Τί 
 
 t 
 
 / 
 
 
 ^ -t· 
 
 , ( 
 
 1 
 
V 
 
 ·· « 
 
 \ 
 
 ίι 
 
 ί 
 
 d 
 
 ί» 
 
 » 
 
THE TRAGEDIES 
 
 OF 
 
 SOPHOCLES, 
 
 WITH 
 
 NOTES 
 
 CRITICAL AND EXPLANATORY, 
 
 ΑΡΊΈΟ TO THE USE OF SCHOOLS ANDLtjliiViJMltrilS 
 
 • ' 
 
 BY 
 
 4 * 
 
 <·'-' 
 
 y / 
 
 
 T. MITCHELL, 
 
 LATE FELLOW OF SIDNEY-SUSSEX COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 VOLUME 1. 
 
 OXFORD, 
 
 JOHN HENRY PARKER, 
 WHITl’AKER AND CO. LONDON, 
 
 J. AND J. J. DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 M.DCCC.XLIV. 
 
V. X 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 IHE general object of this publication has been to furnish 
 younger students of Greek literature with an edition of Sophocles 
 less diffuse than that of Wunder, and not so concise as that of 
 Neue. From circumstances, to which it is not thought necessary 
 here to advert, that object has been less closely pursued than it 
 ought to have been in the first of the plays but it has been 
 pretty uniformly maintained in those which succeed. Besides 
 the annotations of Wunder, Neue, and preceding editors, the ela¬ 
 borate lexicon of Ellendt has been carefully consulted, in order to 
 give the sense of an author, who, though generally plain and per¬ 
 spicuous in his language, occasionally indulges in constructions of 
 the boldest and most unusual character, thereby occasioning no 
 small difficulty in a correct appreciation of his text. Though the 
 excellent work of Matthise supplies almost all that is necessary for 
 understanding the grammar of Sophocles, it was thought that some 
 additional value might be given to this publication by furnishing 
 occasional references to the grammatical works of Kiihner, Bern- 
 hardy and Hartung, works of high and deserved reputation on the 
 continent, and which from the growing inclination in this country 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 to study the German language, more particularly among the ad¬ 
 mirers of ancient literature, cannot fail in time to excite attention 
 here. It will not deteriorate from the value of those references, 
 that since they were made, the first and most important of these 
 three publications has assumed more than one dress in our own 
 language. 
 
 The text of Dindorf has been generally adopted throughout this 
 publication, but not without an occasional deviation from it. 
 
 ARGUMENT. 
 
ARGUMENT. 
 
 The ^ guilty conduct of Laius, third in descent from Cadmus, having 
 brought upon him the just anger of the gods, the Delphic oracle declares 
 that he shall either die childless, or that, if a parent, he shall fall by the 
 hands of his own offspring. Notwithstanding this denunciation, the 
 infatuated monarch becomes the father of a child, subsequently named 
 CEdipus. The attempt to murder this wretched infant, his preservation, 
 his subsequent nurture in the court of Corinth, the occurrence which leads 
 him to suspect that Polybus and Merope are not his real parents, the 
 application to the Delphic oracle, his subsequent encounter with his parent, 
 and his murder of that parent without knowing his person (though one 
 of Laius’ attendants could, and perhaps did, whisper into the dying 
 man’s ear, that the oracle had been fulfilled in all its parts), are circum¬ 
 stances too well known to need dilating upon; as are also the subsequent 
 arrival of CEdipus at Thebes, his triumph over the Sphinx, and his marriage 
 with the royal widow Jocasta. And, for a long series of years, who stood 
 apparently at the height of human happiness, if this fortunate adventurer 
 did not ? Immense wealth, unrestricted power, high reputation for wisdom, 
 a fruitful bed, the fondest affections of his devoted subjects,—all these 
 were his. That all this outward prosperity, however, was hollow within, 
 two, and perhaps three, of his own subjects were aware. Tiresias, though 
 bound, it might be thought, to secresy by his prophetic functions, had perhaps 
 imparted something on the subject to Creon; else whence the suspicions 
 felt by CEdipus towards the very commencement of the drama } The third 
 person cognizant of the dreadful circumstances was of too humble a grade to 
 venture to open his lips upon the matter; a mysterious look, an unguarded 
 word might escape him, when neighbours talked of the unknown stranger, 
 so suddenly raised by his wisdom to a throne, and to be the consort of a 
 
 “ For his particular crime, see the oracular response given at p. 4 . 
 
ARGUMENT. 
 
 viii 
 
 royal widow ; but that was all. But what man might not reveal, the gods 
 were bound to do. They saw upon the hands of CEdipus a father s blood; 
 they beheld in his bridal bed one of the foulest of nature s pollutions. 
 That lands suffer for the crimes of those who rule them, was one of those 
 great truths of which heathen antiquity was ^ aware; and dreadful was 
 the penalty which Thebes was now suffering for regal guilt unassoiled. 
 A pestilential gale rides her atmosphere, and death in every shape is 
 about her; in the perishing fruits of the earth, in the lifeless progeny of 
 cattle, in the blazing fires which consume at once the parent and her 
 offspring. Who of living men could put a stop to this by his counsels and 
 his wisdom, unless it might be the former vanquisher of the Sphinx ? To 
 solicit this aid, a deputation of Thebans, consisting of the most imposing 
 characters—aged priests—tender infants—young men in the pride of their 
 strength—traverse the streets of Thebes, and ascend the heights, which 
 lead to the royal palace, bearing in their hands those branches of the 
 olive, which marked the character of supplicants. The opening scene 
 depictures them as arrived at the palace-gates, and all that follows is best 
 learned from the drama itself. 
 
 Πολλάκί και ξΰμττασα ττό\ι$ κακού αν- tion is evidently directed at the judicial 
 dphs ατΓΎΐύρα | Hans aXirpaivei καϊ ατάσθαλα rulers, by whom the poet had been despoiled 
 μηχαναάται. Hes. Op. 238. The declara- of his property. 
 
uSfUliY 
 
 ‘SOfSSVlO 
 
 (EDIPUS TYRANNUS 
 
 OF 
 
 SOPHOCLES, 
 
 WITH 
 
 NOTES 
 
 CRITICAL AND EXPLANATORY, 
 
 ADAPTED TO THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND UNIVERSITIES, 
 
 BY 
 
 T. MITCHELL, A.M. 
 
 LATE FELLOW OF SIDNEY-SUSSEX COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 OXFORD, 
 
 JOHN HENRY PARKER, 
 WHITIAKER AND CO. LONDON, 
 
 J. AND J. J. DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 M.DCCC.XLI. 
 

 
 f 
 
 Λ ^ » 
 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 In any undertaking connected with a language so boundless in extent 
 and variety as the Greek, and adapted to such widely different classes of 
 readers, it becomes necessary to state with some precision what is in¬ 
 tended, that the author may not be judged by rules different from those 
 which he has laid down for himself, or which he has adopted in cor¬ 
 respondence with the views of others. The object and plan of the present 
 undertaking are easily told, but it is less easy to tell why that plan has 
 been so widely departed from. 
 
 Having fatigued himself with occupations of a more laborious kind, yet 
 not wishing to be entirely idle, it was proposed to the present editor by a 
 member of a family, which has for many years been to him almost the 
 same as his own, to draw up an edition of Sophocles with short notes, 
 adapted to the use of younger students in the University; and after some 
 little consideration, this seemed to be the sort of work of which he was in 
 quest;—a work that would occupy his time, without pressing too heavily 
 upon it. The most trying and least palatable of the difficulties con¬ 
 nected with such an undertaking had been superseded by the labours of 
 preceding editors. Of the three modes by which a Greek text may be 
 purified—manuscripts, citations of ancient grammarians, scholia—it seems 
 admitted by those most conversant with the subject, that all three have been 
 pretty well exhausted on the text of Sophocles, and that consequently little is 
 left to be supplied but explanatory remarks and conjectural criticism. What 
 would have been his greatest objection to the undertaking being thus re¬ 
 moved, there were some considerations of a personal and incidental nature 
 calculated to give it no small recommendations. Previous labours had thrown 
 him among the dicasteria and ecclesiaz of Athens : was it no agreeable 
 variety to exchange those turbulent scenes for the green glades of 
 
 a 2 
 
IV 
 
 ADVEKTISEMENT. 
 
 Cithseron or the nightingales of Colonos? Former labours had almost 
 chained him down to Athenian politics; and Athenian politics are not 
 certainly the department in which her name appears to most advantage: 
 was it nothing to get rid almost, if not entirely, of these ? But there was 
 one recommendation to the task still stronger than either of the preceding. 
 His former labours, by shewing what man ought not to be, furnished rather 
 an argument against vice than an incentive to virtue; if, as Aristotle 
 asserts, Sophocles of all the three Grecian dramatists best exhibits what 
 man may be and ought to be, could there be a stronger stimulant to 
 intellectual labour, than to have the opportunity of holding up such a 
 model of excellence before those who must one day occupy that place in 
 society which their seniors now hold ? 
 
 It now becomes necessary to explain why in the present instance (and 
 it wiU certainly be the only one) the narrower plan, first chalked out, 
 has been abandoned, and whence it has happened that besides notes of a 
 size not originally contemplated, the reader had nearly found himself 
 involved in a Preface of no ordinary length, in order that an explanation 
 might be afforded out of what circumstances those notes have grown. 
 
 Simple and easy as the language and constructions of Sophocles usually 
 are, it cannot be denied that in the following drama many are found which 
 are neither one nor the other. Finding no satisfactory explanation of some 
 of these in preceding editors of the poet, it occurred to the present writer, 
 that from the scene where the drama was laid and the general nature of 
 the subject, some clue to those difficulties might be found in the writings of 
 Theban poets, more particularly of Hesiod and Pindar. To suppose that a 
 man of taste and genius like Sophocles could, under any circumstances, have 
 been ignorant of such compositions, would be more absurd than to suppose 
 such men as Byron and Wordsworth without a knowledge of the writings of 
 Chaucer and Spencer. But when Sophocles determined to try whether, 
 by removing the Tragic Muse from Argos to Thebes, a joint effort of art 
 and genius might enable the destinies of the house of Cadmus to compete 
 in deep interest with those of the house of Atreus, was it likely that any 
 previous Theban writings, capable of assisting in such a purpose, would 
 not be examined by him with intense eagerness and curiosity ? A very short 
 inquiry convinced me that I had not been too sanguine in these expectations: 
 a mine hitherto unexplored was evidently within reach; phraseology, 
 construction, myths, the very colour, as it were, of the Attic poet’s 
 thoughts in ethics, in politics, in religion;—all or most of these, it was 
 clear to me, might receive illustration from both these poets; the present 
 play perhaps more than any other from the first and earliest of the two, 
 but this and every succeeding play from the second. 
 
 That the prosecution of such inquiries, even in their preliminary shape. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 V 
 
 would occupy some space, was feared from the beginning; but on being 
 submitted to the actual operations of the press, they were found to assume 
 a size and character so much at variance with the general object of this 
 publication, that it has been thought better to withdraw them from the 
 present volume, and submit them to readers in some separate form; and 
 this wiU accordingly be done. 
 
 For the language in which the following notes, and the remarks which 
 should have preceded them, have been conveyed, the writer can, in spite of 
 very high authority, offer little or no apology. Latin notes, in other 
 words, the cruelty of making that more difficult which in itself is not easy, 
 and thus it may be engendering dishke, where it is of the first moment to 
 create satisfaction and dehght, are now done away with; and many rea¬ 
 sons might be given why it should he so ; but it is unnecessary. Time 
 with its Juggernaut wheels has passed over them, as it has passed over 
 many other things; they are crushed and gone : and the man who should 
 be bold enough to attempt their revival, had better furnish himself first 
 with a glass case, that he may be exhibited with the old classic epigraphe, 
 which provides a “ black swan’* as the representative of all that is most 
 rare in the world. And the remedy for this change rests clearly 
 with those learned persons, in whose hands is that most important 
 and responsible of trusts, the education and culture of the rising gene¬ 
 ration. In proportion as the process of education is rendered more easy 
 to them by the press—that proverbially greatest of schoolmasters— 
 so let its compass be proportionably enlarged; and enlarged it must 
 be, and widely enlarged, if England in this as well as other matters 
 is to maintain her wonted post among the nations. The present writer 
 would be among the last of men to undervalue that mighty pile of erudi¬ 
 tion and acute criticism, which has gradually grown out of the necessity 
 for rectifying the Greek MSS., and explaining their difficulties; and still 
 less would he be disposed to speak lightly of that school which has 
 brought up the rear of all this among ourselves. Learning, accuracy, good 
 taste, general courtesy to opponents, and perhaps more than all, that brief 
 practical form, so weU adapted to the general energy of the national character, 
 may safely be reckoned among its many recommendations. But is such a 
 school sufficient to answer the wants of the present day, or can it compete 
 with one which the continent now affords ? That school, the growth of 
 almost one man, occupies a position in Europe, which Science, even 
 in this her day of vaunt, may weU contemplate with envy and admiration. 
 Erudition the most profound—as wide an acquaintance with modem as 
 with ancient languages—deep knowledge of men as well as books—the sen¬ 
 sibilities of genius combined with the workings of powerful and command¬ 
 ing intellects—such are among its distinguishing characteristics. And the 
 
VI 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 themes selected for their occupation by such minds are not unworthy of 
 them. Synoptical views of all that has been done great and glorious in 
 literature since the world began—inquiries ethical, oeconomical, poli¬ 
 tical, all in short that enables nations to become wiser and better 
 —deep investigations into the origin and tendencies of the fine arts; in 
 the drama, searching inquisitions as to the great principles on which 
 it is founded—in metre, what are the laws of harmony by which the 
 passions may be excited or regulated—in mythology, by what methods 
 history may be disentangled from fable, and new rules gained for purify¬ 
 ing the annals of nations :—such are some of the pursuits in which the 
 scholars of a Germany occupy themselves : and so ought Greek literature to 
 be occupied. When the Almighty determined that men should no longer 
 be of one lip and one speech. He created a countless variety of languages, 
 which, after serving a temporary purpose, should die without fruits; but 
 two He selected to be of ever-living interest and eternal duration: the 
 one, because in that He deigned to communicate such knowledge of 
 His own attributes and purposes as might direct man’s thoughts to future 
 stages of existence : the other, because in that should be found embodied 
 almost all that man can work out by his own wisdom for his guidance 
 and comfort here; thus constituting in its single self the largest portion of 
 that great legacy of knowledge and ideas, which is with justice con¬ 
 sidered as the common good of mankind ; which is committed to all ages 
 and nations in their turn, which ought to be sacred in their eyes, and for 
 the preservation of which posterity is entitled to call them to an ^account.” 
 How far due provision has been made for effecting an object of such im¬ 
 portance in our own great and opulent country, I leave persons of more 
 weight and authority than myself to determine. 
 
 a It is perhaps unnecessary to add, that 
 I speak exclusively of the classical litera¬ 
 ture of Germany ; with her disgraceful 
 and offensive productions, her novels and 
 her divinity, I have nothing to do. Even 
 in classical literatin’e, the above remarks 
 must be understood to apply rather to 
 
 works written in the native tongue, and 
 which are consequently less known in this 
 country, than to those in which the Latin 
 language has been made the channel of 
 communication. 
 
 b F. Schlegel’s Hist, of Literature, 
 I. 279. 
 
ΟΙΛΙΠΟΤ2 TTPANN02. 
 
ΤΑ TOT ΔΡΑΜΑΤΟΣ ΠΡΟΣΩΠΑ 
 
 ΟΙΔΙΠΟΥΣ. 
 
 ΙΕΡΕΥΣ. 
 
 ΚΡΕΩΝ. 
 
 ΧΟΡΟΣ γζρόντων Θηβαίων. 
 •ΤΕΙΡΕΣΙΑΣ. 
 
 ΙΟΚΑΣΤΗ. 
 ΑΓΓΕΛΟΣ. 
 ΘΕΡΑΠΩΝ Ααΐον. 
 ΕΒΑΓΓΕΛΟΣ. 
 
ΑΡΙΣΤΟΦΑΝΟΤΣ ΓΡΑΜΜΑΤΙΚΟΤ ΤΠΟΘΕΣΙΣ. 
 
 Λιττων Κόρινθορ Οΐ^ίπονς, ττατρος νόθος 
 προς των απάντων \οώορονμξνος ζόνος^ 
 ηΧθεν πυθόσθαι ΙΙνθικων θεσπισμάτων, 
 ζητών εαυτόν καϊ γένους φυτοσπόρον, 
 ειψών 8ε τΧημων εν στεναϊς άμαζιτοΊς 
 άκων επεφνε Χά’ίον γεννήτορα. 
 
 Σφιγγός 8ε 8εινής θνήσιμον Χύσας μεΧος 
 ησχυνε μητρός αγνοούμενης Χεχος. 
 λοιμός 8ε Θήβας είΧε κα\ νόσος μακρά. 
 Κρεων 8ε πεμφβείς ΑεΧφικήν πρός εστίαν, 
 όπως πυθοιτο του κακού παυστήριον, 
 ήκουσε φωνής μαντικής θεού πάρα, 
 τόν Ααΐειον εκ8ικηθήναι φόνον, 
 όθεν μαθών εαυτόν θ 18 ίπους τάΧας 
 πόρπαισι 8ισσας εξανάΧωσεν κόρας, 
 αυτή 8ε μήτηρ άγχόναις 8ιώΧετο. 
 
 ΔΙΑ ΤΙ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ ΕΠΙΓΕΓΡΑΠΤΑί. 
 
 ο ΤΥΡΑΝΝΟΣ ΟΙΔ 1 ΠΟΥΣ επι 8ιακρίσει θατερου επιγεγραπται. χαριεντως 
 8 ε ΤΥΡΑΝΝΟΝ απαντες αυτόν επεγραφον, ώς εζεχοντα πόσης τής ΣοφοκΧεους 
 ποιήσεως, καίπερ ήττηθεντα υπό ΦΐΧοκΧεους, ώς φησι Αικαίαρχος. είσι 8ε και 
 οί ΠΡΟΤΕΡΟΝ αυτόν, ου ΤΥΡΑΝΝΟΝ, επιγράφοντες, 8ιά τους χρόνους των 
 8 ι8ασκαΧιών κα\ 8ιά. τα πράγματα' άΧήτην γαρ κα\ πηρόν θ 18 ίπο 8 α τόν επι 
 ΚοΧωνω είς τάς ^Αθήνας άφικνεισθαι. ϊ8ιον 8ε τι πεπόνθασιν οί μεθ' "Ομηρον 
 ποιηταΧ, τους πρό των Ύρωϊκών βασιΧεΙς ΤΥΡΑΝΝΟΥΣ προσαγορεύοντες, όψε 
 ποτέ του8ε του ονόματος είς τους "ΈΧΧηνας 8ια8οθεντος, κατά τοί/ς *ΑρχΐΧόχου 
 χρόνους^ καθάπερ ^Ιππίας ό σοφιστής φησιν. "Ομηρος γουν τόν πάντων παρα- 
 νομώτατον"Εχετον βασιΧεα φησ'ι, κα\ ου τύραννον' (’Οδυσσ. σ. 84·) 
 
 Έις"Εχετον βασιΧήα, βροτών 8ηΧήμονα. 
 
 προσαγορευθήναι 8ε φασι τόν τύραννον από των Ύυρρηνών' χαλεπούς γάρ τινας 
 περί Χηστείαν τούτους γενεσθαι. ότι 8ε νεώτερον τό του τυράννου όνομα 8ήΧον. 
 οϋτε γάρ "Ομηρος ούτε 'Ησ/οδο? οϋτε αΧΧος ού8είς των παλαιών τύραννον εν τοΊς 
 ποιήμασιν ονομάζει, ό 8ε ΆριστοτεΧης εν ΚυμαΙων πολιτεία τους τυράννους φησι 
 τό πρότερον αίσυμνήτας προσαγορεύεσθαι. ευφημότερον γάρ εκείνο τοΰνομα. 
 
 Β 2 
 
ΑΛΛΩΣ. 
 
 ‘ο τύραννος Oldinovs προς άντώιαστολην τον iv τώ Κολωνω (πιγύγραπται. 
 το ΚΐφάΧαων be τον δράματος γνωσις των Ιδίων κακών ΟΙδίποδος, πηρωσίς Tt 
 των οφθαΧμών, και δι αγχόνης θάνατος ^Ιοκάστης. 
 
 ΧΡΗΣΜΟΣ ΔΟΘΕΙΣ ΛΑΙΩ/. 
 
 /ia'ie Ααβδακίδη, παίδων γύνος όλβιόν αΙτ€ΐς. 
 δώσω τοι φίλον νίόν' άτάρ π€πρωμ€νον €στ\ 
 σον παιδος xeipeaai λιπ€ίν φάος. ώς γάρ evevae 
 Ζ€νς Κρονίδης, Τΐίλοπος στνγ€ραΙς άραίσι πιθησας^ 
 ον φίλον ηρπασας νίόν’ ό δ’ ηνξατό σοι Tube πάντα. 
 
 ΤΟ ΑΙΝΙΓΜΑ ΤΗΣ ΣΦΙΓΓΟΣ. 
 
 ''Έστι δίπονν eVi γης κα\ τύτραπον, ον μία φωνή, 
 κα'ι τρίπον’ άλλάσσ€ΐ be φνην μόνον, δσσ’ cVt γαίαν 
 epπeτa KiveiTai άνά τ aWepa και κατα πόντον. 
 αλλ’ όπόταν πλeίστoισιv epeib0pevov ποσ\ βαίντ}, 
 ίίνθα τάχος γνίοισιν άφανρότατον πίλ€ΐ αντον. 
 
 ΑΤΣΙΣ ΤΟΤ ΑΙΝΙΓΜΑΤΟΣ. 
 
 Κλΰ^4 κα\ ονκ ύθίλονσα, κaκόπτepe Μονσα θανόντων, 
 φωνής ημeτepης σον τίλος^άμπλακίης. 
 άνθρωπον κaτeλeξaς, δς ηνίκα γαίαν eφ€pπeι, 
 πρώτον βφυ τeτpάπovς νηπιος eK λαγάνων’ 
 γηραλάος be πίλων τρίτατον πόδα βάκτρον epeίδeι, 
 ανχίνα φορτίζων, γηρη'ί καμπτάμ€νος. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤ2 TTPANN02. 
 
 ΟΙΔΙΠΟΥΣ. 
 
 τι ΤΕΚΝΑ, Κάδ/χοι; του πάλαι νέα τροφή, 
 
 I. τ 4 κνα. This opening word of 
 the drama must not pass without 
 a short comment. Whatever might 
 be the natural infirmities of temper 
 in CEdipus, or the sudden ebullitions 
 of anger into which he is thrown by 
 a supposed conspiracy against his 
 throne between Tiresias and Creon, 
 he is represented throughout the 
 whole of this play as the father of 
 his people. Such were many of the 
 absolute monarchs (τύραννοι) of an¬ 
 tiquity ; such are said to be the 
 monarchs of the Austrian family at 
 this day. We state the fact, without 
 at present entering into any political 
 reasoning on the subject. The im¬ 
 portance of this trait in the dramatic 
 character of CEdipus has not escaped 
 one of those ancient scholiasts, for 
 an excellent edition of whose re¬ 
 marks we are so much indebted to 
 the joint labours of Elmsley and 
 Gaisford. (Φί\ό8ημον κα\ προνοητικόν 
 του κοινή συμφέροντος τό του ΟΙδίποδος 
 ήθος ... (Ικότως ουν κέχρηται τ6“ τέκνα f 
 ωσπβρά πατήρ.) For proofs of reci¬ 
 procal affection on the part of the 
 Thebans to the family of CEdipus, 
 see Pausanias’ Boeotics, cc. 9. ad 
 fin. 18. 25. 
 
 Ib. Κάδμου. This name, the great 
 link between Asia and Europe, and 
 attended with such important results 
 to the literature and religion of the 
 latter, deserves the deepest attention. 
 Whether there was one or more 
 Cadmus, what connexion existed 
 
 between the Boeotian Cadmus and 
 the Samothracian Camilus, Casmilus, 
 Cadmilus, or Cadmus, whether the 
 name betokened “ a messenger from 
 God,” an office, or a certain period 
 in the Theban monarchy, &c., are 
 speculations left to the readers of 
 Welcker, Schelling, Miinten, Creu- 
 zer, and other learned continental 
 writers. That it .was a name likely 
 to be deeply impressed on the minds 
 of the two Theban poets, who, for 
 reasons fully stated in the preface, 
 have been selected as more particu¬ 
 larly proper for the illustration of 
 this and other dramas of Sophocles, 
 will readily occur to the reader. As 
 the passages, however, in which that 
 venerated name occurs, more par¬ 
 ticularly in the writings of Pindar, 
 will be used hereafter for the pur¬ 
 pose of shewing what colour they 
 gave to general modes of Sopho- 
 clean thinking, I content myself at 
 present with giving mere references. 
 Hesiod. Theog. 937. 975. Pind. 
 Olymp.II.40. sq. 141. sq. Pyth. III. 
 155. sq. Hymn. Fr. 6. p. 51. En- 
 com. fr. p. 64. &c. (Heyne’s edit.) 
 That even the soft muse of Anacreon 
 looked to Thebes and Argos, to Cad¬ 
 mus and the sons of Atreus, as the 
 objects of all higher poetry, one of 
 his beautiful little trifles gives preg¬ 
 nant proof. Ode 23. (Mehlhorn’s 
 edit.) See further infr. 223. 
 
 Ib. ToC πάλαι. Cadmus might be 
 ό πάλαι to Sophocles and his con- 
 B 3 
 
6 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τίνα^ iroff "48ρας raabe μοι θοαζ€Τ€ 
 Ικτηρίθί9 κλάδοισιί βζβστβμμβιΌί ; 
 
 temporaries ; but could he in strict 
 parlance be so denominated in refer¬ 
 ence to CEdipus and his contempo¬ 
 raries ? Cf. infr. 267. The gram¬ 
 matical construction scarcely needs 
 illustration, but compare infr. 48. 
 52. &c. 
 
 Ib. τροφή, soboles, propago. Eu- 
 rip. Cycl. μηκά8ων άρνων τροφοί . — 
 Musgr. 
 
 2. τίνος. Dissen, when comment¬ 
 ing on a noble Pindaric fragment 
 (Hyporchemat. fr. 4.), does not think 
 it below his notice to observe, that 
 the interrogative τί, in the opening 
 verse, may not improperly be ren¬ 
 dered in his own language (the Ger¬ 
 man) by was ist es eigentlich warum ? 
 The still shorter expression of why ? 
 tuherefore ? will be found convenient 
 for translating this and other pas¬ 
 sages in the Sophoclean dramas. 
 In strict construction: nVes elalv 
 aide al ebpai, as 
 
 Ib. ۤpas. The word here implies 
 the seat, occupied by a suppliant, 
 generally on the steps of an altar. 
 ./Esch. Eum. 40· όρω δ’ eV’ ομφαίλω 
 μβν avbpa θ^ομνση | edpav €χοντα, προσ- 
 τρότταιον. Suppl. 34 °· ττ^φρικα Xeva- 
 σων τάσδ’ edpas κατασκίονς. 4°7· 
 iv θεών edpaiaiv ώδ’ ’ώρνμίνας | έκΒόντες 
 νμας. 4 ^ 7 · ^ί^τ]ς μ’ €ξ έδραν | ττο- 
 λνθέων ρνσιασθείσαν. Eurip. Heracl. 
 261 . αττασι κοινον ρνμα δαιμόνων έδρα. 
 Here. Fur. 51 · ττάντων δέ χρείοι τάσδ' 
 έδρας φνλάσσομεν. (μοι redundant). 
 Cf. infr. 13. CEd. Col. 1163. 1166. 
 
 Ib. θοάζετε. From etymology, 
 from the scholia, and from the cita¬ 
 tions of ancient authors, two dif¬ 
 ferent meanings have been elicited 
 for this verb : to sit, and to unite 
 quick and tumultuous motion with the 
 act of sitting. Brunck adopts the 
 former sense; Erfurdt and Hermann 
 
 prefer the latter, but surely without 
 reason. When the stage on this occa¬ 
 sion was first exposed to the specta¬ 
 tors, or, in modern phrase, when 
 the curtain first drew up, one of two 
 things must, I think, have been the 
 case: either these suppliants were 
 already seated on the altar-steps 
 (the supplicatory branches having 
 been deposited on the seats of the 
 altar, or the altar itself), or, as I 
 have ventured to describe in the 
 opening remarks, they were seen 
 advancing in solemn procession, 
 holding the supplicatory branches 
 in their hands ; the children of either 
 sex forming it may be the head of 
 the procession, the choicest youths 
 of Thebes composing the middle 
 part, while reverend priests of the 
 most imposing aspect brought up 
 the rear. Whichever of these two 
 views we adopt, the solemn na¬ 
 ture of the business itself, as well 
 as the decorum due to a royal pa¬ 
 lace, would require that all should 
 be done with becoming gravity and 
 solemnity, not hastily and tumul¬ 
 tuously. (It was gratifying to the 
 present writer to find, after these 
 remarks had been made, that he was 
 supported throughout by tv/o such 
 authorities asDindorf and Buttmann. 
 See the former’s annotations on the 
 passage, and the latter in his Lexi- 
 log. p. 346. Engl, transl.) For gram¬ 
 matical construction of έδρας θοάζειν, 
 cf. Qid. Col. 1166. τις δητ αν εΧη 
 τηνδ' 6 προσθακών έδραν. Eurip. Here. 
 Fur. 1214* σ€ τον θάσσοντα δυσ¬ 
 τήνους έδρας | αυδώ. See also Reisig’s 
 Enarr. CEd. Col, p. 146. 
 
 3. ικτηρίοις κΚάδοις (= ίκτηρίαις, 
 cf. Dem. 1078, 26. .^schin. 14, 43. 
 30,11. Andoc. 15, 1, 11. Din. 92, 
 28). What these were, the com- 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 ΤΓολίί δ’ ομού μβι/ θυμιαμάτων γάμζΐ, ^ 
 ομου de παιάνων re και στβναγμάτων' 
 άγω δίκαιων μη παρ άγγβλων, τβκνα^ 
 
 .S' ‘ 
 
 -J2.' 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 mentators are pretty well agreed: 
 they were branches of olive wound 
 round with pieces of wool. Two or 
 three further things, however, occur 
 for consideration. Whence and why 
 this singular combination .f* ^Did the 
 two symbols imply one and the same 
 thing; or was a sense of deserved 
 wrath from the Deity bound up in 
 the one, and did hope of mercy, and 
 of a granted petition, mingle with 
 the other } Again, does Sophocles 
 here speak as an antiquarian, refer¬ 
 ring to a custom which originated 
 in Boeotia, or does he, as a poet, 
 transfer to Thebes a custom more 
 peculiar to his own country } If 
 the former, do we find proofs of 
 this custom, single or combined, in 
 the only two poetical writers of 
 Thebes whom we now possess ? and 
 if so, from what sources may they 
 be supposed to have derived a rite 
 so singular ? We shall endeavour 
 in the course of our proceedings to 
 throw some light on all these in¬ 
 quiries : if that light should prove, 
 after the lapse of so many ages, but 
 scanty and imperfect, let us in our 
 turn put a question to the reader 
 himself. From the day which com¬ 
 memorates the nativity of the author 
 of Christianity, and for several suc¬ 
 ceeding sabbaths, the reader yearly 
 sees the temples of his ΟΛνη country 
 ornamented with sprigs of holly. 
 Has he ever asked himself, or does 
 he know, w^hence and when this 
 custom, so constantly passing before 
 
 his eyes, a arose ? For verbal illus¬ 
 trations of the text, cf. infr. 143. 
 
 Ib. €ξ€στ€μμ€νοι = Κίκοσμημ^νοι 
 (Schol.) provided with. The simple 
 word στ€φ 6 ΐν (Soph. Electr. 53. 458. 
 uEsch. Suppl. 339. Eum. 44.) and 
 such compounds as καταστ€φ€ΐν (Eu- 
 rip. Herac. 125). (κστέφειν (see 
 Pass, in voc.) &c. occur in reference 
 to this or similar rites. Cf. infr. 19. 
 
 913· - ^ 
 
 4. θυμιαμάτων {incense') γίμξΐ {is 
 full). Plat. 9 Rep. 573, a. θυμιαμά¬ 
 των 'γ^μουσαι κα\ μύρων. John, Apocal. 
 V. 8. €χοντβς . . . φιάλας χρυσάς γ^μού- 
 σας θυμιαμάτων. Also VIII. 3* cf. 
 
 infr. 913· 
 
 5. παιάνων. By the word παιάν 
 is signified either the name of Apollo 
 (infr. 154), or, as here, a hymn ad¬ 
 dressed to him, or to Diana, as Sos- 
 pitatores or Saviours. It was sung 
 after deliverance from plague, after 
 battles triumphantly concluded, (see 
 the fragment of Bacchylides ap. 
 Nevium, p. 19) or upon the cessation 
 of any dreadful evil. “ It was,” says 
 Dissen, in his comment on the few 
 remaining Paaans of Pindar, “ a spe¬ 
 cies of song, joyous, yet grave and 
 dignified; the rhythm and music 
 nervous, but not soft and relaxed.” 
 (P. 614.) Metrical and other re¬ 
 marks on the subject will be found in 
 Boeckh’s elaborate work de Metris 
 Pindari, pp. 201. 270. and also de 
 Fragm. Pind. p. 567 sq. For a So- 
 phoclean piean, or something not 
 unlike it, see his Trachiniae 205-22 i. 
 
 a One of the traditions on the subject is, that this tree first sprang up in heaxity and’ 
 perfection when the feet of the Saviour first condescended to tread this earth. This is 
 at all events classical imagery. It was in the same way that herbage and roses xvcre 
 said to grow beneath the feet of Aphrodite, when she first appeai'ed to astonish the 
 world with her beauty. lies. I'heog. 191. Anacreon Ode νδ ap. JMehlh. 
 
 B 4 
 
8 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 άλλων ακούουν avros &S ίληλνθα^ 
 ο ττασι κλβίνος ΟΙδίττον^ καλούμ€νοί. 
 
 The scholiast on this and the two 
 preceding verses observes: ol μ^ν 
 
 μη86ν π€πονθότ€ς, ctti άποτροπτ} τον 
 
 κακού θύονσιν και Tvaiavas α8ονσιν' οι 
 
 « 
 
 δε ζττταικότ€ς, ε’πΐ τοΐ? oiKeiois κακοίς 
 άποιμώζονσιν. 
 
 η. άλλων. Elmsley, referring to 
 Erfurdt and to Plat. Gorg. 424, 31. 
 Eurip. Orest. 531. Aristoph. Pac. 
 759. considers this word as redun¬ 
 dant. Is it not rather used some¬ 
 what in the sense of the adverbial 
 άλλως, i. e. merely, altogether ? El- 
 lendt'(whom see for other references) 
 observes αΚλων = παρ’ άλλων, οντων 
 ά-γ'γίλων, S. α-^γελλόΐ'τωί/. 
 
 8. 6 πασι κλεινός, omnium ore cele- 
 hratissimus. Dind. Comparing v. 40, 
 there can be little doubt that this is 
 the true interpretation of the pas¬ 
 sage, but does not that interpreta¬ 
 tion leave the poet on the horns of 
 more than one dramatic dilemma ? 
 If the fame of CEdipus had been so 
 widely blazoned, (for it is evident, 
 from other passages, that the ex¬ 
 pression is not to be restricted to 
 his own subjects,) it could hardly 
 have failed to reach the not distant 
 land of Corinth ; mount Cithagron 
 being apparently a sort of common 
 pasturage to Thebes and Corinth. 
 Infr. 1134 sq. If it had reached 
 Corinth, how happens it that Jocasta 
 had yet to be informed of her hus¬ 
 band’s early history (infr. 774 sq.) ? 
 If it had not, how come the Chorus 
 (infr. 493) to be cognizant of the 
 fact, that CEdipus was the son of 
 Polybus ? The case of the Corinthian 
 herd, who announces to CEdipus the 
 death of Polybus, and his own elec¬ 
 tion to the vacant throne of Corinth 
 (infr. 924 sq.), is scarcely attended 
 
 with less difficulties. That this early 
 preserver of CEdipus should have 
 watched the latter’s growing fortunes 
 at the court of Corinth with intense 
 interest, is natural enough; but when 
 CEdipus suddenly takes flight from 
 that court, how does the Corinthian 
 herd become acquainted with his sub¬ 
 sequent whereabout ? That no com¬ 
 munication had taken place between 
 him and the Theban herd, at whose 
 hands he originally received the 
 exposed child, and who also may be 
 supposed to have kept an eye upon 
 CEdipus through all his vicissitudes 
 of fortune, is clear from the context. 
 But, supposing the discovery made 
 on the Corinthian herd’s part, that 
 the illustrious conqueror of the 
 Sphinx is no other than the child 
 found in the thickets of Cithseron, 
 does he keep the secret to him¬ 
 self, or does he impart it to his 
 fellow-citizens, and, above all, to the 
 sorrowing Polybus and Merope ? If 
 the latter, how comes it that no 
 communications take place between 
 them and their lost son ? and that no 
 communications had taken place, the 
 ignorance of Jocasta is clear proof. 
 If the former, how happens it that 
 the breath has no sooner left the 
 body of Polybus, than the Corin¬ 
 thians elect this CEdipus for their 
 monarch, and make this very herd 
 the bearer of the intelligence ? would 
 the Corinthians have taken the mere 
 word of such a person, on a point of 
 so much importance to them ? Whe¬ 
 ther in making these observations I 
 subject myself to some censures 
 passed on preceding commentators 
 by Manso and ^ Bliimner, I am not 
 aware, the very names of those scho- 
 
 l) Wunder’s (Ed. Tyr. p. 14. From circumstances not necessary to mention, this work 
 did not come under my examination till the present sheet was in the press. Any 
 

 (ilAinOTg. 'ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ.ό' ^ 
 
 , , , , , , , , v 
 
 άλλ’, ώ γ€ραί€, φράζ" y\hre\ πρβπωρ ίφν^ ^ 
 ττρο τώρδβ φωΡ€Ϊν^\·ίρί καθβστατβ, 
 
 δβίσαρτβ^, η σψβρζαρτΐ^; ώ? Θίλονγος, οψ ^ 
 
 > 'Ν ^ Si \ ,\ 
 
 €μου ττροσαρκβίΡ παρ, ονσαΑγητο^ γαρ αρ 
 €\ηρ τοιαρδβ μη ον κατοίκτβίρωρ βδραρ. 
 
 9 
 
 ΙΟ 
 
 
 Ρ^ΕΡΕΥΣ. 
 
 υάλλ’, ώ κρατύρωρ ΟΙδίπον^ ^χωρα^ e/iijs*, 
 ο/)α? /Χ€Ζ/ ηλικοϊ ττροσημβθα 
 
 15 
 
 lars being unknown to me till the 
 remarks themselves had been made. 
 Mv reason for making* them, and one 
 or two others of a similar tendency, 
 will appear when the writings of 
 Sophocles come to be discussed in 
 my general critique. 
 
 9. πρέπων €<j>vs. You are the 
 proper person; to you it belongs in 
 propriety. See EUendt on the first 
 of these two words. 
 
 10. προ ra)v 8 e φων^ΐρ. Reisig, 
 comparing (Ed. Col. 807. (βρω γαρ 
 κα\ προ τώί/δβ), translates, wrongly 
 I think (cf. infr. 134.) : dicere ante- 
 quam illi dicent. Enarr. p. 115. 
 
 Ib. TLPi τρόπω καθ€στατ€. I. q. πως 
 8 ιάκ€ΐσθ€ ωστ€ ivdabe καθ^στηκίναί, not 
 simply πως διάκ€ΐσθ€, as Elmsley and 
 Matthise imagine, nor quare advenis- 
 tis, as Brunck translates. Ell. That 
 this is the true sense, is clear from 
 the two propositions which follow in 
 the next verse. 
 
 1 I. δίίσαντξς η στ^ρ^αντζς ; In the 
 first of these two participles is ex¬ 
 pressed those fears, which drive men 
 to the divine altars, from a sense of 
 guilt committed; the second refers to 
 those petitionary requests (arepyeip, 
 petere, cupere, orare, Br. cf. (Ed. Col. 
 1094.) made to the gods for assist¬ 
 
 ance in the hour of peril or calamity. 
 Do we in these two words find some 
 clue to the two symbols found in a 
 preceding verse (3) ? Various pas¬ 
 sages in ancient authors at present in 
 my hands would lead me to infer as 
 much ; but the proofs not being yet 
 so full as I could wish, I shall defer 
 their consideration for the present. 
 
 I I, I 2 . cos θύλοντος αν ipov προσαρ- 
 κύν παν is in construction equivalent 
 to eVe'i λβγω παν αν προσαρκύν θίΚζίν. 
 (Ed. Col. 72. ως αν προσαρκων μικρά 
 K€p 8 dvTj μβγα. Plato Thesetet. 168, c. 
 ταντα . . . τω έταιρω σον eh βοηθ€ΐαν 
 προσηρ^άμην, (προσηρκ€σάμην, suppedi- 
 tavi, ScHNEID.) 
 
 12. δυσάλγητος, devoid of feeling. 
 
 1 3 . ρτ) ον. Elmsley observes, that 
 the Greek tragedians seldom unite 
 these two particles, unless ού or μη 
 occurs previously in the same sen¬ 
 tence. Cf. infr. 221. 283. 1065, &c. 
 It has been ingeniously remarked, 
 that in the present instance an 
 equivalent for the previous nega¬ 
 tive is found in the first syllable of 
 the compound δνσάλγητος, that com¬ 
 pound, as Hermann observes, being 
 equal to ούκ οίκτίρμων. See also 
 EUendt in voc. μη. 
 
 1 5 . ήλίκοι, “of what various ages.” 
 
 serious obligation to it will be faithfully acknowledged, but where the editor and myself 
 happen to coincide in opinion (and from what I have already read, those coincidences seem 
 likely to be not a few), I shall not think it necessary to suppress my own remarks, be¬ 
 cause they have been in some degree anticipated. In any future plays of Sophocles Avhich 
 it may be my lot to edit, 1 hope to come somewhat nearer to Wunder’s excellent brevity. 
 
10 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 βωμοΐσί roh aoh' οΐ μίν ού^^ττω μακραν 
 ΤΓΤβσθαί σθένοντ^ς^ οΐ 8e συν γηρσ βαρ€Ϊ9 
 
 ίβρη^, σ/ω μβν Δηνο^, OLOe τ Ύ}υβων 
 
 ‘Τ’ 
 
 ,cJ· 
 
 Dale. Rather, of what extremes as 
 to infancy and age; the epithet thus 
 comprising the youngest and oldest 
 portions of the supplicants. 
 
 i 6 . βωμοΐσί rotf σοΐς, the altar 
 which belongs to, or which stands be¬ 
 fore your palace. This altar, though 
 subsequently addressed as that of 
 the Apollo Lycius (infr. 919. cf. 
 Electr. 637. 645.), implies, in more 
 general language, the altar of the 
 Apollo cAguieus,which “was erected 
 in court-vards, and before the doors 
 of houses; i. e. at the boundary of 
 private and public property, in order 
 to admit the god as a tutelary deity, 
 and to avoid evil.” Midler’s Do¬ 
 rians I. 3 2 T. Hence in the Phoenissse 
 of Euripides, (which will be advan¬ 
 tageously read in conjunction with 
 the present play,) Polynices observes, 
 when approaching the paternal man¬ 
 sion after exile, αλλ’ iyyvs άλκη’ 
 βώμιοι yap ζσχάραι [ ττίΚας πάρξίσι, 
 κουκ ('ρήμα δώματα. (281.) When 
 taking leave of it, he says, κα\ συ, 
 Φοΐ/ 3 ’ αναξ 'Ayviev, κα\ μ€Χαθρα χαφ€Τ€. 
 See further on this subject Creuz. 
 Symb. II. 882. and notes to Thudi- 
 chum’s Germ, translation of Sopho¬ 
 cles, I. 221. For grammatical pecu¬ 
 liarities in the words before us, viz. 
 as to the sense which Sophocles often 
 gives to possessive pronouns, and 
 his constant use of plural for singu¬ 
 lar nouns, cf. infr. 337. 572. and 
 elsewhere. 
 
 16,17. 01 μ(ν ουδ^πω K.T.e. “Some, 
 whose callow wings [ refuse a length¬ 
 
 ened flight.” Dale. Musgrave, re¬ 
 ferring to Eurip. Troad. 752. Here. 
 F. 72. 984. observes that children 
 are often termed νεοσσοί. 
 
 lb. συν yrjpg βαρείς. Aj. 1017· 
 yrjpg βαρύς. Cf. CEd. Col. 875· 
 
 18. ί^ρης. As no question con¬ 
 nected with Greek dialects, accen¬ 
 tuation, the subscript iota, &c. seems 
 destined to be ever set at rest, the 
 reader may consult, if he pleases, 
 some recent opinions on this plural 
 by T. C. Schneider, “ De dialecto 
 Trag. Grace.” p. 1 i. On sacerdotal 
 embassies cf. Eustath. p. 77 ς, 2i 
 (684, 28). 
 
 Ib. Ζηνός. On the Theban Zeus 
 (and Attic divinities must be ex¬ 
 cluded as much as possible from the 
 reader’s mind throughout the pre¬ 
 sent drama), the reader need scarcely 
 be referred to the writings of Hesiod 
 and Pindar. Whether Sickler be 
 right or otherwise in his etymology, 
 the majestic physical powers which 
 the father of gods and men displays 
 in the former, and the equally ma¬ 
 jestic moral and intellectual attri¬ 
 butes which he displays in the latter, 
 alike entitle him to the cognomen of 
 Zivos, Zevos, or Zeus, the 
 ruling Power, the absolute Lord and 
 Commander. (Cadmus, p. 74.) 
 
 lb. otSe {pointing') τ and these. 
 otSe δ’ Eber. but cf. infr. 78. 
 
 Ib. Ί}θ€θς. Hesych. Ιηθβος. έφη¬ 
 βος, ayaμoς. Elmsley compares the 
 French word gar9on, as implying 
 both a young man, and an unmarried 
 
 c This name deserves more investigation than it has yet, I believe, received. In a 
 fragment of Boeo, preserved by Pausanias (X. c. 5) it is said that Pagasus and Agnieus, 
 two youths of the Hyperboreans, Avere the persons who established the oracle at Delphi. 
 In these few observations is comprised matter for a whole volume, rather than a pass¬ 
 ing note. 
 

 ΟΙΔΪΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑ^ΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 λβκτοί' το δ* άλλο φυλοΐ' βζβστβμμβνοι/ 
 άγοραίσί θακβΐ, wpos· re Παλλάδο? διττλοΐ^ 
 
 11 
 
 
 20 
 
 ■St 
 
 man. Cf. Eustath. ad 11 . σ. p. ii66. 
 adolescentes. Ell. Eurip. Phoen. 958. 
 ΑΪμονος μβν ovu γάμοι | σφαγάς aneip- 
 γονσ, ού yap iariv ^θ^ος. Cf. 0 pp. 
 Hal. 1 .199. 
 
 19. TO δ’ άλλο φνλορ, the people 
 generally, in opposition to the select 
 persons previously mentioned. He¬ 
 siod. Theog. 202. φίλον θ€ων. 212. 
 φίλον Ονείρων. 33 *^· Φ^^ ανθρώπων. 
 591· γυναικών. 9 ^ 5 * ^^^ων. Ορ. 197 * 
 αθανάτων. 
 
 20. άγοραΐσι. The agora as the 
 place where so much necessary and 
 important business was transacted 
 in Grecian towns, was, as a mat¬ 
 ter of course, deficient neither in 
 temples nor statues. Cf. Hischyl. 
 Sept. c. T. 258. Eum.931. Soph. El. 
 V. 7. Pausan. Boeot. cc. 17. 25. 
 Aristoph. Eq. 500. See also infr. 
 161. 
 
 Ib. Παλλάδοί. That Sophocles 
 would here have the Boeotian and 
 not the Attic Pallas before his eyes, 
 is obvious enough. The earliest 
 mvths attached to the name of Pallas 
 
 a' 
 
 are connected with a river and lake in 
 Libya, bearing the name of Triton 
 or Tritonis (Creuz. II. 261) : when 
 therefore we find a river of the 
 same name in Boeotia (Pausanias 
 IX. c. 33), on the banks of which 
 the people of Boeotia also believed 
 the goddess to have been born, it 
 is reasonable to suppose that the 
 myths in both countries respecting 
 this divinity were pretty much the 
 same. What then was the nature 
 of the Libyan myths ? A more 
 appropriate place will soon occur 
 (infr. 159.) for shewing that they 
 belonged closely to solar and lunar 
 worship, and when in that place we 
 find the Boeotian Pallas (under her 
 other name of Athene) invoked in 
 
 concert with Apollo and Artemis, 
 to protect the land from the pesti¬ 
 lential Ares, there can be little 
 doubt of the similarity of Libyan 
 and Theban myths on this subject, 
 though the learned writer, from 
 whom I shall chiefly draw my 
 proofs of similarity, does not appear 
 to have been at all aware of the con¬ 
 firmation which his opinions receive 
 from the present drama. 
 
 20, 21. διπλοί? νάοι?. Though two 
 divinities only are wanted for these 
 two Theban temples, the scholiast has 
 provided us with four : a Pallas Cad- 
 meia, a Pallas Ismenia, a Pallas Alal- 
 comeneis, and a Pallas Onca. Among 
 the numerous Theban Pallades men¬ 
 tioned by Pausanias, I am not aware 
 of any bearing the first two of these 
 names, and perhaps they had no 
 existence except in the scholiast’s 
 brain. Erfurdt, indeed, observing 
 that the Pallas Alalcomeneis be¬ 
 longed to the little village of that 
 name (Pans. Boeot. c. 33.) and not 
 to Thebes, adopts the Ismenian Pal¬ 
 las of the scholiast: but was it 
 likely that a deity so important 
 (ibid.) should be worshipped ex¬ 
 clusively in a small village and not 
 find her way to the metropolis of 
 the country ? Dissen (Comment. 
 Pind. p. 465.) has taken, I think, 
 a more just view of the subject. 
 “ Though the epithet of Alalcome¬ 
 neis, i. e. Propulsatrix,” says that 
 writer, “may be derived from the vil¬ 
 lage of that name, where the goddess 
 had a very ancient worship, yet it is 
 highly probable that the name of the 
 village itself was derived from the 
 still older name of a ‘ Pallas Pro- 
 pulsatrixthe word ά\α\κ€ΐν being 
 that which would come first into 
 a Greek mind, whenever the term 
 
12 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 vaohy €7Γ* ^Ισμηνου re μαντβία σττοδώ. 
 
 Άθηνη *Α\αλκομ€νηϊς was mentioned.” 
 And surely if the Thebans in their 
 present calamity wanted, as we shall 
 subsequently see they did want 
 (infr. 159.)» Athene of purest 
 aether to purge their poisoned at¬ 
 mosphere, they no less needed an 
 “ Athene Propulsatrix” to drive the 
 fiery Ares, or originator of the 
 pestilential vapours, into the sea. 
 (Infr. 195.) In quality of Onca, 
 the goddess could come to the ex¬ 
 pulsion of the same Ares with 
 power equally great; but to make 
 that power evident, we must first 
 look into the derivation of the name. 
 Pausanias having conducted his Cad¬ 
 mus to the spot, where by oracular 
 direction the Cadmean citadel was to 
 be founded, proceeds to observe: 
 “ there in the open air stand an altar 
 and statue of Athene, dedicated, ac¬ 
 cording to report, by Cadmus. The 
 name of this divinity is entirely at 
 variance with those who imagine 
 that the Cadmus who came to the 
 Thebaid was an Egyptian and not 
 a Phoenician; the name of Onca'^, 
 which this Athene bears, being a 
 Phoenician and not an Egyptian 
 word f.” (Pausan. IX. c. i 2.) When 
 
 therefore we derive the word with 
 Valcknaer and Sickler from Phoe¬ 
 nician (Creuz. II. 701.) or Hebrew 
 terms (Cadmos, p. 80.), implying 
 all that is lofty and gigantic, whether 
 applied to person or mind, we pro¬ 
 vide as formidable an assailant for 
 Ares in the Pallas Onca, as in the 
 Pallas AlalcOmeneis. See further on 
 the word Cr. Symb. II. 21. 263. 
 699-703. 741. and cf. infr. v. 80. 
 
 lb. ^Ισμήνου. Leaving the reader 
 to collect from Boeckh, Dissen, Tafel 
 and Ellendt, the difficulties which 
 they have had to encounter with this 
 (mythical) son of Apollo, my limits 
 oblige me to hasten as quickly as 
 possible to my own considerations 
 of the name, considerations so novel 
 that I fear they will be thought to 
 add to the embarrassments of the 
 question instead of relieving them. 
 From various causes, however, the 
 authorities for which will be pre¬ 
 sently laid before the reader, I have 
 little hesitation in saying, that to 
 this name we are to look for a num¬ 
 ber of myths, connecting the Phoe¬ 
 nician Esmun with the Grecian 
 Apollo; adding as a corollary, that 
 these myths, if better developed than 
 
 e Learned men had long been convinced, that the word hlya in Pausanias was a 
 corruption, and that ‘'Ογγα or ’'OyKa ought to be read. (Creuz. II. 293. 699.) The 
 inquiries of Schubart and Walz, the recent editors of Pausanias, have now settled the 
 point, and the former reading has accordingly been admitted into their text. 
 
 f As this remark on the Pallas Onca at i'hebes necessarily involved a similar applica¬ 
 tion to the ΠυλαιΌγκοΓαί in the same place, (iEsch. Sept. c. T. 483. 497-8.) Jablonski,who 
 favoured the idea of an Egyptian rather than a Phoenician Cadmus, triumphantly opposed 
 to them the Πυλα* Νήϊτοί, (vEsch. Sept. c. T. 456.), those Theban gates, as he imagines, 
 pointing to the Egyptian goddess Neith, and consequently allowing him to prefer 
 exclusively an Egyptian colony. But is not this to fight the old knightly battle of the 
 shield, one party protesting that the said shield was entire gold, the other that it was 
 of entire silver, neither party, as was afterwards proved, being altogether ΛVlΌng or 
 altogether right ? I have endeavoured elsewhere to shew, that we are not limited as to 
 time, when the first Phoenician vessels came to Greece, and that in such vessels the 
 immigrants were composed of various eastern people, all bringing with them as a matter 
 of course their respective customs and religious opinions. See Introduction to “ the 
 Frogs” of Aristophanes. For the sense attached by Pausanias to the word Νηίσ'ταν, 
 (sic Schub.) see his Bceotics, c. 8, 4. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ^ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 13 
 
 TToAty yap, ωσττβρ καύτο9 βΐσορά^, άγαν 
 
 I have the means of doing, would be 
 found to establish a strong commu¬ 
 nity of practice between the three 
 great oracular institutions of Greece, 
 viz. those of Thebes, Olympia, and 
 Delphi. That the names of Ismenos 
 and Melia (his admitted mother) are 
 closely connected with that of Cad¬ 
 mus, and consequently are of Phce- 
 nician origin, no one acquainted with 
 that Pindaric fragment which brought 
 upon its youthful author the smiling 
 rebukes of his fair contemporary 
 Corinna (Boeckh. Fgmm. Pind. p. 
 560.) can for a moment doubt; but 
 before we proceed to the Pindaric 
 ode, which would remove any such 
 doubts if they still existed, let us 
 advert briefly to another branch of 
 Pindaric poetry, and to the festival 
 for which it was composed; the 
 Ismenium, or temple of Ismenos, 
 being closely connected with both. 
 The strains themselves, being sung 
 by a chorus of virgins, as they tra¬ 
 versed the streets of Thebes on their 
 way to the Ismenium, bore generally 
 the name of Parthenia (Boeckh’s 
 Fgmm. 589 sq.), even when meant 
 to grace the ^daphnephoric festival. 
 That this festival, of which Proclus has 
 given so curious an account, (Chre- 
 stom. 347.) was essentially Phoe¬ 
 nician in its nature, however it may 
 have found its way into Thessaly, 
 no one can doubt, who is aware how 
 deeply solar and planetary worship 
 entered into Phoenician religion (cf. 
 infr. 190.), and who observes what 
 constituted the great attraction of 
 the daphnephoric festival, viz. emble¬ 
 matic representations of the sun, the 
 moon, the stars, and the 365 por¬ 
 tions of the solar year, all these being 
 grafted on an olive-stem, (of which 
 
 more in another place.) With the 
 youth, beauty, and high birth of the 
 person who bore this singular em¬ 
 blem, we have nothing further to 
 remark, except that with high birth 
 on the bearer’s part, some degree of 
 opulence must have been united, the 
 office of daphnephoros obliging the 
 youth or his relations to deposit in 
 the Ismenium a golden tripod. That 
 these tripods again bring us into 
 connexion with Cadmus and his 
 birth-place, the joint testimony of 
 Herodotus (V. 59. cf. Paus. Boeot. 
 c. lo.) and Pindar alike suffice to 
 shew; but our limits restrict us to 
 that testimony which may be de¬ 
 rived from the 1 ith Pythian ode of 
 the latter. This ode, confessedly 
 the most difficult of any which occurs 
 in the Pindaric writings (Boeckh’s 
 Explic. p. 337.) was written in 
 honour , of Thrasydseus, a Theban 
 youth, and apparently a Κα 8 μογ€νψ, 
 i. e. a lineal descendant of Cadmus, 
 who had been proclaimed victor 
 at the Pythian games. The ode 
 itself appears to have been sung, as 
 the κώμος or processional pomp 
 moved through the streets of Thebes 
 to the Ismenium, there to return 
 solemn thanks for the lustre thrown 
 on Thebes, the victor and his family, 
 by the attainment of this much- 
 prized triumph. In allusion to those 
 golden tripods of which we have 
 previously spoken, the temple, by 
 one of those bold expressions so 
 familiar to Pindar, is here termed 
 “ the inmost (αδντον) treasure of 
 golden tripods ; that treasure,” the 
 poet adds, ‘ ‘ which Apollo so especially 
 respected, and which he named 
 Ismenian, being the seat of true 
 prophets.” And now, in addition to 
 
 f Boeckh considers fragment 9. in the Parthenia of Pindar, as part of a daphnephoric 
 hymn sung in the Ismenium. That little difference existed between the two species of 
 hymns, viz. the Parthenian and daphnephoric, see the same learned writer. Fgm. Pind. 591. 
 
14 
 
 -ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 η^η aaXevei κάι^ακουφίσαί κάρα 
 
 other difficulties started by com¬ 
 mentators, commence those which 
 we have brought upon ourselves by 
 our Phoenician leanings. IVhoever 
 else may have been worshipped at 
 this temple, it is evident that Melia, 
 the acknowledged mother of Isme- 
 nos, had a particular respect paid 
 her in it; since upon this occasion 
 the daughters of the ancient Cad¬ 
 mus, and the mother of Hercules, 
 are invited to attend her there, 
 “ after usual wont” (Tafel, Dilucid. 
 Find. p. 954.) ; the same ladies, as 
 I understand the text with Boeckh, 
 being subsequently invited to join 
 her in a solemn hymn of even¬ 
 ing praise to the Delphian god, by 
 whose assistance Thrasydaeus was 
 supposed to have gained his glo¬ 
 rious triumph. Who then was this 
 Melia ? That she was of Phoenician 
 origin, her close connexion with the 
 Cadmean family would at once lead 
 us to suspect; and when in the 
 Theogony of Hesiod we find a family 
 of MeXiai Νυμφαί, belonging by their 
 joint etymology, as well as the com¬ 
 pany in which they are found, to 
 principles of fulness, fruitfulness and 
 humidity; and when we further re¬ 
 collect that among Boeotian myths 
 this particular Melia is mother of 
 the river Ismenos, as well as the 
 Ismenos more immediately under 
 consideration, the supposition of 
 Phoenician origin on the lady’s part 
 becomes rather strengthened than 
 the contrary. And now what are 
 the conclusions to which the pre¬ 
 ceding premises, and which might 
 have been much enlarged, had time 
 admitted, justify us in coming } 
 They seem to admit a reasonable 
 conjecture, that the Ismenos of 
 Thebes was no other than the Phoe¬ 
 nician Esmun, that personage, who 
 
 with the seven Cabiri formed the 
 eight sons of the Phoenician fire-god 
 Sydyk (Cr. H. 15S.), and who in 
 Phoenician mythology is either a sun, 
 or a solar incarnation. Between this 
 Esmun and the Greek word Ismen, 
 there is no difference of sight or 
 sound which ought to startle an 
 etymologist; and if to the Pindaric 
 god we may be allowed to apply a 
 canon, which Sickler has so skilfully 
 applied to the deities of Hesiod’s 
 Theogony, viz. that the final ω? and 
 os in their names is but an equiva¬ 
 lent for the Semitic, iiv (Oos) and 
 IV (Os), i. e. power, strength, firm¬ 
 ness, splendour (“ Cadmus,” p. 21.), 
 the difference vanishes altogether, 
 Ismen-os, under that view, signifying 
 Esmun the solar power, or Esmun the 
 solar splendour. Secondly, that un¬ 
 der the Ismenian Apollo is to be com¬ 
 prehended a double solar worship, 
 amicably settled (perhaps after some 
 previous conflict like that between 
 the Bacchic andApollinean worships) 
 in a common temple, of which the 
 adytum was appropriated to the 
 Phoenician, and the great body of 
 the temple to the Grecian branch of 
 worship. It is satisfactory to me to 
 be able to add, that the above idea 
 of identity between Esmun and 
 Ismenos had at all events crossed 
 the, brain of the writer most con¬ 
 versant with such subjects (Creuz. 
 II. i 59 .)> though the learned writer 
 has nowhere to my knowledge en¬ 
 tered into any reasoning, or de¬ 
 veloped his ideas upon the subject. 
 But—for alas ! we have not yet con¬ 
 cluded—why was the mother of Her¬ 
 cules brought into this company of 
 Cadmean heroines, {ηρωΐδων στρα¬ 
 τόν,) “ to hymn with consentient 
 voice the Delphian god ?” It will be 
 remembered that one of our posi- 
 
ΟίΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 15 
 
 βυθών er ούχ^ οΐα re φοίνίου σάλον, 
 
 tions at the commencement of these 
 observations was, that the myths 
 connected with Ismenos, if com¬ 
 pletely developed, would tend to 
 establish a certain community of 
 religious practices between the three 
 great oracular institutions of Thebes, 
 Delphi, and Olympia. Now without 
 troubling the reader with myths of 
 the Esmun-Hercules, he must be ill 
 acquainted with the Pindaric writ¬ 
 ings, if he does not know, that not 
 only were Olympian rites and fes¬ 
 tivals originally instituted by the 
 Theban Hercules, but that one of 
 the first proceedings of that insti¬ 
 tution was to change the mode of 
 delivering oracular predictions at 
 Olympia, that change being made in 
 strict conformity with the usages 
 of the Ismenian and Delphic. What 
 those usages were, and what the 
 consequent change introduced by 
 Hercules was, will be understood by 
 a note almost immediately following, 
 and that at v. 182. See also v. 223. 
 
 Ib. μαντ€ΐο 5 {serving for prophetic 
 purposes.) adject. = μαντικός. Find. 
 Olymp. VI. 6. Pyth. XL 11. V. 90. 
 Eurip. Ion. 130. &c. 
 
 Ib. στΓοδώ, ashes: equivalent to 
 altar, according to the Scholiast, to 
 temple, according to Dindorf. If all 
 the temples above mentioned, had 
 been visited for supplicatory pur¬ 
 poses, Dindorf’s version, though cer¬ 
 tainly a striking proof of part taken 
 for a whole, might perhaps have 
 stood. But was the Ismenium visited 
 for that purpose ? Was it not rather 
 for the purpose of prying into futurity 
 
 on this occasion } Thucydides, with 
 whom the poet will be found closely 
 to harmonize in Ifis account of the 
 Theban plague, informs us that, 
 during the Attic, both modes of pro¬ 
 ceeding took place, as might indeed 
 have been expected. (H. 47. 6 σα re 
 ττρος Upolg ίκ€Τ€υσαν η μαντΑαις και τοίς 
 τοιουτοις όχρησαντο, πάντα άνωφ€Χη ην.) 
 But how were future events collected 
 at the Ismenium ? By the flame 
 which rose from the sacrificed ani¬ 
 mal, say learned men (Cr. H. 163. 
 Boeckh Find. Explic. 152. 9.); the 
 testimony of Herodotus (VHI. 134) 
 being apj)ealed to as a confirmation 
 of this opinion. But Herodotus, as 
 Schweighoeuser has shewn, does not 
 necessarily say any such thing. The 
 historian, speaking of the mode in 
 which the Apollo Ismenius delivered 
 his answers, observes, κατάπβρ iv 
 ’OXu/iTTiV/, ίροίσι αυτόθι χρηστηριάζ^ται, 
 “ he delivers his answers there, as 
 he does at Olympia,” (not verbally, 
 or by written papers, or by dreams, 
 &c. but) “ by means of victims,” 
 leaving his readers, whom he sup¬ 
 poses perfectly acquainted with the 
 fact, to draw their own inferences. 
 That no oracular response was drawn 
 from \h.Q flame of the Ismenian altar, 
 we should be the last to deny (cf. 
 infr. 182.), but that among the multi¬ 
 tudinous contrivances of the ancients 
 for prying into g futurity, and more 
 particularly of the people from whom 
 h Cadmus came, that the ashes should 
 have been wholly neglected, seems 
 hardly conceivable. I contend there¬ 
 fore that the word σποόυς may here 
 
 Van Dale de Idolatr. 370. 440. Wachsm. IV. 277. Creuz. Symb. I. 188. II. 411. 
 b Cf. Dent. XVIII. 10, ii. That the various species of divination here commemo¬ 
 rated were meant to \varn the Jews against the practices of their neighbours, there can 
 be little doubt. In the second edition of Sir W. Scott’s Demonology, will be found a 
 detailed account of those practices, which the present Avriter Λvas allowed to append to 
 that Avork. He has not the volume at hand, and does not remember \vhether divination 
 by the sacrificial ashes was among them. 
 
16 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 φΘίνονσα μίν κάλνζίΡ Ιγκάρττοις χθοί'οί, * 25 
 
 φθίΐ^ουσα S' άγβλαις βουνόμοις^ τόκοισί re 
 
 
 be taken in its original sense; and 
 in so contending, I am happy to 
 find that I do not quite stand alone, 
 as in looking into Muller’s “Dorians” 
 for another purpose, it was my lot 
 to drop upon the following passage. 
 “ The identity of the Boeotian with 
 the Delphian worship of Apollo was 
 particularly striking in the temple of 
 Ismene (?) at Thebes. . . . Tripods 
 were the sacred vessels in both 
 temples, though never employed in 
 the latter for the purpose of pro¬ 
 phecy. In later times the priests 
 were contented with observing omens 
 from the flame and ashes of sacri¬ 
 fices, hke the ττνρκόοι of Delphi.” 
 I. 263. (Engl. Trans.) Omitting 
 for the present any objection which 
 may be derived from the augural 
 practices of Tiresias to this assertion, 
 I have only to add, that if the Scho¬ 
 liast, when rendering the word σπο¬ 
 δό? by βωμός, meant an altar made of 
 the ashes of sacrificed victims, as the 
 altar of Juno of Samos, that of Apollo 
 Spondius—where another singular 
 mode of divination was practised— 
 (Pans. Boeot. c. xi.) or that of Zeus 
 Olympius (Paus. Eliac. c. 13.), his 
 view of the matter is far more to 
 the purpose than that of my learned 
 predecessor, Dindorf. 
 
 23. aaXeveiv. Metaph. from a ship 
 tempest-tost. 
 
 Ib. ανακούφιζαν, to hold up its 
 head. Metaph. from a ship nearly 
 sinking. 
 
 24. €T ονχ oia re, i. e. ovKeri oia 
 re. WuND. gl. ap. Eber. 8 ννατη. 
 
 25. φθίνονσα. CEd. Col. 6lo. φ^ί- 
 vci μ(ν Ισχύς γης. Cf. infr, 1 71 .· Wun- 
 der translates φθίν. μ. κ. iy.perit civi- 
 tas sic, ut pereant simul folliculi, 
 referring to Rost’s Gr. Gr. p. 507. 
 Ed. 4. 
 
 Ib. κάΧνξ. Hesych. cvioi δε (μβρυα 
 (the germen of plants not yet opened) 
 άποδιδόασι τούς κάλυκας, evioi δε βλασ¬ 
 τήματα. 
 
 Ib. κάλνξιν €γκάρποις. By these 
 terms I think is to be understood 
 the calyx with the fruit-bud formed 
 in it. This interpretation will bring 
 the Theban plague, like the Attic, 
 (of which it is evidently meant to be 
 a counterpart) to that period of the 
 year, when spring is ended, but 
 summer not fully commenced, and 
 when all is full of promise as well as 
 beauty. The splendid fruits of Thebes 
 are alluded to in a fragment of Pin¬ 
 dar (Hyporchem. fr.3.), where, after 
 observing in what countries dififerent 
 articles are best procured, as dogs 
 from the Spartan Taygetus, armour 
 from Argos, &c. he adds, but a chariot 
 is best obtained Θηβαίων από γάς άγλα- 
 οκάρτΓον. For the construction, see 
 Bernhardy’s Wissenschaft. Syntax 
 der Griech. Spr. p. 102. 
 
 Ib. κάλνκ€ς χθονός. Wunder com¬ 
 pares Phil. Joy. ίερα? γας σπόρος. A 
 better way perhaps would be to con¬ 
 sider χθονος as nearly redundant, 
 like γης, CEd. Col. 669. and else¬ 
 where. 
 
 26. βοννόμοις άγίλαις i. e. άγίλαις 
 βοών ν^μομύνων. Matth. §. 44^· .3· 
 
 Ib. τόκοισιν άγόνοις γυναικών. Par¬ 
 tus sive fostus mulierum nondum editi. 
 WuND. Hesiod, denouncing the 
 vengeance of heaven on a city where 
 injustice prevails, says, in that bitter 
 language which he could assume at 
 will, 
 
 τοΊσιν δ’ ουρανόθίν μ 4 γ* όπήγαγζ πήμα 
 ΚρονΙων, 
 
 λιμύν όμου κα\ λοιμόν’ άποφθινύθουσι 
 δε λαοί. 
 
 οι’δε γυναΐκΐς τίκτουσιν. 
 
 Ορ. et Dies 240. 
 
t 
 
 ΟίΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ^ 
 
 ^ V ^ ' 
 
 άγόνοις'γυναικών' €v δ’ ό ττυρφόρο^ θεός 
 σκηφ^ας ελαύνει, λοιμοί εγθιστος, ττόλιν, 
 vcf) ού κενουται δώμα Κ.αδμεΐον, μελα9 δ’ 
 
 ^Αιδης στεναγμοί^ κα\ γόοις πλουτίζεται» 5 
 θεοΐσι μεν νυν ούκ Ισούμενόν σ εγώ 
 ούδ' οΊδε παϊδε^ εζόμεσθ* εφέστιοι, 
 άνδρών δε πρώτον εν τε συμφοραΐ^ βίου 
 κρίνοντες εν τε δαιμόνων ζυναλλαγαίς' 
 
 0 ? γ εζελυσας, αστυ Υι.αδμε'ίον μόλων, 
 
 17 
 
 : A 
 
 30 
 
 U 
 
 35 
 
 27· δ’ [ev δ’ Buttm. Gr. Gr. 
 IL 300. note 8). σκηψας. i. e. ίνσκη- 
 ψας gl. € 7 Γΐσκη·ψ·αί, βαρίως ^μττ^σών. 
 'Diucyd. II. 47· {de peste) \cy 0 pevov 
 
 pev KOI πρ 6 τ(ρον ποΧΚαχόσε ^γκατασκή- 
 
 ψαι. Lucret. VI. 1139· Nam pe- 
 nitus veniens Aigypti e finibus 
 ortus, I ... incubuit tandem populo 
 Pandionis. Cf. Trach. 1087. 
 
 Ib. πνρφόρος, violent heat, or fever- 
 bringing. Thucyd. II. 49. τα δε ivros 
 όντως Ικάβτο, ώστε ρ^τ€ των πάνν 
 Χ^πτών ιματίων και σινδόνων τας eVi- 
 βοΧας μη 8 ^ άλλο τι η yvpvoX άνίχ^σθαι. 
 Lucret. VI. 1166. Intima pars ho- 
 mini vero flagravit ad ossa: | fla- 
 gravit stomacho flamma, ut forna- 
 cibus intus. Boccaccio observes, 
 that in the plague of Florence, the 
 greater number died without fever: 
 “ e i piu senza alcuna febbre, o altro 
 accidente raorivano.” 
 
 Ib. θζός. Why Mars appears in 
 a future verse (190) as the god in 
 whom this scourge is personified, we 
 shall endeavour to explain when that 
 passage comes before us. The 
 reader, who wishes to know how 
 severely the Thebaid and other parts 
 of Boeotia must have suffered from 
 this scourge in earlier periods, will 
 observe the incidental remarks in 
 Pausanias (Boeotics cc. 5. 8. 22. 36. 
 38 &c.). 
 
 28. iXavvei agitat.Yih. Pind. Isth. 
 IV. TO. άλλοτε δ’ άΧΧοΐος ουρος | πάν- 
 τας ανθρώπους ^παΐσσων iXavvei. Aj. 
 275* Χ^^Χνός τ€ Χνπρ πας €ΧήΧαται κακτ}. 
 
 29· δώ/χα. Schol. πόλις. Dindorf 
 notices this as a remarkable use of a 
 noun singular for a noun plural. 
 On the particle δ’ as terminating 
 this verse, see Matth. Gr. Gr. §. 160. 
 p. 256.^ 
 
 30. "Αι 8 ης. On the mode of 
 writing this word, consult Ellendt: 
 for other particulars, see Thudichum 
 I. 223. and Reisig’s Enar. p. 190. 
 
 31. oiiK laovpevov {κρίνοντας) σε, 
 non eum te juclicantes, qui diis tequi- 
 paretvr. Erf. 
 
 32. ε’φε'στίοι i. e. επι τρ Ιστία 
 (Matth. Gr. Gr. 446, 8.), here : on 
 the steps of the altar. 
 
 33. σνμφοραί, common occurrences 
 of life. 
 
 34. ^vvaXkayaX, extraordinary in¬ 
 terpositions of the deity, more par¬ 
 ticularly in the case of the Sphinx. 
 
 35. (κΧν€ΐν. Tollendl componendive 
 et Jlniendi vis adsignificatur. El. 
 Traph. 653. vvv δ^^'Αρης οίστρηθ^ϊς | 
 ε^έλυσ’ Ιπίπονον αμίραν. Cf. infr. 
 
 391 - 
 
 lb. (ίστν Kabpclov. cf. Pausan. 
 cc. 5. 7. Aischyl. Sept. c. T.47. 527. 
 πάλιν Καδ/χοΰ. Ib. 74 · ^ 13· 126. 289* 
 1007. 1078. 
 c 
 
18 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 A· 
 
 l·· 
 
 
 A" 
 
 \ 
 
 σκληρά^ άοιδον δοχτμον oj/ τταρβίχομβρ, 
 
 Kcu τανθ* νφ* ημώι/ ονδ^ βζβιδωζ ττλβον 
 ούδ' ^κδίδα^^θβίί' άλλα ττροσθηκρ θεού 
 \eyeL νομίζει θ' ηράν δρθώσαι βίον' 
 νυν τ, ώ κράτιστον ττάσιν ΟΙδίττου κάρα^ 
 Ικβτβύομβν σ€ πάντ€9 οΐδβ ττρόστροττοί 
 αλκήν TLV βνρέΐν ημΊν, βϊτβ τον θεών 
 φήμην ακουσας €lt αττ avopos οισσα ττου 
 cos τοΐσιν εμττείροίσί καΐ ras ζνμφορά9 . ^ 
 ζώσα9 δρω μάλιστα των βουλευμάτων. 
 ϊθ', ώ βροτών άριστ^ άνόρθωσον ττόλιν, 
 
 Wy εύλαβηθηθ'* ώ? σε νυν μεν ηδε γή 
 σωτήρα κληζει τής ΤΓάρο9 προθυμίας' 
 
 40 
 
 45 
 
 36. aoibov, Sphingis sc., because 
 her enigma was delivered in verse, 
 cf. Eurip. Phoen. 820.1522. See also 
 Dissen’s Comment, in Find. p. 164. 
 
 38. €κ 8 ιΒαχθ€ίς. The preposition 
 is redundant. Schol. 
 
 Ib. προσθηκτ). Schol. σνμβονΧη, 
 iniKovpia. El. auxilium. gl. Pal. MS. 
 βονΚΐ}. Kayser, editor of the “Acta 
 Seminarii Philol. Heidelberg,” pre¬ 
 fers mandatum dei, comparing He- 
 rodot. III. 62. Ι 1 ρηξασπ€ 5 , οντω μοι 
 Βκπρηζαο τό τοι προσίθηκα πρηγμα ; 
 
 40 . κράτιστον πάσιν, omnibus ορ- 
 timus, i. e. qui ab omnibus optimus 
 haberis. Wund. 41. πρόστροποι, sup¬ 
 pliants. The Scholiast supposes the 
 speaker to have here fallen at the 
 feet of CEdipus. 
 
 42. αλκήν, a remedy, a means of 
 driving away the evil. The term is 
 both Pindaric and Hesiodean. Op. et 
 Dies, 199. Theog. 876. κακόν δ’ ονκ 
 €σσ€ται άλκη. Pind. Nem. VII. 141. 
 bvvaaai δε βροτοϊσιν άλκάν [ άμαχανιάν 
 δυσβάτων θάμα διδόμ^ν. So άλκτήρ. 
 Hes. Theog. 65 7 · δ’ άθανάτοισιν 
 
 άρής yeveo κρνβροΐο. Scut. Here. 28. 
 δφρα Oeoiaiv | άνδράσι τ αλφηστρσιν 
 aprjs άλκτήρα φντίυσΐ}. Pind. Pyth. III. 
 12 . ηρώα παντοδαπάν άλκτηρα νονσων. 
 
 43· ΦνΗ·ν^> oracular response. Cf. 
 infr. 86. 
 
 Ib. από belongs to τον θεών as well 
 as άνδρός. Cf. infr. 94. 123. 637. 
 734. 761. 1349. CEd. Col. 1561. 
 Antig. 1176. Trach. 766. Phil. 334, 
 and other places. 
 
 44. τοΐσιν ipneipoiaiv, those who 
 have had much experience. 
 
 44, 5 · "τάς ξνμφορας των βονλίνμά- 
 των {eveKa gl. MS. Pal.), the issues of 
 their consultations. Musgrave com¬ 
 pares Thucyd. I. 140. Tas ξνμφοραε 
 (Schol. τάς άποβάσίΐς) των πραγμάτων. 
 
 Ib. ^ώσα?, having vitality, efficacy, 
 certainty. Successu florentes. Muse. 
 
 47. €νλαβηθηθ\ urbi cave, ab in- 
 teritu earn defende. El. Wunder 
 thinks it is rather to be referred to 
 the words following at v. 49. cave 
 tibi, ne meminerimus, &c. 
 
 48. προθνμίας, promptitude to ren¬ 
 der assistance. Elmsley prefers προ- 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΛΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 19 
 
 άρχη9 Se της σης μηδαμώς μ^μνωμβθα 
 
 στάντ€9 τ €9 ορθον KOU ΤΓβσόντ€9 ύστερον’ 5° 
 
 άλλ* ασφαλή ία rrjvS άνορθωσον ttoXlv, 
 
 ^ ορνίθι γαρ καί την^τότ αισίω τύχην 
 7Γαρ€σχ€5^ ημΐν^ καΙ ταννν ϊσο9 yevov. 
 ώ9 €Ϊπ€ρ ap^eL9 rrjaSe γη9, ωσττβρ κρατ€Ϊ 9 ^ 
 ζνν άνΒράσιν κάλλιον η Κ€νη9 κρατβΐν. 55 
 
 ώ? ούδύν βστιν οντ€ 7Γνργο9 οϋτ€ vav9 
 ίρημο9 άνδρών μη ζννοίκούντων ίσω. 
 
 μηθίας, and is strongly supported in 
 this reading by Eber and Kayser. 
 (Acta Sem. Phil. 70.) The con¬ 
 struction, which supposed cvcku to 
 be here understood, does not seem 
 sufficiently refined for the modern 
 grammarians. Cf. Wunder. 
 
 49, 50. “ Let not our reminis¬ 
 cences of your sway be to the effect, 
 that it once placed us in an erect, 
 i. e. in a prosperous condition, and 
 subsequently in a prostrate one»” 
 
 49. μζμνωμζθα. Erfurdt gives as 
 references for this grammatical form 
 Fischer ad Weller II.420. Schneider 
 ad Xenoph. Cyrop. i, 6, 3. Anab. 
 I, 7, 5. Hermann refers to Butt- 
 mann in Mus. stud, antiq. i. p. 239 
 sq. and Gr. Gram. i. p. 442. 
 
 50. is ορθον = ορθως. infr. 696. 
 yav κατ ορθόν ουρισας. Triptol. I. 1. 
 is τα Se^ta, dextrorsus. Trach. 347. 
 Triptol. IX. 7. 
 
 5 1. ασφαλίΐα = ασφαλώς, cf. infp. 
 1526. Wunder aptly compares 
 Antig. 162. τα piv όη πόλ?α>? (i. e. 
 την noXcv) άσφaλώs θξθ\ [ πολλω σάλω 
 aciaavTcs ωρθωσαν ττάλιν. Translate : 
 place the city in an erect and secure 
 position. See also the same learned 
 writer ad Philoct. 11 26. 
 
 52. ορνίθι αισίω, with favourable 
 omen. lies. Op. et Dies, 826. όρνιθας 
 κρίνων. In his fourth Pythian ode. 
 
 Pindar exhibits the seer Mopsus ap¬ 
 parently as embarking the assembled 
 host by means of actual birds, in¬ 
 stead of augural omens. 337. καί ρά 
 ol I μάντις ορνιχ^σσι και κλάροισι θ^ο- 
 7 Γρο 7 Γ€ων hpois I Μόψος αμβασΐ στρα¬ 
 τόν πρόφρων. The same ode, besides 
 the metaphorical sense, furnishes 
 the epithet attached in our text. 
 Ib.34. Keivos όρνις €ΚΤ€λίντάσ€ί μ^γαλαν 
 ΤΓολίων I ματρότΓολιν Θήραν yξviσθaι. 
 Ib. 40· οίίάΊον δ’ eVi οί Κρονίων Zevt 
 ττατηρ βροντάν. Ib. 35 ®* 
 
 νξφβων δί οί άντάνσ^ βροντάς αίσιον 
 φθ€yμa. See also on this subject 
 the poet’s fifth Ishmian ode, 70 sq. 
 
 Ib. τύχην, lot, good fortune. 
 
 53. ΐσοςζ=.0μοιος SchoX. shew your¬ 
 self the same as you did formerly. 
 
 55. COVunder ad Philoct. V. 825. 
 
 56. ουδίν, of no value. (Cf. Eurip. 
 Phoen. 452. 607. Here. F. 314.633.) 
 (For sentiment the Scholiast com¬ 
 pares Alcseus ; iivhpes ττόλξως Trvpyoi 
 ap^iot (cf. Mus. Crit. I. p. 426.), and 
 Demosthenes : avbpes yap πάλας, καΐ 
 ού τάχη. 
 
 37 · μί} ξννοικούντων. “ Additum 
 est μη ξννοικούντων eo modo, quo so- 
 lent Grseci rem efficiendam vel ef- 
 fectam verbis adjungere.” Herm. 
 See also El. in voc. μη. p. loj. 
 
 Ib. όσω. For examples of the 
 word thus used, see Ell. I. 344 · 
 c 2 
 
20 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ τταΐ^βς οίκτροί, γνωτα κούκ αγ^ωτά μοι 
 ττροσηλθβθ* lp€LpovT€9. €ύ γαρ οίδ* on 
 voaeire Trairres^ και voaovvre^j cos* 
 ουκ eanv υμών οση9 Ισόν voael. ^ ^ 
 
 το μ^ γαρ υμών αλγΟς eh ev βρχβταί 
 μονον κασ αυτοί/, κουοβν άλλον η ο €μη 
 -ψνχΎΐ ΤΓολίν Τ€ κάμβ kcu σ ομου aTevei» 
 ωστ ου\ υττνω y evhovTa μ e^eyeipETe, 
 άλΧ* ϊστΕ τΓολλά μβν μ€ δακρύσαντα δη, 
 ΤΓολλας δ’ 6δον9 Ελθόντα φροντίδθ9 ττλάνοις. 
 ην S Ευ σκοπών Ευρισκον ίασιν μόνην, 
 ταυτήν Εττραζα. τταΐδα yap ^ΕνοικΕωζ 
 ¥^ρΕοντ\ Εμαυτου γαμβρόν, eV τα ΤΙυθίκα 
 
 
 6 ο 
 
 ^5 
 
 70 
 
 58. γνωτα κονκ αγνωτα. Eusta¬ 
 thius ad II. Ζ. 333 · αΊσαν . . 
 
 ovb' vnep αΐσαν) compares this and 
 El. 929. 7 ]^vs ov 8 e μητρί Βυσχ^ρης. 
 1078 . οντ€ τι τον Baveiv προμηθης τό 
 Τ€ μη βλ€π€ΐν ίτοίμα. Add QEd. Col. 
 397 * βαιου κονχϊ μνρίου χρόνον. 
 
 Aj. 289. ακ\ητο 5 ονθ* νπ άγγίΚων 
 κληθ€ίς. Hes. Theog. 55 ^· 7 ^^ Ρ 
 ηγνοίησ€ doXov. 
 
 60. voaovvTcs. Attice for νοσονν- 
 των. Elms. No ; says Hermann : 
 voaovvTes ov voaelre όξ ϊσου ως όγώ. 
 To shew that this is to he under¬ 
 stood without exception, the speaker 
 changes his turn of speech, and 
 says, ovK όστίν νμων οστις. Cf. Wund. 
 ad QHd. Col. 543. 
 
 62. eh ev. Ehnsley’s reading of 
 ev from Trin. Mosq. has been adopted 
 by Herm. and Ellendt. 
 
 64. areveiv, in a transitive sense, 
 occurs also CEd. Col. 1709. del yap 
 ομμα σβ τόδ’ όμον στίν^ι Βακρνον. Phil. 
 338 . Keivov στίνω. 
 
 6 ι^. νπνω γ (νδοντα. Said of a 
 person resting in the utmost security. 
 
 The addition of the noun, as Erfurdt 
 remarks, gives intensity to the sig¬ 
 nification of the verb by reiterating 
 the notion in which the primary force 
 of the sentence is employed. Cf. Phil. 
 55. 225. CEd. Col. 1625. Eur. Plerc. 
 F. 1034. 1060. Schsefer, who had 
 proposed to read νπνον, has since re¬ 
 turned to the original text, which is 
 confirmed by Eustath. 712, 17. See 
 notes on the subject by Wunder, 
 here and at (Ed. Col. 302. 431. 
 
 67. τΓοΧΧας δ’ κ. τ. e. Having 
 gone over many modes or ways of 
 curing this evil in my mental wander¬ 
 ings.” ScHOL. τΐοΧΧας γνώμης (πιβοΧας 
 ev τη aKey^ei πXavωμevoς ηΧθον, Ιως ου 
 
 K.T.e. Cf. Eurip. Orest. 625. 
 
 Ib. φροντίδος ττΧάνοις. Wunder 
 compares infr. 727. ψνχης πΧάνημα. 
 
 Ib. πΧάνος for πΧάνη. ScHOL. The 
 latter word is always used byTEschy- 
 lus, ττΧάνος by Soph. In the remains 
 of Euripides, πΧάνη occurs once 
 (Rhad. fr. I. 8), πΧάνος frequently. 
 
 70. epavTov γαμβρόν. The empha¬ 
 sis which QSdipus lays on , these 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 άτβμψα Φοίβον δώμαθ\ ώ? ττύθοίθ* ο re 
 
 ^ \ f j '■-ϊ·'.'' ^ ■ 
 
 δρωι^ η τί φωνών τηνδβ ρυσαψην ττόλιν. 
 και μ ήμαρ ηδη ζυμμβτρονμίνον χρόνω 
 Χνπβΐ τί ττροίσσβί, τον γαρ €ΐκότο9 ττβρα 
 
 άπβστί ττλβίω τον καθήκοντος χρόνον, 
 όταν δ* ΐκηταί, τηνικαντ όγώ κακός 
 μη όρων αν €ίην ττανσ οσ αν όηλοι σβος. 
 
 21 
 
 75 
 
 words, shews his paternal interest in 
 his subjects. He has sent no ordi¬ 
 nary person to consult the Delphic 
 oracle, hut the brother of his royal 
 consort. The wide extent in which 
 the Greek writers used the words 
 γαμβρός and π^νθ^ρος has been ob¬ 
 served by Brunck. 
 
 71. € 7 Γ€μψα . . ως τινθοιβ* . Cf. infr. 
 
 555 · 730. 780. 791. 843·, The 
 grammatical rule on which this con¬ 
 struction depends, is too well known 
 to require explanation. 
 
 72. την^€ ρνσαίμην. Brunck, re¬ 
 ferring to this shortened vowel be¬ 
 fore the inceptive p in ρνσαίμην, says, 
 “ See Hisch. Prom. 235. Sept, ad 
 Th. 91. 830. Eur. Suppl. 380. 
 Bacch. 1336. some of which still 
 require emendation.” Laur. a. την 8 ' 
 (ρνσάμην. Par. 467. Τί^νδ’ ερνσαίμην. 
 
 73» ημαρ ξυμμζτρονμ^νος ,meSLS\irmg 
 the present day or time. Herodot. 
 IV. 158. συμμ€τρησάμ(νοί την ωρην 
 της ημίρης. Cf. infr. 9 ^ 3 * 
 
 Ib. χρόνω, with the time which 
 such a journey requires. Erf. χρόνω 
 (τον an€Lvai).WvNO. Thudichumcom¬ 
 putes the distance between Thebes 
 and Delphi at 24 “ Wegstunden.” 
 
 74. Xvnel Ti πράσσει. We shall 
 assist the dramatic illusion, if we 
 suppose CEdipus to pause here, and 
 exhibit by his gestures some of those 
 feelings of suspicion in regard to 
 Creon, which afterwards break out so 
 violently on his part. Erfurdt for 
 
 construction compares infr. 155. ά^ό- 
 μ€νος, τί pot — εξαννσ^ις χρόος. Aj . 794 · 
 ωστ€ μ' ω^ίν^ιν, τί φης. Eurip. Hec. 
 185. δ€ΐμαίνω, τί ποτ άναστένξις. Vid. 
 Schsef. adL. Bos. p. 580 sq. 
 
 Ib. τον (Ικότος πόρα, ultra quod 
 ccquum est. Muso. 
 
 76, 7 * τηνικαντα κ. τ. k. If the 
 Greek dramatists had some disad¬ 
 vantages in bringing subjects before 
 their audiences, the general bearings 
 of which were previously well known 
 to the hearers, they also had their 
 benefit. In the present play more par¬ 
 ticularly, the ignorance of CEdipus in 
 regard to his own actual condition, 
 and the knowledge of the audience, 
 keep up a perpetual dramatic in¬ 
 terest, and sometimes of the most 
 intense kind. The determined tone 
 in which the unfortunate monarch 
 pronounces these words, may be 
 considered as the first of a series of 
 dramatic sensations, some of which 
 will be occasionally noted, but more 
 left to the reader’s own taste and 
 feeling. 
 
 77. hrjkoi, a conjunctive. See 
 Matth. Gr. Gr. §. 527. not. 2. 
 (At the conclusion of this verse, 
 some significant gesture on the part 
 of the Suppliants apprises the priest 
 of Jupiter that'Cleon is approach¬ 
 ing. The Scholiast supposes that a 
 whisper conveys the news to the 
 priest’s ear.) Cf. infr. ad λαμπρός 
 ομματι. 
 
 c 3 
 
22 
 
 ΣΟΦϋΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΙΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 άλλ’ eis* καλοι^ σύ τ βίπα^, οϊδβ τ άρτιων 
 Y^piouTa ττροστβίχοντα σημαίνονσί μοί. 
 ώνα^'ΆτΓολλον^ el γαρ iv τνχτ] ye rep 
 
 8ο 
 
 78. €19 καλόρ. This is an ambigu¬ 
 ous expression : it may refer to the 
 observation last made, to those at 
 vv. 71, 2. or to the simpler matters 
 about ime and distance, 73-5. The 
 ambiguity may be avoided by trans¬ 
 lating : tcell hast thou said. 
 
 79. προστβίχοντα, i. e. ττροσστίί- 
 χοντα as in CEd. Col. 30. 3^*^· 
 Dind. 
 
 80. ωναξ^Άπολλον. Remembering 
 
 that it is a Cadmean who here 
 speaks, we are bound to provide him 
 with a suitable Apollo. Besides the 
 Ismenian Apollo furnished in a pre¬ 
 ceding verse, Pausanias, in his Boe- 
 otics, supplies us with an Apollo 
 Spodius (c. 12.) a Boedromius (ib. 
 c. 17.) an Apollo iPtous (ib. c. 23. 
 cf. Herodot. VIII. 135), to whom, 
 I believe, may be added an ApoUo 
 Galaxius. (Cr. II. 160.) Leaving 
 the reader to make choice between 
 these five divinities, a more impor¬ 
 tant question remains; what in the 
 mouth of such a person as (Edipus, is 
 the meaning of the word Apollo it¬ 
 self ? “ It is well known,” says the 
 
 learned Symbolist who has just been 
 quoted, how much the Greeks ex¬ 
 erted their wit and ingenuity to un¬ 
 twist this name out of their own 
 language, and it is equally well 
 known with how little success.” 
 
 (II. 167.) Recollecting that we are 
 here engaged with a family only five 
 degrees in descent from the Phoe¬ 
 nician Cadmus, we are bound to try 
 what his language will afford us in 
 the matter. Now, as on a former 
 occasion (sup. p. 14.) it was found 
 that Hesiodean terminations in ως 
 or os generally signified the power 
 of those cosmogenic or ^ primeval 
 deities, to whose names it was ap¬ 
 pended, (the authority of Sickler 
 being given for that declaration,) so 
 it appears, from the same learned 
 writer, that the termination ων im¬ 
 plies power also, but power more 
 particularly used of primeval deities, 
 implying light, water, air, breath, 
 &c. the termination itself being equi¬ 
 valent to the Semitic pw (Hon), i. e. 
 might or power, particularly pro- 
 creative power. (Genes, xlix. 3. Deut. 
 xxi. 17. Ps. cv. 36. &c,) The words 
 ΚΡΟΝΙ-ΩΝ, ΥΠΕΡΙ.ΩΝ, ΠΟΣΕΙΔΕ- 
 ΩΝ, ΤΥΦΑ-ΩΝ, &c. wiU all be found, 
 when traced to their respective roots, 
 to answer to this canon. For the 
 process by which the Greek word 
 ΑΠΟΛΛ-ΩΝ is thus brought to sig¬ 
 nify “ the separating and dividing 
 power,” or that power by which the 
 periods of the year as well as the 
 day are separated and divided, the 
 reader is referred to the learned 
 
 i The 9th Fragment in Pindar’s Parthenia” evidently relates to this Apollo. 
 
 κινηθείς dwrjei 
 
 yau Kal θάλασσαν καΐ σκοττιαΤσιν μ^γάλαιε ορίων linep ίστα 
 κα\ μνχους Βινάσσατο βαλλόμενος κρηττΊδας άλσεων. 
 
 καί ποτέ rhv τρικάρανον ΤΙτώου κευθμώνα κατεσχε. Dissen’s Pind. ρ. 229· 
 
 ^ Who does not, when writing on such subjects, miss the German Ur, by which so 
 many happy compounds are formed, Urlcraften, Urtrage, Urmythen, Ursachen, Urkunde, 
 &c. ? Where does “primeval Night” come forth with such solemnity and dignity as in the 
 Urnacht of the same powerful language } How many of these and similar compounds 
 are wanted when the primordia rerum are under discussion; yet who will venture to in¬ 
 troduce them ? 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 σωτηρι βαίη λαμπροί ώσττβρ ομματι, 
 
 Ιϋι. ijtAA eLKoxraL μ€ν^ ηόυ9 ου γαρ αν καρα 
 ^^^Α^7ΓθΧυστ€φη9 ώδ’ Λμπβ παγκάρπου 8άφνη9, 
 ΟΙ. τάχ βΙσόμβσθα' ζύμμβτρος γαρ ώς κλύβιν. 
 
 23 
 
 Sickler himself. (Cadmus, ρ. 89·) 
 See also infr. 162. 
 
 Ib. αι/αξ. As a term of dignity, 
 this word has a large range in the 
 following drama. We find it applied 
 here to Apollo, afterwards to Creon 
 (v. 85), toTiresias (284), to (Edipus 
 (276. cf. ^sch. S. c. T. 39. 916. 
 1001), and even to the Chorus of the 
 piece (911). The reader’s-best re¬ 
 source is to translate according to per¬ 
 sons and circumstances, divine^ illus¬ 
 trious, royal, chiefs of the realm, &c.) 
 Finding the term applied to Zeus him¬ 
 self by the earliest of Theban poets 
 (Hes. Theog. 660. ηΚυθαμ^ν, Κρόνον 
 vie αναξ, avdeXnra πα 6 όντ€ς), we do 
 not hesitate to ascribe a Phoenician 
 origin to the word, and derive it with 
 Sickler and Valcknaer from the Se¬ 
 mitic Ρ» (anak) signifying, great, 
 lofty, he. (Creuz. II. p. 701.) Find. 
 01. XIII. 152. βωμός αναξ, 
 
 Ib. el γαρ (i. e. eWe), 0 that / Cf. 
 infr. 863. 
 
 Ib. ev τνχτ] ye τω. Porson com¬ 
 pares .Esch. Sept. c. Th. 468. σνν 
 τνχτ] 8 e τω. Clioeph. 136. σνν τνχη 
 Tivi. 
 
 81. σωτηρι. This union of a noun 
 masculine with a substantive as if it 
 were an adjective feminine, is less 
 remarkable than Ellendt seems to 
 consider it. Something like it oc¬ 
 curs in Phil. 1470· Νύ/χφαυ άΧίαισιν 
 enev^apevoi | νόστον σωτηρας Ικ^σθαι. 
 Elmsley compares .Esch. Ag. 673. 
 
 Ύνχη be σωτηρ vavv στeXovσ eφeζeτo. 
 
 Eurip. Med. 360. See also jEschyl. 
 S. c. T. 211. Ellendt renders the 
 passage: utinani bene ominatus, cum 
 fausto nuncio veniat. 
 
 Ib. λαμπρός ομματι. As the palace 
 
 of (Edipus stood on the Cadmea, it 
 necessarily commanded a very ex¬ 
 tensive prospect. (Cf. .Eschyl. Sept, 
 c. T. 226. Eurip. Phoen. 86-200. 
 204.) Creon is consequently for 
 some time in sight before he comes 
 on the stage. 
 
 8 2. ηόνς, welcome, acceptable, with 
 good tidings. Infr. 510. ηόνπολις, 
 acceptable to the state. Eurip. Phoen. 
 783. σο\ pev γαρ ήόνς eh λόγονς άφί- 
 ^eTai. Ib. ehaaai, as One may con¬ 
 jecture, Matth. Gr. Gr. §. 545. 
 
 Ib. ov yap av. Supply otherwise. 
 Cf. infr. 318. This mode of speaking 
 occurs in Hesiod. Op. 43. ρηϊόίως 
 γάρ Kev καϊ eV’ ηματι εργάσσαιο. 
 
 83. πολνστ€φης, largely crowned, 
 (jEsch. Eum. 39. Soph.Trach. 178), 
 παγκάρπον όάφνης, (for construction 
 see..Matth. §.345.) In proof of this 
 custom of wearing a chaplet on the 
 head, when an oracular response had 
 been favourable, the Scholiast refers 
 to the Plutus of Aristophanes, v. 21. 
 Brunck adds the reverse case of 
 Theseus ap. Eur. Hippol. v. 813. τί 
 δήτα τοΊσό' aveareppai κάρα | nXeKToiai 
 φνλλοις, όνστνχης βeωpός ων ; and the 
 case of Fabius Pictor in Livy 
 (XXIII. II.), who, addressing the 
 senate, observes, se jussum ab templi 
 antistite, sicut coronatus laurea corona 
 et oraculum adiisset, et rem divinam 
 fecisset, ita coronatum navim ascen- 
 dere, nec ante deponere earn, quam 
 Romam pervenisset. 
 
 Ib. πάγκαρπος, dives frugum. Ell. 
 perfecundus. Erf. Find. Isth. IV. 
 70. πάγκαρπον eVt χθόνα. Pyth. IX, 
 102 . παγκάρπων φντων. 
 
 84. ^vμμeτpoς— ως κλναν, within 
 convenient distancefor hearing. Schoi.. 
 
 c 4 
 
24 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 aVaf, βμοι^ κηδβνμα, παΐ Μ.€νοίΚ€ω£, 
 τίν ημιν ηκ€ίς του Oeov φημην φβρωι/ ; 
 
 s/ . ΚΡΕΩΝ. 
 
 ίσθλην' Χέγω γαρ καί τα δύσφορ, el τύχοί 
 κατ δρθδν e^eXOovTa^ ττάντ αν evTvyfLV. 
 ΟΙ. eaTLV δ€ ττοΐον τοϋττο^ ; οντ€ γαρ θρασύς 
 οντ ονν ΊτροδΕίσα^ elpl τω γβ νυν Χόγω. 
 ΚΡ. el τώvδe χρρζ^ί^ ιτλησιαζόντων KXveiv, 
 
 85 
 
 V 
 
 90 
 
 έτοιμος ehrelv^ eiTe και aTeL\eLV eσω. 
 
 eV ττάντας ανδα. τώvδe γαρ irXeov φ^ρω 
 
 0 ν 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ονκ ίστι μακραν, αλλ’ iyyvf, και μίτρον 
 €χωρ του uKoveiv, δια το ττλησίον -ye- 
 ν€σθαι. 
 
 85. (μον κηΒενμα = (μος κη 8 €στης. 
 Brunck compares Eurip. Orest. 479. 
 ω χα. 7 ρ€ και συ, Μ^νίΚ^ως, κηδίνμ' ίμόν. 
 Phoen. 298. ω ^vyyeveia (i. e. ω ^νγ- 
 yeves) των ^Ayrjvopos τίκνων, Cf. infr. 
 
 1 28. 
 
 86. φημην, oracular response, infr. 
 158. αμβροτ€ φάμα, 475 · ^Χαμφί yap— 
 φάμα ΤίαρναοΌν. 7^3· φηρ^^*- μαντικαί. 
 Orph. h. Apoll. καθαρας φημας χρηο"- 
 μονς τ άναφαίνων. 
 
 87 · δύσφορα. ScHOL. δνσφημα. 
 Coupling this notice of the Schohast 
 with the preceding references, I un¬ 
 derstand, oracular responses, hard or 
 difficult in their enunciation. Ellendt 
 prefers a diiferent scholium, viz. τα 
 χαλ^πα (βιαττράττίΐν), things difficult to 
 be done. 
 
 88. κατ’ ορβον (cf. infr. 695) i^ep- 
 χ^σθαι, to come out rightly in the end. 
 infr. 1011 . ταρβων ye μη μοι Φοίβος 
 (ξίΧθτ) σαφής, κατ ορθον e^eXeeiv = 
 (ξορβονσθαι. WuND. 
 
 Ib. πάντα (utique) άν evTVxelv (se- 
 cundis (Equiparanda) . El. For exam¬ 
 ples of oblique infinitives formed 
 by av for potential optatives, see the 
 same lexicographer I. 121. 
 
 89. τοντΓος. The Scholiast un¬ 
 
 derstands this word in its com-' 
 mon acceptation ; Ellendt translates 
 oracle, prediction. In this latter 
 sense, cf. Trach. 822. τονπος το Beo- 
 ττρόπον — τάς παΧαιφάτον πρόνοιας. CEd. 
 Col. 630· ταυτα και τοιαντ €πη (CEdipi 
 prsedictiones) — τ€λων. Pindar Pyth. 
 IV. 15» Μί^δ^ιαί €πος, ΙΟΟ. Μτ/δίία? 
 €π€ων στίχ€ς. Tyrtseus fr. 8. Φοίβον 
 άκονσαντ€ς Ί1υθωνόθ€ν, οικάδ’ eveiKav ] 
 μαντύας re β(ον και TeXeevT enea. Thu- 
 cyd. II. 54. 
 
 90. τω ye vvvXoyep. “NequehonuS 
 animus mihi factus neque metus mihi 
 sermone tuo injectus est.” Wund. 
 
 Dativus h. 1 . causam indicat. Vid. 
 Matth. Gr. Gr. §. 403. c.” Erf. 
 Cf. Wund. ad CEd. Col. 735. See 
 also Here. F. 963. 
 
 91. Ta>vde πΧησιαζόντων, in the pre¬ 
 sence of these persons. Eurip. Phoen. 
 923. βovXeι παρόντος Βήτα σοι τούτον 
 φράσω ; 
 
 92. έτοιμος (ei/ii) ; then, with 
 Elmsley : eiVe και aTelxetv Ζσω χρηζ^^ς, 
 έτοιμός elμ^ κα\ τούτο δραν. Eurip. Ιοη 
 1120. π€πνσμ€ναι yap, el Baveiv ημάς 
 Xpeoiv, I ηδιον άν Bavo^ev, etd’ όράν 
 φάος, (supply with Heath : ηδιον άν 
 
 ^ω/ΐ6ΐ/.) 
 
 93 · πάντας ανδα. ScHOL. άξίως 
 του βασιΧικον ηΒους δημοσία φpάζeιv 
 KeXevet .... av^ei δε ό ποιητης το ώς 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 25 
 
 το 7 Γ€ρΘο 9 η καΙ τη9 €μη^ ψ^χν^ Trept. 
 
 ΚΡ. λβγοίμ αν οΐ ηκονσα του θ^ον πάρα. 95 
 
 άνωγβν ημά^ Φοΐβθ9 βμφανώ^ άναζ 
 μίαχτμα χώρας, ώς τ^ΘραμμίνοΡ χΘον\ 
 iv rfjS, iXavv€LV μη^ άνηκβστο^ τρ€φ6ίν. ^ 
 
 OL ποιώ καθαρμω^(' τίς 6 'Τρόπος της ζυμφοράς ; 
 
 ΚΡ. άνδρηλατονντας, η φ6νω φόνον πάλιν ^ ιοο 
 
 λύοντας, ώς τόδ’ αίμα χβιμάζον πόλιν. 
 
 ΟΙ. ποιου yap άνδρος τηνδβ μηνύει τυγιην ; 
 
 evvoiKou ήθος τον Olblirohos, οττως αν- 
 ξοίτο τα της τραγωδίας, ύστερον αίτιον 
 αυτόν των κακών άναφαινομένον. 
 
 94· belongs equally to τώνδβ 
 and ψνχης ; “ The concern which I 
 feel for t^se, is greater than that 
 which I feel for myself.’" 
 
 95. Xcyot/t* av dicam. infr. 282. 
 (Ed. Col. 507. Antig. 1108. Br. 
 
 97. μίασμα == μιάστορα χώρας. 
 WuND. Though hypallages of this 
 kind abound in Sophocles, we had 
 better at present, I think, adhere to 
 general meanings : the nature of the 
 μίασμα does not appear till v. 100, 
 where it first assumes the shape of 
 murder. Cf. Eur. Here. F. 1233. 
 1324. 
 
 97. 8. τ^θραμμίνον {horn, bred, 
 fostered') iv Tfjde χθονί. (Why all 
 these words should be emphatically 
 pronounced, the reader’s own good 
 taste will suggest to him.) 
 
 98. μηΒ’ άιτηκ. τρίφαν. W^UNDER : 
 ** nor foster, i. e. tolerate it any 
 longer, since it cannot he expiated.” 
 Perhaps : much less tolerate it, till it 
 becomes incurable. 
 
 99. (Edipus, instead of first ask¬ 
 ing as to the nature of this dreadful 
 guilt which has been committed 
 (We 6 T. T. |.) inquires as to the 
 mode by which the μίασμα is to be 
 purged. Creon replies in the order of 
 
 the questions as they are put to him. 
 
 100. άνδρηλατοΰντας {άνηρ, β’λαύ- 
 v€Lv) sc. “The god has commanded us 
 to purge or purify the city, by driving 
 tbe μιάστορβς into banishment, or 
 exacting the usual punishment of 
 murder, blood for blood. On the. 
 word άν8ρηλατ€Ϊν {to drive into ba¬ 
 nishment) cf. Ruhnken ad Tim. 
 p. 34. Blomf. Gloss. Sept. c. T. 634. 
 infr. 402. 
 
 Ib. φόνω φόνον Χνοντας. Eurip. 
 Or. 503. Kaneid’ 6 κείνον yevopevos 
 φόνω φόνον [ Χίισ^ί. 
 
 ΙΟΙ. τόδ’ αίμα, this murder (Eurip. 
 Pheen. 1517. τρισσα τάδ’ αίματα συγ- 
 yova) of which I spake. Infr. 113. 
 τωδβ φόνω, the murder which you just 
 mentioned. (Ed. Col, 898. προς rovabe 
 βωμούς, the altar of ivhich I just 
 spake. Cf. Ell. II. 271. “ Hanc 
 csedem dixit, quoniam prsecedentibus 
 verbis satis designavit μίασμα χώρας, 
 Tedpappivov χ 6 ον\ iv Tjjbe, et φόνω φό¬ 
 νον πάλιν Χνοντας. Dind. 
 
 Ib. χξιμάζαν, properly said of stir¬ 
 ring up a storm, here figuratively 
 infortumo agitare. Consult Lobeck 
 ad Phryn. p. 388. For instances of 
 construction, cf. infr. 159. (Ed. Col. 
 380. 1120. Antig. 260. 413. 
 
 102. ποιον — τνχην. i. e. ποιου yap 
 άνδρός όστιν -qbe η τνχη, ην μηνν€ΐ ; 
 WuND. 
 
26 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΚΡ· ην ημίι^, ωι^αζ, ΛαΓόί TToff ηγ^μων 
 
 γης rrjade, 7rp\v σβ ttjvS aTrevOvveLU ttoXlv, ^ 
 
 ΟΙ. e^oiS άκούων' ου γαρ elaeldoi/ γβ 105 
 
 ΚΡ. τούτον θανοντος νυν Ιπιστβλλβί σαφώς ^ 
 τους αυτοβντας χ^ψί τιμωρβιν τυνας, 
 
 ΟΙ. οΐ S €ΐσΙ ΤΓου γης ; ττου τόδ* βύρ^θησβταυ 
 ίχνος τταλαιάς δυστβκμαρτον αίτιας ; 
 
 ΚΡ. ev TpS εφασκβ γη. το Se ζητούμβνον ιιο 
 
 άλωτόν' ^κφβύγβι δβ τάμβλούμβνον. 
 
 ΟΙ. πότβρα δ’ iv οϊκοις, η V άγροΐς 6 Αάϊος, 
 η γης ίττ άλλης τωδβ συμ7Γί7ΓΤ€ί φόνω^ 
 
 105. ού yap elaeldov ye πω. (A 
 sensation through the theatre, the 
 auditors knowing what Qidipus as 
 vet did not know.) 
 
 106. “ Cohserent verba τούτον 6a- 
 vovTos Tovs avToevTas.” Dind. 
 
 Ib. emaTcWei. Sch. evTeWeTat, 
 commands. 
 
 107. avToevTas = avdevTas (avTos, 
 €VTea),assassms. Consult Valck.Diatr. 
 p. 189. Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 120. 
 
 lb. xeipX τιμωρ€'1ν. Infr. 140. καμ 
 αν τοιαυττ] χ€ΐρ\ τιμωpe'iv 6e\ot. 
 
 Ib. Tivas, whosoever they may be.) 
 Bernhardy (Wissensch. Syntax, p. 
 441) die etwaniyen Thater. Coll. 
 Plat. Soph. 237. c. Add CEd. Col. 
 288. όταν δ’ 6 κύριος παρϋ τις {who¬ 
 ever that sovereign of your's may he). 
 .iEsch. S. c. T. 599. Elmsley and 
 Dindorf prefer τινά. 
 
 108. πoυyης; Cf. infr. 367.413. 
 1309. 1442. &c. Ib. oi δ’ Herm. 
 Wund. Dind. ο?δ’ Ebner e MS. Pa- 
 lat. 
 
 109. dvaTtKpapToVf difficult to he 
 traced. For the shortening of the 
 middle syllable in thesis, see Herm. 
 ad Orph. Argon. 12. 
 
 110. TO ζητονμ€νον. Erfurdt com¬ 
 pares Chseremon Stob. i. 9. p. 236. 
 
 Heer. ovk eaTiv ovdev των iv άνθρώ- 
 ποις, ο τι | ούκ iv χρόνω ζητονσιν i^ev- 
 ρίσκ€ται. Brunck, Terent. Heaut. IV. 
 2. 8. Nihil tarn difficile ’st, quin 
 quaerendo investigari possiet. 
 
 III. iKipevyei. ScHOL. \av6avei. 
 
 112,13. What! so ignorant after 
 so many years of marriage with the 
 widow of Laius ? If authority of 
 the highest order could throw a 
 shield over so gross a violation of 
 dramatic probability, Sophocles 
 has received it at the hands of 
 Aristotle (A. P. XVIII. 14. XXV. 8. 
 ed Herm.) and W. Schlegel (Ueber 
 die dram. Kunst. T. 1.182). But 
 neither the ancient nor the modern 
 critic has perhaps gone to the real 
 ground of those violations, which 
 meet us more than once or twice in 
 the present drama. Where a play 
 was acted but once, as was the case 
 at Athens, the writer would know¬ 
 ingly hazard a trespass now and 
 then, and if detected, he perhaps 
 exclaimed, as Fielding or Dryden 
 is said to have done. “ υλοιντο ! 
 what, have the boobies found it 
 out }” But the comic poets, it will 
 be said, were at hand, ready to note 
 all such trespasses. True: but the 
 
( c 
 
 BOSTON COLLEGE ει«*..ηλϊ 
 CHESTNUT HILL, MAi^, 
 
 ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 KP. θβωρο^, ώς ίφασκβρ, 4κδημωι^^ ττάΧίν 
 
 TTpos OLKOv ούκ βθ* ΐκ€θ\ ώί άτΓβστάλτ}. 
 
 ΟΙ. ovS* αγγελόί τΐ 9 ονδβ σνμπράκτωρ οδού 
 
 κατ€Ϊδ\ δτον TLS ίκμαθων βγρησατ αν ; 1 
 
 ΚΡ. θνησκουσι yap, ττλην els· os· φόβω φνγων 
 ων €ώ€ ττΑην €v ovoev etocos· ψρασαι, 
 
 ΟΙ. το ποιον ; ev yap ττολλ’ αν i^evpoc μαθβΐν, 
 αρχήν βραχύαν el λάβοίμβν βλπίδο^. 
 
 ΚΡ. Χρστα9 βφασκβ συντνχόντας ού μια 
 
 ρίόμΎ) κτανβΐν vlv, αλλά συν πλ'ηθ€ί χ€ρών. 
 
 1^5 
 
 1 20 
 
 comic criticisms did not in general 
 come till twelve months after: the 
 dramatist mean time had made his 
 present impression, and perhaps se¬ 
 cured the prize of victory. 
 
 114. βίωρος, a person who travels 
 abroad for the purpose of consulting 
 an oracle, or transacting other reli¬ 
 gious business. CEd. Col. 413. avdpa>u 
 ββωρώρ AeX(f)ii0js αφ’ 4στίας. Pausan. 
 IX. 38. τάφοι 8e Mivvov και 'ϋσιόδον. 
 καταδβξασθαι de φασιν οντω τοΰ^Ησιόδον 
 τα οστά, ράσου καταΧαμβαροίισης Xot- 
 μωδονς κα\ άρθρωττονς και τα βοσκή¬ 
 ματα, άποστίΚλονσι θεωρούς τταρά top 
 β( 6 ρ. Euripides (Phcen.36) says that 
 ^Laius had gone to inquire of the 
 oracle respecting his exposed child. 
 A more likely object was, to ask 
 how the ravages of the Sphinx 
 might be stopped. 
 
 1 I 6. ovb' άγγίΚός Tit. ScHOL. olop, 
 ακόλουθοί. Trap’ ου tis clp μάθοι, και 
 χρησαιτο ττρος ζητησιρ. 
 
 Ib. συμπράκτωρ όδοΰ, companion in 
 his travels. 
 
 11 7. οτου Tis, &C. = οτω τΐί χρη~ 
 σάμζροί (ξίμαθορ άρ. Cf. Matth. 
 
 §. 557· 2. 1. ^ 
 
 120. TO τΓοΐοι/; Cf. CEd. Col. 17 *^ 5 · 
 Electr. 671. 
 
 Ib. f^evpoi. gl. άρτΧ του μηχαρηρ 
 δοίη. The verb (ΰρίσκίΐρ often im¬ 
 
 plies not so much to excogitate, as 
 to afford the means by which a 
 thing may be done. Erfurdt gives 
 as instances Lucian Parasit. VII. 
 126. cupois elirelp. Plutarch, prsec. 
 reipubl. gerendse, p. 798. f. ζητωρ δε 
 τταύσασθαι και deopepos μβταβολης και 
 ησυχίας, ευρε καταθίσθαι τηρ δυραμιρ. 
 
 12 2, 3· Wunder, with great good 
 sense, suggests that this story had 
 most probably been set on foot by 
 the fugitive slave, in order to ex¬ 
 cuse the cowardice of Laius and his 
 attendants in being worsted by a 
 single man. How much the com¬ 
 position of the fable is assisted 
 by not bringing too soon to light 
 the smgle person by whom this 
 wholesale deed of blood had been 
 accomplished, is very obvious. 
 
 Ib. ληστάί, robbers, brigands, not 
 unlike those perhaps whom Josephus 
 records with such power of language 
 in his Jewish Antiquities, and two of 
 whom are to be recognized in Matth. 
 XXVII. 38. 
 
 Ib. ov μια ρά)μη (a sensation 
 through the theatre, who know that 
 it was b}· a single person’s strength 
 that the murder had been com¬ 
 mitted.) 
 
 123. συρ ττληθίΐ χ(ρώρ, by means 
 of a numerous band, cf.infr. 124.657. 
 
28 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. ττώς ούν ο λ^στη^, βϊ τι μη ζύρ άργνρω 
 €7Γ/οασσ€τ €vu€vo , €9 TOO αν τόλμην φη ; 
 ΚΡ. δοκονντα ταυτ ην' Ααΐου S' 6Χωλότο9 
 ouSel 9 άρωγο9 ίν κακοΐς· βγίγνβτο, 
 
 ΟΙ. κακόν Se ττοΐον βμποδων^ τυραννίδας 
 ουτω ΤΓβοΌνσης, eipye τουτ i^eiSevat ; 
 
 ΚΡ. 77 τΓΟίκιλωδος ΈφΙγζ τά ττρος ττοσΐ σκοττβΐν 
 
 V Vi. 
 
 μεθώντας ημάς τάφανη ττροσηγβτο, 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ’ βζ νπαρχης αύθις αντ βγω φανώ, 
 βτταζίώς γάρ Φοΐβος, άζίως δβ συ 
 ττρο του θανόντος τηνδ' βθβσθ' βττιστροφην* 
 
 Ϊ25 
 
 130 
 
 I 24,5* (ττράσσίτο . . αν ^βη. This 
 idiom having been largely explained 
 by me in other publications, two or 
 three references to examples in 
 Sophocles will here suffice. Infr. 43 2. 
 (Ed. Col. 271. 951. Antig. 906. 
 
 Ib. ξύν άργνρω, by means of money, 
 by a bribe. 
 
 125. eV^eVSe (ScHOL. from this 
 city.) Dobree compares Thucyd. V. 
 83. νπηρχ€ be τι αυτοΊς και άκ του 
 ’'Αργους avToOev πρασσόμ€νον. Cf. An¬ 
 tig. 1077· {CEdipus looks intently 
 at Creon as he utters this.) 
 
 126. δοκουντα ταυτ ην. “ Such 
 was suspicion’s comment.” Dale. 
 
 128, 9. τυραννίδας ουτω 7 Γ€σονσης, 
 a monarch having thus fallen. A 
 common mode with Sophocles of 
 putting things for persons. 
 
 130. ποικιλωδος, singing things 
 implicated and deceitful. The allu¬ 
 sion is to the enigmatical and ora¬ 
 cular terms in which the sphinx- 
 question was propounded. Cf. Stanl. 
 ad (Ed. Prom. 662. Valck. ad Phoen. 
 50. nos in Equit. v. 194. &c. 
 
 Ib. Σφίγξ. (Aisch. Sept. c. 7. 536 
 sq. 554 sq. 775 sq.) The reader is ill- 
 prepared, I fear, to see this “ winged 
 girl” converted into a volcanic moun¬ 
 
 tain, and to find GEdipus as absolute 
 and efficient in the world of science, 
 as on the throne of Thebes. How 
 far the language of Hesiod and 
 Sophocles justify us in taking this 
 view of the subject, will most pro¬ 
 bably be explained on a future occa¬ 
 sion (cf. infr. 1525.) : in the mean 
 time the reader is left to the poetry 
 of the tale, subject to such deduc¬ 
 tion as may be derived from the 
 following references—Grsevius ad 
 Hes. Theogon. 326. Apollodor. HI. 
 5. 8. Pausan. IX. 26. Plin. VHI. 30. 
 Diodor. HI. 35. IV. 69. Winckelm.^ 
 Not. 337. Schlegel Ueber drama- 
 tische Kunst und Litt. I. 1 79. 
 
 Ib. TCI προς ποσί. Pyth. HI. lo8. 
 TO nap ποδδς, prcEsentem conditionem. 
 Diss. Cf. Philoct. 838. 
 
 131. τάφανη, things unknown, diffi^ 
 cult of investigation. Elmsley com¬ 
 pares Rhes. 482. 
 
 132. άξ νπαρχης [as it ivas ori¬ 
 ginally )— φανώ, 1 will drag into light. 
 (A sensation in the theatre, as CEdi¬ 
 pus pronounces this in a determined 
 tone.) 
 
 134. προ τον θανόντος. Gloss in A, 
 vnep, in behalf of, Cf. sup. 10. (Ed, 
 Col. 811. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 29 
 
 ωστ ΙνΒίκω? οψβσθβ κάμΙ σύμμαχον 
 Ύν Τίμωρονντα τω θβω θ\ϊαμα^ V 
 ντΓβρ γαρ ονχι των άπωτβρω φιλων^ 
 άλλ* αύτο9 αυτόν, τουτ άποσκ^δώ μύσος. 
 
 οστις yap ήν €Κ€Ϊνον δ κτανων τάχ αν 
 καμ αν τοιαντρ χ^φΐ τιμωρβΐν θβλοί. 
 κβίνω ττροσαρκων ούν Ιμαντον ώφβλώ, 
 άλλ’ ώί τάχιστα, τταΐδβ^, νμ€Ϊ9 μ€ν βάθρων 
 ιστασΘβ, τούσδ* άραντ€9 Ικτηρα^ κλάδους* 
 
 135 
 
 140 
 
 Tb. (θίσβ" επιστροφήν = επεστρί- 
 φεσθε. So infr. 144^· — 
 
 ον θεΧεις τάφον θοΰ = θάπτε. CEd. 
 Col. 466. θον καθαρμόν των 8 ε δαιμό¬ 
 νων = κάθαιρε τάσδε δαίμονας. 54^· 
 εθον φόνον πατρός. ΙΙ39· 
 
 'λόγων εθον. Cf. Ell. in ν. τιθεναι. 
 
 136. τίμωρονντα. ScHOL. προσβο- 
 ηθουντα. 
 
 137 · φί^^ν = φίλον. For similar 
 instances, cf. infr. 366. 487. 495. 
 1093.1176.1184.1246.1250.1495. 
 
 138. avTOS (νπερ) αντον, SC. εμαν- 
 τον. Matth. §.489. 
 
 Ib. άποσκεδω, Attic future for 
 άποσκεδάσω. CEd. Col. 620. διασκε- 
 δώσιν. jdiseh.Prom. 25. σκεδα. Arist. 
 Vesp. 229. διασκεδώ. Cf. Schneider 
 de dialect. Trag. p. 13. Ib. μνσος. 
 Cf. Here. F. 1155. 1219. 
 
 139. τάχ av, perhaps, easily, readily. 
 This and other constructions will be 
 more minutely examined in future 
 plays. 
 
 I 40. κάμ', as also κείνω and εμαντόν 
 in the following verse, are to be 
 pronounced with a strong emphasis. 
 Emphatic pronouns abound so much 
 throughout the writings of Sopho¬ 
 cles, and give them so much force 
 and beauty, that were it not for a 
 wish to avoid singularity, a text, 
 marking them by a distinct cha¬ 
 racter, would I think long before 
 this have been furnished. 
 
 142. πα 7 δες. Under this term is to 
 be considered the whole band of sup¬ 
 plicants, priests inclusive; but the 
 paternal heart of CEdipus restricts 
 his language as it were to the 
 younger and more interesting por¬ 
 tion of the band. 
 
 Ib. βάθρων, the steps of the altar, 
 where the suppliants were sitting. 
 For some excellent remarks as to 
 whether the genitive is governed by 
 ΐστασθε or άραντες, see Wunder in 
 loc. c. and GEd. Col. 571. Cf. Here. 
 F. 715. Tro. 16. 
 
 143. ΐστασθε— άνΙστασθε. ScHOL, 
 Cf. Philoctet. 893. αλλ’ Γστω τε καν- 
 
 τός άντεχον. 
 
 Ib. άραντες, having taken up. Had 
 the supplicatory branches then been 
 deposited on the ground, on the 
 steps of the altar, or on the altar 
 itself? The general language of 
 antiquity is in favour of the latter, 
 ^sch. Suppl. 475. κλάδονς γε tovtovs 
 alyf/ εν άγκάλαις λαβών, | βωμονς επ 
 (ίλλονς δαιμόνων εγχωρίων | θε'ς. Eurip. 
 Heracl. 124. Ικεται κάθηνται παίδες οΐ 8 * 
 'Ηρακλεονς, j βωμόν καταστεφαντες. 
 Andoc. de Mysteriis 15, ΐτ· άναστας 
 Καλλίας ό 'ίππονίκον την σκενην εχων 
 λεγει ότι ικετηρία κεΐται επί τον βωμόν. 
 For the violet chaplets placed on the 
 altars of the gods on a more festive 
 occasion, see Dissen’s Pindar, p. 617· 
 
 Ib. ίκτηρας κλάδονς. Aisch. Suppl. 
 
30 
 
 IE. 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 r , 
 
 άλλο? ^6 Καδμοο λαοζ^ ώδ' άθροίζβτω, 
 ώ? παί' €μοΰ δράσοντο9· η γαρ βντνχβΐί 
 
 κ « 
 
 avif τω θβω φανούμ€Θ\ η π€πτωκοτ€9. 
 ώ 7Γαί(δ€?, Ιστώμβσθα' τώνδβ γαρ γαριν 
 
 ' 5^ θ' Λ» J 5- /-ν \ 
 
 καί ό€υρ €ρημ€ν ων οό βξαγγΕΛΑβταί, 
 Φοΐβθ9 δ* 6 ττύμφας^ τάσδ€ μαντείαν αμα 
 σωτηρ ff Ikolto koll νόσου τταυστηρίο^· 
 
 J45 
 
 150 
 
 21 . (Tvp τοίσδ’ ίκβτων €γχ€ψι 8 ίοις | 
 €ρωστ€πτοίσι κΚάδοισιν. 147* 
 λνξ^νώτατον | Ζηνα των κΐκμηκότων | 
 ίξόμ(σθα συν κλάδοί?. 237* ^λάδο/ γε 
 μ€ν 8 η, κατά νόμους άφικτόρων, | κ^ΐνται 
 τταρ νμιν προς θ^οίς αγωνίοις. 328. τι 
 φης ίκνά,σθαι των 8 ' άγωνίων θεών, | 
 Χ^νκοστίφ^Ις Αχούσα vfobpenrovs κ\ά- 
 8 ονς; 500· κλάδους ph αντοΰ λ^Γπε, 
 σημ^ίον πόνου. Cf. ./Esch. Eumen. 
 43· Eurip. Suppl. 113. Heracl. 5 18. 
 
 144. άλλος δό. As the monarchs 
 of the ancient tragic stage never 
 appeared without a suitable train of 
 attendants, it is perhaps to one of 
 them that this is addressed. 
 
 Ib. Κάδμου λαόν (Eurip. Phoen. 124· 
 1254. 1481. Suppl. 339. 674. 754). 
 The poet is here preparing the way 
 for the entrance of his choral troop. 
 That this did not consist, as some 
 have imagined, of the sacerdotal 
 portion of the suppliants on the 
 stage, might be pretty clearly proved, 
 were other arguments w’anting, from 
 a corresponding passage in the An¬ 
 tigone (156-164). Though uncir¬ 
 cumscribed in political power, the 
 Theban monarchs appear from that 
 passage to have consulted the senior 
 and more dignified members of the 
 state on arduous occasions, con¬ 
 voking them by a solemn sum¬ 
 mons. 
 
 Ib. άθροιζότω. On the initiatory 
 breathing of this word, see Schneider 
 de Dial. p. 18. 
 
 145. ώί πίΐν (μου δράσοντος. On 
 
 those various modes of speech, where 
 παν implies attempting and investi¬ 
 gating to the last degree, consult 
 Heindorf ad Plat. Pheedr. p. 249. 
 Dissen, Expl. Find. p. 507. Kuster 
 ad Ar. Equ. 753. Valck. Diatr. p. 
 233. Ellendt. in voc. πάς. 
 
 146. συν τω θ€ω. (A wide dif¬ 
 ference of feeling between the spec¬ 
 tators and CEdipus as he pronounces 
 these words with deep reverence; 
 they applying the word π(πτωκ 6 τ(ς 
 to the ensuing investigation, he, no 
 doubt, the word (ντυχ( 1 ς.) For this 
 and cognate expressions in the deeply 
 pious Pindar, cf. Nem. VIII. 28. 
 Isthm. I. 6. IV. 2. 7. Olymp. X. 125, 
 &c. Diss. Comment, p. 11 2.563. 
 
 148. ων οδ’ (ξαγγ(λλ(ται, quce ille 
 (CEdipus sc.) ultro et quasi de suo 
 protulit. El. Elmsley compares 
 Eur. Heracl. 532. 1001605. Soph. 
 Aj.1376. 
 
 149. μαντεία, prophetic response. 
 Trach. 238. ευκταία φαίνων, ή Vo 
 μαντείας τινός ; 
 
 150. νόσος. As implying plague 
 or pestilence, this word again occurs 
 infr. 217, 303. So Thucyd. II. 47. 
 κα\ όντων αυτών (Lacediemonii sc.) ου 
 πολλάς πω ημέρας iv τη 'Αττική η νόσος 
 πρώτον ήρξατο Ύεν^σθαι τοις 'Αθηναίοις. 
 In the sacred writings, this scourge of 
 the East appears as “ the pestilence 
 which walketh in darkness, and the 
 sickness Avhich destroyeth at noon¬ 
 day.” 
 
 Ib. παυστηριος z=. παυστηρ, “Nam 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 31 
 
 ΧΟΡΟΣ. 
 
 ώ Alos^ άδυεπβς' φάτι, r/s* ττοτβ τάς ττολνχρνσου (ττρ. ά. 
 
 σωτήριος, Χυτηριος, θεΧκτηριος, alia, 
 poetae cum genitivo rei servatse, 
 liberatae, pulsae conjungunt.” El. 
 
 151. The Chorus, consisting of 
 the principal men of Thebes, here 
 enter the orchestra, and chaunt their 
 entrance-song. Anxious inquiries 
 respecting the oracular response 
 which they know to have arrived 
 from Delphi, though its contents are 
 yet a secret to them, appeals to 
 certain divinities (of whom more 
 hereafter), touching pictures of the 
 scourge under which the city is suf¬ 
 fering, a prayer that the god in 
 whom this pestilence is personified 
 may he driven from the country, or 
 be crushed under the thunderbolts 
 of Zeus, together with a fresh appeal 
 ^ to protecting or cathartic deities, 
 form the subject of this noble but 
 somewhat difficult ode. 
 
 Ib. ω Αιος advenh φάτι. In ex¬ 
 plaining these words, it will be more 
 convenient to reverse the order in 
 which they occur, φάτις, an ora¬ 
 cular response. Cf. infr. 310. 323. 
 1440. yEsch. Ag. 1103. από δε θ€σ- 
 φάτων τις άγαθα φάτις | βροτοίς στελ- 
 λεται. More frequent in Euripides, 
 Phcen. 23. γνούς τάμπλάκημα, του Oeov 
 τε την φάτιν. Suppl. 844· 'η'ίκράν Φοί¬ 
 βον φάτιν. 
 
 Ib. άδυεπε?. As the Chorus did 
 not yet know the nature of the 
 response come from the Delphic 
 shrine, this epithet perhaps refers 
 
 to the outward form, in which those 
 responses were usually clothed, viz. 
 the hexameter verse (Pausan. Phoc. 
 c. 5.) into which, or its cognate forms, 
 the choral strain seems by a sort of 
 sympathy to flow. Horn. h. eh 
 '2€\ηνην : Μονσαι, [ ^δυεπε?? κονραι 
 Κροι/ιδεω Αιος, ιστορεί ωδ^ί. Hes. 
 Theog. 965* 1 02 1 . τ^δυεπειαι | Μοίσαι 
 Όλνρπιάδεί, κονραι Διόί αίγιόχοιο. 
 For Pindaric use of the word, see 
 01. X. 113. Nem. I. 4. VII. 30. 
 For some grammatical niceties con¬ 
 nected with the word, cf. Herm. and 
 Ellendt, and Ebner in Sem. Phil, 
 p. 72. ά^υeπης WuND. 
 
 Ib. Διο'ί. But why is this φάτις, 
 though confessedly coming from the 
 shrine of Delphi, ascribed to Zeus, 
 and even subsequently (v. 187.) 
 termed his “ golden daughter” ? It 
 must be remembered that in all pro¬ 
 phetic intercourse with mankind, 
 Apollo acted but a delegated part, 
 the primal agency lying with his 
 father, the king of heaven. It is 
 the latter who sends the omen-bird 
 and other signals by which Phoebus 
 and other Igods become possessed of 
 mantic power (H. h. Merc. 213. h. 
 Cer. 46.); those signals being to the 
 right if propitious (II. II. 353), to the 
 left, if otherwise. (Od. XX. 242.) 
 Hence the first declaration of the 
 Homeric Apollo (h. Apoll. 131.)— 
 after praying for a haiq) and crooked 
 bow—is to the effect, that in a pro- 
 
 • Sickler considering tlie ancient gods themselves as little more than cosmic powers, 
 oracularly declaring the Λνϋΐ of Zeus, and the world itself {κόσμος) to be little more than a 
 
 Dpi? (Kesem) or prediction of the same god, observes, ‘^Sic sind nur Orakel oder Ver- 
 kiinder seines Willens und seiner Macht in seiner Weitordnung. Sie sind nur Theoi, 
 Semit. Theuteh, d. i. Kosmische Kriifte, die seine Macht verklinden. Vergl. Herod. II .6. 
 52. denii das All, Kosmos, ist nur ein Kesem, d. i. ein Orakel oder eine Vcrkundigimg 
 Gottes (Cadmus, p. 19.).” Looking to the boundless universe, and to the small space 
 which we occupy in it, there may be more in all this than our limited faculties are at 
 present capable of fathoming. 
 
32 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΥΙυθωνος άγλαας ίβας 
 
 Οηβα^ ; βκτβταμαι φοββραι^ φρει/α, SeifxaTL ττάΧΧων, 
 ΙηΪ€ ΑάΧιβ ΥΙαίάρ, 
 
 phetical capacity he will declare to 
 men the true counsels of Zeus, (χρησω 
 τ’ άνθρωπυισι Αώς νημ€ρτ€α βουλήν.) 
 This will suffice to explain the ad¬ 
 missions made by the god himself, 
 
 or bv others for him, in Greek dra- 
 
 ·· _ *' 
 
 matic poetry. .dEsch. Eumen. ^86. 
 ούττώποτ βίπον μαντικόΐσιν iv θρόνοις, | 
 ούκ av8p6s, ου -γυναικος, ού π6λ€ως 
 Trepi, I δ μη ’xeXcuore Zeus 'Ολυμπίων 
 πατήρ, Ib. 19. Aios προφήτης δ’ €στ\ 
 Αθλιας πατρός. GEd. C 0 I, 623. et Zeus 
 eVi Zeus, χω Αώς Φοίβος (ταφης. 793· 
 (ταφ€στ€ρων κλυω Φοίβου τε | καυτόν 
 Ζηνος^ ος κείνου πατήρ. Hence Tire- 
 sias, who in the present drama is 
 put nearly on a level with Phoebus 
 himself for prophetic powers (infr. 
 284, 5), appears in the Pindaric 
 writings, as the Αώς νφίστου προ- 
 φατης €^οχος, ορθόμαντις Teφeσ/αs. 
 
 (Nem. I. 9Ο') That Apollo also, in 
 those writings, derives his powers 
 solely fromZeus, see Olymp. VIII. 54 
 sq. Cf. infr, 498. See also the noble 
 ode (infr. 897 sq.) where the three 
 great prophetic seats, Delphi, Abse, 
 and Olympia, are brought together. 
 As this subject will again come under 
 discussion in the poet’s “Trachiniae,” 
 further remarks may here be spared. 
 
 Ib. πολύχρυσον. The epithet is 
 equally correct, whether applied to 
 the costly presents made to the 
 Delphic shrine by grateful votaries, 
 or to the rich treasuries deposited 
 there by nations or individuals for 
 purposes of security. The reader 
 who wishes to make himself mas¬ 
 ter of this subject from ancient 
 authorities, may consult Pausanias. 
 (Phocid. cc. 9-32.): in a more 
 modem form, it will be found in 
 \"an Dale de Oraculis, in the notes 
 
 appended to Thudichum’s German 
 translation of the CEdipus, and-an 
 elegant little Italian work, “ L’Ora- 
 colo di Delfo,” by Count Mengotti. 
 See more particularly pp. τ y. 45, 46. 
 93. For Pindaric applications of 
 the word, whether in a literal or 
 metaphorical sense, see Pyth. IV. 
 95.VI. 8. Fragm. Select. (Diss. edit.) 
 136. 139. As an epithet of towns 
 and persons, it occurs both in Homer 
 and Hesiod. 
 
 132. Ιίνθων, ωνος, another form 
 for Ώνθω, οΰς. (infr. 603.) II. II. 519. 
 Τΐυθωνά re πβτρψσσαν. Η. h. Merc. 
 178. elpt yap et? Πυ^ώυα. Pindar. 
 Pyth. XI. 13· οφρα Oepiv tepav Πυθώνά 
 re και ορθο^ίκαν | yas ομφαλον κίλαΒη- 
 
 σετ’. See also Olymp. II. 88. VI. 6i. 
 XII. 26. Pyth. IV. 5. VII. r i. Nem. 
 IX. ir.X. 47, Pyth. XII. TO. Sup¬ 
 ply the prep. από. Schol. 
 
 153. ίκτίταμαι. perfect, pass, of 
 e’KreiVeiu. The primary meaning of 
 this word as applied to stretching 
 out the dead, leads easily to the 
 metonymic sense in which it is here 
 employed. My trembling mind is on 
 the stretch. Solger, who observes most 
 of the metrical forms of the original, 
 translates not amiss ;—Von Zagen 
 erstarr’ ich im Innersten, schrechen- 
 geschiittelt. See further Herm. 
 and Ell. and Bernhardy’s Wis- 
 sensch. Syntax, p. 428. 
 
 Ib. φοβίραν Schol. π^ρίφοβον. 
 
 Ib. πάλλων. Erfurdt refers for 
 similar passive significations to Eu- 
 rip. Electr. 435.477. Pheeniss. 1133. 
 {κρυτΓΓίΐν), Soph. Aj. 627. (κζύθίΐν). 
 See also Porson ad Eur. Or. 316. 
 
 154· Δόλιε Παιόυ. These 
 
 words have occasioned no small 
 trouble to the commentators on So- 
 
.(y 
 
 
 OIAinOTglJDfp4(1§^^ 
 a/x0t σοί αζ6μ^νθ9<) τί μοί η veov, 
 
 Q Ο 
 
 όο 
 
 Τ 
 
 155 
 
 phocles. Our own view of the sub¬ 
 ject will be assisted by taking the 
 words, as on a former occasion, in 
 their reverse order. 
 
 Ib. Παιάν. It has been seen in a 
 former note that the pcean, as a 
 hymn, was a grave and solemn strain 
 addressed to Apollo and Artemis 
 as saving and healing powers. We 
 do not therefore 1 think go wrong, 
 when, as a person, we translate gene¬ 
 rally— healer of ills. So Orph. h. 34. 
 %\θ€, μάκαρ Ilaiav ravpoKTOve, Φοϊβξ 
 Ανκωρζΰ. In h. 8. Helios, the sun- 
 god, is addressed as φ^ρίσβι^, κάρ- 
 TTipe, Haiav. Nor was this title ap¬ 
 parently confined to Apollo and 
 Artemis. Pausanias, speaking of 
 an altar in the once Boeotian 
 Oropus (I. 34. 3), mentions an 
 Athene Pseonia, as well as an 
 Apollo Paeon, (’Απόλλωνος Παιωζ/ο?, 
 ...και * Αθήνας ΤΙαιωνίας,) and with 
 whom the Theban Athene claimed 
 close sisterhood, we shall presently 
 have to discuss, (infr. 160). It may 
 be added that Creuzer (Symb. II. 
 276.) speaking of the Carthaginian 
 Esmun or Asklepios, observes, ‘here, 
 as among the Phoenicians, he was 
 probably termed the health-god 
 Pceon, and healing powers ascribed 
 to him.’ (Metre: dactylic with 
 anacrusis.) 
 
 Ib. Δάλί6 (cf. Aj. 704.) at Delos 
 born. The force of this word will 
 be better understood, when the epi¬ 
 thet Lycius, as applied to Apollo, 
 and the close connexion between 
 Lycia and Delos, as seats of sun- 
 worship, come to be explained, (infr. 
 203.) For general references to 
 this island in conjunction with 
 Apollo, the reader may consult the 
 Homeric h. to Apollo. Od. VI. 162. 
 
 Herodot. I. 64. Thucyd. HI. 104. 
 Callimach. in Delon. Dissen’s Com¬ 
 ment. in Pind. pp. 219, 524, 5. 
 
 Ib. Ιηΰ. I have had occasion in 
 another work to remark, how often 
 the Greeks and other eastern na¬ 
 tions expressed their feelings by 
 exclamations; the same exclama¬ 
 tion being often expressive of 
 opposite feelings (cf. infr. 174.) 
 according to the tone of voice 
 thrown into it. Had the Pseanic 
 and Dithyrambic hymns of anti¬ 
 quity reached us, we should per¬ 
 haps have found the exclamation of 
 Ιη, Ιη, as much prevailing in the for¬ 
 mer, as cvol and evav in the latter 
 (cf. infr. 211.) Hence the Scholiast, 
 or whoever it is that Wunder quotes, 
 for he gives no name: iXeyero κα\ 6 
 * Απόλλων Ιηίος, ως υπο τοιοντον μίλονς 
 υμνούμενος, ώσπερ ενϊος ό Αιόννσος’ 
 κα\ επ\ τον παιάνος το αντο τούτο συμ¬ 
 βαίνει. cf. infr. 1096. Ιηϊε Φοίβε. 
 (Η. h. Apoll. 120. ή'ϊε Φοίβε, ηηι. 
 Ιηπαιηονι. ^ΟΟ. Ιηπαιηον άείόειν.)^Ει8θ\\. 
 Ag. 144· δε καλώ ΐίαιανα. (If 
 
 the above views are correct, it is 
 obvious that we can only translate, 
 either by naturalizing the original 
 word, and saying leeian, or else 
 using a long paraphrase, healer of 
 ills, at Delos born, and invoked in 
 our solemn songs by the exclamation 
 ιη, ιη.) 
 
 155. αζεσθαι, an Homeric word, 
 implying the reverential feeling 
 entertained for gods, for parents, 
 and for superiors in age. II. I. 21. 
 άζόμενοι. ..' Απόλλωνα. Od.XVII. 40 I. 
 μητ ουν μητερ εμην αζεν τόγε. II. XIV. 
 26,1. Hes. Th. 5 3 2· Goettl. in 
 loc.) 
 
 lb. άμφ'ι, propter. Cf Pind.Ol.VIH. 
 114. IX. 20. Pyth. VHI. 48 &c. 
 
 ΐϊΐ See further on the subject of an Apollo Paean, and an Athene Paeonia, Orph. h. 32. 
 Creuz. II. 391-8. 691. 737, 8, 9. 740, 1,2. and Thudichum’s notes to (Ed. T. I. 233. 
 
 D 
 
34 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΪ:,., . - 
 
 η ττΐριτίλλομ^νακ Spots πάλιν e^avvcreis xpios. 
 ehre μοι, ώ χρνσβα^ τβκνον Έλττ/δο?, αμβροτβ Φάμα. 
 
 Ib. η V€OV. ScHOL. η ν^ωστί. 
 
 156. 7Γ€ριΤ6ΧΚομ€ναις ωραΐ9 revolu¬ 
 tion of time. SckOL. τί μοι η νυν ή 
 μ(τα χρόνον avvaeis ; II. II. 551. TJ-fpi- 
 τίΚΧομίνων Ενιαυτών. Od. XI. 294· 1 ^· 
 Apoll. 35°* TrepireWopevov ereos. 
 Aristoph. Αν. 696. ncpLreXKopevais 
 ωραΐί. Find. Ol. IV. 4. ωραι...€λισ- 
 σόμ^ναι. Isthm. III. 29· Goettl. ad 
 Hes. Theog. 184. nepireXXopevos 
 iviavTos est annus vertens, nepinXopevos 
 vero annus inversus. 
 
 Ib. e^avvaeis. ScHOL. eWpa^eis. 
 
 158. Dale translates the verse, 
 (and in that translation is closely fol¬ 
 lowed by the German Solger,) 
 
 ‘ Say, child of Hope, imperishable 
 
 Fame!’ 
 
 What ideas the translators attached 
 to this it would be difficult to say ; 
 that if does not agree with the con¬ 
 text is pretty clear. The word 
 Έλπ'ίί in the Greek language signi¬ 
 fies as much fear as hopCy (cf. infr. 
 486. 771. and Goettling ad Hes. 
 Op. V. 94.) and that it is to be un¬ 
 derstood of this mixed feeling on the 
 present occasion, is past a doubt. 
 For what is Φάμα here ? Surely 
 nothing more than the φάης or 
 oracular reψonse, thrown by a bold 
 image (of which more presently) 
 into a personified form. In a pre¬ 
 ceding verse (151), the φάτις had 
 been questioned, as to what form she 
 came in,—favourable or unfavour¬ 
 able,— (the Chorus not having been 
 in the orchestra, while the conver¬ 
 sation took place between Creon and 
 QSdipus,) and no answer having been 
 returned, the poet after the usual 
 poetical fashion, repeats the question, 
 and still remaining without a reply, 
 he troubles himself no further with so 
 close a personage, but proceeds to 
 the business of his Ode. Our best 
 
 resource in this as in so many other 
 passages of Grecian literature where 
 we want equivalent terms, is to 
 translate by the words themselves, 
 and allow to Elpis and Pheme as 
 much of divinity as to the Athene 
 and Artemis, whom we shall pre¬ 
 sently have to discuss. As to the 
 epithet ‘ golden,’ it is little better 
 than a poetical expletive, being ap¬ 
 plied to all deities and every thing 
 connected with them. If these in¬ 
 terpretations are correct, the Scho¬ 
 liast and Dindorf are not quite so, 
 when they explain the text by 
 saying “ quia sperantes oracula con- 
 sulant.” It is mixed feelings of 
 hope and fear, which induce men to 
 pry into futurity, and hence the 
 affiliation in the present instance. 
 
 Ib. Φάμα. That Sophocles abounds 
 more in these abstract divinities 
 than either of his two great contem¬ 
 poraries, is very certain: whence 
 did he derive the practice ? I answer 
 without hesitation, from that great 
 Theban poet, to whom we so conti¬ 
 nually resort for illustrations of him. 
 What is Day in that poet ? the child 
 of Helios. ( 01 . II. 56). Who is He¬ 
 lios himself ? the father of sun-beams 
 ( 01 . VII. 129). Who is Aggelia 
 (news or a message) ? the daughter 
 of Hermes (Ol. VIII. 107.). Showers, 
 the children of Clouds ( 01 . X. 3.); 
 Songs, the daughters of the Muses 
 (Nem. IV. 5.); Insolence, the mother 
 of Satiety (Ol. XHI. 13); Pretext, 
 the daughter of Epimetheus (Pyth. 
 V. 36), and the first Down upon the 
 cheek, (Nem.V.io.)—but we should 
 never have done, if we went into 
 this last case of maternity, and many 
 others that might be added. But was 
 Pindar himself the originator of this 
 style of poetry, or did he follow in the 
 
ΟΙΔΤΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 35 
 
 π ρωτά σβ κ€κλ6μ6Ρ09, θνγατβρ Αώ^, άμβροτ ' Κβάνα^ άντ. ά. 
 
 wake of poetical predecessors ? Let 
 the reader compare 01 .XIII. 13. and 
 Herodot. T. IV. p. 996. (Gaisf. 
 ed.) and his inference perhaps will 
 be, that the Theban Pindar only 
 followed the Theban Bacis, who 
 perhaps wrote in this manner, just 
 as temple-priests and oracular 
 songsters had written for ages be¬ 
 fore him. 
 
 159. κ€κλυμ€νος. We must not 
 look too closely at a little lapse on 
 the part of so profound a gramma¬ 
 rian as Matthiae, who by referring 
 this participle to eVreVa/xat §. 312. 5 . 
 556. 2.) destroys all the force and 
 sublimity of the passage. The con¬ 
 struction (πρώτα σε Κ€κ\όμζνος—-τρισ-> 
 σοΙ άΧζξίμοροί προφάνητ€ μοί, i. e. pri- 
 mam te appellans—rogo vos ut —) 
 has been illustrated by Erfurdt from 
 a passage in Plato (6 Legg. 769,0.) 
 θνητός ών — σμικρόν τινα χρόνον αυτω 
 πόνος παραμζνύ πάμποΧνς. cf. Ebner 
 Sem. Phil. p. 73. 
 
 Ib. 'Αθήνα, (cf.^schyl. S. c. T. 12. 
 Eur. Phcen. 1387.) Before investi¬ 
 gating the various divinities, who 
 come under notice in the following 
 ode, one or two preliminary ob¬ 
 servations will not be found ir¬ 
 relevant. In all appeals of the 
 ancients for divine assistance, two 
 things seem necessary ; first that 
 the deities addressed should have 
 immediate reference to the pur¬ 
 pose for which they are invoked; 
 and secondly, that those deities are 
 as much as possible to be viewed 
 under local and not under general 
 attributes. Under what particular 
 circumstances, then, doesthe Theban, 
 for we are not dealing with the Attic 
 Athene, here come before us } The 
 Boeotian land is sufiering under the 
 most terrible of eastern scourges— 
 the atmosphere is loaded with poi¬ 
 
 sonous vapours—beneath a lurid sun 
 and a malignant moon plants droop, 
 the cattle perish, and children die 
 before they come to the birth. 
 What is wanted in return } Clearly 
 a purer air—bright solar beams in¬ 
 stead of the influences of fiery and 
 malignant planets—a moon, not hid 
 in sable clouds, but riding in peer¬ 
 less majesty, “ apparent queen of 
 heaven”—health-gods and health- 
 goddesses, and if among the latter 
 an Ilithya, repairing by new births 
 the many which have failed, so 
 much the better. Does the Boeotian 
 Athene answer to one or more of 
 these demands ? Let us examine. 
 When in a former note (v. 20), we 
 first made acquaintance with this god¬ 
 dess under her other name of Pallas, 
 we found her closely connected by the 
 common name of Tritonia with the 
 Pallas of Libva. What was the 
 character of the goddess there ? 
 The writer, who has given most 
 attention to these matters, having 
 from a variety of ingenious ob¬ 
 servations seen reason to conclude, 
 that that singular tribe of women 
 known to us by the name of Ama¬ 
 zons, were nothing more than a race 
 of women devoted to abstinence and 
 moon-worship (Creuz. Symb. II. 171 
 -6.), when he arrives at Libya in the 
 course of his profound researches, 
 finds the young females of that 
 country so closely resembling the 
 Amazons in their habits (II. 642 
 sq.), that could we be secure of 
 the author’s first premises, we 
 should at once feel justified in 
 asserting moon-worship to have 
 been the peculiar rite of the Libyan 
 (II. 261. 2.) and consequently of 
 the Boeotian Pallas. In the pre¬ 
 sent instance, however, we prefer 
 to consider her as a goddess of 
 D 2 
 
3G 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 γαιάοχόν τ άδβλφβαί' 
 
 light generally and of a purer 
 aether. And in this instance, from 
 whatever quarter we bring her, 
 whether we look to pure Boeotian 
 myths, or those which connect Attic 
 and Boeotian legends on the subject, 
 whether we turn to fable, allegory or 
 the fine arts, our difficulty, cramped 
 as we are for room, lies rather in 
 the embarrassment of wealth than of 
 poverty. Do we bring our Athene to 
 Thebes by the joint instrumentality of 
 Egypt and Phoenicia? She is then that 
 Neith, or parent of pure solar light, 
 on whose temple was written the 
 well-known inscription, “ that which 
 is and will be and has been, that am 
 I; my veil no one has uncovered, 
 and the fruit which I bore has be¬ 
 come the Sun.” (Ib. 672). On this 
 birth of a Sun by Athene to 
 Hephsestus, the ancient myths con¬ 
 tinually dilate ; and hence perhaps 
 the almost filial affection shewn to 
 her by Helios in the writings of the 
 Theban Pindar. ( 01 . VII.) Nay, the 
 legends went still further, repre¬ 
 senting her not only as the mother 
 of the sun, but as the mother of 
 the sun, moon and stars personified 
 (Symb. II. 672. 709) ; but with this 
 difference, that while they are 
 changeable and inconstant, she re¬ 
 mains ever one and the same. But 
 if thus substantially a goddess of 
 light, she was also the goddess of a 
 purer atmosphere. Without mul¬ 
 tiplying instances of this or of 
 our first position, except by re¬ 
 ferences (Creuz. II. 407. 644, 5. 
 671-5. 680. 712 sq. 722. 724 sq. 
 731-3· 743-4· 759· 761-3.788, 9.) 
 we confine ourselves to one, but that 
 one sufficients conclusive. In an- 
 
 a/ 
 
 cient philosophy, and not unfre- 
 (juently in ancient poetry, Zeus and 
 ./Ether are one and the same : what 
 
 160 
 
 then must that allegorical being, 
 who sprang from the head of Zeus, 
 have been in physical or symbolical 
 meaning, but aether in its purest 
 and most purifying state ? and who 
 consequently more fitted than she 
 for invocation, when 
 
 .wasteful forth 
 
 Walk’d the dire power of pestilential 
 disease. 
 
 . . . when the wide air was full of 
 fate; 
 
 And struck by turns, in solitary 
 pangs 
 
 Men feU unblest, untended, and un¬ 
 mark’d? Thomson. 
 
 We have said so much on Athene 
 as a goddess of light, that we cannot 
 enter on the Athene Paeonia, or god¬ 
 dess of health, except by the re¬ 
 ferences given in a former page 
 (33. foot-note). 
 
 160. γαιάοχον ScHOL. πο\ιονχορ. 
 In all other Greek poetry that I am 
 aware of, Hesiod (Theog. 15.), 
 Homer (passim), Pindar (Ol. 1 .40.), 
 .^schyl. (S. c. T. 299), &c. this 
 epithet is applied to that Neptune, 
 who 
 
 .besides the sway 
 
 Of every salt flood, and each ebbing 
 stream. 
 
 Took in by lot ’twixt high and nether 
 Jove 
 
 Imperial rule of all the sea-girt isles. 
 
 Why it is here transferred to 
 Artemis, and in a sense so widely 
 different from its usual one, the 
 commentators have never apparently 
 asked ; but like Ellendt and Wunder, 
 content themselves with translating 
 the Scholiast, and representing her as 
 the Tutatrix Thebarum: and why 
 so ? because, say they, “ the Ar¬ 
 temis Eucleia had a temple in the 
 
ΟΙ^ΐηΟΧΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ.. 
 
 37 
 
 ’Άρτβμιρ^ a KvdXoevT αγοράς· θρόνοι/ evKXea θάσσ^ι, 
 
 circular agora at Thebes.” This is 
 undoubtedly true; but as other 
 deities had temples in the same 
 place (Pans. XL 17, 2.), it does 
 not seem sufficiently to explain 
 why an Artemis should be empha¬ 
 tically styled the “ Tutatrix” of 
 Thebes. The fact itself we are 
 far from denying; on the con¬ 
 trary, we think nothing more pro¬ 
 bable from the interpretations which 
 Creuzer will presently enable us 
 to set upon the goddess,» than that 
 the Scholiast was substantially cor¬ 
 rect in asserting Artemis to be a 
 tutelary goddess of Thebes. Our pre¬ 
 sent difficulty, however, lies with the 
 epithet attached to her name, and 
 how to get out of that difficulty, we 
 know not, except by one way, and 
 that but an indifibrent one. That in 
 a religious system, if such it may be 
 called, where nothing systematic 
 prevailed, that in such a system re¬ 
 ligious myths should be continually 
 crossing, recrossing and inter¬ 
 changing with each other, till they 
 not only puzzle us, but must have 
 puzzled the ancients themselves, 
 seems a reasonable conclusion; is 
 it then unlikely, that the poet has 
 here applied to Artemis as a moon- 
 goddess (and that such she was will 
 presently appear) an epithet more 
 properly belonging to the moon in 
 her character of Hecate ^ ? That such 
 an epithet might belong to the latter 
 goddess in her own proper Phoe¬ 
 nician vocabulary, seems clear from 
 Sickler, who calls her from that 
 language much in a general sense, 
 what the present text of Sophocles 
 does in a contracted one, “ die grosse 
 
 Vereinte, die AUes umfasst" (p. 64). 
 But was Hecate herself held in 
 high repute at Thebes ? Of that 
 there cannot be a shadow of doubt, 
 if we look to the peculiarly high 
 and laudatory terms in which the 
 Hesiodean Theogony speaks of her 
 (410 sq.) ; for though Soetbeer, in 
 his recent attempt to restore the 
 Theogony to the state in which he 
 supposes it to have originally left its 
 writer’s hands, has expunged, I ob¬ 
 serve, this Hecatsean hymn from the 
 Theogony, there can be little doubt of 
 its being a true Hesiodean fragment, 
 even if the hand of some rifacci- 
 me?zio-artist, like Onomacritus, has 
 been busy with it. (cf. Goettl. Hes. 
 p. 41.) This epithet therefore seems 
 to me another instance in which 
 Sophocles uses a term, which would 
 have been better understood at 
 Thebes than at Athens, and by doing 
 which he fell into so much displea¬ 
 sure with his auditors. 
 
 Ib. αδβλφβάι/ (cf. CEd. Col. 534. 
 Ί056.) If my learned predecessor 
 Wunder dealt but briefly with the 
 preceding word, he has dealt more 
 briefly with the present, by passing 
 it over altogether. Did he then 
 imagine that common paternity from 
 Zeus would account for the intro¬ 
 duction of this word into an ode 
 so significant as the present } Surely 
 something more is meant. When 
 the consanguinity of Artemis is men¬ 
 tioned in ancient poetry, it is uni¬ 
 formly, I believe, in reference to her 
 brother Apollo; why then is an excep¬ 
 tion here made in favour of Athene } 
 Before that question is answered, 
 we must proceed to an examination 
 
 n It is observable that in Hesiod’s hymn to Hecate, she is joined with Poseidon as an 
 object of common prayer (441. ^ΰχονται δ' Έκάτρ καΐ ίρικτνττφ 'YLvvo(Tvyalcp\ another 
 epithet than yaiTjaxos being selected for the sea-god. See further on the subject of this 
 goildess in connexion with Artemis, Cr. II. 124,5, 7 · I 39 · ' 9 ^· P^rkh. Heb. Lex. 
 
 P· 347 · 
 
ss 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κα\ Φοίβον βκαβόλον, Ιω 
 
 of the word Artemis itself; but as 
 our pages are at present somewhat 
 crowded, and practical scholars may- 
 think they have had enough of moon¬ 
 shine already, that examination must 
 be deferred to a future period, cf. 
 infr. 207. 
 
 161. a kvkKocvt αγοράς θρόνον fv- 
 κΚία θάσσ€ΐ—ά evKXea θρόνον iv κν~ 
 κΚοίσσρ αγορά θάσσα. WuND. So 
 Philoct. 159· όράς τόνδ’ 
 
 αμψίθνρον | 7Γ€τρίνης κοίτης, (where 
 πέτρινης, which properly belongs to 
 οίκον, is joined to κοίτης.) Trach. 
 817. 
 
 Ib. κνκΧ 0 €ντα orbicular, so called 
 from the form of the agora, where 
 the Theban Artemis was worshipped. 
 Had this form any reference to the 
 moon in its fulness ? Such a suppo¬ 
 sition tends to favour the idea of a 
 predominance of moon-worship at 
 Thebes, a worship which for many 
 reasons we have seen was likely to 
 be predominant there. 
 
 Ib. αγοράς. It is observable that in 
 the Hesiodean hymn to Hecate, the 
 poet among her other qualities says, 
 eV r’- άγορη λαοίσι μ^ταπρίπ^ι ον κ 
 (θίΚησιν. Theogon. 43 ®· 
 
 Ib. θρόνον. Ellendt observes, that 
 this word, when signifying a seat, 
 is found in both numbers; as applied 
 to a royal throne, it is found only 
 in the plural. “ Illud : ^Aprepiv a 
 
 kvkX. άγ. θρόνον— €VK. θάσσ^ι, in- 
 sedit, velut cSpa et (δος de templis 
 creberrime leguntur.” Id. 
 
 Ib. evKXea. Pausan. Bceot. c. 17. 
 Πλησίον de ’Αρτίμιδος ναός eariv Eu- 
 κλβίας (i. e. Gloriosse. Schubart and 
 Walz.) That Sophocles in using this 
 epithet had the above goddess in his 
 eye, there can be little doubt. As 
 to the metre: Dissen, commenting 
 on Pind. Dithyr. p. 616. observes, 
 that evKXea often occurs in epic and 
 lyric poetry for evid^ea (“ significans 
 omnino prseclaram,”) ut Soph. CEd. 
 R. 161. See also Nem. VI. 76. 
 
 Ib. θρόνον θάσσα. Cf. Sup. 2. 
 
 162. Φοίβον. If Apollo is here in¬ 
 voked solely as a sun-god, which 
 the epithet following would rather 
 imply, then we are bound to leave 
 him in possession of all those glo¬ 
 rious adjuncts with which Athenian 
 imagination clothed him as such ; 
 but if he is additionallv invoked as 
 a healing god, as I think he is (sup. 
 154), we then seem entitled to step in 
 w’ith an Esmun-Asclepios, or health¬ 
 bringing sun, (Cr.II. 275, 6. 313. 
 391-2-4. 402. 736, 7.) deriving the 
 latter godfrom that land of Phoenicia, 
 to which we have been so conti¬ 
 nually looking for illustrations of 
 the present dramatic o divinities. 
 Whether this is done direct, or 
 whether landing our sun and health- 
 
 o Pausanias (Achaic. e. 23. 7.) after some reference to a τόμίνος and statues of Hygeia 
 and Asclepios at ^Egium, observes in his naive manner, “ At this temple I had a dispute 
 with a man of Sidon, who asserted that the Phoenicians were better instnicted in divinity 
 and other matters than the Greeks—adding as a proof that the Phoenicians make Ascle¬ 
 pios son of Apollo, but do not, like the Greeks, give him a mortal woman for a mother, and 
 why ? because Asclepios, said he, as the Phoenicians know, is nothing but that tempe¬ 
 rature of the air, which is conducive to health both in men and animals. With regard 
 to Apollo, who is also the sun, he is very properly termed the father of Asclepios, because 
 in directing his course according to the seasons, he imparts salubrity to the air. All this 
 I admitted to be correct, but asserted that the Greeks held this opinion not less than the 
 Phoenicians, and the proof Λvhich I gave was that in Titane, (which is a town of Sicyon,) 
 one and the same statue represents Asclepios and Hygeia. As to the sun’s course being 
 the cause of earthly health, that, I observed, even boys knew.” 
 

 ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ITPANNOE.i, ^ 
 
 τρισσ^άλΕ^ίμόροί ττροφάνητβ μοι, 
 
 €L TWTe Kca irporepas aVas* νπβρορι/υμβνα^ ttoXu 
 ηνύσατ €κτοπίαν φ?)^6γα ττηματο^, eXOere καΐ νυν, 
 ώ ττόποι, άνάριθμα γαρ φβρω <^τρ· 0· 167 
 
 ττηματα' νοσβΐ de μοί πρόττας στόλοι, ούδ" evL φρον- 
 
 39 
 
 1^5 
 
 
 ,/Ο 
 
 [,τ/δο? €γχο5^ 
 
 god previously with his seven 
 Cabiric brethren on the isle of 
 Samothrace (Cr. II. 312. 317. 350. 
 364), we then through the Demeter 
 Cabiria (Paus. Boeot. c. 25.) esta¬ 
 blish a constant intercourse and 
 chain of legends on solar and pla¬ 
 netary worship between the two 
 countries, (Cr. II. 20. 276. 285. 
 294· 329· 330· 347·) is imma¬ 
 terial. An Esmun-Asclepios once 
 in Thebes, we assert with renewed 
 force that the Ismenian Apollo of 
 that place (sup. 21.) was nothing 
 but the Esmunian sun-god, settled 
 it may be first in Samothrace, but 
 originally derived from Phoenicia. 
 For a probable derivation of the 
 word Φοίβος in that language, see 
 Sickler’s Cadmus (p. 33.) and on the 
 subject of Esmun generally see his 
 “ Hieroglyphen im Mythus der 
 j^sculapius.” 
 
 Ib. €κάβολον. Whatever ideas the 
 common people and later poets 
 might attach to this word and to its 
 cognate forms (Horn. h. Apollo 
 passim, Orph. h. 34.), Creuzer (II. 
 140-1.) and Boeckh (Explic. ad 
 Pind. Pyth. V. p. 293.) seem to be 
 correct in asserting that in the 
 earlier temple-hymns and philo¬ 
 sophic poetry, no other idea was 
 attached to them, but that of re¬ 
 ference to sun or moon-beams, and 
 the arrowy darts of light. 
 
 164. άΚβξίμοροι, warders off of ill. 
 Cf. Reisig. in Enarr. p. 181. Dissen 
 Comment, in Pind. p. 635. 
 
 165. rrpoTepas ατας, (i. e. the 
 Sphinx.) 
 
 Ib. νπίρορνυμίνας (cf. Zehlich in 
 Reisig’s Enarr. CEd. Col. p. 181.) 
 impending over. 
 
 Ib. πολβί. Kayser (Act. Sem. 
 p. 73. note), after admitting the pro¬ 
 priety of contracting vnep and oppv.. 
 μ€νας into one word, adds, “ sed 
 TToXft non ab illo verbo regi con- 
 tendo ; pendet ab ηννσατξ (κτοπίαν 
 φλόγα ττηματος.” 
 
 1 66. ηνύσατ ΐκτοπίαν. Syll. 
 ScHOL. ζΤΤθΐησατ€ ζκτζτοττισμύνον, του- 
 τύστι ζ^ζτοττίσατΐ, vnepopiov ^ποίησατβ. 
 
 Ib. φλόγα πηματος. Schol. nepi- 
 φραστίκως την πημονην την biairvpov. 
 a baleful fire i. e. a most violent evil. 
 SoLG. die Flamme der Noth. Thud. 
 die Glut des Verderbens. For con¬ 
 struction, cf. infr. 833. κηλΊδα συμ¬ 
 φοράς — a disgraceful calamity. 1313. 
 σκότον νίφος, dark cloud. So Trach. 
 1199. γόου δάκρυ. Phil. 1263. θόρυβος 
 βοής. Pind. Isthm. VI. 39. χάλαζαν 
 αίματος i. e. χαλαζά^ντα φόνον. 
 
 ι 6 η . ώ ποτΓοί. cf. Trach. 832. Whe¬ 
 ther the latter word is to be used as 
 an adverb of exclamation, or trans¬ 
 lated with Lycophron (943) gods, 
 see Musgrave, Passow and Ellendt 
 in voc. 
 
 170. πρόπας στόλος, the whole 
 people, Pind. Pyth. VIII. 140. 
 όλ(υθύρω στόλω. (cf. Dissen Com¬ 
 ment. 299. 347- 379·) 
 
 Ib. evi φροντίδος 6γ;!^οί, (gl. ουδ 
 eVeari μηχανης, όπινοίας δύναμις.) I 
 understand generally : nor does 
 
 D 4 
 
40 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 'α 
 
 ( 
 
 ώ τΐ9 άλβζβται. οΰτ€ γαρ ίκγον 
 κΧυτας γΟονος ανζ^ται οντβ τόκοισιν 
 Ιηΐων καμάτων άνβχονσί γυναΐκβς' 
 άλλον δ’ άν άλλω ττροσίδοί^^ άπβρ βΰτττβρον ορνιν^ 
 
 
 κρβΐσσον άμαιμακβτου πνρο9 ορμ^νον 
 
 anxious reflexion (φροντίςν) furnish 
 any weapon, by which to ward off,” 
 &c. The expression seems to have 
 grown out of the poet’s Pindaric 
 reading, and the frequent meta¬ 
 phorical use of the word βίΚος (cf. 
 Dissen’s Comment, p. 20) by the 
 latter. For the metre of the verse, 
 compare Herm. and Wunder. Sol- 
 ger translates : Kein Speer cler Er- 
 flndung. Thudichum: Keine Wehr 
 eines Gedankens. 
 
 171. ake^erai. Tlie Tragedians, 
 says Ellendt, use άλ^ξομαι as a de¬ 
 ponent verb. “ Neque est cur dXe- 
 ξομαι futurum esse credamus.” Find. 
 01 . XIII. 9. aXe^eiu νβριν. 
 
 172. αϋξ€ται grow. Cf. Find. 01 . 
 Vn. Ill Fgmm. Sel. ap. Diss. p. 
 243. Comment, p.655. κΧντας as an 
 epithet belongs to poetical expletives; 
 like the word/iiir in our own poetic 
 vocabularv. Huschk ad Tibull. 2, 
 5, 91. compares generally Herodot. 
 III. 68. Aristoph. Pac. 1320. 
 iEschyl. Eum. 905. 
 
 I 73 ~ 4 · τόκοισιρ K. T. €. ScHOL. 
 ai re yvvaiKes των καμάτων ev Tois 
 TOKois ovK άνίχουσιν, τουτ^στιν, ου 7 re- 
 piyivovrai των πόνων. Herm. and 
 Jacobs ad Philostr. p. 277. prefer 
 “ are not liberated hij childbirth^ 
 i. e. remain barreUy cf. El. in voc. 
 άν€χ€ΐν. 
 
 Ib. Ιηΐων, (gl. θρηνητικών) καμάτων. 
 ScHOL. των μ€Τ fvx^s γ€νομίνων. If 
 
 the ίη, Ιη, of the pceanic hymn was a 
 joyous, or at all events a solemn in¬ 
 vocation, it is obvious that the ex¬ 
 clamation excited by pains of child¬ 
 birth, under any, but at all events, 
 under such circumstances as we are 
 at present contemplating, would be of 
 a very different description. Cf. Eurip. 
 adPhcen. 1050-1051. El. I3ii. 
 
 175. aXXov ^Χω i. q. aXXov in* 
 αΚΧω, alium super alium. cf. Jacobs 
 ad Anth. Pal. III. 277. Erfurdt 
 compares Eurip. Troad. 1323. αλλω 
 δ’ άΧΧον φρονδόν. See also Find. Ol. 
 X. 13. 
 
 Ib. anep cvnrcpov opvtv. Musgrave 
 compares Eurip. Hippol. 840. opvis 
 yap cos ns ex χ€ρων άφαντος ei | πηδημ* 
 es '^Αιδον κραιπνόν όρμησασά μοι. 
 
 176. κρ€ΐσσον άμαιμακότου πυράς. 
 The Scholiast offers two explana¬ 
 tions of this expression, i st, as a pro¬ 
 verbial expression, implying celerity 
 and intensity ; 2nd, as implying that 
 the dead bodies came in too great 
 numbers to be consumed by the 
 funeral pyres. The former inter¬ 
 pretation is adopted by Musgrave, 
 Wunder and most of the commen¬ 
 tators, but the latter seems the 
 more dignified and more consonant 
 with facts. Cf. Thucyd. II. 53. 
 Lucret. VI. 1276. sq. 
 
 Ib. άμαιμάκ€τος, frequently used as 
 an epithet of fire. Hes. Theog. 319. 
 cf. 363-6. metaph. Find. P. III. 57. 
 
 p The application of the words ψροντϊς and μΐριμνα in this sense was fully explained in 
 our “ Clouds.” It is observable that a similar sense attaches to these and cognate words 
 in the Sacred Writings. Matth. VI. 25 sq. Epist. ad Tit. III. 8. 
 
..j^^OIAinOTE ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 41 
 
 άκταν προ9 ίσττ^ρου Oeov' 
 
 177· «κτάι/. Find. Pyth. XI. 31 · 
 
 Άχίροντος άκταν παρ' (ϋσκιον. 
 
 175—7· reader wishes to 
 
 see the compressed description of 
 Sophocles expanded into a fuller one, 
 he will find it in Boccaccio, when 
 describing the plague of Florence; 
 the great prose-writer’s concluding 
 turn being not altogether unlike that 
 of the Attic poet. Oh quanti valorosi 
 uomini, quante beUe donne, quanti 
 leggiadri giovani...la mattina desi- 
 narono co’ loro parent! compagni ed 
 amici, che poi la sera vegnente ap- 
 presso nell’ altro mondo cenarono 
 con li loro passati! 
 
 Ib. The metre in the above 
 strophe requires little explanation, 
 lambics and Dactylics preceded by 
 anacrusis, or an lambic dipod. com¬ 
 plete or cat. are the prevalent ones. 
 In Wunder v. 170. comprises two 
 verses—an lambic dim. and an ana¬ 
 paestic verse. 
 
 178. ίσπ^ρου 6 eov. That by this 
 “ evening or western god,” was 
 meant the Infernal Pluto, there can 
 be no doubt; but whence so singu¬ 
 lar an expression ? Musgrave and 
 Wunder content themselves with 
 observing, that it is no where to be 
 found but in this passage of Sopho¬ 
 cles ; but how came it there ? I 
 know of no means of accounting for 
 it, but by referring to those sources 
 to which we have so frequently ap¬ 
 plied for explanations of this play, 
 and to which we must now again 
 betake ourselves. How far the 
 Mosaic accounts of the creation 
 were framed to meet Phoenician and 
 other adjoining philosophies,—how 
 
 far again those philosophies subse¬ 
 quently adapted themselves to the 
 biblical accounts, are questions now 
 beyond our reach ; but that many 
 strong points of resemblance are 
 found between the two (cf. infr. 
 661), none but the ignorant or pre¬ 
 judiced can venture to affirm. Let 
 us compare then the accounts given 
 in the Sacred Records with Phoe¬ 
 nician philosophy as explained by 
 Hesiod, and see what light the two 
 wiU throw upon the present ques¬ 
 tion. Omitting all previous matter 
 in the first, we come at once on that 
 term, which our own language, pow¬ 
 erful and significant as it is in many 
 respects, is obliged to express by the 
 word darkness; that word being in 
 the original, where every term is in 
 fact a philosophic idea or picture, 
 not the non-entity of darkness, but 
 the celestial fluid in a stagnate, in¬ 
 active state. (Parkhurst in voc. 
 1'©Γτ. ) Having called this inactive 
 into an active, and flowing prin¬ 
 ciple, (and which being found fit 
 for the purpose for which it was in¬ 
 tended, is called good,) the Deity 
 is represented as making a distinc¬ 
 tion between their natures, calling 
 the one Day and the other Night, 
 (each of these two latter words bear¬ 
 ing important significations in the 
 original language, which we do not 
 here stop to explain.) The sacred 
 historian then sums up his statement 
 in language, all of more or less im¬ 
 portance in the consideration of the 
 present chorus, “ there was evening 
 (Ereh), there was morning—one 
 day,” (q/om Hechad.) Let us now 
 
 q In what way the Hesiodean divinity 'Ημΐρα, and the corresponding Greek Avords 
 ^μαρ, άμαρ grew out of the Semitic words lom-or, Em-or, Hama-or (the terminating or 
 signifying light,) the reader may consult Sickler (p. 28). A more important question for 
 consideration is, hoAV far the Grecian myths of Hecate, who so frequently combines in 
 herself the opposite ideas of light and darkness, derived her name from the Hebrew 
 Hechad, which Ave find expressing the anion of evening and morning in the JMosaic 
 recoi'ds. 
 
42 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ώι/ ττόλίί άράρίΘμο9 ολλνταί’ Λντ. β. 
 
 νηΧ^α δβ γβνβθλα ττρο^ ττβδω θανατηφόρα Κ€Ϊταί άνοίκτως" 
 
 turn to Hesiodean divinities. Among 
 the earliest of these we find 
 an Erebos (not to be confounded 
 with the Homeric Erebos, which is 
 a placCy not a person, viz. the 
 passage-place to Hades), son of 
 Chaos, and to whom by his sister 
 Night Γ are born two children, 
 ^ther and Day. If agreeably to a 
 canon mentioned in a preceding 
 note (sup. 21.), we assign to the ter¬ 
 minating os of this Hesiodean di¬ 
 vinity its proper Semitic meaning, 
 we find implied in this Phoenician 
 compound Ereb-os, an Evening or 
 Western Power, or in other words, 
 precisely what Sophocles, in the 
 text, has expressed by the words 
 €σπ€ρος Qeos. But let US not 
 stop here. That with a setting sun 
 and growing shades of evening, 
 eastern nations should connect ideas 
 the most opposite to those which they 
 did with arisingone,—ideas of gloom 
 and melancholy,—is not surprising; 
 were there other circumstances 
 under which natives of Phoenicia— 
 traversing as they constantly did 
 the Mediterranean, i. e. to them the 
 Western Sea, and even passing be¬ 
 yond the pillars of Hercules—were 
 there circumstances under which 
 these ideas of gloom should occa¬ 
 sionally be converted into ideas 
 of consternation, and an abode for 
 a god of terror be found in the 
 West, as well as a god of terror 
 himself.? Though a certain event 
 on the borders of their own coun¬ 
 try might have fearfully told Phoe¬ 
 nician mariners what volcanic erup¬ 
 tion from below could do, when 
 
 commingling with fires rained from 
 above, yet that event occurred but 
 once, and then all was still. But 
 was that the case as they passed the 
 shores of Sicily and Italy and Spain ? 
 There those blazing fires, which the 
 Theban Pindar has so powerfully 
 described (Pyth. I. 40 sq.), and 
 sounds concomitant with them, 
 seemed to be as constant in opera¬ 
 tion as they were tremendous in 
 their efl'ects: is it surprising then 
 that West and Sun-set. Hell and a 
 Hell-god should gradually become 
 mingled thoughts with them, or that 
 Sophocles copying after Hesiod 
 should use language, which Hesiod, 
 far anterior to him in age, and 
 closely connected by his birth with 
 Phoenician modes and habits, was 
 perfectly familiar with ? That a 
 feeling of something terrible as con¬ 
 nected with the Ji'''est was not alto¬ 
 gether strange even to Attic ears, is 
 evident from the nature of their bann 
 pronounced on sacrilegious persons ; 
 it being customary on such occa¬ 
 sions for their priests and priestesses 
 to turn to the western quarter of 
 the heavens (προς ίσπ^ραν), and 
 shaking their purple or scarlet robes, 
 to devote the wretch to the in¬ 
 fernal gods. (Lysias c. Andoc. 
 107. 40). 
 
 179· TToXiy ανάριβμος, a countless 
 host. Lucret. VI. 1141. omnes | 
 inde catervatim morbo mortique da- 
 bantur. Wunder perhaps better: 
 “ Quibus (cadaveribus) abundans 
 urbs fuit. Col. Electr. 232. Trach. 
 
 256.” 
 
 180. ρηλζα yeveOXa ehildren oh~ 
 
 Γ The Biblical, Hesiodean, and oriental accounts generally, which make Night always 
 anterior to Day, may be still recognised in common parlance, when we speak of a se’n- 
 (i. e. seven) night, or fort- (i. e. fourteen) night, hence, cf. Levit. XXIII. 32. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 43 
 
 eV S* αλοχοί πολιαΐ τ βτη ματ^ρβ^ 
 άκταν παρα βωμων akXodev aXKaL 
 
 taining no pity. Schol. vyXea τα μη 
 τυχόντα iXeov^. Find. Fgmm. Sel. ap. 
 Diss. 65. νη\€€ΐ νόω. 
 
 Ib. θανατηφόρα (θαναταφόρα Ebner 
 
 ex La, Lb_, Lc. Find. Ol. VIIL 10.) 
 caudng death by contagion. (Cf. 
 Lucret. 1213 sq. Boccaccio p. 5.) 
 In most eastern languages, as Gese- 
 nius assures us (Heb. English Lex. 
 1. 143.11. 403.), death and pestilence 
 are synonymous terms. Out of this 
 peculiarity of language, and with a 
 propriety whicli will be evident be¬ 
 fore this note is concluded, proceed 
 one or two expressions in the in¬ 
 spired writer of the Apocalypse, 
 which rightly translated wiU give 
 more sense to the passages in which 
 they occur, than our authorized ver¬ 
 sion is calculated to convey. The 
 sacred writer being about to describe 
 the fortunes of the Christian church, 
 not only from the moment at which 
 he was writing, but through all 
 futurity, (and the variety and apt 
 choice of imagery with which this is 
 done is perfectly astonishing to those 
 who have compared historical events 
 with the predictions themselves,) 
 uses as instruments for describing 
 his first four periods of Roman his¬ 
 tory, those cherubic animals which 
 our version so inadequately renders 
 by the word “ beasts.” Fassing over 
 the first three periods as sufficiently 
 known to the reader by the learned 
 expositions of Bishop Newton or 
 others, we turn to the fourth cherubic 
 animal, who directs the prophetic 
 seer’s attention to the north, and to the 
 
 vision coming up from that quarter. 
 And with that vision who is not fa¬ 
 miliar—the pale horse—the emblem¬ 
 atic figure which sits upon it—and 
 hell, or rather the grave, following 
 to swallow up the corpses, which 
 accumulate around him in his course? 
 But how is this connected with our 
 present theme ? because to him that 
 sat on this horse, and to him that fol¬ 
 lowed, power was given over the 
 fourth part of the earth (in apoca¬ 
 lyptic language, the Roman empire) 
 to kill with sword and with hunger, 
 and with ^pestilence, and with the 
 beasts of the earth.” Whoever 
 knows any thing of the Northern 
 Maximin and his immediate suc¬ 
 cessors on the imperial throne, who¬ 
 ever has read the various calamities 
 under which the Roman empire suf¬ 
 fered at that period, and not least 
 from a pestilence, which pervaded 
 all her provinces, and for fifteen 
 years nearly exhausted them, will 
 at once see the necessity of this 
 translation: its propriety on the 
 part of the Sacred Writer himself 
 will be manifest from the recollec¬ 
 tion, that St. John is almost exclu¬ 
 sively addressing himself to Asiatic 
 churches, to whom this peculiarity 
 of language was perfectly familiar. 
 
 181. eV. Cf. Find. 01. XIII. 
 30-1. Hes. Scut. Here. 156. 161. 
 &c. 
 
 lb. eVi, moreover. Cf. Hes. op. 
 427. 493. (Goettl. Ed.) 
 
 182. άκταν irapa βώμιον. To ac¬ 
 cuse SO profound a scholar as 
 
 s θάνατοί. By adopting the primary, instead of the secondary sense, our version not 
 only injures the meaning, but vitiates the order in which these four scourges of the 
 Almighty almost necessarily folkuv. So again, when the mystic Babylon falls, what 
 are the plagues that are to come upon herein one day?” Surely not “ death,” but 
 “ pestilence, mourning and famine” (Apoc. X. VIII. 8): the word θάνατοε being again to 
 be taken in its secondary and not in its primary meaning. 
 
'44 
 
 ΣΟΦΌΚΑΕΟΤΣ 
 
 λυγρών πόι/ωι^ Ικτηρβ^ 67ηστ€νάχουσίΐ/. 
 
 Boeckh of misunderstanding an au¬ 
 thor with whom he is so deeply 
 conversant as Pindar, is a dangerous 
 speculation, and the danger is not 
 lessened by seeing two such men as 
 Dissen and Tafel following in his 
 track. In spite, however, of this 
 triple array of learning and talent, 
 I must, with most unfeigned de¬ 
 ference, say that their explication 
 of a difficult passage in that writer 
 (Ol. VI. 117.) seems neither called 
 for by the text itself, nor consistent 
 with the chapter in Pausanias, which 
 is quoted in support of it. As the 
 subject is curious, and calculated 
 to throw light, not only on this but 
 on other passages of the present 
 play, (sup. 20, infr. 900.) I shall be 
 excused for going at some little 
 length into the matter. At a pre¬ 
 ceding verse (20) we had occasion to 
 speak of ashe 7 i altars, and the reader 
 may be desirous to know how these 
 were formed. The inquisitive tra¬ 
 veller just referred to tells us, (Eliac. 
 c. 13.) that they were constructed 
 from the ashes which fell from the 
 thighs of sacrificed victims; in one 
 place, (viz. Didymus,) the blood of the 
 slain animal being used to form the 
 ashes into a sort of paste or cement; 
 at Olympia, the water of the Alpheus 
 being used exclusively for that pur¬ 
 pose. This preliminary got over, 
 let us now in company with Pau¬ 
 sanias approach that Olympian altar, 
 and with the reverence due to so 
 singular a place. The first thing 
 Avhich meets our sight is a base¬ 
 
 ment (κρηπ'ις), the perimeter of 
 which is 125 feet, and the access to 
 which is by a flight of stone steps 
 on either side. On this basement 
 stood the ashen altar itself, having 
 a perimeter, if Ave understand the 
 text bright, of 32 feet, and when 
 Pausanias visited it, being 22 feet 
 in height. And how was that top¬ 
 most point reached ? the same 
 writer tells us,—by a flight of steps 
 on either side, made, not of stone, 
 but of the same material as the altar 
 itself. And where is any thing here 
 said of two altars, a lower and an 
 upper one, as Boeckh, and Dissen 
 and Tafel after him, suppose ? The 
 text, as it appears to me, furnishes 
 no such indication. But to proceed. 
 To the great basement, (more com¬ 
 monly termed πρόθνσις than κρητης,) 
 men and women, virgins as well as 
 matrons, were admitted ; there too, 
 the victim was slain^ as I under¬ 
 stand the text, but not sacrificed in 
 the strict sense of the word, as 
 Boeckh evidently understands, and 
 out of which supposition appears 
 to have grown his sense of a double 
 altar, one below and another above. 
 This victim having been slain and 
 dissected, the priest—and none else 
 was allowed to ascend the ashen 
 steps—carried the thighs to the 
 altar-top, burnt them and took the 
 sacrificial omens; but how } bC ip- 
 ττνρων, by fire, says Boeckh, (Ex- 
 plicatt. 152. 180.) That this is 
 true, may be inferred from another 
 ode of Pindar (Ol. VIII. 5.), but 
 
 t Some difficulty is encountered here by the intrusion (for an intmsion it certainly is) 
 of the word Τάστου into the text. Goldhagen in his German version proposes to sub¬ 
 stitute βωμού —Buttmann prefers 4 σχάτου —the recent editors, Schubart and Λ\'’η 1 ζ, in¬ 
 clude the word between brackets. If I may speak my own opinion, the Avord βωμού 
 ought to be inserted, and the Λvord3 του βωμού expunged in the sentence following. 
 
 u To those not much conversant with the original, it may be necessary to observe, that 
 the poet is explaining how the great family of the lamidae became hereditary interpreters 
 of the Olympian orade. lamus, their founder, being a son of Apollo, the god gifts him 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ 
 
 45 
 
 τταιαν δβ λάμπβι στονό^σσά τβ γηρνς ομαυΧος' 
 ών υπ€ρ, ώ χρυσία θνγατβρ Δώ?, / ^ ( 
 
 €ύωτΓα TreuArov άΧκαν\^^ν-' '^\ . 
 
 ’Άρβά τβ τον μαλβρον, 09 νυν αχαλκος ασπίδων ττρ.γ 
 
 as has* been observed in a preceding 
 note, it does not necessarily fol¬ 
 low from the words of Pindar in 
 the passage more immediately under 
 >» consideration; the term used by 
 him being an απα^ λ^γόμζνον, on which 
 no further hght is thrown by an 
 απαξ 'Κ€γόμενον in Herodotus (VIII. 
 134.) than this, that the mode of 
 taking omens in the Ismenium at 
 Thebes and the altar at Olympia 
 was one and the same. But be the 
 case as it may as to a double or sin¬ 
 gle omen, a lower and an upper 
 altar, and as to the place where the 
 sacrificial rite took place, the reader 
 will, I think, have anticipated me in 
 seeing that the άκτη βώμιος of Sopho¬ 
 cles is nothing more than the κρηπις 
 or ττρόθυσις of Pausanias, and that by 
 this explanation we get a clearer 
 and an ampler space for placing our 
 suppliants upon in the text than 
 Erfurdt and Wunder have supplied 
 us ^with. (The word κρηπις, as im¬ 
 plying the base on which an altar 
 stands is not unknown to the Tragic 
 writers. Soph. Trach. 993. ω Κηναία 
 κρηπϊί βωμων. Eurip. Here. F. 986. 
 1099. In Eur. Tro. 16. Seidler 
 considers it as the base on which a 
 statue stands.) 
 
 Ib. πάρα. EUendt explains : Nu- 
 merus supplicum arts circumfusus 
 quasi longa serie cogitatur conspici. 
 
 185. πόνων, troubles generally, but 
 plague inclusive. Thucyd. II. 49, 
 
 fiat €V ov πολλώ χρόνω κατίβαινίν is τα 
 στηθη 6 πόνος, μβτά βηχός Ισχυρόν. 
 52. eViWe δ’ αντονς μαΧλον προς τω 
 νπάρχοντί πόνω και η ξνγκομώη κ. τ. i. 
 
 cf. infr. 694· 
 
 Ib. ίκτηρ^ς, supplicants to the gods, 
 viz. that the evils under which they 
 groan may be removed. 
 
 Ib. ΐπιστΐνάχονσιν . Cf. Hes. Th. 
 843. Scut. Here. 344. Wunder 
 notices the construction πόνων — 
 όπιστ€νάχουσιν, and compares Eurip. 
 Phoen. 1434. Ebner with Brunck 
 prefer όπίστοναχουσιν. The former 
 compares Electr. 133. στοναχήν. 
 
 I 86. λάμπβι. ScHOL. λαμπρώς rfj 
 φωνί} λβγβται. 
 
 iSy. ων νπβρ in behalf of which 
 supplicants. By the golden daughter 
 of Zeus, I understand the oracular 
 response, not Athene. 
 
 Ib. βνώπα (metaph. propitious, cf. 
 Pass, and Ell. in voc.) άλκάν. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 11 2. note 2. cf. infr. 211. 
 οίνώπα. 2 14. ά·γλαώπι. Antig. 53®· 
 
 190. ^Apea. Wunder adopts 
 Musgrave’s and Nseke’s explana¬ 
 tions of this term. ** Ares, says 
 the latter writer, does not stand 
 under his proper appellation, but is 
 to be taken for λοιμός, the latter re¬ 
 sembling Mars, in being equally 
 pernicious with him, though unpro¬ 
 vided with shield or spear/' Some¬ 
 thing deeper than this lies, I imagine, 
 at the root of this unusual appella¬ 
 tion. If in the Ionic Homer, i. e. 
 
 with “ a double treasure of prophecy.” The first gift enables him to give responses from 
 the aotual words of the god : but when in process of time the Olympic sacrificial rites 
 and games are instituted by Hercules, then lamus is ordered, Ζ-ηνός άκρυτάτφ βωμψ 
 χρ-ηστ-ήριον θβσθαι, and so give his prophecies. Heyne has totally mistaken the sense in 
 his Latin translation of the passage. 
 
 X Their brief but valuable explanation is as follows ; “ άκτάν παρά βώμιον, ad altarium 
 gradm. Interdum enim άκττ] eminentiam significat, βξοχην, uti bene h. 1 . interpre- 
 tatur Scholiastes. Sic ^sch. Choeph. 718. ακτή χώματος de sepidchri iumulo dictum.” 
 
 J 
 
46 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 φλβγβί μ€ ΤΓβρίβόητοί άρπάζωρ, 
 
 supposing the hymn addressed to 
 Ares in Ernesti’s edition (v. V. p. 
 94.) be really Homer’s property— 
 if in that poet something like a 
 planetary Ares is found, how much 
 more likely is it that a planet-god 
 of the same name—sometimes of 
 friendly, but more commonly of 
 malignant aspect—should be found 
 in Boeotian Thebes, so closely as we 
 have found that Thebes connected 
 with Phoenicia and Samothrace, and 
 therefore so likely to participate in 
 the doctrines and tales peculiar to 
 both ? For how came the former of 
 these two countries by her prin¬ 
 cipal intellectual system, and what 
 was its nature ? As expounded by 
 Sanchuniathon i. e. the friend of 
 y truth, that system must have re¬ 
 lated almost exclusively to planetary 
 and astronomic lore, the system it¬ 
 self being originally dictated by the 
 Supreme Intelligence, transcribed 
 at his dictation in z star-language 
 by the greater of the planetary gods, 
 and then communicated by his com¬ 
 mand through Taaut to this lower 
 world. Did these planetary doc¬ 
 trines or the myths connected with 
 them—and not least in myths con¬ 
 nected with the planet-god with 
 whom we are at present dealing— 
 
 lose any thing by transmission from 
 Phoenicia to the isles of Samo¬ 
 thrace and Lemnos ? Confined as 
 we are for room, the reader must be 
 content to receive satisfactory re¬ 
 ferences on both these points (Creuz. 
 Symb. 11 . 319, 320. 330-331. 348. 
 351-2. 361-6. 402 &c.), while I 
 hasten to see, whether etymology 
 will afford any further light on this 
 matter. Among other canons laid 
 down by Sickler for determining, 
 what meaning the names of Hesio- 
 dean Divinities strictly bear, one is 
 that all such as end in have 
 more or less connexion with fire, 
 that Greek termination exactly cor¬ 
 responding with the Hebrew word 
 tJN {Hes or βτέ). Are we to depart 
 from this canon in the case of the 
 Hesiodean Ares ? The learned writer, 
 just referred to, has so done, be¬ 
 cause finding Ares in the Hesiodean 
 Theogony to be the brother of Hebe 
 and Ilithya, the one indicative of 
 birth and production, the other of 
 blooming youth, he thinks it neces¬ 
 sary that a family resemblance 
 should be kept up in their attributes, 
 and he accordingly provides his Ares 
 with a Semitic derivation, which 
 would make him a sort of universal 
 bridegroom, or general uniter of 
 
 y How far this term belongs to the fragment of Sanchuniathon, preserved by Euse¬ 
 bius, and from Λvhich the foregoing account is taken, we have not the learning necessary 
 for deciding. It may be added, however, that Creuzer, to whom we should certainly 
 ascribe no religious prejudices, as they ai’e termed, observes that recent information from 
 India and elsewhere tends rather to confirm than to weaken its authenticity. 
 
 z By star-language was not improbably meant those terms in ancient philosophic poetry, 
 by which authors endeavoured to keep their language aloof from the language of common 
 life ; as Homer’s god-language may in the same way be little more than the conventional 
 terms which the priests threw into their temple-hymns or religious poetry, and which it 
 would have been considered profane to use in the ordinary occasions of life. Those con¬ 
 versant with Italian need not be told, that poetic Italian and prose Italian still form 
 almost two separate languages. 
 
 a Not to mention other instances, the truth of this position is clearly to be traced in 
 the three Titanic powers, BpSvrps, 'Ζτΐρόιη)$ and ’'ApyrjSf Avho supply Zeus with his 
 fiery bolts in the Hesiodean Theogony, and whose names throughout, when traced to 
 Semitic roots, bear perfect resemblance to their office. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 47 
 
 τταΧίσσντον δρόμημα νωτίσαι ττάτρας· 
 ατΓονρον, άτ h μ4γαν 
 
 things. The Sophoclean text obliges 
 us, I think, to abide by the canon 
 as originally laid down by the learned 
 writer. Deriving then the second 
 syllable of our planet-god from the 
 Hebrew word, fire^ and the first 
 syllable from the Hebrew verb har 
 {to flovo)^ (and were it necessary, and 
 did time allow, we could add much 
 about the substantive light, as con¬ 
 nected with this verb, about nn, 
 a fiery sword, and about Schelling’s 
 .^sar (Creuz. II. 371,) which seems 
 little more than Ares reversed) we 
 gain in this fiowing fire an explana¬ 
 tion of the word Ares much more 
 adapted to the text before us, than 
 that which Sickler has been disposed 
 to give. (Cadmus p. 91.) By ex¬ 
 amining the epithet attached by 
 ^ Sophocles to his planet-god, some¬ 
 thing further may perhaps be gained 
 in confirmation of the foregoing 
 theory. 
 
 Ib. μαλβρος (μάλα). Whoever has 
 been accustomed to read the Theo- 
 gony of Hesiod, not as a heap of 
 Grecian names, signifying nothing, 
 but as a collection of deities, em¬ 
 bodying the philosophic system of 
 Phoenicia, and allegorizing that 
 philosophy after the manner of the 
 son of Thabion (Cr. II. 14.), who 
 lived ages before Hesiod was born, 
 whoever has so read his Hesiod, 
 knows how habitual it is with 
 him, after mentioning his deity 
 in a Phoenician sense, to attach im¬ 
 mediately some corresponding epi¬ 
 thet to it, in an Hellenic sense. 
 (For examples, see Sickler, pp. 27- 
 8. 31.41-6, 7-8. 54-7. 62, &C.&C.) 
 Under such circumstances, what 
 epithet should we expect to see 
 appended to the malignant Ares, 
 but that which w’e here find belong¬ 
 
 ing to it; μαλίρος, i. e. hot, fiery, 
 vehement? Cf. 11 . IX. 242. XX. 316. 
 XXL 375. Hes. Sc. 18. Pind. 01 . 
 IX. 34, cf. Dissen’s Comment, 
 p. 112. Tafel, I. 337. (If we needed 
 proof, how the genius of the Roman 
 language habitually quailed before 
 that of Greece, we might find an in¬ 
 stance of it in this paXepbs ^Αρης of 
 Sophocles, sinking gradually, as it ap¬ 
 pears to have done, into the compara¬ 
 tively feeble “ mortifer sestus” of Lu¬ 
 cretius (VI. 1136.); and yet where 
 shall we find a nobler poet than 
 the philosophic poet of Rome ?) 
 
 Ib. αχάλκος άσπίδωρ. Literally, 
 without a shield of brass. Sen. ov χρώ- 
 pevos οπλοις, (therefore “ helmet and 
 brigandine of brass, the broad haber¬ 
 geon, A^ant-brass, and greaves” in¬ 
 clusive.) Cf. El. 36. ασκ€νον άσττί- 
 8ωρ. 1002 . CEd. Col. 677* ανην^μον 
 χ€ΐμωνωρ. 7 ^ 6 . κακών ανατος. S6^. 
 αφωνον apas. Aj. ^21. ά'φόφητος οζίων 
 κωκνμάτων. See also Eurip. Phoen. 
 334. Hippol. 147. El. 310. 
 
 191. πίριβόητος. ScH. μ€τα βοής 
 κα\ οίμωγης iniojv. Ib. άντιάζων, OC- 
 currens. El. I understand the ad¬ 
 jective to be taken adverbially, as 
 infr. 479· μ^^ος — χηρ^νων. 1506. 
 QEd. Col. 347. 8 νσμορος πΧανωμίνη. 
 349. ασιτος νηΧίπονς τ αλωμίνη. Phil. 
 294* ^^^'ρτΓων τάΧας. Ε 1 . 961. αΧζκτρα 
 γηράσκονσαν. Eurip. Phoen. 1554 * 
 δύστανος Ιανων. 1734· απαρθΐν^ντ 
 άΧωμ€να. Pyth. VIII. 13· τραχεία 
 νπαντιά^αισα. Cf. Dissen ad Pind. 
 Nem. IV. 22. 
 
 192. τταλισ. δρόμ. νωτίσαι. gl. παλιν- 
 δρομήσαι. Supply δος, as Brunck ob¬ 
 serves, or πομφόν (v. 189.), as 
 Musgr.'^ and Erf. prefer, νωτίζ^ιν 
 terga dare. Eurip. Androm. 1142. 
 
 193. ατΐονρος. lon. ονρος (i. e. 
 δρος), far from the borders of my 
 
48 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Κ 
 
 θάλαμοι^ 'λμφιτρίτα^, 
 βϊτ eV τοι^ άττόζενον ορμον 
 Ορρκίον κλν8ωνα' 
 
 TeXet γαρ el tl νυζ ά( 
 TOUT eV ήμαρ ep^erac 
 τον^ ώ τάρ πυρφόρωί' 
 άστρατταν κράτη ν^μων, 
 
 195 
 
 
 200 
 
 country. So ττρόσονρος = πρόσορος. 
 Philoct. 691· 
 
 194» 5 * θάλαμον * Αμφιτρίτης. His¬ 
 tory tells us, that the intensity of 
 the Attic plague-heat drove numbers 
 to seek death by plunging into rivers 
 and fountains (Thucyd. 11 . 49.) ; it 
 is not therefore surprising that poetry 
 gets rid of its embodied essence by 
 plunging it into waters of still greater 
 magnitude. Musgrave, Dindorf and 
 Wunder, understand by the above 
 expression the Atlantic Ocean ; but 
 this understanding must I think 
 be justified almost exclusively on 
 local ideas of Thebes in concert with 
 Phoenicia. To the seamen of the 
 latter, the Atlantic was well-known ; 
 but how much converse had Grecian 
 mariners with it ? That the word 
 Amphitrite should be formed out of 
 Phoenician terms, as we find it 
 formed in Sickler (p. 43.), follows 
 as a matter of course. Dissen 
 (Comment. Pind. p. 340.) compares 
 Pyth. XL 2. See also on this sub¬ 
 ject Welcker’s Tril. -^sch. p. 164. 
 
 197. θρηκιον κλύ 8 ωνα = Pontum 
 Euxinum. “ Name und Vaterland 
 des Ares ist Thracien,” says the 
 learned Creuzer, (II.610.) We need 
 not wonder, therefore, that having 
 been plunged into a more distant 
 ocean, he is now consigned to a sea 
 more familiar to him. That sea, it 
 must be remembered, though sub¬ 
 sequently termed Euxinus, or, fa¬ 
 
 vourable to strangers, bore previously 
 the title of "'Αξ€ΐνος (Pind. Pyth. IV. 
 362.), i. q. άπόξ^νος, or unfavourable 
 to strangers. The Ionic poetic form 
 in the word θρηκιον has been noticed 
 by Herm. and Erf. 
 
 198. TeXei = τζλεως, altogether. 
 Eurip. Bacch. 858. iv reXei = cVre- 
 λβω;. Elms, ini τω ίαυτης reXft. ScHOL. 
 Kayser’s proposed emendation (Act. 
 Sem. 74.) may as*well be left untold. 
 
 Ib. fl . . άφη. Cf. Matth. §. 5 ^ 5 * 
 7. This construction has been more 
 largely noticed in one of my plays 
 of Aristophanes. 
 
 199. TOVT in ημαρ έρχεται i. q. τοντο 
 ημαρ inepxerai. Dind. proceeds againsf 
 itinahostilemanner. inipxeaeaiin this 
 sense is more commonly found with¬ 
 out a case (Horn, passim. Thucyd. VI. 
 34.), sometimes with dative of person 
 (II. XX. 91. Od. XL 22. Plat. 8. 
 Rep. 549, e.), sometimes with acc. 
 of thing (II. VII. 262.), and here 
 with τούτο. See Pass, in voc. and 
 Dissen. Comment, ad Pind. p. 128. 
 
 200. TOP for ov. cf. Pind. Nem. II. 
 3 6. &c. Wunder, who omits the article 
 τάν in this verse, and forms Dindorf s 
 two into one, pronounces the metre to 
 be doubtful. Its general character 
 throughout the strophe is evident 
 enough. lambics of various dimen¬ 
 sions, relieved by an lambic dipodia 
 and cretic (i 94.), a dim. Troch. bra- 
 chycat. (195-7.)» ^ trim. dact. with 
 anac. 196. form its leading features. 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 49 
 
 ώ Zev Trarep, ύττο σφ φθίσον κ€ραυνώ. 
 hvKeL αναζ^ τά re σα γ^ρυσοστρόφων άπ αγκυλών 
 /3eXea θβλοιμ αν άδάματ 4ν8ατ€Ϊσθαί 
 αρωγά ττροσταθβντα, ray re ττνρφόρους· 
 
 *Αρτβμιδοζ^ αϊγλα^, ζνν aly 
 
 άντ.γ. 
 205 
 
 Το those not deeply conversant with 
 the writings of Hesiod, the following 
 references (Theog. 72. 458. 699. 
 707. 846. 854.) will serve to shew 
 whom Sophocles was likely to have 
 in his thoughts, when writing these 
 noble lines. For the part which 
 Brontes, Steropes, and Arges, per¬ 
 form in furnishing Zeus with these 
 terrible thunders and lightnings, cf. 
 Theog. 140 sq. See also Sickler’s 
 Cadmus, pp. 35. 36. 75. 
 
 200. πνρφόρον. Find. Nem. X. 
 132. Zevs δ’ eV’ Τδα πνρφόρον πΧαξε 
 ψο\ 0 €ντα κεραυνόν. 
 
 201. κράτη, cf. infr. 237· 5 ^^· 
 
 758. 
 
 Ib. νβμων, possessing. Cf. infr. 
 237.579. Phil. 393. Aj. loi. Find. 
 01. II. 22. ω Kpovie παι ‘Peay, εδο? 
 * Ολυμπον νόμων. ΟΙ. XI. Ι7· νόμ^ι-γάρ 
 ^Ατρεκαα πόλιν Αοκρων Ζεφνρίων. 
 
 202. κεραννω, thunder-bolt, i. e. 
 
 thunder and lightning together. 
 (Heb. ρζ. For some no¬ 
 
 ble Pindaric applications to Zeus, see 
 01. XL 96-99. Pyth. VL24. Nem. 
 IX. 56. sq. 
 
 203. Ανκει άναζ. The Lycian 
 Apollo is a subject of too great im¬ 
 portance to be dispatche^-by mere 
 references, and a short paSfcg note. 
 It is therefore proposed to make it 
 the subject of a prefatory notice to 
 the poet’s “Electra,” where it occurs 
 still more appropriately for remark. 
 In the mean time the reader is 
 referred to a learned note of Blom- 
 field S. c. Th. p. 120. For αναξ cf. 
 Sup. 80. and add Find. Ol. XI. 59. 
 
 άνάκτων θεών. 
 
 Ib. χρνσοστρόφων (στρέφω) ^ gold- 
 twisted. αγκυλών (αγκύλων Ebn. MS. 
 Palat.), properly, strings of a bow; 
 here, the bow itself. 
 
 205. βελεα, a dissyllable, as’^Apea, 
 V. 190. ορεα, 20S. πάθεα, 1330. Dind. 
 here evidently meaning the purer 
 beams of the sun. 
 
 Ib. ενδατείσθαι. (βατεΊσθαι Hes. 
 Theog. 537. Op. 37. 444. Find. 01. 
 VII. 101. Hes. Th. δίαδατβίσ^αι 5 44 · 
 
 6o6. 885* επώατεΐσθαί ^Sg. ^schyl. 
 in Plat. 2 Rep. 383, b.) The Scho¬ 
 liast appears to have rightly ex¬ 
 plained this word by καταμερίζεσθαι, 
 distribui, i. e. imniitti. Another ex¬ 
 ample of this word in a passive sig¬ 
 nification (the middle voice being 
 not uncommon) has been supplied 
 bv Schneider from Nicander’s Ther. 
 
 ν' 
 
 509. Bind. Hermann prefers Elm s- 
 ley’s interpretation, cormnemorare, 
 celebrare. Cf. Blomf. S. c. T. p. 159. 
 
 206. προσταθεντα (from προΐστα- 
 μαι), i. e. προστάντα, or, as Erfurdt 
 explains it, προστατηρια. Dindorf 
 observes, “ Scribendum certa emen- 
 datione, quam ipsum illud αρωγά 
 monstrare potuerat, προσταχθεντα.” 
 
 2oy. "'λρτεμΐ 9 . If classical edu¬ 
 cation, instead of proceeding up¬ 
 wards through Latin and Greek to 
 Hebrew, took the contrary course, 
 we should have little trouble in ex¬ 
 plaining the names of ancient divi¬ 
 nities, as, generally speaking, they 
 would explain themselves. But what 
 naturally comes up before the eyes 
 of a person educated as we have 
 
 E 
 
50 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ^>Λ 
 
 t 
 
 A.vkl opea ^ιάσσπ' 
 
 described, when the word Artemis 
 is mentioned ? Doubtless a Roman 
 Diana, armed with bow and arrow, 
 buskined and equipped for the chace. 
 Present purposes require that such 
 ideas should be ejected as speedily 
 as possible from his brain. Placing 
 him therefore before the oldest of 
 the statues of Artemis, viz. that at 
 Ephesus, we pour into his ears, while 
 engaged in contemplating it, Ephe¬ 
 sian philosophic lore (Creuz. II. 
 192-9. 690.), myths or tales from 
 Persia and from Upper Asia (Ib. 146. 
 180.), myths from Egypt (Ib. 17 i .)» 
 Phoenician myths (Ib. 136.), Lycian 
 T32-7), Delian (188. J93.). and even 
 Cretan (151) myths, all tending to 
 one and the same point, viz. that we 
 are to see in our present Artemis, 
 not a goddess of the chace, but a 
 goddess of light, and more particu¬ 
 larly a moon-goddess. If circum¬ 
 stances further require of us to see 
 in her a moon-goddess, propitious 
 to fruits, whether of the earth or of 
 the womb, this too the Orphic 
 hymns wiU effect for us: 
 
 Αρτίμις ΈΐΚίίθνια, κα\ €νσ€μντ] Ιΐροθν- 
 ραία, 
 
 KXvOiy μάκαιρα’ δίδου δε ·γονας, επαγω¬ 
 γό? εοΰσα, 
 
 καί σω^, ωσπ^ρ εφυ? αΙΛ σώτειρα προ¬ 
 πάντων. Η. II. 
 
 ώ^ίνων €παρωγ€, κα\ ώ^ίνων άμύηη' 
 
 * * * 
 ε’λ^ε, θίά σώτζψα, φίλη μνστησιν 
 άπασιν, 
 
 €νάντητο5, αγονσα KakovS KapiTOVS 
 άττό γαίη9, 
 
 €ΐρηνην τ iparfjVy καλλιπλόκαμόν θ' νγί- 
 €ΐαν' 
 
 ΊΤζμτΓΟίζ δ* eh ορίων Κ€φαλαί νού~ 
 σονί Τ€ κα\ αλγτ;. Η. XXXVI. 
 See also Cr. II. 120. 151. 185-7· 
 191.326. 
 
 Tlie close consanguinity between the 
 Boeotian Artemis and Athene is per¬ 
 haps already sufficiently established 
 in the reader’s mind, without his 
 requiring any further references: 
 if he wishes for a triple sisterhood, 
 viz. between the three Korse, Arte¬ 
 mis, Athene, and Persephone, that too 
 can be supplied him, after the new 
 Platonist fashion, by the emperor 
 Julian, certainly not the least ta¬ 
 lented of that mysty school. (Creuz. 
 II. 767. also 119,20.) And now what 
 is the reader henceforth to recognize 
 in the Theban Artemis? Not, as we 
 before said, a mere Roman “ silver- 
 shafted queen,” nor even a Greek 
 goddess, who makes men sound of 
 health (aprepeas Cr. II. 190!), but 
 a Phoenician (Artemith), 
 
 i. e. a foe to darkness and atmospheric 
 impurity. (Sickler90.) Yoroi Lycian 
 Artemis in AEschylus, see S. c. T. 
 138. for a tutelary Artemis, see ibid. 
 445 · 
 
 Ib. aiyXai. To all deities con¬ 
 nected with light, Creuzer has, I 
 think, somewhere observed, that the 
 torch was assigned as symbolic of 
 their office. If so, how comes it 
 that the wine-god Bacchus is found 
 with one in either hand ? (Eurip. Ion 
 716.) His connexion with night 
 and deeds of night we are well aware 
 of; but unless by connexion with 
 Demeter-mysteries, whence does he 
 derive his torch ? That the learned 
 German, however, is correct in his 
 general^ssertion, there cannot be 
 a shadow of doubt, from works of 
 art still remaining, or from those 
 seen by Pausanias. For Athene thus 
 armed as a goddess of light, see 
 Eckhel (D. N. V. T. 2. p. 484. sq.) 
 For Artemis, as a moon-goddess, simi¬ 
 larly equipped, see Trach. 214. Pau- 
 san. VIII. 36.7.8. IX. 19.6. X.37. i. 
 
ΟίΔΤΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 51 
 
 τον χρυσομίτραν re κικλησκω, 
 
 τασδ’ βττώνυμον γά^, 2ΐο 
 
 οίνώττα Ώάκχον €νϊον, 
 
 ΝΙαινάδων ομόστολον, 
 
 Orph. h. 36. Sickler’s Cadm. p. 90. 
 For a Demeter (Paus. X. 35. 10.) 
 For an *^Ilithya (Id. VIL 23. 6.), 
 Hecate (Aristoph. Ran. 1406.) For 
 coins of Apollo, having on one side 
 the head crowned with laurel, and 
 on the other the emblematic lyre 
 and torch, see Pellerin’s Recueil II. 
 pi. 69. numb. 7. Cr. II. 199. Even 
 earthly families connected with light- 
 deities are exhibited with the same 
 symbol. Hence Cephalus, in con¬ 
 nexion with the morning-sun, ap¬ 
 pears with burning torches. (Cr. II. 
 756, 7.) Whence was this custom 
 derived ? Our general critique on 
 the writings of Sophocles may per¬ 
 haps enable us to trace it to earlier 
 sources of Jewish and pagan idol¬ 
 atry than have yet been surmised. 
 In the mean time we content our¬ 
 selves with referring to an Homeric 
 hymn, for more particular applica¬ 
 tion of this word in reference to a 
 moon-goddess: 
 
 Μηνην aetdeiv τανυσίπτ^ρον eanerf Moi- 
 σαι, 
 
 ης ατΓΟ αίγλη yaiav ekicaerai όύρανό- 
 dcLKTOS 
 
 κράτος άπ άθανάτοίο, noXvs δ’ νπο 
 κόσμος ορωρ^ν 
 αίγλης λαμπούσης. 
 
 Ernesti’s Edit. V. ι 16. 
 
 2 ο8 . διάσσειν poet, diataaeiv, cir- 
 cumvagari. Ell. 
 
 209. χρυσομίτραν. Musgrave com¬ 
 pares Lucian I. 247. μίτρα — dvade- 
 δίμίνος την κόμην. 
 
 2 10. (ττωννμον, a term applied to 
 deities presiding over countries. 
 The όπωννμοι ηρωΐς in Athens were 
 those who gave their names to the 
 twelve tribes. 
 
 211. οίνωψ = οίνοψ (οίι /os, ώ ψ). 
 Cf. Pors. ad Med. 1363. Schaefer 
 ad (Ed. Col. 674. panipinis et uvis 
 coronatus. El. 
 
 Ib. Βάκχον. Whatever doubts 
 may be entertained as to the tute¬ 
 lary goddess of Thebes, there can be 
 none as to who was among the most 
 favoured of her gods. Bacchus is 
 here no doubt invoked to come as 
 he does in the poet’s “ Antigone,” 
 with “ cathartic foot,” (1144.); and 
 his Epiphany, as well there as 
 here, is with a kindred retinue. 
 (Cf. 1152.) 
 
 Ib . cviov. The general meaning 
 of this word has been already ex¬ 
 plained, (sup. 154.) A greater dif¬ 
 ficulty, however, still occurs; what 
 is the etymological meaning of these 
 exclamations, Ιή, and evoi, and whence 
 the origin of using such exclamations 
 in temple-hymns } Whoever con¬ 
 siders from whence the Theban Bac¬ 
 chus came, will have no doubt as to 
 the language from which one or 
 both these terms ought to be de¬ 
 rived ; on the latter subject some 
 light might be thrown, could we get 
 at a more full understanding of the 
 Hebrew term Selah than we are now 
 likely to do. But it is not wished to 
 press these matters too frequently on 
 the reader. 
 
 The following reasons are given for this goddess being so symbolized: Είκ^ιθυίη. Se 
 (ϊκάσαι tis hv elvai SaSas, ‘ότι γυναιξιν iv ίσψ καί ττυρ etVlr at wSTves. ^χοκν δ’ hv λόγον 
 καί 4ίγΙ τοκμδβ αί SaScs, ‘ότι Εΐλ€ίθνιά icrriv η is <ρώ$ &γονσα τους παίδαί. Ibid. 
 
 Ε 2 
 
ΣΟΦΟΚΑΕΟΤΣ 
 
 π^Χασθηναι φλβγοι^τ 
 άγλαώτΓί * * * 
 
 7 Γ€νκα Vi TOP άπότιμορ ev θβοΐς θβόρ. 215 
 
 . Λ 5ν» ί · -^ V » > \ /Λ ^ 
 
 (J1. aLT€L 9 a ο αιτβί^, ταμ eap ( 7 €ΑΎ}ς €πη 
 κλύωρ Ββχεσθαι τύ) νόσω ff ύπηρβτ€Ϊρ, 
 
 213* όμόστοίλον g\. όμοΒίαιτον, σνν- 
 'όμιΚον, σννο^οίπορον. 
 
 2 15- TreiiKa. Cf. nos in Ran. p. 268. 
 
 Ib. άπότιμον (Heroclot. II. 167.) 
 When the Zeus of Hesiod’s Theo- 
 gony gains, through the assistance 
 of the three Cyclopian and hundred¬ 
 handed powers, a complete victory 
 over the Titans, and over Typhoeus, 
 he distributes to his associates in the 
 conflict certain shares and participa¬ 
 tions in the new go\’^ernment, which 
 are repeatedly termed their yepaa and 
 Ttpai. (Th. 112. 393-6. 885. cf. He- 
 rodot. II. 53.) Considering the deep 
 attention which Sophocles had evi¬ 
 dently paid to the writings of Hesiod, 
 and the ambition which he had to 
 say things in a new way in this 
 drama (cf. Wunder, (Ed. T. v. 164.), 
 this remark may perhaps seiwe to 
 throw some light not only on the 
 present passage, but on the poet’s use 
 of one or two other unusual com¬ 
 pounds of the word τιμή. (Infr. 340. 
 789.(Ed.Col.49.&c.) That a scourge 
 so tremendous as the plague should 
 be put into the ranks of divinity (it is 
 in our own sacred writings termed, 
 I believe, the cangel of the Lord), 
 is not surprising; but the credit of 
 Olympus is saved by the declaration, 
 that this was an intrusion rather than 
 otherwise, and that Αοιμος had no 
 proper share or participation in the 
 offices of the new government. If 
 the reader thinks that all the phases 
 
 under which the Sophoclean Ares ap¬ 
 pears may be resolved by the βροτ 6 ~ 
 \oiyosy μιαίφονος Ares of Homer, and 
 the hatred which the Homeric king 
 of gods and men professes for him, 
 —I content myself with observing, 
 that it is a very easy and cheap 
 mode of settling the business. Cf. 
 infr. 909. 
 
 216. From the mode in which 
 CEdipus addresses the Chorus, it is 
 evident that he has been present, 
 partially or entirely, during the above 
 strain ; how then has he been occu¬ 
 pied ? In a former work, when asking 
 the same question in regard to Cly- 
 tiemnestra at the commencement of 
 the “Agamemnon,” it was suggested 
 that throwing incense on the altar, 
 and superintending other religious 
 preparations, might in part answer 
 the purpose. Why should we not 
 here see a prince, as yet so pious, and 
 so deeply concerned for his people, 
 prostrate at the foot of the altar, 
 wrapt up in silent devotion, while 
 the choral troop is asking for divine 
 assistance } Of all the ancient losses 
 Avhich dramatic readers have to de¬ 
 plore, not the least is that treatise 
 which Sophocles wrote on the Cho¬ 
 rus, and which would no doubt have 
 enlightened us on this as well as 
 many other points. 
 
 217. rfj νόσω νπηρ€Τ€ΐν, ea facere 
 qu(E morhi natura et ratio exigit. 
 Musgr. 
 
 c Isaiah xxxvii. 36. “And the angel of Jehovah went forth, and smote in the camp 
 of the Assyrians a hundred and fourscore and five thousand men; and when the people 
 arose early in the morning, behold, they Avere all dead corpses.” Ivouth's Transl. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 53 
 
 άΧκην λάβοΐ9 αζ/ κάΐ'ακονφί(Τίΐ' κακών' 
 
 άγω ζ4νο^ μβν του λόγον rovS* όζβρώ, 
 
 ζόνος de τον πραχθόντο^, ον^γάρ άν μακράν no 
 
 ϊχνβυον αύτο9, μη ονκ εχων τι σνμβολον. 
 
 νυν δ\ vaT€pos‘ γάρ άστο9 els* αστούς τβλώ, 
 
 Ν 
 
 2Ι9· τον Xoyov τοΟδβ. Com¬ 
 
 paring this verse with the following, 
 Tov λόγου seems equivalent to του 
 λ€χθ€ντο5. And what was this thing, 
 which had been so much the subject 
 of conversation ? Undoubtedly the 
 murder of Laius; but as that con¬ 
 versation had taken place between 
 CEdipus,, Creon, and the deputation 
 of priests, before the Chorus had 
 entered the theatre, does not this 
 expression savour of a little careless¬ 
 ness on the part of the poet ? 
 
 2 20. μακράν. This word is capa¬ 
 ble of two significations, between 
 which our choice will be better 
 made when we come to a right un¬ 
 derstanding of the word σνμβολον. 
 
 221. Ixveveiv, to investigate. Cf. 
 sup. 109. (As a term of the chace 
 this word has been explained by me 
 ill Aristoph. Eq. 787.) 
 
 Ib. αυτός. Ebner and Kayser both 
 prefer, and I think rightly, the read¬ 
 ing of their MSS. αυτό. 
 
 Ib. σνμβολον. Hermann translates 
 the whole sentence, of which this 
 word forms so essential a part, pa- 
 rum ipse investigando profcerem, nisi 
 aliquid indicii reperirem. Wunder ; 
 neque cnirn longe procederem investi¬ 
 gando, nisi aliquid haberem indicii. 
 How these interpretations (Elmsley 
 and Ellendt offer none) harmonize 
 with what follows, I do not exactlv 
 see. Two more explanations are 
 here submitted to the reader. The 
 words νυν de, at ver. 222, seem (for 
 I do not assert that in Sophoclean 
 
 language it is always so) to require 
 a protasis to them. This I find in 
 the adverb μακράν, which may then 
 signify, heretofore, long ago. (Cf. 
 Electr. 323. where Electra, with her 
 usual vehemence, declares that but 
 for her confidence in the future 
 arrival of Orestes, she would have 
 ceased to live long ago, μακράν). 
 What then is to be understood by 
 the word σνμβολον ? To Attic ears 
 that word was very familiar, as im¬ 
 plying the mark by which judicial 
 authority was exercised (Dem. 298, 
 6) ; hence therefore by an easy me¬ 
 tonymy, the right of inquisition into 
 any matter. I understand, therefore, 
 GEdipus to say, “ In former days I 
 should not have taken upon myself 
 this investigation, having no legiti¬ 
 mate authority for that purpose; 
 but now, having been enrolled, 
 though late, among your citizens,” 
 &c. If the reader thinks this sense 
 of the word σνμβολον too distant 
 and recondite, a simpler one may be 
 found from sources very familiar to 
 the poet. ΐϊηά. Ol.Xll. 10. σνμβολον 
 {signum cerium) δ’ ον πω τις (πιχθονίων 
 I πιστόν άμφ\ πράξιος ξσσομίνας evpev 
 θίοΘίν. The word μακράν would then 
 be better explained from the Scho-^ 
 hast, after so long an interval, (τοσου- 
 Tov όντος τον μ€ταξύ.) 
 
 2 22. νυν δ€. Cf. infr. 258. 263. 
 &c. Electr. 783-6. 
 
 Ib. αστός (Ις αστούς. So all the 
 MSS. read, those of ά Ebner inclu¬ 
 sive. Elmsley and Wunder prefer 
 
 ^ Codd. Palat. 40. 140. 35^*. See the Proceniium. 
 
54 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ύμίν ττροφωνώ ττάσί KaS/xe/oty τάδί* 
 
 αυτός, and, without any authority, 
 have both admitted it into their text. 
 The change however is one of more 
 importance, it may be, than the 
 learned editors are aware of. Were 
 Sophocles here speaking as an u 4 ttic 
 poet, the expression in either shape 
 might pass without much comment: 
 hut in the mouth of an absolute 
 monarch, it is surely somewhat un¬ 
 usual, and can hardly be considered 
 as a mere euphemism, a piece of 
 courtly refinement, by which his 
 possession of absolute power is made 
 more palatable to his hearers. What 
 then is the real meaning of the ex¬ 
 pression ? To ascertain it, we must 
 go back I think to still earlier times 
 than those of Qidipus, and this we 
 have less scruple in doing, because 
 if we fail of establishing our main 
 point, we shall be enabled to throw 
 a little additional light on this and 
 other plays connected with the CEdi- 
 podean family. Pausanias tells us 
 (Boeot. c. 5.) that the original in¬ 
 habitants of the Thebaid were the 
 Ectenes, and that these having been 
 swept away by a pestilence, they 
 were succeeded by the Hyantes and 
 Aonians (cf. Eurip. Phoen. 653)— 
 “Boeotian races, as it appears to me,” 
 says Pausanias, “ not foreigners.” 
 These Cadmus found in possession 
 of the soil, when he arrived from 
 Phoenicia. Having given battle to 
 the former, he remained master of 
 the field, and the Hyantes took ad¬ 
 vantage of the night to retire else¬ 
 where. The Aonians submitted to 
 the conqueror, and were permitted 
 to live as before in their villages 
 
 {τοις jueV ovv ^Αοσι Kara κώμας eri ησαν 
 
 ai οίκησεις), those villages being situ¬ 
 ated in the ^ plain, while Cadmus 
 and his companions, as a measure of 
 precaution, took possession of the 
 higher country, where he built that 
 citadel which ever after bore the 
 name of the Cadmea. (Cf. infr. 1203. 
 1378). The persons inhabiting this 
 citadel I imagine to have been the 
 αστοί properly so called, and who of 
 course considered themselves as of a 
 higher grade than the subjugated 
 Aonians, and any future settlers 
 among them. Into these αστοί (and 
 could a higher compliment be paid 
 him ?) GEdipus had most probably 
 been incorporated after his triumph 
 over the Sphinx, and hence the sa¬ 
 tisfaction with which he reduplicates 
 the term. That this reasoning is not 
 one of mere fancy, will be more evi¬ 
 dent when the two references last 
 given come to be more fully con¬ 
 sidered. 
 
 Ib. eis αστούς Τ€λώ, i. e. eis αστωι/ 
 τίλος έρχομαι. Cf. Ruhnken. adTim. 
 p. 251. and Passow in voc. TeXetz/. 
 
 223. νμιρ πασιν Καδ /ieiots. infr. 
 273. νμΧν το 7 ς αΧΚοισι Κα 8 μ€ίοις. In 
 both these instances CEdipus might, 
 without being guilty of any anachro¬ 
 nism (infr. 1203), have used the word 
 θηβαίοις ; but the term Καδ /xeiots (in¬ 
 dependently of the equivoque, he be¬ 
 ing a real Cadmean to the theatrical 
 audience, though only a supposed 
 one to himself) was more flattering 
 to those whom he addressed. Those 
 who wish to examine this word in 
 other dramas connected with the 
 fortunes of the Cadmean family will 
 find the following references of use : 
 jEsch. S. c. T. 9. 39. 47. 676. 
 
 c 7Γ€δ/α . . πυροφόρ' Άόρων. Euz'ip. Phoen. 652. Cf. Alschyl. S. c. T. 60. 85. &c. It is 
 perhaps in some reference to tliis distinction that tve find the latter poet more than once 
 distinguishing between the gods of the Acropolis and those of the plain, (169. 239. 257. 
 824. &c.) as well as those of the agora at Thebes. (25S.) 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 55 
 
 0(7Τί9 ττοΘ ν/χών Α.αϊοΡ τον Α.αβδ(ΐκον 
 
 κάτοίδβν άνδρο 9 iK τίνο9 διωΧ^το, 225 
 
 τούτον KeXevco τταντα (TTjpaLvetv e/xot* 
 
 Kel μβν φοβείται, τουττίκλημ υπεζελων 
 
 1027-8. Eurip. Phoen. 223. 57 ^· 
 710. 722, 4· 843*9^^* ι° 35 · 1 ^ 79 · 
 1767. Suppl. 406· 656. 679· 83^· 
 Here. F. 10. 26. 32· 61. 256. 43^· 
 568. 1042. 1086. Bacch. 35. 983. 
 
 1192. Soph. Antig. 508.1115. τ ΐ 55 · 
 (See also Goettl. ad Hesiod p. 95. 
 and Dissen in Find. 339.) From 
 a love for this venerated name grew 
 also such expressions as Κάδ/χου τροφή 
 (sup. V. l). Κάδ/χον or Καδ /xeia χθων, 
 Antig. 1162. Eurip. Phoen. 1117. 
 Suppl. 292. 410. 533. 597. Troad. 
 242. Κάδμον γαΐα, Here. F. 217 * 754 · 
 
 13 89. Κάδμον πάλιν. Here. F. 6.1086. 
 Suppl. 940. &c. &c. But the most 
 singular expression is 'Ισμήνον πάλιν 
 in the latter play, (v. 1224.) Did 
 Euripides then consider Cadmus and 
 Ismenus as one and the same person ? 
 
 227. If an (Edipus himself is re¬ 
 quired to settle many passages in 
 this play, his power of solving rid¬ 
 dles is not least wanted on the pre¬ 
 sent occasion. To content ourselves 
 with the last two or three expositions 
 of the text. Hermann, having deter¬ 
 mined the meaning of the verb ύπε- 
 ^aipfiv to be condita prom ere, gives 
 as the meaning of the whole sen¬ 
 tence : si rnetuit, si ei contra se ipsuni 
 promenduni est indicium. Where the 
 learned writer found this sense of 
 νπί^αιρ^Ίν , he does not state. The 
 w'ord is one of very rare occurrence, 
 nor, except in the present instance, 
 and Plato 8 Rep. 567, b., do I know 
 where it is to be found. And what is 
 its meaning thei*e ? clearly, to get rid 
 of, to set aside {νπ^^αιρ^ΐν τον τνραν- 
 vov ). Matthise interprets : “ debebat 
 dici, Kel pev φοβ€ΐται, τονπκλημ νπ€~ 
 ζ€λων avTos καθ' αντον οττίλ^χτω (Κ ttjs 
 
 γης' π€ίσ€ταί yap ονδίν άλλο αστ€ργ6ς. 
 Wunder, subjoining the grammatical 
 reasonings on which Matthise’s in¬ 
 terpretation is founded, translates to 
 the same effect: et si rnetuit (sc. νμων 
 τις πάντα σημαίνον άμοϊ) crimen ccEdis 
 cujus ipse reus sit, surripiat, sive, sub- 
 terfugiat, et in terrain peregrinam 
 nbeat i nullum enim aliud patietur 
 malum. May we, recurring to the 
 passage in Plato, which has never 
 been brought into the question, ven¬ 
 ture, partly on the strength of that 
 passage, to suggest one more inter¬ 
 pretation of this disputed passage ? 
 Of aU the dramatic features in this 
 play, the one most conspicuous is, 
 that (Edipus should for ever be 
 uttering language, the import of 
 which he does not himself under¬ 
 stand at the time he is speaking, but 
 of which his auditors are fully cogni¬ 
 zant : and hence a species of thea¬ 
 trical excitement almost peculiar to 
 this drama. From v. 224. where his 
 present enunciations are made, to 
 V. 275, where they close, scarcely a 
 word escapes him which does not in 
 some shape or other tend to this 
 effect. Was his own particular situ¬ 
 ation at the very moment that he 
 was speaking to be entirely lost 
 sight of in this deeply interesting 
 enunciation ? Many years had now 
 elapsed since his murder of Laius 
 had been committed, and not only 
 had no charge been made against 
 him, but, in the full tide of pros¬ 
 perity, his own conscience had evi¬ 
 dently withdrawn or set aside those 
 compunctious visitings which must 
 have come upon him for some time 
 after an assault, in which a sacred 
 E 4 
 
56 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 avTos^ κα& αυτού* πβίσβται γαρ άλλο μίν 
 aarepyh ούδβι^, γης S απβίσιρ άβλαβης, 
 el δ* αύ τις άλλον oidev e^ άλλης χθονος 
 τον αντόχβφα, μη σιωττάτω* το γάρ 
 
 fs. 
 
 κψδος τβλώ *γω χάρις TTpoaKeiaeTai. 
 el δ’ αύ σLωπησeσθe, καί τις η φίλου 
 δeίσaς aircoaei τοΰττος η χαύτου τόδe, 
 άκ τώνδ€ δράο'ω, ταύτα χρη κλύ€ΐν Ιμού. 
 τον άνδρ άτταυδώ τούτον^ οστις eVri, γης 
 τησδ\ ης ύγω κράτη re και θρόνους νόμω, 
 
 230 
 
 235 
 
 herald, be it remembered, was slain, 
 as well as Laius. Considering the 
 words τοντΐίκλημ νττ€^ίΚων as said 
 parenthetically in reference to this 
 state of CEdipus’s mind, the whole 
 passage, with the ellipses filled up, 
 would stand thus : kcI μβν φοβ€Ϊται 
 {and if he is afraid), τονπίκΧημ vne- 
 ξζλων {having hitherto set aside, or 
 not become obnoxious to the accusa¬ 
 tion) avTos καθ’ αντον σημαίνον ττάντα 
 {himself to denounce all against him¬ 
 self: still) KeX. 7Γ. σ. (/ command 
 him to signify all) for (and here 
 observe the covert reference to the 
 future fate of Qidipus himself) he 
 shall suffer no other injury, but—what 
 CEdipus really suffers, when the 
 charge can no longer be set aside, 
 but is actually brought home to him; 
 viz. is allowed to go into banish¬ 
 ment, with his person intact. If 
 this explanation seems too recon¬ 
 dite, then a simpler way will be to 
 understand, as I think the ancient 
 Scholiast did, “ but if he fears the 
 accusation, (as being himself involved 
 in it,) let him, having withdrawn 
 this fear, denounce himself; for,”&c. 
 κα\ el μ^ν avTOS €’ίη ττράξας κα\ φοβάται 
 Xeyeiv avros καθ’ a^/rov, τον φόβον bne- 
 ξe\ωv Xeyeτω. ScHOL. 
 
 229. aarepyes, noxium, Ell. 
 
 Ib. άβλαβης, without injury. Cf. 
 Find. 01 . XIII. 38. Kayser with 
 his MS. prefers ασφαλής. As a term 
 of “ safe convoy,” it is certainly 
 strongly supported by a quotation 
 which the writer gives from the 
 GEd. Col. 1164. σο\ φασίν αντον ός 
 λόyovς όλθβϊν μολόντ αΐτβίν άπ€λθ€ 2 ν τ 
 ασφαλώς της devp’ οδού. 
 
 230. άλλον όξ άλλης χθονος, alium, 
 eumque peregrinum. Wund. 
 
 232. τβλώ, Attic future for τ^λεσω. 
 
 Gl. δώσω. 
 
 233,4. φίλου δ€ίσας η χαντον. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 348· de voc. κηδεσθαι,^^^^,.^ 
 
 234. αττώσβί τοϋπος, neglects this 
 my edict, άπωση, Herm. Reis. Ebn. 
 
 235. άκ, i. e. ά eK τώνδβ. Brunck, 
 comparing Alciph. Epist. 33. όκ το- 
 σαντης σννηθ€ίας, post tantam familia- 
 ritatem, translates, dehinc, posted. 
 Comparing context, and.^sch. Eum. 
 520. perhaps better, in consequence 
 of this. 
 
 236. The deepest feeling through¬ 
 out the theatre as QEdipus utters the 
 following verses in a loud and so¬ 
 lemn tone of voice. Cf. infr. 450. 
 
 Ib. Construction: άπαυδώ μητ 
 €σδ€χ€σθαι τινά τησδ€ yης—τον άνδρα 
 τούτον. Erf. 
 
 237· κράτη Te κα\ θρόνους. Cf. CEd. 
 
 Col. 425· Antig. 173. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ 1ΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 57 
 
 μητ eiaSe^eaOaL μητ€ προσφωνβΐν τινα, 
 
 μητ Ιν θβών βνχαΐσι μητ€ θνμασιν 
 
 KOLVOV ποίβΐσθαί^ μητ€ γέρνιβας pepeLV' 
 
 ώθβΐρ δ* άτΓ οίκων ττάντας, ώ^· μιάσματος 
 
 του§ ημΐν οντο£, ώ? το Υίνθικον θβοΰ 
 
 μαντβΐον €ζ€φ7]ν€ν άρτιων βμοί. 
 
 βγω μβν ούν τοιόσδβ τω τβ δαίμονι 
 
 τω τ άνδρΙ τω θανόντι σύμμαχος ττβλω, 
 
 κατβύχομαί δβ τον δβδρακότ\ βϊτβ τι^ 
 
 eh ών λβληθβν βϊτβ πλβίόνων μβτα, 
 
 κακόν κακω9 νιν αμορον βκτρΐφαί βίον. 
 
 βπβνχομαι, δ\ οϊκοίσιν βΐ ^υνβστίο^ 
 
 βν Toh βμοϊ^ γβνοιτ βμου συνβίδότος^ 
 
 τταθβΐν ατΓβρ τοΐσδ* άρτίως ηρασάμην. 
 
 ύμΐν δβ ταϋτα ττάντ βτησκητττω τβλβΐν, 
 
 0 
 
 ντΓβρ τ βμαντον, του Θβου τβ, τησδβ τβ 
 
 240 
 
 245 
 
 250 
 
 238. ΐΐσ^ίχ^σθαι (sc. yijy τ^σδβ). 
 See an excellent note by Wunder. 
 
 240. KOivbv τνοίύσθαι, to admit as 
 an associate. 
 
 Ib. χ€ρνιββς, lustral waters. Athen. 
 IX. 409. '^Εση be xepVLxjf νδωρ, eh b 
 άπ4βα7ντον baXbv ck tov βωμού \αμβά- 
 vovTes, i(f) ov την θνσίαν eTzerekovv’ 
 και τοντω nepippaivovres tovs τταρόν- 
 τας ηγνιζον. Cf. Eurip. Orest. 885. 
 Here. F. 829. Aristoph. in Pac. 
 If done with a brush, as Thudichum 
 intimates (I. 250.), the ceremony 
 closely resembles that practised in 
 Roman Catholic churches at this 
 day. 
 
 24 T. ώβ€Ϊν be. κeλeυω is to be un- 
 • derstood, which is implied in the 
 preceding word απανδώ. Elms, who 
 besides Eurip. Or.^514. 898. Phoen. 
 1224. compares St. Paul, Ep. ad 
 
 Tim. I. iv. 3· κωλνόντων γαμ€ΐν, ane- 
 XeaOai βρωμάτων, a 6 Geos K. r. e. 
 
 244. τω ba^ovi, i. e. Apollo. 
 
 246. κaτevχoμaι. Schol. καταρώμαι 
 be TOV cjjovea. 
 
 247. eh ων. Cf. sup. 122, 3. 
 
 248. αμορον. Cf. Dissen’s Com¬ 
 ment. p. 430. Ebner from his MS. 
 prefers αμοιρον, and erases viv as 
 useless. 
 
 Ib. eKTp'^eiv, ad firieni usque con- 
 terere. Musgr. Cf. infr. 428. Hes. 
 Op. 249. 
 
 251. iradelv, ut patiar. Heath. 
 
 253. TTjabe ye. Codd. Pal. “An 
 excellent reading,” says Ebner, 
 “ which I wonder Hermann has not 
 admitted. The sense is νμΐν —reXeii/ 
 vnep T epavTod του Beov re, by my 
 command and that of the god (for 
 no other sense can be in vixep) ; the 
 
58 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 γηε ώδ* άκαρπων κάθβως 4φθαρμ€ΐ/η9. 
 
 ούδ’ el γαρ ην το Ίτράγρυα μη θβηλατοι^, 255 
 
 ακάθαρτον ύμά^ βίκο? ην οντω^ eav, 
 
 άνδρό^ γ άρίστου βασιλέων δλώλότος, 
 
 ’ΝΛ’»/* oWiV rs i ί \ 
 
 αΑΑ e^epevvav* νυν ο eireL κνρω τ €γω 
 βχων μίν άργας^ α? eKelvos ei^e ττρίν, 
 
 €)(ων δβ λβκτρα καΐ γυναΐ)( ομόσπορον, 260 
 
 κοινών τ€ τταίδων κοιν αν, el Keivco yevos 
 μη *δvστύχησev, ην αν eκπeφvκ6τa, 
 
 words τησ^€ ye yrjs — €φθαρμ€νης in¬ 
 dicate the cause of the command, 
 since this earth is so impiously 
 ruined. The particle ye therefore in 
 this place separates things which 
 ought not to be joined; for vnep 
 cannot be joined withr7;σδe y^s eepeap- 
 μ€νης.” Surely a strong partiality 
 for his MS. has led the learned 
 writer a little astray in all this. 
 
 255-264. The coherence between 
 these lines is as follows; even though 
 the oracle had issued no command, 
 you ought not to have allowed the 
 death of so excellent a man and 
 monarch to have gone unpunished; 
 how however fortune has willed that 
 he should perish: his throne and 
 widow have come into my posses¬ 
 sion, and had he left any offspring, 
 that offspring would have been in 
 common to him and me : wherefore 
 it is my duty to take care, as if I 
 were taking care for my father, that 
 his assassin be put to death. Herm. 
 
 255. eerjkaToVfSent by a god. See 
 Ellendt in voc. 
 
 256. elKos ην. For the omission 
 of the av, see Matth. §. 508. 2. 
 
 257. άνδρός y άρίστου βασΐλ€ως. 
 (Edipus, it is to be presumed, speaks 
 by courtesy: neither as a man nor 
 as a monarch did Laius deserve any 
 such epithet as is here given him. 
 
 For άνδρος βασί\€ως cf. infr. 928. 
 
 258. e^epevvav. Cf. Plat. 4. Rep. 
 432, d. ^ 
 
 Ib. cVet. The apodosis is at άνθ* 
 ων, the whole construction being of 
 that free and conversational form in 
 which Sophocles so much indulges 
 throughout this play. 
 
 258, 9. κνρω ^χων = βχω. For 
 abundant examples of this pleonasm 
 cf. El. .Eschyl. Sept. c. T. 397. μαρ~ 
 μαίρονσαν Kvpelv = pappaipetv. 
 
 260. όμόσπορον. ScHOL. eis ην 
 eaneipe και eKelvos και eyoj. Cf. infr. 460. 
 {Deep sensation in the theatre.') 
 
 261. κοινών τταίδων κοινά = koivovs 
 
 παίδας. Sophocles had learned from 
 Pindar to use words with great pro¬ 
 fuseness. Our only refuge is to term 
 them redundant, cumulative, cumu- 
 lata cum vi,” (cf. Diss. Comment, p. 
 29. 382, 3. 412. 473. 529 &c. &c.) as 
 the occasion may require. Erfurdt 
 translates: haherem communes cum 
 illo fortasse ipsius quoque liberos et 
 meos. . Jt. ■; Vi;- ■ 
 
 lb. ei Keivip k. r. e. How lortunate 
 for (Edipus, had this been true; viz. 
 that Laius had been without off¬ 
 spring ! How every word is made by 
 the poet to tell throughout this 
 speech! 
 
 261, 2]^''’'6n tbe^ouble av in this 
 sentence, cf. El. I. 128. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 59 
 
 
 pvp ^ €9 TO K€LPOV KpOLT €ρηλαθ* η τύχη' 
 avff ών €γω τάδ\ ώσπβρβϊ τονμον ττατρο^, 
 ντΓβρμαχονμαί κάττί ττάντ άφίζομαι, 
 ζητών τον αύτόχβφα τον φόνου λαββΐν^ 
 τω Ααβδακβίω τταιδί ΤΙολνδώρον Τ€ καί 
 τον ττρόσθβ Κάδμον τον ττάλαί τ Άγήνορο 9 ' 
 και ταντα τοΪ 9 μη δρώσιν εύχομαι θβονς 
 μητ άροτον avTols γη9 άνυέναι τινά 
 μητ ονν γυναικών τταΐδα^, άλλα τώ ττότμω 
 
 265 
 
 270 
 
 263. νΰν δ’. Cf. CEd. Col. 273· 
 Aj. 1060. 
 
 Ib. Musgrave compares Antig. 
 1345, τα δ’ eVl κρατι μοι πότμος dvaKO- 
 μιστός (Ισηλατο. General sense : but 
 now through adverse fortune Laius 
 has been murdered, without leaving 
 any children. Cf. El et. Erf. 
 
 264. άνθ’ ων,/οτ all which reasons. 
 With this apodosis to vw δ’ eVei (v. 
 258.) commentators compare Cicero 
 de Orat. Nam quoniam, quicquid est, 
 quod in controversia versetur, in eo, 
 aut sitne, aut quod sit, aut quale sit 
 quceritur : sitne, signis ; quid sit, de- 
 Jinitionibus ; quale sit, recti pravique 
 partibus quibus ut uti possit orator, 
 &c. A more Sophoclean one occurs 
 in Aj. 1057—1062. 
 
 Ib. τάδε (Brunck and Mudge 
 τοΰδ’). Aj. 1346. συ ταυτ’, ’Οδυσσευ^ 
 τοΰδ’ υττ^ρμαχείς ipoi ; CEd. Col. 820. 
 τάχ e^cis μαΧλον οίμωζαν τάδε. I had 
 translated : I will fight this or these 
 things as for my father. Wunder 
 has come to much the same con¬ 
 clusion, but in a more learned man¬ 
 ner. See his note. A deep sensation 
 through the theatre.) 
 
 265. ε’τΓί ττάντ άφίξομαι, ivill leave 
 nothing untried. Musgrave compares 
 Eur. Hippol. 284. ds ττάντ άψιγμαι 
 Kovbev (ΐρ-γασμαι ττλεου. Add Xen. 
 
 Anab. III. I. 18. άρ' ουκ αν ε’ττί ττάν 
 
 ί\θοι ; 
 
 206 . τον αντόχ€ΐρα (perpetrator) 
 τον φόνου. Elect.’ 935* αυτόχαρα 
 πατρώου φόνον. 
 
 267. τω Λα/3δακεί^ παιδί = τω του 
 Ααβ8άκου παιδί, i. e. Laius. (II. ΙΙ. 54 · 
 Νεστορε'^ παρά νηΧ IlvXqyevios βασίλήος. 
 V. 74 ^· Τ€Τοργ€ίη κ^φαΧη deivolo 
 
 πελώρου.) For an account of the suc¬ 
 cession on the Theban throne, from 
 Cadmus to Laius, and many inter¬ 
 vening events, see Pausanias IX. 5. 
 cf. Eurip. Phoen. 7. 
 
 269. εύχομαι θ^ονς . . avuvai. Arist. 
 Thes. 35 O· Tous θζους ίϋχ€σθ€ . . ποΧλά 
 bovvai κά-γαθά. Pind. Pyth. V. 166. 
 
 270. tipoTov (fruits) γης άνιίναι, 
 h. Horn. Cer. 33 -· 7 ^^ καρπόν άνησαν. 
 On the accentuation of the word, see 
 Ellendt, who prefers άροτός for seges, 
 άροτος for annus. 
 
 Ib. avuvai. (Eurip. Phoen. 954.) 
 mittere, remittere. El. I pray the 
 gods to send them neither fruits from 
 the earth, nor children from their 
 wives. Nothing, as Erfurdt observes, 
 is more common than the formula, 
 by which a verb appropriate to one 
 thing is applied to another. Cf. 
 Bernhardy Wissen. Synt. p. 137. 
 
 271. τώ πότμω τω νυν, the present 
 a^ffliction, i. e. the plague. 
 
60 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τώ uvv φΘ^ρ^ισθαί κάτι τονδ* βχθίονι* 
 νμίν δβ Tois αλλοίσι Καδμβίοίί, οσοις 
 ταο €στ αρβσκονσ, η re σύμμαχος ^ικη 
 χοΐ ττάρτβς ei; ^vveiev elaael θβοί. 
 
 ΧΟ. ωσπβρ μ* άραίον βλαββς^ ώδ\ ανα^, 4ρώ. 
 οΰτ ίκτανον γάρ οϋτβ τον κτανόντ €χω 
 δύζαι, το δ€ ζητημα τον ττβμψαντος ήν 
 Φοίβου τόδ’ βΙπ€Ϊν, οστις βΐργασταί ττοτβ. 
 
 ΟΙ. δίκαί βλβζας. άλλ* άναγκάσαι θ^ους 
 
 αν μη υβλωσιν ονο αν ety ουναιτ ανηρ. 
 
 Χυ. τα bevTep €κ τωνό αν Αβγοιμ αμοί οοκ€ί. 
 
 ΟΙ. el καί τρίτ €στ\ μη τταρης το μη ον φράσαί. 
 
 ΧΟ. ανακτ ανακτί τανθ' ορώντ err ίσταμαι 
 
 μάλιστα Φοίβω Ύ€ΐρ€σίαν τταρ ον τις αν 
 
 275 
 
 38ο 
 
 // 
 
 285 
 
 372. φθ^ρβίσθαι. Elmsley observes 
 that he has no other example at hand 
 of an infinitive future thus joined 
 with €νχομαι in the sense of praying. 
 Cf. Matth. §. 506. 6. 
 
 274. Αίκη. For the personified 
 Αίκη in Find. cf. 01 . VII. 32. XIII. 
 7. Pyth. VIII. 100. in Hes. cf. infr. 
 
 885. 
 
 275. fv ^vveival τινι, J'avere alicui. 
 WuND. Cf. infr. 1081. 
 
 276. ωσπ€ρ μ αραιόν eXajSey. Eu- 
 stath. p. 1809, 14. explains by ωστΓβρ 
 μ€ elXfs διά τηςάρας. Wunder: quem- 
 admodum tu me execratione tua coe- 
 gisti loqui, ita loquar, 
 
 lb. ωδβ, 50 upon oath. Cf. infr. 660. 
 
 277. ίχω = bvvapat. 
 
 278. ζητημα, the subject of investL 
 gation. Of the numerous modes of 
 constructing this passage, Elmsley 
 prefers that by Erfurdt: ην δε τον 
 πίμφαντος Φοίβον το ζητημα, elnelv 
 τόδε, δσΓΐ5 εϊργασταί ττοτε. (τοδε su¬ 
 perfluous.) As the Greek dramatists 
 often appear to have favourite con¬ 
 
 structions in difi'erent plays, I should 
 prefer that construction which would 
 assimilate the present to such as infr. 
 717. 785. &c. 
 
 Ib. τον πίμφαντος, who gave the 
 oracular response. 
 
 281. dv. on av with relative pro¬ 
 noun, cf. El. I. 119. cf. infr. 1062. 
 
 Ib. οϋδ’ dv iis δ. d. Herm. com¬ 
 pares Trach. 1072. κα\ τοδ’ οΰδ’ dv 
 eis TTore τόνδ' dvbpa φαίη ττρόσθ^ ιδεΓν 
 bebpaKOTa. 
 
 283. μη παρης το μη ον φ. ne ad- 
 mitte, ne non dicas, quin dicas i. e. 
 πάντως φράζς. El. 2. 106. where see 
 further examples, and cf. Matth. §. 
 534. not. 7. 
 
 284,5. «ΐ'ακταΤειρεσιαι/. The same 
 title is applied to him by Homer, Od. 
 XI. 143· ^ 5 ®· "cavS^ i. e. τα αντά. 
 
 285. If the prophetic Tiresias was 
 not an absolute creation of the genius 
 of Sophocles, still he occupies so 
 important a place in his few remain¬ 
 ing dramas, that we must be allow¬ 
 ed, while the poet’s auditors are 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 
 σκοπών ταδ*, ώζ/α^, βκμάθοί σαφέστατα. 
 ΟΙ. άλλ’ ούκ €v άργοίς ονδβ τοντ Ιπραζάμην. 
 βπβμψα γάρ'Κρβοντο^ euT^ovros· διπλούς 
 πομπού9' πάλαι δΐ μη παρών θανμάζβται. 
 
 waiting with intense interest for his 
 appearance, to dedicate a few words 
 to him. As common report ex¬ 
 tended his life over seven and even 
 nine generations (Goettl. Hes. fr. 
 111), it is impossible to say when he 
 was born, but as we find a grandson 
 of his living at the time of the 
 Trojan war (Hes. fr. 14. Gaisf.ed.), 
 we may go back to very remote pe¬ 
 riods for that event. Tiresias, ac¬ 
 cording to Apollodorus (III. 6, 7.), 
 was the son of Everes and Chariclo, 
 the latter a nymph tenderly beloved 
 by Pallas. This acquaintance, how¬ 
 ever,‘of Chariclo with the virgin- 
 goddess did not much tend to the 
 welfare of her son. The latter 
 having by accident or design cast 
 his eyes on Pallas when bathing, 
 the latter in her indignation deprived 
 him of his eye-sight, but subse¬ 
 quently at the earnest intreaties of 
 his mother, gave such acute per¬ 
 ception to his ears, that he was 
 enabled to understand the language 
 of birds, and consequently became 
 a consummate augur; and to his 
 prophetic powers we must now 
 chiefly attend. The leading feature 
 of these seems to have been a high 
 character for truth. Hence in the 
 Pindaric writings (Nem. I. 90), he 
 is termed “ the excellent prophet of 
 Zeus the most high, the ορθόμαντις 
 Tiresias”—and when the same poet 
 asks the personified Thebe (i. e. 
 Thebes) after her various ornaments, 
 the πυκνοί βονλαϊ or wise counsels 
 of Tiresias are reckoned among the 
 choicest of them. (Isth. VI. [VII.] 
 13,) In the Homeric poems, besides 
 
 a high compliment to his general 
 integrity of understanding (Od. X. 
 493), we find him retaining his pro¬ 
 phetic powers even after death; and 
 unlike other shades, he has not to 
 go through the ceremony of the 
 blood-draught, before his torpid 
 senses can recognise a denizen of 
 the upper world. (Od. XI. 90 sq.) 
 For other circumstances connected 
 with this remarkable person, as to 
 when and where he died, and how 
 he died, his place of sepulture, his 
 change of sex, whether he was a 
 priest of Zeus, or Apollo, his family, 
 the pictorial representations of him 
 at Delphi &c. &c., the reader may 
 consult Pausanias, IX. cc. ii. 18, 
 19. 33. X. cc. 28, 29, &c. Hesiod 
 fr. Ill, 112 (Goettl. Ed.). Wachs- 
 muth IV. 272. Dissen’s Comment, 
 in Pind. 367 &c. 
 
 286. σκοπών gl. ζητών, €ρ€ννών. cf. 
 sup. 68. ev σκοττώι». Ih. €κμάθοί. On the 
 fondness of Sophocles for compounds 
 in (K, we shall speak in a future 
 play. 
 
 287· άργοΐς = άρ-^ώς idly, in an 
 idle manner. Schol. Ellendt com¬ 
 paring CEd. Col. 1605. and Eurip. 
 Phoen. 778, translates, ne hoc qui~ 
 dem infectum esse sivi: but ev apyois 
 seems here rather to intimate things 
 idly or imperfeclly done, than things 
 undone, as it does in the two passages 
 quoted by Ellendt. 
 
 288. Κρίοντος ίΐπόντος. (A slight 
 pause and the tone of voice in which 
 these words are uttered, shew that 
 some unpleasant feeling is passing 
 in the speaker’s mind. cf. infr. 555.) 
 
 288—9. δίπλονϊ πομπούς. The 
 
62 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΧΟ, καΐ μην τά γ αλλα κωφά και τταλαι ίπη. 
 
 ΟΙ. τά ποια ταντα ; πάντα γάρ σκοπώ λόγον. 
 
 ΧΟ. θαν€Ϊν όλβχθη πρός τινων οδοιπόρων. 
 
 U1. ηκονσα καγω τον ο ώοντ ovoeis ορα. 
 
 ΧΟ. άλλ* €? TL μβν δη δρίματός γ* €χ€ί μβρος, 
 ray σά^ άκονων ου μβνβϊ τοίάσδ* άράς. 
 
 ΟΙ. φ μη *στί δρώντί τάρβθ 9 , ovS €πο 9 φοβ^ί. 
 
 ΧΟ. άλλ* ονζβλόγζων αυτόν ίστίν' οΐδβ γάρ 
 τον θειον ηδη μάντίν ώδ" αγουσιν^ ώ 
 τάληθε9 εμπεφυκεν ανθρώπων μόνω. 
 
 2go 
 
 295 
 
 Scholiast rightly adverts to the ear¬ 
 nestness and good feeling displayed 
 in this double dispatch of messen¬ 
 gers to summon Tiresias to the royal 
 presence. Cf. infr. 809. 
 
 289. μη παρών θαυμάζεται, I WOn~ 
 
 der he is not present. Cf. Matth. §. 
 555 · 2. ^ 
 
 290. κωφά. Schol. ψυχρά και ovdev 
 σαφές εχοντα, ψιθυριζόμενα. On the 
 word κωφοί, Erfurdt refers to Koray’s 
 Heliod. 11 . 152 sq. on παλαιός to 
 Schiitz ^sch. Prom. 317. Ib. επη, 
 rumours. 
 
 293. But when did (Edipus hear 
 that Laius had been murdered by 
 travellers on the road (όδοιπόρων) , or 
 as the plural covertly imphes, I 
 think, bv a traveller ? From Creon 
 GEdipus had learned that Laius 
 had been murdered by robbers, and 
 till he received that information, he 
 is dramatically supposed to have 
 known little or nothing about the 
 matter. 
 
 Ib. τον δ’ ιδόντ, the person who 
 saw the murder committed. An ano¬ 
 nymous annotator in Burton’s Pen- 
 talogue comparing v. 296, inge¬ 
 niously proposed to read τον δε 
 δρωντ : but the substitution is un¬ 
 necessary. The nominative to εχει 
 
 at V. 294. is the word οδοιπόρος, im¬ 
 plied in the plural noun felicitously 
 put for a singular one at v. 292. 
 Erfurdt has partly seen this. 
 
 295. “ άράς communiter ad άκοΰων 
 et μενει refertur, adsignificaturque 
 ferendi notio.” El. Wunder aptly 
 compares Philoct. 871. for μενειν in 
 the sense of susiinere. 
 
 297. ου^ελεγζων (gl. 6 φανέρωσών 
 αυτόν.) Instead of a participle 
 future, some of the best MSS. give 
 a participle present. Hermann, says 
 Ebner, has properly admitted the 
 participle present, and well defended 
 his choice. This reading was also 
 not unknown to the Scholiast. 
 Wunder, to justify his choice of a 
 future participle, appeals to Philoct. 
 1242: but there, as Ebner observes, 
 ουπικωλυσων was necessary, because 
 the verse preceding had κωλυσει. 
 “ Ceterum non τις εσται, sed τις εστι 
 ibi scribendum est. Quo enim du¬ 
 plex futurum ?” Cf. CEd. Col. 302. 
 Pind. 01. X. 66. 
 
 Ib. οίδε, the persons of whom you 
 spake. 
 
 299. ταΧηθεςζ=.η αλήθεια (cf. infr. 
 356.) here more particularly, pro¬ 
 phetic truth. So the personified 
 Olympia of Pindar ( 01 . VIII. 4.) is 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ^\4ΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 6S 
 
 ΟΙ. ω ττάντα ρωμών Ύβφβσία, διδακτά re ^οο 
 
 άρρητα τ ουράνια τβ και χθονοστιβη, 
 
 ΤΓολιν μβν, €1 και μη βλβπβι^, φρονβΐί δ* ομω^ 
 οΐα νοσώ σύνβστιν' ης σ€ προστάτην 
 
 termed beanoiv άληθίίας, where 
 Dissen observes, ‘^propria vox to 
 αληθές, fj άληθζία de iis, quse vere 
 iient aut evenient, vaticinatione et 
 oraculis cognoscendis.” 
 
 Ib. μόνω above all others. Cf. CEd. 
 Col. 261. 
 
 300. All eyes are now turned with 
 intense interest towards that part of 
 the stage, where the expected seer is 
 to enter. The old man enters led 
 by a fyouth, whose blooming and 
 ingenuous countenance admirably 
 contrasts with the stern and severe 
 countenance of the venerable pro¬ 
 phet himself. A golden chaplet— 
 the gift of some city, grateful for 
 the wise counsels which it had re¬ 
 ceived from him—is on his head 
 (Eurip. Phoen. 870.) ; whether the 
 staff or sceptre in his hand is of the 
 same golden colour, or of a darker 
 hue, must depend on the reader’s 
 deriving his opinion of this far- 
 famed staff from Homer (Od. XL 
 91), or from Apollodorus. (III. 6, 7.) 
 His step is slow and evidently that 
 of a reluctant person; and till warm¬ 
 ed into passion by the insults of his 
 monarch, his language is rather that 
 of a person conversing with himself, 
 than of one conscious or careful of 
 the presence in which he stands. 
 Why so much pains have been taken 
 to put the stage-play of this cha¬ 
 racter on its proper footing with the 
 reader, will be better understood, 
 when the whole dramatic genius of 
 the author himself in reference to 
 
 his times and contemporary events 
 comes before us for consideration. 
 
 Ib. πάντα νωμών, Schol. κρίνων 
 €καστα και βζβτάζων. (Plat. Cratyl. 
 4 11 , d. TO yap νωμάν και ro σκοπόν 
 ταυτόν.) JEschyl. Sept. c. T. 25. (de 
 Tiresia) iv ώσΐ νωμων και φρ^σίν 
 χρηστηρίους όρνιθας. So also in that 
 graphic description of Euripides, 
 where preparations are making for 
 the single combat between Polynices 
 and Eteocles. 
 
 μάντεις δε μηί^ εσφαζον, (μπνρονς τ 
 άκμάς 
 
 prj^eis τ €νώμων, νγρυτητ Εναντίαν, 
 άκραν τε λα/χττάδ’, η dvoiv opovs €χ€ΐ, 
 νίκης τε σήμα, και τό των ήσσωμίνων . . 
 
 Phoen. 1270. 
 
 Cf. infr. 900· 
 
 lb. bihaKTa. Cf. Pind. IV. 154· 
 
 Nem. HI. 71. 
 
 ^01. άρρητα. Cf. infr. 993. Eurip. 
 Here. F. 174. Van Dale de Idolatr. 
 
 p. 387. 
 
 Ib. χθονοστιβής (στείβω). Schol. τά 
 Iv τή yrj, τά iπiy€ιa. Dindorf com¬ 
 pares Niceph. Greg. Hist. Byz. 
 p. 695, d. άκτιστα ylveaOai πάντα τά 
 τ ουράνια τά τε χθονοστιβη και υΒραΙα 
 yevη. Compare generally with this 
 account of Tiresias, that given of 
 Apollo by Pindar. Pyth. IX. 75 sq. 
 
 3 03. oia νόσω συν^στιν. Soph. El. 
 600. κακοϊς πολλοί? ξννοΰσα. Eur. fr. 
 incert. 75, 3. ταντη τή νόσω ξννών. 
 
 Ib. προστάτην patronuin, nostrum 
 a moj'bo preesidium. Ell. 
 
 f Cf. infr. 444. Antig. 988. 1014 &c. In the Phoenissae of Euripides, the blind pro- 
 phet is conducted by his daughter (848 sq.). 
 
ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 σωτηρά τ\ ώΐ'αζ, μουνον €ξ€υρίσκομ€ΐ'. 
 Φοίβον y^p, €l καί μη κλνβις των άγγ^λωρ, 
 ΤΓβμψασίΡ ημίν άρτβπβμψβρ, βκλνσίΡ 
 μόνην αν i\0€LV τονδβ τον νοσηματο9, 
 el TOV9 κτανόντα^ Λάϊοζ^, μαθόντβ^ ev, 
 κτβίναιμβν^ η γης φνγάδας βκπβμψαίμβθα. 
 σύ δ’ ονν φθονησας μητ άπ οΙωνών φάτιν 
 μητ el τιν αλΧην μαντικής ίχ€ΐς όδον, 
 ρυσαι σβαντον καί ττόλιν, ρυσαι S e/xe, 
 ρυσαι Se τταν μίασμα του τβθνηκότος, 
 ev σοι γαρ €σμ€ν ανορα ο ωφβΧΕίν αφ ων 
 βχοι τ€ καΐ δνναιτο κάλλιστος ττόνων. 
 
 ΤΕΙΡΕΣΙΑΣ. 
 
 φβν φβν, φρονεΐν ώς δεινόν ένθα μη τέλη 
 
 3'?5 
 
 310 
 
 315 
 
 304· μοννον. On this Ionic form 
 as used by Sophocles in his trimeters, 
 see Wunder’s Excursus ad CEd. Col. 
 p. 225. Cf. Find. Pyth. IV. 404. 
 
 305. κ\ν€ΐς — άκηκοαί. Cf. (Ed. 
 Col. 33. 41. 527. 792. El. 566. cf. 
 Wund. ad Philoct. 259. 
 
 306. 7Γ€μψασίν άντ€ΤΓζμ'^(ν, made 
 answer to those whom we sent to con¬ 
 sult him. 
 
 309. ΐκπ€μ^αίμ€θα. Cf. Reisig’s 
 Enarr. p. 163. 
 
 310. σύ δ’ ονν. cf. (Ed. Col. 1444. 
 Arist. Nub. 39. Ib. φθονύν, to with¬ 
 holdfrom invidious motives. Cf. Horn. 
 Od.XI. 148. Find. Ol. XIII. 35. 
 
 Ib. άτΓ οΙωνων φάτιν, an oracular 
 response from the flight or voices of 
 birds. For construction, see Bern- 
 hardy, p. 225. Cf. infr. 395. 398.' 
 Antig. 1000. sq. also Find. Pyth. 
 VIII. 70. Nem. IX. 45. Isth. VI. 77. 
 
 3 I I . μαντικής SC. τέχνης. Tiresias 
 ap. Eurip. in Bacch. 368. μαντική 
 pev ov \(γω, j rots πράγμασιν de. 
 
 lb. 6 b 6 v, means, method. (Eurip. 
 
 Hec. 732. Phoen. 925. Hippol. 291. 
 393. Heracl. 237. See also Dissen 
 Comment, in Find. p. 20.) Ib. 6χ€ί? 
 scis mente. Ell. 
 
 312. The Scholiast refers to the 
 delicacy of (Edipus, naming himself 
 last, as of least importance. 
 
 313. ρυσαι {purify) δε τταν μίασμα 
 τ. τ. The poet evidently speaks by a 
 ζζυγμα, joining two different senses 
 to the same verb, a mode not un¬ 
 common in Pindar. Cf. Ol. I. 141. 
 (where eXev signifies conqueredCEno- 
 maus, and acquired possession q/Hip- 
 podamia). Pyth. IV. 185. VIII. 26. 
 Nem. IV. 46. 110. X. 46 &c. Com¬ 
 pare (νρίσκ€ΐν infr. 440, i. 
 
 314 . €v σοι ΐσμ^ν, all our hope is 
 
 placed in you. (Ed. Col. 247. h νμΐν 
 κ^ίμΐθα. 392. iv σοι κ. τ. ε. Eurip. Al- 
 cest. 279* δ* €σμζν και ζην και μη. 
 
 Ib. avhpa ώφελεΐν κ. τ. ε. That a 
 man profit others to the utmost extent 
 of his possession and power is &c. 
 "With αφ’ ων εχοι cf. Electr. 1378, 
 
 316. φρον€Ϊν ως heivov, (Cf. Eur. 
 
ΟίΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 65 
 
 λν€ί φροι/ονρτί. ταυτα γαρ κάΚώ^ eyco 
 €ΐδω9 διωλβσ’ ον γαρ αν δβυρ Ικόμην. 
 
 ΟΙ. τί & €στίν ; €09 αθυμο 9 ^Ισ^Χηλνθας. 
 
 ΤΕ. αφ€9 μ^ €9 oiKOV9' ραστα γαρ το σόν Τ€ σν 
 κάγω διοίσω τονμον, ην ίμο\ ττίθρ, 
 
 ΟΙ. οϋτ evvopL €νπα9 ovre προσφιλή iroXeL 
 
 ΤΎ}δ\ η σ βθρβψβ, τηνδ' άποστβρών φάτιν. 
 ΤΕ. ορώ γαρ ονδβ σοΙ το σον φώνημ! ίδν 
 
 7Γρο9 καιρόν* ώί ούν μη^ βγω ταυτον ττάθω. 
 
 320 
 
 325 
 
 Phoen. 968 sq.) Tiresias speaks a 
 language, which far higher autho¬ 
 rity has confirmed. When St. 
 John in the Apocalypse is ordered 
 to eat, i. e. thoroughly consider and 
 digest, the βιβλιαρίδιορ or prophetic 
 codicil (X. 9.), he found it as he 
 was informed it would be, sweet as 
 honey in his mouth, but hitter in his 
 stomach. “ The knowledge of future 
 things,” as an excellent annotator 
 remarks, “ at first was pleasant, but 
 the sad contents of the little book 
 afterwards filled his soul with 
 sorrow.” 
 
 316—17· Τίλ»; \v€i, i. e. XvaireXei. 
 Electr. 1005· λτ5« yap ημάς ovdev ov8* 
 ^ττωφβλα. Ib. φρονονντι part, for inf. 
 cf. Heindorf. ad Plat. Phsedon. 
 p. 250. Erf. 
 
 3 18. SiwXeaagl. (ΤΤΐΧαθόμην, forgot. 
 Cf. Monk ad Eur. Hippol. 391. 
 
 Ib. ov yap av devp' Ικόμην SC. el μή 
 δίώλβσα. So sup. 82, 3. where the 
 elhpse is to be supplied from 80, i. 
 but the simpler mode is to insert the 
 word otherwise. Cf. CEd. Col. 125. 
 Trach. 1118. 
 
 319. ci)s αθνμος (Schol. λβλυτΓ»^- 
 /ieVoi). See Ellendt II. p. 1000. 
 
 321. ην e/iot πίθη i. e. by allowing 
 him to sro home. 
 
 321. hia(f)epeiv (fut. διοΙσω), to en¬ 
 dure. 
 
 322. προσφιλές. Ebner proposes 
 from his MSS. to read προσφιλή, as 
 more in harmony with the preceding 
 plural ewopa. 
 
 3 23. τηνδ' άποστ€ρων φάτιν. Schol. 
 not declaring or explaining this ora¬ 
 cular response. άποστ€ρών celans, 
 fraudans. El. 
 
 324. TO σον φώνημα. The reader 
 who compares sup. 236 sq. and infr. 
 450. will readily see what is meant. 
 All those fearful invocations and im¬ 
 precations on the part of CEdipus, 
 Tiresias, though absent, had known 
 by his preternatural powers. 
 
 325. προς καιρόν, opportunely, sea¬ 
 sonably, benefcially. Cf. Ell. in voc. 
 and Pind. Scol. fr. 2. (Dissen’s Edit.) 
 
 lb. At the conclusion of this 
 verse, Tiresias evidently offers to go 
 Saway, (cf. verse following;) had not 
 the stop therefore better be removed 
 from πάθω, and an aposiopesis be 
 allowed } This will answer all pur¬ 
 poses better, I think, than by ren¬ 
 dering ωί, utinam. 
 
 Ib. ταντόν SC. TO άκαιρα Xeyeiv. Ill 
 preceding verse ιόν is rendered by 
 the Scholiast βξιόν. 
 
 S Cf. Eurip. Phoen. 909, where scriptural readers are strongly reminded of the final 
 parting between the first Israelite king, and tlie prophet Samuel. 
 
66 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. μη ττρος Θ^ων ψροΐ'ώΐ' γ άττοστραφηΫ, eVet 
 7ravT€9 σβ προσκυρουμ^ν oXS Ικτηριοί. 
 
 ΤΕ. ττίντβς γάρ ου φροΡ€Ϊτ. βγω δ’ —ού μη ποτβ 
 ταμ ώς αν βϊπω μη τα σ βκφηνω κακά. 
 
 ΟΙ. τί φη9 ; ζυνβώως ού φράσβί^^ άλλ’ ίννοβΙς 
 ημάς ττροδονναί καΙ καταφθβϊραι ττόλιν ; 
 
 1 L·. βγω ουτ βμαυτον οντ€ σ αλγννω. tl ταντ 
 άλλως βλβγχβις ; ού γάρ αν ττύθοώ μου. 
 
 ΟΙ. ούκ^ ώ κακών κάκιστβ^—καΙ γάρ αν πβτρου 
 φύσιν συ γ* οργάνβιας,—βζβρβΐς ττοτβ, 
 άλλ’ ώδ* άτβγκτος κατβλβύτητος φανβΐ ; 
 
 330 
 
 335 
 
 326-7. The Scholiast, (whom 
 Brunck follows) assigns these two 
 verses to the Chorus, an opinion to 
 which Wunder and Dindorf in his 
 annotations accede. Elmsley, Herm. 
 and Ebner prefer the text as here 
 given. 
 
 326. φρονων, knowing, άποστραφρς. 
 Cf. infr. 431. 
 
 327 . ττροσκννονμίν Ικτηριοι, vene- 
 rabundi supplicamur. El. That this 
 plural is no bar to the two verses 
 being spoken by GEdipus, cf. CEd. 
 Col. 1327. as Ebner has seen. 
 
 328. 9. All the resources of 
 syntax and punctuation have been 
 brought to bear upon this trying 
 passage by the CEdipuses of gram¬ 
 mar, but in vain. What is meant, 
 is evident enough—the seer is still 
 determined on inflexible silence, and 
 why ? because . he may be led into 
 words, too clearly betraying the ills 
 which await the doomed and des¬ 
 tined one before him. The punc¬ 
 tuation, hazarded in the text, has 
 been adopted to meet the general 
 character of Tiresias, which fluctu¬ 
 ates between pity and resentment. 
 
 330. The passions of the irritable 
 monarch are beginning to rise, but 
 
 respect for the high character and 
 sacred office of Tiresias still reins in 
 his tongue. 
 
 332. €γω oil, a disyllable. Cf. 
 infr. 1002. CEd. Col. 939. 998. 
 Antiq. 458. &c. 
 
 Ib. ταΐιτ, thus: cf. Aristoph. Nub. 
 Elmsley observes that he has noticed 
 no similar elision at the end of a 
 verse in the tragic writings. 
 
 333. άλλως {fo no beneficial pur¬ 
 pose) Τλ€γχεις (inquire). The seer 
 pauses, and then speaks with com¬ 
 passionate earnestness. 
 
 334. και yap k. t. e. The storm, 
 though ready to burst, is again de¬ 
 layed by this little parenthesis. 
 
 335· opyaveias (opyaiveiv) gl. els 
 οργηρ κινησείας, provoke to anger. 
 Brunck, as a similar hyperbole, com¬ 
 pares Plant. Poen. I. 2. 77. Nain 
 ilia mulier lapidem silicem subigere, 
 ut se amet. potest. 
 
 336. areyKTOs (τeyyω) gl. Ebn. 
 MSS. άμάλακτος, unsoftened. ScHOL. 
 άσνμπάθης καΙ αδάκρυτος. Eur. Here. 
 F. 833. areyKTOv σνλλαβονσα καρδίαν. 
 Arist. Thes. I 047 · μοίρας 
 
 areyKTe δαίμων. 
 
 Ib. ατελεύτητος gl. άπρακτος, im¬ 
 practicable. 
 
ΟίΔίΠΟΤΣ 1 ΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 ΤΕ. οργήν βμβμψω την βμην' την σην S ομου 
 ναίουσαν ού Kareides, άλλ’ e/ze xj/eyei^, 
 
 ΟΙ. r/s* γαρ rocavr άν ούκ άν οργίζοίτ ίττη 
 κλνων, a νυν συ την& άτίμάζ€ΐ 9 ττόλιν ; 
 
 1 JCi. η^€ί γαρ αυτα^ καν βγω (τιγή στβγω. 
 
 ΟΙ, ουκονν a γ η^βι και σβ γρη λβγβιν βμοί. 
 
 ΤΕ. ούκ αν τΓβρα φράσαιμι. προς τάδ\ βΐ θβλβίς, 
 θυμού δί οργής ητις άγριωτάτη. 
 
 ΟΙ. καΐ μην παρήσω γ ούδβν, ώς οργής βχω, 
 ατΓβρ ζυνίημ , ϊσθί γαρ δοκών βμοί 
 καί ξυμφυτβΰσαι τοϋργον, βίργάσθαι θ\ οσον 
 
 67 
 
 340 
 
 345 
 
 337 · οργήν. The igno¬ 
 
 rance of CEdipus as to his real 
 situation, and the preternatural 
 knowledge of Tiresias, lead here to 
 an equivoque of language, the diffi¬ 
 culty of which is increased by the 
 latitude which the poet allows to 
 his possessive pronouns. Under¬ 
 stand generally—“ the anger, to 
 which I excite, by maintaining silence, 
 is a source of crimination with you : 
 but the anger and indignation to 
 which ?jou excite, or rather will ex¬ 
 cite hereafter, is hidden from you, 
 though its cause (viz. Jocasta) abides 
 under the same roof witli you, and 
 is the companion of your table and 
 your bed.” See the explanations of 
 the Scholiast and also of Eustathius 
 755 » 14· 
 
 338. Kareldes. κάτοιδας. Both. 
 Ebn. cum MS. 
 
 339. CEdipus, not understanding 
 the covert meaning of Tiresias, 
 answers in a widely different sense. 
 
 340. άτιμάζβιν. Referring to note 
 216. and comparing Antig. *544. 
 μητοί . . μ' άτιμάσης το μη ού J θανύν 
 re συν σο\ τον θανόντα θ' αγνίσαι, I 
 understand : (hi a) through which 
 WordSj ατιμάζεις Trjvdc πόλιν, you rob 
 
 this state of a right, to which she has 
 a claim. Cf. infr. 789, 909. 
 
 341. rj^ei (they will happen, they 
 will take place, they will have their 
 oracular fulfilment) αύτα (of their, 
 own accord, without my proclaiming 
 them). Tiresias speaks hesitatingly, 
 and almost on the point of yielding. 
 a in the following verse emphatic. 
 
 343. ovK av nepa φράσαιμι, my lips 
 are closed, I will not utter another 
 
 _ t 
 
 word. (Tiresias still speaking to him¬ 
 self, butwith his mind now made up.) 
 
 Ib. 7 Γ pos Ta8€=7rp6s τούτα, where¬ 
 fore. (Addresses himself to CEdipus.) 
 cf. infr. 426. 
 
 344 · θυμού di οργής — οργίζου 
 οργήν, (cf. Wund.) Let your anger 
 assume the most violent form. 
 
 Ib. ητίς άγριωτάτη. Erfurdt com¬ 
 pares Aisch. S. c. Th. 65. καιρόν οστις 
 ωκιστος. Pers. 830. κόσμον οστις ev- 
 πρ^πης. Cicero in Pison. c. 21. poenas 
 — eas quae gravissimse sunt. 
 
 345. και μην παρησω γ' ούδεν (/ 
 will spare no words) &>ς οργής εχω 
 (Matth. §.337) present state 
 
 of indignation. 
 
 347. ξυμφυτ€ύσαι, to have been 
 a joint partner or concocter of the 
 deed (Creon being the supposed as- 
 F 2 
 
68 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 μη χ^ρσί καιρών' el δ’ βτύγχανβς βλβπων, 
 καΙ τοϋργορ αν σου tout βφην eivai μόνου. 
 
 ΤΕ. αληθβς ; Ιννόττω σε τω κηρύγματί 35° 
 
 ωττερ ΤΓροβΐπας όμμβνβίν^ Ka(j) ημόρα^ 
 τη^ νυν προσαυδάν prjre τοιίσδε μητ €μ€, 
 ώί ovTL γης τησδ* άνοσίω μίάστορι, 
 
 ΟΙ, ούτως άναιΒώς βζβκίνησας τόδε 
 
 το ρήμα ; καί που τούτο φβύζβσθαι δοκβΐς ; 355 
 
 ΤΕ. πεφβυγα' ταΚτιθΙς γαρ Ισχυον τρόφω. 
 
 sociate). The dative usually accom¬ 
 panies compounds of this form. 
 Electr. 986—7. συμπόνα πατρί, σνγ- 
 καμν άδ^'Κφω. jEsch. S. C. Th. 598. 
 ξνν€ΐσβάί πΧόΐον — νανταισι θίρμοΐς. 
 6ιΟ &C. &C. 
 
 347~^· οσον μ. χ. κ. only not to 
 have perpetrated by actual murder. 
 Trach. 1214. οσον y av αυτός μη 
 πυτιψαύων χ(ροϊν. 
 
 349· νοϋργον. here, perpetration 
 of the deed. Aj. 116. χωρω πρός 
 epyov. 
 
 350. αληθές; The extreme vio¬ 
 lence of GEdipus allows the prophetic 
 seer no longer to observe the 
 guarded silence which he has hither¬ 
 to kept. Folding perhaps his arms, 
 while he pronounces his hitter and 
 ironical indeed! (cf. Antig. 758. 
 Aristoph. passim), he suddenly un¬ 
 locks them, and then in a tone of 
 vehement solemnity, utters the aw¬ 
 ful declaration in the text. 
 
 Ib. όννόπω σβ, I enjoin, I command 
 you. Elmsley compares Aj. 1047. 
 οΰτος, ae φωνω rovbe τον νεκρόν χ€ροϊν 
 I Μ ζηγκομίζ^ιν, αλλ’ eav όπως 
 Phil. ΙΟΙ. λβγω σ εγώ δόλω Φιλο- 
 κτητην λαβ^Ίν. That a dative may be 
 used after such verbs, cf. (Ed. Col. 
 840. hence the change in construc¬ 
 tion infr. 353, 
 
 350—1. τώ κηρύγματι ippeveiv, tO 
 abide by your own edict. 
 
 352. προσαυδάν, ScHOL. προσφθέγ- 
 yeadai. 
 
 353· μιάστορι for ovra μιάστορα. 
 Erfurdt compares Plato 5 Rep. 453, 
 d. ούκουν και ημΊν ν^υστόον . . . δελ- 
 φΊνά τιν ΐΧπίζοντας ημάς υποΧαβζίν αν. 
 
 354· (after a pause of astonish¬ 
 ment and in a voice choking with 
 rage.) “ βκκινάν excitare, de motu; 
 tralato dictum de voce.” Ell. This 
 I think does not convey the full 
 force of the word, which like the 
 simple verb Kive7v (cf. (Ed. Col. 
 624. 1526. Antig. 1060,1.) no doubt 
 bore the sense of uttering, divulging, 
 what religious considerations ought 
 to have made a man keep silent. 
 
 355 · τΌΐιτο φβύζζσθαι, to escape 
 punishment for this. · 
 
 356. πε'φευγα. The figure of the 
 venerable prophet expands into al¬ 
 most preternatural grandeur, as he 
 utters this at the top of his voice ; 
 and then adds, in the beautiful 
 translation of Dale, for “ the might 
 of truth is mine !” 
 
 Ib. ταΚηθίς = η άΚηθαα. So Phil. 
 83. TO άναώίς = η avaibeia. (Ed. Col. 
 1125. TO εύσε/3ε5 = η (υσίβαα. 1137 · 
 τουπΐ€ΐΚ€ς = ή όπείκαα. 
 
 lb. Ισχΰον, valens. Ell. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 69 
 
 ΟΙ. ττρος τον διδαχθείς·; ον γάρ εκ γε της τέχνης, 
 
 ΤΕ. ττρος σον. σν γάρ μ άκοντα προντρέψω λέγειν, 
 οι, ΤΓοΐον λόγον ; λέγ* ανθις, ώς μάλλον μάθω, 
 
 ΤΕ. ονχι ζννηκας ττρόσθεν ; η 'κπειρά λέγειν ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ονχ ώστε γ είττεΐν γνωστόν' άλλ' ανθις φράσον, 
 
 ΤΕ. φονέα σε φημι τάνδρος ον ζητείς κνρεΐν, 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ* ον TL χαίρων δίς γε ττημονάς ερεΐς, 
 
 Γρτ;ι V Λ'' Vxvjf/»» fy ./ 
 
 1 x!i. ειττω τι οητα καλλ , lv οργιξη ττλεον ; 
 
 ΟΙ. όσον γε χρηζΕίς' ώς μάτην είρησεται, 3^5 
 
 ΤΕ. λεληθέναι σε φημΙ σνν τοΐς φίλτάτοίς 
 
 lb. τρέφω = βχω. ScHOL. Cf. Diss. 
 ad Pyth. I. 20. 
 
 357 * του δώαχθβΙς SC. to άλτ;- 
 
 Ofs. (Sneeringly and in secret re¬ 
 ference to Creon, whom he suspects 
 to be the suborner of Tiresias.) 
 
 358. σου strongly emphatic. 
 Then compassionately ; “ for you 
 
 have compelled me to speak against 
 my will.” ττρουτρεφω gl. παρζκίνησας. 
 
 360. €κπ€φα X^yeiv ; the meaning 
 of this and the subsequent answer 
 of (Edipus were perhaps better con¬ 
 veyed to the audience by the tone 
 and gesture of the latter, than by his 
 words. I understand them as fol¬ 
 lows : “ Do you put me to the proof/’ 
 asks Tiresias, “as to what I can say?” 
 “ No,” replies (Edipus sarcastically; 
 ovK €κπ€ΐρώμαι οντωί Xeyeip ώστε y' 
 elnelv yvωστov, “ I do not put you to 
 the proof for the purpose of saying 
 what we are already cognizant of, 
 but I wish it repeated, in order that 
 we may admire it’s matchless impu¬ 
 dence and folly.” Having given 
 what appears to me the general 
 tenor of these two difficult verses, 
 I add the explanations of preceding 
 commentators. Brunck : sermo~ 
 nemne meum tentas ? i. e. experirisne, 
 an iierum eadem tibi sim dicturus P 
 Erf. Herm. and Ell. tentasne me. 
 
 ut revera dicam? Wund. an expe~ 
 riris, num dicam ? quo Tiresias hoc 
 significet: an rogitando quid dicam, 
 id studes efficere, ut verum non 
 dicam ? On the word (κπαρωμαι cf. 
 nos ad Aristoph. Eq. T197. 
 
 361. ούχ (supply from preceding 
 verse σννηκα. El.) 
 
 Ib. γνωστού, id quod potest nosci; 
 γνωτόν, notum. Solger translates the 
 two verses: 
 
 Tei. Begriffst du nicht mein Reden, 
 
 Oder priifst du mich ? 
 
 (Ed. Nicht dass ich klar es wiisste. 
 
 Wieder sag’ es drum. 
 
 362. Peremptorem te esse {κυρά,ν) 
 dico viri, cujus peremptorem quseris. 
 Johns. 
 
 363. χαίρων, With impunity. Cf. 
 infr. 368. Antig. 759. Phil. 1299. 
 frequent in Aristoph. 
 
 Ib. πημονας gl. Xoibopcas. 
 
 364. ειπω, shall I speak (Subj. in- 
 terrog. Cf. (Ed. Col. 26. 480. 828. 
 Antig. 554. Trach. 390. Aj. 468. 
 1312. Phil. 963. 974. 1352.), Ti 
 άλλο {something else) ? Brunck in¬ 
 cautiously reads ri. 
 
 365. (with affected ease.) 
 
 366. συν Tois φιΧτάτοΐί SC. his 
 mother. Cf. Eur. Here. F. 514. Infr. 
 1184, (Edipus says, ξυν oU r ού χρην 
 μ όμιΧών, ovs τε μ* ονκ εδει κτανών, 
 
 F 3 
 
ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΤΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΤΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΤΕ. 
 
 αίσχισθ' ομιλουντ\ ού8' οραν \u el κακόν, 
 ή KOU γ€γΐ]θω9 ταντ aei Xe^eiv δοκ^Ϊ9 ; 
 
 €Lir€p τί y icrrl τη9 άΧηθ^ίας aOevos* 
 αΧΚ €στί, ττΧην σοί. σο\ Se τοντ ονκ βστ , eTrei 
 τυφΧος τά τ ώτα τον re νουν τά τ ομματ el. 
 σν δ’ αθΧίός ye ταντ bveώlζωv, a σο\ 
 ovde),s 09 ov)(L τώνδ* oveidLei τάχα, 
 μιας Tpe(l)eL ττρος ννκτος, Sare μήτ 6/xe 
 μητ άΧΧον, οστΐ9 φώ? ορα, βΧαψαί ττοτ άν. 
 ού yap ae μοΐρα irpos y ίμου Treaeiv^ eireL 
 ικανός ΆττόΧΧων, ω ταδ* ίκττράζαι μeXeί. 
 KpeovT09^ η σου ταντ a ra^ev ρήματα ; ο 
 
 Κρ 4 ων be σοι ττημ ovbev, άλλ* αυτός συ σοί. 
 ώ ττλοδτβ καΙ τυραννΙ και τέχνη τέχνης 
 
 37 ° 
 
 375 
 
 :8ο 
 
 367· iva κακόν. Cf.inf.4i3· Αί·3^9· 
 
 368. γ€γηάώί. Cf. Electr. 1432. 
 
 371. (A deep sensation through 
 the theatre, the auditors knowing 
 that all here objected on the part of 
 (Edipus to Tiresias is applicable to, 
 or will soon be applicable to himself 
 —deaf at present to admonition, and 
 soon to be as dark of eye, as he is 
 now dark of mind. I spare the 
 reader the usual quotation from 
 Ennius.) The calm and half com¬ 
 passionate reply of Tiresias provokes 
 (Edipus into a new ebullition of 
 rage. 
 
 Ib. τά r’ ωτα. The ears of Tire¬ 
 sias had, as we have already seen, 
 a preternatural acuteness. Hence 
 vEschylus, when speaking of him 
 (Sept, C. T. 25.) fV ώσΐ νωμωρ και 
 φρΐσίν. 
 
 374· τρεφα ττρος ννκτός (gl. 
 
 διόλου εν τω σκότω Βιατρίβεις). Thou 
 art all darkness, bred and nurtured 
 in it. What light then of prophetic 
 truth hast thou, that I or any else, 
 
 who see the outward light, should 
 suifer injury from thee ? ’Ε/ιου in the 
 verse following, emphatic. 
 
 377. Ικανός εκπράττειν. Apollo is 
 quite competent to give effect to the 
 declaration made from his shrine, 
 that the murderer of Laius shall be 
 punished. 
 
 Ib. τάδβ, sc. TO πεσειν σε. 
 
 378. τάξενρηματα. Cf.^sch. Sept, 
 c. Theb. 646. For the friendship 
 between Creon and Tiresias cf. 
 Antig. 990 sq. Eurip. Phoen. 859 
 sq. (CEdipus speaks after a slight 
 pause.) 
 
 379. Κρε'ων δε. As instances of 
 δε indicating objection to interro¬ 
 gations, Erfurdt gives Trach. 732. 
 CEd. Col. 395. Aj. 951. Eurip. Or. 
 383. (Tiresias has no bodily eyes to 
 look out upon Creon ; but the eyes 
 of his soul as it were here penetrate 
 into him, and more in pity than in 
 anger.) , 
 
 380. πλοντε. The wealth which 
 CEdipus had gained in conjunction 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 71 
 
 ύπ€ρφ€ρουσα τώ πολυζηλω βίω, 
 
 οσο 9 παρ ύμίν ο φθόνος φυλ ^σβται, 
 
 el τησδό γ* αρχής οννβχ, ην όμοί πόλις 
 
 δωρητον, ονκ αΐτητον, βίσβχβίρισβν^ 
 
 ταύτης Κρόων 6 πιστός, ονζ <^PXVS‘ φίλος, 3^5 
 
 λάθρα μ ύπβλθων ό κβαλ€Ϊΐί ιμ€ίρβται, 
 
 νφβΙς μάγον TOi0v^e μηχανορράφον, 
 
 with the hand of Jocasta, may be in¬ 
 ferred from one or two other ex¬ 
 pressions which drop from others 
 or himself. See infr. 455. 1070. 
 and cf. 541, 2. See also foot-note 
 to V. 487. 
 
 Ib. Tvpavvls, absolute power. 
 
 380—1. τέχνη τέχνης νπ^ρφέρονσα. 
 Of the many interpretations set upon 
 this expression, the most correct ap¬ 
 pears to me to be that of Musgrave, 
 who understands by it, political and 
 regal science. In illustration of this 
 opinion the learned writer quotes 
 Philo Judaeus de constitutione Prin- 
 cipis II. 362. and Xen. Mem. IV. 
 462. A more appropriate illus¬ 
 tration may, I think, be derived from 
 the Philoctetes of Sophocles, where 
 the Chorus, i. e. the attendants on 
 the princely Neoptolemus after ask¬ 
 ing his advice on a critical emer¬ 
 gency, observe, τέχνα yap τέχνας 
 έτέρας 7 Γρονχ€ΐ | καΧ γνωμα παρ' οτω το 
 θβίον j Aios σκηπτρον ^άνάσσ^ται,, Phi- 
 loct. 138. 
 
 38.. υπ€ρψέρον(Γα excelling, cum 
 gen. rei et pers. Herodot. VIII. 138. 
 IX. 96. Thucyd. I. 81. Xen. de Rep. 
 Lac. 15.8. Ailian Var. Hist. I. 3. 
 
 Ib. τώ ποΧυζηλω βίω. Placing a 
 comma at νπξρφέρονσα and removing 
 it from the word ^ βίω, I translate 
 generally, “ exposed as life generally 
 is to envy, how close a guard does 
 envy keep on you three, viz. wealth, 
 power, and political wisdom.” 
 Having explained what appears to 
 me the sense of this passage, I sub¬ 
 join the opinions of my predecessors. 
 Brunck: ars arte potentior ad vitce 
 felicitatem. Erfurdt: ars artem su~ 
 perans vitce felicitate. Hermann ; 
 ars ante alias artes eniinens in hac 
 diiiersissirnis studiis plena vita. 
 
 385. ονξ αρχής φίλος. Wunder 
 thinks this said ironically. But why 
 so } It is clear from v. 597 sq. that 
 the most friendly relations had ori¬ 
 ginally subsisted between CEdipus 
 and Creon. 
 
 386. λάθρα μ' υπίλθων. υπέρχ^σθαι, 
 a term of the palaestra, used of a 
 person “ insidians et clandestinos 
 dolos tentans.” El. Phil. 1007. οίός μ 
 νπήλβζς. Dindorf compares Aristoph. 
 Vesp. 463. apa δήτ’ ονκ αντόδηλα τοΐς 
 πένησιν ή τνραννΧς | ως λάθρα έλάνθαν' 
 νπιονσά μζ. 
 
 387. μάγον, juggler. Erfurdt com- 
 
 h That Donner, (an excellent translator of Sophocles, as far as I have seen from his 
 Antigone and Philoctetes,) understood the words in this sense, is evident from his version— 
 denn hoch ragt vor andei'n Kunsten ja 
 Eines Koniges Kunst, 
 
 Der, king waltend, Zeus’ gottliches Zepter lenkt. 
 i These remarks were made long before Wunder’s “ CEdipus” came into my hands, 
 where I find this opinion anticipated. From the same writer I find that by Matthiae 
 the same interpretation, and for the same reason, is set upon the words τέχνη τέχνης 
 v 7 rep(f>. as by Musgrave. 
 
 F 4 
 
72 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 SoXlou αγύρτην^ οστίί iu τοίς Kepbeatv 
 μόνον δβδορκβ, την τέχνην S βφν τυφλός. 
 
 €7Γ€ί, φβρ* €ΐπ€, τΓου συ μάνης el σαφής ; 39® 
 
 ττως ουχ^ ου η ραψωόος evUao ην κνων^ 
 
 ηΰδας Τί τοΐσΒ' άστοΐσιν βκλντήρων ; 
 
 καίτοί τό y dlvLyp, ούχι τούττιόντος ήν 
 
 άνδρος δί€ί7Γ€Ϊν, άλλα μαντβίας βδβί' 
 
 ήν οϋτ άπ οΙωνών συ ττρονφάνης βχων 395 
 
 οντ βκ θβών του yvwTOv' 
 
 pares Zosimus I, 688. μάγοις re και 
 ayvpTais ^σχόλακώς. Cf. Ruhnk. ad 
 Tim. p. lo.' 
 
 Ib. vipeis. gl. ap. Ebn. evbiis, νπο- 
 βά\\ων. 
 
 388. άγνρτης (αγείρω, Viendicando 
 colligens), trarnper, impostory con¬ 
 jurer. Plat. 2. Rep. 364, b. άγύρται 
 de και pAvreis iir\ πλουσίων θυρας lovres 
 πείθονσιν ως εστι παρα σφίσι 8νναμις 
 (κ θ^ων ποριζομίνη βνσίαις re και eVw- 
 δαί?, ei re η αδίκημά του yeyovev αυτοΰ 
 η πpoyόvωv, άκβισθαι /zed’ ηδονών re και 
 
 , ίορτών^ idv re τιν (χ^θρον πημηναι 
 €θίλτ}, ftera σμικρών δαπανών ομοίως 
 δίκαιον αδικώ βλάφαν, €πayωyaΐς τισΐ 
 και καταδίσμοις τούς θβούς, ως φασι, 
 π^ίθοντίς σφισιν ύπηρ^τ^Ιν. See also 
 Van Dale de Idol. ς8. 291. 43 λ. 
 
 388-9. iv τοίς κίρδ^σιν μόνον δί- 
 
 δορκζ. Erfurdt compares Cicero' Tusc. 
 Disputt. V. 39. de Cn. tE. Aufidio 
 cseco : videbat in Uteris. 
 
 389. την τόχνην, gl. κατά. Ebn. 
 
 390. eVei, otherwise, if it is not so. 
 lb. σαφής. On this word in reference 
 to the mantic art, cf. infr. 1011. 
 perhaps here added in contemptuous 
 reference to sup. 286. 
 
 Ib. που. I understand, to what 
 purpose ? so 1 Cor. i. 20. πού σοφός ; 
 που ypaμμaτeύς ; πού ζυζητητής τού 
 αΙώνος τούτου ; 
 
 άλλ* Jyco μόλων, 
 
 391· ραφωδος (^ράπτω, ωδη), car- 
 mina texens. See a learned ex¬ 
 planation of the word in Passow. 
 
 Ib. κύων, the Sphinx. Schol. 
 κύνα δΐ αυτήν διά το άρπατικόν. Cf. 
 nos ad Arist. Ran, 1249. Σφίγγα 
 δυσαμύριον πρύτανιν κύνα. Brunck 
 refers to Eurip. Here. f. 1277. Apol¬ 
 lonius II. 289. Soph. Electr. 1387. 
 Erfurdt to JEsch. Choeph. 1051. 
 
 392. αύδάν as a verb applicable to 
 fatidic purposes occurs also infr. 
 568. Trach. 170. τήν πάλαιάν φηyov 
 αύδήσαί ποτέ. Pind. Nem. X. 150.166. 
 
 393. aXviypa. Pind. frag. Incert. 
 62. aiviypa παρθύνου | όξ aypiav γνά¬ 
 θων. (Diss. Edit.). For an allusion 
 to the enigma in Hesiod, see Goettl. 
 p. 180. Eurip. Phoen. 48. 50. 1064. 
 1702.1745. 
 
 Ib. τούπιόντος, ScHOL. roC τυχόν¬ 
 τος, an ordinary person. CEd.C0l.752. 
 τούπιόντος άρπάσαι. Eur. H.F. 1248. 
 
 394. δι^ιπβιν, Hesych. διηyήσaσθaι. 
 Cf. infr. 854. Trach. 22. 
 
 Ib. μαντεία, real inspiration. 
 
 395. απ’ οιωνών. Eurip. Suppl. 222. 
 ά δ’ εστ’ Άσημα, κού σαφώς yιyvώσκoμev 
 
 1 είς πύρ βλεποντες, και κατά σπλά¬ 
 χνων πτυχάς, | μάντεις προσημαίνουσιν, 
 οιωνών τ απο. 
 
 395“^· yvωτov seems equi¬ 
 
 valent to εyvωκεvaι. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 73 
 
 6 μηδ^ΐ' ΟΙδίττου^, έπαυσα vlv^ 
 
 γρώμγ) κνρησας ούδ* άπ οΙωνων μαθών* 
 w δη συ iretpas €κβαλ€Ϊι/, δοκών θρόνοί9 
 παραστατησβίν τοΐς ίίρβοντβίοις ττβλα?. 
 κλαίων δοκ€Ϊ 9 μοι καΐ συ χώ συνθ^ις τάδ^ 
 άγηλατησειν' el δβ μη 'δ6κ€ΐ9 γ€ρων 
 
 elvaL, τταθων εγνω9 αν οΐά irep 
 A(J. ημιν μ€ν €ίκα^ουσι και τα τουο €πη 
 
 οργή Xeke^OaL καΙ τα σ\ ΟΙδίπου, δοκ€Ϊ. 
 θ€ί ο ου τοωυτων^ αλλ οττωί τα του σβου 
 μαντβΐ* άριστά λύσομβν, τ6δ€ σκοπβΐν, 
 ΎΈ^ el καί τυpavveΐ 9 , ί^ισωτ^ον το γουν^ 
 ϊσ avTiXe^ai* τουδε γαρ κάγω κρατώ, 
 
 ψ 
 
 ου γάρ τι σοΙ ζώ δοΰΧο^, άΧΧα Αοζία’ 
 
 400 
 
 405 
 
 410 
 
 398· Ύνωμη κνρησας, cogitatione 
 adsecutus, i. e. quod intellexi ejus 
 enigma meopte ingenio. Wund. 
 γνώμη appears to me here as else¬ 
 where, to imply the human intellect 
 as opposed to divine inspiration, 
 cf. infr. 1086. On ουδέ c£. Matth. . 
 
 4a iWivW tiML 
 
 399 — 400 . apovoLS Ίταραστατησίΐν — 
 
 neXas. ^Esch. Sept. C. Th. 666. οϊμαί 
 VLV αντω vvv παραστατ^Ιν niXas. 
 
 401. κΧαίων, to your sorrow, cf. 
 
 infr. 1152. Antig. 754. κΧαίων φρ€~ 
 νώσ^ις.'^^ ^ 
 
 Ib. 6 σννθίΐί τάδε, sc. Creon. cf. 
 sup. 378. Jacobs compares Demosth. 
 de Coron. p. 275. Eurip. Ion. 382. 
 
 402. άγηΧατ€'ίν (ayoff, ε’λαυι/ω), to 
 drive into banishment as a person 
 stained with guilt and pollution. 
 (Gl. ε/χε ^ηΧονότι ον Xeyeis <f)ovea elvai.) 
 Herodot. V. 72. dniKopevos δε άγη- 
 λατεεχ ίπτακόσια Απιστία 'Αθηναίων. 
 On the aspirate, cf.EL. and Schneid. 
 p. 18. (CEdipus utters this word with 
 an ironical sneer (cf. sup. 100.), then 
 
 proceeds with great earnestness and 
 gravity of speech.) 
 
 403. παθών, to your cost, with bitter 
 suffering. 
 
 Ib. φρονεΊς, meditate. 
 
 405. Οιδιπου. Cf. (Ed. Col. 557. 
 1346. 
 
 407. Xvaopev, solvamus, i. e. imple- 
 amus ambiguitate sua difficilia. Ell. 
 
 408. €ξίσωτ€ον sc. ε/χοι. ScHOL. 
 
 409. ϊσ’ άντΐΧίξαι. The political 
 Ισηγορία, on which the Athenians so 
 much prided themselves (Xen. de 
 Rep. Athen. c. i. 12.) is here evi¬ 
 dently alluded to. Cf. Eurip. Phoen. 
 402 sq. 546 sq. 
 
 Ib. τοίδε sc. TO (ξισοϋ Xiyeiv. ScHOL. 
 cf. infr. 1158. κρατώ, am master of. 
 
 410. σοι δοδλοί. Eurip. Here. 
 F. 1413. ζώ σοι ταπεινός; 
 
 Ib. Λοζία : name of Apollo first 
 used by Herodotus (I. 91.) Passow 
 derives the word from Χοξυς, in allu¬ 
 sion to the crookedness and ob¬ 
 scurity of oracular responses j 
 Doederlin from λέγω, which word is 
 
74 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ωστ ού K/jeo^ros* προστάτου γβγράψομαι. 
 λβγω δ\ €π€ίδη καί τυφλόν μ ώνββισας' 
 συ κα\ δόδορκα^, κού βλόπβίί ϊν d κακού, 
 
 ^ ' --ί ν ,-^νΟ 1- w! - 
 
 ουό βνσα vaiets^^ ουο οτων olk€L 9 μ€τα. 
 
 άρ οίσθ' άφ* ών el ; κοά λόληθας όχθρος ων 
 
 τοΪ9 σοΐσιν αύτοΰ νβρθβ κάπΙ γης άνω, 
 
 καί σ άμφιπληζ μητρός τβ και του σου πατρος 
 
 όλα ποτ €κ γης τησδ€ δβινόπους άρά, 
 
 βλβποντα νυν μβν ορθ\ hvevra δβ σκότον. 
 
 βοής δβ της σης ποιος ούκ βσται λιμην, 
 
 415 
 
 420 
 
 used by Herodotus (VIII. 136.) in 
 reference to oracles. Pindar not 
 unfrequently uses this name of 
 Apollo. Pyth. III. 50. XI. 9. 
 Isthm. VII. 70. 
 
 411. προστάτης in Athenian juris¬ 
 prudence implied a citizen, re¬ 
 sponsible for the conduct of a rnetic 
 or sojourner, the name of the latter 
 being registered in the public tables 
 as such. Cf. Aristoph. in Vesp. 
 Musgrave properly translates : non 
 in tahulis publicis, tanquam Creontis 
 cliens, recensebor. 
 
 412. λ^γω δ’. Cf. infr. 449. 
 
 413. There seems to be an ironical 
 force in the word και answering to 
 our sooth; implying that though 
 CEdipus had his outward sight, yet he 
 had not the inward sight, which could 
 point out the dreadful position in 
 which he was placed. Hermann ex¬ 
 plains the passage: “ tu non modo non 
 es cfecuSf et nihil cernis, sed etiam 
 vides, et cernis nihil; quod est idem 
 ac si dicas, tu non modo nihil cernis, 
 quia ccecus sis, sed etiam nihil cernis, 
 quum sis videns. 
 
 414. vaUis, cf. sup. 338. 
 
 415. ap οίσθα {num scis ?) άφ' ων 
 
 el (cf. CEd. Col. 937 ·) XeXqOas 
 (nay, you know not, &c.) 
 
 416. rots vepOe, i. e. Laius. 
 
 Ib. rots en\ γης άνω, Jocasta and 
 her children. 
 
 417. άμφιπληξ, striking on both 
 sides, ScHOL. Trach. 930. άμφιπληγι 
 φασγάνω. 
 
 418. ^€ΐνόπους (cum infortunio 
 adventans El.) άρά. Erfurdt com¬ 
 pares Antig. 1104. θβων πο 8 ώκ€ΐς 
 βλαβαί. Elmsley, .tEsch. Eum. 419. 
 17/xeis pev eapev No/cros αίανης τέκνα, j 
 'Αραϊ δ* εν οΧκοις γης νπαι κεκΚημεθα. 
 Dindorf, Soph. Elect. 49 ^· χο^^κόπους 
 'Έριννς. A still more appropriate 
 allusion, I think, would have been 
 to the heavy and crushing foot of 
 the same divinities in that appalling 
 chorus, Eum. 346. μά\α γαρ ουν 
 άΧλομενα | άνεκαθεν βαρνπεση κατα¬ 
 φέρω πο 86 ς άκμάν. 
 
 419· βλάποντα...ορθ\ clear-sighted, 
 enough at present. 
 
 Ib. βλεποντα σκότον, seeing nothing. 
 Musgrave compares Eurip. Phoen. 
 391. σκότον 8 ε 8 ορκώς. Bacch. 510. 
 είσορα κνε'φας. See also Brunck ad 
 V. 1273. and Jacobs ad Anthol. 
 vol. II. P. HI. p. 203. 
 
 420. βοής governed of σύμφωνος, 
 Matth. §. 379, 2, 
 
 Ib. λιμην, ScHOL. roVos. This 
 word and Citheron in the following 
 verse I think are to be considered in 
 connection, the allusion being to the 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ, 
 
 75 
 
 ποίος Υ^ίθαιρων ov)(l σύμφωνος τάχα, 
 όταν καταίσθγ) τον ύμύναων, ον δόμοις 
 
 V ·" , /\ '-W 
 
 ανορμον €ίσ€πΑ€νσας, ^υττΑοιχις τυχών , 
 άλλων de ττληθος ούκ ^παισθάνβι κακών, 
 ά σ i^cacoaet σοί τ€ κάΙ τοΐς σοΐς τύκνοίς. 425 
 
 τ-ρος ταυτα και Κρβοντα και τουμον στόμα 
 προ 7 Γηλάκιζ€. σου γαρ ούκ €στιν βροτών 
 
 deep recesses for which that moun¬ 
 tain was famous, and into the deepest 
 of which the infant OEdipus would 
 be thrown, for better securing the 
 purpose of his unnatural parents. 
 
 423. ανορμον (a, δρμος) properly, 
 without an anchoring-place, or port: 
 metaph. unfortunate. El. The nau¬ 
 tical imagery, of which Sophocles is 
 in general so fond, is here suffi¬ 
 ciently apparent; ov ανορμον elai- 
 ττλβυσαί = els ov δρμον ανορμον e- 
 nXevaas. WuND. We should come 
 better to this sense, if in the pre¬ 
 ceding verse, we might understand 
 by νμδναιος, the hymeneal δρμος. 
 
 Ib. βνπλοιαί τυχών. Wunder un¬ 
 derstands the words as referring to 
 the success of CEdipus in solving 
 the Sphinx-enigma. 
 
 424. πΧηθος κακών. What is to be 
 understood by this crowd of evils ? 
 To a mind like that of Tiresias, 
 where “ coming events cast their 
 shadows before,” could there be any 
 thing in the present or future des¬ 
 tinies of CEdipus or his family capa¬ 
 ble of concealment } He a parricide 
 and incestuous, they the offspring of 
 a parricide and an incestuous. He 
 doomed to lose his sight and be a 
 wanderer— they maddened in their 
 intellects, and destined, as in the 
 case of Antigone and Eteocles, to be 
 wanderers also ! the mother of this 
 wretclied race dying by her own 
 hands, and her two sons dying by 
 each other’s. In this accumulation 
 
 of misery and affliction, and by put¬ 
 ting father and children upon one 
 common footing of calamity, will be 
 found the best general sense of the 
 following verse, whether we read, as 
 in the present text, or adopt from 
 Markland and Brunck the reading of 
 οσ’ Εξίσωσα, taking the latter word 
 in an intransitive sense. 
 
 425. a σ’ €ξισώσ€ΐ. Ebner sup¬ 
 
 poses this expression, purposely left 
 obscure here, to be explained at vv. 
 1497, 8. when CEdipus, at present 
 laughing at the predictions of Tire¬ 
 sias, reckons up his crimes, then 
 observes of himself, την τ^κονσαν 
 ηροσζν I . . κάκ των Χσων €κτησαθ' υμάς, 
 (avnep αυτός “ Quod vero h. 1. 
 
 α σ’ ξξισώσίΐ σοι dixit, hoc ορρο- 
 sitionis causa et copise poeticse abun- 
 dantia fecit; sufficiebat enim a σ’ 
 €ξισώσ€ΐ τοΐς σοΐς τ€κνοις.” 
 
 Ib. The sibilant letter in this verse 
 has not escaped the commentators 
 (cf. Porson ad Med. 476), any more 
 than the letter ταΰ in a preceding 
 verse (371). 
 
 426. προς ταυτα, wherefore. Cf. 
 supr. 343. GEd. Col. 956. Antig. 
 658. Aj. 970, &c. 
 
 Ib. τουμον στόμα, gl. τους όμούς 
 λόγους. Ellendt, dissatisfied with 
 this interpretation, understands 
 στόμα in many passages of Sopho¬ 
 cles in the sense of “ os, quatenus 
 verba inde exeunt.” Here he ob¬ 
 serves : “os suum vates contumeliae 
 haberi indignatur.” See the learned 
 
76 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 » / t 
 
 κακών oaTLs ^κτριβησβταί Trore.-^ 
 
 ΟΙ. ή ταυτα δητ άνβκτα TTpos τούτου κλνβίν ; 
 ονκ els* οΧβθρον ; ουχί θασσον ; ού ττάλιν 
 axj/oppos οίκων τώνδ' άποστραφβίί awet ; 
 
 liii. ουο ίκομην βγωγ αν, ei συ μη καλβις, 
 
 ΟΙ. ού γάρ TL σ ηδη μωρά φωνησοντ, eVei 
 
 σχολή y αν οϊκου5" rovs^ βμού^ βστβίλάμην. 
 
 ΤΕ. ημβΐ^ τοωίδ* βφνμβν, ώί μβν σοΙ δοκβΐ, 
 
 μωροί, γονενσι δ\ οΐ σ βφνσαν, €μφρον€9. 
 
 ΟΙ. ΤΓοίοίσί ; μβΐνον, tl 9 δύ μ €κφύ€ί βροτων ; 
 
 ΤΕ. ηδ' ημβρα φύσει σε και δίαφθερεΐ. 
 
 ΟΙ. cos* ττάντ αγαν αΐνικτά κάσαφη λεγεί 9 . 
 
 430 
 
 435 
 
 on this 
 
 lexicographer generally 
 
 428. (κτριβησίται, (said of a per¬ 
 son utterly ruined, destroyed.) The 
 Scholiast derives the metaphor from 
 metals which lose their quantity by 
 the processes of smelting, rubbing 
 &c. Herodotus, (IV. 120. την ποίην 
 €Κ της yfjs €κτρίβ€ΐν. VI. 37 * 
 
 TTiTvos {pine-tree) τρόπον anelXee €κ- 
 Tpi^eiv,) uses the word in the sense 
 of utterly sweeping away, or up¬ 
 rooting. Ellendt observes that the 
 word is in tragic diction, what eVi- 
 τρίβΐσθαι is in comic. Cf. sup. 248. 
 
 431. αψορρος for άψόρροος, see 
 Pass. Aj. 369. ovK αψορρον eKvepei 
 ΤΓοδα; El. 1430. ω τταιδβί, ονκ αψορρον; 
 wilt you not begone ? Erfurdt derives 
 the word from αψ and δρω. Pass, 
 from pea, Musgrave and Doederl. 
 from ερρω. (If accumulated words of 
 repulsion could have driven Tiresias 
 from the royal presence, the poet 
 does not spare them here. Cf. CEd. 
 Col. 233 sq.) 
 
 433· Ώ^ν· Schneider de dial. 
 
 Ρ· 9 · 
 
 434. σχοΧη. ScHOL. βραδίως, ού- 
 δαρώί. Elmsley aptly quotes Shake¬ 
 
 speare : Γ11 trust by leisure him that 
 
 mocks me once.*’ (Tit. And. Act. I. 
 ‘sc. 2.) 
 
 Ib. ίστΐιΧάμην, (gl. μ€Τ€στ€ίΧάμην), 
 sent for. Brunck refers to similar 
 instances of the simple verb thus 
 used for the compound, infr. 860. 
 (Ed. Col. 298. Antig. 165. Phil. 
 60. 495· 
 
 435. ίφνμβν, visi sumus. El. 
 
 436. μωροί (cf. v.433), epexegetic 
 of Toioide in preceding verse. Ell. 
 Wunder compares Philoct. 1271. roi- 
 ovros ησθα — πιστός, άτηρός Χάβρα. 
 
 Ib. yovevai, οΐ σ έφυσαν. Compare 
 also Cadmus and Tiresias in the 
 Bacchse of Euripides, particularly 
 vv. 170 sq. 179. 186. 330. 
 
 Ib. €μφρον€ς, gl. φρόνιμοι. (Tire¬ 
 sias again wishes to quit the stage, 
 but is stopped by CEdipus.) 
 
 43 7. ποίοισι = τισι ; Cf. Electr. 
 
 1348. Aj. 747. 
 
 438. General poetical translation : 
 “Your birth and death are both of 
 this day’s date,” or more briefly— 
 “ this day will give you birth and 
 death.” 
 
 439. άγαν αΐνικτα κάσαφη. Some 
 of the prophet’s denunciations were 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ 'ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 77 
 
 ΤΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΤΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΤΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 οΰκ oSp σν ταντ αριστο! ΐύρίσκΐΐρ t(hvs ; 
 τοιάυτ ορΐίΒιζ’, oh ep (ΰρήσΐΐί μίγαν, 
 αντη ye pePTOi σ’ η τύχη διώλ€σ€Ρ. 
 άλλ’ el ττόλιρ τηρδ’ ύ^σωσ’, ου μοί μ€λ€ί. 
 απβίμί τοίνυν' και συ, τταΐ, κόμιζβ μβ, 
 κομίζβτω δηθ’' ώί τταρων σύ y ίμποδων 
 οχλβΐ^, avOeus τ αν ούκ αν άλγνναι^ ττλβον. 
 βίπων απβιμ! ών οννβκ ήλθον^ ού το σον 
 δ^ίσας ττρόσωτΓον. ού γαρ βσθ* σίτου μ’ όλβϊρ. 
 λβγω δβ σοί' τον ανδρα τούτον^ ον πάλαι 
 
 440 
 
 445 
 
 doubtless enigmatical and obscure, 
 but ought no reminiscences to 
 have been awakened in the mind 
 of CEdipus by what the Delphic 
 shrine had previously communicated 
 (cf. infr. 787-793), and by the 
 warning voice of the Chorus (sup. 
 285), that the words of Tiresias and 
 Apollo were nearly tantamount in 
 value ? But we must not press too 
 hard on a drama, which from the 
 nature of its subject required such 
 singular dexterity of management. 
 
 Ib. aydv. Cf. Arist. Nub. 199. 
 et alibi. 
 
 440. ταυτ\ sc. αΐνικτά. (Tiresias 
 speaks with the bitterest tone of 
 irony^ and in allusion to the sphinx- 
 enigma, which CEdipus had solved.) 
 
 441. oXs e/x' €νρησ. μ. quibus me, 
 diligentius si rem perpendere vo- 
 lueris, magnum invenies. (CEdipus 
 returns the irony by partly playing 
 on the word evpiaKeiv {to divine) used 
 by Tiresias. peyav emphatic. 
 
 442. αΰτη η τνχη. Suspicor τίχνη. 
 ScHiEF. Schaefer generally hits the 
 nail on the head, but not I think 
 here. Tiresias implies contemp¬ 
 tuously ; this— skill, as you no doubt 
 consider it, but accident as I take 
 leave to term it, viz. the solution of 
 
 the Sphinx enigma, has been your 
 ruin: for to what has it not led ? 
 a marriage with your own mother 
 &c. &c. 
 
 443. The noble sentiment here 
 uttered by CEdipus requires no com¬ 
 ment. 
 
 444. ω παΐ. Cf. Antig. ioi2. 
 
 Ib. κόμιζζ, lead me away. Cf. CEd. 
 Col. 589. Antig. 1087. 
 
 445. παρών, by your presence. 
 
 445—6. €μποδων οχλίΐς, turbas vt 
 
 impedimento sis. Erf. El. Elmsley 
 compares for the latter word ^sch. 
 Prom. 1000. 6χΚ(2ς, μάτην pe, κυμ 
 οττωί, παρηγορων. 
 
 44 ^· (τνθζΐς {aevopai, eo, abeo) as 
 opposed to παρών in preceding verse 
 may be rendered, by your absence. 
 Aj. 294. b δ’ €σσνβη {exiit) μόνος. 
 CEd. Col. 119. που Kvpet ίκτόπιος 
 σνθίίς ; (That Tiresias was not in 
 better odour with the children of 
 CEdipus than with the parent, cf. 
 Eurip. Phoen. 778 sq.) 
 
 448. πρόσωπον, gl. αξίωμα. Rather 
 your threatening brow. cf. infr. 533* 
 Bothe compares Horace vol. III. 3.3. 
 non vultus instantis tyranni. Add 
 our own nobler poet: “ his look, | 
 haughty as is his pile high-built and 
 proud.” Samson Agon. 1069. 
 
78 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ζητβΐς απειλών^ κάνακηρύσσων φορον 
 TOP KdteLOPj ovroy iartp ipOade, 
 
 ^€P09 λόγω μότοίκος^ dra S eyyepr)^ 
 φαρησ€ται θηβαΐο^' ovS ησθησβται 
 rfi ξυμφορα. τνφλθ9 γαρ €Κ δβδορκότο^ 
 και τΓτω^οί άρτ\ πλουσίου ^όρηρ €7η 
 σκηπτρω ττροδβίκρύί γαΐαρ βμπορβύσβται. 
 φαρησβταί δβ παισ), τοΪ9 αύτου ζυρωρ 
 άδβλφος αύτο9 καΐ ττατηρ, κάζ η9 βφυ 
 
 γυραικο^ pigs' καί iroaiSj καί του ττατρος 
 όμόσ7Γορ09 re koll φθΡ6ύ9. καί ταΰτ^ Ιωρ 
 €Ϊσω λογίζου' καρ λ(ίβτρ9 μ βφβυσμβρορ, 
 φάσκβίρ €μ ηδη μαρτίκτ) μηδβρ φρορβΐρ^ 
 ΧΟ. TLS ορτίρ* ά θβσπίόπβια ΑβλφΙς ehre ττβτρα 
 
 450 
 
 455 
 
 460 
 
 ττρ, α>. 4^3 
 
 450 · άνακηρνσσων, contemptuously : 
 proclaiming as if you had been a 
 loud-tongued herald. Ellendt, less 
 rightly I think; per prceconem pro- 
 nuntians. 
 
 45 2. λόγω, asfar as words go, in ap¬ 
 pearance. On the suppression of vvp 
 pev in this sentence, see Wunder in 
 loc. and at CEd. Col. 1446. 
 
 454 . rfj ξνμφορα. ScHOL. rfj συν¬ 
 τυχία, the occurrence, (fortunate as 
 he may at first think it, to be a 
 real Thebaif*by birth, and not a 
 mere metic.) 
 
 456. σκηπτρω irpoheiKvbs, feeling his 
 way with his staff, as a blind man 
 does. Burton compares the CEdipus 
 of Seneca 656. haculo senili triste 
 prcetentans iter. Erfurdt adds Theoc. 
 Idyl. XXII. 102. 
 
 457-8. And of the children with 
 whom he is in daily intercourse, it 
 will be seen that he is at once their 
 brother and their father. 
 
 460. όμόσπορος, partner of his bed. 
 
 461. λογίζου, (a shudder through 
 the theatre at mere thought of the 
 account to be taken by CEdipus.) 
 
 462. φάσκ€ΐν inf. for imperative, 
 cf. infr. 1466. 
 
 Ib. μαντική, a bitter return for the 
 taunts thrown out by CEdipus, sup. 
 390. 394. &c. (Tiresias led off the 
 stage.) 
 
 463. After a scene like the pre¬ 
 ceding, which has few parallels for 
 energy and grandeur, on what would 
 the workings of the Choral mind 
 necessarily turn ? On solemn in¬ 
 quiries as to who may be the mur¬ 
 derer thus pointed out—on re¬ 
 flexions as to the terrible position 
 of the unhappy wretch, pursued by 
 the avenging bolts of heaven, and 
 the unerring footsteps of the im¬ 
 placable Krjpcs, whoever he may be. 
 But that CEdipus can be that man— 
 no : the recollections of former 
 benefits conferred by him upon the 
 state will not allow the devoted 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 79 
 
 αρρητ άρρητων τβλβσαντα φοίνίαισι χ^ρσίν ; 4^5 
 
 ωρα νιν άζλλάδων 
 
 Chorus to harbour such a suppo¬ 
 sition. The workings of the choral 
 mind exhibit themselves metrically 
 in logaoedic verses with iambic or 
 spondaic dipodise (w. 464, 5.), ana¬ 
 paestic or trochaic dimeters—cho- 
 riambics and Glyconics (466, 7, 8 
 &c.). Of the power of the first 
 three species of metre, our ears give 
 us some imperfect feeling; the last 
 are rather matter for finger-reckon¬ 
 ing, and metrical equations. 
 
 Ib. riy i. e. TLS eKclvos iariv ; infr. 
 1056. ris δ’, ovTiv ewre j Aj. 1043. 
 τις δ’ €στ\ν, OVTIV avbpa ττροσΚ^νσσ^ις 
 στρατού ; 
 
 Ib. β€σπΐ€'ΐΓ€ΐα (eTros) fatidic. See 
 Ellendt on the word. Lucani Phar- 
 sal. 1 .Appius...sollicitat superos, 
 multosque obducta per annos | Del- 
 phica fatidici reseratpenetraliaPhcebi. 
 
 Ib. Δελφίί. On the strict mean¬ 
 ing of the word, and whence it de¬ 
 rived its name, cf. Pausan. Phocic, 
 cc. VI. VIII. 
 
 Ib. πίτρα. Wachsmuth (IV. 262.) 
 thinks that by this word is to be 
 meant the ομφάΚος or stone placed 
 in the middle of the temple at 
 Delphi. But this is surely to take 
 too narrow a view of the subject. 
 Erfurdt and Ellendt, the former re¬ 
 ferring to Strabo IX. 418. Justin 
 XXIV. 6. Livy 42, 15. understand 
 more properly mount Parnassus, 
 on which the city of Delphi and the 
 temple of Apollo were built. Cf. 
 Aristoph. Nub. 604. Orph. Argon. 2. 
 The word is often found coupled, 
 according to Goettling (Hes. p.6,7.). 
 
 with the word δρδί, in reference to 
 the joint fatidic powers of Zeus and 
 ApollOj or more strictly speaking, 
 to the primary agency of the first 
 deity and the subordinate office of 
 the latter. II. XXII. 126. ov μίν 
 πως νυν ίστιν από δρυος οόδ’ από 
 πίτρης [ τω οαριζ^μίναι. Hes. Theog. 
 3j. αλλά τίη μοι ταντα nep\ dpiiv ή 
 περί πετρην ; Plato in Phsedr. 275. 
 οί δε γ\ ώ φίλε, εν τω τον Διός τον 
 Δωδωναίου Ιερω δρνος Χόγονς εφασαν 
 μαντικούς πρώτους γενεσθαι. τοις μεν 
 ονν τότε, ατε ονκ ουσι σοφοϊς ώσπερ 
 υμείς οί νέοι, άπεχρη δρνος καΐ πέτρας 
 άκουειν υπ' ενηθείας, εΐ μόνον άΧηθη 
 λεγοιεν. but οη all this we shall 
 have a future opportunity of speak¬ 
 ing. For applications of the epithet 
 πετρηεσσα to Delphi or Pytho, see 
 Horn. h. Apollo 183. II. II. 519. Pind. 
 01 . VI. 81. See also Eurip. Phoen. 
 234. Here. F. 790. Bacch. 306. 
 Ion 550 &c. Dissen’s Comment, in 
 Pind. 630. Lucan’s Pharsalia 1 . 5. 
 
 465. αρρητ’ άρρητων. CEd. Col. 
 1238. κακά κακών. El. 849. δειλαία 
 δειΧαίων. Phil. 65. εσχατ εσχάτων 
 κακά. 
 
 466. ώρα, it is time. 
 
 Ib. άεΧλάς i. q. αελλαίος, prop. 
 storm-sped. For a large collection 
 of this and cognate epithets, applied 
 to horses, see Tafel’s Dilucid. Pin¬ 
 dar. II. p.628. The association of 
 ideas between this animal and 
 swiftness in ancient times, is cu¬ 
 riously instanced in a fragment of 
 the Pindaric Hyporchemata, where 
 the words ιπποις βοαις are rendered 
 
 ^ Mengotti Avell observes: Una delle industrie, comune a tutti gli oracoli, fu la scelta 
 di luoghi, die inspirassero o meraviglia, o terrore, o diletto, come sono le alte montagne, 
 o le cupe foreste, o le horride spelonche, o le piaggie piu amene, ridenti ed incantate. 
 1 / Oracolo di Delfo p. 63. 
 
80 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ίππων σΘ€ναρώτ€ρον - , 
 
 φνγα πόδα νωμαν. 
 
 €νοπλθ9 yap ίπ αυτόν επβνθρώσκβί 
 
 πυρ), και στ€ροπαΪ9 δ Αώ^ yevera^' 47 ° 
 
 5 » \ Μ ef * r/ 
 
 oeivaL ο αμ βπονται 
 Κηρ€^ άναπλάκητοί. 
 
 βλαμφβ yap του νιφόβντο^ αρτίων φαν€Ϊσα αντ.ά, 473 
 
 byDissen (Comment, ρ. 636.) quam 
 primum. 
 
 467. The adjective aOevapos, as 
 Wunder observes, properly implies 
 vehemence. As implying swiftness, 
 Erfurdt compares ^Ατη σθεναρή. II. 
 IX. 501. 
 
 468. φνγα πόδα νωμαν (agitare). 
 Ellendt compares Aj. 243. ποδοΐν 
 κΧοπαν άρίσθαι {clani prqfugere) , 
 Wunder adds Virg. *Έη. IV. 281. 
 ardet abire fuga. For some inge¬ 
 nious reasonings, by which the latter 
 endeavours to establish a gramma¬ 
 tical dative of design, see his Phi- 
 loct. 1126. 
 
 469. evonXos. This word does 
 not occur again in the remains of 
 Sophocles. It is not found in 
 .dEschylus, but is not unfrequent in 
 Euripides. Phcen. 266. Orest. 1281. 
 &c. 
 
 470. πνρ\ κα\ στ^ροπαις seems 
 equivalent to, with the fire of light¬ 
 nings. So Philoct. 1450· Kaipos κα\ 
 πλους = καιρός του πλ^ν. Pind. Isth. 
 VIII. I. Κλζάνδρω ηλικία re = the 
 youth of Cleander. Nem. VII. 107. 
 αυχένα κα\ σθένος = strong neck, or 
 strength of neck. By a similar He¬ 
 braism, those receptacles or reflec¬ 
 tors of light, of which we shall sub¬ 
 sequently have to speak (infr. 666 ), 
 are said to be “ for signs and for 
 seasons, and for days and for years,” 
 i. e. to be for signs of the seasons, 
 days and years. 
 
 Ib. γΐνίτας, here son, (cf. Eurip. 
 
 Ion 916), more commonly father. 
 On Apollo, as well as other deities, 
 more particularly Minerva (^Esch. 
 Eumen. 791, 2), being occasionally 
 armed with the thunders and light¬ 
 nings of Jupiter, see the notes of 
 Bothe, Wunder, and Thudichum (I. 
 252). 
 
 472. Κηρ^ς. Whoever wishes to 
 anaJyse or compare the Homeric and 
 Hesiodean Κηρβς (in the remains of 
 Pindar they appear I believe but 
 once), will find the following refe¬ 
 rences of use to him, whether as 
 regards the Κηρ^ς themselves, or 
 their relation to the Moerse. II. 
 II. 834. VHI. 528. XH. 116. XHI. 
 602. Od. XVH. 326. Hes. Theog. 
 211. 217. (where see Goettl.) Scut. 
 Here. 249. Among these the most 
 striking is the personified Κηρ, who 
 appears equally in our copies of 
 Homer ( 11 . XVHI. 535 sq.) and of 
 Hesiod (Scut. Here. 156). For 
 Sickler’s derivation of the word, see 
 his “ Cadmus,” p. 59. 
 
 Ib. άναπλάκητοι = άναμπλάκητοι 
 (αμπλακ€Ϊν), not missing (their prey), 
 or αφνκτοι, those whom there is no 
 escaping. 
 
 473. €λαμφ€. Passow is content 
 to see in this word the sense of 
 clear and loud sound. Ellendt dis¬ 
 cerns in it a double proof of figurative 
 language—first, that the prophetic 
 response (φάμα) is compared with a 
 fire on the top of a mount, visible 
 through the adjoining places ; se- 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 81 
 
 φαμα ΐίαρνασον top άδηλορ αρδρα ττάρτ Ιχρ€ν€ΐρ. 475 
 
 φοίτα γαρ νπ άγρίαρ 
 
 νλαρ άρά τ αρτρα καί 
 
 irerpas are ταυρο 9 , 
 
 p^Xeos peXeco ττοδί χηρβύωρ, 
 
 τα μβσόμφαΧα γάς άποροσφίζωρ 48ο 
 
 pLaPT€La‘ τα δ* ael 
 ζώρτα πβρίΤΓΟτάται, 
 
 δβίρά μβρ OVP, δβίΡα ταράσσ€ί σοφος οίωροθβτα^^ττρ,β'. 
 
 condj that there is a sanatory im¬ 
 plication in the word. The learned 
 writer refers to Merrick ad Tryphiod. 
 p. 360. ed. Wernick. for confirma¬ 
 tion of his opinions on the sub¬ 
 ject. 
 
 Ib. νιφόεντος. 
 
 O thou Parnassus! whom I now 
 survey. 
 
 Not in the phrensy of a dreamer’s 
 eye, 
 
 Not in the fabled landscape of a lay, 
 But soaring snow-clad through thy 
 native sky. 
 
 In the wild pomp of mountain 
 majesty! Childe Harold. 
 
 Cf. h. H. Apollo 282. Eurip. Phoen. 
 213. 241. Pausan. X. 8, 9. More 
 minute remarks on this celebrated 
 mountain are reserved for the An¬ 
 tigone. 
 
 475. αδηΧορ, unknown. 
 
 Ib. πάντα. ScHOL. πανταχον. 
 Brunck: quemque. 
 
 476. υπό. The force of the Greek 
 preposition will be better understood 
 by reversingthe expression—“where 
 wild woods hang over him.” 
 
 479. χηρ^νων. ScHOL. Tjj φνγτ/ 
 μονάζων. El. commercii orbus. 
 
 480-1. ra μζσόμφαΧα yas μαντϋα 
 
 = ra μ€σομφάΧον yrjs μαντεία. For 
 construction cf. sup. 161. Why 
 Delphi was thus termed, see infr. 
 898. .^sch. Sept. c. Theb. 743. 
 rp'ts εΙπόντοί (Apollinis sc.) εν μεσομ- 
 φάΧοΐί ΤΙνθικοίς χρηστηρίοις. 
 
 Ib. άπονοσφί§ων. SchOL. εκφευ- 
 yoiv. Musg. fraudans, fallens. 
 
 482. ζωντα, vivid and efficacious. 
 Musgr. cites Antig. 453. άεί ποτέ 
 Cfj ταντα, and refers to Trach. 1169. 
 Eurip. Suppl. 223. Bacch. 8. AEsch. 
 Ag. 828. Suppl. 995. But illustra¬ 
 tions of Sophocles should be drawn 
 as much as possible from Pindar. Cf. 
 Diss. ad Nem. IV. 6. 
 
 483-5. The simpler form of con¬ 
 sidering these two verses is to under¬ 
 stand εμε as the accusative to the 
 verb ταράσσει, with which εμε are to 
 be joined the participles δοκοΰντα and 
 άποφάσκοντα. (So Kayser under¬ 
 stands the construction, translating: 
 vales me conturhat nec prohantem, 
 neque audentem negari.) A more 
 recondite construction, and that to 
 which Erfurdt, Herm. and I think 
 Ellendt, incline, is to consider δεινά 
 as an accusative plural to ταράσσει 
 with which are to be joined οϋτε 
 δοκονντ οντ άποφάσκονθ' . ScHOL. 
 οϋτε πιστά οντε άπιστά. Erf. neque 
 
82 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 οντ€ δοκουντ οΰτ άττοφάσκορβ^ * ο τι Χβ^ω δ* αττορώ, 
 ΤΓβτομαι δ’ ΙΧττίσίν οϋτ ivOaS ορών οΰτ οττίσω. 
 τί γαρ η Ααβδακίδαι^ 
 
 η τω ΐΙοΧνβου ν€Ϊκο9 ΰκατ\ οΰτ€ πάροίθβν ττοτ βγωγ* 
 οΰτ€ ταννν ττω 
 
 ίμαθον, 7 Γρο£ δτου δη βασάνω 
 
 afflrmmitia neque negantia, i. e. qua 
 nec probant rem, nec redarguunt. 
 
 485. άποφάσκοντα. Musg. com¬ 
 pares Aristot. Metaph. III. c. 7* 
 
 άνάγκη η φάναι η άττοφάναι iv καθ 
 ei/os οτιονν. Idem Categor. c. 8. η 
 κατάφασα Trpos την απόφασιν αντικα- 
 ται, οϊορ το, κάθηταί, τω, ου κηθηται. 
 
 486. Ίΐίτομαι δ’ ίΚτΐίσιν. I am sus¬ 
 pended between hope and fear. Cf. 
 sup. 157. Find. Pyth. VIII. 129. 
 
 Ib. epddbe, things present. 
 
 Ib. οπίσω, things future. Elmsley 
 compares θpητbs π^φνκως, τώπίσω 
 π€φω β\€ΤΓ€ΐρ. (Tragicus ap. Stob. τ 15. 
 cf. Find. 01 . X. 44. Nem. VII. 149. 
 in voc. ^οπιθ€Ρ. Grot.) Hermann 
 translates: quid dicam, nescio: sed 
 anxius sum expectatione, qui rieque in 
 prasentia quidquam, neque futura 
 perspiciam. Kayser, objecting to 
 these interpretations of ipddde and 
 οπίσω, observes that the true mean¬ 
 ing of the chorus is to be derived 
 from II. III. 108-no, and implies 
 plane cacutio in hac re, pendeo 
 animi. 
 
 487. Ααβ8ακ18αις, i. e. Laius. So 
 Find. 01 . VI. 115. θάλος ’Αλκαϊδαν, 
 i. e.filius Alcai. 01 . IX. 82. Kpopibdp, 
 Jovis, (“plur. pro sing, ut ssepius 
 apud nostrum.” Tafel.) Pyth. II. 
 46. παρα Kpopidais (in dorno et fa- 
 mitia Jovis, Boeckh.) Pyth. IV. 4. 
 
 Αατοί 8 αισΐρ, i. e. Apollini. Cf. Schol. 
 Ib. 127. Αιολιδαι/, i. e. uno CEolida- 
 rum. A still more remarkable in¬ 
 stance of this grandiloquent way of 
 speaking in Pindar occurs in Isthm. 
 V. 49-55. where by ripes and τοϊσιρ, 
 the single person of Achilles is 
 meant. Cf. Diss. adNem. V. p. 419. 
 
 488. τω Πολύζον, i. e. GEdipus, as 
 yet supposed to be the son of the 
 Corinthian Polybus. Cf. infr. 774 · 
 
 494—6. προς orov — θαράτωρ. It 
 may be of use to have this passage 
 translated first, and the reasons on 
 w’hich that translation is founded 
 given afterwards, προς orov (where¬ 
 fore) βασάρω (by a torturing process, 
 in a torturing inquisitorial manner. 
 cf. infr. 1526.) cViei/ii (I should at¬ 
 tack) rap ίπί^αμορ φάτιρ ΟίδιπόΒα (the 
 popular talk and favourable opinion 
 of CEdipus) Επίκουρος (by coming for¬ 
 ward as an assistant or avenger) 
 ΑαβΒακίΒαις (to Laius) θάρατωρ άΒηλωρ 
 (in respect to a murder involved in 
 all sorts of difficulties and obscuri¬ 
 ties) . 
 
 Ib. προς orov here seems equiva¬ 
 lent to apff^ ωρ, άρθ' ον, apff orov. 
 (Electr. 575. Antig. 237. CEd. Col. 
 967) ; but see the note which fol¬ 
 lows. 
 
 Ib. βασάνω. (Cf.infr. 51 o.) Wun- 
 der, who adopts from the Schohast, 
 
 m παίδωρ δε παΓδεϊ €χοΐ€Ρ aUl yepas τυπερ pvp κα\ 6.p^iov 6πιθ€Ρ. Dissen translates : 
 “ et nati natorum habeant haec fortunae eximiae oi*namenta*et majora etiam”—where 
 the opposition between pvp and οπιθΐΡ is lost. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 83 
 
 €7Γ£ TOLU ΕΤΓίδαμον φάτίΡ ύμ ΟΙδίπόδα^ Ααβδακίδαίς 495 
 Ιττίκουρος άδηλων θανάτων. 
 
 άλλ’ ό μ€ν ουν Zev^ ο τ ’Απόλλων ξννβτόί καΙ τά 
 βροτών άντ. 0. 498 
 
 eidorey’ άνδρών δ’ δτι μάντκ ττλέον η 'γω ώίρΐται, ^οο 
 
 and inserts in his text, the participle 
 χρησάμ^νος, which is wanting in all 
 the MSS., explains and translates: 
 TTpos ovTivos vcIkovs μζμαθημίίνου βασα- 
 νΐσας αύτο, qua simultate sive rixa 
 cognita et explorata^ adding, that he 
 considers προς οτου as similar in dic¬ 
 tion to Trpbs roO infr. v. 525. 
 
 495. eVieVat, to attack. Cf. Hero- 
 dot. 1 . 15 7. Thucyd. Ill. 56. V. 65. &c. 
 
 Ib. φάτις. Find. Pyth. I. τ 86 . €χθρα 
 ΦάΚαριν κατίχα φάτις. Pyth. III. 199· 
 ανθρώπων φάτις. ΟΙ. I. ^.2. βροτών 
 φάτις. Soph. Antig. 829· ά>ς φάτις 
 άνδρών. cf. infr. 715* 
 
 Ib. οΖδίτΓοδα (Find.Pyth. IV. 467. 
 ^sch. Sept. c. T. 722. 884. Eur. 
 Phoen. 827. 15TI. 1519. Suppl. 846. 
 1088.) contracted for Οίδιπόδαο, cf. 
 Hes. Op. 162. 
 
 Ib. Ααβδακίδαις, i. e. Laius. From 
 whom Sophocles derived this par¬ 
 ticular mode of speaking, we have 
 seen above (v. 487.) ; and whence 
 became these patronymics so fami¬ 
 liar to Pindar himself? Obviously 
 from that department of poetry which 
 made him acquainted with all the 
 great families of Greece, Sicily, 
 Libya, &c.—the Eualidse, the Ble- 
 psiadae, the Oligaethidae, the JEgidas 
 —of which illustrious family the poet 
 was himself a member—the Emme- 
 nidae, who descended from Cadmus— 
 the lamidae, to whom was committed 
 the superintendence of the oracu¬ 
 
 lar rites at Olympia—the .^acidae 
 of ^gina, to whom the poet’s af¬ 
 fections were so deeply wedded;— 
 among these and many similar 
 high-sounding names, Euxenidae, 
 Battidae, Cleonymidae, Psatychidae, 
 Midylidae, &c., was it hkely that 
 the title of Labdacidae should be 
 missing ? The poet is not so want¬ 
 ing (cf. llsthm. III. 26.), and had 
 all the poems of Pindar reached us, 
 it is not improbable that in those 
 poems, as well as in the writings of 
 Sophocles, we should have found, as 
 here, a plural for a singular noun. 
 
 496. Επίκουρος. Musgrave com¬ 
 pares sup. 127· Aa'iov αρωγός. Eurip. 
 Electr. 138. αιμάτων όπίκουρος. 
 
 Ib. άδηλων. Cf. infr. 509. Ib. 
 θανάτων, plur. for sing., after the 
 usual manner of Sophocles. Chori- 
 ambics and anapaests prevail too con¬ 
 spicuously throughout this second 
 strophe to occasion any difficulty as 
 to the metre. 
 
 498. ξννβτοι (prophetically), wise. 
 For the union of the names of Zeus 
 and Apollo in this verse, see sup. 151. 
 On the prefixing or otherwise of 
 articles to proper names, consult 
 Ell. II. 211. 
 
 ^00. μάντις. Hes. Fragm. 52. 
 Μάντις δ’ ουδΛς όστ\ν όπιχθονίων άν~ 
 θρώπων, | οστις αν €ΐδ€ίη Ζηνος νόον 
 αίγιόχοιο. 
 
 Ib. πλίον φ^ρ^ται. After bringing 
 
 1 The reference is to the great wealth of the Labdacidae. (Cf. j^sch. Sept. c. "i'heb. 
 708. 726. 790. 817. 896. 901. 941-8. &c. Eur. Suppl. 164.) Had that wealth, like the 
 riches of the Sidonian Dido in Virgil, come originally from the great merchant-land, 
 brought thence by the Tyrian Cadmus ? That great wealth was not confined to the 
 Cadmean family in Thebes, see the appeal in the poet’s Antigone, v. 843. 
 
 G 2 
 
84 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κρίσί9 ονκ βστιν άληθη^' (τοφία δ’ άρ σοφίαι^. 
 ΤΓαραμΕίφβίβΡ άνηρ, 
 
 αλλ ουτΓΟΤ ^γωγ αν^ ττρίΡ ίοοιμ ορυον eTToy, μβμφομβ- 
 φαρ€ρα τΓτβρόεσσ ηλθβ κόρα \^ρωρ αν καταφαίην. 
 
 7Γ0Τ€, καΊ σοφθ9 ωφθη βασάνω β ^hxmoKis' τω άπ 
 φρ€νο9 οντΓΟΤ οφΧησβι κακίαν, [eyuas* 5*° 
 
 together two or three passages, in 
 which the middle verb φίρ^σθαι im¬ 
 plies sibi ferre, aliquando ut potiaris, 
 EUendt observes, “ Hinc translatum 
 est πΚίον φίρίται (CEd. R. 5 *^^·) 
 sapientior fit, ah auferendo, opinor, 
 prsemio ducta locutione.” 
 
 501. κρίσιί ovK €. a. (On this 
 matter) there is no correct mode of 
 judging. 
 
 Ib. σοφία — παραμζίφ^ΐξρ. The 
 train of thought in this latter part of 
 the choral strain has evidently been 
 derived from a psean of Pindar. 
 
 TL δ' eXneai σοφίαν ippevai, a ολίγον 
 άνηρ vnep αι/δρόί Ισχύει ; 
 ον yap %σβ' όπως τα βίων βονλίνματ 
 ipevvaaei 
 
 βροτία φρίνί’ θνατας δ’ από ματρος 
 
 Fgmm. Sel. ap. Diss. p. 224. 
 
 Ih. τταραμίίβίΐν, to surpass. Pyth. 
 
 II. 91. 
 
 505. ορβον ίττος. Antig. 1178. ω 
 μάντί, TovTTos ως ap' ορβον ήννσας. The 
 meaning therefore seems to he: 
 “ before I see this oracular declara¬ 
 tion (of Tiresias) made clear and 
 proved by the event.” 
 
 Ib. μίμφομίνων, those who blame 
 (Edipus. Find. Nem. I. 25. λίλογχε 
 be μίμφομίνοις ίσλονς νδωρ καπνω φε~ 
 peiv I άντίον. 
 
 Ib. κατάφαναι (to assent to), the 
 opposite ίοάποφάναι (to dissent from). 
 Musgrave compares Arist. Metaph. 
 
 III. 7 · V ^ίάνοια η κατάφησιν ή άπό- 
 φησιν. 
 
 509. φανίρα, emphatic, in oppo¬ 
 sition to άbηλωv, V. 496. ScHOL. a 
 μίν ίγκαλονσιν αυτω (CEdipus SC.) 
 αδτ/λα, κα\ ον πάντως άληβη. *Α δε κα- 
 τώρβωσ€, φανίρά, ore ίπίλβονσης αντω 
 της Σφιγγος, ωφβη σοφός. 
 
 Ib. After φανβρά Wunder admits 
 the words γάρ eV’ αντω, in order to 
 make the strophic and antistrophic 
 verses correspond. 
 
 Ib. πτίρόίσσα κόρα, the Sphinx. 
 
 510. σοφός. The word σοφία im¬ 
 plies excellence in any branch of art 
 (cf. Diss. Comment, p. 122); here skill 
 in solving enigmas. Hence Pindar, 
 before proposing some enigmatical 
 questions to Arcesilaus (Pyth. IV. 
 467.) observes, γνωβι vvv τάν Olbi~ 
 πόδα σοφίαν. Eurip. Phcen. 48. σο- 
 φης αίνιγμα παρβίνον. 
 
 Ib. σοφός — βασάνω. Find. Pyth. 
 X. 105. πίίρωντι be και χρνσός ev 
 βασάνω πρίπίΐ | και νόος όρβός. Also 
 Find. Scol. fr. 1 , 
 
 'Ησιόδου, του πλίίστον ev άνβρωποις 
 κλόος ίστ\ν 
 
 άνόρων κρινομίνων ev βασάνω σοφίης. 
 Certamen Horn, et Hes. Goettl. 
 p. 251. 
 
 Ib. ^bvnoXis, agreeable to the city, 
 or citizens. Cf. sup. 82. Find. Nem. 
 VIII. 65. €γώ δ* άστοΐς abo)V και 
 χβονι γνΐα κάλνφαιμ . 
 
 5 11. όφλισκάνίΐν κακίαν, to incur 
 a charge of impiety. The formula is 
 too well known to require illustra¬ 
 tion. 
 
ΟΙΔΪΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 85 
 
 ΚΡ. av^pes ΤΓολΐταί , δβίι/ βττη 7Γ€7Γν<τμ€Ρ09 
 C Ο τύραννον ΟΙδίτΓονν 
 
 παρβίμ arXyjrcov. el γάρ ev ταΪ 9 ζυμφοραϊς 
 ταΐς νυν νομίζβί ττρό^ y βμον ΤΓβττονθύναί 
 λόγοίσιν €LT epyoiaiv eh βλάβην φύρον, 
 OVTOL βίου μοί του μακραίωνοι tto^os*, 
 φβροντί τηvδe βάξιν, ου γάρ eh άττλοϋν 
 η ζημία μοί του λόγου τούτου φύρβί, 
 άλλ’ h μύγιστον, el κακο^ μίν ev ττολβί, 
 κακο9 δ€ ττρος σου καΐ φίλων κβκλησομαι. 
 
 ΧΟ. άλλ* ήλθe μίν δη τούτο τoΰveLδo 9 τά^ άν 
 όργη βιασθίν μάλλον η γνώμη φpevώv. 
 
 512. (Creon enters with great 
 appearance of indignation.) 
 
 512,13. 6eiV βπη κατηγορζίν μον. 
 Eurip. Or. 28. Φοίβον αδικίαν...κατηγο- 
 ρ^ίν. Ion 93 1 · τίνα \ 0 yov Αοζίον κατη- 
 yopels Hippol. 106]. κaτηyopei σον 
 ΤΓίστά. 
 
 5ΐ4· τύραννον, in antiquity, a poli¬ 
 tical word, implying a monarch 
 possessed of absolute power, and 
 generally without reference to his 
 personal vices or Λdrtues. (Plat. 
 
 I Rep. 338. d. των πόλεων αί pev 
 τυραννοννται, αί be δημοκρατοννται, αί 
 be άριστοκρατούνται. Cf. Find. Pyth. 
 II. 160.) In one or two of the 
 Euripidean plays, where the scene 
 is laid, like that of the present, in 
 Thebes, the poet does not fail to use 
 every opportunity of sneering at 
 Theban absolutism, and lauding 
 .Athenian democracy. On this point, 
 as well as for verbal illustrations, 
 see more particularly his Supplices 
 394 · 409· 4 H· 426.439. 457. Phcen. 
 559. sq. For the plenitude of royal 
 power in Thebes, &c. cf. Qid. Col. 
 1293. Antig. 60. 173 213. 506. 
 
 ^^ 4 - 73 7. 8 . 873. 1163. 
 
 515. άτλητών (a, τλήμι) bearing 
 with impatience. Schol. μη Kapre- 
 ρων, μη φύρων, δνσανασχζτων. 
 
 5 1 7 · f‘S' βλάβην φύρον, tending to 
 bring injury. See this phrase fully 
 illustrated in Markland’s Suppl. v. 
 
 305. 
 
 Ib. fire. On eiVe thus singly 
 placed, instead of being in both 
 parts of the sentence, see Ell. in voc. 
 
 518. μακραίωνος. Comparing this 
 word with v. iioo. I should trans¬ 
 late : such as immortals lead.” 
 
 519. βάξιν (βαίνω), repol't. Aj. 
 997· o^elafydp σου βάξις ως Of ον τίνος 
 διηΧΘ' 'Αχαιούς. 
 
 Ib. (Ις άττλονν . . φίρα. Non una 
 ex parte, sed multifariam, i. e. pari, 
 ter, nocet. El. 
 
 520. ζημία = Χοιδορία, affront. 
 
 521. iv TToXei, by the people gene¬ 
 rally. 
 
 522. κακός Κ€κΧησομαι, obtrecta- 
 tione obruar. El. 
 
 ^2 7 ). τάχ av,fortasse. Schol. τάχ 
 αν βιασθίν, quasi τάχ αν opyp βιασθ^ίη 
 το δν€ΐδος τοντο κα\ όντως ηΧθ€. Herm. 
 
 524. yr 0 >p]] φρ€νών, mental per. 
 suasion. 
 
86 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΚΡ. Trpoy του δ* 4φάι/θη, rats* €μαΐγ γνώμαις 6 tl 
 ΤΓ βισθβΙς 6 μάνης tovs λόγους yj/evdei^ Aeyoi ; 
 ΧΟ. ηνδάτο μ^ τάδ*' οίδα δ’ ού γνώμγ} tlvl. 
 
 ΚΡ. ομμάτων S ορθών re κάζ ορθη^ φρβνος 
 κατηγορβΐτο τονπίκλημα τοντό μου ; 
 
 ΧΟ. ονκ οίδ*' ά γαρ δρώσ οι κρατούντας ούχ δρω. 
 
 » V 5ν» <■/ Λ» ^ 
 
 avTos ο 00 ηοη οωματων €^ω ττΐρα. 
 
 ΟΙ. ουτος συ, ττώς δαυρ ηλθας ; ή τοσόνδ' α\αίς 
 τόλμης ττρόσωττον ώστα τάς αμας σταγας 
 LKOVy φοναυς ών τουδα τάνδρος αμφανώς, 
 
 525 
 
 530 
 
 525. TTpos του δ’ (φάνθη. ^Sch. 
 
 Eum. 5 ^ 3 * 7·ου δ’ έτΓίίσθης, και 
 
 τίνος βουλ^νμασιν ; 
 
 Ib. rats e/tais γνωμαις, by MY coun¬ 
 sels. 
 
 526. Xeyei Br. ErP. Xeyoi ElmS. 
 “ Recte: quia per optativum in- 
 dicat Creon, non ita esse, sed esse 
 putari ab aliquibus, neque corru- 
 pisse se vatem, sed perhiberi corru- 
 pisse.” Herm. 
 
 527. οιδα δ’ o. γ. r. I know not 
 with what proof. 
 
 528. e^. 6 μ. K. r. i. with steady 
 unfiinching eye and sane wind. Cf. 
 infr. 1385. and Blomf. Gloss, in 
 *Έ3 ο1ι. S. c. T. p. i8i. The Scho¬ 
 liast remarks, that the Chorus pro¬ 
 fessing themselves unable to say 
 with what intention these words had 
 been uttered on the part of QEdipus, 
 Creon proceeds to inquire about 
 the look and gesture with which 
 they were uttered, that he may form 
 some conjecture as to the intentions 
 of CEdipus from outward marks. 
 
 529. κaτηyopύτoy SC. this crime was 
 objected to me. 
 
 530. oi κρατούντας. Eurip. Phoen. 
 404. ras των κρατουντών άμαθίας φά- 
 peiv χράων. Cf. Suppl. 18. 
 
 531. Eurip. Iph. Taur. 734. ywr] 
 
 yap ηδα δωμάτων αξω τταρά. ElMS. 
 
 532. When in interrogative sen¬ 
 tences η is to be written, and when 
 η, cf. infr. 622. 
 
 534 — 5 . φονανς — αμφανως — Χωστής 
 
 avapyής. That persons in very high 
 stations not unfrequently resemble 
 those of the lowest grades in their 
 habits, is a trite remark. How 
 should it be otherwise ? A con¬ 
 sciousness of being above the world’s 
 opinion necessarily engenders, if not 
 carefully guarded against, the same 
 defects, as a consciousness of be¬ 
 ing below its criticism. Of that 
 species of vulgarity which consists 
 in retorting an opponent’s words 
 upon him, our absolute monarch 
 will presently give some tolerably 
 strong specimens (548 sq.) ; the de¬ 
 fect seems to be here breaking out, 
 though in a more covered form. 
 “ Youf implies CEdipus to Creon, 
 (and that Creon understood the in¬ 
 sinuation is pretty clear from what 
 he himself subsequently declares, 
 infr. 603, 4,) You, under cover of 
 an oracular response from Delphi, 
 pointed at me as a robber and a 
 murderer (sup. 100. 122.): without 
 any disguise, I denounce you as the 
 destroyer (cf. infr. 1454.) of my 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 Χωστής τ βναργης της βμης τυραννικός ; 
 (f)ep ehre ττρος θβών^ decXiav η μωρίαν 
 Ιδών τίν €v μοί ταντ ββουλενσω ττοιβΐν ; 
 η τοΰργον ώς ού γνωρωΐμί σου τόδβ 
 δολω ττροσβρπον κούκ άλ^ζοίμην μαθών ; 
 αρ’ ονχί μωρόν Ιστί τούγγβίρημά σου^ 
 dv€v τ€ ττληθονς καΙ φίλων τυραννίδα 
 Θήραν, ό ττληθβί γβημασίν θ αλίσκ^ται ; 
 ΚΡ. οΙσθ ώς ΤΓοίησον ; άντί των ΕΪρημόνων 
 ΐσ αντάκουσον^ κατα κρΐν αυτός μαθών. 
 ΟΙ. Xeyeiv σϊ) δ6ίνός' μανθάνβιν δ* εγώ κακός 
 
 87 
 
 535 
 
 545 
 
 person, and manifest filcher of my 
 throne.” Besides proofs of this vul¬ 
 garity exhibited in the present play, 
 see the poet’s Electra 795 sq. 
 
 Ib. Tovde ravdpos = ipov. Cf. 
 inff. 815. 829. and numberless other 
 places. 
 
 538. γνωριοΐμι (ElmS. Dind. ^νω- 
 ρίσοιμι Libri. Herm.) and άλ^ξοίμην 
 refer respectively to μωρίαν and bei- 
 λίαν in a verse preceding. (536.) 
 
 539. δολω, craftily. 
 
 Ib. μαθων = et μάθοιμι. 
 
 541. πλήθους. A former German 
 translator of the (Edipus ingeniously 
 proposed to substitute πλούτον for 
 πλήθους, whether from general con¬ 
 siderations, or in reference to the 
 particular wealth of the Labdacidse 
 (cf. sup, p. 83.) I am not aware ; but 
 the substitution is unnecessary, the 
 idea of wealthy being implied, as 
 Matthise observes, in the word φίλων. 
 
 54 F, 2. τυραννίδα ... 6 . Pindar 
 Pyth. III. 36. €στι δε φίλον . . μαται- 
 ότατον, δστις κ.τ.ί. Pyth. XII. 52. 
 αλλ’ (σται χρόνος ούτος, ο κ. τ. ί. 
 Eurip. Hel. Ι 702, 3. και χαίρ(θ\ ‘Ελε- 
 νης ovv(K ΐύ·γ€ν(στάτης j γνώμης, ό 
 πολλαΐς iv γνναιζιν ούκ tvi. 
 
 543· αίσθ' ώς ποίησον; i. e. ποίησον, 
 οΙσθ' ώς,/αο, scin quomodo? On this 
 formula, the authorities for consul¬ 
 tation are Muretus Var. Lect. III. 
 12. Bentley ad Menand. p. 126. 
 Koenius ad Gregor, p. 7. Pors. ad 
 Hec. 225. Matth. Gr. Gr. §.511. 
 4. Ellendt II. 288. Examples cited 
 are Eurip. Hec. 225. Iph. Aul. 725. 
 Cycl. 131. Heracl. 452. Hel. 322. 
 1249. 1029. Aristoph. Eq. 
 
 I 158. Pac. 1061. Av. 54. 80. Her- 
 mip. ap. Athen. p. 476, d. &c. 
 
 545. λίγαν συ δ€ΐνός. (Cf. CEd. 
 Col. 795. 806.) From Triclinius 
 to Wunder, not a commentator or 
 translator, that I am aware of, has 
 gone into any investigation of the 
 dramatic character of Creon, or even 
 seemed to feel that such an in\’^esti- 
 gation was called for. References to 
 Suidas, and Matthise, and Rost’s 
 Greek Grammar, the learned writers 
 supply in abundance; and so they 
 ought to do : but why not add an 
 occasional reference to the great 
 book of human nature, or to human 
 nature as modified by political or 
 other institutions ? In regard to this 
 Sophoclean character of Creon, who 
 
 G 4 
 
88 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 σου. δνσμβυη γαρ και βαρύν σ €νρηκ €μοί, 
 
 ΚΡ. TOUT αυτό νυν μου πρώτ ακουσον ώς €ρώ. 
 
 ΟΙ. τοΰτ αυτό μη μοί φράζ\ οττωί ουκ ei κακο9. 
 
 ΚΡ. €? TOL νομίζ€ί9 κτήμα την αυθαδίαν 
 
 elval τί του νου "χωρΐ^, ουκ δρθώς φρονείς. 55° 
 
 ΟΙ. εϊ τοι νομίζεις ανδρα συγγενή κακω9 
 
 δρών ού\ ύφεζειν την δίκην, ουκ ευ φρονείς. 
 
 ΚΡ, ^ύμφημί σοι ταυτ ενδικ εΙρησθαί' το δε 
 πάθη μ οποίον φης παθεΐν δίδασκε με. 
 
 ΟΙ. επείθες, η ουκ επείθες, ώς χρείη μ* επί 555 
 
 τον σεμνόμαντίν ανδρα πεμφασθαί τινα ; 
 
 ΚΡ. και νυν ϊβ αυτός είμί τω βουλεύματί. 
 
 can fail to observe, that through 
 three successive dramas—the pre¬ 
 sent, the CEdipus Coloneus, and the 
 Antigone—the character has been 
 highly and curiously elaborated, 
 and who that is conversant with 
 Greek oratory and Greek comedy, 
 does not see, that it’s ground¬ 
 work is essentially Attic, and such 
 as none but an audience, spend¬ 
 ing three parts of their lives in 
 courts of justice and the General 
 Assembly, could have fully appre¬ 
 ciated ? That the poet, though 
 pretty well generalising his picture, 
 had an individual orator more par¬ 
 ticularly in his eye, I have not a 
 shadow of doubt: who that indi¬ 
 vidual was, I shall endeavour to sub¬ 
 stantiate elsewhere. 
 
 Ib. κακός {indisposed) μανθάναν {to 
 hear such speeches) σου {from you). 
 
 546. βαρνν, —a quo grave quid 
 metuendum.” Cf. Antig. 767. 1251. 
 1 256. WUND. 
 
 547. TOVT avTO, viz. 8νσμ(νη κα\ 
 βαρνν eivai. 
 
 549 . ανθαδία {αυθάδης, αυτός, ηδο~ 
 μαι). Ellendt translates wrongly 
 
 superbia. The word has been largely 
 explained in my “ Frogs.” (w. 801. 
 986.) Antig. 1028. αυθαδία Toi σκαι- 
 άτητ όφΧισκάνβι. 
 
 552. νττίχΐΐν την δίκην. ScHOL. tO 
 pay the penalty. Plat. 6 Leg. 754, e. 
 δίκην νπ^χίτω. Dem. 646, 14. την δ’ 
 eVl τω 7Γροτ€ρω φόνω δίκην νπίχα. 
 
 Cf. Electr. 34· ^ 9 ^· ^ * 3 · 
 
 Ib. ουκ (at this word CEdipus 
 pauses, and then with the bitterest 
 contempt.) 
 
 555. η ου, a monosyllable in 
 rhythm. Cf. infr. 1232. El. T07. 
 133. Antig. 544. 936. Trach. 88. 
 622. Aj. 540. 
 
 Ib. €7Τ€ΐθ€ς, ως χρξίη. Cf. infr. 791· 
 Dawes’ Miscell. p. 325. 
 
 556. Tov aepvopavTiv. (Said with 
 a sneer, Creon having probably used 
 some such term when persuading 
 CEdipus to send for Tiresias.) El¬ 
 lendt translates: verenda canens. 
 The word μάντις not unfrequently 
 occurs in composition : CEd. Col. 
 1097. φ^νδόμαντις . Phil. 1338. άριστά- 
 μαντις. Pind. Nem. I. 92. ορθόμαντις. 
 
 557. “Nor am I inconsistent with 
 myself. I am still of opinion that 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 89 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 TTOcrov TLV ηδη Brjff δ Λάϊο? \ρόνον 
 δβδρακβ ΤΓοίον epyov ; ου γαρ ίννοω, 
 αφαντοζ eppEL θαρασίμω χΕίρώματί ; 
 μακροί παλαιοί τ αν μΕτρηθΕΐΕΡ χρόνοι, 
 τότ ουν 6 μάντΐ 9 oSros* ην ev rrj ΤΕχνρ ; 
 σοφός" γ ομοίως κάζ ίσου τιμώμΕνος. 
 Ιμνησατ ουν ίμου τι τω τότ ev χρόνω ; 
 οΰκουν Εμού y όστωτος ούδαμοΰ πόλας. 
 άλλ’ ούκ EpEOvav του θανόντος ΕσχΕΤΕ ; 
 παρόσχομΕΡ^ πώς δ' ούχί ; κούκ ηκούσαμΕν. 
 πώς ουν τόθ' ούτος ό σοφος ούκ ηΰδα τάδΕ ; 
 ουκ οίδ * €0* οίς γαρ μη φρονώ σιγάν φιλώ, 
 τοσον δό γ οίσθα και λέγοις άν Ευ φρονών. 
 ποιον τόδ*; εΙ γαρ οίδά γ\ ούκ άρνησομαι. 
 όθούνΕκ\ el μη σοΙ ζυνηλθΕ, τάς Εμάς 
 
 56ο 
 
 5^5 
 
 570 
 
 Tiresias ought to have been sum¬ 
 moned and consulted.” Philoct. 521. 
 TOT ovK eff avTos Tols Xoyots tovtois 
 <j)avrjs. Thucyd. III. 38. ^γώ μβν ουν 
 6 αυτός €ΐμι ττ} yvώμr]. (Libri, Herm. 
 Ell. €Tt αυτός ei/xt. Elms.\ Wund. 
 Dind. e^’ αυτός (ϊμι.) 
 
 560. Άφαντος, properly, unseen. 
 Cf. infr. 832. Eurip. Or. 1573. Ib. 
 θανασίμω χεφώματι, by deadly violence, 
 i. e. by a violent death. 
 
 561. μακροΧ παλαιοί τ. gl. eVi πολύ 
 8 ιηκοντ€ς καΧ πάλαι άρξάμ^νοι. Supply, 
 ft μζτρηθάίζν. and cf. CEd. Col. 647. 
 
 562. ην iv τη Τ€χνη. Aj. 271.^1' iv 
 τη νόσω, Philoct. 847. πάντων iv νόσω 
 — πάντων νοσούντων. Cf. Viger de 
 Idiot, p. 607. ed. Herm. 
 
 563. (ξΧσου τιμώμενος. Cf. Antig. 
 640 sq. Eurip. Iph. A. 804. 
 
 565. €μού βστώτοί . . πίλας, in my 
 presence. Cf. infr. 1047. 
 
 566. epevvav (χ€ΐν — ipcovav. So 
 El. 616. αίσχυνην €xeiv = αίσχύνισθαι. 
 
 Aj. 879. α-γρας€χ€ΐν = aypeveiv. Phil. 
 322. έγκλημα €χ€ΐν τινΧ = εγκαλεΐν. 
 El. 897* θαύμα €χειν = βαυμάζειν. &C. 
 See Ell. I. 732· 
 
 566, 7 . άσχετε followed by τταρ- 
 εσχετε, will perhaps remind the 
 reader of a rule observed in comic 
 Greek. 
 
 Ib. πως δ’ ούχί; ^sch. ap. Athen. 
 IX. 375 » e. λευκός, τι δ’ ούχί; καΧ κα¬ 
 λώ? ηφευμενος | ό χοίρος. Dind. Ib. 
 κούκ ηκούσαμεν — neque quicquam com- 
 perimus. Wund. 
 
 568. 6 σοφός (sneeringly). 
 
 570. TO σόν 8 ε γ’ οίσθα. Εβν. from 
 his own MS. and L Lb. See his 
 reasoning on the matter. Brunck 
 had previously adopted the same 
 reading, τοσόνόε y\ Dind. 
 
 570—2. λεγοιςαν — όθούνεκ . Much 
 discussion has existed among the 
 commentators on Sophocles, whe¬ 
 ther this word is to be written as 
 one or two (0^’ ούνεκά) words, what 
 
90 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛ ΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ^Ρ. 
 
 ούκ αν ττοτ ehre Ααΐον διαφθοράς. 
 
 €ί μίν Xeyei τάδ\ αυτός οΙσθ*' βγω δβ σου 
 μαθβΐν δίκαιώ ταΰθ' άττβρ κάμοΰ συ νυν, 
 βκμάνθαν ' ου γάρ δη φονβύς άλώσομαι. 
 τι δητ ; άδβλφην την βμην γη μας ; 
 
 αρνησις ουκ βνβστιν ών άνιστορβίς, 
 άρχβις δ' βκβίνη ταύτά, γης ϊσον νβμων ; 
 άν Ύ} θβλουσα, πάντ βμου κομίζβται, 
 ούκ ούν Ισούμαι σφων βγω δυοΐν τρίτος ; 
 βνταύθα γάρ δη και κακός φαίνβι φίλος, 
 ούκ, βΐ διδοίης γ ως βγω σαυτω λόγον. 
 
 S7S 
 
 580 
 
 is its origin, and when it enters into 
 an indicative, when into an optative 
 mood. On all these points the 
 reader may consult Ellendt, who 
 coincides with the general opinion, 
 that the word is a contraction of 
 οτου €V€Ka. The mode of illustra¬ 
 tion more particularly pursued in 
 this edition leads me to remark, 
 that no notice has been taken of 
 the Pindaric elveKev, which in Isthm. 
 VIII. 69. (fiveKfv ττ^Ίτρωμίνορ ην') 
 bears exactly the same conjunctive 
 meaning as όθοννβκα does here : viz. 
 that. 
 
 Ib. ei μη σο\ σννηΧβί. ScHOL. 
 μη (λάμβανίν σβ κοινωρον τον βονλβν- 
 ματοί. 
 
 Ib. τάς €μας (emphatic) {the work 
 of MY hands, caused by me). Ααΐον 
 διαφθοράς {the murder of Laius). 
 
 574 ~5· {τταρα) μαθειν. 
 
 575 * ravff i. e. Kara, τα αντά. In 
 the same way as you endeavoured 
 by a set of interrogations to prove 
 that Tiresias had been suborned by 
 me, so I by interrogation will prove 
 that Tiresias could not have been 
 suborned by me. Wund. 
 
 576. ΐκμάνθανβ, put your questions 
 (looking with the utmost contempt) 
 
 to superfluity, if you will. 
 
 577. γημας €χ€ΐς. For authorities 
 on this Attic formula, and numerous 
 examples from Sophocles, to whom 
 it is more familiar than Euripides, 
 see Ellendt. The participle is not to 
 be considered wholly redundant, but 
 rather as implying something durable 
 and permanent. Cf. Find. Nem. 1 .45. 
 
 578. El. 527· έ'^οιδα* τώι/δ’ αρνησις 
 ονκ Ζνΐστί μοι. Erf. 
 
 579 * νΐμων, parent regni 
 
 portionem ohtinens. Erf. Are we 
 then to understand that Jocasta and 
 CEdipus were the joint sovereigns of 
 Thebes } This seems deducible from 
 the language of the Chorus infr. 873. 
 where by the word τύραννον, Jocasta 
 is clearly meant; but how is it con¬ 
 sistent with the language of CEdipus 
 himself (sup. 237.)? 
 
 580. κομίζζσθαι (middle voice) to 
 receive. Schol. άντ\ τον e^eis. Ari- 
 stoph. Av. 549. to recover. 
 
 TV * _ ^ M 
 
 ID. av =. ατινα av. 
 
 581. τρίτος. Cf. CEd. Col. 8. 
 
 582. ΐντανθα, from that very cir¬ 
 cumstance. 
 
 583. ovK, i. e. ovK av φαινοίμην. Cf. 
 sup. 361. infr. 1018. 1131. &c. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 91 
 
 σκβψαί τούτο ττρωτον^ e? τιι/ αν 8οκ€Ϊ9 
 αρχ€ίν βλεσθαι ξνν ψόβοισί μάλλον η 
 ατρβστον βνδοντ, el τα γ* αυθ €^€l κράτη, 
 βγω μβν ούν οΰτ αυτο^ Ιμβίρων βφυν 
 τύραννος elvai μάλλον η τνραννα δράν, 
 ουτ αλλθ9 6στί9 (τωφρονβΐν Ιττίσταται. 
 νυν μβν γάρ βκ σου τνάντ άνβυ φόβου φβρω' 
 el δ αυτός ήρχον, πολλά καν ακων βδρων. 
 πώς δητ βμοί τυραννίς ηδίων €χΕίν 
 ^ΡΧν^ άλυπου και δυναστβίας βφυ ; 
 οϋπω τοσοΰτον ηπατημβνος κυρώ 
 ωστ αλλα χρηζ^ίν η τα συν κβρδβί καλά, 
 νυν πάσι χαίρω, νυν μβ πάς άσπάζβται, 
 νυν οί σβθβν χρηζοντβς βκκαλουσί μβ. 
 το γαρ τυχβΐν αύτοΐς άπαντ βνταυθ' evL. 
 
 585 
 
 590 
 
 595 
 
 lb. dibdvai \0yov (σκε'ψ'ίΐ/ κα\ dia- 
 γρωστικψ κρίσιν. ScHOL.). Herodot. 
 II. 162. ovBeva Χόγον αντώ 8όντα. At 
 the word €γω in this verse supply 
 ζμαυτω. 
 
 584 ~ 5 · would prefer. 
 
 586. arpearov evdovr (in a State of 
 the utmost security.) sc. αρχ€ΐν. 
 
 587. Brunck compares Hippo- 
 lytus’ reasoning with his father in 
 the drama of that name. 1013 SQ* 
 
 Ib. Ιμίίρωρ €φνρ. Wunder com¬ 
 pares Phil. 1032. ρικαρ ye μύρτοι τταρ- 
 ταχον χρίιζωρ €(pvp. 
 
 588. Tvpappa hpap, to enjoy royal 
 power, gl. βασιλικό, woieip κα\ μη βασι¬ 
 λεύς ειραι, ώσπερ avros εχω pvp. Ύυραρ- 
 ρορ for τυραρρικορ occurs Antig. 1169. 
 Tvpappop σχήμα. yEsch. From. 786. 
 προς του τνραρρα σκήπτρα σνληθησεται. 
 Eurip. Tro. 474 * V τνραρρος, κεϊς 
 τυραρρ* εγημάμηρ. 
 
 594 · η'η-ατημερος, misled, foolish. 
 595 · 'ί· K.'^hings at once 
 
 prifitahle and honorable. 
 
 596. ρυρπασι χαίρω, nunc omnibus 
 oblector. Br. i. e. / love every body, 
 and am beloved by them in return. 
 WuND. Ebner justifies Solger’s 
 translation, *‘Jetzt griisst michjederj’ 
 and observes that pvp πασι χαίρω is 
 the same as pvp με πάς άσπάζεται. 
 But why is the poet to say the same 
 thing twice ? 
 
 597. εκκαλονσι ScHOL. προκαλον- 
 σιρ. Erf. evocant me, sc. ex sedibus, 
 rogantque, ut ipsorum tibi petitiones 
 proponam. El. evocant (in suos usus). 
 L. Dindorf, considering the word as 
 unsuited to the dignity of tragedy, 
 proposes αΙκάλλονσι. But is the lat¬ 
 ter word (cf. Arist. Eq. 48. 211. 
 Thes. 869.) more consistent with 
 tragic diction than the word in the 
 text } Cf. Diss. ad Pyth. IX. 49. 
 
 598. Construction; to γάρ τνχεΐρ 
 άπαρτα (the obtaining of all that they 
 desire) εστΙρ αντοίς ερτανθα (ScHOL. 
 
92 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ττώς δητ βγω κβίν αν λάβοιμ a(j)e\s τάδβ ; 
 ούκ αν yevoLTo vovs· κακός" καλώς φρονών, 
 άλλ’ οϋτ βραστής τησδβ της γνώμης βφυν^ 
 ουτ αν μβτ άλλου δρώντος αν τλαίην ποτβ. 
 καί τωνό βλβγχον τούτο μβν ίΐνσωο ίων 
 7Γβυθόν τα γρησθβντ\ βΐ σαφώς ηγγβίλά σοί' 
 
 6οο 
 
 iv €μοί.) Sophocles is hardly less 
 peculiar in his use of adverbs (cf. sup. 
 125.486. OEd. Col. 585.) than pos¬ 
 sessive pronouns. For construction 
 of τύγχαναν with accus. cf. Wund. 
 ad Philoct. 503. avrovs απαν 
 Ebn. cum MS.^^ 
 
 599. λάβοιμ {select, choose) κβινα, 
 rahe a<p€h, having abandoned. (Ed. 
 Col. 787. ovK €στί σοι ταντ , αλλά σοι 
 τάδ’ eVrt. Cf. ibid. 5 ^ 5 * 
 
 600. A mind capable of discri¬ 
 minating and judging so rightly can¬ 
 not be a bad mind. 
 
 601. βραστής, amator, i. e. sectaior. 
 El. 
 
 Ib. γνώμη valet Βιάθβσις, dispositio 
 animi, ut interpretatur etiam Hesych. 
 nunquam amavi hanc 7 nentis dispo- 
 sitionem, i. e. earn quse titulis et fastu 
 capitur.” Musgr. 
 
 602. τλαίην ποτά Supply δραι/ 
 from the preceding 8 ρωντος. 
 
 603. τωνδ’ βλβγχον, i. e. ος τωι/δ’ 
 βλβγχός βστι. Eurip. Hel. 35 · 
 
 κβΐ μ* βχβιν, κβνην δόκησιν, ονκ βχων. 
 Electr. 23 Ι · βυδαιμονοίης, μισθόν η 8 ί~ 
 στων λόγων. V. Matth. Gr. Gr. §.426. 
 1. Erf. ωστβ βλβγχβσθαι τούτο. El. 
 
 604. χρησθβντα. (Ed. Col. 356· μ^ν~ 
 TeV αγουσα πάντα — ά τουδ’ βχρησθη 
 σώματος. 
 
 Ib. τούτο μβν {partly) is generally 
 followed by τούτο δε (cf. Antiph. 
 130, 30. 139, 5. and Greek orators 
 generally) ; but this arrangement is 
 often changed. Herodot. III. 108. 
 
 TOVTO μβν — TO δε\ VI. 125 · "^^οτο μβν 
 
 — μβτά δε. &C. So Sophocles infr. 
 
 605. τοίιτ άλλο. Antig. 61—3. TOVTO 
 μβν — βπβιτα δε. Phil. Ι 345 ~^· '^οΟτο 
 μβν — βίτα. Antig. 165 — 7 · TOVTO μβν — 
 τοντ ανθις. Sometimes the second 
 member is omitted. Cf. Plat. Alcib. 
 I2 2,d. Soph. (Ed. Col. 441. Aj. 672. 
 
 Ib. Ιίνθω, ονς. In strict speaking, 
 Pytho meant the upper part of the 
 town of Delphi, the middle part 
 being termed Nape {βησσα τρηχβΊα 
 Hym. Horn. cf. Pind. Pyth. VI. 9. 
 cum Schol. Pausan. X. 6, i. Hesych. 
 S. VOC. Τοπίου βοννός. Schol. II. II. 
 519). and the lower part Pylcea, on 
 which suburb, see Plutarch de Pyth. 
 orac. 29. In the Pytho were com¬ 
 prised the temple of the god, the 
 great altar, the brazen wolf, the 
 όμφαλός, presents and donations, the 
 tomb of Neoptolemus, the Cronian 
 stone, the theatre, &c. &c. Some 
 derive the word from πνθβσθαι, to 
 inquire of an oracle, a derivation in¬ 
 consistent with metrical propriety; 
 some from the dragon Pytho, who 
 haunted there; others from πνθω, 
 corruption, because the dragon, when 
 slain by Apollo, rotted and corrupted 
 there. Pytho first appears as the 
 name of a town in the writings of 
 Pindar and Herodotus. See further 
 on the subject Horn. h. Apollo 183. 
 372. 517. Od. VHI. 80. XI. 580. 
 Hes. Theog. 499. Scut. Here. 480. 
 fragm. 29. Pind. Ol. VH. 16. XHI. 
 50. Pyth. IV. 117. X. 6. XI. 73. 
 Isthm. VH. 72. fr. Incert. 86, 9. 
 See also Passow in voc. Wachsm. IV. 
 263. Thudichum I. 229, 30. Sick- 
 
0ΙΔ1Π0ΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 93 
 
 τοντ αλλ\ iap μ€ τώ τβρασκόπω λάβρί 605 
 
 κοίΡΤ] TL βονλβνσαρτα, μη μ άπλη κτάνης 
 λίτηφω, δίπλη Se, τη τ 4μη καΙ ση, λαβών, 
 γνώμη δ' άδηλω μη μβ \ωρ\ς αΐτιώ. 
 ου γαρ δίκαιον οΰτβ rous* κακούς μάτην 
 χρηστούς νομίζβιν οντ€ τους χρηστούς κακούς, 6ιο 
 φίλον γαρ 4σθλον βκβαλβΐν ίσον λ4γω 
 καί τον Trap αντω βίοτον, ον ττλώίστον φιλβΐ, 
 άλλ’ 4ν χρόνω γνώσβί τάδ' ασφαλώς' βπβϊ 
 χρονος δίκαιον ανδρα δβίκννσιν μόνος' 
 κακόν δβ καν 4ν η μόρα γνοίης μια, 6}ζ 
 
 ΧΟ. καλώς βλβζβν βνλαβονμύνω ττεσβιν, 
 
 αναξ, φρονβΐν γαρ οι ταχείς ούκ ασφαλείς. 
 
 ler’s Cadmus, ρ. 17* Parkh. Heb. 
 Lex. ρ. 6 o 2. and Dissen’s Find. I. 
 284. II. ad fin. 628. 
 
 606—7. άπλτ} ψήφω, your own 
 single suffrage. 
 
 607. λαβωρ, like various other 
 participles in Sophocles, is nearly 
 redundant. 
 
 608. γνωμί] ά 8 ηΧω, on account of 
 an opinion without foundation. Cf. 
 infr. 657. 
 
 Ib. χωρίς, i. e. depending on this 
 argument, and no other. Erf. 
 
 609. μάτην, gl. άνΐ^ζτάστως, with¬ 
 out inquiry ; perhaps better, impru¬ 
 dently. 
 
 612. TOP Trap' αντω βίοτον, i. e. τον 
 avrov βίοτον, his own life. Suppl. ck- 
 βάΧΧαν. 
 
 Ib. ίσον κα\, the same as. 
 
 Ib. ov ττΧΐϊστον {άνηρ) (piXel. 
 
 614. The same or similar senti¬ 
 ments occur in other Greek writers. 
 
 μη ΤΓοτ ^παινησης, πρίν αν (ΙΒης άνδρα 
 σαφηνως, 
 
 οργήν και ρνθμον κα\ τρόπον οστις 
 αν rj. 
 
 ποΧΧοί τοι κίβδηΧον (πίκΧοπον ήθος 
 €χοντες, 
 
 κρύπτονσ, iv 6 epLevot θνμον εφημέ¬ 
 ριον’ 
 
 τούτων δ' εκφαίνει πάντων χρόνος ήθος 
 εκάστον. Theogn. 957 * 
 
 χρόνος δίκαιον άνδρα μηνύει ποτέ. 
 
 Philemon, ap. Stob. 
 
 615 . καν — Koi αν. 
 
 6 1 6. The monarchical Chorus, 
 observing the vehemence and pre¬ 
 cipitation of CEdipus, remark with 
 much delicacy and tact, that the 
 words of Creon well considered, and 
 by a man careful not to stumble 
 from over haste, are much to the 
 purpose. The Scholiast, with an 
 eye to a following verse, writes, 
 εύΧαβονμενω πεσεΐν και επιβουΧευθη- 
 σεσθαι παρ' αντω. For the word 
 πίπτειν Elmsley compares El. 398. 
 429 - 
 
 lb. εύΧαβονμενω. Cf. QEd. Col. 
 
 116. Eurip. Suppl. 335. 
 
 6γ 7. Eurip. Phoen. 462. επίσχες' 
 οντοι το ταχύ την δίκην εχει’ | βραδείς 
 δε μύθοι πΧείστον άνύτονσιν σοφόν. 
 
94 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. όταν ταχύς ης ονπφονλβνων λαθρα 
 
 χοορτΙ, ταχυν δβΐ κάμ€ βουλβύβίν τταΧιν, 
 
 el δ' ησυχάζων ττροσμβνω^ τα τονδβ μβν 620 
 
 ΤΓβττραγμύν "Ισται^ τάμα δ* ημαρτημένα, 
 
 ΚΡ. τί δητα χρηζ^ι ^^; η μ^ γψ βαλβΐν ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ήκιστα, θνησκβιν, ού φυγεΐν ae βούλομαι. 
 
 ΚΡ. όταν ττροδβίζης οίον βστι το φθον€Ϊν. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώς ούχ ντΓβιξων ovSe πιστβύσων λέγεις ; 625 
 
 ΚΡ. ον γάρ φρονουντά σ εύ βλέττω. ΟΙ. το γονν εμον. 
 ΚΡ. άλλ’ 6^ ίσου δει κάμόν. ΟΙ. άλλ’ εφυς κακός. 
 
 ΚΡ. ει δε ζυνίης μηδέν ; ΟΙ. άρκτέον γ όμως. 
 
 Publ. Syr. Sent. 5· Ad poenitendum 
 properat, cito qui judicat. 
 
 618—19. ταχύς — χ(^ρπ quick in 
 
 his advances, or movements.) = ra- 
 χ€ως —Cf. CEd. Col. 306. βραΒνς 
 evdei. Antig. 1215.ΪΓ ώκβΐς. &c. &c. 
 On 'Κάθρα and λάθρα, cf. Ell. and Pass. 
 
 620. τα Tovdf. Creontis sc. 
 
 621. τάμα δ’ ημαρτημένα, MY pro¬ 
 ceedings or counsels ivill he to no 
 purpose. 
 
 622. η μ€. Brunck lias incau¬ 
 tiously written η μ€. Ebner has 
 thus explained the rule of accentua¬ 
 tion : “ Docent in interrogationibus 
 directis turn solum η admittendum 
 esse, ubi in interrogatione prsece- 
 dente insit sensus generalis, in se- 
 quente specialis ideoque certior et 
 magis definitus. Matth.§, 619. Ad 
 'v. 532. sensus verborum η τοσ-όνδ* 
 βχβίί κ. τ. λ. non minus generalis est, 
 quam qui in interrogatione antece- 
 dente inest; ex quo patet, η illic 
 locum habere non posse, sed scriben- 
 dum esse η. Hie contra η scriben- 
 dum erit, et in Philoct. 579. η φόβος 
 
 S f 99 
 
 TLS etpye pip ; 
 
 624. όταν προδΰξης seems equi¬ 
 valent to our “ of course you will 
 first shew" —that it is said in a taunt¬ 
 
 ing, offensive manner, is evident from 
 CEdipus’s mode of reply. Dobree 
 proposes ω ’ταν, προδ€ίξ€ΐς. 
 
 Ib. οϊόν έστι το φθον€7ν. gl. οιός 
 €(ΓΤΐν 6 έμος ττρός (τέ φθόνος, qU(E mea 
 sit in te invidia. Br. quid in me sit 
 hoc odio dignum tuo. Elms, quid sit, 
 quo indignere. Herm. qualis sit tua 
 invidia. Wund. i. e. quid sit, ob quod 
 vitam mihi invideas. On the word 
 φθόνος in a political sense, we shall 
 have to enter somewhat largely in a 
 future play. Cf. infr. 1526. 
 
 626. TO yovv ipov {my own benefit) 
 (cu φρονουντά μ€ βλέπίΐς). The el¬ 
 lipse is again to be supplied atCreon’s 
 answer in the following verse. 
 
 628. et be ξννίης μηδέν {ων νπο- 
 νοΐίς the Schohast adds.) On the 
 word ξννίης, see Schneider de dial. 
 8-9. 
 
 Ib. That the verbal adject, άρκτέον 
 is here used in a passive sense, the 
 answer of Creon intimates. The two 
 passages may be paraphrastically 
 rendered, “ Whether my suspicions 
 are founded on a correct knowledge 
 or otherwise, is no matter: your 
 duty is submission.” “ Submission ! 
 and to an unworthy ruler } Never 1 ” 
 See a learned note on the subject by 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 95 
 
 ΚΡ. ovTOL κακώί y apypvTOS. ΟΙ. ώ ττόλις^ ττόλί?. 
 
 ΚΡ. καμ(λ ΤΓολβωί μίτ^στιν^ ονχι σοί μόνω. 630 
 
 ΧΟ. τταύσασθ^ avaicres' καιρίαν & ύμϊν ορώ 
 
 την 8 €Κ δόμων στβίχονσαν *Ιοκάστην, μβθ' ^9 
 το νυν ΐΓαρ€στ 09 V€lko 9 €ύ θόσθαι, χ^ρ^ών. 
 
 ΙΟΚΑΣΤΗ. 
 
 τί την αβονλον, ώ ταλαίττωροι, στάσιν 
 
 γΧώσσης hrrjpcwff ονδ* ΙτΓαισχυνβσθβ γη 9 635 
 
 οΰτω νοσούση 9 ϊδια κινουντβ^ κακά] 
 
 ονκ el σύ τ οϊκου^, σύ re, Vipeov, κατά crreya?, 
 
 καΊ μη το μηδβν άλγθ 9 els· μόγ οϊσβτβ; 
 
 ΚΡ. όμaιμe, δeLvά μ! Οίδ/ττουί ό σο9 ττόσις 
 
 Hermann, and also by EUendt, who 
 compares Dinarch. c. Dem. 103, 45. 
 ov καταπΧηκτΙορ eVri, where Reiske 
 observes, “ non sensu activo, sed 
 passivo; non, pro ov προατήκξΐ νμ7ν 
 aXXovs καταπΧητταν, sed νπ αλΧωρ 
 καταπΧήττίσθαι.” 
 
 629. ω πόΧις, πόΧις. “ Thebes ! 
 Thebes !” Dale. This is poetically 
 rendered; but looking to Creon’s 
 response, perhaps the speaker’s mind 
 is best interpreted by some such ex¬ 
 pression as Be the whole state 
 auditors to this!” (turning to the 
 Chorus, who here represent the state.) 
 For numerous examples of this re¬ 
 duplication of words, see EUendt II. 
 984. 
 
 632. ^Ιοκάστηρ. In the Odyssey 
 (XI. 270), this royal personage is 
 termed Epicaste. Μητέρα τ Οίδιπόδαο 
 Ίδορ, κάΧηρ ^Επικάστηρ. It is unneces¬ 
 sary to remind biblical students, how 
 often this custom of antiquity, viz. 
 that of giving more than one name to 
 eminent persons, renders it difficult 
 to harmonize scriptural with profane 
 historical names. 
 
 633 · €v θ€σθαι, to compose, to 
 settle. Creusa fr. 321'. (Dind.) ταντ 
 €στ\ρ αΧγιστ, ήρ παρορ θ^σθαι καΧώς | 
 αυτός τις αντω τηρ βΧάβηρ προσθτ} 
 ρωρ. 
 
 635· eTTaipeip, to raise up, as the 
 voice. Dem. 449, 13. Xoyovs eVai- 
 ρ€σθαι. ^02, 13. €πηρασθ€. ElmS. 
 Dind. Ebn. επηρατ€. Herm. quod 
 et ipsum bonum, cum recte dicatur 
 noXepop et στάσιρ αφειρ, de COllflandlS 
 beUo et discordia.” El. 
 
 636. ιδία κιρονντες κακά. ScHOL. 
 φϊΧορεικονρτες. 
 
 637. κατά στεγας. Cf. CEd. Col. 
 339 · Eurip.Phoen. 200. Orest. 1479. 
 &c. &c. 
 
 638. μη. On this particle placed 
 after ού in a preceding sentence, 
 consult EUendt, II. 95. 
 
 Ib. TO μηδερ άΧγος, a sorrow of nO 
 moment. 
 
 Ib. εις μεγα, viz. that which the 
 state is suffering under. 
 
 639. 0 σ05 πόσις (said perhaps 
 contemptuously, as if Jocasta had 
 disgraced herself by marrying an 
 unknown adventurer). 
 
96 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 SpdaaL δίκαιοί, δυοίν άτΓθκρινα 9 κακοΐν, 640 
 
 η γης άττώσαι πατρίδας, η κτβιναι Καβών, 
 
 ΟΙ. ζυμφημι' δρώντα γάρ νιν, ώ γύναι, κακώς 
 βίληφα τούμον σώμα συν τβγνη κακή. 
 
 ΚΡ. μη νυν οναίμην, άλΧ αραιός, βϊ σέ τι 
 
 δίδρακ, ολοίμην, ών υπαίτια μ€ δραν. 645 
 
 ΙΟ. ώ προς Θβών πιστευσον, ΟΙδίπον, τάδβ. 
 
 μάλιστα μίν tovS* ορκον' 
 έπειτα κάμβ, τονσδβ θ οϊ 
 ΧΟ. πίθου θβλησας φρονησας 
 
 640. δυοΐι/, in metre a monosyl¬ 
 lable. Dindorf gives the following 
 instances of a similar synizesis in 
 Latin authors. 
 
 Plautus Rud. t, 2, 41. 
 
 Duas s^cum adduxit, quique ador- 
 naret sibi. 
 
 2, 2,14. 
 
 Qui duceret mulierculas duas se- 
 cum sat venustas. 
 
 Trinumm. 4, 3, 46. 
 
 Si mage exigere gupias, duarum 
 rerum exoritur optio. 
 
 Terent. Heaut. 2, 3, 85. 
 
 Harum duarum conditionum nunc 
 utram malis vide. 
 
 Cf. Schneider de dial. p. 13. 
 
 Ib. άποκρίναν, to select, decide be¬ 
 tween ; (here : one out of two evils. 
 ScHOL. €V των bvo ττοιησας.) For 
 construction, cf. QEd. Col. 640. 
 
 Ib. άπόκρίνας. On this metrical 
 rarity, see Erf. andHerm. and Person 
 ad Eurip. Orest. 64. To the exam¬ 
 ples given by Erf. add with Elmsley 
 Soph. Phil. 30. El. 1193. ^sch. 
 Prom. 25. 
 
 643. τούμον σώμα, i. Q. μ€. Brunck 
 compares Eurip. Alcest. 647. ούκ 
 ησθ' dp' ορθως roOSe σώματος ττατηρ. 
 i. e. e/xo? πατήρ. Add Pind. Pyth. 
 
 αιδ€σθ€ΐς θ€ων, 
 πάρεισί σοι. 
 
 -, άναζ, λίσσομαι. (ττρ.ά 649 
 
 i 
 
 VIII. 116. τίτρασι δ’έ'/χττβτβί ύψόθ€ν j 
 σωμάτ^σσι (sc. personis Gurlitt.) κακά 
 φρονβων. Dissen refers to Barnes’s 
 notes ad Eurip. Alcest. 636. 
 
 644. μη vvv οναίμην. (ScHOL. τού 
 βίου. An addition, the necessity of 
 which Passow denies.) On μη with 
 an optative mood, consult Ell. II. 
 96. 
 
 Ib. αραιός. Suidas ; dpa υποκεί¬ 
 μενος. 
 
 647. ορκον — θεών, an oath sanc¬ 
 tioned by invocation of the gods. 
 Solger observes : “ Man beleidigte 
 die Cotter, wenn man ihr Zeugniss, 
 welches der Schworende anruft, nicht 
 gelten liess.” “ The gods were of¬ 
 fended, when validity was not allowed 
 to their testimony, which the per¬ 
 son making oath appealed to.” Cf. 
 infr. 651. et Eurip. Hippol. 1058. 
 And see a most learned disquisition 
 on the word by Buttmann. Lexil. 
 
 P* 433 sq. 
 
 649. θεΧησας, readily and from 
 good will. 
 
 Ib. φρονησας, wisely, and from 
 having given the matter full con¬ 
 sideration. Metre: tetram. cret. with 
 anac. 
 
01ΔΓΠ0ΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 97 
 
 ΟΙ. τί σοι OeXeis δητ €ΐκάθω ; 
 
 χο. TOP οντ€ ττρίρ νηπων νυν τ βν ορκω μβγαρ καταίδβσαι. 
 ΟΙ. οΙσθ' ουρ a χργιζ€ί9; ΧΟ. οίδα. ΟΙ, φράζβ δη τί φψ, 
 ΧΟ. TOP €Ραγί^ φίλορ μηττοτ ip αίτια 656 
 
 σνρ άφαρ€Ϊ λόγ(ρ ατιμορ βαλβΐρ, 
 
 ΟΙ. €ύ PVP ίττίστω^ ταν& οταρ ζητης^ e/xoi 
 ζητώρ οΧβθροΡ η φυγηρ e/c τησδβ γης. 
 
 ΧΟ. ού TOP ττάρτωρ θβώρ θβορ ττρομορ σ-τρ. 0. 66ο 
 
 650. eeXeis €ΐκάθω. Ε 1 . 8θ. ^eXecs 
 μ€ίνωμ€ν. Cf. Matth. Gr. Gr. §. 516. 
 
 652. νηπιον. (νη — enos). That this 
 is not a word of light import, the 
 solemnity of the occasion on which 
 it here occurs, and the use of it by 
 the Delphic oracle to such a man as 
 Croesus (Herodot. 1 . 85. Avde yevos, 
 ΤΓοΧΧων βασιΧίν, μίγα νητΐΐζ Κροισβ), suf¬ 
 ficiently she'w. We are not therefore, 
 as Goettling observes (Hes. p. 158), 
 to consider the word as invidiously 
 applied by Hesiod to his brother, 
 that brother, whom though deeply 
 injured by him, he had relieved 
 more than once (Op. 396. Goett. 
 Ed.) before he strongly impressed 
 on him the necessity of working out 
 his own independence. 
 
 Ib. eV ορκω μ€γαν, i. e. μ^γαν ορκω, 
 eV ω iari. WrjND. metre : tetram. 
 cret. with anac. and iamb. dip. (For 
 Pindaric adjurations in his own 
 person, see Ol. II. 166. VI. 35. 
 &c. &c.) See also Diss.Comm. p. 88. 
 
 655. TL φης, what you mean. Aj. 
 794. ωστ6 μ dibipeiv, τί φης. Erfurdt 
 compares the German, was du 
 meinst. 
 
 656. ivayr]s (Jv ayet ωι/). Passow 2). 
 a person who has bound himself by 
 an oath to the gods, and in case of 
 breaking that oath, has rendered 
 himself liable to the divine curse. 
 
 656—7· αιτία βαΧύν, culpcB S. 
 criminis arguere. Musgrave com¬ 
 
 pares Trach. 940. ματαίως αιτία βάΧοι 
 κακτ}. Plato ρ. 1287, f. μηΒ€πυτ€ βα~ 
 Xe 7 v iv αιτία τον beiKvvvTa. Philo Jud. 
 I. 545 * ττασαν κάκωσιν iv αίτια ride- 
 ριαι. Add Pind. Pyth. XII. 53. 
 
 657· σνν άφανβΤ. λόγω. gl. συν dve- 
 ξ£τάστω υποΧηφβι, having used an un¬ 
 certain proof. Hermann compares 
 Antiphon de csede Herodis : iyu> piv 
 ydp σοι φανίραν την πρόνοιαν els ipe 
 anopeiKVvpi, σύ de pe ev άφaveι λόγω 
 ζητeιs άποΧόσαι. Cf. SUp. 124. CEd. 
 Col. 814. and cf. Pind. Isthm. III. 
 T. V. 15. 45. Nem. II. 39. VII. 20. 
 IX. 116. Pyth. IV. 475. Metre: 
 dimeter dochm. 
 
 659. Because the punishment, 
 which he neglects to inflict on Creon, 
 he knows that Creon will inflict on 
 him. Cf. sup. 622. 
 
 660. ου τον for ου pa τον (cf. infl*. 
 T088. Electr. 1063. 1238.) κ.τ.ί. 
 This solemn adjuration made by the 
 whole Choral body with uplifted 
 hands, and while a vernal sun it may 
 be was shining brightly over their 
 heads, must have produced no small 
 eficct in the theatre, though the 
 oath itself, as we shall presently see, 
 was in all probability no very legiti¬ 
 mate one to Attic ears. 
 
 Ib. Tov πάντων decov deov πρόρον. 
 Having adverted to the poetry of 
 this striking adjuration, in the pre¬ 
 ceding note, let us address ourselves 
 to the words themselves, and to some 
 
 II 
 
98 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 'AXiov' eVei a^eoy άφιλοι ο tl ττύματορ 
 
 observations of learned men in con¬ 
 nexion with them. If Buttmann in 
 
 ·· 
 
 his treatise “Uber die philosophische 
 Deutung der Griech. Gotth.” denied 
 (as he appears from Creuz. Symb. 
 II. 166. to have done) that the 
 Greeks ever held any great festival 
 to the god Helios, or swore by his 
 name, (their adjuration, according to 
 Buttmann, being always made in the 
 name of Apollo,) it is clear that on 
 the latter point this great scholar 
 had either forgotten or overlooked 
 the important passage before us. 
 But is he the only scholar, whose 
 reasonings might have been benefit- 
 ted by referring to the same passage ? 
 Among the remains of Pindaric 
 Hyporchemata, there is a noble frag¬ 
 ment relating to an eclipse of the 
 sun, which according to Ideler took 
 place B. C. 465, and which had evi¬ 
 dently produced the utmost con¬ 
 sternation at the time. The frag¬ 
 ment appears to be part of an 
 Hymn addressed to the god Helios, 
 and its close connexion with the 
 town of Thebes seems « unques¬ 
 tionable. Dissen, however, from 
 a similar persuasion with Buttmann, 
 that no particular worship was paid 
 to this god in Thebes, was induced 
 to believe, that the Hymn had been 
 sung, not at a Theban festival, but 
 at the Thargelia of Athens. Inde¬ 
 pendently of the present striking 
 passage, the reader has perhaps 
 seen reason to conclude from many 
 preceding notes (21. 80. 162. 190. 
 207.), that of all worships practised 
 in Thebes, solar, lunar, planetary &c. 
 the former was in all its branches par¬ 
 
 ticularly predominant there; and there 
 seems reason to believe, that not only 
 did the god Helios share in that wor¬ 
 ship, but his mother also ; a divinity 
 who in connexion with Theban 
 myths requires more attention than 
 has yet been paid to her. In the 
 Theogony of Hesiod (and to that 
 Theogony we shall presently return 
 for the investigation of the sun-god 
 Helios himself) this Titanic being 
 appears under the name of Theia 
 (v. 371.) and is the mother of Hehos 
 by Hyperion : and though I can 
 shew no positive testimony of her 
 being worshipped in Thebes, so much 
 collateral evidence can be furnished 
 to that effect, as will nearly answer 
 the same purpose. From Pindar’s 
 fifth Isthmian Ode, it is evident 
 that the goddess was worshiped in 
 Hilgina, that very Ode having been 
 sung at a festival dedicated to her, 
 and most probably sung in her 
 temple there. Now he can know little 
 of Boeotian myths, who does not 
 know, that according to those fables, 
 Higina and Thebes derived their 
 descent from two sisters, daughters 
 of Asopus (cf. 01. VI. 145. Nem. 
 III. 6. Diss. Comment, p. 376.); 
 and he must be still more ignorant 
 of the Pindaric writings, who is not 
 aware, that in consequence of this 
 consanguinity, the poet sings with 
 at least as much fervour, and far 
 more o frequently, the praises of the 
 former island, than he does those of 
 his native town. Is it likely under 
 such circumstances of consanguinity, 
 that the worship of Theia should 
 have belonged exclusively to the 
 
 n See more particularly v. 7. Λvhere the poet prays that the portent may turn out 
 favourably to his native town, or that if some dreadful catastrophe is preparing, he may 
 share in the common ruin. 
 
 o Of the forty-four Odes of Pindar (Diss. ed.) fo 7 ir are dedicated to natives of Thebes 
 and not less than eleven to natives of vEgina. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 99 
 
 one sister, and not have had some 
 favour with the other ? Again : this 
 goddess was confessedly worshipped 
 in Lemnos and Samothrace (Cf. 
 Dissen’s Comment, in Find, p.562.); 
 and how close the connexion was 
 between these two islands and 
 Thebes, we have seen in a former 
 note (190.). Is this no additional 
 argument for supposing a worship 
 of the sun-god’s mother in the 
 latter place ? But the case does 
 not altogether end even here. 
 Whoever has attentively considered 
 the Hesiodean goddess Hecate, 
 (a goddess not to be confounded 
 with the Attic Hecate,) and observes 
 how closely this goddess in some of 
 her most remarkable attributes har¬ 
 monizes with the Pindaric Theia 
 (cf. Theog. 420. 435. and Isth. V. 
 2. 15.), when he further learns that 
 the etymologic meanings of the 
 words Theia and Hecate are pretty 
 nearly the P same, and sees the 
 former noticed in Pindar as being 
 πολυώνυμος, or “ bearing many 
 names,” he will probably feel justi¬ 
 fied in coming to the following con¬ 
 clusions ;—that in Theban estima¬ 
 tion, Helios was not merely a god, 
 but “ a prince among gods”—that 
 where the god himself was so de¬ 
 voutly worshiped, the god’s mother 
 would not be altogether excluded 
 from adoration—that in using 
 the oath therefore under consi¬ 
 deration, Sophocles writes as a 
 Theban poet would have done, and 
 consequently in the true spirit of an 
 antiquarian—and, finally, that the 
 Hyporchematic fragment antece¬ 
 dently referred to was part of a 
 hymn sung, not at Athens, but at a 
 festival, ordinary or extraordinary, 
 of the god Helios in the Boeotian 
 capital. 
 
 Ib. πρόμον, a prince. (Cf. CEd. 
 
 Col. 884. Aisch. Ag. 193. 398. 
 Eum. 377. Eurip. Phoen. 1259. 
 Iph. A. 699. Troad. 31.) As the 
 word when traced to Phoe¬ 
 
 nician words implies the Power of 
 Greatness and Priority” (Cadmus 
 p. 65.), this substantive maybe con¬ 
 sidered as confirmatory of an obser¬ 
 vation made in a preceding note 
 (v. 190), viz. that when Hesiod, and 
 Sophocles after him, give us Phoe¬ 
 nician notions of primeval deities in 
 Hellenic forms, they generally add 
 to such a deity’s name an adjective 
 or substantive indicative of that 
 meaning in Hellenic language. For 
 opinions of Pindar and Empedocles 
 on princes, whether of the intel¬ 
 lectual or the political world—how 
 they were fabricated, how advanced 
 from men to heroes, and from heroes 
 it may be to gods, see the Threni 
 of the former, (fr. 4.) and Sturz’s 
 fragments of the latter. Part of 
 one of these is here subjoined, as 
 containing the word before us. 
 
 eh de reXos μάντ€ΐς re κα\ υμνοπόΧοι 
 και ΙητροΙ 
 
 και πρόμοι άνθρώποισιν €πίχθονΙοισι 
 πεΧονταί, 
 
 ev 6 ev άναβΧαστουσι 6 eo\ τιμρσι (pe'- 
 ρισ-τοι. Sturz. Edit. ρ. 532· 
 
 66 ι."ΑΧιον. . When we find two 
 such scholars as Buttmann andDissen 
 somewhat at fault in regard to this 
 deity, as far as concerns the classical 
 department of antiquity, it cannot 
 be thought irrelevant to pay some 
 little attention to him ; and perhaps 
 it would have been wiser to restrict 
 that view entirely to classical litera¬ 
 ture, without going into deeper 
 matter ; but the reader’s forbearance 
 is requested for one further instance 
 of a mode of illustration, which has 
 perhaps been too largely pursued 
 in the present drama. In Hesiod’s 
 
 1’ Cf. Sicklei'’s Cadmus, pp. 32. 64. 
 H 2 
 
100 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 οΧοίμαν, φρόΐ'ησιΐ' el τάζ/δ’ βχω. 
 
 Theogony, we find clear traces of f ectors, i. e. two instruments or 
 three principles of light, to which means by which light is transmitted 
 perhaps Hephaestus might he added to men, but certainly not that sub- 
 
 as a fourth: Hyperion^ the Titanic 
 or primeval light (v. 134), Helios, 
 his son, or embodied light, and 
 Apollo, to whom after the defeat of 
 the Titanic powers by Zeus, was as¬ 
 signed as his ye'pas and τιμή, the 
 guidance and administration of the 
 solar light. As we have more than 
 once already shewn, and could more 
 largely shew, did space and time ’ 
 admit, that Hesiodean notions on 
 theology and cosmogony are pretty 
 nearly one and the same with Phoe¬ 
 nician, it becomes a fair subject of 
 investigation, how far these accounts 
 tally with or differ from Mosaic 
 declarations on the same subject. 
 In a former note, when referring to 
 these deeply interesting matters, 
 we found a stagnant principle 
 of light called into an active one 
 by the mere word of the Creator. 
 This done, the sacred historian pro¬ 
 ceeds to describe the creation—not 
 of a firmament, as our Version most 
 inaptly terms it from the Vulgate,— 
 but that q expanse, or as it appears 
 to us, that vaulted arch, on whose 
 glorious appearance the eye is never 
 tired of gazing. In this expanse 
 the Almighty places — not two 
 lights, as our Version again renders 
 —but two luminaries or Ught-re- 
 
 tile, elastic matter, to which our 
 poverty in philosophic terms gives 
 the name of light itself. On the 
 resemblance between two of the 
 Hesiodean and Mosaic principles of 
 light — viz. Hyperion, the active, 
 s all-pervading, and Hehos the em¬ 
 bodied light—we feel no inclination 
 to dilate; how then shall we pre¬ 
 sume even to mingle the Ascrean’s 
 third principle with the Triune Deity 
 of the sacred historian ? On their 
 own three principles—or with He- 
 phsestus, i. e. the fiery breath, as a 
 fourth—Phoenician philosophers no 
 doubt talked and argued, as philo¬ 
 sophers are apt at all times to talk 
 and argue. 
 
 If so our first, our second so; 
 
 From which as sequence it must flow. 
 That if we have a first and second, 
 
 A third and fourth may well be 
 t reckon’d; 
 
 How must such jargonists have 
 been struck dumb, when with equal 
 brevity and sublimity, and in a pecu¬ 
 liarity of construction which Phoe¬ 
 nician philosophers would under¬ 
 stand, though English readers do 
 not, the sacred volume proclaimed, 
 “And God said, let there be light, 
 and light ^was !” It is unfair per- 
 
 ^ Cf. Gesenius and Parkh. in voc. The latter compares Avith this expanse 
 Plato’s Tdirts in his Timaeus. 
 
 See Parkh. H. Lex. p. 38. and Professor Jameson’s Preface to Engl. Transla¬ 
 tion of Cuvier’s Essay on the Theory of the Earth. How far some parts of the Newto¬ 
 nian system may be impugned or assisted by the Mosaic accounts, when strictly exa- 
 mined in the original, this is not the place for inquiring. 
 
 s Sickler’s definition is: “ die fiber alles hin Avandelnde, alles durchdringende und 
 mit vorzfiglichem Zeugungsvermogen versehene Urkraft.” Cadm. p. 65. 
 
 t ‘‘ Das Erst’ Avar’ so, das ZAveyte so” &c. See the scene in Goethe’s Faust, Avhere 
 Mephistophiles, Avith a true devil’s malice, plays on the simplicity of the young scholar. 
 
 u That the impression made by these and some preceding Avords had not ceased in the 
 days of the Tyrian monarch, nearly contemporary with Hesiod, see the correspondence 
 between Hiram and the Avisest of HebreAv monarchs, 2 Chron. II. 12. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 101 
 
 αλλά μοι δυσμόρω γα φθίνονσα 665 
 
 τρύχει φυχάι/, τάδ’ el κακοί^ κακά 
 ττροσάψβί τοΪ 9 ττάλαί τά ττρο^ σφωυ. 
 
 ΟΙ. όδ* ow LTO)y K€L "^^pTj P'^ Vi αζ^τ'ίλίΰ? 0 aveLi^^ 66^ 
 
 haps to subject even such a genius, 
 as that of Sophocles, to comparisons 
 like these; but the reasons, which 
 seemed to justify an editor of this 
 particular drama in taking such a 
 course, having been stated in the 
 prefatory remarks, I must be con¬ 
 tent to abide by such censures as 
 the pursuance of that course may 
 subject me to. It now remains to 
 give such references as will assist 
 the reader in enlarging his ideas as 
 to the Greek '^HXtos·, or in comparing 
 him with the Egyptian and Phoe¬ 
 nician Kneph, Phthas, Horus, Sy- 
 dyk, Esmun, &c. &c. For Ho¬ 
 meric opinions on the subject, 
 see II. III. 277. hymn to Helios 
 p. 114. (Ernesti’s ed.) h. to Apollo 
 v. 413. h. to Athene v. 13. For 
 opinions of the Orphic school, see 
 hymn 8. and Creuz. Symb. H. 162. 
 for Hesiodean and Pindaric doc¬ 
 trines, consultTheog. 18. 371. 956. 
 loii sq. 01. Ode 7. See also 
 Soph. (Ed. Col. 869. Electr. 424. 
 825. Aj. 845. 857. Rhizot. (fr. 480 
 Dind.) Tereus (fr. 523 Dind.) In- 
 cert. fr. 772 (Dind.). Eurip. Med. 
 407. 744. Phoen. 3. 179. Here. F. 
 1090. 1204. vEschyl. Choeph. 970. 
 Fr. Prom. Sol. 3. 6. Plato 12 Legg. 
 946 sq. Schol. Eq. Arist. 725. 
 Creuz. Symb. II. Ϊ 55-6-8. 164-5. 
 196. 206. 453. 656. HI. 148. 301. 
 313—15. Thudichum’s Soph. I. 254. 
 
 Ib. αθζος άφιλος^ without a friend, 
 human or divine. 
 
 Ib. on πνματον — έσχατος. Schol. 
 In this dimeter dochmiac, eVei has 
 the measure of a pyrrhic. Dind. 
 
 664. φρόνησιν, animum. El. 
 
 665. ya φθινουσα. Dindorf pro¬ 
 poses to read yrj φθιράς, or some 
 other dissyllable, (queere : 709 φθίσις 
 cf. Pind. Pyth. IV. 47 i. Hyporch. 
 fr.4.v. 8.) that the strophic may cor¬ 
 respond with the antistrophic verse 
 694, where he is unwilling to read 
 πόνοισι. Kayser proposes to con¬ 
 struct the strophic and antistrophic 
 verses as follows : 
 
 αλλά μοι δυσμόρω γας πόνος ατρ. 
 
 τρνχβι 'φνχάν, τάδ’ el κακοΐς κακα 
 προσάψω τοίς πάλαι τα πρός ye σφων. 
 οστ όμαν γαν φιλάν ev πόνοις άντ. 
 άλύονσαν κατ' ορθόν ονρισας. 
 και νυν δ’ evπoμπoς, el dvva, yiyvov. 
 Hermann considers the passage as 
 so corrupt, that no certain emen¬ 
 dation can be applied to it. The 
 great fault he thinks lies in the 
 word ψυχαν, which he considers to 
 have crept into the text from the 
 annotation of some interpreter. 
 
 666. rpvxeiv, to afflict. Eurip. 
 Hel. 1286. τρνχονσα σαντην. In 
 passive voice, Trach. no. Aj. 605. 
 Eurip. Hip. 146. Hel. 521. 
 
 666-7. Construction: el (γα) προσ- 
 a\fAei {addita haheat) τάδβ κακα τα 
 πρός σφων τοΊς πάλαι κακοΐς. Elmsley, 
 who with Dindorf adopts this sense 
 of πpoσάψeι from an anonymous 
 writer in Burgess, compares Eurip. 
 Here. 1210. ίώ παΐ, KaTaa^eOe Xcov- 
 τος aypiov θυμόν, ως | δρόμον όπϊ φό¬ 
 νων, άνόσιον, e^dyei, j κακα. θίλων 
 κακοΐς ξυνάψαι, τόκνον to which, says 
 he, add Med. 78. Iph. T. 487. See 
 also Soph. Phil. 1266. Eur. Here. 
 F. 831. 1212. 
 
 669. 6 δ’ οΰν Ίτω, {let him go then 
 unscathed, unhurt.) Schol. άναχω- 
 
 « 3 
 
102 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 η γης άτιμοι/ τησ8 άττωσθηναι βία. 6ηο 
 
 το γαρ σοι/, ου το tovS, ίττοικτ^ίρω στόμα 
 eXeivov' οντος ο βρσ αν η στυγησβται. 
 
 RP. στυγνός μίν βίκων δηλος βΐ, βαρύς δ\ όταν 
 θυμου ττβράσης. αΐ δβ τοιαυται φύσβις 
 αύταΐς δικαίως βΐσίν αλγ-ΐσται φβρβιν. 675 
 
 ΟΙ. οϋκουν μ βάσεις κάκτος el ; ΚΡ. ττορβύσομαι, 
 σου μεν τυχών άγνώτρς, εν δε τοΐσδ* ίσος. 
 
 ΧΟ. γύναι, τί μελλεις κομίζειν δόμων τόνδ* εσω ; άντ. λ. 
 
 ΙΟ. μαθοΰσά γ ητις η τύχη. 
 
 ρησάτω. Aj. 960. οί δ’ ονν γίΚώντων. 
 
 Cf. El. IL 435 · 
 
 672. eV^’ αν jJ {wheresoever he 
 may be) στν'γήσβται {shall be the ob¬ 
 ject of my hatred). On the word 
 iXeivov it is usual to refer to Porson. 
 Prsefat. p. 7. See also Schneider de 
 dial. p. 21. 
 
 673. στυγνός μ. i. δ. ScHOL. ΒηΧος 
 6t άη^ως ζ’ίκων. Referring the reader 
 first to the Scholiast’s construction 
 and to a note at v. 192, I observe, 
 that the passage before us seems 
 capable of two interpretations; 
 “ even when you yield, you yield 
 rancorously; for even in yielding 
 you profess eternal hatred.” Or else, 
 Creon observing the dissatisfied 
 looks of the Chorus at these violent 
 ebullitions of their monarch, and 
 catching at the word last uttered by 
 him {στνγησβται), observes: “ you 
 are obviously hateful (cf. CEd. Col. 
 1173) to others, even when you 
 give way, and will be insupportable 
 to yourself from a sense of the in¬ 
 justice which you have committed, 
 when your angerhascometoaclose.” 
 The first seems the better sense. 
 
 Ib. βαρύς. An tig. 767. νους δ’ eVri 
 τηΧικοντος άΧγησας βαρύς. CEd. Col. 
 402. κ^ίνοις ό τύμβος δυστυχών {justis 
 
 680 
 
 honoribus carens) 6 σος βαρύς. (But 
 this last example seems less in point 
 than the former.) 
 
 Ib. όταν θυμόν π€ράστ]ς. ScHOL. 
 όταν 67Γΐ TO τύρμα €Χθτ]ς της οργής. 
 
 “ Notanda constructio verbi nepav 
 cum genitivo, excusabilis eo quod 
 π€ράσης idem est quod πύραν ης.** 
 Dind. 
 
 677* τυχών άγνωτος^ {incapable 
 of knowing me, mistaken in me.) Phil. 
 320. σνντνχων κακών άν^ρών^Ατρβώών. 
 
 Ib. 61/ δε τοΐσδ’ (i. e. the Chorus) 
 ίσος, held in the same good repute as 
 I was before. Philoct. 685. Ισος eiv 
 ϊσοις cequus inter cequos. { Cleon retires.) 
 
 678. τδι/δ’, CEdipum sc. That the 
 interlocutory dialogue between the 
 Chorus and Jocasta, and more par¬ 
 ticularly the direction to conduct {ko- 
 μίζ^ιν) the absolute monarch within 
 doors, cannot with propriety be 
 carried on in the hearing of (Edipus, 
 is obvious enough; how then does 
 the monarch dispose of himself 
 meanwhile ? That question is easily 
 answered by supposing him to tra¬ 
 verse the stage, “ with lower’d looks 
 and in a sultry chafe,” while his 
 recent paroxysms are subsiding. 
 
 680. κομίσω to be supplied from 
 the preceding verse. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 103 
 
 ΧΟ. δόκησί9^ ayucoi λόγωι/ ήλθβ^ δάπτ^ι Se καΐ το μη*'νδίκον. 
 
 « 
 
 ΙΟ. άμφοΐρ άτΓ αύτοϊν ; ΧΟ. ναίχι. ΙΟ. /cat rtV ήν Aoyos* ; 
 ΧΟ. aAts* €μοίγ\ άλι^, γα^ ττροτΓΟΡονμβι/α^, 685 
 
 φαίν€ταί evff βληζβι/, αυτού μέν€ίν, 
 
 ΟΙ. ορα9 1 ν ηκ€ίς, άγαθθ 9 ων γνώμην άνηρ, 
 τονμον Trapteli και καταμβλύνων κβαρ ; 
 
 ΧΟ. ώναξ, ehrov μίν ονχ αττα 
 
 Ib. ή τύχη, the occurrence which 
 has occasioned all this violence. 
 
 681. ^όκησις άγνως \όγωρ, literally: 
 a speciousness, seemingness of words, 
 i. e. words of a seeming speciousness, 
 out of which no certain knoiv- 
 ledge (γνωσις) could be extracted 
 {ayvois). As decorum would have 
 been violated by allowing the 
 Chorus to take part against the 
 husband or brother of Jocasta in 
 her immediate presence, the poet 
 seems purposely to have selected 
 such vague and general terms, as 
 by leading the queen on a wrong 
 scent, would induce her to think 
 that the fault of the late contention 
 lay as much with the one party as 
 the other. Ellendt, taking Her¬ 
 mann as his guide, translates : spe¬ 
 cies sermonum suspicionem incertam 
 gignens, i. e. speciosus sermonum 
 habitus. Wunder; incerta suspicio 
 de sermonibus, sc. Creontis. In Soph. 
 Trach. 426. the word δόκησις is op¬ 
 posed to exactness of speech. As a 
 term of the philosophic schools, it is 
 naturally not unfrequent in Euripides: 
 and as such, together with the verb 
 Kopyjreve, it seems to be the object of 
 a sneer in our poet’s Antig. 3 24. 
 
 Ib. SaTTret (cf. Find. fr. Select. 
 140. Diss. Edit.) TO μη €p8ikov. 
 Musgrave, apparently with the ap¬ 
 probation of Hermann, translates : 
 
 “ mordet Creontem sc. injusta 
 CEdipi criminatio. That Jocasta 
 
 ^ μονον^ άί/Γ. β . 689 
 
 does not understand the passage in 
 this sense, is evident from her 
 reply, which rather tends to confirm 
 the opinion suggested in the note 
 preceding this. 
 
 684. κα\ τις ηρ ό Xoyos ; Solger : 
 wie kam der Zwist P how originated 
 the dissension P 
 
 686. €\ηξ€Ρ sc. 6 Χόγος. 
 
 687. ορας κ. τ. e. “Well-inten¬ 
 tioned and noble-minded as you 
 are, do you observe, what conse¬ 
 quences may ensue” &c. cf. Reisig. 
 Enar. ad (Ed. Col. 933. 
 
 688. παριίΐς κα\ καταμβΧίίρωρ, (cf. 
 ^sch. Sept. c. Th. 712.) by re¬ 
 laxing and blunting. (Edipus seems 
 to object two things to the Chorus; 
 first that they endanger the good 
 feelinsrs between him and Jocasta 
 
 O 
 
 by not making her acquainted 
 with the real grounds of the dis¬ 
 sension between himself and Creon ; 
 secondly, that by preventing him 
 from taking instant measures for 
 the exile or death of the latter, 
 they expose him to the vengeance 
 of an irritated and detested, but 
 powerful subject. How deeply the 
 Chorus feel the imputation, is mani¬ 
 fest from the warmth of their 
 reply. 
 
 690. The approach to tautology 
 in this verse does not escape the 
 Scholiast, who observes, 8\ς τ8 αυτό 
 einep, άρτ\ τον, μώρορ κατά dcapoiap, 
 κα\ ηπορορ. 
 
 Η 4* 
 
104 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ίσθί Se τταραφρόνιμον^ άπορον €πν φρόνιμα 
 πβφάνθαι μ άν, e? σβ νοσφίζομαι^ 
 όστ όμαν γάν φιλάν iv πόνοΐζ 
 
 άλύουσαν κατ όρθον ονρισοίς, 695 
 
 τανυν τ βνπομπο?^ el dvvato, 
 
 ΙΟ. προΫ Θβών δίδαζον καμ\ αναζ, οτον ποτβ 
 μηνιν τοσηνδβ πράγματος στησας ^χ^ΐ9. 
 
 ΟΙ. ίρώ (σ€ γαρ τώνδ* βς πΧίον, γύναι^ σββω) yoo 
 
 Ib. αττορον €πι φρόνιμα, ctd omne 
 prudens consilium inhabilis. Musgr. 
 Antig·. 360. παντοπόρος, άπορος eV’ 
 ovbev. 
 
 691. π^φάνθαι αν. Ellelidt in 
 noting this construction observes: 
 “ semel exstat wfinitivus perfecti pro 
 plusquam perfecto conditionali po- 
 situs.” I. 121. (N 
 
 Ib. νοσφίζομαι. Tlie Scholiasts 
 and gloss-writers offer various ex- 
 plaixations of this word. Taking 
 Homer for our guide (II. II. 81. 
 XXIV. 222. Od. XXIII. 98), we 
 shall do best, I think, by adopting 
 the sense, to cast off, to turn with 
 aversion from. So Thudichum: 
 wenn ich von dir, mein Furst, mich 
 abwendete. 
 
 694. όστ . On the different read¬ 
 ings όστ€ and 05 yc see some acute 
 remarks by Hermann. 
 
 695. άλνονσαν. On the accent of 
 the word, consult Ellendt. 
 
 Ib. κατ ορθόν ουρίσας. ventu Se- 
 cundo sive prospero cursu direxisti. 
 WuND. coll. Trach. 827. Eurip. 
 Androm. 611. et sup. 88. 
 
 Ib. ουρίζ(ΐν {ονρος, a favourable 
 wind) to bring under a favourable 
 wind. Cf. Eustath. ad II. VII. 
 p. 661. Ad Od. p. 1452.) 
 Cf. .^sch. Ch. 914. Pers. 594. 
 Choeph. 315. in which two latter 
 passages a transitive sense is to be 
 
 \ 
 
 given to the verb. See Pass, 
 in V. 
 
 696. βΰπομπος {πίμπω) ScHOL. 
 cod. Lips. άγα ^05 όόηγός, κνββρνητης. 
 Passow translates, prosperously con¬ 
 ducting, incautiously adding, espe¬ 
 cially in the tragic writers. Except 
 this passage, and .^sch. Eum. 93. 
 I believe it would be difficult to find 
 another instance of the word in the, 
 tragedians. Cf. Find. Nem. II. 10. 
 ίυθυπομπός αΙων . Eurip. Phoen, 1726., 
 πομπίμαν βχων (μ, ωστ€ νάνσίπομπον 
 αύραν. 
 
 097 · ότον. “Non est pro τίνος, 
 sed cum sic compbnenda verba es- 
 sent όίόαξον to π pay μα, ότον μηνιν 
 στησας ^χβις, nomen πράγματος post — 
 positum pronomini casu tenus appli- 
 catur.” El. cf. Aj. 1023. τις δ’ €στΙν, 
 ovTLv ανόρα προσΧ^νσσας στρατού. 
 
 6 gg. στησας €χ€ΐς gl. (στησας, cf. 
 infr. yoi. βββονΧβνκως (χα. ίστάναι 
 μηνιν = μην U IV. Br. Eurip.Iph. A. 789. 
 (λπίς, olav — στησονσι. Erf. Cf. Diss. 
 Comment, p. 240. 
 
 700. σε yap r. #c. τ. e. The most 
 obvious interpretation of these 
 words is one of angry feeling on 
 the part of CEdipus towards the 
 Chorus, a feeling, for which we are 
 prepared by the interpretation put 
 on the word στυγνός (sup. 673). 
 Wunder understands : “ for I had 
 rather comply with you, who desire 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 105 
 
 Κρ€0ΡΤ09, οΐά μοί βββονλευκω^ €χ€ί, 
 
 ΙΟ. λ€γ\ €ί σαφώί το νβΐκος ίγκάΚων ipels. 
 
 ΟΙ. φονεα με φησί Ααΐον καθεστάναι, 
 
 ΙΟ. αυτο9 ζυνεώως^ η μαθων άλλον πάρα ; 
 
 ΟΙ. μάνην μεν ούν κακονργον είσπεμψας, επεί 
 τό y ε\^ εαυτόν παν ελεύθεροί στόμα, 
 
 ΙΟ. συ νυν άφεί^ σεαυτόν ων λεγει^ περί, 
 εμού ^πάκουσον και μά& οΰνεκ εστί σοί 
 βρότεων ού8εν μαντικήν 
 φανώ δε σοί σημεία τώνδε σύντομα, 
 χρησμοί yap ήλθε Ααΐω ποτ, ονκ ερώ 
 Φοίβου γ άπ αύτοΰ, των δ’ υπηρετών άπο, 
 , ώί αυτόν ηζοί μοίρα προς παιδος θανεΐν. 
 
 705 
 
 710 
 
 me to .explain the whole matter, 
 than with these, i. e. the Chorus, 
 who wish the whole matter to be 
 suppressed.” This explanation, if it 
 could be established, preserves the 
 good feeling between* the monarch 
 ' and the Chorus unimpaired, but be¬ 
 sides some difficulties of construction, 
 it obliges us to suppose that the 
 former had overheard at least the 
 two preceding ver§es 685, 6. 
 
 70 T. KpeovTos. sub. €V€Ka as in 
 verse 697. Br. sub. rrepl, as Trach. 
 1124. Phil. 439. El. 317. Elms. 
 Nothing is to be supplied, says 
 Hermann." “ Nam ut modo οτου 
 πράγματος μηνιρ dictum erat, ita nunc 
 Κρ€θντος -μηνιν, sive rectius Κρ€οντος 
 βουΧ^νμάτων.” *' 
 
 702. σαφώς, emphatic,^ inVeference 
 to V. 681. " speak, i. e. provided in 
 charging Creon with originating 
 this dissension, you go upon clear 
 and not upon imaginary grounds.” 
 
 Ib. TO νΰκος, causam rixcE. Philoct. 
 328. χοΚον €γκα\ών. Erf. 
 
 706. TO y eh eavTov (as far as he 
 
 himself is concerned. Cf. Eur. Here. 
 F. 171.) Tvav {altogether) iXevdepol 
 στόμα {liberates, keeps his speech free 
 of any such accusation) by throwing 
 all the blame on Tiresias. Vauvil- 
 lers, who had been preceded by Tri- 
 clinius in giving this sense to the 
 passage, compares Antig. 395. 
 δ’ ί\ζνθ€ρος J Βίκαιός elpi τωι/δ’ άπη\~ 
 Χάχθαι πόνων. 
 
 707. Wunder translates: absolve 
 yourself from those things of which 
 you speak; i. e. throw aside all care 
 about them. 
 
 708—9. όστ\ "ίχον ■=■ €χ€ΐ = μετόχα 
 with genitive. “ Hoc dicit: res 
 humanas nihil commune habere cum 
 arte vatum, i. e. non pendere ex ea.” 
 Dind. Much to this effect also Her¬ 
 mann and Ellendt I. 732. cf. AEsch. 
 apud Plat. 2 Rep. 383, b. 
 
 710. σύντομα {briefiy). Antig. 446. 
 ζΐπύ μοι, μη μήκος, αλλά σύντομα. 
 
 711. ηΧθ€. Plut. Vit. Agidis et 
 Cleom. μύχρις αν €Κ ΑΐΧφων ή * 0 Χνμ- 
 πίας χρησμός (Χθη. 
 
 713· Erf. Elms. Dind. 
 
106 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 \ 
 
 οστίζ yevojT βμοΰ τ€ κάκβίι/ου πάρα. 
 
 καΐ τον μβν, ωσπβρ γ η φάτΐ9, ^evoL ττοΓβ 7^5 
 
 λρσταί φονβνουσ ev τρυπλαΐς άμαζιτοΐ^' 
 
 παώθ9 Se βλάστας· ου διβσχον ημβραι 
 
 Tpeis^ καί νιν άρθρα κβίνο9 βνζβύζα^ ποδοΐν^ 
 
 eppLyfrev άλλων χβρσίν els* άβατον ορος. 
 
 κάνταυθ Απόλλων ουτ βκβΐνον ηρνσβν ^2ο 
 
 φονβα γβνβσθαι πατρίου οΰτ€ Αάίον, 
 
 (το δβίνον ουφοβύτο,) προς παιδο^ θανβΐν. 
 τοιαυτα φημαι μαντικοί διωρισαν, 
 ών βντρόπου συ μηδόν. ών γάρ άν θ€09 
 
 7 
 
 \peLav ipevva ραδίων αυτός φανβΐ. 7^5 
 
 ηξ(ΐ alii. '‘-.-Equo uterque modus 
 jure stare potest.” Ebn. 
 
 Ib. προς παώυς θανύν. CEd. Col. 
 969. ei Ti θίσφατον πατρϊ | χρησμοϊσιν 
 UveW' ωστ€ προς παί 8 ων θανύν. Cf. 
 Reisig. Εη. ρ. 129. et infr. η22. 
 In what manner the different tra¬ 
 gedians handled this matter, see 
 Thudich. I. 213. 
 
 716. αμαξιτός Att. αμαξιτός {αμαξα^ 
 ύμι) used by stage waggons : η αμα¬ 
 ξιτός Att. αμαξιτός suh. όδοΓ, road for 
 stage waggons. II. XXII. 146. cf. 
 Od. X. 103. Pass. Find. Nem. VI. 
 
 87. xaX ταυταν μέν πάλαιότ^ροι | όδόΐ' 
 αμαξιτόν evpov. Pyth. IV. 440. 
 
 717* παι 86 ς de βλάστας, quod ad 
 pueriim attinet. The grammatical 
 construction upon common princi¬ 
 ples is too well known to require 
 explanation, (cf. sup. 302. 706, (Ed. 
 Col. 518. 583. El. 92. 924. 1290. 
 Trach. 350, &c. Dissen. Comment. 
 329,) but Grammar proceeds with 
 it’s refinements as well as other 
 sciences, and Matthiae asks, why 
 this accusative is not to depend on 
 the verb δι^σχον } Natales pueri non 
 disiinucrunt ires dies ab eo, quod 
 
 postea factum est, i. e. tres dies inde 
 a nato puero non elapsi sunt. , 
 
 718. αρθραποΒοΙν {articulospedum) 
 
 €νζ€νξας. Schol. Ttt σφνρα π^ρονρ 
 συνάψας. -For construction see 
 Matth. §. 421, 5. '■ , 
 
 719. On the readings ύς αβατρν 
 ορος and άβατον cts ορος consult the 
 commentators. 
 
 720—1. rjvvaev yeveaOai, perfocit ut 
 esset. .Esch. Pers. 718. στρατός rjwae 
 π€ράν. WuND. ' ' 
 
 722. “ Afa μέσου sunt verba 
 ονφοβείτο : id quod metuehat,*\ 
 Elms. 
 
 Ib. θανύν. a sec. m. La et Lc. ' 
 παθείν, which seems the preferalile 
 reading. ' ^ j 
 
 723 φημαι μαντικα\, prophetic re¬ 
 sponses, (speaks with a sneer.) 
 
 Ib. διώρισαν definierunt, consti- 
 tuerunt. El. cf. infr. 1083. 
 
 724. εντρεπεσθαι, to care for. (cf. 
 infr. 1056. 1226. Aj. 90. El. 519.) 
 
 toj/ εντρεπον συ μη^ύ. i. e. αλλά τού¬ 
 των εντ. σ. μ. Matth. §. 477 » 
 
 724 — 5 * Schol. ήγουν ά yap ζητί} 
 ό θεός, πρέποντα κρίνας ζητεΧσθαι, ρα- 
 8ίως αυτός Βείξει. Necessitatem sive 
 
 I 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 107 
 
 > > 
 
 ΟΙ. olou μ άκούσαντ άρτιων €χ€ί, ywaL, 
 ψνχη^ ττΧάνημα κάνακίνησι^ φρ€ΐ/ώι/, 
 
 ΙΟ. ΤΓοίας μβρίμνης τουθ' υττοστραφάς Xeycis ; 
 
 Ul, €οοξ· ακονσαί σου τοο , ως ο Ααως 
 
 κατασφαγβίη προς τριπλαϊς άμαζιτοΐς. 
 
 1U. ηυοατο γαρ ταντ, ovoe πω ληξαντ €χ€ί. 
 
 ΟΙ. καί που 'σθ' ο χώρος οντος ον τόδ’ ην πάθος ; 
 
 ΙΟ. ΦωκΙς μίν η γη κληζ€ται' σχιστή S οδος 
 €9 ταντο Αβλφών κάπο Ααυλίας ayet. 
 
 ΟΙ. κάΧ τις χρόνος τοΐσδ^ ίστ\ν ον^ζληλνθώς ; 
 
 ΙΟ. σχβδόν tl πρόσθβν η συ τησδ* €χων χθονός 
 άρχην ίφαίνου, τουτ βκηρύχθη πόλβί. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ Ζευ, τί μου δράσαι βεβουλενσαι περί ; 
 
 ΙΟ. τί δ’ εστί σοί τουτ\ ΟΙδίπονς, ενθύμων ; 
 
 -30 
 
 735 
 
 utilitatem rei dixit pro re,-qua opus 
 est. Herm. 
 
 728. TToias μ€ρίμνης νττοστραφ^Ις, 
 i. e. νπο ποιας μ^ρίμνης στραφ€\ς 
 (qua cura commotm^ Winsem. cf. 
 Eurip. Phcen. 1079. Καδ/χειαι/ μέριμναν 
 ορμησασ eV’ epyor.) Xeyety τούτο ; 
 Elmsley compares Aj. 1117. του 8e 
 (Tov φόφον ovK av σ'τραφ€ίηυ. 
 
 730. τρίπΧαΐς άμαξιτοϊς, Cf. Sup. 
 716. infr. 800. 1399. 
 ment of ^schylus’s CEdipus, ίπρμξν 
 
 της οδοί) τροχήλατον j σχιστής KeXevdov 
 τρίό^ον^ €νθα σνμβολας J τριών κελεύ- 
 θων Ώοτνιά^ων ημ€ίβομ€ν. 
 
 733~4· όδόί €ς ταντο 
 
 κ. τ. i. See Pausanias X. 5 » 2. 
 προϊών δε αυτόθ€ν εττι 686ν άφιξη καλόν- 
 μίνην Σχιστήν' ε’ττί ταντη τη όδω τα άς 
 τον φόνον τον πατρος Οιδιττοδί βΙργάσθη. 
 Cf. 35 » 5 · Eurip. Phoen. 37· 
 ξννάπτ€τον ττόδα | εΐί ταντόν άμφίύ 
 ΦωκίΒος σχιστής όδον. The dead 
 bodies of Laius and his attendants 
 were found and buried by Dama- 
 sistratus. Dodwell (I. r. 261) 
 
 thought that he recognised the 
 place in the abutment of three hil¬ 
 locks, between which three roads 
 from Delphi, Daulis and Ambrysos, 
 'united. See Thudichum’s Soph. I.| 
 
 255· 
 
 734. ταντο for ταυτον (Trach. 425. 
 .^sch. Choeph. 208. Eur. Or. 54. 
 Med. 564. Iph. Taur. 658. Hel. 764. 
 Elms.) For the exact sitje of this 
 celebrated spot, see the Atlas to 
 Kruse’s ·' Hellas,” plate 6. For an 
 account of Daulis, see Pausan. Pho- 
 cic. cc. 4, 5. 
 
 Ib. Δελφών κάπο Αανλιας, i.e.from 
 Delphi andyVow Daulis. 
 
 735. τοίσδ’, ex quo hcec gesta sunt. 
 Erf. compares Thucyd. I. 13. ετ?; δε 
 μάλιστα και ταντη {τη ναυμαχία) Εξή¬ 
 κοντα και διακόσια εση μΕχρι τον αυτόν 
 χρόνον. 
 
 Ib. Εξ^ληλνθώς, per actus. El. 
 
 736. πρόσθίν η σν. Cf. infr. 832. 
 El. 82. 1333· 
 
 738. (QEdipus speaks half aside.) 
 
 739. Ενθνμιον, exciting trouble, 
 
108 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 μηπω μ ΐρώτα. τον Se Λάϊον φύσιν 
 
 TLV €ίχ€ TLva ο ακμήν ηρης βχων. 
 
 μβγας, χνοάζων άρτι λ€υκανθ€9 κάρα, 
 
 μορφής· Se της σης ουκ άττβστάτβί πολύ, 
 
 οίμοι τάλας' eoLK βμαντον βΙς άράς 
 
 δείνας προβάλλων άρτίως ουκ elSevai. 
 
 πώς φης ; οκνώ τοί προς σ άποσκοπουσ, άναζ. 
 
 δβίνώς άθυμώ μη βλεπων 6 μάντις fj. 
 
 740 
 
 745 
 
 uneasiness, terror. Musgrave trans¬ 
 lates terriculamentum, and refers to 
 his Eurip. Here. Fur. 724. for illus¬ 
 trations of the word. 
 
 740. φνσιν gl. τον τον σώματος 
 ογκον. Pindar appears to use the 
 words φνσις and φνη in various senses 
 of bulk, stature, height. Cf. Dissen’s 
 Comment, pp. 244. 428. 520. 557· 
 
 741. ήβη, properly youth, is trans¬ 
 ferred to any period of life. Fr. Inc. 
 Soph, νβρις be roi ουπωποθ" ήβης eis 
 TO σώφρον iK€TO. 
 
 Ib. ακμή, maiuritas. El. 
 
 Ib. “ (χων, i. e. €χων ήν, verbo ex 
 prsecedente repetendo.’^ Dind. 
 The construction is, I believe, closely 
 Pindaric, and to be illustrated from 
 that Pindaric form, by which a 
 phrase is amplified, and greater 
 strength given to it, by adding a 
 participle, and supplying a verb 
 from the sentence preceding. So 
 in the beautiful little ode to Ari- 
 stagoras, the Prytanis of Tenedos, 
 (which usually passes for the 
 Xlth Nemean Ode of Pindar, but 
 like the two preceding, has nothing 
 to do with Nemean games,) it is 
 said in allusion to the haughty de¬ 
 signs which men indulge in, and the 
 many deeds which they plan, (αλλ’ 
 €μπαν μ^γαλανορίαις €μβαίνομ€ν, | epya 
 re πολλά μΐνοινωντΐς'ή where, as 
 Dissen observes, “ pro nudo sub- 
 
 stantivo €ργοις re πολλοί? scil. (μβαΐ- 
 νομ€ν ponitur plenior phrasis parti- 
 cipio addito et supplendo verbo 
 finito sic ; epya re πολλά μ^νοινωντ^ς 
 €μβαίνομ€ν αντοϊς.” So here, as the 
 same learned writer has seen, the 
 sense is, “ tell me of what stature 
 was Laius, and what was his period 
 of life, or, what flower of age had he 
 in that stature.” 
 
 742. μeyaς. By this word I think 
 is to be understood height, not hulk. 
 Cf. Passow in voc. 
 
 Ib. χνοάζων {χνόος^ \evK. κάρα, 
 having thefirst down or growth of grey 
 hair. Cf. Eurip. Pheen. 61. Pind. 
 Nem. IX. 52. 
 
 742 . μορφή, form, or figure gene¬ 
 rally. (Ed. Col. 578. Pind. 01. VI. 
 127. IX. 98. 
 
 744. (CEdipus shudders and speaks 
 partly aside.) 
 
 746. οκνώ. ScHOL. beboiKU. cf. 
 infr. 749. 834. II. V. 255. οκν€ίω δ’ 
 ίππων €πιβαιν€μ€ν. 
 
 747· Η'Ψ Oil connexion of this 
 particle with verbs of fear in the 
 conjunctive mood, see EllendtII. 105. 
 
 Ib. βΧ^πων, gl. αληθής, αληθινών, 
 παρ οσον 6 τήν αλήθειαν λεyωv, βλεπει' 
 6 δε τά ψευδή, τνφλωτάτων εστί. 
 (CEdipus speaks emphatically, re¬ 
 ferring in his own mind to previous 
 declarations of Tiresias, and his own 
 sneers at the unfortunate prophet. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 109 
 
 0€ίξ€ί9 0€ μαλλορ, ην ev e^eiwrji eri. 
 lU. και μην οκνω μ€ν, αν ο eprj μασονσ €ρω. 
 
 ΟΙ. ττότβρον βχώρβί βαίο^, η πολλον^ βχων 75 ^ 
 
 ανδρας· Χογίτα^, οΤ άνηρ άργτηγίτη^ ; 
 
 ΙΟ. πΙντ ησαν οί ζύμπαντβ^, βν δ* αύτοίσυν ην 
 κηρνζ' άττηνη δ’ ήγβ Αάΐον μία. 
 
 U1. αιαι^ ταο ηοη όιαψανη. tl 9 ην ττοτβ 
 
 ο τονσδΐ λε^αί τονί λόγους νμΐν, γΰναι ; 755 
 
 ΙΟ. οίκΐΰί τΐί, οσιτίρ ΐκίτ ίκσωθύί μόνος. 
 
 ΟΙ. ή καν δόμοισι τνγχάνβί ταννν παρών ; 
 
 with “ wisdom at one entrance quite 
 shut out.”) 
 
 749. av 8 \ Er. a δ’ ai/. Libri. 
 Ebner, finding in his MS. δ’ avepr), 
 asserts that we are to read δ’ av 
 «Ρ? 7 · 
 
 750. βαιος, with few attendants. 
 Cf. Wunder ad CEd. Col. 1015. 
 
 751. \οχίτα$, gl. νττασπίστας. Cf. 
 .iEsch. Ag. 1566. (Klaus. Edit.) 
 body guard. 
 
 Ib. άρχηγ€τας. Find. 01 . VII. 143. 
 Ύιρννβίων apxayera. Pyth. V. 80. ap- 
 Xayeras ^Απόλλων, (where, however, 
 Apollo is rather commemorated as 
 the leader of the colony which, un¬ 
 der Battus, was to establish the 
 great city of Cyrene.) ^Esch. Suppl. 
 180. 248. S. c. T. 1001. 
 
 753 · Whether we are to write 
 κηρνξ or κηρνξ, consult the gramma¬ 
 rians. An inquirer into human na¬ 
 ture and the usages of antiquity, is 
 more anxious to know, why a person 
 of Laius’s rank travels with so few 
 attendants, and why a herald is in¬ 
 cluded among them ? That he could 
 not, dramatically speaking, be ac¬ 
 commodated with more, is very ob¬ 
 vious, for the overthrow of five 
 persons by a single man, is of itself 
 a strong demand on credibility; did 
 
 history and the drama coincide in 
 this point ? That among the per¬ 
 sons killed by CEdipus on this occa¬ 
 sion, a person so deeply reverenced 
 by the religious feelings of antiquity 
 as a herald, should be included, is a 
 considerable point gained to modern 
 feelings, as it fixes upon CEdipus 
 a real guilt, independent of that 
 which he derived from mere fa¬ 
 tality. 
 
 Ib. άττηνη (αγω). prop, a four- 
 wheel carriage, drawn by mules 
 dr oxen, afterwards used like the 
 word for a carriage and pair. 
 
 Cf. infr. 803, 812. Find. 01 . V. 6. 
 P. IV. 167. 
 
 Ib. jjye, conveyed. 
 
 Ib. μία in Greek often answers to 
 the indefinite article a in English. 
 So Find. Nem. VI. i. ev άν 8 ρών, iv 
 θ€ων yivos, a race of men, a race of 
 gods, and not, as is commonly trans¬ 
 lated, in total opposition to the 
 poet’s meaning: “ the race of men 
 and gods is one and the same.” 
 Lucret. VI. 1268. pallis super ossi- 
 bus una, a skin upon the bones. 
 
 754. (CEdipus clasping his hands 
 in agony.) 
 
 756 . oIk€VS = οίκίτης. SCHOL. 
 
110 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΙΟ. ου δητ' άψ ου γαρ KeWev ήλθβ καί κράτη 
 σβ τ 6?δ’ βχοι^τα Αάϊόυ τ ολωλότα, 
 €ζίΚ€τ€υσ€ της βμης χεφος θιγων 
 αγρούς σφε ττεμψαι κάττί ποιμνίων νομας, 
 ώί πλεΐστον εϊη τουΒ* άποπτος άστεως, 
 κάπεμφ' εγώ νιν. άζιος γάρ οΐ άνηρ 
 δούλος φερειν ήν τησδε και μείζω γαριν. 
 
 ΟΙ. πώς αν μόλοι δηθ' ημ\ν εν τάγει πάλιν ; 
 
 ΙΟ. πάρεσην, άλλα προς τί τούτ εφίεσαι ; 
 
 ΟΙ. δεδοικ εμαυτον^ ώ γύναι, μη ττόλλ* άγαν 
 εΙρημεν* η μοι δι ά νιν εισιδεΐν θέλω. 
 
 ΙΟ. άλλ* Ι^εται μεν' άζία δε που μαθεΐν 
 
 κάγώ τά γ εν σο\ δυσφόρως εχοντ\ άναζ. 
 
 ΟΙ. κού μη στερηθης γ\ ες τοσούτον ελπίδων 
 εμού βεβώτος. τω γάρ αν και μείζονι 
 
 760 
 
 770 
 
 758. κράτη, royal authority. Cf. 
 sup. 237. 586. Antig. 60. 166. 
 
 173· 
 
 760. TTjS €μη^ χ€φ6ς 6ty0>v. So 
 infr. 1510. (Edipus, when making his 
 solemn request to Creon, says, ξυν- 
 vevaov, ω yevvaie, ση ψαίισας χ^ρί. 
 
 Ib. θίyωv, de quo jam multi 
 multa. Cf. Buttm. II. §. 114. p. 
 T49.” Ebn. 
 
 761. eVi belongs to aypovs and 
 VO μάς. Cf.-Esch. S. c. T. 673. 858. 
 Find. 01 . II. no. Pyth. I. 26. IV. 
 231. V. 94. VIII. 114. 143. Nem. 
 III. 146. X. 76. Isth. I. 39. 
 
 762. αττοτττος, remote. El. 1489· 
 άποπτον ημών. 
 
 763. οΓ άνηρ. (sic Herm. Libri 
 6y άνηρ, οδ’ άνηρ, ode γ άνηρ.) Phil. 
 584* oV άνηρ ττίνης. Cf. infr. 1118. 
 
 766. παρβστιι/, conceive him to be 
 present, νόμιζα αυτόν irapeivai. ScHOL. 
 
 767. δεδοίκα — μη (ϊρημίν η. Cf. 
 Trach. 663. Phil. 493. and sup. 747. 
 
 (QEdipus speaks convulsively, and 
 in a low tone of voice.) 
 
 768. elaideiv, gl. Ιδβΐν. The prac¬ 
 tice of using compound verbs for 
 simple ones, occurs continually in 
 Sophocles, as well as other Greek 
 writers. 
 
 770. €V σο\, tejudice. Herm. 
 
 Ib. δυσφόρως €χοντα, gl. βαρίως 
 διακείμβνα. infr. 783. δυσφόρως τοϋνα- 
 δος rjyov. 
 
 77 Τ· ου μη στερηθης, you shall not 
 be deprived, sc. του paBeiv. For simi¬ 
 lar constructions of ου μη with con¬ 
 junctive, see QEd. Col. 450. 649. 
 1703. El. 42. 1039. Trach. 621. 
 1190. Aj. 83. 421. 450. Phil. 103. 
 381. 418. 
 
 771-2. €? τοσ. i\. e. β. since I have 
 reached this state of excitement. Cf. 
 Ell. in voc. βαίν€ΐν. et sup. 158. 
 
 772. μείζονι, reverentid digniori, 
 majori dignitate. El. 
 
ΟΙΔΓΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 Ill 
 
 λβ^αιμ αν η σοΙ δία τύχης τοιάσδ* Ιών ; 
 
 €μοί πατήρ μ€ν Πόλνβος ην Κορίνθως, 
 μητηρ δβ Μβρόπη Αωρίς. ηγόμην S άνηρ 
 αστών μέγιστος τών e/cet, πριν μοί τύχη 
 τοίαδ" βπβστη, θαυμάσαι μίν αζία^ 
 σπονδής ye μβντοί της βμης ονκ αξία, 
 άνηρ γάρ iv δβίπνοίς μ νπβρπλησθβΙς μύθης 
 καλβΙ παρ οίνω, πλαστός ώς βϊην πατρί. 
 
 καγω βαρυνθβίς την μίν 
 μόλις κατύσχον' θάτβρα 
 
 773 · τνχης TOiaaS' Ιων, quum 
 in tali discrimine verser. Br. quasi 
 permeans i. e. expertus ejusmodi 
 fortunam. El. (cf. Br. in loc. Markl. 
 ad Eur. Suppl. 112. Valck. ad Phcen. 
 526. Heindorf. ad Plat. Protag. 
 §. 36.) Pind. Isth. III. ttXovtov die- 
 στειχον, in divitiis versabantiir. Cf. 
 Diss. Comment, p. 549. 
 
 774. epoi πατήρ pev. Had this 
 play been a composition of Euri¬ 
 pides, instead of Sophocles, we all 
 know what this narrative would have 
 served to form, and how Aristo¬ 
 phanes would have filled up this and 
 the next senarius for him. Sopho¬ 
 cles had the good sense to steer clear 
 of prologues and of the— ληκύθων 
 άπωλ^σ^ν. 
 
 775 · η'γόμην. ScHOL. €τρ€φόμην, 
 ^τύγχαναν. Hesych. διήγον, was pass· 
 ing my life. Cf. Aristoph. Ran. 457. 
 and Musgrave ad (Ed. Col. 205. 
 
 777. f πίστη (ίφιστάναι), Hesych. 
 ίπίτνχ€, happened, befell me. 
 
 Ib. θανμάσαι μίν αξία. (Ed. Col. 
 461. ίπάξιος — κατοικτίσαι. Matth. 
 §· 535 · 
 
 778. σπονΒής. ScHOL. άρζτης. 
 El. strenuitas, gnavurn ingenium. Is 
 it not rather, my serious considera¬ 
 tion, the earnestness exhibited by me 
 
 ονσαν ημύραν 
 S ιών πβλας 
 
 in consequence? Cf. Diss. in Pind. 
 p. 232. 
 
 779· ^η·€ρπλησθ€ίς (υπ€ρπιμπλάναι) 
 μίθηζ {μίθη Dind.). Cf. infr. 874. 
 
 780. παρ οίνω, inter pocula. Apol¬ 
 lon. Rhod. I. 45^· “^(^ph 8αιτ\ κα\ οΧνω. 
 Cf.Valck. ad Callim. p. 15, 262. 
 and Erf. in loco. 
 
 Ib. KaXei —wy eiqv. The Commen¬ 
 tators pass this construction unno¬ 
 ticed. For Euripides’ account of the 
 circumstances which induced (Edipus 
 to consult the oracle, see the pro¬ 
 logue to his “ Phoenissse.” If Aristo¬ 
 phanes had not taught us to laugh 
 at Euripidean prologues, the man¬ 
 ner in which the mother of (Edipus 
 there enters into details of her do¬ 
 mestic circumstances would engen¬ 
 der no small feelings of disgust for 
 them. 
 
 781. βαρννθβΙς, gl. χοΧωθ€ί 9 . Aj. 
 41 . χόλω βαρννθάί των "ΑχιΧΧβίων 
 οπΧων. 
 
 Ib. την μίν ονσαν ήμίραν. (Ed. Col. 
 433 · αύτίχ ημίραν. 
 
 782. μόλις κατίσχον {θυμόν, cf. (Ed. 
 Col. 874)· 01* ίμαντόν. Aristoph. 
 Nub. 1363* Kaya> μόλις μίν, άλλ’ όμως 
 ην^σχόμην τό πρώτον. 
 
 Ib. θατίρα. ScHOL. τη ίξης, on the 
 following day. 
 
112 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 μητρο 9 ττατρόί τ ηλβγχοι/’ οΐ de δνσφόρως 
 
 τουνβίδος ηγοι/ τω peOevTi τον λόγον, 
 
 κάγω τα μβν κβίνοιν Ιτβρττόμην^ όμω9 δ* 7^5 
 
 €KVL^e μ α€ί τονσ * νφβφτΓβ γαρ πολύ. 
 
 λάθρα δβ μητρο9 και ττατρός iropevopuL 
 
 Υλυθώδβ. καί μ 6 Φοίβος ών μβν Ικόμην 
 
 άτιμον €ζ07Γ€μψ€ν, άλλα S άθλια 
 
 783. η^^Ύχον, questioned them. 
 
 Ib. 8 νσφόρως ayeiv τί τινι, Wunder 
 considers as so an unusual an ex¬ 
 pression, that he prefers translating 
 by his vernacular tongue, instead of 
 Latin, Jemandem etwas uhelnehmen, 
 to take any thing ill of a person. 
 
 785. τα yev {aliquanturn, El.) 
 €Τ€ρπόμην. But would Qidipus have 
 used so strong a term as €Τ(ρπ 6 μην 
 (cf. (Ed. Col. 799. where Brunck 
 and Wunder seem to me to translate 
 in too cold a fashion, considering 
 the excitement under which (Edipus 
 is labouring) if he had only been 
 partially satisfied with the explana¬ 
 tion given him by his supposed pa¬ 
 rents } Thudichum appears to have 
 understood the passage in a still 
 more qualified sense: Er beklagt 
 sich bei den Aeltern, und ihr Wort 
 befriedigt ihn nicht.” (see his pre¬ 
 face, p. 5.) I understand, by a well- 
 known construction : τα μ€ν κείνοιν, 
 as far as they two were concerned^ 
 ^ερπόμην, I was delighted. That, 
 after the explanation given by Po¬ 
 lybus and Merope, (Edipus had little 
 doubt about the genuineness of his 
 birth, seems evident from vv. 778. 
 827. &c. &c. 
 
 Ib. τα μ^ KCLVoiu = κζίνω. (Ed. 
 Col. 5^^· rroTepa τα των σών ίκγόνων, 
 η *μον (i. e. τάμον) Xeyeis ; (i. e. do 
 you speak of your children or me 9 ) 
 606. Kcu ττώί yevoiT av τάμα κάκβίνων 
 πικρά ; (and how shall I and they be 
 
 at hostility ?) Also 922.1628. i 740. 
 Electr. 924. 1203. Find. Pyth. II. 
 162. χρη de προς deov ovk άρίζβιν, | 
 ος avexei (exalts) ποτ€ pev τα Κ€ίνων, 
 τότ αυθ' €Τ€ροις ^Βωκβν peya κϋΒος. Cf. 
 iiifr. 977* 
 
 786. κνίζ€ΐν. Find. Nem. V. 58. 
 
 τον de τ opyav | κνίζον alπeιvol Xoyoi. 
 Pyth. XI. 36. eKviae βαρνπάΚαμον 
 ορσαι χόλον. See also Bergler ad 
 Alciph. I. Ep. 29. 
 
 Ib. υφeφπe. Musgrave, under¬ 
 standing the word in the sense c/ ' 
 wide-spread report, compares L u 
 nius I. 784, a. πόλνς τοιουτος νφ€ 
 Xoyos. Others interpret in the s<; . 
 of animum subire. Ellendt ado^’.· 
 the former sense; Wunder prer·:: 
 the latter, aptly quoting Sallust ,iu£ 
 c. II. quod verbum in pectus hx 
 gurthse altius quam quisquam r.vtn 
 descendit. 
 
 789. άτιμον, ignominia ajfec 
 El. The Scholiast, much better, 
 κουστυν, i. e. without a hearing, !]c 
 consequently without an answe. <ri 
 those points on which he 
 wished to consult the oracle. Ί hut 
 this is the true meaning of ^he 
 word, can hardly be doubted by t ■ ^ 
 who compare (Ed. Col. 49. 51. i , - 
 with the context adjoining. But the 
 question is, how came Sophocles to 
 use the word in so unusual a sense ? 
 I know no other solution, and that 
 is but a poor one, than that the poet 
 had generalized the Hesiodean term 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 113 
 
 καΐ δβίρά καϊ δύστηνα ττρονφάνη λύγων^ 79° 
 
 ώί μητρί μ€ν χρ€ίη μ€ μυχθηναι^ γύνος δ' 
 ατλητον άνθρώποισί δηΧώσοιμ δραν, 
 φονβν^ δ* Ισοίμην του φντενσαντο^ ττατρός. 
 κάγω *7Γακονσα9 ταύτα, την ίίορίνθίαν 
 
 τίμη, ι. e. a honorary share, or par¬ 
 ticipation in a thing, and thus given 
 it a sense which it did not strictly 
 bear in Attic language. Cf. sup. 
 215. infr. 909. 
 
 792. ατΚητον (intolerable) Spav, to 
 be seen. Find. Nem. I. 71. ατλατον 
 βίλος ίκπΧαξβ γυναίκας. ΟΙ. VI. 65. 
 ατλάτου πάθας. Fgmm. Sel. 69. 6. 
 άτΧάτα κακότας. 
 
 Ib. δηΧώσοιμι. gl. δβΐξαιμί, exhi- 
 beam. 
 
 794“^· Th® construction and 
 sense of these verses have alike fur¬ 
 nished difficultv to the commenta- 
 tors. Ellendt, objecting to the ex¬ 
 planations of Heath, Toup, Erfurdt, 
 and Hermann, approves of that of 
 Brunck, who, understanding 6bbv as 
 the accusative to ίκμβτρούμ^νος, (φυ¬ 
 γήν would be better understood_,) 
 translates : Corinthiam terrani exul 
 dereliqui, astris in posterum cur sum 
 dirigens. And much to this effect 
 the Scholiast and Suidas, in v. αστρο¬ 
 νομία : αστροις τ^κμαίρ^σθαι. eVi των 
 μακραν κα\ έρημον όδον ττορ^υομίνων καϊ 
 αστροις σημ^ιουμίνων τας θίσ^ις των 
 πατρίδων. Dindorf adopts the ex¬ 
 planation and construction of Mat- 
 thise : “ την Κορινθίαν αστροις το Χοιπον 
 ΐκμζτρουμ^νος χθόνα, ϊ. e. situm Co- 
 rinthi et distantiam ex astris con- 
 jiciens, ut navigantes solent. V.Wesse- 
 ling. ad Diodor. I. 166, 5. Toup. 
 Emend. II. 387.” But travellers, 
 who compute sites and distances by 
 stars, necessarily travel by night: 
 did QEdipus so pursue his journey ? 
 
 That he avoided all beaten tracks, is 
 pretty clear from a subsequent de¬ 
 claration of his own (infr. 1398 sq.) : 
 may not the meaning of the expres¬ 
 sion therefore be, that terrified by 
 the declarations of the oracular 
 shrine, and fearing to encounter any 
 human being, he “ fled the land of 
 Corinth, pursuing his journey from 
 Delphi henceforth by night.” But 
 the question then occurs, did Laius 
 also travel by night ? Else, how 
 could the encounter take place be¬ 
 tween the parties That the object 
 of the latter’s visit to the oracular 
 shrine required urgent speed, seems 
 evident from the small retinue with 
 which he travels ; and if he did not 
 actually travel by night, he would 
 at all events be likely to journey at 
 that time when day and night are at 
 odds; and why might not the en¬ 
 counter have taken place at such a 
 period ? If the reader is unwilling 
 to put Laius on these nocturnal tra¬ 
 vels, there is perhaps a simpler way 
 of getting rid of the difficulty. The 
 plural αστροις may, as in innumerable 
 places of Sophocles and Pindar ( 01 . 
 IX. 59. 161. XII. 12. Isth. I. 5. 
 VIII. 76. Nem. VI. 65. Dith. fr. 
 III. II. Hyporch. IV. i. &c.), be 
 considered as put for the singular 
 αστρω, that word implying, as it does 
 at least in two places of Pindar 
 (Ol. I. 9. Hyporch. fr. IV. 2.), the 
 ^ sun, by which GEdipus might have 
 known how to keep clear of Corinth, 
 as well as by the stars. 
 
 In 4 Esch. S. c. T. 386. the full moon is termed πρίσβιστον άστρων. 
 
 I 
 
 X 
 
114 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 αστροίς το λοίττον €κμ€τρούμ€ΐ/θξ γθόνα 
 ί'φβνγοί/^ ^νθα μηποτ οψοίμηΐ' κακών 
 -χρησμών ονβίδη τών βμών τβλούμενα. 
 στβίχων δ' Ικνουμαι τονσδβ τους χώρον9 019 
 συ τον τύραννον τούτον ολλνσθαι XeyeL9· 
 καί σοί, γύναί, τάληθ€9 €^€ρώ. τρίπλη9 
 οτ ην κβλβύθου τησΒ* οδοιπορών ττβλα?, 
 Ινταυθά μοι κύ/ρυζ τβ κάτη 7Γωλίκη9 
 άνηρ άτΓηνη9 Ιμβφώ9^ οΐον συ (I)rj9, 
 ξυνηντιαζον καξ οοον μου ηγβμων 
 αύτ09 ff ο πρβσβυ9 7rpo9 βίαν ηλαυνβτην. 
 κάγώ τον Ικτρίττοντα^ τον τροχηλάτην, 
 τταίω Bl οργη9' καί μ 6 7Γρύσβν9 ώ9 ορα^ 
 
 795 
 
 8οο 
 
 8 oc 
 
 796. e(f)evyov, SC. €κάσ€. Cf. QEd. 
 Col. 168. 188. 900. 
 
 796—7* χρησμών τών Ιμών, 
 
 the dreadful predictions delivered to 
 mCy or respecting me. 
 
 797. reXovpeva. The word τβλ/ω, 
 and its cognates, belong closely to 
 mantic diction. Trach. 173. ώς re- 
 Χ^σθηναι χρεών, SC. τα μαντεία. Pindar, 
 referring (Olymp. II. 72.) to the 
 unfortunate meeting between CEdi- 
 pus and Laius_, observes, εν δε Πυ- 
 θώνι χρησθεν παΧαίφατον τεΧεσσεν. The 
 adjective άτεΧψ, as belonging to this 
 vocabulary, occurs in rather a diffi¬ 
 cult form, Pyth. V. 82. where Apollo 
 is said to terrify the wild beasts of 
 Cyrene, in order that he might be 
 an accomplisher of oracles (μη άτεΧψ 
 yivoLTO μαντενμασι) to its lord. 
 
 802. κηρνξ. (CEdipus pauses, and 
 a sense of pain evidently comes over 
 him.) The name of this sacred 
 functionary has been preserved by 
 Apollodorus (III. 5.7.). It was Po- 
 lyphontes ; and consequently having 
 little of that eponymy in it, which the 
 
 Greeks so much coveted in their 
 names ; for instead of being a many- 
 murderer, he contrived with three 
 others to be murdered by a single 
 person. 
 
 Ib. πωΧίκης, drawn by young horses, 
 (not by mules, as the άπψη usually 
 was.) The reason for thus marking it 
 is obvious. 
 
 804. ξννηντίαζον. Pind. (Olymp. 
 II. 70.) remarking the great change 
 which had taken place in the for¬ 
 tunes of the house of Cadmus, refers 
 that change to the period, εξ ονπερ 
 εκτεινε Αάον μόριμος vibs | συναντά^ 
 μένος. 
 
 8ο6. τον τροχηΧάτην, the cha¬ 
 rioteer, (cf. Eur. Phoen. 39.) added 
 epexegetically to τον εκτρεποντα. Er- 
 furdt compares infr. 837. τον avhpa, 
 τον βοτήρα. Add fr. Aristoph. ap. 
 Athen. 161, f. τούς ττάΧαι ποτέ, tovs 
 Πυ^αγοριστά? yivop^vovs. 
 
 807. δι opyrjs (angrily). So Aj. 
 822. δια τάχους (speedily). 
 
 lb. ώί opa, SC. παίοντα τον τροχη¬ 
 Χάτην. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 115 
 
 οχου τταραστβίχοντα τηρησας μέσον 
 κάρα δίττλοΐς κέντροισΐ μου καθίκβτο. 
 ού μην ϊσην y eriaev, άλλα συντόμων 
 σκηπτρω rvwels· έκ τησδβ χΕίροζ νπτω^ 
 μ€ση9 άττηνης evOvs ίκκυλίνδβταί' 
 κτβίνω δβ τον^ ζύμπαντας, el δβ τω ζένω 
 τουτω ττροσηκβί Καίω τι avyyeve^^ 
 rL9 τονδβ νυν βστ άνδρο^ άθλιωτβροί ; 
 
 TL9 Εχθροδαίμων μάλλον αν γένοιτ άνηρ ; 
 
 Φ W ζ^^ΕΕ)ν β^βστί μηδ' αστών τινά 
 δομοΐ9 δέχ€σθαί, μηδβ ττροσφωνβΐν τινά, 
 ώθβΐν δ’ άπ οίκων, και raS ουτις αλλθ9 ην 
 
 8το 
 
 8ι5 
 
 8θ8. οχον. ScHOL. αρματος. Din- 
 dorf, comparing El. 78. 324. trans¬ 
 lates, e curru. The learned writer’s 
 proposition to substitute οχους for 
 οχου (cf. Find. Fmm. Incert. 119, 
 Diss. Edit.) would save ail the gram¬ 
 matical difficulties connected with 
 the appearance of a genitive case 
 after the compound παραστ^ίχοντα. 
 For accusatives after, this verb, cf. 
 Antig. 1255. h. H. Apoll. 217. 
 Bemhardy (Wiss. Synt. 256.) reads 
 with a genitive, and compares Q 5 d. 
 Col. 1572. 
 
 808-9. κάρα. gl. κατά το 
 
 peaov TTjs κεφαλής. Ordo verborum : 
 καθικ€τό μου διπλοϊς Kevrpois μίσον κάρα. 
 See Matth. §. 330. note. 
 
 809. διπλοΐς Kevrpoiat (Find. Fyth. 
 IV. 420). The Scholiast explains, 
 struck me twice with the goad, which 
 he used for spurring his horses. Her¬ 
 mann adopts the explanation of 
 Neue; “ struck him with a thong 
 having a double goad to itun¬ 
 less,” adds the learned annotator, 
 “ we prefer to understand the διπλή 
 μάστιξ, of which frequent mention is 
 made in ancient authors.” 
 
 Ib. καθικνάσθαι, to strike. Cf. 
 Valck. ad. Herodot. VII. 35. 
 
 810. ϊατην, sc. δίκην vel τιμωρίαν. 
 V. L. Bos. p. 474. ed. Schsef. Erf. 
 
 8 11, ύπτιος, gl. eVi τά μίτάφρζνα. 
 
 813. (Fauses for breath, and then 
 convulsively) κτ^ίνω δε τ. ξ. 
 
 Ib. τω ξενω, homini illi mihi 
 ignoto. Gallice: cet inconnu. Br. 
 
 814. TO συγγενές, kinsmanship, cf. 
 El. 1469. 
 
 Ib. Λάϊω. “Frustra Bothius Ααΐου.” 
 Erf. Either case, as Dindorf ob¬ 
 serves, may be used; but it is pro¬ 
 bable that Sophocles here preferred 
 the genitive, on account of the da¬ 
 tives preceding. Cf. infr. 1016. 
 
 815. τοΐιδε άνδρος, sc. εμού. Din¬ 
 dorf considers the verse as spurious. 
 
 ^ 817-18. The sense is more ob¬ 
 vious than the construction, which is 
 of a very loose order, ώ μη εζεστι 
 (ivhom it is not allowed) μη ξένων 
 μηδ^ αστών τινά {that amj stranger, 
 much less a citizen) δεχεσθαι εμε, 
 κ. τ. ε. Cf. Diss. Comment, in Find. 
 277. 31Ϊ. 
 
 819* οίθείν δ’ αττ’ οίκων {χρή).' 
 
 819-20. The declaration of Tri- 
 
116 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 η *γω V* ίμαυτίο τάσ8 apas ο ττροοτίθ^ί^. 
 
 Χ€)(η Se του Θανόντος ev γ^ροΊν epcdv 
 
 '^paLUco^ Sl ώρτΓβρ ωλβτ" . up βφνρ kccacos* I 
 
 up' ούχί ττας αναγνος ; €? μβ χρη φνγεΐν, 
 
 καί μοί φυγόντί μητβ rov9 €μον9 ISeiP, 
 
 μητ βμβατβνβίΡ ττατρίδος* η γάμοί9 μ€ δβΐ 8*5 
 
 μητρο^ ζνγηναι καΐ ττατβρα κατακτανύν 
 
 ΐΙόλνβορ, 09 βξβφνσΕ κάξ€θρ€ψβ μβ, 
 
 αρ ονκ άτΓ ώμου ταυτα δαίμονός tls αν 
 
 κρίνων βτΓ άνδρΐ τωδ’ αν ορθοίη λόγον ; 
 
 μη δητα μη δητ\ ώ Θβών αγνόν σββα?^ 830 
 
 clinius, that rdde and τάσδ’ άρας are 
 one and the same thing, the sub¬ 
 stantive serving to explain the pro¬ 
 noun more clearly, has been excel¬ 
 lently illustrated by Wunder, from 
 II. IX. 244. Cf. GEd. Col. 1054-8. 
 On Pindaric appositions of a similar 
 or different nature, there may be 
 occasion to speak on a future oppor¬ 
 tunity. 
 
 821. gl· γυναίκα. (Pauses, 
 and looks at Jocasta, who shudders, 
 but quickly suppresses her emotion.) 
 
 Ib. €v xepoiv ipaiv. On this Greek 
 dative with a preposition preceding, 
 and equivalent to a Latin ablative of 
 instrument, see Wunder ad Philoct. 
 V. 60. 
 
 822. δι* ωντΓζρ (sc. xepoiv). A 
 pause, and then with a voice of suf¬ 
 focation— ώλίτο. 
 
 Ib. apa pro ap* ov. Cf. Schaefer 
 Mel. Cr. p. 89. Herm. adVig. p.823. 
 Heindorf ad Plat. Theset. p. 476. 
 ad Protag. p. 496. Stalb. ad 8. Rep. 
 p. 223. Wunder ad CEd. Col. 750. 
 778. 
 
 823. avayvos (a, ayvos) unclean, 
 polluted with guilt, infr. 1383. CEd. 
 Col. 944· avbpa και πατροκτόνον κά· 
 vayvov. 
 
 824. 'ώζίν (e^fan). “Videndum, 
 
 ne apud Sophoclem non 
 
 propter praegressum χρη, sed propter 
 sequens δίΐ omissum sit.” Herm. 
 
 825. €μβατΐν€ΐν. Schol. : €πιβαί~ 
 V€LV. (CEd. Col. 400. yqs μη 'μβαίν 7 )ς 
 ορών.) 678. LV 6 βακχιωτας Αιόννσος 
 €μβατ€ν€ΐ, (where ^μβατ^νζίν answers 
 rather to the άμφιβαίναν of Homer.) 
 
 825—6. η yapois — ζνγηναι. Cf. 
 
 (Ed. Col. 525. 
 
 827. €ζ€φνςΓ€ Ka^€ 0 p€\fre. Erfurdt 
 prefers €ξ€θρ€φ€ κάξ€φνσ€ pe —a read¬ 
 ing which may be justified from the 
 Dresden and Venetian MSS. and also 
 by the schema νστ^ροΧογία, but wliich 
 is not absolutely necessary. 
 
 828-9. 
 
 Would he not rightly judge who 
 
 deem’d these woes 
 The work of some inexorable god ? 
 
 Dale. 
 
 Ib. av ορθοίη Χόγον. Herodot. VII. 
 103. και οΰτω pev ορθοίτ αν 6 Χόγος 
 ό τταρά σςΰ elpqpivos. Pind. Pyth. IV. 
 σε δ’ €V τοντω Χόγω ωρβωσ^ν χρηο'ρό^. 
 
 830. ω βίων αγνόν σίβας, ye most 
 holy powers. Dale, du reine Hei- 
 ligkeit der Gotter. Thud, aller Goi¬ 
 ter heil'ge Macht. Solg. If the anno¬ 
 tators notice the expression at all, it 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 117 
 
 ΧΟ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 τούτην ημύραν, άλλ* ύκ βροτών 
 βαίην αφαντο9 ττρόσθβν η τοιάνδ* Idctv 
 κηλΐδ* €μαυτφ συμφοράς άφιγμβνην, 
 ημΊν μ€ν, ώναζ, ταντ οκνηρ* €ω9 δ* αν ούν 
 ττρος του τταρόντο^ Ικμάθης, €χ βλπίδα, 
 και μην τοσοντόν y έστί μοι τη^ Ιλπίδος, 
 τον άνδρα τον βοτηρα ττροσμβΐναί μόνον. 
 ΊΓβφασμόνον δβ τις iroff η προθυμία ; 
 
 €γω δίδαζω σ * ην yap evpeOfj \iyωv 
 aoL ταύτ , eyωy αν iκ7Γ€φeυyoίηv ττάθο^. 
 ποιον δό μου πβρίσσον ηκουσας Aoyoz^; 
 ληστά^ ίφαχΓΚ€9 αυτόν ανδρας όννόπείν 
 ως νιν κατακτ€ίν€ίαν. el μβν ούν eri 
 λ6^€6 τον αυτόν αριθμόν^ ουκ eyo) ^'κτανον. 
 ου yap yevoiT αν όϊς ye τοΐς πολλοΐς ίσος. 
 
 835 
 
 840 
 
 845 
 
 is, as far as I am aware, to fall into 
 similar mistakes. Whom the Theban 
 and Phoenician CEdipus addresses 
 with uplifted eyes on the present 
 occasion, is clear from a passage in 
 the Medea of Euripides, where we 
 are as much among sun-worshippers 
 as in the present drama. 750. 6μ- 
 ννμι yaiav, 'Ηλιου θ' ayvbv σίβας. 
 (where see the use of the word σ€'βας 
 among the tragedians learnedly ex¬ 
 plained by Person.) 
 
 832. βαίην αφαντος, ut nullum mei 
 relinquam vestigium. El. Cf. Mehl- 
 hom’s Anacreon, p. 105. 
 
 833· (QEd. Col. 1134) |υ/χ- 
 
 φοράς, probosa calamitas. So Trach. 
 356. ηόνων \ατρεύματα ~ Επίπονα λα- 
 τρζνματα. El. 19. άστρων ^ύφρόνη = 
 aarepoeaaa (νφρόνη, die Sternennacht. 
 Erf. Matthiae (§. 375.) “ stain ori¬ 
 ginating in misfortune.” Cf. Ellendt 
 in voc. Reisig. Enar. p. 144. 
 
 834. οκνηρά, fearful. Find. Nem. 
 
 XI. 28. eXntbes δ’ 6κνηροτ€ραϊ yove%v 
 παιΒος βίαν [ ^σχον iv Ίίνθωνί π€ΐράσθαι 
 κα\ 'Ολυμπία άθλων, (i. e. the fore¬ 
 bodings of his parents,more timid than 
 became them, restrained their stout 
 son from attempting the Pythian 
 and Olympian contests.) 
 
 835 · παρόντος, oculato 
 
 teste. El. 
 
 838. προθυμία (ad consilium cupide 
 cupiendum refertur. El.) gl. τί δια- 
 νοη δρασαι ; Tr. 669. ωστ€ μηποτ αν 
 προθυμίαν άδηλον epyoo τω παραινόσαι 
 λαβξίν. 
 
 841 . 7Γ€ρισσ6ν, particularly worthy 
 of observation. Bothe compares 
 Theognis 7 ^ 7 · xph Μουσωυ θεράποντα 
 καί ayyiXov, ην η περισσόν [ ΐΐδίίη 
 σοφίης, μη φθον€ρ6ν τίλόθ^ιν. 
 
 842. ληστας ανδρας. Cf. Sup. 257 
 
 &C. 
 
 843· κατακτΐίνααν. Cf. Schneid. 
 de dial. p. 13. 
 
 845. Tois πολλοίς, those many 
 I 3 
 
118 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 el δ’ ανδρ ev οΙόζωνον αύδησβί, σαφώ^ 
 τοντ €<ττίρ ηδη τονργον ets* e/xe ρβττον, 
 
 ΙΟ. άλλ’ ώ? φανβρ γβ TouVoy ώδ’ ίττίστασο, 
 κονκ eo’TLV (WTcp τοντο y €κβα\€Ϊΐ' ttclXlv. 
 ΤΓολί^ yap ηκουσ\ ούκ iyco μονή, ταδβ. 
 el δ* ονν TL κακτρίτΓουο του irpoaOev Xoyov, 
 ovTOL 7 Γθτ\ ώναζ, σόν ye Aatov φονον 
 φaveΐ δίκαίω9 δρθον, ον ye Αοζια^ 
 δLeL 7 Γe γρηναι τταίδθ9 ίζ ίμου Oavelv, 
 καίτοι VLV ου Kelvos y δ δύστηνός irore 
 κατίκταν, άλλ* αύτδ^ TrapoiOev ώλβτο. 
 ωστ ούχί μavτeLa9 γ αν oiire τρδ' eyay 
 βλ€ψαίμ αν oZveK , oire τϊ}δ’ αν iarepov. 
 ΟΙ. καλώ 9 voμίζeL 9 , άλλ’ δμω9 τον epyaτηv 
 
 8κθ 
 
 855 
 
 persons, by whom you say Laius was 
 killed. Brunck for roTs substitutes τις. 
 Ib. ΐσοί, gl. Ισάριθμος. 
 
 846. οΙόζωνος {ζώνη) = μονόζωνος 
 = μόνος. ^cuOh. μονόστοΧον. HesycH. 
 “ Recte, nam ζώννυσθαι proiiciscen- 
 tium est, ut non solum, sed solum iter 
 facientem significet.” El. 
 
 847. €ΐς €μ^ ρόπον. gl. ipe άφο- 
 ρών. res me tangit. El. Arist. PI. 
 
 ovK εσθ* όπως 6 χρησμός είς τοντο ρεπει. 
 
 848. φανεν ώδε, uttered to this 
 effect. As specimens of the inter¬ 
 change of meaning in the word φαί- 
 veiv from sight to sound, Buttmann 
 notices Philoct. 189. τηΧεφανης {heard 
 from afar). 202. προυφάνη κτύπος. 
 
 216. τηΧωπόν Ιωάν. 
 
 849. εκβαλεϊν,^Ι.μεταβαλεΙν. ScHOL. 
 
 αρνεισθαι. retractare, irritum reddere, 
 El. 
 
 852. Aaiov. Cf. Matth. §. 375. 
 σόν emphatic. · 
 
 853. φανεί {αυτός ό θεράπων.) 
 
 ScHOL. t 
 
 Ib. δικαίως, ut par est. ορθόν 
 
 (redundant). 
 
 854. παιδός εξ εμον. (empha¬ 
 tic.) 
 
 855. νιν, i. e. Laius. κείνος, he, 
 i. e. her son. 
 
 857. ώστε. On ώστε, placed as it 
 here is with an optative · and av, 
 something will be said in a future 
 play. 
 
 857—8. μαντείας y* οννεκ, as far 
 as the prophetic art is concerned. 
 El. 387. αλλ’ εξίκοιτο τονδε y οννεκ 
 εν τάχει. 6 θ^. τονδε y οννεκα | κή¬ 
 ρυσσε μ εις άπαντας. Το the nume¬ 
 rous illustrations to he found in 
 Aristoph. add Pind. 01 . I. 160. άεθ- 
 Χων y ενεκεν, quantum quidem certa- 
 mina prcestare possunt. Boeckh. 
 
 ■ Ib. οντε τνδε βΧεφαιμ’ άν οντε 
 τηδε. Tie oculos quidem hue vel illuc 
 converterim, adeo hxec fiocci pendo. 
 Musgr. ut non videar mihi cura- 
 turus. El. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ 'ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 119 
 
 ΤΓΐμψον τινα στΐλονντα μη8( τοΰτ dchfjs. 
 ΙΟ. ΤΓβμψω ταχυνασ' άλλ* ely ^όμου^. 
 
 ovSeu γάρ αν ττράζαιμ αν ών ον σοΙ φίΧον, 
 χο. et μοι ζννβίη φβροντι 
 
 μοίρα ταν evaewTov άγνβίαν λόγων 
 
 86ο 
 
 (Γτρ. Λ. 
 
 86ο. στίΚονντα {g\. μετακάΚξσόμζνον, 
 κομίονμ€νον, μΐταστ€\ονντα), to fetch. 
 
 862. ^ ών ον σοι φίλον, ί. e. τούτων, 
 a μ€ πμαξαι ού σο\ φίλον Ιστί. Matth. 
 
 ρ.653· Erf. who comparesPhil.1227. 
 
 enpa^as epyov τνοΐον ών οϋ σοι πρύπον. 
 
 ^Esch. C. Tim. III. 39· (Heiske). 
 
 €κ yap του πράττ€σθαί τινα ών ού προσ- 
 ηκ€ΐ. (CEdipus and Jocasta retire.') 
 
 863. Whoever considers how 
 deeply the monarchical feelings of 
 the Chorus (sup. 530), must have 
 been brought into collision with 
 their religious opinions, by the re¬ 
 cent profane language of Jocasta, 
 and the more than tacit acquiescence 
 on the part of CEdipus, will be pre¬ 
 pared to see the effects of this 
 divided feeling in the following ob¬ 
 scure, but still noble ode. General 
 reflections instead of personal ones— 
 references of the loftiest nature to 
 those unwritten laws, which had 
 their origin in heaven, and of which 
 piety to the gods, both in words 
 and deeds, forms the best growth— 
 a sudden transition to that insolent 
 disregard for the divine law, which 
 is apt to characterize the possessor 
 of absolute power—intimations as 
 to the reverse which such insolence 
 almost necessarily creates for itself, 
 form the leading features of its first 
 and second strains. Unwilling to im¬ 
 plicate their beloved monarch too 
 closely in the guilty language of 
 Jocasta, yet dramatically obliged to 
 shew some resentment for his too 
 ready acquiescence in her opinions, 
 the Chorus in their third strain 
 
 seem to have been gifted with a 
 preternatural knowledge by the poet, 
 as to the transactions in which their 
 unfortunate monarch had been en¬ 
 gaged, which will be more fully ad¬ 
 verted to hereafter (infr. 889.). 
 Declarations of a full assurance on 
 the part of the Chorus, that through 
 one or other of the three great ora¬ 
 cular shrines, that at Delphi, that at 
 Abse, or that of Olympia, the pro¬ 
 phetic art will be fully vindicated; 
 and a solemn prayer to that almighty 
 Zeus, of whom Apollo was the 
 agent, that the oracular power of 
 the latter may regain its somewhat 
 diminished reputation, very properly 
 conclude this noble ode. Whether 
 Sophocles had his eye upon Athens 
 as well as Thebes in this fine piece 
 of composition, and whether any 
 additional poignancy was given to 
 his remarks by secret reference to 
 events which had recently occurred, 
 or not many years before, it will be 
 time to consider at a future period. 
 
 Ib. 61 μοι (Cf. Eurip. Hec. 836. 
 Musgr.) ξνν€ΐη φβροντι μοίρα (may it 
 be my lot to have, &c.) 
 
 Ib. “ φύροντι per attractionem 
 dictum pro φύρξίν.” Dind. Cf. 
 Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. p. 250. For 
 the sense of φ^ρΕίν = (χ^ιν, cf. sup. 
 590. 764. infr. T190. 
 
 864. μοίρα, lot, condition, part 
 assigned to one in life. sup. 376. 713. 
 Phil. 68 ί . 
 
 Ib. (ϋσ^πτον (σίβω) ayveiav, plain 
 sanctimoniam. El. May we not bet¬ 
 ter translate by transposition, the 
 1 4 
 
120 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 €ργων τ€ ττάντων, ών νόμοι ττρόκβινται 865 
 
 ύψίτΓοδβς, ουρανίαν 
 
 δι αίθβρα τ€κνωθ€ντ€ 9 , ών *Όλνμ 7 Γ 09 
 
 ττατηρ μόνο^, ουδό νιν 
 
 θνατα φύσΐ 9 άνόρων 
 
 ότικτβν^ ούδβ μΎ]ν ττοτβ Χαθα κατακοιμαοτβΓ 870 
 
 μόγας iv τούτοι^ ούδβ γηρασκβι. 
 
 purest reverence for, &c. as if the 
 poet had written ayvov ? 
 
 (Metre : dip. epitrit. and cret.) 
 
 8655. ων νόμοι ττρόκανται, SiC. The 
 whole of this subject is reserved for 
 future consideration. (Metre ; epi¬ 
 trit. cum anac. and ithyphal.) 
 
 866. vylrlnobes, high-treading (said 
 in reference to their heavenly birth.) 
 Dissen (Com.Pind. p.149.) compares 
 01. XIII. 54. We should rather 
 have expected to find the compound 
 itself in the Pindaric writings. But 
 no : y υψιβανος , υ·ψίθρυνος, vyjAinebos, 
 ν\1/Ί7Γ€της, νψιχαίτηί, &c.&c. are found, 
 hut not νψίτΓονς, that I am aware 
 of. (Metre : paeon and choriamb. 
 Dindorf compares Eurip. Hel. 528. 
 Orest. 1431. for cretic and choriamb. 
 Hel. 1360-1.) 
 
 Ib. ουρανίαν Bi aWepa — iv ονρανω. 
 SCHOL. 
 
 868. viv, them. Cf. infr. 1332. 
 CEd. Col. 43. El. 436. 
 
 869. θνατα (pvais άνίρων = 7 nan of 
 mortal frame. (This and foregoing 
 verse, glyconic.) 
 
 870. 'Κάθα κατακοιμάσΐΐ, ohlivio con- 
 sopiet, sive sepeliet, i. e. delebit. 
 W^UND. κατακοιμάσρ. ElmS. Herm. 
 Ebn. (Metre: penth. iamb. dim. 
 chor. with troch.) 
 
 871. piyas iv TOVTOis Beos. ScHOL. 
 τουτόστι, Beia δύναμις κα\ μβγάλη τοίς 
 
 Ib. γηράσκ€ΐ. (CEd. Col. 7 ^ 7 * 
 
 τ^σδε χώρας ου yeyrjpaKe σθ€νος.) 
 
 Donner, whose version of the CEdi- 
 pus has just come into my hands, 
 translates the two foregoing verses : 
 
 -nimmer hiiUt sie die Zeit, traun, 
 
 in Vergessenheit; 
 
 Es belebt machtvoU sie ein Gott, der 
 
 nie altert. 
 
 Metre: ionic a min. logaced. ter¬ 
 minating in spond. 
 
 873. The Chorus, in secret refer¬ 
 ence to Jocasta, proceed to ask, and 
 what is tyranny ? It is the child of 
 insolence, that insolence, which leads 
 persons possessed of absolute power 
 to throw aside this regard for 
 heavenly laws and powers, and to 
 speak contumeliously of their holiest 
 institutions. From whom the poet 
 learned this detestation for insolence 
 in high places, it will he time to see 
 when we come to inquire what co¬ 
 lours his dramatic and political cha¬ 
 racter derived from the great Doric 
 poet, in whom a strong abhorrence 
 for all tendency to "Υβρις, whether 
 in nations or individuals, in private 
 citizens or monarchs, formed a pro¬ 
 minent feature. At present we 
 restrict ourselves to mere verbal 
 illustrations. 
 
 Ib. ϋβρις. In one of the Pindaric 
 odes, on which Sophocles appears 
 
 νόμοις iveariv. 
 
 y This epithet comes nearest in application to that in the text, being given to the 
 Achaean cities (Nem. X. 86.) on account of their being mostly built on hill-tops. 
 
ΟίΔίΠΟΤΣ ^ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 121 
 
 νβρίς φιπβύβί τύραννον' dvr, d, 873 
 
 νβρί9^ el ΤΓολΧών υπβρττλησθρ μάταν, 
 
 a μη 'ττίκαιρα μηδβ συμφέροντα, 875 
 
 άκρότατον βΙσαναβάσ 
 
 * * απότομον ωρονσβν els" άνάγκαν, 
 
 evff ού ποδΙ "χρησίμω 
 
 more particularly to have cast his 
 eye in the composition of this choral 
 strain, Boeckh and Dissen both un¬ 
 derstand the word νβρις as applied to 
 demagogic and democratic insolence. 
 Cf. infr. ad μάταν. 
 
 874. Having defined what inso¬ 
 lence is the parent of in the verse 
 preceding, the poet proceeds to de¬ 
 tail its fate, when arrived at it’s top¬ 
 most height. 
 
 Ib. μάταν, to no purpose, i. e. with¬ 
 out extinguishing its appetite for more. 
 Sophocles here follows that Pindaric 
 doctrine, which represents insolence 
 as the mother of satiety ( 01 . XIII. 
 13. cf. Diss. Com. p. 145.); not 
 that satiety which covets nothing 
 further, but that which, fastidiously 
 disdaining its own possessions, covets 
 eagerly those of others. Wunder, 
 comparing ματάζων. v. 891. under¬ 
 stands μάταν as equivalent to ματαίως, 
 dem enter. 
 
 875. επίκαιρα. Find. Pyth. IV. 
 480. (Nem.VII. 85. ioiKora καιρόν 
 άλβον, convenientem copiam divitia- 
 rum, h. e. nec pauca nec maxima. 
 Diss.) 
 
 Ib. συμφέροντα, beneficial. 
 
 876-9. The best guide for ex¬ 
 plaining these difficult verses, seems 
 to be the following Scholium ; "Υβρις 
 {φησίν ό 7 Γ.) μη^έν καίριον 8 ιαπραττο- 
 μένη, els 8 νσβατον άκρώρ€ΐαν άναβι- 
 βάσασα tovs χρωμένονς αυττ}, κατ€- 
 κρημνισ€ν (^κατ€κρημνησ€ν). 
 
 876. άκρότατον €ΐσαναβάσ*, having 
 mounted to the topmost {height). 
 
 Find. Pyth. XI. 84. eX Tis άκρον έΧων 
 άσνχα re vepopevos alvav νβριν άπέ- 
 φυΎ€ν. ^VuNDER ; €ΐσαναβάσ' άν . 
 
 877· Dindorf, observing that two 
 syllables are here wanting, which he 
 thinks should he filled up with avdis, 
 or some substantive to be joined with 
 άκρότατον, compares Antig. 853. 
 ττροβάσ c’tt έσχατον θράσους | υψηλόν 
 es Αΐκας βάθρον j TTpoaeireaes. (As a 
 substantive, the word κρημνόν would 
 answer to the sense, and to the 
 strophic metre, at least as well as 
 αυθις : it is deducible from the ob¬ 
 servation of the Scholiast, and it is 
 a Pindaric word. Ol. III. 39. where 
 see Diss.) 
 
 Ib. άπότομος {άποτέμν€ΐν) , schroff, 
 steil {rugged, steep). Pass. 
 
 Ib. opoveiv, to rush impetuously. 
 (Hes. Scut. Here. 412. 436. Find. 
 01 . IX. 153. Nem. I. 74. Eurip. 
 Phoen. 1252. Here. F. 972.) Find. 
 01 . VII. 66. κορυφαν κατ άκραν άνο- 
 ρουσαισ . 
 
 Ib. άνάγκαν. For Pindaric applica¬ 
 tions of this word, cf. Dissen’s Com¬ 
 ment. pp. 243. 472. and more par¬ 
 ticularly 667. 
 
 878—9. eVd’ ου ποδί χρησίμω χρηται. 
 “ Where it is not granted to stand 
 with a steady foot, but where the 
 person so arrived must needs topple 
 and fall.” (Indicative of the fates 
 which are soon to befall Jocasta and 
 (Edipus, she a suicide, he deprived 
 of sight and of his throne). The 
 Attic poet had not improbably in his 
 eye Pindar’s “ man void of real ex- 
 
122 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 χρηταί, το καλώς 6 βχον 
 
 ττόλβι, ττάλαίΟ'μα μηττοτβ Xvaat θβον αιτονμαι. 88ο 
 
 Oeou ού λήξω ττοτβ ττροστάταν ϊσχων. 
 
 el δε TL9 vTrejmTTTa χ€ρσίν ο"τρ. /3 . 883 
 
 η λόγω ττορβνβται, 
 
 Αίκας άφόβητος, ούδε ^^5 
 
 cellence,” (ψβφηνός άνηρ), who, —αλ- 
 λοτ’ αλλα πν€ων —(“ after various 
 gusts and agitations”) καταβαίνα ον 
 τΐοτ drpefif t τΓοδι {with unsteady foot) . 
 
 Nem. III. 71. Cf. Nem. VIII. 31. 
 01. XIII. 102. 162. On the allitera¬ 
 tion of the v/ords χρησίμω χρηται, see 
 Lobeck ad Ajacem. 
 
 880. πάλαισμα . . Χνσαι. If Pindar 
 is still to be our Sophoclean guide, 
 we shall have less difficulty in deal¬ 
 ing with these two words than some 
 of our predecessors have experienced. 
 Of all metaphoric images in the The¬ 
 ban poet, I need scarcely observe 
 that the two most predominant are 
 those derived from the palaestra and 
 the ocean (infr. 923.). What was 
 the present state of things at Thebes ? 
 An inquisition, confessedly difficult 
 in its nature (sup. 109 sq.), but 
 fraught with the most important 
 consequences to the state, had been 
 commanded by the Delphic shrine. 
 To this inquisition it was pretty clear 
 that the court would be opposed, the 
 queen having made light even of the 
 authority from which it emanated. 
 All right-minded men, however, it 
 was as evident, would side with the 
 god: and was not this a true πά- 
 λαισρα or wrestting-match, whether 
 the difficulties of the matter to be 
 struggled with, or the opposing 
 power, be considered ? Ellendt’s in¬ 
 terpretation of the passage is not 
 very easy to comprehend : “By the 
 word ττάλαισρα,” says the learned 
 
 writer, “ I understand the wis¬ 
 dom, by which CEdipus gained the 
 throne; and as his sway had been 
 beneficial to the country, the Chorus 
 pray, that it may not be disturbed.” 
 For \v€LVj in the sense of levare, 
 ininuere^ tollere, cf. Diss. ad Find. 
 01 . X. II. 
 
 Ib. Χνσαι deov αΐτουμαι. For con¬ 
 struction, compare sup. 269. and 
 add Find. Fyth. VIII. 96. έκόντι 
 δ’ €νχομαι νόω κατά τ\ν αρμονίαν βλε- 
 TTeiv. 
 
 881. προστάταν. Of the devotion 
 of the Chorus to their royal master, 
 we have already had many aflfecting 
 proofs; but when the struggle is to 
 be between an earthly and a heavenly 
 director, the Chorus have no diffi¬ 
 culty in determining with whom they 
 are to side. By a usual Pindaric 
 asyndeton (cf. Dissen ad Isthm. IV. 
 32. Nem. VII. 27.), the connecting 
 particle yap is to be understood after 
 the word θ^όν. 
 
 883. νπεροπτα. For construction 
 (a neuter plural used adverbially) 
 Elmsley compares Aj. 197. άτάρβητα 
 όρμάται. Eurip. lon 717. Χαιψηρά 
 πηδά. 
 
 883—4. χ^ρσ'ιν η λόγω. Cf. SUp. 
 864—5* λόγωι/ €ργων re. The choral 
 mind, which is about to pass from 
 Jocasta to Oedipus, hints covertly at 
 the deeds of the one, and the words 
 of the other. Ellendt translates: 
 violenter aut facit ant sentit. 
 
 885. άίκη. In the Theogony of 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 123 
 
 δαιμόνων βδη σέβων^ 
 κακά VLV eKoLTO μοίρα 
 δυσττότμου γάριν χλίδά^, ' 
 ύ μη το Κ€ρδθ9 κβρδαυβΐ δικαίων, 
 
 Hesiod, this Dike, or avenging Jus¬ 
 tice, is the daughter of Jupiter by- 
 Themis : 
 
 Acvrepov ηγάγ^το Χιτταρην Oepiv, ή re- 
 K€V "Ωρας, 
 
 Έννομίην re, Αίκην re, καΧ Έίρηνην re- 
 θαΧυϊαν. 901. 
 
 (With this description compare Find. 
 01. XIII. 6—11.) For a still nobler 
 description of Dike, see the Opera of 
 Hesiod, (253 sq.) : 
 
 'H δε re παρθένος εστί Αίκη, Αιος cKye- 
 yavia, 
 
 Kvbpr) T αΙδοίη re θίοΐς ot "'ΟΧνμπον 
 Ζχουσιν. 
 
 καί p όπότ* αν τις μιν βλάπττ] σκοΐλιώς 
 ονοτάζων, 
 
 αυτίκα ιταρ Δα πατρϊ καθίζομβνη Κρο- 
 νίωνι 
 
 ■γηρνίτ ανθρώπων άδικον νόον, οφρ' άπο- 
 τίστ] 
 
 8ήμος ατασθαλίας βασιλέων, οϊ Xvypa 
 νοΐυνης 
 
 αΚλη παρακλίνωσι Βίκας, σκόλιώς ivi- 
 ποντ€ς. Goett. ed. 
 
 For the personified Dike on the 
 shield of the JEschvlean Polvnices, 
 and passages in Sophocles, which 
 come nearest to the Dike of Hesiod, 
 cf. Sept. c. Th. 643 sq. Soph. CEd. 
 Col. 1382. Antig. 451. El. 476. On 
 the derivation of the word, see Sickler, 
 pp. 3. 84. 
 
 Ib. άφόβητος. ScHOL. την Αικην μη 
 Β€Βοικώς. For active compounds of 
 the same class in Pindar, cf. Isth. 
 IV. 51 · άπ€ΐράτων {making no 
 trial or effort) ayvωστoL σιωπαί, Ol. 
 XHI. 35. άφθόνητος εττεσσα/ yevoio 
 χρόνον άπαντα, Zcv πάτ€ρ. 
 
 886. By the Βαιμόνων βΒη must be 
 more particularly meant the Delphic 
 and other oracular shrines. Cf. Diss. 
 Comment. P. p. 604. 
 
 887. Metre : logaoedic with anac. 
 as at V. 885. 
 
 888. χόριν (i. e. evcKo) χΧιΒης, 
 {pride), but I think rather in refer¬ 
 ence to female pride, and hence 
 aimed at Jocasta. Soph. Fr. 679. 
 (Dind.). τις δ’ οίκος iv βροτοίσιν ώλ- 
 βίσθη ποτ€, | yvvaικoς €σθΧης χωρίς, 
 6yκωθe\ς χΧίΒρ ; 
 
 Ib. Βνσπότμον. ScHOL. : ανοσίαν. 
 
 889. The reflections in the. fol¬ 
 lowing verses point rather, I think, 
 to CEdipus than Jocasta. But if 
 respectful considerations tended to 
 generalize the taunts against her, 
 how much more would the still un¬ 
 broken attachment of the Chorus to 
 CEdipus tend to throw obscurity 
 over the remarks bearing upon him, ? 
 The choral troop are in fact to be 
 here considered as speaking under a 
 sort of prophetical afflatus, an affla¬ 
 tus which these aged counsellors in 
 some degree claim for themselves in 
 a future part of the drama (infr. 
 1086.). This temporary inspiration 
 brings words out of their mouths, 
 of the full tendency of which they 
 themselves are hardly aware, but 
 which were perfectly understood and 
 appreciated by their auditors. (Me¬ 
 tre : epitr. with anac. and ithyph.) 
 
 lb. Who had “ gained an un¬ 
 righteous gain,” if CEdipus had not? 
 He was in possession of a throne; 
 but how ? by the commission of 
 murder, the murder of a sacred 
 herald, and the murder of his own 
 
124 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κα\ των άσβπτων ep^erai^ 
 η των άθικτων e^erai ματαζων, 
 
 TL9 €TL 7Γ0Τ iv τοΐίτδ* άνηρ θυμόν β€λη 
 βρζβται ψνχας άμννβιν ; 
 
 father. The things impious (ασεπτα), 
 and the things touched which ought 
 not to have been touched {άθικτο), 
 need no comment. (In a Pindaric 
 ode, which must have been particu¬ 
 larly ungrateful to Attic ears, it is 
 observed, KcpSos be φίΧτατον, eKovros 
 ei τις eK 8όμωρ <Pepoi. Pyth. VIII. 16.) 
 
 890. Koi Erfurdt observing, that 
 el μη is to be supplied from the pre¬ 
 ceding verse, applies a passage of 
 Diphilus : 
 
 ayvoeis iv ταΐς άραΐς 
 ο τι eoTiv, €i τις μη φράσ€ΐ ορθως όδον, 
 η Ίτνρ ivavcei , η διαφθ€ΐρ€ΐ ύδωρ, 
 η beiTTVielv peWovTO κΐύΧνσαι τινα. 
 
 Athen. 238, f. 
 
 Ib. ep^eTou ScHOL. €κτ6ς Ζσται. 
 (Ed. Col. 836. eXpyov, manus ahstine. 
 On the accentuation, see Ellendt. 
 (metre: epit. with anac. and cret.) 
 
 891. e^eToi, inhcerebit, tanget.OiNO. 
 e^eToi ματάζων — e^eTai ματαιαΐς χ€ρσίν. 
 (Trach. 565. ^aveiv ματαιαϊς χ^ρσί.) 
 Id. For the sentiment, cf. Pind. Nem. 
 XI. 47-8.. Diss. Edit, (metre: 
 epitr. with anac. and ithyphal.) 
 
 892. To connect this with what 
 precedes and follows, we are I think 
 again to apply the Pindaric asyn¬ 
 deton : and in the elliptic manner, 
 common to him and Sophocles, un¬ 
 derstand “ for if a κακά μοΊρά does 
 not seize upon the doer of such 
 deeds as this,” τις Ζτι κ. τ. e. 
 
 Ib. The ellipse being filled up, as 
 
 proposed in the foregoing note, by 
 the words θνμου βίλη in this much 
 disputed passage must, I think, be 
 understood all those feelings of 
 wrong desire and z cupidity, which 
 have been referred to in the pre¬ 
 ceding verses, and which like arrows 
 and darts assault and wound the 
 soul. In a similar sense Dissen, 
 I think, rightly interprets the word 
 ββλος in Pind. Nem. I. 72. as a 
 sudden emotion of the mind, com¬ 
 bining consternation and grief. 
 Hermann, reading θνμοΰ β€\η ev^eToi, 
 translates: quis tandem ampUus his 
 in rebus (i. e. si contemnuntur di- 
 vina) iriE tela se ah animo suo arcerc 
 gloriabitur? Elmsley, reading θυμω 
 βίλη eip^eToi, understands; si ecedes 
 Laii inipunita discesserit, quis jam 
 abstinehit se, quin a mente arceat con- 
 scientice stimulos, sceleris sc. recorda- 
 tionem, metumque vindictce divinee P 
 Dindorf, with the text as before us, 
 observes: “ θνμου βίΧη irani dicit. 
 Antig. 1085. άφηκα θυμω καρ^ιας 
 τοξενματα.'' Ellendt prefers θ€ων βίΚη, 
 and understands “ mala ab iratis 
 Diis data.” ΛVunder adopts Her¬ 
 mann’s opinion. (Metre: penth. 
 iamb, and dim. iamb, brach.) 
 
 894. €Ϊργ€σθαι, to ward off, the 
 word β€Χη serving as joint accusative 
 to this verb and to άμυνάν. Plat. 9. 
 Leg. 873, a. τούτα {sic) bf] παρά dea)V 
 pev Tiva φοβονμ€νον τάς τιμωρίας 
 
 z Long after this note had been Avritten, it was gratifying to the writer to find so able 
 a scholar as Kayser coming to a similar conclusion. After combating the opinions of 
 Bothe, Erfurdt and Wunder, on this passage, and much to the same effect as in the 
 above note, Kayser observes: “ Inde apparet θνμου βί\η esse κακά δρμ-ίιματα, malas lubi- 
 dines. Θυμδς de cupiditate occurrit ap. Soph. CEd. Col. 778. apud Eurip. Med. 304. in 
 Herodot. I. r. et Horn. Od. κ. 217. Tribui autem ei βίλη non raagis oflfendet nos, quam 
 ipwTi apud Eur. Troad. 255.” Act. Sem. Phil. p. 92. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 125 
 
 el γάρ αΐ τοίαίδβ ττράξβις τίμιαι, 895 
 
 τί δβΐ μ€ χορβνβιρ ; 
 
 ονκ eTL TOP αθίκτορ βΙμι dvT, β', 
 
 γας ίττ ομφαλορ σ^βωρ^ 
 
 €ΐργ€σθαι χρη τά? Toiavras. Gorg. 
 505, b. fipyeiv αυτήν (sc. την ψνχην) 
 των (ΤΓίθνμιών, και μη cTriTpenecv 
 αλλ’ αττα ποιύν η αφ’ ων βίΚτΙων €σται. 
 
 «ρέεται. Elms. €φξ€ται. Pal. Tricl. 
 
 Ib. ψυχάς (ωστ€) άμνν€ΐν, SO as to 
 guard them from the soul. Pindar 
 (Isth. I. 71.) uses a dative after this 
 verb, γαστρί αμύνων λιμόν. For in¬ 
 stances of ωστ€ omitted in the Pin¬ 
 daric writings, see Isth. III. 16. 
 Pyth. III. 98. IV. 260. Nem. VII. 
 41. Hymn. II. 5. Fgmm. Incert. 
 61. 150. (metre: dim. epit.). 
 
 895. Metre: dim. epitr. andcretic. 
 
 896. xopeveiv. In what sense the 
 word is here used, will be best un¬ 
 derstood from the well-known pas¬ 
 sage in Horace : Hie (Chorus sc.) 
 
 Hie bonis faveatque et consilietur 
 amice, * * * 
 
 Hie tegat commissa, Deosque pre- 
 cetur et oret, 
 
 Ut redeat miseris, abeat fortuna 
 superbis. Ars Poet. 196. 
 
 Ell. “ TO xopevetv tanquam pars 
 cultus Deorum memoratur.” (metre : 
 adonic with anac.) 
 
 897—8. “ αθικτον ya? όμφαλον i. q. 
 abvTov Delphici templi propter in- 
 violatam sanctitatem sic dictum.” 
 Ell. 
 
 Ib. ειρι, not perhaps so much in a 
 private capacity, as in that of a pub¬ 
 lic βΐωρος, such functionaries being 
 usually selected out of persons of 
 rank, like the men here composing 
 
 the Chorus. 
 
 898. όμφάλόν. The ομφαλος was 
 in strict language that white stone, 
 which stood in the adytum of the 
 Delphic temple, (^schyl. Eum. 40. 
 Plat. 4 Rep. 427, b. c. Fragm. 
 Pind. Boeckh. p. 570.) and on which 
 were placed two golden eagles, re¬ 
 presentatives of that Zeus, who, as 
 we have more than once already 
 seen, was the real president and in- 
 spirer of the temple, Apollo being 
 the subordinate agent or a interpreter. 
 It is unnecessary to remind the 
 reader of the legend, by which the 
 flight of these two eagles determined 
 the ομφαλος to be the navel or mid¬ 
 dle spot of the earth. Thudichum, 
 I know not upon what authority, 
 asserts, that the Jews had the same 
 notion with regard to their own 
 metropolis, as being the centre of 
 the earth. These golden eagles 
 were carried ofi* by Philomelas in 
 the Phocian war, after which the 
 omphalus was placed outside the tem¬ 
 ple in the peribolum. (Schol. ad Pind. 
 Pyth. IV. 6.) For some interesting 
 accounts of the localities of Delphi, 
 its immense wealth &c. &c. see 
 Thudichum’s notes I. 231, 2. 
 Wachsm. IV. 263, 4. The word 
 ομφαλος is naturally of frequent oc¬ 
 currence in the writings of Pindar. 
 Pyth. IV. 131. VI. 3. VHI, 85. 
 XI. 16. Nem. VII. 49. Cf. Diss. 
 Comment. 219. 616. &c. See also 
 Eurip. Med. 666. 
 
 a It is not unworthy of remark, when treating on these matters, that Gesenius (Lexic. 
 I. 47^’) translates £xod. VII. i. thou shall be with reference to Pharaoh, i. e. in the 
 discourse with him, the God, i, e. the Inspirer, and Aaron thy brother shall be thine in¬ 
 terpreter.'"* 
 
.126 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ούδ’ eV τον ^Άβαισί ναόν, 
 ovde ταν ^ΟΧνμττίαν, 
 el μη τάδβ χβφό^βικτα 
 
 899· ^Αβαισι. Br. Erf. Dind. Ebn. 
 *Αβαΐσι libri. Herm. Wund. That 
 the temple of Apollo at Abse (in 
 Phocis, not in Lycia, as the Scho¬ 
 liast writes) was upon a scale of 
 grandeur not much inferior to that 
 of Delphi, may be collected from 
 Herodotus, who after including Abse 
 among the places burnt and de¬ 
 stroyed by the Persian invaders 
 under Xerxes, observes: evOa ην 
 ίρυν ’ΑπολλωΐΌ? πΧονσιον, θησανροΐσι 
 re και άναθηραοΊ ττολλοΐσι KarecTKevacr- 
 μίνον' ην δε και rore, και ννν εστ'ι, 
 χρηστηριον αυτόθι" και τούτο τό ίρον 
 σν\ησαντ€ς όνβπρησαν. VIIL 33 · 
 
 also νπΐ. 2 7- 134· Pausanias X. 
 CC. 3· 35* Wachsm. IV. 266. 
 
 900. 'θ\νμπιαν. And what ideas 
 rose uppermost in the minds of 
 Sophocles’ auditors, when this word 
 of magic sound to Grecian ears was 
 now pronounced ? If their character 
 is to be determined by the entire 
 word before us, they would have been 
 of the ^ Altis, or sacred grove with all 
 its magnificent appurtenances; they 
 would have been of the Cronian 
 Hill, thick-set with the olives 
 brought by Hercules from the land 
 of the ^ Hyperboreans, and of that 
 wide plain, to the south and east of 
 the Altis, which extending from the 
 side of “ the broad fiowing” Alpheus 
 ( 01 . V. 41.), contained within its 
 
 900 
 
 spacious bosom as well the tents of 
 assembled chiefs and nations, as the 
 stadium and hippodrome, in which 
 their exhibitions of skill and strength 
 and opulence were to be displayed: 
 for all these were comprehended 
 under the single word Olympia. 
 But if the general tenor of the drama 
 and the flow of feeling engendered 
 by it, is to determine its force, then 
 we venture to say, that one single 
 image mastered and superseded all 
 the rest. And what was that? It 
 was that ashen d altar, which stood 
 apart from the temple of Olympic 
 Jove, and was dedicated to him—it 
 was the prophetic fires which blazed 
 upon its top—it was the candidates 
 for victory bending in holy prayer 
 before e it, and such venerable func¬ 
 tionaries as the lamidse, the Cly- 
 tiadse and Telliadse, intently gazing 
 on the sacred flame, and predicting 
 from its changing forms, to whom 
 success and to whom defeat would 
 probably be assigned in the games 
 which would succeed this day of 
 g sacrifice. Such is the power of 
 genius, not only to create ideas, but 
 to fix or dissipate those with which 
 the mind has been already impreg¬ 
 nated, or of which, under ordinary 
 circumstances, it is most tena¬ 
 cious. 
 
 901. χ€ΐρό^€ΐκτα αρμόσει, shall agree 
 
 b An Elian word for &\(Tos. ^ 01 . HI. 23 sq. X. 55 · 
 
 d 01 . I. 150. VI. 6. of. sup. 184. 
 
 e 01. V. 10 sq. VIII. 10. cf. Diss. Comment, pp. 51. 260. &c. 
 
 f Compare 01 . VIII. 5. and Eurip. Phcen. 1270-4. · ·β j 
 
 g In the Pindaric writings the sacrificial day, which preceded the games, k signified 
 by the terms )3ou0ufriat, Ol. V. ii. Nem, X. 41. eopr?? 01.Vl. ii6. βωμων άγισθεντων, 
 ΟΙ. HI. 35. the days of the games being denominated aycSves, αμιλλαι, νικαψορίαι, reOpos 
 ά 4 θλων (Cil. VI. 116.) α 4 θλων κρίσι$ (Ol. III. 37. Nem. X. 41), &c. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 127 
 
 ττασιν άρμόσβι βροτοΐς. 
 
 άλλ\ ώ κρατύνων^ βϊττβρ ορθ' άκούβις^ 
 
 ZeVy Ίτάντ ανάσσων^ μη Χάθοι 
 
 σ€ τάν re σαν αθάνατον alev άρχάν, 9^5 
 
 φθίνοντα γάρ * * * Ααΐον 
 
 Θίσφατ i^aipovaiv η8η, 
 
 κούδαμου ημαίς Άττόλλωζ^ βμφανης' 
 
 eppu be τα θβΐα. 91 ° 
 
 so perspicuously with the event, that 
 they shall pass into an example, to be 
 pointed at by the finger. 
 
 903. etTrep ορθ' aKoveis, if indeed 
 you are rightly termed, τνάντ ανάσ¬ 
 σων, lord of all things, (oracles in¬ 
 clusive.) 
 
 904. rravr ανάσσων. Dindorf 
 notices the rarity of an accusative 
 after ανάσσων. “ Cui audacise, si 
 qua est, nullo alio in vocabulo fa- 
 cilior parata excusatio est quam in 
 adjectivo ττάντα.” 
 
 Ib. Χάθοί, Dind. Χάθρ, Elms. 
 Herm. The latter says : hie qui- 
 dem, quum non tantum optet, sed 
 etiam oret chorus, conjunctivus 
 praestat.” Ellendt on the contrary, 
 
 male Χάθρ vulgahatur, cum optari, 
 non moneri apertum sit.” II. 96. μη 
 Χάθοι, let not these things escape you. 
 Erfurdt warns his readers against 
 Burgess’s translation, “ ne tuimet 
 ipsius obliviscaris tuique ceterni im¬ 
 perii,” observing that ^πιΧανθάνβσθαι 
 often goSterns an accusative case, 
 Χανθάν^σθαι never. 
 
 906-7. I understand : “for peo¬ 
 ple (i. e. Jocasta) hold cheap {e^ai- 
 ροΰσιν Schol. €κφανΧιζονσιν) the old 
 oracles concerning Laius, (viz. that 
 
 he was to be murdered by his own 
 son. Cf. sup. 852 sq. infr. 916.) or, 
 the oracles given to Laius.” Cf. 
 Matth. §. 342. 
 
 goy. φθίνοντα, Schol. παΧαιά, παρε- 
 ΧηΧνθότα. El. irrita, contempta. 
 Donner : “ Der Gotter uraltes 
 
 Wort an Laios | wird bereits ja 
 nichts geachtet.” 
 
 Ib. θέσφατα (^eos, φημ\), oracles. 
 Find. Pyth. IV. 126. Isthm. VIII. 
 67. iEsch. Sept. c. Th. 614. 844. 
 Eurip. Phoen. 433. 632. 921. &c. 
 &c. 
 
 909. ovdapov. Eurip! Here. F. 841. 
 η θ€θΙ pev ουδαμοΰ, [ τα θνητά δ eWat 
 peyaXa, μη bovTOS δίκην. 
 
 Ib. τιμαΊε. What the words τιμαί 
 and yepas mean in Hesiod’s Theo- 
 gony has been explained, sup. 215, 
 That both these words were under¬ 
 stood by Pindar in a similar sense, 
 cf. 01. VI. loi. VII. 106. 125. X. 
 58. Pyth. I. b 94. H. 83. IV. 191. 
 262. See also Eur. Here. F. 845. 
 853. on the word τιμαί. 
 
 Ib. τιμαϊς Εμφανής = (μφανως τι- 
 μάται. El. cf. Wunder ad (Ed. Col. 
 V. 1004. 
 
 910. eppei τα Θ^Ια, peril cultus 
 deorum. Eurip. Troad. 27. (ρημία 
 
 h Dissen, who does not appear to have been aware of the Hesiodean distinction of the 
 word TLph, annotates very properly: “ τιμάν, imperium et honorem ex imperio, recte 
 monente Boeckhio, plane ut Pyth. II. no.” 
 
128 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΙΟ. χώρας ανακτ€ς^ δό^α μοί τταρ^οτάθη 
 ι^αονς Ικβσθαί δαιμόνων^ τάδ* iv χ^ροίν 
 στβφη λαβούστ) κάτηθυμιάματα. 
 vxj/oO yap αίρβί θυμόν ΟΙδίττους αγαν 
 λυτταισί παντοΐαίσιν' ονδ* δττοΤ άνηρ 9* 
 
 βννονς, τα καινα τοίς ττάλαί τεκμαΐρβταί, 
 άλλ’ iarl του λβγοντος, ην φόβους Χόγρ, 
 οτ ούν τταραινουσ ούδβν βς ττλόον ττοιώ, 
 
 7 Γρος σ\ ώ Αύκβι "ΆττολΧον^ αγχιστος γαρ el, 
 
 Ικότίς άφΐγμαί τοΐσδβ συν κατβύγμασιν, 9^ 
 
 yap ττόλιν όταν λάβ// κακή, | νοσύ τα 
 των θ^ών ovSe τιρασθαι θεΧα. W^UND. 
 
 cf. Lucret. VI. 1274-5· 
 
 91 Τ. χωράς ανακτάς, (primores 
 Dind.) cf. sup. 80. infr. 1223. 
 OLd. Col. 83 T. Goettling’s Hesiod 
 p. 139. Creuzer Symb. II. 336. In 
 Hisch. S. c. T. 1007. the provisional 
 government, established after the 
 mutual murder of Eteocles and Poly- 
 nices, is called δήμον πρόβονλοι τησδΐ 
 Καδμείας π6λ€ως. 
 
 Ib. δϋ^α μοί παρξστάθη = ίδο^β μοι, 
 placuit mihi. Wund. 
 
 912. νάονς δαιμόνων, here appa¬ 
 rently niches where statues of the 
 gods were placed. Cf. Electr. 1374 “ 
 
 9 · 
 
 913. στίφη. As the observations 
 connected with this word would 
 occupy a large space, they are re¬ 
 served for a future play, where they 
 will be equally opportune. 
 
 Ib. ίπιθνμιάματα, incense. Cf. Sup. 
 4. Electr. 63 1-2. Find. Fgmm. Se¬ 
 lect. Scol. I. V. 2. Thren. 1. V. 7. Diss. 
 Edit. 
 
 914. v\j/ov (Find. 01 . 1 . 188. €ΐη σί 
 re τούτον νφον χρόνον TTorelv. Pyth. 
 X. 109. νψον φίροντι νόμον (rem- 
 publicam) θεσσαλώι/. Apoll. Rhod. 
 III. 368.) yap aipei θυμόν. ScHOL. fie- 
 τ€ωρίζ€ται την ψνχην Polyb. III. 82,2. 
 
 μ€τίωρος και θυμόν ττΚηρης. The CauS( 
 which thus trouble the mind 
 CEdipus and disturb the even ten· 
 of its way,” are well enumerated I 
 the Scholiast: the murder con 
 mitted by him—the thought th: 
 he has married the widow of h 
 victim—the expected exile, and tl 
 impossibility of returning to his su] 
 posed parents, from dread of tl 
 oracles still hanging over him. 
 
 915—6. “Does not judge of tl 
 new oracles by the old ones, and coi 
 sider that as they were false, so thei 
 may be false.” Find. Ol. VIII. ^ 
 ίμπύροις τeκμaιpόμevoι. Fgmm. Selec 
 47. τ€κμαιρομαι epyoiaiv 'Ηρακλβο 
 Diss. Ed. p. 243. Eurip. Phcen. 185 
 
 917. ear] του X€yovT 09 . Arist. E( 
 θόο. ώ δαιμόνιε, μη του Xeyovros Χσθ· 
 
 Ib. φόβους = φοβερά. Cf. inf> 
 
 1495· 3^0· Ε1. 68t 
 
 Goettl. Hes. ρ. 105. JEsch. Sep 
 c. T. 382. 
 
 918. οίιδεν ες ττΚεον ττοιω, I f. 
 nothing advantageously, I proj 
 nothing. Musgrave compares Eurij 
 Hippol. 286. ουδεν eXpyaapai ττλίη 
 Plato Apoll. sub init. πλέον τι- ηκί 
 σαι anokoyovpevov. 
 
 919· αγχιστος. ScHOL. πρ 
 θνρών yap ιδρντο. Cf. Sup. V. If . 
 
 920. κaτεvyμaτa (Cf. Sept. Γ 
 
ΟΙΔ1ΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 129 
 
 οττωρ λνσιν tip ημΧν evayrj ττόρψ' 
 ώς νυν οκνονμβν ττάντβς €κπ€7Γληγμ€νον 
 κύνον βλ€ποντ€9 m κυββρνητην veco9, 
 
 ΑΓΓΕΛΟΣ. 
 
 άρ’ αν Trap* υμών, ώ ζ4νοί^ μαθοίμ οττον 
 
 τα του τυράννου Βώματ €(ττ'ίν Οιδίττου ; 9^5 
 
 μάλιστα S αυτόν βϊπατ, el κάτισθ* οπού, 
 
 στβγαι μ€ν aide' καυτοί evdovy ω ^eve' 
 
 γυνή de μ’ητ'ηρ rjde τών Keivoo TeKVCov, 
 
 .Γ. άλλ’ ολβία Te και ζυν ολβίοις aei 
 
 yevoLT y eKelvoo y ουσα πavτeλr]9 daμap, 93*^ 
 
 vreces El. Weihgeschenk Pass. 
 •cat θυμιάματα. WuND. 
 
 . όπως λνσιν (remission from 
 and end of evils. Cf. Trach. 
 Antig. 597.) evayrj πόρτ)ς = 
 Κνσιν ημίν πόρης τοιαύτην, ώστε 
 ον ΟΙδίπουρ φαίνεσθαι. WuND. 
 
 Εβν. 
 
 ‘ ευαγής (άγω) prosperum signi- 
 )roprie sanctimonia diis ac^ 
 , , eoque primitivo significandi 
 legitur τις οίδεν, εΐ κάτωθεν 
 ;·άδε : Antig. 512.” El. 
 
 -3. Ordo : βΚεποντες αυτόν, 
 κυβερνήτην εκπεπ\ηγμενον. That 
 
 a people so devoted to the 
 :he Athenians, naval imagery 
 abound in their writers of 
 description, poets, historians, 
 .tors, &c. was natural enough; 
 ence is it, that the Theban 
 »· the bard of a people having 
 eahngs with the sea, is as 
 of nautical imagery as any 
 Titer whatever? ( 01 . VI. 1 71 · 
 
 . Pyth. I. 165. 176. II. 114. 
 ■'7. 520. IX. 61. X. 80. Isth. 
 IV. J 20. VI. 19. Nem. V. 92. 
 Fgmm. Incert. 118. 136 
 .) Was it the old Phoe- 
 blood working in him, and 
 
 which as well here as elsewhere 
 (^schyl. Sept. c. T. 755. 767. Eur. 
 Here. F. 478. Pheen. 1727.) made 
 even Theban women adepts in nau¬ 
 tical phraseology ? For examples 
 of nautical imagery in the great 
 .'Eschylean Tragedy connected with 
 the family of Cadmus, cf. 2. 62. 193. 
 202. 649. 796. add Eurip. Phoen. 
 
 860.873. QX d ^ 
 
 925. ΟΙδίπου. jEsch. S. c. T. 187 
 &c. (in melicis.) 
 
 928. γυνή μητηρ. (A sensation 
 through the theatre at this equivocal 
 expression.) 
 
 930. (bows reverently as he speaks) 
 παντε'Κης. gl. τέκνα ε^ουιτα. DoNNER 1 
 vollkommne Frau. The Scholiast 
 observes that this is said in re¬ 
 ference to V. 928. children being the 
 great object of wedlock. Hence in 
 the Iliad (II. 700.) it is said of Pro- 
 tesilaus, apparently slain without 
 progeny, ToC δε και αμφιδρυφης 
 άΧοχ^ος ΦυΧάκη ε\εΚειπτο, | και δομος 
 ημιτε\ης. Dindorf and Ellendt 
 adopt Hermann’s explanation: uxor 
 summa dignitate fruens; the first 
 comparing παμμψωρ, Antig. 1282. 
 the second Antig. 1148. τταντε^η 
 μοναρχίαν. Pollux defines : και τεΧος 
 
130 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 αυτως θ€ καί σν γ , ω ξβρ αξως γαρ u 
 της βύβτΓβίας ovveK , αλλά φρ(ίζ* οτον 
 χρηζούΡ άφΐζαί χω τι σημηναι Θί\ων. 
 
 άγαθα δομοίς re καί ττόσβί τω σώ, γύναι. 
 τα τΓοΐα ταντα ; τταρα τίνος S άφίγμβνος ; 
 €κ της Ι^ορίνθον, το δ’ €7Γος ον^βρώ τάχα 
 
 τί S ίστί, ποιαν δύναμιν ώδ’ e^et διπΧην ; 
 
 τύραννον αυτόν ούπιχώριοί χθονος 
 της Ίσθμιας στησουσυν, ώς ηύδάτ e/cet. 
 τί δ* ; ούχ 6 πρύσβυς ΪΙόλυβος ίγκρατης βτι ; 
 ού δητ% eVe/ vlv Θάνατος ev τάφοις βχβί, 
 πώς βίπας ; ή τβθνηκβ ΐΙόλνβος, ώ γβρον ; 
 
 935 
 
 940 
 
 6 γάμος εκαλείτο, και τελειοι οι γ(γαμη~ 
 κότεί. See further on this subject 
 ^sch. Ag. 900-6, and Klausen’s 
 notes. Dissen in Find. p. 72. 501. 
 
 931. αυτως. Cf. Wunder, (de Scho- 
 liorum in Soph. Trag. auctoritate 
 
 p· 32.) 
 
 932. orov. See Ellendt II. 387. 
 
 934 · yvj/ai, lady. (The high tone 
 
 of Tragedy must not be lowered by 
 neglecting these little niceties.) 
 
 935 · TTola ταντα; DoNN. Wie 
 lautet deine Kunde ? What is the 
 purport of thy information ? 
 
 937. άσχαΚΚοις δ’ (αι/) ’ίσως, and 
 perhaps you will be grieved, annoyed, 
 (because though the intelligence I 
 have to communicate elevates CEdi- 
 pus to a new throne, it will also 
 have the effect of removing him from 
 Thebes.) 
 
 Ib. άσχάΧΚίΐν = άσχαΧάν (connect¬ 
 ed accordingtoDoederlin andGrashof 
 with άχος, as ’ίσχω with έχω). Od. II. 
 192. rjv K ivX θυμω | τίνων άσχάΧ\τ]ς. 
 Hes. fr. 37. ap. Gaisf. Anacreon. 
 XIV. 14. Mehlh. The au is to be 
 repeated, as Dindorf observes, from 
 
 the parenthetical πως δ’ ονκ άν; 
 Heindorf ad Plat. Phaedon. p. 135, 
 reads τάχ άν rjdoio μ^ν, πως δ’ ονκ; 
 αν άσχάλλοις δ’ ’ίσως. But, as Her¬ 
 mann observes, in none of the au¬ 
 thorities, by which he attempts to 
 justify this reading, does the par¬ 
 ticle av commence a sentence. Cf. 
 El. I. 122. and Diss. Comment, in 
 Find. p. 192. 
 
 938. διπλήν δνναμιν. The sense of 
 Jocasta’s inquiry is obvious enough : 
 how can one and the same thing 
 cause at the same time joy and 
 grief ? but the construction by which 
 this sense is attained is not so 
 obvious. 
 
 939. ονπιχώριοι. sc. 01 Επιχώριοι. 
 Cf. Schneid. de dial. 26. 
 
 939—40. χθονος της ’ίσθμιας, of 
 which Corinth was the capital. 
 Find. Scol. fr. I. Ισθμόν δεσπόται =z 
 Corinthians. Nem. X. 77. Κόρινθόν 
 μνχοΧ = Corinth in the recesses of 
 the Isthmus. 
 
 943. ω γέροι/ omitted in Ebner’s 
 as well as other MSS. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 131 
 
 ΑΓ. €ΐ μη λ€γω τάληθβς, άζιω Oavelu, 
 
 ΙΟ. ώ ττρόσπολ!, ούχί Ββσπότη τά8 ώς τάχο^ 945 
 
 μολοΰσα ; ώ θβώι^ μαντβύματα, 
 
 1ν βστβ* τούτοι^ ΟΙδίπονς πάλαι τρβμων 
 τον ανδρ* €φ€υγ€ μη κτάνοι' καΐ νυν oSe 
 προ9 τη9 τνχη9 ολωλβν ούδβ τονδ' υπο. 
 
 ΟΙ. ω φίλτατον γυναικδς Ίοκάστης κάρα, 95° 
 
 τί μ ^ζεπβμφω δζΰρο τώνδε δωμάτων ; 
 
 ΙΟ. άκου€ τάνδρο9 τονδ€, και σκόπβι κλύων 
 τα σ4μν ϊν ηκβι του θβου μαντβύματα. 
 
 ΟΙ. οδτο$· 8e TLS ποτ ΐστί, κοα τί μοι Xeyei ; 
 
 ΙΟ. €κ τηζ Ι^ορίνθου, πατβρα τον σον αγγελών 955 
 
 ώί ουκ €τ οντα ΥΙόλυβον, άλλ’ ολωλότα. 
 
 ΟΙ. τί φη9, ^€v ; ayros* μοι συ σημηνας γενου. 
 
 945 · " ττρόστΓολε. Jocasta, I pre¬ 
 sume, addresses one of her train, 
 and not, as the Scholiast intimates, 
 calls to a maid-servant within. The 
 joy which she manifests at a second 
 opportunity of vilifying oracular 
 responses is noticed by the Scholiast. 
 
 Ib. ώ? Ta)^os (i. e. ούτως ωστ€ yiy- 
 ν^σθαι iv τάχ^ι. El.) Aj. 578. 593. 
 Phil. 924 &c. 
 
 946. /lavrev/ia. The word bears two 
 meanings in Sophocles, an oracular 
 response, as here and infr. 953. 992. 
 CEd. Col. 388. and divination, Antig. 
 1013. The word first occurs in a 
 fragment of Hesiod (Gaisf. XXXIX. 
 8.) : evdep (Dodona, or the oracular 
 beech) επιχθόνιοι pavrevpara πάντα 
 φέρονται. Cf. Find. Pyth. IV. 130. 
 V. 82. VIII. 86. Isth. VII. 21. 
 Eurip. Suppl. 7. 
 
 947. tv €στ€. Brunck and Erf. 
 improperly put a note of interro¬ 
 gation here. “ Est autem σχετλιασ¬ 
 τικόν, non ερωτηρατικόν.” El. cf. 
 Matth. §. 620. 
 
 949. προς της τύχης, in the course 
 of nature. (CEdipus returns to the 
 stage, bearing all the marks of a 
 man in deep despair.) 
 
 950. 'ΐοκάστης κάρα. cf. Ell. in voc. 
 and Matth. §.430. In the Hercules 
 F. of Euripides v. 1046. the hero is 
 termed το καλλίνικον κάρα. Find. 
 01 . VI. ΙΟΙ. VII. 124. ea κεφάλα 
 =sibi. Translate in general terms ; 
 my beloved Joco^ta. (The despondent 
 tone of CEdipus contrasts strongly 
 with the exuberant one of Jocasta. 
 The changes which gradually take 
 place in the former from stupor to 
 something like hope and cheerful¬ 
 ness, need not be traced in all their 
 phases throughout this agitating 
 scene.) 
 
 952. σκοπεί, i. e. ^οκίραζε. ScHOL. 
 
 953. τα σερνά. (speaks with a tone 
 of bitter irony.) 
 
 Ib. iv ηκει, quo deveniant, i. e. quo 
 loco censenda sint, abjicienda quippe 
 et nihili pendenda. El. 
 
 957. (τηρηνας yεvoΰ. Elmsley COm- 
 K 2 
 
132 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΑΓ. €L τοντο πρώτον δβΐ μ άτταγγβϊλαι σαφώς, 
 
 €v Ικτίνον Θανάσιμον βββηκότα, 
 
 ΟΙ. TTorepa δόλοισιν, η νόσον ^vvaXXayfi ; φο 
 
 ΑΓ. σμικρα τταΧαια σώματ βύνάζβί ροπή. 
 
 ΟΙ. νόσοις 6 τΧημων, ώς eoLKev, βφθίτο. 
 
 ΑΓ. καΐ τω μακρω γβ σνμμβτρονμβνος χρόνω. 
 
 ΟΙ. φβν φβΰ, τί δητ αν, ώ γύναι, σκοποΐτό τις 
 
 την ΥΙυθόμαντιν εστίαν, η τους ανω 9^5 
 
 κΧάζοντας ορνις, ών υφηγητών βγω 
 
 pares Aj. 588. μη ττροΒονς ημάς yivrj. 
 Philoct. 772· Μ σ·αυτόι/ θ’ αμα καμ , 
 οντα σαντον πρόστροπον, Kreivas yevr], 
 Dindorf refers the reader to other 
 examples given by himself ad H. 
 Steph. Thes. II. 623, c. 
 
 958. TovTo πρώτον, viz. the intelli¬ 
 gence respecting the death of Poly- 
 buSj in preference to the intelligence 
 of the election of CEdipus to th^ 
 vacant throne. 
 
 959. θανάσιμον βφηκότα. gl. νίκρον. 
 Aj. 517. ''Αώου θανάσιμους οίκητορας, 
 1032. δλωλβ θανασιμω π^σημαη. 
 
 Wunder compares the viit Tode ab- 
 gehen of his own language. 
 
 960. η νόσου ξυva\\ayf} (ccfSM, in- 
 terventu), sc. Wave. 
 
 961. €ύνάζ€ΐ. Erfurdt compares 
 Senec. (Ed. 787. Animam senilem 
 mollis exsolvit sopor. 
 
 Ib. ροπή, turn of the scale. Jacobs 
 aptly compares Plat, de Rep. VIII. 
 556, e. ωσπ€ρ σώμα νοσώ3€ς μικρας 
 ροπής €ξωθ€ν delrai προσλαβεσθαι προς 
 το κάμν€ΐν. 
 
 962. 6 τ'Κημων. The Greeks in 
 this word and the French in their 
 le rnalheureux, le pauvre, cf. infr. 
 1175. have an advantage over us. 
 
 963. συμμ€τρούμ€νος (^in agreement 
 with, suitably to) τω μακρω χρόνω [his 
 advanced period of life. Cf. (Ed. Col. 
 7.). And so Passow: er starb der 
 langen Lebenzeit entsprechend, d. e. 
 
 von Alter. Herm. : mortuus est 
 cequando tarn longum tempus, i. e. 
 senio. For similar modes of ex¬ 
 pression among the Byzantine 
 writers, see Dindorf’s notes. The 
 tact of the messenger’s language 
 here has not escaped the Scholiast. 
 
 964. φευ φευ. That this cannot be 
 an exclamation altogether of grief, is 
 pretty evident. Is it one of joy and 
 exultation (cf. Ell. in voc.) ? I should 
 rather term it that of a meditating 
 and wondering mind, conscious that 
 the oracle has been mistaken on one 
 point, and that it may be mistaken 
 on another, but still too fearfully 
 troubled to indulge in exultation, 
 and still less in such levity of lan¬ 
 guage as Jocasta displays. How 
 would the tones of Sophocles’ actor 
 have saved us from all doubts on 
 this and many other points ! 
 
 965. την ΐΐυθόμαντίν ear lav, i. e. την 
 μαντικήν ΤΙυθοϋς Εστίαν. V/^UND. the 
 Delphic fane with its oracle, the 
 soothsayer s seat at Pytho. Pass. Cf. 
 (Ed. Col. 414. άνδρών θίωρων Δελ¬ 
 φικοί αφ’ Εστίας. Pind. Prosod. fr. 3· 
 χρυσία κΧυτόμαντι JIv^oi. Plut. in 
 Lysandr. λόγια πυθόχρηστα. 
 
 g66. κράζοντας ορνις. Antig. ίΟΟΙ. 
 αγυώτ* ακούω φθόγγου ορνίθων, κακω j 
 κΧάζοντας οΧστρω. 1021. ουδ ορνις 
 ευσημους άπορροιβδ€Ϊ βοάς. On omens 
 taken by the notes, or flight of birds. 
 
ΟΙΔ1ΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 133 
 
 KTaveiv e^ueXXov ττατβρα τον βμόν ; 6 Se θανων 
 K€vu€L κάτω οή γη^' β/ω ο οο evuaoe 
 άψαυστο9 €γχου9, et τι 
 
 κατ^φθιΘ^' οντω δ* αν θανων βΐη 'ζ ίμου. 97 ° 
 
 τα δ* ονν παρόντα συλλάβων θεσπίσματα 
 κεΐται παρ "Άίδυ Πόλι;/3θί αζι ονδενό^· 
 
 ΙΟ. ονκουν εγώ σοί ταυτα προΰλεγον πάλαι ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ηνδαί* εγώ δε τω φόβω παρηγόμην, 
 
 ΙΟ. μη νυν ίτ αυτών μηδΐν (Ιί θυμαν βάληί. 975 
 
 ΟΙ. καί ttSs το μητροί Χίκτρον οΰκ OKveiv μ( δΰ ; 
 
 ΙΟ. τί δ* αν φοβοΐτ άνθρωπος ω τά της τύχης 
 
 consult Van Dale de Idol. P. III. 
 cc. I, 2. Wachsmuth IV. 278. Thu- 
 dichum’s notes to CEd. T. Nessel 
 de augur. Graec. Upsala 1719. 
 
 Ib. ωρ υφηγητών, SC. οντων. 
 
 967. KTaveiv e/icWov, was tO kill, 
 
 968. KevOei pro κ^υθίται. So κ^νβων 
 Aj. 634. KCKevOev El. 868. Κ€Κ€νθότοιν 
 Ant. 902. Musgr. 
 
 969. αψανστος βγχου?, without 
 touching a weapon. Matth. §. 344. 
 
 Ib. τωμω πόθω, regret for me. CEd. 
 Col. 419. Trapos rovpov πόθου προϋ- 
 $evTo την τυραννίδα. For other ex¬ 
 amples of the possessive pronoun 
 as used by Sophocles, cf. sup. 16. 
 337. 572. CEd. Col. 333. El. 
 
 343. 1037. Antig. 573. Phil. 1251. 
 &c. &c. For illustrations of the word 
 πόθος, Ellendt refers to Ilgen. Opusc. 
 Philol. I. 29. 
 
 970. οϋτω, emphatic. 
 
 971. συΧΚαβων, having taken with 
 him. CEd. Col. 1384. συλλαβών άράς. 
 Tr. 1153. παί 8 ων τούς pev ^υλλαβουσ , 
 
 Ib. παρόντα {quce data erant El.) 
 emphatic: the dread of future ora¬ 
 cles, more particularly tliat which 
 predicted- his marriage with his 
 mother, still hanging over the mind 
 of CEdipus. 
 
 Ib. θέσπισμα (θεσπίζω cf. Herodot. 
 VIII. 135.) Eurip. Suppl. 152. 
 
 972. αξι ούΒενός. This is not said 
 I think contemptuously, but in the 
 sense of Hermann’s translation, sic 
 ea (Polybus) secum abstulit, ut irrita 
 fierent. Though CEdipus is content 
 to take somewhat of his tone on 
 these matters from his wife, he does 
 not borrow it entirely. 
 
 973· emphatic. 
 
 974. παρηγόμην. Schol. ηπατώμην. 
 For the step by which the primary 
 meaning passes into the secondary, 
 see Ellendt. 
 
 975. els θυμόν βάλλειν, a well- 
 known form of expression among 
 the epic poets; take to heart. 
 
 976. και πώς·, cf. CEd. Col. 606. 
 
 977. ra της τύχης, i. e. ή τύχη, for¬ 
 tune. As specimens of this circum¬ 
 locution, whether implying things 
 themselves, or the qualities of 
 things, cf. CEd. Col. 268. ra μητρος και 
 πατρος = την μητέρα και τον πατέρα. 
 351· τά της οϊκοι διαιτης = την οίκοι 
 δίαιταν. Antig. 162. τά πόλεος = την 
 
 ' πόλιν. Ε 1 . 92. τά παννυχίδων (uoctes a 
 me actas). 261. τά μητρος (i. e. μητηρ) 
 η μ εγείνατο. Trach. 439 * ητις ου 
 κάτοιδε τάνθρώπων, υτι | χαίρειν πεφυ- 
 
 Κ 3 
 
134 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Kparei^ πρόνοια S €στ\ν ovbevos σαφής ; 
 
 €ΐκη κράτιστον ζην, όπως δύναιτό τις, 
 σί) δ* βΙς τα μητρος μη φοβον ννμφβνματα, 
 πολλοί yap ηδη καν ονβιρασιν βροτών 
 μητρί ζννβυνάσθησαν. άλλα τανθ ότω 
 παρ ουδόν ίστι, ραστα τον βίον φόρει, 
 
 ΟΙ. καλώς άπαντα ταυτ αν βζβίρητό σοι, 
 
 €ΐ μη * κύ pel ζώσ η Τ€Κονσα' νυν δ* cVei 9^5 
 
 ζη, πάσ ανάγκη, Κ€ΐ καλώς λόγβις, OKveiv, 
 
 ΙΟ. κα\ μην μβγας γ οφθαλμός οι πατρος τάφοι, 
 
 ΟΙ. μόγας, ζυνίημ' άλλα της ζώσης φόβος, 
 
 ΑΓ. ποιας δβ και γνναικος €κφοβ€Ϊσθ' νπβρ ; 
 
 ΟΙ. Μβρόττης^ yepaie, Τίόλνβος ης ωκ€ΐ μότα. 99° 
 
 ΑΓ. τί δ’ €crr όκβίνης υμιν βς φόβον φόρον ; 
 
 ΟΙ. θβηλατον μάντ€υμα δβινον, ώ ζόνβ. 
 
 Kev ονχι rois αντοίς aei. Phil. 3 ®*^· 
 TO της νόσον. Eurip. Phoen. 414 · 
 τα φίλων — οί φίλοι. 12Τ7· καλώς 
 τα TOiv β(.ων κα\ τα. της τύχης εχ€ΐ. 
 
 Here. F. 5 *^ 3 · βίου. 
 
 gyy—S. ω.. κρατύ. Od. XI. 4 ^ 4 · 
 κρατύίΐς veKveaaiv. XVI. 26^. άν8ράσι 
 , . κρατύονσι, και άθανάτοισι θ€θ7σι. 
 Erfurdt compares for sentiment 
 Thucyd. IV. 62. τ6 δε άστάθμητον 
 του μίλλοντος ως εττι πλβίστον κρατεί. 
 A more apt comparison may be 
 found in Soph. Antig. 1158. 
 
 978. πρόνοια rerum futurarum 
 scientia (Schol. πρόγνωσις) δ’ i, 
 ον. σ. Brunck compares Find. 
 Olymp. XII. 10. σύμβολον ονπω τις 
 όπιχθονίων J πιστόν άμφϊ πράζιος ecr- 
 
 I σομίνας (vpev θύοθ^ν. He might 
 have added Nem. XL 55. 60. 
 
 979. et/c^. gl. at pleasure y care¬ 
 lessly, and without any regard to 
 oracles, 
 
 981. On this subject Thudichum 
 
 refers to Plato 9. Rep. p. 572. Cic. 
 de Divin. I. 29. §. 60. Plut. de Pre¬ 
 fect. virt. I. 234. Xyland. Interp. 
 Herod. VI. 107. Suet. Jul. Cses. 7. 
 
 982. τανθ' emphatically, if said of 
 oracles. 
 
 983. Trap’ ovbev, nihili. El. 13^9* 
 Trap’ ovdev του βίον κη^ίσθ' eTi. Antlg. 
 35. TO π pay μ' ayeiv ονχ ως παρ 
 ovbev. 
 
 987. οφθαλμός, lux, i. e. solatium, 
 levamen, ut Eurip. Androm. 407. 
 Erf. Cf. Boeckh’s Explic. ad Find, 
 p. 123-4. Hissen’s Comm. 63. 257. 
 Donn. ein helles Licht, 
 
 988. της ζώσης φόβος. My father’s 
 death is a great relief—but—he adds 
 emphatically— the living mother —it 
 is she that terrifies me. For con¬ 
 struction, cf. inff. 991. 
 
 991. es φόβον φύρον. * a via aliquo 
 versum ferente duci videtur (Ed. R. 
 517· π^πονθύναι λόγοισιν eiT (ργοισιν 
 (ϊς βλάβην φύρον. ^20, ον yap els 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ^ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 135 
 
 ΑΓ. η ρητόν ; η ούχι Θβμιτον οίΧλον elSevac ; 
 
 ΟΙ. μάλιστά γ' ehre γάρ μβ Αοζία^ ττοτβ 
 γρηναί μιγηναί μητρί τημαντον, τό re 
 πατρωον αίμα χ^ρσί ταίς ίμαΪ9 iXeiv. 
 ων ουνβχ η ι\ορίνσθ9 €ξ βμου τταλαι 
 μακραν άπωκβΐτ* βντνχώί μβν, άλλ’ 0μω9 
 τα των τβκόντων ομμαθ' ηδίστον βΧβττβίν. 
 
 ΑΓ. η γάρ τάδ* όκνών KeWev ησ& άπόπτοΧι^ ; 
 
 ΟΙ. πατρόζ Τ€ χρηζων μη (j)ovev9 elvat, yepov, 
 
 ΑΓ. τί δητ ίγω ονχι τοϋδβ του φόβον σ\ άναζ, 
 iirehrep exivovs ήΧθον^ Ι^^Χυσάμην ; 
 
 ΟΙ. καΧ μην χάριν γ άν ά^ίαν Χάβοις βμου. 
 
 ΑΓ. καΙ μην μάΧιστα τοΰτ άφίκόμην, όπως 
 
 σου προς δόμους βΧθόντος €υ πράζαιμί tl. 
 
 995 
 
 1000 
 
 1005 
 
 άττΧουν η ζημία μοι τον λόγον τοντον 
 (f)epei. 99^·* 
 
 993* ^^μ^τόν, quod per fas licitum. 
 El. Find. Pyth. IX. 75 * 
 
 (i. e. Apollinem) top ov θζμιτόν ψ€νδ€ί 
 θιγάν {jnentiri sc. cf. Diss. ad Pyth. 
 IV. 296). h. Horn. Cer. 203. He- 
 rodot. V. 72. Plato Apol. 30, d. 
 On the different readings θεμιτόν 
 and θβμιστορ, cf. Ellendt. 
 
 994. μάλιστά ye, SC. θ€μιτ6ν. 
 
 996. πατρωον αιμα. . iXeiv=patrem 
 occidere. Cf. GEd. Col. 407. 1671—2. 
 
 997. epov = υττ’ €μον. 
 
 998. μακράν άπωκύτ . Wunder, 
 after remarking on the pregnancy of 
 sense in the word άποικύσθαι, signi¬ 
 fying at once to remove from one 
 place of habitation, and to go to an¬ 
 other, translates: propterea Co- 
 rintho a me olim relicia in remotum 
 locum hahitatum concessi. 
 
 Ib. €ντνχώς, to my good fortune, 
 (in reference to his marriage, and 
 attainment of the Theban throne.) 
 
 ^ See opening speech and elsewhere in 1 
 auf Tauris.” 
 
 .. 999. CEdipus speaks the language 
 of all ages from Homer to Goethe 
 *i2s' ov 8 L· γλνκιον ης πατρίδος ονδέ 
 τοκηων 
 
 γίνεται, etTTfp καί Tts άπόπροθι πίονα 
 οίκον 
 
 γαίη iv αλλοδαπή valei απάν^νθε το- 
 κηων. Od. IX. 34 * 
 
 Who was it that said, that every 
 thing is best in our native land, even 
 the smeU of its soil, and that that 
 soil may be so recognised even with 
 the eyes shut ? 
 
 1000. άπόπτολις, an exile. CEd. 
 Col. 208. ω ^evoi, άπόπτολίί (sc. eipi). 
 Ib. τάδ’, emphatic. 
 
 1003. βξελνσάμην, aorist for pre¬ 
 sent, often used after τί and τί ovv. 
 Cf. Heindorf ad Plat. Protag. 
 p. 460. Erf. 
 
 1005. TovTo, i.e. διά TovTo. Reisig. 
 (Enar. p. 157.) compares CEd. Col. 
 1291. a δ’ ηλθον ήδη σοι ΰίλω Xe^ai, 
 Arist. Plut. 966. δ τι — (ληλνθας. 
 
 I οο6. προς δόμονς, SC. Corinth, 
 
 S truly classic performance, the “ Iphigenie 
 
 4 
 
136 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ’ ουποτ el/xt τοΪ9 φυτβύσασίι/ y ομού, 
 
 ΑΓ. ώ παΐ, καλω9 el δηλθ9 ουκ elbm τί Spas*. 
 
 ΟΙ. TTcas*, ω yepaie ; ττρο? θβώϊ^ δίδασκά μ€, 
 
 ΑΓ. ei τώρδβ (f)€vyet9 ovveK els οίκους μολβΐν, lofo 
 
 ΟΙ. ταρβων ye μη μοι Φοίβος i^eXOrj σαφής. 
 
 ΑΓ. η μη μίασμα των φvτeυσavτωv λαβής ; 
 
 ΟΙ. τουτ αύτο, 7Γpeσβυ, τουτό μ! elσael φoβeΐ. 
 
 ΑΓ. αρ οίσθα δητα ττρος δίκης ούδίν τρόμων ; 
 
 ΟΙ. πως δ* ονχι, παΐς γ el τώvδe yevvητωv ίφυν; 1015 
 
 ΑΓ. oOovveK ην σοί Τίόλυβος ουδ€ν ev yevei. 
 
 ΟΙ. πώς ebras ; ου yap ΐΙόλνβος eζeφvσe μe ; 
 
 ΑΓ. ού μάλλον ούδ^ν rovδe τάνδρος, άλλ* ϊσον. 
 
 ΟΙ. και πώς 6 φυσάς e^ ίσου τώ μηδevί ; 
 
 Ib. ευ τΓράξαιμί τι^ beneficii aliquid 
 consequerer. Trach. 191. οττως τοι 
 Ίτρώτος άγγ^ίλας τάδε ττρος σου τι 
 Κίρδάναιμι καϊ κτωμην χάριν. 
 
 1007* όμον, i. q. ό/χάσε, / will 
 never encounter, (shudders as he 
 speaks.) Cf. C. F. Hermann ad Luc. 
 de Hist. Conscr. p. 197. 
 
 Ib. rots φντ^νσασιν. The term is 
 plural, but the sense—CEdipus dared 
 not say “ my motherand yet he 
 looks at her as he speaks. 
 
 1008. καλώς, valde, prorsus. Sch^f. 
 who compares Theoc. Id. HI. 3. 
 Diodor. Sic. XHI. c. 108. XVHI. 
 c. 9. Chariton, p. 156, 224 &c. ττερί- 
 φανως. ScHOL. 
 
 1010, τωυδε ovvcK , on their ac¬ 
 count of whom we were speaking. 
 
 1011. ταρβων γε. Erf. Dind. 
 W^UND. ταρβώ ye, Codd. Br. ‘ Ac 
 fortasse indicativus stare potest. 
 Num enim Erfurdtii praeceptum, ex 
 quo particula ye in responsionibus 
 post verbum rectum ponere non 
 licet, verum sit, dubito. Cf. Eur.Sup. 
 769.* Ebn. (shudders again.) 
 
 lb. e^eKBji σαφής. Schol. μη oi 
 χρησμοί του Φοίβου τελεσ^ώσ». Cf. 
 
 sup. 88. 
 
 Ib. σαφής. Cf. Sup. 286. 390. 
 439. (Ed. Col. 623. el Zeυς ert 
 Ζεύί, χω Αίος Φοίβος σαφής. 79 ^* 
 δσωττερ και σaφeστepωv κλυω Φοίβου 
 re καυτού Ζηνός. 
 
 1012. μη is also found interro¬ 
 gatively with a final conjunction in 
 El. 1503. η μη φvyω σε; Aj. 77· 
 
 μη yevητaι; 
 
 1014. οίσθα. . τρόμων. Antig. 10^7* 
 οίσθα τάyoυς όντας, αν Xeyrjs, λeyωv; 
 (Ed. Col. 1210. σωςΧσθι. 
 
 Ib. ττρος δίκης (with reason, justly). 
 Soph. El. I2IT. ττρος δίκης yap ού 
 στeveις. 
 
 Ib. ούδε'υ = ού vel μηδαμώς. Cf. 
 Ell. H. 428. 
 
 1016. ev yevei. EUendt compares 
 infr. 1383. φανίντ dvayvov κα\ yevovs 
 τού Ααΐου. “Non enim gens dicitur, 
 sed stirps a patre Polybo vel Laio 
 repetenda.” Donner : Nein, Poly bos 
 war deinem Blute nie verwandt. 
 
 1018. “Not more than myself 
 (τουδε τάνδρος), but just in the same 
 degree as myself.” 
 
 1019. I understand : what then ? 
 had I no father P literally: was my 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 137 
 
 
 ,1- ■' 
 
 1020 
 
 Ατ^ *'V'y* ^ ** / » ν»»'' ν>> / 
 
 Α1 . αΛΛ ου σ ^yuvar ουτ €Κ€ίΡ09 οντ βγω. 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ* άρτΙ τον δη τταΐδά μ ώνομάζβτο ; 
 
 ΑΓ. δώρόρ 7Γ0Γ, των βμων χβφων λα)8α)ΐ>,^^^5Τ*0Α>- 
 ΟΙ. Kaff ωδ' άπ άλλης χβφος βστβρζβν μβγα; 
 
 ΑΓ. η γαρ πριν αύτορ l^iireur άπαιδία. ^ 
 
 ΟΙ . σύ ^ βμπολησας, η τβκών μ αύτω δίδω^; 
 
 ΑΓ. βνρων νατταίαις ίν }^ίθαίρώνος πτνχαΐς. '% 
 
 ΟΙ. ωδουπόρβις δβ ττρος τί τούσδβ τούς τόπους ; 
 
 ΑΓ. βντανθ" ορβΙοίς ποιμνίοίς βπβστάτουν. 
 
 ΟΙ. ποιμην γαρ ήσθα κάπ\ θητβία πλάνης ; 
 
 ' 5 ? 
 
 . ^■*'·· '*C. ·· ■ 
 
 -ί, · - 
 
 \ ■» t··-^ -Jf 
 
 ' s·' 
 
 1. '·■· ■ v??5: 
 
 
 tv - V 
 
 aitU- /I.';' 
 
 
 father equal to nobody ? It does not 
 comport with the general character 
 of CEdipus, that this should be said 
 contemptuously to the herdsman on 
 account of his mean condition, 
 though a passage in the CEdipus 
 Coloneus (v. 918.) might be pro¬ 
 duced to that effect. Gamerarius 
 explains : “ but how can it be, that 
 my father can be so a father, as to be 
 no father, i. e. to have no existence ? 
 CEdipus thus speaking, as supposing 
 Polybus to be his father.” So Don- 
 ner: Wie ist der Vater einem 
 
 gleich, der keiner ist ?” 
 
 1021. άντ\ τον {wherefore?). cf.infr. 
 
 1055· 
 
 Ib. rraiba μ ώνομάζβτο, VOcari sivit. 
 Herm. Suum filium me nominabat. 
 Sic formae mediae vim recte decla- 
 ravit Brunck. Dind. 
 
 1023. άπ άλλης χβιρος^ given by a 
 stranger s hand. 
 
 1025. ζμπάλησας. ScHOL. αγοράσα?. 
 Gave you me to him as a purchaser 
 or as a parent } 
 
 Ib. τ€κών. As the person to 
 whom this question is put had previ¬ 
 ously denied himself to be the father 
 of CEdipus, it is probable that a false 
 reading has here crept into the text. 
 The substitution of τυχών for τίκών 
 
 (cf. infr. 1039.) will put all right. 
 (On turning to Dindorf’s Annota¬ 
 tions, and the Acta Semin., I find 
 that I had been preceded by Bothe 
 and Foertsch in this obvious emen¬ 
 dation.) 
 
 1026. νατταΓο?, abounding in thick¬ 
 ets. infr. 1398. Κ€κρνμμίνη νάπη. 
 
 Ib. Κιθαφώνος πτυχαί. Eurip. 
 Suppl. 7 ^ 7 * rd(f)^bidovrai προςΚιθαι- 
 ρωνος πτνχαΐς. Bacch. 62. eh Kidai- 
 ρωνος πτνχάς | ίΚθών. also 796. 943. 
 1217. Herodot. VII. 141. κ€νθμων 
 re Κιθαιρωνος ζaθeo 7 o. Cf. Find. Pyth. 
 VI. 18. IX. 28. Nem. II. 33. 
 
 1027. προς riy for what purpose? 
 Cf. infr. 1144. 1174. sup. 766. 
 
 1029. eVt θητ€ία πλάνης, i. q. θη- 
 τevωv €πλανώ. El. 
 
 Ib. θητ€ία {θητ€νω, βης), wages for 
 services, which a man earns as a 
 ehs, (II. XXL 444. Od. XI. 488. 
 XVIII. 356. Hesiod. Op. 600.) un¬ 
 derstanding that word more parti¬ 
 cularly of a herdsman or hind. 
 
 Ib. πλάνης, a wanderer. It will 
 be remembered that the person here 
 addressed is a Corinthian by birth, 
 but who carries his flock for pasture 
 as far as the Bceotian Cithseron. 
 ScHOL. ; μίσθιος και eVi μισθω πλάνης. 
 That this mode of entrusting large 
 
138 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΑΓ. σον δ\ ώ τ4κνον^ σωτηρ γ€ τω τ6τ ev -χρονω. 1030 
 ΟΙ. τί S αλγο 9 ϊσχοντ ip κακοΐ? \αμβαν€ΐ9 
 ΑΓ. ΤΓοδων αν αρθρα μαρτυρήσβιβν τα σα. 
 
 ΟΙ. οίμοί, τί τουτ άρχαΐον ivveTreLS κακόν ; 
 
 ΑΓ. λι;ω σ typvTa διατόρου^ ττοδοίν άκμα^. 
 
 ΟΙ. δβινόν y ονβίδοί στταργανων ανΕίλομην. ιο35 
 
 ΑΓ. ωστ ώνομΑσθη^ €Κ Tvyrj? ταυτη^ 09 €l. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ 7 Γρο£ θβών^ ττροί. μητρο9^ η ττατρο^^ φρασον. 
 
 ΑΓ. ονκ οίδ*· ό δού^ δβ ταυτ Ιμου λωον φρονβΐ, 
 
 ΟΙ. η yap τταρ άλλου μ βλαββΫ, ουδ αυτός τυχών ; 
 
 flocks of cattle to a single person, 
 who stays abroad with them from 
 spring to autumn, is still continued 
 by Grecian proprietors, see Thudi- 
 chum’s Soph. I. 263. 
 
 1030. A courteous bow of the 
 head implies, “ my occupation was 
 of the kind to which you allude; 
 but humble as it was, it gave me the 
 means of being the saviour of such 
 a man as you” 
 
 Ib. (Tov ye, Libri. Ebn. MS. σου δε 
 Dind. σου re. Herm.W^und. 
 
 1032 . TTobSiv αρθρα τα σα, the joints 
 of your feet. 
 
 1034. ^ιατόρος {perforating.JEsch. 
 Prom. 76. Eum. 536), bidropos, per¬ 
 forated. Cf. Eurip. Phoen. 26. sq. 
 
 Ib. TToboiv άκμάς. Translate : both 
 feet. infr. 1243. apefitbe^lois άκμαΊς, 
 with both hands, άκμαί, properly, 
 extremities. (Jocasta starts, and then 
 listens with the most painful in¬ 
 terest.) 
 
 1035. beivop y opeibos στταργάρωρ 
 (^z=z σπάργαρα opeibovs TrXea. El.) Ein 
 schmahlich graunvoll Zeichen trug 
 ich hier davon. Donn. 
 
 Ib. σπάργαρορ (σπάργω'), swad¬ 
 dling-cloth. (Pind. Pyth. IV. 204. 
 Nem. I. 58. Fgmm. Sel. ap. Diss. 
 
 102. Eurip. Here. Γ. 1267. h. Horn. 
 Merc. 151. 237.) “ Inde quidquid 
 
 'de ilia infan tice cetate admonet, mo- 
 numenta, crepundia.” El. By these 
 toys or playthings, children exposed 
 or stolen by robbers were often, as 
 Wunder observes, recognized again. 
 On a different reading of this verse 
 in Eustathius, cf. Erf. and Herm. 
 (The bitter tone in which CEdipus 
 utters this will be easily conceived 
 by the reader.) 
 
 Ib. apaipe'iaOai med. secum auferre, 
 nancisci. Trach. 555. (δωροι/) δ — 
 παρα Νεσσου φθιρορτος €Κ φόρωρ apei- 
 
 λόμψ. Ε1. I Ι93· άρ€ΐλόμηρ - 
 
 αθΧιορ βάρος. 
 
 1036. Eur. Phoen. 27. oBep vvp 
 'Ελλά? ώρόμαζερ Olbinovp. 
 
 1037 · 'n'pbs μητρος η πατρός. The 
 Roman Scholiast applies the expres¬ 
 sion to a vehement desire on the 
 part of CEdipus to ascertain who 
 were his parents, and in this inter¬ 
 pretation he is defended with much 
 acuteness by Hermann. The glos- 
 sarist in Brunck understands, “was 
 it by my father or my mother that 
 my ancles were thus pierced ?” 
 
 1038. φρορβΐ, knows, as the con¬ 
 text evidently requires. Antig. 996. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΎΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 139 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΧΟ. 
 
 ΙΟ. 
 
 ονκ' άλλα. ποιμην άλλο? ΐκδίδωσί μοι. 
 τίί ουτοί ; rj κάτοισθα δηΧώσαι Χόγω ; 
 των Aatov δψτου ns ώνομαζίτο. 
 ή τον τυράννου τησδΐ yrjs πάλοα ττοτά ; 
 μάλιστα, τούτου τάvδpos ovtos ήν βοτηρ. 
 
 9 V » V τ <y » »Λ ' 
 
 η καστ ere ^ων οντο^, ωστ lOeLV €μ€ ; 
 νμ€Ϊ9 y άριστ eldeir αν οντηχωρωι. 
 
 eernv τΊς υμών των τταρεστώτων ττβλα^, 
 
 « 
 
 οστις κάτοιδβ τον βοτηρ ^ ον ivv€7ret, 
 
 ν>9»»> « 5/ * /i ' 
 
 €LT ovv €7Γ αγρών etre κανυαο βισίοων ; 
 
 σημηναθ', ώρ ό καφο 9 βνρησθαι τάδβ. 
 
 οιμαι μβν ovOev άλλον η τον βξ αγρών, 
 
 ον κάμάτβν€ 5 ^ ττρόσθβν άσώύν* άταρ 
 
 ηο αν ταο ονχ^ ηκιστ αν ιοκαστη λεγοι, 
 
 γύναί, vo€L9 €Κ€Ϊνον, OVTLV άρτιων 
 
 μολβΐν ίφί4μ€σθα, τ6ν θ ovtos Aeyet ; 
 
 TLS o OVTLV €Ln€ ; μηθ€ν evrpaTrrjs· τα Oe 
 
 1040 
 
 1045 
 
 1050 
 
 1055 
 
 φρόρ€ΐ βζβως αν νυν irrl ξνρον τύχης, 
 Phil. 810. σαφώς φρόνξι. 
 
 1041. 8 η\ωσαι. ωστ€ sub.cf.sup. 
 
 894 · 
 
 1042. των Ααΐον τις. one of the 
 servants of Laius. Cf. infr. 1117. 
 
 1048. evvenei, mentions, sup. 1033. 
 infr. 1150. 
 
 1050. ΐύρησθαι, should he inves¬ 
 tigated. 
 
 1053. * 1 οκάστη Χίγοι. She speak! 
 what, that figure, which has been 
 so long gazing on vacancy, and 
 in which the very functions of life 
 seem destroyed! But animation is 
 suspended, not extinct. An agi¬ 
 tated response—a few brief en¬ 
 treaties—a shriek of piercing horror 
 are yet to be extracted, and then 
 with her all is over;—but he, the 
 
 husband-son! alas ! his tale of woe, 
 utter irremediable woe, has yet to 
 come ! 
 
 1054. ovTiv = ov. Cf. infr. 1526. 
 Aj. 1300. Eurip. Hippol. 924. 
 
 1055. t6v. Cf. El. II. 202. 
 
 1036. τις δ’ OVTLV eiVe; This re¬ 
 sponse of Jocasta, awaking out of a 
 profound stupefaction, has been ex¬ 
 plained with a deep sense of its 
 poetic beauty by Hermann. Mat- 
 thise and Wunder give it the colder, 
 but perhaps more correct interpre¬ 
 tations of grammarians. Hermann 
 had been preceded in his sense of 
 the construction by Moses Mende- 
 lides. Script. Phil. II. 190. Cf. 
 iEschyl. S. c. T. 806. Donner: 
 Wen, sagst du, nannt' er ? Whom, 
 say’st thou, named he? 
 
140 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ρηθίντα βούλου μηδ( μίμνησθαι μάτην. 
 
 ΟΙ. ούκ αν γβνοίτο Tovff^ οπω9 iyco λαβών 
 σημαία τοίαντ ον φανώ τούμον γένος, 
 
 ΙΟ. μη ττρος θεών^ είττερ tl τον σαντον βίον ιοβο 
 
 κη8ει^ ματενσης Tovff' αλις νοσονσ εγώ. 
 
 ΟΙ. Θάρσεί. σν μεν γαρ ovS* αν εκ τρίτης εγώ 
 μητρος φανώ τρίδονλος^ εκφανεΐ κακή. 
 
 ΙΟ. ομχύς τηθον μοι, λίσσομαι' μη δρα τάδε. 
 
 ΟΙ. ούκ αν τΓίθοίμην μη ον ταδ* εκμαθεΐν σαφώς. 1065 
 
 ΙΟ. καΐ μην φρονούσα γ εν τα Χωστά σοί λέγω. 
 
 ΟΙ. τα λώστα τοίννν ταντά μ* άλγννεί τταλαι. 
 
 ΙΟ. ω δύσττοτμ, (ϊθβ μτρτοτΐ γνοίηί δς ei. 
 
 ΟΙ. α^εί τις ελθών δεύρο τον βοτηρα μοι ; 
 
 ταντην S εάτε ττλονσίω γαίρειν γενει. ιοηο 
 
 ΙΟ. Ιον Ιον, δύστηνε' τούτο γάρ σ εχω 
 
 μόνον Ίτροσειττεΐν^ άλλο δ* ονττοθ' ύστερον^ 
 
 ΧΟ. τί ττοτε βεβηκεν, ΟΙδΙττονς, νπ άγριας 
 
 1057· μάτην, for Η can answer no 
 purpose. ,s ' · 
 
 1059. φανώ, bring into light, του j 
 μον yevos, my birth and descent. 
 
 1060. (Imploring with agony.) 
 
 1061. αλί? νοσονσ €γώ. Antig. 
 547. άρκβσω θνησκουσ iyoi. Br. 
 
 1062. ούδ’ αν €Κ τρίτης. As αν = 
 eai^ is a long syllable, and not admis¬ 
 sible in tragic Greek (El. I. 129.), 
 Hermann proposes: ούδ’ av el V τρί¬ 
 της, comparing for the aphseresis 
 Eurip. Suppl. 521. ανω yap av peoi j 
 τά TTpaypaB* ούτως, el *7ηταξόμ€σθα 8 η. 
 Ellendt (I. no.) prefers ούδ’ iav τρί¬ 
 της, or ovbe y el τρίτης. “ De ούδ’ 
 av cf. Schsef. ad h. 1 . et de ambigua 
 particulae av, ubi pro eav ponitar, 
 mensuraeundem Schaefer, ind. Odyss. 
 Person, p. 157. Franck. Callin. p. 
 186.” Ebn. 
 
 1063. τρίδουλοί, a slave through 
 three generations. Elmsley refers to 
 τρ\ς νόθος, Eurip. Androm. 637. 
 where see Musgr. The words σν 
 and c’yo), in preceding verse, slightly 
 emphatic. v * 
 
 Ib. κακή, dishonoured. 
 
 1067. τα 'Κώστα ταντα. QSdipus, 
 after a manner not unusual to him, 
 retorts the expression used by Jo- 
 casta in the verse preceding. 
 
 1069. €Κθών. gl. ατΓβλ^ών. 
 
 1070. ταντην, emphatic. 
 
 Ib. πΚονσίω — yevei. The allusion 
 has been already explained, sup. 
 380. 487. 
 
 Ib. χαίρων. ScHOL. : τρνφάν και 
 evaβpύveσθaι. 
 
 1072. (Jocasta rushes in despera¬ 
 tion from the stage: a pause of 
 some length, before the choral troop 
 
ΟΙΔ1ΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 αζασα λύπψ η γυνή ; δβδοιχ οττω? 
 μη V της σίίύττης τησ8 άυαρρηζβί κακά, 
 ΟΙ. οποία χρίΐζ^ι ρηγνύτω' τούμου δ* βγω, 
 
 κβΐ σμικρόν βστι, σπβρμ' Ιδβΐυ βονλησομαι, 
 αΰτη δ’ ^ίσως, φρουβΐ γάρ ώς γυνή μέγα, 
 την δυσγβνβιαν την βμην αΙσγυνβται, 
 βγω S βμαυτον παϊδα της Ύύχης νβμων 
 της βυ διδούσης ούκ άτίμασθησομαί, 
 της γάρ πβφυκα μητρός' οΐ δβ συγγβνβΐς 
 
 141 
 
 ^075 
 
 ιο8ο 
 
 can recover from the effects of this 
 trying exhibition. For dramatic de¬ 
 partures, not unlike the present one 
 of Jocasta, see Antig. 1244. Trach. 
 
 814·) ^ ^ ^ 
 
 1074. αξασα, gl. όρμησασα. prce- 
 ceps abieris. El. whom see on the 
 different writings άΐσσω, ασσω. 
 
 Ib. SeSot;^* όπως μη .. . avapprj^ei 
 {erumpent), Elmsley compares Eu- 
 rip. Hippo!. 5^8. Β/δοιχ όπως pot μη 
 Χίαν φανϋ σοφή. Plat. SympOS. τ 93 5 a· 
 φόβος ονν eveariv, iav μη κόσμιοι ωμςν 
 προς τονς θ^ονς^ όπως μη και ανθις δια~ 
 σχισθησόμίθα. Dem. 130» 12 . έπειτα 
 όόδοικα όπως μη πάνβ* 0σα ου βονΧο- 
 μΐθα ποίΐΐν ημίν ανάγκη γ^νησ^ται. 
 Hermann, though himself reading 
 άναρρηζξΐ, jobserves that άναρρηξη, the 
 reading of several books, is not a 
 solecism. 
 
 1076. ρηγνύτω, in reference to 
 the word άναρρηξ^ι in preceding 
 verse, infr. I 280. τάδ* €Κ Βνοίν ΐρρωγ^ν 
 (κακά), break forth what will. 
 
 1077. ο·7Γ€ρ/χ’ IbeiVf gl. γόνος γνωναι, 
 
 Ib. βονΧησομαι pro βούλομαι. (Ed. 
 
 Col. 1289. Eur. Med. 261. 
 
 1078. Scribendum αυτή, ut recte 
 olim scripsit Herm. Cf. Antig. 484. 
 Bind. 
 
 Ib. ρόγα φρονίΐν. Aj. 1087. 11 20. 
 Ant. 479. 
 
 1080. παίδα της Τύχης. Erfurdt 
 
 compares Eurip. ap. Plut. de solert. 
 animat, p. 965. ό της Τύχης παΐς κλή¬ 
 ρος. Horat. Sat. II. 6. Luserat in 
 campo Fortunse films. Elmsley adds 
 Plut. de Romanorum Fortuna, p.318, 
 C. άντικρύς ούτος (L. Corn. Sylla) τη 
 τύχη μ€τά των πρά^(ων όαυτδν βισβττοιβι, 
 βοών κατά τον Οίδιπόδα τον 'Σοφοκλόους' 
 όγώ δ’ όμαυτον κ. τ. e. For the Pin¬ 
 daric Tyche, see 01 . XII. 2. Hymn, 
 fr. 12. (where see Boeckh). Fr. 
 Incert. XXXI. XXXII. LXXV. 
 LXXXII. (Heyne’s Ed.) As proof 
 that this goddess was much wor¬ 
 shipped at Thebes, cf. Pausan. IX. 
 
 16, I. 
 
 lb. νόμων, considering, regarding. 
 Aj. 1330. φίλοι/σ’ όγώ μόγιστον^Αρ- 
 γ^ίων νόμω. Ε 1 . 147 * — Νιόβα, σε δ’ 
 €γωγξ νόμω θΐόν. (Ed. C0I. 878. τάι/δ’ 
 άρ ουκ ότι νόμω πολιν. 
 
 Ιθ8ΐ. της ευ διδούσης. See on this 
 formula Pflugk ad Eur. Androm. 
 751. cf. (Ed. Col. 642. 
 
 1082. της (emphatic), gl. ταύτης. 
 So τω infr. 1102. On the article 
 thus used pronominally, see Matth. 
 §.286. 
 
 1082—3. συγγΐνύς μην^ς. qui me~ 
 cum fuerunt, i. e. vita mea menses, 
 vita mea cursus ac perpetuitas. 
 Herm. una nati et conjuncti. El. 
 Dindorf compares (Ed. Col. 7. ό 
 χρόνος ξυνών μάκρος. 
 
142 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 μην€ς μβ μικρόν και μβγαν διώρισαν. 
 
 τοιόσδβ δ* βκφύς ούκ αν ί^^λθοιμ €τι 
 
 7ΓΟΤ αλλθ9. ωστ€ μη ^μαθβΐν τούμον yeVos*. 1085 
 
 ΧΟ. €Ϊπ€ρ βγω μάντις βΙμΙ 
 
 1083· μικρόν και μ€γαν ^ιωρισαν. 
 
 gl. (ταξαν. I understand : deter¬ 
 mined my transitions from smallness 
 to greatness, as well in person as in 
 fortune. Ellendt, objecting to the 
 gloss, says, “ διώρισαν, gl. era^av. 
 Melius βτΓοίησαν ; in διά inest dis- 
 criminis significatio inter pristinum 
 et praesentem statum rerum suarum 
 intercedentis.” 
 
 1084—5. β^ίλθοιμ - άλλθ5. The 
 
 commentators, with the exception of 
 Ellendt and Wunder, rather shrink 
 from this difficult passage. Ellendt, 
 in his fifth sense of the verb e^ep- 
 χ€σβαι, contents himself with saying, 
 “ ab event'd suspenditur mutationis in 
 aham formam ratio.” Wunder, sup¬ 
 posing a grammatical pregnancy in 
 the words ούκ αν — aXKos, translates ; 
 “ ejusmodi auiem matre quum natus 
 slm, nunquam alius ego evadam, 
 quam qualis fui, i. e. nunquam non 
 magnus ero, nec is evadam, i. e. nec 
 committam, ut non investigarem genus 
 meum” It need not be observed, 
 that the words in Roman letter are 
 at variance with previous observa¬ 
 tions of CEdipus, who evidently sus¬ 
 pects that his birth will prove but 
 mean. What then is the language of. 
 this resolute man ? Whether we con¬ 
 sider άλλος as a word of itself im¬ 
 plying meanness, (cf. Diss. ad Find. 
 Nem. IV. 64.) or, as here, equiva¬ 
 lent to αΧλος poy, άλλος άντ ipov, his 
 general reasoning appears to be as 
 follows. I shall not come out of 
 this investigation with my origin so 
 mean, so utterly changed from my 
 former self, as that I should shrink 
 from it. Mine has been a chequered 
 life. I have been in adversity and in 
 
 prosperity: I have been small and 
 great: let this investigation end as 
 it may, I shall but be what I have 
 been before; and therefore I am 
 resolved to go through with it.” In 
 some such sense both Solger and 
 Donner, I think, understand the pas¬ 
 sage, the former translating αΧλος by 
 ‘ entartet,’ degenerate; the latter 
 rendering €^€λθοιμ άλλος by werd* 
 abarten, i. e. will degenerate. On 
 the word (ξίρχΐσθαι, cf. El. 687. 
 1509. and observe the Scholiast on 
 the last passage. 
 
 Ib. On ποτέ as the commence¬ 
 ment of a verse, see Hermann ad 
 Aj.965. 
 
 1086. If that wild shriek of horror 
 (sup. 1071.) is ringing in the reader’s 
 ears, as it doubtless did in those of 
 the poet’s audience, he will not won¬ 
 der at the rehef furnished, however 
 slender the occasion for it, by the 
 following little chorus:—joyous, jubi¬ 
 lant—telling of early and festive 
 loves—bringing before us all the 
 younger divinities of heaven—the 
 pasture-wandering Loxias, the fro- 
 licksome Hermes,—he to whom on 
 mountain-tops was known “ each 
 lane, and every alley green,” and he 
 “ that first from out the purple 
 grape. Crush’d the sweet poison of 
 mis-used wine.” In diction, in 
 allusion, in myths and lore, in the 
 glowing warmth with which it pro¬ 
 poses to celebrate the birth-place of 
 CEdipus, and it may be even in the 
 saltatory movements, it is a truly 
 Pindaric ode. As such we shall be 
 more than usually profuse in draw¬ 
 ing illustrations from that noble 
 source. The most conspicuous me- 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 143 
 
 κα\ κατα γνώμην 
 ου τον^ΟΧυμτΓον άττβίρων, 
 ώ Κ,ίθαφών, ούκ βσβί 
 τάν αυρών πανσέληνον^ 
 
 trical feature in the ode is the use 
 of epitrites, with a cretic added 
 (v. 1087. 1089.), or an iambic dipo¬ 
 dia preceding (1090.); the rehef 
 being in dactylic movements (1088. 
 T091.) 
 
 Ib. etTrep e. p. e. It has been be¬ 
 fore observed, that Sophocles is apt 
 to impart a sort of prophetic lore to 
 his Chorus. Hence in the Electra 
 we find language precisely similar 
 to the present: (472.) el μη *γω ττα- 
 ράφρωρ pAvTis ίφνρ | καί γνώμας Xei- 
 πομ 4 να σοφάς κ. τ. e. Cf. QEd. Col. 
 1080. 1097. &c. &c. (coll. Reisig’s 
 Comm. Crit. in GEd. Col. p. 315·) 
 Milton, to whose lofty mind all the 
 language of the Greek stage was fa¬ 
 miliar, speaks the very language of 
 Sophocles: “ If there be aught of 
 presage in the mind, | This day will 
 be remarkable,” &c. Sams. Ag. 1387. 
 See also iEsch. S. c. T. 808. 
 
 1089. Κιθαφώρ. Whatever the 
 hand of genius has touched becomes 
 invested with the deepest interest to 
 minds of “ better clay.” To those 
 of this class who may wish to know 
 more of this wild wood, “ its 
 dingles and its dusky dells. And 
 every bosky bourn from side to 
 side,” the following references, for 
 to such our limits confine us, may be 
 of use. Find. Pyth. I. i^o. .^sch. 
 Ag. 289. Eurip. Phoen. 24. 815. 
 1621. Bacch. 661. 750. Herodot. 
 VII. 141. Pausan. I. 38, 8. IX. 2,4. 
 
 1090 
 
 Apollod. III. 4, 4. Pliny IV. 12. 
 
 1090. παρσβληρορ. Whatever re¬ 
 ligious or joyous festivities “ a full 
 moon” might bring before the minds 
 of others, the one here predominant 
 in the mind of Sophocles was doubt¬ 
 less that full moon which Hercules, 
 when instituting Olympic rites and 
 games, had fixed upon as the one 
 which should regulate their future 
 celebration; the Mger^ and Time 
 standing by, the first to ratify their 
 fate by an immutable decree, the 
 second to preserve and hand down 
 to posterity undoubted records of 
 whatever concerned those illustrious 
 festivals. (Find. Ol. HI. 35 sq. X. 
 65 sq.) Leaving the combatants 
 to practise under a solstitial sun, 
 and amid countless spectators, their 
 various exercises of skill and strength, 
 the placid beams of the full moon 
 saw the mighty host gathered into 
 the bosom of the plain adjoining 
 the Altis, some to lead the pro¬ 
 cessional pomp to Zeus for the day’s 
 triumph (Diss. ad 01 . 9.), some to 
 celebrate with dance and ^ song, and 
 amid magnificent ^ banquets, their 
 national victor (Ol.X. 90 sq.); others 
 to carouse, and hope that the next 
 day’s labours would be more pro¬ 
 pitious to their favourite candi¬ 
 date than those of the present had 
 been. (Wunder : avpiop es παρσ€- 
 \ηρορ ) . 
 
 1091. ττατριώτης {πάτριος), fellow- 
 
 i If Pindar or some other lyric bard could not furnish a short one on the spur of the 
 moment (a more elaborate one being reserved for the victor’s return home, or for future 
 anniversaries of the event), the hymn of Archilochus to the Hercules Callinicus seems to 
 have been sung. (01. IX. in init.) 
 
 01. X. 93 . aelSero Se τταν repeuos τ^ρπνοάσι θαλίαις \ rhp iyK0uiop άμφί τρόττορ. Also 
 V. 56 . . ' 
 
144 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 μη ού σ€ γβ και ττατριώταν Olbhrov 
 και τροφον και μητψ av^eiv^ 
 
 καΐ ^(ορβύβσθαι ττροί ημών, ίττίηρα φβροντα τοΪ9 
 €μοΐ9 τυράννοΐ9· 
 
 countryman, one who lives in the 
 same country, compatriot. Passow 
 observes, that the word was origi¬ 
 nally used only of slaves, animals, 
 as for instance, linvoi πατριώται ; hence 
 metaphorically used of things with¬ 
 out life, as in its present apphcation 
 to Mount Cithseron. I do not re¬ 
 member to have met with the word 
 more than once, Plat.VL Leg. 777 »^· 
 ττατριώτας άΧΚηλων eivai. Plutarch, 
 according to Passow, speaks of the 
 Theban Bacchus as πατριώτης Oeos. 
 
 1091-2. Elmsley proposes the 
 following order and meaning : μη ού 
 και τροφον και μητέρα (Corinthum sc.et 
 Thebas) ανξ^ιν ae (ώ? ovra) πατριώταν 
 018 ίπου. How much better the Scho¬ 
 liast ! ovK εση els την avpiov aneipaTOS 
 Tov ημάς av^eiv ae, ώς τροφον και μη- 
 Tepa τον Οιδίττοδοί, you shall have 
 complete experience of our celebrating 
 you as the compatriot, nurse and 
 mother of CEdipus. 
 
 Ib. μη ον, quin, (metre : dact. et 
 cret.) 
 
 1092. τροφόν. Pind. Pyth. II. 5· 
 άνΒρών ίππων Τ€ . . τροφοί. (Syra- 
 cusae, sc.) 01 . V. 7. πό\ιν Χαοτρόφον. 
 
 Ib. μητόρα. Pind. 01. IX. 31· 
 κρών ματ€ρ ayXaobevbpov (Opuntium 
 SC.) Isth. I. I. MaTep epa χρνσασπι 
 Θήβα. Add Pyth. VIIL 140. Nem. 
 III. I. Soph. Phil. 326. .lEsch. 
 Sept. c. T. 581. 
 
 Ib. av^eiv. ScHOL. : peyaKvveiv, 
 Xeyeiv, to extol, to magnify. This is 
 a favourite word of the Theban bard, 
 from the noble ode which in-born 
 genius first dictated to him at the 
 age of twenty (Pyth. X.), and where 
 it is twice found, down no doubt to 
 that hymn to Proserpine, with which 
 
 he closed his glorious career. I 
 select two or three examples where 
 the use of this word by his great 
 master comes nearest to the sense 
 in which his illustrious pupil employs 
 it. 01. V. 7. ταν σαν πόΧιν ανξων, 
 Καμάρινα, Χαοτρόφον. Pyth. VIII. 52. 
 αν^ων πάτραν Μι8νΧι8άν. Isth. VII. 
 40—2. ιστω — αστών yeveq μeyιστov 
 κΧόος ανξων. Pyth. IV. 49 ^· 
 και ΜοΤσα δι* ayyeXias όρθάς. Cf. Nem. 
 II. 2 2. Isth. IV. 107. Hesiod Op. 
 6. Eurip. Iph. Aul. 562. Markl. ad 
 Eur. Suppl. 323. and Tafel. (To 
 those acquainted with the Pindaric 
 writings it is needless to observe, 
 that next to the celebration of the 
 triumphant victor himself, the ex¬ 
 tolling of the city or town which 
 gave him birth or nutriment) was 
 the poet’s second object. See, for 
 instance, the transition made (01. 
 XHI. 67-72.) from praises of the 
 Corinthian Xenophon and his family, 
 to the praises of Corinth itself; and 
 cf. Dissen’s Comment, pp. 93. 109. 
 125-6-7. 142. 357. 561. &c. &c.) 
 The Electra of Sophocles will fur¬ 
 nish an opportunity of returning to 
 this subject.) 
 
 1093. χορ€ν€σθαι {to be celebrated, 
 viz. by a dance) προς ημών (Cf. Pind. 
 Isthm. I. 8.). On this sense of the 
 verb xopeveiv cf. nos. ad Ran. p. 77 * 
 where various examples are given. 
 ScHOL. νμνΛσθαι, τιμασθαι, 
 
 Ib. ίπίηρα, agreeable; an Ho¬ 
 meric word. II. I. 572. 578· Butt- 
 mann (Lexil. 337 sq.) proposes to 
 discard the word, and substitute €πι 
 ήρα, but,” says Passow, “ his rea¬ 
 sons for this are not convincing.” 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 145 
 
 Ιηί€ Φοίββ, σο\ δβ ταυτ άρ^στ €??;. 
 
 τις σ€) T€Kuou, τις σ’ βτικτβ dvr. 1098 
 
 τώι/ μακραίωνων αρα, 
 
 Παί'δ? ορβσσιβάταο ιιοο 
 
 ττροσπβλασθβΐσ, η σί ye 
 
 τις θυγάτηρ, Αοζίον ; τω 
 
 γαρ πλάκ€ς άγρόνομοί ττασαι φίλαι' 
 
 Ib. τνράννοις, plur. for sing. CEdi- 
 pus being exclusively meant. Pindar 
 uses the word rvpavvos, I believe, but 
 once (Pyth. III. 15 i.)» there as 
 here, in reference to political, not 
 moral qualification. (Metre: dim. 
 epitr. penth. dact. dim. iamb, cat.) 
 
 1097. apearos (pleasing) άντι του 
 άρβσκων Gr. Bekk. An. p. 80, 20. 
 An tig. 499 * Χόγων j 
 
 άρβστον ovdeu. 
 
 Ib. ravr, i. e. the discovery of the 
 parentage of Qidipus. (Metre : lo- 
 gaoed. with anac. and trochees.) 
 
 1098 sq. The construction has 
 been excellently explained by Her¬ 
 mann. rls βνγάτηρ των μακραίωνων 
 (what daughter of the gods), προ- 
 σπίΚασθ^ίσα TLavbs η Αοξίον (ap¬ 
 proached for pmγoses of love by Pan 
 or by / 4 pollo) Ζτικτίν ae (became your 
 mother). 
 
 1099. μακραίων (μάκρος, αΙων), 
 long-lived. Applied to gods. Antig. 
 987. Motpat μακραίωνες. Cf. Creuz. 
 Symb. II. 267. .«^sch. S. c. T. 520. 
 
 ^αροβίοισι θεοΐσιν. 
 
 I TOO. For the Pindaric Pan, see 
 Pyth. III. 139. Parthen. Fg. 2. 
 (Dissen p. 229.) Fgmm. Incert. 
 Heyne’s edit. p. 50. 159. See also 
 Thudichum, p. 261. 
 
 Ib. ορεσσιβάτης = ορεσιβάτης 
 poet, for ορειβάτης (ορος, βαίνω). 
 “ Scribendum ορεσσιβάταο cum Bo- 
 thio, ejecto quod Brunckius intulit 
 που.” Dind. 
 
 1101. προσπελάζω (πελάζω.) The 
 
 simple verb is more frequently found 
 in this sense than the compound, 
 .^sch. Prom. 9 ^ 7 · πλαθείην ya- 
 
 μ€τα τιν\ των εξ ovpavov. (where see 
 Blomf.) Pind. Nem. X. 150. τόν^ε 
 δ επειτα πόσις | σπέρμα θνατον ματρί 
 τεα πελάσαις [ στάξεν ηρως. Soph. 
 Phil. 677· τον πελάταν λεκτρων ποτέ 
 του Διός 'ΐξίονα. Trach. 17. 
 
 1 ΙΟΤ-2. Dindorf, adverting to 
 the remarkable collocation of the 
 words in these two verses, observes, 
 that the arrangement ought to have 
 been, τις σ’ ετικτε των μακραίωνων άρα 
 θυγάτηρ, ΤΙανος ορεσσιβάταο προσπε- 
 λασθύσ η Αοξίου ; This however be¬ 
 ing prevented by the metre, the 
 pronoun τις, he says, is added to 
 the noun θυγάτηρ, being placed low 
 in the sentence, in order to prevent 
 ambiguity. The repetition of the 
 pronoun σε hei llustrates by a pas¬ 
 sage in the Odyssey,VIII. 488. Αημό- 
 
 δοκ, (ξοχα δη σε βροτων αΙνίζομ απάν¬ 
 των' I η σε γε Μουσ’ εδίδαξε, Αιος παις, 
 ή σε Απόλλων, and by a passage 
 in the Philoctetes of Soph, τ 118. 
 πότμος πότμος σε δαιμόνων τάδ', ουδέ 
 σε ye δόλος | εσχ υπό χειρός εμείς. 
 
 1102. θυγάτηρ. Cf. Diss. Comment, 
 in Pind. 377. Thudichum’s Soph. I. 
 260-f. 
 
 Ib. Αοξίου. The reader of 
 Pindar need not be reminded how 
 the great family of the lamidie had 
 their origin ( 01 . VI.), and the health- 
 god Aisculapius his birth. (Pyth. 
 III.) See also the 9th Pythian 
 
 L 
 
146 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 uff b Υ^υλλάνας ανάσσων^ 
 
 €ΪΘ^ ο Βακχβΐοζ θβοί ναίων hr άκρων ορβων, βνρημα 
 δβ^ατ €Κ του 
 
 Ι^νμφάν ^Έίλικωνίδων^ cus ττλβΐστα σνμτταίζ^ί, 
 
 ΟΙ. el γρη τι κάμΐ^ μη ζυναΧΧαζαντα ττω, mo 
 
 ττρβσβν, σταθμασθαί^ τον βοτηρ οράν δοκώ^ 
 
 Ode, where the loves of Gyrene and 
 Apollo are detailed with such ex¬ 
 quisite beauty and tact. 
 
 1102—3. τω yap, Apollini sc. On 
 the Apollo Nomius, see Dissen’s 
 Comment. 314-15. H. h. in Apoll. 
 Del. 44. 
 
 1103. ττΚαζ, locus planus. El. ai 
 άνατάσας των ορών. ScHOL. Find. 
 Pyth. I. 45. βαθίϊαν ττόντον πλάκα. 
 
 Ib. άγρόνομοι. Dissen ad Find. 
 Nem. IX. 31. “ Ut άγρόνομον signi- 
 ficat quod in agris est, agreste, v. c. 
 πλάκ€ί άypόvoμoι, ανλαι aypovoμoι, SIC 
 ά(ττννομα qu(B in ufhc sunt, uvbica. 
 
 1105. 6 Κνλλάνας ανάσσων, 1. e. 
 Hermes. For the Pindaric Hermes 
 of Cyllene, consult 01 . VI. 130 sq. 
 As a deoff νόμιος, see Aj. 695. Thu- 
 dichum I. 262. Kuinoel compares 
 Virg. ^n. VIII. 138. A more im¬ 
 portant view, as connected with 
 our present subject, is to find in 
 what estimation Hermes was held 
 in the island of Thera (Dissen’s 
 Comment. 220. 236.), that island 
 having originally been a Cadmean 
 settlement. 
 
 1106. 'Βακχΰος Oeos (JBucchus ipse 
 El.) h. Horn. XVIII. 46. Βακχείος 
 ά,ιόννσος. Arist. Thes. 988. Βάκχ€ΐ€ 
 δ^σποτ’. Herodot. IV. 79. επ^θύ- 
 μησε /λιονύσω ΒακχεΙω τελεσθηναι. 
 
 Elmsley (CEd. Col. 1494) compares 
 
 Τ1οσει8ανίω θεω. 
 
 iioy. 8εξατο, expression applica¬ 
 ble to a child, abandoned by the 
 mother. El. 
 
 1109. Νυ/χφαί'. On the subject 
 
 of Nymphs generally, see Hesiod 
 Theogon. 130 sq. Thudichum I. 260. 
 
 Ib. *ΈλικωνίΒων. Piho.. Isthm. 
 VIII. 125. ‘Κλίκώνιαι παρθένοι. Isth. 
 II. 49. ον yap πάyos, ον8ε προσαντης 
 ά κελευθος yίyvετaι, | fi ns ένδοξων 
 is άνδρών ayoi Tipas Βλικωνιαδων (h. e. 
 verses are easily composed, when 
 illustrious men are their subject, 
 when the poet has to lead the 
 praises of the Muses into the houses 
 of distinguished men). Cf. Hes. Op. 
 656. Theog. I. &c. Eurip. Here. F. 
 791. On Helicon cf. Pausan. IX. 
 12.28.29. Sicklerp. 50,1. Creuzer 
 II. 386. (a myth of some impor¬ 
 tance when considering how a band 
 of Muses came to be established in 
 Helicon.) 
 
 Ib. σνμπαίζει. Dindorf quotes 
 Anacreon ap. Dion. Chrys. I. 94. 
 ωναξ (^Αενννσε), ώ δaμάληs''Έpωs j και 
 ννμφαι κvavώπιδεs | πορφνρεη τ Αφρο¬ 
 δίτη I σνμπαίζονσιν, επιστρεφεαι δ \ 
 νφηλών κορνφά$ όρεων. and the same 
 poet in Athen. XIII. 599, c. σφαίρη 
 
 δ' ηντε με πορφνρεη | βάΚλων χρνσο- 
 κόμηs *'Έιpωs | νηνι ποικιλοσαμβαΧω | 
 σνμπαίζειν προκαλείται. 
 
 II ΙΟ. (The herdsman, accompa¬ 
 nied by some of (Edipus’s servants, 
 here comes upon the stage.) 
 
 Ib. μη ξνναλλάξαντα, having never 
 met with him, come into intercourse 
 with him. Cf. infr. 1130 andHisch. 
 S. c. Th. 594. (deep sensation). 
 
 11 1 I. Whether πρεσβν or πpεσβειs 
 is the right reading, it is obvious 
 that the Chorus are addressed by 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 147 
 
 ovirep ττάλαι ζητουμ^ν. re γάρ μακρώ 
 yVP^ ζνι^άδβί τωδ€ τάνδρϊ σνμμβτρο^’ 
 αλλω9 τ€ T0V9 αγοντα^ ωσπβρ οίκβτα^ 
 
 €γνωκ Ιμαντου' rfj δ' Ιτηστημρ σύ μου 
 7Γρονχοί9 τάχ αν ττον, τον βοτηρ Ιδων ττάρο^^ 
 ΧΟ. βγνωκα γαρ, σάφ* ϊσθί, Ααΐου γάρ ην 
 eiTrep TLS άλλος' πιατος ώς νομβνς άνηρ. 
 
 ΟΙ. σβ ττρώτ’ €ρωτώ, τον Κορίνθιον ζβνον^ 
 
 ή τόνδ€ φράζβις j ΑΓ. τούτον, ovirep άσορας, 
 οτ. ουτος συ, ττρέσβυ, δενρό μοί φώνβί βλβπων 
 οσ αν σ βρωτώ. Ααΐου ποτ ήσθα σύ ; 
 
 ΘΕΡΑΠΩΝ. 
 
 ή δούλος, ούκ ώνητος, άλλ* οίκοί τραφβίς, 
 
 ΟΙ. ί'ργον μερίμνων ποΐον η βίον τίνα j 
 
 ιΐ'5 
 
 I I 20 
 
 CEdipus. Dindorf and EUendt prg- 
 ^ the term : Brunck refer- 
 
 ling tpi the pronoun σύ'Ι^ν. ιτι ς), 
 seems more correct in adopting the 
 former. Hermann remarks that it is 
 usual to address the Chorus at the 
 beginning of a new scene, πρ^σβυ 
 Ebn. cum MSS. 
 
 III2-I3. “ Ordo est: τω μακρω 
 γήρα ξυνά^ίΐ κα\ ξνμμβτρός eariv άν8ρ\ 
 ‘r£§e,i e. the messenger from Corinth." 
 Br. Why not rather; the man of 
 whom we were talking ? 
 
 Ib. iv superfluous. Cf. sup. 821. 
 Antig. 962. 1003. Phil. u6o. 
 
 111 3 . ^vvadei σύμμετρος, corre¬ 
 sponds exactly. Cf. sup. 192. 
 
 1114. αΧΧως re, moreover. Matth. 
 
 §· 597 · 
 
 1115. επιστήμη, actual knowledge^ 
 seems here opposed to <ζτα^άσ^αί, 
 or conjectural knowledge: sup. v. 
 nil. 
 
 1116. που, forte. See examples in 
 EUendt II. 623. 
 
 1117. εγνωκα yap. Wunder ob¬ 
 
 serves that yap has reference to the 
 supposed words προνχοιμ αν σον τη 
 επιστήμη. 
 
 I I 1 8 . ώί νομεύς άνηρ (πιστός), 
 as trust-worthy, as a man in his 
 condition of life can he trust-worthy. 
 Cf. sup. 763. For construction, cf. 
 Find. Pyth. I. 134. άyητηp άνηρ. l'] 6 . 
 κνβερνάτας άνηρ. ΟΙ. VI. ^O. άνδρι 
 δέσποτα. Isth. VI. 105. άνδράσιν 
 άθληταΊσιν, &C. 
 
 II21. δεύρο βλεπων. Trach. 402. 
 ουτος, βλεφΙ ωδε. 
 
 1123· η for ην. See an ample 
 dissertation on this subject in Her¬ 
 mann’s pref. to his (Ed. Tyr. 
 
 II 24. μεριμνάν, hetreihen, to carry 
 on. Donn. strictly, to carry on 
 anxiously. The sense and construc¬ 
 tion are best illustrated from the 
 Sacred Writings, i Cor. VII. 32. 
 
 6 Ινγαμος μεριμνά τα τον Κυρίου. 33 · ° 
 δε yaμησaς μεριμνά τα του κόσμον. 
 
 Matthew VI. 34· V Ύ^Ψ οΰριον μεριμ- 
 νησει τα εαυτής. cf. νν. 2 ζ. 2 *]. 28. 
 31. cf. infr. 1460. 
 
 L 2 
 
148 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΘΕ. ΤΓοίμναις τά ττλ^ΐστα τον βίου ζυν€ίΤΓομην. 1125 
 
 ΟΙ. χώροί9 μάλιστα ττροί τίσι ξνρανλος ων ; 
 
 ΘΕ. μβν ί^ιθαιρων^ rjv δβ ττροσχωρο^ tottos*. 
 
 ΟΙ. τον άνδρα tovS ούν οίσθα ττ)δ€ ττου μαθων ; 
 
 ΘΕ. τι χρήμα δρώντα ; ττοΐον ανδρα και Aeyety ; 
 
 ΟΙ. TovS ος ττάρβστιν, η ζνναλλαζας τί ττω ; *13° 
 
 ΘΕ. ουχ ωστ€ γ άττειν εν τάχει μνημη^ υττο. 
 
 ΑΓ. κουδεν γε θαύμα, δεσποτ\ άλλ’ εγω ( ^φώς 
 άγνωτ άναμνησω νιν. εύ γάρ οιδ οτι 
 κάτοιδεν, ημοί τον Ι^ιθαιρώνο^ τοττον 
 6 μεν διπλοΐσί' ττοιμνίοις, εγω S ενί ιΐ35 
 
 ετνλησίαζον τωδε τάνδρΙ τρ^ δλονί 
 εξ ηρο 9 εΐ 9 άρκτονρον εκμηνονς χρόνους' 
 
 Ib. epyov, more commonly, rustic wealth of the son of Laius is signi- 
 occupation. In Pindar not unfre- fied by the word μήλων. 
 quentlv applied to the exertions 113^. € 7 Γλησίαζον {versahar una 
 used in the sacred games. Ol. XIII.j El.) τώδβ ravbpi. On the construe 
 r-A ' ‘ -Γ ^ consult Wunder in loc. and ii 
 
 54. 
 
 V 
 
 τα 
 
 1125. τά ττλίίστα του βίου, die 
 meiste Zeit,for the most time. Donn. 
 
 1126. ξύνανλος (αυλή) de pastore 
 certa loca pascendi causa insidente. 
 El. 1427. ττρόσχωρος, neighbouring, 
 adjoining. 
 
 1128. τ^δε ττου μαθών. ScHOL. 
 αυτί του, εκεί μαθων, having made 
 acquaintance with him there. 
 
 1130. ξυναλλά^ας. Ebner’s MS. 
 Lc. ξνναλλάζας τί πω ; to which 
 the learned writer adds : “ the par¬ 
 ticiple, and not so harshly as 
 Bothe imagines, refers to μαθών ; 
 the indicative, however, does not 
 want for recommendations.” 
 
 113 I, ουχ (οΓδα) . 
 
 Ib. μνημης νπο,βτοηι recollection. 
 
 1133. άγνώτα gl. €πΐλαθόμ€νον. 
 
 1133’. διπλοΐσι ποιμνίοις. ScHOL. 
 δυο αγε'λαί?. It is observable that 
 in Hesiod (Op. 162.) the great 
 
 ^ion consult Wunder in loc. and in 
 his CEd. Col. p. 144. See also 
 Bernhardy p. 460. 
 
 1136^,7. τρύς ολους Ικμηνονς χρό¬ 
 νους, three entire periods of six 
 months each. Thudichum accordingly 
 translates; drei vollige Sechsmon- 
 denzeiten. Donner; sechs voile 
 Mondesfristen. 
 
 Ib. ε^ ηρος eh άρκτου pov. “ Averis 
 initio, quo tempore greges in illis 
 tends τά σταθμά relinquebant, ad 
 ortum Arcturi sex menses erant.” 
 ScH^F. On the subject of the 
 constellation of Arcturus, see some 
 interesting accounts by Goettling 
 Hes. p. 167. Thudichum I. 264. 
 Pliny fixes the rising of Arcturus 
 at eleven days before the autumnal 
 equinox. 
 
 Ib. €κμηνος, (ε^, μ^ν). Polyb. IV. 
 367. Στρατοκλεου? πρυταν€υοντος την 
 heVTepav 'όκμηνον. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΎΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 149 
 
 ΘΕ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΘΕ. 
 
 ΑΓ. 
 
 ΘΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΘΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΘΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΘΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 '' S'* ■’^5' >/»»ν 
 
 χ€ίμωρί, ό ηόη ταμα τ €L9 €παυλ βγω 
 ουτάς τ βΐ? τα Ααΐου σταθμά. 
 
 Χβγω TL τούτων, η ού λβγω τΓβττραγμβρον; 
 λβγβί^ άληθη, καίττβρ βκ μακρον χρόνον, 
 φβρ βΐπβ νυν, τότ οίσθα τταΐΒά μοί τινα 
 ω^ βμαντω θρβμμα θρβ'φαίμην βγω ; 
 
 TL Ο βστί Trpos TL τούτο TOwro9 ιστορβί^ ; 
 
 00 βστιν, ω ταν, Kewos os* τοτ ήν νβο^. 
 ονκ eh ολβθρον ; ού σιώπησαν eaei ; 
 α, μη κοΑαζβ, ττρβσρν, τονό , βττβι τα σα 
 δβΐταί κολαστον μάλλον η τα τονδ' βπη. 
 τί δ\ ώ φβρίστβ δβστΓΟτών, αμαρτάνω ; 
 ούκ βννβπων τον τταΐδ' ον οντο9 Ιστορβϊ. 
 λβγβί γάρ βΙδω 5 ^ ούδβν, άλλ’ άλλως^ ττονβΐ. 
 σύ TT/Jos* χάριν μβν ούκ βρβΪ9, κλαίων S ipeh. 
 μη δητα Trpos* θβών τον γβροντά μ* αΙκίση. 
 ούχ ώs* τάχος τις τονδ^ άποστρβψβί χβρας ; 
 
 1140 
 
 ί MS 
 
 1150 
 
 1138—9. €παυΧα and σταθμά differ 
 little from each other; both may be 
 translated stalls or folds. 
 
 1140. λ^γω TL — 7Γ€πραγμ€νον, estne 
 aliquid horum, qu^ dico, factum., an 
 non factum P Wund. 
 
 1 143. θρίμμα. Phil. 243. τον ye- 
 povTos θρέμμα Ανκομη^ονς. Cf. Valck. 
 Diatr. p. 249. 
 
 1144. Trpos τί—πρυς 6 tl. Dind. 
 compares El. 316. ως νΰν άττόντος 
 Ιστορεί τί σοι φίΧον. Iiy 6 . τί δ’ εσχες 
 άλγος προς τί τοντ είπων κνρεις ; 
 Trach. 339 · εστϊ του με τηνδ* 
 
 εφίστασαι βάσιν ; 
 
 Ib. τούτο τονπος, this thing, (on 
 which the conversation turns). Cf. 
 Br. and Matth. ad Eur. Or. i. 
 
 Ib. Ιστορείς. ScHOL. έρωτας, ζητείς. 
 
 1146. ούκ εις ολέθρου sc. άποφθερεΐ 
 vel άπει ; cf. sup. 430. Brunck com¬ 
 
 pares Arist. Nub. 789. Eq. 829. ούκ 
 εις κόρακας άποφθερεΐ; (The herdsman 
 speaks aside to the Corinthian.) 
 
 1147. κόλαζε IV, to chastise (with 
 words). Aj. 1160. Xoyots κολάζειν. 
 I 107 . τά σεμν επη κόλαζ’ εκείνους, (gl. 
 κολάζων εκείνους λ eye τα σεμνά επη). 
 
 1 148. κολαστον. Soph. Proc. fr. 
 478. (Dind.) κολασταί κάπιτιμηται κα¬ 
 κών. 
 
 1150. “By not speaking of the 
 infant of whom this man inquires.” 
 
 1151. άλλως πονεΐ, muht umsonst 
 sich ab, fatigues himself to no pur¬ 
 pose. Donn. 
 
 IJ52. προς χάριν, leniter et amice 
 rogatus. El. 
 
 1153. Aj. III. μη ^ητα τον δύσ¬ 
 τηνον ώδε γ' αΙκίση. 
 
 ΙΙ54· άποστρεφεις χέρας, tie his 
 hands behind his back : preparatory 
 
 ^ 3 
 
150 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ) 
 
 ΘΕ. δύστηνος, άντ\ του ; τί ΤΓροσγρηζων μαθβΐν ; 
 Ρ1 . τον τταΐδ* ί'δωκας τωδ’ ον οντος Ιστορεί ; 
 
 ΘΕ. βδωκ, oXkaOai S ωφβλον τηδ' ημ4ρα, 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ* €ΐς τόδ’ ηζας μη λ4γων ye τοϋνδικον, 
 ΘΕ. ΤΓολλω ye μάλλον, ην φρασω, διολλυμαι. 
 
 ΟΙ. άνηρ οδ\ ως €olk€v, βΙς τριβάς eAa. 
 
 ΘΕ. ού δητ €γωγ' άλλ* elirov ώς δοίην πάλαι, 
 ΟΙ. πόθβν λαβών ; οίκβΐον, η άλλον τίνος ; 
 ΘΕ. €μον μβν ουκ βγωγ, βδβζάμην δά τον. 
 
 ΟΙ. τίνος πολιτών τώνδβ κάκ ποιας στέγης ; 
 
 ΘΕ. μη προς θεών, μη, δεσποθ", ιστορεί πλέον. 
 ΟΙ. δλωλας, εϊ σε ταντ ερησομαι πάλιν. 
 
 ΘΕ. των Ααΐον τοίνυν τις ην γεννημάτων. 
 
 ΟΙ. ή δούλος, η κείνου τις εγγενής γεγώς ; 
 
 ΘΕ. οίμοι, προς αντω γ είμΐ τω δεινω λεγειν. 
 
 1155 
 
 1 ι6ο 
 
 1105 
 
 to a slave’s punishment, viz. by the 
 scourge. 
 
 1158. 61? rdSf (sc. 61? TO 0 X 6 V^at.) 
 i7^6t?. Eur. Here. F. 1356. ούδ’ αν 
 ωόμην | 6*? τονθ’ ίκίσθαι. 
 
 Ib. τοννδικον, the truth. Eurip. 
 Phoen. 479. απλοί)? 6 μύθος της άΚη~ ' 
 6 €ίας ζφυ | κου ποικίλων ^61 τανδιχ 
 4 ρμην€νμάτων. also ^θ 6 . 
 
 Ιΐ 6 θ. 6 t? τριβάς. ScHOL. ΐΐς βρα¬ 
 δύτητα καΧ διατριβάς και αναβολάς. 
 Brunck compares Arist. Acharn. 386. 
 πορίζΐΐς τριβάς. Nach Zogerungen, 
 sell ichy jagt der Alte nun. Donn. 
 
 1163. ipov sc. βΐίηηι. EL 536. 
 την y €μην {βΐίαηί) κτανΛν. 
 
 1167. τις γίννημάτων τι γΐννημά- 
 των, a child. Elmsley gives the fol¬ 
 lowing instances of this ο-χημα προς 
 το σημαινόμ(νον, as the grammarians 
 term it. Eur. Troad. 735 · ^φίλτατ, 
 ω περισσά τιμηθβΙς τύκνον. Bacch. 
 1305* "της σης τόδ* €ρνος, ω τάλαιι/α, 
 νηδνος I αίσχιστα και τάχιστα κατθά- 
 νονβ' δρω. ^Esch. Choeph. 893· οΐ ’γώ. 
 
 τeθvηκaςf φίλτατ Αίγίσθον βία. Arist. 
 Ach. 872. ω χαΐρ€, κό\\ικοφάγ€ Βοιω- 
 τίδιον. Cf. Pors. et Schsef. ad Eurip. 
 Phoen. 1730. Dissen adPind.Nem.V. 
 p. 422. των Ααΐον, household of Laius. 
 
 1168. η —a pause, then the word 
 Kcivovy like the Amen,” which 
 stuck in the throat of Shakespeare’s 
 ruffian. Donner, excellent in general 
 in catching the admirable collocation 
 of words in Sophocles, translates 
 tamely, “ oder wars sein eigner 
 Sohn?" Modem language must have 
 recourse to an artifice, and that 
 comparatively poor; or he, was 
 it his son ?” 
 
 1169. 6i/ii προς, not altogether 
 unlike προσόψι. “ I approach, I am 
 at the dreadful thing to tell.” (Speaks 
 in a low tone, and almost aside. 
 CEdipus replies in a tone still lower, 
 hanging over the herdsman in an 
 attitude, which the next reply seems 
 likely to stiffen into everlasting 
 rigidity.) Cf. Electr. 1329. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ 1ΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 151 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΘΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΘΕ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 καγωγ’ άκούαν. άλλ’ ομωί άκρνστέον. 
 κΐίνον γί τοι δη παΐς ΐκλτιζΐθ’' η δ’ «τω 
 κάλΧιστ αν ΐίποι ση γυνή tojS toy 
 
 Τ'- 
 
 η γαρ δίδωσιν ηδβ σοι; ΘΕ. μάλίστ\ ανα^, 
 ττρδ^ τί xpeias^ ; ΘΕ. ώί άναΧώσαιμί vlv» 
 τβκουσα τλημων ; ΘΕ. θβσφάτωρ γ οκνω κακών, 
 ποιων ; ΘΕ. κτβνβϊν νιν rov9 τ€κόντα9 ην Aoyos*. 
 πώς δητ άφηκας τώ yepovTL τώδβ σύ ; 
 κατοίκτίσας, ώ δβσποθ', ώς άλλην χθόνα 
 δοκών άποίσβίν, αυτός βνθβν ην' δ δ€ 
 κάκ βΙς μβγιστ ίσωσβν. el γαρ ουτος el, 
 ον φησιν ουτος, ϊσθί δύσποτμος γβγώς. 
 
 Ιού Ιού' τα πάντ αν ίζηκοι σαφή. 
 
 1170 
 
 1^75 
 
 I ι8ο 
 
 II71. Κΐίνον. The beauty of the 
 collocation baffles us more than be¬ 
 fore. (The whole conversation is in 
 a stifled tone, barely audible to the 
 spectators.) 
 
 Ib. ή δ’ βσω, she within. This 
 power of the demonstrative pro¬ 
 noun has been excellently explained 
 by Ellendt, who compares Phil. 371. 
 6 δ' ΐΐπ 'Obvaaevs, ille vero, Uli- 
 xem dico, respondit. Aj. 767. 6 
 δ’ ΐνθνς ΐξ edpas πβμπΐΐ μ€ συ\ φΐ~ 
 ροντα τάσδ' επιστολάί Ύΐυκρος. CEd. 
 1171. where, says the learned lexi¬ 
 cographer, those who join ή έσω ση 
 yyvvrj elicit a sense, but a very languid 
 one. 
 
 1173. μάλιστα. Translate: she and 
 none else. 
 
 1174. <as προς τί χρΐίας. (gl. ως 
 €π\ ποια χρΐία, cujus rei causa.) Trach. 
 1182. ως προς τί πίστιν τηνδ' άγαν 
 ΐπιστράφΐΐς; Qild. Col. 7·· ως προς τί 
 λΐζων, η καταρτύσων μολΐΤ,ν ; In what 
 these and some similar expressions 
 agree, and in what they differ, see 
 Ellendt II. 1004. 
 
 Ib. ως άναλώσαιμί (Schol. άπολί- 
 
 σαιμι) νιν. 
 
 1175 · τλημων, poor wretch! The 
 interjection of this word, under all 
 the circumstances, seems to me one 
 of peculiar beauty and pathos. 
 
 Ib. θΐσφάτων γ’ οκνω κακών, sane : 
 et quidem mala metuens vaticinia.' 
 Erf. so also Dind. and Wund. But 
 would not the herd rather avoid 
 CEdipus’s last question, and afffecting 
 not to hear it, continue his observa¬ 
 tion from V. 1174; the text here 
 being as Brunck gives it, θεσφάτων 
 κακών οκνω ? The transposition of the 
 words probably took place, as Ebner 
 suggests, from a copyist who thought 
 the first syllable in οκνος long. 
 
 1176. τους τΐκοντας, plural as usual 
 for singular. 
 
 1177. πώς, how came it to pass 
 then, that, Slc. 
 
 1178—9. Order : cos δοκών άποίσΐΐν 
 (eis) άλλην χθόνα. Elmsley com¬ 
 pares Eur. Here. F. 984. ίΐλλω δ’ 
 
 ΐπύχΐ τόξ', δς άμφιβώμιον | ΐπτηξΐ 
 κρηπϊδ^, ώς λΐληθΐναι δοκών. 
 
 II82. Ιοί) Ιού. The stifled tone 
 changes suddenly into a loud and 
 
 L 4 
 
152 
 
 ΣϋΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ώ φώ?, τβλβυταΐόρ σβ ττροσβλβψαιμι νυν^ 
 
 οστί^ ΤΓβφασμαι φνς τ άφ* ών ου χρηρ^ ζνν oh τ 
 
 ού χρ^ν μ ΟμίΧων^ ovs" τ€ μ ονκ eSei, κτανων, ^185 
 
 I · ! 
 
 ΧΟ. Ιω yevecu βροτών^ <ττρ, λ. 
 
 ώί υμάς ϊσα καί το μη- 
 δβρ ζώσας ίναριθμώ. 
 τις y^Pj ^h άνηρ ττΧ^ον 
 
 τας ευδαιμονίας φερει 1190 
 
 η τοσουτον οσον δοκεΐν 
 καί δόζαντ άττοκΧΐναι ; 
 το σόν τοι ^τapάδεLyμ ^χο^ν, 
 
 piercing shriek -vof horror, which 
 paralyses the theatre. 
 
 lb. i^i)KOL (Hei*m. Dind. Wund. 
 El.) i^'iKOi (Lib. MS. Pal. Ebn.) 
 Herodot. VI. '80. συμβάλλομαι δ’ 
 €^ηκξΐν μοι το χρηστημιον. 
 
 1183. ω φως, addressed to the 
 Sun, as the great origin of light; 
 but how addressed, in what tone 
 and manner? A tale of humbler 
 life, recently published, and in 
 which the suicide about to be points 
 menacingly to a dark cloud above 
 him, may help us in some degree to 
 it: I know nothing else that can so 
 powerfully. 
 
 1185. The smitten monarch rushes 
 from the stage in a paroxysm of 
 despair. A pause of some duration 
 before the Chorus commence their 
 solemn and dirge-like lament, so 
 deeply contrasting with their pre¬ 
 ceding strain. Glyconic, (1186. 
 1189. 1196.) Pherecratean (1188. 
 1192), and Glyconean verses (1187. 
 1190-1. 1193-4-5.) are used as 
 most suited to their present purpose. 
 
 1186. yeveal βροτων. Pind. Nem. 
 XI. 49. yeveah άντρων. 
 
 1187. 'ίσα κα\ το μηΒβν, the same 
 as nothing. Cf. Matth. §. 620, b. 
 
 ,(_Ed. Col. 810. 918. sup. V. 61 1. 
 
 1188. ζωσας, im Leben. Donisl 
 rather, in your most fiourishing con¬ 
 dition. Cf. sup. 45. 482. &c.' 
 Pind. Pyth. VIII. 135· eVa/xepoi* τί 
 de τις ; τι δ’ οϋ τις ; (i. e. what is the 
 somebody, or great man ? what is 
 the nobody, or mean man ?) σκιάς 
 ovap άνθρωπος. 
 
 1190. φίρ£ΐ=:€χει, possesses or 
 acquires. Pind. Isth. I. 56. 6 πονη~ 
 σαις δε νόω και προμάθ(ΐαν φ€ρ€ΐ. VII. 
 
 2 8 . φίρ€ΐ yap Ισθμοί νικάν πayκpaτioυ. 
 Nem. III. 29. καματωάίων πλayάv 
 άκος...φ€ρ€ΐ. 5 ί. 
 
 ΙΙ 9 Ι· δοκεΐι/ SC. ΐνάαιμονίαν φ€ρ€ΐν. 
 Erf. Α far more Pindaric sense 
 might be given to the ode by sup¬ 
 plying άνηρ eivai from V. 1 189. and un¬ 
 derstanding that word in its highest 
 sense of dignity. Cf. Arist. Eq. 1255* 
 
 1192. άποκλίνΐΐν (metaph. προς τά - 
 ησσω). Hermann understands with 
 Erfurdt, that human happiness con¬ 
 sists merely in appearance and imagi¬ 
 nation—and that just as a man be¬ 
 gins to think himself happy, or to 
 be so thought by others, his scale 
 turns, and he verges to ruin. 
 
 1193. ro σον {πapάδ€ιyμa.) Came· 
 rarius prefers τον σον sc. δαίμονα, 
 
ΟΙΔ1ΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 153 
 
 τον σον δαίμονα, τον σον, ώ 
 
 τλαμον ΟΙδίττόδα, βροτών 1195 
 
 ούδβνα μακαρίζω^ 
 
 δστΐ9 καθ* νπβρβολάν Λντ.α!, 1196 
 
 τοζβύσας €κράτησ€ τού 
 ττάντ €υδαίμονο 9 ολβον, 
 ώ Ζβν, κατά μ€ΐ> φθίσας 
 τάν γαμφ'ώννχα παρθένον 
 
 χρησμωδόν' θανάτων S εμα ' ΐ2οο 
 
 χωρά πνργο9 άνέστα* 
 εζ ον και βασίλευα καλεΐ 
 
 “ having your natal genius, yours 
 and none else but yours_, as an ex- 
 ,ample.” That Sophocles is not 
 averse to reduplications of this kind 
 cf. Philoct. 663 sq. &c. 
 
 1194. δαί/Αοι/α. Pind. 01 . XIII. 36. 
 Zfv πάτ€ρ,. . . Ξΐνοφώντος evOvve δαί¬ 
 μονας ovpov. 148. fi be δαίμων yeveB- 
 Xios epnoi. See further on Pindaric 
 notions of a natal genius in Dis- 
 sen’s Comment, pp. 143. 148.135· 
 
 1193-6. ουδβΐ' βροτών, nihil rerum 
 humanarum. Herm. Dind. ovbeva. 
 WuND. Ebn. the latter observing, 
 
 “ Nam proceleusmaticus pro dactylo 
 eodem Jure stare potest, quo in- 
 terdum pro anapsesto ponitur.” 
 
 Ib. μακαρίζω. Pind. Nem. XL 14. 
 tivbpa δ’ €ya> μακαρίζω pev Trarep’ 
 *Αρκ€σίΧαν. 
 
 1196. δστις,. by some referred to 
 (Edipus, by others to δαίμων. If to 
 the latter, then we must read cKpd- 
 τησ€, άνοστα ; if to the former, then 
 , €κράτησας and avearas. Ebner and 
 Kayser finding the two last in their 
 MSS. attack, and justly, I think, 
 the metrical and other reasons which 
 have caused Wunder and Dindorf to 
 embrace the reading of Erfurdt and 
 Hermann. 
 
 Ib. καθ^ ντΐ€ρβο\ψ (Hesych. wcp- 
 βαΧΚόντως) rp^evaag. ScHOL. cVt- 
 τνχων, βυτνχησας. Ell. nimium pro¬ 
 sper o jactu. Cf. Valck. ad Hipp. 638. 
 and see some interesting remarks by 
 Dissen. Comment, in Pind. 459 sq. 
 
 1198. €κράτησ€ τον ττάντ evbaipovos 
 ολβον. summcB potita est felicitatis. 
 Herm. On the large and important 
 meaning of the word ολβος in the 
 Pindaric writings, we shall speak 
 elsewhere. 
 
 1199. κατα — φθίσας. For in¬ 
 stances of Pindaric tmesis, see 01 . I. 
 30. 77. III. 67, VII. 41. 76. VIII. 
 25. 42. X. 90. Pyth. I. 160. II. 21. 
 III. 180. IV. 60. 120. 230. IX. 92. 
 219. XL 22. XII. 51. Nem. I. 71. 
 HI. 43. 149. VII. 26. 44. 121. 
 IX. 16. 76. X. 170. Isth. VI. 90. 
 Vll. 43. VIII. 129. &c. &c. 
 
 1200. θανάτων, i. e. the deaths 
 caused by the Sphinx. On the con¬ 
 struction θανάτων TTvpyos cf. Matth. 
 
 354> y· 
 
 1201. TTvpyo^, metaph. a defence, 
 a protection. Pind. Pyth. V. 75. 
 TTvpyos aareos ομμα Τ€ φα€ννότατον 
 ξβνοισι. 
 
 1202. KoXei. Wunder cites supr. 
 v. 1190. Antig. 119 &c. in proof 
 
154 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 καΙ τα μβγίστ βτί- 
 μάθη5, ταίς μ^γάΧαισι,ν 
 Οηβαίσιι^ άνόχτσων, 
 
 τανυν S άκούβιν tls άθλίώτ€ρος ; στρ, 0 . 1 204 
 
 t/s* αταις άγρίαις, tls Ιν ttovols 
 
 ξυνοίκο9 αλΧαγα βίου ; 
 ίώ κλβίρον ΟΙδίτΓου κάρα, 
 ώ μάγα9 Χιμην 
 
 that no offence is to be taken at the 
 hiatus. 
 
 120;^. θηβαισιρ. Having adverted 
 in a former note (sup. 267.) to the 
 direct descent of Laius from Cad¬ 
 mus, an opportunity here offers for 
 detailing some intermediate events 
 in the family, in consequence of 
 which the name of their residence 
 was changed from Cadmea into that 
 of Thebes. Labdacus being a minor 
 at the death of his father Polydorus, 
 the guardianship of him and his 
 crown had been put into the hands 
 of Nycteus, king of Lesbos. The 
 death of Nycteus transferred that 
 trust to his brother Lycus. As 
 soon as Labdacus had arrived at a 
 proper age, the reins of government 
 were put into his hands; but death 
 in a few years carrying off this 
 successor of Polydorus, Lycus saw 
 himself now guardian of the infant 
 Laius. It was during this second 
 guardianship of Lycus, that Am- 
 phion and Zethus, two sons of 
 Antiope, invaded the country at the 
 head of an army. “ Laius,” says 
 Pausanias, “ was stealthily removed 
 from the danger, by those on whom 
 it had been imposed as a duty to 
 see that the name and race of the 
 Cadmean family should not be ob¬ 
 literated;”—and well it was that they 
 did so ; for Amphion and Zethus giv- 
 
 1208 
 
 ing battle to Lycus, the latter was de¬ 
 feated. The two sons of Antiope 
 having thus made themselves mas¬ 
 ters of the kingdom, “they added,” 
 says the same intelligent traveller, 
 “the lower city to the Cadmea, giving 
 it the name of Thebes in honour of 
 that consanguinity which they had 
 with Thebe,” i. e. that daughter of 
 the Asopus and sister of -^gina, of 
 whom we had occasion to speak in 
 a former note. See Pausan. IX. 5. 
 2. 6. 7. also c. 7. 6. 
 
 I 204. aKOveiv. ScHOL. els to aKoveiv. 
 Cf. Matth. §. 545. (metre ; penth. 
 iamb, and dim. iamb, brachyc.) 
 
 T205. the preposition ev, after 
 the usual manner of Sophocles, be¬ 
 longs to both members of the sen¬ 
 tence. (metre : iamb. chor. diiamb.) 
 
 1 206. ξύνοικος, i. e. μάλλον ^υνοικοΓ, 
 more at home. μαΧλον, as Dindorf 
 observes, is to be supplied from the 
 preceding comparative deXoaTepos. 
 
 Ib. αλλαγα βίου, on account of your 
 reverse of life. Schol. rfj τον βίου 
 μβταβοΧί}. 
 
 ϊ 2ο8.ω μ6'γας —πβσεΤν. Theimagery 
 which Sophocles employs in de¬ 
 scribing the situation of Jocasta by 
 her new relations with her own son, 
 will not always bear a minute ex¬ 
 planation. Wunder translates with 
 great delicacy ; cui idem sinus suf- 
 fecit, in quo infans et parens maritus 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 155 
 
 αντο9 ηρκεσβν 
 
 παιδ). καί πατρί 
 θαλαμηττόλω 
 
 ττώς ποτβ ttcos τγοΘ* αΐ ττατρωαί σ αλοκ€9 φβρβιι/, τάλα9, 
 σΐγ* ίδυνάθησαν eV τοσόνδ€ ; 
 
 iipevpe σ ακονθ' 6 ττάνθ' ορών γ^ρ6νο9, kvT.0, 1213 
 
 δίκάζβί τ αγαμον γάμον πάλαι 
 
 τβκνουντα και τεκνούμβνον. 1215 
 
 Ιώ Ααϊψον τβκνον^ 
 
 είθε σ\ είθε'σε 
 
 μηποτ είδόμαν. 
 
 δνρομαί γάρ ώί 
 
 περίαλλ' Ιαχεων 
 
 jaceret. Hermann : “ /xeyas λίμψ di- 
 citur, qui justo major fuerit, ut quern 
 puerum sinu gestavisset mater, eun- 
 dem etiam maritum amplexa sit.” 
 Donner translates more boldly. 
 
 1209. θαλαμηπολω (ττολεο/χαι) ττα- 
 τρ\, parenti mariio, nobis ein eheUcher 
 Erzeuger. Wund. Passow, after 
 referring to Od. VII. 8. XXIII. 293. 
 and elsewhere, for two senses of the 
 word, adds as a third, “ seltner von 
 der Ehegattinn, Soph. O. T. 1208.” 
 
 1210. ττατρωαί aXoKes. Translate 
 with Donner: thy father s nuptial bed. 
 (Metre: choriamb, double iamb, 
 and the satne repeated.) 
 
 1211. Metre: choriamb, dim. 
 troch. brachyc. 
 
 1213. Time, as an element of 
 Pindaric, and consequently of So- 
 phoclean poetry and philosophy, 
 will be discussed more fully else¬ 
 where. 
 
 1214. δίκάζα, gl. κατα8ικαζ€ΐ. ul- 
 ciscitiir, pcenas repetit. Br. Find. 01 . 
 II. 106. τα δ’ eV τάδε Διό? αρχα | 
 άΧιτρά Kara yas 8ικάζ€ΐ τις ^χθρα | 
 
 \0yov φράσαις άνάγκα, (^εχβρα avayKq, 
 infesta necessitate, ut de flectendo 
 judice cogitari nequeat, Diss.) 
 
 Ib. γάμον αγαμον, a marriage 
 which ought not to have been con¬ 
 tracted, an inauspicious marriage. 
 
 1215. τίκνονντα (cf. Eurip. Phoen. 
 19. 882.) /cat τ€κνονμ(νον. Trans¬ 
 late : giving birth to children, where 
 the sire himself was born. Or, a 
 marriage, which whether father or 
 child is concerned, is equally unfor¬ 
 tunate and guilty. 
 
 1216. AaUiov. “ Scribendum Λαϊ- 
 ηιον cum Bothio.” Dind. in Annot. 
 
 1217. fWe σ’ (’ide ae. On this 
 repetition, introduced by Wunder 
 into the text, see the learned writer 
 himself. 
 
 1218. Σύρομαι. Cf. Pors. ad Eu¬ 
 rip. Hec. 728. ^sch. S. c. Th. 653. 
 
 1219. TrepiaXKa. ScHOL. : nepiaX- 
 Χως, νιτ€ρβοΧικως. Find. Pyth. XI. 8. 
 bv (^θησανρον^ ττ^ρίαλλ’ ίτίμασί Αθλιας. 
 
 Ib. Ιάχ€ων (gl. φωνών) part, of ια- 
 χ^ω — Ιάχω h. Hom. Cer. 20. other¬ 
 wise seldom used by the epic poets. 
 
156 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 €Κ στομάτων, το S ορθον elireiv, 
 aeOev 
 
 KOLL κατβκοίμησα τούμον ομμα. 
 
 άν€πν€υσά τ βκ 
 1220 
 1222 
 
 ΕΞΑΓΓΕΛΟΣ. 
 
 ω γη^ μβγιστα τησ^ del τιμώμ^νοι^ 
 οΥ βργ* άκονσ€σθ\ οία S' €ΐσόψ€σθ , οσον S 
 
 άρβΊσθβ π€νθθ9, eXirep έγγβνώς Υτι 
 των Ααβδακβίων βντρβπβσθβ δωμάτων, 
 οίμαι γάρ οντ άν’Ίστρον οΰτβ Φάσιν άν 
 νίψαι καθαρμω τηνδβ την στέγην, οσα 
 
 1225 
 
 and more used by the Attic. Herm. 
 h. Horn. 19, 18. The present tense 
 seems to have been wholly unknown 
 to the epic writers. Ion. aor. ΐαχον. 
 Pass. “ Est autem Ιαχίων non geni- 
 tivus adjectivi Ιάχ€ος, quod fingit 
 Elmsleius, sed participium verbi la- 
 X^iv.” Dind. See also Ellendt. “ Ex¬ 
 tra dubitationem mihi videtur esse 
 genuina lectio ΙαχαΙων.” Ebn. Ιακχίων 
 Erf. Herm. Cf. Eurip. Phoen. 1312. 
 
 1220. TO δ’ ορθον clnelv, ut veruvi 
 dicam. Cf. Matth. §. 545. 
 
 1222. Senkete da schlummernd 
 erst mein Auge. Thud. Gahest dem 
 Aug' endlichSchlaferquickung. Solo. 
 It is the language of all ages : fuy 
 eye had sleep and rest, after all its 
 previous troubles. (A servant here 
 comes out of the palace.) 
 
 1225. άρύσθΐ. SCHOL. : ληψεσβζ. 
 iyyevois. ScHOL. : γνησιωί. El. more 
 ingenito. Erf. more indigenarum, 
 popularitatis causa. The adverb 
 seems to me rather to apply to the 
 Chorus being of kindred birth, i. e. of 
 the Cadmean race. Cf. Antig. 508. 
 
 1227. "'ίστρον ovre Φάσιν. The Ister 
 (Danube), and the Phasis in Colchi 
 are here selected as the greatest 
 rivers then known. For various par¬ 
 ticulars relative to both, consult 
 
 Thudichum. I. 265. On the double 
 av, see Ellendt I. 129. 
 
 Ib. ''Ιστρον. Hes. Theog. 339. 
 Pind. 01 . III. 25. 46. VIII. 63. 
 
 Ib. Φάσιν. Hes. Theog. 340. Pind. 
 Pyth. IV. 375. Isth. II. 61. 
 
 1228. νίψαι. In strict language, 
 viTTreiv is to wash the hands and 
 feet, as Xoveiv is to wash the whole 
 body. To the examples of fluvial 
 ablution, given by Bothe and Er- 
 furdt, add the case of Alcmseon 
 purged from the murder of his 
 mother by immersion in the Ache- 
 lous. (Apollod. HI. 7. 6.) For the 
 Euripidean sea-bath, in Egypt,— 
 whence his θάλασσα (a) κλνζβι πάντα 
 τάνθρώπων κακά (Iph. Τ. 1 1 93 )» — 
 Diog. Laert. HI. 6. 
 
 Ib. καθαρμω. For construction, 
 see infr. 1526. When a public puri¬ 
 fication was to take place among the 
 Hebrew people, it is observable that 
 another species of washing or cleans¬ 
 ing took place, viz. that fuller’s pro¬ 
 cess, by which the mantle usually 
 ΛVorn was restored to its original 
 whiteness. In the Greek language, 
 the term is πλνναν (Aristoph. pas¬ 
 sim), in the Hebrew? D55 Exod. XIX. 
 10. Lev. XHI. 6. For the water of 
 lustration poured on the Levites at 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 KevOet' τα δ’ αύτίκ elf το ώώί φαν€Ϊ κ^κα 
 
 ’ ^ J. -- — 
 
 ίκόντα κον κ ακοι/τ α. των 8e ττημονών 
 μάΧίοτα Χνττονσ ca φανωσ αυθαίρετοι, 
 
 ΧΟ. Χείττει μεν ovS a ττρόσθεν γιδεμεν το μη ον 
 βαρύστον είναι' irpos S εκείνοισιν τι φης ^; 
 ES. ο μεν τάχιστοί των Χόγων είπεΐν τε καΐ 
 μαθεΐν^ τεθνηκε θειον Ίοκάστηί κάρα. 
 
 ΧΟ. ω δυστάΧαινα^ ττροί τίνοί ττοτ αίτιας ; 
 
 ES. αυτή προς αυτής, των δε πραχθεντων τα μεν 
 άΧγιστ άπεστιν' η γάρ οφις ού πάρα, 
 όμως δ\ οσον γε καν εμοι μνημης ενι, 
 πεύσει τα κείνης άθΧίας παθήματα. 
 
 157 
 
 1230 
 
 1235 
 
 1 240 
 
 their consecration, see Numbers 
 VI II. 7. For the cleansing of a 
 whole people or country, see Ezek. 
 XXIV. 13. XXXVI. 33. XXXIX. 
 12, 14. 
 
 1228—9. οσα (κακα), KevOet (con- 
 tinet in se. El.) sc. rjbc η στ^γη : 
 alluding covertly to the death of 
 Jocasta. 
 
 1229. τα δ’ αντίκα κακα^ the mise¬ 
 ries 'presently about to exhibit them¬ 
 selves : referring to the self-inflicted 
 blindness of (Edipus. 
 
 Ib. etff TO φώ? φανΐί. pleonastic. 
 Erfurdt compares Fr. Incert. ττάντ 
 €ΚκάΚνπτων 6 χρόνος els το φως ayei. 
 
 1230. ίκοντα κονκ ακοντα. This 
 expression (cf. Antig. 276. Find. 01 . 
 X. 35. on the rare application of 
 the word ακων to things, cf. CEd. Col. 
 240.) seems thrown in to relieve 
 the household of CEdipus from the 
 blame of allowing their lord to 
 appear in public, as I presume he 
 does, like Shakespeare’s Gloucester, 
 with eyes yet bleeding, and other 
 marks of self-inflicted torture. 
 
 1231. φανώσι. On the omission 
 
 of the av before φανωσι, see Matth. 
 §. 527. Ebner protests vehemently, 
 as he well might, against Butt- 
 mann’s suggestion of reading av for 
 
 Λ Jf 
 
 ac av. 
 
 Ib. αυθαίρετοι, self-chosen. 
 
 1234. elnelv τε καΐ μαθεΊν, to be 
 spoken by me, and to be heard by 
 you. On the nature of Pindaric 
 appositions, of which these two 
 verses may be considered a speci¬ 
 men, some notice will be taken here¬ 
 after. 
 
 1236. ω δνστάλαινα. Wunder and 
 Dindorf err here and elsewhere in 
 writing ω for ώ. See Ebner on 
 this subject. Donner translates pro¬ 
 perly, Arme. 
 
 1238. οψις adspectus. πάρα for 
 πάρεστι. (I had not to encounter 
 the worst part, viz. sight of the 
 actual suicide). 
 
 1239. iv epo'ievi. As instances of 
 similar pleonasms, Erfurdt quotes 
 QLd. Col. I 269. προς σο'ι παρασταθητω. 
 Phil. 1056. επεί πάρεστι μεν Ύευκρος 
 παρ ημίν. V. Bast, in Epist. crit. ad 
 Boisson. p. 124 sq. 
 
158 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 οπωί γαρ opyfj γρωμίνη τταρηλΘ €σω 
 
 θνρώι/09, ?€Τ- €νθύ 7Γρο9 τα νυμφικά 
 
 λβχη, κόμην σττώσ άμφιδβζίοι^ άκμαΐς' 
 
 ττνλας δ\ οττω? ύσηλθ\ έπφρηζασ Ιίτω j 
 
 KaXei τον η 8 η Ααίον τταλαι νεκρόν, 1245 ! 
 
 μνημην παλαιών σπερμάτων εχουσ νφ ών ι 
 
 θάνοι μεν αύτ09, την δε τίκτουσαν λίποι j 
 
 Τ 0 Ϊ 9 ϋΐσιν αυτόν δύστεκνον παιδονργίαν» ! 
 
 1241· ορΎΐί χρα>μ€νη^ fury-sTTiitten. 
 
 Ib. τταρηΚβξ^ entered. 
 
 1 242. θνρων. This word occurs 
 but twice in the writings of Sopho¬ 
 cles, here and at El. 328. and is not 
 without its difficulties. Passow 
 translates: the hall, the forecourt. 
 Donner uses the first intei-pretation 
 in the present place, and in the 
 Electra, renders it the “ door of the 
 forecourt.” In this latter sense, it 
 seems equivalent to the aoKclai 6 v- 
 pai of Pindar (Nem. I. 29.), where 
 the choral body are placed, who sing 
 the hymn in honour of Chromius, 
 the banquet which was to succeed 
 being apparently placed in the fore¬ 
 court itself. See also the exordium 
 to 01 . VI. with Dissen’s explana¬ 
 tions. Sagittar. de Januis perhaps 
 affords satisfactory information on 
 this subject. 
 
 Ib. ί€το...πρ. T. V. because that 
 nuptial bed, as the Scholiast ob¬ 
 serves, had been the cause of her 
 destruction. 
 
 1243. άρφώίξίοις άκμαίς. ScHOL. 
 Min. : άμφοΐν χ^ροΐν. (Ed. Col. 1112. 
 nXevpov άμφώ^ξιον (utrumque latus). 
 ^sch. Tel. (ap. Hesych.) αμφιδε- 
 ξίοις χ^ροΊ. 
 
 1244. (τηρρηξασα (ScHOL. : AcXet- 
 σασα) Ζσω, having closed the door 
 violently from within. 
 
 1245. “ Read KaXet not KaXet. coll. 
 
 (Ed. Col. 1626. Trach. 796 .”Dind. 
 in Annot. “ Why some persons 
 write καΧβΐ here instead of Kokei, I j 
 do not understand. In the verses j 
 following we meet with an imper¬ 
 fect tense, and there is no reason 
 why it should not be used here. Onjii 
 the omission of the augment see the 
 very discreet and learned observa¬ 
 tions of Matthise. §. 160. note.*’ 
 Ebn. If the reader knows any 
 thing of Greek criticism, he knows 
 that in all such cases as the present 
 much may be said on both sides, 
 and that frequently the wisest course 
 is to say as little as possible. 
 
 1246. σπερμάτων J i. e. (Edipus. 
 Plural, as usual, for singular. 
 
 1247. θάνοι. Cf. Bernhardy, p. 
 409. 
 
 Ib. avTos SC. Laius. 
 
 Ib. την τίκτουσαν, parentem, i. e. ' 
 herself. On Wunder’s doctrine off 
 XtVoi δ€ for \ιπων, see his (Ed. Col. 
 420. i 
 
 1248. rots οΐσιν αυτόν, to her own 
 son, i. e. (Edipus. 
 
 Ib. bvaT€Kvov TTaibovpyiav ( = παι-·ι 
 bovpyov) the parent of a wretched ' 
 offspring. On the Pindaric and So- ·ι 
 phoclean use of things for persons, 
 or nouns abstract for nouns con- i 
 Crete, we shall speak largely in a ' 
 future play. 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ^ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 159 
 
 γοατο & ίνθα δύστηνοί δίττλον^ 
 
 βζ άνδρος ανδρας και τ€κι/ βκ τβκνων τίκοι. 
 γωττως μ^ν βκ τωνο ονκ er οώ απολλυται. 
 βοών γαρ elaeTraiaev ΟΙδίττον^, νφ* ου 
 
 ούκ ην το Κ€ίνη9 Ικθεασασθαι κακόν* 
 
 ··> 
 
 άλλ* els eKelvov πβριπολονντ €λ€νσσομ€ν. 
 φοίτα γαρ ημάς εγχος εξάντων ττορεΐν, 
 γυναίκα τ ού γυναίκα, μητρωαν δ’ οττου 
 κίχοί δίττλην άρουραν ου τε καΐ τέκνων. 
 
 ,1 i Χυσσώντι S αύτω δαιμόνων δείκνυαί τις* 
 ουδεις γαρ άνδρών, οΐ τταρημεν εγγύθεν. 
 δεινόν δ’ άύαας, ώς ύφηγητοΰ τίνος, 
 ττύλαις διπλαΐς ενηλατ* εκ δε πυθμένων 
 
 1250 
 
 1255 
 
 1200 
 
 1249· γοατο. On the omission of 
 the augment, particularly in narra¬ 
 tives by dramatic ayyeXot, see Her¬ 
 mann deMetris, p. 120, τ . and also his 
 preface to the Bacchae of Euripides. 
 
 1250. άν 8 ρ 6 ς, her husband ( Laius ); 
 avbpaf (plur. for sing.) her husband 
 (CEdipus). So also τίκνα, Eteocles, 
 Polynices, &c. τίκνων, OEdipus. The 
 passage, which Elmsley and Dindorf 
 quote from Eurip. Here. fur. 950. 
 hiiiKovs δ’ ότταδοϊς ην γέλως φόβος θ' 
 όρον, to justify the reading of avdpa, 
 does not seem to apply to the case 
 before us. 
 
 1251. έκ τωι/δβ, after this. Cf. 
 
 235. 282. 
 
 1253. έκθ(άσασθαι, to see out. 
 Elms. 
 
 1254. TrepinoXovvra. ScHOL. : ne- 
 pifpXopevov ώστΓβρ έμμανη. έκύνον, em¬ 
 phatic. (Xevaaopev, fixed our eyes 
 upon^ turned our whole attention to. 
 
 1255. φοίτα, i. e. μαίνβται ut Aj. 
 59 · Erf. cur furit, nee proprie, 
 ruit ? Herm. 
 
 1256—7. γυναίκα τ ον γυναίκα (sc. 
 
 έξαιτων οπού κίχοι, Heath.), μητρωαν 
 δε διπλήν αρονραν κ. τ. e. demanding, 
 where he might find his wife, who 
 was no wife, but, &c. &c. 
 
 Ib. μητρωαν αρονραν (^'Esch. Sept, 
 C. Til. 750. οστε (CEdipus sc.) μη 
 προς άγναν σπείρας αρονραν, ίν έτράφη, 
 ρίζαν αίματό^σσαν βτλα,) =. μητέρα, 
 the mother of himself and of his chil¬ 
 dren. (Novel situations of life re¬ 
 quire novelties of expression, which 
 the sufierer seems to take a mournful 
 pleasure in dwelling upon.) 
 
 1260. deivbv άνσας, with a dreadful 
 howl. 
 
 Ib. ως νφηγητον τίνος, aS if there 
 had been one, who led him to it. 
 (Ed. Col. 15^^· ί’φηγητηρος ονδίνός 
 φίλων, sc. παρόντος, vel νφηγονμένον. 
 Musgrave gives the sense : tanquam 
 admonitus ab aliquo, Jocastam intus 
 esse. 
 
 1261. πνλαις διπλαίς, the folding- 
 door. For a learned exposition of 
 what follows, derived from ancient 
 works of art, see Thudichum’s So¬ 
 phocles. 
 
160 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 €kXlu€ κοίλα κλ^θρα^ κάρπίπτβι στβγτ), ^ 
 
 ου δη κρεμαστήν την γνναΐκ εσειδομεν^ 
 
 ττλεκταΐ^ icopais εμττεττλεγμενην, ο δε 
 
 οττω? δρα vlv, δεινά βρυχηθείς ταλας, ^ 265 
 
 χαλα κρεμαστήν άρτάνην. επεί δε γη 
 
 εκειτο τλημών, δεινά δ’ ην τάνθενδ' δράν. 
 
 άτΓοσττάσα? γάρ ειματων χρυσηλατον^ 
 
 ττερδνα 9 άττ αντη 9 , αίσιν εζεστελλετο, 
 
 άρας επαισεν άρθρα των 
 
 Ib. €Ρηλατ. ScHOL. ; λαξ cVc^ero, 
 applied his foot to. 
 
 1261-2. €K de πυθμένων ί'κ. κοιλ. 
 κ. “And from the posts rent out 
 the hollow locks.” Donn. On the 
 disputed readings κ\τ}θρα and κλάθρα, 
 see Schneid. 
 
 1262. cTTeyr], used here for, the 
 nuptial chamber. 
 
 1263. KpepacrTTjv. For Homers 
 account of the death of Jocasta, see 
 Od. XL 276. 
 
 1264. €ωρα, a halter. “ Wyt- 
 tenbachius, ut rei metricse longe 
 imperitissimus, solum αιώρα probabat 
 ad Plut. t. II. p. 130, c.” El. See 
 also Wunder ad CEd. Col. p. 152· 
 
 1265. βρνχασθαι, properly said 
 of the lion’s roar. For Sophoclean 
 uses of the word, see Aj. 321. 
 Trach. 805. 904. 1071. Cf. Butt- 
 mann’s Lexil. p. 204. 
 
 1266. χαλαν, let loose. Cf. CEd. 
 Col. 840. 
 
 Ib. άρτάνη (αρτάω), rope, halter. 
 Ant.54. ALsch.Ag.1059. Suppl.151. 
 
 1266-7. Brunck: ineX δε y η 
 τλημων €Κ€ΐτο, δεινά τάνθβρδ' ηρ οραρ. 
 With this conjectural reading of 
 Brunck, Ebner, though unsupported 
 by his MSS., expresses himself much 
 pleased, Hermann’s refutation of 
 it not appearing to him quite satis¬ 
 factory. “For why,” says the learned 
 
 avTov κύκλων, 1270 
 
 writer, “since such prepositions as 
 ip and ε’| may be put at the end of a 
 verse, may not an article be put at 
 the end of a verse ? Articles are so 
 found Antig. 409. Philoct. 263. then 
 why not here ?” 
 
 1268. χρν(τη\άτον 9 , ex auro ductas. 
 Ell. Eurip. Phoen. 60. χρνση\άτοΐ 5 
 πόρπαισιρ αιμάξας κόρας. 
 
 1269· τΓ^ρόρη (ττείρω, περάω), ori¬ 
 ginally, every point to stick or bore 
 through with, prickle, a thorn; par¬ 
 ticularly the point or tongue in the 
 ring of the buckle or clasp, with which 
 the robe was pierced to fasten it to 
 the body over the shoulders. Cf. 
 II. V. 425. Od. XVIII. 293. XIX. 
 226. also a sort of needle, used for 
 the same purpose, cf. Herodot. V. 
 87. Pass. 
 
 Ib. ε^εστεΧλετο (Trach. 6i 2.), or- 
 namentedj dressed herself. Pindar 
 employs a similar word to remind 
 the rich, the beautiful, and the vic¬ 
 torious in the pubhc games, that 
 he is clothed in mortal limbs, and 
 that his last dress will be the earth. 
 θρατα μξμράσθω ττεριστΑ-λων 
 Kill τελευτάν απάντων yap ε’πιεσσόρενοί. 
 
 Nem. XI. 20. 
 
 1270. αρας {having elevated), the 
 golden pins, as Solger and Donner 
 translate. Cf. infr. 1275—6. where 
 the determined character of CEdipus 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 161 
 
 ανδών τοιαΰθ'' οθονν^κ ονκ οψοιντό νιν 
 
 ν/1» Τ» V V/Ji « r^> >/Λ \ 
 
 ουσ OL βπασχβν οϋσ οποί eopa κακα, 
 άλλ’ eV σκότω το Χοιττον ous* uev ονκ eSec 
 oyj/oiaff, OV9 S* eyjprj^Ev ov γνωσοίατο. 
 
 TOLavT έφυμνων ττολλάκι^ re κονχ ατταζ 1275 
 
 ηρασσ Ιπαίρων βλβφαρα» φοίνιαι δ’ ομού 
 γΧηναυ γέν^ί ereyyov, ovS avieaav 
 
 is depictured by a still more terrible 
 trait. See also Plato IV. Rep. 440, a. 
 
 Ib. αρθρα, pupils. SCHOL. τα μίρη 
 των eavTOv οφθαλμών, Ζνθα αρμόζεται 
 τα βλέφαρα, τουτίστι τας κόρας. 
 
 Ib. κύκλων, eyes. Antig. 974 · 
 μάτων κνκλοις. CEd. Col. 6 yap 
 
 aUv όρων κύκλος λ^ύσσ^ι νιν Μορίου 
 Δίο?. 
 
 1 271 — 2 . όθοννίκ ονκ όφ. V. SC. = 
 ονκ οψοιντο οϊα αυτός ίττασχςν, that 
 they shall not see, what he suffered 
 in his infancy by exposition, in man¬ 
 hood by exile, nor what he did in 
 the same manhood by the murder of 
 his father. Herm. Wund. οφαιντο. 
 
 1273—4. €V σκότω όφοίαθ' {should 
 never see) ονς pev ούκ edec, those chil¬ 
 dren, ivhom it was now improper for 
 him to see), ονς δ’ ^χρ^ζεν ον γνωσοί- 
 ατο, nor recognize (in another world) 
 those parents whom he had been so 
 anxious to discover (in this). This 
 explanation, which I have adopted, 
 partly from Hermann, partly from 
 considerations of my own, seems 
 justifiable on the following grounds. 
 Theban, if not Greek, superstition 
 believed that persons deceased took 
 the liveliest interest in the afiairs of 
 near and dear relatives, when Hiving. 
 (Dissents Comment, pp. 93. 159. 
 
 252). Is it not a necessary conse¬ 
 quence that both parties looked 
 forward to meet again when dead ? 
 and is it not a second conse¬ 
 quence, that CEdipus, in extinguish¬ 
 ing his visual orbs, thought to escape 
 the worst portion of death,—the 
 facing of a father whom he had mur¬ 
 dered, and of a wife-mother, who 
 had murdered herself? Cf. infr. 
 1371 sq. ^ 
 
 1275. ίφνμνών. ScHOL. : άνοιμώ- 
 ζων. Eustath. : δυσφημών. 
 
 Ib. Hermann punctuates at the 
 end of the verse, in order to get 
 rid of what he considers unneces¬ 
 sary cruelty, by connecting ττολλάκις 
 re κούχ άπαξ with rjpaaae, but the 
 latter course seems more consistent 
 with the fiery character of CEdipus, 
 who not unfrequently reminds us of 
 the Lear of Shakspeare, at least in 
 his ebullitions of temper. 
 
 1276. άράσσ€ΐν, to strike. Antig. 
 5 2. διπλάς I o■ψeις άράξας αντονργω 
 
 Ib. όπαίρων, lifting up. El. 634. 
 enaipe Βη σύ θύματα. 
 
 1277. γλψη, pupil of the eye. II. 
 XIV. 494. Od. IX. 390. 
 
 Ib. avteaav, emitted, viz. the pupils 
 of the eye. 
 
 1 See more particularly the beautiful conclusion of the 14th Olympic Ode, where Echo 
 is directed to let Cleodamus know that his son has gained the chaplet of victory in the 
 valley of Pisa, i. e. at the Olympic games. 
 
 M 
 
162 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 φόρου μνδώσας σταγόνας^ άλΚ όμοΰ μβλας 
 όμβρος χαλάζης αίματοΰς ότ^γγβτο. 
 
 [τάδ’ €Κ δνοΐρ όρρωγβρ^ ού μόνον κακα^ 
 άλΧ άνόρΙ καΐ γυναίκΐ συμμιγή κακά,~\ 
 ό TTfHV ΤΓοΧαιος β ολβος ην τταροιθβ μβν 
 όλβος δικαίως' νυν δβ γγιδε θ^μόρα 
 
 -UliA- * >*'’■ Λ->.Τν 
 
 στεναγμός, ατη, θανατος^ αισχύνη^ κακών 
 όσ όστί ττάντων όνόματ\ ονδβν ear άττον, 
 
 ΧΟ. νυν S eaff ό τλημων ev τίνι (Γχολτ) κακόν ; 
 
 ES. βοα διοιγειν κλρθρα και δηλοΰν τινα 
 
 τοΐς ττασι Κ.αδμβίοισι τον ττατροκτόνον^ 
 τον μητρος, αυδών άνόσί ουδί ρητά μοι, 
 ώς €κ χθονός ρίφων βαυτον, ούδ' ότι 
 μ€νών δόμοις αραιός, ώς ηράσατο, 
 ρώμης ye μβντοι και ττροηγητου τίνος 
 δειται' το γάρ νόσημα μβΐζον η φβρβιν. 
 
 1 28ο 
 
 1 28s 
 
 1290 
 
 1278. φόνον μν^ώσας σταγόι/αρ, 
 (merely) wet drops of blood. 
 
 Ib. όμον, statbn. El. 
 
 1278—9. μιλάς όμβρος χάλάζης ai- 
 ματονς, a black hail-rain of blood. 
 
 1279. αίματονς. HeATH. Dind. 
 AVuND. χάλάζης αίματός τ. Elms. 
 χάλαζάθ’ αίματονσσ . PoRS. (ap. Kidd, 
 p. 216.) χάλάζης αιμάτων. Herm. 
 (On this plural^ see various exam¬ 
 ples by 1 Kayser.) χάλαζαν αίματος 
 occurs in Find. Isth. VII. 39. 
 
 Ib. eVeyyeTo, diffiuebat. El. Find. 
 Nem. X. 141. τίγ^ων ^άκpva. 
 
 1280-1. On the probable spuri¬ 
 ousness of these two verses, see 
 Dindorf. 
 
 1286 . €V TlVl Ο-χολβ. SCHOL. : €V 
 TToia διατριβή. El. num quid otii a 
 malo habety i. e. num in qua pausa 
 mali est ? The Scholiast reads 
 
 τίνι, but some MSS. read τιν\, and 
 Mudge and Elmsley seem rightly to 
 prefer the enclitic. 
 
 1287. βοα, cum clamore jubet. 
 Schsef. Coll. Xen. Anab. i. 8. 12. 
 §. 19. 
 
 1291. δόμοις αραιός. Elmsley com¬ 
 pares-<Esch. Ag. 245. φθόγγον αραιόν 
 οΐκοις. Eurip. Med. 608. κάι σοϊς 
 άραία γ' ονσα τυγχάνω δόμοις. Iph. 
 Taur. yyS. η αοϊς άραία δώμασιν γ€νη- 
 σομαι. 
 
 Ib. αραιός, ώς ηράσατο, ΐ. e. άραΊς 
 ντΓοκάιμζνος, ας ηράσατο. WuND. 
 
 1292. Antig. 9 ^ 9 · τυφλοΊσι 
 γάρ I αυτή κόλΐνθος όκ ττροηγητοΰ ττίλίΐ. 
 
 Ib. ρώμης, a firm supporter. 
 
 1293· νόσημα (i. e. πάθημά) μάιζον 
 η φόρειν. Consult on this phrase 
 Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 844. 
 
 * As a Hebraism, bloods for blood is of continual occurrence. Cf. Ezek. VII. 23. IX· 
 9. XVI. 9. 36. XXII. 2. Nahum III. i. Habak. II. 8. 12. 17. &c. &c. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ 'ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 163 
 
 δί/Αίί δί καί σοί. κλί/θρα γαρ πυλών τάδ( 
 
 * » * 
 
 δωίγβταί' θβαμα δ' €ΐσόψ€ί τάγα 
 τοίουτον οιον καί στυγουντ^ ίποικτίσαι. \ 
 ΧΟ. ώ δ^ίνδν Ιδβΐι/ πάθος άνθρώποις^ 
 ώ δ€ΐν6τατον πάντο^, 6σ Ιγω 
 
 προσ4κυρσ ηδη. τις σ\ ώ τΧημον, 
 
 / / ί Λ / 
 
 προσβρη μανία ; ης ο πηοησας 
 μβίζονα δαίμων των μακίστων 
 προς arj δυσδαίμονι μοίρα ; 
 ώβΰ φβν· δύσταν\ άλλ* ovS Ισιδ^ϊν 
 δύναμαι σ\ Ιθύλων ττολλ’ avepeaOat^ 
 
 ΤΓολλά πυθίσθαι^ ττολλά δ’ άθρησαι’ 
 
 ' * '* *«■■ ■ 
 
 το/αί^ φρίκην παρύχβίς μοι. 
 
 >295 
 
 1300 
 
 ί 3 θ 5 
 
 ΟΙ. atat αία?. 
 
 /- ^ 
 
 Λ 
 
 1 294* δε και σοί. “ Com- 
 
 monstrabit videndum. Ipse enim 
 sese coecatum et obrutum malis mon- 
 straturus CEdipus erat.” El. 
 
 1296. (A sight) such as even an 
 enemy might pity. Brunck compares 
 Aj. 924. cas και παρ' €χθρυΐί άξιος 
 βρηνων τνχΐίν. Tyro fr. 15. κάνην 
 άνοικτίρμων τΧς oiKTeipeuv αν. (CEdipus 
 returns to the stage. The Chorus, at 
 V, 1303. turn away their eyes, as 
 unable to endure the terrible sight.) 
 
 1297- 8. As the ώ is not an ad¬ 
 dress to the TraBosy but an exclama¬ 
 tion of the Chorus, we are not to 
 write with a circumflex as Wunder 
 and Dindorf have done. 
 
 1298— 9. ττροσκνράν generally has 
 a dative case after it. Hes. Th. 198. 
 ./Esch. Choeph. 13. Ellendt gains 
 an accusative by the following reso¬ 
 lution of the verb : προς οσα εγώ 
 η^η (κνρσα. 
 
 1300—1. τις (βστιν) 6 πηοησας 
 {ττηΒηματα) μάζονα των μακίστων. 
 
 Ib. ττη^αν, “ tralate dictum de ir- 
 
 ruente invido numine.” El. 
 
 1301. μακίστων. Brunck observes 
 that the Tragedians use the Doric 
 μάσσων μάκιστος for μάζων μέγιστος. 
 To the examples given by him (Phil. 
 849. Eurip. Hippol. 826. .-Esch. 
 Prom. 634. Pers. 438. 7 *^ 5 ·) 
 
 Pind. 01 . XIII. 161. ΐνρησας epevvcov 
 μάσσον, η ως ιδέμ^ν. Isth. III. 7* 
 ζώ €1 δε μάσσων ολβος οπιζομένων. 
 Nem. II. 35 · οΤκοι μάσσον αριθ¬ 
 μού I Διδί άγωνι. 
 
 Ib. μ^ίζονα των μακίστων, gravius 
 quam gravissimum, i. e. longe gra- 
 vissima sunt. El. in voc. μακρός. 
 
 I 30 I- 2 .πpδ 9 having here the sense 
 of approaching, I understand the 
 whole to imply, “ what hostile deity 
 has been making gigantic strides to 
 come at you, and your wretched 
 fate?” Cf. sup. 1169. 
 
 1306. φρίκην. Soph. Fr. Inc. 922. 
 (Dind.) ορθόκίρως φρίκη. Herodot. 
 VI. 134. φρίκης αυτόν υπ^Χθουσης. 
 
 1307. οιαΐ αίαΐ. Woe, woe, woe, 
 woe! 
 
 Μ 2 
 
164 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 φβύ φβΰ δύστανο9 €)/ώ, 
 
 ΤΓοΐ γά9 φβρομαί τλάμων ; 
 
 ττα μοι φθογγα \_δία7Γ6ταταί~\ φοράδηι^ ; 13 «ο 
 
 Ιω δαΐμοι^, lu €ζηλλύν. 
 
 ΧΟ. €9 SeLmu, ούδ* ακουστοί'^ ούδ’ Ιττόφίμον. 
 
 ΟΙ. Ιω σκότου (ττρ. λ . 
 
 1309. (speaks with his hands 
 spread out, as if feeling his way.) 
 
 1310. The perplexity of com¬ 
 mentators at this verse arises less 
 from want of explanations by the 
 ancient Scholiasts, than from multi¬ 
 plicity. To assist in seizing the 
 proper one, let us first throw our¬ 
 selves into the situation of a man 
 suddenly blinded like Qidipus, and 
 ask, what would be our primary 
 feelings ? A sense of insecurity as 
 to our movements, and a start of 
 astonishment at the sound of our 
 own voices, which would seem to 
 fly different ways (διαπβταται), with¬ 
 out reaching a distinct point as they 
 had been used to do. The first 
 feeling has apparently been embodied 
 in the verse preceding; the second 
 seems to me as evidently implied in 
 the present verse. And so, I think, 
 the first of the three Scholia imports 
 on the subject, πον βΙμι ; iv ποίω 
 χωρίω η φθογγη μον φ€ρ€ται ; Το eject 
 a word like Βιαπ€ταται, as Dindorf 
 and Hermann propose to do, from 
 the text,—that word with some little 
 variation of spelling being to be 
 found in all the best MSS. of 
 Sophocles,—is surely to take an un¬ 
 warrantable liberty with the text. 
 If any word is to be ejected, it 
 
 should, I think with Ebner, be the 
 word φορά 8 ην, which smells strongly 
 of a gloss derived from the pre¬ 
 ceding verb φέρομαι. That learned 
 writer accordingly proposes to read 
 ττα μοι φθογγα ττα diancrerai, (so his 
 MS.) referring to Herm. ad Ajac. 
 205. for the dactyl followed by an 
 anapaest. Wunder reads πά μοι 
 φθογγα j irkrcrai φοράδην j 
 
 Ib. φοράδην. Hesych. rrdvrij φ^ρό· 
 pcvov. El. raptim. 
 
 1311. ΐν ^ηλλου. Referring to 
 V. supr. 1300-1, and to the verse 
 which follows, a good general sense 
 is effected by rendering : “ alas, 
 
 thou genius of my fate; the leap 
 which you have taken is—” into 
 such a calamity as eye or ear has 
 never yet witnessed.” 
 
 Ib. ίξηΧλόυ. Libri €^77X0^ vel (ξη- 
 λω. Elms, β^άλω. “ Inaudite δω- 
 ρίξων,” as Ellendt observes in voc. 
 The Scholiast’s metaphoric expla¬ 
 nation of the word may very safely 
 be left untold. 
 
 1313—14. σκότου νίφος. Though 
 construction (cf. sup. 166.) would 
 warrant us in translating, clouded 
 darkness, what reader of ® taste 
 would endure so tame a version in 
 preference to the noble Hebraism 
 
 my cloud of darkness Euripides 
 
 m That something more than a matter of taste is involved in this construction, may be 
 seen from a mistranslation in our authorized version, where instead of ‘‘ a bloody hus¬ 
 band” (Exod. IV. 25.) we ought to translate with Gesenius (I. 262), *‘a bridegroom of 
 blood,” or with Parkhurst, “a father-in-law by blood.” (Heb. Lex. 251.) The former 
 lexicographer considers the expression as metaphorically said of the newly circumcised 
 child, in relation to a mystical matrimonial alliance with God. For Parkhurst’s expla¬ 
 nation, see himself in loco. Further examples of this Hebraism will be given elsewhere. 
 
01ΔΙΠ0ΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 163 
 
 v€(f)os €μορ άττότροπον, ίττιπλόμ^νον αφατοι^, 
 άδάματόι/ τ€ καΐ δυσούριστον ον. 1315 
 
 οϊμοι, 
 
 οϊμοί μάΧ αύθί 9 ' οΐον eiaedv μ αμα 
 κβντρων Τ€ τώνδ* οϊστρημα καΐ μνημη κακών. 
 
 ΧΟ. και θαύμα γ ovSev iv τοσοΐσδβ ττημασιν 
 
 thus couples the two words in the 
 text in his Here. Fur. 
 ovheXs σκότος yap ώδ’ Ζχ€ΐ μόΧαν νίφος, 
 οστις κακών σών συμφοράν Kpvyj/eiev αν. 
 
 I 2ι6. 
 
 Pindaric examples of this construc¬ 
 tion will be given in a future play. 
 
 1314. άπότροπον, ScHOL. which a 
 person would turn from with horror. 
 Find. Pyth. VIII. 134. άποτρόπω 
 γνώμα σ^σ^ισμίνον. (The allusion is 
 to such a sudden reverse in human 
 prosperity, inflicted by the gods, as 
 causes the spectator to turn from it 
 with horror.) 
 
 Ib. ίπιπΧόμβνον for όπιττΐΧόμ^νον , iil- 
 stans, El. Cf. Od. VII. 261. Hes. 
 Sc. 87. Th. 493. 
 
 Ib. αφατον. The word occurs in 
 the sense of unspeakably great, Pin¬ 
 dar Nem. I. 70, where Hercules 
 strangles the two snakes, and makes 
 their souls after some time exhale 
 from their limbs, άγχομίνοις de χρό¬ 
 νος j φνχάς απόπν€νσ€ν μΐΧίων αφάνων. 
 (metre : dimeter dochmiac.) 
 
 1315. abaparov—abapaaTOV’. poet. 
 
 insuperable. 
 
 Ib. bvaovpiarovy immedicabile Br. 
 infaustus, quasi vento sceviter secundo 
 advectus. El. So also Hermann be¬ 
 fore him, deriving the word from 
 οΖρος (a wind), not from ορος {a 
 boundary) as the Scholiast had done. 
 If a decision is to be made by Wun- 
 der between a high poetic sense 
 and a more prosaic one, it is not the 
 former, which the learned writer 
 most naturally inclines to. He ac¬ 
 
 cordingly prefers the interpretation 
 of Brunck. I have no hesitation in 
 adopting the derivation of Ellendt 
 and Hermann, but under a some¬ 
 what difierent meaning. Tottering 
 with uncertain step under his new 
 infliction, why should not the ideas 
 of CEdipus suddenly conform them¬ 
 selves to his new situation, and re¬ 
 present him to himself as one tossed 
 about by every adverse wind, and 
 never secure of his path or the step 
 which he takes ? If the Pindaric 
 studies of Sophocles are to be taken 
 into account, they certainly would 
 add strength to this suggestion, for 
 with whom more than Pindar does 
 the word ουρος occur in a metaphoric 
 sense Isthm. IV. 7. άλλοτε δ’ αλ- 
 ΧοΙος (adversus) ουρος | πάντας ανθρώ¬ 
 πους όπαΐσσων ΐΧαύν^ι. Add Nem. VI. 
 46. Isth. Η. 6ο. νΐΙΙ . 120. Pyth. 
 I. 66. IV. 520. 01 . ΧΗΙ. 38 . 
 
 (metre: dim. dochm.) The tasteful 
 reader will not fail to compare with 
 these first exclamations of the 
 blinded CEdipus those of Milton's 
 Sampson Agonistes, 80 sq. 
 
 Ib. bυσoύpισrov bv. Brunck’s edi¬ 
 tion : abapaarov re | καί bυσoύpισrov, 
 ο’ίμοι. For the text, as here excel¬ 
 lently emended, we are indebted to 
 the metrical skill of Hermann. 
 
 1316—17. o’lpoi, ο’ίμοι pa}C αυθις, 
 woe me, and woe me once again ! 
 
 1318. κίντρων οϊστρημα, the mad¬ 
 dening pain derived from the blows 
 inflicted on his eyes. 
 
 M 3 
 
166 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 δίττΧά σ€ τΓ^νθβΐν koll δίττΧα φ^ρβιΐ' κακα. y 1320 
 
 ΟΙ. Ιω φΙΧθ9, 
 
 σν μίν e/xos* ίττίττοΧο^ ^tl μονίμου. €Tl γαρ 
 ντΓομ(ν€ΐ 9 μ€ τοι^ τυφΧον κηδ^υων. 
 φβν φβν. 
 
 ον γάρ μβ XrjOeLSy άλλα γιγνώσκω σαφώς^ 1325 
 
 καπΓ€ρ σκοτ€ΐνοζ^ την ye σην ανδην ομω?. 
 
 ΧΟ. ω δβίνα δράσα^, ττώ? ίτΧη^ τοιαυτα σα^ 
 οφΕίς· μαράναι ; τίς σ βπηρβ δαιμόνων ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ΆττόΧΧων raS ήν, *ΑττόΧΧων, φίΧοι^ ττρ, 0. 
 
 1320. cfiepeiv. In his annotations, 
 Dindorf prefers φορειι/, which he ob¬ 
 serves is found in La, Lb, Palat. and 
 six or eight other MSS. Wunder 
 renders this and the preceding verse: 
 in tantis calamitatibus, i.e. tantce cum 
 sint calaniitates, non est mirum dupli- 
 citer te lugere, et dupliciter i. e. gra- 
 viter te ferre mala. 
 
 1322. eninoXos — ηρόσπόΧος, at¬ 
 tendant, servant. Pass. imnoXos μό¬ 
 νιμος, my only prop. Donn. 
 
 1323. v/xo/xeV«s— κη^ίνων. Schsefer 
 compares Herodot. VIL 101. Diod. 
 Sic. XIX. 12. Xen. Cyrop. IV. 5, 
 22. 
 
 1328. όψίΐς, eyes. Antig. 52. δι- 
 ττΧάς δψίΐς αράδας αυτός. Eurip. Phoen. 
 776. όφιν τνφΧώσας. Cycl. 628. ey τ’ 
 αν ομματος | οφις ΚνκΧωτΓος όξαμιΧ- 
 Χηθη πνρί. 
 
 Ib. μαραίναν, to extinguish. 
 
 Ib. errrjpe. ScHOL. βπεισί. Eur. Or. 
 280. όστις μ Μπάρας epyov άνοσιώτατον. 
 
 1329. ’ΑπόΧΧων τάδ’ ην. Wuiider 
 (cf. Bernhardy ρ. 281.) compares 
 in his vernacular tongue, “ Apollo 
 was it, who’* &c. &c. A more im¬ 
 
 portant question arises, in what tone 
 and spirit are these and the follow¬ 
 ing words uttered by (Edipus } Are 
 we to recognize in them an irreli¬ 
 gious heroism, gathering up a proud 
 indignation against the Deity, even 
 when sinking beneath his power ? 
 or is it the resignation of Fatalism, 
 surrendering with a wise discretion 
 to a blind necessity, which it cannot 
 avoid; or is it, finally, a pious hu¬ 
 mility, submitting itself to the 
 inscrutable purposes of a superior 
 Being ? These and other points it 
 will be time to consider, when the 
 great Sophoclean n Trilogy (for such 
 the poet’s arrangements have made 
 it to us, though not to his contem¬ 
 poraries) comes before us for exami¬ 
 nation, and when it will be at¬ 
 tempted to be seen, whether the 
 whole subject may not be placed on 
 higher grounds, than the ingenious 
 and powerful reasonings of Thudi- 
 chum, Solger and oQsann have at 
 present put it. On the general hos¬ 
 tility of Apollo to the family of 
 Laius, cf. ^sch. Sept. c. Th. 688. 
 
 n More specific differences between this word and the word Tetralogne will be pointed 
 out, when the respective theories of Hermann and Scholl (‘‘ Beitr'^e ziir Kenntniss der 
 tragischen Pocsie dev Griechen”) come to be examined. 
 
 o See his excellent remarks “ Uber dcs Sophocles Aias.” 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 167 
 
 ό κακα κακα τβλώι/ €μα τάδ* βμα πάθ^α. 1330 
 
 €7Γαίσ€ δ’ αύτόχβιρ vlv οΰτι?, άλλ’ βγω τΧάμων. 
 
 f \ νΛ » ί Λ 
 
 TL γαρ eoet μ οραν, 
 
 οτω y ορώντι μηδβν ήν Ιδβΐν γλυκύ ; ΐ 335 
 
 ΧΟ. ην τανβ σττωσπβρ καΐ συ φη9. 
 
 ΟΙ. τί δητ βμοί βλβπτον, η (ττρ, γ . 
 
 στβρκτον^ η προσηγορον 
 
 ν>ν»» / *5. '' 
 
 βτ βστ ακουβιν -ηοονα^ φΐΑοι ; 
 
 άπάγβτ ίκτότηον δτυ τάγιστά /α6, 134 ° 
 
 «Trayer , ώ (blXou του ολβθρον μβγαυ, 
 του καταρατοτατου, βτι οβ και σβοίί ΐ345 
 
 βχθρότατου βροτώυ, . , 
 
 ΧΟ. δβίλαίβ του^ού'^ί^β συμφοράς ϊσου^ 
 
 8 ο 2. and W elcker’s ^sch.Tril . ρ. 3 5 5 · 
 
 lb. φίλοι. Ebner’s MSS. like 
 others, read ω φίλοι, thus vitiating 
 the metre (dim. doch. like the verse 
 following). 
 
 1330. πάθβα, a dissyllable. Dind. 
 For the sense of the verse cf. infr. 
 1382. 1440. 
 
 1331. A similar verse, i. e. tri¬ 
 meter iambic concluded with a 
 trochseus semantus (see Herm. de 
 Metris, 76. 327. 660 sq.), occurs in 
 the poet’s Ajax (400.) : ct άξιος βλί- 
 neiv Tiv eis ονησιν ανθρώπων. 
 
 1333. νιν, them, i. e. his eyes. 
 οντις (^οΧλος') cf. Ellendt 1 . 86. The 
 following references will shew, that 
 it is not only in the writings of 
 Sophocles, that we are sometimes 
 to go to a considerable distance to 
 find the substantive to which an 
 emphatic pronoun belongs. Find. 
 01 . 1. 163. 11 . 66. 120. Vll. 90. 
 Vlll. 81. IX. 79. Xlll. 131. Pyth. 
 VII. 16. Nem. VII. 131. X. 160. 
 Isthm. IV. 9. 105. VIII. 31. &c. Cf. 
 infr. 1482. 
 
 1337-8. βλ€πτ 6 ν, object of sight, 
 orepKTOv, object of love, προσηγορον, 
 topic of conversation, (metre : diiamb. 
 two cretics and diiamb.) 
 
 1339. (ώστε) uKoveiv Tjdova, to hear 
 with pleasure or pleasurably. Cf. 
 infr. 1526. Dindorf pronounces the 
 metre of this verse not to be iambic, 
 but iambico-trochaic. 
 
 1340. Elmsley compares Antig. 
 1323. ayere p on τάχος, άγετε ρ ε’κ- 
 ποδών. On what grounds the hiatus 
 at the end of the verse (dim. 
 dochm.) may be defended, see Herm. 
 de Metr. p. 248. 
 
 1341. Tov ολΐθρον (i. e. KaBappaj 
 ρίγαν, perditissimum. El. Aristoph. 
 Thesmoph. fr. VIII. 3. άγχουσαν, 
 ολίθρον τον βαθνν, φιρρνθιον. See 
 also Meineke ad Menand. p. 191. 
 
 1345. καταρατότατον, cf. sup. 
 820. Hermann reads τον καταρα¬ 
 τότατον, et τις δε και θ^οίς, making 
 the verse to consist of a dochm. 
 and iamb, ischiorrog. 
 
 1347. Hermann: 0 miser aque 
 eo, quod cognovisti mala tua, atquc 
 M 4 
 
168 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΧΟ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 coy σ’ ήθίΧησα μη8ΐ y αν γνώναί wore. 
 
 Λ» C/ 9 ^ Γ * *~ι * ' 'S' 
 
 OAOLU ΟΟΤ19 ην OS [ατΓ J aypias webas 
 νομά^ος iTTiTToSias ί'λαββ μ* άττό re φόρου 
 eppvTo κάρβσωσβρ, ονδβρ els χάριρ ττράσσωρ. 
 Tore γαρ άρ θαρωρ 
 
 ονκ ηρ φίλοισιρ ovS βμοί ToaopS a^os* 
 θόλορτί κάμοί τοντ αρ ηρ, 
 
 OVKOVP Trarpos y olp φopevs 
 ήλθορ, ovSe pυμφLOs 
 
 αντ, β'. 
 
 1350 
 
 1355 
 
 αντ. γ . 
 
 ipsis nialis. Schol. δειλαιβ rrjs (τννί- 
 σεως eviKeu, και της συμφοράς χάριν. 
 χαΚίΤΤον yap σνν€τω άνθρωττω τα 
 τοιαντα συν€ν€χθήραι. 
 
 134^· Libri : μη 8 ί* άραγνωναί ττοτ 
 άρ. Ebner’s MSS. μη δ’ α. ποτ άρ. 
 Dind. in Annotat. proposes ως ηθ€- 
 \ησα μηδ€ ae γρώραί ποτ' aPj or ως 
 ηθίΧησα μηδί σ' άρ γρώραι ποτά. 
 Hermann translates : Ο that I had 
 not even so much as known you I 
 Donner: Wie wiinscht’ ich, dass 
 du nimmermehr dich selbst erkannt! 
 Cf. Eurip. Here. F. 666 . 
 
 1349. απ’. Dindorf has properly 
 inserted between brackets, what 
 Hermann has admitted into the 
 text. The preposition is to be sup¬ 
 plied from the verse following. Cf. 
 supr. 761. For verbs common in 
 the same way to two sentences, cf. 
 Dissen’s Comment, ad Find. p. 66. 
 
 Ib. πβάη, Fuss-fessel, foot-fetter. 
 Pass. 
 
 1350. ρομας, pasturing, providing 
 oneself a livelihood; hence, remain¬ 
 ing or abiding in a place. Pass. 
 What was this place to CEdipus 
 A former verse (1026) has told us: 
 ραπαιαι cp ϋ,ιθαιρωρος πτνχαΙ, and 
 infr. 1398. κ€κρνμμ€ρη ράπη. There 
 can be little doubt, therefore, I think, 
 that we are here to read with Elms- 
 ley ρομάδ’, making that adjective to 
 agree with the pronoun /ze, but not 
 
 giving it the strange sense and con¬ 
 struction which that eminent scholar 
 has done. For two Scholia on the 
 subject, and Ellendt’s op^on on 
 them, see his Lexicon. ' · ' ''i*. 
 
 Ib. €πιπόδιος (πούς), on the foot. 
 The word, as Passow observes, is 
 formed like ^μπόάιος and*' Trept- 
 
 πδδιορ. 
 
 Ib. ίλαβε μ*, Herm. ex Schol. ‘ 
 eXv(re μ\ Libri. Ebner’s MSS. inclu- 
 sive. Wunder observes that it is*^ 
 difficult to say what ought to be 
 written, as the Strophic verse seems 
 corrupt. 
 
 1351. eppvTo (ρυομαι tueor, servoi). 
 
 Cf. sup. 72. 312. 313. For metre, 
 cf. sup. 1331. and see Buttm. Lexil, 
 P-307- 
 
 1353 · χάριρ, ut a me gratiam 
 iniret, i. e. graturn. El. 
 
 1354. Elmsley and Hermann 
 punctuate at θαρωρ, which is then to 
 be taken absolutely for €μου Θανόρτος, 
 in which sense the Scholiast under¬ 
 stood the passage. In that case ηρ 
 in the following verse is in the third, 
 not in the first person. To this con¬ 
 struction Dindorf also inclines in his 
 notes, though not in his text. 
 
 135^- deXopTi κάμο\ τοντ άν ηρ. 
 This would have been with my good 
 will also. Cf. Valck. ad Her. VHI. 
 
 101. Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 5. 
 
 1358- “ ν^θορ, proprio significatu 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 169 
 
 βροτοΐ? €κληθηρ ών βφνρ αττο, 
 
 νυν S αθ€09 άροσίωρ δβ ττα??, 
 
 6μογ€Ρη9 δ* άφ' ώρ αυτός ίφνρ τάλας. 
 d δβ η πρ€σβντ€ρορ ere κακού κακορ, 
 τουτ €λα\ υίοιπονς. 
 
 ΧΟ. ονκ οίδ' δττως σβ φώ βββονλβνσθαί καλώς. 
 
 κρβίσσωρ γαρ ησθα μηκ€Τ ώρ η ζώρ τνφλόςρ^ 
 U1. ως μβρ ταο ουγ^ ωο ear αρίστ βίργασμερα, 
 
 μη μ €κοώασκ€, μηΟβ συμρουΑβν ere. 
 
 / 
 
 Ιγώ γαρ ούκ οΖδ’ ομμασιρ ττοίοις βλ^ττωρ 
 ττατβρα ττοτ αρ ττροσβΐδορ βΙς'^'Αίδου μολώρ, 
 ονδ* αν τάλαιραρ μητ€ρ\ οΙρ ξμόΐ δνοΐρ 
 ίργ ίστ\ κρβίσσορ άγχρρης βΙργασμβρα. 
 άλλ’ η τβκρωρ δητ οφις ηρ ίφίμ€ρος^ 
 βλαστονσ όπως ββλαστβ^ wppaXevaaeLP ίμοί. 
 
 1360 
 
 1365 
 
 Τ370 
 
 1375 
 
 accipio : non patris interfector hue 
 venissem." El. Erf. 
 
 1360. aOeos, {diis invisus) Elms. 
 Seidl. Reisig. Libri άθλιος. 
 
 1361. opoycvrjs is to be taken in 
 an active sense. Translate: consort 
 of her from whom myself was sprung. 
 Cf. sup. 460. 
 
 1364. πpeσβvτ€povy schrecklicheres, 
 more frightful. Donn. 
 
 1365. cri Herm. βφυ libri, which 
 Hermann now approves. 
 
 1368. Elmsley compares Aj. 634. 
 κρΐίσσων trap ‘^Αίδα κΐνθων, η νόσων 
 paravy where see Lobeck. On the 
 omission of av in the sentence, 
 see Ellendt I. 125. 
 
 1369. τάδε, i. e. τά της τυφλώσεων. 
 ScHOL. 
 
 1374. κρ€ίσσονα αγχόνης, atrociora 
 quam quae suspendio lui possint. 
 Cf. Viger, p. 65. and 714. Erf. 
 Cf. QEd. Col. 439. μ^ίζω. . των πρ\ν 
 
 ημαρτημένων. Matth. §.451· 
 
 1375· ^ τέκνων : “but doubtless 
 
 you will say that” &c. Schol. : έν 
 έρωτησ€ΐ, he speaks interrogatively. 
 
 1376. βλαστονσ όπως (βλαστ€. 
 (Ed. Col. 273. ικόμην IV Ικόμην. 336. 
 εϊσ* ονπέρ εισι. Eurip. Orest. 7^· 
 ε’ττεί προς ^ϊλιον επλενσ·’ όπως εττλεϋσα 
 βΐομανα. πότμω. 
 
 1378-9· three things 
 
 which the eyes of CEdipus are de¬ 
 scribed in these verses as so much 
 desiderating, viz. the αστν, the πύρ¬ 
 γος, and the δαιμόνων αγάλματα, the 
 commentators of Sophocles say little 
 or nothing; yet surely, whether 
 we look to the present play, or to 
 others connected with the Cadmean 
 family, each and all of them de¬ 
 serve some attention. By the first 
 of these words is, I think, to be un¬ 
 derstood that upper portion of 
 Thebes which was occupied by the 
 
170 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ον δητα τοΐς γ' βμοΐσιν οφθαλμοί^ ττοτβ' 
 
 Cadmeans, before Amphion and Ze- 
 thus added the πόΧις or lower part. 
 (Cf. sup. 1203.) As the ancient 
 poets were not always very precise 
 in their use of words, it is not to be 
 expected that this distinction will be 
 always found nicely observed, but 
 whoever will compare the following 
 passages in the Sept. c. Theb. 46-7. 
 337-8, where the words αστυ and 
 PTToXti are brought together, will, I 
 think, find reason for seeing that 
 the definition above given of their 
 respective meanings is not alto¬ 
 gether incorrect; the term Καδμείων 
 αστυ (v. 527. cf. Eurip. Bacch. 838) 
 adding strength to the argument. 
 That the poet, from whom so many 
 previous illustrations of the Sopho- 
 clean text have been derived, does 
 not desert us on the present occa¬ 
 sion, might easily, did time allow, 
 be shewn from the use of the word 
 ίϊστυ in his myth of fjBellerophon ; 
 and but for the same difficulty, 
 similar conclusions might, I think, 
 be drawn from the following pas¬ 
 sages in the Phoenissse of Euripides. 
 374. 856. 1117. The epithet there¬ 
 fore of ττατρί^ρ attached to this 
 word αστυ, not only by CEdipus in 
 the present drama (infr. 1450.), but 
 by his daughter in another (Antig. 
 937. cf. CEd. Col. 758. Eur. Phoen. 
 226.) is just that epithet which un¬ 
 
 der the circumstances we might have 
 expected to see attached to it. If 
 this reasoning is correct, may it not 
 be added, that the word άστος is not, 
 as was contended in a former note 
 (sup. 222.), an unimportant word in 
 this drama, but that if any alteration 
 is to be made in the poet’s text, that 
 iteration is to be made, not by ex¬ 
 cluding αστοί, and substituting avrbs 
 in his Tyrannus, but by introducing 
 αστοί, and excluding αυτός, in his 
 (Edipus at Co tonus (v. 1774) ? The 
 reader may be further reminded, 
 that on this elevated ^spot, and be¬ 
 fore the Cadmean palace, is laid the 
 scene, not only of the present play, 
 but of the S. c, Theb. of .Eschylus, 
 and the Phoenissae, and, I think, the 
 Here. Fur. of Euripides. In con¬ 
 nexion with the subject of the Cad¬ 
 mean family keeping themselves as 
 a distinct race from the prior and 
 other inhabitants of Bceotia, Pindar’s 
 third and fourth Isthmian Odes, both 
 dedicated to Melissus, apparently a 
 Kadyoy€vf}s, deserve attention, more 
 particularly IV. 13, 14. 
 
 1378. Tvpyos. When it is con¬ 
 sidered that Cadmus came from a 
 land the cities of which were 
 “ fenced up to heaven,” and that he 
 had to secure himself from subju¬ 
 gated and hostile tribes, it is na¬ 
 tural to suppose that the Theban 
 
 P Where yEschylus uses as he sometimes does, for the acropolis (S. c. T. 219. 
 
 226, &c.), then ττόΚις and &στυ are obviously equivalent terms. 
 
 q That Dissen understood the word &στυ in the sense here contended for, may, I 
 think, be collected from his note on the passage. “ μ 4 yapov, videtur '^ισύφζίον intelli- 
 gendum cum Tafelio et Strabone VIII. 6. situm in Acrocorintho, ubi i-egum pristinam 
 sedem credibile. Ibidem in arce quum esset Pirene, suavis denominatio ίστυ Tleipdvas.''^ 
 Comment, ad 01 . XIII. 62. If the reader have still further appetite for the subject, he 
 may investigate the same poet’s first Nemean Ode, as to Avhere the palace of Amphitryon 
 stood, and whence the ΚαΒμ^ίων dyol (v. 76) issue, when alarmed by the cries of the 
 infant Hei’cules. 
 
 r Among other proofs of the prospect commanded fi’om them as Avell as the royal 
 palace, cf. Eurip. Pheen. 99. 499. &c. See also Plate VI. in Kruse’s Atlas. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 171 
 
 ><\1V » ' 
 
 ονο αστυ γ, ovde ττνργο^, ον0€ οαιμονων 
 
 battlements from their first con¬ 
 struction assumed no mean appear¬ 
 ance. That Euripides was of that 
 opinion, seems clear from the ex¬ 
 pressive word put into the mouth of 
 his prophetic Tiresias, when arrived 
 at the palace gates of Cadmus. 
 
 Tis iv πνΧαισι Κάδμον eKKaXel. δόμων, 
 ^Αγηνορος τταΐδ’, os πόΧιν Σώωνίαν 
 Χιπων, ζΤτόργύίΧΤ άστν Θηβαίων τάδε ; 
 
 Bacchse 170. 
 
 
 Μ 
 
 chases by falling from them a pa¬ 
 triot’s immortal name (Eur. Phoen. 
 1107.), or the two brother-foes 
 making their respective proclama¬ 
 tions upon them (yEsch. S. c. T. 
 631 sq. Eurip. Phcen. 1239.) and 
 in death earning those sympathies 
 from us which their lives had failed 
 to command ? But we should never 
 have done, if we went further into 
 the subject except by references. 
 On various matters as connected with 
 
 But what did the eyes of QEdipus 
 (for to them the text almost confines 
 us) desiderate from this spot as well 
 as his royal dwelling } An expanse 
 of plain (Pind. Nem. IX. 60,), as 
 rich in wood and mead and lawn 
 (^sch. S. c. T. 294. Soph. Antig. 
 420. Eurip. Phoen. 840. Here. F. 
 468.) as that which the royal heights 
 of Windsor can command; a plain 
 almost as prolific of milk and honey, 
 if we may judge from Pindaric epi¬ 
 thets (Diss. Com. p. 391), as the land 
 from which Cadmus himself came; 
 the rich stream of the Ismenos (Eur. 
 Phoen. 805. 841. Suppl. 66. 393. 
 Here. F. 572. 781. Bacch. 5.) wan¬ 
 dering through it, and hard by, that 
 Dircean fountain, “ the most nou¬ 
 rishing of waters” (S. c. T. 295.) 
 whether to the bodily or the sintel¬ 
 lectual palate. This magnificent 
 prospect from Theban battlements 
 may be denied to our bodily sense ; 
 but do the tragic writings offer no 
 compensation to the intellectual eye ? 
 Need we point to that messenger 
 who tells in deathless tale the com¬ 
 bat which he beheld from them 
 (Eurip. Suppl. 662 sq.) ? Need we 
 tell of that gallant youth, who pur¬ 
 
 the Theban πύργοι, see Hisch. S. c. 
 T. 30-3. 202. 220. 282. 302. 422. 
 545 · 625. 823. 895. Soph. Antig. 
 122. Eur. Phoen. 186. 630. 838. 
 1094. 1212. 1375. &c. 
 
 1379. άγάΧματα, “ statucB divorum : 
 nisi καταχρηστικούς dicuntur templa 
 quibus dei sese coli gaudent.” El. 
 That something more is meant than 
 this, no one will fail to conjecture 
 who observes how these Cadmean 
 άγάΧματα are alluded to in the 
 writings of .Eschylus and Euripides 
 (S. c. T. 244. 25 t. Phoen. 227. 641.), 
 as well as Sophocles. That if sta¬ 
 tues, they had reference to statues 
 of the hereditary gods of the Cad¬ 
 mean race (^eo't ογγονοις, Antig. 199. 
 προγονύς, ibid. 938. ποΧιονχοι S. C. T. 
 822.) there can, I think, be little 
 doubt: the ancient writings, how¬ 
 ever, enable us to specify only one 
 among the Theban άγάΧματα, and 
 that perhaps of a much lower date ; 
 viz. the national Thebe, with her 
 golden shield and golden tunic. 
 (Pind. Isth. I. i. Fgmm. Incert. 104. 
 Diss. edit.) Whether any reference 
 was made by this word to the costly 
 ornaments apparently brought from 
 Sidon by Cadmus (infr. 1464), or 
 
 ® For who lived close adjoining to the Dircean fountain ? He who could assure victo¬ 
 rious chiefs 
 
 πίσω σή>ο Αίρκα$ ayvov ϋδωρ, rh βαθύζωνοι κόραι 
 
 χρυσοπόπλου Μναμοσννσ,ς άνότοιλαν παρ' ουτοιχόσιν Κάδμου πν\αί$. 
 
 Pind. Isth. VI. 106. cf. 01 . VI. 145* 
 
172 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 άγάΧμα& Ιρα, των 6 τταντλημων βγω 
 
 κάλλιστ, άνηρ βΐ 9 βν γβ ταΪ9 Θηβαί9 τραφβί9 13^0 
 
 άπβστβρησ έμαυτον^ αυτός ίνν^ττων 
 
 ώθβϊν ατταντα9^ τον άσββη^ τον βκ θβών 
 
 φανβντ αναγνον καί γβνον9 τον Aatov, ^ 
 
 TOLavS βγω κηλΐδα μηνύσα9 βμην 
 
 6ρθοΪ9 βμβλλον ομμασίν τούτου9 οραν ; 1385 
 
 ηκίστά γ' άλλ’ βΐ τη9 άκουούση9 βτ ην 
 7Γηγη9 St ώτων φραγμο 9 , ονκ αν βσχρμην 
 το μη *7Γθκλβΐσαί τουμον άθλιον δβμα9, 
 ΐν ή τνφλ09 τβ και κλνων μηδβν. το γαρ 
 
 to costly Cadmean tombs (cf. Diss. 
 ad Find. Nem. X. v. 67.), I must 
 leave to others to investigate. 
 
 Ib . των for ων. Find. Nem. X. 
 52 . των μ€ν cparai φρζν'ι, σιγά οί στό¬ 
 μα. Cf. infr. 1427· 
 
 1380. “ I, who of all men led the 
 most honourable and desirable life 
 in Thebes.” That this enlarged 
 sense of the word τρίφ^ιν is occa¬ 
 sionally required in Sophocles, seems 
 clear from CEd. Col. 331. 362. &c. 
 Electr. 1183. cf. Find. Nem. II. 20. 
 Isth. VIII. 35. 86. where see Dis- 
 sen’s explanations. Conner seems 
 to have mistaken the sense, and the 
 current of CEdipus’s feelings, when 
 he translates, “ I who sprang out 
 of the best stem in the town of 
 Thebes.” 
 
 1381. €νν€πων, commanding. Find. 
 Nem. III. 13 I· φρον^Ιν d' tvenei (eV- 
 verrev, Fyth. IX. lyo.) to τταρακ^ί- 
 μβνον. 
 
 1382-3. τον €κ θ^ων. By the lat¬ 
 ter word (plur. for sing.) I under¬ 
 stand Apollo. On the preposition 
 tK, see Bernhardyp. 227. Hermann 
 renders: qui per oraculum et scelestus 
 et Laio sanguine conjunctus repertus 
 sum. 
 
 1384. μηννσας €μην (ipse in me 
 declarans El.) κηλΐδα. 
 
 1385 * ρρθοΐί όμμασιν, with open 
 eyes. Donn. I should rather trans¬ 
 late, with eyes erect, in opposition to 
 down-cast eyes. (Find. Nem. X. 75. 
 κρνπτ€ΐν φάος όμμάτων. See also Diss. 
 ad Fyth. II. 76.) Cf. Find. Ol. X. 6. 
 ορθά χ€ρΙ, with uplifted hand. 
 
 Ib. τούτους, you. DoNN. Thebanos. 
 Br. Dind. 
 
 1386-7. η άκονονσα ττηγη δι ωτων, 
 ScHOL. 17 ακουστική δύναμις. 
 
 1387 . φραγμός (φράσσω), Όαηΐηΐ, 
 mound. Donn. Herodot. VII. 36. 
 
 φραγμόν παρξίρυσαν €v 6 (v και Ζνθ^ν. 
 “ φραγμός δι ωτων coniunffenda vi- 
 dentur.” El. 
 
 Ib. ούκ αν ΐσχόμην, I would not 
 have abstained. Vid. Schaef. melet. 
 crit. p. 56. and 135. 
 
 1388. απόκλειαν, Fass. άποκληειν. 
 El. to shut up. Dindorf thinks that 
 the crasis is to be formed by μάπο- 
 κλησαι. Cf. Schneid. lo. On the 
 particle μη, see El. II. 99. On the 
 preservation of the metaphor, see 
 WUND. 
 
 1389. tv (in which case) η, I had 
 been, &c. Cf. infr. 1392. Elmsley 
 refers to the following as examples 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ^ΓΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 την φροντί8 €^ω των κακών οΙκ€Ϊν γλυκύ. 
 Ιώ Κι^αφών^ τί μ ; τί μ* ού λαβών 
 
 €KT€Lva9 €V0V9, ώς eSet^a μηποτβ 
 βμαυτον άνθρώποίσιν ίνθβν ην γβγώ^ ; 
 ώ ΙΙόλυββ καί Κόρινθβ και τα πάτρια 
 λόγω παλαιά Scopuff^ οίον άρα με 
 κάλλθ9 κακών νπονλον ε^εθρεψατε. 
 
 t f 
 
 νυν γάρ κακό^ τ ών κάκ κακών ευρισκομαι. 
 ω τρεΐ9 κεΑευσοί και κεκρυμμενη ναπη 
 ρυμό^ τε καΙ στενωπός εν τριπλαίς ό^οΐς, 
 (U τούμόν θάμα τών εμών χεφών άπο 
 επίετε πατρός, άρά μου μεμνησθ^ οτί, 
 
 OL έργα όρασας υμιν, ειτα οευρ ιων 
 
 173 
 
 1390 
 
 1395 
 
 1400 
 
 of this well-known construction. El. 
 1131. JEsch. Prom. 152.746. Cho- 
 eph. 193. Eurip. Hippol. 645. 925. 
 1078. Iph.Taur. 354. Aristoph.Vesp. 
 989. Pac. 135. Eccl. 151. 422. &c. 
 
 1390. Sensu carere grata res esi 
 in malis. Camer. φροντ'ώ’, cogita- 
 tionem. El. 
 
 1392. ως ne ostendissem, 
 
 El. II. 1006. 
 
 1393. η Elmsl. with whom Din- 
 dorf now agrees. See Hermann’s 
 preface. 
 
 1395. λόγω, as far as words went. 
 Cf. sup. 452. 
 
 Ib. δώματα, palace. Cf. sup. 531. 
 925. El. 661. Cf. Pind. Pyth.V. 
 130. from which it should seem, that 
 in Cyrene, the royal tombs were 
 erected in front of the palace. 
 
 1396. κάΧΚος κακών νπονλον, i. e. 
 externe pnlcrum, interne morhis laten- 
 tibus plenum. Musgr. 
 
 Ib. νπονλος {ονλη, scar left after a 
 wound, Od. XIX. 391. 393. 464. 
 507, &c.), said of wounds cicatrised 
 
 but not healed, and which are likely 
 to break out again. Plat. Gorg. 480, 
 b. 518, e. Tim. 72, d. Dem.327,ult 
 
 1398. rpeis KeXevOoi. Cf. Sup. 
 800-1. 
 
 Ib. νάπη, wood or thicket. Pind. 
 
 Isth. III. 19. κοίλα λίοντος νάπα. 
 
 Pyth. VI. 8. iv πολνχρνσω ’Αττολλω- 
 
 via νάπα. 
 
 « « 
 
 1399. “ δρνμυς, de via σχιστή 
 silvis umbrosa.” El. Homer uses 
 only the plural δρνμά. II. XI. ii8. 
 Od. X. 150. 197. 25 I. 
 
 Ib. στ€νωπ 6 ς, angusti(B. El. 
 
 1400—I. τονμον αίμα πατρος = 
 τονμον πατρος αίμα. Erf. Dind. The 
 former compares Antig. 788. veiKos 
 άνδρών ξνναιμον for ξνναίμων. 
 
 1401. μ€μνησβ' otc. Cf. Herm. 
 ad Antig. 2. 
 
 1402. νμιν, gl. παρ’ νμΊν. Bothe 
 has taken a far deeper and more 
 poetical view of the word. “ Immo 
 ipsam regionem nefando suo facinore 
 Isesam ait (Edipus, quemadmodum 
 alibi parietes locuturi esse, si vocem 
 
174 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ότΓοΓ’ hrpaaaov αυθις ; ώ γάμοι γαμοί^ 
 βφνσαθ'' ημα^, καΙ (j^vrevaaifTe^ ττάλιν 
 άρ€Ϊτ€ ταυτόν σττβρμα^ κάττβδβίζατβ 
 TToripas άδβλφον^ τταΐδαί αίμ βμφνλιον, 
 ννμφα^ γυναίκαν μητβρας re, γωττοσα 
 αίσγιστ iv άνθρώποίσιν βργα γίγνβται, 
 άλλ’ ού γαρ αυδάν βσθ^ a μηδβ δράν καλόν, 
 Όττως τάχιστα, ττρο^ θβών, e^co μ€ ττου 
 καλνψατ^ η φον€ύσατ, η θαλάσσιον 
 βκρί'ψατ^ evOa μηττοτ βΐσοφβσθ^ βτι. 
 ϊτ% άζίώσατ άνδρο9 αθλίου θιγβιν. 
 
 ΊΓίθεσθβ, μη δβίσητβ, τάμα γάρ κακά 
 ούδβί? otos* re ττλην βμού φβρβιν βροτών. 
 
 1405 
 
 1410 
 
 Ι4Ϊ5 
 
 habeant, et hujusmodi alia dicuntur 
 
 τταθητικως.” 
 
 1403. ώ -γάμοι, 0 bridals, wretched 
 bridals! (sing. for. plur. Jocasta 
 being meant.) Longinus, in refer¬ 
 ence to these verses, observes (de 
 Sub. C. 23.) eo’d' οπον προσπίπτω τα 
 πληθυντικά. μ€γάλορρημον€στ€ρα, και 
 αντω ^οξοκομπουντα τω οχλω τον αριθ¬ 
 μόν. Cf. Tracb. 1139· 
 
 1404—5* φντ^νσαντβς — σπίρμα. 
 The same imagery here again occurs, 
 which so often meets us in this play. 
 
 Ib. anebel^aT€, commonstravistis. 
 El. fecistis ut. Wund. 
 
 1406. Εμφύλιον αίμα (cf. Find. 
 Pyth. II. 57. Eurip. Suppl. 159). 
 This term belongs to the present 
 and following verse, indicating, 
 by a dreadful conglomeration of 
 ideas, a father in him, who was 
 the brother of those of whom he 
 was the father, and the son of her of 
 whom he was the husband. 
 
 1407. Et fecistis ut αΙμ €μφ. 
 esset νύμφη yvvf) κα'ι μητηρ, i. e. ut 
 
 sponsa esset, quae uxor fuerat et 
 mater. Wund. 
 
 1408. αΧσχιστα tpya, res turpis- 
 simcp. Erf. 
 
 1409. Erfurdtcompares Isoc.5,a. a 
 ποιύν αίσχρον, ταντα νόμιζα μη8ε Xeyeiv 
 €ΐναι καλόν. Heliodor. IV. 10. κρν- 
 πτονσαν ά και πάσχβιν αισχρόν, κα\ βκλα- 
 Xelv αίσχρότ^ρον. Ρ. Syrus Sentent. 
 792. Quod facere turpe est, dicere 
 ne honestum puta. 
 
 1410—II. (ξω καλύψατε. ScHOL.: 
 ^κβαλόντ€5 αφανή ποιήσατε. 
 
 [ 4 11 —Τ 2. θαλάσσιος, quod maris 
 est. θαλάσσιον ΐκρίφατβ = καταπον¬ 
 τίσατε. El. Cf. sup. άπάyετ εκτό- 
 πιον. CEd. Col. 118. εκτόπιος σνθείς. 
 Aj. 495* χειρίαν άφείς. IOI9. απωστος 
 yri£ άπορριφθησομαι. Phil. 600. χρο¬ 
 νιάν εκβεβληκότες, et similia. Find. 
 Pyth. V. 79. yλωσσav . . . άπενεικεν 
 νπερποντίαν. IX. I Ο 7* επιyovvίδιov 
 κατθηκάμεναι. 
 
 Ι4ΐ4“ί5· ancients be¬ 
 
 lieved that pollution was contracted 
 by the mere touch of a polluted per- 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 175 
 
 ΧΟ. αλλ’ ών ίτταιτύς eV ττάρβσθ’ oSe 
 
 Κρβωι/ το πράσσειν καΐ το βονλεύβίν' εττεϊ 
 χωράς Χελεητται μουνος άντ\ σου φνλαζ. 
 ΟΙ. οΐμοί, τί δητα λεζομβυ ττρος τόνδ^ έπος ; 
 τις μοί φανεΐται ττίστις ένδικος ; τα γαρ 
 τταρος προς αυτόν πάντ^ εφεύρημαι κακός, 
 ,ΚΡ. ουχ ως γελαστής, ΟΙδίπους, εληλυθα, 
 ούδ^ ως ονειδίών tl των πάρος κακών. 
 αλλ’ €ί τα θνητών μη καταίσχύνεσθ^ ετι 
 γενεθΧα, την γουν πάντα βόσκουσαν φλόγα 
 αΐδεΐσθ' άνακτος Ήλιου, τοιόνδ' άγος 
 ακάλυπτον ουτω δεικνύναι, το μήτε γη 
 μητ'* ομβρος Ιρος μήτε φως προσδεξεται. 
 άλλ’ ως τάχιστ^ ες οίκον εσκομίζετε. 
 
 1420 
 
 Γ425 
 
 son (Solger ρ. 199)» (Edipus desires 
 the Chorus to dismiss all such ter¬ 
 rors : “ for my pollutions,” says he 
 in the depth of his misery, “ are so 
 great that they cannot be commu¬ 
 nicated. One person alone can sus¬ 
 tain them and their concomitants, 
 and that person is myself.” 
 scrihendum cum Elmsleio.” Dind. 
 
 1416. is biov, suitably, conve¬ 
 niently. Cf. Aristoph. Nub. 857. and 
 Krueger ad Xen. Anab. p. 229. 
 
 1417. TO π.ράσσ€ΐν. Cf. Matth. 
 §· 543 · 2. Ellendt II. 222. 
 
 1420. Tts pot K. T. €. El. How 
 can I Justly ask his confidence ? Donn. 
 How can any belief be properly placed 
 in me ? 
 
 1422. Creon, though now guar¬ 
 dian of the state, is perhaps too 
 new in office to enter with a regal 
 train. Cf. infr. 1424. 
 
 Ib. ονχ ως. οΰθ' Pal. MSS. L. 
 (a pr. m.) Lb. Lc. 
 
 Ib. yiXaaTrjs, a mocker. 
 
 1423· “ Ούδ’ cannot here be 
 
 tolerated,” says Ebner; “ ονβ' must 
 certainly be written, which is the 
 reading of L. Lb. Lc.” 
 
 Ib. των ττάρος κακών, alluding to 
 their former contentions. 
 
 1424—5. θνητών yiveOXa, the race 
 of mortal men. 
 
 1424. καταισχννζσθ^. (Addressing 
 apparently the attendants of CEdipus). 
 
 .1426—7. 'Ηλιου. . .ακάλυπτοι/. Eurip. 
 Here. F. 1231. τί Βητά μου κρατ 
 άν€κάλν·ψ·ας η\ίω; 
 
 Ib. ayos. Cf. Blomf. Gloss, in S. c. 
 Th. p. 190. 
 
 1427. τό=ο. See Ellendt in Lex. 
 II. 202. and cf. Find. 01 . II. 135. 
 VI. 82. 145. X. 121. Pyth. I. 2. 
 31. 40. 57.155. III. 139. V. 108. 
 116. IX. 155-6. XI. 21. XIL 15. 
 45. Nem. VII. 49. Isthm. VI. 55. 
 107 &c. 
 
 1428. ομβρος, rain. Cf. CEd. Col. 
 35 O· πολλοΤσι δ’ ομβροις ηΚίον tc 
 K avpaertv | μοχθούσα. Trach. 145. και 
 viv ου θάλπος θ€θΰ, [ ούδ’ ομβρος. . , 
 κλονΐΐ. here, water. 
 
176 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Τ019 ip γ€Ρ€ί yap τάγγ€ρη μάλισθ^ 6 pap 143° 
 
 μοροις τ άκονβίρ €ύσ€βώς eyei κακα, 
 
 ΟΙ. 7Γρο9 θβωρ^ iTrenrep βλττίδο^ μ αττίσιτασας^ 
 αριστοζ βλθωρ ττρο? κάκίστορ αρδρ’ e/xe, 
 τΓίθου τί μοΓ ττροί σου yap, ούδ’ βμον, φρασω. 
 
 ΚΡ. καί τον μ€ yjpeias ώδβ λυπαρύς τυχβΐρ ; 1 435 
 
 ΟΙ. ρίφορ μβ yrjs €Κ τησδ’ δσορ τάχισθ' οπού 
 θρητωρ φαρονμαι μηδβροί πpoσηyopo 9 . 
 
 ΚΡ. βδρασ αρ €ύ τουτ ϊσθ* αρ, el μη του Oeov 
 πρώτιστ ^χρηζορ Ικμαθβΐρ τί πρακτβορ, 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ’ η γ βκβίρου πάσ iδηλώθη φάτί 9 , 144° 
 
 TOP πατροφορτηρ, top άσββη μ άπολλυραί. 
 
 ΚΡ. οΰτωί €λ€χθη ταυβ' όμως δ’ Ϊρ ίσταμβρ 
 
 Ib. npoabe^erai, will admit; viz. 
 from fear of elementary pollution. 
 
 1430— I. Tots iv yivti — Tois iy- 
 yeveai vel τοίς avyyeveai. 
 
 Ib. eyyevrj κακα, domestic evils. 
 Cf. (Ed. Col. 765. 
 
 1431. ζνσφως (χει. Sup. 77 ®· 
 
 φόρως El. 7 ^ 7 * ^Όττηρώς Ζχΐΐν. 
 
 1178. άθλίως ^X^iV, &C. &C. 
 
 1432. €λπ/δο? /X* άτί^σπάσας, have 
 disappointed the expectations which I 
 had formed, viz. that I should be the 
 object of your taunts and your re¬ 
 proaches. Aj. 1382. μ (ψίνσας eX- 
 ττίδοί πολν. 
 
 1434. πίθου τί μοι. (Ed. C0I. 
 1414· ίκ€Τ€νω σε πεισθηναί τί μοι. 
 Aristoph. Thesm. 93 ^· βραχύ 
 
 τί μοι. 
 
 lb. προς σον, for your interest. 
 Brunck compares Trach. 479. δεί 
 yap καί το προς κείνον 'kεyειv. 
 Aristoph. Vesp. 647. μη προς εμού 
 'KlyovTi. Add Herodot. I. 75. 124. 
 VIII. 22. 60. 
 
 143^. Tov (i. e. τίνος') χρείας τνχεΊν 
 
 {to obtain what thing). (Ed. Col. 
 
 1755. τίνος, ω πα 78 ες, χρείας άννσαι 
 {to accomplish what thing), προσ~ 
 πίτνετε. 
 
 Ib. λϊπαρεΐς {earnestly entreat) με. 
 ^sch. Prom. 1040. και λιπαρησω τον 
 μεya στvyovμεvov. 
 
 1437 * μ'ηύενος πpoσηyopoς. Phil. 
 1353· ’"Φ πpoσηyopoς (Schsef. Mel. 
 Cr. p. 137 . ToC). conversable. Cf. 
 sup. V. 1338. 
 
 1438. The double av in this verse 
 is thus explained by Dindorf; εύρασ 
 av, εν τοΰτ* ίσθ', εύρασ' αν. (In what 
 tone is this uttered } The language 
 seems harsh and unkind, and at 
 variance with the better feelings 
 for which (Edipus had recently given 
 Creon credit.) 
 
 1440. No further response {φάτις) 
 need be sought from him ; his com¬ 
 mand is clear enough. 
 
 1442. όντως ελεχθη τανθ’. Such in 
 truth has been his command. 
 
 1442—3. Iva χρείας εσταμεν = οτι 
 ενταύθα χρείας εσταμεν. Matth. §. 480. 
 Obs. 3· Trach. 1145· ^νμφορας tv 
 εσταμεν. Aj. 102. τί yap παΐς 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 177 
 
 \peias, αμίΐνον ΐκμαβΰν τί δραστίον. 
 
 ΟΙ. ούτως αρ^ άΐ'δρος άθλιου TrevaeaO^ νττερ ; 
 
 ΚΡ. καί γάρ συ νυν τάν τω θβω ττίστιν φάροις, 1445 
 
 ΟΙ. καϊ σοί Ϋ ίτΓίσκητττω re και ττροτρβψομαι, 
 της μίν /car’ οίκους αυτός ον θβλβις τάφον 
 θου' και γάρ ορθως των ye σών τβλζΐς ΰττβρ, 
 ίμου δβ μητΓΟτ'^ ά^ιωθητω τόδβ 
 
 ττατρωον άστυ ζωντος οίκητοΰ τυχβιν. 1450 
 
 άλλ’ ea μ€ ναίειν ορβσιν^ ίνθα κληζβται 
 θύμος Κιθαφων ούτος, ον μητηρ re μοι 
 πατήρ r’ ΙΘβσθην ζωντι κύριον τάφον, 
 
 IV €ξ βκβινων, οι μ απωλλυτην, υανω. 
 
 καίτοι τοσούτόν y’ οίδα, μητ 6 //,’ αν νόσον 1455 
 
 μητ^ άλλο πβρσαι μηδβν' ου γάρ αν ποτ€ 
 
 Θνησκων βσώθην, μη ’π/ τω δβινω κακω. 
 
 ο τον Αα€ρτΙον, πον σοι τύχης €στη- 
 
 K€V ■, 
 
 Ib. Tav = TOt αν' αν φύροις will give. 
 (In what tone again we ask is this 
 uttered ? The emphatic vvv is surely 
 a taunt that might have been spared, 
 more particularly by the brother of 
 Jocasta. That CEdipus feels, what 
 Creon ought to have felt, is clear 
 fi'om his following language.) 
 
 1444. όντως dialecticam vim ali- 
 quando habet, sic igitur, s. ergo sig- 
 nificans. Cf. CEd. Col. 1433. Antig. 
 673. El. 
 
 1446. προτρύφομαι. ScHOL. αΐτη- 
 (τομαι. El. deprecabor a te, ττρόστροπος 
 Ύ^νησομαι. 
 
 1 449» μητΓοτ άξιωθητω. See Ell. 
 
 ίΙ· 97 · 
 
 1450. τόδβ πατρωον αστν. Cf. SUp. 
 137^· CEd. Col. 297. πατρωον αστν 
 vis €χ€ΐ. (Sc Theseus). 
 
 Ib. οίκητης, an inhabitant. 
 
 1451—2. ivda K. ov. K. ov. ubi est 
 qui mens Cithceron dicitur. Sch^ef. 
 Dissen (Comment, p. 493.) compares 
 Nem. IX. 41. Soph. Trach. 636 sq. 
 
 1453. κύριον. (ScHOL. i 8 iov) ede- 
 σθην, apud se destinarunt. El. 
 
 1454. ot μ' άπωλλνσαν, i. e. as far 
 as wishes and intentions could effect 
 the purpose. Brunck compares 
 El. 320. πράγμ avfjp πράσσων (ScHOL. 
 €πιχ€ΐρων πράσσαν) peya. CEd. Col. 
 993. KTcivoi oLcidere velit. Aristoph. 
 Pac. 2T2. εκείνων ποΧλάκις σπov^aς 
 ποιούντων,ΐ.&. noielv €πιθνμούντων. Add 
 Find. 01 . XIII. 82. κομίζοντας [endea¬ 
 vouring to recover), ^schyl. S. c. Th. 
 1021. ηραι (tentabat capere) : see 
 also Ellen dt I. 994. 
 
 1455-6. μ' αν πάρσαι, is destined 
 to destroy me. 
 
 1457. θνησκων, doomed to deaths 
 on the point of dying. Cf.. Eurip. 
 Here. F. 537. 550. 
 
 N 
 
178 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 άλλ’ η μίν ημών μοΐρ\ οττητΓ^ρ ϊτω. 
 τταίΒων δε των μβν άρσβνων μη μοι^ Κ/^εοζ^, 
 ττροσθη μέριμναν' ανδρβς· βΙσΙν, ώστε μη 
 σττάνίν ΤΓΟτβ (7'χ€Ϊν, €νθ^ αν ώσι^ του βίου' 
 ταΐν S’ άθλίαιν οίκτραΐν τε τταρθίνοιν ίμαΐν^ 
 (αίν οΰ ΤΓοθ^ ημη χωρίί ίστάθη βοράς 
 τράτΓβζ’ avev τονδ’ άνδρος, αλλ’ όσων βγω 
 
 1458 . οπηπ€ρ Br. Dind. οττοιπβρ 
 El. (whom see), onoinep Ebner’s 
 MSS. WUND. 
 
 1459-60. To the troubles already- 
 pressing upon CEdipus, Creon was 
 not unlikely to enjoin him solicitude 
 about his family. CEdipus depre¬ 
 cates any such superaddition of 
 trouble (for so the words προσθί} 
 μίριμναν seem necessarily to be un¬ 
 derstood) on the part of his two 
 sons, fof they being arrived at man’s 
 estate could take care of them¬ 
 selves ; but in the most pathetic 
 terms recommends to his care his 
 two infant daughters, (περί may be 
 understood at παίδων, but is not 
 1 think absolutely necessary.) 
 
 1460. ττροσθη μέριμναν —ne mihi 
 adde curam s. impone. El. “ Scri- 
 bendum προθτ} cum Elmsleio, qui 
 comparat Electr. 1334. vvv δ’ εύλά- 
 β(ΐαν τώΐ'δε προυθβμηρ ε’γώ.” Dind. 
 Hermann, after noticing a mistrans¬ 
 lation of Elmsley, and observing that 
 ττροσθίσθαι μέριμναν does not signify 
 curam curce additam habere, but 
 curam sibi addere, subjoins, that 
 though the learned writer’s conjec¬ 
 ture is very probable in itself, yet as 
 all MSS. concur in the present read¬ 
 
 ing, we are not to consider it as a 
 wrong one. 
 
 Ib, μέριμναν. In the Pindaric 
 writings this word is not unfre- 
 quently applied to the anxious con¬ 
 cern and endeavours of those who 
 laboured to excel in the sacred 
 games. 01 . 1 . 174. Pyth. VIII. 131. 
 Nem. III. 121. 
 
 Ib. &vbp€s, men, as opposed to 
 women. Cf. Antig. 484. El. 997. 
 Aj. 1182, &c. &c. 
 
 1461. σττάνιν €χ€ΐν = σ7Γανίζ€ΐν, to 
 be in want of, to be without. 
 
 1463. x<op\s έστάθη, has been set 
 apart. 
 
 1463-4. βοράς i. e. τροπής τράπεζα, 
 eating-table, cf. Matth. §. 316, f. 
 and §.355, c. Pind. Scol. fr. 8. 
 (Dissen’s edit.) 
 
 Ib. avev τοίδ’ άνδρος, meaning 
 himself. 
 
 1464. τράπΐξα. The table of 
 CEdipus and its accompaniments,— 
 both heir-looms,—seem to have been 
 of that magnificent description, 
 which might be expected in a regal 
 family coming from the wealthy 
 shores of Tyre and “ Sidon. Hence 
 the author of the Cyclic The- 
 baid : 
 
 u What says the prophetic writer of the Tyrian Prince Ithobal ? “ Every precious stone 
 has been thy covering, the ruby, the topaz, and the diamond, the beryl, the onyx, and 
 the jasper, the sapphire, the emerald, and the carbuncle.” Ezech. XXVIII. 13. (Newcome). 
 Where the equipment of the pei*son was such, Avere the decorations of the table likely to 
 be on a less magnificent scale ? But we have only to look to the vastness and strength 
 of the Atrean treasuries (Kruse’s Atlas, pi. i.) to conjecture what must have been the 
 wealth of ancient Argive and Theban monarchs, both of them coming from Egyptian 
 and Phoenician shores. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 179 
 
 ψαυοιμι, ττάντωρ τώνδ' ael μ€Τ€ίχ€την') 1465 
 
 αίι/ μοί μζλβσθαί’ καΐ μάλιστα μίν χβροΐρ 
 
 β> 
 
 ψανσαί μ eaaov, κάττοκλαυσασθαι κακά, 
 
 ώ yovfj γ€ΡΡαΪ€, χΕρσΙ τάν Θιγων 
 ^οκοϊμ ίχβίΡ σφά?, ωσπβρ ηνίκ^ ίβλζττον. 1470 
 
 τί φημί ; 
 
 ού δη κλυω ττου 7 rpo 9 θβώρ τοΐρ μοι φίλοιρ 
 δακρνρροούρτοίρ, καί μ* ίττοικτ^ίρας Υ^,ράων 
 ΟΓβμφβ μοί τά φίΧτατ Ικγόνοιρ βμοίν ; 
 
 Αυτάρ 6 ^ίογίνης ηρως ^av6os Πολυ- 
 νξίκης 
 
 ηρώτα pep Oldinodi καΧηρ τταρζβηκε 
 τράπ€ζαρ 
 
 άργνρ€ηρ, Κάδ/χοίο Oeocppopos' ανταρ 
 eneura 
 
 Xpvaeop €ρπ\ησ€Ρ καΧορ δβττας rjbeos 
 οίρου. Athen. XI. 465, f. 
 
 (Why this proceeding should have 
 brought down the curses of the 
 angry monarch upon his sons, it 
 will be time to inquire in a future 
 drama.) 
 
 1466. alp (gl. τοντωρ). WuND. 
 Dind. Ebn. MSS. ταϊρ Br. 
 
 Ib. peKeadac, infin. for imper. sup. 
 462. CEd. Col. 484. El. 9.396. Phil. 
 1411. 
 
 €\αφραρ κνπάρισσορ (piXeeip, 
 cap δβ popop Κρητας nepiBalop, 
 
 Find. Fgmm. Incert. 23. 
 
 1468. Iff ωραξ. A bacchiac verse, 
 as also 1471. 
 
 1469. yopfj yeppatos seems to imply 
 a person noble in disposition, because 
 noble in birth: ρηδβρ ωρ yopoiaip 
 (Aj. 1093.) implying merely mean 
 birth. The interpretation of Erfurdt 
 and Herm., tjui non es incestis pa- 
 rentibus geniius, is more ingenious 
 than solid, for that would rather im¬ 
 ply that CEdipus himself had been 
 
 born of incestuous parents, which 
 he was not. Cf. El. in voc. yoprj. 
 
 Ib. χ^ροΊ K. r. λ. 
 
 Ah, dear son Edgar, 
 Might I but live to see thee in my 
 
 touch, 
 
 I’d say, I had my eyes again. 
 
 Gloucester, in King Lear, 
 
 1470. The two infant daughters of 
 CEdipus (the Antigone and Ismene, 
 who are afterwards to furnish us 
 with so much intellectual delight) 
 are here brought upon the stage : 
 their audible sobbing reaching the 
 paternal ears, CEdipus exclaims as 
 in the verse following. 
 
 1471. Tt φηρ'ι z= 'λiyω τι (v. 1 475.) 
 
 are my words true ? am I deceived^ 
 or do I augur right? τι is not, I 
 think, interrogative here any more 
 than in Find. Pyth. X. 5. n κορπ 4 (ΰ 
 παρα καιρορ, do I make any unreason¬ 
 able boast ? 
 
 1472-3. TOLP pot φΙΧοίρ {my 
 daughters) δακρνρρ. The Scholiast 
 notices the Attic use of a plural 
 masculine for a plural feminine. 
 
 1474. τα φίλτατ eKy. ep. The un- 
 hapj^y parent already has an in¬ 
 stinctive feeling, that though his 
 sons might prove traitors, his daugh¬ 
 ters would devote themselves to him 
 with unflinching duty and affection. 
 
 N 2 
 
180 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 λέγω η ; ^475 
 
 ΚΡ. XiyeL9, eyco yoip ο ττοραυνα^ ταδβ^ 
 
 yvovs την Trapovcrav T€py^LV^ η o' ^t,y£V ttclXcll. 
 
 OI. άλλ’ €ντνχοίη9, καί oe τησδε της οδού 
 
 1476. The wide intervals, at which 
 the Sophoclean portraits of Creon 
 were produced, necessarily engen¬ 
 dered some variety in the drawing of 
 them. In the present drama Creon 
 is little more than a cold reasoner and 
 calculator, nice in his distinctions and 
 definitions, and sufficiently rhetori¬ 
 cal in his expositions of them. In 
 the GEdipus Coloneus, he becomes, 
 with no small display of oratorical 
 powers, a finished sophist, capable 
 of giving any colouring to his 
 thoughts by the power of words, 
 and ready to eflfect by force and 
 violence what he cannot achieve by 
 treachery and dissimulation. The 
 X Antigone exhibits him as one of the 
 most hateful of tyrants—carrying 
 misery into the bosom of his own 
 family, contumeliously spurning at 
 the man who has helped him in 
 authority, and in the plenitude of 
 power, opposing himself to one of 
 the most sacred of human obhga- 
 tions. That this picture of Abso¬ 
 lutism was well calculated to please 
 the poet’s audience, there can be no 
 doubt: but is it fraught with no in¬ 
 struction to us.^ It surely teaches 
 (and it is not the highest lesson 
 which may be drawn from that ad¬ 
 mirable composition), that though 
 uncontrolled power may by accident 
 be kind and paternal in its character, 
 yet political wisdom requires, that 
 the greatest of civil blessings should 
 not be left to accident and chance. 
 
 but that Sovereigns should be bound 
 by oaths and obligations as strictly 
 as their subjects. But to come 
 to our more immediate object. That 
 the character of Creon could at no 
 time have found much favour in the 
 eyes of Sophocles, is obvious from 
 the above brief sketch : whence then 
 the present softening in its favour ? 
 I answer, from dramatic necessity. 
 The poet knew that he had here the 
 means of furnishing a scene of the 
 most exquisite pathos, and as that 
 scene could not be furnished without 
 the consent of Creon, the new Abso¬ 
 lute of Thebes, who begrudges a little 
 inconsistency of character—if in¬ 
 deed there is inconsistency—when 
 necessary for such a purpose? The 
 reader, who wishes to enlarge his 
 intellectual enjoyments, will com¬ 
 pare this closing scene of the CEdi- 
 pus Tyrannus with that of the 
 “ Hercules Furens” of Euripides. 
 
 1477. I understand: “ having 
 known the present pleasure to be 
 that for which you have been long 
 anxious.” 
 
 Ib. TepyfrLv. Eurip. Phoen. 321. 
 ΤΓύύζ ...Tcp'^iv ττάΚαιάν λαβω ^appovav', 
 Ib. exei. WuND. eixev. Dind. EbN. 
 
 -my care provided this de¬ 
 light. 
 
 Assured of old what joy their pre¬ 
 sence gave thee. Dale. 
 
 1478. {eveKo) τησ 8 € τηί όδον. 
 ScHOL. ηί €π€μψας δηλονότι ras κόρας. 
 
 ^ It need scarcely be observed, that though the Antigone is here mentioned last, it was 
 in fact the poet’s first production of these three dramas. Internal evidence, as well as 
 historical traditions, prove that at least ten years must have elapsed between the exhi¬ 
 bitions of the Antigone and the (Edipus Tyrannus. Cf. Scholl’s “ Beitrage zur Kenntniss 
 der Tragischen Poesieder Griechen.” p. 169. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 181 
 
 δαίμων άμεινον η * με φρονρησας τύχοι. 
 
 
 'ΐ / Λ >» V\ /ι 
 
 ω τεκνα^ που ποτ εστε ; οευρ ιτ , ελβετε 
 
 0 
 
 00 
 
 >-· 
 
 ως τάς άδελφάς τάσδε τάς εμάς χ^ρας, 
 
 
 αϊ του φυτουργοϋ πατρος ύμΐν ώδ’ οράν 
 
 
 τά πρόσθε λαμπρά πρού^ενησαν ομματα' 
 
 
 ^ f \ 9 / » J//)* « V/iJ t ' 
 
 ος υμιν, ω τεκν , ουεί ορών ουσ ιστορων 
 
 
 πατήρ εφάνθην ενθεν αυτός ηρόθην. 
 
 1485 
 
 KOLL σφω δακρύω' ΤΓροσβλ 4 ττ€ίν γαρ ού σθβνω' 
 ΐΌούμβιΌί τά λοιπά του πικρού βίου^ 
 
 οιον βιώναι σφω προ 9 ανθρώπων γρ^ών, 
 
 ποιας- γάρ αστών ηζβτ €ΐς ομιλίας 
 
 ποιας δ^ βορτάς, βνθβν ού κβκλανμβναι 1490 
 
 προς οίκον 1 ^€σ& αντί της θβωρίας ; 
 
 άλλ* ηνίκ αν δη προς γάμων ηκητ άκμάς, 
 
 κ 
 
 τις ούτος βσται, τις παραρριψζΐ, τβκνα, 
 
 » 
 
 τοιαύτ ονείδη λαμβάνων^ a τοΐς εμοΐς 
 
 ΐ. e. for this their coming. And so 
 Ellendt understands the passage. 
 But the words may be better taken, 
 I think, in a Pindaric sense: for 
 this proceeding, for this mode of act¬ 
 ing. For examples of the words 
 όδόί and KeXevdos thus occurring in 
 Pindar, see Dissen’s Comment, p. 
 213, and cf. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1397. 
 1506. El. 68. 1295. 13 14. See also 
 Lowth’s Isaiah, c. X. 24. 26. and 
 note: also Blayney’s Jerem. XXXII. 
 39. and note, p. 233. 
 
 1479. δαί/χων. Here, deity, as effi¬ 
 cacious in directing the affairs of man, 
 whether in a good or bad sense. 
 
 1481. = πρός. Trach. 532. 
 
 Bvpaios ηΧθον cos vpas. A pause be¬ 
 fore the wretched man can utter the 
 word άδίΧφάς. 
 
 1482-3. ωδ’ όραν, thus to see, i. e. 
 not to see at all. Wund. I under¬ 
 stand : thus to be seen by you. 
 
 1483 · τα Trpoade Χαμπρά ομματα, 
 once brilliant eyes. 
 
 Ib. προνξ€νησαν. ScHOL. ; rrepie- 
 ποίησαν, elpyaaavTO, αίτιοι eyivovTO. 
 
 Cf. Kreug. ad Xen. Anab. VI. 3, 14. 
 also (Ed. Col. 465. Trach. 726. 
 
 1484. οϋβ" όρων ονβ' ίστορων, 
 neither eye nor tongue—neither in¬ 
 vestigating matters myself, nor ask¬ 
 ing of ot\iQr^,= Ignorantly, uncon¬ 
 sciously. 
 
 1488. σφω, masculine dual for 
 feminine. Cf. Matth. §. 436. Erf. 
 
 Ib. προς ανθρώπων, ab hominibus 
 sive per homines. Wund. 
 
 1490. πoίas δ’ iopras Cf. 
 
 Electr. 982. Eurip. Here. Fur.* 1 283. 
 
 Ib. KCKXavpevai, bathed in tears. 
 Cf.-Esch. Choeph. 455. 729. 
 
 1491. άντΧ της θεωρίας, in return 
 for the pleasure which the spectacle 
 has afforded you. 
 
 1493-4. παραρρίφζΐ — Χαμβάνων 
 
182 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 γορβνσιν ίσται σφών θ ομοϋ δηληματα ; 
 τί yap κακών anecm ; τον ττατβρα ττατηρ 
 υμών €π6φν€’ την τβκονσαν ηροσεν 
 οθεν 7 Γ€ρ αυτοί εστταρη, κάκ των \σων 
 εκτησαθ* νμαί, ώνττερ αυτοί εζεφυ, 
 τοιαυτ ονείδιεΐσθβ. κατα τίί γαμβΐ^ 
 ουκ βστίν ουοείί, ω τεκν ^ αλλα οηλαοη 
 γερσουί φθαρηναί κάγάμουί ύμάί γρεών, 
 ω τταί Ήίενοίκεωί, άλλ* eVet μονοί ττατηρ 
 ταυταιν λελειψαι^ νω γαρ^ ω *φυτεύσαμεν, 
 ολώλαμεν δυ οντε. μη σφε ττεράδηί 
 
 1495 
 
 
 
 τΓτωχαί ανανορουί εγγενεΐί αλωμεναί^ 
 
 1500 
 
 1505 
 
 κ. τ. i. ScHOL.: ris \αμβάνων νμας eh 
 ywaiKas Trapoyf/eTai τοιαυτ 6 ν€ώη. Br. 
 τις τΐαραρρΙ>\τ€ΐ—Χαμβάνωρ quis adeo 
 projecta erit impudentia (ut) &c. 
 Dindorf adopts Brunck^s interpre¬ 
 tation. Comparing, therefore, con¬ 
 struct. sup. 1323, I translate: who 
 will have the boldness to take to him 
 such reproaches ? 
 
 1494—5. rots epoh yovevai (sc. 
 Laius and Jocasta) : σφων yovevat 
 (CEdipus himself, and Jocasta). 
 
 Ib. ^ηΧηματα, causes of ruin. Od. 
 XII. 286. 8 ηΧηματα νηών. Boimer 
 translates ; which will bring a curse 
 upon your parents and mine. 
 
 1497-8. rjpoaev K.T.e. translate: 
 ** wedded her from whose bosom 
 himself had sprung.” As a Pindaric 
 word applied to the fields of the 
 Muses ploughed by poets, see the 
 beautiful exordium of the sixth 
 Pythiah Ode, (where the poet seems 
 in doubt, whether to compose the 
 usual song of triumph^ or to substi¬ 
 tute an amatory song instead,) and 
 Nem. VI. 55. X. 49. 
 
 1498. eK των ίσων. ScHOL. 4 κ τής 
 άρονρης τής αυτής. Translate : “ and 
 
 derived you from the same parent 
 from whom myself was born.” 
 
 1500. τοιαυτ* oveiSieiaSe = τοιαϋτα 
 ον€ίδη Χήψ€σ'θ€. 
 
 1502. χέρσος, used adjectively of 
 a hard and strong soil: (Antig. 251.) 
 here applied to an unmarried female, 
 who remains without ofispring. 
 Translate: childless. 
 
 Ib. φθαρήναι, perire, pessum ire. 
 WuND. {φθ€ίρ€σθαι is used princi¬ 
 pally in the Greek language of those 
 who travel to their injury. Ellendt 
 refers to Br. in loco. Bergl. ad 
 Alciphr. I. 13. Abresch. ad ^sch. 
 Pers. 450. Lennep ad Phalar. p.351.) 
 
 Ib. κάγάμους, used after χέρσους 
 by the schema vaTepoXoyla. 
 
 1505* οΧώΧαμβν δυ ovTe. Jocasta 
 actually dead, himself virtually dead. 
 
 Ib. ττ€ριιδ€Ϊν, to overlook^ to neglect, 
 παρίδρς, Libr. Ebn. MSS. See Her¬ 
 mann on the passage. 
 
 1506. τΓτωχας άνανδρους eyyeveh 
 άΧωμ€νας. Dindorf, dissatisfied with 
 this arrangement, proposes to read 
 eKyeveh, a change which seems to 
 be uncalled for. In a former publi¬ 
 cation (Frogs of Arist. p. 294.) I 
 
ΟΙΔ1ΠΟΤΣ ΊΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 183 
 
 μηδ* Άσωσης τασδβ τοΪ 9 €μοΪ9 κακοΪ9. 
 άλλ* οϊκτισον ΐτφα9, ωδβ τηλίκασδ ορών 
 ττάντων ίρημον9^ ττλην ο(Τον το σον μ€ρο9· 
 
 ^uwevcToVy ώ γβνναΐε^ cry xj/avo'as' χ^ρ^· ^5^^ 
 
 σφων δ\ ώ τ€κν\ d μίν βΐχετην ηδη φρβνα^, 
 
 ΤΓολλ* άν Trapyvovv νυν δβ τουτ βιίχβσθβ μοί 
 ου καιροί άβί ζην, βίου δβ Xcoovos^ 
 ύμας κυρησαι του φυτβύσαντο^ ττατρό^. 
 
 ΚΡ. αλί?, ϊν e^ry/cei? δακρύων, άλλ’ ίθι στ€γη9 βσω. 15^5 
 ΟΙ. 7 Γ€ίστ€ον, κβΐ μηδβν ηδύ. ΚΡ. τταντα γαρ καιρω καλα. 
 
 ' <L· 
 
 endeavoured to call attention to 
 iEscliylus’s mode of accumulating 
 epithets, two, three, and even six 
 together, without any copulative 
 y conjunction. That this arrange¬ 
 ment, though occasionally abused by 
 the dithyrambic poets, had its own 
 propriety in languages, like the 
 ancient, addressed to auditors, and 
 not to readers, (a point of much 
 moment in considering the struc¬ 
 ture of those languages,) there can 
 be little doubt: coupling, therefore, 
 this general remark with a rule 
 previously laid down (sup. 192.), 
 I think that this verse would convey 
 to Attic ears the following sense, 
 but under a form more agreeable 
 to them than our own plain ver¬ 
 sion; “wandering in poverty and 
 unblest singleness, though members 
 of your family.” Trach. 299. ravras 
 όρώστ] ^νσπότμονί eV'i ξίνηί | χώρας 
 άοίκονς άττάτοράς r άΧωμ^νας. Eur. 
 Phoen. 1753· anapOivevT αΧωμίνα. 
 
 1507. Ne eadem quam ego patior, 
 calamitaie illas vexari sine. El. 
 τάσδ? i. e. τα rcjvde κακά. W^UND. 
 coll. Matth. §. 453. not. i. 
 
 1508—9. ωδ’ έρημους (^so destitute) 
 τηΧικάσδ" {and at such a tender age). 
 τηΧικάσ 8 €, ScHOL. μικράς. 
 
 1510. στ; ψαίιαας χ^ρί·· On this 
 proceeding as a proof of plighted 
 faith, see Eurip. Med. 21. Heracl. 
 308. Hel. 839. cf. sup. 760. (Creon 
 performs what is requested of him.) 
 
 15 I I. el μ^ν (Ιχίτην φρίνας. “ Were 
 you capable of understanding those 
 admonitions.” On the dual form 
 (Ιχζτην, see Elmsley ad Arist. Ach. 
 733. and Eurip. Med. 1041. 
 
 1512 . TOVT evxeaOe μοι = 
 
 TvyxaveTe ντΐ €μον, receive this pvayev 
 on my behalf. Cf. Schol. and Matth. 
 §. 495, d. 
 
 1313. ov καιρός, where it is jor 
 your advantage. Musgrave com¬ 
 pares Electr. 1259. Libanius II. 
 
 376, a. ov καιρός, σνγκαθίζομ€ν. 
 
 1515. άΧις, Iv €ξηκ€ΐς δακρύων, 
 satis jam lachrymasti. Heath. 
 Eurip. Here. F. 1394. άνίστασ, ω 
 bvaryve’ δακρύων δ’ αλι?. (Further in¬ 
 stances of hexameters in the Sopho- 
 clean dramas occur in (Ed. Col. 
 887-891. Philoct. 1402-1408.) 
 
 1516. πάντα yap καιρω {at apropei 
 
 y Dissen has also called attention to the subject in the Pindai’ic writings, collecting 
 examples, and explaining them with his usual erudition and good taste. Comment. 
 "TOA sq. 
 
 N 4 
 
184 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 οίσθ" €0* ο\ς ονν βίμι; ΚΡ. Ae^ets*, καί τ6τ ^ίσομαί 
 κλύων, 
 
 γη9 μ οττως πβμψβίί αττοίκον, ΚΡ. του Oeov μ αΙτ€ίς 
 δόσιρ. 
 
 άλλα Oeols γ βχθίστο^ ηκω, ΚΡ. τοιγαρουν rev^H 
 ταχα, 
 
 φης τάδ' ουν ; ΚΡ. α μη φρονώ γάρ ον φιλώ λβγβιν 
 μάτην. " 
 
 άπαγβ νυν μ evrevOev ηδη. ΚΡ. στ€Ϊχβ νυν, τβκνων 
 δ* άφου, 
 
 μηδαμώς ταύτας γ ίλη μου. ΚΡ. πάντα μη βούλου 
 
 κρατβιν 
 
 \ \ r / 
 
 και γαρ ακρατησας οΰ σοι τώ βίω ^vvecnrero. 
 
 season) καλά. For verbal illustra¬ 
 tions, cf. Ellendt I. 900. Whence 
 Sophocles derived some of his no¬ 
 tions on this subject, we reserve for 
 another occasion; at present we 
 content ourselves with a single one 
 from that fruitful source. 
 
 0 δε καιρυί ομοίως 
 
 παντός βχα κορνφάν. βγνων ποτέ και 
 Ίόλαον 
 
 ούκ άτιμάσαντά νιν (καιρόν SC.) επτά- 
 
 πνλοι θήβαι. Pyth. IX. 135* 
 1517· οϊς, οη what condition, 
 ei/ii I will go within. Arist. Plut. 
 1168. ε’τΓΐ τουτοις εισιω. Eur. Phoen. 
 599. επι Tols (Ιρημίνοις. Cf. Pind. 
 Pyth. IV. 33O· fTTi θανάτω. 
 
 Ib. λε|. K. T. €. Erfurdt compares 
 •iEsch. S. C. Th. 268. Χ€γοις αν ως 
 ταχιστα, και τάχ* ΐίσομαι. Plaut. 
 Pseud. II. 2, 62. “ scin’ quid te 
 orem, Syre }” “ Sciam, si dixeris.” 
 Cf. Wunder ad Philoct. 1255. 
 
 1518. όπως π€μψ€ΐς. sub. opa. 
 
 Ib. άποικον gl. ζξόριστον. (See on 
 this subject Wunder’s Preface to his 
 CEdipus Coloneus, p. 16 sq.) 
 
 1519. ηκω = adsum. Cf. El. I. 
 766. 
 
 Ib. roiy. r. r. (In what tone does 
 Creon utter this } To me it sounds 
 like a piece of cool detestable irony). 
 
 Ib. φρονώ, in mente habeo, volo, 
 El. 
 
 1521. άφου (άφίημι). ScHOL. άφι- 
 στασο, let go. (Οί dipus is still ten¬ 
 derly embracing his children). El. 
 “ Medium (sc. του άφιίναι) uno loco 
 reperitur CEd. R. 1521. ubi τέκνων δ’ 
 άφου : quod nisi arnoris haberet et 
 desiderii adsignificationem, vix dis- 
 creparet ab άφ^ς.” 
 
 1522. μη €λη (αΙρ€ΐσθαι), take not, 
 ταύτας (these), μου (from me.) 
 
 Ib. πάντα κρατύν as infr. άκράτησας 
 i. e. a €κράτησας. So also κρατΐίν 
 occurs with an accus. (Ed. Col. 
 ^ 39 · ^381. Suidas cites the ex¬ 
 pression in the text as proverbially 
 said of persons, who wish to be al¬ 
 together prosjjerous, to bask in 
 sunshine without any intervening 
 cloud. 
 
 15^3* ScHOL. δσα ν^νίκηκας, ου 
 
01ΔΙΠ0ΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 185 
 
 ΧΟ. ώ ττάτρας θηβψ evoiKOL^ λβιίσσβτ, Olbhrovs οδβ, 
 
 (os* τά κλβίν αΙνίγματ τ^δη καΐ κράτιστο^ ην άνηρ, 1525 
 
 σννην€γκ€ σοι, for your former 
 triumphs have been of no benefit to 
 you. 
 
 1524-30. No small controversy 
 has been excited among scholars and 
 critics, whether the following verses 
 are to be admitted as genuine So- 
 phoclean verses, or to be discarded as 
 partially or wholly spurious. Heath_, 
 Boivin, Camerarius, Dindorf and 
 others, have leaned more or less to 
 the two latter opinions; Hermann, 
 Thudichum, and Matthise (Constan¬ 
 tine) argue strenuously for their 
 genuineness. The two former think 
 that the tragedy could not properly 
 terminate without them ; the latter, 
 after recording the particular plea¬ 
 sure which he derives from the 
 perusal of this “locus pulcherrimus^” 
 adds, somewhat oddly, “ credo autem 
 minus pulchrum eum visurum esse, 
 si minus sanus, et minus sanum, si 
 minus pulcher visus esset.” With all 
 submission to three such high autho¬ 
 rities, it appears to me, that the 
 auditor might safely have been left to 
 draw his own moral from what he 
 had heard, without these half-dozen 
 verses lieing tacked on, which seem 
 to justify Longinus’s declaration, that 
 even in the midst of grandeur and 
 sublimity, both Pindar and Sophocles 
 could make an occasional tumble 
 (De Sublim. §.33.) The arguments 
 relating to the controversy will be 
 found in the “ Quccstiones Sopho- 
 clese ” of Matthice : it is less within 
 the scope of the present undertaking 
 to enter into the dispute than to 
 endeavour to make the verses them¬ 
 selves intelligible to the reader. 
 
 Ib. θηβης. Observations on the 
 use of this name by Sophocles are 
 reserved for a future play. 
 
 lb. (voiKoi. Soph. Trach. 1092. 
 
 Nepeas Volkov . . Xeovra. The word 
 is of much more frequent occurrence 
 in the writings of jEschylus and 
 Euripides. 
 
 1525. ra iiXeiV αινίγματα. W^e 
 have for some time lost sight of the 
 Ascrean poet, from whose writings, 
 as well as those of his illustrious 
 countryman, it was proposed to illus¬ 
 trate the present drama; and with¬ 
 out disrespect to that great moral 
 and philosophic poet, we may add, 
 that we should have been content 
 to lose sight of him altogether, had 
 the deep tragic tone which pervades 
 the later scenes of this noble drama 
 been left to operate upon us undis¬ 
 turbed. But the hexametrical verses, 
 which seem so satisfactory to Her¬ 
 mann and Thudichum, having snapped 
 the chain, which had previously held 
 our own minds in bondage, we 
 shall perhaps give less offence to 
 others, if we amuse an idle moment 
 by inquiring, whether, in the enig¬ 
 matic Sphinx the language of 
 Hesiod and Sophocles allows us to 
 see any thing more than a volcanic 
 mountain, which had recentlv burst 
 forth, carrying terror and desolation 
 to all around—philosophers of course 
 excepted. The pinions of the 
 “ winged girl” will create no surprise 
 to those who know the heights to 
 which such mountains carry their 
 productions, and the velocity with 
 which their work is done, when once 
 they are in earnest: the lion-part of 
 her will be satisfactorily explained 
 by future references to the Leo Ne- 
 maeensis, her own brother by the 
 mother’s side; and for the virgin- 
 face, if we cannot othemise dispose 
 of it, the reader must be content to 
 imagine, that being the youngest of 
 the breed, this Sphinx had been for 
 
186 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ocrTL9 ον ττοΧίτών kcll τν^αΐί eTrt/SAeTTcoi^,) 
 
 some time the pet-volcano of philo¬ 
 sophic eyes. And now to more 
 recondite proofs of our assertion, 
 taking in this as well as many pre¬ 
 ceding matters of far more import¬ 
 ance, the learned Siclder as “our 
 Tyrian cynosure and star Boeotian.” 
 
 Among the earlier elementary dei¬ 
 ties in Hesiod’s Theogony, who de¬ 
 rive their offspring from legitimate 
 wedlock, and not from spontaneous 
 or individual creation, stand a most 
 respectable couple, bearing the names 
 of Phorcys and Keto (Theog. 270). 
 A very numerous progeny was the 
 issue of their joint loves ; how could 
 it be otherwise, since the male deity 
 was by etymology “ the separating 
 or decomposing '^principle,” and the 
 female that portion of atmospheric 
 ^ space, in which float the electri¬ 
 cal fluid and other matters; the 
 epithet of “ beautiful-cheeked” (καλ- 
 \ΐ7Γάρηο5^ being added to her name, 
 in allusion to the various and ever- 
 changing colours which atmospheric 
 space exhibits ? Dropping any 
 further notice of some eight or 
 ten of their progeny, whose Phoe¬ 
 nician etymologies, however, would 
 evince how deeply the philosophy 
 of that people had entered into the 
 principles of electricity, the origin of 
 thunder and lightning, and the 
 formation of clouds,—sucking-clouds, 
 rain-clouds, concussion-clouds, &c.— 
 we come at once to their daughter 
 Echidna, and their son-in-law, Ty- 
 phaon, whose union introduces us 
 to six grandchildren, of whom the 
 
 Sphinx was one; and who, with her 
 brother, the Leo Nemeceus, we are 
 obliged to state, were not more 
 creditably begotten than the chil¬ 
 dren of CEdipus '^himself. Echidna, 
 like so many other primeval deities 
 of Hesiod, bears a name void of ety¬ 
 mological meaning in the Greek lan¬ 
 guage, but when traced to her set¬ 
 tlement among the Arimoi (Theog. 
 V. 301.), and consequently to Ara- 
 mean roots, she presently becomes 
 the “ freckled” or “ the spotted” 
 one (Sickler’s Cadmus, p. 52. Ge- 
 sen. I. 58.); passing in general 
 language for the head of the snake 
 and dragon tribe, but in symbolical 
 language, representing all those ser¬ 
 pentine windings and fissures which 
 extended from the two Syrias 
 through Lycia, Lydia, and elsewhere, 
 and were the cause of those nume¬ 
 rous convulsions and earthquakes in 
 ancient days, to which Strabo has ad¬ 
 verted (L. XII. XIII. XVI. ad fin.). 
 Typhaon is too well known in his 
 modern name of Typhoon—i. e. as a 
 storm-wind, rising suddenly from 
 the earth and sweeping-all before it— 
 to occasion any doubt as to what his 
 etymology ought to be ; and we have 
 only to add, that in the same Phoe¬ 
 nician tongue, his name closely 
 answers to the definition here given 
 of him. Two persons better calcu¬ 
 lated to be the parents of a set of 
 volcanic eruptions cannot well be 
 imagined; let us pass their six 
 poetic children successively before 
 us, to see how far they answer this 
 
 S' From p“iD, to splits to set free, and the terminating (which has been elsewhere ex¬ 
 plained,) comes Phork-os, “ the separating and decomposing power.” (Kadmus, p. 41.) 
 a Cf. “ Cadmus,” p. 41. The derivation depends upon too many minutiae to admit ot 
 
 our here going into the subject. i · i 1 
 
 b The object of this union in the primeval myth is obviously to connect electrical and 
 
 volcanic appearances. That purpose is still further effected by establishing a close con¬ 
 nexion between Orthos and Geryon. 
 
01ΔΙΠ0ΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 187 
 
 els' οσορ κλνδωνα δεινής συμφοράς ίΧηλυθεν. 
 
 account. We shall take the brood 
 in that order which will best assist 
 us in coming to a conclusion on the 
 subject, without regarding rights of 
 seniority, or other arrangements 
 which might place the matter in a 
 more logical and scientific point of 
 view. That the Chimcera, with its 
 three heads of dragon, goat and 
 lion, was a volcano—the dragon re¬ 
 presenting the symbolical founda¬ 
 tion of such mountains, the goat its 
 middle or more accessible part, and 
 the lion its summit or head,—is now 
 generally admitted; were there in 
 fact a doubt, that doubt would be sa¬ 
 tisfied by the large details into which 
 Sickler has entered respecting the 
 Leo Nemeceus, who, it has been be¬ 
 fore hinted, was a son of Echidna, 
 and by one of her own offspring. 
 That all the Greek words λβωι/, 
 λβίωρ, Xis, are of Semitic origin, is 
 unquestionable—that the epithet at¬ 
 tached by Hesiod to the word λ^ων 
 comes also from the same language, 
 is pretty clear—but to prove, as 
 SicUer has most ingeniously done 
 (Cadmus, p. 57 sq.), that in these 
 two words we have but collaterally 
 to deal with the well-known Pelo¬ 
 ponnesian hon of that name, the 
 primary idea of the words Leo Ne- 
 mceus being that of a volcano in full 
 roar, would lead us into lengths 
 utterly incompatible with our present 
 limits. And thus far for two of the 
 breed. Our imaginations have been 
 so long accustomed to see in Cerberus 
 the mere guardian of the infernal re¬ 
 gions, that it requires some strength 
 of mind to recognize him in his 
 original office; and yet if any one 
 has seen Mount iEtna or Mount 
 Vesuvius in full play of flame and 
 
 voice, he will be at no loss to ima¬ 
 gine, whence the idea of a barking 
 hell-dog first arose. Orthos, the 
 fourth of this hot and noisy stock, 
 will create us little difficulty. When 
 we find him characterised by Hesiod 
 as a dog, attendant on the triple and 
 electric Geryon (Sickler 51-2. 4.), 
 we are at no loss to guess what his 
 original occupation and office were. 
 We have now only the Lernsean 
 Hydra and Sphinx, or, as Hesiod 
 terms her, the Phix, to deal with. 
 Of the bog-volcano and its conical 
 hills, we say nothing, that we may 
 address ourselves without further 
 delay to the object of our search. 
 And first for etymology. “ From the 
 verb rtifQ (Phitzeh), to open widely,'' 
 says the learned Sickler, “ comes 
 the word Phi {a mouth) and that 
 this mouth was not the mouth of 
 a compound form, bearing the face 
 of a young virgin and the body of a 
 lion (of all which, by the way, He¬ 
 siod says nothing), but the crater 
 of a volcano, discoursing such lion¬ 
 like sounds as volcanos usually do— 
 is, we trust, apparent from all that 
 has been previously advanced. But 
 did Hesiod elsewhere acknowledge 
 this Phix to be a mountain ? Let the 
 reader turn to his Scutum Herculis 
 (v. 32-3.): let him compare the poet’s 
 Ύνφαόνιον and Φίκιον άκρότατον with 
 an observation made by a scholiast 
 in Pindar ( 01 . IV. 11 .), and then 
 judge whether not only a mountain, 
 but a burning mountain is meant by 
 those terms; and that Sophocles, 
 however he might feelhimself obliged 
 to deal with the Sphinx as a poet, 
 knew her as an antiquarian to be such 
 a mountain, is also pretty evident; 
 why else does he term her in the 
 
 c η δ’ &pa (Ekihidna sc.) Φ 7 κ oKo^v t 4 k€, Καδμ^ίοισ^ 6\ίθρορ. Thcog. 326. 
 
188 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ωστ€ Θνητόν οντ Ικ^Ινην την τ^Χ^υταίαν Ιδβΐν 
 
 present drama (ν. ι66.) φλόγα ττημα- 
 τβς, a fire of bale, or a baleful fire ? 
 But the enigma and its solution— 
 how are they to be disposed of ? When 
 facts once give way to fiction, it is 
 difficult to say, when and how fable 
 first begins ; but let us suppose some 
 CEdipus of the day, equally gifted 
 with the love of science and of 
 poetry, ascending the Phix with a 
 view to explore its mysteries. In 
 some parts he walks erect, in others 
 he uses the support of his staff, in 
 others he is obliged to descend to 
 the less dignified posture of all-fours: 
 meantime, certain mysterious and 
 enigmatical sounds are continually 
 operating in his ears, and when we 
 remember what effects a succession 
 of hammerings produced on the mu¬ 
 sical ears of Pythagoras and <1 Han¬ 
 del, and further consider that the 
 taste of Qidipus’s day ran much into 
 poetical riddles, I see no reason why 
 the musings of our supposed philo¬ 
 sopher and poet should not have 
 clothed themselves in that identical 
 set of hexameters, which, if they 
 have not preserved the philosophic 
 portion of the subject, have kept 
 alive the poetic part of it. Whether 
 it results from all this, that CEdipus 
 was the prince of scientific men in 
 his day, and that by contriving to 
 cover up and stop the Phix’s vomit¬ 
 ings, he derived his name, as Sickler 
 derives it, from the word to 
 cover, I do not take upon myself to 
 say ; but if any modern man of sci¬ 
 ence can perform a similar feat with 
 mount Hitna, Hecla, or Vesuvius, no 
 one, I think, would begrudge him 
 the first vacant throne in Europe 
 for his ingenuity, even though no 
 
 widowed Jocasta should form an ad¬ 
 dition to his prize. 
 
 Ib. κράτιστος, most eminent. Herm. 
 Matthiae (Const.) considers the for¬ 
 titude of CEdipus to be as much in¬ 
 timated by this epithet, as his wisdom 
 in the preceding sentence, os τα κ. 
 alv. η. and his justice in the verse fol¬ 
 lowing ; a triplicity of commendation, 
 which, if correct, gives more dignity 
 to this little epilogue, than most 
 readers, I imagine, will be inclined 
 to give it on the first perusal. 
 
 1526. όσης == os. Cf. EUendt 
 
 II. 387. 
 
 Ib. ζηλώ, invidiously. Cf. sup. 51. 
 άσφαλβία. 405. opyrj. 434. (τχολη 
 491. βασάνω. 12 28. καθαρμω. l^^g. 
 rjdopa. So also Electr. 233. Phil. 
 1322. cvvola, {benevolently). Antig. 
 1003. φονα^, (murderously). Phil. 
 538. ανάγκη, necessarily, &c. &c. For 
 Hesiodean opinions on the word 
 ζ^fλos, see his Op. 193 sq. How 
 deeply the passion itself pervaded 
 antiquity, a future drama will give 
 an opportunity of examining. 
 
 Ib. πολιτών κα\ rvxais. Seager, 
 Matthiae, and Ellendt, agree in sub¬ 
 stituting πολιτών Tals Tv^ais, the lat¬ 
 ter translating, “ who envied not 
 the fortunes of the citizens from a 
 cavilling disposition.” This trait in 
 CEdipodean character not a little 
 resembles one which Pindar assigns 
 to his royal friend Hiero, the excel¬ 
 lent, but far from faultless “Abso¬ 
 lute” of Syracuse. 
 
 βaσCλζvs 
 
 πpavs aaTois, ov φθονίων άγaθo2s, ξ€ΐ~ 
 
 vois δε OavyaaTos άνηρ. 
 
 Pyth. III. 124. 
 
 Ib. (πιβλβπων (sc. ην). It is more 
 usual with Sophocles to complete 
 
 d Comnieroorated in his well-known air, “ The harmonious Blacksmith. For the 
 more important effects produced on Pythagoras, see Iamb. Vit. Pyth. c. 26. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΤΤΡΑΝΝΟΣ. 
 
 189 
 
 ημέραν ίπισκοττουντα μηΒ 4 ν 6 λβίζ€ίΐ/, 7 rp\v αν 
 τβρμα τον βίου wepaay μηδβν αλγεινόν παθών. 1530 
 
 this form of expression (Philoct. 412. 
 ην ζων. 435 · τ^^νηκως ην. 444 · 
 κυρύ. 459· «^αρκουσα eWat) ; but his 
 great model of composition might 
 teach him to give it occasionally in 
 the elliptic form. Find. Pyth. X. 67. 
 φνγόντβς (sub. 6ΐσι) vnepdiKov Νερεσίΐ/. 
 01 . II. 102. el be μιν €χων (sub. eVri) 
 Tis, olbep TO μίΧλον. Cf. Dissen on 
 both places. 
 
 1527. els οσον. The sense, as 
 Matthiae explains, is to be continued 
 from V. 15 24. the two intermediate 
 verses being as it were paren¬ 
 thetical. 
 
 1528—30. Out of the various 
 poetical enunciations to a similar 
 effect (Solon. El. Eurip. Androm. 
 100. Troades 513. Suppl. 270. 
 Iph. A. 161. Here. F. 105. Antiop. 
 fr. XXXIX. 5. Ovid. Metam. III. 
 135. Ausonius inludo VII. Sapient.) 
 we content ourselves with tran¬ 
 scribing our poet’s own. Trach. 2. 
 
 ovK av αΙων €κμάθοΐ9 βροτών, πρ\ν αν | 
 Bavrj Tis, οντ' el χρηστός οντ ei τω 
 κακός. 
 
 Ib. ωστe κ. τ. e. Cf. (Ed. Col, 
 
 565· 
 
 1528—9. όπισκοπονντα ibeiv, expec- 
 tantem dum videat Erf. Instead of 
 Ibelv, Stanley (ad *Esch. Sept. c. Th.) 
 suggests ebeL. Matthiae improves 
 upon this ingenious suggestion by 
 proposing, or rather deciding for ye 
 beiv. The word TeXevTalav emphatic. 
 
 1529. okβίξeLv. -Esch. Ag. 902. 
 όΧβίσαι be χρή | βίον TeXevT^aavT' ev 
 eveaTol φίλη. Eurip. Phoen. 1703. 
 ev ημάρ p’ ωλβισ', ev b' an<a\eaev. 
 ((Edipus de seipso). Soph. Trach. 
 284. e^ ολβίων αζηλον evpovaai βίον. 
 
 1530. τόρμα του βίου. For the 
 first noun without an article, Er- 
 furdt compares (Ed. Col. 735. τόρμα 
 της σωτηρίας. Phil. 900. bυσχepeιaτυΰ 
 
 ' νοσήματος. 
 
 V 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 I. The objection made to the use of the word πάλαι as applied to Cad¬ 
 mus, will appear still more captious than I fear it does at present, if the 
 term naXaiyevei is really applied to Laius in the Phcenissse of Euripides 
 (352.). Brunck and Beck propose to read Κάδμω. 
 
 3· €^€στ€μμ€νοι. Eurip. Here. F. 526. 
 
 3. παιάνων. Solger, adverting to a popular tradition, that Sophocles had 
 the power of allaying storms and tempests, thinks that the story had pro¬ 
 bably arisen from his having been the author of some pseanic poems, which 
 had been publicly sung for the purpose of averting some public calamity. 
 We must in that case suppose that the poet’s prayers had been accom¬ 
 plished. 
 
 6. Neue compares Xenoph. Cyrop. I. 6. 2. 
 
 P. 8. The argument has been overstated in saying that the messenger was 
 dispatched by the Corinthians. His errand seems to have been a voluntary 
 performance. 
 
 9. 6 i^.€iv 6 sf a common epithet of monarchs. Eurip. Here. F. 38. 54 
 Troad. 358, &c. &c. 
 
 34. Cf. QEd. Col. 296. 
 
 20. διπλοΊς νάοις. The editors of a German prose translation of Sopho¬ 
 cles, which has just come into my hands, understand by this term a single 
 temple dedicated conjointly to the Pallas Onca, and Pallas Ismenia. On 
 the Pallas Alalcomeneis, see Parkhurst’s Heb. Lex. p. 51· 
 
 Ib. On the allies of Hebrew sacrifices the reader may consult Levit. VI. 
 II. Numb. IV. 13. XIX. 9, 10. 
 
 Ib. Παλλάδα?. Cf. Antig. 1183-5. See also Dissen’s Comment, on 
 Find. p. 438. 
 
 27. άγόνοις, κατα πρόληψιν. Cf. Aj. 69. Neue. 
 
 30. πλουτιζΐται. ...Esch. Ag. 5 ^ 9 · ^^ 39 * 
 
 36-7. “And this too (cf. Antig. 322), though no information or in¬ 
 struction on oiir part had reached you.” ημών and θ^ού emphatic, πλ^ον, 
 pleonastic. 
 
 42. αλκήν. Cf. Eurip. Here. F. 144. 326. .Esch. S. c. T. 76. 
 
 52. αΙσίω. Eurip. Here. F. 596. Find. Nem. IX. 41. 
 
 63. μόνον καθ' avrov, Kohbev άλλον, (Ed. Col. 908. EL 885· 
 
 65. Cf. Esch. S. c. T. 1-3. 
 
 70. γαμβροί. Cf. Dissen Comment, in Find. p. 420. 
 
 P. 21. A travelled friend informs me, that the German Wegstunde” is in 
 common parlance an hour’s walk, or about two miles and a half; and the 
 same friend computes the distance between Thebes and Delphi in Cramer s 
 
 o 2 
 
196 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 map to be about sixty miles, allowing for winding of the road. (Thudichum’s 
 little lapses, in sending a man of Cleon’s rank, and under such circum¬ 
 stances, on foot ΰίπά from a town so celebrated as Thebes for the excel¬ 
 lence and numbers of its carriages (Antig. 149. CEd. Col. 1062.) will not 
 escape the observing reader.) Those who know in what manner the 
 Delphic oracle was worked, and how skilfully means were adopted to 
 elicit what the object of the visitor was, before any answer was attempted 
 to be given to his inquiries, will not be surprised at Creon’s delay,— if in a 
 work of fiction it is necessary to make such a remark. 
 
 80. el yap, utinam. Pyth. I. 90. ei yap 6 nas χρόνος . . . καμάτων ΐπίλασιν 
 τταράσχοι. 
 
 82. η^ύς. Cf. Philoct. 530· 
 
 90. προ^ίίσας elpi. 126. doKovvra ην, 274* άρίσκοντα. 847 * 
 
 ρίπον. 1045. €στί ζων. 
 
 ιοο. άν 8 ρη\ατοϋντ€ς. Cf. Blomf. Gloss. in Theb. p. 164. 
 
 101. T 08 e. Cf. Hes, Op. 269. 
 
 Ib. αίμα. Murder and blood are synonyms hardly requiring illustration. 
 The Hebrew language furnishes them abundantly. Hosea IV. 2. “ blood 
 reacheth unto blood,” (i. e. there are murders committed without inter¬ 
 mission : one overtaketh another. Newc.) XII. 14. “therefore his Lord 
 will leave his blood upon him,” (i. e. therefore his murders shall be upon 
 him, and his master or conqueror shall requite them unto him. Horsley.) 
 
 107. τινάς. Dissen compares Pind. Nem. I 97. άν 8 ρων τινά τον ίχθρό. 
 τατον, hominum aliquos qui infestissimi. Add Pyth. II. 95. ί/ψιφρόνων τιν 
 €καμψζ βροτων. 
 
 1 24. ζον apyvpa, by means of money. Pyth. IV. 445. κ\ 4 ·φ€ν re Mrjbeiav 
 συν αυτά (ipsa puella juvante). 
 
 130. Pind. Isth. VIII. 25. to 8 e προ πο 86 ς άρτιον del σκοπύν χρήμα παν. 
 
 146. συν τω θ€ω, by favour of the god. Pind. Nem. VI. 40. συν deoC 
 τύχα. V. 88. Mevavbpov συν τύχα. 98. συν ζανθαΙς "Κάρισσιν. IV. I I. συν Χα- 
 ρίτων τυχα. 
 
 Ib. obe. Are we to understand CEdipus or Creon by this term ? A ges¬ 
 ture or wave of the hand would apprise the audience which was meant; 
 we must form our conjectures from other circumstances; and upon the 
 whole I agree with the German prose translators of Sophocles, that Creon 
 is intended. (The Hebrew language, from causes adverted to in the page 
 following, naturally anticipated the Greek language in every phase of 
 construction. Among others may here be mentioned the emphatic pro¬ 
 noun (Newc. Ezek. XXIII. 24.), the pronoun with no antecedent, or 
 with the antecedent at a great distance, (Newc. Ezek. XXL 30.) and 
 the deictic or demonstrative pronoun. By this latter may, I think, 
 be explained a difficult passage in Isaiah, (c. VII.) where, while a 
 greater and more distant sign is implicated, a nearer and more imme¬ 
 diate one is given. The prophet, it will be remembered, goes with 
 his son Sheaijashub to meet Ahaz, who has been deeply alarmed 
 by the unnatural combination of the Syrians and Israelites against 
 him. The prophet assures the Jewish monarch of deliverance, and de- 
 
 a A prophetic name, signifying “ The the prophet’s second child is named Maher- 
 remnant shall return,” as in a following shalal hash-baz, i. e. “ haste to the spoil, 
 chapter with equal pungency of meaning, quick to the nrev.” 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 197 
 
 sires him to ask any sign, even to the most difficult, as a proof of divine 
 interference. The monarch declining to do this, the prophet himself pro¬ 
 mulgates two signs ; the first relative to the great deliverance to be here¬ 
 after achieved by the son of a virgin, the second to be effected within a 
 very few years—“ before this child (pointing to his infant son) shall have 
 arrived at that age when good and evil are distinguished.” This, if my 
 memory does not deceive me, is Kennicotf’s interpretation of the passage.) 
 
 154. Tlaiav. Pyth. IV. 480. iaai 8 * Ιατηρ ^πικαιρότατος, ΤΙαιάν re σοι τιμά 
 φάος. V. 85. ο (Apollo sc.) και βαρζιάρ νόσων | άκίσματ αν 8 ρ€σσι και γνναιξι 
 vipd. For the Apollo Peean and hymn sung to him after deliverance from 
 pestilence, Dissen refers to Valcken. ad Eurip. Hippol. p. 313. Muller’s 
 Dor. I. p. 298. 
 
 155. άμφ\, propter. Pind. 01 . VIII. 114. IX. 20. Pyth. I. 21. VIII. 48. 
 Nem. VII. 117. 
 
 158. On the word ί\π\ς, as implying/ear as well as hope, see Dissen ad 
 Pind. Nem. I. p. 364. Cf. Hes. Op. 500. Soph. Trach. 724. 
 
 159. Though on this and many other occasions, the reader has been re¬ 
 ferred to Matthise and other Greek grammars for construction, he should 
 never forget that there is a grammar of a still higher nature which should 
 ever be present in his view, if he would read ancient authors with delight; 
 viz. that grammar which arose naturally out of compositions addressed by 
 the voice to the ear, and which necessarily differs so widely from the 
 grammar of compositions addressed through the press to the eye. Gram¬ 
 marians necessarily invent names to distinguish these constructions,— 
 Schema Atticum, schema Pindaricum, schema Alcmanicum, σχήμα npos to 
 σημαινόμ^νον, deiKTiKoos, pleonastic, &c. &c. Readers of taste, who peruse 
 ancient authors with facility, of course trouble themselves little about mere 
 names; but do they less deeply admire the beautiful collocations which 
 grew out of this necessity, and which perhaps are no where more apparent 
 than in the writings of Sophocles, where with his emphatic words of every 
 description, they constitute a never-ceasing charm } Perhaps a more 
 philosophical inquiry than has yet been instituted might be made, with a 
 view of seeing how modern languages gradually acquired difierent in¬ 
 flexions and different constructions to adapt themselves to the great change 
 of circumstances effected by printed instead of spoken languages. 
 
 P. 37. On the interchange between Hecate and Artemis, see Thudich. 
 
 P- 355 · 
 
 P. 52. The pestilence is frequently described as a blast, a hot wind, in the 
 scriptures. See inter aliaBlavney’s Jerem. IV. ii. XXII. 22. XXIII. 19. 
 XXX. 23. LI. I. 
 
 160. Cf. Diss. in Pind. p. 102. 
 
 161. ov 8 ' 'Aldas ακίνητον e^e ράβδον, 
 βρότ€α σώμαθ' a κατάγει κοιΚαν irpos ayviav 
 θνασκόντων. Pind. 01 . IX. ζο. 
 
 (Where βρότ^α is used for βροτών.) Cf. Antig. 1265. See also Qucest. 
 Soph. p. 38. and add notes by Neue, Matthiae, and Dissen at (ϋκνκλον 
 e^pav (Pind. Nem. ΙΛ^. io6.). 
 
 Ib. ΐΐ)κλάα. Cf. Pind. Pyth. IX. 96. 
 
 166. φλόγα πηματος. Lowth observes (Dissert. Prelim, to Isaiah), that 
 from our constant use of a close verbal translation, both of the Old and 
 New Testament, the English language has been gradually moulded into 
 
1P8 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 such a conformity with that of the original scriptures, that it can upon occa¬ 
 sion assume the Hebrew character without appearing forced or unnatural. 
 This is no where more observable than in the above mode of putting two 
 substantives together, instead of an adjective and substantive. A few of more 
 unusual form, which the genius of our language could not admit, are here 
 given from the Hebrew prophets. Ezek. IX. I. the weapon of his de¬ 
 struction” = his destroying weapon. XVII. 5. “field of seed”=fruitful 
 field. XX. 47. “flame of flaming” = flaming flame. XXV. 17. “rebukes 
 of fury” = furious rebukes. XXXV. 9. “ desolations of eternity”=perpe¬ 
 tual desolations. XXXIX. 11. “a place of a name” = a renowned place. 
 XLVII.5. “waters of swimming” = waters to swim in. Amos VHI. 9. “ day 
 of light”=bright day. Hosea VII. 6. “ a fire of flame” = a flaming fire. 
 Micah VI. 6. “the God of height” = High God. 10. “ ephah of leanness” 
 = scant measure. Habakkuk II. 19. “ stone of silence” = silent stone. 
 Zach. XI. 13. “a magnificence of price” = a goodly price. XII. 3. “a 
 stone of burden” =:a burdensome stone. Jerem. XXXI. 39. “ a line of the 
 measure” = a measuring line. For more common forms, see Ezekiel II. 5. 
 VIII. Ti. XVI. 12. 17. 39. 49. XVH. 8. 23. XVIII. 9. XIX. 13. 
 XX. 28. XXL 15. 23. XXII. 2. XXIII. 6. XXVI. ii. 16. XXXII. 19. 
 XLV. I. JonahII. 8. Amos II. 7. V. ii. Hosea VII. 16. XI.9. XIII. 15. 
 Micah II.9. VI. ii. Zephan. III. 13. Zech.VHI. 17. XIV.6. MalachiII.14. 
 
 170. On Pindar’s mode of terming his mind or tongue a bow, and his 
 verses arrows, see Tafel’s Dilucidationes Pindaricse, 1. 1 , p. 10, ii. 
 
 171. Pestilence and famine are almost necessary companions; but no 
 where do they appear so strikingly together as in a passage of the prophetic 
 writings. Flattered by some embassies which he had received from neigh¬ 
 bouring nations, more particularly Tyre and Sidon, the Jewish monarch 
 Zedekiah had dared to rebel against the Babylonian monarch, to whom he 
 had sworn allegiance. Another invasion followed in consequence. Terri¬ 
 fied at the consequences which might ensue, Zedekiah endeavour to pro¬ 
 pitiate the favour of Jehovah, by performing one duty at least of the sab¬ 
 batical year ; viz. that of proclaiming liberty to all Hebrew bondmen. The 
 proclamation took place under the most solemn ceremonies (Jerem. 
 XXXIV.) : but the Chaldeans withdrawing from the siege, the edict was 
 immediately withdrawn. The prophet’s commission to the perjured 
 monarch and his subjects was instantly to the following effect; “ Therefore 
 thus saith Jehovah, Ye have not hearkened unto me, in proclaiming 
 liberty every one to his brother, and every one to his neighbour; behold, 
 I proclaim liberty in regard to you, saith Jehovah, unto the sword, and 
 to the pestilence, and to the famine; and I will give you up to vexation in 
 all kingdoms of the earth.” (Blayney). That this scourge was emphatically 
 called the angel of Jehovah, cf. 2 Kings XIX. 35, and 1 Chron. XXL 12. 
 
 172. “Nor by means of births do women have a remission from their 
 mournful troubles.” 
 
 176. And a man’s relation, and he that burneth him, shall take him up. 
 
 To carry the bones out of the house : 
 
 And shall say to him that is in the innermost part of the house. Is 
 there yet any with thee } 
 
 And he shall say. There is none. Then shall he say. Be silent. 
 
 Amos VI. 10. 
 
 (“ This obscure verse seems to denote the effects of famine and pestilence 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 199 
 
 during the siege of Samaria. The carcass shall be burned, and the bones 
 shall be removed with no ceremony of funeral rites, and not without the 
 assistance of the nearest kinsman. Solitude shall reign in the-house : and 
 if one is left, he must be silent (see ch. VII. 3.) and retired, lest he be 
 plundered of his scanty provisions.” Newcome.) 
 
 178. Cf. Newcome’s note to Joel II. 20. 
 
 179. ων άνηριθμος. Cf. Aj. 601. 
 
 180. In reference to this double meaning of the word θάνατος, Horsley 
 
 translates Hosea XIII. 14. “ From the power of hell I will redeem them. 
 
 From death I will reclaim them. Death ! I will be thy pestilence. Hell! 
 I will be thy burning plague.” Cf. Gesen. in voc. nii. 
 
 181. “ cV Se, atque ita simuL Cf. Blomf. ad ^sch. Sept. 965.” Dissen 
 ad Find. Ol. VH. v. 5. See also Bemhardy, p. 198-9. 
 
 184. κρηπίς. Eurip. Here. F. 985. 1009. 1261 (metaph.) Diss. Com¬ 
 ment. in Pind, p. 232. Soph. Trach. 993· 
 
 192. περιβόητος άντιάζων. For sense, (coll. Pind. Nem. IX. 80.) we may 
 perhaps translate, opposing me with war on every side. For construction, 
 (the adjective with participle assuming an adverbial form,) besides other 
 passages in the present play, cf. CEd. Col. 196. βραχύς όκλάσας. Trach. 
 1064. ετητνμος γεγώς. ^schyl. S. C. T. 439. γεγωνά κνμαίνοντ επη. Eurip. 
 Phoen. 1554. ^υστανος Ιανων. Pind. Ol. XIII. 120. καρτερος όρμαίνων. Nem. 
 IV. 22. ποικίλον κιθαρίζων. Pyth. III. T90. πο\νς επιβρίσαις. VI. ΙΟ. επακτός 
 εΧθων, &C. &C. 
 
 197 · άφιεναι est ornittere. Neue. 
 
 207. αΧγλας. Cf. Dissen ad Pind. 01 . XIII. p. 149. on the Hellotia, a 
 festival to Minerva, as a moon and light-goddess, and celebrated by a 
 game of torches. 
 
 • 211, ενιον. Cf. Jerem. XXV. 30. XLVIII. 33. 45. and Gesen. in voc. 
 
 Trn. 
 
 215. Alluding to the festivals of Bacchus, which were generally per¬ 
 formed by torch-light. 
 
 219. On the objections made by Voltaire and others to this, see some 
 ingenious observations in Preface to Solger’s Sophocles, I. 31 sq. 
 
 221. σνμβολον. Include πιστόν in the translation, cerium indicium. 
 
 227. “ And if he fears the (consequences of the) charge.” Cf. Pind. 01 . 
 XHI. 54. “ he put (the consequences of) these honourable labours round 
 his hair.” The German prose translators render, “ But he whom self- 
 consciousness of guilt terrifies, let him no longer stun the voice of his own 
 conscience.” 
 
 241. The student of Pindar will not unfrequently find the necessity of 
 eliciting a verb out of a verb that has preceded. Thus Nem. IX. 45. ovSe 
 Κρονίων άστεροπαν εΧεΧί^αις ο’ίκοθεν μαργονμενονς στειχειν επωτρνν , αΧΧα φει- 
 σασθαι κεΧεύθου, (where from επώτρυνε, as Dissen remarks, is to be elicited 
 εκεΧενσεν . ) 
 
 270. άνιεναι. Eurip. Ion 1000. Here. F. 625. Pind. Pyth. IV. 175. 
 
 285. So Plautus’s “ Amphitryon” immediately has recourse in his diffi¬ 
 culties to the soothsayer Tiresias. Act V. Sc. i. 
 
 287. εν άρ·γοϊς. Aj. 97 ^* κενοΐς. 
 
 313. ρυσαι. A case of zeugma occurs Exod. XX. 18. “And all the 
 people saw the thunderings and the lightnings, and the noise of the 
 trumpet, and the mountain smoking,” &c. 
 
200 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 316. Cf. Eurip. Phoen. 968. sq. 
 
 337 · caused by me. The possessive pronoun of the Hebrew 
 
 writers often requires a little discrimination. Ezek. XXIII. 41, “ mine in¬ 
 cense and mine oil,” i. e. which should have been offered to me. XXIV. 7. 
 “ her blood” (i. e. the blood shed by the inhabitants of Jerusalem) “ is in 
 the midst of her.” Isaiah XXL 2, ‘"her vexations” i. e. vexations caused 
 by her. A close approximation to this use of the possessive pronoun occurs 
 in a passage of Ezekiel, from which the reader will perhaps allow me to make 
 a considerable extract. In that chapter of unparalleled magnificence, the 
 prophet is represented as casting into the lower parts of the earth various 
 enemies of the Jewish race—Egypt—Assyria—Elam—Sidon &c., the pro¬ 
 phet himself or a chorus singing over them a dreadful refrain, of which the 
 following is a specimen : 
 
 There is Meshech, Tubal, and all her multitude: 
 
 Her graves are round about her: 
 
 All of them uncircumcised, slain by the sword. 
 
 Though they caused their terror in the land of the living. 
 
 And these lie down with the mighty. 
 
 That are fallen of old time. 
 
 That are gone down to the pit with their weapons of war. 
 
 And have laid their swords under their heads 
 And the punishment of their iniquity is upon them. 
 
 Though thev were the terror of the mighty in the land of the living. 
 
 Ezek. XXXH. 26-7. (Newcome). 
 
 377. Ικανοί. Xen. Anab. HI. 3. 10. oiTrep (οίθεοϊ) Ικανοί (Ισι κα\ τους peyo- 
 \ovs ταχν fiiKpovs ττοΐ€ΐν, και tovs fxiKpovs, καν €V dcivois ωσι, (Τίύζαν etiTrcTSp. 
 400. τταραστατησβιν. Cf. Pind. ΟΙ. VI. JO, · ^ 
 
 409. tV avTiKi^ai. So the popular Hsemon to the despotic Creon, Antig. 
 
 757 · βονλ^ι Xcyeiv τι, κα\ λίγων μη^ίν κλνίΐν ; 
 
 423. Neue takes the same view. “ Ipse hymenseus est Λσπλονς vel 
 
 ορμισις. Matth. §. 408. El. 492.” 
 
 427. σου. For emphatic,pronouns, cf. Hes. The'og. 277. 591. 615. 628. 
 
 659. 793. 899. 900. 910. 979. ^ ^ „ 
 
 431, άποστραφίίς. Antig. 315. ίίττίίν τι bSireis ; 17 στραφβ'ις ούτως ιω ; 
 
 442· τύχη. Pindar sometimes uses this word in the sense of triumph or 
 victory. Pyth. IX. 126. καί wv iv ϋνθωνί viv άγαθύα Kapveidba j νιος evOaXei 
 
 σννύμιξί τνχα. ^ 
 
 450. άνακηρνσσων. CEd. Col. 429. (CEdip. de seipso), αλλ’ ανάστατος | αύ- 
 
 τοίν ίττύμφθην κάξίκηρνχθην φνγάς. 
 
 463. τΐίτρα. Pind. 01. VI. 81. 
 
 47Ο· rrvpl κα\ στίροπαΐς. Exod. XIV. 20 . was a 
 
 cloud and darkness (i. e. a dark cloud) to them.” (As to whether there were 
 two pillars in the wilderness, or one. Viz. a pillar of cloud with fire burning 
 in it, the former of which would appear most by day, the latter by night, 
 see Parkhurst’s Heb. Lex. p. 536.) For other instances of the Hendiadys 
 in the sacred writings, see Levit. VIII. 17. Jerem. XV. 8. (Blayney). 
 Lowth, Isaiah, p. 276, Newcome’s Min. P. Zechar. XIII. 2, and Wintle’s 
 notes on Daniel, p. 23. 
 
 505. μίμφομίνονς. Pind. Nem. I. 35. λίλογχί de μίμφομύνοις ίσλονς νδωρ 
 κάπνω φύρίΐν άντίον. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 201 
 
 518. μακραίωνος. That this word may be rendered in a more limited 
 sense, cf. (Ed. Col. 150. 
 
 533. τόλμης πρόσωπον. Cf. Matth. §. 316, f. 
 
 541-2. TvpavvLb\ 6 . Pind. Pyth. II. 91. Θ^ος, 6 κα\ nrepoevr alerov κίχ€. 
 
 580. There seems to be rather a delicate evasion on the part of CEdipus, 
 than an admission that Jocasta shared his sovereignty. 
 
 392. TvpavvLs. The three forms of ancient government—a despotism, 
 a democracy, and an aristocracy, are thus described by Pindar; 
 
 €V τταντα de ^ νόμον (υθύγλωσσος άνηρ ^ ττροφίρςι, 
 τταρα Tvpavvidif ό χ^ίοπόταν ό λάβρος στρατός, 
 χωταν πόλιν οί σοφοί τηρεωντι. Pyth. II. 159· 
 
 660. On the uplifted hand, as a sign of solemn adjuration, see Ezek. XX· 
 5. 6. 15. 28. XXXVI. 7. Daniel XII. 7. (where see Wintle). 
 
 P. 98. Thebes has been spoken of as the native town of Pindar in a 
 popular way; his general residence being there or in the neighbourhood. 
 His real birth-place has never been satisfactorily ascertained. See 
 Boeckh’s Life of the poet. 
 
 672. “Construe στυγνός όήλος et. Ant. 471. (Ed. Col. 321. 1210.” 
 Neue. 
 
 ^73 sq* See an excellent note on this subject by Thudichum, I. 303. 
 
 696. Pind. Pyth. I. 65· νανσιφορητοις δ* άνόράσι πρώτα χάρις | es πλόον 
 αρχομόνοις πομπαίον όλβόίν ουρον. 
 
 733 · The mode of illustration pursued in this play must be my excuse 
 for drawing attention to a σχιστή όόός of another kind. It is that where 
 the great conqueror halts for a moment, as doubtful whether his vengeance 
 shall fall first on Rabbah or Jerusalem. “ For the king of Babylon stood 
 at the parting of the way, at the head of two ways: to use divination, he 
 mingled his e arrows, he consulted with images, he looked in the liver.” 
 Ezekiel XXL 21. 
 
 740. φνσιν. Cf. Hes. Op. 129. 
 
 741. ηβης. Cf. Trach. 547. 
 
 745 · ττροβάλλων ovK elbivai, i. e. προβαλύν ουκ ίΐόώς. (Jt alibi est 
 λανθάναν. (Matth. §. 552, β.) Neue. 
 
 756. “ tK€To, rediit. Heind. ad. Plat. Protag. 4. 758.” Neue. 
 
 763. Cf. Philoct, 584. 
 
 770· f*' o-o't, tejudice. Antig. ^2^. ev deoh, diis judicibus. go καίτοι σ’ 
 'τίμησα τοϊς φρονονσιν €v. iv omitted. Sup.v. 9. πάσι, omnium judicio. 
 
 778. σπονδής. Aj. 12. όννίπΐΐν δ’ οτου χάριν | σπουδήν Wov τηνδ'. 
 
 785. τα μόν κΐίνοιν €Τ€ρπόμην. Thudichum (ρ. 357 ·) fields embarrass¬ 
 ment about Polybus and Merope when questioned by CEdipus about his 
 birth, the grounds of which it is not easy to discover. 
 
 Ib. The schema Atticum, as it is generally termed, is also a Hebraism. 
 Ezek. IV. 12. “And a barley cake, thou shdt eat it.” XXXII. 7. “ The 
 sun, I will cover it with a cloud.” XXXIII. 2. “A land, when I bring a 
 sword upon it.” Amos I. ii. “His wrath, he kept it.” Hos. XIV. 8. 
 
 “ Ephraim, what hath he to do with idolsIsaiah XXII. 9. “ And the 
 breaches of the city of David, ye shall see that they are many.” 
 
 b Form of government. c Excels. 
 
 ^ The turbulent multitude or people. 
 
 e On divination by arrows, see Wintle’s Daniel, note, p. 26. 
 
 p 
 
202 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 792. ΒηΧωσοιμ opav. Cf. Diss. ad Find. 01 . IX. 74 * 
 
 795. On αστρον — sun, see Goettl. ad Hes. Op. v. 4 ^ 7 · 
 
 830. Find. 01. VII. 109. ayvov Beov, i. e. Solem. 
 
 F. 125. The Jewish notion on this subject is derived, I believe, from 
 Ezek. XXXVIII. 12. where Cast. Lex. observes, “ Hebrsei de Jud^a intel- 
 ligunt, quse in medio terrse.” 
 
 901. TuBe, these things which I affirm. 
 
 909. τιμαί. Cf. Hes. Op. 138. 347 · 
 
 914. Hosea XL 7. “And my people shall hang in doubt;” where New- 
 come observes, “ they shall be μετζωριζόμ^νοι, in a state of anxious sus¬ 
 pense, Luke XII. 29·” „ , „ 
 
 917. φόβους = φοβέρα, a Hebraism. Ezek. 11 . 7. “For they are-rebel¬ 
 lion ; i. e. most rebellious. XVI. 7. “ Thou wast nakedness and bareness;” 
 i. e. naked and bare. XXX. 12.“ And I will make the river dryness;” i. e. 
 dry. Joel HI. 17. “ And Jerusalem shall be holiness;” i. e. holy. Zech. 
 V. 8. “ And he said. This is wickedness;” i. e. the wicked one. 
 
 919. Cf. Flautus’s Mercator, Act. IV. sc. i. Bacchides, Act. II. sc. i. 
 
 948. On the fluctuations between κτάνοι and κτάντ), see the respective 
 editors. 
 
 930. *1οκάστης κάρα. Goethe, if I recollect rightly, uses the word Haupt 
 frequently in its classic sense, in his Iphigenie auf Tauris.' 
 
 964. φ€ΰ φζΰ. Thudichum, in his attempts to prove the pious trust of 
 QEdipus in oracular predictions, makes a strange remark in reference to 
 these words : “ Nichts ist aber bewundernswiirdiger, als bei der Nachricht 
 vom Tode des Folybos sein Schmerz, dass nun doch die Weissagungen 
 nichtig seyen; die Freude iiber seine Rettung kann dagegen nicht auf- 
 kommen, er versucht eine uneigentliche Deutung, um seinen wankenden 
 Glauben wieder herzustellen,” &c. &c. I. ^61. The reflecting character of 
 this exclamation {strange, most strange!) may partly be seen in Fhiloct. 
 234. 
 
 987. τάφοι. For the frequent use of plural for singular nouns by the 
 prophetic writers, see Newcome’s Ezekiel II. 3. XXI. 16. XXHI. 17. 
 XXV. 17. XXVI. 16. 21. XXVHI. 8. 19. XXIX. lo. JoelH. 7. Zepha- 
 niah III. 4. Habakkuk I. 6. Jeremiah L. 21. &c. &c. 
 
 1029. This want of regular abode in the θψ seems to be alluded to in 
 Hesiod’s directions, θητά τ άοικον ποι^ίσθαι. See also Faget s travels in 
 Hungary and V^allachia, where the same mode of tending cattle from 
 spring to autumn appears to prevail as in ancient Greece. See also Lowth s 
 notes on Isaiah I. 8. XXIV. 20. 
 
 1035. σπάργανα. On the tokens put into cradles, see more particularly 
 Flautus’s Rudens, Act IV. sc. 4. Cistellaria, Act HI. sc. i. 
 
 1084. Non ita diversus a pristina opinione evadam, ut originem meant 
 nolim queerere; i. e. quarnvis diversa stirps mea cognoscatur, nihilo secius 
 sum queesiturus. Neue. 
 
 1108. In Ezek. c. XVL, Jerusalem is represented under the image of 
 an exposed infant, whom God preserved from destruction, brought up, 
 espoused, and exalted to sovereignty. 
 
 1137. As a personification, Arcturus is seen to great advantage in the 
 Frologue to Flautus’s “ Rudens.” 
 
 1151, αλλωϊ novel, gives himself unnecessary trouble, merely to win 
 your favour. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 203 
 
 1154. αποστρ^ψα χίρας. Cf. Plautus’s Epidicus, Act. V. sc. 2. But 
 perhaps some species of torture, and not mere whipping, is here intended. 
 
 1186. A strong suspicion was thrown out in the preceding notes, that 
 the view taken by Erfurdt and Hermann of this and the following verses was 
 not the correct one, and that a reference to some general Pindaric doctrines 
 would be the best means of refuting those views. It gives me much 
 pleasure to find since, that the very learned and acute author of the 
 “ Quaest. Sophocl.” has come to the same conclusion as myself as to the 
 actual meaning of the verses, though by a much more learned process. 
 His general version, however, of the passage, as will be shewn hereafter, is 
 perfectly Pindaric: quisnam plus felicitatis adipiscitur, quam ut fructus 
 aliquamdiu secunda fortuna vel gloria rursus infelixfiat. 
 
 T188. On the Pherecratean verse as following a set of Glyconics, see 
 Solger’s Preface to his Sophocles, p. 68. 
 
 I 220. For the formula ck στομάτων, Neue refers to Matth. §. 396. ann. 2. 
 
 1225. Neue supports the opinion here taken, but refers to El. 1328. 
 
 1227. Cf. Plautus’s MosteUaria, Act II. sc. 2. 
 
 1329. Cf. Eur. Androm. 168. Thucyd. VI. 77. Blomf. Gloss, .^sch. 
 Pers. 1. 
 
 1378. nvpyos. Cf. Ezek. XXVI. 4. 9. for Tyrian battlements; for 
 aSidonian, see Notes on Daniel by Wintle, p. I 77 · alsoLowth’s note 
 
 on Isaiah XXXIII. 18. "./Egina is termed by Pindar qvirvpyov Αίακώάν ( 8 os. 
 Nem. IV. 18. 
 
 1420. πίστις hdiKos. The German prose translation paraphrastically 
 renders, “ What feehng of compassion, what consolation can I, his accuser 
 and foe, entreat of him!” Neue, comparing vv. 625. 144^, translates 
 πίστις, ohsequium. 
 
 1435. τνχύν. On this infinitive thus used, see Neue’s note. On άννσαι, 
 consult Wunder’s note ad (Ed. Col. 1736. 
 
 1467. \j/aveiv, to embrace. Cf. (Ed. Col. 1639. 
 
 1478. The Hebrew derek is used frequently like the Greek όδόί, a mode 
 of proceeding. Cf. Lowth’s Isaiah X. 24. 26. and the learned prelate’s 
 note. 
 
 1493-4. Cf. Hes. Theog. 102. 
 
 1506. Cf. (Ed. Col. 1114.1236. 1241. 
 
 1510. Ezek. XVII. 18. “Because he (Zedekiah) hath despised the 
 oath, by breaking the covenant, {when, lo, he had given his hand) ... he 
 shall not escape.” Cf. Philoct. 813. 1398. See also Plautus’s Rudens, 
 Act. V. sc. 3. 
 
 1518. Tov θΐον f atreTs 8 όσιν, a gift which only the god, i. e. Apollo, 
 can bestow. 
 
 1520. On φάναι, in the sense of to promise, Neue refers to Schaef. ap. 
 Seidl. ad Eur. El. 33. 
 
 1526. ζηλώ. The Hebrew language partakes of these adverbial sub¬ 
 stantives. Hosea XII. 14. “ Ephraim hath provoked with bitternesses 
 i. e. most bitterly. Ezek. XXV. 6. “in soul;” i. e. heartily. 
 
 • While this sheet is passing through the press, this most ancient of cities has fallen 
 before the fires of British cannon ! 
 
(EDIPUS COLONEUS 
 
 OF 
 
 SOPHOCLES, 
 
 WITH 
 
 NOTES 
 
 CRITICAL AND EXPLANATORY, 
 
 ADAPTED TO THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND UNIVERSITIES, 
 
 BY 
 
 T. MITCHELL, A. M. 
 
 LATE FALLOW OF SIDNEY-SUSSEX COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 OXFORD, 
 
 JOHN HENRY PARKER, 
 WHITTAKER AND CO. LONDON, 
 
 J. AND J. J. DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 M.DCCC.XLI. 
 
W.B 
 
 . Η.™».·' 'ί 
 
 Ρ'·';/' ■.';^it:-#-i-ST,: Λ■ *■' 
 
 
 , 7 '· . ■ ·ΐ·. ,ΜΒΚ ’ ;■«¥ Χ:> 
 
 Λ· 
 
 fiii 
 
 i. ■. Auk;.;v -^i».!.· .·»:,Ρίί1 '.4' 
 
 , -f. 
 
 
 ·νί'·- 
 
 »<■' *■! -V*‘> 
 
 i?', ' 
 
 i·"'.'/; vd-.·. 'i·, ■.' ..Mt 
 
 ■ < νΚί 3 Όβ^·\ 4 ’ 
 
 ♦ 744 . f'< ■■ ''■' 
 
 ‘ '■. ' ^· .1 
 V*·' ·■'-',sv*^ . 
 
 ' J < 
 
 UV,P_V·'·-,·^·· V · 
 
 > 1 ■'•'s *· ■. 'V 
 
 ' 5 fjf^'-·' 7 "·'· - ■'. t -SM 
 
 .... 
 
 λ;^ -■ -^χ^ΐίβ^/ϋ 
 
 ■ ■ ; ,.-<4 . 
 
 ■ = r 
 
 - ·',- 3 ^.‘;y_ 
 
 . ■■wif!’®'·' 
 
 jv Viv 
 
 • · - * 
 
 Ί < ' Γ 7 > ■ .-JK- 
 
 l .m!^. ^ 
 
 3^.;. ϊν, ^.V - .■ ^ ;:κί 
 
 : _ U \ 
 
 ■S^S->4 ■.. 
 
 Λ'. *■ ESl·^ · '\‘-'j."· 
 
 ,■·, -f :iiS0-y"‘''4r--^ ·%| M ^ ^ '■■>pEI'i?i 
 
 
 f-‘f<"-. π-χ^ίΑ· .. 
 
 
 ^ Γ' 
 
 ■ <; 'iV 
 
 WTT.V' 
 
 [is-; *Tr'".v ,:v ' '■ i ,*'T ·" ■ ' ,\ii 
 
 Mfci .· ^ Afcc;· 1 ·*:/* . '·ί· t·* *SV 
 
 
 
 «la 
 
 Li'T •^'^.v. 
 
 |y '’»5 k* 
 
 tei ■ V ‘#y?:-c '‘*·'''·.^Λ 
 
 '■ *;sar' 
 
 , * 
 ^ β ■ 
 
 
 ,7 -ixca. '^ΐϊ'^Λ. 
 
 ■ -‘'Hif^l' *-' ^ ■■■‘--X* ·. .,'H'i,4liWf ·>! :')fc.j ..i>^*) j 
 
 • '. ·,<ί*·.-1, i/''. ’ ■ · -. . .«ν ftlt?* ir 'i'' , .’ιΐή .· .irfk'·, . '^mB 
 
P E E F A C E. 
 
 one can have perused the Orestean and CEdipodean Trilogies, (if 
 the latter term may be allowed me,) or the Orestes, Phoenissse and 
 Iphigenia in Tauris of Euripides, without perceiving how much the crime 
 of blood-guilt had occupied the attention of the times in which those 
 dramatic works were composed; and under what circumstances the crime 
 should be dealt with by exile or by death. The political causes, which first 
 perhaps drew the attention of ^schylus to the subject, as well as many 
 other matters connected with it, have recently been discussed by a German 
 spholar^, and with such a combination of learning and talent, as must 
 make the premature death of its author one of the greatest losses which 
 classical literature has ever sustained. An inquiry however of deep im¬ 
 portance (and into which that writer’s apparent ignorance of the Semitic 
 languages perhaps prevented him from entering) remains yet to be pur¬ 
 sued ; viz. what light may be thrown on the matter by reference to those 
 sacred records of our own, of which I shall elsewhere endeavour to 
 shew, that the earliest Greek writers must from demonstrable causes have 
 had more or less knowledge, and which will in consequence be found 
 among our best guides for explaining many of the customs and modes of 
 thinking in Grecian antiquity. 
 
 With a different interpretation of some passages of Holy Writ—it would 
 ill become me to say, by a more correct one than that which the authorized 
 version furnishes—little doubt exists in my own mind, that an almost com¬ 
 plete identity would be found to exist between Hebraic and Hellenic modes 
 of dealing with blood-guilt; but as the inquiry, besides being one of much 
 delicacy, would lead into discussions incompatible with the object and 
 limits of this work, it is for the present abandoned, the reader’s attention 
 being called to such points only of the subject, as seem necessary for a 
 better understanding of the following drama. 
 
 At the close of the (Edipus Tyrannus, after a scene of the deepest pathos 
 
 a K. O. Muller in his ‘ .^Eschylos Eumeniden.’ 
 
 b 2 
 
IV 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 between the blind monarch and his infant daughters, we find the unhappy 
 parricide demanding impatiently of Creon, the new ruler of Thebes, that 
 temporary expulsion from his country, which homicide, even when acci¬ 
 dental, required, and which in his present state of blindness, he was of course 
 unable to accomplish of himself. To this demand Creon returns an evasive 
 answer, referring the matter to the Delphic shrine. And why is this ? 
 If Sophocles already meditated a play like that which the student is about 
 to peinise, but from which the ill success of his Tyrannus for many years 
 deterred him, a happier contrivance could not be devised for leaving him 
 at liberty to work up the materials of his future drama without subjecting 
 himself to those criticisms, which it seems had fallen on .^Eschylus for 
 allowing his Clytsemnestra to remain in Argos after the murder of her 
 husband (Miiller p. 132.) Under any other supposition, this uncalled- 
 for departure from established usage, and for which no dramatic necessity 
 existed, seems inexplicable. But whatever might have been the poePs 
 concealed motives on this occasion, let us pursue things as we find them. 
 What were the answers of the Delphic shrine to Creon’s inquiries, we are 
 no where told; one thing, however, is certain according to the Sophoclean 
 drama, that CEdipus did not quit Thebes till Antigone, then an infant, had 
 made the first approaches to womanhood, (infr. 345 ·) And what had the ex¬ 
 monarch been doing in the long interval ? The muse of Sophocles apprises 
 us but of two particulars: first, that time had worked its usual lenient 
 effects on the unintentional parricide (infr. 437. 769.): secondly, that in con¬ 
 sequence of some offencef*, domestic as well as religious, the two sons of 
 GEdipus had drawn upon them the Erinys^, or paternal cursed;—and now 
 
 For the nature of the double offence 
 committed, see Athenaeus xi. 465. E. F. and 
 the Scholiast to CEd. Col. 137';· In adopt¬ 
 ing VVellauer’s interpretation of ^schylus’ 
 Sept. c. Theb. 786. instead of Heath’s and 
 Blomfield’s excellent emendation, Mi*. 
 Griffiths does not, I think, display his usual 
 judgment and taste. Some light may be 
 thrown on the religious character of the 
 rpo<p)] there alluded to, by comparing i Sam. 
 ix. 22—4. 
 
 c That a people, Avhose theology Avas so 
 lax, that the poet Euripides could in one 
 play represent the Erinyes as three in num¬ 
 ber (Orest. 402.), and in another could 
 allow his hearers to multiply their number 
 at pleasure (Iph. in Taur. 970 sq.), that the 
 poets of such a people should be very strict 
 or uniform in their use of the word itself, 
 was not very probable. The true meaning 
 of the Avord, Avhich IMuller hesitates, as 
 he Avell might, to derive from the Arcadian 
 infinitive ^pii/veiv (Eumeniden p. 165.), I 
 shall endeavour to illustrate, Avhere more 
 
 space will be alloAved for the purpose. As 
 indicative of the paternal curse in its em¬ 
 bodied form, cf. inter alia Horn. II. xxi. 
 412. Od. xi. 279. ^sch. Eumen. 487. Eur. 
 Or. 575. infr. 1299. 1434. See also Scholl’s 
 * Beitrage zur Kenntniss der tragischen 
 Poesie der Griechen’ p. 581 sq. 
 
 ^ The oldest parental curse recorded in 
 antiquity is that pronounced over the 
 shameless Canaan. (Gen. ix. 25.) That 
 such an imprecation should have made a 
 deep impression on the Phoenicians, and 
 through them have been transmitted to the 
 Hellenic race, was in the strict nature of 
 things; and hence perhaps the close iden¬ 
 tity of sound as well as sense in the Helle¬ 
 nic &ρω, αράρω, and the Phoenician or He¬ 
 brew Among other instances of refe¬ 
 
 rence to the (Edipodean curse, see iEsch. 
 S. Theb. 70. 692. 706. 720. 785. 792. 818. 
 833· 885· Eurip. Phoen. 65.344. 484. 777. 
 890. 1068. 1374. 1441. 1572. 1627. Suppl. 
 161. Herodot. iv. 149. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 V 
 
 a new scene of troubles and miseries opens on this unhappy man. By the 
 joint means of Creon and the eldest son of GEdipus, their blind and wretched 
 relative is driven from his ancestral halls, to seek his bread as best he might, 
 his only ^ide being a female of that age, when bodily nutriment has 
 barely ceased to be of the first importance, (infr. 345 ·) Where the 
 wretched exile first goes, the poet has wisely left in the dark; but that 
 between his first quitting Thebes and reaching Athens some years of 
 wandering intervene, many incidental proofs will be found in the inte¬ 
 rior economy of the following drama. Had these wanderings been years 
 of unmitigated suffering ? Painful they must undoubtedly have been to 
 the ex-monarch in the first instance; but an object and an interest 
 had subsequently become attached to them, which must have deprived 
 them of much of their bitterness. As the nature of this object has 
 hitherto escaped the poet^s commentators, and led one of the acutest and 
 ablest of them to accuse the poet of a tautology, with which he does not 
 seem chargeable, the reader will perhaps excuse a brief exposition of the 
 
 matter. 
 
 Of the two daughters of CEdipus, we have seen that one (Antigone) was 
 attendant on his steps throughout his painful travels; but the other 
 (Ismene) was not less attentive to his interests at home. At some period 
 of her father*s travels, and most probably an early one, she had contrived 
 to steal from the Cadmean palace (as we shall again find her doing in the 
 following drama), and bring her wandering parent intelligence in which he 
 was deeply interested, (infr. 353 · ®^·) That intelligence, fresh from the 
 Delphic shrine, though intimating that great hardships still awaited the 
 unhappy wanderer (infr. 87.), yet contained not only a distinct assurance 
 that those hardships would one day cease, but pointed out the χωρά 
 τίρμία^, or actual place, where they were to terminate; some minute parti¬ 
 culars being added as to the circumstances under which he should arrive 
 at this terminal spot. 
 
 An enigma at the same time was conveyed in the communication from 
 the sacred shrine, which of itself involved the probability of much further 
 travel and investigation. That enigma referred to those dreadful Beings, 
 who had beset the path of QEdipus through life, and to whose influence he 
 seemed to be again consigned. The Delphic oracle, however, now intimated, 
 that CEdipus’s course of wanderings would some day bring him to a place, 
 where these Beings, instead of bearing that name which men nevei pro¬ 
 nounced without fear (Erinyes)^, and for which that of the ‘ veneiable 
 
 e Mr. Griffiths, in his Prom. Vinct. v. 
 117, compares, hut I think erroneously, 
 τζρμόριον, ex'tremey remote. 
 
 f ’Op. €δο|’ ιδίίΡ rpeis νυκτί ττροσ’φ^ρίΐί 
 κ 6 ρα$. 
 
 Me, οϊδ’ its ^\e|as, ονομάσαι δ' ου βού¬ 
 λομαι. 
 
 Όρ. σ^μραϊ ydp’ εύπαίδευτα δ’ airorpe- 
 Tret Keyeip. Bur. Or. 402 sq. 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 goddesses’ (σ€μνα\ θ€α\) was usually substituted S, would be found to bear 
 the appellation of Eumenides^i, or ‘ the mild and gentle,’ having at the same 
 place an άλσος or sacred grove. As no libations of wine, it was further 
 hinted in the oracle, were made to these goddesses, CEdipus was informed, 
 that he should himself reach this grove early some morning, when his fast 
 was yet unbroken, and his lips consequently had tasted no wine (νηφων) : 
 he was further informed that by this άλσος, or grove, his wearied frame 
 would find a resting-place, the oracle even descending to point out the 
 rough {άσκύπαρνον) materials of which his seat would be formedh And now 
 indeed a great change was to come over his course of life, the nature of 
 that change, however, like every other allusion in the oracle, being so 
 worded as to leave the meaning obscure, till future communications should 
 clear up the mystery. One thing, however, was certain. Instead of the 
 wanderer which he had hitherto been, spurned from every door, with coarse 
 raiment for his limbs, and scant food for his lips, he was at this spot, and 
 by means not yet explained, to become capable at his death of conferring an 
 inestimable benefit on those who gave him a favourable reception, and 
 of inflicting a vengeance as terrible on those who had driven him from 
 his paternal halls. And that the persons thus favourably receiving him 
 might deem this no idle boast on his part, the oracle allowed him to 
 appeal to some signal phsenomenon—some convulsion of the earth— 
 some fall of thunder or lightning from heaven, or all three united, as 
 corroboratory of what he advanced. If these expositions are correct, 
 (and they appear to me to admit of close examination k,) it is obvious that 
 Ismene has made an appearance before her father, since his exile, antecedent 
 to that in the present drama; that she does not bring him one set of oracles 
 only, as Hermann supposes, but that the oracles brought in the present play 
 are intended to place a more definite sense on some previously brought, 
 —more particularly as to the mode in which CEdipus was to become a 
 benefactor to his friends, and a mischief to his enemies,—and consequently 
 
 g Cf. Miiller p. 176. Peile ad Ag. v. 70. 
 And yet which of the tragic poets ever 
 scmples to use the term Erinyes ? 
 
 h It is observable, that in the ^Eschylean 
 drama of the ‘ Eumenides’ (by whomsoever 
 the title was given) the goddesses never 
 bear that name; while Euripides in his 
 ‘ Orestes’ three or four times substitutes it 
 for that of Erinyes. (38. 315. 826. 1666.) 
 
 ‘ A very close parallel might be drawn 
 from the remains of antiquity between 
 the cases of Orestes and CEdipus, from the 
 cradle to the grave, and even beyond it; 
 this coincidence of sitting on a stone, before 
 their Erinyes are converted into Eumenides, 
 not being wanting. Pausan. III. 22. i. 
 
 Γυθβ/ου rp^ts μάλιστα άττ^χξΐ σταδίου 5 
 ^Apyhs λίθο 5 . Όρ 4 στην Keyovai καθ^σθίντα 
 €7 γ’ αυτόν τταύσασθαι της μανίας' διά τούτο 
 δ λίθος ώνομάσθτ) Zevs Καπττώταϊ κατά 
 yλώσσav την Αωρίδα. 
 
 k q^hese observations had long been 
 committed to writing, when happening to 
 turn to Dindorf’s Annotations to see what 
 sense he affixed to the word ijvvaev (infr. 
 454), I found some references, by pursuing 
 which it Λvas evident that the idea of a 
 double set of oracular communications had 
 occurred to the same scholar. The learned 
 writer however gives nothing but refer¬ 
 ences. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 vu 
 
 that in charging Sophocles with repetition and tautology (cf. Herm. ad v. 
 392. &c.) that most learned expositor has not acted with his usual acute¬ 
 ness and judgment. 
 
 As the limits assigned to this publication have already been exceeded, 
 I must forbear to enter into more minute explanations, as was intended, 
 of the closing scene of CEdipus’s life ;—the Knight’s Hill—the hill of De¬ 
 meter Chloe, and above all of that subterranean abyss, in which CEdipus 
 disappears ; but as the interpretations set upon three or four passages in 
 the following drama, more particularly in the lyrical parts, may give offence 
 by their boldness, and in their references to modern authorship may seem 
 derogatory to the ancient poet, a few words on this matter will perhaps 
 be allowed me. In reading the Greek drama, whether tragic or comic, 
 it should never be forgotten that dramatic representations in Athens were 
 of rare occurrence—that they took place at distant intervals—that a play, 
 except under extraordinary circumstances, was never performed twice— 
 that the representation took place under every circumstance of excitement 
 —bard pitted against bard—aulete against aulete—dancer against dancer— 
 tribe against tribe; while criticism in its present organised shape was a thing 
 unknown. Is it possible that under such circumstances some little instances 
 of false taste in language should not occasionally occur ? the latter more 
 particularly in the lyric portions of the play, and for the following reason. 
 The choral ode was, I need scarcely say, the progeny of the dithyrambic ode, 
 the latter belonging to the Dionysiac festivals, long before the regular 
 drama was invented, and which being performed at a festival in honour of 
 the god of wine, and to auditors who had partaken largely of his gifts, 
 naturally pushed the powers of the Greek language to the utmost extra¬ 
 vagance of license. The reader who knows any thing of the writings of 
 Aristophanes, knows that the dithyramb and its composers never in con¬ 
 sequence come before him, but that every species of compound epithet is 
 invented‘to ridicule the turgidity, obscurity, and bombast of their lan¬ 
 guage. And yet if the reader peruses carefully the specimens of distorted 
 language which the poet puts into the mouth of his Cinesias (Av. 1373 
 sq.) or his Agathon (Thes. loi sq.), I venture to say that he will find none 
 which go greater lengths than some which occasionally occur in the 
 writings of Sophocles k And why such extravagances in an author, 
 whose diction was naturally so pure and simple, and who certainly was 
 not ignorant that simplicity is the best accompaniment of sublimity ? 
 The only answer, I think, is to be found in the dramatic peculiarities above 
 alluded to, and the nature of the poet’s audience;—that mob of con- 
 
 1 Compare for instance a nearly similar satii-ist most probably whispering softly to 
 idea as expressed by the Aristophanic Cine- himself in both cases, whTr, βόμβυξ, βομ- 
 sias (Av. 1395), and by Sophocles in the βαλοβομβάξ. 
 following drama (v. 1081 sq.); the great 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Vlll 
 
 ceited artisans and mariners, who ruled in the theatre as they did in the 
 ecclesise and in the courts of law, and who from old habit naturally 
 expected in the choral ode the same extravagances of language as had 
 been wont to delight them in the dithyrambic ode. Nor in making this 
 remark do I convey any unjust imputation on the taste of the most inge¬ 
 nious people that ever existed. Correct taste is the result of constant 
 practice and observation, on whatever subject it is exerted. In oratory the 
 taste of the commonest artisan in Athens was almost perfect, because the 
 peculiar institutions of his country made forensic or legislative oratory the 
 daily and hourly food of his life. But dramatic representations were 
 literally ‘ angel-visits, few and far between ;* and if the hearer's taste on 
 such occasions was less perfect, and the purveyor to it, intent on victory, 
 cared little for an occasional sacrifice of his own better knowledge, who 
 can fairly wonder at it ? These reasonings seem to me founded on 
 common sense; but if the reader requires better authority than my own 
 for them, he will find them amply supported in some bitter and pungent 
 remarks of Plato, who complains (3 Leg. 700 sq.) of an Attic thea- 
 trocracy^ as he does elsewhere of an Attic democracy, and indignantly 
 laments that questions of what was beautiful or otherwise in language were 
 carried, not by men of sense and taste, but by the boisterous voices of those 
 who ought to have sat still and deferred to their betters. 
 
 I transcribe a short extract from the ‘ 6 Qiv τά θέατρα έξ άφώνων φωνήβι/τα iye- 
 
 pages referred to. Toiavra 5^ Troiodvres 
 ττοιΊ^ματα \0yovs t6 4τη\έγοΡΤ€ε roioinovs 
 To7s ΐΓολλοΓϊ 4 νέθ€σαν τταρανομίαν els τήι/ 
 μουσικήν καϊ τ 6 \μaVy ω 5 ίκανόΪ 5 οΖοΊ κρίνΐίν. 
 
 ροντο, &s 4παίοΡτα 4ρ MoZffais τό τε καλΖρ 
 καΐ /iij, καί αρτ\ &.ριστοκρατία5 4ρ αύτρ θεα- 
 τροκρατία ns ττορηρα yeyoP€P» e. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤ2 ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΠΙ. 
 
ΤΑ TOT ΔΡΑΜΑΤΟΣ ΠΡΟΣΩΠΑ 
 
 ΟΙΔΙΠΟΥΣ. 
 
 ΑΝΤΙΓΟΝΗ. 
 
 ΚΕΝΟΣ. 
 
 ΧΟΡΟΣ ΑΤΤΙΚΩΝ ΓΕΡΟΝΤΩΝ. 
 
 ΘΗΣΕΥΣ. 
 
 ΚΡΕΩΝ. 
 
 ΠΟΛΥΝΕΙΚΗΣ. 
 
 ΑΓΓΕΛΟΣ. 
 
 ΙΣΜΗΝΗ. 
 
ΤΠΟΘΕΣΙΣ. 
 
 ο ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ ΟΙΔΙΠΟΥ 2 συνημμένος πώς έστι τώ ΤΥΡΑΝΝΩΙ. της yap 
 πατρικός €κπ€σα>ν ο ΟιΒιπονς η 8 η γ€ραιος o)v αφικν^ίται (Ις ’Α.θηνας^ νπο της θνγα- 
 τρος 'Αντιγόνης χειραγωγούμενος, ησαν γαρ των αρσενων περί τον πατέρα φιλο- 
 στοργοτεραι. άφικνεΐται δβ είς 'Αθήνας κατα πνθόχρηστον, ώί αυτός φησι, χρησθέν 
 αυτω παρα ταις σεμναΊς καΧουμεναις θεαίς μεταΚΚά^αι τον βίον. το μεν ούν πρώτον 
 γέροντες εγχώριοι, εζ ων ο χορός συνεστηκε, πυθόμενοι συνέρχονται καϊ διαλέγονται 
 προς αυτόν, επειτα δε Ισμηνη παραγενομένη τα κατά την στάσιν απαγγέλλει των 
 παιδων, και την γενομενην αφιζιν του Kpeoi /το? προς αυτόν’ ός και παραγενόμενος 
 έπ'ι τω άγαγείν αυτόν είς τούπίσω άπρακτος άπάλλάττεται. 6 δέ πρός τόν θησέα 
 διελθών τόν χρησμόν οΰτω τόν βίον καταστρέφει παρά ταίς θεαϊς. 
 
 Το δε δράμα των θαυμαστών' δ και ηδη γεγηραιίώς ό Σοφοκλής έποίησε, χαριζό- 
 μενος ου μονον τή πατριδι, αλλά κα\ τω έαυτοΰ δήμω’ ήν γάρ Κ,ολωνήθεν’ ώστε 
 τον μεν δήμον επίσημον αποδείζαι, χαρίσασθαι δέ και τά μέγιστα τοϊς 'Αθηναίοις, 
 δι ων απορθητους εσεσθαι, και τών εχθρών αυτους κρατήσειν υποτίθεται ό ΟΙδίπους 
 προαναφωνών και οτι διαστασιασουσι πρός Θηβαίους ποτέ, κα\ τούτων κρατήσουσιν 
 έκ χρησμών διά τόν τάφον αυτου. 
 
 ΣΑΛΟΤΣΤΙΟΤ ΠΤΘΑΓΟΡΕΙΟΤ. 
 
 τά πραχθέντα περί τόν ΟΙδίποδα ϊσμεν άπαντα τά εν τώ έτέρω ΟΙΔΙΠΟΔΙ* 
 πεπηρωται γάρ και άφϊκται είς την 'Αττικήν, οδηγούμενος έκ μιας τών θυγατέρων, 
 Αντιγόνης, και έστιν εν τω τεμένει τών σεμνών \_'Έρινύων^, ο έστιν εν τω κάλου- 
 μενω ιππίω Κολωι/ω, ουτω κληθέντι, έπέί κα\ Ιίοσ^ιδωι/όί έστιν ιερόν ίππίου κα\ 
 ΐΐρομηθέως, και αύτοΰ οί όρεωκόμοι ϊστανται’ έστι γάρ αυτω πυθόχρηστον ένταύθα 
 δεΐν αυτόν ταφής τυχειν’ ου μη έστιν έτέρω βεβήλω τόπος, αυτόθι κάθηται' κάϊ 
 κατά μικρόν αυτω τά τής ύποθέσεως προέρχεται, όρα γάρ τις αυτόν τών έντεύθεν, 
 και πορεύεται αγγελών οτι τις άρα τω χοορίω τούτω προσκάθηται. κα\ έρχονται οΐ 
 εν τω τόπω έν χορού σχήματι, μαθησόμενοι τά πάντα, πρώτος ούν έστι καταλύων 
 Την οδοιπορίαν, κα\ τή θυγατρ'ι διαλεγόμενος. άφατος δέ έστι καθόλου ή οίκονομία 
 (V τω δράματι, ως ουδενΙ άλλω σχεδόν. 
 
 Η σκηνή τού δράματος ύπόκειται έν τή 'Αττική έν τω Ιππίω, πρός τω ναω τών 
 σεμνών, ό δέ χορός συνέστηκεν έ^ 'Αθηναίων άνδρών. προλογίζει ΟΙδίπους, 
 
 Β 2 
 
ΑΛΛΩΣ. 
 
 Τόΐ' iVt Κολωνώ ΟιδίτΓοδα eVi τ€Τ€\€ντηκ6τί τώ ττάππω Σοφοκλής 6 νΐδονς 
 edtSa^ev, νΙος ων *Αρίστωνος, im αρχοντος Μίκωνος*, 6ς τέταρτος αττδ Καλλίου, 
 €φ* οδ φασιν οί ττλίίονς τον Σοφοκλέα τίλβντησαι. σαφίς Be τοντ eariv (ξ ων 6 
 pev * Αριστοφάνης iv τοίς Βατράχοις eni Καλλίου avayei τους στρατηγούς virep γης, 
 6 Be Φρύνιχος ev Μούσαις, ας σνγκαθηκ€ τοϊς Βατράχοις, φησιν όντως' 
 
 μάκαρ Σoφoκ\eης, ος ττολύν χρόνον βιονς 
 aTreSavev, €νΒαΙμων ανηρ και Β€ζιος, 
 
 ΤΓολλάί ΤΓΟιησας και καλάς τραγωδίας, 
 καλώς Ιτ€λ€ντησ , ovBev v^τoμeιvaς κακόν. 
 
 eVi Be τω λίγομόνω Ιππίω Κολωνω το δράμα Ke'iTai. ίστι γάρ κα\ ίτ€ρος Υ.ολωνος 
 αγοραίος ττρος τω Ενρνσακ€ΐω, προς ω οί μισθαρνονντες προ€στηκ€ΐσαν, ωστ€ και 
 την παροιμίαν €πι τοις καθνστ€ρίζονσι των καιρών Βιαδοθηναι 
 
 οψ* ηλθ€ς, αλλ’ eh τον Κολωνον ^σο. 
 
 μνημον€ύ€ΐ των Bveiv Τά,ολωνων Φ€ρ€κρατης ev Tleτaλ 1 J δια τοντων 
 οντος, πόβev ηλ6eς ; Έΐς Κολωνον ωχόμην, 
 ον τον άγοραιον, αλλα τον των ιππeωv. 
 
 * 01. XCIV. 2. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤ2 ΕΠΙ 
 
 ΚΟΛΠΝΠΙ. 
 
 ΟΙΔΙΠΟΥΣ. 
 
 Τεκνον τυφλού yepovTOs ^ Αντιγόνη^ r/ms* 
 χώρους· άφίγμ€ffy η τίνων άνΒρών ττόλίυ ; 
 τις του ττλανητην ΟΙύίπουν καθ' ημ^ραυ 
 την νυν σπανιστοΐς Se^eTac δωρημασί, 
 σμικρον μίν βζαιτούντα, τού σμικρού δ’ €tc 
 μ€Ϊον φβροντα, /cat τόδ' ί^αρκούν €μοί; 
 
 I. τνφλοΰ yepovTos. The occu¬ 
 pants of an Attic theatre, whether 
 natives or strangers, were doubtless 
 as loquacious before the commence¬ 
 ment of a new piece, as they were 
 tumultuous at its close. The sight 
 of an actor, however, brought their 
 colloquies to a speedy end, and be¬ 
 fore the short pause and nicely-in¬ 
 flected voice of ^Polus or Tlepole- 
 mus had given these two significant 
 words their proper force, the sound 
 of a dropping pin, to use a modern 
 phrase, might almost have been 
 heard in the spacious theatre. And 
 the eyes as well as ears ?—Such as 
 were not fixed on that old man re¬ 
 verend, with his grey and unre¬ 
 strained locks floating to the wind, 
 were riveted on the mask of Anti¬ 
 
 gone, indicative of all that youth 
 and innocence, daring resolution 
 and the most touching feminine 
 beauty, could combine together. 
 
 2. χώρους = χώρον, open country, in 
 opposition to πόλις, an inhabited 
 place or city, whether great or 
 small. 
 
 4. σπανιστόΐς, scant, sparing. 
 
 Ib. δ€χ€σθαι ^ωρημασι. Wunder 
 compares Xen. Anab. V, 5. 24. και 
 ζ€νίοις, ην pev %λθητ€ προς την Σινω- 
 π€ων πόλιν, βκβί Be^opeSa. See also 
 Abresch. ad .^sch. 1. p. 603. 
 
 6. (pepovra. Schol. άποφβρόρ^νον, 
 receiving. On verbs of this nature, 
 cf. Schol. ad Soph. Phil. 1109. 
 Reisig’s Enarr. p. 27. Lobeck ad 
 Aj. 129. Wund. ad El. 1069. and 
 Ellendt II. 899. 
 
 »■ The two favourite actors of Sophocles. Cf. Lessing’s ‘ Leben des Sophokles,* p. 164. 
 
 B 3 
 
6 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 στ€ργ€ίν yap αΐ ττάθαί μβ χώ γρονο9 ζυνων 
 
 μάκρος ^ώάσκΗ καΐ το yevvalov τρίτον. 
 
 άλλ\ ώ TeKvoVj θάκησιν βϊ τινα βλ€7Γ€ίς 
 
 η προς βββηλοίς η προς αλσβσιν θ€ών, ιο 
 
 ", arepydv, to he content; with 
 what ? the verses preceding in¬ 
 form us, with scant food ; subse¬ 
 quent verses enable us to add, with 
 mean apparel, and humble lodg¬ 
 ment ; the reverse of all to which 
 the speaker in his day of royalty 
 had been accustomed to. And what 
 had lessoned the ex-monarch into 
 so much wisdom ? Himself assigns 
 three causes; and of those three, 
 if the preliminary observations to 
 this drama should be found correct, 
 there can be little doubt that Wunder 
 has misinterpreted the second. 
 
 7—8. 6 χρόνος ξυνων μακρός. L)as Al~ 
 ten, in deni ichstehe,ein liohes.WvNo. 
 That CEdipus was now old, himself 
 assures us in the opening verse; 
 that he was very old, as Wunder’s 
 version does and ought to imply 
 (cf. (Ed. T. 963), pro^dded the in¬ 
 terpretation he sets on the word 
 χρόνος be correct, is not so clear. 
 Granting that χρόνος does in the 
 writings of Sophocles not unfre- 
 quently imply old age, —and more 
 pertinent examples than Wunder has 
 quoted occur in the present play 
 (infr. 112. 805-6. 875),—the first 
 question then would necessarily be, 
 does old age, and more particularly 
 the old age of monarchs, incline us 
 of itself to be less easily satisfied 
 with supplies of food, raiment and 
 lodgment ? Into this philosophical 
 inquiry, however, we need not en¬ 
 ter ; the prefatory remarks to this 
 play allowing us I think to say, that 
 as ττάθαι here signifies the hardships 
 which CEdipus had endured since 
 his expulsion from his ancestral 
 
 halls, so μάκρος χρόνος implies the 
 great length of time, during which 
 those hardships had continued ; the 
 word ξννων, so frequently redundant 
 in Sophocles, here perhaps implying 
 in unison with those hai'dships. Had 
 any third agent been at work to effect 
 this feeling of contentment ? The 
 text tells us, yes. 
 
 8. TO yevvdiov, inborn nobility of 
 mind : that feeling, which makes 
 truly noble minds consider the trap¬ 
 pings of rank and station as things 
 rather to be submitted to for the 
 sake of society, than things de¬ 
 sirable in themselves; and who 
 upon any reverse of fortune can, 
 like the speaker in the text, wrap 
 themselves up in their own reflec¬ 
 tions, and find ‘ that virtue though 
 in rags will keep them warm.’ It 
 is observable that Euripides ascribes 
 this nobility of mind to CEdipus in 
 his day of calamity (Phoen. 1639. to 
 yap όμόν ποτ evyfveς | ουκ αν ττροδοίην, 
 ovbe nep πράσσων κακώς) as well as 
 Sophocles, and in both instances 
 no doubt with similar results : 
 shouts of applause from all parts 
 of the theatre: for the Athenians 
 understood what was noble, though 
 they did not always practise it. 
 
 Ib. τρίτον, cf. infr. 332. 
 
 9. θάκησιν (Phil. 18. (νθάκησις), 
 seat, θάκοισιν Lib. βάκησιν Seidl. 
 
 10. βίβηΧος [βαίνω, βηλός) , ap¬ 
 proachable, accessible to all ; opposed 
 to Άβατα (infr. 167), places not ac¬ 
 cessible, because holv. 
 
 Ib. Άλσος [άλ8ίω, αλδαιι/ω), a grove 
 dedicated to a god or goddess. Ct. 
 Trach. 1167. El. 567. et infr. 98. &c. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 στησον μ€ κάζίΒρνσορ, ώί ττυθώμβθα 
 σίτου 7ΓΟΤ ίσμίν. μανθάν€ίν γάρ ηκομβυ 
 ζβροί προς άστώρ, χαν άκούσωμ^ν τίλβΐι^, 
 
 ΑΝΤΙΓΟΝΗ. 
 
 πάτβρ ταλαιπωρώ Οίδ/ττου, πύργοι μίν^ οι 
 πόλίΐ/ στβγονσιν, ώς άπ* ομμάτων^ πρόσω' 
 χώρος δ* οδ* Ιρος, ώς σάψ* €ΐκάσαι^ βρύων 
 
 Arist. Thesm. 1 149· That the άλσος 
 was not always planted with trees, 
 see Diss. Comment, ad Find. p. 45. 
 86. 133. Passow in voc. 
 
 T I. στησόν μΐ κάξίΒρνσον. By the 
 first word, CEdipus intimates his 
 wish to proceed no further ; by the 
 second, his desire to be seated. 
 
 Ib. ττνθώμζθα, Br. Elmsl. Gaisf. 
 ^Dind. Wund. πυβοίμίθα, Lib.Matth. 
 §.518. I. 4. ττνθοίμίθ' αν, Herm, 
 
 12. ηκομξν μανθάνΐΐν. Matth. §. 
 
 532. C. 
 
 ^3· Bi*· Bind. 
 
 Wund. av δ’, Elmsl. Herm. Mark- 
 land adopts this crasis in Arist. 
 Thesm. 90. (κκλησιάσοντ iv ταίς yv- 
 ναιξίν, χον derj λίξονθ* VTrep Ιμον. 
 
 Ib. reXety, execute, perform. Trach. 
 286. Aj. 528. infr. 465. (CEdipus, 
 who knows that he is already near 
 Athens, and that much awaits him 
 there to be done, speaks with deep 
 emotion.) 
 
 15. πόλιν, the city. Dale. In 
 stricter parlance, the acropolis or 
 citadel, the lofty ramparts of which 
 could be discerned, not merely from 
 the twin-hills of Colonos, but from 
 the far more northern pass at Phyle, 
 and I believe from the eastern sum¬ 
 
 mit of mount Fames. See Kruse’s 
 Hellas II. 11. 
 
 Ib. areyeiv, to cover, to protect, to 
 guard. Doederlein (perhaps from An- 
 tig·. 122. στεφάνωμα πvpyωv) conjec¬ 
 tures στΐφξΐ. 
 
 Ib. ως άπ ομμάτων, as far as may 
 be conjectured by the eyes, Cf. Matth. 
 II. p. 995. Wunder ad El. 65. 
 
 Ib. πρόσω. To a female, conduct¬ 
 ing a man old and blind, and who 
 has already travelled some way, such 
 language may be allowed for a dis¬ 
 tance comprehending at most a mile 
 and a ^quarter; but that 7 nen of 
 Greece, however old, should speak 
 of it in the same language (cf. infr. 
 303), seems rather puzzling. The 
 text, however, evidently admits of 
 none of the attempts by which Mus- 
 grave endeavours to rectify it. 
 
 16. ίρός. For a refutation of 
 Reisig’s opinion, who supposes An¬ 
 tigone to have conjectured the place 
 to be holy, merely from the nature 
 of the trees planted in the άλσος, see 
 Thudichum I. 291. Ιρος Dind. Wund. 
 ΐ€ρ 6 ς vulg. 
 
 Ib. ωςσάφ' άκάσαι. Donner trans¬ 
 lates : dos erkenn’ ich klar. “ That 
 I see clearly.” But do not the words 
 
 ^ See his Annotations. In his text, he reads πυθοίμ^θα. 
 
 c Thucydides (VIII. 67.) places the temple of Poseidon at Colonos, as at most ten 
 stadia from Athens. Thudichum speaks of the distance between the tAvo places as 
 about the fourth of a German mile; the Gei’man mile being in common parlance 
 5 English miles, but more nearly 4·^ miles. Mr. Hussey, in his valuable Essay on 
 Ancient Weights and Measures, observes, ‘ the English statute mile contains very 
 nearly 8^ Olympic stades, Λvanting only 29 feet 2^ inches.’ P. 236. 
 
 B 4 
 
8 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 δάφιτης^ βλαία9) άμττέΧου' irvKVOirrepoL 5’ 
 
 ^ίσω κατ^ αυτόν €νστομονσ άηδ6ν€9* 
 ου κωλα κάμψον τουδ* eV’ άζωστου ττέτρου, 
 μακραν γαρ ώς γβροντί ττρούστάλη^ οδόν. 2 ο 
 
 OL κάθίζβ νυν μ€ καΐ φύλασσβ τον τυφλόν. 
 
 ΑΝ. γρόνου μβν οΰνβκ ου μαθβΐν μ€ δβι ίόδβ. 
 
 ΟΙ. διδάζαί δη μ! ottol καθόσταμβν ; 
 
 ΑΝ. τα9 γουν ^ Αθήναν οίδα, τον δ€ χώρον ου. 
 
 ΟΙ. Tray γάρ tls ηϋδα τουτό γ ημχν όμττόρων. 25 
 
 ΑΝ. άλλ’ όστίΐ 6 τόπο9 η μάθω μολοΰσά ττοί j 
 ΟΙ. να\ τόκνον, €Ϊπ€ρ ίστί γ* όζοικησιμο^. 
 
 σάφ* ζΐκάσαι involve a sort of contra¬ 
 diction, when placed together? Neue 
 suggests άττΐίκάσαι. The same cor¬ 
 rection had previously occurred to 
 Reisig, but was afterwards aban¬ 
 doned by that acute, but eccentric 
 scholar. Trach. 141. las άπίικάσαι. 
 
 βρύων {filled with) δάφνης. 
 The genitive after βρν€ΐν has been 
 amply illustrated by the Editor in 
 his Aristophanes, Nub. 45. Ran. 319. 
 cf. Matth. §. 352. 
 
 17. πνκνόπτ€ροι=πνκνα\, in great 
 numbers. Herm. ‘ Nimia diligentia 
 Elmsleius interpretatur πνκναΙ άηδόν^ς 
 τΓΤίρουσσαι.^ Dind. For the elision 
 at the end of the verse, cf. Erf. ad 
 Antig. 1018. and add Arist. Eccles. 
 351. Av. 1716. 
 
 18. (νστομα,ν, to sing. cf. Jacobs 
 ad Callistr. p. 613. Schneider ad 
 .^lian H. An. II. 21. Ell. On the 
 word ίίσω, cf. Wund. ad Antig. 489. 
 
 19. κωλα κάμπτ€ΐν, to bend the knee 
 for the purpose of sitting = ίο sit, to 
 rest. 
 
 Ib. τοΰδ’ απίστου πίτρου, this rude 
 unpolished stone seat. cf. infr. 101. 
 
 20. προυστάλης όδόν. ScHOL. you 
 have come a longer way than became 
 an old man. Pass. προστάΚηναι όδον, 
 
 den Weg fiiirder gehn. Cf. Matth. - 
 §. 388. 
 
 21. φύλασσ€ —(pauses^ and then 
 with a deep sigh.) 
 
 22. χρόνον ovv€k\ after such a 
 length of time. Donn. For stricter 
 meaning, see Passow in voc. «/εκα, 
 and cf. infr. 443. El. 387. 605. 787. 
 Phil. 774. 
 
 23. oTToi Dind. Wund. οπού Br. 
 Wunder, comparing Eur. Or. 1330. 
 Phoen. 1288. observes, that there is 
 a latent sense of motion in the verb 
 καθίσταμ^ν. 
 
 25* ττα? — Εμπόρων, every traveller, 
 every person on the road. Phil. 342. 
 Trach. 318. ξνν^μπορον, {companion on 
 the road.) The metaphorical appli¬ 
 cation of the word has been inge¬ 
 niously traced by Reisig (Enar. p. 
 31), who compares .^sch. Choeph. 
 657· δ’ epnopovs μίθΰναι | άγκυ¬ 
 
 ράν iv δόμοισι πανδόκοις ξβνων. 
 
 Ib. ηνδα, SC. told US that the city 
 before us was Athens. 
 
 27· ^ζοικησιμοί, habitabUis et ha- 
 bitatus. Ell. On its compound 
 form, cf. infr. 333. In the verse 
 following Antigone speaks generally, 
 from catching sight of a person as 
 yet a stranger to them. cf. infr. 39. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 9 
 
 ΑΝ. άλλ* €στΙ μην οίκητός, οίομαι Be Belv 
 ovBev' ΤΓβλα? γαρ avBpa TOvSe νων ορώ, 
 
 Οϊ. ή Bevpo ττροοΎβίχοντα κάζορμώμ€νον ; 3*^ 
 
 ΑΝ. καΙ δη μβν ουν παρόντα' χώ η σοί λβγβίν 
 evKaipov Ιστιν^ evve(p\ ώ? άνηρ οδβ. 
 
 Ul. ω ^eiv , ακονων τησοβ της νπβρ τ βμον 
 αυτής θ’ όρωσης, ovve^ ημΐν αίσιος 
 σκοπός προσηκβις των άδηΧοΰμβν φράσαι, 35 
 
 ΞΕΝΟΣ. 
 
 πρ\ν νυν τα πλβίον Ιστορβΐν, βκ τησδ’ βδρας 
 €^eXe\ ^χ€ΐς γαρ χώρον ονχ αγνόν πατβΐν. 
 
 3 ©. κάξορμωμ^νον, and that with 
 haste, cf. Aj. 1224. Antig. 1233. 
 Trach. 913, 929. Aisch. Eum. 93. 
 
 31. μ€ν ovu, imo vero. Cf. Matth. 
 p. 1116. κα\ δη = και ήδη. cf. Hartung, 
 
 I· 135· 
 
 32. evKaipov, opportune, Donner, 
 am, Orte, in place. On ανηρ οδε, the 
 man is here, see Matth. §. 264. 5. 
 
 ' 33· Oil vnep T epov for vnep epov 
 
 re, see Matth. ad Eur. Hec. 459. 
 WUND. 
 
 34. αίσιος, fortunate, as being a 
 person who can solve their doubts. 
 ovveKa, that. 
 
 35. σκοποί, here, informant. Ib. 
 τών = ταΰτα, ων Matth. §. 292. ‘ ών 
 Elmsleius. Recte, ut videtur.’ Dind. 
 cf. infr. 1258. Wund. ad Phil. 14. 
 Trach. 381. El. 1123. &c. 
 
 Ib. άδηλξΐν {άδηλονν Pass, contrary 
 to the genius of the language, as 
 Ellendt observes), to be in the dark, 
 or uncertain about a thing. 
 
 Ib. Much controversy has been 
 excited, as to whether the SiVoj in 
 the text was a native of Colonos, 
 an Athenian, or an entire stranger 
 (cf. Reisig’s Enar. p. 18. Thudich. 
 p. 291. Wunder’s note to the dra¬ 
 matis personae.) There appears to 
 
 me to be a further matter for consi¬ 
 deration : whether the word ^ivos 
 has not crept into the persons of 
 the drama, instead of σκοπός. Was 
 it likely that a grove, to which so 
 much superstitious feeling was at¬ 
 tached as that of the Eumenides 
 (infr. 129. &c.), should have been 
 left unguarded, with the chance of 
 strangers intruding upon it, as we 
 see Qidipus was on the point of 
 doing ? That the person in question 
 was responsible to the authorities 
 of Colonos, seems pretty clear from 
 V. 48; that he was at their behest 
 may I think be inferred from v. 297. 
 Would a passing stranger from 
 Athens or elsewhere have so ex¬ 
 pressed himself in the first instance, 
 or have been so dealt with in the 
 second } 
 
 36. τα nXeiova, i. e. the further 
 things which you were about to say. 
 Phil. 576. μη νυν μ* €prj τα π\(ίονα. 
 
 37· rtbx ayvov naT€iv = bu πατ(ίν ονχ 
 uyvov όστι. Cf. Matth. 535 * 01^®· 
 Seidler compares Eur, Iph. T. 1045. 
 βρίτας diyfiv όσιόν εστ’ ipo\ μόνη. On 
 exeis see Ellendt, p. 731. Translate : 
 7 J 0 U are on a place. 
 
10 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. r/s* δ’ €σθ^ 6 χωρο9 ; του Θβων ρομίζβται ; 
 SE. αθικτοΫ ούδ’ οίκητό^· cu γαρ βμφοβοι 
 
 θβαί σή> βχονσι, Τή^ Τ€ καΙ Έκότου κόραι, 
 ΟΙ. τίι/ων το σβμνον ορομ! αν βύζαίμην κΧνων ; 
 ΞΕ. τας ττάνθ^ ορώσα^ Εύ/χβ^^/δα? ο γ evOaS^ ών 
 
 40 
 
 38. του θΐαν (to what god) νομίζΐ- 
 ται (is it appropriated, dedicated) ? 
 
 39. αθίκτοζ ούδ’ οίκητος (speaking 
 of the άλσος or τψβνος). Musgrave 
 compares Philoct. 2. &στ€ΐπτος ονδ’ 
 οίκονμίνη. 
 
 40. σφζ, it. Matth. §. 147, a. 8. 
 Ib. €χονσι. cf. infr. 54. et Blomf. 
 gloss, ad yEsch. S! c. Th. 69. 
 
 Ib. Της re και Σκότου κόραι. From 
 what theological sources Sophocles 
 derived his parentage of the Erinyes, 
 is not clear; and ancient writers, 
 more particularly Attic, seem to 
 have allowed themselves great lati¬ 
 tude on this subject. AEschylus, 
 without assigning any father to 
 them, calls them daughters of Night. 
 The Theogony of Hesiod makes 
 them daughters of Gsea and the 
 blood-drops, which fell from the 
 mutilated body of Uranus. One of 
 the Orphic Hymns ascribes their 
 birth to Hades and Persephone. A 
 work bearing the name of Epimeni- 
 des, makes them daughters of Cro¬ 
 nus and Eurynome. According to 
 Eudenius, their sire and mother 
 were Acheron and Night ; accord¬ 
 ing to Athenodorus and Mnaseas, 
 Hades and Styx ; Euphorion makes 
 Phorcys their father; Ister, Gsea- 
 Euonyme their mother. See fur¬ 
 ther on the subject Reisig’s Enarr. 
 p. 33. and Muller’s Eumeniden 
 p. I 84. 
 
 41. Wunder translates: ‘ what are 
 they called, that having heard their 
 holy name, I may be able to address 
 
 them ?’ ‘ By what most holy name 
 
 should I invoke them ?’ Dale. 
 
 42·. ray ττάνθ' όρώσας. Aj. 836. del 
 θ' όρώσας πάντα τάν βροτόΐς πάθη | , 
 σ€μνάς 'Έ,ρινυς. AEschylus (Eum. 
 103.) gives the power of sight to 
 the heart of these terrible beings, 
 thus enabling them to see even when 
 the eye is closed, the wounds that 
 had been inflicted on Clvtaemnestra 
 by the hand of her son. 6 pa de πληγάς 
 τάσδβ καρδία σόθ^ν. 
 
 Ib. Έ,υμίνίΒας : supply θεάς, (εΰ, 
 μένος.) The uncontrollable emo¬ 
 tions which burst from QEdipus 
 at finding himself at last in the 
 close vicinity of those divinities, 
 of whom he had been so long in 
 search — the start, the uplifted 
 hands, the devout and reverential 
 prayer—are best seen from the im¬ 
 pression eventually made on the 
 σκοπός. To treat of the divinities 
 themselves, under their joint names 
 of Erimjes and Eumenides, would be 
 to write a volume, not a passing 
 note. Much learning and research 
 have been devoted to the subject by 
 Thudichum (I. 279, sq.), by Klausen 
 in his Hi^schyleanTheology, and above 
 all by the learned Muller in the notes 
 appended to his powerful transla¬ 
 tion of the Eumenides of iEschylus. 
 But alas ! a link is wanting, which 
 even their learning and research could 
 not supply, and of the want of which 
 they do not appear to have been 
 sensible. From Pausanias (II. ii. 
 4.^) it is evident that the name of 
 
 '* Cf. Siebelis’ note. 
 
0ΙΔ1Π0ΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 11 
 
 eiTTOL Xecoi vlv* αλλα δ’ αλλαχού καλά. 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ’ ΐλ€ω μίν τον Ικβτην δβζαίατο' 
 
 A » Λ,, ,\ »/- Λ /I ? 
 
 ωί ουχ βοράς γης τησο αν βξβλσοίμ βτί. 45 
 
 SE. τί δ’ βστί τοντο ; ΟΙ. ζνμφοράς ζννθημ! βμης. 
 
 Eumenides had been known in Si- 
 cyon long before any such title of 
 the Erinyes was recognized in 
 Athens (cf. infr. 63. 90). Sicyon, it 
 need scarcely be observed, was the 
 oldest of Grecian dynasties, having 
 preceded that of Athens by some 
 centuries. Peopled originally from 
 Phoenicia and Egypt, here was the 
 spot to have traced many of the 
 most important Grecian myths in 
 all their originality and freshness, 
 and then to have compared them 
 with the accounts of the Sacred 
 Writings, before those primeval 
 tales had been changed and altered 
 by Attic or even Boeotian writers: 
 but the antiquities of Sicyon are an 
 entire wreck, and we must be con¬ 
 tent to remain in ignorance, under 
 what circumstances the Furies be¬ 
 came converted among them into 
 the Mild and the Benevolent. It is 
 observable that jEschylus in the 
 magnificent drama known to us by 
 the title of Eumenides, never uses 
 the word itself, though he styles 
 these divinities after the victory 
 gained over them by the adroit¬ 
 ness of Minerva, ev<ppovas (946), 
 €υθύφρορ€ς (992), &C. cf. infr. 1299. 
 
 Ib. eV^aS’ ων, Libri, ΛVund. evdad' 
 av, Vauvill. Br. Gaisf. Dind. (in 
 Annotat.) Ell. See also Dissen 
 Comment, in Find. p. 231. Passow 
 (I. 433.), evidently with an eye to 
 this passage, when dissertating on the 
 restricting power of the particle ye, 
 says, ‘ o y iv6abe Aewy, das hiesigc 
 Volk wemgstens, wenn auch nicht 
 alle Menschen,’ the people here ot 
 least, if not all nten. 
 
 43. etTTOi. Cf. Matth. §. 515. Obs. 
 Reisig, who had persuaded himself, 
 that the word Eumenides might not 
 be pronounced by an Athenian, 
 translates: ‘ Eumenidas dixerit po- 
 pulus, si quidem dixerit 
 
 Ib. viv, them. At the word αλλα, 
 supply ονόματα. 
 
 44- ίκίτην (ίκω) . The first proceeding 
 of a man stained with blood was (see 
 prefatory remarks) instant f ight from 
 his native land. He must go to some 
 distant person, and with the sup¬ 
 plicatory branch, entreat of him, 
 as his ayvLT^, the purifying rite. 
 This connexion of the word Ικω with 
 Ικίτης is also discernible in the word 
 Ίξίων, the first person whom anti¬ 
 quity records as guilty of kindred 
 murder {ipchvKiov αίμα πρώτιστοί ene- 
 pi^e θνατοΧς Find. F. II. 59 )> tind 
 whose ayvLT^ Zeus himself con¬ 
 descends to become. Cf. ^sch. 
 Eum. 4 «9- 688. Muller’s Eumeni- 
 den p. 134. 7. 8. Welcker’s Trilogie 
 
 P· 549 · 
 
 45. I understand: ‘For out of 
 this land as a fixed habitation’ or, 
 ‘ out of a seat in this land (cf. 
 Matth. §. 380. 3), I shall not de¬ 
 part.’ ώρ. Elms. Wund. Dind. (in 
 Annot.) ωστ€, Libri, Schol. Gaisf. 
 Ell. 
 
 46. τί (sc. dia) δ’ eart τοντο ; 
 Schol. why is this that you do not 
 rise ? The answer of QEdipus would 
 rather, I think, imply, iidiat is this 
 which you speak ? the σκοπός evinc¬ 
 ing every mark of astonishment at 
 the enigmatical language of CEdipus. 
 
 Ib. ξνμφορας ξύνθημ^ όμας. * I 
 speak the settled, concerted, agreed 
 
12 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 HE. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 SE. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΞΕ. 
 
 άλλ* ovSe μ4ντοί τού^ανιστάναι ττόλβωί 
 δίχ* βστί θάρσο9, ττρίν y αν βνδβίζω τί δρω 
 πρ6ς νυν θβών^ ώ ^elve, μη μ άτιμάσης, 
 τοίόνδ^ άλητην, ών σ€ ττροστρ^πω φράσαι. 
 σημαινβ, κούκ άτιμοι e/c γ €μοΰ φανβΐ. 
 r/y δ’ €σθ^ 6 χώρο9 δητ iv ω βββηκαμβν ; 
 οσ οίδα κάγω ττάντ ίτηστησβι, κλνων. 
 
 50 
 
 upon token or pass-word (Eur. 
 Phoen. 1156. Rhes. 572. 684.) of 
 my fate.’ 
 
 47-8. The σκοπος, after a pause 
 of the utmost astonishment at the 
 language and demeanour of CEdipus, 
 proclaims his want of courage to 
 remove him from the sacred seat 
 without the state’s sanction, (πολ^ωί 
 dl)(a. cf. Aj. 768. δίχα κείνων.) 
 
 47· τυνξανιστάναι, the removal (of 
 this man). Aj. 788. τί μ αυ τάλαι- 
 ναν— eSpas άνίστατε. 
 
 48. For θάρσος eari, or rather 
 θάρσος e^ei, followed by an infinitive, 
 Wunder compares Phil. 596. ovros 
 yap TiXiov το θάρσος βίχζ θάτίρον δρά- 
 σ€ΐρ τάδε. (If the context is carefully 
 considered, δράσαν I think will be 
 found to depend on the preceding 
 participle Χάγοντος, not on θάρσος 
 €Ϊχ€ : the intermediate words being 
 parenthetical.) Elmsley compares 
 Phil. 106. ovK <ip’ €Κζίνω y ονδζ 
 ^ΊΓροσμϊξαι θρασύ ; 
 
 48. πριν γ άν Αδει^ω τί δρω. The 
 German translators get rid of this 
 difficulty with more ease than the 
 commentators. German prose : ‘ be¬ 
 fore our state has given me au¬ 
 thority.’ Dunn. ‘ before I signify it 
 to the state, and ask what is to be 
 done.’ (which double force of the 
 verb (νδακνύναι is certainly a very 
 convenient one.) Hermann and 
 Reisig read from some MSS. τί 
 δράν ; the latter comparing (Ed. 
 Tyr. 1439. 1443. and observing that 
 
 Tt δραι/=τί πρακτύον or τί δραστύον. 
 Wunder quotes the Scholiast: €ως 
 ον τί) πόλει βνδ^ίζω τί χρη ποκΊν. Sup¬ 
 posing the σκοπος to be merely soli¬ 
 loquizing in his astonishment at the 
 language and conduct of CEdipus, 
 we may, I think, translate ; before I 
 indicate to the city my proceedings^ 
 or, what I do by allowing this stran¬ 
 ger to sit on forbidden ground. 
 
 49-50. μη μ άτιμάσης — ων. The 
 sense and construction may be illus¬ 
 trated from CEd. T. 788. ό Φοίβος ων 
 μζν ίκόμην (i. e. (Κζίνων, δι ά ϊκόμην) 
 άτιμον €ζίπ€μψ€ν. Do not think me 
 unworthy of an answer to those things, 
 which —. Cf. Matth. §. 339. 473 > b. 
 
 50. τοιόνδΐ άΧητην^ a wanderer at 
 once old, blind, and destitute. 
 
 Ib. προστρίπω, supplicate. CEd. T. 
 41. tKerevopev σε πάντ€ς οιδε πρόσ- 
 τροποι. 
 
 52. β€βηκαμ€ν = €σμ€ν or βχομίν. 
 Wund. ad El. 962. cf. BoeckhExpl. 
 ad Pind. p. 134. Trach. 41. κείνος 
 δ’ δτΓου βάβηκ^ν, ονδζ\ς οΙδ(. Antig. 
 67. τοΊς iv τίΧίΐ βφωσι. 
 
 53· Reisig (Enar. ρ. 37 ·) consi¬ 
 ders this verse as a justification of 
 his opinion, that the speaker is a 
 stranger, not a native of Attica. 
 Seidler by various quotations (Xen. 
 Cyrop. V, i, 22. IV, 2, 22. VII, 7, 
 47.) has shown that the expression 
 is equivalent to, whatever things I 
 knowy you shall know also. cf. Har- 
 tung, I. 129. 
 
ΟΙΔΪΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 13 
 
 χωρο9 μ€ν Lpos ττα? οό €στ * βχβί όβ 
 
 σβμνοί Ποσβίδώί/* Ιν S ο ττυρφόρο^ 0eo9 55 
 
 Tiraz/ Π/)0/χ7;^6ΐ;5** οζ/ δ’ ΙτΓζστβζ/Βεζ? τόπον, 
 
 χθονο 9 καλείται τησδβ χαλκόπον^ 6δθ9, 
 
 ερεισμ ^Αθηνών' οΐ δβ πλησίοι γύαι 
 
 TOvS ίτπτότην Κ-ολωνον εύχονται σφίσιν 
 
 αρχηγόν είναι, και φερουσι τοννομα 6ο 
 
 τό τονδε κοινόν πάντες ώνομασμενοι. 
 
 τοιαυτά σοι ταυτ εστϊν, 
 
 55· Ποσ^ιδώι/. For Semitic deri¬ 
 vation of the word, see Sickler’s 
 ** Cadmus” p. 73. ’Ei/ δ’, sirnul cum. 
 Cf. Wund. ad El. 700. See also 
 GEd. T. 27. 181. 
 
 Ib. πυρφόρος. As a daduchus and 
 fire-bringer, Prometheus is repre¬ 
 sented with a torch in his hand. 
 Eurip. Phoen. 1137. δβ^ια be λαμ- 
 πάba Ύίταν Ώρομηθ€νς €φ€ρ€ν. The 
 reader is referred for further infor¬ 
 mation to Reisig’s Enar. Thudi- 
 chum’s Sophocl. p. 286. Wunder’s 
 Preface to (Ed. Col. Creuzer’s Sym¬ 
 bol. 11 . 288. 293. For Semitic de¬ 
 rivations, consult Sickler’s “ Cad¬ 
 mus” pp. 31. 69. 
 
 57. χαλκόπους (πονς) obos, metaph. 
 with brasen steps. This threshold, 
 with its steps of brass, has been al¬ 
 ready described in the prefatory re¬ 
 marks. The entrance to Tartarus 
 had been poetically provided, from 
 the earliest times, with a threshold 
 of a similar nature. 
 
 evBa aibfipeiai re πνλαι και χάλκ€ος 
 
 oibbs. II. VIII. 15. 
 
 (vedbe μαρμάρίαί re πυλαι /cat χά\κ€ος 
 ovbos 
 
 άστ€μφης, ρί^ησι bιηveκeeσσιv άρηρως, 
 αυτοφυής. Hes Theog. 8ΐΙ. 
 
 Dale, from his translation, evidently 
 mistakes 6 b 6 ς for όbός. 
 
 58. €ρ€ΐσμ* * Αθηνών, the prop or 
 bulwark of Athens. As Athens was 
 
 ω ξεν , ου λογοΐ 9 
 
 too far distant from Colonos for 
 this to be well said in the first 
 sense, we must suppose it to be 
 said proleptically in the second 
 sense. The burial of CEdipus on 
 this spot made it to after-ages that 
 support against Theban invasion, 
 which it is here already assumed to 
 be. Cf. infr. 41 t. 457-460. 621 sq. 
 
 1524· 1533· 
 
 Ib. ot πΧησίον yvai, the neigh¬ 
 bouring (arable) lands. Eur. Bacch. 
 13. Heracl. 839. 
 
 59. Tovbe (pointing to a statue of 
 Colonos), On the honours usually 
 paid to founders of cities, see Hero- 
 dot. VI. 38. 
 
 Ib. ev^ovrai, profess, boast. Les¬ 
 sing (Leb. Soph. 19.) might well 
 express surprise that Vitus Winse- 
 mius translates €ϋχονται, precantur, 
 and αρχηγόν, prresidem. 
 
 60. αρχηγός (ηγ^ομαι), founder. Cf. 
 Blomf. gl. yEsch. Ag, 250. Pind. 
 Pyth. V. 80. άρχαγίτας * Απόλλων. 
 ΟΙ. y. 14^.άρχαγότα Ύφυνθίων. 
 
 61 . ώνομασμενοι, SC. αυτό. They all 
 bear the name of Colonenses from 
 Colonus, their founder. 
 
 62. τοιαυτά σοι ταυτ εστιν, SUch 
 are the things on which you have 
 questioned me. Cf. Soph. El. 761. 
 
 62—63. ου λάγοις — πλέον. Her¬ 
 mann’s interpretation of this pas¬ 
 sage has been so implicitly admitted 
 
14 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τίμωμβν, άλλα rfj ^υνουσία TrXiov. 
 
 by succeeding editors of Sopho¬ 
 cles,—Elmsley, Gaisford, Dindorf, 
 Wunder,—that it may seem imper^ 
 tinent to call its propriety in ques¬ 
 tion. That ablest of expositors con¬ 
 siders the words as applying almost 
 exclusively to the hero Colonos, and 
 to a desire on the poet’s part to 
 make him as much known and re¬ 
 spected abroad, as he was in his 
 own immediate locality; hence he 
 translates : “ non tarn sermonibus 
 hominum et fama haec celebrata 
 esse, quam consuetudine atque usu 
 in honore haberi.” To this it may 
 be answered, ist, that the question 
 immediately put by CEdipus seems 
 to imply that something about in¬ 
 habitancy or inhabitants had been 
 said in the verse immediately pre¬ 
 ceding ; 2ndly, that allowing for the 
 Sophoclean practice of using ab¬ 
 stract for concrete nouns (and no 
 Attic poet uses them more fre¬ 
 quently or with greater latitude), 
 an expression to that effect is actu¬ 
 ally found in the word ξννονσία ; 
 and 3dly, that the whole drift and 
 tenour of this drama lead to the 
 supposition, that something of wider 
 import is here intended than a re¬ 
 ference to the hero Colonos, who, 
 however high he might stand in the 
 estimation of his own deme, could 
 
 command little interest in the eves 
 
 ·/ 
 
 of the strangers, who crowded from 
 all parts of Greece to be present at the 
 theatrical exhibitions of the spring- 
 festival of Bacchus. What then was 
 that reference } A few words will 
 put us in the way for understanding 
 it. Though a resident diplomacy 
 ,had not yet originated what sir H. 
 
 Wootton slily terms lying abroad 
 for the good of one’s country, he 
 must know little of Athenian affairs, 
 who is not aware that lying at 
 home for the same purpose was in 
 that republic practised to · an un¬ 
 limited extent by ® statesmen and 
 orators, rhetoricians and poets. Now 
 in this very drama, two positions of 
 very doubtful authority, if not of 
 absolute falsehood, are interwoven 
 with its very texture; first, that in 
 the age of ffidipus, the Erinyes had 
 a settled worship in Attica, under 
 the widely different name of Eume- 
 nides: (cf. sup. 42.) 2ndly, that 
 the bones of CEdipus had been in¬ 
 terred somewhere near Colonos, and 
 under circumstances, which made 
 it of no small political moment to 
 Athens, that such a statement should 
 gain a wide belief. The poet, aware 
 that among the strangers present 
 at the representation there would be 
 sceptics and scoflfers at the hardi¬ 
 hood of both these assertions, guards 
 against the occurrence by declaring 
 in very adroit language (for it in¬ 
 sinuates rather than affirms), “ and 
 these things which I tell you (the 
 worship of the Eumenides, and pro- 
 leptically, the sepulture of CEdipus, 
 inclusive) must have a value set 
 upon them not from what / say, 
 or from common parlance on the 
 subject, but rather from what the 
 inhabitants here traditionally know 
 and believe on these points.” With¬ 
 out altogether venturing to impugn 
 Hermann’s exposition, these remarks 
 may, I think, be submitted for con¬ 
 sideration. 
 
 63· σννονσΙα = οΙ avvva'iovTcs. So 
 
 e What says the learned Boeckh, a writer without any political prejudices that I am 
 aware of? “ All the Athenian orators, and even the noblest among them, Demosthenes, 
 distorted the truth without the least hesitation, whenever it suited their own purposes.” 
 Econ. of Athens, I. 108. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠί ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 15 
 
 ΟΙ. ή γάρ TLve 9 ναίουσί τοι/σδβ τους τόττους ; 
 
 SE. και κάρτα, rovSe τού θβου y Επώνυμοι, 65 
 
 ΟΙ. α/>χβί τις αυτών, η Vi τω ττληθβι λόγος ; 
 
 SE. €κ του κατ άστυ βασιλάως ταδ' άρχβταί. 
 
 ΟΙ. οΐτΓος de τις λόγω τβ καί σθόνβι κρατβΐ; 
 
 SE. θησ€υς καλβΐται, του ττρίν ΑΙγβως τόκος. 
 
 infr. 658. άπ€ί\αί = οί άπ€ΐ\ονντ€ς. In 
 a future play this construction will 
 be more largely illustrated. At pre¬ 
 sent I content myself with observing, 
 that Passow, after going through the 
 ordinary meanings of the word συνου¬ 
 σία, adds, ‘ϋherh.=:συI/otίftα, auch die 
 zusammenwohnenden selbst,’ which 
 is just the meaning here contended 
 for. On looking into Neue, who 
 rarely, however, gives any opinion 
 of his own, I find that Doederlein 
 also translates ab incolis, but in what 
 sense is not added. 
 
 64. η yap. Cf. Phil. 248. 322. 
 where the formula again stands at 
 the head of questions growing out 
 of something said by a previous 
 speaker. 
 
 65. και κάρτα, i. e. μάλιστα, infr. 
 301. και κάρθ*, OTavnep τοϋνομ αισθη¬ 
 τοί το σόν. AVund. τοίδε τοΰ θίοΰ. 
 cf. sup. 59· 
 
 66 . άρχίΐ Tis αυτών ; ./ire they 
 under a monarclis sway ! 
 
 Ih. ττλτ)θ€ΐ. This word, as indicat¬ 
 ing the pcop/e by numbers, has been 
 illustrated in my “ Wasps” and 
 “ Frogs” of Aristophanes. 
 
 Ib. λόγος, surnma potestas. Ell. 
 strictly, speech, right of delivering 
 
 their opinions; that constituting 
 power in democracies. Cf. Demosth. 
 de Corona 285, 5-12. 
 
 67. κατ’ άστυ ; “ The king who 
 
 rules the city rules here also.” 
 Dale®. 
 
 68. λδγω και σθίν€ΐ. The delibera¬ 
 tive and executive powers of go¬ 
 vernment seem to be here intended. 
 Doederlein compares Eur. Iph. A. 
 1020. στρατός τ’ άν ου μίμψαιτό μ!, ει 
 τα πράγματα | λελογισμένος πράσσοιμι 
 μάλλον ή σβένει. On ουτος τις, see 
 Ellendt II. 45 ^· 
 
 ' 66-6g. άρχει — θησευς. “ It may 
 seem surprising, ” says Brumoy, 
 “ that (Edipus, who had so long 
 been monarch of Thebes, should not 
 know whether a neighbouring state 
 was a republic or a monarchy; hut 
 it will afterwards appear, that (Edi¬ 
 pus only asks this question for a 
 feint, that he may not be known, 
 and in order to gain fuller intelli¬ 
 gence.” This reply does not seem 
 satisfactory ; for it may be observed, 
 that after (Edipus is fully known to 
 the Chorus, and all reason for feints 
 and disguises is at an end, he speaks 
 of Theseus in a verv indefinite man- 
 ner, 288. (<5 κύριός τις, your lord. 
 
 e As frequent use will be made of this gentleman’s version, in order to remind young 
 readers, that Soplnxdes was not merely a subject for commentators and metricians to exer¬ 
 cise their respective tools upon, but a great poet, it may be as well to add that iMr. Dale’s 
 translation is not as accurate as it is elegant and poetical. I have observed (and without 
 seeking for them) at least 120 translations in the ])resent play, the accuracy of Λvhίch 
 may be more or less questioned, without including errors contained in notes derived 
 from popular writei’s on these subjects, such as Potter and Brumoy, or mistakes in 
 assigning the dialogue to its proper speakers. 
 
16 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. άρ αν TL9 αύτώ πομποί υμών μόλοι; 
 
 SE. 0)9 7Γρο9 τί λβζων η καταρτνσων μολβΐν ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ9 αν ττροσαρκών μικρά KepSavrj μόγα. 
 
 SE. κα\ TL9 7Γρο9 άνδρο9 μη βλ€7Γοντο9 αρκ6σΐ9 ; 
 ΟΙ. όσ αν λβγωμβν ττάνθ* όρώντα Χόζομ^ν, 
 
 SE. οισθ\ ώ ^ev\ ω9 νυν μη σφαΧη9 ; iireinep ei 
 yevvaio9^ ό)9 Ιδόντι, ττΧην τον δαίμονο9. 
 
 70 
 
 7.5 
 
 whoever he may be). If any real 
 defence for Sophocles can be found, 
 it must be derived, I think, from 
 other grounds. It is to be remem¬ 
 bered then, which Brumoy appa¬ 
 rently did not, that CEdipus had not 
 come direct from Thebes to Colo- 
 nos; that he had been a wanderer, 
 it may be, for years; that during 
 those wanderings the great political 
 changes which Theseus originated 
 in Athens had taken place, and that 
 consequently we are not to bear too 
 closely upon the poet for allowing 
 CEdipus to ask questions here, which 
 he certainly might have asked during 
 his previous wanderings. 
 
 70. πομποί, messenger. 
 
 Ib. αντω μόλοι. Ant. 148, ηλθ€ 
 ®ηβα. 234. μολ^ίν σοι. 
 
 71. Wunder, considering two in¬ 
 terrogations to be here mixed up 
 together, states them thus at length : 
 ώ? προς τί μόλοι τις όξ ημών αντω, τί 
 λίξων, η καταρτνσων μόλξίν ; The con¬ 
 struction would be simplified by con¬ 
 sidering προς λί^ων as a tmesis, in 
 which case we must read πρός τι, 
 as Brunck and Gaisford do. For in¬ 
 stances of Sophoclean tmesis, see 
 Wunder himself at v. 1671. 
 
 Ib. καταρτναν, arcessere. Ell. 
 καταρτνσων μολί'ίν {effecturus ut ve- 
 niat. Dind.), nearly the same con¬ 
 struction as Phil. 60. στ€ΐλαντ€ς μο- 
 λίΐν. 
 
 72. προσαρκ€'ιν, priebere, concedere. 
 
 Cf. Heind. ad Plat. Thesetet. §. 66. 
 
 K€pbaiv€iv μίγα^Κ€ρόαίν€ΐν μόγα κίρ- 
 δος. 
 
 αρκ€σις, pripsidium. Ell. προς, 
 on the part of. 
 
 74. όρώντα, tumble prcedita, i. e. 
 consilii plena. Reisig. (CEdipus 
 speaking with great emphasis and 
 dignity), clear-sighted, without dark¬ 
 ness or obscurity. 
 
 75. οΙσθ' — ως vvv μη σφαλης ; The 
 passive of σφάλλω signifies to slip 
 into some evil or misfortune (Trach. 
 297. 719.); hence, to transgress, to 
 offend against (Trach. 621. ov τι μη 
 σφαλώ y €V σοι ποΓ€, I Will never sin 
 against thee). The trespass which 
 CEdipus was likely to commit, was 
 leaving his present situation and 
 entering the sacred grove. The σκο¬ 
 πός therefore cautions him, that his 
 safest course will be to remain where 
 he is. Erfurdt has explained the 
 construction from the well known 
 idiom, οΐσθ' ώς ποιησον, thus : ** oiaff 
 ως μη σφαλης nihil aliud est quam 
 μη σφαλης, οΐσθ' ώς.** The reader 
 will beware therefore of taking his 
 sense of this passage from Dale. 
 
 Know’st thou, stranger, 
 That thou art not deceived ? And 
 yet, &c. 
 
 76. ώς Ιδόντι, ut es ei, qui te vide· 
 rit, i. e. secundum ejus judicium, qui 
 te viderit. Cf. Matth. §.388. Wund. 
 
 Ib. Tov δαίμονας, dies herbe Loos, 
 this hard lot. Donn. (the allusion is 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 17 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΑΝ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 αυτόν μ(ν\ ovTrep κάφάρψ, «os* €γω 
 rots* ίνθά^ αύτου μη κατ αχττυ δημοται^ 
 Λ€ξω ταο βλυων. otoe γαρ KpLuovai σοι, 
 el γρη σ€ μίμνβίν, η πορ^υβσθαί πάλιν, 
 ώ τβκνον, ή βφηκ€ν ημίν ο ζβνος ; 
 βφηκ€ν, ώστ€ παν iv ησνχω, πάτβρ, 
 βζβστι φωνβΐν, ώs' €μον μόνη^ π4λας, 
 ώ πότνιαι δβινώπβ^, evre νυν βδρας 
 πρώτων 4φ> υμών τησδ€ γηί ίκαμψ* βγω, 
 Φοίβω Τ€ κάμοί μη γ4νησθ' άγνώμονβ^^ 
 OS* μοι^ τα ττοΛΛ eKUV οτ ^ς^χρη κακα, 
 ταύτην eXe^e παύλαν iv χρόνω μακρω, 
 ίλθόντι χώραν τβρμίαν^ οπού θβών 
 
 8ο 
 
 85 
 
 to his blindness and state of destitu¬ 
 tion. Instead of a full stop after 
 δαίμονας, as Brunck, Gaisford and 
 Dindorf give, it is better to put a 
 comma with Matthiae and Wunder. 
 
 77 · civTov μίν, remain here. On 
 ίωί.,.λβ^ω, see Hart. II. 292. 
 
 78. τοίς €νθάδ' αυτόν. Reisig com¬ 
 pares Eupolis ap. Stob. IV. 33. ήν 
 
 τις των €νθάδ' αυτόν | €πιτίθηται τβ 
 ποίησα. Add Arist. Vesp. 765* 
 βάδ€ αυτόν μινών. 
 
 82. €v ήσύχω. Cf. infr. 197* 
 
 84. πότνιαι. On the application of 
 this epithet to the Eumenides, cf. 
 Muller p. 176. See also infr. 1050. 
 
 Ib. δεινωψ (ωλ//·), qffearful aspect. 
 
 84-5. “ Since you are the first 
 persons in this country, on whose 
 seats I have reposed.” Germ, prose 
 translators; da ich in diesem Lande 
 zuerst eine Ruhestatte lei each ge- 
 funden hale. On evre, since, see 
 Matth, p. 1103. Kiihn. §. 805, 3, a. 
 
 86 . άγνωμονίς, immites, durce. Ell. 
 Trach. 473. rationis expers. 
 
 87. ra πόλλ’ €κύνα κακά. Neue re¬ 
 
 fers for the many evils or hardships 
 here spoken of to the denunciations 
 made by the Delphic shrine when 
 first consulted by CEdipus. (QEd. T. 
 787 sq.) That the learned editor is 
 incorrect in this view of the matter, 
 has I hope appeared from the pre¬ 
 fatory remarks. The other editors 
 pass the words unnoticed. 
 
 Ib. (^€κχράν), announced ora¬ 
 
 cularly. Cf. Pass, in voc. χράω. 
 
 88-100. The general sense of 
 these verses having been explained 
 in the Preface, we have now merely 
 to go through their details. 
 
 88 . T αυτήν, emphatic: παυΧαν sc. 
 των κακών. 
 
 Ib. €v χρόνω μακρω, after a long 
 time. Cf. Phil. 235. El. 330. Eur. 
 El. 1154· δίκίτίσιν iv σποραίσιν {after 
 ten years). 
 
 89. Teppiav (reppa). This adjective 
 occurs no where in the Greek drama 
 (nor any Greek author that I am 
 aware of), except Soph. Antig. 
 1330. Tepplav apipav, the last day, 
 the day of death. The general mean- 
 
 c 
 
18 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 σεμνών ebpav Χάβοιμι καί ζβνόστασίν^ 
 ίνταυθα κάμψβιν τον ταλαίττωρον βίον, · 
 κ€ρδη μ€ν οίκησαντα τοΐ9 δβδβγμβνοί^, 
 ατην δβ τοΪ 9 ττ^μψασίΡ, οϊ μ άττηΧασαν' 
 σημαία δ’ ηζ^^Ρ τώρδβ μοί παρηγγνα, 
 η σβίσμορ, η βρορτηρ tlp\ η Δώί σβλα?. 
 βγρωκα μβρ pup ω? μβ τηρδβ τηρ οδορ 
 ουκ βσθ* δπω9 ου πιστορ βζ νμώρ πτβρορ 
 
 90 
 
 95 
 
 (Γτρ. CL , 
 
 ΐη^ is determined by the word from 
 which it is derived, terminal, con¬ 
 cluding, final. 
 
 89—90. σεμνών θζών. El. I 1 2. 
 σ€μναί re θίών naibes *EpLvve^. Aj. 
 837. σίμνας 'Epivvs Tavvnobas. ^Esch. 
 Eum. 359. pevei yap ^υμηχανοί re κα\ 
 TiXeioi κακών re μνημονβς σ^μναί. 992. 
 bevp ire, σ^μναί. 798. σ^μνότιμος και 
 ^ννοικητωρ (μοί. The epithet is ap¬ 
 plied in ^schylus even to the vic¬ 
 tims offered to these goddesses. 
 Eum. 960. σφαγίων τών 8 ' νττο σεμνών 
 κατα γης σνμ^ναι. Pausan. II. II. 3* 
 ναός θ(ών, ας ’Αθηναίοι Σίμνας, Σικυώ- 
 νιοι be ΈvμevLbaς όνομάζονσιν. And 
 here I think we have one proof of 
 oracular ambiguity, calculated to 
 put CEdipus on long travel and in¬ 
 vestigation ; for the term σ€μνα\ 6 eai 
 might apply to the goddesses De¬ 
 meter and Cora, between whom and 
 the Erinyes there seems to be much 
 connexion of ideas. My limits allow 
 me only to furnish references on the 
 subject. See Osann ad Philem. 
 Meineke ad Menand. Muller’s Eu- 
 raen. pp. 168. 170. 172. 176. 181. 
 Klausen’s Theol. 56. 
 
 90. ebpav. Cf. tEscIi. Eum. 817. 
 852. 
 
 Ib. ^(νόστασιν (ξ€νος, στάσις) = 
 ^evoboKeiov, place for the reception 
 of guests or strangers. 
 
 91. Musgrave compares Eur. 
 Hippol. 87. Wunder adds Hel. 
 
 1666. El. 956. κάμτΓΤ€ΐν, Reis. Herm. 
 κάμψειν, Elms. Gaisf. Wund. Dind. 
 (in annotat.) Neue. 
 
 92. The commentators fluctuate 
 between οίκησαντα, the participle of 
 olKeiv hahitare, and οΙκίσαντα, the 
 participle of οΙκίζβιν, in domicilio 
 constituere. Those who adopt the 
 former, as Seidler, Dindorf, and 
 Ellendt,. consider κepbη and άτην as 
 put in apposition with e/ie, i. e. CEdi- 
 pum. Doederlein, Hermann, Elmsley, 
 and Wunder prefer the transitive 
 verb and participle, and reject Mat- 
 thise’s interpretation §. 433. Obs. 3. 
 Dindorf, for his sense of the word, 
 aptly compares Eur. Here. F. 824. 
 Tiokei yap ovbev ηκομεν βλάβος. The 
 same learned writer thinks that we 
 ought to read οίκησοντα with cod. 
 Paris. 2886. and Turnebus’s edition. 
 
 94—3. σημ^α Αιος. On the Zeus 
 Semalios, or Zeus the giver of 
 weather-signs, see Kruse’s Hellas, 
 II. 7-8. 
 
 96. TTjvbe την obov. Neue com¬ 
 pares Aj. 877. 1 should consider the 
 expression emphatic. (As far as this 
 journey is concerned; all my pre¬ 
 vious wanderings having been with¬ 
 out effect.) 
 
 97. ovK €σθ' όπως ον, without douht. 
 
 Phil. 195. 
 
 Ib. πιστόν e^ υμών πτ€ρον, “ an 
 omen, or impulse, (Schol. οιωνός, η 
 πτόρωσις της bιavoiaς.) which has you 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 19 
 
 ^ζηγαγ* eh τόδ’ αλσο9. ον γαρ αν ττοτβ 
 
 ττρώταίσιν ύμΐν άντβκνρσ οδοίττορών, 
 
 νηφων aoLVOt^y κάττϊ σεμνόν βζόμην ιοο 
 
 βάθρον τόδ’ άσκ€ 7 Γαρνον. άλλα μοι, θβαί, 
 
 βίου κατ’ ομφάί τάς 'Απόλλωνος δότβ 
 
 πβρασιν ηδη καΐ καταστροφήν TLva, 
 
 el μη δοκώ tl μeLόvως e^eiv, ael 
 
 for it’s author, and which may be 
 depended upon.” On the word 
 nrepov, see Bemhardy’s Wiss. Synt. 
 
 P* 57· 
 
 98. av. On the elliptic use of av, 
 see Hartung II. 224. 226. 244. sq. 
 Cf. infr. 125.146, &c. Insert^ other¬ 
 wise. 
 
 99. avTiKvpeivy to meet. infr. 1680. 
 οτω μητ “^Αρη^ μητ€ novTOs άντίκνρσ^ν. 
 Phil. 545 · ^T^^irrep άντίκνρσα, δοξάζων 
 pkv οϋ. 
 
 ΙΟΟ. νηφων {myself pure from or 
 abstinent of wine) άοίνοις {to you who 
 hold it in abhorrence). That CEdi- 
 pus had not broken his fast, when 
 he arrived at Colonos, is clear from 
 the language held by him (sup. 
 3-4), and from the early hour at 
 which he reaches the place (infr. 
 306). No one acquainted with the 
 oracular language of antiquity will 
 fail to recognise it in the opposition 
 and ambiguity of the terms here 
 used. Whether Sophocles derived 
 these terms from (Edipodean ora¬ 
 cles in actual existence, is of little 
 moment to inquire. 
 
 Ib. άοίνοις. Libations made to the 
 Eumenides consisted, as we shall 
 see hereafter, of water and honey 
 mixed with water. Hence Clytsem- 
 nestra’s appeal to the Furies, (^Esch. 
 Eum. 106. coll. 822.) η πολλά μίν 
 δη των ίμων iKel^are | χοάς τ’ άοίνονς, 
 νηφάλια μ(ΐ\ίγματα. For the trickery 
 practised by Apollo on the Mcerse, 
 who also were bound to the same 
 
 sober libations, see Klausen’s .Esch. 
 Theol. p. 44. See also Dissen’s Com¬ 
 ment. in Find. p. 618. In the 
 words νηφων άοίνοις we may sup¬ 
 pose some reference to the oracle 
 given to (Edipus through Ismene 
 on their meeting previous to the 
 present play, the meaning of which 
 words (Edipus now for the first 
 time comprehends. 
 
 101. άσκίτταρνον {a, σκίπαρνον, an 
 instrument used for smoothing and 
 polishing), rough, unpolished. 
 
 102. δμφη. “ Est ομφη Homerico 
 usu vox divina, β^ίη, θ€ων, deov, cra- 
 culo aut alio modo futura indicans 
 hominibus.” Diss. ad Find. Nem. X. 
 cf. Wachsm. IV. 277. et Ell. in v. ■ 
 
 103 . ττίρασιν gl. τ^λζίωσιν, termi¬ 
 nation. Ell. transitus. He considers 
 ττίρασιν κα\ καταστροφήν as an hen- 
 diadys, equivalent to πίρασιν βίου 
 TikevTaiav. On ήδη. See Hart. I. 238. 
 
 104. μ^ιόνως ^χ€ΐν. π€ρισσώς €χ€ΐν 
 
 would, I think, imply, to be in a state 
 of superfuity as to number (cf.Electr. 
 155.); μ€ΐόνως would on the 
 
 contrary be, to be in a state of defi¬ 
 ciency as to number. Wunder adopts 
 Hermann’s explanation, vilior esse, 
 quaru cui hoc beneficiuni concedatis. 
 lEe first view is, I think, more in 
 accordance with the opinion of the 
 scholiast : et μή δοκω νμίν Ιλαττόνως 
 €χ€ΐν τά κακά, κα\ δζίσθαι προσθήκης κα¬ 
 κών. The German prose translators 
 take a similar view of the matter. 
 
 c 2 
 
20 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 μόχλοις λατρ^ύων τοΪ9 ύττβρτάτοΐζ βροτών. 
 
 LT, ώ γλνκβΐαί τταΐδβ^ αρχαίου Έκότον, 
 ϊτ\ ω μεγίστης ΤΙαλλάδθ9 καλούμ€υαί 
 ΤΓοσών Άθηναι τιμυωτάτη πόλ^?, 
 οίκτβίρατ άνδρο 9 ΟΙδίττου τόδ' άθλων 
 €ίόωλον ου γαρ όη τοο αρχαιον oepas. 
 
 ΑΝ. σίγα. ττορβύονται γαρ οΐδβ δη rives 
 χρόνω τταλαω), σης βδραί Επίσκοποι, 
 
 ΟΙ. σιγησομαί re και συ μ e^ οδού ττόδα 
 
 κρύψον κατ αλσοί, τώνδ' €ω? αν ίκμάθω 
 TLvas λόγους βρουσιν, ev γαρ τω μαθ€Ϊν 
 eveariv ηύλάββια των ποιούμενων, 
 
 ΧΟΡΟΣ. 
 
 όρα. τις αρ ην ; που vaiei ; ττροφ, αί, 
 
 105 
 
 1 ΙΟ 
 
 1*5 
 
 117 
 
 105. βροτων. The words βροτων, 
 άντρων y ανθρώπων, χθονος, γης, seem 
 to be frequently used by ancient 
 poets, and more particularly by So¬ 
 phocles, much in the same spirit of 
 redundancy, as our in the world, on 
 the face of the earth, &c. 
 
 106. tV’ ω γΧνκΐΊαι. ScHOL. €νφη- 
 μως τας 'Ερινύας γΧνκβΙας φησϊν, ϊνα 
 μη πικραί αντω γενωνται. Jacobs con¬ 
 siders the goddesses to be so termed 
 by (Edipus, because through them 
 he hopes to be led into a sweet 
 haven from his calamities. 
 
 Ib. παίδβί Σκότου, How lax the 
 ancients were in their genealogies 
 of these abstract beings has been 
 seen supr. v. 40. 
 
 107. Παλλάδοί καλόνμ^ναι, Wun- 
 der compares Eur. Ion 8. eanv γαρ 
 ovK άσημος 'ΕΧληνων πόΧις, της χρυσό- 
 λόγχον Παλλάδας κ^κλημίνη. 
 
 109—10. άνδρυς Οίδίπον . . (Ίδωλον' 
 hanc speciem viri, qua sola reliqua 
 est CEdipo. Herm. Cf. Neue ad 
 Aj. 817. 
 
 110. The poet might have been 
 expected to say, τόδ( τ 6 άρχαΊον δέ¬ 
 μας. But the article is omitted, says 
 Hermann, “ quia quae pristina dici- 
 mus, per se certa quaedam intelli- 
 guntur.” 
 
 111. πορεύονται οίδ€=πορεύονται 
 
 ώδε. infr. 7 ^ 3 · ^ΡΧ^α,ι Κριών δδ’ 
 ημΐν. Antig. ι 55 ~ 7 · hue 
 
 venit. 
 
 1 13. pe πόδα. Matth. §. 421. Obs. 
 5. Bern. p. 120. Kiihn. §. 564. Eurip. 
 Hec. 807. ποί μ' εξάγεις πόδα; Her¬ 
 mann explains : κρυφόν με κατ άλσος, 
 άγουσα πόδα εμόν εξ όδον. Reisig com¬ 
 pares the language of the Berlin po¬ 
 pulace : es zerreisst mich das Herz. 
 
 114. έωςάν. Cf. Matth. §. 522. I. 
 
 115-16. “It is only by inquiry 
 
 and observation that we learn how 
 to proceed cautiously.” 
 
 117. Before entering upon the 
 details of the following chorus, some 
 remarks on its general character 
 may not prove misplaced. It is 
 well known that the present drama 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 21 
 
 που κνρεΐ εκτόπως συθβις 6 πάντων 
 
 was written by Sophocles at the 
 very close of his theatrical career; 
 and doubts I believe exist whether 
 he ever lived to complete it, or 
 whether some additions were not 
 made to it after his death. At all 
 events, two distinct styles are pretty 
 visible in its composition; and were 
 we discussing an Italian instead of 
 a Grecian drama, with a supposition 
 of joint authorship, the two writers 
 whom I should select for the pur¬ 
 pose of illustration, would be Alfieri 
 and Metastasio. To the first we 
 should ascribe nearly nine-tenths of 
 the performance, and in which if 
 not exhibiting the severest form of 
 Greek tragedy, certainly nothing 
 appears to compromise its dignity 
 or grandeur. To the latter we should 
 assign not merely the portion im¬ 
 mediately before us, but one or two 
 others, where the same character 
 of composition appears,—a studied 
 quitting as it were of the heroic and 
 dropping into the forms of familiar 
 life—brief sentences and quick in¬ 
 terrogations— movements addressed 
 to the eye, and obviously meeint to 
 be exceedingly graphic —elliptic ex¬ 
 pressions, and a rapid interchange 
 of speakers, &c. &c. Though I can 
 derive no direct countenance from 
 preceding editors in justification of 
 these remarks, yet an indirect one 
 may, I think, be found in some me¬ 
 trical remarks of Hermann. That 
 ablest of the expositors of Sopho¬ 
 cles was the first to notice, that in 
 the following chorus, we are not 
 to consider the coryphaeus of the 
 
 choral Troop as taking upon himself 
 the whole task of speaking. One 
 of the Troop puts a string of inter¬ 
 rogations (i 17-120): a second sug¬ 
 gests a plan of proceeding (121- 
 2): a third draws an imaginary 
 portrait of the yet unseen intruder 
 (123-136); a fourth characterizes 
 him, when he comes under actual 
 observation (140-1): a sixth, it 
 may be, puts a question to CEdipus 
 himself, and without waiting his 
 answer, completes his work by an 
 observation addressed to a brother 
 of the Troop (149-150); the whole 
 harmonizing with that tableau form, 
 and vif character, which with us 
 belongs rather to the melodram 
 than the regular drama. How far 
 this innovation upon the Attic 
 drama, originally of “ stateliest and 
 most regal, argument,” may have 
 satisfied bearded auditors, it is not 
 for us to say; that the ladies of 
 Athens, young and old, would be 
 as much gratified with this speci¬ 
 men of “ Tragedy made easy,” as 
 the court-ladies of Maria Theresa 
 were with similar effusions of her^ 
 gentleman-usher, there can be little 
 doubt. For further observations on 
 the form in which the Choral body 
 enter the orchestra, and the parts 
 taken by individual members in the 
 dialogue, see Hermann in loco, and 
 also his preface to the Here. Furens 
 of Euripides. 
 
 117. tA ap’ ην. Wunder expresses 
 his surprise, that editors should here 
 consider ην as equal to eVrt, (cf. 
 infr. 1696.) not recollecting, says 
 
 f Such, if I remember right, was the office held by the poet of Vienna, and his exe¬ 
 cution of which drew upon him the unutterable loathing of his brother bard, Alfieri. But 
 the latter was a haughty aristocrat with an ample fortune; and such persons do not 
 always consider, that poets and men of genius must live as well as other persons; if by 
 means not altogether consistent with their innate dignity, the fault does not always lie in 
 themselves. 
 
22 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ό ττάντων άκορ€στατο9 ; ΐ2ο 
 
 προστΓβνθον, Χβνσσβ vlVj 
 ττροσδερκου πανταγ^. 
 
 ΊτΧανάτα^ ττΧανάταί τις ο ττρ^σβυς^ ου^ 
 
 βγχωρος* ττροσββα γαρ ούκ 125 
 
 au ποτ άστιβΙς αΧσος eV 
 
 ravS άμαιμακ^ταν κόράν, 
 
 άς τρβμομεν Xiyeiv, 
 
 και τταραμ^ιβόμβσθ* ά^βρκτως, 13° 
 
 the learned writer, that the Chorus 
 could have used the present tense 
 only on the supposition that they 
 had seen (Edipus. This may he 
 logical reasoning, hut is not very 
 poetical. Metre : iamb, et dochm. or 
 dochm. with double anac. Cf. Seid- 
 ler de dochm. Vers. p. ro4. 
 
 Ib. vaUi, haunts, hides, infr. 137. 
 Trach. 99. 
 
 119. e/croTTios {from this place) 
 σνθάς {having rushed). Cf. infr. 
 234, &c. Matth. §. 446. S. 
 
 11 9—20. 6 ττάντχύν 6 πάντων. On re¬ 
 duplications of this kind, cf. inf. 124- 
 155. Phil. 829. 849.1095. &c. &c. It 
 is the language of earnestness in all 
 ages of the world. Psalm 60. “ The 
 kings of mighty armies did flee, did 
 flee.” 
 
 Ib. άκορίστατος, impudentissimus. 
 WuND. “ Conjecturas, in quibus 
 extremam harbariem redolens Angli 
 cujusdam est άφοβ^στατος, prseterire 
 satius duco.” Ell. άκορο: Pind. Pyth. 
 IV. 360. 
 
 121 . προσπενθου, exquire. Ell. 
 Elmsley compares ^sch. Eum. 245. 
 opa, opa /χάλ’ αν' λεύσσετον παντά, μη 
 λάθη φύ'γ^α βάς ό ματροφόνοί άτίτας. 
 This language is parodied by Ari- 
 stoph. Thesmoph. 663 sq. Eccles. 
 480 sq. 
 
 Ib. λεΰσσε viv, Herm. Wund. Bind, 
 (in annot.) λενσσατ αντον, Libri. 
 λεύσσεΐί νιν ; προσ 8 ερκον, προσπευθου 
 πανταχη Gaisf. 
 
 121-2. Metre: antispast. and 
 iamb. 
 
 1 24. πλανάτας — ^ενος. ScHOL. ονδ’. 
 Cf. Hart. I. 204. Metre : two doch- 
 miacs. 
 
 125-6—7. Metre: glyconean. as 
 also 131-2. 
 
 1 26. άστιβ^ {inaccessible, cf. Aj. 
 65.) άλσος ες. For preposition thus 
 placed after its noun, Neue com¬ 
 pares Qid. T. 178. El. 14. Eur. 
 Phcen. 24. 
 
 128. αμαιμάκετος (a sort of redu¬ 
 plicative form of άμαχος, μαίμαχος). 
 /Esch. Eum. 362. calls the Erinyes 
 Βνσπαρηγόρονς βρότοις, impervious to 
 the prayers of men. Sophocles and 
 Hesiod apply the term to fre 
 (CEd. T. 177. Theog. 319.), as well 
 as to the Furies. Reisig translates, 
 adversus quem cegre contendas. 
 
 129. άς τρεμομεν λεγειν. SC. under 
 the name of Erinyes. Cf. infr. 486. 
 Metre : choriamb. 
 
 130. ά^ερκτως, without looking at 
 their habitation. Cf. infr. 193. 490· 
 
 131. άφώνως, without any eleva¬ 
 tion of voice. Metre : logaoed. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΟΝΩΙ. 
 
 23 
 
 άφώΐ'ως, αλόγων το ray 
 βνφημου στόμα φροντ'ώος 
 livres^ τα Se νυν tlv'^ ηκ€ίν 
 Aoyoy ovdev αζονθ\ 
 ον €γω λβύσσων wepl ττάν ονττω 
 δύναμαι τβμβνοί 
 γνώναι πού μοί ποτβ vaiei. 
 υΐ. 00 eK€LV 09 €γω φωντ) γαρ ορω 
 το φατίζόμβνον. 
 
 135 
 
 / 
 
 (τυττημΛ. 
 
 131 —3 · «λόγωί— Uvres. The au¬ 
 thors of the German prose transla¬ 
 tion render not amiss: aus des 
 Herzens Tiefe stille Gebete sendend, 
 sending forth still praijers from the 
 depths of the heart. 
 
 131. αλόγω?. By this word I un¬ 
 derstand, aspirations of the heart, 
 which do not form themselves into 
 actual words. 
 
 132. (ύφημον, bene ominati. Electr. 
 630. οΰκονν (άσζΐί ουδ' νπ ευφήμου 
 βοής I θυσαί μ€. On the family of 
 the Hesychidae, who were occupied 
 with the sacrifices to these god¬ 
 desses, and the origin of whose 
 name is sufficiently evident, see 
 Muller’s “ ^schylos Eumeniden” 
 P- 179 · 
 
 Ib. στόμα. See Ellendt in voc. 
 who considers the whole phrase as 
 equivalent to ^υφημουντ^ς τω στόματι. 
 “ Apte hoc vocabulo usus est: nam 
 preces dicit, quae ore, sed suppressa 
 voce, emittuntur.” Dind. 
 
 132— 3. στόμα ιέντίς. El. 596. ή 
 Ίτασαν 1 ης γΧώσσαν. Antig. 12 10. 
 €7ros Ιησι δνσθρηνητον. 
 
 133- Metre: glyconean hyperc. 
 
 134. Metre : penthem. iamb, with 
 anac. 
 
 135 — 7 * λζύσσων nepi irav 
 
 Τ(μ€νος, ονπω δύναμαι κ. τ. e. On a 
 Pindaric use of the word τύμ^νος, 
 
 see Dissen ad OL XI. (X.) 45. 
 
 138. CEdipus comes forward from 
 his hiding-place in the sacred re/ne- 
 i/oy, a considerable distance being 
 between him and the Chorus (cf. 
 infr. 164). The Chorus look with 
 horror on the profane intruder. 
 Metre: 138 to 148. anapaests. 
 
 Ib. οδ’ όκΐΐνος βγω. Antig. 384* 
 
 ηδ' €στ €Κζίνη (rovpyov η ^ξεφγασμίνη). 
 CEdipus announces himself to be the 
 person of whom they are in search. 
 
 139. TO φατιζόμβνον. ScHOL. to 
 Χζγόμενον παρ' υμών. And what 
 had the Chorus just said } They 
 had just promulgated (of course in 
 a dramatic sense) that they had 
 examined the τόμ^νος all round to 
 see where this daring intruder had 
 concealed himself. The answer of 
 CEdipus, at first so enigmatic to the 
 Chorus, who from the distance at 
 which he speaks are not yet cogni¬ 
 zant of his blindness, (for it does 
 not necessarily follow that the σκο¬ 
 πός had informed them of this cir¬ 
 cumstance,) is to this effect: “ My 
 want of sight prevents me from 
 seeing that you have actually made 
 the circuit of the grove, but by 
 your voices I perceive that you have 
 done as you say.” Whoever is at 
 all conversant with the habits of the 
 blind, and knows how habitually 
 
 c 4 
 
S,4> 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 xo. LQ) Ιω, 140 
 
 δ€ίΡ09 μ€ν opal/, Setvos δβ κλνβίΐ/. 
 
 ΟΙ. μη μ, Ικ€Τ€νω, προσίδητ άνομον, 
 
 ΧΟ. Ζβί) άλβ^ητορ, TL9 TToff 6 τΓρβσβυ^ ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ον ττάνυ μοίρας βύδαιμονίσαί 
 
 πρώτης, ώ rrjaS βφοροι χώρας. 145 
 
 Οηλω Ο ου γαρ αν ωό αλΑοτριΟίς 
 
 ομμασιν βίρπον, 
 
 κάπ\ σμικρας μβγας ώρμουν. 
 
 AU. € 65 αΑαων ομμ/χτων ctvr. ct. 149 
 
 they use the word seeing, will rea¬ 
 dily understand why Qidipus uses 
 the word όρω on this occasion. I 
 have given what appears to me the 
 simplest sense of this passage, and 
 my limits forbid me to enter upon 
 various other explanations given by 
 respective commentators. 
 
 141. bfivbs k\v€lv : applied to the 
 strange and enigmatic^ language 
 which GEdipus has just used, as 
 beivos opav to his general appearance. 
 
 142. μη προσίδητ (ώί) άνομον, 
 i. e. do not look at me as a person 
 acting contrary to what custom and 
 usage require. Cf. infr. 168. For 
 the ellipse Doederlein compares Thu- 
 cyd. II. 72. δίχ€σθ€ 5 e άμφοτίρονς 
 φίλους. 
 
 143. Zev άλεξητορ. Consult Klau- 
 sen’s .^schyl. Tlieol. p. 82. 
 
 Ib. πρΐσβνς. The final syllable 
 elongated for the same reason as 
 the final syllable in φατιζόμ^νον : 
 viz. that it occurs before a full 
 stop, and where a change of person 
 takes place. 
 
 144-5. General meaning: The 
 Chorus having asked, who is this old 
 man ? Qidipus replies, “ it is an old 
 man not to be felicitated on account 
 of his lot, as if that lot were of the 
 
 happiest description; it being on 
 the contrary of the worst descrip¬ 
 tion.” 
 
 Ib. πρώτης μοίρας. Find. Pyth. I. 
 191. TO δε παθείν ευ πρώτον άθλων' ευ 
 δ’ ακόυαν δΐυτίρα μοΊρ\ 
 
 144· ^νδαιμονίσαι, cum gen. Neue 
 compares Electr. 920. Matthiee (§. 
 361. e.) supplies άμ\, and §. 535, b. 
 supposes the infinitive to be explica¬ 
 tive of the, sense in which πρώτης is 
 to be taken. 
 
 145. (φοροι {(φοράω), guardians. 
 
 146. δηλώ δ\ Cfi infr. 1145. 
 
 146—7· αΧλοτρίοις ομμασιν, viz. 
 
 those of Antigone. Cf. infr. 867. 
 Reisig compares Plat. Phsed. 99, b. 
 άλλοτρίω ομματι προσχρώμΐνοι. 
 
 148. κάπ\ σμικρας SC. άγκυρας, 
 Reisig. e conject., Wunder. Of the 
 translators. Dale alone appears to have 
 adopted Reisig’s explanation, “ or 
 lean’d though weighty on so frail a 
 stay.” κάπι σμικροΐς, (i. q. σμικρον 
 (ξαιτών, sup. V. 5.) Libri, Herm. 
 Gaisf. Dind. Neue. 
 
 Ib. ώρμουν. “ 'Ορμάν autem, i. e. 
 in portu consistere, se dicit> utpote 
 ίλθών χώραν reppiav. Vide V. 89.” 
 Dind. 
 
 149—50. άλαών όμμάτων φυταλμιος, 
 a person born blind. See Pass, in 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 25 
 
 άρα και ησθα φυτάλμοις δνσαίων ; 
 
 μακραίων γ\ οσ €7Γ€ΐκάσαι. ΐ5<^ 
 
 αλλ ου μαρ ev γ €μοι 
 
 7Γροσθησ€ΐ9 τάσδ* apas, 
 
 TTepas γαρ nepas' αλλ’ Ινα τωδ' Ιν ά- •55 
 
 φθ€γκτψ μη 7Γρο7Γ€σΎ}9 vmrei 
 
 TTOiaePTL, καθυδρος ου 
 κρατηρ μ^ιλυχίων ποτών 
 ρ€ύματι συντρβχβι, 
 
 VOC. φντάΚμιος. So also the Scho¬ 
 liast. On apa, see Hart. L 450 sq. 
 
 149—5 O. δνσαίωρ μακραίων. Putting 
 a note of interrogation at the word 
 φντάΚμιος, and supposing one mem¬ 
 ber of the troop to be addressing 
 another, I translate: miserably old. 
 Cf. sup. p. 21. And so I think the 
 Schohast understood the passage, 
 δυστυχής καί γίρων ci. For different 
 modes of punctuating and explain¬ 
 ing this difficult passage, see the 
 various editors, and cf. infr. 1241. 
 
 150. δσ’ 4 ττξΐκάσαι, to conjecture 
 from his appearance. Cf. Matth. 
 
 §· 545 · 
 
 151. tvy ipoL. Quantum in me est. 
 DiED. Mihi, qui te monuerim. Dind. 
 
 152. 7 Γροσθησ€ΐς r. d. You shall 
 not to those evils which already op¬ 
 press you, viz. old age and wretch¬ 
 edness, add the misery which must 
 fall on your devoted head by being 
 where you ought not to be. · 
 
 Ib. τάσδ’ άράς. Quas tibi contra- 
 hes, ubi nemus intraveris. Djnd. 
 
 155* rrepas γαρ rrepas. “Ultra, 
 quam debebat, progresso CEdipo ca- 
 vet Chorus, ne lucum Furiarum in- 
 tret.” Ell. But CEdipus was al¬ 
 ready in the grove: the expression 
 seems therefore merely to imply 
 that he was already trespassing; the 
 Chorus subsequently expressing their 
 
 160 
 
 fears, lest he should trespass on a 
 portion of the grove still more sa¬ 
 cred than that where he already is, 
 and into which a few more steps 
 would carry him. Wunder, I am 
 pleased to see, takes much the same 
 view. 
 
 155-62. The Chorus here pro¬ 
 ceed to describe that portion of the 
 grove where their peculiar libations, 
 consisting of water and honey, were 
 paid to the Eumenides; and that 
 CEdipus may not violate this most 
 sacred of spots, they beg him in¬ 
 stantly to remove {μ€τάσταθ') from 
 the place where he is, and come the 
 opposite way. Dindorf observes, 
 that the apodosis to the words αλλ’ 
 ΐνα — μη πρόποσης is at V. 102, 
 
 156. “ αφ^6γκτοι/ vocatur νάποί, ut 
 summa religio sanctitasque cultus 
 taciturnitate servata significetur.” 
 Reisig. 
 
 Ib. πρόποσης, Herm. τΓροσπίσης, 
 libri. On μη, see Hart. II. 149. 
 
 157 -8. κάθυδρος κρατηρ, ein Gefiiss 
 voll Wasser ; a goblet full of water. 
 Pass. cf. infra 469-79. The paren¬ 
 thetic verses should be pronounced 
 rapidly in order to get more readily 
 at the verb μ€τάσταθ\ 
 
 159. μ€ΐλιχίων ποτών = γλυκέων πο¬ 
 τών, 6 ίστι μίΚιτοί, ScHOL. Cf. infr. 
 481. 
 
26 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 των, ^€V€ ττάμμορ, €ύ φύλαζαι, 
 μ€τάσταθ\ άττόβαθί, ττολ- 
 λά κ4λ€υΘθ9 iparver 
 
 κλύβίς, ώ πολνμοχθ" άλατα ; 165 
 
 λόγον ei τιν olaeL^ 
 
 προς όμάν λόσγαν, άβατων άττοβάς, 
 
 ΐνα ττάσι νόμος-, 
 
 φώνβί' ττρόσθβν δ’ άπβρύκον. 
 
 ΟΙ. θνγατ€ρ, ποΐ τις φροντίδος ^λθρ\ τυττί^μα. lyo 
 
 ΑΝ. ώ ττάτβρ, άστοίς ίσα χρη μ^λ^τάν, 
 
 €ίκοντας ά δβΐ κάκούοντας. 
 
 ΟΙ. ττροσθίγβ νυν μου. ΑΝ. φαύω καί δη. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ ^€LVOL, μη δητ άδίκηθώ 
 
 σοϊ ΤΓίστεύσας μζταναστάς. τ7ς 
 
 1 61 . των ( = ών) φύλαξαι, quce max- 
 line cave. Wund. cf. Bernh. p. 181. 
 
 163. τΓολ. κ(\. iparvci. The Cho¬ 
 rus, speaking half aside, observe, 
 that the distance between themselves 
 and (Edipus prevents the latter 
 from hearing them. They conse¬ 
 quently elevate their voices in the 
 next verse. € ρητϋ € ΐν , to prevent. Ell. 
 
 166. oia-eis. Elmsley compares 
 Trach. 123. ών enipcp(f)op€va σ dSeia 
 pev άντία δ’ οισω. οΧσας La. Elmsl. 
 ’ίσχας e conject. Reis. 
 
 167. ττρόί ipav λζ'σχαν, my com¬ 
 pany or troop, i. e. me. Antig. 159. 
 σύγκλητον γερόντων λέσχην. See Pas- 
 sow on the word. 
 
 Ib. άποβάς. Supply cKelae before 
 iva. Cf. infr. 812. 900. 
 
 169. άπβρΰκον {^ρυκω, Find. Nem. 
 IV. 54), abstain from speaking. Aj. 
 186. anepvKoi Zevs κακαν φάτιν. 
 
 I JO. ποί φροντΐ8ος €λθτ] ; infr. 310. 
 ποΐ φρ€νών €λθω; Trach. 705. Antig. 
 42. Matth, §. 324, 8. Metre: 170 
 to 175. anapccsts. 
 
 I 7 1 . άστοίς — peXeTav. paria CUm 
 civibus agere, vel, paria atque civis 
 agere. Reis. Wunder compares Eur. 
 Med. 222. χρη be ^e'vov pev κάρτα 
 προσχωρ€Ϊν ττόλβί. 
 
 172. κάκούοντας, and obeying. Bekk. 
 Anecd. p. 79· dKoveiV άντ\ τον π€ΐ- 
 Oapxelv. κάκούοντας, Musg. κουκ άκού- 
 όντας, libri boni. 
 
 I 73. φαύω. infr. 1 544. κα\ ρη φαύ- 
 erf. where Wunder translates, nolite 
 me tangere ducendi causa. Dale : 
 CEd. Sustain me then. Ant. My 
 hand e’en now sustains thee. On 
 the particles καΐ bf] see Wunder ad 
 Electr. 310. Hart. I. 255. 
 
 174. dbiKyOo), because while in the 
 grove, no person dared molest him. 
 For the construction of ρη with άbι- 
 κηθώ Elmsley compares Horn. II. I. 
 26. Soph. Trach. 803. Eur, Here. 
 F. 1399. see also Hartung, II. 149. 
 
 J75. σοι πιστ€ύσας peτavaστάςf 
 having shifted my position from con¬ 
 fidence in you. For this construction 
 of double participles, see Herm. On 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 27 
 
 ΧΟ. οΰ TOL μηττοτί σ’ ίκ τών^ βδρανωρ, 
 ω yepov^ ακοντά τις d^ei, 
 
 ΟΙ. er ονν ; ΧΟ. Ιττίβαιν^ ττόρσω. 
 ΟΙ. (Τΐ; ΧΟ. ττροβίβαζί, κούρα, 
 ττρόσω' συ ydp αιβις. 
 
 ΑΝ. €7Γ€0 μαν^ €π€ ώδ’ άμανρω 
 κώλω, 7raT€p, a σ αγω, 
 
 ΧΟ. τόλμα ξβΐνος όττί ζόνψ, 
 ώ τλάμων^ ο τι καί ττολις 
 τβτροφβν άφιλοι' aTToarvyeii^, 
 καί το φίλον σόββσθαι. 
 
 ΟΙ. dye νυν σύ μβ, τταϊ. 
 
 ι8ο 
 
 (τυττνιμΛ, 
 
 σοι, as applied to the Chorus, see 
 
 Kuhn. §. 430, 2. β. 
 
 I iK τώνδ’ ibpavoiv. The Chorus 
 points, I imagine, to some place, 
 where CEdipus might sit without 
 offence. Cf. infr. 192. 233. 263. 
 
 177. Metre: dim. anap. catal., 
 after which glyconic and gglyconean 
 verses. On ov μη see Matth. 
 517, ohs. 2. Hart. II. 157. 
 
 178. eV’ ovv CEdipus, having ad- 
 Λ’anced some way, asks, must I pro¬ 
 ceed ? must I advance further ? 
 
 I 79. προβίβαζ€ ; Reis, προσβιβαζβ, 
 Libri. lead him further forward. 
 
 180. aiety, i. e. you have your eye¬ 
 sight, and consequently know the 
 exact spot, where he is to come. 
 
 181. ene' code (hue), infr. 1542· “ 
 Traldes, cod' eTrecrOe. On μην, cf. Hart. 
 
 I .375- 
 
 Ib. άμανρ(ύ. Much controversy 
 exists, whether this adjective is to 
 be rendered infirm or blind. Brunck 
 adopts the former sense, Reisig the 
 
 latter. Passow renders αμαυρός ttovs, 
 the blind foot, 1. e. the blind mans 
 foot, in the same way, as infr. 1639. 
 άμανραΐς χ€ρσίν. The German prose 
 translators : unsichern, unsteady. 
 
 1 84. τολ/χα, have the courage, or, 
 resolution. Neue compares Aj. 528. 
 El. 1051. Phil. 481. Matthise ad 
 Eurip. Hec. 330. 
 
 Ib. ^eivos iVt ζίνης. Cf. Phil. 
 125. iv ζ^να ^evov. CEd. T. 222. 
 αστοί eh αστούς. Aj. 267. κοιυος ev 
 κοινόΐσι. . μόνος μόνοίς. 620. αφι\α 
 
 παρ' άφίλοις. 1283. μόνος μόνον. Αη- 
 tig. 1240. veκpbς πep\ veKpep. 1 266. 
 νίος veep ^υν popep &C. 
 
 186. τ€τροφ€ν. Schol. ^xeL. See 
 Pass, in voc. et cf. Aj. 503. 644. 
 T124. and elsewhere. The German 
 halten, and English hold, answer 
 pretty well to the Greek word. 
 Reisig refers to Casaubon ad Athen. 
 p. 549. On the metre see Herm. 
 de Metr. p. 546. 
 
 187. Metre: logaoedic. 
 
 S “ Glyconeos dixi, quorum hrec est forma : 
 
 glyconicos vero, qui cognati sunt glyconeis, atque aut breviorem 
 habent.” Wunder, Monitum ad Conspect. metrorum Soph, 
 distinction has, I believe, been admitted by Hermann. 
 
 aut longiorem formam 
 The propriety of this 
 
.28 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Iv αν ^ύσφίας ίπιβαίνοντ^ς 
 
 το μίν €Ϊποίμ€ν, το δ* άκούσαιμ^ν, tqo 
 
 Kca μη χρβ/α πολβμώμβν. 
 
 ΧΟ. αυτου* μηκ 4 τι tovS άντίττίτρου dn, /3. 
 
 βηματο9 €^ω πόδα κλίνης· 
 
 ΟΙ. όντως ; ΧΟ. αλις, ώς ακούεις, 
 
 ΟΙ. η στώ ; ΧΟ. λεχριός y eV άκρου 195 
 
 189. Lva, where. See Const. Μ at- 
 thiae’s Quaest. Sophocl. on the whole 
 of these four verses. For Matthiae 
 (August.) and Hartung’s opinions, 
 see former, §. 520. Obs. 2. latter, 
 II. 290. 
 
 Ib. (υσφίας. (Ion for ηνσφ^ίας. 
 see Schaef. Met. p. 42. Passow Prog, 
 iiber Griech. Worterb. p. 16.) 
 
 Ib. (νσίβίας (πφαίνοντα = evae- 
 βοίντ€ί. EusT. p. 7 ^ 3 » 3 ^· ίύσ·6/3ώ9 
 TrarovvTfs ScHOL. It is usual to il¬ 
 lustrate by Phil. 1463. δόξης ποτέ 
 τησδ' €πφάντί5. Earlier examples 
 might be furnished from Homer and 
 Hesiod. H. Horn. M. 166. τίχνης 
 €7τφησομαί {arte utar). Horn. Od. 
 XXII. 424. άναώίίης ΐττφησαν, 
 XXHI. 52. 8φρα. . €v(f)poavinjs im- 
 βητον. Hesiod. Op. 659. Xiyvprjs 
 ίπφησαν άοώης. 580. ηως . . TToXcas 
 €7τφησ€ KcXevdov j άνθρώττονς. For 
 various opinions on this phrase, 
 see Herm. in loc. Person, Wunder 
 and Ellendt adopt the explanation 
 of Eustath., the latter adding, “ ab 
 ingrediendo loco religioso baud dubie 
 orta locutio.’* 
 
 189—190. ro peu dv cwroi/iej/, to δ’ 
 dv άκονσαιμεν, a periphrasis for, we 
 may converse together, cf. infr. 
 1288. 
 
 19 T. και ... 7 ΓοΧ(μώμ€ν, and let us not 
 combat with necessity. Antig. 1106. 
 apdyKTj δ’ ονχ\ δνσμαχητίον. 
 
 ig2. αντου, stop where you are. 
 cf. sup. 77. The studied attempt 
 throughout the whole of this dia¬ 
 logue to mimic the usages of col¬ 
 loquial discourse has been already 
 noticed. 
 
 Ib. avTinerpov {=·π€τρΙνον) βημα~ 
 TOf, saxea sedes. Ell. It will be suffi¬ 
 cient to observe at present, that ad¬ 
 jectives compounded with the pre¬ 
 position άντί usually mean equiva¬ 
 lent to, resembling, much the same as. 
 .lEsch. Eumen. 38. άντίπαις, the same 
 as a child. 445. dvrUtvrpa, the same 
 as spurs. Ch. 128. άρτί 8 ονΧος, the 
 same as a slave 3 fc. 
 
 194. οΰτωί; thus far? shall I stop 
 here ? 
 
 195. The commentators are di¬ 
 vided in opinion as to whether 
 CEdipus is now to sit or to stand. 
 Those who come to the latter con¬ 
 clusion, (including the names of 
 Reis. Elms. Deed. Gaisf. Matth. 
 Wund. Hind.) read η στω ; those 
 who adopt the former (Brunck, 
 Schaef. Herm. Neue, Ellendt) read 
 ίσθω or η Ισθω (aor. ofh ΐζομαι). 
 Whichever side we take, we are 
 in good company; and if I incline to 
 the sitters, it is on other grounds 
 besides those which may be derived 
 from the succeeding verse. The 
 scene of a Greek Tragedy is gene¬ 
 rally laid before the front of a pa- 
 
 h Carmichael (Greek Verbs, p. 88.) observes : “ In some editions an improbable 
 kaQS) of the aor. subj. pas., may I be seatedy is given at Soph. Col. 195.” 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 29 
 
 λάον βραχνά 6 κλάσα 9 . 
 
 ΑΝ. ττάτβρ, βμορ τόδ*· eV ησνχαία 
 βάσ€ί βάσιν αρμοσαι, 
 
 ΟΙ. Ιώ μοί μοί, 
 
 ΑΝ. yepaov is χφα σώμα σον 2οο 
 
 lace or, it may be, before a tent, 
 cave, &c. into which the parties 
 can retire at pleasure. But here 
 we have a man of royal rank, old, 
 blind, his fast unbroken after much 
 previous travel, with no such recep¬ 
 tacle to receive him ; is he to stand 
 through a drama of nearly 1800 
 lines ? His attendant Antigone we 
 shall find forcibly abducted during 
 the course of the drama; some re¬ 
 lief is consequently found for her. 
 Theseus, though his proper resi¬ 
 dence was on the Athenian citadel, 
 has a convenient sacrifice to pay to 
 Neptune, not to speak of other mat¬ 
 ters, which allow him to enter or 
 quit the stage at his convenience. 
 Ismene appears and disappears, so 
 as to leave no trouble about her: 
 again we ask, was not the author 
 dramatically bound to find a sitting 
 place for the blind and way-worn 
 ex-monarch; but where upon a 
 spot so holy ? The difficulty seems 
 to have been provided for in those 
 words, of which Hermann, Wunder, 
 Neue and Dindorf take no notice, 
 and which Ellendt, as we have seen, 
 translates by the words stony seat. 
 The word βήμα implies by etymo- 
 logy an elevated place : (what it sig¬ 
 nified in the Attic legislative assem¬ 
 blies is well known :) and certainly 
 no small dramatic effect would be 
 gained, if we could suppose the 
 bhnd monarch sometimes rising from 
 an elevated place, as when he deals 
 invectives on Creon, or pours forth 
 curses on the devoted head of 
 Polynices ; or in still more ex¬ 
 
 cited moments, quitting this seat 
 and pacing the stage in deep agi¬ 
 tation. (Cf. infr. 1113.) That one 
 or two other minor advantages will 
 be gained by this mode of viewing 
 the subject, will appear as we pro¬ 
 ceed. That the seat here found for 
 (Edipus could not be that from 
 which the ^eVo? purposes to remove 
 him, is self-evident. 
 
 Ib. Xexptos, obliquely, so that his 
 face may not be turned towards the 
 sacred grove. But the man is al¬ 
 ready blind, and cannot see it, says 
 Matter of Fact. True, says Super¬ 
 stition, but my feelings will be con¬ 
 sulted by dealing with his orbs, as 
 if capable of intense vision. 
 
 195—6. €7Γ* άκρου λάον, ΟΏ the top 
 of the stone or rock, or heap of 
 stones, whether natural to the lo¬ 
 cality, or merely placed there for 
 dramatic purposes. (Xaos = λααν, 
 Stein, nur bey Gramm. Pass.) 
 
 196. βραχύς οκΧάσας, having slightly 
 bent the knees ; shewing thereby 
 that the stone-seat was of some 
 height, not a low seat, as Wunder 
 determines. (Phrynich. ap. Bekk. 
 p. 56. οκΧάσαι’ το τα γόνατα βγκάμψαι 
 €γκαθίζοντα.) 
 
 197· ησνχαία = €ν ησνχω sup. V. 
 ^ 2 .—ήσνχώς, quietly, bedachtig, cir¬ 
 cumspectly. Donn. 
 
 198. αρμοσαι, Elms, αρμόσαι, Libri. 
 
 Ib. βά(Τ€ί βάσιν αρμοσαι. gressum 
 gessui accommoda. Wund. rather 
 perhaps : pedem pedi accommoda. 
 cf. Passow in voc. βάσις. 
 
 200—1. “ having inclined your 
 
 aged body on my friendly hand.” 
 
30 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ττροκλίναί φίλίαν ΐμάν. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώμοι Βύσφρονος ατα9. 
 
 ΧΟ. ω τΧάμων, ore νυν χαλα?, 
 ανδασον, tls €φν^ βροτών ; 
 
 τις 6 πολνπονος αγβι ; τίν αν 205 
 
 σου ττατρίδ' ίκττυθοίμαν ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ ζβνοι, 
 
 άττόπτολίς' αλλά μη, 
 
 ΧΟ. τί τόδ' άτΓβννβπβίς, γβρον ; 
 
 ΟΙ. μη μη μη μ"" ανβρη τις βΙμι, 2ΐο 
 
 μηδ' βζβτάσης ττβρα ματβύων. 
 
 ΧΟ. τί ToS ; ΟΙ. αΐνα φύσις. ΧΟ. αιίδα. 
 
 20 2. ατας. In this ατη ΟΓ cala- 
 mity Reisig sees the foul crime 
 of murder, which CEdipus had 
 committed many years previously. 
 Hermann and Wunder more justly 
 refer it to the blindness of CEdipus. 
 But why does even a sense of this 
 come so suddenly upon him, and so 
 strongly ? The question is at once 
 answered, if, as the preceding dia¬ 
 logue seems to intimate, the ascent 
 to his new seat was one of some 
 difficulty. 
 
 203. χαλαί, give way, do not op¬ 
 
 pose our entreaties. Schol. ovk άντι- 
 τίίνας το Xeyet δε εκ του 
 
 iepov. 
 
 204. Tis εφν? βροτων ; Three ques¬ 
 tions were usually asked of a stranger 
 in ancient times ; his parentage, his 
 name, and his country (infr. ^^571)· 
 That the Chorus here meant to 
 demand the first, seems implied 
 from vv. 212. 215. The words 
 before us therefore seem equivalent 
 
 (and Wunder has so taken them) 
 to rts βροτων εί την φυσιν. But a 
 better reference than to Aj. 1259. 
 is found I think in CEdipus’s own 
 wmrds, infr. 212. τις (φνς ; F. La. 
 pro V. 1 . Tis σ εφυ La. A. Aid. τις 
 ?φν Lb. R. τις σ ?φνσε Pb. V. Br. 
 
 205. Quis es, qui tot malis op- 
 pressus duceris ? Wund. 
 
 206. (κπνθοίμαν. Cf. Matth. §. 5 * 5 * 
 Obs. 
 
 207. Metre ; cretic. Cf. infr. 236. 
 Phil. 1182. 
 
 208. άττόπτοΧις. ScHOL. βρημος και 
 αποΧίς (Ιμι. metre : glyconic. Dals : 
 Strangers, I have no country—Ask 
 no more. 
 
 211. Metre : logaoed. with anac. 
 
 2 12. φνσις, origin, birth, infr. 1295. 
 Electr. 325. εκ πατρος ταντον φυσιν. 
 Schol. yewa. Dindorf (in Annotat.) 
 adopts Wunder’s emendation, τί τοδ’; 
 αϊνα, thus making this verse as well 
 as the following, ionic a minore. 
 Libri: τί τοδε ; deiva. 
 
 Ii Elirhu Tis, τίνος εσσι, τίνος ττατριδος, τί δε νίκης. 
 
 Κάσμυλος, Εύαγόρου, Πύθια ττνξ, 'Ρόδιος. Simon. Fmm. 70." 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩ1. 
 
 31 
 
 ΟΙ. τέκνον^ ωμοί, τί γβγώΐ'ω ; 
 
 ΧΟ. τίνος el σπέρματος, 
 
 ζ€Ϊν€, φών€ΐ, πατρόθβν. 215 
 
 ΟΙ. ωμοί €γω^ τί πάθω, τβκνον βμόν ; 
 
 ΑΝ. λβ/’, βπβίπβρ βττ βσχατα βαίνεις, 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ’ ερώ, ον γαρ εχω κατακρνφάν. 
 
 ΧΟ. μακρα μελλετον^ άλλα τάχννε. 
 
 ΟΙ. Ααίον ίστε τιν ; ΧΟ. ώ, ιοί) Ιού. 220 
 
 ΟΙ. το τε Ααβδακίδάν γένος ; ΧΟ. ώ Zeo. 
 
 ΟΙ. άθλιον ΟΙδιπόδαν ; ΧΟ. σύ γάρ οδ* εΐ ; 
 
 ΟΙ. όεος ισχετε μηοεν οσ ανόω. 
 
 ΧΟ. ιω, ώ ώ. ΟΙ. δύσμορος. ΧΟ. ώ ώ. 
 
 ΟΙ. θνγατερ, τί ττοτ αντίκα κύρσει ; 225 
 
 ΧΟ. ε^ω ττόρσω βαίνετε χωράς. 
 
 ΟΙ. α δ’ νττεσχεο ττοΐ καταθησεις ; 
 
 215· πατρόθ^ν. (a sensation in the 
 theatre.) Metre : ionic a min. cat. 
 as 214. brachycat. 
 
 2 1 6. τί πάθω; Matth. 5 *^» 
 Trach. 973. Metre: two dactyls, 
 syllable over, and fourth pseon, 
 as also 218. 220. 222. Dindorf 
 compares a poem of Boethius: 
 Qui serere ingenuum | volet agrum, 
 liberat arva prius | fruticibus &c. 
 &c. 
 
 217. επ’ έσχατα βαίν€ΐς. Ellendt 
 doubts, whether to translate, in ex¬ 
 trema necessitate versaris, or, ad 
 ultima confugere cogeris. Hermann 
 adopts the former. 
 
 218. κίΐτακρνψη = κατάκρνψις, "place 
 of concealment or refuge. Pass. 
 
 219. piKXerov — τάχυι/ε, Herm. 
 \Vund.Dind. peKXcr — ταχννατ€, Libri. 
 
 2 20. Ααίον ιστέ nV, i. e. (Kyovov 
 riva Λάιου. W^UND. 
 
 22 2. Οίδιττόδαυ. Cf. Hisch. S. 
 
 c. T. 749. Eur. Phoen. 817. (marks 
 of extreme terror exhibited by the 
 Chorus.) 
 
 223. δεοί ΐσ\€ΐν, to fear, as infr. 
 584. Χηστιν ϊσχαν, to forget. Cf. 
 Matth. §.421. Obs. 4. 
 
 224. I'd) and 7 ώ (Seidl. dochm. p. 
 277.) Metre: dim. anap. 
 
 225. κυρσα. ScHOL. προβησβται. 
 Neue compares Phil. 275. Eur. 
 Hec. 679. Seidl. ad Iph. T. 741. 
 
 227. a δ’ ύπε'σχεο {and the pro¬ 
 mises which you made to me (sup. 
 176.) 7 Γ0Ϊ {in what manner) καταθη- 
 aeis {will you pay) P viz. if you thus 
 desire me to quit the country. In 
 thus using the word κατατίθ€ναι, 
 GKdipus adopts the colloquial lan¬ 
 guage of ordinary life, which So¬ 
 phocles was never averse to doing. 
 (Cf. Arist. Eccles. 794. and Dissen 
 ad Pind. Nem. VII. p. 461.) 
 
 Ib. The general reasoning of the 
 
32 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΧΟ. ού8€ΐη μοφιδία τίσι^ βρχβται 
 
 ών προττάθρ το τίι/€ΐρ, άπατα S άπα- 230 
 
 Tais hepaL9 eTepa παραβαλλόμε¬ 
 να πόνον, ού χάρίν, άντίδίδωσιν e- 
 χ€ΐν. συ δ€ τών8 ίδράνων πάλιν €Κτοπο9 
 ανθις άφορμο9 όμάς χΘονό^ €κθορ€, 
 μη TL πόρα χρόος βμα πόλβι προσάψη^. 235 
 
 Choral mind is to this effect: that 
 where people merely repay suffer¬ 
 ings wliich have been previously and 
 unjustly put upon themselves, there 
 the Moerae or Fates award no pu¬ 
 nishment to the parties so acting: 
 that deceit necessarily engenders 
 deceit, entailing pain and not plea¬ 
 sure on the party commencing such 
 practices. The flow of the dactylic 
 metre, expressing as it does earnest¬ 
 ness, vehemence, indignation, rapi¬ 
 dity, cannot escape the most un¬ 
 practised ear, any more than the 
 change to iambics in the closing 
 verse (235)·^ 
 
 229. ovdevi ... epx^eTui, El. 169. 
 Tt yap ovK ipo\ €ρχ€ται ayyfXias ; Aj. 
 1138. TovT 6ts ανίαν τονπος epxerai 
 TivL. For metre, cf. Phil. 1195 sq. 
 
 229-30. * Idem est ac si dixisset: 
 TO riveiv (the compensating) ταντα, a 
 Tty Ίτροπάθτ] (which a person has suf¬ 
 fered preinously), τούτων ovdev'i μοι- 
 pi8ia Ttais βρχίται, quum deberet hoc 
 dicere ; roG riveiv ταντα, a tls προπάθτ], 
 ov8ev\ μοιρ. τίσις €ρχ€ται/ WuND. 
 
 Ib. άπατά. The deceit of which 
 the Chorus complain is, that CEdi- 
 pus had not explained who he was 
 before they had made their promise 
 to him. 
 
 231. παραβαλΧομίνα, repaid. 
 
 232. πόνον, what is painful, χάριν, 
 what is agreeable: so (Ed. T. 917. 
 φόβους, what is frightful. Dale 
 translates perhaps upon the whole 
 
 as faithfully and as elegantly as 
 the difference of language will per¬ 
 mit ; but how tame and languid his 
 version in comparison with the ra¬ 
 pid dactylic movement on which the 
 choral thoughts travel, and which 
 metrical movement is arrested in so 
 striking a manner at the close ! 
 Nay, Heaven’s avenging justice 
 smites not him 
 
 Who wreaks but wrong for wrong; 
 And fraud repaid with fraud 
 On the false wretch, who first de¬ 
 ceived. 
 
 Brings sorrow, not success. 
 
 Ib. άντώίδωσιν e^eiv. €χ€ΐν redun¬ 
 dant. Matth. 535, c. Obs. i. 
 
 233—4. €κτοπος . . άφορμος . . ίκ- 
 6ope. If prepositions may serve to 
 evince the determined spirit of the 
 Chorus on this point, they have not 
 been sparingly applied here. €κτοπος 
 €κθορ€, aufer te hinc. Ell. This is 
 inadequate as translation. In tragic 
 expressions ex abundantia,” as 
 they are termed, some equivalent 
 must always be given. Hence ! be¬ 
 gone ! and that without delay ! 
 
 235. πόρα, said in reference to 
 the crime already committed by his 
 trespassing on the sacred grove. 
 The alteration of the metre at the 
 word xpeos will escape no ear at aU 
 sensible to such matters. 
 
 Ib. Xpeos προσάπτ€ίν, negotium fa- 
 cessere. Br. Schuld, Reis. Unheil, 
 Donn. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 33 
 
 ΑΝ. ώ ζβροί 
 
 αΙδ 0 φρθΡ€ 9 , άλλ\ €7Γ€ΐ 
 γεραον irarepa τόρδ* βμορ 
 ούκ ανΙτΧατ €ργων 
 
 άκόντων άΐορτ €9 αυδαν^ 240 
 
 άλλ’ €μ€ ταν μβλβαρ, Ικ€Τ€νομ€Ρ, 
 
 ω ξ€Ρ0ί, οίκτβφασ, a 
 
 ττατρος irrrep τούμου μόρου αρτομαί, 
 
 αρτομαι ούκ άλαοΪ 9 ττροσορωμόρα 
 
 ομμα σορ ομμασιρ^ cos tls άφ^ αίματος 245 
 
 237· αΐ^όφρονβί (αΙδως, φρην)^ qui 
 clementicB laude floretis. Wund. 
 How such a sense can be elicited 
 out of this compound word, I do 
 not see, and considering the hard 
 words recently dealt by the Chorus 
 to CEdipus, any reference to their 
 compassion, though the word αΙδως 
 does sometimes bear that sense 
 (infr. 247.1268), seems a little mis¬ 
 placed. How then is the word αιδώ? 
 here to be understood? I answer, 
 as the Greeks understood it, when 
 an acknowledged murderer stood 
 before them: as a mixture of horror 
 and pity, for which modern lan¬ 
 guages have no equivalent. (Cf. 
 Muller’s Eumeniden p. 134.) The 
 learned Hermann, pressed by the 
 difficulty, punctuates ω ^eVoi, αιδο- 
 φρονα, αλλ’, and renders reverentia 
 iacti. As we have no translatable 
 term for the Greek αΐδόφρον^ς, we 
 must get rid of it by an equivalent, 
 and suppose Antigone to say, “ I 
 appreciate your mixed feelings in 
 regard to my father, but at least 
 (αλλά) have compassion on me: £ 
 have been guilty of no such crime,” 
 &c. &c. Metre : glyconic. 
 
 239. Zpyωv (πβρ'ι sub.) Antig. ii. 
 i/*oi piv ovbels, ^Αντιγόνη, φίλων [ οϋθ' 
 
 ήδνς οντ akyeivos ΐκετ. Metre of this 
 and preceding verse doubtful. 
 
 240. Metre : glyconean h}’perc. 
 
 242. Antigone, who in the pre¬ 
 ceding verse had commenced a se¬ 
 ries of dactylic verses similar to 
 those of the Choral Troop, here 
 beautifully changes the metre, as 
 she does also at v. 249. (choriamb, 
 cretic), thus giving a less impe¬ 
 tuous, and more feminine, expression 
 of her feelings. For a metrical 
 change of a somewhat similar na¬ 
 ture, see the Choral hymn of the 
 Erinyes in iEsch. Eum. 351 sq. 
 The powers of the German lan¬ 
 guage enable Donner to imitate the 
 original. 
 
 243. τουμου μόνου, Herm. τον μό¬ 
 νον, Libri vett. τονμον, Triclin. 
 
 244. avTopat {[ intreat), sc. τον 
 άθλιον αιδοί? κύρσαι. 
 
 244“5· άλαοΐ? όμμασι, “with 
 eyes not blind like those of my fa¬ 
 ther, but open and directly turned 
 towards you; and not with an in¬ 
 decorum unbecoming my sex and 
 age, but as if I had been one of your 
 own blood (ώ? τις άφ’ αίματος νμ€Τ€- 
 ρον), as a daughter might towards a 
 parent.” This beautiful reasoning 
 needs no comment. 
 
 D 
 
34 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 vfxeTepov προφαρβΐσα, τον άθλιον 
 αΙδου9 κνρσαι. ev νμΐν ώ? θβω 
 κβίμζθα τΧάμονβς. άλλ* ίτβ, νβύσατβ 
 ταν άδόκητον γαριν. 
 
 Ίτρδς σ δ τι σοι φίλον εκ σβθεν αντομαι, 250 
 
 η τβκνον, η λεχο^, η χρ€09, η θεός, 
 ον γαρ ϊδοις αν άθρών βροτον, 
 όσης αν, εΐ θεός αγοι, 'κφνγειν δνναιτο. 
 
 ΧΟ. άλλ* ϊσθι, τεκνον ΟΙδίττον, σε τ εζ ίσον 
 
 οίκτείρομεν καΙ τόνδε σνμφοράς χάριν 255 
 
 τα δ' εκ θεών τρεμοντες ον σθενοιμεν αν 
 φωνεΐν ττερα των ττρός σε ννν εΙρημενων. 
 
 ΟΙ. τι δητα δόζης, η τι κληδόνος καλής 
 
 247“^· νμίν κξίμ^θα. OEd. R. 3 ^4* 
 
 €1/ σοΙ yap €σμ€ν. infr. 392· 
 καιρών φασ\ ylyveadai κράτη. Find. 
 Nem. νΠ. 132. eV τίρ {in tuo prct- 
 sidlo) K eOeXoi (poterit). Diss. 
 
 249. (ώόκητορ, unexpected. Hes. 
 fr. 31. (The Chorus apparently not 
 relenting, Antigone falls again into 
 her dactylics, and with the most 
 impassioned earnestness.) 
 
 250. On the construction, see 
 Matth. §. 465. 3. 
 
 251. Xe;(09, bride, wife. Trach. 
 1227. Antig. 573. TO σορ λ€χος, that 
 bride about whom you harass me. 
 Xe'xos, Reisk. λόyoς, Libri. 
 
 Ib. η χρίος η Θεός. I know no 
 better way of getting out of this 
 difficulty, than by translating, what¬ 
 ever is dear to you, whether earthly, 
 or heavenly. Brunck, Reisig, and 
 Wunder interpret xpeo? by possessio, 
 fortuna, (in which sense cf. Phil. 
 469.) Hermann by necessitudo, res 
 necessaria, qua quis cegre careat, to 
 which also Ellendt apparently in¬ 
 clines. Dind. χρ^ος, i. q. χρήμα. Does 
 
 Sophocles use the word in its Pin¬ 
 daric sense of exploit, achievement 
 (Pyth. VIII. 46.) ? Dale translates, 
 duty. 
 
 Ib. 6 ebs, di penates aut familiares. 
 Reis. Wund. 
 
 252. άθρωρ, surveying diligently. 
 In the same way the participle ζητωρ 
 is often used. Aj. 1054. Arist. Plut. 
 104. Ran. 97. Av. ii i. 
 
 253. Seos ayoi. Reisig refers for 
 expression and sentiment to infr. 
 998. Antig. 624. El. 696. Aj. 456. 
 See also Valck. ad Eur. Hippol. 
 
 1435·^ 
 
 Ib. ’κφνγβίι», Herm. iKc^vydip, Libri. 
 Dindorf suggests (pvyeip, and com¬ 
 pares Electr. 696. οταρ δε tis θ^ωρ \ 
 βλάπττ], BvpaiT ap ovb* av Ισχνωρ φν- 
 yeip. 
 
 256. τα δ’ εκ decop. Cf. infr. 1 54 *^' 
 Neue ad Aj. 138. compares EL 619. 
 η yap €K σον bvapepeia. Ant. 95* την 
 ε^ €μον δνσβονλίαρ. The word θ^ωρ 
 strongly emphatic. Cf. infr. 287. 
 
 257. φωρβΊρ nepa, mehr sagen als, 
 &c. say more than, &c. Donn. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 μάτην ρ^υνσης ωφέλημα γίγρ€ταί, 
 
 €1 τάς γ 'Αθήνας φασί θβοσβββστάτας 
 elvat^ μάνας Se τον κακονμβνον ζβνον 
 σώζβιν οίας re, καΙ μάνας άρκ€Ϊν βχβίν, 
 καμοίγε ττοϋ ταΰτ βστίν, οΐτίνες βάθρων 
 εκ τώνδε μ εζάραντες είτ ελαύνετε, 
 ονομα μάνον δείσαντες ; ού γάρ δη τά γε 
 σώμ ουδέ τάργα ταμ!' επεί τά y έργα μου 
 ττετΓονθάτ εστί μάλλον η δεδρακάτα, 
 εί σου τά μητρος καί ττατρος χρβίη λεγειν, 
 ών οννεκ εκφοβεΐ με' τουτ εγω καλώς 
 εζοίδα, καίτοί πώς εγώ κακός φνσιν, 
 οστίς παθών μεν άντεδρων, ώστ εΐ φρονών 
 επρασσον, ούδ' άν ώδ' εγιγνάμην κακάς ; 
 νυν ο ουόεν εώως ικομην lv ίκομην, 
 
 35 
 
 200 
 
 27 
 
 Ο 
 
 259· ρ€ονσης. der wesenlos 
 
 zerrintyfiowing without effect. Donn. 
 Jalso divulgata, Deed. Neue refers to 
 Aj. 1267. El. 1000. Trach. 698. for 
 the participle here used, and to El. 
 331. for the whole addition. 
 
 260. θ€οσ€β€στάτας, Reisig com¬ 
 pares infr. 1125. ^sch. Eum. 867. 
 Pericles ap. Thucyd. II. 41. De- 
 mosth. or. Lept. §. 90. Wolf. Iso- 
 crat. de perm. p. 314. 
 
 261. κακονμ,ζνον. Trach. 1069. eiSo? 
 iv dUrj κακονμ€νον. By ^evov Ellendt 
 understands suppliant. 
 
 262. μάνας, prcB cceteris civitatibus. 
 Erf. άρκύν €χ€ΐν, opes habere, qui- 
 bus defendant. Ell. 
 
 263. oiTives. supply παρ’ υμών in 
 preceding sentence. Matth. §.481. i. 
 
 266. ovde ταργα ταμ SC. 8ei- 
 <ταντ€ς. 
 
 267. ΊΤ€ττονθότ , things of a suf¬ 
 ferer, bebpoKOT, things of a doer. 
 
 Reisig refers to his Commentatt. 
 
 Critt. ad v. 507. and 514. The 
 commentators compare Shakespear’s 
 Lear, 
 
 I am a man 
 
 More sinned against than sinning. 
 
 268. τα μητρος κα\ ττατρος=μητηρ 
 κα\ πατήρ, Quod intelligeres, si de 
 matre et patre tibi exponere mihi li- 
 ceret. Wund. Reisig compares infr. 
 1196. 
 
 269. ων. Hermann refers to τα 
 μητρος καΐ πατρος, Wunder to epya. 
 
 270. ^oiba. Cf. Wund. ad Phil. 
 414. 
 
 Ib. κακός φύσιν, malus natura. 
 Both. 
 
 27 T. παθών, having received an 
 injury, φρονών, knowingly, both 
 words emphatic. 
 
 273. vvv be, jam vero. (Ed. T. 
 263. Aj. ιοβο. 
 
 Ib. ίκόμην IV ίκόμην. (Cf. (Ed. T. 
 1376. Matth. §. 486. 2. Herm. ad 
 
 D 2 
 
36 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 νψ ων S ΙπασχοΓ, βίδότωι' άττωΧλνμην. 
 
 avff ών ίκνονμαί ττροζ θβών υ/χα?, 275 
 
 ωοΊΓβρ μ€ κάρ€στησαθ\ ώδε σώσατε. 
 
 καΙ μη θεου^ τιμώντε^ είτα του 9 θεου 9 
 
 μοίραν ΐΓΟίεΐσθε μηδαμών* ηγεΐσθε δε 
 
 Vig. ρ. yog. &C.) Dale : But I 
 went, I Oh how unconscious of the 
 path I trod! 
 
 274. (ττασχον, (ΙΒότων, both em¬ 
 phatic ; but it would be endless to 
 apply similar remarks to a poet 
 who so continually puts his terms in 
 contrast as Sophocles does. The 
 last term applies to the exposition 
 of CEdipus by his parents. 
 
 lb. άπωΧΧνμην. In what sense 
 this word is used has been ex¬ 
 plained in a former play. (QEd. T. 
 1454, &c.) 
 
 275. άνθ* ων, wherefore. CEd. T. 
 264. 
 
 276. ωσπ€ρ /xe κάνβστησαθ', its con- 
 ditionibus quibus me e luco reduxi- 
 stis. Musgr. Cf. infr. 284. άνιστά- 
 vai, used of persons, who command¬ 
 ing a supplicant to rise from a sa¬ 
 cred place, take him as it were 
 under their protection, infr. 1 286. 
 Thucyd. I. 128. oi Λακεδαιμόνιοι dva- 
 στησαντες εκ του ιερόν...των Είλώτωυ 
 ίκετας, άτταγαγόντες διεφθειραν. ΒοΤΗ: 
 erexistis, i. e. solati estis, spem mihi 
 fecistis. 
 
 277 sq. CEdipus proceeds in lan¬ 
 guage intelligible enough to his au¬ 
 dience, who were familiar with hi- 
 lastic and cathartic rites, and the 
 gods presiding over them, but not 
 so easy to us. 
 
 Ib. By the word θεονς we are, I 
 think, to understand the gods gene¬ 
 
 rally (cf. sup. 260) ; by τούί θεονς, 
 the gods most in OEdipus’s present 
 thoughts; viz. Zeus and Apollo, 
 under whose joint direction he had 
 come to Athens, and the Eumenides, 
 who were more particularly to be 
 his saviours and benefactresses. 
 
 278. μοίραν, B.T. V. Earn. Schsef. 
 Herm. Wund. μοίραις, Vett. Edd. 
 La. Lb. R. μοίρα, Dind. in Annot. 
 μοίρας, “ duo nuUius auctoritatis 
 apographa.” Dind. των θεών ώραν, 
 Br. That we are on a difficult 
 passage, is evinced by the various 
 cases as well as differences in num¬ 
 ber which editors assign to this 
 word. The first is the one here 
 retained, but to be understood in 
 a sense and in a construction dif¬ 
 ferent from those adopted by my 
 learned predecessors. Let us first 
 attend to the importance of the 
 word μοφα (μείρομαι, εμμορα, μόρος, 
 μόρος ) itself. In Greek theology 
 every divine being—gods above, 
 and gods below, from the Zeus of 
 heaven, to the Pluto of Hades 
 —had a certain portion of divinity 
 and office assigned him by the 
 Moerse or Destinies, which portion 
 he was bound to maintain, and on 
 which no other divinity was allowed 
 to intrude (Klausen’s -Esch. Theol. 
 passim). The very Destinies, who 
 dealt these assignments, fulfilled 
 their own μοίρα^ by so doing; and 
 
 ‘ So of the Erinyes (between whom and the Mcerse there was a close connexion) it is 
 said, 
 
 Adrai δ’ εχουσι μοίραν ούκ ευττεμττεΚον. jEsch. Eum. 454· 
 
 Which Muller well translates : 
 
 Auch DIE hinwegzuweisen, dirldet nicht ihr Amt. 
 
ΟΙΔΪΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 37 
 
 βΧ 4 π€ίν μίν αυτούς 7 rpo 9 τον βύσββη βροτών, 
 βλβπβίν de προ9 rous* δυσσβββΐί’ φυγήν δβ τον 280 
 μηττω yeviaOai φωτοί άνοσίου βροτών, 
 ζύν ols* σύ μη κάλυπτ€ ras* ενδαίμονας 
 
 then fell, as far at least as Zeus was 
 concerned, into a subordinate state, 
 just as cardinals and German elec¬ 
 tors, having for a certain period the 
 fate of popes and emperors in their 
 hands, are during that brief mo¬ 
 ment their superiors, as it were, 
 though afterwards their subordi¬ 
 nates^. Human beings, not more 
 the living than, I think, the dead (cf. 
 Antig. loyi.Trach.i238.EI. 1419.), 
 had in the same manner their re¬ 
 spective μοϊραι. The μοίρα here more 
 particularly alluded to seems to 
 have been that superintendence over 
 hilastic and cathartic rites, in which 
 suppliants and persons stained with 
 blood were concerned, which be¬ 
 longed more particularly to Zeus, 
 Apollo, and in some sense to the 
 Eumenides. The reasoning of CEdi- 
 pus therefore, who had so much 
 reason to be conversant with these 
 matters, appears to be this : “ And 
 do not, while you profess to honour 
 the gods generally, make the μοίρα 
 of certain more particular gods of 
 no effector more literally, “ make 
 certain gods as to their μοίρα of no 
 value.” Let us now attend to con¬ 
 struction. 
 
 Ib. μοίραν. The accusative seems to 
 be here used in the same independent 
 form, as Sophocles delights to throw 
 not only nouns, but infinitive moods 
 into. Cf. infr. 1213. and see Dindorf 
 ad Antig. 212. If the above reasoning 
 and construction are not admitted. 
 
 the next best form is perhaps to read 
 μοίρα with Dindorf, who illustrates by 
 Herod. II. 172. (eV ovdepifj peyakrj 
 μοΙρτ]) and Soph. Phil. 498. (eV 
 σμικρω pepei), to which might be 
 added Plat. XI. Leg. 923, b. iv μοί~ 
 pais ίΚάττοσι κατατιθ€ίς. 
 
 Ib. μηδαμώς ποιά,σΘξ. So in the 
 Eumenides of Hischylus it is ob¬ 
 jected by the Furies to Orestes, or 
 rather to Apollo, and through him 
 to Zeus, that by allowing Orestes 
 to revenge his father’s death, he 
 “ makes his mother’s rights of effect 
 no where,” μητρος μη 8 αμον ripas vepei. 
 594)· μηδαμού ν^μξίν and μηδαμώς 
 ποιύσθαι seem to me as closely 
 allied as μοίραν and τιμάς are. Miil- 
 ler translates accordingly: Urn Mut- 
 terrechte ganzlich unhesorgt zu sein. 
 
 279. τον €νσφη βροτών. Soph. 
 Fr. Al. 94. 6. τους pev βρο¬ 
 
 τών. Cf. infr. 287. 
 
 281. βροτών redundant. Cf. Lo- 
 beck ad Aj. 1358. Dindorf consi¬ 
 dering βροτών to have crept into the 
 text from v. 279. suggests as the 
 true reading of this and the verse 
 following, φυγήν de του μηπω yeveaOai 
 φωτός άνοσίου. τάδ’ ουν | ξυνίΐς συ μη 
 κάλυπτ€, &C. 
 
 282. ξυν οΐς (θβοίς), in concert 
 with whom, Schol. Herm. Hell. 
 quapropter, Reis. Both, inter quos 
 impios. Heath. 
 
 Ib. κά\υπτ€, obscura et dehonesta. 
 Ell. Cf. Diss. et Boeckh. ad Find. 
 01. VII. 92. Neue ad Electr. 826. 
 
 ^ And in the papist case, subordinates even to adoration. Hence the medals of 
 Alartin V. represent two cardinals as crowning the pope, and two kneeling before him, 
 with this inscription, “Quern creant adorant.” This I think not inaptly represents 
 the relative situations of the Zeus of antiquity and the Moeraj. 
 
38 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 €ργοί 9 "Αθήνας άνοσίοις νττηρβτών. 
 
 άλλ* ωσπβρ βλαββς τον ικέτην i^eyyvov, 
 
 ρνον μ€ κάκφύλασσβ' μηδβ μου κάρα 285 
 
 το δνοΊτρόσωτΓον βΙσορων άτιμάσγις, 
 
 ηκω yap Ιρος βνσββης re και φψων 
 
 ονησιν άστοίς TcilaS' όταν S ο κύριος 
 
 Ίταρρ τις, υμών οστις ίστ\ν ηyeμωv, 
 
 τ 6 τ €ΐσακονων ττάντ Ιπιστησβι’ τα δβ 290 
 
 μβταζν τούτου μηδαμώς yiyvov κακός. 
 
 ΧΟ. ταρββΐν μίν, ώ yepaie, τάνθυμηματα 
 
 πολλή "στ άvάyκη τάπο σου' λόyoισι yap 
 
 Passow in voc. Hermann's applica¬ 
 tion of Find. Pyth. IV. 146. see re¬ 
 futed in Dissen. 
 
 Ib. €υ 8 αίμονας. The reference is to 
 the high reputation of Athens. Sup. 
 258 sq. 
 
 284. €xeyyvo 9 {^χων, ίγγνψ), here, 
 a person to whom an assurance has 
 been given that no harm shall hap¬ 
 pen to him. Aliter Electr. 942. τί 
 yap Ke\€V€is, ών e^o) (pepeyyvos ; Cf. 
 sup. 176. 
 
 285. Supply ωδβ in answer to 
 ώσπερ in preceding verse. Wunder 
 compares CEd. T. 276. ώσπερ μ 
 άραίον ελαβες^ ώθ', αναξ, ερώ. 
 
 287· ηκω. For the connection of 
 this word with Ικέτης, cf. sup. 44. 
 
 Ib. Ιερός ευσεβής τε. AVunder ap¬ 
 plies the first epithet to (Edipus as 
 being a suppliant: the second, be¬ 
 cause he had come to this sacred 
 place in obedience to the com¬ 
 mands of Apollo. (Edipus appears 
 to me to refer to other matters. 
 The Chorus, as soon as they ascer¬ 
 tain who he really is, evidently turn 
 from him in horror, as a parricide, 
 and plead the gods as a reason for 
 having no further intercourse with 
 
 him. To this horror and fear of the 
 gods, (Edipus I think replies, by al¬ 
 leging that he stands clear and un¬ 
 polluted in their sight, having paid 
 all those expiatory and cathartic rites 
 which the guilt of murder required, 
 before a man could be reconciled 
 with the gods, or allowed free inter¬ 
 course with his fellow-men. (What 
 those rites were, has been partly ex¬ 
 plained in a former publication, and 
 may be seen more at large in Mul¬ 
 ler’s Eumeniden.) The words be¬ 
 fore us, therefore, seem equivalent 
 to those by which Orestes, under 
 similar circumstances, is termed in 
 the Eumenides of ^Eschylus, σεμνός 
 προσίκτωρ (v. 419), and ικέτης καθα¬ 
 ρός άβλαβης (v. 452). 
 
 288—9. 6 κύριός τις, is aliquis, 
 penes quern potestas est. Herm. 
 
 290—1. τα μεταξύ τούτον, iill this 
 is done. 
 
 292. ταρβεΙν, to respect, transitive 
 also atTrach. 723. ενθυμήματα, argu¬ 
 ments, reasonings, die Worte, Donn. 
 Ermahnungen, Germ. Pr. 
 
 293. τάπο σου. Cf. W^und ad 
 Antig. 193. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΑΩΝΩί. 
 
 39 
 
 ονκ ώνόμασταί βραχ^σι. τού^ δβ τησδβ γψ 
 I ανακτας άρκεΐ ταντά μοι heihevai, 295 
 
 ΟΙ. κα\ ΤΓου 'aff 6 κραινων τησδε τη? χώρας, ζενοι ; 
 
 ΧΟ. ττατρωον αχττυ γης εχευ' σκοττος δε vlv^ 
 ος κάμε δενρ* εττεμττεν, οιχεται στεΧίάν. 
 
 ΟΙ. η καΙ δοκεΐτε τον τυφλόν tlu εντροπήν 
 
 η φροντί^ εξειν, αυτόν ώστ ελθεΐν πελας ; 3οο 
 
 ΧΟ. καΙ κάρθ\ δταν περ τοιίνομ αίσθηταί το σόν, 
 
 ΟΙ. τις δ* εσθ' δ κείνω τούτο τονπος αγγελών ; 
 
 ΧΟ. μακρά κελευθος' πολλά δ’ εμπόρων επη 
 φι,λεΐ πλανάσθαι, των εκείνος αιών, 
 θάρσεί, παρεσταί. πολν γάρ, ώ γέρον, το σον 3^5 
 ονομα διηκεί πάντας, ώστε, κεί βραδύς 
 
 294* ωνόμασται^ uttered. λογοισ6 
 βραχίσι, 7nean language. Argumenta 
 enim non sunt dicta leviter. Reis. 
 
 295. ap/cfi μοι, I am satisfied. 
 
 Tovs avo-KTcis ^^Tov ανακτα.. 
 
 (δίοιδα) to have accurate information 
 of. 
 
 296. 6 κραΐνων {rex) TrjaBc χωράς. 
 Infr. 862. ό κραίνων rrjabe γης. 926. 
 τον κραίνοντος χβονός. 
 
 297* ττατρωον, jam ^geo et niajo’· 
 rihus regnatum. Ell. Antig. 937 * 
 γης θήβη5 αστν ττατρωον. Dale ren¬ 
 ders : 
 
 (Ed. Where, strangers, doth your 
 monarch hold his court ? 
 
 Cho. In his ancestral city. 
 
 298. στελών, ejficere ut veniat. Cf. 
 Ell. in voc. 
 
 299. του τνψλον, SC. evcKu. 
 
 300. αντον ώστ’, Pors. Elms, αττο- 
 νως τ’, Libri. 
 
 302. τούτο τονττος, SC. his name, 
 the σκοπος not having been ap¬ 
 prised of this; hence, as Reisig 
 acutely remarks, GEdipus calls him¬ 
 self in a preceding verse merely τον 
 τνφΧόν. 
 
 303. μακρα (Antig. 232. χουτωί 
 όΒ 6 ς βραχ€ΐα γίγνβται μακρα) Κ€λ€νθος. 
 
 The Chorus argue, that though 
 much space intervened between 
 Athens and Colonos, yet travellers 
 are numerous, reports fly rapidly, 
 and that by some of these means 
 the name of CEdipus will have 
 reached the royal ears long before 
 the messenger arrives. The at¬ 
 tempts of Musgrave and others to 
 change μακρα into μικρά have been 
 exposed by Reisig (Enar. p. 28). 
 For further observations on the dis¬ 
 tance between Athens and Colonos, 
 as determined by actual as well as 
 imaginary causes, see the same 
 acute writer. 
 
 304. φίλβί, are wont. El. 320. 
 913. Trach. 548. &c. &c. 
 
 Λ06— 7. Kei βραδύς evdei: SO all the 
 MSS. But with the slight change of 
 βαθυν for βραδύς, (cf. Lucian D, Mar. 
 2. ως βαθυν βκοιμηθης,) why may not 
 the words be understood in their most 
 literal sense, sleeps profoundbj, and 
 for the following reason ? As thea¬ 
 trical exhibitions began early in the 
 
 D 4 
 
40 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 evSeiy κΧυων σου 8 evp άφίζβταί τα^ύ^, 
 
 ΟΙ. αλλ €ντνχη 9 Ίκουτο Trj θ αυτου ττόλβι 
 
 €μοί Τ€. Tis* γαρ ^σθλο^ ονχ^ αντω (I)lXos^ ; 
 
 ΑΝ. ω Ζβί), TL λβζω ; ττοΐ φραγών β^θο), ττάτβρ ; 
 
 ΟΙ. TL δ earC) τβκρορ Κνηγονη ; ΑΝ. γνναΐ^ ορώ 
 στβί^ουσαι/ ημών άσσον^ ΑΙτναία^ iiri 
 
 πώλου βζβώσαν' κρατί 
 
 morning at Athens, the dramatists 
 frequently adapted the fune of their 
 plays to that period. That CEdipus 
 had come to Colonos without break¬ 
 ing his fast, is obvious from his own 
 language (sup. i oo.); why then 
 might not the Chorus suppose the 
 royal slumbers yet unbroken } Those 
 to whom this literal meaning of the 
 passage may not have occurred, or 
 who may think it unsatisfactory, 
 must either with Schiefer, Her¬ 
 mann, and Ellendt, adopt a meta¬ 
 phoric interpretation of the word 
 (‘‘a person at ease, a man whose 
 mind is free from all cares”—a si¬ 
 tuation in which the active Theseus 
 did not, I presume, often find him¬ 
 self), or get rid of it by an emen¬ 
 dation, as Eldik (σττίνδβί), Seidler 
 (ep^ei), Brunck (epnei, &c.). Dale’s 
 translation, whether correct or not, 
 will be more agreeable than pursu¬ 
 ing the subject further : 
 
 Widely, old man. 
 
 Thy fame is blazoned; though his 
 steps were slow. 
 
 Thy name would urge him to re- 
 doubhng speed. 
 
 307. κλίιων (TTfp't, ScHOL.) σου. 
 
 308. €ντνχής, Gliak bereitend, 
 preparing good fortune. Donn. Neue 
 compares Aj. 966. ipo\ πικρός τίθνψ 
 Κ€Ρ ή κΐΐνοις γλυκύς ; 
 
 309. τίς yap . . φίλος: probus 
 gitisgue sibi favet, Reis. Enarr. p. 
 67. where see examples. (Edipus 
 is to be understood us speaking of 
 
 δ’ ηλιοστ€ρη9 
 
 himself as well as Theseus. 
 
 310 . ποΐ φρένων έλθω ; guid COgi- 
 tem ? Ell. what mental conclusion 
 must I come to? Cf. Matth. §. 
 324. 
 
 312 . Αίτναίας. The reader of Pin¬ 
 dar need not be reminded of the 
 beauty or swiftness of Sicilian 
 horses. The “ Eclipse” of modem 
 days did not excite more admira¬ 
 tion or talk than the Pherenicus of 
 the Sicilian monarch Hiero. 
 
 313 . βεβωσαν, mounted. Cf. infr. 
 1070. Sophocles, of course, knew 
 the manners of his times better 
 than we do, and Theban women 
 might differ in their habits from 
 Athenian women. But a young 
 Greek lady traversing the country 
 on horseback, and with merely a 
 single attendant, instead of being 
 safely immured in the gynaeceum— 
 is contrary to all our notions of 
 ancient conventional regulations. If 
 dramatic necessity, however, re¬ 
 quired such a departure from ge¬ 
 neral rules, and the audience saw 
 no reason to object to it, it is not 
 for us to find fault. 
 
 Ib. κρατι, dative of place. Matth. 
 §. 406, b. cf. infr. 411. 700. 715. 
 1260. El. 174. 1332, &c. &c. Neue 
 refers to CEd. T. 25. 
 
 Ib. ηλιοστερής (στερεω), depriving 
 of the sun, i. e. keeping off the suns 
 heat (viz. by the breadth of the 
 brim). 
 
ΟΙΔΤΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 41 
 
 KVJ^ πρόσωπα θβσσαλ/ί άμπβχβι. 
 
 τί φω ; ' 3^5 
 
 άρ ecTTip ; άρ ονκ ίστιν ; η γνώμη πλανα ; 
 
 κα\ φημ\ κάπόφημι, κονκ βχω τί φω, 
 
 τάλαινα, 
 
 ούκ βσην άλλη, φαίδρα γονν απ ομματων 
 
 σαίν€ί μ€ προστβίχονσα* σημαίνει δ ότι 320 
 
 μόνη9 τόδ' ίστ\ δηλον 'λσμηνη^ καρα. 
 
 ΟΙ. πώ9 βίττα?, ω παΐ : ΑΝ. παΐδα σην, όμην δ’ όράν 
 όμαίμον' αύδη δ* αύτίκ e^eariv μαθεΐν. 
 
 ΙΣΜΗΝΗ. 
 
 ώ δισσα πατρός και κασιγνητη^ ίμοι 
 
 ηδιστα προσφωνημαθ\ ω9 νμα^ μολι^ 325 
 
 εύρονσα λύπη δεύτερον /χδλί? βλέπω. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ τεκνον, ηκει^ ; ΙΣ. ώ πατερ δυσμοιρ οραν. 
 
 ΟΙ. τεκνον^ πεφηνα9 ; ΙΣ. ονκ άνευ μοχθου γε μοί. 
 
 314* θβσσαλίί, a hat used by 
 travellers to protect them from heat 
 and rain. Soph. Inach. fr. 262. 
 (Dind.) Τννη tIs tJSc ; KVK\as ^Αρκαδος 
 κννης. See also Aristoph. in Av. 
 1203. For information on these 
 hats, consult Thudichum’s Sopho¬ 
 cles, pp. 292-3. 
 
 Ib. πρόσωπα . . viv, Cf. Matth. 
 §. 421. Ohs. 5. 
 
 316. Elmsley compares Eurip. 
 Iph. T. 577· ap’ etoriV ; dp' ονκ άσί\ 
 τις (fypdaetev αν ; 
 
 Ib. η yvcopr] π\ανα ; OLYl sentcnticL 
 fallit? Reis. Hermann from La 
 prefers yvayprj πλανώ. 
 
 3 1 8 . τάλαινα, peril. Br. Wund. ut¬ 
 tered in the fear that Ismene comes 
 with bad tidings, die gute, Reis. 
 ich arme, Donn. 
 
 319. φαώρα, neut. plur. for adv. 
 Matth. §. 446, 7. 
 
 319—20. απ' όμμάτων, as Hermann 
 observes (coll. Aisch. Ag. 247.), is 
 to be united with σαίν^ι. blando 
 
 oculorum nutu se cognoscendam 
 praebet. Ell. απ' 6μμάτων = ομμασι. 
 Mehlhorn’s Anacreon, p. 107. 
 
 321. eVri 8ηλον, supply ov. Neue. 
 Reisig compares Trach. 11. Wunder 
 translates 8ηλον Ίσμηνης κάρα, Is- 
 menens leibhaftiges Haupt. In fami¬ 
 liar English : Ismene’s very self, &c. 
 
 322. πα'ώα σψ, supply, I say. 
 
 324-5. Though these two verses 
 
 present no single word of difficulty, 
 yet collectively they present much. 
 To me they appear as another of 
 those forms in which Sophocles de¬ 
 lights to use abstract for concrete 
 nouns (infr. 331. 658. 863. 960.^, 
 and may be rendered, O father! 
 sister! the two persons whom I 
 would most gladly address, or, with 
 whom I would most gladly hold 
 converse : with difficulty, &c. Neue 
 compares Aj. 54· Xeias φρονρηματα. 
 
 326- λύπτ), on account of my pain^ 
 ful feelings. For construction, ct. 
 infr. 332—3. ηρομηθία and πόθοισι. 
 
42 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. ττροσψανσον, ώ τταΐ, 12. θιγγάρω Svolp ομού, 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ σ7Γ€ρμ ομαιμορ. 12. ώ δνσάθλίαι τροφαί. 33^ 
 ΟΙ, η τησδβ κάμοΰ ; ΙΣ. δυσμόρου τ €μον τρίτης. 
 
 ΟΙ. τβκρορ, τί δ' ηλθ^ς ; 12. ττάτβρ, ττρομηθία. 
 
 ΟΙ. TTorepa ττόθοίσι ; 12. καί λόγοί^ y avTayyO^os^ 
 ζύρ ώπβρ βΐχορ οίκβτώρ ττιστω μόρω, 
 
 ΟΙ. οί δ’ αύθόμαιμοί ττοΐ veaviaL Trove tv ; 335 
 
 3^9· '^ρόσψαυσον, embrace me. 
 
 Ib. θιγγάνω ΒνοΙν όμοΰ, my amis 
 are round you both at once. 
 
 330. ω σπβρμ — ομαιμον. a pause, 
 before the wretched man can brins: 
 out the last word so pregnant 
 with meaning. Cf. infr. 535. 
 
 Ib . ω dvadeXiai τροφαί, infelix Vi¬ 
 vendi ratio. Musg. Wund. And 
 could so significant an exclamation 
 as that recently uttered by Qidipus 
 elicit so cold a response from Is- 
 mene } but let us examine the words 
 in detail. 
 
 Ib. bvaa&kiai. Dindorf observes 
 that this word is not to be found 
 elsewhere. It was then most pro¬ 
 bably a coinage of Sophocles, and 
 the terms of the composition allow 
 us to translate not merely wretched, 
 but more than wretched, or thrice 
 wretched. Cf. Antig. 1276. ττόνοι 
 δνσπονοι. 
 
 Ib. τροφα\ = τραφίντ€ς. (cf. Sup. 
 324.) beings! creatures! 
 
 331. τ^σδβ κάμου (τροφαί) . She 
 and I! 
 
 Ib. δνσ/ζ. — τρίτης, and myself the 
 ill-starred third. The interchange 
 of thoughts, too terrible for plain 
 utterance between/ai/ier and daugh¬ 
 ter, seems to be thus given with 
 the most scrupulous delicacy. 
 
 332. τί d' ηλθ€ς ; Reisig refers to 
 his Comment. Crit. p. 585. 
 
 Ib. ση ττρομηθία, from anxiety on 
 thy account. Matth. §. 466, 2. 
 
 333. TTOTcpa. On Trorepa and ττδ- 
 T€pou in mere interrogations, see 
 
 Neue ad Aj. 460. and Wunder ad 
 Antig. 284. ττόθοισι, a desire to see 
 me, or, regret for me. 
 
 Ib. Sensus est: καΧ Χόγοις ye, av- 
 τάγγ€\ος αυτών. Herm. yes, and as 
 far as words are concerned, myself 
 their own narrator. 
 
 335. Sensus videtur esse, quo 
 abierunt fratres tui, quibus, cum ju- 
 venes sint, labor are convenit ? Gaisf. 
 It is no safe matter to quarrel with 
 any interpretation of so sound and 
 excellent a scholar as the learned 
 dean of Christ Church, yet the an¬ 
 swer of Ismene in the verse follow¬ 
 ing seems to imply, that we should 
 read sunt, not abierunt. In such 
 case we must read ττου, not ποί; 
 and for such reading there wants 
 not authority of MSS. or collateral 
 illustration. Lb. ποΰ veavlai KopeXv, 
 V. TTOv veavlai rrovelv. Eur. Orest. 
 1472. TTOV δήτ apvveiv oi κατα areyas 
 Φpvyes; (In looking into EUendt 
 since this note was written, I find 
 the learned lexicographer justifying 
 part of the foregoing remarks. “ Con- 
 jungo ποί TTovelv, nec €βησαν sed elalv 
 intelligo mente addi: quousque aliis 
 rebus indulserunt, illius ut rationem 
 habere non possint ?”) 
 
 Ib. veavlaL novelv. I understand: 
 having all those powers of youth and 
 activity which labour requires: the 
 infinitive rroveiv coming under that 
 construction, which will be explained 
 infr. 1213. With regard to the la¬ 
 bour spoken of, it must be remem¬ 
 bered that it did not consist merely 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 43 
 
 [Σ. ela ουπβρ βΐσι. δείνα τάκείνοις τανυν. 
 
 DI. ω ττάντ εκείνω roh εν ΑΙγντττω νόμοι^ 
 φύσιν κατεικασθεντε και βίου τροφα^, 
 εκεί yap οΐ μεν αρσενες κατα στεγας 
 θακονσιν Ιστόνργονντε^, αΐ δε σύννομοι 34 ° 
 
 τα^ω βίου τροφεία ττορσύνονσ αεί. 
 σφων δ\ ώ τεκν\ ov 9 μεν εΙκο 9 ην ττονεΐν τάδε, 
 κατ οίκον οίκουρονσιν ώστε παρθένοι, 
 σφω S άντ εκείνων τάμα δυστήνου κακα 
 νπερπονεΐτον. η μεν εζ οτου νέας 345 
 
 τροφής ί^ηζε και κατίσγυσεν δέμας, 
 άε\ μεθ" ημών δύσμορος πλανώμενη 
 γερονταγωγεΐ, πολλά μεν κατ άγρίαν 
 ύλην άσιτος νηλίπονς τ άλωμενη, 
 
 πολλοΐσι δ* ομβροις ήλιου τε^καύμασιν 3 S^ 
 
 in bringing an oracular declaration 
 from Thebes to Colonos, but in the 
 painful task of tracing CEdipus 
 through a varied and obscure route 
 (cf. infr. 362.), before he arrived at 
 what was to be his χώρα reppia. 
 
 336. elV ovTTep elai, a formula for 
 passing over in silence what the 
 speaker does not wish to tell. 
 
 Ib. deiva TaKcivois τα νυν. As 
 Qidipus takes no notice of a decla¬ 
 ration, which in his long irritated 
 state against his sons (infr. 441. 
 &c.) his irascible feelings we should 
 think would have caught at, this is 
 not improbably said aside to Anti¬ 
 gone. In that case it would be 
 better to adopt Schiefer’s proposi¬ 
 tion, “ Malim τάν kclvols. Schol. : 
 vvv be τά ev eKeivois earl beiva’ 
 
 337 ' Αίγυπτω. Cf. Herodot. II. 
 35. See also a long and interesting 
 note by the Scholiast, where this re¬ 
 versing of the duties of the two sexes 
 is ascribed to the tyranny of Seso- 
 stris, who wished thereby to render 
 
 the manners of the Egyptians ut¬ 
 terly effeminate. 
 
 340. σύννομοι, toiv€S. Aristoph. 
 Av. 209. aye σνννομύ μοι. Soph. El. 
 600. σνννόμον, husband. Ellendt re¬ 
 fers to Wyttenb. ad Plut. deAmicit. 
 Mult. p. 93. E. and Matth. ad Eur. 
 Hippol. 976. 
 
 341. βίου rpocfiela, support of life. 
 
 342. σφων. Seidler observes, that 
 CEdipus here includes his children 
 of either sex, ex vobis utrisque. For 
 genitive case, see Buttmann’s Lexil. 
 I . 17> 4· 
 
 343. oiKovpeiv (οικουρος, οίκος, ον- 
 ρος), to keep the house. Cf. Aristoph. 
 Vesp. 970. 
 
 344. ταραδυσπίι/ου. Matth.§.466,1. 
 346. κaτίσχυσev bepas. Neue com¬ 
 pares Aj. 1077. 
 
 348. yepovτayωye'iv {γύρων, αγω), to 
 be an old mans guide and leader. 
 
 Cf. Arist. Eq. 1099. 
 
 349. νηΧίτΓονς {νη, ηλιφ, πους) = 
 άνηΧίπονί, άνηΧιτΓΟί, bare-footed, {η- 
 λιφ, a species of Doric shoe.) 
 
44 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΙΣ. 
 
 • μοχθούσα τΧημων^ δβντβρ’ ηγΗται τα της 
 OLKOL διαίτης, el ττατηρ τροφήν ^χοι, 
 συ δ\ ώ τβκνον, ττρόσθβν μβν ίζίκου ττατρι 
 μαντβΓ αγουσα ττάντα, Ι^αδμβΙων λάθρα, 
 ά τουδ^ ίχρησθη σώματος* φύλαζ δβ μου 
 τηστη κατβστης, γης οτ ^ζηλαυνόμην* 
 νυν υ αύ τίν^ ηκβις μύθον, Ισμηνη ττατρΙ 
 φβρουσα ; τις σ e^rjpev οϊκοθβν στόλος ; 
 ηκβις γάρ ον Kevrj ye, τουτ ίγώ σαφώς 
 ί^οιδα, μη ούχι δeΐμ όμοί φόρονσά τι, 
 όγώ τά μίν 7 Γαθημα& άτταθον, iraTep, 
 ζητούσα την σην ΤΓον κατοίκοίης τροφήν. 
 
 355 
 
 360 
 
 351 * ^(VT€pa ηγ€ΐσθαι. Phil. 1442. 
 ως ταλλα πάντα devrep' ηγ€7ται πατήρ 
 Ζευς. 
 
 351~2. τά της olkol διαίτης = την 
 oIkol bialrqv, Neue compares El. 
 261. τά μητρος (sc. η μητηρ) η μ* 
 iy^LVOTo. 
 
 352. ft, dummodo. Matth. §. 
 617. 4. 
 
 353. (ξίκον, advenisti, proprie 
 pervenisti. Cf. ad Phil. 197. El. 
 387. WuND. Sophocles is fond 
 of compounding words with the 
 preposition εξ, where the simple 
 word would have been equally ex¬ 
 pressive. sup. 27. ίξοικησιμος. 285. 
 εκφνλάσσειν. infr. 1526. ^άγιστα. 
 (where, as Reisig observes, άγιστά 
 would have done.) Aj. 997. εξιχνο- 
 σκοπείσβαι. 12 ^ 8 . εξεΧενθεροστομεϊν. 
 Antig. 913* €κπροτιμάν, SlC. &C. 
 
 354. μαντεία. The Scholiast refers 
 to the oracle concerning the tomb 
 of CEdipus; that wherever CEdipus 
 was buried, he would be a benefac¬ 
 tor to that country. 
 
 355. τουδβ σώματος, supply περί. 
 On εχρησθη, see Matth. §. 495, a. 
 
 Ib. φνλαξ is not guide, nor is 
 πρόσθεν (v. 353.) oft, as Dale trans¬ 
 lates ; for Ismene had been to her 
 
 father but once previously during 
 his wanderings, and the dutiful and 
 affectionate Antigone' had been his 
 guide. Ismene’s office had been 
 rather to keep close watch on pro¬ 
 ceedings at home, and notify to her 
 father whenever any thing of an ex¬ 
 traordinary nature, such as commu¬ 
 nications from the sacred shrine &c. 
 occurred. 
 
 338. τις στόΧος {eocpeditio). Phil. 
 243* riVi στόΧω προσεσχες τηνδε γην; 
 Wunder : quce te excivit domo expe- 
 ditto ? i. e. cujus rei expediendse 
 causa domo exist! ? 
 
 359. ov κενή γε, at least not empty. 
 Hart. I. 375. 
 
 359-60. ηκεις κ. τ. i. non enim 
 venisti, quin aliquid terroris mihi af- 
 feras. Dcederl. “ Differunt μη so¬ 
 lum et μη ουχι ita, ut illud si non, 
 hoc autem nisi significet.” Herm. 
 ov γάρ αν ηΧθες, μη ονχ\ δεϊμά τι φε~ 
 ρονσα, i. e. ει μη δείμά τι {^something 
 Jearful) εφερες. Ex abundantia κενή. 
 WuND. On the particles μη ονχΐ, 
 see EUendt II. 106. Matth. II. 
 1083. Hartung II. 171. (quin). 
 
 362. ζητούσα — τροφήν, dum in- 
 vestigarem, quo in loco versareris, 
 Br. tuum ubi victum institueres, 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 45 
 
 irapeia Ιάσω. Sis yap ουχι βούλομαι 
 πονούσά τ άλγύν καΐ λβγονσ avOcs πάλίρ. 
 a S άμφί Toh σοίν ^υσμόροιν παίδοίν κακα 3^5 
 
 vvu iaTL, ταυτα σημανουσ βληλνθα, 
 
 TTpiv μ€ΐ/ γαρ avTOLS ην epws Ys^plovri re 
 Opovovs kaxrQai^ μηδε χραίνεσθαί πόλιν, 
 λό^ω σκοτΓουσί την ττάλαί yevovs φθοράν, 
 οία Kareaye τον σον άθλιον δομον' 37 ° 
 
 νυν S €Κ θεών τον καζ άλίτηροΰ φρενο9 
 είσηλθε τοϊν τρισαθλίοιν ερΐ9 κακή 
 άρχψ λαβεσθαι και κράτους τυραννικόν, 
 μ^ νεάζων και χρονω μείων y€yωs 
 τον ττρόσθε yεvvηθεvτa Τίολυνείκη θρόνων 375 
 
 άτΓοστερίσκει, κάζεληλακεν ττατρας* 
 
 6 S, ώς καθ' ημάς εσθ' δ ττληθύων λoyoς, 
 
 parares, coll. ν. gi. Reis. Obscu- 
 rius dicto την σην τροφήν, poeta ex- 
 plicandi causa addidit που κατοικοίης. 
 Dind. The poet seems to have had 
 in his eye place of abode, as well as 
 sustenance. Par. i . κατοικοΙη στρο¬ 
 φήν. Aid. La. κατοικοίης στροφήν. 
 
 363. παρ€ΐσ βάσω. Reisig com¬ 
 pares Aj. 754· αφίΐ/τ iav. Cf. Valck. 
 ad Herodot. II. 30. Ell. taceho, 
 omitto meniorare. 
 
 364. ανθις πάλιν. Find. 01 . I. 
 105. 6 . Of repeated occurrence in 
 Soph, and Aristoph. 
 
 367. epw?, Tyrwh. epis, Libri. Doe- 
 derl. epiv, Reis. &c. For examples 
 more select than Brunch’s of this 
 mode of using ?ρως, see Ilgen. 
 Opusc. Philol. I. 27. 
 
 367-8. Tf— μη 5 €. As examples of 
 ovbe and pjjSe thus interchanging 
 with T€, Hartung (I. 209.) cites 
 Eur. Iph. T. 680. Pindar Pyth. 
 VIII. 51. Neue compares Aj. 836. 
 cf. Matth. §. 609. 626. 
 
 Ib. χραίν€σθαι (passive) πάλιν, the 
 
 city to be polluted by their pre¬ 
 sence, or command, as being of in¬ 
 cestuous origin. Cf. CEd. T. 822. 
 λ]· 43 · 
 
 369. λόγω σκοποΰσι. Dcederlein 
 compares Thucyd. II. 43. σκοποΰν- 
 τας ρη λόγω μόνον την ωφβλιαν. 
 
 37 ί· άλίτηρος (άλ^ίτης αλη)=:αλι¬ 
 τήριος, a person or a mind laden with 
 guilt. Cf. Thucyd. I. 126. Arist. 
 Eq. 447. See further Ellendt in 
 voc. and Klausen’s AEsch. Theol. 
 
 19· 
 
 372. είσήλθβ Toiv τρισ. Cf. Neue 
 ad Electr. 493. Matth. §. 402. c. 
 τρ\ς άθλίοιν, PoRS. Elms. 
 
 373· λαβάσθαι (άντΐλαβόσθαι 
 
 SCHOL.) Phil. 761. βονλξΐ λάβωμαι 
 8ήτα κα\ θίγω τι σου : 
 
 374 · redundant. Cf. Neue 
 
 ad Aj. 1299. 
 
 377. 6 πληθυων λόγος, sermo fre- 
 quens et multorum celebratus ore. 
 Ell. ^sch. Ag. 842. ως (πλήθυνον . 
 λόγοι, καθ' ήμο,ς, amongst us. 
 
46 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 TO κοίλον "Άργος βας φνγας, ττροσλαμβάνβί 
 
 κη 8 ός 7€ καινόν καΐ ^ννασπιστας φίλους, 
 
 ώς αυτίκ "Άργος η το Κ,αδμβίων ττβδον 38ο 
 
 ημτ) καθβζον, η ττρος ουρανον βιβών, 
 
 ταντ" ονκ αριθμός ίστιν, ώ ττάτβρ, λόγων, 
 
 άλλ" €ργα δβινά' τους δβ σονς όττοι Oeoi 
 
 πόνους κατοικτιοΰσιν ούκ βχω μαθ^ΐν. 
 
 ΟΙ. ηδη γαρ ίσχβς όλπίδ" ώς όμου θεούς 385 
 
 ώραν τιν e^eiv, ωστ( σωθηναί ποτ€ ; 
 
 378. κοίλον ’'Αργος, SO termed be¬ 
 cause situated in a valley, and sur¬ 
 rounded with mountains: down in the 
 hollow, is a common designation for 
 places among our own country people. 
 Soph. Epig. fr. 197· t 6 κοΊλον’'Αργος 
 ον κατοικησαντ ere. Tham. 2'^0.’'Αρ· 
 γύ κοίλω. On the subject of Argos, 
 see Thudichum's Sophocles, p. 294. 
 
 379. καινόν. Doederlein considers 
 that a latent reproach is involved in 
 this word, as marriages do not ap¬ 
 pear to have been common between 
 the Thebans and the Argives. 
 
 380. ’'Αργος. An accusative abso¬ 
 lute. See Matth. ^C)S. 3. 
 
 381. Tipfj, gloriously. “ Ύιρη enim, 
 κλόος, €νχος, ut vel ex Homero notum, 
 gloriam significat victoris.” Herm. 
 
 Ib. κάθεξον. Ellendt understands, 
 about to possess. Neue, comparing 
 Antig. 604. τεαν, Ζεν, dvvaaiv τις 
 άντρων I υπερβασία κατάσχοι, prefers 
 the sense of ruling, constraining. 
 
 Ib. βιβων = βΙβασον. fut. part, of 
 βιβάζειν, about to exalt, (evehere, 
 Ell.) Sensus est: Argis ant de 
 Thebanis gloriam reportaturis, aut 
 eos aucturis gloria. Herm. The 
 biblical form, which the latter 
 meaning assumes, is much what 
 might be expected among a people 
 . so closely connected with Phoenicia 
 as the Thebans. Doederlein illus¬ 
 trates the phrase by Horn. Od. XV. 
 
 829. Eur. Bacch. 930. Cic. pro 
 Mil. 35. Add Horn. II. IV. 443 . 0 V‘ 
 ράνω εστηριξε κόρη. Soph. El. 752. 
 ονρανω σκέλη προφαίνων. Arist. Nub. 
 459. κλέος ουρανόμηκες εξεις. 
 
 382. αριθμός λόγων, mere WOJ'ds. 
 Cf. Elmsl. ad Eur. Heracl. 997. 
 
 383. οποί (quatenus, quam in par¬ 
 tem). Reis, οπού (ubi) Elms. Donn. 
 when, Dale. It appears to me that 
 the word for consideration here and 
 in two or three subsequent instances 
 (v. 385. 394.) is the word θεοί : the 
 sudden change in the tone of the 
 actor’s voice making, I think, some¬ 
 thing like this impression on the au¬ 
 dience;—But enough of human 
 beings. Let us now to the gods. 
 In what manner your sufferings Λνϋΐ 
 be compassionated and brought to a 
 close by them, I have not been able 
 to learn, but that they will in some 
 way be alleviated—it may be, by 
 restoring you to your lost home—I 
 feel confident from some present 
 oracles, not from those which I 
 brought you on a former occasion.” 
 Libri, κατοικτιοΰσιν. Par. F. κατοι- 
 κιονσιν. 
 
 385—6. ώ? . . ^ειν. On this re¬ 
 dundancy, see Matth. §. 539, 1. 
 
 Ib. ώραν, care. Trach. 57. εΐ πα- 
 τρός νεμοι τιν’ ώραν τον καλώς πράσ- 
 σειν δοκεΐν. Cf. Valck. ad Herodot. 
 III. 155, 6. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 47 
 
 ΙΣ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΣ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΣ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΣ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΣ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΙΣ. 
 
 ΐγωγΐ rots νΰν γ, ώ πάτ€ρ, μαντ(νμχισα>. 
 ττοίοισι τοντοΐΐ ; τί δβ τ€θ€σπισται, τίκνον ; 
 σ€ rots’ e/cet ζητητον άνθράπτοκ ττοτί 
 θανόντ’ ίσΐσθαι ζώντά τ’, evcrotai 'χαριν. 
 τις δ’ αν τι τοιοΰ^ άνδροί (ύ ττραζΐκν αν ; 
 ΐν σοι τα κΐίνων φαιτ'ι γίγνεσθαι κραττ). 
 or ονκ €Τ €ίμί, τηνικαυτ αρ βιμ ανηρ ; 
 νυν γαρ θεοί cr ορθονοΊ, ιτροσθε δ ωΚΧνσαν. 
 
 V / 
 
 γέροντα S' ορΘουν φλανρον ος νεο9 Trecr?^. 
 καΙ μην Υ^ρεοντά γ ϊσθι σοί τούτων γάριν 
 η^οντα βαιον κούχι μυρίου χρόνον. 
 οττω? τί δροίση, θύγατερ ; ερμήνευε μοι. 
 ως σ αγχι γη9 στησωσι ¥ί.αδμείας^ όττως 
 
 390 
 
 395 
 
 388. τξθξσπισται. Cf. Plutarcli de 
 Mario, as quoted in Van Dale de 
 Idololatr. p. 302. (CEdipus speaks 
 with much earnestness.) 
 
 3 89. rots 6 X 64 . . άνθρωττοις, The- 
 banis sc. 
 
 390. €V(Toias (Hesych. evBeveias, 
 σωτηρίαί) χάριν. out Op regard to the 
 preservation of the state. Soph. 
 Amph. fr. 124. των τριών μίαν 'λαβύν 
 ^ΰσοιαν apKci. 
 
 39 ^· τοιουδ* νπ άν^ρός. Neue, 
 WuND. τι το 4 θί)δ’ άν 8 ρός. Herm. 
 Dind. For the preposition, cf. infr. 
 411.681. Matth. §. 592, 7. For the 
 sentiment, cf. sup. 73. καί tis Ίτρος 
 av 8 p 6 s μη βΧίποντος αρκβσις. 
 
 Ib. €v npa^eiev. CEd. T. IO03. 
 δπωί I σου προς δόμους (Χθόντος (ύ 
 ττράξαιμί τι. 
 
 392. Cf. sup. 247· Matth. II. 
 1004. 
 
 393 · emphatic. Aj. 1238. 
 ovK ap 'Αχαιοΐί av 8 pes ela'i πΧην ode ; 
 Brunck compares Aristoph. Eq. 
 391. 1234. Cf. Wunder ad Aj. 77. 
 
 512. 
 
 394. Wunder compares infr. 
 1565. ποΧλών γαρ άν κα\ μάταν πημά- 
 των ίκνονμίνων ττάΧιν ae δαίμων δίκαιος 
 αϋξοι. The word θβοΐ is here pro¬ 
 nounced by Ismene in an emphatic 
 tone which makes it the best guide 
 no tmerely to the preceding reason¬ 
 ing, but to the whole (Edipodean 
 destiny. 
 
 393. φΧανρον, useless, trivial. 
 Blomf. Gloss. Pers. 222. On os 
 with conjunct, see Matth. §. 527· 
 2. Dale : 
 
 What avails it 
 
 To raise in age the wretch whose 
 
 youth they blasted ? 
 
 397. βαιον — χρόνον, after a short 
 time. El. 478. ov μακρον χρόνον. 
 Alatth. 377, 2. On the redun¬ 
 dancy of the entire expression, see 
 CEd. T. 58. 
 
 399-400. The proceedings of the 
 Thebans or Cadmeans, consequent 
 on the oracles newly promulgated, 
 but not perfectly understood, seem 
 to have gone on this principle. If 
 CEdipus was buried on a foreign 
 
48 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κρατώσυ μβι/ σου, γηί δβ μη 'μβαίιηης ορών, 4°° 
 
 ΟΙ. ηδ' ώφ^λησις τις θύρασι κβίμβίΌν; 
 
 ΙΣ. κβίνοις δ τύμβος δυστυχών δ σδς βαρύς, 
 
 ΟΙ. κανβυ Θβοϋ Τις τοΰτό y αν γνώμη μάθοί, 
 
 ΙΣ. τούτου χάριν τοίνυν σβ προσθίσθαι ττβλας 
 
 χώρας θύλουσι, μηδ' ίν αν σαυτου κρατης, 4^5 
 
 ΟΙ. η καΙ κατασκίώσί θηβαία k6v€L 5 
 1ζ. αΛΛ ουκ ea τουμφυλον αιμα σ, ω ττατβρ. 
 
 soil, they had much to apprehend 
 from the anger of his offended manes: 
 to receive him on their own soil, 
 and much more to bury him there, 
 his parricidal crime forbad. A mid¬ 
 dle course consequently remained: 
 to place him somewhere among those 
 prior inhabitants of the country, 
 who, though not incorporated with 
 the Cadmeans, were yet among their 
 dependencies. His person would 
 thus be in their power, while living; 
 and at death, if permission might not 
 be obtained from the Delphic shrine 
 to bury him among themselves, still 
 his tomb would not be among actual 
 enemies. Cf. infr. 785. See also 
 on this subject Muller’s Eumeni- 
 den, p. 170. 
 
 399. στησωσι. ScHOL. : κατοικί- 
 σωσι. 
 
 400. κρατωσι pev σον. ScHOL. : 
 dj/rl τον όπως σχώσί σε. Cf. infr. 405 · 
 
 Ib. €μβαίντ]ς ορών. Cf. GEd. Τ. 
 825. Matth. §. 379. 2. 
 
 401. Keipevov. ScHOL. : οίκονντος. 
 Ismene evidently understands it in 
 the sense of buried. 
 
 Ib. θυρασι (Elms, θνραισι, Libri), 
 emphatic. 
 
 402. 6 τύμβος δυστυχών. Bv this 
 delicate euphemism on the part of 
 Ismene, the Scholiast understands a 
 person unhappily buried, because 
 buried in a foreign land. Donner 
 accordingly translates δυστυχών, in 
 
 fremdem Lande. Elmsley, Herm. 
 and Ellendt interpret, justis hono- 
 ribus carens. But, actual soil ex¬ 
 cepted, could not all funeral rites be 
 satisfactorily paid even in a foreign 
 country ? “ De loco potissimum 
 
 sepulcri agitur.” Dind. 
 
 403. γνώμτ}. There needs no ora¬ 
 cular declaration, implies CEdipus, 
 that if my remains are despoiled of 
 their due sepulchral honours, the 
 vengeance of my manes will fall 
 upon my countrymen : mere human 
 intelligence could tell that. 
 
 404. προσθ^σθαι, sibi adjungere. 
 Neue. 
 
 405. κρατάς, Herm. Dind. Wund. 
 κρατοΐς, Br. Elms. Matth. {§. 528. 
 who renders Iva, where). 
 
 406. Will they bury 7 ne in Thebes? 
 will they cover me with Theban dust? 
 asks the resolute ex-monarch : that 
 is the one and only question which 
 I have to put to them. 
 
 Ib. κατασκιάζειν {σκιάζω), to cover. 
 Hes. Th. 716. Kara δ’ εσκίασαν βε- 
 λεεσσι Ύιτηνας. 
 
 Ib. θηβαία, highly emphatic. 
 
 407. fa, sc, κατασκιάζβσθαι. 
 
 Ib. τοϋμφυΧον αίμα, kindred blood. 
 Ismene delicately hints at the pa¬ 
 ternal blood shed by CEdipus. Reisig 
 compares Eur. Suppl. 148. Τνδεύ? 
 μέν αίμα συγγ^ν^ς φεύγων χθονός. A 
 more appropriate illustration occurs 
 Pindar Pyth. II. 59. Εμφύλιον αϊμα 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 49 
 
 ΟΙ. ούκ άρ (μου ye μη κρατησωσιν ποτέ. 
 
 ΙΣ. earai ποτ άρα τοΰτο JiaSpeioK βάροί. 
 
 ΟΙ. TToias φαν€ίσηί, ώ τέκνον, ζνι/αλλαγής ; 
 
 ΙΈ. τηί arjs νπ opyr/s, σοΐί όταν στωσιν ταφοιί. 
 ΟΙ. a δ’ evvewets, κλνου<τα του Xeyeii, reKvov, 
 
 ΙΈ. άνδρών θεωρών Αελφική^ άφ> εστίαί. 
 
 ΟΙ. και ταΰτ εφ' ήμΐν Φοΐβοί εΙρηκώί κυρεΐ ; 
 
 ΙΣ. ω9 φασιρ οΐ μοΧόντβ^ ets* Θηβη9 ττβδοι^. 
 
 ΟΙ. τταίδων tls ουν ηκουσβ των βμών τάδβ ; 
 
 ΙΣ. οίμφω γ ομοίως, κάζβττίστασθον καλώ^. 
 
 ΟΙ. καθ' οί κάκιστοι rcovS άκονσαντβς^ ττάρος 
 τονμον πόθου προνθβντο την τυραννίδα; 
 
 410 
 
 4*5 
 
 πρώτιστος . . inepi^e θνατοίς (Ixion 
 SC.) 
 
 408. Then they shall never be 
 masters {ου μη κρατησωσιν) of me, 
 the ex-monarch declares at the top 
 of his voice. Infr. 450. αλλ’ υντι 
 μη Χάχωσι T0v8e συμμάχου. Phil. 3 Si. 
 ού μη ποτ €s την Σκΰρον ^κπΧεύσης. 
 
 See Hart. II. 157· 
 
 409. Ismene speaks modestly, 
 and after a short pause, βάρος, res 
 molestias creans. 
 
 410. In consequence of what oc¬ 
 currence {ξυναλλαΎης. cf. Qid. T. 
 34.) ? asks GEdipus, with great 
 earnestness. On the word φανβΙς, cf. 
 infr. 514. 974. 
 
 411. “In consequence of the 
 wrath of your manes, when the 
 people of Thebes stand (in hostile 
 array) at your tomb.” The poet’s 
 drift in all this is obvious enough; 
 it was to make the tomb of (Edipus 
 a perpetual bugbear to the Thebans; 
 an intimation that their armies could 
 never approach nearer to Athens 
 than Colonos; that even there they 
 would meet, if any faith w'as to be 
 placed in oracles, a signal defeat. 
 
 Compare the language of CEdipus, 
 infr. 621 sq. Schaefer proposes, or’ 
 ίνστώσιν, quando arma intulerint. 
 On the dative τάφοις, see Neue ad 
 El. 174. 
 
 413 . avhpatv — ΙστΙας, a legatis, Qui 
 redierant ab ara Delphica. Winsem. 
 On the word β^ωροΧ, see Dissen’s 
 Comment, in Find. 388-9. 
 
 414. 60’ ημϊν, concerning me. 
 Matth. §. 584. 8. (where the exam¬ 
 ples quoted belong to the genitive 
 case) and §. 586, e. The terms Οηβη 
 and θηβαι are used by Sophocles prow 
 miscuously, both in dialogue and 
 chorus. What then is the distinc¬ 
 tion between the two words } Re¬ 
 ference is made, I think, in the 
 former word, to that Thebe, sister of 
 Higina, and daughter of Asopus, of 
 whom Pindar occasionally sings, and 
 in concert with names most respected 
 at Thebes; as, Ismenus, Melia, Cad¬ 
 mus, &c. Hymn. i. 2. See also 
 Dissen ad Nem. HI. 3. Isth. 
 VII. 16. 
 
 418—19. παρος του μου πόθου, in 
 preference to regret for me. παρος 
 προυθ^ντο, ex abundantia, as common 
 E 
 
50 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΙΣ. άλγω κλνονσα ταντ βγω^ φψω δ’ ομω?, 
 ΟΙ. άλλ* (Α θ€θί σφί μητβ την ττβπρωμ^νην 
 epLV κατασββσειαν, iv δ* ΙμοΙ τ€λθ9 
 αύτοίν yivoLTO τησδε της μ^^ΧΨ ττψί, 
 ης νυν εχονται κάτταναίρονται δόρυ’ 
 ώς ουτ αν oy νυν σκήπτρα καΐ θρόνους €χ€ί 
 μ€ΐν€ί€ν, ουτ αν ούζβληλυθως πάλιν 
 €%θοι ποτ αύθις’ οί ye τον φυσαντ epe 
 ούτως άτίμως πατρίδος ίζωθούμ€νον 
 ουκ eayov^ ox)S ημυναν’ αλλ αναστατος 
 αύτοίν βπβμφθην κάζβκηρυχιθην φυγας. 
 
 420 
 
 4^5 
 
 430 
 
 with Sophocles. Neue compares 
 Eur. Herac. loi. η yap αισχύνη παρος 
 τον ζην παρ' iaffKo'is άνδράσιν νομίζεται. 
 Το instances given elsewhere of the 
 force of the possessive pronoun in 
 Soph, add those cited by Reisig. 
 Enarr. p. 76. also infr. 1413· Dale; 
 
 Yet those degenerate wretches, 
 warned of this. 
 
 Could grasp at empire, and neglect 
 a father. 
 
 420. φ€ρω, aifero, nuncio. Vid. 
 Lobeck ad Aj. 798. Herm. The 
 word φέρω continually occurs in this 
 sense in Sophocles. See EUendt in 
 voc. and Wunder ad Electr. 856. 
 
 421-2. μητ€ — δ’. Hermann ob¬ 
 serves on the impropriety of Elmsley 
 in changing δ’ into τ’, on account of 
 the preceding μητβ : “ Aperte e par- 
 titione commutatio fit in oppo- 
 sitionem.” Neue compares Trach. 
 
 143· 
 
 423. Cf. Matth. §. 380. 4. 
 
 424. ηί νυν βχονται, quam nunc 
 conserere par ant. Br. On βχβσθαι 
 with gen. in the sense of adhering 
 to, seeWund. ad Philoct. 775. 
 
 Ib. κάπαναίρονται (ScHOL. : κατ’ 
 άλληλων βπαίρουσιν) dopv. The πβρϊ 
 
 of the preceding verse seems to have 
 an influence on this second member 
 of the sentence; and on account of 
 which they lift up the spear. See 
 Pass, in voc. βπαναίρβσβαι. βπαναι- 
 ρονται, Herm. Dind. βπαναιροννται, 
 Neue, Gaisf. Wund. The latter 
 appeals to Xen. Anab. V. 7. 21. the 
 former refers to Antig. goj. Wunder 
 illustrates the construction by Virg. 
 ^n. IV. 71 sq. 
 
 425. σκήπτρα και θρόνους. Pind. 
 Pyth. IV. 270. σκαπτόν μόναρχον και 
 
 θρόνος. Cf. infr. 449 · ^ 354 · 
 
 Ib. ως non ΐνα hie significat, sed 
 βπβί. Herm. Which explanation seems 
 better than Wunder’s reference to 
 Matth. 628. 3. b. 
 
 426. μβίνβιβν, bestehe, remain un¬ 
 moved. Donn. ruhig ihn besitze, pos¬ 
 sess it in peace. Germ. Pr. 
 
 Ib. πά\ιν, La. Lb. V. cum Junt. 2. 
 Gaisf. Wund. πόλιν, A. Aid. Herm. 
 Dind. 
 
 428—9. βξωθονμβνον ονκ βσχον. 
 infr. 888. βονθυτονντα .. βσχβτ , hin¬ 
 dered from &c. Matth. §. 555 · 
 
 Cf. Wund. ad El. 550. 
 
 430. βξβκηρνχθην φνγας, proclaimed 
 an exile by the herald, ^schin. 90, 
 26. βκκηρυττβιν βκ της πόΧβως. Lys. 
 
ΟΙΔΤΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 51 
 
 €Ϊποΐ9 αν ώί θ4λοντί τοΰτ €μοΙ τότε 
 
 ττόΧίζ το δώρον εΐκότωί κατηνυσεν. 
 
 ού δητ\ εττεί τοί την μεν αντίχ ημέραν^ 
 
 οπηνικ ε^ει συμο^, ηοιστον οε μοι 
 
 το κατθανεΐν ήν και το λευσθηναι πετροΐ9, 435 
 
 ονόεί9 ερωτοζ τουο εφαινετ ωψελων' 
 
 χρόνω δ\ or’ ηδη Tras* ό μόχθος^ ήν πεττων, 
 
 κάμάνθανον τον θυμόν εκδραμόντα μοι 
 
 μείζω κολαστήν των πριν ημαρτημένων, 
 
 τοτηνίκ ηδη τούτο μεν πόλις βία 44^ 
 
 ηλαννε μ εκ γης γρόνιον' οΐ δ’ επωφελεΐν, 
 
 οΐ τον πατρος, τω πατρί δυνάμενοι, τό δραν 
 
 173 » ^ 5 · αστεοϊ. Cf. CEd. Τ. 
 
 450. Antig. 7. 
 
 43 Γ · eikovTi ^Ο.ΐξορισϋηναι. ScHOL. 
 Cf. (Ed. Τ. 1436 sq. 
 
 Ib. ToVe. cf. Wunder ad Aj. 631. 
 Poppo ad Thucyd. I. 101. 
 
 433· αντίχ ημ,ίραν, am 
 
 jenen Tage. Donn. On eWi roi, see 
 Matth. §. 627. Hart. II. 353. 
 
 434. (ζΐΐν effervescere), Cf. 
 Eurip. Hec. 1055. Dorville ad Char, 
 p. 233. Jacobs ad Anthol. II. 2. 203. 
 Pass, in ΐττιζίίν. 
 
 436. epoiTOiTovh' , ScHOL. του άπο- 
 βανάν, Herm. and Wunder under¬ 
 stand it of exile. On the wordepωs, 
 implying msh, desire^ see the latter 
 ad Aj. 674. 
 
 Ib. ώφελώρ = ώφ^ημα τοΰδε του 
 έρωτος παροχών t Herm. = ωφ^Χητηί, 
 WuND. whom see also ad Aj. 526. 
 Reisig has given his explanation in 
 Enar. p. 78. 
 
 437· Χρόί'ω, after a time, = iv 
 χρόνω μαχρω. Phil. 235. Cf. infr. 
 441. and Matth. §. 446. 8. 
 
 Ib. ΤΓζπων. Hesych. : ckXvtos, 
 ασθ^νψ. Jacobs. ; μαλαχβ€ΐς, sicut 
 ulcus, initio durum. 
 
 438. θυμόν όκ^ραμόντα {όκτρόχην 
 metaph. ausschweifend, unmassig 
 werden, to be extravagant, excessive. 
 Pass.). 
 
 439. μήζω — των—μζΐ^ωηκατατά. 
 Matth. §. 451. to have inflicted 
 greater punishment on me than my 
 offences deserved. 
 
 440. τοτηνίκ ή8η, just then. On 
 various adverbs, with which φη is 
 joined in Sophocles, see Ellendt in 
 voc. I. 760. Cf. Hart. I. 235 sq. 
 
 440—1. τούτο μόν {partly), oi δε. Cf. 
 Aj. 670-2. Herm» adViger. p. 702. 
 Matth. §. 288. 2. 
 
 441. χρόρίον. Hesych. Reis. 
 WuND. after a length of time; Ell. 
 for a length of time. coll. Phil. 600. 
 Elms, in perpetuum. The middle 
 explanation is most agreeable to the 
 usages of antiquity, when murder 
 had been committed without pre¬ 
 meditation. Dindorf supposes the 
 adjective to have been added, be¬ 
 cause χρόνω, V. 437, is so far re¬ 
 moved from the verb rjXaove. 
 
 442. ol του πατρός, i. e. vere pa- 
 tris filii, nec degeneres, sed, ut ego 
 in meum patrem, ita in me impii. 
 
 £ 2 
 
52 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ονκ ηθίλησαν^ άλλ’ eirovs σμικροΰ γάριν 
 φνγά^ σφίν βζω τττωχοί ηλώμην βγω, 
 
 €Κ ταΐι^δβ δ* ουσαιν παρθβροιν, οσον φύσΐί 
 δίδωσιν αύταϊν^ καί τροφας βχω βίου 
 καΙ γης- abeiav και yevov^ iwapKeaiv 
 τω δ’ άρτί τον φνσαντος ύΧ^σθην θρόνους 
 καί σκήπτρα κραίνειν καί τυραννενειν χΘονό^, 
 άλΧ* οϋ TL μη Χάχωσι τονδε συμμάχου^ 
 οιίτε σφιν αρχής τησδε Ι^αδμείας ποτέ 
 
 V </> «Λ/ 
 
 ονησυς ηξβί. τοντ εγωοα^ τησόε τε 
 μαντεΤ άκούων^ συννοών τε τάζ εμού 
 παΧαίφαθ\ αμο\ Φοίβος ηνυσεν ποτέ. 
 
 445 
 
 450 
 
 Herm. Neue, by his note to Electra 
 341, seems to consider the expres¬ 
 sion as referable to a doctrine of the 
 times, more particularly promulgated 
 in the Eumenides of ^Eschylus, that 
 children were far more the oifspring 
 of the father than the mother. On 
 the infin. to bpav, cf. Neue ad Aj. 
 114. Matth. ad Eur. Hip. 49. and 
 Gr. Gr. §. 543. 2. 
 
 443. €πυνς σμ,ικρον χάριν, for want 
 of a few words ; i. e. a defence which 
 a few words would have contained. 
 Reisig refers to Heller in Program- 
 mate A. 1820. Matth. §. 576. to 
 avoid the necessity of saying a word. 
 
 445-6. Reisig rightly observes 
 that the participle οϋσαιν is by no 
 means superfluous : ab hisce qu<2 
 virgines sint. οσον φ. δ. as far as their 
 sex will admit. 
 
 447. yrjs adetav, ein siclirer Sitz ; 
 a secure abode. Donn. tuta vita 
 aliquo loco degenda. Ell. Cf. Matth. 
 344. i. 
 
 Ib. yevovs (ττάρκ^σις, all that sup¬ 
 port and assistance which a person 
 is entitled to receive from his rela¬ 
 tions. Kindershulfe. Donn. 
 
 448. TO) δ’. Strongly emphatic, 
 like the pronoun ralvbe 445. σφιν 
 
 444 * 
 
 449. Kpaiveiv, cum acc. infr. 9^4* 
 cum gen. Aj. 1050. Wund. (ad 
 Phil. 139.) compares σκηπτρον ανάσ¬ 
 α erai. 
 
 450. ου μηΧάχωσι. Matth. §. 517 * 
 
 Ib. τουδε SC. cpov, they shall never 
 
 have me for an ally. Dindorf ob¬ 
 serves, that we must either read ούτε 
 with Elmsley, or the following ovre 
 must be changed into ουδέ. See also 
 Dind. adAntig. 699. 
 
 453—4. σνννοών — τταΚαΙφαθ' . I un¬ 
 derstand : “and comparing my (τάξ 
 €μον=τά ε/χά, see Ell. I. 553 ·) ora¬ 
 cles, which Phoebus formerly an¬ 
 nounced (fvvaev, edidit, Dind.) to 
 me viz. those which Ismene 
 brought on a former occasion. 
 Wunder reads, άκούων σνννοων τά τ 
 €ξ 6/χου. 
 
 454 * ‘ττάΚαίφατος (πάλαι, φατο9, 
 φημΐ), uttered at some time preceding^ 
 but not necessarily, I imagine, a 
 very long time. As applied to ora¬ 
 cular declarations, cf. Od. IX. 507* 
 XIII. 172. Find. 01 . II. 72. In 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 53 
 
 7 Γρο 9 ταυτα και Υ^ρίοντα ΤΓ€μττοντων ίμου 455 
 
 μαστηρα, k€l tls άλλο? iv ttoXu aOeuei. 
 ίαν γαρ i/ieZy, ώ ^euoL, θβλητβ μου 
 7Γ pocrrarurL rats* σβμροίσι, δημονχοί^ Oeois 
 αλκήν ττοίεϊσθαι^ τρδβ rfj TroXet μίγαν 
 σωτηρ άρβΐσθβ, rots* δ* e/xots* βχθροΐ^ ττόνους. φο 
 
 ΧΟ. Ιττάζίο^ μ€ν, ΟΙδίτΓον^, κατοικτίσαί^ 
 
 aoros* re τταιοβ^ υ αώ eirei oe τησοβ yrys* 
 σωτηρα σαυτον τωδ* eVe/x^aXAets* λόγω, 
 
 παραινβσαι σot βούλομαι 
 
 ^schyl. Sept. c. Th. 763. it is 
 applied to the QEdipodean curse, 
 invoked on his children. In what 
 sense this word, as it appears to me, 
 is to be here understood, has been 
 explained in the preceding verse. 
 More learned men, however, see 
 the matter in a very different light. 
 Hermann, referring it to that old 
 Delphic declaration, that CEdipus 
 should be the assassin of his father, 
 and husband of his mother, under¬ 
 stands it of the annihilation of the 
 whole guilty race, now about to be 
 accomplished, and accordingly trans¬ 
 lates : id ego scio et hujus audiens 
 oracula, quum repute, et per me quas 
 Phoebus olim antiquas dictiones ef- 
 fectum dedit. EUendt takes the same 
 view of the subject. Wunder sub¬ 
 scribes apparently to Doederlein’s 
 opinion on the subject: viz. that by 
 these παλαίφατα are to be understood 
 those curses which Qidipus had in¬ 
 voked on his children during his 
 ill treatment at home, or when he 
 was expelled from Thebes. For 
 the constructional process by which 
 this conclusion is come to, see the 
 learned writer himself. 
 
 Ib. ηννσ^ν, uttered. Antig. 1178. 
 ω μάντι, τονπος ώί αρ’ ορθόν ήννσας. 
 
 455 * ταυτα, wherefore. Cf. 
 (Ed. Τ. 426. Matth. 59’> 
 
 456. μαστηρα, a searcher for, in 
 search of. Trach. 73 3. πάρεση μαστηρ 
 πατρός. Eur. Bacch. 986. 
 
 437—9. μου αλκήν ττοίζΊσθαι, de- 
 fendere. Ell. Beistand gewahren, 
 Donn. Cf. infr. 1524. 
 
 438. προστάτισι rais, Dind. (Prse- 
 fat. ad poett. seen. p. 14.) Wund. 
 συν ταισι rals edd. vett. racaSe Canter. 
 συν προστάταις Herm. rrpos ταισι. ταΊς 
 La. In his Annotations, Dindorf 
 proposes, θβληθ’ όμου {together with) 
 προστάτισι κ. τ. e., comparing Aj. 
 767. Beols μόν καν ό μη0€ν ων όμου 
 κράτος κατακτησαιτ . 
 
 Ib. δημηύχοις (έχω). Applied to 
 the σ€μνα\ θβάι, as having accepted 
 an habitation in the place. See El- 
 lendt in voc. cf. infr. 1086. 
 
 460. TTovovs sc. δώσετε. Elms. Qy. 
 a source of pain. Hermann trans¬ 
 lates ; me huic urbi magnum sospi- 
 tatorem recipietis, inimicis autem 
 ultorem. 
 
 461. όπάξιος — κατοικτίσαι. Cf. 
 (Ed.T. 777. El. 393. Trach. 855. 
 Matth. §.535. 
 
 463. €π€μβάλλ€ΐς, ingeris. Ell. 
 ultra offers ,· dich aufwirfst zum 
 Better. Reis. 
 
 ε 
 
54 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ φίλτα&, ώί νυν τταν τβΧουντί Trpo^evei, 4^5 
 
 ΧΟ. θοΰ νυν καθαρμόν τώνδ€ δαιμόνων, βφ’ α9 
 το πρώτον ίκου καχ κατόστβιψα^ πόδον. 
 
 ΟΙ. τρόποισι ποιο is', ώ ζόνοι, διδάσκ€Τ€, 
 
 ΧΟ. πρώτον μίν Ιρά^ όζ άβφύτου χοας 
 
 κρηνης όνβγκου, δι οσίων χβιρών θιγών, 47 ° 
 
 ΟΙ. όταν δβ τούτο χ^ΰμ άκηρατον λάβω ; 
 
 ΧΟ. κρατήρες είσιν, άνδρος εϋχειρος τέχνη, 
 
 ών κράτ ερεψον καΊ Χαβάς άμφιστόμονς. 
 
 ΟΙ. θαΧΧοΐσιν, η κρόκαισιν, η ποιώ τρόπω^ 
 
 ΧΟ. οίος νεαράς νεοπόκω μαΧΧώ λαβών, 475 
 
 465. 7 Γρθξεν€ί. ScHOL, πρ 0 ξ€νθ 5 
 (μο\ κα\ φίλος ylvov. Ell. prcebe. 
 
 466. θον καθαρμόν =.κάθαιρζ. infr. 
 542. e 6 ov φόνον = €φόν(νσας. 1139' 
 μήκος %θου = (μηκννας. Cf. Antig. 1 5 1 . 
 Trach. 1264. -Aj. 13. El. 1334. &c. 
 On the rare imperative θον, see 
 Matth. §. 213. 2. 
 
 467. κατ€στ€ΐψας (καταστώ ίββα^, to 
 tread). Wunder, like the preceding 
 editors of Sophocles, has admitted 
 this most questionable reading into 
 his text. The true one, preserved 
 in Suidas (viz. κατάστίφον), and 
 which Wunder has since defended 
 with so much ingenuity and learning 
 (see his “ De Scholiorum in Soph. 
 Trag. Auctoritate,” p. 8 sq.), had 
 not perhaps then occurred to him. 
 The subject will be more fully en¬ 
 tered into on another occasion. 
 
 469. ά€ΐρντος=ζάζίροος (peca), per¬ 
 ennial, ever fiowing. 
 
 470. eveyKov, Elms. Libri vitioso 
 accentu iveyKOV, Dind. an eveyicov 
 praestet, non ausim dicere. Herm. 
 
 Ib. δι οσίων χάρων, with holy 
 hands. Passow in δια A. 4. Matth. 
 §. 396. 2. 
 
 Ib, diya>v. diyyaveiv here implies 
 to take, to draw. Ellendt expresses 
 
 his surprise that Doederlein should 
 have rendered it lavari. 
 
 472. τίχντγ, workmanship. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 431. (νχ^ιρος άνδρος, sup¬ 
 posed by the Scholiast to be Daedalus. 
 
 473. €ρ€φ(ΐν, to crown, to cover; 
 frequent in Pindar. 01 . ΧΠΙ. 45. 
 δυο δ’ αντδν Τρ^φαν ττλόκοι σέλινων. 
 Pyth. IV. 426. στ€φάνοισί μιν ποιας 
 
 epeuTov. 01 . I. ιιο. Nem. VI. 73· 
 Isth. IV. 93 · Ef. Carmichael, p. 118. 
 
 Ib. λαβή {λαβζίν), ear or handle, 
 αμφίστομος {στόμα), double. “ Ana- 
 logia ansas significari postulat in 
 utraque craterum parte pervias, ut 
 manus inseri posset.^’ Herm. On 
 the cadiscus, a two-handed vessel, 
 crowned with white wool, and be¬ 
 longing to Jupiter Ctesius, see Athen. 
 XI. 473, c. 
 
 474. θαλλοϊς, olive-branches. Ib. 
 κρόκαισιν, woollen thread. Musg. 
 Pass. Wund. Are we not rather to 
 understand, wool itself ? 
 
 475. νζαρας. Valcknaer supports 
 the metre by substituting veoyvrjs, 
 Hermann ν^ωρον. Elmsley reads 
 οίός ye ν€αρας. νβωρονς, newly bonfl 
 (but not confining the sense too 
 strictly), seems to me the preferable . 
 reading. Cf. infr. 730. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 55 
 
 ΟΙ. etei'* το δ’ evOev ττοΐ τβλβυτησαί μ€ χρη ; 
 
 ΧΟ. χοά? χβασθαί στάντα irpos ττρώτην βω. 
 
 ΟΙ. ή τοΐσδβ κρωσσοί^ ois* Xiy^Ls χίω τάδβ ; 
 
 ΧΟ. τρισσάς ye ^τηyάς. τον τβλβνταΐον δ* δλον. 
 
 ΟΙ. του τόνδβ ττλησας θώ; δίδασκ€ καΙ τόδβ. 4^0 
 
 ΧΟ. ΰδατος, μβλίσσψ' μηδβ ττροσφβρειν μβθυ. 
 
 ΟΙ. όταν Se τούτων yi} μβλάμφυλλο^ τυχρ ; 
 
 ΧΟ. Tph ivve αύτρ κλώνα^ 6 < 
 
 Ib. veoTTOKos {π€κω, ttokos), new- 
 shorn. Cf. Antig. 1201. Supply epe- 
 ψορ at the end of the verse, λαβών, 
 nearly redundant, having first taken 
 it. λαβών, Schsef. Gaisf. βαλών, Br. 
 Dind. Wund. 
 
 476. TO δ’ evBev {the remaining 
 part of the task) ttol τ^λίντησαί μ€ 
 χρη, {in what manner must I bring to 
 a conclusion ?) Cf. El. 1307. αλλ’ 
 οϊσθα pev ravOevde. Also 1339 ’ 
 
 895. CEd. T. 1 267. 
 
 477. ττρος πρώτην €ω. The Scho¬ 
 liast illustrates from the Chiron of 
 Cratinus : aye δη προς eca πρώτον 
 απάντων ιστω, κα) λάμβανβ χ€ρσιν (τχΐ- 
 νον μβγάλην. Masgrave has col¬ 
 lected a variety of illustrations from 
 the Latin poets. See also Thudi- 
 chum I. 294. I have elsewhere ob¬ 
 served, that imprecations by the 
 Erinyes were made to the west, or 
 setting sun. 
 
 478. κρωσσος, a pitcher. Eur. 
 Cycl. 89. Ion 1173. 
 
 Ib. χίω, shall / pour? subj. in- 
 teiT. as 6 ω, infr. 480. 
 
 479· τρισσάς ye πηγάς. ScHOL. : 
 άντ\ τον, το νδωρ άπο τριών πη'γων. 
 
 Cf. Electr. 895· The commentators 
 generally, Heath, Hermann, Both, 
 Dindorf, Muller (Eum. ^Esch. p. 
 180.), suppose three libations to have 
 been made. Three is certainly the 
 more usual number in holy rites: 
 the context, however, seems to me 
 
 αμφοιν xepOLV 
 
 to imply that two libations only were 
 used to the Eumenides; the one of 
 water, poured out at three intervals 
 or gushes, the second of water and 
 honey, poured out at once and 
 entire. Reisig evidently under¬ 
 stands also, that two libations only 
 were made. That the χοαΐ τρίσπονδοι 
 (Antig. 431), are to be understood 
 in a similar mannet I do not under¬ 
 take to say, but I think it not im¬ 
 probable. 
 
 480. Tov τόνδζ πλησας {having 
 filled this with what ?). Ib. θώ. 
 Hermann and Wunder, statuam, 
 sc. ante quam libem. Donner, and 
 the German prose translators, merely 
 render : with what shall 1 fill this ? 
 
 48 [. νδατος, μίλίσσης. ScHOL. 
 The copulative καί is to be supplied. 
 Antig. 1079. άνδρών, γυναικών .. κω- 
 κνματα. 
 
 Ib. μζλίσσης, i. q. μβλιτος Dind. 
 
 Ib. προσφ€ρ€ΐν, infin. for imperat. 
 infr. 484. 490. CEd. T. 462. El. 9. 
 Phil. 1411. Matth. §. 546. Cf. 
 sup. 100. On μηδ€, see Hart. I. 
 205. 
 
 482. γη μΐλάμφνλλος . Cf. Sup. 
 16. infr. 676. Find. Pyth. I. 27. 
 Αίτνας iv μ^λαμφυλλοις (ScHOL. πο- 
 λνδβνδροις" η γάρ τών δ€νδρων πνκνο- 
 της βαθβίαν €ργάζ€ται την ύλην) κορυ¬ 
 φαία. terra frondibus opaca. Reis. 
 Cf. Diss. Comment, in Find. p. 168. 
 
 483. τρία ivve, thrice nine. Porph. 
 
 E 4 
 
56 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τίθάς €λα/α?, τασδ’ βπενχβσθαί λίτάς. 
 
 ΟΙ. τούτων άκούσαι βούλομαι, μίγιστα γάρ. 4^5 
 
 χο. ώί σφα^ καλούμ€Ρ Ένμβι/ίδα^, 6υμ€νών 
 στβρνων ^β^^σθαι τον Ικέτην σωτήριον, 
 
 ' αϊτού σύ τ’ αύτο^, Κ€Ϊ Τί9 άλλο? άντί σου, 
 άττυστα φωνών μηδβ μηκύνων βοήν, 
 
 €7Γ€ίτ^ άφέρτΓβιν αστροφρς. και ταύτά σοι 49® 
 
 δράσαντι θαρσών αν τταρασταίην ίγώ* 
 
 Ν 5^' S' ' » ■»' 
 
 αλΛω? 06 όβιμαινοιμ αν, 
 
 de vit. Pythag. §. 17. ets δε το ’Ιδαίον 
 κάλούμξρον αντρον καταβας, epia ίχων 
 μίΚανα τας ν^νομισμίνας τριττας ivuia 
 ημ€ραε €κύ 8 ieTpc\j/e, και καθήγισ€ τω 
 Διϊ, τόν Τ6 στορννμζνον αύτω κατ eros 
 θρόνον (θΐάσατο. 
 
 Ib. (ξ άμφοΐν χ€ρο7ν. Dale: “with 
 both thy hands.” No : on both sides, 
 right and left. Donner, more cor¬ 
 rectly : Z 7 i beiden Seiten. 
 
 483—4. κλώνας^ ίΚαίας. Pausan. V. 
 15 . 6 . θυονσι δε άρχαΐόν τινα τρόπον 
 (Elei SC.), λιβανωτόν yap όμοϋ πνροΊς 
 μζμνγμόνοις peXiTi θυμιωσιν εττι των 
 βωμων' τιθίασι δε κα\ κλώνας eXaias 
 επ’ αυτών, και οΊνω χρώνται σπονόρ- 
 
 486-7· ώ? emphatic, vis we term 
 them Eumenides, so pray them to 
 receive with hearts and minds suit¬ 
 able to their name (ε^ (υμενών στίρ- 
 νων), &c. &c. For the genitive, see 
 Matth. II. p. 998. 
 
 487. σωτήριον. Is this an active or 
 passive adjective ? Reisig adopts 
 the former sense, and understands, 
 “ who is to be the saviour of our 
 country.” But this is a selfish con¬ 
 sideration, not likely to have crossed 
 the choral mind at such a moment. 
 I understand, to his own health and 
 safety. Cf. .^sch. Eum. 747. El- 
 lendt, whom see, objects to the 
 illustrations given by Hermann. 
 
 ώ ζέν\ άμφί σοί. 
 
 Dindorf observes : “ significatione 
 passiva dictum pro σών.” 
 
 488. άντ\ σου, in your place. Cf. 
 Matth. 366.1. Wund. ad Antig. 182. 
 
 Ib. συ T αυτός, Elmsl. from three 
 MSS. σύ y, vulgo. 
 
 489. απυστα (πυνθάνομαι) , pass, of 
 which nothing is heard. Od. I. 242. 
 ωχΐτ' αίστος, απυστος. (Nulli-visus, 
 nulli-auditus.) 
 
 Ib. μηκύνων βοήν, elevating the 
 voice-, or, prolonging the discourse. The 
 majority of the commentators adopt 
 the former sense : yet, that three pre¬ 
 cepts should be given, viz. to speak 
 little, to speak low, and then to 
 retire, without turning to look back 
 on divinities so fearful, seems more 
 agreeable to reason. How brief is 
 the prayer which the Chorus them¬ 
 selves put into the mouth of CEdipus, 
 or his substitute ! Examples for the 
 use of μηκύν€ΐν in the latter sense 
 are not wanting. El. 1484. μηκύνων 
 X0yoos. Herodot. II. 35. μηκυνίων 
 τόν λόγοι/. Ellendt, adopting the first 
 sense, says ; “ Perperam Doederl. in 
 Spec. p. 93. de longis precibus dici 
 existimat.” 
 
 490. επειτ’ άφ. άστρ. Virg. VHI. 
 102. fer cineres — transque caput 
 jace ; ne respexeris. Cf. ^Esch. 
 Choeph. 99. Orph. de Lap. 739. 
 
ΟΙΔ1ΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 57 
 
 ΟΙ. ω τταΐδβ, κλνβτον τώνδβ προσχωρων ζίνων ; 
 ΑΝ. ηκονσαμίν re χω τι δβΐ ττρόστασσβ δράν, 
 
 ΟΙ. €μο\ μίν ονχ δδωτά. Χβίττομαι γαρ eV 
 
 τω μη δύνασθαι μηθ^ οραν^ δυοίν κακόΐν. 
 σφωΐ' δ* ατίρα μολουσα ττρα^άτω τάδβ. 
 άρκύν γαρ οίμαί κάντ\ μυρίων μίαν 
 ψυχήν τάδ* ίκτίνουσαν^ ην evvovs τταρη, 
 άλΧ iv τάχΗ τι πράσσβτον' μόνον δό μβ 
 μη XecTrer, ον γαρ αν σθίνοι τούμόν δέμα^' 
 έρημον epTveLV ούδ^ νφηγητου y’ avev, 
 
 ΙΣ. άλλ* βΙμ’ βγω τβΧουσα' τον τόττον δ" ΐνα 
 
 χρησταί μ βφβνρβΐν, τούτο βούΧομαί μαθβΐν, 
 ΧΟ. τούκβΐθβν αΧσου^, ώ ζόνη^ τονδ\ ην δβ τον 
 σπάνιν τιν^ ί^^ΧΡ^^ cW’ βττοικο9^ os* φράσβι. 
 ΙΣ. χωροΐμ αν els τοδ’’ ^Αντιγόνη^ σν δ' ίνθάδβ 
 φνΧασσβ ττατβρα τόνδβ* tols τβκονσι γαρ 
 
 495 
 
 500 
 
 505 
 
 495* όδωτά (όδόω) plur. for sing, 
 cf. Trach. 64. 949. 1118. Aj. 888. 
 1126. Phil. 5 24. 854. nil. &c. &c. 
 that path is not for me to take. 
 
 Ib. Xeinopai (roO ό8ωτα eivai) SC. 
 Tov πορ€ν€σθαι. Ell. For prepo¬ 
 sition at the end of the verse, cf. 
 CEd. T. 555. Phil. 626. 
 
 496. μη δννασθαι μηθ* όρον, want 
 of strength and want of sight. 
 
 Ib. Scribendum μηδ' cum Elmsleio. 
 Bind. On μη — μητ€, see Matth. 
 §. 609. 
 
 498—9. άρκύν eKTLu. Cf. Matth. 
 II. 510. 
 
 499. evvov 9 , mit frommen Sinn. 
 Germ. P. 
 
 500. eV τάχ€ΐ rt. “ Nobis etwas 
 schnell {somewhat quickly). Apte 
 confert Doederl. Aj. 854. συν τάχ€ΐ 
 τινί.” WuND. Neue, considering rt 
 as acc. to πράσσ^τον, compares infr. 
 732. El. 305 
 
 501. δίμας. Cf. El. 57 · 
 
 502. νφηγητου δίχα, Herm.Wund. 
 νφηγητου γ avev, Τ. Earn. Gaisf. 
 Bind. 
 
 504. χρηστοί, i. e. χρ^ίη eaTai. 
 ScHOL. who illustrates bv the Tri- 
 ptolemus of Soph. (fr. 537.), 
 
 χρησται δί σ’ βνθβνδ' αντις. 
 (Where Bindorf observes, “ rectius 
 editor Romanus χρη Vrai.”) Cf. 
 Ellendt in voc. and see a learned and 
 ingenious note by Bindorf on the 
 subject. 
 
 505. TovKeWev aXaovs τονδ€, dort 
 im Haine. Bonn, there in the grove. 
 “ Pro eW dici videatur tovksWcv liX- 
 σονς τονδβ. Ell. 
 
 506. σττάνίν ίσχηζ = σπανίζη 9 . Cf. 
 sup. 223. enoLKos, accola. Ell. 
 
 507. ^Αντιγόνη, σύ δ’. Aj. 1409. 
 παί, σύ δ’. El. 15*^· Νίθ/ 3 α, σε δ. 
 Cf. Bernhardy, ρ. 73· 
 
58 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ούδ^ el TTOvel Sei πόνου μνημην εχβιν. 
 
 ΧΟ. Setvov μ€ν το πάλαι κβίμβνον ηδη κακόν, ώ ζ€Ϊν, ί7Γ€- 
 γβίρβιν' (Γτροφ, Λ. 510 
 
 όμως^ δ’ βραμαι πυθόσθαι, 
 
 ΟΙ. τί τοΰτο; 
 
 ΧΟ. ray δβίλαία^ απόρου φανβίσας 
 άλγηδόνος, a ^υνόστας. 
 
 ΟΙ. μη πρθ9 ζβνία^ άνοιξην 
 
 ray σα9, πβπον, βργ’ αναιδή. 
 
 ΧΟ. τό τοι πολύ καί μηδαμα ληγον 
 
 χρηζού, ζόν% όρθον άκουσμά άκούσαι. 
 
 5·5 
 
 ΟΙ. ωμοί. 
 
 ΧΟ. στόρζον, Ικβτβύω. 
 ΟΙ. φβΰ φβυ. 
 
 510. 8eiv6v, grave. Hermann 
 compares Antig. 1096. τ6 τ (ϊκάθ€ΐν 
 yap hcLvov. The Scholiast compares 
 Callimachus : τί δάκρνυν €υδον iyei- 
 peis; Add Theognis 423. πολλάκι yap 
 TO κακόν κατακ€ίμ€νον ev8ov αμανον. 
 See also Scholiast ad Plat. Phileb. 
 p. 40. Metre : Tetram. chor. hyper, 
 with base. 
 
 511. Metre : glyconic ; as also 
 513» 514» 515» 5*6. 
 
 512 . τί τοΰτο SC. 6 βον\€ΐ πνθβσθαι. 
 The Scholiast understands nepl to be 
 wanting in the next verse. Metre : 
 amphibrach. 
 
 5 I3“I4. apropos άλyη^ωv = άμηχα- 
 vov aXyos, Electr. 140. a grief from 
 which there is no means of extri¬ 
 cating oneself. On φαν^ίσας, cf. 
 sup. 41 o. 
 
 514· 9 ^ννίσταί {σννίστημι). “Ao- 
 ristus propria conveniendi aliquo vi 
 dictus est Trach. 28. \exos 'ΐίρακλύ 
 KpLTov ξυστάσα. Tralate (CEd. Col. 
 514.) confiictari significat.” Ell. 
 Cf. Neue ad Aj. 611. Wund. ad 
 
 Phil. 266. 
 
 515—^6. ττρος ^βνίας Tas σάς, bv 
 the hospitality which you have shewn 
 me. 
 
 516. Libri, ras σαί. ττίττονθ' €py 
 άναώη. Reis. Herm., ray σάς. a ttc- 
 πονθ\ avaidrj. Both. Dind. Wund. 
 as here given. Sophocles loved a 
 touch of common human nature, 
 but a word so much of common life 
 as ττίττον, and which is no where else 
 to be found in tragic Greek, is a 
 bold innovation. 
 
 517. TO rot ΤΓολο και μφ. Xrjy. qiKS 
 late dissipata est neque desinit dissi- 
 pari. Wund. On the τοι, see Hart. 
 11.344. Metre: dim. chor. hyper, 
 with anac. 
 
 51^· ορθον άκονσ. άκ. = 6 ρθώς άκον- 
 σαι. Reis. Neue compares El. 1034. 
 ονδ’ αν τοσοΰτον €χθος €\θαίρω σ' eyri, 
 
 519* στ€ρξον, ergieb dich darein. 
 Reis. For metre (cret. catal.), Din- 
 dorf compares Arist. Lys. 783. αυτός 
 %Ti τταΐς ων. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 59 
 
 ΧΟ. πβίθον κάγω yap οσον συ ΤΓροσχρΎΐζβι^, 5^0 
 
 ΟΙ. ηνβγκον κακότατ\ ώ ^€vol, ηνβγκον βκων μβρ, Oeos ϊστω, 
 τούτων δ’ αυθαίρετον ούδεν. [_cIvt. λ , 
 
 ΧΟ. άλλ* €9 τί ; 
 
 OL κακα μ εύνα ττόλις ούδεν ϊδριν 5^5 
 
 γάμων ενεδησεν ατα. 
 
 ΧΟ. ή μητρόθεν^ ώί ακούω, 
 
 δυσώνυμα λεκτρ’ επλησω ; 
 
 520. κάγω γάρ. Supply €π€ΐθόμην. 
 For δσον σύ ΊΓροσχρ^ζ€ΐ 5 , Reisig com¬ 
 pares ^sch. Prom. 642. 786. The 
 metre similar to 513; but here 
 ending in antispast. 
 
 521. ην^γκον κακότατ (κακότητ 
 
 Ell.). Comparing infr. 963. and 
 Horn. II. 11 . 304. 3 c; 2. III. 6. VIII. 
 541. XII. 332. XVII. 757. Od.IV. 
 273. XII. 231. 427. there seems 
 little doubt that we are here to 
 render, / have occasioned, I have been 
 the author of much evil and calamity. 
 Doederlein, who puts a similar inter¬ 
 pretation on the words, illustrates 
 by II. XII. 332. and Evenus ap. 
 Stob. Flor. XLIX. p. 354. 
 
 irpos σοφία pev τοΚμαν μάΚα συμ¬ 
 
 φοράν άστι, 
 
 χωρίς be βλαββρη κα\ κακότητα φάρα. 
 
 Ib. ηνεγκον €κών. άκων libri. άνων 
 Herm. Ικων Both. Both’s emenda¬ 
 tion has been adopted by Wunder 
 and Dindorf: the former observ¬ 
 ing that the expression is used per 
 oxymorum· (does Sophocles indulge 
 in such Euripidean subtleties and 
 “ Spitzfindigkeiten ?”), and implies, 
 that QEdipus had been at once the 
 willing and unwilling author of these 
 crimes : willing, because he had not 
 been actually compelled to commit 
 them; unwilling, because no fore¬ 
 thought nor consent could be implied 
 in them. Dindorf in like manner 
 understands the two verses together 
 
 as equivalent to the Euripidean ονχ 
 ίκων €κων (Iph. Τ. 512.), and the 
 Homeric €κων άίκοντί ye θνμω. (II. IV. 
 43.) Hartung’s reading, ^vejK, 
 άe'κωv pev (II. 411.), comes nearer 
 to the Triclinian books, and agrees 
 better I think with the sense, and 
 with two subsequent passages : 964. 
 
 987· 
 
 Ib. debs "στω. Cf. Trach. 399 ' 
 Eur. Androm. 37. Iph. T. 1046. 
 
 523. avdaiperov. As this is the 
 only instance in Sophocles, where 
 the antistrophic form of the glyconic 
 is at variance with the strophic, 
 Hermann and Dindorf doubt the 
 genuineness of this word. 
 
 524. is τί ; quonam respectu? 
 quamnam in partem miser fuisti P 
 Herm. quousque progressus es ? 
 Matth. II. 1008. who understands, 
 rjXdes. 
 
 525. κακα μ evvq, Lb. Elms.Wund. 
 Dind. κακα pev evvq, vulg. κακα μ ev 
 evva, Br. Herm. and others. 
 
 526. γάρων ατα. This appears to 
 me like a Hebraism, i. e. a most 
 calamitous or polluted marriage, the 
 words to be put in apposition with 
 evvq. Antig. 862. ματρωαι λάκτρων 
 άται. Neue refers for the double dat. 
 to his GEd. T. 27. Brunck trans¬ 
 lates : nefario in toro civitas me 
 insciurn nuptiarum irretivit noxa. 
 
 527—8. pqTpodev δυσώνυμα COn- 
 jungenda sunt, ita ut haec verba rei 
 
60 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. ωμοί, θάνατοί μ^ν raS άκούειν, 
 ω ζ^ίν' αυται 8e δ& βξ βμου μίν 
 
 ΧΟ. πώς φής ; 
 
 ΟΙ. τταίδβ, δύο δ' ατα 
 ΧΟ. ώ Zed, 
 
 ΟΙ. ματρδς κοινας αττύβλαστον ώδινος. 
 ΧΟ. αυταί γαρ απόγονοί τβαί; 
 
 ΟΙ. κοίνα'ί ye πατρος άδβλφβα/. 
 
 ΧΟ. Ιώ. ΟΙ. ίώ δητά μνρίων γ όπίστροφ 
 ΧΟ. hvaOes ΟΙ. ^παθον αλαστ’ ^γ^ίν. 
 
 530 
 
 (Γτροψ, / 3 ^ 
 535 
 
 αί κακών' 
 
 effect80 significationera habeant: num 
 torum tihi implesti, ut per matrem 
 Herm. (The Chorus 
 may be considered as making a 
 pause between every word, so fear¬ 
 ful is the sense implicated in them.) 
 The compounds of Sophocles com¬ 
 mencing with δυ? deserve much 
 consideration. In general they form 
 a contrast to the Pindaric ανώνυμος 
 (see Diss. ad Nem. VJI. p. 464). 
 
 528. ζπΧησω, Cf. Pass. ad di/a- 
 ττίμπλημι. Carmichael, p. 236. 
 
 529. θάνατος. Aj. 215. θανάτω yap 
 ’ίσον πάθος ^Knevaei. Antig. 933 * 
 νάτον TovT eyyvτάτ(ύ τονπος άψΐκται. 
 
 330. e/ioO piv, Elms. Herm. 
 Dind. ipov .. Wund. 
 
 532. duo ατα, two pollutions. An- 
 tig. 533. τρίφων dv άτα κάπαναστάσ€ΐς 
 θρόνων. “ δύο άτα iilias vocat propter 
 incestum cum matre connubium.” 
 Dind. 
 
 333. άπ'^βλαστον. El. 440. πασών 
 €βλαστ€. Nbue. 
 
 534. άπόyovoι, daughters. The 
 Chorus speak, not as ignorant of the 
 fact, but in a sort of stupefaction^ as 
 Herm. observes. In this strophe, 
 iambic the prevalent metre ; here 
 dim. iamb. 
 
 Ib. αυται yap άπόyovoι real, Herm. 
 ex conject. Wund. Dind. σαί τ άρ 
 
 ίΐσ’ άπόyovoί re και, vulg. 
 
 535· “ their father’s 
 
 sisters too.” (The dreadful truth is 
 again elicited, with many a pause 
 between.) 
 
 536. ζπιστροφαί, assaults. Died. 
 Cf. infr. 1045. Perhaps better, 
 turns and returns. Metre: iamb, 
 dochm. dim. iamb. 
 
 537 . eVa^es, (539)> 
 
 φόνον ( 34 ^) > 'όκαν^ς (549)* The 
 marked character of the dialogue in 
 these passages,—the Chorus starting 
 the text, and QEdipus immediately 
 supplying the context,—would have 
 been rendered by a modern Meta- 
 stasio in a manner equally vif and 
 striking. Dale has missed the pecu¬ 
 liarity, partly, it should seem, from 
 not perceiving it, and partly from 
 his confusion as to the parties speak¬ 
 ing, and giving some of them more 
 than their respective portions. 
 
 Ch. Are these thy daughters then. 
 Daughters at once and sisters of 
 / their sire ? 
 
 (Ed. Alas! 
 
 Ch. Yes : thou dost well to weep. 
 The woes thou hast endured 
 are infinite. 
 
 (Ed. And e’en oblivion’s solace is de¬ 
 nied me. 
 
 Ch. And thou hast done &c. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 61 
 
 ΧΟ. βρβξα^ ΟΙ. ούκερβξα, ΧΟ. τίγάρ·, ΟΙ. βδβξάμηι^ 
 δωρον^ δ μητΓοτ €γω ταλακάρδω^ 54^ 
 
 ^πωφβλησα ττόλβο^ Ιζβλβσθαί, 
 
 ΧΟ. δύσταρβ^ τί yap ; eOav φονοι^ β . 
 
 ΟΙ. τί τούτο ; τί S eOeXet^ μαθ^ίν ; 
 
 ΧΟ. ττατρόί 5 ΟΙ. πατταϊ, δ^υτίραν eiraiaas εττί νοσώ νοσον. 
 ΧΟ. eKaves ΟΙ. ίκανον. eyet δβ μοι 545 
 
 ΧΟ. τί τούτοι ΟΙ. 7 Γρο 9 δίκαί TL. ΧΟ. τιγαρι ΟΙ. βγω 
 φράσω. 
 
 κοίί γαρ aXov9 βφονβνσα και ωΧβσα' 
 νόμω δβ καθαροί, αϊδρίς- βΐ^ τδδ’ ηΧθον, 
 
 The wide difference between the 
 languor of the above version, and 
 the liveliness of the original, need 
 not be pointed out. 
 
 Ib. On αΚαστ ^'χ^ιν see Matth. II. 
 
 925· 
 
 538. €pf^as. ανόσια they would 
 have added, but CEdipus prevents 
 them. 
 
 541. ίπωφίλησα. Passow, adopt¬ 
 ing Hermann’s acute hut somewhat 
 subtle exposition of this passage, 
 translates : / received a reward from 
 the state (viz. Jocasta), to receive 
 which I assisted her not (viz. in the 
 matter of the Sphinx); πόλζΐ or πάλιν 
 being to be understood after εττωφε- 
 λησα. Matthise (I. 426.) understands 
 ^πωφίλησα in the sense of ωψβλον, 
 0 that! and so Dind. “ όπωφίλησα 
 pro &φ€λον dixit, usu singulari.” 
 For Hartung’s opinion, see Partikel- 
 Lehre, 11 . 272. 
 
 Ib. e^eXeVdai (aor. 2. med. of 
 e^atpeiJ/). Trach. 244. ταύτιις —e^et'Xeff 
 αντώ (^sibi elegit) κτήμα κα\ Oeois κριτόν. 
 In the present instance, says Ellendt, 
 “ acceptum premium adsignificatur.” 
 See also Blomf. Gloss. Ag. 927. On 
 the genitive πόλ^ος after ό^ΐλίσθαι 
 see Bernh. p. 146. 
 
 542. τί yap, for what else but a 
 wretch are you ? edov φόνον = όφό- 
 vevaas. 
 
 544. eVt νόσω (Pind. Nem. VI. 
 lOO. πζμπτον ini είκοσι) νόσον, a 
 blow added to a former blow. 
 
 545—6. e^ei de μοι προς Βίκας τι, 
 habet ea res mihi aliquid veniw a facti 
 justitia. Herm. πρός ^ίκας η €χ€ΐν 
 =:8ίκαιον eivai. Matth. §. 59 *^' 
 
 Ib. τί yap {προς δίκας €χ€ΐ τι) ; 
 
 547 - ^λοίις. I understand the word 
 in its simplest sense, caught, en¬ 
 trapped, circumvented. Infr. 763. τί 
 ταΰτα neipa Kupe bevTepov θίλ^ις | eXelv, 
 iv 019 μάλιστ αν akyolqv άλου? ; Ant. 
 496. iv κακοΊ,σι αλούς. Docderl. and 
 Herm. convictus. (The latter ob¬ 
 serving that piv is to be supplied.) 
 Dindorf connects καΐ yap ζάλών piv 
 φονενσας καΐ όλόσας, νόμω δε— . αλους, 
 ex conject. Herm. Wund. Dind. άνονς, 
 Pors. Elms. Gaisf. άγι/ώ?, Tyrwh. Br. 
 άλλους, libri. 
 
 548. νόμω δε καθαρής, but pure aS 
 far as law and usage are concerned ; 
 because the homicide was committed 
 in self-defence, and I had no know¬ 
 ledge that I was committing a par¬ 
 ricide. 
 
62 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 AU. καί μην αναξ οο ημιν Αί/εω? γονθ 9 
 
 Θησ€ν9 κατ^ ομφην σην ίφ> αστάΧη ττάρα, 
 
 ΘΗΣΕΥΣ. 
 
 ΤΓολΧών άκονων €v Τ€ τώ ττάρο^ χρόνω 
 τα9 αΙματηρα9 ομμάτο^ν διαφθοράς 
 βγνωκά σ\ ώ τταΐ Ααΐον^ τανυν Θ' οδοίς 
 iv ταΐσδ' άκούων μάλλον ίζ^ττίσταμαι. 
 σκ€υη τβ γάρ σβ καΙ το δύστηνον κάρα 
 οηλουτον ημιν ονσ ος €ΐ, και σ οικτισας 
 θύλω 'πβρύσθαι, δύσμορ ΟΙδιπον, τίνα 
 ΤΓολβως ίττύστης ττροστροπήν ίμού τ βχων 
 αυτός τ€ \η ση δνσμορος παραστάτις. 
 δίδασκ€. δβινην γάρ τιν’ αν πρά^ιν τύχοις 
 λύζας, οποίας ίζαφισταίμην όγώ. 
 ως οιοα γ αυτός ως βπαιόβυσην ξβνος. 
 
 55 -^ 
 
 555 
 
 56ο 
 
 Ib. et? τόδ’ ηλθον. Wunder illus¬ 
 trates by Cic. ad Att. II. 17. nusquam 
 hue venissent, nisi’&c. Cf. Matth. 
 §.578.0.^ 
 
 549. κα\ μην δδ’. Autig. ^26. κα\ 
 
 \ ίΤ5Ν> 
 
 μην ηΟ . 
 
 550. κατ' ομφην σην, in obedience 
 to your invitation, or message. Her¬ 
 mann’s application of this word to 
 the secrets which (Edipus was to 
 communicate, seems more subtle 
 than correct. 
 
 Ib. iφ' άστάΚη, i. e. 60 ’ ά εστάλη. 
 Dind. Wund. os εστάλη, Herm. 
 άπεστάλη, Libri. El. 404* χωρησομαί 
 Tap' οίπερ εστάλην οδοί). Eur. Bacch. 
 454 ' ^Φ' fS· Θήβας πάρει. 
 
 551. On the dramatic character 
 of Theseus generally, and more par¬ 
 ticularly in reference to Sophocles, 
 see Thudiclium, p. 289. 
 
 553-4. όδots ev ταίσδ’. Per vias 
 hasce. Reis. 
 
 555. σκευή, attire. 
 
 Ib. TO δύστηνον κάρα, alluding to 
 his sightless eyes. 
 
 556. Οηλουτον — os ei. Ostendunt 
 nobis esse te eum, qui es. Wund. 
 Find. Pyth. II. 131. yivoC otos εσσι 
 (where see Dissen). 
 
 558. προστροπη. Hesych. Ικετεία. 
 The deep connection of this word 
 with persons, who came in suppli¬ 
 catory form, is well known to those 
 conversant with the Eumenides of 
 .Eschylus. Infr. 1309. ττροστροπαίονς 
 — λιτάς εχων. Passow renders ττροσ- 
 τροπην πολεως ^χειν, simply, to make 
 request. 
 
 559 · τταραστάτις, qu(E adstat. Trach. 
 889. &)S 8η πλησία παραστάτις. Here, 
 companion. 
 
 560 — 1. 8εινην — εγώ. Some 
 strangely difficult business must be 
 mentioned by you, from which I 
 should turn away. 
 
 562. επαώενθην ζενος, viz. at the 
 court of Pittheus inTroezene, as CEdi- 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 63 
 
 ωστΓβρ σν, χω? Τί9 ττλβΐστ’ άνηρ eVi ^€ρη9 
 ηθλησα KLvhvvevpaT ίν τώμω κάρα, 
 ωστ€ ζβρορ y άν ούδβρ* ονβ\ ωσπ^ρ σύ νυν, 
 νττεκτρατΓοίμην μη ού σννβκσώζβίν’ βττβί 
 €ξοώ ανηρ ων γωτι της es* αυρών 
 ούδβν ττλβον fiOL σου μβτβσην ημψας^ 
 
 ΟΙ. Οησβΰ, το σον γβνναΐον iv σμικρω Χογω 
 
 τταρηκβν, ωστ€ βραχβα μοι δβΐσθαι φράσαι. 57° 
 
 σύ γάρ μ’ os ύμι, κάφ* οτου vrarpos γβγω^ 
 καΐ yrjs oiroias ηΧθον βίρηκω^ Kopeis' 
 ωστ Ιστί μοι τύ Xolttov ούδβν άλλο, ττΧην 
 
 pus had been brought up at the 
 court of Poly bus. Pausan. I. 27. 8. 
 The construction, as Hermann ob- 
 sei*ves, is : ώ? οίδά y αυτός, o)S ^ivos, 
 «σπερ συ, έπαώΐυθην, και ηθλησα Kivdv- 
 νβνματα ως τις ττλβίστα άνηρ άθλησας. 
 Brunck compares Virg. .^η. I. 628. 
 On ξ€νος implying, in a foreign land, 
 see Wund. ad Electr. 849. 
 
 563. ως τις πλ€Ϊστ. Cum mper- 
 lativo adjectivi dicti ojs unum ex- 
 emplum reperi. CEd. Col. 563. ut 
 quis plurima: L e. plurima, si quis 
 alius, pertuli. Ell. 
 
 564. άθλ^ΐν. Horn. II. VII. 453 · 
 XV. 30. intransitive in the first in¬ 
 stance ; transitive in the second. 
 Kivbvvevpa. Antig. ^2, 
 
 565. ωστ€ ξ^νον γ’ άν ovdiv ονθ, 
 i. e, ωστ€ ovbcva άν ζ^νον, όντα, ωσπ€ρ 
 σύ. Hermann (not without the 
 authority of excellent MSS.) reads 
 ovbh 0 νθ\ But would a noble- 
 minded man like Theseus have used 
 so humiliating an expression to a 
 fallen monarch like QEdipus } 
 
 566. σνν^κσώζ^ιν, either, to assist 
 in preserving, or, to preserve in con¬ 
 junction with (glancing at Antigone, 
 cf. infr. 1632). On μη ον, see 
 
 Matth. p. 1082. 
 
 567. άνηρ=άνθρωπος, i. e. a mem¬ 
 ber of the human race, in all its weak¬ 
 nesses, casualties, &c. Cf. Antig. 
 768. fgmm. 682. 708. 
 
 567—8. της ός ανριον μύτεστιν ημύ- 
 ρας. Cf. Bernh. 437 * Kiihn. §. 519., a. 
 
 569. TO σον .. λόγω. ‘Your noble¬ 
 ness of mind conspicuous in a speech, 
 however brief.’ 
 
 570. παρηκ^ν. The best com¬ 
 mentators seem agreed in deriving 
 this verb from παριόναι, to permit. 
 Infr. 591 · παρίζσαν. El. 1482. αλλά 
 μοι Trapes καν σμικρόν ξΙπύν, 
 
 Ib. ωστ6 δεΐσ^αι e’pot (τα πράγματα) 
 βραχία φράσαι, ut res mihi indigeat 
 pauca dicere. Herm. ut mea res brevi 
 oratione indigeat. Ell. Wunder ob¬ 
 serves, that άόισθαι must either be 
 considered as equivalent to άάν, 
 which was Doederlein’s opinion, or 
 that two constructions have been 
 mixed; άύομαι βραχόων φράσαι and 
 dfi μοι βραχύα φράσαι. For the former 
 he compares Xen. Anab. V. 419. 
 VII. 3.10. 
 
 572. γης όποιας. For gen. cf. 
 Electr. 324. Matth. §. 354. ζ· 
 
 Ib. η\θον=ίφνν. cf. Bernh. p. 166. 
 
64 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 elireLV a χρ^ζ(ο, χώ λόγος δωίχβταί. 
 
 ΘΗ. τοΰτ^ αυτό νυν δίδασχ\ όπως αν όκμάθω. 575 
 
 ΟΙ. δώσων Ικάνω τονμον άθλων δβμας 
 
 σο\ δωρον, ού σπουδαΐον βΙς 0 \j/LV’ τα δβ 
 κβρδη παρ αυτόν Kpeiaaov η μορφή καλή. 
 
 ΘΗ. ποιον δβ κόρδος άζωΐς ηκβιν φόρων j 
 
 ΟΙ. χρόνω μάθοις αν, ούχι τω παρόντί που. 5^° 
 
 ΘΗ. ΤΓΟιω γαρ ή ση προσφορά δηλωσΐται ; 
 
 ΟΙ . δταρ θάνω ’γο), και σύ μον ταφβνί yivy. 
 
 ΘΗ. τά λοίσθι αΐτβΐ τον βίου, τα δ’ iv μόσω 
 η ληστιν ϊσχβις η δι ούδβνος ποιβΐ. 
 
 ΟΙ. όνταυθα γαρ μοι κβϊνα συγκομίζεται. 5^5 
 
 ΘΗ. άλλ’ iv βραχεί δη τηνδε μ εξαιτεΐ χάριν. 
 
 574 · λογο? διοίχεται. Und die 
 Red’ ist schon am Ziel. Donn. a}id 
 the speech (on my part) is at an end. 
 Eur. Suppl. 530. χη δίκη διοίχίται. 
 
 577· σπουδαΐον (guod expetaiur 
 non (lignum. Ell.) els οψιν {guod 
 adspectum attinet. Wund.) Matth. 
 §· 578, c. 
 
 i. e. τα Κ€ρδη παρ' αύτοΰ 
 μάλλον αγαθά eariv η καλή η μορφή. 
 Died. Neue compares An tig. 1050. 
 
 οσω κράτιστον κτημάτων €νβονλία. 
 
 579 · άξιοΐς, gloriaris. Neue. 
 
 581. ποίω sc. χρόνω. 
 
 Ib. προσφορά, properly, accession 
 (infr. 1270.) ; here, the κφδος, or 
 advantage, of which you speak. 
 
 Ib. δηλώσβταί for δηλωθησ^ται. 
 
 582. συ μου ταφ(υ9 y^vrj. And 
 thou hast paid me my sepulchral 
 rites! 
 
 583—4. λοίσθι — βίου. Gene¬ 
 
 rally : your request (viz. that I 
 should be your ταφβυς) can have re¬ 
 spect only to the last stage of life : 
 either you forget the intervening 
 part, or set no value upon it. On 
 τα iv μβσω, as accusative to ληστιν 
 
 ίσχίΐς, see Matth. §. 421,4. To the 
 examples there given, Ellendt in voc. 
 ληστις adds Eur. Ion 733 · TroXty €χοι 
 σκηψιν ξενικόν (Ισβολάν. Bacch. 1281. 
 TO μίλλον καρδία πηδημ' (χ(ΐ. Isoc. C. 
 Callim. 44 ^» ^ 3 · δίαιταν ίξαρνον 
 ΐΐναι. 
 
 584. ληστιν ’ίσχ€ΐς. Το illustra¬ 
 tions given above (ν. 223.), add El. 
 214. ου γνώμαν ’ίσχξΐς = ου γιγνιάσκας. 
 See also Bernhardy, ρ. 125. 
 
 Ib. δι ουδβνος ποιύσθαι, to set ηο 
 value on. Matth. §. 580, b. 
 
 585. ενταύθα (in your being my 
 ταφ^υί) κ€Ϊνα (those things of which 
 you speak) συγκομίζεται (are con¬ 
 joined). Bonn. Erlang’ ich jenes, 
 kommt zugleich mir dieses zu. Germ. 
 P. In Jenem liegt auch dieses inbe- 
 griifen. For the sense of ενταύθα as 
 here given, cf. CEd. T. 598. El. 21. 
 &C. &C. ScHOL. διά του τέλους και τά 
 μέσα του βίου ευτυχήσει’ προσδοκων γάρ 
 συ ώφελησεσθαι παρ' εμού, όταν άπο- 
 θάνω, ζώντά με γηροβοσκησεις. 
 
 586. εν βραχεί SC. ουσαν. Gene¬ 
 rally ; the favour you ask of me lies 
 in a small compass, or, this is a very 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΟΝΩί. 
 
 65 
 
 ΟΙ. ορα γ€ μην* ον σμικρό?, ονκ, άγων οδβ. 
 
 ΘΗ. 7Γ0Τ€ρα τα των σών €κγόνων, η * μου Xeyei? ; 
 ΟΙ. κβΐνοι κομίζβιν κ€Ϊσ άναγκάζονσί μ€, 
 
 ΘΗ. αλλ’ €1 θάΧοντά γ, ονδβ σοΊ φ^νγβιν καλόν. 
 ΟΙ. άλλ’ ον8% ότ αντο? ηθ€λον, τταρίΐσαν. 
 
 ΘΗ. ώ μώρ€, θυμό? S' iv κακοί? ον ζνμφορον. 
 
 ΟΙ. όταν μάθη? μον, νονθβτβι, ταννν S ea. 
 
 ΘΗ. SiSaaK . dvev γνώμη? γάρ ον μβ γρη λ€γ€ΐν. 
 
 small favour which you ask of me. 
 El. 673. iv βραχεί ξννθί'ις λ^γω. On 
 δή, see Hart. I. 281. 
 
 587. I understand CEdipus (who 
 speaks with great solemnity and 
 earnestness) to say : “ hut trivial as 
 this affair of my sepulture may ap¬ 
 pear, there will he no small turmoil 
 and contest about it.” άγων, discri- 
 men. Ell. periculum, Herm. μην, 
 yet, Matth. p. 1069. Hartung (II. 
 388.) translates : O, sieh zu, nicht 
 klein ist der Kampf, den du fiir 
 mich ubemimmst. 
 
 588. Do you speak in reference 
 to your children {τα των €κγόνων= 
 τους βκγόνονς) or me ? 
 
 589. κύνοι. The bitter and con¬ 
 temptuous feelings of CEdipus are 
 fully evinced by the emphatic pro¬ 
 noun Keivoi, and the equally empha¬ 
 tic adverb κ€ίσ€. 
 
 Ib. άναγκάζονσί, Hart. (II. 308.) 
 άναγκάσονσι, Dind. Some light may 
 perhaps be thrown on this verse and 
 the following, if instead of rendering 
 άναγκάζ€ΐν by Command, compel, as 
 Hermann and other commentators 
 do, we adopt the frequent Platonic 
 sense of, think necessary; (CEdipus 
 speaking with a bitter sneer.) As 
 instances of this Platonic use of the 
 word, Heindorf adduces Cratyl. 432, 
 c. Sympos. 202, a. Farm. §. 14. 
 
 590. αλλ’ et θίΚοντά yc, Elms. 
 Dind. αλλ’ et θίΧοντάς y, Reis. 
 
 Herm. Wund. Dced. Matth. Hart. 
 (II. 212.) With Elmsley’s and 
 Dindorf’s reading, the general sense 
 would seem to be,—“ it may be, 
 with your own consent—nor is it 
 reputable for you to live in exile.” 
 If we read θίΚοντ^ς, “and if eager, 
 anxious (cf. Plat. Theset. 143, d. 
 I Leg. 630, b. Charm. 154, e.) to 
 bring you back to Thebes, why 
 should you object } it surely is 
 not becoming” &c. And much in 
 the same way Dr. Gaisford under¬ 
 stands the passage : “ Nescio an 
 prsestet θΐΚόντων, sc. pro θίκ^τωσαν, 
 hoc sensu : fac istosita velle.” Be- 
 XotvT av. Par. B. T. Earn. θίΚοντάγ, 
 Lb. BiXotev av. Vat. Ven. 
 
 Ib. ovdi. Hartung (II. 122.) says 
 we must read μητ€. 
 
 591 . ηΒ€\ον sc. φξνγ€ΐν. 
 
 592. ω μώρ€. “ Oh most un¬ 
 wise !” Dale. 
 
 Ib. Βνμος δ’. Hermann has well 
 expressed the force of the particle, 
 which Brunck had rejected: vera 
 dicis, sed ira in malis nihil prodest. 
 For construction, cf. El. 934. for 
 sentiment, Phil. 1387. ω *τάν, δί¬ 
 δασκαν μη ΒρασννίσΒαι κακοϊς. 
 
 593 * 0'*·“*' μάΒης μον. “ La. μάΒης 
 με. quod minime damnem.” Herm. 
 δταν μάΒης, με νονΒετει. Lb. 
 
 594* γνώμης, without infor¬ 
 
 mation — till I have full knowledge 
 of the circumstances. 
 
 F 
 
66 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. ΤΓίΤΓονθα, θησίν, deiva irpos κακοΐί κακα. S9S 
 
 ΘΗ. ή την τταλαιαν ζνμφοραν yevovf €peii ; 
 
 ΟΙ. οΰ Βητ' ΐττέι was τοΰτό y Ελλήνων θρού. 
 
 ΘΗ. τί γαρ το μΰζον η κατ' άνθρωπον voaeis ; 
 
 ΟΙ. οΰτωί €χ€6 μοί. γη? €μη? άττηλάθην 
 
 προ? των ^μαντού σπβρμάτων' eaTLV Be μοί 6 οο 
 
 πάλιν κατβλθβΐν μηποθ\ ώ? πατροκτονω. 
 
 ΘΗ. πώ? Βητά σ άν π€μ'\\ταίαθ\ ωστ οίκβΐν Βίχα; 
 
 ΟΙ. το θ€Ϊον αυτού? €ζαναγκάζ€ί στόμα. 
 
 ΘΗ. ποιον πάθο? Ββίσαντα? Ικ χρηστηρίων ; 
 
 ΟΙ. OTL σφ* ανάγκη τηΒβ πληγηναι χθονί. 605 
 
 ΘΗ. καί πω? γβνοίτ άν τάμα κάκβίνων πίκρα ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ φίλτατ ΑΙγβω? παΐ, μόνοί? ού γίγνβταί 
 
 59^· παλαιάι/ ζνμφοραν, viz. the 
 murder of his father, and subse¬ 
 quent marriage with Jocasta. 
 
 598. The question of Theseus 
 must be understood as expressing 
 the utmost astonishment—a parri¬ 
 cide ! an incestuous! and yet ap¬ 
 parently some still greater evil, 
 something beyond the ordinary lot 
 of mortality to communicate ! CEdi- 
 pus, who sees what astonishment 
 his excited feelings have created, 
 extenuates matters by his ούτως 
 €χ(ί μοι. For Matthise’s opinion of 
 the construction, cf. §. 265. Obs. 4. 
 I speak under correction, but it does 
 not appear to me, that τι at the 
 commencement of a verse does 
 always imply an interrogative pro¬ 
 noun. Cf, CEd. T. 1471. 
 
 600. eariu, it is legal. 
 
 601. κατζΚθάν, a term more parti¬ 
 cularly used of a person returning 
 from exile. Cf. Arist. in Ran. 1165. 
 
 602. ττΐμψαΐαθ' (cf. Neue ad CEd. T. 
 434.) =:ρ,€τα7Γ€ρ,·ν//“αία^’, send for, fetch. 
 The sense would, I think, be im¬ 
 
 proved by putting a note of interro¬ 
 gation here, as well as at δίχα. But 
 if, as a parricide, says Theseus, you 
 cannot enter your native land, to 
 what purpose do they send for you ? 
 is it on condition that you dwell 
 apart from the other citizens ? Wun- 
 der illustrates this sense of ώστε by 
 Xen. Anab.V. 6, 26. Thucyd. IV.3 7. 
 
 603. TO 6 eiov στόμα, “non vati~ 
 cinia, sed deus rates.” Ell. In his 
 Annotations, Dindorf observes, 
 “ Restituendum (ξαναγκάσ€ΐ ex La. 
 Lb. B. T. V.” 
 
 604. eK χρηστηρίων, secundum ora- 
 cula. Reis. 
 
 605. ScHOL. avTi του, υπό ταντης 
 της γβονος ττληγηναι {cladeni accipere 
 Ell.) 
 
 606. τάμα κάκΐίνων, I and they. 
 Eur. Phoen. 484. τονμόν τε κα\ τουδε. 
 Cf. Matth. §. 268. Obs. i. 
 
 Ib. πίκρα, at enmity (with each 
 other). Aj. 1359· ^ <άρτα πολλοί vvv 
 φίΧοι καυθις πικροί, infr. όΐ^· 
 
 607. sq. (if. Klausen’s ..'Esch. 
 Theol. p. 20. 
 
ΟΙΔ1ΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 67 
 
 θβοΐσί γήρας ονΒί κατθανβϊν irore' 
 τα S αλλα συγγ^ϊ πάνθ^ 6 τταγκρατης χρόνος, 
 φθίνβί μ€ν Ισχνς γης, φθίνβι δβ σώματος' 6ιο 
 
 θνησκβι δβ ττίστις, βλαστάνβί δ* απιστία. 
 
 KOLL πνεύμα ταντόν οϋποτ οΰτ iv άνδράσιν 
 
 φίλοις βββηκβν, οΰτβ προς πόλιν πόλπ. 
 
 τοϊς μ€ν γαρ ηδη, τοΐς δ' ίν νστίρω χρόνω 
 
 τα τερπνά πίκρα γίγνεται, καύθις φίλα. 615 
 
 καΐ ταΐσι Οηβαις el τανυν βνημερβΐ 
 
 καλώς τα προς σε, μνρίας 6 μυρίος 
 
 χρόνος τεκνοΰταί νύκτας ημέρας τ Ιών, 
 
 εν εας τα νυν ζνμφωνα δεζίώματα 
 
 δόρεί διασκεδώσιν εκ σμικρού λόγου' 620 
 
 ΐν’ θύμος εύδων καΊ κεκρυμμενος νεκυς 
 
 6ο8. κατθανύν. μηρ θανύν Philostr. 
 V. Apoll. ρ. 353 · 
 
 6og. Cf. Aj. 646. 714. 
 
 610. Reisig refers to (Ed. T. 25. 
 
 612. πρενμα, animus. Reis. figu- 
 rate, quasi de spirante animo be¬ 
 nevolo et amoris pleno, cf. Mark], 
 ad Eur. Suppl. 553.” Ell. Doeder- 
 iein cites Eur. Iph. T. 1282. Neue, 
 Aisch. Suppl. 27. Eur. El. 1151. 
 
 613. βίβηκζρ, versatur. 
 
 615. τά repnva, arnicifuE. Wund. 
 
 Semel in arsi producitur πικρά.” 
 
 Ell. 
 
 616. ΐίημζράν, to be on good and 
 friendly terms with a person. Pass. 
 ΐνημ(ρύν^ nihil est aliud quam tran- 
 quillum esse. Herm. 
 
 617· καΧώς τά npbs cl. Sic bene 
 correxerunt scripturam omnium li- 
 brorum καΧώς re προί cl. ScH.iEF. 
 Wunder, considering the whole pas¬ 
 sage as corrupt, contents himself 
 with the reading of the MSS. 
 
 617—18. o pvpios χρόνος. Pind. 
 Isth. IV. 36. μνριον χρόνον, {im- 
 mensumper tempus. Diss.) Cf.Wund. 
 
 ad Antig. 1047. 
 
 618. Ιων, in its progress Doeder- 
 lein comparing infr. 1771. Ιόντα φό¬ 
 νον. Eur. Phoen. 1637. και παρθ^ν^νου 
 την lovc<iv ήμίραν pJvovca, translates, 
 χρόνος Ιων, postejra cetas. For the 
 opinion generally, cf. El. 1365. An¬ 
 tig. 1064. 
 
 620. b 0 p€i. On the use of this 
 dative by Sophocles, instead of bop\, 
 see Neue ad Aj. 1056, and a learned 
 note by Wunder. 
 
 Ib. biacKebcociv (biacKebavvvvai), 
 infr. 1341. Antig 287. -γην Ικανών 
 καΐ νόμους biacKcbcov. 
 
 Ib. Ικ c μικρού λόγον, on light pre¬ 
 text. Phil. 730. Ιξ ονΒίνος λόγου, { for 
 no reason.) 
 
 621. iva. The commentators dif¬ 
 fer whether this is an adverb of time 
 or place. Schaefer decides for the 
 former, Hermann for the latter. 
 Agreeing myself with Schaefer, I 
 suppose this and the two following 
 verses to be a sudden outburst on 
 the part of (Edipus, who speaks 
 abstractedly, and as it were to him- 
 
68 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ψυχροί ΤΓοτ αυτών θερμόν αίμα ττίβταί, 
 
 €ί Ζβύί ^TL Zei»?, χώ Αώί Φοΐβοί σαφής, 
 
 άλλ* ου γαρ αύδαν ηδύ τάκίνητ βτττ;, 
 
 ea μ ev οίσιν ηρζάμην, το σδν μονον 625 
 
 self. At V. 624, suddenly recollect¬ 
 ing that the recent communication 
 of Ismene respecting the Theban 
 slaughter, which is to take place near 
 his tomb, if ever they approach it, 
 is a state-secret to be divulged to 
 one person only at a time, he catches 
 himself up, and proceeds in a more 
 composed tone. In this view of the 
 case, 7 ua might be translated, then 
 is the time when &c. 
 
 622. ψυχροί... θ€ρμ6ν. For the 
 opposition, cf. Antig. 88. 
 
 Ib. irieTai, will drink. See Butt- 
 mann and Carmichael in ττίνω. ^sch. 
 Eum. 936. πιοΰσα κόνις μιλάν αίμα 
 τΓολίταν. 
 
 623. ft Ζβύ?, in allusion to his 
 prophetic powers. 
 
 Ib. Aios Φοίβος, Cf. Aj. 172. 
 401.450. 952. for the ellipse; Trach. 
 19. for the ellipse filled up. To in¬ 
 stances given in a former play of 
 Phoebus as the mere agent of Zeus in 
 prophetic declarations, add .^sch. 
 Sacerd. fr. I. 2. ταντα γαρ πατήρ 
 Zevi eyKadUi ΑοξΙα θεσπίσματα. Eum. 
 19. Δ,ιος προφήτης δ’ εστί Αοξίας. 684· 
 καγωγε χρησμούς τοίις εμους τε και 
 Διόί I ταρβεΙν κελεύω. See also infr. 
 792-3· and Klausen’s Theol. .lEsch. 
 
 P· 74 · 
 
 Ib. σαφής, the author of oracles 
 which (infr. 792.), /rom *their clear¬ 
 ness and want of ambiguity, may he 
 depended on. Cf. (Ed. T. 390. 1011. 
 II. IV. 404. επιστάμενος σάφα (i. e. 
 αληθώς) εΙπεΧν. (We are at present 
 dealing with classic poetry, and wish 
 not to intrude unnecessarily on the 
 ideas connected with it : but the 
 time will come when the subject of 
 ancient oracles must be more closely 
 
 looked into, and the reader’s atten¬ 
 tion drawn to that Being, who con¬ 
 siders all pretensions to prophecy as 
 the most daring of invasions on his 
 peculiar prerogative, and proclaims 
 himself as “ the Jehovah, who alone 
 speaks truth and gives direct an¬ 
 swers.” Isaiah XLV. 19.) 
 
 624. αλλ’ ου yap. The doctrine 
 of άλλα yap, with and without an 
 intermediate word, has been ex¬ 
 plained by Hartung, I. 470. &c. 
 
 Ib. ακίνητα (a, κινεω), was ver- 
 schweigen werden muss, that which 
 must not be divulged. Pass. Antig. 
 1060. ορσεις με τάκίνητα διά φρένων 
 φράσαι. Cf. infr. 1526. 
 
 625. ea (sc. είναι) μ* εν οΧσιν ηρξά- 
 μην, SC. είναι, i. c. sine me consistere 
 in iis, qucE dicere ccepi ; i. e. sufficiat 
 dixisse quae exponere coepi. Wund. 
 The political wisdom of this re¬ 
 serve is clear enough. The myste¬ 
 rious secret which is to be finally 
 entrusted to Theseus, and to him 
 alone, with right of communicating 
 to one other person at his death, 
 and so on for ever, is again held in 
 terrorem over the Boeotians. How 
 these intimations were received by 
 those present in the theatre, it is not 
 for us to say; but we can fancy some 
 resident by the Theban river Ismenus 
 nudging some dweller at Dirce, and 
 observing; “All this is very fine; 
 but did not our wise neighbours 
 keep fast hold of the mountain-passes 
 between them and us, as well as the 
 bones of old (Edipus, the latter alone 
 would not keep the tiles of Athens 
 from rattling some fine morning 
 about her ears.” “’'ΐττω Αευς” (Arist. 
 Ach. 911.), rejoins the man of Dirce 
 
ΟΓΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 69 
 
 • TTUTToy φυΧάσσων kovwot ΟΙδίττουν ipels 
 άχρΐΐον οίκητηρα δέζασθαι τόπων 
 των 4 νθΜ, ehrep μη Oeoi ψΐνοΌνσί μί. 
 χο. αναζ^ ττάλαί καΐ ταντα καΙ τοι,αΰτ βττη 
 γτ) ΤΎ)0 00 ανηρ ω? τ^λων €φαίΐ/€Τ0. 
 
 ΘΗ. r/f δητ αν άν^ρος βύμβνβίαν βκβάλοι 
 TOLovd , οτω πρώτον μβν η Bopv^evos 
 κοίνη παρ^ ημΐν alev ίστιν ιστία ; 
 
 ίπεντα S Ικ€τη9 δαιμόνων άφιγμβνο^ 
 
 ΎΤί κάμοί δασμόν ον σμικρόν τίνβι. 
 αγώ σφισθώ^ οΰποτ βκβαλώ γάριν 
 την TovSe, χ(ορα δ* ίμπαλιν κατοικιώ, 
 
 » Λ» > Λ /Λί ΓΛ\ ^ ο/ f / 
 
 €L Ο βνσαό ηου τω ς€νω μιμνβιν, σ€ νιν 
 
 630 
 
 ^35 
 
 (taking care, at the same time, that 
 his vulgar dialect did not reach an 
 Attic ear) : Jove knows thou art 
 right; their state-safety is deposited 
 in Phyle and iDeceleia, not in a few 
 empty words whispered from father 
 to son; but we may yet chance to 
 find the cue of the road between 
 Colonos and Athens, in spite of all 
 the whispering.’^ 
 
 625—6. TO σον πιστόν (=ζτην σην 
 πίστιν), or, as EUendt expresses it, 
 TO σον φνλάσσων, ωστ€ πιστόν elvai, 
 a tua parte fidem servans. Wunder 
 refers to sup. 585. for an explana¬ 
 tion of the meaning. A better refer¬ 
 ence, 1 think, would be to 565 sq. 
 where Theseus pledges himself to 
 CEdipus for a safe and unmolested 
 residence in his dominions. 
 
 628. θ(οί. More particularly Zeus 
 and ApoUo. Cf. sup. 277. ψεύσονσΐ 
 μ(, facient ut mendax videar. On 
 (ϊττερ, see Hart. I. 343. 
 
 630. ως Τ€Χων {prcEstiturus) (φαί- 
 
 8ρασ(ίων κακόν. 
 
 631. €κβάλ\(ΐν, fere est Latine 
 repudiare. Reis. Infr. 636. οϋπυτ 
 (κβαΧώ χάριν. €vp€v€iav, benevolencef 
 good will. 
 
 632 . oTov, Dind. in text; οτω, in 
 Annotat. ex Suida, in v. δορύξ€νος. 
 οτω Wund. Gaisf. 
 
 634. baιμόvωv, i. e. Furiarum. Cf. 
 Diss. ad Find. Nem. V. p. 415· On 
 the construction ικέτης δαιμόνων, see 
 Wund. 
 
 635 . δασμόν, payment for the pro¬ 
 tection received. 
 
 637. The commentators fluctuate 
 between εμπάλιν and εμπόλιν. Those 
 who, with Hermann, Gaisford, &c. 
 prefer the former, will translate, 
 on the contrary (Trach. 358. Hero- 
 dot. I. 207. Valck. Hippol. 388. 
 Diss. ad Find. 01 . XI. p. 137)· The 
 latter word, adopted by Wunder 
 from Musgrave’s conjecture, needs 
 no explanation. Dind. reads εμπάλιν 
 in text, εμπάλιν in Annotat. Cf. infr. 
 Ϊ 1 s6. 
 
 I'fTo. Aj. 326. κα\ δηλός εστιν ως τι 
 
 1 Two of the five passes through Cithaeron and Fames, the great mountain barrier 
 l>etween Boeotia and Attica. 
 
 F 3 
 
70 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τά^ω φυλάσσβιν' el δ' βμον arei^eiv μβτα 
 τόδ’ ηδν, τούτων^ ΟΙδίττον, δίδωμί aoc 
 KpLvauTL γ^ρησθαι. τρδζ. γαρ ^υνοίσομαι. 
 
 ΟΙ . ώ Zfv, διδοίηί τοΐσι τοιούτοισιν (ύ. 
 
 ΘΗ. τί δητα χρρζ^ίί ; η δόμους areL^eiv ίμούς ; 
 ΟΙ. 6? μοι θ€μί^ y ήν. άλλ’ 6 γωροί ecr^’ οδβ, 
 ΘΗ. eV φ τί πράζ€ί9ΐ ού γαρ άνηστησομαί. 
 
 ΟΙ. fV ώ κρατήσω των βμ ίκβφληκοτών. 
 
 ΘΗ. μ€γ^ αν Xeyoi9 δώρημα της συνουσίας. 
 
 ΟΙ. ά σοί γ airep φης Ιμμ^νύ τ€λοΰντί μοι. 
 
 ΘΗ. θάρσβί το τοΰδβ y άνδρός’ ου σ€ μη ττροδώ. 
 ΟΙ. οΰτοί σ ύφί ορκου y*, ώς κακόν, τηστώσομαι. 
 
 640 
 
 645 
 
 650 
 
 638. iv6ab\ SC. in Colonos. 
 
 Ib. (7-e, i. e. the choral troop. 
 
 640. For robe with infinitive pre¬ 
 ceding, Reisig compares Trach. 458. 
 
 TO μη ττυθίσβαι, τοντό μ' akyvvetev au. 
 
 Horat. Sat. i. 1. 78. an vigilare 
 inetu exanimem—hoc juvat ? See 
 also Bernh. p. 283. Elmsley ob¬ 
 serves upon the inaccuracy of the 
 poet’s language in making tovt. Old. 
 8ί8ωμί σοί κρίναντι χρησθαι an apodosis 
 to el δ’ ep. — rjdv. “ Eligendi enim 
 optio ad utramque conditionem per- 
 tinet.” 
 
 640—1. τούτων κρίναντι. See Bernh. 
 p. 146. and cf. CEd. T. 640. 
 
 641. ξυνοΐσομαι. ScHOL. σνμττρά- 
 ξομαι, coy σν βούλβι. For in this way 
 (i. e. by leaving you to make your 
 own election), I shall act in concert 
 with your wishes, which ever way 
 they tend. So El. 946. ξννοίσω 
 (ScHOL. σνμπονησω) παν oaovnep uv 
 σθ^νω. 1465. avpcfiepeiv toIs Kpeia- 
 σοσιν. 
 
 642. Cf. Klausen^s Theol. jiEsch. 
 82. On ev dtdovai cf. CEd. T. 1081. 
 
 644. €i μοι 6epis y ην, si mihi fas 
 esset, Herm. utinam, Br. 
 
 646. κρατήσω, victurns sum. Hart. 
 
 275* ^ ^ 
 
 647. p^y av — συνουσίας, SC. el 8 υ- 
 vato KpaTeiv των Εχθρών evBdde μ^νων. 
 ScHOL. Phil. I 17. Tovro y ^ρξας δύο 
 ejiepei δωρήματα {advantages'). 
 
 Great recompense thou nam’st for 
 thine abode 
 
 In these our realms. Dale. 
 
 648. General meaning; I shall 
 abide by my contract, if you remain 
 steady to yours. 
 
 Ib. φης, promise. Cf. CEd. T. 1520. 
 Ib. “ Res dicitur eppeveiv τινί, 
 quam quis animo servat, ut in 
 ^schyl. Prom. 534. αλλά μοι τόδ* 
 epptvoi καΐ μηποτ eKTaKely." Reis. 
 
 lb. TeXovvTi, about to perform. 
 Sup. 465. ως νυν παν TeXovvTi προ~ 
 ξύν€ΐ. 5 *^ 3 · 'Τίλοί 5 σα. Cf. 
 
 Matth. §.555» 2 · Kuhn. §. 662. 
 
 649· τούδύ y άνδρδς, as far as I 
 am concerned. Matth. §. 283. 
 
 650. υφ' ορκου (cf. Antig. 223.) 
 πιστοΰν, to bind by an. oath. Phil. 
 8 IT . ov μην σ’ evopKov y άξιω θύσθαι. 
 
 Cf. Matth. §. 592. On οϋτοι, see 
 Hart. II. 355. 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 71 
 
 ΘΗ 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 . ονκουν Tvepa γ αν ovSev η λόγω (pepois. 
 ττωί ούν TTOLrj(Teii ; ΘΗ. του μαλιστ okvos cr ; 
 ηζουσιν avdpes ΘΗ. άλλα τοΓσδ’ βσταί μβλορ. 
 ορα μβ λ^ίττων ΘΗ. μη δίδασχ a χρη μβ δραν, 
 δκνουντ ανάγκη ΘΗ. τουμον ονκ οκνβϊ κ€αρ, 655 
 ονκ olaff aireiXas ΘΗ. οίδ’ eyco σε μη τινα 
 βνθβνδ" άττα^οντ^ άνδρα ττροί βίαν €μον, 
 
 ΤΓολλαί δ’ άττείλαΐ ττολλα δη ματην €7Γη 
 
 θνμω κατητΓβίλησαν' άλλ ο vov9 όταν 
 
 αυτόν γβνηταί, φρούδα τά7Γ€ίληματα. 66ο 
 
 KeivoLs δ' 'icrcos κ€ΐ δζίν βττβρραχτθη λβγβιν 
 
 της σης αγωγής^ οίδ φανησβταί 
 
 μακρον το δβνρο Tre'Aayos* οι;δε ττλωσίμον. 
 
 651. “You would not gain more 
 (nepa) by my oath than by my pro¬ 
 mise (λόγω).” On the verb φίρ^ιν 
 (active for middle) see Matth. 
 §· 496, 5 · 
 
 653. ηξονσιν avbpes (viz. to carry 
 him to Thebes). 
 
 Ib. ToiaSe, emphatic; viz. the 
 Chorus, etrrat μίΚον = μ€\ησ€ΐ. Cf. 
 infr. 1586. avdpfi, Herm. \Vund. 
 Dind. avbpes, Br. Gaisf. 
 
 654. opa μ€ 'Κξίπων, SC. μη cKelvoi 
 άπάξουσιν. Both. 
 
 655. oKvovvr ανάγκη, “ a man in 
 
 terror must” (repeat his entreaties, 
 he means to say, but the bold heart 
 of Theseus does not allow him to 
 complete his sentence). Schol. ov 
 ν(μζσητόν μοι, el ύττό deovs τα 
 
 αυτα cvvexcos λόγω* τον φοβονμ€νον 
 yap ανάγκη ταντά 'Keyeiv. 
 
 657* ττρό? βίαν (μον, against my 
 loill. Aj. 1327. προς βίαν θάφ€ίν epov. 
 
 658. τΓολλαι δ’ άπ€ί\αί. As in a 
 former verse (63), ξννουσία, it was 
 seen, might from Sophoclean prac¬ 
 tice be considered the same as σνν- 
 ναίοντ€ς, so here we have the assur¬ 
 
 ance of the Scholiast that αττβ^λαι is 
 equivalent to άπeiλovvτeς. (Minas 
 pro hominibus minantibus nomi- 
 nasse poetam animadvertit scholi- 
 asta. Dind.) On this frequent use 
 of abstract for concrete nouns by 
 Sophocles we shall dwell more 
 largely in a future play. 
 
 659. θνμω, passionately. Cf. nos 
 in CEd. T. 1526. 
 
 661. κeivoLς (Thebanis sc.), em¬ 
 phatic. ίσως, profecto, Reis, rather, 
 it may he, with an ironical sneer. 
 Hermann observes, that Kelvois is to 
 be construed both with eneppioady 
 and φανησ€ται. 
 
 Ib. βπψρωννΰμι (ρώνννμί), aor. I. 
 pass, eneppcaaey Xeyeiv, man ermuthigt^ 
 erdreistet sich, zu sagen. Pass. Neue 
 refers for the verb to Krueger Comm. 
 Thucyd. p. 271. Translate with 
 Hermann: ^‘if their confidence should 
 increase to such an extent, as that 
 they should threaten heavily about 
 bringing you back.” 
 
 662. της σης αγωγής. Supply nepi. 
 Schol. 
 
 663. πέλαγος, voyage ior journey; 
 
 F 4 
 
72 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 θαρσ€Ϊν μίν ουν βγωγβ^ Koivev της βμης 
 γνώμης^ Ιπαίνώ, Φοίβος el ττροΰπβμλίτβ σ€' 665 
 
 όμως Se κάμοϋ μη τταρόντος οΙ& on 
 τουμον φνλάζβί σ ονομα μη Tvaa^eiv κακώς, 
 χο. evLTHTOv, ^€1/6^ τοχτΒβ γωρας (ττροψ, λ · 
 
 a natural metonymy in the language 
 of so nautical a people as the Athe¬ 
 nians. Both illustrates by Athenseus 
 I. 13. Trach. 118. ^sch. Prom. 
 748. Eur. Hipp. 817. Suppl. 826. 
 
 Ib. ovbe πΧώσιμον. ScHOL. : αδίά- 
 βατον' δβδοικασι yap ημάς. 
 
 664-5. Kavev της (μης γνώμης, ne 
 de me dicam. Ell. etiam si ego non 
 spondeam tibi auxilium. Herm. etiam 
 sine sententia sive auctoritate mea. 
 WuND. γνώμη, vov ^tάθ€σις. Hesvch. 
 
 665. προπ€μπ€ΐν, “proprie mif/ere, 
 adsignificatur tamen tutela. CEd. Col. 
 665. Ell.” Neue refers tov. 1667 
 of this play. El. 1155. 1158. Phil. 
 105. 1205. See also Wund. ad 
 Antig. 1267. Phil. 105. Translate: 
 “ if you have come hither under the 
 protection of Phoebus.” 
 
 666. On όμως with participle, see 
 Neue ad Aj. 15, Matth. §. 566. 
 
 668. The following ode is one of 
 those productions of ancient tragedy, 
 which leave an impression on young 
 minds not likely to be eradicated by 
 the more just but homelier lessons 
 of Grecian comedy. How could it 
 be otherwise ? All that most easily 
 catches youthful imaginations is in 
 it : fruits, flowers, trees ; shady 
 groves, impervious to wind or sun; 
 sparkling and meandering streams ; 
 the descant of the nightingale; the 
 narcissus, the golden crocus, and, 
 above all, that noblest of animals 
 assigned to the use of man, and 
 a delight in which is among the 
 proverbial characteristics of youth. 
 And the deities that haunt about 
 this spot partake of its generally 
 
 attractive character ; the god of 
 wine, the Muses, Aphrodite with 
 golden reins in her hand, and 
 consequently with a car of the 
 same refulgent metal at her com¬ 
 mand. But where was the spot 
 itself, into which so many delights 
 were congregated ? Preceding com¬ 
 mentators, as if it were not glory 
 enough for Colonos to haΛ’^e given 
 birth to Sophocles, insist upon crowd¬ 
 ing them all into that little deme. 
 Whether this has been done cor¬ 
 rectly, must be the subject of several 
 succeeding notes. The predominant 
 metre of the first strophe (better 
 arranged by Wunder than by Din- 
 dorf) is Glyconean. 
 
 Ib. χώρας. Attica generally, but 
 more particularly that noble plain, 
 watered by the Cephisus, in which 
 Athens and Colonos stood. 
 
 Ib. €νιππος, rich or plentiful in 
 horses. Ellendt. Ευ in compo¬ 
 sition will bear two other significa¬ 
 tions : famous for horses (cf. Pind. 
 Nem. V. 16. 01. I. 36. Pyth. I. 79. 
 154. II. 108. IV. 491.), or, skilled 
 in the management of horses (01. 
 III. 69.); but the first is, no doubt, 
 its proper meaning here. On the 
 subject of Attic horses, the reader 
 is referred to Boeckh’s Economy of 
 Athens (I. §. 14.) : and if, from 
 what he sees there, he should be led 
 to infer, that βνιππος was a bold 
 term, even when applied to the Attic 
 plain, he will doubtless consider it 
 as something more than a poetical 
 exaggeration when said of a little 
 deme like Colonos. The persons 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 73 
 
 ίκου τα κρατιστα yds βπαυλα, 
 
 τοί' άργητα Κολωϊ/ό*/* 670 
 
 ά λίγβια μίνύρβταί 
 
 θαμίζουσα μάλίστ αηδών 
 
 χλωραΪ9 νπο βάσσαις, 
 
 τον οΙνώτΓ άν 4 χουσα κισσόν 
 
 living there might be excellent bit 
 and bridle makers (infr. 715.)» b'lt 
 that they bred horses to any great 
 extent, is matter for much doubt. 
 
 669. yas. How we are frequently 
 to deal with such words as yay, 
 χθορος, βροτών, άντρων, ανθρώπων, in 
 the Sophoclean writings, has been 
 already more than once stated. They 
 are words “ ex abundantia,” for 
 which we are to give the best equi¬ 
 valent we can; and therefore while 
 readily admitting Colonos to be 
 
 preeminently the best {yas τα κρά- 
 τιστα) location or habitation (βτταυλα) 
 on the Attic plain (χώρας) ” we still 
 feel bound not to allow that deme to 
 appropriate to itself what belongs to 
 the plain generally. On the word 
 yaς as a redundancy in Sophocles, 
 cf. infr. 1662. See also Ellendt I. 
 p. 362. Wunder adAntig. 924. and 
 Bemhardy’s Wissent. Synt. p. 51. 
 Elmsley, I believe, first gave the 
 true interpretation of the passage. 
 
 Ib. €παν\ος (ανλη), properly, a stall 
 for cattle. Pass, τά enavXa, solum 
 quod habitatur. Herm. 
 
 670. Κολωνον, in strict meaning, 
 
 a hill, the same as κολώνη. (h. 
 Horn. Cer. 273. 299. Hes. fr. XIX. 
 I.) For further information on the 
 deme of that name, besides what has 
 already been said in the prefatory 
 remarks, the reader may consult 
 Lessing’s Life of Sophocles, pp. 15. 
 17* Reisig's Enarr. 3. 4. 27—9. 
 
 98. 139. Kruse’s Hellas H. 288 
 sq. 
 
 Ib. apyrjra. ScHOL. : \€vκόycωv. 
 Allusion to the gravelly and chalky 
 nature of that part of the Attic soil, 
 and which so well fitted it for the 
 growth of the olive. (Aptissimum 
 vero genus terrse est oleis, cui glarea 
 subest, si superposita creta sabulo 
 admixta est, Columel. V. 8.) Cf. 
 infr. 694-702. and see also Thudich. 
 I. 283. Pindar (Pyth. IV. 13.) terms 
 the island Thera, evapparov πολιν iv 
 apyaevTi μαστώ. 
 
 Ib. €νθα, there. Cf. infr. 1054. 
 The general view here taken of the 
 contents of this ode, (whether right 
 or wrong, is of course left to the 
 judgment of the reader,) obliges me 
 to throw the next seven verses into 
 a parenthesis, a, Pors. Herm. 
 Seidl. Gaisf. Wund. Hind. evOa libri. 
 
 671. ^lyeia. Suavi €t canora voce 
 prceditus. Ell. 
 
 Ib. μιννρομαι — μινυρίζω, I mourn 
 with a low, gentle voice. II. V. 889. 
 Od. IV. 719. Pass. 
 
 673. χΧωραΊς νπο βάσσαις z=z ^ω^ 
 ραΐς €v βάσσαις, in the green vallies. 
 Pind. 01 . HI. 39. ev βάσσαις Κρονίου 
 ΠίΚοπος. “ νπο pro iv dictum respectu 
 collium, quibus convalles subjacent.” 
 Erf. 
 
 674. οιι/ώπα, (CEd. T. 211,) Pliny 
 (XVI. 34.) mentions three kinds of 
 ivy; the white, the helix, and the 
 dark, with a purple flower. The 
 latter is here meant. See a learned 
 note by Thudichum on the subject, 
 I. 297. 
 
74 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Kcu ταν αβατον θβοΰ 675 
 
 φνλλάδα μυρίόκαρτΓον ανηΚιον 
 άνηνβμόν re τνάντων 
 χβίμωΐ'ων') ίν 6 βακγιώτα^ 
 
 Ib. άνίχονσα, having over or above 
 it. ScHOL. VTTfp iavrrjv Αχούσα το 
 φντόν. The commentators, dissatis¬ 
 fied with this sense, vary in their 
 explanations. Musgrave: honorans, 
 sive colens; i. e. frequenlans, habi- 
 tans. Reisig. : tenens superiorem 
 partem. Herm. : sustinere ac tueri. 
 Ell. : folia sibi imposita sustinentes, 
 inde occultata· eis et latentes. It is 
 beyond the limits of this work to 
 enter into the reasoning on which 
 these explanations are founded. From 
 Par. B. Vat. τον οίνωπαν €χονσα, it 
 has been proposed to read τον οίνω- 
 τΓον Ιίχονσα, where ^χονσα might be 
 rendered, possessing, inhabiting, in 
 the same high poetic sense, as gods 
 are said exeti^, to possess such 
 and such a place. On the word 
 avexet in Find. Pyth. II. 164. see 
 Dissen ; also Wunder ad Aj. 209. 
 Dindorf proposes to read : τον οίνωπα 
 vepovai κισσόν. 
 
 675. θζοΰ. All the commentators 
 agree in understanding Bacchus to 
 be here meant. I can only say that 
 Pausanias (I. 30. 4.) speaks of an 
 άλσος of Poseidon at Colonos, but 
 ascribes none, that I am aware of, 
 to Bacchus. I transcribe the pas¬ 
 sage : SeiKVVTai be κα\ χώρος καλού- 
 μ€νος Κολωνος ΐππιος, evOa της 'Αττικής 
 πρώτον eXOelv λ€γονσιν Olbinoba...Xe- 
 Ύονσι δ' ονν και βωμόν Ώοσ€ΐδώνος 
 Τππίου, καΐ 'Αθήνας ^Ιππίας' ηρωον δε 
 Ιΐ€ΐριθον καί Θησέως, ΟΙδίποδός τε καΙ 
 * Αδραστον, το δε άλσος τον ΙΙοσειδώνος 
 καΧ τον ναόν ενεπρησεν ^Αντίγονος εσβα^ 
 λών. (Att. I. 30. 4·) Cf. infr. 888. 
 
 1073. 1158.1285. 
 
 676. φνλλάδα, i. e. the άλσος or 
 
 τε'μενος just mentioned. Cf. Trach. 
 754. ένθα πατρωω Δα βωμονς ορίζει 
 τεμενίαν τε φνλλάδα. Antig. 4^9* 
 πάσαν αϊκίζων φύβην | νλης πεδιάδας, 
 άνεχονσα, to be understood from the 
 former verse. Herm.: Metre : te- 
 tram. dact. 
 
 Ib. μνριόκαρπον, fecundissimuni. 
 Ell. ; who adds: Elmsley under¬ 
 stood the epithet to apply to the 
 laurel: Hermann correctly under¬ 
 stands, of a grove thickly planted 
 with various trees: “ nec afficitur 
 illud quidem eo quod πάγκαρπος 
 δάφνη dicitur GEd. R. 83.” 
 
 Ib. άνηλιον, safe from the beams 
 of the sun, on account of the thick¬ 
 ness of the umbrage. Pindar, de¬ 
 scribing the reverse (Ol. III. 41.), 
 says, τοντων (δενδρεων SC.) εδοζεν 
 γνμνός αντω κάπος όζείαις νπακονεμεν 
 ανγαΧς άλίον. 
 
 6 7 7“· 8. άνηνεμον — χειμώνων, safe 
 from storms of every kind, unbuffeted 
 by wind or storm. The construction 
 has been explained in a former play. 
 See also Kuhn. §. 513. Anm. 3. infr. 
 786. 865. The commentators com¬ 
 pare Trach. 146 sq. Od. V. 477. It 
 seems not improbable to me, that 
 Sophocles had in his eye a pas¬ 
 sage in the Eumenides of JEschylus 
 865 sq. 
 
 678. Xva. As ένθα (v. 760.) is, I 
 think, to be referred to Colonos, so 
 Iva appears to me to belong to the 
 word χώρας. On paper, and to the 
 eye, this particle undoubtedly ap¬ 
 pears at a very awkward distance 
 from the word with which I propose 
 to connect it; but Greek theatrical 
 ideas, it must be remembered, did 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩ1. 
 
 75 
 
 ael ^ίόνυσο9 €μβατ€ύ€ί 
 
 Oecus άμφίΤΓολώι^ τιθηναί^. 68ο 
 
 θάλλβί δ’ ουρανίαν νττ άχΐ'α^ ^ντ. λ . 
 
 6 καΧλίβοτρν^ κατ ήμαρ άβί 
 νάρκισσος^ μβγάλαιν θβαΐν 
 
 not travel on demy and pica, but on 
 the human voice, which, knowing its 
 heavy responsibilities, took care to 
 be provided accordingly. Where 
 velocity was required, it could travel 
 with unlimited' ΐϊϊ speed ; where an 
 emphatic word required to be marked, 
 that word presently stood forth a 
 head and shoulders above its peers. 
 Through the most intricate sentence 
 it wound its way, dropping lights 
 and shadows just as the component 
 parts required; and many a mys¬ 
 tery of diction, which cost modern 
 eyes so much diificulty, Greek ears, 
 through the nice inflexion of the 
 actor’s voice, admitted at once* with¬ 
 out any difficulty at all. What is 
 the difficulty in the present case, 
 compared with a passage in the Aga¬ 
 memnon, where the apodosis does 
 not occur till twenty lines after the 
 protasis? (177-198.) 
 
 Ib. βακχιώτης, hacchator. Ell., 
 whose remarks on the word deserve 
 attention throughout. 
 
 679. €μβατ€ν€ίν {βατ^ν^ιν). Strictly, 
 when used of gods, says Passow, 
 this word answers to the άμφιβαίναν 
 of Homer. Ellendt observes : “ de 
 locis sacris Deo et comitibus invi- 
 sendis.” 
 
 680. θζίαις — τιθψαις, i.e.Nymphis. 
 Eurip. Cycl. 4. ’Ω Βρόμιά — ΐ^νμφας 
 ope/af €κ\ίπων ωχον τροφόν^. Hygin. 
 Astron. Poet. IT. 17. Liberum pa- 
 
 trem—ut redderent nutricibus Nym- 
 phis. Musgr. For omission of pre- 
 pos. συν, see Matth. §.405, 2. θίαϊς. 
 Elms. Dind. 
 
 Ib. άμφιπολών, pererrans, Herm. 
 peragrans,versatus circa,O(E- 
 DERL. “ Quse quidem propria verbi 
 significatio est, ita tamen ut Nym- 
 phas circa Bacchum, non hunc circa 
 Nymphas versari oporteat, quippe 
 majorem Deum.” Ell. Cf. Pind. 
 Pyth. IV. 158. 272. with the ob- 
 seiwations of Passow and Dissen. 
 See also Klausen’s Theol. ^sch. 
 P·125. ^ ^ 
 
 681. αχνας. ScHOL. της δροσον. 
 for νπο, cf. sup. 391. 
 
 6S 2 . ' καλλίβοτρυς schon traubig, 
 m beautiful clusters. Pass. 
 
 Ib. κατ ημαρ del, not one day, but 
 every day. On this pleonasm, see 
 Person ad Eur. Phoen. 1422. and 
 Wund. ad Phil. 780. 
 
 683. νάρκισσος. So named from 
 its narcotic powers (Plin. XXL 75. 
 Plut. Symp. III. i. Clem. Alex. 78. 
 27. Eustath. ad II. I. 206.) Pausan. 
 IX. 31.6. νάρκισσον δί άνθος η γη κα'ι 
 τΐρότίρον €φιΐ€ν (^€μοι δοκ^ιν'), ft τοις 
 ΙΙάμφω τ€κμαίρ€σθαι χρη τι ημάς εττβσι. 
 γ€γονως yap ττοΧλοΙς πρότ€ρον ίτεσιν, η 
 Νάρκισσος 6 θξσττκνς, κόρην την Αη- 
 μητρός φησιν άρπασθηναι παίζονσαν και 
 άνθη σνΧλ€γονσαν' άρττασθάσαν δβ ονκ 
 ίοις άττατηθβΊσαν, αλλά ναρκισσοις. The 
 holy flowers, holy plants, &c., of 
 
 n As in the άπν^υστί verses, for instance, which terminate a comic parabasis, and in 
 words of such enormous length as that which occurs at the close of the Lcclesiazusae of 
 Aristophanes. 
 
76 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 άρχαΐον στ€φάρωμ\ ο re 
 
 χρυσαυγής κρόκος* ovS ovttvol 685 
 
 κρηναί μίρύθουσιν 
 
 Υ^ηφίσου νομά^€ς ρβόθρων, 
 
 αΛΛ aiev βττ ηματί 
 
 ώκυτόκος ττβδίωι^ ίτηνίσσβται 
 
 antiquity, form rather a subject for 
 separate consideration than a pass¬ 
 ing note. 
 
 Ib. μ€γά\αιν 6caiv. Demeter and 
 Kora. Pausan.VIII. 31. i to δε ere- 
 
 pov. ..6ea)V Upov των Μεγάλωι/· at δε 
 ίΐσιν αί Μεγάλαί θ(αϊ Αημητηρ και 
 Κόρη. Cf. I. Η. Voss, ad Hymn. 
 Cereris, p. 8. 
 
 684. άρχαΐον. ScHOL. : ort πρ\ν 
 η τον Πλούτωι^α αυτήν αρττάσαι, τούτω 
 €Τ(ρπ€ΤΟ. 
 
 685. κρόκος. It appears from the 
 Scholiast, that in his Niobe also 
 Sophocles spoke of this flower, as 
 sacred to Demeter. On holy flowers, 
 holy fish, &c., much information will 
 be found in Creuzer’s Symbol. 
 
 Ib. χρυσαυγής (αύγη), glittering like 
 gold. Aristoph. Av. 1710. rw^er, vel, 
 luteus. Reis. 
 
 685—7· αϋπνοι — ρ^βθρων. The 
 commentators on Sophocles seem 
 shy of coming to close quarters with 
 this difficult sentence. I under¬ 
 stand generally: ούδ’ αυττνοι κρηναι 
 (nor do sleepless fountains) Κηφι¬ 
 σού n ρζζθρων {for supplying the 
 Cephisian streams'), μινύθουσι (dry 
 up, or fail), νομάδας (being scat¬ 
 tered here and there, breaking out 
 first in one place and then in an¬ 
 other, like nomad tribes, whether 
 of men or cattle). Dindorf adopts 
 Brunck’s interpretation of this last 
 word : rivos agrum pererrantes. 
 
 686. μινυθίΐν, to be diminished, to 
 
 dry up. Hes. Op. 242. 323. 407. 
 On the transitive and intransitive 
 uses of this verb, see Merrick ap. 
 Wernick adTryphiod. p. 48. 
 
 687. Κηφισού. The reader, who 
 casts his eye on Knise’s Atlas, 
 containing Attica and the Megarid, 
 will find not less than three rivers of 
 this name : the river here men¬ 
 tioned, which, rising in mount 
 Fames, flowed through the great 
 Attic plain, and discharged itself into 
 the sea near Phalerum; a branch of 
 the same river, bearing the same 
 name, and apparently springing from 
 the Pentelicus; and a Cephisus, which 
 rising near Cithseron, passed through 
 the Eleusinian plain, and emptied it¬ 
 self into the Eleusinian gulf. This 
 will account why, while Sophocles 
 speaks of a Cephisus, whose springs 
 never failed, other writers speak of 
 a Cephisus, which in summer-time 
 was quite dried up. Whether we 
 are to write Cephisus or Cephissus, 
 see Ellendt in voc. For an account 
 of the river itself, see Kruse’s Hellas 
 II. 27. 
 
 688. alev επ’ ή μάτι, everlastingly 
 from day to day. Donn. die post 
 diem. Xen. Hist. Grsec. IV. 4. 9. 
 ημέρα iiii τη νυκτΧ ταύτη. Reis. 
 
 689. ώκυτόκος {τίκτωί), bearing 
 easily and quickly, i. e. fecundating. 
 Cf. Herodot. IV. 35. πεδιωι/ to he 
 joined with στερι/ού;^ου χθονος (v. 691). 
 For a refutation of ώκύτοκος, as 
 
 » Bernhardy (p. 173·) makes μέθρων a genitive depending on νομα 8 ( 5 . 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 77 
 
 άκηράτω ζυν ομβρω 690 
 
 στ 6 ρρον)(ον ^θονό^' ov^e ΉΙ,ονσαν 
 χοροί VLV άπβστύγησαν, ovd* ά 
 χρυσάνίο^ * Αφροδίτα. 
 
 eaTLV S οΐον Ιγω yas 'Ασίας ονκ εττακονω, α-τροφ, 0 , 
 
 adopted by Hermann and Wunder, 
 see Ellendt. ώκντοκος, Dind. in text. 
 wKVTOKos in Annot. 
 
 Ib. (πινίσσ^ται {accedit, superfun- 
 ditur Ell.), sc. irehiav arepv. χθονός. 
 Reisig imitates the beautiful dactylic 
 flow of the verse by translating, 
 rieselt dahin, die Ge^lde bewdssernd. 
 
 690. άκηρατος (a, Kepavvvpn), pure.^ 
 unpolluted. 
 
 691. στ€ρνονχος (arepvov, ?χω). 
 The ancients were fond of comparing 
 earthly phaenomena with those of the 
 human body. Large and broad 
 plains were assimilated to the chest, 
 narrower places to the neck. Hes. 
 Theog. 117. TaV fvpvarepvos. Find. 
 Pyth. IV. 45. νώτων vnep yaias. 
 Isthm. I. 10. rav aXiepKca 'ίσθμον 
 d€ipab\ χθονος nearly redundant. 
 
 691—2. Μούσαν χοροί. “ Elmsleius 
 adscripsit Pausan. I. 30. eWt be Μου¬ 
 σών re βωμοί, κα\ exepos Έρμον,και evbov 
 'Αθηνάί.” WuND. But Pausanias is 
 there speaking of the Academy, not 
 of Colonos. A much more correct 
 reference, I believe, would be to the 
 kindred strain in the Medea of Eu¬ 
 ripides (820 sq.), and to consider 
 the poet’s Dionysus, Muses, and 
 Aphrodite, as general rather than 
 local divinities, belonging to Attica 
 rather than Colonos, deities never to 
 be so readily celebrated as during 
 the genial Dionysian festivals, at 
 which time alone dramatic repre¬ 
 sentations took place. Klausen, still 
 more liberal of divinities for Colonos, 
 observes (Theol. .^sch. 75 ·)» “P^trii 
 Dii Coloni, Bacchus, Musse, Venus, 
 
 Jupiter, Minerva, Neptunus.” 
 
 692. viv. ScHOL.: rr)y ^Αττικήν. 
 The commentators generally cling to 
 Colonos : “ Colonum maxime intel- 
 lige.” WuND. Dindorf much better: 
 “ Colonum et omnino terram At- 
 ticam.” 
 
 Ib. ουδ’ a, Wund. Dind. ovb' av, 
 Gaisf. ovbe μαν, Herm. Kiihn. §. 696. 
 3, b. Hart. H. 381. 
 
 693. Άφpobίτa. Klausen, in his 
 ^schylean Theology, says boldly, 
 Prospicit (Venus sc.) Colono. Thu- 
 dichum, evidently taken by surprise 
 at the goddess’s appearance here,— 
 “ since Pausanias refers to no Aphro¬ 
 dite, either in the Academy or at Co¬ 
 lonos,”—supposes that one was to be 
 found in the latter place in the time 
 of Sophocles. “ The goddess,” con¬ 
 tinues the learned writer, had golden 
 reins (Soph. Aj. 834. cf. Lobeck), 
 and, without doubt, horses, not spar¬ 
 rows, as Sappho gives her.” 
 
 Ib. χρνσάνιοί {r)via), having golden 
 reins. This epithet is ascribed to 
 Ares (Od. VIH. 285.), to Artemis 
 (II. VI. 205.), and to Pluto by Pindar 
 (Pausan. IX. 23, 2). The reins put 
 into the hands of Helios (Aj. 847.) 
 are characterised as χρνσόνωτοι, hav¬ 
 ing golden buckles. For a note, pro¬ 
 fuse as usual of erudition, on the 
 subject, see Lobeck’s Ajax, p. 372. 
 2nd edit. 
 
 694. yas 'Aaias, here put for the 
 east, as Peloponnesus is in the next 
 verse put for the west. (Thudichum 
 (I. 299.) understands the term in 
 the narrower sense of Asia Minor.) 
 
78 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ονδ* eV τά μβγάλα /\ωρίδί νάσω Πβλοττο? ττώττοτβ 
 βλαστόν 695 
 
 φυτβυμ άχβίρωτον αντόττοίον, 
 βγχβων φόβημα δαΐων, 
 
 ο ταδβ θάλλει μέγιστα χώρα, ηοο 
 
 γλαύκας τταίδοτρόφον φνλλον ελαίας' 
 
 ^schyl. (Eum. 673·) seems to put 
 Scythia and Peloponnesus in a simi¬ 
 lar manner for north and south. For 
 case, Neue·refers to El. 900. Matth. 
 377,1. The prevalent metre through¬ 
 out the second strophe : choriambics 
 with base. 
 
 695. Δωριδι νάσω Πβλοποί. Thu- 
 cyd. I. I 2. Αωριης — όγ8οηκοστω erec 
 (^pcTo. Τλιου άλωσιν) ξνν 'Ηρακλβίδαι? 
 ΤΙί'Κοττόννησον εσχον. 
 
 698. φυτ€νμα. Pindar, speaking 
 of the olive-tree, as introduced at 
 Olympia by Hercules (who derived 
 it from the Hyperboreans), calls it 
 (f)vrevpa ξυνον άνθρωποα στζφανόν τ 
 aperav. ΟΙ. III. 34 · The whole ode 
 should be read in illustration of this 
 part of the chorus. Consult also 
 Pausan. I. 30, 2. Herodot. V. 82. 
 Metre : two penthim. iamb. 
 
 lb. άχζίρωτον (χ^αρόω), nicht aus- 
 zurotten, not to he rooted up. Pass. 
 nativus Ell. Pollux II. §. 154., Σο¬ 
 φοκλή? de eiTrev άχ^ίρωτον το άχίΐ~ 
 ρονργητον : non rnanu satum, Reis. 
 Dindorf, after observing that άχ^ί- 
 ρωτον can have but one meaning, 
 that of insuperahile, invincihile, pre¬ 
 fers the reading of La. and other 
 MSS. viz., άχΐίρητον. 
 
 Ib. αντόποιον, self-created. The 
 two adjectives in conjunction appear 
 to me to imply : not to he rooted up, 
 because it would replant itself. 
 
 699. The Scholiast, adverting to 
 the curse which the Athenians laid 
 upon friend or foe, who, in an in¬ 
 vasion of Attica, should cut down 
 
 the sacred olives, adds, bC o AaKebai- 
 μόνιοι την "Κοιπην γην δτ]οννΤ€ς (Thu- 
 Cyd. II. 12.) της μβν Ύ€τραπό\€ως 
 άπ^σχοντο δίά τους ‘ϋρακΧίίδας' των 
 be μορίων, bici τάς άράς. 
 
 Ib. εγχίων φόβημα. Cf. Lowth 
 ad Isaiah VIII. 12. Metre: dim. 
 iamb. 
 
 700. 
 
 Yet are thy skies as blue, thy crags 
 as wild; 
 
 Sweet are thy groves, and verdant 
 are thy fields. 
 
 Thine olive ripe, as when Minerva 
 smiled. 
 
 And still his honied wealth Hy- 
 mettus yields. 
 
 Childe Harold, c. 2. st. 87. 
 In the Here. Furens of Euripides, 
 Theseus is termed, ω τον ΐΧαιοφόρον 
 οχθον €χων (ν. 1178). 
 
 701 . παώοτρόφος (τρ^φω), Passow, 
 confining himself to the literal mean¬ 
 ing of the word, translates, child- 
 nourishing, rearing, &c. Reisig ap¬ 
 plies it to the primal olive: “pro- 
 paginem generans, quia ab ea, quae 
 est in Acropoli, pullularunt morise 
 dictae in Academia.” An explication 
 of Hesychius. as well as the quota¬ 
 tion made from Pindar in a pre- 
 cedingnote (698.), (and what thought 
 but Pindar’s would the Pindaric 
 Sophocles more readily connect with 
 the olive ?), entitle us to give a nobler 
 explanation to the word. “ It was 
 the custom,” says that excellent lexi¬ 
 cographer, “when a male child was 
 born in Athens, to place a crown of 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝίΙΙ. 
 
 79 
 
 το' μίν TL 9 οντ€ veap09 ovre γηρ(^ 
 
 σημαίνων άλίώσβί χ^ρΐ ττβρσα^' ο γαρ αϊβν ορών 
 κνκλθ9 
 
 XevaaeL νιν Μ,ορίου Δώί, 7°$ 
 
 χά γΧαυκώτης ^Αθάνα. 
 
 άλλον δ’ OUVOV βχω ματροττόλβι ταδβ κράτιστον, αντ.β'. 
 
 olive before the door; when a fe¬ 
 male, a lock of wool; the respective 
 duties of the two sexes being thus 
 significantly pointed out: the one 
 born to spin and knit, the other to 
 achieve all those martial and intel¬ 
 lectual employments, for excellence 
 in which the olive crown was the 
 reward, as the oil extracted from it 
 was of use in the preparatory labours 
 of the palaestra.” Musgrave compares 
 Eur. Ion. 1433. στέφανον eXaias d/x- 
 φββηκά aot Tore, | ήν πρωτ 'Αβάνας 
 σκόπελος (Ισηνάγκατο. 
 
 702. TiSf be he who he will. t6 
 emphatic. 
 
 Ib. veapbs, ingeniously supposed 
 to mean Xerxes by Reisig, who quotes 
 xEsch. Pers. 779. {Ξάρξης δ’ epos παίς 
 ων veos ν€οφρον€Ϊ) to prove that he 
 was young when he invaded Attica, 
 ovre νεαρός, Libri, Dind. ov νίωρος, 
 Wund. ex conject. {νβωρος as a dis- 
 syll.) ov veos, Herm. 
 
 702—3. γήρα σημαίνων, senex im- 
 perator. Herm. Reisig, with equal 
 ingenuity, refers the expression to 
 Archidamus, shewing from Thucyd. 
 I. 80. {κα\ avTOS ττοΧλών ήδη πολέμων 
 epneipos elpi, ω AaKehaipovioi, και υμών 
 Tovs ev rfj αυτή ήΧικία όρώ), that he 
 was advanced in life at the time of 
 his invasion of Attica. The word 
 σημαίνων, which the commentators 
 fail to notice, is best illustrated from 
 Homer, II. I. 288. πάντ€σσι δ’ άνάσ- 
 aeiv, 1 πάσι δβ σημαΙν€ΐν. 2C)^. αλΧοισιν 
 δη ταντ emriXXeo, μη yap epoiye | σή- 
 μαιν. 
 
 703. αΚιώσει, (^αΧιονν, irritum red- 
 dere, extmguere) i. q. άφαν^Ί, exitio 
 dabit Ell. The allusion is to the 
 well-known story told in Herodot. 
 VHI. 55. χβρι nepaas, ubi manu de- 
 truncaverit. Wund. 
 
 704. κύκΧος, eye. Cf. Klausen’s 
 Theol. p. 83. 
 
 Ib. alev ορών, Herm. Dind. Gaisf. 
 elaaiev (vel els alev). La. Lb. V. 
 Wund. (who supposes some cor¬ 
 ruption in the antistrophic verse). 
 ales Pors. 
 
 705. Xevaaei viv. Cf. infr. 869· 
 1370. 1453. El. 175. Neue. 
 
 Ib. The Zeus Morius was the in¬ 
 spector and guardian of the μόριαι, 
 or sacred olives. The trees them¬ 
 selves are said to have been so 
 named from the fate (μόρος) which 
 H alirrhotius, son of Neptune, brought 
 upon himself. Enraged at seeing 
 his father surpassed by Minerva in 
 her production of the olive, the 
 young man attempted to cut it down, 
 but the axe fell upon himself, and 
 causing his death (μόρος), gave an¬ 
 other name to the tree itself. On 
 the μόριαι, or sacred olives, see Thu- 
 dich. I. 300. 
 
 706. Metre : glycon. cat. or Phe- 
 recratean. 
 
 707. ματροπόΧ€ΐ. Ellendt excel¬ 
 lently explains : “ de terra Attica, 
 propter antiquitatem et incolentes 
 αύτό)^θονας dictum.” Cf. infr. 1480- 
 See also Dissen ad Pind. Nem. V. 
 p. 413. On the case, see Bern- 
 hardy, p. 79. 
 
80 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 8ώρον τού μεγάλου δαίμορο^, direLV^ * * αϋγτημα μ€- 
 γιστορ, 
 
 evLTnrop, βνττωλορ, ευθάΧασσον. η 11 
 
 ώ Έαί Κρόνον, συ γάρ vlv els’ 
 
 / 5>> Τ V » V /· -ΓΤ 5» ' 
 
 TOO eiaas ανχημ, αναζ ίίοσαοαν, 
 ίτητοίσίρ τον άκβστηρα χαλινόν 
 
 ττρώταίσί raiaSe κτίσας ayvials* 7*5 
 
 709. του μ€γά\ου Βαίμορος, ί. e. 
 Poseidon. 
 
 709— 1 1· ^ωρορ (ϋιππον. On this 
 conjunction of words, see IMatth. 
 §. 446. 3, c. Wunder refers its mean¬ 
 ing to excellence in management of 
 horses, and fitting them for war. By 
 €νπωλον he understands, the excel¬ 
 lence of the breed. It may be observed, 
 that when the ancients use the word 
 ίππος, it is generally in reference to 
 the 7 uare, not to the horse. (See 
 inter alia Find. OL I. 65. V. 50. 
 VI. 21. Pyth. II. 15. IV. 30. ^Esch. 
 S. c. Th. 457. Soph. Electr. 703-5.) 
 I translate, therefore, bSapov ζνιππον, 
 ΐϋπωΧον, the gift of producing noble 
 mares and colts. (Loud applause 
 from the equestrian order.) For 
 various emendations proposed by 
 commentators, to get rid of the ap¬ 
 parent tautology, {ΐϋμωΧον, Musgr. 
 €νπλουτον, Reis. &c.), see Hermann. 
 Two instances, however, in conjunc¬ 
 tion with the explanation above 
 given, shew that no tautology is in¬ 
 volved in the expression. Simmias 
 ap. Hepheest. p. 75. ed. Gaisf. σο\ pep 
 €νιππος, €ϋπωΧος, €χ€σπα\ος | δώκ€Ρ 
 αΙχμαρ 'ΕρνάΧίος evσκoπop elpai. Theoc. 
 II. 48· τωδ’ €π\ πάσαι και πώΧοι μαί- 
 νορται άρ* a>pea κα\ θοαΧ ίπποι. 
 
 Ib. 8ωρορ €νθάΧασσορ, the gift of 
 being comm odiously situated on the 
 sea, or, the gift of being favoured by 
 the sea. This interpretation (cf. 
 Passow in voc. €υθάΧασσορ^ is sub¬ 
 
 mitted to the reader in lieu of that 
 given by Reisig, Wunder, Thudi- 
 chum, and Ellendt (the latter trans¬ 
 lating nobile maris donum), who 
 refer the verse to the gifts of Nep¬ 
 tune when contending with Minerva, 
 in which contention the former is 
 said to have first produced the ^ 6 ά- 
 Χασσα ^Ερ€χθηΧς in the acropolis, and 
 then a horse. See Herodot. VIII. 
 55. Apollodor. III. 14. Bentley ad 
 Hor. Carm. i. 7. (Shouts of ap¬ 
 plause from the nautic multitude.) 
 Brunck and Dindorf agree in con¬ 
 sidering βνιππορ, €ϋπωΧορ, €ύθάΧασσορ, 
 as feminine adjectives to be con¬ 
 strued : ματρόποΧίρ €χω 0ΐπ€'ίρ €νιππορ, 
 &C. 
 
 712. ω παι Κρόρον (i. e. Poseidon). 
 Cf. infr. T073. On the vocative, 
 see BernhardV, p. 74. 
 
 Ib. PIP , SC. ματρόποΧιρ. i. e. Attica. 
 
 713. €ΐσα, aor. 1. of εω {I place, 
 I erect).'’ See Buttmann and Car¬ 
 michael’s “ Irregular Verbs.” 
 
 714. άκ€στηρα (properly, healer, 
 here, improving (see Pass, in voc.), 
 or regulating) χαΧιρόρ. Hermann 
 compares Find. Ol. XHI. 95. φίλ- 
 τρορ ΐππ€ΐορ. Dissen, v. 85. φάρμακορ 
 πραν τβίρωρ άμφΧ yepvi. Add ν. 2 7· of 
 the same ode (which should be con¬ 
 sulted throughout) : τις yap Ιππ€ίοις 
 ip ePTeaip (frenis) perpa {moderamen) 
 €π€θηκ€ ; Pyth. IV. 42. ayKvpop... θοας 
 'Apyovς χαΧιρόρ. 
 
 715* ττρώταισι ταΐαδβ άγνίαις. That 
 
 ο Apparently a salt-water spring. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 81 
 
 ά δ' €νηρ€τμθ5^ βκτταγλ’ άλία X^pcn παραπτομ^να πλάτα 
 θρώσκβί^ των Ικατομττόδων 
 Ι^ηρρδων ακόλουθος · 
 
 ΑΝ. ώ ττλβίστ 67 Γαίνοί 9 €νλογονμ€νον ττίδον^ η ίο 
 
 the streets of Colonos are here 
 meant, is pretty evident, and the 
 poet must have known far better 
 than we can, what divinity the tra¬ 
 ditions of the place considered as 
 the inventor of that curb which 
 brings one of the noblest of the 
 animal creation so completely under 
 our power. It is observable, how¬ 
 ever, that in the Pindaric poems 
 ( 01 . XIII. 94.), it is Pallas who, by 
 the present of a curb, enables Bel- 
 lerophon to mount the fiery Pegasus ; 
 and Creuzer (Symbol. II. 783.) cites 
 Pausanias for the fact, that the in¬ 
 habitants of Barce, in Lybia, pro¬ 
 fessed to have learned from Poseidon 
 the art of educating horses, and from 
 Minerva that of bridling them. But 
 to which ever deity the invention 
 was due, loud shouts from the Colo¬ 
 nials, more particularly such as were 
 of the equestrian order, followed 
 this little compliment to their deme ; 
 the voice of Aristophanes cheering on 
 the young knights who had yet their 
 (intellectual) spurs to win, with— 
 ev, καλώς, ίππικώς’ σύ δ αυτόθίν μοί 
 χαϊρε, vie Σωφίλον” (cf. infr. 1137 )· 
 
 Ib. κτίσας. Neue refers to Trach. 
 898. Blomf. Gloss. Pers. 294. 
 
 716. €νηρ€τμος {epeτμ6ς), ad rerni- 
 gandum aptus. Blomf. Gloss, in 
 Pers. 382. remis bene instructa. 
 WuND. The reader will adapt the 
 explanation to the sense, in which 
 he takes the substantive πλάτα, lite¬ 
 rally, an oar; meton. a ship. 
 
 Ib. ίκπαγΧ, admirably. Cf. An- 
 tig. 1137. ταν eKTTayXa τιμάς. (Wun- 
 der’s ed.) Xen. Hier. ii. 3. This 
 adverbial form, but in a different 
 sense, occurs in Homer. 
 
 Ib. παραπτομβνα (παράπτω, άπτω), 
 held fast, grasped. So Pass., who 
 understands πλάτα in the literal 
 sense. Wunder, who understands 
 πλάτα as a ship, translates : prceter- 
 vehitur (quod litora legebant). 
 
 Ib. πλάτα. ScHOL. κώπη. 
 
 716- 17. άλία 6ρώσκ€ΐ. bounds in 
 
 the sea. Hesych. : θρώσκ€ΐ' πη^ψ 
 άφάλλ€ται' κολνμβα. Aj. 357 * · · 
 
 ίλίσσων πλάταν. (Shouts from the 
 nautic multitude.) 
 
 717 — 18 . τών €κατομπό8ων Τ>ίηρη8ων. 
 Pindar, in his eighth Nemean Ode, 
 proposing to erect a lofty pillar in 
 honour of a certain family and phra- 
 tria, says, in a very singular way, 
 that he does it “on account of 
 twice two glorious feetin other 
 Avords, on account of two victorious 
 persons belonging to that family; 
 viz. Dinis and Megas. Can we 
 doubt that Sophocles, with his Pin¬ 
 daric propensities, has here desig¬ 
 nated the fifty daughters of Nereus 
 (cf. Hes. Theog. 240 sq. Kl. Theol. 
 p. 139. Creuz. Symb. II. 432. Thu- 
 dich. 302.) by a similar mode of 
 speaking ? Cf. Dissen’s Comment, 
 pp. 480. 608. Hermann under¬ 
 stands the word in the sense of 
 multipedes, Doederlein in that of 
 swiftness: “ centum quasi pedibus 
 properantes, ut eKaToyxeip vires ac 
 robur Briarei indicat.” For Bern- 
 hardy’s opinion, see Wissen. Synt. 
 
 P· 57 · 
 
 719. ακόλουθος, gl. Vict., ομοιος. 
 Deed., την αυτήν KeXevBov Αχούσα. 
 (Shouts of the nautic multitude 
 repeated.) 
 
 720. π^δοϊ/. infr. 736. ro Y.abyelaiv 
 π€0ον. Would a word of so large 
 
 G 
 
82 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 νυν σοί τα λαμττρα ταντα δβΐ (paiveiv βττη. 
 
 ΟΙ. τί δ* ίστιν, ώ τταξ καινόν ; ΑΝ. άσσον ί'ρ'χβται 
 Κρ ίων οδ’ 7]piv οΰκ avev ττομττων, Trarep. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ φίλτατοι γβροντβ^, ίζ υμών ίμο\ 
 
 φαίνοιτ αν ηδη τβρμα της σωτηρίας, 7^5 
 
 ΧΟ. θάρσβι, τταρβσταί. και yap ά γβρων κνρώ, 
 το τησδβ χωράς ον γβγηρακβ σθβνος, 
 
 ΚΡΕΩΝ. 
 
 άνδρβς χθονός τησδ* βνγβνβΐς οίκητορες, 
 
 όρώ TLV υμάς ομμάτων βίληφότας 
 
 φόβον νβωρη της βμης βπβισόδου, 
 
 όν μητ OKveiTe, μητ άφητ βττος κακόν. 
 
 ηκω γάρ ούχ ώς δράν τι βουληθβίς, βττβΐ 
 
 γβρων μόν βίμι, ττρος ττόλιν δ’ Ιττίσταμαι 
 
 σθίνουσαν ηκων, e? τιν Έλλαδθ5'5 μίγα.' 
 
 άλλ’ άνδρα τόνδβ τηλικόνδ* άττβστάλην 735 
 
 extent be applied to a small deme 
 like Colonos ? On π^βίστα {valde), 
 see Wunder ad Phil. 252. 
 
 721. ra λ. r. €πη, these splendid 
 commendations. φαίν€ΐν, to ratify. 
 Trach. 239. ευκταία φαίρων. On σοι 
 δα, cf. Matth. 411. Obs. 4. 
 
 725. reppa της σωτηρίας, com¬ 
 pletion of deliverance; i. e. complete 
 deliverance. Matth. II. p. 7 ^ 3 * 
 Macht Heil zu verleihen, the power 
 to bestow salvation. Pass. Enrip. 
 Orest. 1336. σωτηρίας yap Tepf 
 ημίν μόνη. ^sch. Eum. 400. to τόρμα 
 της φυyης. Cf. Reisig’s EnaiT. p. 106. 
 and Dissen’s Comment, in Pind. 
 Ρ· 38 ι· 
 
 726. καί yap el, 1. e. el yap καί. 
 On yepωv (^γώ) κνρω, see Bernh. p. 
 275. Kuhn. §. 627. Anm. 2. 
 
 729—30. ομμάτων φόβον, “ heCciUSe 
 όμματα φοβ€ΐταί may be said for 
 
 ‘betray fear.’ ” Matth. §. 380. i. 
 The commentators refer to Aj. 140 
 sq. 
 
 730. veωpη, newly risen. Cf. El. 
 901. where I understand ν€ωρη to 
 be joined with τ€τμημ€νον, newly cut; 
 not as Jacobs, newly placed. Supply 
 heKa before r. e. επβισ. 
 
 73 I. δί^ μητ OKvelTe μητ άφητ€. The 
 change of mood and tense has been 
 explained in my Aristophanes. Cf. 
 Kiihn. §. 469, 3. Matth. §. 511, 3. 
 “ bv refertur ad €μ€, quod latet in 
 βμης.” Vauvill. Cf. Matth. 477, b. 
 Bernhardy, p. 294. 
 
 732. bpiiv Ti. Cf. Wund. ad Phil. 
 674. 
 
 734. ft tip' 'Ελλάδα?. Elmslev 
 compares Aj. 487. βγω δ’ βΧβνθβρον 
 μβν β^ίφνν πατρυς, einep τίνος, σθβνον- 
 τος βν ττΚοντω, Φρυ^ωι/. 
 
 735· νη\ικόν 8 \ of such an age as 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 83 
 
 ΤΓ^ίσων βπβσθαί προς το Καδ/χε/ωι/ πβδοι/, 
 ονκ βζ eVo? στβίλαντος, άλλ’ άνδρων νπο 
 πάντων κβλβυσθβΙς, οννβχ ηκβ μοί yivu 
 τά τονδε πβνθβΐν πηματ βΙς πλβΐστον πόλβως. 
 άλλ\ ώ ταλαίπωρ ΟΙδίπονς^ κλνων ίμου 
 Ικον προς οίκους, πας ae Υ^,αδμ^ίων λβώ? 
 καλ€Ϊ δικαίως' €Κ δβ των μάλιστ β/ώ, 
 δσωπβρ^ ά μη πλβΐστον ανθρώπων βφνν 
 κάκιστος^ άλγώ τοΐσι σοΐς κακοΐς, γβρον, 
 ορών σβ τον δύστηνον^ οντα μβν ζβνον, 
 άβΐ δ' άλητην, κάπΙ προσπόλον μιας 
 βίοστβρη “χωρουντα, την βγω τάλας 
 ούκ αν ποτ βς τοσουτον αΙκίας πβσβΐν 
 βδοζ\ δσον πβπτωκβν ηδβ δύσμορος, 
 άβί σβ κηδβνουσα και το σδν κάρα 
 
 740 
 
 745 
 
 750 
 
 to require the care and protection of 
 his relations. 
 
 737· For eVo? στ^ίλαντος, see 
 Bernh. p. 228.; for άντρων νπο κβλεν- 
 Sfii, cf. infr. 850. Phil, 1143. dv- 
 8ρών νπο πάντων, das gauze V oik. 
 Donn. 
 
 A charge no private voice, but the 
 whole state 
 
 Imposed on me. Dale. 
 
 738. ηκ€ for προσηκ€. Schicfer 
 compares Eur. Alcest. 298. 
 
 Ib. yevei, on account of relation¬ 
 ship. 
 
 739. fi? π\άστον πόλβως. Cf, 
 Stallbaum ad Plat. Euthyphr. 12, c. 
 vor allem mir’ zumeist, myself above 
 every body. Donn, ds π\άστον, La. 
 Lb. Herm. Dind. Wund. η πλάστον 
 or ci πλ(Ίστον, Libri. Dobree con¬ 
 siders the whole verse as spurious, 
 concocted out of 741 -44. 
 
 742. δικαίως, suo jure. Ell. 
 
 Ib. tK δε των μάλιστ ε’γώ. Elmsley 
 
 compares Eur. Alcest. 274, οίκτράν 
 φίΧοισιν, €Κ δε των μάΚιστ €μοί. Add 
 Phil. 1243· γάμπας ^Αχαιών λάος, ev 
 δε τοίσδ’ εγώ. Ύών = τούτων (cf. 
 Matth. §. 286,) occurs perpetually in 
 Pindar. For δε after prepos. see 
 Hart. 1 .190. 
 
 743—4. δσωπβρ — αλγω. Trach.3 T 3. 
 επει viv τώνδβ π\ύστον ωκτισα βλύ- 
 πονσ , I δσωπερ και (ppovdv oibev μόνη. 
 
 Matth. §. 455 » 7 · 
 
 Ib. πΧβΙστον κάκιστος. Reisig com¬ 
 pares Aristoph. Eccl. 1131. μάλλον 
 όλβιό)Τ€ρος. See Matth. §. ^61. 
 Kiihn. §. 590. 
 
 746. αει δ’ άλητην^ i. e. οντα δ’ αει 
 αλ. Neub. 
 
 Ib. ε’π'ι προσπόλον μιας, accom¬ 
 panied by one attendant, viz. Anti¬ 
 gone. · Matth. §. 584, η. an der 
 Hand lemandes gelien. Wund, 
 
 749. όσον πύπτωκζν. For omis¬ 
 sion of preposition, see Bernh. p. 
 203. 
 
 G 2 
 
84 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΙ. 
 
 ΤΓτωχώ δίαίτΎ), τηλικοντος, ου γαμων 
 €μ7Γ€ίρο9, άλλα τον *7Γιορτο9 αρττασαι, 
 άρ άθλιον τονν€ίδθ9, ώ ταλας βγω, 
 ώνβίδισ els* ce κάμβ καί το ττάν γβνο9 ; 
 άλλ’ ον γαρ βστι τάμφανη κρντττβιν, σν ννν 
 Trpos θβών ττατρωων, ΟΙδίττον^, ττβισθβ\ς e/xot 
 κρνψον, θβλησα^ αστυ καί δομον^ μολβΐν 
 TOV9 σον9 TTOTpcpovs, τηνδβ την ττολιν φίλω9 
 βίττων' βτταζία γάρ' η δ* οίκοι ττλβον 
 δίκτ) σββοιτ αν, ονσα ση ττάλαι τροφος. 
 ώ ττάντα τολμών κάττο τταντος αν φβρων 
 λόγον δίκαιον μηχάνημα ττοικίλον, 
 τι ταντα ττβιρα κάμβ δβντβρον θβΧβις' 
 
 755 
 
 760 
 
 75Ι· τηλικοΰτος. Έλ. 6 ϊ 2,. ητις τοι- 
 αντα την τ€κο 0 σαν νβρισεν, | και ταΟτα 
 τη\ικουτος; Cf. Matth. 43 ^> 
 Kiihn. §. 43°· Anm. so ripe of age. 
 Donn. 
 
 752. Tov 'τΓΐόντος (cf. CEd. T. 393 *) 
 sc. ουσα. (cf. (Ed, T. 41 i.) Matth. 
 
 §· 3^5· αρπάσαι — κατα την αρπαγήν, 
 Matth. 335, a. Reisig understands 
 ώστ6 αρπάσαι. Translate with Matth. 
 a prey to the first comer. 
 
 753-4. apa {nonne cf.(Ed.T.822.) 
 a6\iov rovveiSoi (Eurip. Iph. A. 3 ^ 5 · 
 καΧόν yk μοι τοΰν€ίδος €^ωι/6ΐδισα?) 
 
 ώι^6ΐδισ’; Cf. Matth. §. 267. 
 
 753 * ίΐλλ’ ού γαρ can [but seeing 
 that it is not possible), τάμφανη, things 
 visible to every body. 
 
 757. άστν και δόμους. (Ed. Τ. 
 1430. Tols iv ykvei γάρ τάγγΐνη μά- 
 Χισΰ* όράν μόνοις τ άκού^ιν ζυσίβώς 
 κακά. At κρυφόν, supply τοϋ- 
 veibos. 
 
 758-9· τ. π. φ. €ΐ7Γ. having 
 bid a friendly adieu to. Cf, Matth. 
 416, a. 
 
 759· ^ οίκοι, sc. πόλιί, i. e. pa- 
 tria. Ell. Find. Pyth. VIII. 72. 
 
 TO δε OLKoOev, filius. 
 
 760. δίκη, justly. For examples, 
 see Ellendt I. 432. 
 
 761. πάντα τοΧμών =■ πάντοΧμος 
 
 (^sch. S. c. Th. 673). Arist. Nub. 
 375. ω πάντα συ τοΧμών. Reis. 
 
 Ib. από παντός. infr. 807. άνδρα 
 δ’ οόδεν οίδ’ ΐγίύ | δίκαιον οστις 
 άπαντος’^υ Xkyei. Antig. 312. οΰκ (ζ 
 άπαντος δει το κ(ρδαίν€ΐν φιΧ€'ίν. bee 
 also infr. 1000. and cf. Matth. 572. 
 
 Ib. av φίρων = ος αν φίροις. 
 Matth. §. 59^’ b. Bernh. 391. Hart. 
 II. 322. 
 
 762. Χόγου — μηχάνημα, aliquam 
 justitice speciem. Herm. And so 
 the editors of the German prose 
 translation: einer jeden Sache weisst 
 du den Schein der Gerechtigkeit 
 anzuhdngen. The word ποικίλο? has 
 been illustrated in my Knights of 
 Aristoph. Translate, craftily. 
 
 763 - 4 - 
 
 Why seek to lure me to those scenes 
 again, 
 
 Where if beguiled, severest woes 
 await me } Dale. 
 
 Cf. infr. 784-5. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 85 
 
 eXeLP^ ίρ oh μάλιστ αρ άΧγοίηρ άΧούς ·; 
 ττρόσθβρ τ€ γάρ με τοΐσιρ οικείοι^ κακοΐς 
 ροσουρθ\ οτ ηρ μοί τερψίς· εκττεσεΐρ χθορο^, 
 ούκ ηθεΧες ΘεΧορτί ττροσθεσθαι γάριρ' 
 αλλ’ ηρίκ ηδη μεστοί ηρ θυμονμερο9, 
 και τούρ δόμοίσιρ ήρ δίαιτασθαι γλνκν, 
 τότ εζεώθεΐί κα^εβαΧΧε^^ ουδέ σοι 
 το σνγγερ^ τοντ ονδαμώ^ τότ ήρ φΙΧορ’ 
 PVP τ αυθί^, ήρίκ είσορας ττόΧίΡ τε μου 
 ζνρουσαρ ευρονρ τήρδε κα\ γερο 9 το ττόίρ, 
 πείρα μετασπαρ, σκΧηρα μαΧθακώ^ Χεγωρ. 
 
 καίτοί Th αυτή τερψις" ακορτας φίΧεΐρ ; 
 ώσπερ tl 9 εί σοι Χιπαρουρτι μερ τυχεϊρ 
 μηδερ διδοίη μηδ" επαρκεσαι θεΧοι, 
 πΧήρη δ’ εχορτι θυμορ ώρ χρρζοίξ, τότε 
 δωροΐθ\ ότ ουδερ ή χάρις χάριρ φεροι' 
 άρ άρ ματαίου τήσδ* άρ ήδορής τυχοις ; 
 
 7^5 
 
 770 
 
 775 
 
 780 
 
 765. oIkclois, of my own making. 
 Aj. 260. TO yap eaXevaaeiv oIkciu 
 πάθη, I μη8€ν6ς άλλου 7Γαρηπράξαντο9, 
 μ(yάλaς obvvas vnoreLvei. Cf. Antig. 
 1176. 
 
 766. iKTveaciv χθονος, to he ejected 
 from my country. Aj. 1177. κακός 
 κακώς αθαπτος άκπβσοι γθονός. 
 
 767· προσβίσθαι χάριν = ίττιχαρί· 
 ζζσθαι Ell. Cf. Antig. 40· 
 
 768. μαστός, full, satiated. μ€στ6ς 
 ην θνμονμ^νος (ScHOL. κορζσθ€\ς τον 
 θυμόν), when my anger had satiated 
 itself to fulness. Cf. Matth. 550, b. 
 Kuhn. §. 659. IV^ The imagery is 
 derived from a vessel full to an over¬ 
 flow. 
 
 770. Cf. Eurip. Phcen. 1605. 
 1642. In a subsequent part of the 
 play (and it is necessary to bear it 
 in mind, as some justification of the 
 harsh language of CEdipus,) this pro¬ 
 
 ceeding, as well as other indignities, 
 are more particularly ascribed to his 
 eldest son Polynices. 
 
 771. TO avyyeves τούτο, i. e. η avy- 
 yeveia αυτή, this relationship of which 
 you talk. Cf. sup. 738. 
 
 773. yevos TO παν. ScHOL. to 
 ^Αττικόν. 
 
 774· σκΧηρα μαλθακώς λεγωι/. An¬ 
 tig. 1046. όταν λόγουν | αισχρούς κα- 
 Χώς Xeyωσι. Cf. infr. 782. 
 
 775 · Ιίκοντας, against their will. 
 (Emphatic.) 
 
 776. Χιπαράν, to entreat earnestly. 
 (Ed. T. 1435. infr. 1201. 
 
 777. (πάρκων, satisfacere suppe- 
 ditando vel prcehendo. Ell. 
 
 778. πΧηρη — θυμόν. Phil. 3 ^ 4 · 
 θυμόν — πΧηρώσαι. 
 
 780. dp\ i. e. nonne? Cf. sup. 
 753. (Ed. T. 822. Aj. 277. 1282. 
 El. 614. 790. 816. &c. 
 
 G 3 
 
86 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τοιαντα μίντοι καί συ 7Γροσφ€ρβί9 €μο\, 
 λόγω μίν ίσθλα^ τοΐσι δ* ίργοισιν κακα, 
 φράσω δε καί τοίσδ\ ώί σ€ δηλώσω κακόν. 
 ηκ€ΐ9 €μ αζων, ονχ 1ν eh δόμους ctyrj^y 
 άλλ’ ώ? ττάρανλον οίκίσης^ ττόλις δβ σοι 
 κακών ανατος τησδ" άτταλλαχθη γθονος. 
 ουκ ίστί σοί ταντ' άλλα σοι raS βστ ^ e/cet 
 χωρα9 άλάστωρ ούμο9 βνναίων ael· 
 
 785 
 
 781. τοιαντα μβντοι. Cf. infr. 
 997 * Hart. II. 39^· 
 
 782. λόγω — epyoiaiv, ’ terms of 
 opposition continually occurring in 
 the Greek tragedians. El. 1359. 
 αλλά μ€ ] λόγοι? άπώΧλνς, «ργ* ίχ^ων 
 η8ιστ ίμοί. On the article as used 
 in this verse, see Matth. §. 268, i. 
 
 783. κακόν, SC. ovra. (cf. Wund. 
 ad Antig. 469. Matth. §. 549, 6, 3. 
 Kiihn. §. 656, 3.) 
 
 I will speak, 
 
 That to these strangers I may prove 
 thee villain. Dale. 
 
 785. ττάρανλον, incinum, Ell. Aj. 
 892. τίνος βοη πάρανλος {near) (ξεβη 
 νάττονς ; 
 
 785—6. ττόλις — χθονός. “ That 
 your city may escape without feel¬ 
 ing the evils which impend over it 
 from this land.” 
 
 785. σοι. On this dative see 
 Neue ad El. 764. Matthise, §. 389, g. 
 
 786 . άνατος { = av€V ατης HerM.) 
 κακών. Cf. sup. 677* άνηνεμον χειμώ¬ 
 νων. El. 1002 . αλνπος άτης, &C. On 
 the pleonasm ανατος άττηλλαχθτ}, cf. 
 Aj. 1019. Antig. 399. &c. 
 
 Ib. τησδε, Seal. Wund. Dind. 
 τώνδε, Libr. Herm. Gaisf. ; the latter 
 observing that χθονός is redundant, 
 and translating : nt civitas immunis 
 evaderet eorum malorum, qua patrice 
 imminere preedixerat oracuium. 
 
 Ib. κακών τησδε χθονός. On this 
 construction, cf. Wunder ad Phil. 
 
 T91. Neue ad Antig. 10. Matth. 
 
 §· 375 · 
 
 787. On τάδε, as implying a 
 single thing, see Neue ad El. 1124. 
 Wunder ad Phil. 1326. Bernh. 280. 
 On demonstrative pronouns, as used 
 in order to announce a noun which 
 follows, whether in the masculine or 
 feminine gender, see Matth. §. 472, 
 2, e. 
 
 788. χώρας. This genitive may 
 belong to εκεί in the preceding verse 
 (sup. 170. Matth. §. 472, 2.), or to 
 άλάστωρ (Trach. 1092. βονκόλων άλάσ- 
 τορα). The ears 'of the audience 
 perhaps connected it with both. 
 
 Ib. άλάστωρ {αλαστος for άληστος, 
 ληθω, λαθεΐν). Like the word ττροσ- 
 τροπαίος, this word has two senses, 
 a passive and an active one. In the 
 first, it implies a person guilty of 
 some crime never to be forgotten, 
 more particularly Tnurder; one who 
 pollutes every person approaching 
 him, and is to be shunned by all man¬ 
 kind. In its active sense, it implies 
 one ^Γάio forgets not to take revenge 
 for the guilt committed; hence the 
 avenging or punishing power, the 
 word δαίμων Omitted or added at 
 pleasure. See Pass, and Ellendt in 
 voc. and cf. Klausen’s Theol. yEscli. 
 56. (As the ex-monarch, with up¬ 
 lifted hand, pronounces these and 
 the following words at the top of 
 his voice, he rises from his seat, and 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 87 
 
 ίστιν δβ τταισΐ τοΪ9 ίμοΊσι τη9 e/x^s* 
 
 ^θθΡθ9 Xa'^eiv τοαουτορ, euSavelv μονον. 79° 
 
 αρ ουκ αμβινον η σύ ταν Θηβαίε φρονώ ; 
 
 ΤΓολλω γ\ οίτωτΓβρ kou (ταφβστερων κλνω 
 
 Φοίβου Τ€ καυτόν Ζψ 09 ^ os* Keivov ττατηρ. 
 
 το σορ S άφΐκταο devp νπόβλητορ στόμα^ 
 
 πολληρ βχορ στόμωσιρ’ Ιρ δε τω λεγβίρ 795 
 
 κσ.κ αρ λάβθί9 τα ττλείορ η σωτηρία. 
 
 άλλ\ οίδα γάρ σε ταυτα μη ττείθωρ, ϊθί’ 
 
 ημάς ο εα ζηρ ερσαο . ου γαρ αρ κακώς 
 
 oi)S ώδ’ εχορτες ζωμερ, εΐ τερττοίμεθα. 
 
 stands before the spectators as if he 
 were already that alastor, or aveng¬ 
 ing spirit, which he threatens to be 
 at some future day to Thebes.) 
 
 789—90. της εμης χθονος, most 
 emphatic. 
 
 789. eariv, licet. 
 
 790. · hOaveLV, TO DIE THEREON. 
 
 Cf. ^schyl. S. c. Th. 728. χθυνα 
 
 va'icLV διαττηλας, όπόσαν | και φθιμ^νονς 
 άν κατβχζίν. 8ΐ8. €^ονσι δ’ ην λάβωσιν 
 €V ταφή χθόνα, | πατρδς κατ βύχας 
 δνσπότμονς φορονμ€νοί. 
 
 791 · A pause, then in a tone of 
 the bitterest irony : “ And who now 
 is best advised of the future destinies 
 of Thebes; you or IOn ap' ούκ, 
 see Hart. 1 . 454. 
 
 792. σαφ€στ€ρων. To the illus¬ 
 tration of this word, drawn from the 
 greatest of the Hebrew prophets 
 (sup. 623.), add, from the same 
 source, VIII. 20. including context, 
 19-22. 
 
 794-5. “But 7 jou are a speakef 
 of mere fallacies, uttering them in¬ 
 deed without stint or limit.” Cf. 
 Matth. II. p. 705. 
 
 Ib. ϋπόβλητον. ScHOL. ούκ άΚηθ^ς, 
 αλλά π€7Γ\ασμίνυν. Aj . 48 1 · νπύβλητον 
 
 Xoyov eXe^as. Ib. 188. νπυβάΧΧόμ^νυι. 
 The Scholiast derives the word from 
 the practice of introducing suppo¬ 
 sititious children into Attic families. 
 
 795· στόμα, ποΧΧην €χον στόμωσιν, 
 ein Mund, der viele Redekraft hat, 
 a mouth which has much power of 
 talk. Pass. Reisig compares Arist. 
 Nub. 1102. όπως ca μοι στομώσ€ίς 
 αυτόν. Cf. Dissen ad 01 . VI. p. 71. 
 
 Ib. iv δβ τω Xeyeiv, but through, 
 or, in consequence of your oratory. 
 
 796. A similar sentiment occurs 
 in the Antigone : 
 
 €K των yap αίσχρών Χημμάτων τους 
 
 πΧ^ίονας 
 
 άτωμ€νονς Ίδοις αν η σ€σωσμ€νονς. 3 3· 
 where see Hermann for construc¬ 
 tion. 
 
 797. οίδα πλίθων. Kuhn. §. 653 
 sq. 
 
 799. €ΐτ€ρποίμ(θα. Wunder adopts 
 Brunck’s translation: si ita vivere 
 nos juvat. Reasoning from the ex¬ 
 cited feelings of CEdipus, and com¬ 
 paring Philoct. 1043-4., I should be 
 disposed to give a stronger turn to 
 the word τΐριτοίμ^θα. Reisig com¬ 
 pares El. 354. ού ζώ; κακώς μ^ν, οΓδ’* 
 όπαρκονντως δί μοι. 
 
 G 4 
 
88 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΚΡ. TTOTepa ρομίζβις Βυστνχμν ίμ eh τα σα, 
 
 Ύ] (τ els τα (ταντον μαΧΧον ev τω ννν Χογφ ; 
 
 ΟΙ. €/xoi μ^ρ eaff ηδιστορ, el συ μητ eμe 
 
 ireiOeLP oios τ’ ei^ μ'ητe τovσSe tovs TreXas· 
 
 ΚΡ. ώ δνσμορ, ov8e τω χρορω (fyvaas (^apeL 
 (ppepas 7Γθτ\ άλλα Χύμα τω γηρο- τpeφeL ; 
 
 ΟΙ. γΧώσσρ συ deipos' αρδρα δ* ovSep οίδ eyω 
 δίκαίορ oaTLS e^ aTraPTOS ev Xeyei. 
 
 KP. χωρ^ TO T ehre'ip ττοΧΧα και τα καίρια. 
 
 ΟΙ. <hs δη συ βραχ^Εα, ταυτα δ’ ep καφω Xeyeis. 
 
 ΚΡ. ού δηθ\ δτω ye povs ίσος καί σοΊ ττάρα. 
 
 8οο 
 
 8ο5 
 
 8ιο 
 
 8οο-ι. Donner translates : “do 
 you think that the words just uttered 
 will prepare greater misfortune for 
 you or for me ?” Hermann, Ellendt, 
 Wunder, and Neue, quote the Scho¬ 
 liast : eV τω μη π€ίθ€σθαί ae μαΧλορ σύ 
 ^υστυχ^Ίς ηπ^ρ iy(i> ; The preposition 
 eh (in respect to, cf. Matth. §. 578, c.) 
 has been largely illustrated by me in 
 other plays; cf. sup. 524. The 
 word δνστνχειρ appears to me to refer 
 to 795-6 : “You talk of evils to 
 ensue from speaking: I ask whether, 
 from the present speech, most evils 
 will ensue to you or me?” Creon, 
 it must be remembered, has already 
 Ismene in his power, and meditates 
 the capture of Antigone. 
 
 804. τω χρόνω, by lapse of time. 
 
 804—5 · φρβνας, to beget wis¬ 
 
 dom. El. 1462. μηδί προς βίαν | epov 
 κολαστου προστυχών φύση φρύνας. 
 ^Esch. S. c. Th. 608. φρ€νών βία 
 (in spite of his better sense, or 
 wisdom.) 
 
 805. λύμα τω γήρα τρύφα, your 
 existence is a reproach to old age, 
 or, literally, you exist as a reproach 
 to old age. 
 
 806. deivbs, strong in any thing, 
 adapted, fitted for any thing. Matth. 
 
 II. 918. Cf. Philoct. 1307. for sen¬ 
 timent. 
 
 Soy.oaris — Xe'yec, qui ex Omni causa 
 probabiliter dicendi materiam petit. 
 Herm. 
 
 Who smoothly talks on right and 
 
 wrong alike,— 
 
 Can such a man be virtuous ? 
 
 Dale. 
 
 Ib. βξ απαντος. On the difference 
 of preposition, here and sup. 761, 
 see Matth. II. 996. 
 
 808-9. Creon observes : “ Much 
 speaking, and speaking to the pur¬ 
 pose, are two things widely dif¬ 
 ferent.” (Edipus retorts : “You 
 forsooth are a man, who can speak 
 briefly, and yet speak to the pur¬ 
 pose.” 
 
 Ib. T-e— καί. Elmsley illustrates 
 by Hisch. Prom. 927. Xen. Hier. 
 I. 2. Eurip. Alcest. 546· Neue by 
 Plat. Phsedr. 237, d. Protag. 340, a. 
 359, e. Phsedon. 58, c. See fur¬ 
 ther, Hart. I. 100. 117. Before τα 
 καίρια supply TO emeiv. 
 
 Ib. TO καίρια, Musgr. Schsef. Gaisf. 
 τα καίρια, MSS. Herm. Wund. Dind. 
 TO τα καίρια, Br. See Matth. on the 
 subject, §. 268. Obs. i. 
 
 810. ov δήτα (τούτω) οτω &C., wko 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 89 
 
 ΟΙ. ατΓ€λθ\ €ρώ γαρ καΙ ττρο τώνδβ, μηδΕ μ€ 
 φύλασσ αφορμών evOa χρη valeLV ipe, 
 
 ΚΡ. μαρτύρομαι τούσδ\ ού σβ, ττρό? γβ tov 9 φίλους 
 οΤ άνταμ^ίββί ρηματ\ ην σ ΐλω ττοτε. 
 
 ΟΙ. τίί δ' αν μί τώνδί συμμάχων eXot βία ; 815 
 
 ΚΡ. η μην συ κάν&) TovBe Χυττηθαί Ισβί. 
 
 ΟΙ. ΤΓοίω συν ^ργω τουτ άττ^ίΧησας ^χ€ί9 ; 
 
 ΚΡ. τταίδοίν δυοϊν σοί την μίν αρτίων ίγω 
 ζυναρττάσας Άτβμφα, την δ’ αζω τάχα. 
 
 ΟΙ. ωμοί. ΚΡ. τάχ ίζβκ μάλλον οίμωζαν τάδβ. 82ο 
 ΟΙ. την τταΐδ* ίχβίί μου ; ΚΡ. τηνδβ τ’ ού μακρον χρόνον. 
 
 has a mind like yours. On ’ίσος κα\ 
 σοΙ, see Bernh. 96. Hart. I. 150. 
 
 811 . προ τώι^δβ, in the name of 
 these persons, i. e. the Chorus. Cf. 
 (Ed. T. 10. 
 
 812. (φορμών. “ Non ah έφορ/χαΐ' 
 ducendum, sed ah (φορμών.” Dind. 
 “ (φορμύν, de nave proprium, sed ita 
 non dicitur Sophocli. Instare, adesse 
 significat, cum custodiendi et prce- 
 scribendi molestia.” Ell. 
 
 813-14. I understand generally, 
 and from the text as arranged by 
 Wunder, not by Herm. Dind. Gaisf.: 
 “ If ever you come into my power 
 {ηνσ' (λω ποτϊ), be these (Coloniats) 
 my witnesses, not you, who pretend 
 to speak in their name, what reply 
 you make to one who wished to be 
 your friend.” 
 
 813. npos y( τους φίλους, andcis, 
 i. e. mihi, cognato tiio. Wund. προς 
 be τους φίλους, Herm. Dind. Gaisf., 
 who place a full stop at ae, and un¬ 
 derstand an interruption at σ’ ελω 
 π ore. 
 
 815. rcovbe συμμάχων βία, these 
 allies (viz. the Chorus) being un¬ 
 willing. 
 
 816. κάνευ τονδβ. ScHOL, : καί 
 
 χωρίς του λαβεΙν σε είς Θήβας, viz. 
 without yourself being carried off. 
 (Creon speaks with a scornful sneer, 
 knowing that Ismene is already in 
 his hands, and on her way to Thebes.) 
 Dindorf, who reads τών 8 ε in his text, 
 adopts the emendation of Musgrave, 
 viz. τοΰδε, in his notes. Cf. (Ed. T. 
 
 1158. 
 
 817. ποιώ συν ’άργω, in consequence 
 of what proceeding? Infr. 1663. 
 συν νόσοις, hi consequence of disease. 
 Cf. (Ed. T. 635. Ant. 172. Bemh. 
 p. 214. 
 
 Ib. άπείλησας ^χ^ις. Infr. II40. 
 βαυμάσας ί'χω. 1474· συμβολών ^χ^ις, 
 and numerous other places in So¬ 
 phocles. 
 
 819. επεμψα, have sent away; 
 viz. to Thebes. Cf. infr. 1274. 
 
 Ib. την δ’, Antigone sc. 
 
 820. οΙμώζειν. Creon forms his 
 verb from the ωμοί, just uttered by 
 (Edipus. So in the Eumenides 117. 
 κόρος. (Μυ-γμός). Κλυτ. μύξοίτ άν. 
 121. Χόρος. (ώ-γμός). Κλ. ωζεις; υπ- 
 νώσσεις ; 
 
 821. την 8 ε τ’ {εζω), pointing to 
 Antigone. τψΒε τ’, Both, τψδε y , 
 Libri. 
 
ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 90 
 
 ΟΙ . Ιω ζβνοί, τί δράσβτ ; ή ττροδωσβτβ ; 
 
 κονκ βζβλάτβ τον ασφη τησδβ γθονός ; 
 
 ΧΟ. χώρ€ί, ^eV, €^ω θάσσον' οΰτβ γαρ τα νυν 
 
 δίκαια ττράσσβίς ουθ^ a ττροσθβν βίργασαι. 825 
 
 ΚΡ. υμίν αν βϊη τήνδβ καιροί βζαγβιν 
 
 ακόυσαν, el θβλουσα μη ττορβνσβταί. 
 
 ΑΝ. οΐμοι τάλαινα, ττοΐ φύγω ; ττοίαν λαβω 
 
 θβών αρηζιν η βροτών ; ΧΟ. τί δ pas, ζ^νβ ; 
 
 ΚΡ. ούχ αφομαί τουδ' άνδρο 9 , άλλα της €μη9. 830 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ γης άνακτβς. ΧΟ. ώ ζβν, ον δίκαια δρας. 
 
 ΚΡ. δίκαια, ΧΟ. ττώς δίκαια ; ΚΡ. τους βμονς άγω, 
 
 ΟΙ . ιω ττόλις, ττροφ, 
 
 ΧΟ. τί δρας, ω ξβ'ν ; ονκ άφησβις ; τάχ ek 
 
 βάσανον ei χβρών, ^35 
 
 ΚΡ. βϊργον, ΧΟ. σου μβν ού, τάδε γε μωμενου, 
 
 ΚΡ. Ίτόλει μαχεΐ γάρ, εϊ τι πημανεΐς εμε. 
 
 820. νμίν, (speaks to his at¬ 
 tendants). 
 
 829. τΐ δρας. ScHOL. ; to Creon, 
 who is dragging away Antigone. 
 
 830. (i/s being }iis nieces 
 and committed to his guardianship). 
 Antig. 45. Toi' yovv epbv κα\ τον σον 
 (αδίλφόι/). Cf. infr. S32. τους epovs, 
 where Antigone is again meant, 
 infr. 942. των Ιρων ζήλος. 
 
 833. Ιω ττόλις. Exclamations of 
 this kind must often be rendered by a 
 periphrasis, “citizens ! to you I make 
 appeal!” Dale translates,“O Athens! 
 Athens !” but the appeal is to men 
 of Colonos, not· to men of Athens. 
 The same translator, who has 
 much confused the characters here, 
 puts this appeal into the mouth of 
 Antigone. Every reader of taste 
 must perceive that it belongs to 
 CEdipus, and that the stage-effect is 
 
 much benefited by allowing Anti¬ 
 gone to be mute till she is about 
 to be actually forced away (infr. 
 844). Dindorf, who in his text had 
 ascribed this verse to Antigone> in 
 his notes restores it to CEdipus. 
 
 834. Metre: dim. dochm. 
 
 834—5. (Ις βάσανον ei χβρών. Schae¬ 
 fer compares infr. 1297. οϋτ ek 
 ‘4λ€'γχον χ€ΐρυς οϋτ epyov μόλων. 
 Metre : dochmiac. 
 
 836. e’lpyov (speaks to the Cho¬ 
 rus, who are laying hands on him). 
 Away ! take off your hands. Metre : 
 dim. dochm. . 
 
 Ib. σου pev ov {[ Will not take οβ 
 my hands from you) ρωρόνου {ράω, 
 cf. Matth. §. 243.), contriving, at¬ 
 tempting. On the particle ye, see 
 Hartung, I. 477. 
 
 837. πόλ 64 , i. e. Thebes, paxei — 
 πημαν€ΐς, Pors. Elmsl. Dind. ττηραι- 
 
ΟΙΔΤΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 91 
 
 ΟΙ. ουκ ηγόρενον ταντ ίγώ ; ΧΟ. μ4Θ€9 χ^ροίν 
 
 την τταΓδα Θασσον, ΚΡ. μη 'ττίτασσ a μη κρατ€Ϊ9· 
 ΧΟ. χαλαν λβγω σοι. ΚΡ. σο\ δ' ίγωγ οδοίττορ^ΐν, 840 
 ΧΟ. 7 Γροβά& ώδβ, βάτ€ βάτ\ evTOTTOu 
 ΤΓολί? ivalperai, ττόλις ^μα, σθβνβι. 
 
 7τροβα& ώδί μοι. 
 
 ΑΝ. άφβλκομαί δύστηνος^ ώ ζβνοί ξβνοί. 
 
 ΟΙ. 7 Γον, τβκνον, el μοί j ΑΝ. ττρο? βίαν ττορεύομαι. 845 
 ΟΙ. op€^ov, ώ τταί, χβΐρας. ΑΝ. άλλ’ ούδ^ σθβνω. 
 
 ΚΡ. ουκ αξβθ' νμ€Ϊ9 ; ΟΙ. ω τάλα9 €γω, τάλας. 
 
 veis, Herm. Wund. Neue. infr. 893. 
 πημηνας. Aj. 1314. ττημαν^Ίε, 
 
 838. ονκ η. τ. €. Did I not tell 
 you (that men would come from 
 Thebes to do what Creon is now 
 doing) ? A great improvement in 
 the arrangement of the dramatic 
 characters will be found here by 
 comparing Wunder’s text with that 
 of Brunck. The learned writer’s 
 views have justly been adopted by 
 Herm. and Dind. 
 
 839. μή \1τασσ’ a μη κρατείς. El- 
 
 lendt observes, that it is doubt¬ 
 ful whether κρατών has here an ac¬ 
 cusative, or whether we are to un¬ 
 derstand Kparels €τητάσσ€ΐν, are com¬ 
 petent to command. I 
 
 840. χαλαν, to let go; λ(γω, I 
 command, infr. 856. μη yfravecv Xtyo. 
 (Cf. Wund. ad Phil, iof.) 
 
 Ib. σοι δ’ eyωy€ (λέγω) όδοιπορεΐν. 
 
 841. ωδε, here. Metre: dim. 
 dochm., as also verse following. 
 
 842. πόλις ivalperai. The Chorus 
 exclaim, that by this violent pro¬ 
 ceeding of Creon (adevei), the state 
 and its liberties are infringed. If 
 chronolog-v would in the least have 
 
 O./ 
 
 admitted of such an observation, I 
 should have said that the scuffle be¬ 
 
 tween Philocleon and the Chorus 
 in the “ Wasps” of Aristophanes 
 was a parody on this proceeding in 
 the present drama. Here, as there, it 
 might be asked, “ and how was this 
 conflict conducted } Were the Cho¬ 
 rus on the stage, instead of the or¬ 
 chestra ? or had the Greek Chorus 
 a double body; one to perform the 
 active part upon the stage, while the 
 real Chorus remained quiescent in 
 the orchestra ? or finally, did Greek 
 conventional feeling admit of such a 
 proceeding as that before us being 
 done by supposition ?” Had the trea¬ 
 tise of Sophocles on the “ Chorus” 
 reached us, these questions might 
 have been answered; at present 
 they can only be asked. 
 
 Ib. πόλις ipci. Antig. 1140. πάνδη¬ 
 μος άμα πόλις. W^und. Edit. 
 
 846. ούδεν ( = ού, cf. Ell. II. 428.) 
 σθίνω, 1 am unable, I have no power 
 (to reach forth my hands). 
 
 847. ovK νμζΐς ', (addressed 
 
 to his guards or attendants, who 
 carry Antigone oflf the stage.) 
 
 848—9. ov μη υδοιπορησ€ΐς. On the 
 irony of this future with ού μή, see 
 Hartung, II. > 57 · 
 
92 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΚΡ. ουκουν ττοτ €Κ τούτοιν ye μη σκητττροίν eri 
 6δθί7Γορησ€ί9' άλλ* eTrel νικάν OeXeis^ 
 ττατρίδα τε την σην και φίλους, νφ ων εγω 850 
 
 ταχθεί raS ερδω, καΙ τύραννοί ων ομως^ 
 νίκα, ypovcp y^py οίδ εyωy yvωσεL ταδε^ 
 δθϋύνεκ αντο9 αυτόν ούτε νυν καλα 
 δρα9, ούτε ττρόσθεν εlpyaσω βια φίλων, 
 opyfj yapiv δου9^ η σ* αει λυμαίνεται. 855 
 
 ΧΟ. ε7Γίσγε9 αύτου, ζεΐνε. ΚΡ. μη ψαυειν λεyω. 
 
 ΧΟ. ουτοι σ άφησω, τωνδε y εστερημενο9· 
 
 ΚΡ. και μειζον άρα ρύσιον ττολει τάχα 
 
 θησεις' εφάψομαι yap ου ταύταιν μοναιν. 
 
 848. (Κ τοντοιν — σκηπτροίν, ΐ. θ. 
 Ismene and Antigone, who acted as 
 his staffs and supporters. Eur. Hec. 
 280. avTi ποΧλων eVri μοι τταρα- 
 ψνχη, πόλις, τιθηνη, βάκτρον, ηγ^μων 
 
 όδοΟ. For the prepos. cf. Phil. 91. 
 
 βνος ποδός. Schsef. ad Dionys. p. 
 295. Matth. §. 574. 
 
 851 · ταχθ^'ις τάδ’ Γρδω. Phil. 6. 
 ταχθείς τοδ’ epbeiv των άνασσόντων υπό. 
 
 Ib. τύραννος, of royal race. Reis. 
 That he was not the king of Thebes, 
 as Ellendt makes him, seems clear 
 from former passages of the play. 
 367. sq. 425, &c. 
 
 853. 0θθνν€Κ =ZOTl, Matth. II. 
 1114* αυτός αυτόν. Id. §. 489, 2. 
 Bernh. 287. 
 
 854. βία φίλων, infr. 943. Antig. 
 
 59 * 
 
 855· opyfj χάριν δους, gratifying 
 your anger, infr. \ 1S2. αύτοΰ φρίνι 
 χάριν παρασχύν. For further ex¬ 
 amples, see Elmsl. ad Eur. Bacch. 
 720. (as Creon prepares to leave 
 the stage, the Chorus lay hands on 
 him.) 
 
 856. €πΙο·χ€ς, halt, stop, (Phil. 
 539. ίπίσχζτον, μάθωμίν. El. 13 ^ 9 · 
 d δ' €φίξ€τον. Eur. Hip. 567. ini- 
 
 ο·χ€Τ, αύδην των ϊσωβ^ν όκμάθω,) αυ¬ 
 τόν, οη the spot where you are. Cf. 
 sup. 192. 
 
 858. ρύσιον. Hesych. : to βνβκα 
 (ν^χύρου κατ€χόμ€νον, something de¬ 
 tained as a pledge, and which may 
 be recovered by paying the price for 
 it: here applied sneeringly to CEdi- 
 pus, whom Creon meditates to carry 
 off, as well as his daughters, πάλα, 
 Thebes. 
 
 859. τιθίναι, to lay down as a 
 pledge. Passow, art. 8. Wunder’s 
 version, redemptionis pretium solves, 
 which is also that of Musgrave and 
 Reisig, does not strictly accord with 
 the definition of Hesychius. A dis¬ 
 tinction seems to he in Creon’s 
 mind between his neices and their 
 father. The former he considers as 
 his property, the latter as pledge 
 or booty, which may be redeemed. 
 
 Ib. (φάπτβσθαι, riianus injicere. 
 Ell. 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 93 
 
 ΧΟ. άλλ’ €9 τί τρβψβί ; ΚΡ. ropd' άττάζομαι Χαβών. 86ο 
 ΧΟ. BeLvov Aeyety. ΚΡ. ώς τούτο νυν ττβπράζβταί, 
 ην μη μ ο κραίνων τησδβ γη 9 άττείργαθη. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ φθβγμ άναώΐς^ ή συ γαρ ψανσ€ί9 βμου ; 
 
 ΚΡ. ανδώ σίωτταν. ΟΙ. μη yap aide δαίμοΡ€9 
 
 θβΐβι/ μ άφωνου τησδβ της άράς eVi, 865 
 
 os* pL ^ ώ κάκιχΓΤ€, ψιΧον ομμ άττοσττάσας 
 ττρος ομμασιν τοΐς ττρόσθβν βζοίχβί βία. 
 
 86ο. €9 τί τρβ'ψ'ίΐ; quo te con- 
 vertes? i. e. quid facies? Wund. 
 T0vb\ strongly emphatic. 
 
 861. 7Γ€πρά^6τα4, Matth. §. 49 ^· 
 Hermann proposes to get rid of the 
 particle ώ?, (which is not recognized 
 in the ancient MSS., and which 
 Triclinius appears to have foisted 
 into the text,) by reading beivov Xe- 
 yms av. For Matthiae’s opinion, see 
 Gr. Gr. §. 628, 5. 
 
 863. ω (f>eiyf avaiSes, may per¬ 
 haps be rendered, O man of shame¬ 
 less speech! Electr. 1225. ω (pdeyf" 
 άφίκον, (of which in its proper 
 place;) so infr. 960. ω Χημ' άναώίς, 
 Ο man of shameless audacity ! An- 
 tig. 746. ω μιαρόν ήθος, (applied to 
 Hsemon.). Cf. Aj. 14. (At the con¬ 
 clusion of this verse, I understand 
 some gesture or movement on the 
 part of CEdipus, indicative of a de¬ 
 sire to vent a solemn imprecation on 
 the head of Creon. The latter, 
 justly fearful of a curse uttered in 
 the presence of the Fui'iES, begs 
 him in a state of great agitation to 
 forbear.) 
 
 864. ανδώ σιωπάν. Silence, I charge 
 thee! On looking into Dale, I find 
 he has used the very same words. 
 But why translate words at all of 
 which the meaning is so obvious ? 
 I answer, because the version, which 
 first flies to young lips on such oc¬ 
 
 casions, is generally of the homeliest 
 kind; because the dignity of ancient 
 tragedy, being compromised by such 
 renderings, does not always subse¬ 
 quently exercise its due impressions ; 
 and because it is of much conse¬ 
 quence that impressions of intellec¬ 
 tual dignity and beauty should be 
 formed early in young minds as well 
 as rules of grammar and laws of 
 prosody. 
 
 Ib. μη yap, 0 that not ! aide dai- 
 pove9, the Furies. “ Eas aut imagi- 
 nibus suis quasi inhabitantes demon- 
 strat, aut certe prsesentes, ut qua- 
 rum prope lucum assiderat.” Ell. 
 
 865. (ίφωνον άρας. (cf. SUp. 677. 
 786. Matth. § 339·) I understand: 
 without voice and power to pro¬ 
 nounce this curse, which I was 
 about to pour upon you. Reisig 
 proposes to substitute rtjade σης άρας 
 eri, ος, &c. “ ut sit exsecratio tui.” 
 
 Ib. rijade της, ed. Lond. a. 1747. 
 Herm. Wund. Dind. τ^σδ^ yr]9, Libri. 
 σοί ye Ttjad' , Br. 
 
 866. 6 ς. See Bernh. p. 293. 
 
 866-7. The commentators differ 
 
 widely in their explanations of these 
 verses. All of them agree with the 
 Scholiast in understanding Antigone 
 by the word ομμα, as being her fa¬ 
 ther’s eye. The next consideration is 
 the adjective ψιΧόν. Does this agree 
 with pe or ομμα ? Dcederlein and 
 

 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τοίγαρ ae τ αυτόν καΙ yevo9 το σον θ€ων 
 6 ττάντα ΧβνσΌτων "^HAiOS* Βοίη βίον 
 
 τοίουτον, οΐον κάμβ, γηραναι ττοτβ. 870 
 
 ΚΡ. opare ταντα, τησΒβ γης βγχωρίΟί ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ορώσί κάμβ καί ae, καί φρονονσ οτί 
 
 Wunder refer it to the pronoun, but 
 differ in their sense of it; the former 
 interpreting by inermls, the latter by 
 “ oculis privatus” “ so that the words 
 which follow,” continues the learned 
 editor^ “ viz. np 6 s 6 μμ. τ. πρ. may 
 serve as an explanation of the ad¬ 
 jective ψιλόν.” Jacobs, objecting to 
 the word όμμα thus “ nakedly placed, 
 and especially when όμμασιν rois 
 •ηρόσθ^ν follows,” joins ψιλόν with 
 ομμα, and understands by it the 
 miserable and destitute condition of 
 Antigone. Hermann interprets by 
 ‘‘ vilis oculus.” “ Est enim ilia (An¬ 
 tigone sc.) oculus quidem, sed quia 
 alienus.potissima carensvirtute oculi, 
 ut eo CEdipus ut suo et semper ut 
 velit uti possit.” Whether (Edipus, 
 with all his proverbial sagacity, 
 argued in this subtle way, I leave 
 others to judge. It is painful to 
 trouble the reader with additional 
 explanations; but to myself none of 
 the foregoing seem altogether satis¬ 
 factory. Whoever traces the word 
 ψιλόν through Passow’s explana¬ 
 tions, will find in it a general 
 sense of nudity, destitution, and un¬ 
 protectedness, with which senses, 
 whether in a primary or metaphorical 
 sense, the reader will find the fol- 
 'lowing passages in Sophocles ex¬ 
 actly correspond: Antig. 426. Aj. 
 1123. Phil. 953. and infr. 1029. 
 Considering therefore the word ομμα 
 as one which a blind man would 
 naturally use of any person that Λvas 
 a light, a guide and a support to 
 him, I understand by ψιλόν όμμα^ 
 
 not Antigone, but Ismene, carried off 
 by Creon’s troops while engaged in 
 the cathartic rites of the grove, and 
 where of course she was wholly un¬ 
 protected, and to whom the mind of 
 CEdipus naturally turns, now that 
 he was additionally deprived of his 
 όμματα τα πρόσθεν, or Antigone. 
 How much both were in his mind, 
 when uttering these words, the mere 
 repetition of the word άποσπάσας, in 
 a subsequent verse (895), will, I 
 think, suffice to shew ; Κρίων δδ’, 
 όν δεδορκα?, οϊχζται τίκνων | άποσπάσας 
 μου την μόνην ζυνωρίδα. It may be 
 added, that Ellendt interprets ψιλόν^ 
 “ infirmum, non idoneuni defensioni, a 
 similitudine ψιλόν, levis armaturcB 
 hominis.” For the double accus. in 
 the sentence, cf. Matth. §. 418. 
 
 869. Not having dared to curse 
 Creon by the Erinyes, the blind old 
 man curses him by Helios ; but why 
 by the giver of light, instead of the 
 author of darkne.ss, when the object 
 of his prayer is, that he may be old 
 and blind, like himself? Reisig, 
 with much acuteness and ingenuity 
 of illustration, shews that the an¬ 
 cients were accustomed to consider 
 the same deity as capable of shewing 
 his power in exactly contrary ways, 
 according as he operated by his 
 presence or his absence. Neue, 
 with his usual propriety of reference, 
 points to El. 824. ττου ποτέ κεραυνοί 
 Αιός, η που φα^θων | ''Αλιοί^. A ταντ 
 όφορώντεί κρνπτονσιν €<ηλοι ; 
 
 870. οιον κάμε, i. e. εδωκβ γηραναι. 
 
 Matth. §.427· Bernh. 299· 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 95 
 
 epyoLS 7ν€πονθως ρημασίν σ αμύνομαι. 
 
 ΚΡ. OVTOL καθεζω θυμον^ άλλ* αζω βία, 
 
 κβΐ μουνός άμι, τόνδβ, και χρόνω βραδύς. 875 
 
 ΟΙ. Ιω τάλα 9 . dvT. 
 
 AU. οσον Αημ βχων αφικον, ζβν , u 
 τάδβ δοκβΐς τβλβΐν. 
 
 ΚΡ. δοκώ. ΧΟ. τάνδ* αρ ούκ βτι νβμω ττόλιν. 
 
 ΚΡ. τοΓ? τοι δικαίοις χώ βραχύς νίκα μβγαν. 88ο 
 
 ΟΙ. oLKoveff οία φθβγγβται ; ΧΟ. τα γ ού τελβΐ. 
 
 ***** ΚΡ. Ζβνς ταυτ αν βίδβίη, σύ S ον. 
 ΧΟ. άρ ονχ υβρις raS ; ΚΡ. νβρις' άλΧ άν^κτία. 
 
 ΧΟ. [ώ ττάς λβώ?, Ιώ γας ττρόμοι, 
 
 873· I should not have thought 
 of adverting again to an opposition 
 so common in tragic Greek as that 
 between epya and ρήματα, if I did 
 not see that Dale’s version had missed 
 it; 
 
 —they know what wrongs I have 
 endured, 
 
 While but in words I vent my pow¬ 
 erless vengeance. 
 
 I should rather translate : 
 
 they know, my sufferings 
 Are deeds, but my revenge mere 
 words. 
 
 Ib. σ’ αμύνομαι. Antig. 643, ώί 
 κα\ Toy εχθρόν άνταμύνωνται κακοΐς. 
 Thucyd. I. 42. άξιοντω rols όμοίοις 
 ημάί άμυνξσθαι. Cf, infr. I 1 28. 
 
 874· καθίζω {restrain) θυμόν. El. 
 ΙΟΙ I. κατάσχ^ς όρ-γην. Find. Isthui. 
 III. 3. κατ€χ€ΐ κόρον. 
 
 .^ 75 · χροι/ω, age. Sup. 374 · An¬ 
 tig. 681. Plat. Soph. 234, d. (Creon 
 seizes on CEdipus.) 
 
 876. For metre, cf. strophe 833 sq. 
 
 879. τάνδ’ dp’ ovK €Γ6 νίμω ττό\ιν, 
 
 “ Then I consider this state as no 
 longer a state, mistress of her 
 
 laws, and able to protect herself 
 from violence.” The force of this 
 declaration seems much weakened 
 by reading ν^μω instead of νίμω, as 
 Reisig, Dindorf, and other commen¬ 
 tators do. 
 
 880. Toi? δικαίοις, in a just cause. 
 Soph. Phil. 1251. Eurip. Heracl. 
 331. συν τω 8 ικαίω. For the dative 
 without preposition, Neue compares 
 Thucyd. IV. 62. ci tis βεβαίως τι η 
 τω δικαιω η βία πράξζίν o’Utoi. Cf. 
 
 Matth. §. 4οο> 5 · 
 
 Ib. βραχύς, homo opihus nullis 
 valens. Ell. Musgrave compares 
 σ μικρόν, infr. 958. and Eur. Heracl. 
 614. 
 
 882. Dindorf proposes to fill up 
 the lacuna by putting a comma at 
 reXei, and supplying d Zei»? eVi Zed?. 
 
 883. dp ουχ υβρις τάδ’ ; if this is 
 not insolence, what is ? Eur. Troad. 
 ταυτα yap γί\ως ποΧυς. The formula 
 has been largely illustrated in my 
 Aristophanes. See alsoKiihn. §. 423. 
 Anm. For examples of τάδβ, as ap¬ 
 plied to a single thing, see Ellendt 
 II. 276. 
 
 884. yd? ττρόροι. Wunder rightly 
 
V 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 μόλ€Τ€ συν μόλβτ’ iirel irepav 885 
 
 7 Γ€ρώσί ^ * ^η. 
 
 ΘΗ. TLs τΓοθ* η βοη ; τί τουργον ; ίκ τίνο9 φοβου ττοτβ 
 βουθυτουντά μ! άμφί βωμοί' eerier epaXico θβω 
 τονδ' β7Γί(ΓτάτΎ) Κολωζ/οι; ; Xe^aff , ωί 6ίδώ το τταζ/, 
 ον γίριν δβνρ 'ρζα θάσσον η καθ' ηδονην ττοδο^. 890 
 ΟΙ. ω φίΧτατ, βγνων γαρ το ττροσφώνημά σου, 
 πβπονθα δβίρα τουδ' νπ άνδρο9 άρτιων. 
 
 ΘΗ. τα τΓοΐα ταντα ; τί^ δ* 6 ττημήνας ; Χβγβ. 
 
 ΟΙ. Κρβων οδ\ ον δβδορκας, οϊχβταί τέκνων 
 
 άποσπάσας μου την μόνην ζννωρίδα. 895 
 
 ΘΗ. ττως βίττας ; ΟΙ. οία ττβρ ττβττονθ ακηκοας. 
 
 observes, that Theseus only is meant. 
 How much the Chorus must have 
 elevated their voices, or how conve¬ 
 niently Theseus was within dramatic 
 distance to hear this appeal, will ap¬ 
 pear in the course of two or three 
 verses. 
 
 885—6. eVei TTepav ττζρωσι. 
 
 “ Far, far e’en now, they pass the 
 bounds of right.” Dale. 
 
 The northern minstrel would, I think, 
 have suggested bounds of another 
 kind : 
 
 “ She’s o’er the P border, and awa’ 
 Wi’, &c. &c.” 
 
 eVfi 1 translate, otherwise, and πβρωσ 
 I understand as a future verb. The 
 distinction between nepap and πέρα 
 has been nicely discriminated by 
 Hermann. See also Passow in voc. 
 Buttmann’s Lexil. and Diss. ad Find. 
 Nem.VlI. p. 461. Hermann, Gais- 
 ford, and Wunder, fill up the lacuna, 
 as Elmsley proposed, thus : πβρωσ 
 olde δη. On the particle, see Hart. 
 I. 249. 
 
 887. Ti Tovpyov, quid hoc rei est? 
 Ell. On the preposition ex, (06) see 
 Kiihn. §. 599. 
 
 888. βονθντονντα άμφί βωμόρ. Cf. 
 infr. 1495. βονθντορ ίστίαρ άγιζωρ. 
 See also Trach. 609. 
 
 Ib. eV^er, inhibuistis, moram in- 
 jecistis, Musg. stort, disturbed, Germ. 
 Prose. Cf. Matth. p. 961. 
 
 889. (πίστάττ) {βφίσταμαί), here, 
 tutelar deity. 
 
 890. θασσυρ η καθ' ηδορηρ ποδός. 
 Donn : sclineller, als den Fuss er- 
 freuen mag. El. 1503. μη μ(ρ ovp καθ' 
 ηδορηρ θάρηζ. Neue refers to Phil. 
 206. στίβου κατ' άράγκαρ epnoPTOS. 
 
 891. yap. On the use of this 
 particle after vocatives, see Tafel’s 
 Dilucid. Pindar. I. 164. 
 
 895. ξυρωρ'ις, properly, a chariot 
 with two horses; hence, a pair; here, 
 Ismene and Antigone. Eur. Phoen. 
 I ] OI. ζη σοί ξνρωρ\5 els τόδ' ημέρας 
 Τίκρωρ. Med. 1142. Ίτριρ μερ τεκρωΡ 
 σώρ (ίσιδεΙρ ^υρωρίδα. 
 
 896. ols ττερ. See Hart. I. 34^· 
 
 ρ This would be the case Avhen Creon’s troop reached the Pythian temple at CEnoe 
 (cf infr. 1047), which latter place Thucyd. (II. i8.) describes as the border-ground be¬ 
 tween Attica and Boeotia. Cf. Muller’s Dorians, I. 267. 
 
a 
 
 ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 97 
 
 ΘΗ. οΰκουν TL 9 ως τάχιστα ττροσττόλων μόλων 
 •προς τούσδβ βωμούς πάντ αναγκάσει λ€ων 
 ανιτπτον Ιππότην τ€ Θυμάτων άπο 
 
 σπβνΒβιν άπο ρντηρος, ένθα 8ίστομοι 9 ^ο 
 
 μάλιστα σνμβάλλουσιν εμπόρων οδοί, 
 ώς μη παρβλθωσ αι κόραι, γελως δ* εγώ 
 ζόνω γενωμαι τωδβ, χειρωθείς βία. 
 
 ώς άνωγα^ συν τάχει. τούτον δ* εγώ, 
 
 » \ Λ > > Τ e/SS* V/- ^ . 
 
 €ΐ μεν οι οργής ηκον, ης οο άξιος, 9°5 
 
 άτρωτον ου μεθηκ άν εξ εμης χ^ρός. 
 νυν δ’ οΰσπερ αυτός τούς νόμους είσηλθ^ 
 
 897* · · ττροσττόλωι/. Theseus 
 
 speaks to one of the attendants on 
 his royal person. 
 
 898. Tovabe βωμοίΐί, the adjoining 
 altar. So infr. 1020. iv τόποισι 
 roiade. 105 7. τοΰσδ’ civa χώρους. On 
 the primary and secondary senses of 
 ode, see Ellendt in voc. 
 
 899— 900. θυμάτων απο anivdeiu, 
 to quit the sacrifice and hasten. 
 
 900. ρντηρ (ρυω, €ρυω), a strap, 
 or thong in the horse’s bridle, which 
 was drawn tight, or hung loose, 
 according as the animal was to pro¬ 
 ceed leisurely or at speed. From 
 II. XVI. 475. (τώ δ’ Ιθυνθητην, iv de 
 ρντηρσι rdwaOev), it would appear, 
 says Passow, that the word was 
 originally used of the cords in which 
 chariot horses were confined. To 
 ride with the bridle loose, was 
 termed από ρυτηρος iXaiiveiv. On the 
 preposition, c/. Neue ad El. 1127. 
 Matth. §. 572. translates: “far from 
 the reins i. e. “ without reins, with 
 loose reins.” Hence : at full speed. 
 
 900— 1. δίστομοι (Antig. 119· 
 τάπνλον στόμα. Eur. Suppl. 4 1 I. in- 
 ταστόμονς ττνΧας) όδοι, twO roads, σνμ- 
 βάΧΧονσι, meet. This σχιστή όδος will 
 
 be explained more fully infr. 1044. 
 
 Ib. βμττοροι, travellers. 
 
 902. '^παρέρχομαι. Proprie priC- 
 tereo : ώ? μη παρ, αί κόραι, adsignifi- 
 cata evadendi notione, ingredior.” 
 Ell. 
 
 903. ξ^νω. The Scholiast under¬ 
 stands Creon; Schneider, CEdipus. 
 
 904. τούτον. Creon sc. On the 
 union of τούτον and ode in the same 
 sentence, see Ellendt in "'Ode III. d. 
 Ellendt (II. 453.) has apparently 
 fallen into the mistake of supposing 
 the former part of the verse to be 
 addressed to Creon, instead of the 
 πρόσποΧος. 
 
 905. εΐ μεν δι’ οργής ηκον. ScHOL. : 
 εΐ εν ταντη τη οργή ην. Cf. Bernll. 
 ρ. 235 · Matth. §. 580, c. 
 
 907-8. The reasoning of Theseus 
 is clear enough. He (Creon) has 
 laid hands, in a strange land, on 
 what does not belong to him : we 
 will now lay hands on him; nor 
 shall he be restored to his country, 
 till they (Antigone and Ismene) are 
 restored to our country. Cf. infr. 
 933 sq· 
 
 907—8. ονσπερ — τοντοισι. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 474, a. 
 
 H 
 
98 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τούτοισυ κονκ αΧΧοισιν άρμοσθηα’€ταί. 
 
 ον γάρ 7 ΓΟΤ €^ei τησδε τη 9 χώρα^, ττριν αν 
 
 Keiva^ βναργβΐΫ δβνρό μοι στηστρ^ άγων* 9 '^ 
 
 eVei δβδρακαξ οντ ίμου καταζίω^, 
 
 oijff ων π^φυκας αυτός οϋτβ σης χθονος^ 
 
 οστίς δίκαί ασκούσαν βΙσβΧθων ττόΧιν 
 
 κάνβυ νόμον κραίνουσαν ονδβν, eir αφβις 
 
 τα τησδβ της γης κνρί^ ώδ βττβίσττβσων 9^5 
 
 άγεις θ' ά χρηζ<Εί9 και τταρίστασαι βία. 
 
 καί μοι πόΧίν κβνανδρον η δονΧην τννά 
 
 εδο^ας elvat, κάμ ίσον τω μηδενί- 
 
 καίτοί σε θηβαί γ ονκ ετταίδευσαν κακόν* 
 
 ον γαρ φίΧονσιν άνδρας εκδίκονς τρεφειν, g'io 
 
 Ib. ονσττίρ, Br. Wund. Dind. 
 ωσπ€ρ, Libri, Reisig. Herm. Gaisf., 
 who understand οντω before τοντοισι. 
 
 908. άρμοσθησ^ται, ilUgahitur, 
 Neue (Eur. Bacch. 231. και σφας 
 σώηραΐς άρμόσας iv άρκνσιν). EUendt 
 translates: secundum quani sibi ipse 
 scripsit regulam judicabitur. 
 
 909. ου yap ποτ for you shall 
 not depart. (The rapid and lively 
 character of this speech, Theseus 
 first addressing one of his attendants 
 (904), then turning to the Chorus, 
 and now addressing himself person¬ 
 ally to Creon, will not escape the 
 discerning reader.) 
 
 910. ivapyfii, vor Augen, before 
 my eyes, Donn. 
 
 913. oaTis = os, Sup. 263. infr. 
 962. 
 
 914. αφείί. Infr. 1537· 
 
 άφζίς. 
 
 915. τα τησδ€ yrjs κύρια (leges et 
 morem publicum civitatis,YA'Li,.), Mat- 
 thise (§. 438.) considers as equiva¬ 
 lent to τον κύριον. 
 
 gi6. aycis, juxta te statuis, ut sit 
 penes te: ergo potiris, Reis, carry 
 off. Infr. 923. 927. ^ 
 
 Ib. παριστασαι (παρίστημι). ScHOL. 
 καταδουλοΐί και υττοχ^είριον (σοι) ττοι- 
 
 € 19 . 
 
 917· ττολιν Kevavbpov η ^ούλην. 
 Reisig compares Eur. Herac. 244-6. 
 el yap τταρησω rovbe σνΧάσθαι βια ^evov 
 Trpos avdpbs βωμόν, ονκ i\ev 6 epav oiKeiv 
 δοκησω yaiav, K. r. e. 
 
 918. τω μηδ€νί. Aj. I I 14. ou yap 
 ηζίου rovs pqdevas. Cf. Matth. §. 437 * 
 Hartung. II. 130. 
 
 919. On the phrases παι8€ύ€ΐν 
 Tiva κακόν, yevvalov, &C., see Matth. 
 §. 420, 3. Hemsterh. ad Arist. Pint. 
 4. Musgrave ad Eur. El. 379. Phil. 
 1360. 019 yap η yvoipy κακών | μητηρ 
 yevnrai, rSKKa τταιδίόει κακούς. (A 
 strong emphasis on the word θηβαι, 
 alike honourable to Theseus and the 
 poet.) 
 
 920. ov yap φΐΚονσιν, it is not her 
 wont or custom. 
 

 ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 99 
 
 ούδ’ αν σ eTraiveaetaVy el ττυθοίατο 
 σνλώντα τάμα καΐ τα των θβών, βία 
 αγοντα φωτών αθλίων Ικτηρια. 
 οΰκουν €γωγ αν, ση^ ίττβμβαίνων χθονο9, 
 ονδ" el τα πάντων ei^ov ίνδυκώτατα, 
 avev ye του κραίνοντος, οστις ήν, χθονο^, 
 ονσ eiAKOV out αν ηγον αλλ ηπισταμην 
 ζ4νον παρ άστοΐς^ ώί δίαιτάσθαι ypecov, 
 σύ δ* άζίαν ούκ oSaav alayvveLs πάλιν 
 την αυτός αυτου^ καί σ ο πληθύων χρόνος 
 γάρονθ^ ομου τίθησι και του νου Kevov. 
 ebrov μίν ούν και πpάσθev^ έννεπω δβ νυν, 
 τάς παΐδας ως τάχιστα δeυp ayeiv τινά, 
 el μη μίτοικος τησδe της χώρας θeλeις 
 
 925 
 
 930 
 
 922 . σνΧωντα τάμα κα\ τά των θ^ων, 
 spoliantem terram rneam eamque diis 
 sac 7 'am. Wund. 
 
 Ib. τάμα, terram meam, non res 
 meas. Neue. 
 
 923. φωτων άθΧίων Ικτηρια — φωτας 
 άθλιους ίκτηρίονς. Mattli. §. 442> 4 · 
 Neue, referring to ν. 832, evidently 
 considers CEdipus only to be meant 
 in the plural noun φωτας. If a single 
 person only is intended, I should 
 rather refer it to Ismene, who had 
 actually been carried off by the 
 troops of Creon, while performing 
 supplicatory rites in the sacred 
 grove. Referring to former notes 
 on the subject of double and triple 
 participles, and the use of possessive 
 pronouns, &c., I throw out for con¬ 
 sideration, whether the two verses 
 might be rendered : plundering my¬ 
 self and the goddesses —i. e. the Eu- 
 menides {τάμα κα\ τά των θεών) — by 
 forcibly carrying off those who were 
 supplicants to them. On turning 
 
 to the German translators to see 
 what support I could meet for this 
 interpretation, I find Solgen, Thu- 
 dichum, and Donner, all translating 
 as has been here proposed: mich 
 beraubend und die Goiter, Thudich. 
 Donn. mich und selbst die Gbtter 
 plundernd, Solg. 
 
 926. av€v, without the consent of. 
 
 Ib. οστις ην, whoever he might be. 
 
 927. ηπιστάμην. Supply av from 
 preceding verse. 
 
 929. άξίαν ovK ονσαν (sc.. αίσχίι- 
 νεσθαΐ) . 
 
 930. την αυτός αυτοΰ. Cf. Neue 
 ad Aj. 1T32. Matth. §. 468, 6. 
 Bernh. 287. 
 
 Ib. ττληθυων χρόνος. Cf. Sup. 377 * 
 
 931. Antig. 281. μη 'φευρεθης 
 άνους τε κα'ι γέρων άμα, a union which 
 ought not to be found, the proper 
 duty of age being to confer wisdom, 
 not to take it away. 
 
 934. μετοικος, what a metic was in 
 comic Greek, the readers of Ari- 
 
 H 2 
 
100 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 χο. 
 
 ΚΡ. 
 
 elvaL βία τ€ κού)( ίκών" και ταυτα σοι 
 τω ρω ομοίως κάττο τη9 γλωσση^ λ€γω. 
 opa9 IP ηκ€ί9, ω ξβρ ; ω? αφ ωρ μβρ et, 
 φαίρβί δίκαιος, δρώρ S βφβνρίσκβι κακα. 
 
 €γω οΰτ αραρδρορ τηρδβ τηρ ttoXlp λεγωρ, 
 ώ τεκρορ Aiy€ct )?5 ουτ αβονΧορ^ ω9 (τν φϊ]9, 
 τονργορ τοδ* εζεττραζα^ γίγρωσ'κωρ δ otl 
 ονδβίί 7ΓΟΤ avTOV9 τώρ εμώρ άρ εμττβΟΌί 
 
 935 
 
 940 
 
 stophanes are well aware. Here per¬ 
 haps the word, which will occur 
 frequently for illustration in future 
 plays, implies little more than an 
 inhabitant ; a sense of captivity in¬ 
 cluded. Dale translates boldly, but 
 not amiss to the sense, 
 
 Or in the land will I detain thee, 
 
 bound 
 
 A slave reluctant. 
 
 935. βία T€ κονχ €κών. It is usual 
 to compare such formulae as CEd. T. 
 1275. ποΧλάκις re κονχ άπαξ. El. 885. 
 ΐξ ipov T€ KOVK άλλης, &C. &C. On 
 the particles re και, see Hart. I. 102. 
 
 936. General sense: and what I 
 say I mean. 'Απ 6 της ‘γλώσσης=τη 
 γλώσση. Cf. Matth. §. 396. Blomf. 
 Gloss. Agam. 786. and Diss. Com¬ 
 ment. in Find. p. 62. 
 
 937—8. αφ’ ων peu ei — κακά. Her¬ 
 mann understands this as said of the 
 Thebans, not of the parents of Creon. 
 Reisig had previously observed, that 
 the expression referred not only to 
 parentage, as in (Ed. T. 415, but 
 appeared to comprehend what was 
 observed at v. 912. οϋθ' ών πβφνκας 
 αυτός, οϋτ€ σης χθόνος. See also the 
 eulogium on Thebes, 919-20. Like 
 so many other passages in Sopho¬ 
 cles, every word almost is put in 
 opposition to, and made to contrast 
 with, some other word or words. 
 
 “Thy words and outward bearing 
 (φαίί /ei) are such as might be ex-r 
 pected from the quarter whence you 
 came, for they are just and honour¬ 
 able—thy deeds are those of self- 
 convicted villainy. 
 
 939. In considering the speech 
 of Creon, we must remember that 
 we are dealing with a practised 
 sophist, who answers what he thinks 
 convenient, and omits what it is less 
 convenient to reply to; glossing 
 here, and fabricating there; using 
 every art to justify himself, and 
 raise hatred against the ex-monarch. 
 
 Ib. avavbpov. Reply to the k€~ 
 vavbpov of Theseus at v. 917. άνηρ 
 emphatic in both cases. 
 
 940. άβουλοι/. Reisig and Wunder 
 refer this also to the passage pointed 
 out in the preceding verse. To my¬ 
 self it appears, that the cunning 
 sophist merely imagines Theseus to 
 have said this, in order that he 
 may be provided with a peg for 
 his ζύβουλον πάγον at v. 947· 
 
 941. γιγνώσκων. Heller : γνώ¬ 
 μην €χων, νομίζων. Eur. Cycl. 421. 
 άλλην €Βωκα κύλικα, γιγνώσκων otl 
 τρώσ^ι νιν οίνος και 8 ίκην δώσει τάχα. 
 Herm. ad Ion. 59*^· 
 
 942. αύτούί (ScHOL. τούς ^Αθη¬ 
 ναίους) may be elicited from the 
 word πάλιν, V. 939· Cf. Bernh. 
 288. Matth. §. 434, 2. Diss. ad 
 
ΟΙΔ1ΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 101 
 
 ζήλος· ζυναίμων^ ωστ εμού rpeipeiv βία. 
 τ^δη δ\ οθούν€Κ ανδρα καΐ ττατροκτόνον 
 καναγνον ου δ€^οίατ\ ovS οτω γάμοί 
 ζνρόι'τβς ζύρζθησαρ ανόσιοι τόκνων. 
 τοιοντον αύτοΐς A ρβος βνβονλον ττάγον 
 €γω ζννρόη γρονιον ονσ ^ ος ονκ ea 
 τοιονσδ' άλητας ττιδ" 6μου vaieiv ττόλεΓ 
 ώ ττίστιν ϊσχων τηνδ' βχξίρούμην αγραν. 
 
 KOLi ταυτ αν ούκ Άτρασσον, el μη μοι πίκρας 
 αυτω τ άρας ηρατο και τώμω yivei' 
 ανυ ων πβπονυως ηξιουν ταο αντιοραν. 
 θυμου γαρ ούδ€ν γήρας όστιν άλλο πλην 
 θανβΐν* θανόντων δ’ ούδβν άλγος απτβται. 
 
 945 
 
 950 
 
 955 
 
 Find. Nem. VI. ρ. 4 ν 3 ^· avrovs 
 ^μπίσοι, see Matth. §. 426, Her¬ 
 mann observes, “videtur Sophocles 
 more suo quod insolen tins esset pree- 
 tulisse.” 
 
 942—3. ζηΧος των €μων ξυναίμων, 
 eager emulation for my relatives. 
 On av βμττίσοι, see Hart. II. 264. 
 
 943. ωστ€ — βία, to foster them 
 against my consent. 
 
 945. δ€ξοίατ\ Elms. Herm. Wund. 
 Hind. δ€ξαίατ\ Libri. 
 
 945—6. γάμοί τίκνων, matris cum 
 filio connubium. Herm. ξυνόντξς 
 ανόσιοι, perhaps, unholily consorted. 
 Reisig refers to infr. 1133. (ω τις 
 ονκ evi I κηΧις κακών ξύνοικος ',) Neue 
 to Antig. 372. Add El. 610. Aj. 610. 
 On the subject of marriage be¬ 
 tween near relatives, see Thudichum 
 
 1*303· 
 
 947. On the Areopagus as a 
 criminal court, much information will 
 be gathered from Thudichum I. 304., 
 and still more from Muller’s Eume- 
 niden. See also Klausen’s Theol. 
 ^sch. p. 129. 
 
 948. χθόνιον. ScHOL. : αντόχθονα, 
 native to the soil. Aj. 202. γ(ν€άς 
 χθονίων άπ ^Ερξχθβώάν. Herm. : Εγ¬ 
 χώριον. 
 
 950. ω ττίστιν ισχων = ττιστβνων, 
 confiding in which. El. 735 . τώ reXei 
 ττίστιν φΕρων. 
 
 951—2. ττικρας—άρας ηρατο. An¬ 
 tig. 427* κακας ηρατο. For the 
 
 fact, cf. sup. 868. 
 
 954-5. These two verses, the 
 connexion of which with the pre¬ 
 ceding is not at first very apparent, 
 must be explained out of the dramatic 
 character of Creon, which is a mix¬ 
 ture of the moralist, the rhetorician, 
 and the hypocrite. “ As for any 
 anger displayed on this occasion, 
 why should it create surprise ? It 
 is a passion born with us, which 
 grows with our growth, and the old 
 age or termination of which (^Esch. 
 S. c. Th. 679.) is synonymous with 
 death; for the dead alone,” continues 
 our moralist, laying his hand on "'is 
 breast, “ are insensible to pain and 
 provocation, and consequently are 
 H 3 
 
102 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 7 Γρο 9 ταΰτα ττρά^Η^ (ηον αν θ€λΎ}9’ βπβΐ 
 βρημία μ€^ κβΐ δίκαι ομω9 λβ^/ω, 
 σμικρόν τιθησι’ 7Γρο9 Se ras* 7rpa^€L9 ομω9, 
 καΙ τηλίκόσδ' ών, άντώραν ττβιράσομαι, 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ λημ αναιδή, τον καθυβρίζβιν δοκ€ΐ9^ 
 ττότβρον €μου γβροντο^, fj σαντον, τοδβ ; 
 δστΐ 9 φόνους μοι και γάμους καΐ ξνμφορας 
 του σου διηκας στόματος^ ας όγω τάλας 
 ηνεγκον οίκων, θβοΐς γαρ ην οΰτω φίλον, 
 τάχ αν τι μηνιουσιν €ΐς γόνος ττάλαι. 
 
 €7Γ€ΐ καθ' αυτόν γ ούκ αν βζβυροις βμοι 
 αμαρτίας ονβιδος ουδΙν, avff ότου 
 
 960 
 
 9^5 
 
 insensible to anger.” The explana¬ 
 tion has been generalised, that the 
 application may be made to (Edipus 
 as well as Creon, if the reader so 
 pleases. For various opinions col¬ 
 lected from the ancients on the sub¬ 
 ject of anger, seeThudichum I. 303. 
 
 340· 
 
 955· θανόντων — anrerai. Wun- 
 der compares El. 1170. τούς yap βά- 
 νοντας ούχ όρώ Χνπονμένονς, Dale 
 translates with his usual elegance : 
 
 Resentment knows no soothing 
 balm of age. 
 
 Calmed but in death, it only fails 
 to rouse 
 
 The long departed. 
 
 957. όμως. Cf. Matth. §. 566, 3. 
 
 Ib. βρημία, alluding to the want of 
 
 his body-guard, or attendants. 
 
 958. σμικρον, injirmum, nullis opi- 
 bus valentem. Ell. Aj. 158. καίτοι 
 σμικροΧ μξyάXωv χωρ'ις σφαΧβρον Tvvpyov 
 ρνμα πίλονται. 
 
 96ο. ω Χημ άναώβς. “ Audacious 
 and shameless.” Cf. sup. 863. 
 
 Ib. τού (i. e. τίνος^ καθύβριζαν. 
 Phil. 1363. ot ye σου καθύβρισαν. 
 
 With dat. Aj. 153., with acc. El. 
 522. 
 
 961. Tohe. Cf. infr. 968. 1504. 
 Neue ad Aj. 1156. 
 
 962. ξνμφοράς, Reisig and Wun- 
 der refer to v. 949. Does not the 
 expression rjveyKov ακων, infr. 964., 
 evince that something worse than 
 bodily pains and privations was up¬ 
 permost in the thoughts of (Edipus ? 
 
 963. διηκας (biuvai,emitter6, edere). 
 “ Memorasti, adsignificata facti im- 
 pudentia.” Ell. 
 
 964. TjveyKov ακων, iDGs the unwil¬ 
 ling author of. Cf. sup. 521, 2. 
 
 965. τάχ άν τι μηνίονσιν. “ Si 
 resolves, habebis, ot τάχ άν τι μηνί- 
 ouv.” Herm. Cf. Matth. 599, c. 
 Hart. II. 322. Klausen’s .Esch. 
 Theol. p. 26. 
 
 966. καθ' αντον, in respect to my¬ 
 self as far as I am personally con¬ 
 cerned. Matth. §. 489, II. Bernh. 
 p. 287. ye italicises as it were the 
 word preceding. 
 
 Ib. e’/xoi. On this dative, see 
 Bernhardy, p. 79. Kiihner, §. 568, 
 2, a. 
 
 967. αμαρτίας oj/etdos, reproachful 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 103 
 
 τάδ* €19 ίμαντον tovs e/xous* θ' ημάρται/οι/. 
 hrei δίδαζοί', eL τι θβσφατοι/ πατρι 
 γρησμοίσιν Χκνύθ^ ώστε τΓρο9 τταίδωι/ θαν€Ϊν^ 
 ττώ9 αν δικαίως τουτ ονβιδίζοις βμοί, 
 
 09 οΰτ€ βλάστας ττω γενβθλίους πατρος, 
 ού μητρο 9 ^Ιχον, άλλ* αγέννητος τότ ή ; 
 el δ’ αν φανβΐς δύστηνος^ ώς €γω 'φάνην^ 
 eh χΕίρας ήλθον ττατρί καΐ κατ^κτανον^ 
 
 Λ \ ί- \ νΛ » C/ » VOs 
 
 μηόev ^vviei 9 ων eόpωv ei 9 ov 9 τ eόpωv, 
 ττώς γ αν τό γ άκον ττραγμ αν elκ6τω9 ψ^γοις ; 
 μητρο9 δε, τλημον, ονκ eiraiaxvvei γάμους 
 ουσης ομαίμου σης μ άναγκάζων Xeyeiv, 
 οΐους Ιρώ τάχ, ον γαρ ονν σιγησομαι, 
 
 970 
 
 975 
 
 980 
 
 guilt, a guilt with which I can justly 
 be upbraided. Cf. infr. 984. deii 
 Flecken eines Frevels. Donn. avff 
 oTov. Antig. 1068. Mattli. §. 480, c. 
 
 969. eVe'i (sin minus) δίδαξαν. Cf. 
 El. 352. and Passow in voc. 
 
 969—70. θβσφατον {debs, φνρΟ 
 χρησμοΐσι, predicted hy oracles. Infr. 
 1472. θέσφατοί βίου τίΚζντη. The 
 subst. plur. τα θέσφατα is far more 
 common than the adjective. 
 
 970. ωστ€. Cf, infr. 1350. add ex¬ 
 amples collected by Schaefer, Matth. 
 §. 534, 3. and Kuhner, §. 825. 
 Anm. 4. 
 
 Ib. ΤΓαίδων^παιδός. Cf. Q 5 d. T. 
 713. Electr. 838. (where, by ywaiKcov, 
 Eriphyle alone is meant.) 
 
 972—3. βλάστα9 yevedXiovs (the 
 germ of life) narpbs ΐΐχον. Antig. 
 980. ματρος βχοντζς άννμφ€ντον yovav 
 {deriving their birth from a mother 
 married to her misfortune). 
 
 973. η ίοτην, a restoration which 
 Elmsley every where makes. On 
 ovre, ού, see Hart, I. 198. 
 
 974-5. I clearly came into 
 
 conflict with my father, as I clearly 
 did, from an unfortunate accident, 
 {δύστηνος), and not from premedi¬ 
 tated malice, &c. Phil. 760. δύστην€ 
 δήτα δια πόνων πάντων φανείς. 
 
 g"j6. eh. Cf. Matth. 415. Obs. 2. 
 
 977, πως y civ. For the double 
 ye, Hermann refers to Phil. 441., 
 Neue to Antig. 747. Dindorf, on 
 the contrary, referring to his ob¬ 
 servations ad Steph.Thes. II. 537,b., 
 asserts, that Elmsley has very pro¬ 
 perly cancelled the first ye'. Matthise 
 (p. 1065.) and Hartung (I. 376.) 
 retain the double ye. 
 
 978. τλημον. El. 121, ττηί δυστα- 
 νοτάτας (ScHOL. : της eξo\eστάτης' ον 
 yap όπΙ οίκτον όστ\ν 6 Xoyos) ’Ηλε’κτρα 
 ματρός. Phil. 3^3· οί δ’ ίΐπον, ο'ίμοι, 
 τΧημονύστατον {most shameless) Xoyov. 
 
 980. ον yap ονν σLyησoμaι. Now 
 I WILL speak. Dale. For the 
 grammar, see Hart. II. 17. Matth. 
 (§. 625.) observes that ovv is used, 
 even where in English no inference 
 is expressed, 
 
 H 4 
 
104 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 σου y βΙς τόδ’ βξβλθόρτος άνόσων στόμα, 
 βτίκτβ γάρ μ ίτίκτβυ, ωμοί μοι κακών, 
 ούκ €ίδότ ούκ βίδυΐα' καί τβκουσά μ€, 
 αυτής ονβιδος τταΐδας βζβφυσβ μοι. 
 αλλ ev yap ουν βξοιοα, σβ μβν βκοντ βμβ 
 κείνην Τ€ ταυτα δυστομεΐν' εyω δε νιν 
 ακων εyημa, (pθεyyoμaL τ οίκων τάδε. 
 άλλ* ου yap ουτ εν τοϊσ8 ακουσομαι κακός 
 yapoLaiv οΰθ' ους αΙεν εμφερεις συ μοι 
 φόνους πατρώους εζονειδίζων πίκρώς. 
 εν yap μ αμειφαι μοΰνον ών σ αν ιστορώ, 
 εϊ τις σε τον δίκαιον αυτίκ ενθάδε 
 κτείνοι παραστάς, πότερα πυνθανοί αν, εΐ 
 πατήρ σ 6 καινών, η τίνοι άν ευθεως ; 
 
 9^5 
 
 990 
 
 981. 6i? τοδ’ άνόσιον στόμα, this 
 unholy language, Ellendt renders 
 στόμα, loquelam ; “ adsignificata im- 
 pudentia dictorum.” 
 
 984· αυτή? ovetdos, as her shame, 
 παίδαί (cf. Matth. §. 432.) 
 μοι. “ Quo exemplo ab notione 
 rei mente comprehensse (abstract) ad 
 id, quod experientia noscitur (con¬ 
 crete) transitio prsestruitur, velut 
 αταν επάγων άνά ταν €υρώόη Ύροίαρ, 
 ^ύστανον ονειδο? 'Ελλάνων.” Αί. I 1 δο. 
 Ell. 
 
 985. ουν. For examples of this 
 construction of ουν, see Ellendt II. 
 435. Hart. II. 1^. 
 
 986 ^υστομάν, withacc. of person 
 and thing: see Passow in voc. Kiihn. 
 §. 559. Bernh. p. 121. Br. δυσ- 
 στομξίν. 
 
 988. άκουσομαι κακός. Phil. 13 ^ 3 * 
 ήκον' άριστά. Cf. Matth. §. 307* 
 
 989. alev (μφόρζίς. PeRPETUO in- 
 geris, Reis. No reader of the least 
 taste need be reminded, that we are 
 not here looking to a matter of fact, 
 
 but to poetry and passion, both 
 which allow themselves the utmost 
 exaggeration. Creon, as Reisig 
 acutely remarks, had but once re¬ 
 proached CEdipus with the murder 
 of his father, and then merely by 
 the word πατροκτόνον. Quid ergo ? 
 Exaggeratio est oratoria acerbe 
 facta.'* 
 
 991. εν μ€ μοννον. On the double 
 accusative, see Matth. §. 421. Ohs. i. 
 
 992. TOP δίκαιον. The irony of 
 the term will be understood by re¬ 
 ferring back to vv. 880. 957* 
 
 See also infr. 996. 1000. thou para¬ 
 gon of justice. Dale. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 276. 
 
 Ib. αυτίκ (at this moment), ev- 
 θάδβ (on this very spot). 
 
 993. KTelvoi, should wish to kill· 
 This mode of speaking was illus¬ 
 trated at CEd. T. 1420. Schasfer 
 compares Aj. 1126. δίκαια yap τάνδ 
 ίυτυχύν κτβίναντά pe. Cf. infr. 1008. 
 
 994. πατήρ σ 6 καινών. For the 
 enclitic pronoun thus placed, Seidler 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 105 
 
 8οκώ μίν^ 6ΐ7Γ6/) ζην φιλβΐ^, τον αϊτών 
 TLVOL αν^ ovde τοϋνδίκον πβρίβλβττοι^. 
 τοιαυτα μίντοί καυτός βΙσββην κακά, 
 θ€ων αγόντων' oh όγω ούδβ την ττατρος 
 ψυχήν αν οίμαι ζωσαν άντβιπβΐν βμοί. 
 συ δ\ el γάρ ου δίκαως, άλλ* άτταν καλόν 
 XeyeLV νομίζων, ρητόν άρρητον τ Άτος, 
 τοιαΰτ όνβίδίζείς μβ τωνδ' βναντίον. 
 καί σοί τό θησόως ονομα θωττβΰσαί καλόν, 
 καί τάς 'Αθήνας, ώς κατωκηνται καλώς' 
 καθ' ώδ' ότταινών ττολλά τοΰδ' έκλανθάνβι, 
 
 C ' 
 
 995 
 
 ΙΟΟΟ 
 
 1005 
 
 and Doederlein compare Eur. El. 262. 
 σ’ η TCKovaa. Horn. Batr. 13· δε 
 σ’ ό φυσάς. See also Herm. ad Aj. 
 1007. 
 
 995. δοκω μ^ν, immo. As examples 
 of this formula, applied to confirm¬ 
 ing consequences, and denying con¬ 
 traries, Hermann ad Eurip. Suppl. 
 794. refers to this passage, and also 
 to Soph. El. 61. 547. 
 
 lb. τον αίτιον, den Droller, the 
 person threatening you. Donn. the 
 person in fault. Why φΑεΐ?, and 
 not φΐΚοΊς, is here used, see one of 
 those acute remarks so usual to 
 Hermann. 
 
 997 . τοιαυτα μίντοι, talia profecto, 
 WuND., who compares sup. 781. 
 
 τοιαυτα μβντοι και συ ττροσφβρΐΐς 
 
 > / 
 e/iot, 
 
 998 . For οϊς, (to which things 
 i said by me,) followed by e/ioi, Neue re¬ 
 fers to Aj. 1062. Wunder, observing 
 that Tols Xoyots άντ€ΐπ€ΐν τινι is equi- 
 
 I valent to τοίς Χόγοις τίνος άντίΐπξΊν, 
 
 I refers to some observations of his at 
 V. 113. of this play. 
 
 1000. The ironical pause which 
 I CEdipus makes before pronouncing 
 the words ου 81 καιος, will be best un¬ 
 
 derstood by referring back to vv. 742. 
 760. 880. &c. 
 
 1000— I. απαν καΧον Xeyeiv νομίζων, 
 quidvis dictu honestum esse existimans, 
 Musgr. Cf. sup. 807. The Scho¬ 
 liast, by explaining αθυρόστομος ων, 
 had perhaps Aristophanes in his eye. 
 Ran. 838. 
 
 1001. ρητόν άρρητόν τ €7Γος. Neue 
 refers to Jacobs ad Achill. Tat. 
 
 VI. 5. 
 
 1002. τωϊ/δ’ Εναντίον, in the pre¬ 
 sence of these (pointing to the Cho¬ 
 rus) ; or, as Dale still better renders, 
 in this presence. 
 
 1004. κατωκηνται, administered. 
 This sense of the verb οίκβΐν, and its 
 compounds, was largely illustrated 
 bv me in the “ Ranse” of Aristo¬ 
 phanes. Infr. 1534. ai δε μυρίαι πό- 
 λεΐί, καν ευ τις οίκη. The ironical 
 sneer in the words καΧώς and κάΧόν 
 (sup. 1003.) grow out of the feelings 
 involved in the word καλοί/ (looo). 
 
 1005. τουδ’ €κΧανθάν€ΐ, you forget 
 this, you allow this to escape you. 
 Ellendt observes that the middle 
 voice of όκΧανθάνω bears no other 
 sense. On εΐτα, see Matth. §. 5 ^^» 3 · 
 
106 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 οθούρβκ, βϊ TL9 γη Oeovs βττίσταται 
 Τίμαί9 σββίζβίν, ηδε του& νπ€ρφβρ€ί, 
 ά0’ η9 συ KXe\j/a9 τοι/ Ικέτην γ^ροντ €/χ€ 
 αυτόν τ’ Ιχβφον, τα9 κόρα^ τ οϊχβί λαβών, 
 άνθ’ ών βγω νυν τάσδβ τά? θβας ίμο\ 
 καλών Ικνουμαι καΊ κατασκητττω λίταΪ9 
 όλθβΐν αρωγούς ζυμμάχονς Θ\ 1ν βκμάθης 
 οίων νπ άνδρών ηδβ φρονρώίται πόλις. 
 
 ΧΟ. ό ζβΐνος, ώναζ, χρηστός' αι δβ σνμφοραί 
 αυτού πανώλβις^ α^ιαι S άμυνάθβιν. 
 
 ΘΗ. αλις λόγων' ως οι μβν όζηρπασμόνοι 
 
 σπβύδουσιν^ ημβις δ* οι παθόντες βσταμβν. 
 
 ΚΡ. τί δητ άμαυρω φωτ\ προστάσσ€ΐς ποΐ€Ϊν ; 
 
 10Ι0 
 
 1015 
 
 1007. τψαίς. In conjunction with 
 some remarks on this word in a 
 former play (CEd. T. 789. &c.) cf. 
 ^sch. Eum. 204. 218. 313. 397. 
 854. cf. sup. 278. τί/χά9, Libri, Deed. 
 Schn. Neue. τιμαίς, Turneb. Wund. 
 Dind. 
 
 1008. “ KXeKTCLv est in universum 
 furtim quasi, h. e. clam s. clandes- 
 tino dolo aliquid facere : Vel auferre 
 et adimere, vel praripere et occupare, 
 vel explorare et quasi captare, (άρπά- 
 ζίΐρ, ut apud Soph. Aj. 2. ubi vid. 
 Lobeck, p. 219. Cf. Perizon. ad 
 .Mian V. H. III. 47.”) Ast ad 
 Plat. I. Rep. 334, a. On the wish 
 here implied in the participle, see 
 Matth. §. 503. 
 
 1011, καλών. For KoXelv, in the 
 sense of Επικαλούμαι, imprecor, oh~ 
 testor, Ellendt compares Phil. 737. 
 (where Dind. reads βοάί) 1324. Cf. 
 infr. 1376. T389. 1391. 
 
 Ib. ίκνουμαι. Ellendt, after de¬ 
 riving the figurative sense of suppli¬ 
 cation in this verb from approach¬ 
 ing and falling at a person’s feet. 
 
 observes, that it is never used but in 
 the present tense. Sup. 275. Phil. 
 469. 932. Aj. 588. 
 
 Ib. κατασκηπτω Xirais. Tralate 
 dictum: graviter obtestando precor, 
 ejjlagitoprecibus, Ell. I them 
 
 with entreaties, Donn. 
 
 1012. αρωγούς ξνμμάχονς θ', Herm. 
 Dind. ex Paris. 2886. Ell. αρωγούς 
 ξυμμάχους, Gaisf. Wund. Neue. 
 
 I o T 4. χρηστός, denkt edel, is noble 
 in his thoughts, Donn. 
 
 1015 · a^icii d' άμννάθίΐν (^άμνναθβίν, 
 
 Elms. Dind. in Annot.), CEd. T. 
 777. Matth. §. 535, b. 
 
 1016. 01 Εξηρπασμίνοι [^CHOL. : 01 
 
 θ(ράποντ€ς ΚρΕοντος), ravishers, Burt. 
 Matth. Wund. Ellendt. raptce puella, 
 Elms. Herm. “Verum medium suam 
 et legitimam significationem tuetur, 
 sibi enim suisque usibus Creon rapu- 
 erat. Pinguiter judicat Blomf. Gloss. 
 .^sch. Ag. 252.” Ell. See exam- | 
 pies in Bernhardy, p. 346. ! 
 
 1017. earapev, stand still. Arist. 
 Eq. 865. όταν μβν ή λίμνη καταστη. 
 
 ιοι8. άμαυρω. The commenta- 'ι( 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 107 
 
 ΘΗ. 68 ού κατάρχβίν της €Κ€Ϊ, ττομττον di μβ 
 
 χωρβΐΐ', 1 ν\ el μίν ίν τόττοισι τοϊσ 8 ^χβις ιο2ο 
 
 τας 7Γαΐ8ας ημών^ αυτός βκδβίζης e/xo/* 
 
 €1 δ' εγκρατείς φεύγουσίΐ/^ ούδεί' δει ττονεϊν. 
 
 αλλοί γαρ οΐ σττεύδοντες^ ους ου μη ποτέ 
 
 χώρας φυγορτες τησδ' επεύχωνται θεοΐς. 
 
 άλλ* εζυφηγού' γνώθί δ\ ώς εχων εχει, 1025 
 
 καί σ είλε θηρώνθ* η τύχη' τα γαρ δόλω 
 
 τω μη δικαίω κτηματ ούχΙ σώζεται. 
 
 tors are divided between this word 
 and άφαυρω, a marginal reading in 
 Turnebus. Gaisford (coll. Eur. 
 Here. F. 228. αμαυρόν σθβνοί)^ Mat- 
 thiae, Wunder, and Dindorf, adopt 
 the former; (Matthiee translating, 
 cujus splendor regius obscuratus est (cf. 
 sup. 880.957-8); Brunch, Schsef., 
 Herm., EU. and Passow, adopt the 
 latter; Ellendt observing : “ Creon 
 enim nec ignohilis nec ohscurns, in- 
 firmum autem dpavpos nunquam sig- 
 nificavit.” 
 
 1019. (προστάσσω σοι) όδοΰ κα- 
 τάρχαν (viam preeire, Ell.) της e/cei 
 (quod etsi pro fWae dictum esse 
 videatur, non est tamen aliud quid- 
 quam nisi illius vice. Id.) Wunder : 
 jubeo te in earn me viam educere, 
 in quam puellse abductse sunt. 
 
 lb. πομτΓον be μ€ χωρ€Ϊν. I under¬ 
 stand this adj. in an active sense, 
 and having the accusative μ€ after 
 it, as σε φύξιμος, Antig. 789. There¬ 
 fore : to go, escorting me, i. e. having 
 me for your companion. On refer¬ 
 ring to Ellendt, I find both this 
 learned lexicographer and Erfurdt 
 taking much the same view of the 
 case. Wunder translates : ego vero 
 tibi comes esse volo. Libri, Gaisf. 
 Bind. W^und. δε μβ. Br. δ’ ^μοί. 
 Elms, δε' μοι (coll. Eur. El. 669.). 
 Herm. δ’ ε’/χε'. 
 
 10 20. €v τόττοισι To 7 ab\ An Orten 
 hier, Donn. (meaning in the vici¬ 
 nity). 
 
 1021. τας 7 Γα''ώας ημών. Cf. Wun¬ 
 der ad Aj. 1283. τας ττάΙΒας ημ'ιν, 
 Elms. τας τταΤδαρ, η μην, Both, raff 
 παίδας, ηκων, Herm. 
 
 1022. ey κρατείς SC. των τταίδων. 
 Elms. Phil. τόξων εγκρατής, where 
 Ellendt, I think, wrongly translates, 
 potens. 
 
 1023—4. ους ον μη — επεύχωνται, 
 whom your servants will not have to 
 thank the gods that they have escaped, 
 and that they have got clean out of 
 these territories. For remarks on the 
 construction, see Hermann in loco, 
 Elmsley’s Medea 1120. επεύχωνται, 
 (which Dindorf in his Annotations 
 considers to be a solecism,) Herm. 
 Matth. Gaisf. Hart, επεύξωνται, Schol. 
 Neue, Reis. Elms. Deed. Dind. 
 Wund. επευξυνται, Br. επεύχονται, 
 Libri. 
 
 1 025— 6 . — τύχη. 
 
 The doom for others destined now 
 is thine. 
 
 And FatCj at length, in thine own 
 toils hath snared thee. Dale. 
 
 1026—7. ^όλω κτήματα —κτηθεντα, 
 
 things obtained by craft. Plato Cra- 
 tyl. 423, b. δηλωμα τω σωματι. Phil. 
 46, a. raff της ψώρας Ιάσεις τω rpt- 
 
108 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κουκ αΧΚον eh τόδ’* ώί βζοιδά σβ 
 ου ψιλού ούδ’ ασκ€υον eV τοσηνδ' υβριυ 
 ηκοντα τόλμης- της τταρβστώσης τανυν' 1030 
 
 άλλ’ βσθ^ ότω συ τηστός ων βδρας TaSe. 
 a OH μ αυρησαι, μη0€ τηνοβ την ττολιν 
 όνος τΓΟίησαι φωτός άσθβνβστόραν. 
 νο€Ϊς TL τούτων, η μάτην τανυν τέ σοι 
 δοκβΐ λελβχθαί, χώ^β ταυτ όμηχανώ ; 1035 
 
 ΚΡ. oooev συ μβμτττον evUao ων βρεις εμοί' 
 οίκοι δε χημβΐς εισόμεσθ' a χρη ττοιεΐν, 
 
 ΘΗ. χωρών απειλεί νυν' συ δ’ ημΐν, ΟΙδίπους, 
 εκηλος αύτοΰ μίμνε, πιστωθεις ότι, 
 
 /Sell/, &C. cf. Kiihn. §.585· Anm. i. 
 Bernhardy, p. 105. 
 
 1028. KOVK aWov €^ei 9 els τόδ’. 
 
 (τόδ\ A. Aid. Reis. Ilerm. Dind. τάδ’, 
 La. Lb. B. T. V. Gaisf. Wund.) The 
 sense of this somewhat difficult pas¬ 
 sage may, I think, be attained by 
 placing a strong emphasis on the pre¬ 
 ceding word σώζεται, and then on the 
 word τόδβ ; the whole sense of The¬ 
 seus’s mind being this: “ things may 
 be gained by unrighteous treachery, 
 but they are not preserved by it: in 
 gaining your boot5% you have had 
 assistance ; in preserving it, you shall 
 have none: for as to your coming 
 here without assistants,” continues 
 the Attic monarch, casting his eye 
 round, “ that is of course out of the 
 question.” A simpler and perhaps 
 better mode will be to refer the τάδε 
 to V. 1019, or V. 1025 sq. and un¬ 
 derstand : “ And in respect to the 
 matter of which I speak, I will have 
 no agent but yourself.” The Sopho- 
 clean use of the words τάδε and τάδε, 
 as fixing the thoughts on an entire 
 sentence, has been already noticed 
 in CEd. T. 1158. and elsewhere. 
 
 1029. is τοσηνδ' — τανυν, ‘^facti 
 
 audacia cum mentis, qua genitum 
 est, superbia conjungitur.” Ell. 
 
 103 T . πιστοί ων = πιστευωι/. ScHOL. 
 Cf. Kiihn. §. 409, 3. Anm. i. 
 
 1034. νο€Ϊς τι τούτων ; erkennst 
 du’s } Donn. 
 
 1034—5. τανυν τε χωτε, i. e. τα νυν 
 τε και τότε, οτε. nunc ut turn. Neue 
 compares El. 676. νυν τε και πάλαι. 
 This dost thou comprehend, or is it 
 said 
 
 In vain, as when this insult first was 
 planned } Dale. 
 
 1035. χωτε ταυτ’ €μηχανώ, et qU(B 
 Chorus dixit tibi, quum heec molirere. 
 Wund. But how had Theseus be¬ 
 come cognizant of what the Chorus 
 said on that occasion ? he was not 
 present on the stage. 
 
 1037. εισό/ιεσ^’. cf. Matth. §. 
 
 ^ > 3 · 
 
 1036. μεμπτόν, which will meet 
 with a rebuke from me. (cf. infr. 
 1695.) iv6ab' ών, while you are 
 here, on this spot. 
 
 1038. χωρών απειλεί νυν, ** on, 
 and threaten as you go,” (obliging 
 Creon to precede him.) The em¬ 
 phasis on the participle χωρών. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 109 
 
 ην μη θάνω *γω TTpoaOev^ ού\ί παύσομαι, 1040 
 
 7Γρ\ρ αν σ€ των σών κύριον στήσω τίκνων. 
 
 ΟΙ. οναιο^ θησβν, τον Τ€ γενναίου χαριν 
 και της' ττρος ημάς ενδίκου προμηθίας. 
 
 ΧΟ. εϊην οθί δαΐων (ττροφ. d , 
 
 
 1042. οναιο (ονίνημι). Passiviim 
 solum dicitur (medium non agnosci- 
 mus). Ell, Carmichael (p. 216.) 
 admits mid. ονίναμαι, I derive benefit. 
 For Kiihner’s idea of μίpos under¬ 
 stood, see §. 526. Anm. 2. 
 
 1044. sq. The Chorus foreseeing 
 that a collision will ensue between 
 the troops of Creon and those of 
 Theseus, speculate as to the spot 
 where it will take place, and wish 
 themselves spectators of the com¬ 
 bat, They feel a presentiment that 
 their own brave compatriots vdll be 
 the victors, that Creon will be cap¬ 
 tured (how he escapes from The¬ 
 seus, poetry is not called upon to 
 mention), and the virgin daughters 
 be restored to their sorrowing pa¬ 
 rent. Prayers to Zeus, to Pallas 
 Athene, to Artemis and Apollo for 
 assistance, form the conclusion of 
 the ode. From the above sketch of 
 the Choral strain, it is evident that 
 whatever other difficulties may oc¬ 
 cur in its consideration, —and they 
 will be found neither few nor tri¬ 
 fling,—a good map is indispensable 
 for carrying us through some por¬ 
 tion of them. Kruse’s Atlas of At¬ 
 tica and the Megarid is the one 
 which will be here used for the pur¬ 
 pose. From that map it appears to 
 me, that the best course which 
 Creon’s forces, consisting of cha¬ 
 riots as well as horsemen, could 
 take for carrying off their prey, was 
 to make instantly for the Gephyrae, 
 by which they would not only cross 
 the Cephisus, but find themselves 
 on the “ holy road,” which led to 
 
 Eleusis (λα/ζπάδ^? άκται). Pursuing 
 this route for a time, they would 
 come to a spot near the Eleusinian 
 gulf, where two roads meet (cf. sup. 
 900.), the one leading to Eleusis, 
 which they would avoid, the other 
 forming part of the “ holy road” 
 to Delphi, and which they would 
 pursue to the Pythian temple at 
 (Enoe. After passing this, they 
 would find a direct road to Thebes, 
 through the pass at Eleutherae, and 
 through the recesses of Mount Ci- 
 thaeron. The first object of the Co- 
 Ionian and Attic troops would na¬ 
 turally be to get the start of their 
 opponents, and intercept them at 
 the point where the two roads, just 
 mentioned, meet. Failing this, they 
 would pursue on the road to Delphi; 
 and the Chorus suggest the Pythian 
 temple at Qinoe as the spot where 
 the combat will take place. And 
 much geographical and philological 
 difficulty would have been spared 
 to editors of Sophocles, had the 
 Chorus allowed the combat to occur 
 at either of the above places ; but 
 as Reisig and Wunder have sup¬ 
 posed a second mode of reaching 
 (Enoe, and conclude that the Cho¬ 
 rus give Creon the choice of either 
 road, we shall find ourselves obliged 
 to seek for a road, which Kruse’s 
 map does not enable us to find,—for 
 a snow-mountain, which will not 
 make its appearance,—and for a pas¬ 
 ture-ground, which seems equally 
 averse to fix its exact locality, but 
 which in return presents us with an 
 epithet prolific of disputation :—of 
 
110 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 άνδρών τάχ^ ίτηστροφαι ιο45 
 
 τον χαλκοβόαν *Άρη 
 μίζουσυν^ η 7rpo9 Υ1υθίαί9^ 
 
 all which difficulties something will 
 he said as they respectively occur. 
 At present it will be sufficient to 
 add, that in the first strophe of this 
 ode, the prevalent metre is gly- 
 conic, relieved by iambics. 
 
 1044 — 5 . 8 αΐων avdpSiv (πιστροφαί. 
 The commentators generally refer 
 the last of these three words to the 
 turn which the Theban ravishers 
 would have to make when commenc¬ 
 ing their attack on the Athenians as¬ 
 saulting them behind. But if the 
 Athenian troops had, according to 
 Theseus’s directions, previously made 
 themselves masters of the pass, where 
 the two roads met, the turn would 
 rather have been made by the Attic 
 troops. As a military term, the 
 word (πιστροφαΧ may receive illustra¬ 
 tion from my “ Frogs” of Aristoph. 
 V. 1067 . Translate generally, ivhere 
 warlike men turning themselves about. 
 
 1046. χάλκοβόας (βοη), with brazen 
 voice. ScHOL. : στ€ρ€θβόαν, μεγαλό¬ 
 φωναν, coll. ΐ 1 . V. 7 ^ 3 · χαλκεοφώνω. 
 Virg. .^n. VI. 62^.ferrea vox. For 
 other epithets of the god, see Klau- 
 sen’s Theol. p. 128. 
 
 1046— 7. ’'Αρη μίξονσιν. Homer 
 more commonly uses the verb σννά- 
 γειν in this sense. II. II. 381. iva 
 ^ννάγωμεν αρηα. V. 861. ερώα ξννά- 
 γοντες ’'Αρηος. But it was the de¬ 
 light of Sophocles to invent novel¬ 
 ties of expression, and to put his 
 commentators, and perhaps his con¬ 
 temporaries, to great difficulties 
 thereby. 
 
 1047— 9· TTpos ΤΙνθίαις ή λαμττάσιν 
 άκταϊς. As the Scholiast informs 
 us that the word άκταΙς belongs 
 equally to the two preceding adjec¬ 
 tives, it is better to consider the 
 
 sense of the substantive, before we 
 attend to the adjectives belonging 
 to it. What is the strict meaning 
 of the word 'άκτη, has been explained 
 in a subsequent note (infr. 1240.) : 
 it was a triangular promontory, run¬ 
 ning some way into the sea, and 
 so forming a peninsula of more or 
 less extent. But it is not unfre- 
 quently applied to a sea-shore of any 
 kind ; and as Eleusis lay on the gulf 
 of the same name, there is no diffi¬ 
 culty in understanding Eleusis by 
 the words λaμ^Γά^εs άκταί. But how 
 will that terra apply to the Py¬ 
 thian temple at CEnols which was 
 situated a considerable way in-land ? 
 They are joined by a zeugma, say 
 the commentators. A zeugma often 
 connects two very distant notions in 
 the Greek writings, and this must 
 certainly be admitted to be among 
 the most distant; but we are not 
 without means of escape. In a 
 former play (QEd. T. 184.) the word 
 άτκη was found to imply an altar: 
 and if an altar, it might by a well 
 known rule in Greek, imply a temple 
 also ; and the translation would then 
 be, near the Pythian or Eleusinian 
 temple. On an inspection of Kruse’s 
 Atlas, the reader will find that the 
 latter temple lay almost as near the 
 Holy Road as the former; and as 
 one of the Scholiasts understands 
 the word άκτη here as equivalent to 
 the word altar (Άκται?· το βωμόν 
 [Xeyet]), we seem justified in ren¬ 
 dering the word άκταΊς, temples. 
 
 1047. UvOlais. The most memo¬ 
 rable fact connected with this Py¬ 
 thian temple at (Enoe, has been 
 preserved by the Scholiast, who ob¬ 
 serves, that sacrificial rites took 
 
01ΔΙΠ0ΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 Ill 
 
 η λαμπάσιν άκταΐ^, 
 
 ου UoTPLaL σβμνα τιθηνουνταί Τ€λη 1050 
 
 θρατοΐσιν, ών καΐ \ρυσ(α 
 
 place there every day when the Delphic 
 θεωρία was celebrated, {θύει de 6 
 μάντις, όταν μεν τά εΐί ΑεΧφούί πόμ~ 
 πιμα 'γενηται, κα\ θεωρία πεμπηται, εν 
 Olvorj καθ' εκάστην ημέραν εν τω JJv- 
 θίω.) Cf. Muller’s Dorians, I. 267. 
 
 1049. Χαμπάσιν άκταΐί, the torch- 
 lighted shore, or, temple. Why Eleusis 
 should be thus termed, the reader of 
 Aristophanes need not be informed. 
 The nightly ceremonies which there 
 took place, and the prodigious blaze 
 of torches usual on such occasions 
 (Ran. 340. εγειρε ψλογεας Χαμπά8ας 
 εν χερ<τ\ τινάσσων. 3$0. συ δε Χαμ- 
 πάδι φεγγών προβάδην t^ay κ. τ. e.), 
 sufficiently justify the epithet. 
 
 1050. UoTviai. Demeter and Kora. 
 ηκετ' ενφρονες, ΐΧαοι, 
 
 πότνιαι, αΧσος is νμετερον' 
 ού δη άνδράσιν ον θεμιτόν είσοραν 
 οργιά σεμνά θεαίν, Χνα Χαμττάσι φαίνε- 
 τον αμβροτον οφιν. 
 μόΧετον, εΧθετον, άντόμεθ*, ω 
 θεσμοφόρω ττοΧνποτνία. 
 
 Arist. Thes. 1148. 
 
 Αιαβεβηκότι δε ήδη τον 'Ασωπόν, κα\ 
 της πόΧεως δέκα μάΧιστα άφεστηκότι 
 σταδιονς, Ώοτνιών εστιν ερείπια, καΐ εν 
 αντοίς ίιΧσος Αήμητρος και Κόρης. 
 Pausan. IX. 8. ι. 
 
 lb. τιθηνεω (τιθηνη), properly said 
 of the duties discharged by a nurse 
 to an infant, h. Horn. Cer. 142. 
 ScHOL. : επιμεΧουνται, κα\ άζιοΰνται 
 θεραπείας. 
 
 lb. τεΧη=τεΧετάς, mysteries. Both 
 words have been illustrated in my 
 Wasps and Frogs of Aristophanes. 
 Metre: dip. iamb, choriamb, dip. 
 iamb. 
 
 1051. ων. To which of the pre¬ 
 ceding nouns, HoTviaiy τεΧη, θνατοΐσιν. 
 
 does this relative belong ? Herm. and 
 Deed, (for Hartung’s opinion, see I. 
 127.) decide for θνατοΐσιν: the former 
 observing, that the obligation of si¬ 
 lence in regard to these mysteries 
 lay ,as much upon the Eumolpidse, 
 as the other portion of the commu¬ 
 nity. They consequently join κΧής 
 προσπόΧων, and translate : “ morta- 
 libus, quorum linguam coercet aurea 
 antistitum Eumolpidarum clavis, i. e. 
 quibus antistites Eumolpidse tacitur- 
 nitatem imponunt.” Without im¬ 
 pugning the excellence of this ver¬ 
 sion, I may perhaps be excused for 
 suggesting, that by referring the 
 relative ων to ΤΙότνιαι, we get a 
 larger insight into the religious 
 policy of Athens. As the task 
 of superintending and conducting 
 religious ceremonies in that me¬ 
 tropolis was often vested in parti¬ 
 cular families,—as in that of the 
 Eumolpidse for the Eleusinian mys¬ 
 teries,—so a power seems to have 
 lain with these persons of interpret¬ 
 ing sacred books in their possession, 
 and occasionally admitting innova¬ 
 tions in the rites, (cf. infr, 1526.)—a 
 piece of state-policy of unquestion¬ 
 able value. The golden key there¬ 
 fore upon the tongue of the Eumol¬ 
 pidse might imply the right of un¬ 
 locking as well as shutting, of open¬ 
 ing new rites in the administration 
 of the mysteries, (which certainly did 
 not remain invariably the <1 same) as 
 well as enjoining silence upon former 
 ones. From the hvmn of Callima- 
 chus to Ceres, it appears that a 
 key was worn on the shoulder of 
 the priestess who officiated in her 
 mysteries. That the key was re- 
 
 q See observations to that effect in the “ Introduction” to my Frogs of Aristophanes. 
 
112 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κλΎ}ς· ίτη γλωσσά βφακ€ 
 ττροσττόλων Έίύμολτηδαρ' 
 evff οίμαί τον ίγρβμάχαν 
 ^ησβα κα\ ray διστολον^ 
 άδμητας άδβλψάί 
 ανταρκύ τάχ’ εμμί^βιν β 
 τονσδ^ άνα χωρούν’ 
 η ΤΓον τον €(Ι)€σ7Γ€ρον 
 
 cognized among the Jews as emble¬ 
 matic of unlimited power to shut 
 and open both in civil and religious 
 cases, is clear from more than one 
 passage in Isaiah. Thus when the 
 high office of Shebna is to be trans¬ 
 ferred to Eliakim, it is said of the 
 latter: 
 
 And I will lay the key of the house 
 of David upon his shoulder : 
 And he shall open, and none shall 
 shut; 
 
 And he shall shut, and none shall 
 open. XXII. 22. 
 
 And in a still more exalted in¬ 
 stance : 
 
 And the ^ government shall be upon 
 his shoulder. IX. 5. 
 
 See also on this subject Dissen’s 
 Comment, in Find. p. 283. 
 
 1053. Έυμόλπώαν. On this dis¬ 
 tinguished family, see Heyne ad 
 Apollod. p. 338. Aristides in Orat. 
 Eleusin. I. 451. Creuzer’s Symbol. 
 IV. 355. sq. 442. sq. 482. sq. Thu- 
 dichum I. p. 308. Both and Wun- 
 der throw this and the preceding 
 verse into one, to which Dindorf in 
 his Annotations assents. Metre: 
 tetram. epitr. catal. 
 
 1054. €γρ€μάχαν (εγβ/ρω, μάχη), 
 fight-awakening; epithet applied to 
 Pallas in the Homeric hymn to Ce¬ 
 res, V. 424. In the present instance. 
 
 i05S 
 
 Λ|/τ. ct . 
 
 Triclinius substituted it for 6 ρ(ΐβά- 
 ταν, the old reading. 
 
 Ib. €v6a, there (emphatic). Metre 
 doubtful. 
 
 1055 . διστόλου? (στελλω). two. 
 Cf. Pass in μονόο-τολος. 
 
 1056. ά^μη9 (a, Βαμάω) =αΒμητυς, 
 untamed: metaphorically used of 
 virgins. Od. VI. 109. παρθένος αδ- 
 μης. Cf. infr. 1321. 
 
 Ib. αδβλφά?, Br. Dind. Gaisf. 
 άΒζλφζάς (Wund. A. B. Rice. V.) 
 considered as a trisyllable. 
 
 1057 . ανταρκύ {αρκίω) βοα, piignani 
 assequendo consilio satisfacturam, i.e. 
 fortem. Ell. βοα, pugnee. Dind. 
 
 Ib. €μμί^€ΐν, sc. rois TToXepiois. 
 Metre : dochm. and dip. iamb. 
 
 1258. τούσδ’ άνά χώρους. Added 
 as explanatory of the adverb €νθα, 
 under the supposition that that 
 word had dropped from the hearers’ 
 minds. Hermann, however, proposes 
 to carry the words on to the anti¬ 
 strophe, translating as follows: ibi 
 puto rnox diniicatuni iri: illis in lo- 
 cis, nisi forte occidentem versus aufu- 
 gerunt. Metre: adonic. 
 
 1059-60. ή που {perchance it may 
 he) πελώσι {they will approach, or 
 reach). Before involving ourselves 
 in the local difficulties with which we 
 shall presently have to deal, it may 
 be asked, do these words so much 
 
 That is, the ensign of government; the sceptre, the sAvord, the key, or the like, &.c. 
 
 LovvTii· 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 113 
 
 7 Γ€τρα 9 Ρΐφάδθ 9 π€λωσ ιο6ο 
 
 Ο1άτίδθ9 €κ ρομοΰ, 
 
 indicate a choice of road, as further 
 pursuit in one already chosen ? To 
 me they appear to mark the latter; 
 to Wunder and Reisig, whose ob¬ 
 ject it now becomes to make Creon’s 
 horsemen and charioteers reach 
 CEnoe by a different route, they ne¬ 
 cessarily indicate the former. 
 
 1059. Tov i(peanepov (χωρορ.) Ell. 
 cVt TOV eanepov. ScHOL. Cf. Bern- 
 hardy, p. 184. 
 
 1060. 7Γ€τρας νιφάδας. The Scho¬ 
 liast, by a set of premises drawn 
 from the ancient writer Ister, comes, 
 in Reisig’s opinion, to the following 
 conclusion, that νιφάς πέτρα = λεία 
 πέτρα=Αίγάλεωι/. Reisig is wrong 
 in his opinion, says Hermann ; Ister 
 and the Scholiast come to no such 
 conclusion: but distinguish clearly 
 between the two places. Wunder 
 allows the Scholiast to be right in 
 understanding Mount -^Egaleos by 
 the πε'τρα νιφάς, but quarrels with 
 the etymology by which the Scho¬ 
 liast arrives at his conclusion. But 
 where was this Mount Higaleos ? 
 In Kruse’s map it stands so much 
 more south than would in any way 
 have suited Creon’s purpose, that 
 Wunder proceeds to quarrel with 
 Kruse’s and Muller’s geography, 
 and asserts that they ought to have 
 substituted Higaleos for Corydalus, 
 part of that mountain-chain which 
 separated the Eleusinian and Attic 
 plains. He accordingly marches the 
 Theban troops up to Acharnse, turns 
 them between the Icarian and Co- 
 rydalian, or what he considers the 
 Aigalean mount, and having got 
 them on the western (ε’φεσπεροι^) 
 side of this, the Eleusinian plain and 
 
 the “holy road” are before them, 
 and then—“ on go the chariots, on 
 go the horsemen”—for (Enoe. And 
 here the learned writer is content to 
 drop them. But where was the vo- 
 pos ΟΙάτις, from which the preposi¬ 
 tion eK shews that they had previ¬ 
 ously come ? Here new difficulties 
 await us, but before we encounter 
 these, the grammar of the verb πε- 
 λωσ’ must be attended to. 
 
 Ib. πελώσ’. ScHOL. yp. πεΚάζονσι, 
 which Elmsley and Hermann cor¬ 
 rect into ττίΚάσουσι. (πελωσ’=πελά- 
 (τονσι. Matth. §. 181.2. a.) See fur¬ 
 ther a learned note by Ellendt on 
 the subject, and cf. Wunder ad 
 Electr. 483. 
 
 1061. οΙάτώος, Dor., for Ionic 
 Οίητιδος. “ Οίητις,” says O. Muller 
 (Ersch. Encyclop. VI. 225. not. 21.), 
 “ is derived from Olov, an Attic 
 deme, situated near Deceleiaand 
 the learned writer cites Harpocra- 
 tion as his authority. “ The analo¬ 
 gies of language forbid,” says Wun¬ 
 der very justly, “ any such deriva¬ 
 tion. οΙάτις or Olijns must be de¬ 
 rived from Οία or Ο’ίη, a deme of 
 CEneis, near Mount .lilgaleos.” And 
 he too cites Harpocration for his 
 purpose: adding, however, his own 
 conviction, “ that whatever the ques¬ 
 tion of deme and analogy might be, 
 the pasture-ground in question lay 
 to the north of Athens, ahd not far 
 from Acharnse.” “ No !” the learn¬ 
 ed Hesychius would have said, had 
 he been still living, “ Οΐάτις has no¬ 
 thing to do with any deme what¬ 
 ever ; for νομος signifies pasture- 
 ground^ and οΙάτις, fed down hy 
 sheep'^:” and with this explanation 
 
 8 Hesycli.; Oldridos 4κ νομού' 2οφ. Oi8. εττί Κολ.> rys ττροβατ^υομίνης εκ ν(μ'ησΐω$’ 
 δε, άττό 0Ϊ7;5 του δή/Λου. κακώς, ού yap iyyvs κεΓταί. 
 
 οί 
 
 I 
 
114 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ττώλοίσιν^ η ρίμφαρματοί9 
 (f>€uyovT€9 άμίλλαΐ9· 
 
 αλώσβταί' Selpo? 6 ττροσχώρων^Αρψ, ^065 
 
 of that learned and generally accu¬ 
 rate lexicographer there seem good 
 reasons for agreeing. Wunder and 
 Reisig, as we have seen, drop 
 Creon’s troops at Qinoe, by what¬ 
 ever route they bring them there. 
 But though close upon the border- 
 ground between Attica and Bceotia, 
 are the troops of Theseus to hesi¬ 
 tate on passing it on such an occa¬ 
 sion ? And supposing that border 
 passed, what have we first to look 
 out for ? a pasture-ground fed down 
 hy sheep, according to Hesychius. 
 Such pastures are not now, as tra¬ 
 vellers assure us (Kruse, Hell. II. 
 5.), to be found in the neighbour¬ 
 hood of Cithseron; but that such 
 were found, as well for sheep as 
 cattle, in older days, may safely be 
 concluded from the language of the 
 herdsmen in a former play of So¬ 
 phocles (CEd. T. 1135.) ; and if any 
 person should be disposed to quarrel 
 with the derivation of olaxLs from 
 ois, he must remember, that being 
 across the border, he has to deal 
 with Theban, not with Attic Greek. 
 This pasture-ground passed, — and 
 Kruse’s map will furnish more than 
 one for our purpose,—we are in the 
 most intricate part of that chain of 
 hills known by the name of Cithse- 
 ron: was there no one hill among 
 that chain, which from the snow 
 lying longer there than elsewhere, 
 bore the name of vicpas πβτρα^, or 
 is it peculiar to the Swiss, to give a 
 separate nomenclature to one parti¬ 
 cular portion of a mountain-chain, 
 and there, as here, from ideas con¬ 
 necting themselves with snoiu ? Put¬ 
 
 ting all these things together, it ap¬ 
 pears to me that the Chorus speak 
 throughout, not of a double but a 
 continued route ; and that their ge¬ 
 neral train of reasoning is as fol¬ 
 lows : “Be Creon where he will; 
 in our country or his own; in the 
 open plain, or in the mountainous 
 recess, still he will be captured; for 
 he has to deal with brave men, who 
 will not be baffled by him.” 
 
 1061, e«. For numerous exam¬ 
 ples of this preposition in the sense 
 of quitting, departing from, &c., see 
 Ellendt I. 547-8. 
 
 1062. ριμφάρματος (ρίμφα, αρμα), 
 travelling with quick wheels. Cf. 
 Boeckh’s Expl. Find. p. 140. ριμ- 
 
 φάρματοί αμιΧλαί=·αμΐ\\αι. αρμάτων 
 ρίμφα φξνγόντων. Matth. §. 44^* 
 Obs. 3> C. Generally : chariots con¬ 
 tending tvith each other in rapidity 
 of movement. Having had already 
 sufficient difficulties upon our hands, 
 
 I stop not to inquire, why Thebes 
 was so early celebrated for the 
 number and excellence of her cha¬ 
 riots ; but as the subject has bear¬ 
 ings which may not at first sight 
 appear, a little attention will per¬ 
 haps be bestowed upon it hereafter. 
 
 1065. αΧώσ^ται, SC. Creon. Herm. 
 True : but how has he escaped the 
 strong grasp of Theseus in the in-* 
 terim ? Poetry hears, but does not 
 answer such questions. 
 
 Ib. deivos 6 προσχώρων (sup. 493*) 
 *'Αρης. Prosaically : the people of Co- 
 lonos are desperate combatants. Find. 
 Isth. VI. 35. χάλκασπις "Άρης, pede- 
 stris pugna. Diss. 
 
 r That the Boeotians were not Λvanting in such distinctions of name, see Kruse’s Hel¬ 
 las II. 10. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 115 
 
 B^Lva δβ ^ησ^ώαν άκμά. 
 ττάς" γαρ άστράπτβί χαΧίΐ/ο^, 
 •πάσα δ* ορμάταυ κατ άμ- 
 ττυκτηρια φάλαρα πώλων 
 άμβασις^ οϊ τάν ^Ιτπτίαν 
 
 τίμώσιν *Αθάναν 
 
 \ ^ / / 
 
 καί τον ποντίον γαίαοχον 
 
 'Peas* φίλον νΙόν. 
 
 €ρδουσίν, η μβλλονσ ; 
 ώί* προμνάταί τί μοί 
 γνώμα, τάχ αν δώσβιν 
 
 ιο66. θησ^ώαν, the subjects of 
 Theseus, i. e. the Athenians. Heller 
 compares Eur. El. 716. χοροί 'Arpei- 
 dav, Atrei domusque ejus. Neue, 
 Ώ^ισιστρατιδαν. coll. Wesseling ad 
 Herodot. V. 62. Valck. ad c. 65. 
 
 1067- 8. To be thrown into one 
 verse, like 1052, 3. Dindorf, consi¬ 
 dering φάλαρα πώλων at V. 1069. to 
 be a grammatical intrusion, proposes 
 to read κατά at the end of v. 1067, 
 and to leave lacunae in the following 
 verse, as thus ; άμπνκτήρια * * or άμ. 
 πνκτηρι * *. As examples of the hia¬ 
 tus, he gives Aj. 425. Trach. 510. 
 
 1068- 70. πάσα πώλων άμβασίΣ 
 seems to me a bold Sophoclean equi¬ 
 valent for “ all the mounted horse¬ 
 men.” And on turning to preced¬ 
 ing commentators, I find this con¬ 
 jecture fully confirmed. “ Omnis 
 equitatus, omnis numerus αναβατών.” 
 Musgr. Omnis cohors equis insi- 
 dens. Reis. ol άναβάται πάντως. Ell. 
 
 1068. όρμάται. Eur. Suppl. 594. 
 ορμάσθαι χρζών j πάντ avbp οπλίτην, 
 αρμάτων τ ΐπΐμβάτην, | μοναμπνκων re 
 φάλαρα κινεϊσθαι. 
 
 Ib. άμπνκτήρια {αμττυξ, horse’s 
 frontlet) φάλαρα, frontal trappings. 
 
 1070. αμβασίζ — άνάβασις, das Auf- 
 
 crrp. β\ 
 
 1075 
 
 sitzen zu Ross, sitting on horseback. 
 Pass. 
 
 Ib. άμβασις, oi. Cf. Matth. §. 302. 
 
 1070— I. τάν Ιππίαν'Αβάναν. Pau- 
 san. VIII. 47» ‘^η’πία δε παρά Tois 
 Μανθονρΐ€νσιν ^ΐχ^ν (Athene sc.) eVt- 
 κλησιν, ΟΤΙ τω (κείνων λόγω γινόμενης 
 τοΊς θεοΐς προς Γίγαντας μάχης επηλα- 
 σεν 'Εγκελά8ω ίππων το άρμα. Cf. 
 Creuzer’s Symb. II. 782. sq. 
 
 J073. 'Peay, a monosyllable. Din¬ 
 dorf compares the reading of several 
 MSS. in II. XV. 187. τρεις γάρ τ' 
 εκ Κρόνον ειμεν άδελφεοί, ονς τεκετο 
 ‘Ρεα : and Κρέων, a monosyllable, 
 Antig. 156. 
 
 1074· ^'pbovaiv η μελλονσ; Are 
 they doing; are they in action ? or 
 do they dally } The ellipse is easily 
 filled up in the Greek verb, but who 
 would mar Shakespeare’s “ I’U do. 
 I’ll do. I’ll do,” by suggesting the 
 completion of the English ellipse } 
 
 1074-3. Ίτρομνάταί τί (cf. Xen. 
 Anab. VII. 3. 18.) μοι γνώμα, my 
 soul presages. Pass. Metre : iamb, 
 ischior. 
 
 1076. aj/ δώσειι^. The appearance 
 of av with an infinitive future, is, I 
 need not say, a signal for constant 
 battle among the verbal critics. For 
 
116 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 detva τ\οί(Γθίν^ ScLvcc δ* evpovcrcLV irpos dvOcLLp^oDV τταθτ], 
 Τ€λ€Ϊ TeXeL Zev9 rt κατ αμαρ' 
 
 μάντίζ βίμ ίσθΧων άγωνων, loSo 
 
 eXff aeXXala ταχνρρωστο^ ττβλβι,ας 
 αίθβρίας νβφβλα^ κύρσαιμι των8 αγώνων 
 ίωρησασα τονμον όμμα. 
 
 a strong and ingenious defence of 
 av so circumstanced, see Hartung, 
 11 . 275. sq. For other opinions on 
 the subject, see Matthiae, §. 598. a. 
 599, d. Reisig. de part, av, p. 99. 
 Poppo de eloc. Thucyd. p. 160, &c. 
 Metre; iamb, antispast. 
 
 Ib. δώσ6ίΐ/=αποδώσει/ (Phil. 668. 
 
 και δόντι δούναι, io restove the how to 
 him who gave it.) Dindorf, reading 
 €νδώσ€ΐ for av δώσειν, understands by 
 that word άνησ^ι, or navaerai, in the 
 sense of, “ the sufferings of the vir¬ 
 gins—and dreadfully they have suf¬ 
 fered—will have a remission,” or, 
 wiU come to an end.” What sub¬ 
 sequent alterations in the accentua¬ 
 tion of the text this emendation will 
 engender, will presently appear. El- 
 lendt (II. 787.) appears to read eV- 
 δωσ€ΐν. 
 
 1077. τάν δίΐνά {πάθη) τΧάσαν, SC. 
 Antigone. That the Chorus should 
 have thought much of her, and com¬ 
 paratively little of Ismene, is surely 
 compatible with the feelings of hu¬ 
 man nature, and the whole tenour 
 of the drama. Dindorf, however, 
 supposing that both must necessa¬ 
 rily have been in the minds of the 
 Chorus, and bound by his emenda¬ 
 tion of Ινδώσΐΐ, accentuates τάν — 
 τΧασάν — evpovaav. Elmsley had pre¬ 
 viously adopted the same reading, 
 “ erutam a scholiis.” 
 
 Ib. (vpovaav (El. 1061. ονασιν βυ- 
 ρωσι) προς αύθαίμων, on the part of 
 her relations, or brothers. Metre: 
 tetram. iamb. 
 
 Ib. ανθαίρων. Both e conject. 
 Elms. Herm. Dind. Wund. αΰθομαί- 
 μων, vulg. 
 
 1079. κατ άμαρ, to-day, i. e. καθ' 
 ημίραν την νυν. On the sentiment, 
 cf. Klaus. Theol. p. 81. Metre: 
 dip. iamb, and adonic. 
 
 1080-3. Matth. ap. Hell, com¬ 
 pares Eur. Phoen. 163. άν€μώκ€ος cWe 
 δρόμον νεφίΚας ποσ'ιν εξανύσαιμι δι 
 αίθερος προς εμον όμογενετορα. 
 
 Ιθ8ΐ. άελλαία ταχνρρωστος = σνν 
 άεΧλαίω τάχει ρωομενη. WuND. See 
 also the same learned writer ad 
 Antig. 108. Philoct. 1426. Metre 
 in this and preceding verse, epi- 
 trites. 
 
 1083. αιθέριας νεφελας κνρσαιμ' . 
 I understand with EUendt, “ asse- 
 quar, i. e. tollar ad nubes.” Herm. 
 Deed. Wund. Dind. connect κνρσαιμι 
 τωνδ^ αγώνων, νεφελας being under¬ 
 stood as ex nube (cf. Matth. §. 354, 
 ζ.). Libri : κύρσαιμ αυτών δ’ αγώνων. 
 Metre : penthem. dact. and dim. 
 iamb. cat. 
 
 1084. εωρησασα (Libri, θεωρη- 
 σασα) τονμον όμμα. The emendation 
 in the text is Wunder’s, and has 
 been adopted by Dindorf, who un¬ 
 derstand generally : κνρσαιμι τώνδ 
 αγώνων τω εμω ομματι, εωρησασα (i. 6 
 αΙωρησασα) αντό. Utinain has pugnas 
 assequar oculis meis sublime latis. 
 Before offering a new, and it may 
 be thought a very bold explanation 
 and construction of these words, let 
 me be allowed a few words previ¬ 
 ously in justification. No editor 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 117 
 
 Ιω πάνταρχβ θβών, άντ. 0, 
 
 παντόπτα Zev, πόροί^ 1085 
 
 γάς τασδε δαμονχοί^ 
 
 σθβνβί Vi VLK€L(p τον όναγρον Τ€λ€ίώσαί λόχον, 
 σβμνά τ€ παϊς IlaAAas' ^Μάνα. ιοοο 
 
 was ever yet engaged on the works 
 of Sophocles who did not express 
 himself in words more or less strong 
 at the unusual forms and construc¬ 
 tions observable in his writings. 
 And whence did these forms origi¬ 
 nate (for that has been little inves¬ 
 tigated) ? I answer, first, no doubt, 
 from the dithyrambic poems of his 
 own country, out of which not 
 merely the choral ode, but the 
 whole drama originally grew; and 
 secondly, it may be from poems of 
 a similar nature prevalent in Thebes, 
 where the poet’s eye was continually 
 turned; and of which country the 
 dithyramb was perhaps as much 
 the native growth, as the wine-god, 
 to whose service it was dedicated. 
 In what extravagances of diction 
 and construction the Attic dithy- 
 rambists indulged, is now only 
 known from the severe scourgings 
 which Aristophanes never fails to 
 inflict, whenever any of that school 
 come before him. Were the di¬ 
 thyrambs of Thebes likely to be of 
 plainer structure ? If the intercourse 
 between Thebes and Phoenicia was 
 of that constant nature which I 
 have elsewhere supposed it to be, 
 Hebraisms and Orientalisms must 
 have prevailed in them to an unli¬ 
 mited extent; and all the extrava¬ 
 gances of language, which the Della 
 Crusca school of Italy, and that of 
 Gongora® in Spain exhibit, are per¬ 
 haps but faint resemblances of what 
 
 the Theban dithyrambists allowed 
 themselves. Knowing then the taste 
 of Sophocles for every thing Theban 
 and Pindaric, are we under such 
 circumstances to be bound by the 
 closest rules of grammar in consi¬ 
 dering his choral constructions } I 
 think not. In the present instance, 
 therefore, considering θ^ωρύν as a 
 transitive verb, converting θ^ωρησασ, 
 the reading of the books, into θ^ω- 
 ρησονσ , and leaving αγώνων to an¬ 
 swer for its genitive form as it best 
 may, I venture to translate the 
 whole passage : ‘Ό that like a dove, 
 rushing with storm-sped velocity, I 
 could find some ethereal cloud from 
 which to spectacle my eye with this 
 combat, on which my mind is brood¬ 
 ing.” Metre; antispast. and penth. 
 iamb. 
 
 1085. On the theology, see Klau- 
 sen, 67-76. 
 
 1086. δαμούχοΐί, i. e. Theseus. 
 
 plur. for sing. infr. 1348. ^η- 
 
 μονχος χθονός. 
 
 1089. σθβνα Vi viKeico = inl viktj. 
 A 5 sch. Choeph. 475. TTfjLiTrer’ αρωγήν 
 παισϊν προφρόνως eVl vlktj. 868. (Ίη δ’ 
 fVi νίκη. Eum. ΙΟΙ I. TO δ€ Κ€ρ 8 α- 
 Xeov ne'pTreiv πόΧ^ως erri νίκη. Herm. 
 €πινικίω aOevei, Libri. 
 
 Ib. Tov ζϋαγρον reXeiovv λόχον, to 
 bring the ambush (cf. sup. 901—2.) 
 to a successful termination by en¬ 
 abling the ambushment to capture 
 those for whom it lies in wait. 
 
 s By this ΛνπίβΓ Quevedo acted muclx the same part that Aristophanes did by the 
 Attic dithyrambists; and it required all Quevedo’s wit and vigour and learning to dis¬ 
 possess his countrymen of the absolute phrensy with which Gongora had infected them. 
 
 I 3 
 
118 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Kou τον άγρβνταν Άττολλω, 
 
 Kou κασιγνηταν ττνκνοατίκτων οτταδον 
 
 ώκνττόδούν βΧάφων στβργω δίττΧά^ apcoyas 
 
 μοΧβΐν ya ταδβ kou ττοΧίται^. '^95 
 
 ω ξβΐν άΧητα, τω σκοττω μίν ούκ epeh 
 
 ώί ψβνδόμαντί^, ras* /copay yap βΙσορώ 
 
 τάσδ’ άσσον αύθί9 ώδβ ττροσττοΧονμβνα^, 
 
 ΟΙ. ΤΓοϋ ΤΓοΰ ; τί φης ; ττώί eiTvas ; ΑΝ. ώ ττατβρ Trarep, 
 τις άν θβων σοί tovS αριστον ανδρ Ιδεΐν ιιοο 
 
 δοίη, τον ημάς δβνρο ττροσττβμψαντα σου j 
 ΟΙ. ώ τ€κνον, ή πάρβστον ; ΑΝ. αϊδο yap χ^ρβς 
 Θησέως ίσωσαν φιΧτατων τ οτταονων. 
 
 ΟΙ. 7 Γροσ€λθ€τ\ ώ τταΐ^ ττατρΊ, καί το μηδαμά 
 
 ίΧτΓίσθβν ηζοίν σώμα βαστάσαι δοτ€. ιιο5 
 
 ΑΝ. αΙτ€Ϊς ά Tcv^et* συν ττόθω yap η χάρις. 
 
 ΟΙ. ΤΓοϋ δητα, που 'στον ; ΑΝ. αΐδ' ομου πβΧαζομβν. 
 
 lOQI. τον άγρεντάν (}iU7itsman^ 
 ’Απόλλω. Cf. Pausan, I. 41» 5 * Thu- 
 dichum, p. 234. Klausen’s Theol. 
 
 ^17· 
 
 1092. πνκνόστικτος {στίζω), thickly 
 spotted. Phil. 183. στικτών η λασίων 
 pcTO, Θηρών. 
 
 Ib. οπαδον, pursuer. On the Ar¬ 
 temis veiiatrix, cf. Klaus. Theol. p. 
 99. 100. 
 
 1094. στ€ρΎω, I vehemently in¬ 
 treat. 
 
 Ib. διπλας άρω-γας, as joint as¬ 
 sistants. 
 
 1096. τω σκοπώ, in my quality of 
 a conjecturer. Cf. sup. 1074-5, 
 
 1097. ως ψβνδόμαντίί (elpi). 
 
 1098. προσποΧονμίνας, accedentes. 
 ScH^F. προσπολοις φνλασσομίνας, 
 carefully attended and guarded. 
 Herm. Matth. Dind. 
 
 IIOO-I. Tis av θζών — Ιδύν δοΙη. 
 
 Ο that some god would grant you 
 to see (the touching beauty of this 
 exclamation, and the strong em¬ 
 phasis laid on the word ϊδάν, will 
 not escape the discerning reader). 
 Cf. Pass, in πω? av. Matth. §. 514, 
 c. Hart. II. 263. 
 
 1103. ω T€Kvov, η πάρεστον ; By 
 TeKvov, understand Antigone, who 
 has just addressed her father. The 
 plural verb includes Ismene as well 
 as Antigone. Cf. infr. 1104. 1112. 
 See also Matth. §. 312, 2. 511, 2. 
 
 1104—5. TO μηδαμό. εΧπισθΐν ηζζίν, 
 Cf. Matth. p. 931. 
 
 1105. βαστάσαι, contrectare, Reis. 
 Cf. Blomf. Gloss. Ag. 34. 
 
 1106. συν πόθω y. η. χ.ζ=ζποθώ yap 
 ταυτα χαρίζ^σθαι, this is an Ojffice in 
 which duty and delight are united. 
 On aiTcis a τρύζει, see Matth. p. 7 ^ 9 * 
 Obs. I. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 119 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ φίλτατ €ρνη, ΑΝ. τω t€k6vtl παν φίλον. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ σκήπτρα φωτό^. ΑΝ. δνσμόρου ye δνσμορα. 
 
 ΟΙ. εχω τα φίλτατ ' ούδ" eV αν πανάθλιοί 
 Θανων αν βϊην, σφων παρβστώσαίν ίμοί. 
 όρβίσατ, ώ παΐ, πλβνρον άμφιδόζων 
 €μφνντ€ τω φύσαντί, κάναπαύσατον 
 του πρόσθ' όρη μου τουδβ δυστήνου πλάνου, 
 καί μοί τά πραχθόντ ehraff βράχίστ% όπβΐ 
 ταϊς τηλικαϊσδ^ σμίκρο9 όζαρκβΐ Aoyos*. 
 
 ΑΝ. όδ" €σθ^ 6 σώσα^' τοΰδ€ χρη κλύβιν, πάτβρ^ 
 καί σοί τ€ τουργον τουτ όμοί τ "άσται βραχύ. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ ^€lv€, μη θαύμαζα, προς- το λιπαρί^ 
 
 ΤΙίΟ 
 
 1115 
 
 ιιο8. Φ φίλτατ ?ρρη, ‘^my dear¬ 
 est blossoms.” Dale. 
 
 Ib. τω τ€κόντι παν (sc. Τζχθ^ν, cf. 
 Kubner II. p. 603.) φίλον. 
 
 iiog. Antigone and Ismene are 
 in the embraces of their father. 
 
 11 lO-I I. 
 
 I clasp my best beloved, nor can 
 die 
 
 Hapless in all, while ye are left to 
 bless me. Dale. 
 
 1112. epeiaaTe, applicate amplex- 
 ando. Ell. For construction, see 
 Matth. §. 301. 
 
 Ib. πλ^νρον άμφώίξων. Herm. : 
 applicate latus mild ad utrumque la- 
 tUS, ωστβ άμφι^ίζιον ylyveadai : nam 
 πλΐνρον dici puellarum. 
 
 1114. πλάνου. I understand by 
 this word, his agitated pacing about 
 the stage, while βρημος, or bereft of 
 his favourite daughter. Heath. : 
 et mild requiem conciliate ab hac so- 
 livaga, quce prius mild obtigit, nmera 
 erratione. 
 
 Ib. πρόσθί, heretofore, for a time 
 previously (cf. infr. 1321. πρόσθ^ν 
 άτμητης), έρημου, in which I have had 
 the company of neither of you. 
 
 1116. Teas τηλίκαίσδί, solcher Ju- 
 gend, so young. Donn. 
 
 1117. obe — Tovbe (both strongly 
 emphatic, and pronounced in the 
 deepest tone of gratitude). 
 
 11 18. Tovpyov τουτ, this business 
 (viz. the narrative of what had been 
 done). Antigone speaks as feeling 
 that Theseus was a man of deeds, 
 not of words, and consequently 
 would not dwell long on his own 
 exploits. The text is here given 
 from Hermann’s conjecture, adopted 
 by Elmsl. Dind. Wunder. Vett. li- 
 bri: καί σοί re Tovpyov τουμον cVrat 
 βραχύ. 
 
 1119. CEdipus, who in his deep 
 affection and concern for his daugh¬ 
 ters, had forgotten the presence of 
 their deliverer, apologizes for having 
 allowed so much converse (λόγο? μη- 
 κυνόμξνος) to have passed without 
 addressing a word to him. 
 
 Ib. προς TO λιπαρίς, inbrimstig, 
 ardently, fervently. Reis. Dindorf 
 adopts Elmsley’s interpretation; pro¬ 
 duce sermoneni usque ad fastidiuni. 
 For Matthiae’s opinion, see §. 591, β. 
 
 I 4 
 
120 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Τ€κν el φανβντ αβΧτττα μηκύνω λόγον. ιΐ2ο 
 
 ΙττΙσταμαί γαρ τηνδβ την eV τάσδβ μοί 
 
 τύρψιν παρ άλλον μηδβνος ττβφασμβνην. 
 
 σύ γάρ vlv όζβσωσα^, ονκ αλλθ9 βροτών. 
 
 καί σο\ Θεοί ττόροιεν ώί εγώ θέλω, 
 
 αύτω τε καί γη rfjS' εττεί τό γ ενσεβε^ 1125 
 
 μ 6 νοί 9 Trap νμΐν ενρον ανθρώπων εγώ 
 
 και τούπιεικε^ καί τό μη ψενδοστομεΐν. 
 
 είδώ^ δ' άμύνω τοίσδε τοΐς· λόγοι^ τάδε. 
 
 εχω γάρ άχω διά σε κούκ άλλον βροτών. 
 
 καί μοι χύρ, ώναζ, δεξιάν ορεζον, ώ? 1130 
 
 φανσω φιλήσω τ , η Θεμΐ 9 , τό σόν κάρα. 
 
 καίτοι τι φωνώ ; ττώ? σ αν άθλιος γεγώς 
 
 θιγεΐν θελησαιμ άνδρός, ω τις ονκ ενι 
 
 κηλίς κακών ζννοικος ; ονκ εγωγε σε, 
 
 1120. τίκνα φαν^ντ αελπτα (ί. e. 
 αβλπτωί). On this acc. cf. Matth. §. 
 421. 4. 562. 3. Wund. ad Electr. 
 543. Kiihn. §. 670, b. 
 
 11 2 1—2. την^ί την es τάσδβ τ€ρψιν, 
 the pleasure derived from these, or 
 in respect to these; the joy which I 
 have in their deliverance. 
 
 1123. viv, them. Cf. sup. 43. 
 
 1124. coy eyo) 6 ί\ω. Cf. Matth. §. 
 
 485· 
 
 1125. TO ζυσξβίς=την (νσβββιαν. 
 On the praises bestowed on Athens 
 in this and the following verse, see 
 Thudich. I. p. 309. 
 
 1126. TovnuLKh, cequum. Soph. 
 Fgmm. yog. (Dind.) bs ovre tovttul- 
 K€S ovre την χάριν | ηδη. de Orco 
 deo. 
 
 1128. άμννω, I repay. Phil. 601. 
 θ^ων —OLTTep epy’ άμυνονσιν κακά. 
 
 τ 120. On κα\ thus used, see Hart. 
 I. 148. 
 
 1131. jj θψις (as is the custom) 
 Photius : coy νόμος, ως προσηκον. Cf. 
 II. II. 73. Hes. Op. 136. § θίμις άν- 
 *θρώιτοισι. II. IX. 134. 277. XIX. 
 
 177. Libri, Herm. Dind. Gaisf. 
 read €i θίμις. La. η Θίμις. The dif¬ 
 ference between these two modes 
 of expression, in respect to (Edipds, 
 has been well explained'by Wunder. 
 The opinion of a consummate scho¬ 
 lar must not, however, be passed 
 unnoticed : “ Jure vulgatam defen- 
 dit Hermannus. Quae enim sequun- 
 tur, valent αλλ’ ον θψις.” Gaisf. 
 
 1132. καίτοι. Cf. Hart. II. 367. 
 Ib. ττως σ αν, Herm. e conj. πως 
 
 δ’ αν, Libri. 
 
 Ib. άθλιος y€yως, qui sim impurus. 
 Wund. 
 
 1034—5. ovK — €ασω. Hermann 
 thus fills up the sentence : ονκ %ywyk 
 ae θελησαιμ' av θιyiίv Ιμον, ουδ’ ουν 
 €άσω, ft αυτός βονλοιο θιy€ιv. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 ονδ' ουν ίάσω, roh γαρ ipireipOLs βροτων 
 μονοίς οίόν re σννταλαΐΉωρβΐι/ τάδβ. 
 συ δ αντόθβν μοι χαΐρ€, και τα λοιττά μου 
 μβλον δικαίως, ωσττβρ eV τόδ’ ημέρας. 
 
 ΘΗ. ουτ’ ei TL μηκο 9 των λόγων eOov ττλβον^ 
 Τ€κνοισί τβρφθβ]^ τοΐσδβ, θανμάσας ίχω, 
 ούδ^ el ττρο τού μου 7Γpoϋλaβe9 τα τώνδ' ίπη. 
 βάρο9 γαρ ημάς ούδ^ν έκ τούτων 
 ου γαρ λόγοισι τον βίον σπoυδάζoμev 
 Χαμττρον iroLelcreaL μάλλον η τοΐ^ δρωμύνοι^. 
 δeίκvυμL δ’* ών γαρ ωμοσ ούκ eψeυσάμηv 
 ουδόν ae, ττρόσβυ. τάσδe γαρ πάpeLμ^ άγων 
 ζώσα^, aKpaL(l)veL9 των κaτη7Γe ίλη μόνων. 
 
 121 
 
 1135 
 
 1140 
 
 1145 
 
 1135 · (μπξίροις βροτων, der 
 
 Gleiches trug, who has equally suf¬ 
 fered. Donn. On ονδ’ ovv, see Hart. 
 II. 12. 
 
 1136. σννταΚαίΊτωρύν, to he a 
 sharer in misery. 
 
 1137 . avToOev pot xaipe. 
 “ Farewell, my lord; yet while I 
 linger here,” &c. Dale. What! a 
 farewell to the prince, with whom 
 CEdipus has yet so much business 
 to' transact, and at a moment when 
 his obligations to that prince must 
 have made him more than ever 
 anxious to become a public bene¬ 
 factor to him and his people ? The 
 stage-play seems to be this : CEdi¬ 
 pus, in the warm feelings of his 
 grateful heart, is advancing to em¬ 
 brace Theseus, or at all events to grasp 
 his hand. Suddenly he stops short— 
 is it for a wretch like him to touch 
 .one so unpolluted ? “ No,” says he : 
 
 from this spot where I stand (av- 
 ToSev) I send my greetings, my bless- 
 .ings to you, but I advance no 
 nearer to your sacred person.” 
 
 Ib. αντόθζν. Cf. Arist. Ach. 116. 
 
 33 °· Feel. 246. Dem. 1215, 
 pen. -^sch. 70, 20. Andoc. 22. 25. 
 See also Gottling’s Hesiod, p. 123. 
 
 1138 . is τόδ’ rjpipas, auf diesem 
 Tag, on this day. Donn. 
 
 1139. μήκος των λόγων €θον = €μη- 
 Kvvas Tovs λόγους. (Theseus courte¬ 
 ously admits the apology of CEdi¬ 
 pus, sup. J120.) On the conjunc¬ 
 tion cl, as here used, see Matth. p. 
 1100. 
 
 1141, τονμου, SC. ίττους. On ουδέ 
 after ovtc, see Hart. 1 . 194. 
 
 1142. βάρος, displeasure. 
 
 1144. τοίς δρωμ€νοις, deeds, λόγοις 
 and τοΧς δρωμβνοις put in opposition, 
 as λόγοις and €ργοις continually are. 
 Cf. infr. 1644. 
 
 1145 . hcUvvpt δ’. We should say 
 generally, for proof. Cf. sup. 146. 
 and Matth. §. 630. 2, f. 
 
 Ib. ων γαρ ωμοσ' ουκ €Λΐ/€νσάμην 
 ovhev σε = ovbcv όμνυων cyjA. σε, 
 
 Matth. 421. Obs. 2, a, 
 
 1147. ακραιφνής by sync. for ακε- 
 ραιοφανης=άκ€ραιος, unstained in a 
 
122 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 χωττω^ μ€ΐ^ άγων ΐιρ^θη^ τί 8ei μάτην 
 κομπ€Ϊν, a γ βίσβι καυτο9 €κ ταύταιν ζννων ; 
 λόγο9 δ’ 09 βμτΓ^πτωκβν άρτίω9 €μοΙ 
 στβίγοντί δβνρο^ συμβαΧον γνώμην' ewei 
 σμίκρο9 μ^ν βΐπβΐν, αζί09 δβ θανμάσαι, 
 7 Γράγο 9 δ" άτίζβίν ούδ€ν άνθρωπον χρβών. 
 
 ΟΙ. TL δ* βστι, τ€κνον Α1γ(ω9 ; δίδασκβ μβ, 
 
 ώ9 μη βίδότ αυτόν μηδβν ών συ πυνθανβί, 
 ΘΗ. φασίν TLV ημΐν ανδρα, σοΙ μίν βμπολιν 
 ούκ δντα, συγγενή δε, προσπεσόντα πω9 
 βωμω καθησθαι τω Υ{οσείδώνο9, παρ' ω 
 θύων εκυρον, ηνίχ ώρμώμην εγώ. 
 
 ΟΙ. ποδαπόν ; τί προσχρηζοντα τω θακηματί ; 
 ΘΗ. ούκ οίδα πλην εν. σου γαρ, ώ$· λεγουσί μοί, 
 
 1150 
 
 ϊΐ55 
 
 I ι6ο 
 
 moral sense, uninjured in a bodily 
 sense. On the genitive after it, see 
 Mattli. §. 344. 
 
 1148. άγωρ γιρ^θη, de copta et de- 
 portata victoria. Ell. Matthise com¬ 
 pares Herodot. VII. 50. 2. aya>vas 
 τούς μεγίστους avyKaratpiei, Wunder 
 Pint. Cim. c. 13. Κίμων δ’, ωσπ^ρ 
 άθλητης δεινός, ημίρα μια δυο καθτ]ρη- 
 κως άτγωνίσματα. Herm. άγώυ τιρ4θη. 
 Libri et vett. edd. αγώυ οντος ^ρβθη. 
 
 ιΐ 49 · ξννώρ. Cf. Wunder ad Aj. 
 257. On the use of ye after os, see 
 Hart. 1 . 407. 
 
 1150. Xoyoff, Botschaft, Nachricht, 
 7 iews, intelligence. Donn. Germ. P. 
 
 115 1 . σνμβα\ού ypώμηp, de CO 
 tecum reputa sententiam, i. e. vide 
 quid tibi statuendum sit. Herm. On 
 τούτου, to be supplied before σνμβα- 
 λοΰ, see Kiihn. §. 789. 
 
 1152. σμικρος μερ elnelp, short and 
 easy of telling. 
 
 1153. άτίζΐΐρ, to think below his 
 notice. The sentiment seems akin to 
 
 the well-known apophthegm of Te¬ 
 rence—that we are bound to take 
 an interest in every thing which 
 concerns a fellow-creature. 
 
 1155. μη eldoT. On the use of 
 μη before participles, see Kiihn. §. 
 
 7 ^ 5 > 2. 
 
 1156. (μπόΚιρ, citizen. The word 
 seems studiously and with the nicest 
 tact chosen by Theseus, that no fears 
 of another attempt on his personal 
 liberty from his fellow-citizens may 
 be awakened in the mind of CEdipus. 
 
 1157. προσπ€σόρτα. Aj. I181. 
 προπ€σωρ €χον. 
 
 Ib. πως, I know not for what rea¬ 
 son. Reisig compares Trach. 695. 
 
 1159. ηρΙχ ωρμώμηρ εγώ. ElmS- 
 ley, observing that ηρίκα refers not 
 to the words παρ' ω θύωρ cKVpop, but 
 to the words προσπ^σόρτα πως, trans¬ 
 lates, durn aberam ego ; perhaps more 
 strictly, “ set out for the expedition.’ 
 Cf. sup. 1068. On the verb κνρω, 
 see Matth. §. 241. Buttmann, p. 160. 
 
0ΙΔΙΠ0Τ2 ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝίΙΙ. 
 
 123 
 
 βρα^νν τιν αΙτ€Ϊ μΰθον ούκ ογκον ιτΧίων. 
 
 ΟΙ. •ποιον τιν’·, ον γάρ eSpa σμικροΰ λόγου. 
 
 ΘΗ. σοί φασίν αυτόν eV λόγους βλθβΐν μολόντ 
 
 aLTelvy aireXeelv τ άσφαΧώ^ τη^ Sevp* 68οϋ. 1165 
 
 ΟΙ. τίς δητ αν €Ϊη ttjvS ο ττροσθακών edpav ; 
 
 ΘΗ. ορα κατ^Αργοί €Ϊ πί νμΐν βγγβνηί 
 
 eaff , ooTiy αν σου τοΰτο προσγρτρζοι τυγΰν. 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ φίΧτατβ, σχβ? ονττβρ ei. ΘΗ. τί δ’ ίση σου ; 
 
 ΟΙ. μη μου 86ηθΎ]ί, ΘΗ. πράγματοί ττοίου ; Xeye, 1170 
 ΟΙ. ί'ξοώ^ άκούων τών8\ οί ίσθ ο ττροστάτηί. 
 
 1102 . βραχνρ μύθον ουκ ογκον 
 πλβων. A brief colloquy, involving 
 little or no trouble in it. Cf. infr. 
 1341. On the pleonasm, see Matth. 
 §· 636. 
 
 1163. rjde edpa, this altar-sitting 
 of which you speak. Cf. CEd. T. 13. 
 
 Ib. σμικροΰ λόγου, of small mo¬ 
 ment. Herodot. I. 120. λόγον ovbe- 
 VQs γινόμβθα. III. 4. eovra λόγου οΰ 
 σμικροΰ. 
 
 1164. σοϊ is λόγους όλθΐΐν, to hold 
 converse with you. The formula has 
 been largely illustrated in my 
 “ Knights” of Aristoph. v. 785. On 
 μολόντ , as terminating the verse, 
 see sup. v. 17. Herm. Elem. doctr. 
 metr. p. 36. as pleonastic, see 
 Matth. §. 557. Obs. i. 
 
 1165. ασφαλώς (a, σφάλλομαι) της 
 SeGp’ όδοΰ, i. e. μη σφάλζντα της δευρ’ 
 
 όδοδ. Matth. ρ. 558. Cf. sup. 1147· 
 ακραιφνύς των κατηπ€ΐλημ€νων. The 
 safe passage, here required, is again 
 alluded to, infr. 1287. διδονς όμοϊ I 
 r άκοΰσαί τ ασφαλή ξΰν 
 
 ^όδω. 
 
 1166. τηνδ^ ό ττροσθακών edpav—o 
 τηδ€ (cW) θακών, i. e. ικ€τ€υων. Matth. 
 §. 408. cf. CEd. Τ. 2. Matth. §. 409, 
 4. b. (QEdipus speaks reflectingly 
 
 and in much doubt as to who this 
 suppliant at the altar may be. The 
 replies of Theseus are all in the 
 same guarded and cautious tone, 
 from desire to prevent any sudden 
 outbreak on the part of the ex¬ 
 monarch.) 
 
 1167. opa d. See Hart. II. 205. 
 
 1169. (A whisper from Antigone 
 and Ismene imports who the sup¬ 
 pliant is.) 
 
 Ib. σχ€ς ( = €7Γΐσχ€ς) ovnep ei, pro¬ 
 ceed no further; stop where you are. 
 Elmsley compares Eur. Hec. 962. 
 σΰ δ’ 6 t τι μ€μφ€ΐ της iprjs απουσίας, 
 σχίς. Hipp. 1354· απειρηκός 
 
 σώμ αναπαύσω. Iph. A. 1467 · 
 μη με προλίπης. Cf. sup. 856. 
 
 1170. On the double genitive in 
 this verse, see Matth. §. 355, 2. 
 
 1171. άκούων τώνδ' SC. Antig. and 
 Ism. Hermann translates the plural 
 term as applying to Ismene, and to 
 the communication made by her, 
 sup. 378. On εξοώ^ άκούων τώνδ', 
 ος i. δ. π., see Kiihn. on “ Einfache 
 indirecte Frage,” §. 837. Anm. 3. 
 
 lb. 6 προστάτης. ScHOL. : 6 ικέτης, 
 6 προσεστηκώς τω βωμω. infr. 1278. 
 τοΰ θεοΰ γε προστάτην. Passow il¬ 
 lustrates by El. 1378., where Electra, 
 
124 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΘΗ. κα\ TL 9 ττοτ εστίΐ', οζ/ y* €γω ψβζαιμΐ τι ; 
 
 ΟΙ. 7ΓαΪ9 ονμοί, ώναζ^ στυγνός^ ου λόγων βγω 
 αλγιστ αν άν8ρων β^ανασγοιμην κλυων. 
 ΘΗ. TL δ’ ; ονκ άκονβίν βση, koll μη δράν a μη 
 
 χρηζβί9 ; τί σοί TOUT βστ\ λυπηρόν^ κλύβιν ; 
 ΟΙ. βχθιστόν, ωναζ, φθβγμα τονθ' ηκβι ττατρί' 
 καΐ μη μ! ανάγκη ττροσβάλης τάδ' βΙκάθβιν, 
 ΘΗ. άλλ’ βΐ το θάκημ! βζαναγκάζβι, σκοττβι 
 μη σοί ττρόνοι η του θβου φυλακτβα, 
 
 ΑΝ. ττάτβρ, πίθου μοι, κβΐ νβα παραινβσω, 
 
 τον ανορ βασον τονοβ τη ο αυτου ψρβνι 
 χάριν παρασγβίν, τω θβω α βούλβται' 
 
 1175 
 
 I ι8ο 
 
 addressing the tutelary Apollo, says 
 of herself, η σε ττοΧλά δη, I αφ’ ων 
 €χοιμι, Χίπαρξϊ ττρουστην χ^ρί. 
 
 1172. “ And who is he ? and why 
 should I rebuke him ?” Dale. On 
 the omission of the particle av, see 
 Matth. §. 515. 528. Hart. II. 271. 
 
 1174. αλγιστ’ άνδρων. The ad¬ 
 dition of άνδρων, like ανθρώπων in 
 the following passages, only serves 
 to give additional pungency to the 
 adverb. Find. Ol. VIII. 30. ί^οχ 
 ανθρώπων {more than in any other 
 part of the world). Plat, i Leg. 
 636, e. κάλΧιστ ανθρώπων. Hipp. 
 Maj. 285» C. ακριβέστατα ανθρώπων. 
 Theaet. 195, b. ορθότατα ανθρώπων 
 λεγείί, &C. 
 
 1176 . kXv€iv, the act of hearing. 
 The comma, placed after Χνπηρον, 
 will shew that it has nothing to do 
 with kXvciv, and that we must not 
 translate, painful to be heard. Aisch. 
 Eum. 474· τοιαντα pev τάδ' έστίν 
 άμφότ€ρα, pfveiv | πέμπ^ιν re, δνσπη- 
 μαντ άμηχάνως e/ioi. (Muller’s ed.) 
 
 1177. πατρί, to a fathers ear. 
 (Strongly emphatic.) 
 
 1178. μη /x’ ανάγκη προσβάΧης, do 
 not compel me. Ellendt refers to 
 Dorville ad Char. 598. 
 
 Ib. τάδ’ (Ικάθειν. Infr. 1328. μηνιν 
 eiKudeiv. Elmsley and Dind. (in 
 annotat.) ΐΐκαθύν. 
 
 1179· έξαναγκάζα. Theseus evi¬ 
 dently playing on the word ανάγκη, 
 “ But if the necessity arises not from 
 me, hut from considerations of a 
 more solemn nature, viz. a supph- 
 catory seat at an altar (θάκημα).’' 
 
 ii8o. πρόνοια του deov, reverence 
 for the god at whose altar he has 
 placed himself. 
 
 1182. Tov άνδρα τόνδί. i. e. Poly~ 
 nices, Herm. Wund. Dind. ^Ellendt. 
 Theseus, Musgr. Reis. Both, and 
 others. The emphatic ι^ωι^, v. 1184., 
 and the appeal made by Antigone, 
 1201 sq., shew evidently, I think, 
 that Theseus is meant. 
 
 1183. χάριν παρασχβίν, to gratfy· 
 Cf. sup. 855. 
 
 u Who observes, “ non hunc qui adest, non aderat eniin Polynices, sed ilium, de quo 
 sermo est^ 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΠΙ. 
 
 καί νων νπ€ίΚ€ top κασίγνητον μολβΐρ. 
 ον γάρ ere, θάρσει, ττρο^ βίαν τταρασττάσβί 
 γνώμην, a μη σοι ζνμφβροντα λβζβται, 
 λόγων 8* άκονσαι τις· βλάβη ; τα τοι κακώς 
 βυρημόν βργα τω λόγω μηνύβται. 
 βφυσας αυτόν' ωστ€ μηΒβ δρωντά σε 
 τα των κάκιστα δνσσβββστάτων, ττάτβρ, 
 θβμις σό γ elvat κβΊνον αντιδράν κακώς. 
 άλλ’ eaaov, βΙσΙ χάτόροις γοναΧ κακαι 
 
 125 
 
 1185 
 
 1190 
 
 1184. μολξΙν. Reisig compares 
 Aj. 804· σπβνσαθ' οί μ€ν TevKpov — μο- 
 Xetj/. Cf. Matth. §. 532» d. 535, c. 
 
 11 85-8. “ For suppose that any 
 thing prejudicial (μη ξνμφβροντα) to 
 you should be said, is it necessary that 
 such speaking shodld draw you away, 
 in spite of your own fixed purpose 
 of mind ? And as to hearing a set 
 of mere words, what is the harm or 
 injury in that ? But there is a fur¬ 
 ther reason why you should hear 
 him. Words are the symbols and 
 indicators of deeds: and if he has 
 any evil devices against you, those 
 devices will most probably be be¬ 
 trayed by his speech.” 
 
 1186. Xc^erm, shall be said (cf. 
 Pors. ad Hec. 293.) σοι ξυμφ€ροντα 
 (to your advantage). 
 
 1187. Herm. ex conject. 
 Wund. Dind. καλώς, Libri, Gaisf., 
 Neue. 
 
 1188. Cf. Ellendt in ^νρίσκαν, 
 reperire cum queerendo turn cogi- 
 tatione. 
 
 I 1 89—9 1 . ωστ€ (μη) de/xts eivai (so 
 that it is not right (aey^ kcIvov dj/ri- 
 bpav κακώς (that you at least should 
 compensate ill to him) μη 8 € δρώντά 
 (Tc τά των κάκιστα δυσσεβΐστάτων 
 (not even though doing to you all 
 that imagination can form as most 
 
 heinous and undutiful). Kiihner, 
 §. 652, 2. “ Verbinde ώστ€ θίμις 
 eivai, nicht ώστε άντώράν ; θέμις elvai 
 ist grammatisches Pradikat von dem 
 Satze, σε Keivov αντιδράν.” 
 
 1190. κάκιστα δνσσφζστάτων . Cf. 
 Porson ad Hec. 618. Matth. §. 461. 
 
 1191. θίμις eivai. Buttmann’s 
 opinion, that in this formula θάμις is 
 indeclinable, is adopted by Hermann, 
 Dindorf, Ellendt, Wunder, &c., and 
 is supported by the following quo¬ 
 tations : Plato Gorg. 505, c. dXX’ 
 
 ovde τους μνθονς φασ\ μ€ταξν de/xis 
 eivai KaToXelneiv. Xen. Qicon. XI. I l. 
 συ δε μοι λίξον, ώ ’Ίσχυμαχ€, αφ' 
 ώνπ^ρ ηρζω, πώς νγι^ίας ίπιμάλΐΐ ; πώς 
 της τον σώματος ρώμης ‘ πώς θίμις 
 €ΐναί σοι κα\ €Κ ποΧε/ιου σώζ€σθαι ; 
 xEsch. Suppl. 34®· τ^άτ€ρα κατ €χ~ 
 θραν, η το μη θίμις λίγας; xElian. 
 Ν. A. r, 60. μη yap θ^μις elvai τον 
 άρχοντα κα\ τον τοσοντων (φορον κακόν 
 
 ipyάσaσθaι. Cf. Matth. §. II. 943 * 
 Kuhn. §. 652, 2. 
 
 1192. dXX’ εα νιν, Wund. dXX’ 
 €ασον, Dind. dXX’ εα αυτόν, Herm. 
 Elms. αλΧ’ αντον, Eibri, La. B. T. 
 Farn. On εα as a monosyllable, see 
 Wunder ad Ant. 95. 
 
 Ib. yoval κακαι, ill-disposed chil~ 
 dren. El. 1233. Oresies is thus ad¬ 
 dressed by his sister, ιώ yoval, yoval 
 
126 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Kcu θνμος άλλα ΐΌνθβτούμβνοί 
 
 φίλωρ €7ΓωδαΪ9 βζβττάδορται φύσιρ. 
 
 σύ δ’ €69 4κ€Ϊρά μοί τανυν άποσκοττβί 11 95 
 
 πατρώα καί μητρώα πημα& απαθ€9^ 
 
 καν K€Lva λεύσσηί^ οίδ* €γω, γνώσει κακόν 
 
 θυμόν τβλβντην ώς κακή προσγίγνβται. 
 
 €^€69 γαρ ονχί βαία τάνθνμηματα, 
 
 των σών άδβρκτων ομμάτων τητώμβνο^, ΐ 2 οο 
 
 άλλ* ημ),ν βίκβ. λυπαρύν γαρ ον καλόν 
 δίκαια προσχρηζονσιν, ονδ' αυτόν μ^ν ev 
 πάσχβιν, παθόντα δ* ονκ ίπίστασθαι τίνβιν, 
 
 ΟΙ. Τ€κνον, βαρβϊαν ηδονην νικάτβ μβ 
 
 λβγοντβ^' ίστω δ* ούν όπως νμΐν φίλον. 1205 
 
 μόνον^ ζβν\ €Ϊπ€ρ k€lvo9 ώδ* ίλβνσεται^ 
 μηδείς κρατείτω τη9 Ιμη9 ψνχψ ποτέ. 
 
 σωμάτων €μο\ φιΚτάτων. Antig. 641. 
 γόνας κατηκοονς φυσαντ^ς. 
 
 1194 · (ζ^^ά^ονται φνσιν, have their 
 natural disposition softened and sub¬ 
 dued. Cf. Matth. §. 490. Plato 
 Phsedo, 77i e. €ως άν Ι^ΐττάσητ^. Rei- 
 sig quotes Eur. Hippol. 478. ela'iv 
 δ’ €7Γω8αϊ κα\ λόγοι θ€λκτηριοι. 
 
 ιΐ 95 · «fil'd ροι, Herm. ex con- 
 ject. Dind. Wund. Libri, (κβΐνα μη. 
 On the be, see Hart. I. 167. 
 
 1197. οιδ’ όγώ. Cf. Matth. §.630, 
 2, g. 
 
 I 197— Β.γι'ώσίΐ — 7Γροσγίγν€ται. An- 
 tig. 1242. δεί^αί ev άνθρώποισι την 
 αβουλίαν | οσω μίγιστον avbpl npoaKei- 
 ται κακόν. 
 
 1199* βίΐΐ“ όνθνμηματα, light or 
 small proofs. 
 
 1200. ά^όρκτων (sightless and never 
 to see again) — τητώμevoς. For the 
 proleptic nature of this idiom, (an 
 idiom totally foreign to our lan¬ 
 guage,) cf Matth. §. 446, 10. Obs. 2. 
 
 Kuhn. §. 477, 2. EUendt, in voc. 
 
 αδάκρυτος. 
 
 Ib. τητάσθαι, to be deprived. Infr. 
 1618. ov (άνΒρος SC.) τητώμevaι. Phil. 
 383. των 4 μων τητωμevoς. El. 
 φpevωv τητωμevoι. 
 
 1204 . βape'iav ηδονην viKaTe, yoU 
 wring from me that which is pleasing 
 to yourselves, but most painful to me. 
 For the accusative after νικάν, cf. 
 Plat. Gorg. 456, a. Aristoph. Nub. 
 432.Vesp. 594·, and such phrases 
 as νικάν μάχην, &C. 
 
 Thou hast prevailed, my daughter, 
 though assent, 
 
 While pleasing, is reluctant—take 
 thy wish. Dale. 
 
 1205. Xeyoj/res·, by your language· 
 On Ζστω δ’ ουν, see Hart. II. 13· 
 
 1206. On eXevaerai, cf. Matth. I. 
 
 p· 405· 
 
 1207. της Ιμης ψνχης, i. e. Ιμοΰ. 
 El. 775 · οστις της όμης φνχης (i. e. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 127 
 
 ΘΗ. αττα^ τα τοίαντ\ ούχι Sh χρΐΐζ(»^ κλνβίΐ/^ 
 
 ώ ττρβσβυ. κομττβίν S ούχι βούλομαι' σύ Se 
 acos ϊσθ\ kav irep κάμβ τΐ9 (τωζ^ Θ^,ων, 
 χο. οστΐ9 τον TrXiovos μύρους ττρ, 
 
 χρρζ^ι τον μβτρίον Trapeh 
 ζώίΐν, σκαιοσνναν φνλάσ- 
 
 1210 
 
 ίμον) γ€γώς. (CEdipus has still the 
 terror of Creon and a second attempt 
 on his person in his thoughts.) 
 Reisig strangely translates : ne quis 
 animum meum contineat, nequis ani- 
 mo moderetur meo. 
 
 1210. σω? (ων) ισθ'. Cf. Ellendt 
 in voc. οΓδα. II. 288. Matth. §. 549. 
 Obs. 3. (Theseus quits the stage.) 
 
 1211. The Chorus speculate on 
 the miseries of old age, and the 
 folly of those who prefer a protracted 
 existence to a moderate one. As 
 proofs of the afflictions attendant on 
 old age, they instance themselves, 
 and still more the ex-monarch of 
 Thebes, assailed with calamities from 
 every quarter of the horizon, from 
 the east and from the west, from the 
 north and from the south. For a 
 multitude of instances, drawn from 
 the ancient writings, of the same 
 melancholy tenour as that before us, 
 see Thudichum’s Sophocles, I. 311 
 sq. It is satisfactory to think, that 
 whatever the poet’s theory may have 
 been on this matter, his own old 
 age exhibited practical proof that 
 the declining period of life has its 
 comforts and its joys as well as any 
 other. The prevalent metre, glyco- 
 nean, with iambics and trochees. 
 
 I211-12. τον 7 Γ. μ. χρ/ιζζΐ. χρρζίΐν 
 
 with gen. of thing, occurs Od. 
 XVII. 121. 557. Herodot. V. 30. 
 
 1212. του μέτριου rrapels (jrapuvai ). 
 Wunder, considering the participle 
 as equivalent to καταφρονησοί (cf. 
 
 eund. ad Electr. v. 806.), necessa¬ 
 rily understands, overlooking or de¬ 
 spising the moderate portion. As an 
 approximation to this sense by Wun¬ 
 der, I might add the well-known 
 nautical expression (Arist. Eq. 437), 
 του TTohbs napievai. (Cf. Bernh. p. 
 180.) For a variety of opinions 
 by Reiske, Both, Reisig, Herm., &c., 
 on the construction of this and the 
 next verse, see Ellendt II. 511., 
 who justly observes, that which ever 
 we adopt, there will be something 
 harsh in the construction. 
 
 1213. ^ώειι/ (Ep. and Ion. for ζην. 
 Od. XV. 490. αγαθόν βίον ζωξίν.) The 
 poet’s sentence, which had hitherto 
 been of a general character, here, 
 by a strong emphasis, becomes re¬ 
 stricted to its particular limitation. 
 The ellipse may be filled up by sup¬ 
 plying eis or κατα, SC. eis το ^(beiv, in 
 respect to life. CEd. T. τ 204. νυν δ’ 
 ακόυαν (ScHOL. : els το aKoveiv) τις 
 aOXiatTepos ; Antig. ^20. άΧλ' ουχ ό 
 χρηστός τω κακω Χαχβϊν (in respect to 
 sharing those laws of sepulture) Χσος. 
 Cf. Phil. 503. Aj. 825. 870. Such 
 a mode of construction does not 
 appear to be wanting in one or both 
 the Theban poets, whom Sophocles 
 had constantly before his eyes. Hes. 
 Op. 456. έκατον be re Βονραθ' άμάξης, 
 I των πρόσθ€ν peXeTrjv exepev οίκηία 
 θ€σθαι. Find. Pyth. X. 76. epol be θαυ- 
 μάσαι (in respect to its being a matter 
 of wonder or surprise) decov reXe- 
 σάντων ovbev nore φaίveτaί eppev ατησ- 
 
128 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 σων eV €/χοί κατάδηλοί ϊσται, 
 
 €7Γ€Ϊ ΤΓολλά μίν αΐ μακραί 
 
 ά /xepat κατίθ^ντο δη 
 
 Χύττας 4γγυτ€ρω, τά rep· 
 
 τΓοντα δ’ ονκ άν ϊδοΐί οττον, 
 
 όταν TLi €? ττΧέον Trecrry 
 
 τον eiXovTOij ovS eTTL κόρος, Ισοτβλβστος 
 
 τον, the poet using a stronger term 
 epexegetically than he had used at 
 the beginning of his sentence. Whe¬ 
 ther the following examples may be 
 determined by the same iiile, or are 
 better explained by supplying ώστε, 
 is left to those more conversant with 
 such niceties than mvself. Nem. 
 VII. 41-2. κομίσαι (lit reduceret, 
 infinitive consilium causamque iti- 
 neris indicante, Diss.). Pyth. XL 
 14. καλεΐ σννΙμίν. 01 . VI. ^ 6 . λά;(ε 
 r 'Α\φίον oIkcIv. Pyth. III. 99· ^'τρα- 
 nev κομίσαι (eo adduxit, ut restitue- 
 ret, Diss.). IV. 260. αιδώ καλνψαι. 
 X. 27. ανθΰν. 
 
 1213— 14. σκαιοσνναν — εσται, in 
 my judgment will betray manifest 
 folly. Cf. C. F. Hermann ad Lucian, 
 de Hist. Conscr. p. 96. Metres: 
 glyconean and logaoedic. 
 
 1215. αί μακράι rjpepai (length of 
 age) — 6 μάκρος χρόνος, Phil. 3*^^· 
 Longi anni, ^n. X. 549. 
 
 Ib. TToWa, frequently (emphatic). 
 
 1216. κατίθεντο, admoverunt, Br. 
 Herm. reponunt, recondunt, Elms. 
 In a former verse (227) we found So¬ 
 phocles using the active voice of this 
 word in a metaphorical sense de¬ 
 rived from the laying down, or de¬ 
 posit of a debt. Why should not 
 the middle voice be used again here, 
 in the sense of depositing, as it per¬ 
 petually is among the Attic orators, 
 with an accusative after it ? (Dem. 
 121, 21. 1034, 21. Is8eus, 56, 40. 
 
 &c. &c.) Jacobs, with great la¬ 
 titude of meaning, interprets : tan- 
 quani onus dies multa deponunt et 
 imponunt hominibus. 
 
 1217. λνπας (emphatic, in oppo¬ 
 sition to τα τόρποντα). Elmsley, who 
 understands ττολλά as an adjective, 
 understands Χνπας as a genitive case, 
 and joins it with εγγυτερω = λυπαί 
 /χετεχοντα. (Antig. 933. approaches 
 closely to this sense). Brunck, 
 Deed. Matth. prefer the accusative. 
 Ellendt also adopting the genitive 
 case, translates : vita longior hurnana 
 dolori propius admovit, i. e. effecit ut 
 plus doloris quam voluptatis ha- 
 berent. 
 
 1218. oTTou (κατε^ει/το). Sophocles 
 often uses the adverb όπου at the 
 end of a sentence, where the con¬ 
 text does not afford so easy a mode 
 of filling up the ellipse as I think it 
 does here. Antig. 3 1 8. τί δε ρυθμί¬ 
 ζεις την εμην Χυπην όπου’, Aj. Ι03· 
 η τουπίτριπτον κίναόος εζηρου μ οπού ; 
 890. άμενηνον ανόρα μη Χευσσειν οπού 
 (ε'στί.) όπου, όταν, La. Elms, όπότ 
 άν, Libri. 
 
 1219-20. Hermann, joining το 
 π\εον του θεΚοντος, translates : si quis 
 in id, quod in cupiendo nimium est, 
 incidit, i. e. si quis moduni in cupi¬ 
 endo excedit. Elmsley : quando quis 
 senectutem quam vult attigeret. 
 
 1220. ToC θελοντος. ScHOL. : άντ'ι 
 του μετρίου, του ικανού. This may be 
 the sense, but is it the grammar } 
 
129 
 
 * 
 
 ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 “AiSoi ore Μοίρ’ ai/vpwcuos 
 
 του θίλορτος {to be wished^ or, what 
 is desirable) seems to be gramma¬ 
 tically used, as, Aj. 582. τομωνη, 
 to be cut. infr. 1604. rravros Βρώντοε, 
 every thing to be done. Whether the 
 well-known formula, οΐσθ' b ποίησαν, 
 might be rendered, do you know what 
 is to be done ? I leave to others to 
 decide. Metre: trochaic. 
 
 Tb. οϋδ’ eni κόρος. This, under 
 various forms of accent, disjunction 
 and conjunction, may, with little ex¬ 
 ception, be said to be the reading of 
 all ancient MSS., and by it, there¬ 
 fore, if any possible sense can be 
 elicited, we are bound to abide. I 
 understand here with Wunder j nor 
 is satiety present (€7ri=eVeari) ; i. e. 
 neither are we content. 
 
 1220-24. In proceeding with the 
 rest of these difficult verses, the 
 reader will perhaps allow me to fol¬ 
 low the order which seems best 
 adapted to express the sense in which 
 I understand them. 
 
 1220. *'K'ibos Moipa. It has been 
 more than once observed, in the 
 course of these observations, that 
 whatever the Moerse, as a body, 
 assigned to god or man, became 
 his μοψα, his office or trust, which 
 he had to carry out and execute. 
 Whether, therefore, we read in an¬ 
 cient poetry ’Ai 5 j;s or "'K'ibos Μοίρα, 
 the meaning is much the same. So 
 Pindar continually uses καλών, ίσλων, 
 μοφα, &c., for καλοί, eVXot, &c. (Diss. 
 and Boeckh. ad 01 . VIII. 112.) 01 . 
 II· 37 · deov Μοϊρα is but another 
 term for ΰβός. So also Antig. 896. 
 
 μοΊραν βίου is little more than βίον. 
 But supposing "'A'idos Mo7pa = \\ΐ^ηs, 
 in what sense is this latter word to 
 be understood ? As Sophocles typi¬ 
 fies βre by Hephcestus (Antig. 123. 
 1007.); pestilence, madness, &c. by 
 Ares ((Ed. T. 190. Aj. 706.), so by 
 Hades I think is here meant that 
 cheerless, unsubstantial portion of 
 life in the upper world, which Greek 
 imagination considered as the lot of 
 Hades in the lower. Let us now 
 look to the epithets by which this 
 cheerless existence is characterised. 
 
 1220—3. ΐσοτίλεστος (τβλ/ω), El- 
 lendt renders, omnibus communis. 
 To me something more seems in¬ 
 herent in the word, such as putting 
 all old men on the same footing, as 
 to dues exacted from x them. But 
 how ? The Sophoclean mode of 
 bringing numerous adjectives toge¬ 
 ther without a copulative conjunc¬ 
 tion, and making one expressive of 
 the other, will explain : by making 
 them all equally insensible to the 
 joys of love, of music and the dance : 
 a shadowy existence at best, and 
 ending finally in death, or complete 
 annihilation. Hermann, who is fol¬ 
 lowed by Gaisford and Dindorf, 
 reads, 6 δ’ Επίκουρος Ισοτίλ€στος 
 ^'Αϊ 8 ος, and renders the passage thus: 
 sed opifera postremo mors (pque in- 
 teritum adducit, quum Parca sine 
 hymemeis, sine lyra, sine choreis ap- 
 paret. 
 
 1221. Metre(oou | υο- | | -υ): 
 
 dim. Troch., as also the verse fol¬ 
 lowing. 
 
 * After the above remarks were made, I found that the subject had engi-ossed the 
 attention of the author of the ‘‘ Quaestiones Sophocl.,” who observes on this com¬ 
 pound, “ μοίρα laorekearos dicitur, non quo Parca; persona effingatur omnibiis idem 
 tributum imponentis, id quod male quibusdam placuit, sed quia sors mortis ague tributa vel 
 destinata, h. e. omnibus communis est.” It is satisfactory to me to find that others had 
 attached that sense to the compound ΙσοτΙ\^στο$ Λvhich had suggested itself to my own 
 mind. 
 
 K 
 
130 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 αλνρος αχορος άναπβφηρβ, 
 θάνατοί h τβλβντάν, 
 
 μη φυραι top άτταρτα pl~ Λντ. 1225 
 
 κα λόγορ* το δ*, eVei φαρη^ 
 
 βηραί KeWep οΘ^ρ 7Γ€ρ η- 
 
 κβί ΤΓολύ SevTepop ώί τάχιστα, 
 
 ώί €VT άρ το ρβορ τταρη 
 
 κούφας άφροσύρα^ φάρορ, 1230 
 
 TL9 ττλάγχθη πολύμοχθος 
 ξω ; τις ου καμάτωρ ίρι ; 
 
 1224· θάνατος cs TeXevTav, epexe- 
 getical of the preceding sentence. 
 Doederlein observes, that Greek 
 poetry often thus explains by a 
 direct declaration what has pre¬ 
 viously been furnished in a meta¬ 
 phorical sense : an observation which 
 C. Matthiae (Quaest. Sophocl. 156.) 
 confirms by ^Esch. Theb. 207. ίττ- 
 ΤΓίκων άνπνων πηδάλιων dia στόμα ττν- 
 piycverav χ^αΧινων. I hope to shew 
 hereafter, and from a passage of 
 deep importance, that this practice 
 was not pecuhar to Greek poetry, 
 and that it had its origin, as T be¬ 
 lieve many other peculiarities of 
 choral expression in Sophocles, in 
 Hebrew and oriental poetry. 
 
 1225—6. μη '^^φνναί — Χόγον. ’Αγώι/ 
 
 *Ομ. e Theogn. 425· '^ΡΧΨ Μ Φ^~ 
 vat όπιχθονίοισιν άριστον, φνντα δ’ 
 όπως ωκιστα πνΧας ’Αιδαο πβρησαι. 
 Eccl.IV. 2. “Wherefore I praised the 
 dead, which are already dead, more 
 than the living, which are yet alive. 
 Yea, better is he than both they, 
 which hath not yet been.” Cf. VI. 3 
 sq. On the particle μη in this sen¬ 
 tence, see Hartung II. 128. On 
 the infinitive as a substantive, see 
 Bernh. 354. 
 
 12 26. Xoyov. Cf. Ell. in voc. B. 3. 
 
 Ib. cVet φανη, Antig. 1025. tVct δ’ 
 
 V 
 
 €- 
 
 άμάρτη. Cf. Matth. p. 891. Hart. 
 II. 295. Kiihn. §. 808, 2. 
 
 Ib. φανη {τις). On φαίνβσθαι, in 
 the sense of coming into day, or light, 
 with examples from Horner^ see 
 Passow. 
 
 122 ’]. On KciBev oBcv for Keiae oOev, 
 see Matth. §. 474. Hart. I. 342. 
 
 1228. ως τάχιστα, to be joined 
 with βηναι. 
 
 ΐ 229. TO νίον — η ν€0της, the period 
 of youth. 
 
 1231. πXάyχθη, i. e. iπXάyχθη aor. 
 I. pass, of πΧάζω, I make to wander 
 (see Carmichael). Aj. 886. πΧαζό· 
 μ^νον Χξνσσων. Cf. .Esch. S. C. Th. 
 784. 
 
 Ib. ποΧνμοχθος. Reis. Elms. Deed, 
 understand τον πυΧνμοχθος dvai 
 (cf. Musgrave ad Phil. 904.). Her¬ 
 mann, separating the compound, 
 constructs and translates : τις μόχθος 
 πXάyχθη ποΧν yuis lonye discedit 
 labor? Dindorf observes that the 
 poet ought to have said, τίς πXάyχθη 
 €^ω ποΧΧών μόχθων. To me it ap¬ 
 pears that €|ω and evi are to be 
 spoken emphatically, and that to a 
 Grecian ear the two verses would 
 sound as if ποΧνμοχθος agreed with 
 κάματος understood, that nominative 
 being derived from τίς κάματων in the 
 verse following. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛίΙΝΩΙ. 131 
 
 φόι^οί, στάχΓ€ί9, epL^y 
 
 καί φθονοζ' το τ€ κατάμβμτττορ βπίλβλογχβ 1235 
 
 ττυματον άκρατες άπροσόμιλορ 
 y^pcL 9 άφιλοι/^ Lua ττρότταντα 
 κακα κακών ξυνοίκβΐ. 
 
 €v ω τλαμων οδ , ούκ βγω μόνο9, εττω^» 
 
 τταντοθεν βορείου ώς tl9 
 
 1234-5· The picture which So¬ 
 phocles here gives of the heathen 
 world in his day, is almost as dark 
 as that which St. Paul furnishes of 
 the same world in his time. (Rom. 
 I. 26 sq.) Much of that picture had 
 doubtless been derived from the 
 comic drama of the Greeks, with 
 which the great apostle was evi¬ 
 dently conversant. 
 
 Ib. φόνοι, στάσ€ΐς, ίρις, μάχαι. 
 Reisig illustrates by Cic. de Fin. I. 
 §. 44. ex cupiditatibus odia, dissidia, 
 discordiae, seditiones, bella nascun- 
 tur. 
 
 Ib. στάσας. For illustrations in 
 the Pindaric poems, see Dissen’s 
 Comment, p. 217. 522. 
 
 Ib. €pts. Among the fruitful 
 progeny of the Hesiodean goddess 
 of this name, may be found, Ύσμίνας 
 re. Φόνους re, r’, ^Ανδροκτασίας 
 
 rp. 
 
 1235. Φθόνος. The prevalence of 
 this passion in the old world (never 
 so fully crushed as by the spirit of 
 Christianity), Sophocles could have 
 nowhere found so fully exhibited 
 as in his two favourite Theban poets. 
 Cf. inter alia Hes. Op. 26. 193. 
 Pind.Pyth. I. 164. II. 45. VII. 19. 
 Dissen’s Comment, pp. 59. 178. 230. 
 
 362. 393. 439. 444. 457. 464. 469. 
 475· 522. 532. 
 
 Ib. κατάμ^μτττον. Cf. Eurip. Here. 
 F· 649 sq. On the particle rp, see 
 Hart. I. 109. 
 
 άκτα ‘ 1240 
 
 Ib. iTvCKekoyxjE {€πΐλαγχάν€ΐν, in- 
 super nancisci,) accedit, proprie sorte 
 nacta senectus est, ut accedat. Ell. 
 inikikoyx^ i. q. όπβτνχβν, incidit, su- 
 pervenit. Dind. 
 
 1236. άκρατίς. EuSTATH. : to ποι¬ 
 ούν ως μη (χβιν τον yepovra κρατάν 
 iavTOv. 
 
 1238. κακα κακών. See (Ed. Τ. 
 464. 
 
 Ib. ξννοικ^Ί. Cf. sup. 1134· 
 
 Ib. Dale’s muse, peculiarly adapted 
 to the plaintive and elegiac, appears 
 to advantage in this antistrophic 
 strain. 
 
 O better were it not to be;—-■ 
 
 Or when the infant-eve 
 Opens on light and misery. 
 
 To pass in that first sigh 
 Whence first we came. Youth on¬ 
 ward speeds. 
 
 And in his train of folly leads 
 Delusive jdeasures, light and vain. 
 &c. &c. 
 
 1239. eV ω (y^pa). Metre: an- 
 tispast. and dim. iamb, brachyc. 
 
 Ib. τλάμων οδβ SC. CEdipus qui 
 eldest. Ell. An inquisitive mind 
 might further ask, how he is occu¬ 
 pied while the choral ode is singing.^ 
 For the ανακολουθία, see Matth. 
 §. 3^ ^· Supply : αταις κλονύται. 
 
 1240. This verse will be better 
 understood by illustrating the words 
 in a retrograde order. 
 
 Ib. άκτα (άyvυμι). Strictly, place 
 K 2 
 
132 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κνματσπληξ χβιμβρία κλονβΐταί, 
 ώί καί τόνδβ κατάκρας 
 SeLvoii κνματοαγ€Ϊ9 
 άταί κλον(ουσίν άά ζννονσαι, 
 
 αϊ μίν άπ aeXlov δυσμαν^ 1245 
 
 α\ S άνατ€λλορτθ9, 
 αΐ δ’ άρα μβσσαρ άκτΐρ\ 
 αΐ δβ pvyLOP άτΓΟ ρυιταρ. 
 
 on which the sea - waves break. 
 Wunder, adopting Niebuhr’s defi¬ 
 nition of the word, observes that the 
 άκτη is a land which runs far into 
 the sea, but which, not being watered 
 by the sea on one side, answers 
 rather to our expression of a penin¬ 
 sula or promontory t than a mere sea- 
 coast. Trach. 752. άκτη τις άμφί- 
 κΧνστος Ένβοίας άκρον Κηραιόν Ιστιν. 
 
 Ib. βόρειος. Ellendt cautions 
 against joining this adjective with 
 άκτη, as if the sense were, “ Utus ad 
 septentriones conversum.*’ But as 
 άκτη is not to be understood in the 
 narrow sense to which the learned 
 lexicographer limits it, we need not 
 be so scrupulous in joining βάρδος 
 with άκτη. His own explanation, 
 άκτα κλορζίται βόρειος κυματοπληξ χ€ΐ- 
 μ€ρία = κ\ον€ΐται πΧηγβΙσα κύμασι βο- 
 peioi9 χίιμώνος ωρα, though good in 
 some respects, does not furnish that 
 fulness of similitude with the case 
 of (Edipus, which the context evi¬ 
 dently requires. 
 
 Ib. 7Γάντοθ€Ρ. As the άκτη, taken 
 in its widest sense, could only be 
 beaten by breakers from three quar¬ 
 ters of the compass, it is evident 
 that this word is to be understood 
 in a poetical sense, and not in a 
 matter of fact one. 
 
 1241. κνματοπληξ (cf. El. 5· οισ- 
 τροπΧηζ), xcipepia, lashed by the 
 waves in wintry or stormy weather. 
 
 Ib. KkoveiTai, is agitated. Trach. 
 146. Elmsley and Hermann join 
 τΧάμων ode KXovelrai. The latter 
 writer considers πάρτοθ€ν also as 
 applied to QEdipus, not to the άκτη. 
 Metre : epitr. and logaoedic. 
 
 1243. κυματοάγης (^άγννμι), storm¬ 
 ing and breaking as waves do. This 
 and preceding verse, Pherecratean. 
 
 1244. άται. Reisig translates: 
 calamitates divinitus immissee. Me¬ 
 tre : logaoed. cum anac. 
 
 Ib. “ dti ξννονσαι eodem fere sensu 
 dictum, quoHomericum συι/εχεί atci.” 
 WUND. 
 
 1245. Metre: hephthim. dactyl. 
 
 1246-8. Dindorf observes of the 
 
 metre of these three verses, that in 
 the first the choriambus is termi¬ 
 nated by a spondee, in the second 
 by a molossus, in the third by an 
 antispast. Wunder considers the 
 last as a dipod. iamb, with antispast. 
 
 1247. άνα μ^σσαν άκτΧν, at the 
 time of the middle beam, i. e. at mid¬ 
 day. Cf. Passow in dm^. See also 
 Bemh. p. 59. 
 
 I 248. ριττάν. The Scholiast, and 
 most of the commentators, under¬ 
 stand the 'Ρΐπαι, or Riphsean moun¬ 
 tains spoken of by Aristotle, Meteo- 
 rol. I. 13. VTT αυτήν de την άρκτον virep 
 της €σχάτης Σκνθίας, ai KaXovpevai 
 'Ριτταί &c.; but as the poet has rather 
 shifted his sense from place to time 
 in the preceding verse, perhaps Her- 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 133 
 
 ΑΝ. KOU μην οδ’ ημίν^ ώί eoLKev, 6 ^evo9 
 
 άντρων ye μουνος, ώ ττάτβρ, St ομματο^ 1250 
 
 άστακτί λβίβων δάκρνον ώδ’ οδοιττορβΐ. 
 
 ΟΙ. Τ£9 ovTos ; ΑΝ. δνττερ καΐ ττάλαί κατβίχομβν 
 γνωμτ}^ τταρβστι δβνρο Υίολυνβίκη^ οδβ. 
 
 ΠΟΛΥΝΕΙΚΗΣ. 
 
 όϊμοί, τί δράσω ; ττότβρα τάμαυτον κακά 
 
 ττροσθβν δακρύσω^ TratSey, η τά τοΰδ' ορών 1255 
 
 7Γατρο9 yepovTos· ; ον ζβνης ml χθονο9 
 
 ζυν σφων βφβύρηκ βνθάδ’ βκβββλημβνον 
 
 Ισθηη συν TOtaSe, της 6 δυσφίλης 
 
 yepωv yepovrt συyκaτωκηκev ττίνος, 
 
 mann is not incorrect in understand¬ 
 ing by the word ριπαν those winds 
 which the ears perceive most at 
 night; an interpretation approved 
 by Dindorf. The variation of ex¬ 
 pression in the present passage of 
 Sophocles is not altogether unlike 
 that of the great evangelical pro¬ 
 phet : 
 
 Lo these shall come from afar (i. e. 
 from Babylon, or the east ); 
 
 And lo ! these from the north and 
 the west: 
 
 And these from the land of Sinim 
 (i. e. Syene put for south), 
 
 Isaiah XLIX. 12. 
 
 Ib. Libri, νυχιάρ. Herm. €ρρνχιαρ. 
 
 1249-50. The tact observable in 
 Theseus when speaking of Polyuices 
 before CEdipus, is still more observ¬ 
 able in the language of Antigone; 
 he is termed 6 |eVof, that the pa¬ 
 ternal ears may not be wounded; 
 his approach without attendants 
 {μοΰρος άνδρωρ) is carefully pointed 
 out, that the apprehensions of CEdi¬ 
 pus, with regard to being carried 
 back to Thebes, may be alleviated; 
 and finally, to move the old man’s 
 
 pity, the son is described as ap¬ 
 proaching profusely bathed (αστακτΙ) 
 in tears. 
 
 1251 . άστακτΧ (a, στάζω), not flow¬ 
 ing drop by drop, i. e. flowing pro¬ 
 fusely. Plat. Phsed. 117, c. άστακτϊ 
 €χώρ€ΐ τά δάκρυα. Cf. infr. 164.6. On 
 adverbs of this form, see Kiihner’s 
 Gr. Gr. §. 363 sq. Matth. §. 257. 
 On their metrical termination, con¬ 
 sult Hermann ad Aj. 1206. 
 
 1252—3. κατ^ίχομζρ ΎΡωμτ) i. q. 
 ip ‘γρωμτ) ξϊχομβρ, προσ^δοκώμβρ. Ell. 
 cornplectebamur, Neue. 
 
 1254. The dramatic bearing of 
 Polynices needs no enlarging upon : 
 penitence, submission, low voice and 
 humble gesture, form its prominent 
 character. 
 
 I 254 “ 5 · — δακρύσω, παίδίς, 
 
 {maidens.) Elmsley compares Eur. 
 Phoen. 1330. οίμοι, τί δράσω; πότ^ρ 
 ipavTop ή πόλιρ στύρω δακρνσας; 
 
 1258. της=ης. Cf. sup. 35 * 
 1258—9. δνσφιΧης TTipos. This ex¬ 
 pression must be taken in a dra¬ 
 matic, i. e. a qualified sense, and in 
 some reference to former splendour 
 of dress. Cf. infr. 1597. 
 
 K 3 
 
134 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ττλβνραί' μαραίνων^ κρατ\ 6 ομματοστ€ρ€ί 1260 
 
 κόμη δί αύρας άκτόνιστός ασσ^ταί' 
 
 άδ€λφα δ* 5 ώ? loi/ce, τουτοισιν φορβΐ 
 
 τα της ταλαίνης νηδύος θρβΤΓτηρια. 
 
 άγω τταρώλης οψ* άγαν ίκμανθάνω' 
 
 καί μαρτυρώ κάκιστος ανθρώπων τροφαΐς 3265 
 
 ταΐς σαΐσιν ηκ€ΐν' τάμα μη άλλων πνθη. 
 
 άλλ* βστι γάρ καΙ ΖηνΙ σννθακος θρόνων 
 
 Αιδώς Ιπ βργοις πάσι, καί προς σοι, πατβρ^ 
 
 παρασταθητω, των γάρ 
 άκη μάν όστι, προσφορά 
 
 1259 · yepovTi. Schneider 
 
 compares Trach. 613. θντηρα καινω 
 καινόν ev ττβπλώ/χατι. 
 
 Ib. ττίνος, e Seal, conject. ttovos, 
 Libri. 
 
 Ib. σνγκατ(ύκηκ€ν. For sense, cf. 
 sup. 1238. On the tense, cf. Neue 
 ad El. 13 01. 
 
 1260. κρατ). δ’ υμρχιτοστ€ρ€'ι (Eur, 
 Phoen. 337. ττρίσβυς 6μματοστ€ρη<:), 
 and as to your sightless head, or, 
 as far as your sightless head is con¬ 
 cerned. Cf. sup. 313. 
 
 1261. άκτ€νιστος (a, κτίνίζω), un¬ 
 kempt, dishevelled. 
 
 Ib. ασσξται (αισσω), IS tossed, 
 streams. II. VI. 509. άμφ\ δε χαΐται I 
 ωμοις άΐσσονται. 
 
 1262-3. And, according to ap¬ 
 pearances, his sustenance has been in 
 accordance (αδελφα) with his garb, 
 and the disorder of his personal 
 appearance. 
 
 1262. αδελφά. Antig. 192. αδελ- 
 φά Tcovbe κηρνζας. Cf. Matth. §. 3^^» 5 * 
 
 1263. θρίτΐτηριοζ, nutrimental, pi. 
 τα θρζπτηρια=^την τροφήν. Cf. SUp. 
 341. On the hiatus between Bpeir- 
 τηρια and άγω, see AVund. ad CEd. 
 T. 6. 
 
 1264. ττανώλψ, perditissimus cum 
 
 ημαρτημένων 
 
 δ > > V » V 
 
 ουκ €στ €τι, 1270 
 
 convicio dictum. Ell. 
 
 1265-6. κάκιστος τροφαΐς ταΐς σαΐ· 
 σιν, οη account of your mode of life, 
 or, the insufficiency of your sus¬ 
 tenance. Cf. Matth. §. 398, b. 
 Bernh. p. 84. 
 
 1266. τάμα, Reisk. e conject. Pors. 
 Elmsl. Gaisf. Dind. Wund. ταλλα, 
 Libri. Wunder translates : quee 
 ad me pertinent, ne ex aliis audios, 
 i. e. ipse tibi dico. Electr. 1225. μη- 
 
 ΚβΤ aWodev πνθτ}. 
 
 1267. σννθακος (who sits near, 
 hence, companion) θρόνων. Cf. Klau- 
 sen’s Theol. p. 86. 
 
 1268. Αιδώ?, Mercy, Clemency. 
 Antiph. 114, 21. μητ αΐ^νς, μητ ε’λε'ον 
 τυχονσα. Eurip. Heracl. 4 ^^· 
 
 \ης γάρ α 18 ους κάτνχης τις αν τνχοι. 
 
 Οη these abstract divinities of So¬ 
 phocles, see Klausen’s Theol. 134. 
 On the prep, προς, see Matth. 
 §. 590, b. 
 
 Ilj. (Ιργοις πάσι, whatever is 
 done. 
 
 1269. παρασταθητω, be your com¬ 
 panion. 
 
 1269—70. των γάρ — ετι. The of¬ 
 fences committed by me may be 
 healed; augmented they cannot be. 
 1270. άκη (plur. of άκος), healing· 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 135 
 
 τί σιγάς ; 
 
 φώνησον, ώ ττάτβρ,'τι' μη μ^ άποστραφής, 
 ovS’ άρταμβίββί μ ούδβΐ' ; άλλ* άτιμάσας 
 7Γ€μψ€ίς ανανδος^ ούδ* a μηνίβις φράσας ; 
 ώ στΓβρματ άνδρος τονδ\ epou S ομαίμορβς, 
 ΤΓβφάσατ άλλ* υμείς γβ κινησαι πατρος 
 το δυσπρόσοιστον κάττροσηγορον στόμα^ 
 ώς μη μ* ατιμον^ τον θεόν γε προστάτην^ 
 όντως άφη με, μηδέν άντεπτων έπος. 
 
 ΑΝ, λεγ\ (L ταλαίπωρ, αυτός ών X/oe/a πάρει, 
 τα πολλά γάρ τοι ρηματ η τερφαντά τι, 
 η δνσχεράναντ% η κατοικτίσαντά πως, 
 παρεσχε φωνήν τοΐς άφωνητοις τινά. 
 
 ΠΟ. άλλ* εζερώ' καλώς γάρ εζηγεΐ σύ μοι* 
 πρώτον μεν αυτόν τον θεόν ποιούμενος 
 
 1275 
 
 1 28ο 
 
 1285 
 
 What mode of remedying his father’s 
 calamities Polynices has in view, cf. 
 infr. 1342. Aj. 362, κακόν κακω di- 
 dovs aKos. 
 
 Ib. προσφορά, accession, augmenta¬ 
 tion. (CEdipus turns away in con¬ 
 temptuous and indignant silence.) 
 
 1273. άτιρΑσας. On this word, 
 and άτιμος, as apparently implying 
 not giving a hearing to a person, 
 some remarks have been previously 
 made. 
 
 1274. a (i. e. be a), wherefore. 
 Infr. 1291. CEd. T. 1005. 
 
 1275* ipaX b* όμαίμονβς. On the 
 particle, see Hart. I. 169. 
 
 1276, αλλ’ ύ /xety ye. Hart. II. 4^· 
 Matth. §. 613. “Yet (αλλα) do ye 
 try at least (ye).” The conditional 
 proposition, el μηbeXς αΧλος, is want- 
 ing. 
 
 1277. TO bvanpoaoiarov {bvs, προσ- 
 φ€ρομαι), unapproachable, hard of 
 access. 
 
 Ib. bvanpoarjyopov, hard of con^ 
 verse. 
 
 1278-9. For the double pronoun 
 pe, Reisig. compares Arist. Eq. 781. 
 σ€ yap, ος Mήboισι bιe^ιφlσω — ου φρον¬ 
 τίζω σκΧηρως σε KaOrjpevov όντως. Xen. 
 
 CEcon. X. 4· 7 ^Ρ eyωy€ σε 
 
 bvvaiμηv, el τοιοντος eίης, άσπάσασθαί 
 σε εκ της ψυχής. 
 
 1278. προστάτην, suppliant. 
 
 1279· όντως άφη pe, Dind. Wund. 
 όντως άφη ye and ούτως μ άφη ye, Libri. 
 
 1280. ων χρεία, for the want of 
 what things. Matth. §. 398, b. 
 
 1281. τα πολΧα ρήματα, verba quee 
 quis multa facit. Herm. Doederlein 
 considers τα πολλά as an adverb. 
 
 1282. bvσχepάvavτa, having created 
 offence. 
 
 Ib. κατοικτίσαντα, having moved 
 compassion. 
 
 1284. καλώς — μοι, counsellest me 
 well. Donn. 
 
 1285. πρώτον pev. On pev, not 
 
 K 4 
 
136 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 αρωγόν, €V0€V μ ώδ άν€στησ€ν μολ^ΐν 
 6 τησδβ της γης κοίρανος, δίδους €/χοι 
 λβξαί τ ακουσαι τ ασφαλβι ξνν βξοοω, 
 και ταυτ άφ* ύμων, ώ ^€V0L, βονλησομαί 
 καί ταΐνδ' άδβλφαΐν κα). ττατρος κνρβΐν βμοί, 
 a δ" ήλθον ηδη σοί θέλω λέζαι, irarep, 
 γης ίκ ττατρωας 4^€ληλαμαί φνγας, 
 τοίς σοίς ττανάρχοις ονν€κ ένθακβΐν θρόνοις 
 γονή τΓβφυκως ηζίονν γβραιτβρα, 
 avff ων μ ’Ereo/cA^y, ων φνσβι ved^repos, 
 γης ^ζέωσβν, οΰτ€ νικησας λόγω 
 οϋτ €ΐς €λ€γγον γβιρος οϋτ έργου μόλων, 
 πόλιν δβ ΤΓβίσας, ών Ιγω μάλιστα μίν 
 την σην 'Έ*ρίνυν αιτίαν elvat λέγω’ 
 ejreiTa κάπο μάντβων ταύτη κλύων. 
 
 1290 
 
 1295 
 
 1300 
 
 followed by be, cf. Neue ad Aj. 
 1300. 
 
 Ib. αυτόν τον eeov, i. e. Posei¬ 
 don. 
 
 1286. evOev {from whose altar) 
 aveanjcrev {ordered me to rise, cf. 
 sup. 276.) ώδβ μολ€Ϊν {for the pur¬ 
 pose of coming hither, cf. Phil. 
 60.) 
 
 1288. Xe^at T ακουσαι τ, i. e. to 
 hold converse. Reisig refers to 1164. 
 and compares Eur. Heracl. 183. el- 
 TTeXv ακουσαι r’ ev pepei. 
 
 1289. βουλησομαι. Fut. apparently 
 used for present. Cf. Q£d. T. 1077. 
 Matth. §. 506. VI. 
 
 J290. Kvpelv epoi. Phil. 275. oV 
 axjToh τύχοι. (And these proceedings 
 of Theseus I wish ratified to me by 
 you, &c.) 
 
 1291. a, i. e. bi a. Trach. 136. 
 ^ κα\ σε ταν Άνασσαν €\ττίσιν λέγω 
 
 / »t 
 
 ταο aiev ισχ€ΐν. 
 
 1292. Soph. Synd. νΐΙΙ. 2. (ΐ53· 
 
 Dind.) φυγας ττατρωας ε^ελτ^λασαί: 
 χθονός. 
 
 1294 * ΤΓβφυκως yepaiTepa =ζ 
 
 φύσει ων yepahepos. ** Coaluit singu- 
 laris dictio ex yov^ yepaiTcpos, ut 
 Horn. II. XXL 439. συ yap yev€fjφe 
 νβώτέρος, et ex yovj} Trporepq. ττίφυκώς.^^ 
 Dced. 
 
 1296—7. — μο\ώίΤ. 
 
 Not by superior plea 
 Of solid reasoning, or by nobler 
 deeds 
 
 Of conquering arms triumphant.* 
 
 Dale. 
 
 1297. els eXeyxov — μοΧών. Phil. 
 98. els eXeyxov e^ioiv. Cf. Slip. 834· 
 els βάσανον el. 
 
 Ib. xeipos οϋτ epyov. For the 
 omission of οντε in first member 
 of the sentence, Hartnng (I. 203.) 
 compares infr. 1561. eTrnrovco μητ 
 ε’τΓΐ βapυaχeΐ . . μόρω. Phil. 77 ^ * 
 μητ ακοντα. 
 
ΟΙΔΪΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 137 
 
 eVei γαρ ηΧθον ^ Apyos Ι9 το Αωρικοι^^ 
 
 Χαβων*Ά 8 ραστον ττ^νθβρον^ ζννωμότας 
 
 €στησ^ €μαυτω γης οσοίττβρ Άπίας 
 
 πρωτοί καλούνται και τετίμηνται δόρβι^ 
 
 όπως τον € 7 Γτάλογχον βς Θήβας στόλον 1305 
 
 ξνι> τοΐσδ' άγΕίρας η θάνοιμι ττανδίκως^ 
 
 η τους τάδ" βκττράζαντας Ικβάλοιμι γης· 
 
 eiev. τι δητα νυν άφιγμβνος κυρώ j 
 
 σο\ ττροστρσπαίους^ ώ ττάτβρ, λιτάς ίχων, 
 
 αυτός τ όμαυτου ζυμμάχων re των ίμών, 1310 
 
 οϊ νυν ζυν ίτττα τάζ^σι ζύν ίτττά re 
 
 λόγγαις το θηβης πβδίον άμφβστάσι τταν' 
 
 οίος δορυσσους ^Αμφιάρβως^ τα πρώτα μβν 
 
 1301. ^Αργος Αωρίκον, Doric 
 Argos, in opposition to the Pelasgic 
 Argos. Brunck says, that by the 
 Doric Argos is meant Peloponnesus, 
 which at v. 696. is termed Αωρ\ς 
 νήσος, and which, by the ancient 
 inhabitants, was called 'Απία. 
 
 1302. ξννωμότας. ^Esch. Eum. 
 123. "Υπνος πόνος re, κύριοι σννωμόται. 
 
 1303. *Απίας (JEsch. Suppl. 738 .)> 
 i. e. Peloponnesus, so called from 
 an ancient king of that name. Pau- 
 san. Π. 5. 5 . owTos 6 "Απις ός τοσόν^€ 
 ηνζηΟη 8ννάμ€ως, πρίν η Πελοπα ey 
 'ΟΧνμπιαν άφίκ^σθαι, ως την όντος ’ΐσ- 
 θμον,χ^ωραν Άπιαν αττ’ Ικτίνον καΧύσθαι. 
 See furtherThudichum, ρρ. 31 4“3 22. 
 and note 20 in Muller’s Eumenid. 
 p. 147. On oaomep, see Hart. I. 
 34 ί· 
 
 1304. πρώτοι, die Besten. Donn. 
 
 Ib. dopei, ex emend. Wund. Dind. 
 
 Sop't, Libri. 
 
 1305. €πτάλογχον (consisting of 
 seven lances or seven divisions of 
 troops. Pass.) στόλοι/, expedition. 
 Reisig, comparing infr. 1312., un¬ 
 
 derstands by this expression, the 
 seven chieftains who commanded the 
 expedition ; in which opinion Wun- 
 der and EUendt coincide. 
 
 1306. θάνοιμι πανδίκως, utterly. 
 II. XIX. 334. πάμπαν τ(θνάμ€ν. Trach. 
 1247. πράσσ€ΐν άνωγας ούν μ€ παν- 
 8ίκως τάδε; 
 
 1308. είει/. On this weU-known 
 formula, see Wund. in loc. and ad 
 Aj. 101. 
 
 1309. προστροπαίονς (cf. .iEsch. 
 Eum. 169. 225. Muller, p. 135. 
 147. &c.) \ιτάς, supplicatory prayers. 
 
 1310. ipavTOv — όμων, on my own 
 account and that of my auxiliaries. 
 Matth. §. 372. Hart. I. 91. 
 
 1311. ξύν επτά τε. For the par¬ 
 ticle τε, as thus used, see Hart. I. 
 105. 
 
 12,11. TO θηβης π €hiov. Phil. J 435. 
 TO Tpotay πεδίοι/. 
 
 1313. With regard to the seven 
 chiefs who conducted the expedition 
 against Thebes, the description of their 
 persons, their characters and armour, 
 and the difference between the tragic 
 
138 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 d6p€L κρατύνων, ττρώτα δ’ οΙωνων οδοϊρ* 
 ό devrepos^ δ’ ΑΙτωλος ΟΙρβω^ τ6κο9 i3*5 
 
 Τΐ'δβι;^'’ TpLTos δ’ Έτβοκλο?, Άργβΐο^ γβγω^' 
 τέταρτον ^ΙτΓΤΓομ^Βοντ onreaTeikev ττατηρ 
 Ταλαό?* ό 7Γ€μ7Γτθ5· δ’ βνχβταί κατασκαφρ 
 KairaveiJS το Οηβη9 αστυ δρωσβιΐ' ττνρί' 
 
 €κτο 9 de ΐΙαρθ€ΐΌ 7 Γαΐθ 9 Άρκα^ ορνυται, 1320 
 
 Ιττώννμο^ τψ ττρόσθβι/ άδμητης χρόνω 
 μητρος λοχβυθβΐ^, ττιστός Αταλάντης γόνος' 
 όγω δβ σός^ Kel μη σός^ άλλα του κακού 
 
 writers as to their names, Reisig 
 refers to ^sch. S. c. Theb. 375 sq. 
 Eur. Phoen. 119 sq. Suppl. 858 sq. 
 Pausan. II. 20, 4. Diod. IV. 64-5. 
 ApoUod. III. 6. 3. to which add An- 
 tig. 141 sq. and Thud. p. 315. 
 
 Ib. bopvaaovs {dopv, σ€νω), spear- 
 hrandishing. Hes. Sc. Here. 54. δο- 
 
 ρνσσόω^Αμφίτρύωνι. Libri, dopvaaovs. 
 Reisig. Herm. Elms. &c. δορνσσονς. 
 
 Ib. Άμφιάρ^ως. The Pindaric 
 writings are full of reference to this 
 illustrious person, whom the The¬ 
 ban poet terms, άμφότ^ρον μάρτιν 
 τ άγαθορ και δουρι (άγαθορ) μάρρασθαι 
 (ΟΙ. VI. 29·)» ί· 6. “ a prince of war, 
 and in the art of augury.” Cf. Nem. 
 IX. 30. 39. 57. X. 16. {ρ^φοί πολβ- 
 μοιο). Pyth.VIII. 55 · 78· Isth. VII. 
 47. See also Pausan. IX. 8. Soph. 
 El. 837. Horn. Od. XV. 244 sq. 
 
 13 13—14. ra πρώτα κρατυι/ωι/. Neue 
 compares Aj. 1300. στρατόν τα ττρώτ 
 αρίστευσα?. κρατνΡ€ΐΡ, potiri. Ell. 
 
 1314· ’τρώτα δ’. Cf. Wund. ad 
 Phil. 81 o. On οΙωρωρ odois, see 
 Ellendt II. 278. 
 
 1318. κατασκαφη, deslructively y 
 1. e. to utter destruction. (Cf. infr. 
 142T.) Antig. 1003. σττώρτας — αλ- 
 ληλονς φοραΊς, tearing murderously , 
 i. e. for the purpose of killing one 
 another. ‘ (The voice of Polynices 
 
 swells as he parades the names of 
 his assistants ; but is his rhetoric to 
 be admired in bringing the imagery 
 which he does in this and the follow¬ 
 ing verse before the mental eyes of 
 his irritable father ?) 
 
 1320. ΐΙαρΘίΡοπαΊοζ. The term 
 napdepos implied in this appellation 
 was derived, as will be seen in the 
 following verse, from his mother 
 Atalante having remained so long 
 unmarried. 
 
 1321. in 0 )Pvpos, said of a person 
 deriving his name from some par¬ 
 ticular cause. Aj. 430. ώδ’ inSpvpop 
 τονμορ — ονομα τόις εροΓ? KaKois. Nipt. 
 IV. I. (408 Dind.) ορθώί δ’ Όδυσσεύ? 
 ΐΐμ €πώρνμος κακοίς. 
 
 Ib. άτμητος i. ά8μης {swp. 10^6.) 
 
 Electr. 1238. "Αρτεριν τψ aup άδμη- 
 ταρ. {deriving his name from his 
 mother having been long previously 
 {πρόσθζρ) a virgin.) 
 
 1322. λοχβνθβις (partus) cum g’cn. 
 μητρός. Cf. infr. ττότμου φντευθ€ΐς. 
 Antig. 38. Phil. 3. See also Bernh. 
 137. Kiihn. §. 516, a. 
 
 1323-4. 
 
 And I, thy son,—or, if not thine, 
 the son 
 
 Of angry Fortune, yet who bear 
 thy name. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΕΠί ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 139 
 
 Ίτότμου φντβνθζΐς, σός yi τοι καλονμ€ΐ/θ9, 
 
 αγω τον'^Κργους αφοβον eV Θήβας στρατόν. 1325 
 
 οί σ άντ\ τταίδων τώνδβ καΙ ψνχης, ττάτβρ, 
 
 Ικ€Τ€νομ€ν ζύμπαντβς όζαιτουμβροι 
 
 μηρίν βαρείαν εΐκάθειν όρμωμενω 
 
 τωδ* άνδρΙ τονμον ττρος κασιγνητον τίσιν, 
 
 09 μ* εζεωσε κάττεσύΧησεν ττάτρας. 133° 
 
 εΐ γάρ TL πιστόν εστιν εκ γρηστηρίων, 
 
 οΐς αν σύ προσθρ^ τοΐσδ^ εφασκ είναι κράτος. 
 
 • πρός νυν σε κρηνών^ προς θεών όμογνίων^ 
 αΙτώ πιθεσθαι και παρεικάθειν^ επει 
 ΤΓΤωχοί μεν ημείς καΐ ζενοι, ζενος δε σύ* 1335 
 
 1324. ye τοι. Cf. Hart. II. 362. 
 
 1326. άντΧ παίδων r&vde, by these 
 your children. (See Herm. ad Viger. 
 p. 855. aliterMatth. §. 572. Bernh. 
 
 231·) 
 
 Ib. ψνχής, tuce salutis. Br. 
 
 ] 3 28—9. μηνιν — eiKadeiv τώδ’ avbpl, 
 to give up, to abstain from anger 
 against me. Elms. : eiKadeiv. 
 
 Ib. 6 ρμωμ 4 ν(ύ π. κασ. τίσ. who am 
 proceeding to take vengeance on a 
 brother. 
 
 1330. πάτρας. The separation 
 of this substantive from its proper 
 verb the commentators il¬ 
 
 lustrate by Antig. 537. καί ξνμμ€- 
 τίσχω καί φ4ρω της αίτιας. Ε 1 . ΙΟΟ^· 
 \vei γάρ ημάς ovbev ουδ’ ζπωφίΚΰ. 
 
 1331 · ττίστοι/, to be depended upon. 
 The English Bible continually trans¬ 
 lates in this sense by the word 
 faithful. 
 
 1332. €φασκ€ sc. ό ^eos·, to be 
 elicited from χρηστηρίων in preceding 
 verse. ( The god declared, that vic¬ 
 tory (κράτος) should be with those 
 whose side you took, or, to whom you 
 added yourself.) 
 
 1333. TV ρος κρηνών. For construc¬ 
 
 tion, cf. Matth. §. 465, 3. Kiihn. 
 §. 626. Anm. b. That in hot coun¬ 
 tries fountains and springs should 
 be objects of deep regard, can sur¬ 
 prise no one ; hence the frequent 
 addresses to them in ancient poetry, 
 Phil. [461. ώ κρήναι. Aj. 862. ω — 
 κρηναί τ€ ποταμοί θ' otde. Pausanias 
 (X. 4· I ·) hesitates to call the dwell¬ 
 ings of the Panopenses a city, be¬ 
 cause besides the want of public 
 offices, a gymnasium, a theatre and 
 an agora, it had not νδωρ κατ€ρχό- 
 μ€νον €ς κρηνην. For considerations 
 of a higher nature in reference to 
 them, see Numbers XXL 14. 17. 
 Revelat. XIV. 7. 
 
 Ib. θ€ων όμογνίων (ομον, γίνος), 
 gods-protectors of a family or race. 
 The word has been illustrated in my 
 “ Frogs” of Aristoph. Cf. Wunder 
 ad Antig. 652. The Scholiast con¬ 
 siders this adjective as applying to 
 κρηνών as well as θβών. (παθητικόν 
 4 στι το προς πατρώων κρηνών ορκονν. 
 ώί €1 4 φη, προς τών όκθρβφάντων σε 
 νδάτων.) 
 
 1334* τ^αρΐΐκαθά,ν, Elms. 
 
140 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 άλλους 8e θωπβύοντβς οίκονμβρ σύ Τ€ 
 κάγω, Tou αυτόν δαίμον βζ^ίληχοτβί. 
 
 6 δ' eV δόμοίί τύραννος^ ώ τάλα9 €γω, 
 
 KOivfj κα& ημών ίγγβΧών άβρύνβταί' 
 
 ον, el σύ τη μη ξνμτταραστησβί φρβν), 134° 
 
 βραχεί ζύν ογκω καί χρόνω διασκβδώ, 
 
 ώστ ev δόμοισι τοΐσι σοΐς στήσω σ αχών, 
 
 στήσω 8 εμαυτον, κείνον εκβαλών βία, 
 
 Kou ταυτα σου μεν ζυνθελοντο9 εστι μου 
 κομττεΐν, ανευ σου δ’ ουδέ σωθηναι σθενω. ΐ345 
 
 ΧΟ. τον ανδρα, του πεμψαντο^ ούνεκ, ΟΙδίπου, 
 είττών οτΓοϊα ζύμφορ εκττεμ'φαί τταΧιν, 
 
 ΟΙ. άλλ’ εΐ μεν, ανδρες, τησδε δημουχος χθονος 
 μη *τύγχαν αυτόν δεύρο ττροσττεμφα^ εμοί 
 θησεύ^, δίκαιων ωστ εμού κΧύειν Χ6γου9, 135° 
 
 ουτ αν 7ΓΟΤ ομφψ της εμης επησθετο' 
 
 1337· αυτοί/ δαίμονα €ξ€ΐ\η- 
 
 χότ6?, the same destiny being allotted 
 to both of US; viz. banishment from 
 our native country. ^ξ^ιληφότ^ς, Libri, 
 Herm. (ξαΧηχότίί, Lb. Valck. Br. 
 Gaisf. Dind. Wund. 
 
 1338. iv δόμοις τύραννος. “Ex¬ 
 ultant in his royal halls.” Dale. 
 
 1339. καβ* ημών €γγ€λών (El. 277. 
 807.). Aj. 969. πώς δητα τοΟδ’ 
 eVeyyeX^fi/ άν κατά ; Cf. Matth. 
 
 §· 428, 3· 
 
 Ib. άβρύνβται. Gr. Bekk. p. *322. 
 27. θρύπτεται, καυχάται, jactat se, 
 superbit. Ell. ^sch. Ag. 1176. 
 άβρνν€ται yap πας τις ev πράσσων 
 π\€ον. 
 
 1340. τημη cf)pev\y uic ΟΓ my pur¬ 
 poses. 
 
 1341. διασκεδω. Attic for διασκ€- 
 δάσω. Cf. Carmich. in σκ€δάννυμί. 
 
 ^ 344 - 5 · 
 
 This, if thou aid, is no unmeaning 
 
 vaunt;— 
 
 Without thy help I hope not e’en 
 
 for safety. Dale. 
 
 1346. τού π€μψαντος, SC. Theseus. 
 
 1347. €ΐπών όποια ξύμφορ^, having 
 said what is suitable, appropriate. 
 
 lb. €κπ€μφαι, dismiss, send from 
 thee. Cf. Matth. §. 557, i. 
 
 1348. Brunck’s proposal to put 
 the article before δημούχος, and read 
 τησδ* 6 δημούχος, has been over¬ 
 ruled by Schsefer and Elmsley. Coll, 
 infr. 1476. 1630. Eur. Med. 71. 
 Ale. 510. Iph. T. 1080. 
 
 1350. δίκαιων — λδγουρ, thinking 
 him (Polynices) worthy to hear words 
 from me. Donn. : und ihn, zu ho- 
 ren meine Wort’, ein Recht ver- 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 141 
 
 δ' άζιωθβϊς βΐσι, κάκούσας γ Ιμου 
 τοιανθ* a τοι/ tovS’ ον ττοτ ^υφρανβί βίοι/. 
 
 OS' γ\ ώ κάκιστβ, σκήπτρα καΐ θρόνους ίχων, 
 a νυν 6 σο9 ζύναιμο^ iv Θηβαίε €χ€ί, 
 τον aoros* αυτόν πατβρα τόνδ' άπηλασας 
 καθηκα9 αποΧιν^ καΐ στολάς· ταύτα^ φορβΐν^ 
 as· νυν 8aKpv€L9 βΙσορών, οτ εν πόνω 
 ταντω βεβηκως· τυγχάνεις κακών εμοί. 
 ού κλαυστα δ’ εστίν, άλλ! εμο\ μεν οίστεα 
 τάδ\ ώσπερ αν ζώ σου φονεως μεμνημενος. 
 σί) γάρ με μόχθφ τωδ* εθηκας εντροφον^ 
 σύ μ! εζεωσας' εκ σεθεν S άλω μένος 
 άλγους επαιτώ τον καθ' ημέραν βίον. 
 
 1355 
 
 1360 
 
 liehn. On ωστ€, see Matth. §. 53 
 Obs. 2. Kuhner, §, 637. Anm. 4. 
 
 1351. ούται^, Wund. ού raj/, Gaisf. 
 ■ούτ’ άν, Dind. ούδ’ αν, Br. Cf. infr. 
 1366. 
 
 1352. άξιωθβΙς (της €μης ομφης) (ίσι, 
 shall be sent away, as you direct me. 
 
 1354. CEdipus, who has hitherto 
 addressed himself to the Chorus, 
 now turns to Polynices, and speaks 
 in the bitterest tone of reproach. 
 Cf. sup. 909. and Pors. ad Eurip. 
 Hec. 1179. See also Matth. §.477, b. 
 Kiihn. §. 800, 2. c. 
 
 1357* φορ€Ϊν. Supply βποίησας, 
 which, as Wunder observes, is la¬ 
 tent in ^ηκας. Cf. Matth. §. 634, 3. 
 El. 268. έσθηματα φορονντ . 
 
 > 3 S 8 - 9 · iv πόνω ταντω κακών (in 
 the same painful and laborious evils) 
 €μοΙ (as myself). El. 268. όσθηματα 
 φορονντ όκ^ίνω ταντά. Cf. Matth. 
 
 ^385/!· 
 
 Ib. βεβηκώς τνγχάνας (are Occu¬ 
 pied, versed). 
 
 1360. κλανστά. I understand, 
 matter for tears (such as you hypo¬ 
 critically shed, and such as I disdain 
 
 to shed). 
 
 Ib. οίστία, things that must be 
 endured. Dindorf understands tibi 
 after κλανστά. 
 
 1361. ώσπ€ρ αν ζώ—ίωσπ^ρ αν ζώ. 
 Aj. II17. ώ? (as long as) άν ης οϊός 
 
 ΤΓβρ et. 
 
 Ib. σον φονόως μβμνημόνος. Dindorf 
 thinks that the poet wrote μ^μνη- 
 μόνον, under the same mode of con¬ 
 struction as El. 479. νπεστί μοι θρά¬ 
 σος άδνπνόων κΚνσυσαν ] άρτιως ονει- 
 ράτων. Plato 5· Rep. 453 j Con¬ 
 sidering the excitement and whirl of 
 passion under which the ex-monarch 
 speaks, it appears to me that the 
 original may stand good, under the 
 following explanation. Having ob¬ 
 served, and in no gentle tone, “ and 
 these evils I must endure as long as 
 I live,” instead of terminating his 
 sentence, as he might have done, he 
 suddenly changes his tone of voice 
 in a way which implies, “ and as 
 long as I live, never forgetting that 
 you, you were my assassin.” 
 
 1363. σύ, σεθεν, emphatic to the 
 highest degree. 
 
142 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 el δ’ β^εφυσα τάσδε μη 'μαυτώ τροφούς 
 τας τταΓδα?, ^ ταν ονκ αν το σον μερο9' 
 νυν δ’ (ΐίδε μ εκ^ώζονσιν, αί^ εμαί τροφοί, 
 cdS ανδρες, ου γυναίκες, είς το συμττονεϊν' 
 υμείς δ* άττ άλλοι; κούκ εμού ττεφυκατον. 
 τοιγάρ σ ο^δαίμων είσορα μεν ου τί ττω 
 ώς αύτίκ, εϊπερ οϊδε κινούνται λόγοι 
 ττρος αστυ Οηβης. ου γαρ εσθ' όπως πολιν 
 κείνην ερείψεις, άλλα πρόσθεν αϊματι 
 πεσεΐ μιανθείς γώ ζύναιμος ε^ ίσου, 
 τοιάσδ" άρας σφων πρόσθε τ εζανηκ €γω, 
 νυν τ ανακαλούμαι ^υμμάχους ελθεΐν εμοι, 
 
 1ν άζιώτον τους φυτεύσαντας σφειν, 
 και μη 'ζατιμάζητον, εΐ τυφλού πατρος 
 τοιωο εφυτην, αιοε γαρ ταο ουκ εόρων, 
 τοιγάρ το σον θάκημα και tovs aovs θρονονί 
 
 1365 
 
 > 37 ° 
 
 I 37 S 
 
 1380 
 
 1366. ταν — TOL αν. Aj. 455 · 
 
 TIS β^ων I βλάπτοι, φύγοι τάν χω κακός 
 τον κρείσσονα. Reisig adds Eur. Hip- 
 pol. V. 480. Cf. Hart. TI. 355. Kiihn. 
 §. 758, 4. Anm. 
 
 Ib. ovK av η {I should have been 
 out of existence, lebt’ ich nimmer- 
 mehr. Donn.) to σον μίρος (as far 
 as you are concerned. Cf. QEd. T. 
 
 1509)· 
 
 1369. “Ye are not wiiwe, but aliens 
 from my blood.” Dale. Closer to 
 the original perhaps : “ But you !— 
 another was your sire, not I,” (wav¬ 
 ing him indignantly away.) 
 
 1370. elaopa. Cf. infr. 1536. The 
 eye of the deity is upon you, but 
 not as it will be hereafter. 
 
 1371. ως αντίκ (οψβται, to be 
 elicited from €ΐσορα in verse pre¬ 
 ceding) . 
 
 1373· ^ρ^Ιψ^ίί. Antig. 59 ^· 
 
 ipelnet | βίων τις. This emendation 
 of Turnebus for epel τις, the reading 
 of the books, is adopted by Wunder 
 and Dindorf (in Annotat.). €pel τις, 
 Herm. 
 
 1376. άνακα\ονμαι (scrib. άγκαϊλου- 
 μαι, Dind. in Annotat.), sc. the Arse 
 or Erinyes. These deities are also 
 joined in El. in. ω πότνι \\pa 
 σ^μναί τ ’Έρινν^ς. 
 
 1377 * τους φυτ€ύσαντας σ€β€ΐν. Cf. 
 Hes. Op. 329 sq* remarks 
 
 on this subject by Thudichum, I. 
 
 317· 
 
 1379. τοίώδ’ ΐφντον, tales estis 
 tamque impii filii. Herm. (At the 
 word aibe the voice of CEdipus again 
 softens into the utmost tenderness, 
 as he discriminates simply, but most 
 beautifully, between his daughters 
 and his sons.) 
 
 1380-1. I understand generally: 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 κρατουσιν^ βϊπβρ eartv η παλαίφατοί 
 Αίκη ζύρβδροί Ζηνο9 αρχαίοι^ νόμοις. 
 συ S €ρρ’ άποπτνστόί τ€ κάττάτωρ e/uoO, 
 κακών κάκιστβ, τάσδε συλλαβών άρα9, 
 0,9 σοι καλούμαι, μητβ γης ίμφυλίου 
 δόρ€ί κρατησαι μητβ νοστησαί ττοτβ 
 το κοΐλον ^Άργο9, άλλα συγγβνβΐ χβρί 
 θανβΐν, κτανβΐν ff ύφ* ουπ€ρ βζβληλασαι. 
 τοιαυτ άρώμαυ, και καλώ το Ύαρτάρου 
 στυγνόν πατρώον €ρ€βθ9 ω? σ άποίκίσ^, 
 
 143 
 
 1385 
 
 1390 
 
 “ Your supplicatory seat therefore 
 at the altar, and your own or bro¬ 
 ther’s future sway in Thebes, are 
 things in their hands and at their 
 disposal (viz. the Arse), not mine.” 
 For the accusative after κρατάν, cf. 
 Matth. §. 360, b. Ellendt, coupling 
 θάκημα and θρόνους^ translates, solium 
 et imperium regium. Hermann, Wun- 
 der and Dindorf understand the seat 
 at Neptune’s altar. Sup. 1179. 
 
 1381. eariu, i. e. exists, Elms. 
 Neue. €στ'ιν, Herm. Wund. Dind. 
 
 Ib. παλαίφατος. Ellendt observes, 
 that the power of the verb φημ\ in 
 this compound, as here used, is 
 somewhat obscure, but contends that 
 it implies “ Justitice vis Deorum olim 
 cur a et quasi ore hominibus pate- 
 facta.” Neue translates : tanquam 
 oraculis prodita. 
 
 1382. Δ,ίκη ξννβ^ρος. Hes.Op. 257. 
 nap Alt πατρί καθεζομ^νη, SC. Αίκη. 
 Eur. Med. 762. Αίκη Ζηνός. 
 
 Ib. Ζηνος άρχαίοις νόμοις, the laws 
 of Zeus, sanctioned by their antiquity. 
 See further Dissen’s Comment, ad 
 Find. p. 97. Klausen’s Theol. pp. 
 85. 132. 
 
 1383. άπάτωρ epov. For the 
 grammar, see Bernhardy, p. 172. 
 Dale translates with great spirit; 
 
 Hence to thy doom, accursed ! I 
 disclaim 
 
 A father’s part in thee, thou scorn 
 of men. 
 
 And with thee bear the curse I 
 call to blast thee. 
 
 1384. συλλάβων, having taken as 
 your companions. CEd. T. 971. τα δ’ 
 ουν παρόντα συλλάβων θεσπίσματα. 
 
 1385. “ εμφυλίου est quasi 
 συγγενούς, patrice.” Ell. (The so¬ 
 lemn and oracular tone in which the 
 concluding part of this most power¬ 
 ful speech is delivered, will readily 
 occur to the reader.) 
 
 1386. 8όρει, Herm. Dind. Wund. 
 εν δορί. Elms. 
 
 1389—90. TO Ύαρτάρου — ερεβος. 
 Hermann, and Wunder and Ellendt 
 with him, understand: invoco in- 
 visam Tartari caliginem, quce patrem 
 meum Laium tegit, ut te hinc ab- 
 strahat. This appears to me rather 
 a far-fetched explanation, and the 
 reader may perhaps consider the 
 following as still more so. What¬ 
 ever is here invoked, it is certain 
 that the Erinyes or Eumenides are 
 invoked in the next verse. These 
 Sophocles (sup. 40. 106.) considers 
 as the daughters of Scotus and Gaea, 
 but who was the father of Scotus him- 
 
144 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 καλώ τασδβ δαίμοναν, καλώ δ *Άρη, 
 
 TOU σφών το δβινον μίσος ίμβφληκοτα. 
 
 καχ ταυτ άκουσας στβΓχβ, κά^άγγ^λΧ Ιών 
 
 καί ττασί Καδ /xe/otcrt τοϊς σαντον Θ αμα 
 
 ΊΓίστοΙσι συμμάχοισίν, οννβκ Οιδιττονς i39S 
 
 τοίαντ €ν€ίμ€ τταισΐ τοΐς αυτόν yepa. 
 
 ΧΟ. ΙΙολνν€ίΚ€ς^ οντβ ταΐς τταρβλθουσαίς οδοΐς 
 ξννηδομαί σοί, νυν τ Iff ώς τάχος πάλιν. 
 
 ΠΟ. οϊμοί κβλβύθου της τ ίμης δυσπραγίας, 
 
 οίμοί S βταίρων* οΐον άρ οδού τβλος ΐ4°ο 
 
 ^'Αργους άφωρμηθημβν, ώ ταλας €γω, 
 τοιοΰτον οίον ονδβ φωνησαί tlvl 
 βξβσθ" Ιταίρων, ovS άποστράφαι πάλιν, 
 
 self? Reasoning from conjecture, 
 none was more likely to own that 
 honour than Tartarus. If, there¬ 
 fore, by a well-known construction 
 of Sophocles, we refer πατρωον for 
 ττατρωον to Tartarus (j^sch. Eum. 
 315. ματρωον αγνισμα κύριον φόι/ου), 
 (TTvyvov €ρ€βο5 might by a hold me¬ 
 tonymy stand for Scotus. Klausen 
 (Theol. 58.) reverses matters, and 
 makes Tartarus a son of Erebus, to 
 Ύαρτάρον, ex Herm. emend. Elms. 
 Dind. Wund. τον Ύαρτάρον, Libri. 
 
 1390. άτΓοικίζζίν, to remove (Trach. 
 
 954. αύρα, ητα μ anoiKiaeiev ck τόπων). 
 And where to be removed ? The 
 Trachiniae and Ajax of our author 
 will explain. Trach. 282. αντο\ μέν 
 "'Αώον πάντ€ί ciV οΙκητορ€ 5 . Aj. 394 
 sq. Ιω σκότος, (μόν φάος, | ‘όρφος ω 
 φα€ννότατον, ως epoi, | , eXeaBe 
 
 μ* οίκητορα. 
 
 1391. Klausen’s Theol. 
 ρ. 128, 
 
 1394 · Wund. ad 
 
 Antig. 334 * Hart. I. 109· 
 
 1396· €ν€ΐμ€ yipa. Phil. 1061. 
 
 τάχ άν το σον y(paς | τιμήν εμο'ι vei- 
 μ€ΐ€ν. 
 
 Ib. αντον. Cf. Matth. §. 148. 
 Ohs. 3· 
 
 ι 397 ~^· οντ€—^τ€. Ε 1 . 349 · 
 
 δε πατρί πάντα τιμωρονμενης, j οντε 
 ξννφδεις, την τε δρωσαν εκτρεπεις. 
 
 1397· παρεΧθονσαις όδοΐς. 
 
 Wunder compares Antig. 1213. αρα 
 
 δνστνχ^εστάτην κεΧενθον έρπω των ττα- 
 ρεΧθονσών όδών ; EUendt observes : 
 " de tempore et rebus actis.” 
 
 1397—8· ov ^ννηδομαι — σνμπενθω. 
 Eur. Med. 136. ονδε σννηδομαι, ω 
 yvvai, aXyεσι δώματος. HerM. 
 
 1399. δυσττρα^/α, disappointed pur¬ 
 pose. On της εμης, as belonging 
 equally to κεΧενθον and δνσπραζιας, 
 see Matth. §. 441. Ohs. 2. 
 
 1400. oiov apa. Aj. 367* οϊμοι ye- 
 Χωτος, olov νβρίσθην apa. El. I 18^. 
 1399. Antig. 1178. &c. 
 
 1400— I. olov — άφωρμηθημεν, 1. e. 
 OLOV apa τεΧος εστι της όδον, ην απ 
 ^Apyovς ώρμηθημεν. W^UND. 
 
 1403. άποστρεψαι, retro vertere (sc. 
 εζεστι). ElL. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 145 
 
 αλλ* οντ apauSou Trjde συγκυρσαυ τνχτ]. 
 
 ώ τουδ Ομαιμοι παΐδβ^^ άλλ! νμύ^^ Ιττύ 1405 
 
 τα σκληρά ττατρο^ κλύβτβ τονδ' άρωμβρον, 
 
 μη τοί μ€ ττρος θβώρ σφώ γ\ lap αι τουδ' άραι 
 
 ΐΓατρο9 τβλώρται, καί τΐ 9 νμΐρ eV δόμους 
 
 Ροστθ9 γβρηται, μη μ άτιμάσητβ ye, 
 
 αλλ ep ταφοισι θβσθβ καί κτβρίσμασιρ. 1410 
 
 και σφωρ ο pvp βτταιρο^, ορ κομίζβτορ 
 
 τουδ αρδρο 9 0Ι9 ττορβΐτορ^ ονκ Ιλάσσορα 
 
 1404. συγκΰρσ-αι. Supply δει, to be 
 elicited from ‘ίξ^στι. Reisig compares 
 Phil. 667. πάρ^σται ταντά σοι και diyyd- 
 veiv κα\ δόντα δούναι. A better example 
 is found at OEd. T. 819. Cf. Neue 
 ad El. 72. and Matth. §. 634, 3. 
 
 1405· “ τουδ* Ομαιμοι παϊδίς. El- 
 lendt adverts to the tact with which, 
 as usual, Polynices addresses his two 
 sisters. 
 
 1407-9. μη τοί μ€ — μη μ άτι- 
 μάσητ€ ye. On the double pronoun, 
 see Bernh. p. 276. Kuhn. §. 632.; 
 on the particle ye, Hart. I. 376. 
 
 1407. μη Toi. Cf. Hart. 11. 368. 
 
 Ib. edv. See Dind. ad Arist. 
 Vesp. 228. 
 
 lb. σφώ y, ex Elmsl. conject. 
 Dind. W^und. σφώΐν y av al and 
 σφών y av ai, Libri. 
 
 1410. ev τάφοίί Oeaee, bury me. 
 
 Ib. κτepiσμaσιv {κτepίζω), sepul¬ 
 chral honours. Wund. But what 
 sepulchral honours } The commen¬ 
 tators on Sophocles (and rightly at El. 
 434. 931.), understand the secondary 
 meaning of the word; but here I think 
 its primary power may be admitted ; 
 KTepiapaTa, like Krepea (cf. Pass, in 
 voc.), appearing to be such costly or 
 useful articles as were prized by the 
 dead when living, and which were ac¬ 
 cordingly deposited in their z tombs, 
 or burnt upon their funeral piles. 
 KTepiapaai is here joined by zeugma 
 with τάφοισι. Cf. Antig. 204. 1207. 
 
 1411 — 12. enaivos — TVOvelTov. The 
 commendations which you derive 
 from this man (CEdipus) for your 
 laborious services. 
 
 1412. oif novelrov — Tois vpeTepoig 
 TTovois. Matth. §. 481. Obs. 2. 
 
 z From Isaiah, and Ezek. (XXXII. 27.), it is evident that this practice was not un¬ 
 known to the Jews. Hence the elegant translator of the former, Λvhen illustrating the 
 prophet s thirteenth chapter, observes: “ You are to form to yourself an idea of an im¬ 
 mense subterraneous vault, a vast gloomy cavern, all round the sides of which there are 
 cells to receive the dead bodies : here the deceased monarchs lie in a distinguished 
 sort oi state, suitable to their former rank, each on his o\i^n couch, with his arms beside 
 him, his sword at his head, and the bodies of his chiefs and companions round about 
 him. In another jmblication (Arist. Ran. p. 254.) the present writer endeavoured to 
 bring home this feeling of Grecian antiquity (Virgil has made us more familiar Avith 
 U as a portion of Roman belief) to the reader by a copy of verses of a lighter character. 
 Sir John Chardin finds the same custom prevailing in Mingrelia : En Mingrelie ils 
 dorment tons leur ep<f'e sous leurs tfltes, et leurs autres annes a leur cbti ; et on les 
 enterre de mesme, leurs armes posees de cette faqon.” Cf. Ai. 5 74-.1; 7 7. Λ 1 uch light has 
 rw^ntly been thrown on this subject by Mrs. Grant, in her “ Visit to the Etruscan 
 Tombs.” See also Murray’s “China,” Vol. II. 282 sq. 
 
 L 
 
146 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 €Τ άλλον οϊσβί της βμης υπουργίας. 
 
 ΑΝ. ΙΙολύνβίΚ€ς, Ικβτβύω σβ ππσθηναί τί μοι. 
 
 ΠΟ. ώ φίλτάτη, το ποΐον, Αντιγόνη ; Aeye. 
 
 ΑΝ. στρβψαι στράτβυμ! ός 'Άργος ώς ταγιστα ye, 
 
 K(u μη σί τ αυτόν καΙ πόλιν διβργαση. 
 
 ΠΟ. άλλ* ούχ οων τβ. πώς γαρ αυθις αυ πάλιν 
 στράτβυμ αγοιμι ταυτον βΙσάπαξ τρόσας ; 
 
 ΑΝ. τί δ’ αυθις^ ώ τταΓ, Set σε θυμουσθαι ; τί σοι 
 πάτραν κατασκάφαντι κόρφος βρχβται ; 
 
 ΠΟ. αίσχρον το φβύγβιν, και το πρβσββύοντ ίμΙ 
 ουτω γβλάσθαι του κασιγνητου πάρα. 
 
 ΑΝ. όρας τα του8' ουν ώς βς ορθόν βκφόρβι 
 
 μαντ€υμαθ\ ός σφων Θάνατον άμφοΐν θρο€Ϊ ; 
 
 ΠΟ. χρηζβι γάρ' ημΐν δ' ούχι συγχωρητόα. 
 
 *415 
 
 1420 
 
 *42$ 
 
 Τ 413 · viTovpylas, for your 
 
 services to me. 
 
 1417. δκργάζζσθαι, to ruin. The 
 word does not occur again in So¬ 
 phocles. 
 
 1418. ανθα αν πάλιν. Phil. 95 
 avBis αν πάλιν | εϊσει/χι προς σί. (Sui- 
 DAS : av0LS‘ (ξ αρχής, ττάλιν' εκ 
 bcvTepov.) Hermann joins πάλιν ayoi- 
 μι, reducam, and translates (ισάπαξ, 
 uno nisu, repente. The answer of 
 Antigone does not appear to admit 
 of this interpretation. 
 
 Ib. αΰ. “ Aut aj/cum Vauvillersio 
 aut ayoipH av cum Toupio scriben- 
 dum.” Dind. 
 
 1419. ayoipi. For this optative 
 without av, cf. sup. 1172. Bernh. 
 p. 411. Matth. §. 515. Obs. trans¬ 
 lates : how should I be able to 
 lead &c. ? 
 
 1420. θνμονσθαι, von Rache ent- 
 brennen, toburnwithreveiige.Germ. p. 
 
 1422. πρ€σβ(νοντα, the elder by 
 birth. 
 
 To fly were baseness, and I will 
 not fly. 
 
 IMine is the birth-right ; and I 
 cannot brook 
 
 The insults of my brother. 
 
 Dale. 
 
 1424. h ορθον €κφ€ρ€1 (CEd.T. 88. 
 κατ ορθον ^^ίρχ^ται), tend straight to 
 their accomplishment. Find. Nem. IV. 
 100. και TO μόρσιμον AioOev πεττρω- 
 pevov eK(f)epev. See also Heind. ad 
 Plat. Phsedon. 66, b. The German 
 prose translators interpret as if they 
 considered εκφερει the second pers. 
 indie, of the middle verb €κφερομαι. 
 Hermann translates : ut hujus vati- 
 cinia ad eventum ruunt. Tyrw. Br. 
 εκφίρεις. 
 
 1425. θάνατον άμφοΐν, mutual 
 death. 
 
 1426. χριιζίΐ (SCHOL. : iv ϊσω τω 
 χρηίτμω^ξΐ') yap, SO he vaticinates 
 such indeed are his predictions. Cf. 
 ^sch. Eum. 193. Choeph. 332. 
 Eur. Hel. 516. Dindorf translates; 
 
ΟίΔΓΠΟΤΣ ΕΠ[ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 147 
 
 ΑΝ. οίμοι τάλαινα' r/y δβ τολμήσει κλύων 
 τα τοΰδ* ίπβσθαι τάνδρος, οΓ Ιθίστ^ίσ^ν ; 
 
 ΠΟ. ovS ayy^'Kovpev φλανρ' βττβί στρατηλάτου 
 χρηστόν τα κρβίσσω, μηδβ τάνδβά Xeyeiv. 
 
 ΑΝ. όντως' άρ\ ώ τταΐ, ταντά σου δeδoyμlva ; 
 
 ΠΟ. και μη μ! βπίσχης· γ· άλλ* €μο\ μίν ηδ" 6δθ9 
 βσταί μβλονσα δνσποτμό^ τβ καΐ κακή 
 ττροί τονδβ ττατροί των re τονδ* ^Έριννων. 
 σφων S' βνοδοίη Zeuy, ταδ’ el τβλβΐτβ μοί 
 θανοντ\ eVei ον μβ ζώντά y avOis €^€τον. 
 
 1430 
 
 1435 
 
 vult enim, and objects to the inter¬ 
 pretation of the Scholiast. 
 
 Ib. συγχωρητ€α = συγχωρητίον (cf. 
 sup. 495), cedendum. Ell. The 
 Scholiast, and translators generally, 
 adopt a different sense : “ and yet in 
 spite of his predictions no reconcile¬ 
 ment, no coming together, can take 
 place between him (Eteocles) and 
 me’* 
 
 1427“^. ScHOL. : TLs de τολμή¬ 
 σω € 7 Γ€σθαι, κΧνων τά rovSe τάν 8 ρ 6 ς 
 (CEdipus SC.), οΓ €θΐσπισ€ν ; 
 
 1429· φλανρα, words of had omen. 
 For the force of the particle δβ in 
 ovbe, Reisig refers to his Critical 
 Comment. in 585. 
 
 1429—30· ατρατηΧάτον χρήστου 
 (fVrt), a good commander must &c. 
 See Matth. §, 316, c. 
 
 1430. Tavbfd, quce sectis sunt, de- 
 teriora, improspera. Ell. Cf. Elmsl. 
 ad Eur. Heracl. 171. On pqbe, see 
 Matth. §. 608, e. 
 
 1431. beboypev’ SC. earl. Antig. 
 576. 8 ( 8 oypev’, ώί eoiKe, TqvSe κατβα- 
 
 νύν. Cf. Matth. §. 559· Obs. (An¬ 
 tigone first, and then Ismene (infr. 
 *437·)» throw their arms around 
 their brother’s neck.) 
 
 1432. κα\ μη., ye. See Hart. 1. 
 146. 397. 
 
 lb. η8’ (‘^ de re proxime instanie 
 cf. (Ed. T. 1478. Antig. 877.” Ell.) 
 68ος, expedition against his native 
 country. 
 
 1435. evobovv. Passow, under¬ 
 standing this verb in an active 
 sense, translates, to conduct upon a 
 good path, to lead to afavourahle issue. 
 Ellendt agrees in this transitive sense 
 of the verb, which would necessarily 
 require σφώ, not σφων, after it. (Cfi 
 Wesseling ad Herodot. VI. 73.) 
 Dindorf considers €ύο 8 οίη a corruj)- 
 tion for ev 8ι8οίη, in which case 
 σφων would stand correctly. The 
 learned writer refers to sup, v. 642. 
 ω Zev, 8ι8οίης τοΊσί τοιουτοισιν ev, and 
 to Polybius IV. 21, 11. eav ποτ tiv- 
 τοΐς 6 deos ev 8ω (libri duo βυοδω). 
 Wunder reads, σφων 8’ evo8oίη Zevg. 
 
 Ib. τά8\ the things of lohich I 
 spoke, sup. 1410. Reisig: i. e.istam 
 caritatem, qua me nunc, complecti- 
 mini. 
 
 1436. Θανόντ. This is again one 
 of those words which form the signal 
 for battle between those who admit 
 and those who deny the elision of 
 the iota in the dative case. The 
 latter, to preserve their theory, 
 change μοι into pe in the preceding 
 verse. Dindorf, as an advocate for 
 
 L 2 
 
148 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 μβθβσθβ δ' ηδη, γαίρ^τον τ , ου γαρ μ en 
 βλβΤΓΟΡΤ €O'0 \Ia€O‘ 0* αύθί9· ΑΝ. CO ToKcLLv cyco, 
 no. μη τοί pi οδύρον, AN. και ns αν σ ορμωμ^νον 
 
 is ττρούτΓΤον "Αίδην ον κατασηνοι^ κασί , 144° 
 
 ΠΟ. et χρη^ θανονμαι, ΑΝ. μη (τν y, αλλ βμοί ττιθον, 
 ΠΟ. μη TTciff a μη δβΐ ΑΝ. δυστάλαινά ταρ ίγω, 
 et (Του (ΐτβρηθώ, ΠΟ. ταυτα δ ev τω δαιμονί 
 κα\ τηδβ φνναί χάτβρα, σφων δ* ουν €γω 
 
 the former opinion, refers to Trach. 
 677. Eurip. Alcest. 1118. See on 
 the subject Matthise, §. 44. 
 
 1436. οΰ μ€ ζώντα, Elms, ex La. 
 Wund. ov μοι ζώντι cum cseteris libris, 
 Herm. Dind. 
 
 Ib. €ξ€τον. The commentators, 
 who adopt this verb in the sense of 
 embracing, compare Eur. Ion. 1452· 
 Iph. T. 827. Soph. El. 1226. 1285. 
 
 1438. βΧίποντα. Aj. 962. ισωί 
 TOi, Kfl βΚίττοντα μη *πόθονν, j θάνοντ 
 άν οΙμώζίΐαν eV χρ^ία dopos. 
 
 Ib. ω τάλαιν βγω. Antigone en¬ 
 grossing the dialogue, the reader’s 
 imagination must be left to form the 
 stage-play of CEdipus and Ismene. 
 
 1440. is προνπτον "Αώην. Both 
 compares Eur. Hippol. 1366. προν¬ 
 πτον is abav στΐίχω κατα yas. See 
 also Blomf. Gloss, in S. c. Th. 848. 
 
 1441. el χρη, θανονμαι. MuSS' ich, SO 
 start ich. Donn. A modern reader is 
 recalled by this heroic language and 
 bearing of Polynices to that fine 
 passage in Corneille’s “ Horace 
 
 Julie. Que vouliez-vous qu’il fit 
 centre trois ? 
 
 Le viEiL Horace. Qu’il mourfit! 
 
 Ib. μη σν ye, SC. Savr^s, or, ταντ 
 e’mrjs. Cf. Kuhn. §. 854. and Pas- 
 
 sow II. 160. 
 
 1442. a μη del, things unbecoming. 
 
 1443. el — στepηθω. On el with 
 conjunctive, cf. sup. 1226. and Wun- 
 der ad Aj. 513. Matth. §. 525, 7,b. ^ 
 Kuhn. §. 818. Anm. I. Hart. II. 
 301. 
 
 1443-4. ταντα — xarepa. Generally: 
 whether these things shall be for 
 good or for evil {rhbe xarepa), whe¬ 
 ther this way or that, it is for the 
 deity to » decide. (At the emphatic 
 σφων, the tone of Polynices, which 
 has previously been of the deepest 
 energy and solemnity, changes to 
 one of the tenderest afiection.) 
 
 1444. T^Se xarepa. The adjective 
 erepos in the sense of hostile, adverse, 
 (and the adverb necessarily partakes 
 of the adjective,) may be illustrated 
 from the following passages of Pin¬ 
 dar : Pyth. HI. 60. δαίμων δ’ erepos | 
 is κακόν rpeypais ibapaaaaro viv. NeiU. 
 VHI. 5. rbv μev άμipoιs avayKas 
 βaσrάζeιs, erepov δ’ erepais. (On 
 both which passages see Dissen, 
 who translates erepais, asperis.) Cf. 
 infr. 1452. For examples of Tfjde, 
 see Ell. H. 268. 
 
 Ib. σφων. “ Scribendum σφω cum 
 Elmsleio, quamvis ipse postmodum 
 rejecit.” Dind. 
 
 a Hartutig translates, “ Diess steht in der Hand des Geshicks, ob es so oder so 
 geschieht.” II. 13. where see on σφψν δ’ odv. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 149 
 
 6 eoL 9 άρώμαι μη ττοτ άντησαι κακών, ΐ445 
 
 άνάζιαί γαρ ττασίν ίστ€ δυστυχβΐν. 
 
 ΧΟ. vea τάδβ ν^όθβν ήλθβ μοί στροψ, d . 
 
 via βαρύτΓοτμα κακα τταρ άλαου ζβνον, 
 
 €L τι μοίρα μη κιγχάνβί, 145° 
 
 μάτην γαρ ουδβν αξίωμα δαιμόνων ίγω ψρασαι, 
 όρα όρα ταντ* ail χρόνοι, hrii μίν erepa, 
 
 1445· ^ντησαι κακών. Cf. Mus- 
 grave ad Eurip. Troadd. 241. 
 
 1446. πάσιν, in the judgment of 
 all. Matth. §. 387. Bernh. 83. 
 Kiihn. §. 581, e. on all accounts. 
 Br. Elms. Cf. GEd. T. 8. 40. Aj. 
 
 599· 
 
 1447. The Chorus, touched by 
 the scene of deep distress which has 
 recently passed before their eyes,— 
 fearful of future conflicts, in which 
 their country may be engaged,—and 
 perhaps not much conciliated by the 
 resentful feelings lately displayed by 
 CEdipus, feel themselves at a loss whe¬ 
 ther to ascribe the troubles brought 
 and about to be brought upon them, 
 to the blind man himself, or to fate, 
 of which he appears to be the mere 
 instrument. The prophetic afflatus, 
 so often assigned to his Chorus by 
 Sophocles, not only inclines them 
 finally, as it should seem, to the 
 latter opinion, but gives them a 
 sort of intimation that time, and the 
 progress of events, are now about 
 to operate a great change in the 
 fortunes of CEdipus. Doederlein’s 
 opinion, though adopted by Dindorf 
 and Wunder, and previously, I be¬ 
 lieve, suggested by Elmsley, viz. 
 that the opening observations of the 
 Chorus refer to a storm of thunder 
 and lightning already commencing 
 seems to me more ingenious than 
 correct. Is not the exclamation of 
 CEdipus at v. 1457. sufficient proof 
 that the storm does not commence 
 
 till V. 1456 ? 
 
 Ib. via veodev. Doederlein com¬ 
 pares the Homeric alvodev αΐνώς (II. 
 VII. 97·), and olodev olos. Metre : 
 proceleusm. and dochm. 
 
 1449. via, inserted before βαρύ- 
 πυτμα by Herm., to create a dim. 
 dochm. 
 
 1450. et Ti μοίρα μη Κίγχάν€ΐ SC. 
 αυτόν. D(ed., who compares Horn. II. 
 XXII. 303. (νυν avri μ€ μοίρα κιχά- 
 vet), and translates: nisi forte fata 
 eijam instant. For the Chorus to have 
 spoken in this sense, it is in strict¬ 
 ness necessary that they should have 
 been on the stage or in the orchestra 
 when CEdipus intimated what signal 
 from heaven was to precede his 
 death (sup. v. 95.), which they 
 were not. I understand, in a gene¬ 
 ral sense, with Hermann : nisi ali- 
 quid fatale accidit. 
 
 Ib. κιγχάνω, Attic for κιχάνω. 
 Herm. de emend. Gr. Gr. ratione 
 p. 60. Metre : cret. and dochm. 
 
 1451. μάτην, without its due effect 
 and accomplishment. The Chorus, 
 as Reisig has seen, refer mentally to 
 the oracles about the reception of 
 CEdipus in Attica, his burial there, 
 and consequent advantages to the 
 Athenians. Cf. Bernh. p. 338. 
 
 Ib. αξίωμα δαιμόνων, decree of the 
 gods. Metre: iamb, tetram. 
 
 1452. όρα όρα ταυτ aet χρόνος. 
 Dindorf, observing that it is not 
 clear what ταΰτα here refers to, pro¬ 
 poses to read όρα όρα πάντ del χρόνος, 
 
 L 3 
 
150 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 τα 8e τταρ ημαρ αύθις· αν^ων ανω. ΐ455 
 
 eKTV7r€v αιθήρ, ω Δβυ, 
 
 ΟΙ. ώ τβκνα τβκρα, ττώς αν, βΐ tl 9 βντοποί, 
 τον ττάντ αριστον 8evpo Οησβα ττοροι ; 
 
 ΑΝ. ττάτβρ, τί S €στΙ τά^ίωμ βφ* ω καλβΐς ; 
 
 ΟΙ. Δώί πτ€ρωτο9 ηδβ, μ! αύτίκ ά^βται 1460 
 
 βροντή 7Γρο9 Άίδην. άλλα τΓβμψαθ" τάχθ 9 . 
 
 ΧΟ. ϊδβ μάλα μ^γα^ epelweTai άντ. α!. 
 
 comparing Qid. Τ. 1213. «φβΰρβ σ’ 
 ακονθ' 6 ττάνθ' όρων χρόνος. By ταντα 
 I understand the via κακά, of which 
 the Chorus had just been speaking, 
 and things of life generally. 
 
 1454-5. €7Γ6ί — άνω. The general 
 sense of this difficult passage is 
 clearly intimated by the Scholiast: 
 cv τω χρόνω πολλαι μ€ταβολα\, κα\ όρά- 
 ται ό χρόνος ττολλά piv αϋζων τταρ' 
 ημαρ, πολλά δβ eh το βμτταλιν τρόπων. 
 
 Ib. ene\ pev ere pa. In desperate 
 cases we must translate desperately : 
 there are periods when he (Time) 
 sees things in a hostile way. Cf. sup. 
 1444. and add Philoct. 503. βροτοΊς 
 κ€Ϊται παθζίν pev ev, πα0€Ϊν δό Odrepa. 
 Metre : iambus, followed by four 
 dochmiacs. 
 
 1455. Instead of πηματα, the 
 reading of the books, Canter and 
 Brunck have adopted from the Scho¬ 
 liast, παρ’ ημαρ, in which they are 
 followed by Matthise (whom see, 
 p. 1034.), Wunder and Dindorf. 
 H ermann reads επ’ ημαρ, adding, 
 “ επ’ ημαρ autem m diem significat, 
 quod interdum de preesente die 
 dicitur.” 
 
 1456 sq. The Chorus, as with 
 uplifted hands they claim the pro¬ 
 tection of the king of heaven; the 
 blind CEdipus, who conscious from 
 
 the well-known signal that his day 
 of relief is at hand, traverses the 
 stage with an air of majesty; An¬ 
 tigone and Ismene, as with mingled 
 consternation and astonishment they 
 behold their sire, heedless of the 
 growing storm, and only impatient 
 for the arrival of Theseus, must here 
 have formed an interesting group. 
 But we are only at the commence¬ 
 ment of a most deeply interesting 
 succession of scenes. Compare with 
 the present Schiller’s “ Maid of Or¬ 
 leans,” Act iv. s. 11. 
 
 Ib. eKTvnev αιθήρ. On the usual 
 mode of expressing natural phae- 
 nomena without a substantive pre¬ 
 ceding, see Matth. §. 295, i. Elms- 
 ley notices this as the only instance 
 of the Homeric form of eKTvnev in 
 Attic poetry. Metre: chor. and 
 moloss ; or, iamb, and antispast. 
 
 1457. πως av, utinam. Matth. 
 
 §· 513» I· 
 
 Ib. ίντοπος, at hand, on the spot. 
 
 1458. πόροι. Electr. 1267. εϊ ae 
 θ€ 6 ς όπόρισ€ν aperepa προς μίΚαθρα. 
 
 1459. τά^ίωμα. ScHOL. : ro βον· 
 λημα, wish or purpose. 
 
 1460-1. πτ€ρωτος βροντή. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 118. Obs. i. 
 
 1461. Thunder repeated. 
 
 1462. ράλα and ράλ’ av, again. 
 
 ’* Hartnng· (I. 303.) reads i%€iTev erepa, τά δ’ 4 π ¥ιματ αυθ. αΰξ. &νω, and translates: 
 daseine spiiter, das andere Λvieder an einem Tage oder pldtzlich aus Tageslicht bringend. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΪ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 151 
 
 κτύτΓ09 άφατο9 ode 3ίθβολθ9* €9 δ ακραν 
 δβΐμ ντΓηλθβ κράτος φόβαρ, ΐ4<55 
 
 επτηζα θυμόν, ουρανία γαρ αστραπή φλβγβί πάλιν, 
 τί μαν άφησβι τβλος ; dedia δ * ου γαρ αλιον 
 άφορμα ποτ\ ούκ όίνβυ ζυμφορας. ΐ47ο 
 
 ώ μβγας αίθηρ^ ώ Ζβΰ. 
 
 ΟΤ. ώ παΐδβς, ηκβι τώδ’ βττ* άνδρΙ θβσφατος 
 βίου τ€λ€υτη, κούκ βτ βστ αποστροφή. 
 
 ΑΝ. πώς οΐσθα ; τω δβ τούτο συμβαλών βχβις ; 
 
 ΟΙ. καλώς κάτοιδ'. άλΧ ώς τάχιστα μοι μόλων ΐ475 
 
 άνακτα χώρας τησδβ τις πορβυσατω. 
 
 ΧΟ. ία ία, Ιδού, μάΚ αυθις άμφίσταται (ττροφ. β'. 
 
 Eurip. Troadd. 739 * -^sch. Pers. 
 1038. Arist. Pax. 460. Cf. infr. 
 1477. Seid. 
 
 Ib. ΐρζίπζται^ falls. Wunder com¬ 
 pares Virg. Georg. I. 487. ccelo ceci- 
 derunt — fulgura. 
 
 1462—3. peyas aiparosj unspeakably 
 loud. 
 
 Ib. ^ιοβόλος, (because) thrown by 
 the hand of Zeus. (Eustath. p. 692, 
 53. 720, 29. 1188, 30.) 
 
 1466. ουρανία. To accommodate 
 the metre, Hermann reads the neuter 
 plural ουράνια. (Cf. Seidler ad Eur. 
 Troad. 1306.) Dindorf proposes 
 θρανία. Λν under, looking to the 
 Scholiast’s explanation, {ουρανία' άντι 
 του rap^eta,) seems very reasonably to 
 think that Sophocles wrote some¬ 
 thing else, and not ουρανία. 
 
 1469. τί μαν άφησα reXos ; queni 
 eventual habebit P Wund. qucmnam 
 eniittet finem, i. e. queninam fineni 
 portendetP Heath. On τί μάν, see 
 Matth. p. 1070. Hart. H. 375. 
 
 Ib. αλι, for metrical reasons, 
 Herm. ex conject. άλιον, Dind. 
 Wund. 
 
 1470. αφορμή, exovitur j de ful- 
 
 gure non inania portendente. Ell. 
 
 1471. ω —Zei). Help! help! King 
 of heaven, help ! 
 
 1473. αποστροφή, ejfugiuin. Reis. 
 Fgm. Incert. Soph. (864.) οΰκ εστ 
 
 αποστροφή βροτοίς—των κακών. 
 
 1474 · Dindorf and Wunder as¬ 
 sign this verse to Antigone ; the 
 books, much better, I think, to the 
 Chorus. They did not know what 
 this thunder-storm portended to 
 (Edipus ; she did know. 
 
 Ib. τω {by what sign ?) συμ¬ 
 βολών (ScHOL. : νοησας, στοχασάμ€- 
 vos) exeis {have you conjectured?). 
 
 1477. (Peals of repeated thunder 
 and vivid flashes of lightning.) 
 
 Ib. ιδού (cf. Wund. ad Aj. 851.) 
 ^ttX’ αύθιί, again, and yet again. 
 Neue compares El. 1410. ίδού μάλ* 
 αυ θροΐί τις. Add 14 1 6. ώ μοι μολ 
 αυθις. 
 
 11). άμφίσταται, is about US from all 
 parts of the heavens. Doederlein 
 compares Phil. 1263. ϊσταται θόρυβος. 
 Eur. Iph.T. 1272. τις — ίστησιν βοήν; 
 See also Neue ad Antig. 1209. 
 Metre : iamb. dim. dochm. 
 
 L 4 
 
152 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 διαπρύσιος οτοβος. 
 
 Ίλαος, ώ δαίμων^ ΐλαος, €? τι γα 1480 
 
 ματύρι τνγχάρβις άφβγγ^ φβρωί'. 
 ivaiaiou δβ συΐ'τύχοιμι, μηδ' άλαστον ανδρ Ιδων 
 άκ€ρδη -χάριν μβτάσχοιμί πως. 
 
 Zed am, σοΊ φωρώ. 1485 
 
 U1. αρ βγγυς ανηρ ; αρ er €μψνχον^ τβκνα^ 
 κιχ^σβταί μου και κατορθουντος φρύι^α ; 
 
 1479· διαπρύσιος (apparently 
 formed (Έ0Ι. from π?ράω, and re¬ 
 lated to Siapneph, Pass.), piercing 
 through and through. h. Horn. 
 Aphr, 19. φόρμιγγας re χοροί re, δια¬ 
 πρύσιοί τ' ολοΧυγαί. 
 
 Ib. δτοβος, peal, crash. Hes. 
 Theog. 709* απΧητος. Metre ; 
 
 dochm. 
 
 1480. ΐΧαος (ScHOL. : XeiVei ro 
 €σω). The Chorus prostrate them¬ 
 selves on the ground. 
 
 Ib. ώ δαίμων. Herm. ex La. ω 
 δαψον vulg. On the ellipse of the 
 verb, see Kuhn. §. 417. Anm. 
 
 1480-1. ya ματίρι. ScHOL. : rfi 
 *Arri#fp. See Klausen’s Theol. p. 64. 
 Musgrave quotes ^sch. S. c. Th. 
 16. τύκνοις re yfj re μητρί. Metre : 
 dim. dochm. 
 
 1481. άφ€yyeς. Wunder adopts 
 Doederlein’s sense of darkness, as 
 the concomitant of storm and tem¬ 
 pest ; but Greek plays were per¬ 
 formed in full day-light, and did 
 their theatres admit of darkening 
 the stage ? I understand the word 
 with Ellendt, in a metaphoric sense, 
 dark, ill-omened. 
 
 1482. €ναισίον=. εναισίμου (^αίσιμος, 
 αΐσα) σνντνχοιμι. The fears of the 
 Chorus again returning with respect 
 to CEdipus, they pray that their 
 present commerce with the deity 
 may be of a favourable nature. For 
 the gen. see Matth. §. 379. Obs. 2. 
 
 §. 428, 3. Wunder understands it 
 of Qidipus, and translates: utinarn 
 pius sit, in quern incidi ; but this 
 seems a little at variance with the 
 subsequent admission of the Chorus, 
 who in their terror call CEdipus 
 Μαστόν ανδρα (for I cannot with 
 Reisig’ think that Polynices is meant), 
 and evidently dread that they may 
 share in the ungracious doom (ακ€ρ- 
 δή χάριν) which appears to be hanging 
 over him. Metre: iamb, tetram. 
 
 Ib. άΧαστος for αΧηστος (Χηθω, 
 Χαθίίν), a person not to be forgotten 
 on account of his guilt, and con¬ 
 sequently insupportable. A terra, 
 like άΧάστωρ, particularly applicable 
 to murderers. 
 
 1484. ακερδή χάριν, a loss instead 
 of a gain. Reisig, comparing .^sch. 
 Prom. 547. άχαρις χάρις, observes: 
 “ est igitur illud : πόνον, ού χάριν, ut 
 Chorus dixit supra 232.” On the 
 accusative after μ^τάσχοιμι, cf. Matth. 
 §. 325, Obs. 2. Bernh. 149. Kiihn. §. 
 519. Anm. I. Doederleinunderstands 
 μ€Τ€χ€ΐν Ti in the sense of “ particeps 
 feri rei; perexeiv τίνος, particeps esse 
 rei.” Metre : dim. dochm. 
 
 1485. Metre: dochmiac. 
 
 1580. On the interrogational apa, 
 see Hart. I. 453. 
 
 1487. κατορθουντος φρβνα, not 
 merely in full possession of the 
 senses, but with power to direct 
 them properly. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 153 
 
 ΑΝ. τί 8^ αν OeXoL^ το τηστον βμφνναί φρβνί ; 
 
 ΟΙ. άνΰ* ών €πασχον €v, τβΧβσφόρον χά,ρίν 
 
 8ονναί σφιν, ηνττβρ τνγχάνων νττβσχόμην. 1490 
 
 ΧΟ. Ιω Ιω παΐ, ^ ^ ^ βαθι βαθ\ αντ, β\ 
 
 1488. τί δ’ αν (^ΐη) το πιστόν 
 (what is the confidential secret) (6) 
 av dekois {which you would wish) 4 μ- 
 φνναι <j)pev\ {to take deep root in the 
 mind of Theseus?), Dind. ; τί δ’ αν 
 θίλοις πιστ€ν€ΐν αυτω ; Cf. Matth. 
 
 §. 265, 4· 
 
 1489. τελεσφόρον {τέλος, φέρω) 
 χάριν, a favour that will bring real 
 profit with it. 
 
 1490. σφίν = 01. SCHOL. Cf. 
 Buttmann Gr. Gr. §. 72, 19. Bernh. 
 p. 62. Matthise refers for instances 
 to JEscli. Pers. 756. Find. Pyth. IX. 
 206. h. Horn, in Pan. XIX. 19. 
 
 Ib. ηνπερ τνγχάνων υπεσχόμην, 
 which I promised, if I obtained my 
 request. Matth. §. 553. So also 
 Reisig. and Elms, τν-^χάνων, i. e. ότε 
 ετύγχανον ων εβονλόμην. 
 
 1491-2. It is evident that these 
 two verses, as they stand in Dindorf 
 and Wunder, possess neither sense 
 nor metre. What is required to 
 correct the latter must be judged 
 from the strophic verses. Supposing 
 the reduplication of εα, at v. 1478., 
 to be correct, we want for the metre 
 of the first verse a double dochmiac, 
 preceded by an iambus or a pyrrhic, 
 and a single dochmiac in the second. 
 A probable sense of the passage must 
 be supplied from other sources. From 
 conjecture andDindorfs exposition of 
 the text, the call for Theseus may be 
 conceived to proceed on one of two 
 reasons ; either that he was in the 
 royal abode, situated in the acro¬ 
 polis {ακρον), or that he was in some 
 adjacent valley {yvaXov), consecrat¬ 
 ing an altar to the sea-god Poseidon. 
 From the brief notice of the Scho¬ 
 
 liast, it may I think be collected, 
 that sacrifice to the latter divinity 
 was offered not merely in deep val- 
 lies, but on the top of high rocks 
 (eV ακραν πέτραν), a custom among 
 the ancients to which there will be 
 occasion to call the reader’s atten¬ 
 tion in a subsequent play; and that 
 the choral invocation for the pre¬ 
 sence of Theseus is made on the 
 supposition that he is engaged in 
 one or other of these pious offices. 
 My own attempts to adjust these 
 different explanations to the metrical 
 form may be spared the reader, be¬ 
 cause I subsequently found that the 
 subject had occupied the thoughts of 
 two scholars far more competent 
 than myself to settle the difficulty. 
 By rejecting the first εα, atv. 1478., 
 by retaining the word τυγχάνεις, 
 found in earlier editions, and by one 
 or two other processes, the reasons 
 for which it would be tedious to 
 detail here, Seidler and Matthiae 
 (Constant.) have brought the text 
 into the following intelligible shape: 
 to) Ιω παΤ, βάθι βάθ', εΧτ άκραν 
 η ν'ι γναλον άλίω 
 Ώοσεώωνίω θεω τυγχάνεις 
 βουθυτον εστίαν άγίζων, ’ίκου. 
 
 It should be added that Reisig had 
 previously suggested: Ιω παϊ, βάθι 
 βάθ', ειτ άκραν η 'π\ γυάλων, trans¬ 
 lating ; sive in jugo montis sive in 
 valle forte sacrifices. For Matthise’s 
 (August.) and Hartung’s reading of 
 the passage, see former, Gr. Gr. 
 p. 1030., the latter, Vol. II. 210. 
 
 1491—5. βάθι — ίκου. Wunder 
 (CEd. T. 166.) compares προφάνητε 
 — ελθετε. 
 
154 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 €tr ακρον eVi yvaXov 
 ίναλίω ΪΙοσβώαονίφ Θβφ 
 
 C It If 
 
 βούθυτον εστίαν αγίζων^ ικού. ΐ495 
 
 ο yap ζενο9 σε καί ττόλισμα καί φίλους ετταζιοΐ 
 Νίκαιαν χάρίν παρασχειν τταθών. 
 σττενσον, αϊσσ\ ώναζ. 
 
 ΘΗ. r/s* αυ τταρ υμών kolvos ηχείται ktvttos^ 150 ° 
 
 σαφη^ μεν αυτών, εμφανής δε του ζενου ; 
 μη τις Αώς κεραυνός, η τις όμβρια 
 χάλαζ* εττφράζασα ; πάντα yap θεού 
 τοιαυτα χειμάζρντος εικάσαι πάρα. 
 
 ΟΙ . αναζ, ποΘουντι προύφάνης, καί σοι Θεών 15^5 
 
 1492· The preposition cVt, in this 
 verse, belongs, by a common So- 
 phoclean practice, to txKpav as well 
 as γύαλορ. For other grammatical 
 niceties connected with this view of 
 the subject, see the Qusest. Sophocl. 
 p. iSSsq. 
 
 1494. Ποσειδαοι/ίο) θβω. Elmsley 
 compares CEd. T. 1105. 6 Βακχείο? 
 θίός. Ποσειδαοί/ιω, Herm. ex Ricc. 
 Wund. Dind. Ποσείδαωι/ίω, vulg. 
 
 1495. βονθντον (^ύω) ίστίαν, an 
 altar appropriated to the sacrifice of 
 oxen; a construction similar to 
 sup. 1062. ριμφαρμάτοΐί άμίXλa^s. 
 1243. κνματοα'^ύς άται. More Will 
 be said on this mode of construction, 
 which Sophocles appears to have 
 derived from Pindar, in a future play. 
 
 Ib. άγίζ^ιν, to consecrate. Find. 
 01. III. 34. βωμών πατρι α^ισθίντων . 
 Arist. Plut. 681. πόπανα ηγιζ^ν els 
 σάκταν. 
 
 1497. €παξιοΐ, thinks it right and 
 just. EL 657. ra δ’ αλλα — ena^iol σε 
 8 αίμον' OUT e^eidevai. Cf. Wund. ad 
 Phil. 62. The general construction 
 of the sentence is considered by 
 Constantine Matthiee as formed out 
 of two modes of speaking: επάξιοί 
 
 σε δίκαια? χάριτος, and ε’ττα^ιοί σοι δι- 
 καίαν χάριν τταρασχείι/. 
 
 149^· ^ηθών SC. χάριν. 
 
 1500. (The storm at its height, 
 in the midst of which enter Theseus 
 and attendants. After his entrance 
 on the stage, a temporary remis¬ 
 sion of the tempest.) 
 
 Ib. κοινός. ScHOL. Said of the 
 Chorus and CEdipus : the latter per¬ 
 haps joining only in the last verse 
 of the chorus. 
 
 Ib. Ηχείται pro ηχ(ΐ· Find. Dithyr. 
 III. 17. axeirai r δμφαΧ /χελεωι/ συν 
 avXois (where see Dissen.) Cf. 
 Trach. 866. 
 
 1502. μη, num 9 See Matth. 
 §. 608, 5, a. Obs. 3. Hart. II. 160. 
 At the end of the sentence, supply, 
 excited this clamour. 
 
 1^03. όπιρράξασα (επιρράσσω Att. 
 for όπιρρησσω). Matthise (§. 559* 
 Obs.) asserts that ε’στ'ι is not to be 
 supplied, but ηχ€Ϊται to be repeated 
 from V. 1500. 
 
 1303-4. deov τοιαυτα χ€ΐμάζοντθ5 
 = θ€θΟ τοσοντο χ^Ιμιι χ€ΐμαζοντο5. 
 
 Wund. Cf. sup. 961· 
 
 I 1^05. ποΘονντι προύφάνης. Matth. 
 §. 388, d. Kuhn. §. 581, c. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 155 
 
 τύχην τΐ 9 ίσθλην Θηκβ τησδβ τη 9 οδον. 
 
 ΘΗ. τί δ* έστίν, ώ παΐ Aatov, viopTov αν ; 
 
 ΟΙ. ροπή βίου μοί. καί σ απ^ρ ζννηνβσα 
 θέλω πόλιν re τηνδβ μη ψεύσα^ θανεΐν. 
 
 ΘΗ. εν τω δε κεΐσαι του μόρου τεκμηρίφ ; 1510 
 
 ΟΙ . αυτοί θεοί κήρυκες· άγγέλλουσί μοι, 
 
 ψευδοντες" ούδεν σημάτων προκειμένων, 
 
 ΘΗ. πώί elnas, ώ yepatf, δηλοΰσθαί τάδε ; 
 
 ΟΙ . αΐ πολλά βρονταί διατελεΐ^, τα πολλά τε 
 
 στράψαντα χείρον τη$ ανίκητου βέλη. 1515 
 
 ΘΗ. πείθεις με' πολλά γάρ σε θεσπίζονθ' 6 ρω, 
 κού ψενδόφημα. χω τί χρη ποιεΐν λέγε. 
 
 ΟΙ. εγω διδάξω, τέκνον ΑΙγέως, ά σοι 
 γηρως άλυπα τηδε κείσεται πόλει. 
 
 1506. “ Scribendum τ^σδ’ €θηκ€ 
 cum Heathio. Dind.” Gaisf. ηκβ 
 Ttjade, Herm. 
 
 1507. veopros {veos, ορννμι), newly 
 risen. Trach. 894. ά νίορτος ade 
 νύμφα. 
 
 1508 . ροπή βίου μοί, inclinatio 
 vitce ad^nem vergentis. Jacobs. The 
 imagery is derived from a pair of 
 scales. Trach. 82. eV ponfj rotabe 
 Κζΐμίνω. 
 
 1508—9. καί σ — 6 av(iv. And my 
 wish is, after having fully performed, 
 or, having disappointed neither your¬ 
 self nor this city of any of those 
 things which I promised (^vvrjveaa, 
 cf. Phil. 122.), to die. The sudden 
 pause and inflexion of voice by which 
 the actor threw in the words πόλιν 
 T6 τηνδβ, would divest the construc¬ 
 tion of any difficulty to ancient 
 ears. 
 
 1510. eV τω — Τ€κμηρίω, 1. e. τί 8e 
 TO τεκμηριον €χ€ΐς του μόρου ; For 
 κΰσθαι Doederlein compares El. 240. 
 1040. Aj. 407. 
 
 1511-12. 
 
 The gods themselves are heralds 
 of my doom. 
 
 In none of all the former signs 
 proved faithless. Dale. 
 
 1512. ·φ·€υ 8 οντ€ς, falsifying. An- 
 tig. 389. φ€υδ€ΐ yap ή 'πίνοια την 
 γνώμην. 
 
 Ietnas. Matth. §. 193. Obs.y. 
 §. 232. 
 
 1514. πολλά = πολλάκις. Cf. 
 Stallbaum ad Plat. Phsedon. p. 35. 
 Diss. ad Pind. p. 473. 
 
 Ib. διατελεΐί, continuous. 
 
 1515. στράπτζίν, a rarer form for 
 άστραπταν, fulgurare. Supply, at 
 the end of the verse, δηλουσιν. 
 
 Ib. βέλη. Trach. 1087. Ιγκατάσκη- 
 ψον βί\ος, πάτερ, κεραυνοί), .^sch. 
 S. c. Th. 241. ω παγκρατες Ζεΰ, τρε- 
 ψον els e^epoos βeλos. 5 ®^· *Τπ€ρ]3ιω 
 δε Zevs πατήρ επ' aanidos | σταδαΐοί 
 ησται, διά xepos βt\os φλέγων. 
 
 1518. (Edipus and Theseus con¬ 
 fer apart. 
 
 1519. yr/piof άλυπα, uninjured by 
 
156 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 γωρον μβΐ' αντο9 αυτίκ Ιζηγησομαι^ 1520 
 
 αθίΚΤΟ^ ηγητηρο^, ον μβ χρη Oaveiv, 
 
 τούτον δβ φράζ^ μη ττοτ ανθρώπων tlv\ 
 
 μη& ου KeKevOe μητ ev oty κβΐται tottols' 
 
 cos‘ croi ττρο πολλών ασπίδων αλκήν δδβ 
 
 δορό^ τ βπακτου γειτόνων άά τιθη, 1525 
 
 a δ’ εζάγιστα μηδε κινείται λόγω^ 
 
 age. Cf. infr. 1521. αθικτον ηγητηρος. 
 1 J 22 . κακών ovde'ii δνσάλωτο?. Elmsley 
 compares El. 1002. αλνπο? ατης. For 
 the distinction between adjectives of 
 this class, and those sup. 677. 786. 
 865. see Matth. §. 345. Kiihn. 
 §. 513. Anm. 3. 4. 
 
 Ib. Tjjde. La. γρ. σηι re Keiaerai. 
 
 1520. χώρον. Cf. infr. 1540· 
 
 Ib. €ξηγησομαι, prcEeuTido com- 
 monstrabo. Ell. 
 
 1521. άθικτος ηγητηρος, without 
 any guide. (A start of astonish¬ 
 ment and incredulity on the part of 
 Theseus ; for how shall a blind man, 
 not conversant with the spot, per¬ 
 form such a feat?) For construc¬ 
 tion, cf. sup. 1519. CEd. T. 885. &c. 
 
 1522. τούτον. Whether a pre¬ 
 ceding verse has been lost, as Her¬ 
 mann supposes, in which the word 
 ν€κυς was contained, or whether, as 
 Dindorf seems to suggest, τούτον is 
 said carelessly for τούτον νβκνν (the 
 latter term to be derived from the 
 words ov pe χρη Baveiv), it seems 
 clear that CEdipus is here speaking 
 of himself, and not referring to the 
 word χώρος in the preceding verse. 
 
 1523. μηθ* ου — τόποις. Elmsley’s 
 charge of tautology against this 
 verse may be refuted on better 
 grounds, I think, than those ad¬ 
 vanced by Reisig and Hermann; 
 viz. by referring the first verb, 
 KCKevOe, to the Spot where CEdipus 
 first disappeared in the χαλκόπονς 
 
 οδό? ; the second verb, Kelrai, to the 
 actual spot where CEdipus lay buried 
 (cf. sup. 401.), and which was known 
 only to Theseus. That the χαλκόπονς 
 οδό? extended some way, seems 
 pretty clear from the whole con¬ 
 text of the play. The policy in 
 mystifying the whole business, and 
 making the identical spot uncertain, 
 where the Theban forces would 
 suffer total rout and confusion, if 
 ever they advanced a certain space 
 beyond Colbnos, need not be in¬ 
 sisted upon. The word KevOeiv in 
 Sophocles sometimes assumes a tran¬ 
 sitive (El. 1120. &c.), but more com¬ 
 monly, as here, an intransitive form. 
 Cf. Matth. II. p. 825. 
 
 1523—4. προ ποΧΚών ασπίδων δορό? 
 τ όπακτον, before, in preference to 
 many shields and spears. Trach. 259. 
 στρατόν 'Καβών όπακτόν. 
 
 Ib. άΚκην γειτόνων, a protection 
 from neighbours, delicately said for 
 Thebans, many of whom would of 
 course be present in the theatre 
 when this play was exhibited. For 
 genitive after άλκην, see Matth. 
 
 §· 354· Τ¬ 
 Ι 5 26. ε^άγιστα , holy, and therefore 
 
 to be kept secret. Pass. qucB referre 
 piaculum est. Dicendi enim notionem 
 in mente habens non posuit quod de- 
 bebat, ά δ’ εξάγιστα Κεγειν, sed λόγ<ρ, 
 accommodans earn notionem verbis 
 μηδε κινείται. HeRM. 
 
 Ib. Kiveiv, a word applied, with 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 157 
 
 αντθ9 μαθησπ^ Κ€Ϊσ όταν μόλΎ]9 μόνος* 
 
 t V » »Ν » '' Λ» ' 
 
 ως OUT αν αστών των ο αν ^ζβίττοίμι τω, 
 
 οϋτ αν τβκνοίσί τοΐς βμοΐς^ στβργων όμως. 
 
 άλλ’ αυτός άά σώζβ, χωταν βΙς τβλος 153 ° 
 
 τον ζην άφίκνη, τω ττροφβρτάτω μόνω 
 
 σημαιν* ό δ* άβΐ τω 'ttlovtl 8€ΐκνντω. 
 
 γοντως άδηον τηνδ* βνοίκησβίς ττολιν 
 
 στταρτων άττ άνδρών’ αί δβ μνρίαι ττολβί?, 
 
 καν €v τις οίκη, ραδίως καθύβρισαν. ΐ535 
 
 σ€θΐ γαρ ev μβν, oye ο €ΐσορωσ, όταν 
 
 τα OeT άφβίς τις βΙς το μαίνβσθαι τραπη’ 
 
 ο μη συ, τβκνον ΑΙγόως, βούλον τταθβΐν. 
 
 τα μβν τοιαυτ ούν βιδότ βκδιδάσκομβν. 
 
 ■χώρον δ\ eTreiyei γαρ μβ τονκ θβον τταρον^ 1540 
 
 στΕΐχωμβν ηδη, μηδ' er’ Ιντρ€ 7 Γώμ€θα. 
 ώ τταΐδες ώδ* €7Γ€σθ\ έγω γαρ ηγβμων 
 σφων αν πόφασμαι καινός^ ωσττβρ σφω ττατρί. 
 
 its correlatives, to sacred things, not 
 to be divulged. Hence the pro¬ 
 phetic Tiresias : Antig. 1060. opaeis 
 μ€ τάκΙνητα dia φρένων φράσαι. To 
 which the irritated and ironical 
 Creon replies: kIvu, μόνον de μη VI 
 KcpBeaiv Χίγων. 
 
 1527. κ€Ϊσ. Strongly emphatic. 
 
 1530. σωζβ, preserve them in your 
 memory. Cf. CEd. T. 318. 
 
 1531. πpoφepτάτω (superl. of προ - 
 φ^ρης), the eldest. Hes. Theog. 79. 
 η he (Calliope) προφ€ρ€στάτη iarlv 
 άπασέων. Cf. 361. and 777. Matth. 
 
 §· 134· 
 
 1532. 6 h' aei. Erfurdt compares 
 Phil 132. ot dfi λόγο6 (seinejedesma- 
 ligen Worte). Xen. Cyr. VII. i. 47. 
 
 6 del βασιλέων. 
 
 1533. ahrjov. Hesych. : άττόρθητον. 
 
 άττοΚζμητυν. 
 
 1535. οίκη, administer. 
 
 Ib. καθύβρισαν, are wont to fall 
 into insolence. Cf. Neue ad Aj. 674· 
 
 1536. Heller compares II. IV. 
 160. elirep yap re και αυτίκ ’Ολύμπιος 
 ούκ ereXeaaev, j βκ re και όφέ reXet. 
 Cf. sup. 1370. On the particle he, 
 see Hart. II. 405. 
 
 1537. τα deV di^eis. Cf. Sup. 914* 
 
 1540. TovK Beov παρόν, the signal 
 given by the god. 
 
 1541. μηh’ €vτpeπώμeθa = pyhe peV- 
 λωμ€ν, Ell. Germanice : wir wollen 
 uns nicht umsehen. Herm. 
 
 1542. (Turns to his children, and 
 speaks in a louder tone than he has 
 done with Theseus.) 
 
 1543. On the particle αν, see 
 Hart. I. 155. 
 
158 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 χωρ€Ϊτ€, καί μη ψανβτ, αλλ* mre μ€ 
 αυτόν τον Ιρον τύμβον e^evpeiv^ ΐνα 
 μοΐρ άνδρΙ τωδβ τηδβ κρυφθηναι χθονί. 
 
 ΤΎ)ό , ωο6, TYjoe ρατβ. τύ] 0€ γαρ μ αγβι 
 "Έιρμης 6 ττομττος η τ€ vepTepa θβός. 
 ώ φως άφβγγ^, ττρόσθβ ττον ττοτ ήσθ* €μόν, 
 νυν δ’ έσχατόν σου τούμον απτβται δβμας. 
 ηδη γαρ €ρπω τον τβλβυταΐον βίον 
 κρύψων τταρ^ ^Αιδην. αλλά, φίλτατβ ζβνων, 
 αυτός τβ χωρά θ' ηδε πρόσττολοί τ€ σο\ 
 €ύδαίμον€ς yevoiaOe, κάττ βύττραζία 
 μβμνησθβ μου θανόντος βύτυχβΐς aei. 
 χο. el θόμις ΙστΙ μοι ταν αφανή θβον (ττρ. 
 
 κα\ σ€ λίτοΐς σββίζβιν, 
 
 •545 
 
 ^550 
 
 1555 
 
 1544 · Μ (to Antigone and 
 
 Ismene, who take him by the hand, 
 for the purpose of leading him, as 
 before). 
 
 1547. T§be, this way. ωδε, so. 
 
 1548. ^Ερμης, 6 πομπος, i. e. 6 ψυ¬ 
 χοπομπός. Cf. Aj. 832. Thudichum, 
 p. 262. Klausen’s Theol. 101. vep- 
 repa θίός, SC. Persephone, 
 
 1549. Having advanced a little 
 way, CEdipus stops, and apostro¬ 
 phises the sun. Cf. Aj. 856 sq. 
 
 Ib. d<f)€yyh, affording no light 
 to me. 
 
 1550. τονμόν d€pas = iy 0 ). See 
 on circumlocutions of this nature, 
 Matth. §. 430. 
 
 155 I“2. Tou reXevT. — "Αώην, vitam 
 in orco conditurus sic ut finiatur. 
 WUND. 
 
 1553* πρόσπολοι, the royal at¬ 
 tendants. 
 
 1554 * evπpa^ίa~€υπpayoΰvτes. 
 Ell. in felicitate et oh earn. Herm. 
 Vauvillers compares Arist. Eq. 406. 
 
 πΙν€, πίν eVt σνμφοραΐς. (CEdipus, 
 with firm tread and upright mien, 
 leads the way ; his daughters, and 
 Theseus—the latter accompanied by 
 his guards—follow in mute astonish¬ 
 ment at the proceeding.) 
 
 1556. While this invocation to 
 Persephone and Pluto, so striking 
 in its metre and diction, is being 
 chaunted by the Chorus, the soul of 
 a fellow creature, it must be remem¬ 
 bered, is passing into a new state of 
 existence, and by a process of the 
 most extraordinary nature. That 
 spirit, to which in its mortal frame 
 this life had been such a scene of 
 strange vicissitude, is now at rest; 
 and the musical accompaniment to 
 the present strain would be in strict 
 accordance with the train of events, 
 gentle and peaceful, but at the same 
 time solemn, and wild. 
 
 Ib. ταν αφανή deov. ScHOL. : την 
 ΐΐ^ρσζφόνην φησίν. Cf. Klausen’s 
 Theol. p. 59. Metre: dim. dochm. 
 
01ΔΙΠ0ΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 159 
 
 Ιννυγίων ανα^, 
 
 ΑΙδωρβυ, ΑΙδωΡβν, αΙδονμαί, ι$6ο 
 
 ίττυπόνω μητ hn βαρυαχβΐ 
 
 ^evov κατανύσαι 
 
 μόρω ταν τταγκβνθη κάτω 
 
 νβκρών πλάκα καΐ Έτνγιορ δόμοι'. 
 
 πολλών γάρ άν και μάταν 1565 
 
 πημάτων ίκνονμβνων 
 
 πάλιν σΐ δαίμων δίκαιοί αΰ^οι. 
 
 1558. Metre: logacedic. 
 
 1 559* ^νννχίων. ScHOL. : των iv 
 ννκτί del καΐ σκοτω διατριβόντων' των 
 τζθνηκότων, 
 
 1560. Κΐ^ωνίν. That invisible 
 deity, known otherwise by the name 
 of ’'λώψ, Pluto, Deus Orcus, &c. 
 ^sch. Pers. 654. ^Α'ώωνίύς δ’ άνα- 
 πομποί άνίίης, ’Αϊδωί/βύί, Aapeiov. For 
 the joint invocation, cf. Antig. 1199. 
 1200. The first two syllables are to 
 be pronounced by synizesis, as if 
 one. 
 
 Ib. alSovpat “ veneror, translatum 
 ad orandi significationem, ut στεργω 
 sup. 1094.” Herm. As instances 
 of verses, composed of three mo- 
 lossi, Dindorf refers to Soph. Antig. 
 844. 862. 1121. 1132. Phil. 837. 
 853. Aristoph. Av. 1724. Lysist. 
 1314. Eur. Ion. 125. ^sch. Pers. 
 678. αώονμαι, e conject. Erf. Reis. 
 Wund. λίσομαι, Libri. λίσσωμαι, 
 Bind. 
 
 1561. μητ επίττόνω, Libri. μητ 
 recte delet Seidlerus.” Dind. in 
 Annot. 
 
 1561—3. eVl βαρυαχεϊ μόρω = βαρε7. 
 μόρω χρωμενυς, see Ellendt de prae- 
 pos. επι. η. The preposition eVl to 
 be prefixed to επιπυνω as well as 
 βαρναχεί. This practice of Sopho¬ 
 cles was largely illustrated in the 
 CEd.T. 
 
 Ib. βαρνάχης {αχός, αχεω) schwer 
 od. dump/achzcncl. Pass. For several 
 remarks connected with the metre 
 of this word, see Ellendt. Metre : 
 fourth paeon and dochm. 
 
 1562. καταννσαι to wend (his way) ; 
 with or without obov (cf. Antig. 
 231. 805.), and with or without 
 preposition to the place whither the 
 person wends: here πλάκα. El. 
 1451. κατηνυσαν προξένου SC. δόμον. 
 Libri, εκταννσαι. Wunder, καταννσαι. 
 Herm. εκκαταννσαι. Vauvill. Br. εξα- 
 ννσαι (which Dindorf approves). 
 Metre: dochm. 
 
 1563. παγκενΰης (κεύθω), all-con~ 
 cealing. Metre : bacch. and dochm. 
 
 1564. ^Tvyiov δόμον. ~ El. I lO. 
 δωμ "Αίδον κα\ ΐίερσεφόνης. Cf. Thu- 
 dichum 1 . 320. Metre : bacch. and 
 dochm. 
 
 1565—6. “ For many misfortunes, 
 and those contracted without any 
 guilt or intention on your part 
 (μάταν), oppressing you, the just 
 deity will lend you assistance (av 
 ανξοι) again.” The particle av, as 
 Wunder observes, is, by a somewhat 
 unusual course, Avrenched from the 
 verb to which it belongs. Reisig 
 suggests Ιπούμενον for Ικνονμενων. See 
 also Bernhardy on the subject, 
 p. 178. 
 
 1567. Metre : two penthim. iamb. 
 
160 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ώ γθόνιαί θβαί, σώμά τ άνικάτου Λντ, 1568 
 
 θηροΫ, ον iv ττύλαισι 
 
 φασ\ ΤΓολυζβστοίς· 157° 
 
 €ννάσθαί, κνυζασθαί τ Ιζ άντρων 
 
 άδάματον φύλακα τταρ’ ’AtSa 
 
 Aoyoy alev ίχβΓ 
 
 ον^ ώ Γά? τταΓ καΐ Ύαρτάρον, 
 
 κατβνχομαι iv καθαρω βηναι 1575 
 
 I transcribe the opening lines of 
 Dale’s beautiful version of this ode: 
 
 If to thee, eternal Queen, 
 
 Empress of the world unseen ; 
 Mighty Pluto, if to thee, 
 
 Hell’s terrific deity, 
 
 Lips of mortal mould may dare 
 Breathe the solemn suppliant prayer, 
 Grant the stranger swift release, 
 Bid the mourner part in c peace. 
 Guide him &c. &c. 
 
 1568-77. Invocation extended to 
 the Erinyes, or underground deities, 
 and to Cerberus. 
 
 1568. ω χθόνιαι θζαί. ScHOL. : ω 
 ’Epii/yey. But compare Theogon. 767 
 sq. and Guietus’s conjecture of χθο- 
 νίων θ^ων. 
 
 ί 568-9. On “ the beast of un¬ 
 conquered body,” i. e. Cerberus 
 (which, after the dealings of Her¬ 
 cules with him, is an expression to 
 be taken with some license), see 
 Thudichum 1. 321. On the spon¬ 
 daic form of the dochmiac σωμά τ 
 άνικάτον, see Herm. adAntig. 1292. 
 
 1570. πολνξξ'στοις. The palace 
 of Pluto, like the palaces of other 
 monarchs, is of royal magnificence. 
 Horn. II. XVHI. 276. υψηΧαί re πυ- 
 λαι, aavides τ erri rjji apapvlai μακραί, 
 
 €νξ(στοι, ΐζΐν-γμίναι (Ιρνσονται. Mus- 
 grave elegantly, but without any 
 necessity, suggests πόλνξεροις. 
 
 1571* ^ννασθαι, has his lair. 
 
 1572. παρ * Aida. Cf. Bernhardy, 
 
 p· ^56. 
 
 1573 . Aoyoff aUv €χ(ΐ. ScHOL.: 
 Λντι τον, φασ-ίν. Wunder proposes 
 auv €χ€ΐ 'Koyos, that the verse may 
 be dochmiac. 
 
 1574* Ύαρτάρον. The 
 
 theology of Sophocles is somewhat 
 puzzling. In the Hesiodean Theo- 
 gony, Typhceus occurs as the son of 
 'Gaea and Tartarus, 821 sq. The 
 Scholiast, evidently considering Tar¬ 
 tarus and Scotus as the same person 
 (cf. sup. 1389.), understands the 
 Eumenides to be intended, the sin¬ 
 gular, παΐ, being used for the plural, 
 TTuldes. Hermann understands θά- 
 νατον to be here meant. In the He¬ 
 siodean Theogony, θάνατο: is the 
 offspring of Night, but without any 
 father. 211 sq. 
 
 Ib. 6 v, him, i. e. Cerberus. 
 
 1575· καθαρω. Passow sub. 
 roTTo), in open ββΙά or space, where 
 nothing is in the way. Reisig refers 
 to II. VIH. 491. X. 199. Add 
 Aristoph. Eccles. 320. 
 
 1575~7· καθαρω βηναι (ίΟ tO 
 
 c Compare Gunther’s address over the body of the last of the fated house of Borotin in 
 Grillparzer’s “ Ahnfrau,” Act iv. 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 161 
 
 ορμωμ4νφ veprepa^ 
 
 τω ν€κρων ττλάκα^, 
 
 ere TOL κικλησκω τον alevvTrvov, 
 
 ΑΓΓΕΛΟΣ. 
 
 avdpes" ττολΐταί, ζυντομωτάτω^ μ€ν αν 
 τύγριμι λβζα^ ΟΙδίττονν ολωλοτα' 1580 
 
 a ην τα ττρα'χθ^ντ^^ ονθ^ δ μνθθ 9 iv βραχβΐ 
 φρασαι Trapeemvy οντβ τάργ οσ ην €Κ€ί, 
 
 ΧΟ. ολωλε γάρ δύστηνοί ; ΑΓ. ώς λβλοίπότα 
 K6LVOV τον άβΐ βίοτον βζεττίστασο. 
 
 ΧΟ. ττώί ; άρα θβία κάττόνω ταλα^ τύγτ} ; 1585 
 
 ΑΓ. τουτ ioriv ηδη κάττοθανμάσαυ ττρίπον. 
 
 ως μ^ν γαρ ίνθίνδ^ elpwe^ και σύ ττον παρών 
 
 retire that the way may be clear and 
 open) όρμωμ€νω τω ζ€Ρω {to CEdipus 
 now on his way) νεκρών πλάκας (to 
 the regions of the dead). 
 
 1578. (T€ TOL κικλησκω, te inquam 
 compello. Reis. 
 
 Ib. αΐβννπνον, in wternuni con- 
 sopiens. Ell. φησ\ be τον θάνατον. 
 ScHOL. In Hesiod’s Theogony (v. 
 756.), Sleep is the brother of Death. 
 alewnvov, Herm. Dind. Wund. alev 
 ηΰπνον, plerique libri. 
 
 1579. One of the attendants of 
 Theseus here enters, and gives an 
 account of the proceedings of CEdi¬ 
 pus after he had quitted the stage. 
 
 1579-80. Milton, in his “ Samson 
 Agonistes,” has imitated this lan¬ 
 guage : “ Take then the worst in 
 brief: Samson is dead.” 
 
 1759 · ζ^ντομωτάτως. On the rarity 
 of superlative adverbs, see Matth. 
 §. 262. Cf. Buttmann’s Gr. Gr. 
 
 §· 115. 2. 
 
 1580. Xe^as όλωλότα. Cf. Matth. 
 
 II. p. 961. 
 
 1581. a δ’ ην τα πραχθ€ντα^ as to 
 
 what was done (and said). 
 
 Ib. 0 μνθος. By this word I think 
 is to be understood the conversa¬ 
 tions which took place between (Edi- 
 pus and his children, or between 
 him and Theseus^ and which, it will 
 subsequently be seen, occupied some 
 time. 
 
 1582. ov πάpeστιv, non est quo· 
 modoy i. e. vix potest. Ell. whom 
 see further in voc. 
 
 Ib. τάργα, such as dressing him 
 in more befitting apparel, bathing 
 him, &c. &c. Wunder understands, 
 “ nor can they he contained in a brief 
 narrative.'* 
 
 1583. yap, nempe. Reis. Cf. Wund. 
 ad Phil. 331. 
 
 1584. Tov act βίοτον, that wonted 
 life of his; viz. that hfe of misery 
 which he ever led. See Ellendt 
 in voc. 1 . 24. Bernh. p. 323. Kiihn. 
 §. 491, 2, b. vitani perpetuam, das 
 langwierige Leben. Cf. infr. 1701. 
 
 1585. BeLa, sent by the gods. Aj. 
 186. deta νόσος. Phil, 193. θβια πα· 
 βήματα. 
 
 Μ 
 
162 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 €ζθίσθ\ νφηγητηρο9 ovSepo? φίλωρ, 
 άλλ* αυτός ημιρ τταχτίΡ βζηγούμβρος, 
 
 βπβί δ’ άφΐκτο top καταρράκτηρ 68 ορ 1590 
 
 χαλκοΐς βάθροισυ γηθβρ βρρίζωμβρορ^ 
 
 ίστη κβλβύθωρ ep ττολυσγίστωρ μια, 
 
 κοίλου ΤΓβλας κράτηρος, ου τα θησβως 
 
 ΤΙβρΙθου τ€ κ€ίταί ττίστ άβί ζυρθηματα’ 
 
 άφ' ου μβσος στας του Τ€ θορικίου ττ^τρου 1595 
 
 1588. υφηγητηρος SC. οντος. CEd. 
 Τ. g 66 . ων υφηγητών (οντων). Cf. 
 Matth. §. 5^>3· 
 
 159*^· καταρράκτης {καταρρηγννμι) 
 expresses something suddenly burst 
 open, and consequently, precipitous 
 and steep. Cf. infr. 1662. 
 
 Ib. οδοί/, threshhold. The allu¬ 
 sion is to that part of the χαλκόπονς 
 δδόί, where Pluto is supposed to 
 have carried Persephone to the 
 lower regions. See observations by 
 Hermann on 6 vpa καταρράκτης, ad 
 Antig. V. 1171. 
 
 1591. χαλκοΐς βάθροισι, by means 
 of steps of brass. 
 
 Ib. yrj 6 ev ξρριζωμίνον {ριζόω), hav¬ 
 ing its foundation in the earth. Dce- 
 derlein compares Od. XIII. 162. os· 
 μιν (navem) λάαν ζθηκ€ κα\ €ρρίζωσ€ν 
 (Vfpde. 
 
 1592* τΐολνσχιστος, varie discissus, 
 i. e. diversus. Ell. πολνσχίστων, Br. 
 Gaisf. Wund. Dind. ττολυσχίστω, Li- 
 bri. “He stood where many ways 
 converge in one.” Dale. 
 
 ^593* κρατημός. The Scholiast 
 understands a crater or chasm ; Mul¬ 
 ler (Eumen. p. 171.), a kettle, in 
 which Theseus and Pirithous had 
 thrown the σφάγια before their de¬ 
 scent into hell, the formula of an 
 oath being perhaps inscribed round 
 it. Ellendt : “ Crater baud dubie, 
 ut solebat ilia aetate, in faciendo 
 foedere recipiendo hostise sanguini 
 
 constitutus ferebatur.” 
 
 1594. Συνθήματα. ScHOL. : oiov 
 υπομνήματα της πίστ€ως ην edevro προς 
 άλληλους ττβρ'ι της fis "Αώου καταβά- 
 σ€ως. Ell. : documenta igitur et 
 firmamenta fidei, data acceptceque 
 sunt, baud dubie hostia in foedere 
 jungendo defossa. See on this sub¬ 
 ject, Thud. 283. 290. 
 
 1595“7· «φ' oo peVos {between which 
 and the Thorician rock, and the wild 
 pear-tree, and the stone tomb), στάς 
 {having stopped his course), καθέζίτο 
 {he seated himself), αφ’ ου μέσος, Br. 
 ex conj. ίφ’ ου μέσου, Libri. See 
 Matth. §. 354, 77. 
 
 ’595· “ Dicitur μέσος από τινων 
 τόπων, ubi ita quis medius sit, ut 
 distet ab locis illis, in quorum stet 
 medio.” Herm. In the verse fol¬ 
 lowing the preposition από is re»· 
 peated, though such repetition was 
 not absolutely required. 
 
 1595-7. στας (ScHOL. : σταθείς 
 κα\ μηκετι όδευσας) καθεζετ , stopped 
 and sat down. Dale, not observing 
 this nicety in the word στάς, un¬ 
 guardedly translates, “ standing”—· 
 “ he sate.” 
 
 1595. θορικίου πε'τρου. Some local 
 difficulties are connected with this 
 expression, on which see the com¬ 
 mentators. The shortest method of 
 
 dealing with it, is to say with the 
 Scholiast: things well known to the 
 natives are here spoken of. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 163 
 
 κοίλης τ άχορδου κάπο λαΐνου τάφον, 
 
 καθβζβτ^* eir βλνσβ δυσττίΡβΐς στολάς. 
 
 κατΓΗτ άνσας τταΐδας ηνώγβί ρυτών 
 
 νδατίύρ €Ρ€γκ€ίΡ λουτρά καί "χοάς ττοΘ^ν* 
 
 τω δ €υχλοου Αημητρος βΙς εττοφίον ι6οο 
 
 τταγορ μολουσα τάσδ' ίτηστολάς ττατρί 
 
 ταχεΐ ττορευσαν ^υν γ^ρόνω, λουτροΐς τε vlv 
 
 εσθητί τ εζησκησαν η νομίζεται, 
 
 επει δε παντός είχε δρώντος ηδονην, 
 
 » y V»» \ 
 
 κουκ ην ετ αργόν ονοεν 
 
 159^· ΐίοιΚης, implying that the 
 inside was decayed and empty. This 
 pear-tree was in its day as well 
 known apparently as the Fairlop-oak 
 of our own day; but had it ever 
 elicited as fine a strain of poetry as 
 the well-known verses of Cowper ? 
 
 Ib. λαΐνου τάφου. To W'hom this 
 stone tomb belonged is now un¬ 
 known. 
 
 1597· The omission of 
 
 the augment abounds in this nar¬ 
 rative. Cf. infr. 1606-7-8. 1624. 
 
 159^-9· ρυτωϊ/ υδάτων, de aqua 
 fontium dicitur. Ell. 
 
 1 599. λουτρά κα\ χοάς. ScHOL. : eni 
 TO άφαγνισθηναι αυτόν προ της reXev- 
 της. For the washing of the body 
 before sepulture, Musgrave refers to 
 Eur. Hec. 611.; for the χοαϊ, or liba¬ 
 tions to appease the manes, Eur. 
 Iph. T. 160 sq. 
 
 1600. (υχλόου Αημητρος, i. e. the 
 Demeter, who makes every thing 
 green and blooming. From a frag¬ 
 ment of the Maricas ofEupolis (αλλ’ 
 
 €ύθύ πόλ(ως cipi' θνσαι yap pe del 
 κριόν Χλόη Αημητρι), and also from 
 Pausan. I. 22, 3., it is evident that 
 this goddess had a temple on the 
 Acropolis. That she had a smaller 
 one on a hill near Colonos, seems 
 
 ών εφίετο, 1 605 
 
 probable from this and the following 
 verse. On the Demeter Chloe, see 
 Klausen’s Theol. 63. 93. Creuzer’s 
 Symbol. IV. 314. Muller’s Eumen. 
 p. 170. 
 
 1600— I. etff ΐπόψιον πάγον. Her¬ 
 mann, pressed by the difficulty of 
 sending the daughters of CEdipus as 
 far as the Acropolis for lustral 
 waters, translates: “a hill from 
 which the temple of Demeter Chloe 
 could be discerned.” The meaning 
 of the word ΐπόφιον is perhaps best 
 illustrated by a scholium on a similar 
 passage in the Antigone (i no. ΐπό- 
 φιον τόπον') ; φανερόν διά το ύφος. 
 
 ι6οι. όπιστολάς, mandates, com¬ 
 mands. Aj. 781· Trach. 493. 
 
 1602. ταχεί ξυνχρόνω. Trach. 395 · 
 συν χρόνω βραδ€Ϊ, 
 
 Ib. λουτροΐς. Cf. Aj, 654-S· 
 
 Ib. πόρ^υσαν. On omission of aug¬ 
 ment, seeMatth. §. 46. §. } 60. Obs. 2. 
 
 1603. ΐξήσκησαν. Cf. El. 452. 
 Eur. Alcest. 162. 
 
 1604· τΐαντος δρωντος = παντός 
 πράγματος, Reis. Cf. Sup. 12 20.= 
 της δράσ^ως Matth. §. 570. Bernh. 
 327. Kiihner compares Soph. Phil. 
 675. Trach. 196. Eur. Iph. A. 1230. 
 
 1605. αργόν, neglectum, Reis, in- 
 fectum, ScHiEF,, who quotes Theog. 
 
 M 2 
 
164 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κτύττησβ μίν Zeus* χθόνω^, αΐ δβ irapOevoL 
 ρίγησαν^ ώ? ηκουσαν' e? δβ γοννατα 
 ΊΤ(ΐτρο9 7 Γ€θΌν(ταί kXollov^ ουδ avLeccLV 
 (TT€pvc 0 V άραγμον^ ουδβ τταμμτ^κβί^ yoous*. 
 ό δ' ώς άκονβί φθόγγον όζαίφνη^ πικρόν, 
 πτνζας €7γ’ αντάίΐ χβΓρα^ ehrev' ώ τβκνα, 
 ονκ ear eff νμΐν τρδ* iv η μόρα πατήρ, 
 ολωλ€ γαρ δη πάντα τάμα, κουκ eTi 
 την δυσπόνητον 0^€T άμψ βμοί τροφήν' 
 σκληράν μίν, οΊδα, παΐδβ^' άΛλ’ ev γαρ μονον 
 τα πάντα λύβι ταντ €πο9 μοχθηματα. 
 το γάρ φιλβΐν ονκ ίστιν Ιζ οτου πλόον 
 η τοϋδβ τάνδρός €σχ€θ\ ον τητώμβναι 
 το λοιπόν ηδη τον βίον διά^βτον. 
 τοιαντ όπ άλληλοισιν άμφικβίμβνοι 
 λνγδην βκλαιον πάντως, ώ? δβ πρ09 τόλοί 
 
 ι6ιο 
 
 ι6ι5 
 
 1020 
 
 597 · προβββηκΐν άμηχανόν 
 
 €στι yeveaBai | αργά. 
 
 ι6ο6. Ζ^υς χθόνιος. On the Zeus 
 Chthonius, see Muller’s “ Eume- 
 niden,” p. 139. 140. 147. Klausen’s 
 Theol. 69. Creuzer’s Symb. III. 48. 
 Reisig translates, “Jupiter tonitrua 
 subterranea movens.” ‘ Brunck com¬ 
 pares Eur. Hippol. 1201. evBev tis 
 ηχω, χθόνιος ως βροντή Αιός. 
 
 1607. ρίγησαν. Elmsley observes, 
 that the poet might have said άφρι¬ 
 ζαν, or, still better, edeiaav, but that, 
 from Homeric zeal, he employs a 
 word not elsewhere used by Attic 
 writers. 
 
 1609. παμμηκ€ΐς γόους, complaints 
 uttered in a loud tone of voice. Cf. 
 sup. 489. 
 
 1610. πικρόν, mournful. Cf. El- 
 lendt in voc. and Erfurdt ad Antig. 
 
 423· 
 
 1611. πτύξας επ’ αυταΐς χ€φας. 
 ScHOL. : π€ριπλ€ξας. 
 
 1614. Electr. 1143· οίμοι τάλαινα 
 της όμης πάλαι τροφής | ανωφΐΚητον, 
 την εγώ θάμ* άμφϊ σοϊ j πονώ γλνκει 
 παρίσχον, 
 
 1615—16. €V μόνον €πος, uniCUW, 
 verbum ; nempe paternus amor. Cf. 
 Schsefer in Meletem. p. 19· 
 
 1619. TO λοιπόν — του βίον, Suid. 
 Schsef. Wund. to λόπον — τόν βιον, 
 Herm. Gaisf. Dind. του λοιπόν βιοτον 
 ευ, Br. του λοιπόν — βιοτον, and το 
 λοιπόν — βιοτον, Libri. 
 
 Ib. JEsch. Eum. 679. ds το λοι¬ 
 πόν. Muller : fur alle Zukunft. 
 
 1620. ε’π’ άλληλοισιν άμφικζΐμ^νοι, 
 held in mutual embrace. 
 
 1621. λνγόην (λνζ€ΐν, tO Sob). 
 
 lb. πάυτεί, i. e. all three, CEdipus 
 and his two daughters. Schol. : 
 κατ’ ε’πικράτειαυ δε' πάντως (φη) 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 165 
 
 t * Λ f * > 5 ,»»/»» / / 3 ' 
 
 γόων αψίκοντ y ουό βτ ωρωρβι ροη, 
 
 ην μ€ν σιωττη' φθβγμα δ* βζαίφνη? tlvo9 
 
 θώνζβν αυτόν, ωστβ ττάντα9 6ρθία9 ■ 
 
 στησαι φόβω δείσαντας^ βζαίφνηζ τρίχας, 1625 
 
 κάλβί γαρ αυτόν ττολλά ποΧΧαχ^ Oeos' 
 
 ώ ουτος ουτος, ΟΙδίττους, τί μβΧΧομβν 
 
 χωρβΐν ; ττάΧαι δη τάττο σου βραδύνβταί. 
 
 6 δ’ ώς βπτισθβτ'' €κ θβου καΧούμβνος, 
 
 αυδα μοΧβΐν οΐ γης ανακτα θησβα, 1630 
 
 κάτΓβί ττροσηΧθβν, ehrev' ώ φίΧον κάρα, 
 
 δος μοί χ^ρος σης τηστιν 
 
 μίν οντυς τον ap(revos, bvo δε των 
 βήλίΐών. 
 
 1623. Hartung (II. 406.) ex¬ 
 presses the sense of μ^ν, in this sen¬ 
 tence, by wahrend (while). Wahrend 
 A lies still war, rief ihn plotzlich eine 
 Stimme. 
 
 1624. θωνξζν. ScHOL. : iKokeaeVf 
 (βόησ^ν. 
 
 1624—5. όρθιας στησαι φόβω. 
 .^sch. Choeph. 30. όρθόθριξ φόβος. 
 Eur. Hel. 632. κρατϊ δ’ όρθιους όθεί- 
 ρας άνβπτόρωκα. 
 
 1025· φόβω 0 €ΐσαντας, in extreme 
 terror. Phil. 225. 0 κνω δείσαι/τε?. 
 (Ed. Τ. 65· νττνω (νόοντα. Hermann 
 joins φόβω with στησαι. Wunder 
 constructs : ώστε ττάντας δβίσαι κα\ 
 φόβω τρίχας όρθιους στησαι. 
 
 1626. Dcederlein compares Eur. 
 Alcest. 262. ν€κνων δε πορθμούς—μ 
 ήδη καλεΓ. Plat. Phsedou. I 15, a. ε’/χε 
 δε νυν ήδη <αλεϊ, φαίη αν άνηρ τρα·γίκός, 
 ή Έΐμαρμίνη. 
 
 Ib. πολλά τΓολΧαχη, viel lind viel- 
 fach. Donn. (Cf. Elmsl. ad Eur. 
 Heracl. 919. Arist. Eccl. T105. όάν 
 τι πολλά πολλάκις πάθω.) Dale, more 
 poetically, but less accurately, “again 
 and yet again.” 
 
 1627. ω οδτοί. Aj. 89. ω ovros, Αίαν. 
 
 άρχαιαν τβκνοίς, 
 
 Ib. μ^λομ^ν = μ€λλ€ΐς. Cf. Phil. 
 
 64s· 
 
 1628. ταπό σοΰ (El. 1464* 
 τελείται τάπ όμον. quse a me pro- 
 ficisci possunt. Neue. Eur. Troad. 
 74. €Τ0ΐμ’ a βονλβι ταπ’ όμον.) βρα- 
 δννβται = συ βραδύνεις. Translate 
 freely : why this long delay on your 
 part? Cf. Matth. p. 995. 
 
 1632. χ€ρός πίστιν. Phil. 813· e/x- 
 βαλλε χειρος πίστιν. Eur. Med. 21. 
 δεξιάς πίστιν. 
 
 Ib. άρχαίαν. Wunder adopts Her¬ 
 mann’s explanation, derived from 
 Hisch. Ag. 587. (θεοΊς λάφυρα ταυτα 
 τοΊς καθ' ‘Ελλάδα δόμοις επασσάλενσαν 
 άρχαίον γάνος), quce firnia maneat, 
 olim antiqua futura. Neue refers 
 to the old league between Thebes 
 and Athens (v. 632.) : in which 
 sense Ellendt also apparently trans¬ 
 lates : fdes perpetuo apud te tisu 
 sacrata. I rather understand the 
 pledge originally given by Theseus 
 (sup. 565-6.) to (Edipus, and which 
 the latter now wishes to be trans¬ 
 ferred to his children. So perhaps 
 in V. I 10. άρχαΊον δέμας, my person as 
 it originally was. For the double da¬ 
 tive, μοι and τεκνοις, cf. sup. 1518-I9. 
 
 M 3 
 
166 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 (ύμβΐς τ€, τταΐδβ^, τώδε) καϊ καταίν€σον 
 μητΓοτβ 7Γροδώσ€ίν τάσδ’ ίκων^ reXeiv S οσ 
 μβλλρς (j)poi'wu βν ζνμφβροντ αύταΐς άβί. 
 
 6 δ\ ώί άρηρ yevvcdo 9 ^ ονκ οίκτου μβτα 
 Karrjveaei^ raS opKcos δράσήν 
 
 ff 5 >\ >/Ί' 
 
 όπως oe ταυτ eopaaei/, βνσνς Όίοιπους 
 ψανσας άμαυραΐς γ€ρσ\ν ών παίδων XeyeC 
 ώ πάίδβ^ τΧάσας γρη το yevvaiov φρβρί 
 yoopeiv τόπων όκ τώρδβ^ μηδί a μη θόμις 
 Χβνσσβίρ δικαωυρ, μηδβ φωρούρτωρ κΧύβίΡ, 
 άλλ* €ρπ€& ως τάγιστα* πΧηρ δ κύριος 
 θησβύς παρύστω μαρθάνωρ τα δρώμενα. 
 
 A 
 
 αρ 
 
 >635 
 
 1640 
 
 1033· v/A6ts re, naiSes, τώδε (δότε). 
 Elmsley well illustrates the paren¬ 
 thesis from Eurip. Troad. 1016. ω 
 eCyarep^ e^eXO' (ot δ’ epo\ παΐδε? ya- 
 μυνς άλλον? yaμovσι, σε δ’ ε’ττι vavs 
 *Αχαίκάς ττί'μψω ξυν€κκ\€ψασα) κα\ τταν- 
 σον μάχης ^'Ελληνας ημάς τε. Here. 
 624· αλλά θάρσος ισχ€Τ€, καϊ νάματ 
 οσσων μηκβτ i^avure, (σν τ , ώ yvpai, 
 μοι ^vXKoyop ψυχής λάβε, τρόμου τε 
 παυσαι) και μβθΐσθ' όμων πίττΧων. 
 
 Ib. καταίνίσον, promise^ engage 
 faithfully. Cf. Dissen, Comment, in 
 Find. p. 242. 
 
 I 63 4—5. TcXeip — αεί. That the 
 sense of this somewhat difficult con¬ 
 struction is to be illustrated from 
 infr. 1773-4. there can be little 
 doubt. 
 
 ^^35· sc. τελεΐν, do here¬ 
 
 after. Infr. 1773-4. ττάρθ" oTToV άρ 
 μίΧΧω πράσσαρ. 
 
 Ib. “ φρορωρ εν cum τελείν COgi- 
 tatione jungendum, ad οσ άρ μ^ΧΧης 
 rursus mente repetendum τελεΐν.” 
 Reis. To me it appears that εν 
 φρορώρ is to be considered rather in 
 conjunction with ξυμφερορτ ^ medi¬ 
 tating what is benefeial to them ; as 
 at Aj. 488. εν φρορώ τά σά. 
 
 1636. ουκ οίκτου μίτα. The con¬ 
 text seems to require, without ex¬ 
 hibiting any mark of hesitation or 
 weakness. Dale: promptly. Solger, 
 Thudichum, Donner and Matthise: 
 without lamenting. 
 
 1637. ορκιος = ορκω. For adjec¬ 
 tives of this nature, see Matth. 
 §. 446, 8. Kiihn. §. 685, c. 
 
 1638. οπω?, as, when. Matth. 
 §. 623, 4. 
 
 1639. ψαύσας ώρ (Matth. §. 149,1.) 
 παίδωρ, having embraced his daugh¬ 
 ter. 
 
 1640. τΧάσας το γενναίον=γενναία)?, 
 Reis, rather, supporting, what to 
 support is the sign of a noble mind. 
 Phil. 1402. yeppoiop (Ιρηκως εττο?. 
 Hermann illustrates this use of the 
 word γενναίον from Eur. Ale. 640. 
 epyop τΧάσας γενναΤον τάδε. 
 
 1642. δικαιοϋρ. ScHOL. : δί /caiov 
 ρομίζΐίρ. 
 
 1043· ό κύριος, the proper person, 
 the person appointed to witness 
 what follows, or to ratify it. (Cf. 
 infr. 1780.) 
 
 1644. τά δρώ/ίενα, rem gestain. 
 Ell. Cf. Wund. ad El. 1313. 
 
ΟΙΔίΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 τοσαντα φωνησαντο^ ύσηκούσαμ^ν 
 ζύμτΓαντ€ς' άστακτί Se συν ταί^ τταρθβνοι,ς 
 arevovres ώμαρτονμβν. ώί δ’ άττηλθομ^ν^ 
 χρόνω βραχβΐ στραφβντβί, Ιζαπε'ώομ^ν 
 τον ανδρα, τον μ€ν ούδαμοΰ παρόντ €Τί, 
 ανακτα δ’ αυτόν ομμάτων ίττίσκιον 
 χ€Ϊρ άντβχοντα κράτος, ώς δβινοΰ tlvos 
 φόβου φανόντο^ ούδ* άνασχβτου βλβτΓβίν. 
 ίπβιτα μβντοι βαών, ούδ€ συν χρόνω, 
 ορώμβν αυτόν γην τβ ττροσκυνουνθ* αμα 
 καί τον Oecov ^Όλυμττον Ιν ταυτω λογω. 
 μορω ο οτΓΟίω k€lvos ωλβτ, ουό αν €L9 
 θνητών φράσβιβ^ ττλην το θησβωί^ κάρα, 
 ου γάρ tl 9 αυτόν ουτβ ττυρφόρο^ θβου 
 K€paov0s όζόπρα^βν ουτ€ ττοντία 
 
 167 
 
 1^45 
 
 1650 
 
 ί^55 
 
 1645· metre of the verse, 
 
 see “ Vorrede” to Solger’s Transla¬ 
 tion, I. 56. 
 
 1646. αστακΓΐ, profusely. Cf. sup. 
 1251. 
 
 1649. τον itvhpa, τον pev. Neue 
 compares 11 . XII. 14. πολλοί δ’ Άρ- 
 
 γ€ίων, οί pev bapev, οί δ’ βλίποντο. 
 
 XXIV. 72 1. Eur. Hec. 1161. πολ¬ 
 λοί yap ηρών αί pev eicr’ Επίφθονοι, αί 
 δ’ els άριθρον των κακών π€φύκαρ€ν. 
 
 Cf. Herm. ad Viger. p. 699. Matth. 
 §. 288, 5. Bernh. 307. 
 
 1650-3. 
 
 We marked the king alone, with 
 close-pressed hands 
 Shading his brow, as if appall’d by 
 forms 
 
 More terrible than human sight 
 could bear. Dale. 
 
 1 650. όρράτων eTtiaKLOV. Cf. Matth. 
 
 §. 344 · 
 
 1651. xelp' άντ€χοντα κρατ 69 , by 
 
 holding his hand before his head. 
 
 (Reisig, keenly alive to all the 
 poetic beauties of this drama, ob¬ 
 serves, how admirably this imagery 
 is calculated to produce the impres¬ 
 sion of something terrible having 
 occurred ; so fearless a person as 
 Theseus being now under the in¬ 
 fluence of the most abject terror.) 
 
 16^^. βαών ovbe συν χρόνω. ScHOL.: 
 ρβτ ολίγον, ού ρζτά πολύ. Cf. CEd. 
 
 Τ. 58· _ , 
 
 1654 “ 5 · decov ’'Ολυρπον. 
 
 Klausen’sTheol. ρ. 29: “qui vero tel- 
 lurem et coelum invocat, omnia ad- 
 orat numina, infera pariter ac supera. 
 Prom. 499. Soph. Qid. Col. 1634.” 
 
 Ib. deaiv ^Ολυρπον. Trach. ΪΙ91. 
 τον 0’ίτη9 Ζηνος πάγον. Reisig con¬ 
 siders Olympus to be here the same 
 as the god Olpavbs, and illustrates 
 by Antig. 758. αλλ’ ού τόνύ' "'ολνρπην 
 Ίσθ' οτι— devvdaeis epe. 
 
 1659· ScHOL. ; dj/it- 
 
 λev, despatched, destroyed. 
 
 M 4 
 
168 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 θύβλλα κινηθβίσα τώ τότ ev γβόνω* ι66ο 
 
 «λλ* η TL9 ίκ θβών 7 Γ 0 μ 7 Γ 09 , η το ρβρτβρωι/ 
 evvovv 8 ίασταν γη^ άλάμπβτορ βάθρον, 
 ανηρ γαρ ού στ€ΐ/ακτο 9 , ονδβ συν voaoLS 
 aXyeLV 09 i^eTrepwer, άλΧ el tls βροτών 
 θαυμαστός, el δβ μη δοκώ φρονών XeyeLV, 1665 
 
 ούκ αν πapeίμηv οίσι μη δοκώ φpoveΐv. 
 χο. ΤΓοΰ δ* α 1 Te τταΓδβί χοΐ irpowepy^ravTes φίΧων ; 
 
 ΑΓ. α 1 δ\ ούχ ίκάς, γόων γαρ ούκ aarjpoves 
 
 φθόγγοι σφe σημαίνουσι δeύp όρμωμ^νας. 
 
 ΑΝ. αίαΐ, ίστίν ίστι νων δη ττροφ, d , 1670 
 
 ού το pevy άλλο δβ μη, ττατρός έμφυτον 
 αΧαστον αίμα δυσμόροιν στevάζeLv, 
 ώτινι τον ΤΓοΧύν 
 
 ι66ι. ris €κ θ€ώρ τΓομποί, some¬ 
 body commissioned by the gods. 
 
 i66i-2 . TO Ρΐρτίρων βάθρον, the 
 seat of the lower gods. 
 
 1662. €vvovv διασταν, having kindly 
 parted aside. 
 
 Ib. oKapTTerop (a, λά/χπω,) without 
 light. aXapneroPy Musgr. Br. Schsef. 
 
 Reis. Elms. Gaisf. Dind. in Annot. 
 
 Par. F. La. άΧνπητορ, Herm. Wund. 
 
 Neue. 
 
 Ib. yr}9 redundant. Cf. sup. 668. 
 
 1664. aXyeipos. Reisig, who con¬ 
 siders στ6ΐ^α<τόί as an active adjective, 
 translates, dolorem patiens. 
 
 Ib. e^enepncTO. ScHOL. : e^e- 
 
 TTPCvaep. 
 
 1664—5. “λλ’ ei Tis βροτωρ θαν~ 
 μαστός, “ of mankind most wondrous 
 in his doom.” Dale. 
 
 1665. φρορωρ, emphatic; in pos¬ 
 session of my senses. 
 
 1666. TrapUpai significat iw meas 
 partes adducere studeo, inde exoro.” 
 
 Ell. tanta est fides dictorum meo- 
 rum, ut si cui insipiens videar, ejus 
 
 vituperationem nil moror, neque 
 veniam sim tanquam erroris mei 
 petiturus, Reis. 
 
 1667. oi Ίτροπίμφαρτζς φίΧωρ. The 
 Scholiast understands Theseus alone. 
 That the attendants on his person 
 are to be included, the preceding 
 narrative gives valid proof. 
 
 1670 sq. Metre: antispast. dip. 
 troch. Prevalent metres, dactyl and 
 iambic. 
 
 1671. ού TO μ€Ρ, &XXo δε μη, lite¬ 
 rally, not in one thing, and not in 
 another ; being equivalent to, in 
 every thing. Phocyl. ap. Gaisf. I. 
 p. 444 · ^^piOi κακοί’ ούχ ό /zeV, os δ’ οΰ’ 
 πάρτ€ς πΧηρ ΤΙροκΧ€ονς. Eur. Phcen. 
 1655· ού yap το pep σοι βαρύ κακωρ, 
 το δ’ ού βαρύ. 
 
 1671 — 2. πατρος €μφυτορ αΧαστορ 
 αίμα. Infandam originem queritur 
 a patris inde generatione ipsis in- 
 sitam.” Ell. 
 
 1673 . ωτιρι. I understand ; on 
 account of which father. 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΠΝΩί. 
 
 169 
 
 αλλοτβ μίν πόνον βμπβδον βιχομεν, 
 
 βν πνμάτω S* αλόγιστα παροίσομ€ν 1675 
 
 Idovre και παθονσα, 
 
 ΧΟ. τί S βστιν ; ΑΝ. βστιν μίν άκάσαι, φίλοι. 
 
 ΧΟ. βββηκβν ; ΑΝ. ώς μάλιστ αν ά πόθω λάβοις, 
 
 τί γόιρ, ότω μητ ’Άρη^ ι68ο 
 
 μητ€ πόντος· άντόκυρσβν^ 
 άσκοποι de πλάκβς βμαρφαν 
 
 1074· «λλοτ£, at other times. I 
 understand, as in opposition to ev 
 •ηνμάτω, in the verse following·. 
 
 Ib. e/iTreSoi/ (Ιχομεν, wc boreβrmly. 
 Antig. 421. μνσαντ€ς {having shut 
 our eyes) (ϊχομ^ν Oeiav νόσον {we sup¬ 
 ported this calamity from heaven). 
 
 1675. αλόγιστα, perhaps, things 
 which reason never calculated upon. 
 
 Ib. παροίσομ€ν — ο 1 σομ€ν, we shall 
 bear, or, have to endure. The Scho¬ 
 liast, at the verb όξαπ^ί^ομ^ν (sup. 
 1648.), notices it as peculiar to 
 Sophocles to add prepositions to his 
 verbs without altering their simpler 
 sense, {tbiov αυτόν TO πολλαΐί κ^χρησθαι 
 προθίσΐσι.) EUendt renders παροί- 
 σομ€ν, ajferemus, memorabimus,'Vi\n.ch. 
 sense Herm. illustrates by Eur. Iph. 
 Aul. 981. This sense is also adopted 
 by Dindorf. 
 
 1676. 'ώόντζ και τταθοίσα, in con¬ 
 sequence of what we have seen and 
 suffered. What Antigone had seen, 
 the reader of the narrative preceding 
 is aware; what she had suffered, 
 may be considered as partly derived 
 from what she did not see. The 
 Scholiast, referring to the difference 
 of gender in the two participles be¬ 
 fore us, observes, πολλαχον τω σχη- 
 ματι γ^ρηται, άντϊ των θηλυκών τα 
 άρρίνικα τιβζίς. Καί iv 'ϋλ^κτρα ( 979 ·) 
 ω τοίΐσιν ιχθροϊς ev β^βηκόσιν ττοτε 
 
 άφ6ΐδησαντ€ ττρονστητην φονου. 
 και πάλιν' όρα κακώς πάσχοντ€ μη μάιζω 
 
 κακα κτησώμΐθα. Cf. Matth. §. 43 ^» ^ · 
 Wund. ad Electr. 960. 
 
 1677. The books read ουκ ^στιν 
 μ. cIk. Hermann, and later editors, 
 reject the negative. On the sense 
 of μ^, see Hart. II. 412. Metre: 
 amphibr. dim. iamb. 
 
 1678. ■ βίβηκζν, euphemism for 
 
 death. Phil. 494. παλαι αν όξ οτον 
 beboiK όγώ μη μοι βίβηκοι. Arist. 
 Eccl. 9 ^ 3 · Lucretius 
 
 VI. 1241 · Q'li fuerant autem prjesto, 
 contagibus ibant. See the Greek 
 ellipse filled up in Trach. 874· 
 
 Ib. ώς μάλιστ αν {βαίης vel λάβοις) 
 el πόθω λάβοις. Quo modo maxime 
 mortem accipias, si exoptatam acci- 
 pias. Herm. Bernhardy (p. 456.) 
 compares Thucyd. VI. 57. &c. &c. 
 
 Ib. πόθω. For the dative thus 
 placed, Musgrave compares Plutarch 
 Alcib. C. I 8. opyrj κα\ φόβω το γ€γον 6 ς 
 λαμβάνοντ€ς. 
 
 168ο. Metre : fourth pseon and 
 cretic. 
 
 1680—T. μητ "'Αρης μητ€ πόντος. 
 I understand: neither slaughter by 
 land, nor storm by sea. Cf. sup. 
 1659. Antig. 820. 952. Pind. Pyth. 
 XI. s- 
 
 1681 . avTeKvpaev {άντικνρ€ω). 
 
 ScHOL. : όπηλθβν. Ell. : rectius 
 σνν€π€σ€ν. 
 
 1682. άσκοποι πλάκ€ς, the dark 
 Earth's bosom. Donn. άσκοποι, in 
 quo nihil conspicitur. Dced. For 
 
170 
 
 . ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 eV άφανεΐ tivl μόρω φβρόμβναι, 
 τάΧαίνα* νωρ δ’ ολέθρια 
 ρνζ ετΓ ομμασίΡ βφηκε. 
 
 ττώ? γαρ η tlv άττίαρ γάρ ■ 1685 
 
 η ΤΓΟΡΤίΟΡ κλνδωρ άΚώμεραι βίου 
 δύσοιστορ εζομερ τροφάρ ; 
 
 ΙΣ. ού κάτοιδα, κατά με φορίος· (ττροφ, β\ 
 
 *Αΐδας ελοί ττατρί \_ζυρΘαρεΐρ γεραίω~\ i6go 
 
 τάΧαΐραρ' ώί εμονγ ο μελΧωρ βίο^ ού βιωτό^. 
 
 ΧΟ. ώ δίδυμα τεκρωρ άριστα^ 
 το φερορ εκ θεόν καΧω 5 ^ 
 
 μηδερ άγαρ φΧεγεσθορ' οΰτοί κατάμεμτττ εβητορ. 1695 
 
 various senses in which the word 
 άσκοπος is used by Sophocles, see 
 Wunder’s Electr. 848. 
 
 1683. φβρόμίναι. Middle voice. 
 (El. 475 · diKaia φβρομζνα χ^ροίν κρά¬ 
 τη), hearing him off. φ^ρόμ^ναι, ex 
 conject. Herm. Elmsl. Wund. Dind. 
 φαινόμΐναι, Libri. Metre : trim, 
 pseon. 
 
 1684. τάΧαινα (addresses herself 
 to Ismene). 
 
 1684—5. ολέθρια νίιξ επ' ομμασι. 
 Wunder compares Eurip. Alcest. 279. 
 πλησίον '^Αώας, σκοτία δ’ επ' οσσοισι 
 νυξ εφερπει. Cf. Antig. 1302. 
 
 1685. άπίαν yav, longinquani ter- 
 ram. Horn. Od. VII. 25. τηλόθεν 
 εξ άπίης γαίας. Reis. 
 
 1686. πόντιον κλύδων' άλώμεναι. 
 Per cequora vagantes, Reis. Theoc. 
 XIII. 66. άλώμενος — ωρεα. Cf. Neue 
 ad Aj. 30, Kiihn. §. 554. Dindorf 
 proposes to unite this and the fol¬ 
 lowing verse, thus forming six troch. 
 dipod. cat. with an anacrusis. 
 
 1686—7· βίου δύσοιστον τροφάν, 
 by hypallage, for βίου δνσοίστυν 
 (gravia perpessce) τροφάν. Ell. δνσ- 
 πόριστον, ScHOL. 
 
 1689—90. κατά — ελοι, i. e. καθελοι. 
 
 1690. 'Aldas. First syllable long. 
 See Pors. ad Eur. Hec. 1010. and 
 Passow in voc. 
 
 Ib. ξυνθανεΊν γεραιω. Dindorf and 
 Wunder justly suspect these two 
 words as the addition of some in¬ 
 terpreter. Why not include πατρί ? 
 Cf. infr. 1716. 
 
 1691. Metre: dim. iamb, and 
 logaoed. 
 
 1692. Metre: logaoed. For con¬ 
 struction, see Matth. §. 442, 4. 
 
 1694. The part. neut. to φερον, 
 as subst. the leading, conducting, 
 directing power, therefore. Fate, as 
 also/or.s and fortuna from fero, par¬ 
 ticularly with the tragedians, never 
 without the article. Wunderl. obs. 
 cr. p. 55. Art. to φερόμενον, sors. 
 Reisig. Enarr. Soph. O. C. 1694. 
 Pass. Brunck compares Pallad. 
 Epigr. Anall. II. p. 482. εΐ to φε'ρον 
 σε φερει, φ^ρ^ και φε'ρον. Terence : 
 quod fors feret, feremus cequo animo. 
 Dindorf observes: to εκ θεόν φερον 
 καλώς dictum ut τονκ θεού παρόν, 
 V. 154°· 
 
 1695* φλεγεσθον. “ Urere de do- 
 
ΟΙΔΓΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 171 
 
 ΑΝ. TToOos καί κακών αρ ήν τις. άντ, λ. 1697 
 
 καΐ γαρ ο μηδαμα 8 η το φίλον^ φίλον, 
 oTTore γβ και τον iv χ€ροΐν κατβΐχον. 
 ώ ττάτβρ, ώ φίλος, 1700 
 
 ώ τον ael κατα γας σκότον βΙμβνος’ 
 ovde γαρ ων άφίλητος ίμοί τγοτ€ 
 καΊ Tade μη κυρησης, 
 
 ΧΟ. eirpa^ev ; ΑΝ. ewpa^ev οΐον ηθ^λ^ν. 
 
 lore dicitur. Oppian Halieut. II. 
 594. φλ€γΐθ€ΐ be oi ητυρ άνίτ}.’* ReiS. 
 The sense of the whole passage 
 therefore is: do not bear bitterly 
 that which proceeds from the gods for 
 your benefit. Dindorf compares 
 ^sch. Suppl. 1062. τα 6ea>v 
 άγάζ€ΐν. Libri : ayav υντω (f)Xe- 
 
 yeaBov. Dind. ex conj. Wund. μη- 
 bev ayav (pXeyeaBov. 
 
 Ib. ovTOi καταμεμπτ €βητον. ScHOL.; 
 OVK ev τοιοντοις eare Save καταμ^μ- 
 (jieaBai, you are not in such a position 
 that you ought tofnd fault. Com¬ 
 paring El. 979. β€βηκόσιν (men on 
 good fortunes path), perhaps we 
 might render, more literally, the path 
 you have trod is not one for blame. 
 Metre: Priapean. Cf. Herm. Metr. 
 
 P· 574 · 
 
 1696-9. Antigone, paying little 
 attention to the consolatory precepts 
 of the Chorus, follows the bent 
 of her own feelings, and refers to 
 past times. “ Painful as they were,” 
 she intimates, “ still they had their 
 pleasures; for what in some sense 
 was utterly joyless (μηbaμωs φίλον), 
 was in another sense matter of en¬ 
 joyment; for—I had him in my 
 arms. Can 1 be without regret for 
 such a period ?” 
 
 1697. ap' ην. On the force of 
 the particle, and on imperfect for 
 present tense, see Hartung I. 434. 
 Kiihn. §. 438, 4. 
 
 1698. /cat yap — φίλον. Hartung 
 (I. 256.) : was noch nie lieb war, 
 wird lieb. 
 
 1700. φίλος is to be considered 
 here in its connexion with άφίλητος 
 V. 1702. (“For never will you be 
 other than beloved by me and her,'* 
 (viz. Ismene.) 
 
 1701. Tov aet σκότον = Tov αίανη 
 σκότον. D(ed. The force of the ex¬ 
 pression is perhaps better seen in 
 the θανάτω και άeιφvyίa of Demos¬ 
 thenes (528, 7). 
 
 Ib. etftei/os. Cf. Matth. I. p. 402. 
 
 1702. yap ων, Herm. ex conject. 
 Wund. Dind. (in Annotat.) yeρωv, 
 Libri. 
 
 1704. eTTpa^ev olov rjBeXev. Brunck 
 compares Aj. 967. ών yap ηράσθη 
 τνχίίν, €κτησαθ' αυτω, θάνατον, ovirep 
 rj6eXev. (Whoever was the author of 
 this part of the drama before us, 
 whether Sophocles or his nephew, 
 the rapid fluctuations of mind in 
 Antigone, her bursts of uncontrol¬ 
 lable grief, when she thinks of her 
 solitary and unprotected state ; her 
 tender emotions when reflecting on 
 bygone days, passed with a parent 
 so dear ; her swelling thoughts when 
 she considers that he has died the 
 death he wished, and where he 
 wished ; even the contradictory 
 movements in her mind are painted 
 with a master’s hand.) 
 
172 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 χο. ro ποιον ; ΑΝ. as* ^χρχιζ^ yas ίπ\ ^eva 9 1705 
 eOave ’ κοιτάν S βχβί 
 vepOev βνσκίαστον alev, 
 ούδβ π€νθθ9 βλίΤΓ* ακλαντον. 
 άνα γαρ ομμα σε τόδ\ ώ πάτερ, εμδν 
 στενει δακρνον, ούδ' εχω, \y\o 
 
 πως με χρη το σον τάλαιναν 
 άφανίσαι τοσόνδ* αχός. Ιω 
 μη γάς επ\ ζενας θανε\ν ^χρηζ^9, άλλ’ 
 έρημος εθανες ώδε μοι. 
 
 ΙΣ. ώ τάλαινα, τις αρα με πότμος dvT. β\ 1715 
 
 [αυσις ωό έρημος άπορος^ 
 
 1705. yas €τη ξίνας. What ears 
 these words were most intended to 
 please, it is unnecessary to say. 
 
 1707. κοιτάν. So in Electr. 436. 
 the grave of Agamemnon is termed 
 
 (vvr). 
 
 1708. ακΚαυτον, “which friends 
 will leave unwept.'* Reisig aptly 
 compares Solon Epig. μη^€ μοι ακΧαν- 
 Tos θάνατος μόλοι, αλλά φίλοισι [ καλ~ 
 λ€ΐ 7 Γθΐμι θανων aXyea καϊ στοναχής. 
 
 Ib. πένθος. I understand ; a 
 mournful fate. 
 
 l'] 0 ^—\ 0 . άνα — στόν€ΐ'=·άναστίνξΐ. 
 Cf. sup. 1689. Hermann’s emenda¬ 
 tion of ava for del (Libri) is adopted 
 by Dindorf in his notes. 
 
 1 7 · O -1 1. TO σον άχος, the sorrow 
 caused on your account. Cf. Ell. 
 II. 719. 
 
 1712. άφανίζξίν, de dolore, qui 
 ferendo quasi amovetur ah aliquo. 
 Ell. 
 
 ϊ 7 ϊ 3 ~^ 4 · The current 
 
 of Antigone’s feeling is more dis¬ 
 cernible than the construction or 
 language by which she arrives at it. 
 The sepulture of Qidipus in Athens 
 was of such political consequences 
 
 to the latter state, that the poet 
 could not but allow his heroine to 
 acquiesce in it (1705.); but that 
 compliment paid, her feelings take 
 the more natural turn, which leads 
 to the lament that her father should 
 have died in a foreign land, where she 
 could not pay to his remains those 
 duties which the dead require, and 
 which her dutiful affections would 
 so cheerfully have performed. “ O 
 that you had not wished to die in a 
 foreign land! for (by so dying) you 
 have died, as far as I am concerned, 
 desolate, forsaken!” Dale, who 
 does not appear to have understood 
 or troubled himself about the poli¬ 
 tical tendencies of the play, trans¬ 
 lates beautifully, and at first sight 
 more naturally, and correctly : 
 
 Alas ! it was not well to die 
 In a strange land, and dying leave 
 Thy daughter desolate! 
 
 Ϊ 7 * 3 · M —Cf. Hartung 
 
 II· 153· 
 
 1716. Reisig and Wunder ex¬ 
 punge this verse from the text as 
 made out of verse infr. 1735. Cf. 
 strophic verse 1690. 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΙ. 
 
 173 
 
 €παμμ€Ρ€ΐ σ€ τ\ ω φίλα, τας ιτατροζ &S ίρημας ; 
 
 ΧΟ. άλλ* eVei ολβίως γ eXvaev 1720 
 
 το τ4λθ9, ώ φίλαι, βίου, 
 
 ληγβτβ τοοδ* αχού?’ κακών γαρ 8υσάλωτο9 ονδβί^. 
 
 ΑΝ. πάλιν, φίλα, σνθώμβν. ΙΣ. ώ? τί ράξομεν ; στρ. γ\ 1724 
 ΑΝ. Ίμβρον βχβι μβ ΙΣ. τ/? ; 
 
 ΑΝ. τάν χΘόνιον ίστίαν Ιδβΐν 
 
 ΙΣ. τίνο 9 ; ΑΝ. πατρο9, τάλαιν ίγώ, 
 
 ΙΣ. θβμις δβ πώς τάδ" βστί ; μών 
 
 ούχ ορας ΑΝ. τί τοδ’ €π4πληζας ; 173^ 
 
 ΙΣ. και τόδ\ ώς ΑΝ. τί τόδβ μάλ! αυθις ; 
 
 ΙΣ. άταφος ariTve, δίχα τβ παντός. 
 
 1719* Herm. ex con- 
 
 ject. Dind. Wund. eVi/xej/et, Libri. 
 
 1720—1. eXvcrei/ to reXos βίον. 
 “ De vita finienda dictum, a solven- 
 dis jugo armentis. Quern locum cum 
 illoAntig. 1287. perperam contendit 
 Wexius in Sylloge. Recti ora dedere 
 Seidlerus ad Eur. Iph. Taur. 674. 
 et Marklandus ibid.” Ell. 
 
 1723. κακών δυσάλωτο?, vom Un- 
 gliick schwer zu erreichen, difficult 
 to he reached hy misfortune. Pass. 
 Plato Lys. 206, a. Tim. 51, a. Cf. 
 sup. 1521, Matth. §. 345. 
 
 1724. συθωμ^ν (σβνομαΐ)^ let US 
 return. Prevalent metres: iambic 
 and trochaic. 
 
 1725. The pathetic division of 
 the dialogue, and the impulses under 
 which Antigone here acts, ignorant 
 in what manner her parent had 
 actually died, and, like her sex, in¬ 
 clinable to haunt about sepulchral 
 dwellings, are well described by tbe 
 Scholiast, whom see. For some im¬ 
 provement in the arrangement of 
 the verses following, and distinction 
 of the characters, scholars are in¬ 
 debted to Wunder. 
 
 1726. ταν χθονίαν ίστίαν (=1756. 
 τνμβον. 1763· βηκην Upav) , funeral- 
 bed. Dale. Donner translates, the 
 tomb, raised out of earth. Ellendt, 
 having adverted to a passage in the 
 Trachiniae, where the word ίστία im¬ 
 plies altar (v. 658), observes, that it 
 is here used, “ cum grata meta- 
 phora, de loco, quo CEdipus terra 
 absumptus velut piacula scelerum 
 luerat.” Reisig had previously ob¬ 
 served, “ sepulcrum enim ara dicitur 
 humo exstructa.” Metre: dim. 
 iamb. 
 
 1729—30. μων οίιχ 6 ρας, “ do yOU 
 not yourself perceive (cf. Wunder ad 
 Aj. 999.), viz. that what you propose 
 to do, is against all propriety ?” For 
 the style of composition, compare 
 the poet’s Electra 838 sq. &c. 
 
 1730. τί Tob' €π€πλη^ας ; what ad~ 
 monition or reproof is this which you 
 give me? Aj. 288. κάγω ^πιπλησσω 
 κα\ λέγω. 
 
 1 731* ’■όδ’ (sc. ούχ όρας;) ως, 
 
 &C. 
 
 lb. τί Tobe μάλ* ανθις, why this 
 second rebuke ? 
 
 1732 . eniTve (ττιτν^ω). “In the 
 
174 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΌΤΣ 
 
 AN. aye /xe, καί τότ eTrepapt^oi/, 
 
 ΙΣ. αία?, δνστάλαίρα, ττοΐ δητ 
 
 -7 Λ Τλ» V ν 
 
 ανσί9 ωο βρημο? άποροί 
 αΙωνα τΧάμον ίζω j 
 
 ΧΟ. φίλαί^ τρβσητβ μηδβρ, ΑΝ. άλλα ττοΐ φύγω 
 ΧΟ. /cat ττάρος άττύφυγβ ΑΝ. τί ; 
 
 ΧΟ. τα σφωρ το μη ττίτνβΐρ κακώς". 
 
 ΑΝ. φρορώ ΧΟ. τί δηθ* ν7Γ€ρρο€Ϊς ; 
 
 ΑΝ. όπως μολούμβθ* eV δόμους 
 
 ούκ €χω. ΧΟ. μηδό ye μάτβνβ, 
 
 ΑΝ. μόγος ίχ€ΐ. ΧΟ. καΐ πάρος eVet. 
 
 ΑΝ. τοτ€ μΙρ πύρα, rore S ύπβρθβρ. 
 
 1735 
 ώντ.γ. 
 1740 
 
 1745 
 
 passage of Soph. (Ed. Col. 1732. I 
 consider the sense of enirve to be 
 evidently that of an aorist, though 
 Reisig doubts it; for the imperfect 
 can hardly be compatible with the 
 meaning of αταφος (cadebat insc' 
 pultus) ” Buttmanna Irregular Verbs, 
 note, p. 2 14. 
 
 1733* ^^νάριξον, slay me on my 
 father, i. e. on my father s tomb. 
 Cf. sup. 790. enevapi^ov, ex conject. 
 Elms. Herm. Wund. Dind. ivdpi^ov, 
 Libri. 
 
 1734. Metre : antispast. dip. 
 troch. 
 
 1736. τΧάμον, ex conject. Herm. 
 τΧάμων, Libri. 
 
 1739—40. άπίφυγί τά σφων=άπ€~ 
 φύ-γβτον (cf. sup. 1628.), you pre¬ 
 viously escaped (in the abduction by 
 Creon) to μη nirvelv κακώς, a distress¬ 
 ing conclusion. The books give these 
 two verses to the Chorus in the follow¬ 
 ing form : κα\ τταρος άπ€φύγ€τον σφών 
 το μη TTLTveiv κακώς. For the better 
 arrangement, readers are partly in¬ 
 debted to Hermann, partly to Wun- 
 der. 
 
 1741. φθονώ, I am meditating. 
 
 Ib. TL — νπ^ρνοΐΐς, why think, more 
 
 than you ought to think ? Neue 
 compares El. 178. Ιπίράχθ^ο. Ant. 
 128. νπ(ρ(χθαίρ€ΐ. Tracli. 281. vncp- 
 χλιδώντες. 
 
 1743· μηδβ ye μάτ€νε. El. 1347. 
 ovde y es θυμόν φ€ρω. Cf. Hart. I. 
 
 399 · 
 
 1744· H-^yos (sorrow) exei sc. μ€. 
 Sup. 1725· ίμερος €χ€ΐ pe. 
 
 lb. κα\ πάρος enel. The editors, 
 dissatisfied with this reading of the 
 books, either mark the passage as 
 corrupt, or try by various emenda¬ 
 tions to correct it. Hermann sug¬ 
 gests eπeίpώ, Wunder, eneixe, which 
 Dindorf adopts. Considering the 
 elliptical mode in which the whole 
 of this dialogue is conducted, even 
 the common reading may be re¬ 
 duced to tolerable sense. “And 
 sorrow had a hold on you before, 
 when—(your father was living, as 
 well as now that he is dead).” 
 
 1745. The answer of Antigone 
 (manifestly corrupt in the books) 
 seems as if intended to penetrate 
 and reply to this feeling on the part 
 of the (Chorus : “ I grant you, my 
 sorrow was then great, but now it is 
 excessive.” Or, more literally, and 
 
ΟΙΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩΓ. 
 
 175 
 
 ΧΟ. μβγ' αρα ττβλαγο^ ^λάχβτόρ τι. 
 
 ΑΝ. αία?, ττο? μόλωμβι^, ώ ZeO ; 
 βλπιοων γαρ €$· τιρ βτι μβ 
 
 δαίμων τανυν γ έλαύνβι ; 1750 
 
 ΘΗ. Trauere θρήνων, τταΐδβς. iv oh γαρ 
 χάρΐ 9 η χθονία ζύν άττόκβιται, 
 
 ΤΓβνθβΐν ού χρη' vepeais γάρ· 
 
 more worthy of the sententious and 
 emphatic speaker : “ sorrow some¬ 
 times holds us greatly, sometimes 
 more than greatly/’ The tone in 
 which this is uttered, and the look 
 which accompanies it, bring the 
 Chorus to a more proper sense of the 
 grief in which Antigone is at present 
 immersed, and they acknowledge 
 that the wide ocean is not more full 
 of water than her soul is now full of 
 grief. Wunder, to help the metre, 
 proposes rare pev απορα. Hermann 
 writes : rore nepa, Tore Se y vnepOev. 
 
 1749. ελπίδων cs τίν (El. 95 ^· 
 tIv ελπίδων /3λελ//·ασα), into what 
 (fearful) expectation ? 
 
 Ib. h τίν €TL pe, Herm. ex con- 
 ject. Wunder. is τίν ημάς, Br. Gaisf. 
 is ri pe, Libri. 
 
 1751—3, iv ols — vipeais. In these 
 difficult lines, I see another proof of 
 that fine tact and delicacy which 
 mark the language and character of 
 Theseus throughout this drama. 
 After the first feelings of stupefac¬ 
 tion occasioned by the late trying 
 scene had worn offi what must have 
 been the predominant feeling in the 
 mind of a person so truly patriotic 
 as Theseus ? Surely a sense of the 
 inestimable advantage to be derived 
 to that country which he so deeply 
 loved, from possessing in its soil 
 the body of (Edipus ; where, and 
 in what mode, he alone knew. But 
 grateful and advantageous as the 
 
 circumstance was to him and his, 
 how painful must it have been to 
 those whom he was now addressing! 
 Not a word therefore escapes him 
 calculated to wound their feelings. 
 (Edipus, and his tomb, and the 
 benefit to be derived from it, are all 
 wrapped up in the delicate phrase, 
 Xapis η χθονία, the underground bene- 
 fit. But to whom was this benefit ? 
 To himself alone No : ^wa kH- 
 ται (so I think we should read), it 
 is a comynon benefit : a benefit to 
 him who is gone, and consequently 
 relieved from his miseries; and a 
 benefit, it is gently intimated, to 
 him who had witnessed his de¬ 
 parture, but which, being of a po¬ 
 litical nature, it did not become him 
 to express too clearly to Theban 
 women, as Ismene and Antigone 
 were. To indulge in sorrow under 
 such circumstances, is to do what 
 may draw down the anger of the 
 gods. Having submitted to the 
 reader my own sense of this passage, 
 I subjoin some of those of my pre¬ 
 decessors, beginning with the Scho¬ 
 liast : ρη θρην€ίτ€, ω παΐδεί* vipeais 
 yap iari τούτον θρηνίϊν, ω τά τε- 
 λευτί)^ κατα χάριν άπίβη' ον χρη ουν 
 TOVTOVS πεν^εΐν, ois κ^χαρισμ^νον εστί 
 το άποθαν€Ϊν. ReiS. : “xapis η χθονία. 
 Esse gratiam civitati ab CEdipo ha- 
 bitam, declaratur versu 1483. et 
 1491. Nam χθόνιος pro iyxoipios po- 
 situm annotavimus v. 944.” Her- 
 
176 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 AN. ώ τίκνον Α1γ€ωί, προσ'κίτνομίρ σοι. 
 
 ΘΗ. riVo 9 , ώ TraiSes*, χρβίας άννσαι ; 
 
 ΑΝ. τύμβον θβλομβν 
 
 TTpoaiSeLV αύταί ττατρος ημβτβρον. 
 
 ΘΗ. άλλ* ού θβμιτον \_Kela earl μολ€Ϊν.~\ 
 
 ΑΝ. ττώί €ΐπα9, αναζ, κοίραν ^Αθηνών ; 
 
 ΘΗ . ώ τταΐδβς^ άπβΐπβν Ιμο\ κβΐνοί 
 μητ€ ΤΓβλάζβιν eV ravage tottovs 
 μητ^ ^ΤΓίφωνβΐν μηδύνα θνητών 
 Θηκην Upav, ην κβΊνος €χ€ί, 
 καί ταντά μ ίφη ττράσσοντα καλώ^ 
 χώραν e^etv alev aXxnrov, 
 ταυτ ούν βκΧνβν δαίμων ημών 
 χώ ττάντ άΐων Alo 9 "Όρκο^, 
 
 •1755 
 
 τ 760 
 
 1765 
 
 ΜΑΝΝ reads and translates ; χάρις, η 
 χθον'ια ^υναποικΐΊται, gratia qucE simul 
 cum moriuo apud inferos relinquitur, 
 which sense Ellendt in a great mea¬ 
 sure adopts. WuNDER cites the 
 Scholiast, and adds, “ de adverbio 
 ξννά confert Reisig Antig. 546. μη 
 μοι θάνης σύ κοινά.” The sense 
 which I have given of the passage 
 requires the adjective with a long 
 syllable, not a short one. On the 
 adjective ξυνος, see Dind. ad Aj. 
 180. 
 
 1755· — άνύσαι, i. e. τίνος 
 
 χρ€ΐας τνχίϊν μου χρηζ^τ^, ωστ€ άννσαι; 
 
 Reisig aptly compares (Ed. Τ. 1435. 
 και τον μ€ χρβίας ωδ€ \ιπαρ€Ϊς τνχξΐν ; 
 WUND. 
 
 1757* θεμιτόν. The books 
 
 add, Kfla-e μολ^ν. Both and Wunder 
 agree in ejecting these words, and 
 arrange the verses ; τύμβον θίΧομ^ν 
 
 TTpoaibflv ανταί | πατ. η μ. αλλ* ού θ^μ. 
 
 1761-3. The construction is : μη~ 
 Beva θνητών μητ€ π€\άζ(ΐν es Tovabc 
 τόπους μητ€ €πιφων€ΐν ( = €πιφονονντα 
 προσΐΐπΐίν, Herm.) θηκην ί^ράν. For 
 the invocation to the manes usual at 
 c tombs, Musgrave refers to .Esch. 
 Choeph. 4. 106. Pers. 649 sq. Eur. 
 Hel. 970. Virg. En. III. 68. 
 
 1766. Βαίμων ημών. The delicate 
 tact of Theseus is again observable. 
 None of the commentators notice it; 
 but every Athenian and every Theban 
 present in the theatre fully compre¬ 
 hended the political bearings both of 
 this and the verse following. On 
 the epilogistic use of the particle 
 ούν in this sentence, see Hartung 
 II. 19. 
 
 1767. Αώς "'Ορκος. On the gram¬ 
 mar, cf. Antig. 1075.; on the theo¬ 
 logical point, cf. Goettl. ad Hes. Op. 
 
 c In China, when the last hour has arrived, it is usual for one of the relatives to 
 mount to the roof of the house, and three times call upon the soul of the deceased to 
 come back and re-enter his body. Murray’s “ China,” II. 282. 
 
ΟίΔΙΠΟΤΣ ΕΠΙ ΚΟΛΩΝΩί. 
 
 177 
 
 ΑΝ. άλλ* ύ τά& βχβί κατα νουν κβίνω^ 
 ταντ αν άτταρκοΐ’ θηβα^ δ’ ημάς· 
 
 τάς ώγνγίονς 7 Γ€μψον, βάν ττως 1770 
 
 δίακωλνσωμβν Ιόντα φόνον 
 τοίσιν όμαίμοίς. 
 
 ΘΗ. δρ άσω καί τάδβ, καί ττάνθ' οττόσ αν 
 μόλλω ττράσσβίν πρόσφορά ff νμΐν, 
 καΧ τω κατά γης, ος veov eppei, 177S 
 
 προς χάριν, ού δβΐ μ άποκάμνβιν. 
 
 ΧΟ. αλλ άποπανβτΕ, μητ όπΙ πλβίω 
 θρήνον iyeipeTe. 
 
 πάντως γάρ βχβί τάδβ κύρος. ϊ78ο 
 
 2 19· 804. Klausen’s Theol. 85. 
 Thud. I. 324. Donner’s “ Anmer- 
 kungen,” p. 469. 
 
 I 768—9· αλλ’ el — άπαρκοΐ. “ If 
 these things are agreeable to him, 
 it becomes us to acquiesce in them.” 
 For κατά νουν Keivco, Wunder com¬ 
 pares Herodot. VI. 130. ττάσι κατά 
 νουν TTOLelv. 
 
 1770. τάς ώγυγίους, the ancient. 
 On the application of this term to 
 the Ogygian gate at Thebes, see 
 Pausan. IX. 8, 3. On the subject 
 generally, cf. Stanley ad ^sch. S, c. 
 Th. 327. and Thudichum I. 325. 
 
 1771. Ιόντα. Cf. sup. 618. 
 
 1773· οττόσ' άν. “ Italege : 
 
 non δσα άν curn editis, neque οσα y’ 
 av cum Heathio. Vide JEsch. Prom. 
 
 121. Theb. 876. 934. Arist. Pac. 
 558.” PoRS. δσσ’ άν coll. Philoct. 
 509. WuND. 
 
 1774. ττρόσφορα. ScHOL. : αντί 
 του χρήσιμα, useful to you. 
 
 1775-6. τω — προς χάριν, gratify¬ 
 ing to him. 
 
 1776. anoKapveiVj to falter, to be 
 wearied. 
 
 1777. eni πλβίω. Bernhardy (p. 
 253.) compares Plat. 7 I^egg.822, d. 
 eTTt μ€ΐζον levai. col. Thucyd. VI. 34. 
 Neue refers to QEd. T. 700. e7rt- 
 π\€ίω. La. T. Wund. 
 
 1778. κύρος €χ€ΐ — Κ€κυρωται. Alles 
 ist wohlbestellt. Germ. Pr. transla¬ 
 tion. Aj. 540. τταρουσίαν = πά¬ 
 ρεση. - 
 
 N 
 

 
 
 
 >» -· 
 
 ::' ’’^Wt'^■ 
 
 _ ί^·'’^.> ■ ■*■' ■'■ “"'■ * 
 
 ■’t · ,c i 9 M B^: g/-:^·- r . . 
 
 
 :α·- 
 
 ?. 
 
 Λ ii.*; 
 
 eC;·:- ■' '·ί\®5’ ’'‘Ipy· ‘^·|ίίΐ "’■' ■ ’ - 'i 
 
 ·■:;, .■ -ίί· 7 . - ·'■ ■ijm’’ Ί· Λ·%· \l·'' ,'i^'^ 
 
 i»-'··" ' WS" ""^Ιϊ'^ί^·' ■* ■■-’'t'Te 
 
 ti.; ',■, i 
 
 " iv * ' ■· ·«. ‘ ■ /^ilw 'll] 
 
 
 >,·, ■»%· .■«'.' 
 
 
 ^ · ·' j* 
 
 
 
 -A . . 
 
 aifc .Λ;- ,V’v ,5!i <*liaH ii ^ 
 
 - _ « i4L· »’ ·.. ^ . M ^ . ' 
 
 
 
 ■« •ΐί' 
 
 
 
 
 
 '.Vi 
 ΤΪ 'in ■ 
 
 ' .■· ' -*■ ,1 : \· ->■ -. 
 
 ■ I- ■ 
 
 A “S' 
 
 «■ . · 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 23. οποί καθίσταμ^ν, quo progress! simus, et ubi stemus. Kiihn. §. 622. 
 Anm. 2. 
 
 24. ras γονν {certainly) * Αθήνας. Hart. II. 15. On the terms χωρά, χώρος, 
 τόπος, see note in Peile’s Agamem. p. 82. 
 
 28. αλλ* €στι μην οίκητός. Hartung, after examples of άλλα μην, and its 
 meaning, says, “ Μην tritt oft weiter zuriick, und nimmt ein Wort vor sich, 
 auf dem der Nachdruck liegt.” Cf. II. 379. 
 
 42. Hartung (I. 381.) reads eVdaS’ av. 
 
 47. τονξανιστάναι. Cf. Bernh. p. 356. 
 
 48. θάρσος, perhaps, a matter for confidence; as, CEd. T. 917. φόβους, 
 matter for fear and apprehension. Arist. Plut. 637. χαραν, a subject for joy ; 
 βοαν, a'subject for exclamation, ^sch. S. c. Th. φόβον (cause for terror) 
 βλόπων. 
 
 49. Cf. Griffiths ad ^sch. Prom. 783. 
 
 52. τΙς δ\ On the use of be in questions and answers, cf. Hart. I. 
 178 sq. 
 
 53. οσ’ οΐδα κάγώ. For the position of καϊ, see alsoWund. ad Electr. 
 1282. 
 
 67. Tade, this land. Thucyd. VI. 77· ’'ίων^ς τάδε €ΐσ\ν ούδ’ ‘Έ,ΧΧη- 
 σποντίοι. Strabo III. ρ. I'Jl. τάδ’ ούχϊ ΤΙ^Χοπόννησος, άλλ’ 'Ιωνία. 
 
 74· Cf. Peile ad .^sch. Choeph. 823. 
 
 83. ω? όμον μόνης πίΧας. El. 3 ^*^· οντος Αίγίσθον πίΧας. 
 
 84. δανώπες. So Eur. Or. 255* γοργώττε?, όνόρων Upiai, δαναΙ θίαι. 
 
 ιΐ7· A still closer specimen of tragedy familiarized in its diction may 
 
 be seen in the “ Ahnfrau” of Grillparzer, where the “ Fatalism” of the 
 Greek stage, with its accompaniments of parricide, incest (or a close 
 approximation to it), is adapted to the modern stage. In how many 
 important particulars, besides diction, it falls below the CEdipodean tale, 
 from which it is evidently imitated, may perhaps form the subject of 
 future remarks. 
 
 177. For additional observations on ov μη, as followed by a future or a 
 conjunctive, see Peile’s ^sch. Choeph. v. 875. 
 
 189. (νσφίας όπιβαίνοντΐς. Cf. Pind. Isth. I. 55. 
 
 194. ούτως sc. προβω, i. q. eU τάδε. Ell. 
 
 235· For similar change of metre after dactylics, cf. infr. 1673 sq. 
 
 241. On αλλά, see Hart. II. 41. 
 
 251. The reference to the passage in Philoct. had better perhaps be 
 given at full length : 
 
 προς νυν σε πατρός, πρός τε μητρός, ω τόκνον, 
 πρός τ ει τί σοι κατ οΙκόν όστι προσφιΧίς, 
 ικίτης ικνοΰμαι κ. τ. i. 4^7* 
 
 Aristophanes, Αν. 380, couples πάΐδας, οίκον, χρήματα. 
 
 Ν 2 
 
180 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 277—8. Tovs Oeovs μοίραις TroielaSe μηδαμώς. Peile, in his notes to Aga¬ 
 memnon (p. 213.) translates much to the same effect: rate the gods at 
 nought {τταρ ούδεζ/), represent them to yourselves as nothing, in their portions or 
 characters. There is a third mode of viewing this construction, on which I 
 venture with some distrust. May not μοίραν ποιύσθαι be equivalent to μοιρασθαι 
 {allow an allotment to be assigned, assign as an allotment, see Pass.), just as 
 την μάθησιν ποΐ€ 7 σθαι= μανθάναν (Thucvd. I. 68.), νπόμνησιν ΤΓΟίείσ^αι = ύττο- 
 μν^ν (Id. ib. 72.) ? See Matth. §. 421. Obs. 4., the accusative being regu¬ 
 lated by a similar construction as that at w. 583, 4. In the present 
 instance, Matthise adopts Brunch’s reading of ώραν for μοίραν, and trans¬ 
 lates : nolite deos non curare. 
 
 278. In not admitting the supremacy of Zeus over the Moerae, as a part 
 of ^schylean theology, Mr. Peile (Choeph. p. 168.) speaks, I think, with less 
 consideration than might be expected from so able and learned a writer. 
 It would lead into discussions incompatible with the limits of this work to 
 shew that the opinions of that greatest of the three tragedians do not dis¬ 
 agree with the doctrines laid down in my note. Ably as Klaiisen has 
 treated the matter, a knowledge of the Hebrew language, and of the real 
 meaning of Hesiodean theogony, would have enabled him to give a far 
 more comprehensive view of this interesting subject. 
 
 298. στηλών. Phil. 60. στειλαι/τεί ο'ίκων. . 
 
 313. ηλιοστ€ρης. Cf. Blomf. Gloss, in Choeph. v. 989. 
 
 333· "η-ρομηθία. On pronouns of this kind generally, see also Bernh. 
 P· 273. 
 
 335 · — πόνων. Dobr. 
 
 341. τροφάα. Cf. Griffiths ad jEsch. S. c. Th. 477· 
 
 363. παράσ όάσω. Dobree compares Eur. Auge ap. Diog. Laert. Long. 
 ταντ idv άφαμόνα. Id. Plut. II. 24, C. napeXs ia. 
 
 381. προς ουρανόν βιβων. So also Rabbinical Hebrew : “ He who speaks 
 with a bad tongue raises his iniquities to the heavens.” Bab. Talmud, 
 Treatise Erchin, Section 3. This oriental form of expression appears, as 
 might be expected, in its fullest form in Pindar. Thus Isth. IV. iii. 
 he speaks of a flame, as aWepa κνισσαντι λακτίζοισα καπνω. 
 
 397. βαιου — χρόνου. Perhaps better : within a short time. Cf. Buttmann 
 ad Phil. 821. 
 
 421—3. But may the gods, I pray, either not .... or else may it rest 
 with me to decide this contest for them ! Peile ad-Esch. Choeph. 955 * 
 
 435. Eur. Orest. 50. θανύν λ^υσίμω πβτρώματι. Add 436. 
 
 442. πατρός and πάτρί. So infr. 883. υβρις and ϋβρις. Antig. 1240. 
 νεκρός and νεκρω. El. 320— I. οκνεΊν and όκνω. 
 
 447. επάρκεσιν. Cf. Pors. ad Hec. 74 ^· 
 
 453· rd| εμού, rather, on my account, εκ signifying propter persons 
 (Bernh. p. 228.) as well as things. (Kiihn. §. 599. 3. d. Ellendt I. 55 i·) 
 
 Ib. Bernhardy (p. 473.) appears to coincide (and I think correctly) 
 with Wunder in his mode of reading this verse. The subject will be con¬ 
 sidered more fully hereafter. 
 
 473. ερεψον. See Buttmann’s Lexil. p. 294. , 
 
 487. σωτήριον. In the passive sense of this word, Peile concurs, Ag. 
 p. 256. 
 
 532. δυο ατα. Though the extract from Dindorf will perhaps be suf¬ 
 ficient to justify the translation given to these words, yet, to prevent mis- 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 181 
 
 construction, it may be observed that the word ατη bears two meanings ; 
 I. calamity, and more particularly calamity incurred by guilt; 2. the guilt 
 by which calamity has been incurred. Future opportunities will occur for 
 considering the word more particularly; but in the meantime the reader 
 may consult Hermann ad Electr. Soph. v. i τ i. Passow in voc. and Butt- 
 mann’s Lexilogus. Klausen’s-dEsch. Theol. 48—9. Muller’s Eumen. p. 129. 
 136. &c. 
 
 536. Ιπιστροφαί. Cf. Peile ad Hi^sch. Choeph. v. 339. 
 
 3 [53-4. όδοΪ9 iv ταΐσδ'. quam modo viam confect. Ell. 
 
 598. μάζον ή κατ άνθρωπον. Matthise translates : worse than man can 
 bear. Wunder : τί yap to μύζον η κατ ανθρ. ear IV y b voaeii ; 
 
 623. χώ Aios Φοίβος σαφής. Eur. Or. 584. Απόλλων ος μ^σομφάλονς ζ'δρας j 
 ναίων βρότοισι στόμα νόμα σαφ€στατον. 
 
 63 2—3 · οτω — εστί'α. Ellendt translates δορνξβνος : qui hospes domus nostrce. 
 The Schohast to Electr. 46. says, that the word δορνξζνος applies strictly to 
 persons who become friends in war, as Glaucus and Diomed (II. VI. 232.), 
 but may apply to friends generally. The allusion in the present instance 
 seems to me to apply to the terms of strict friendship then (poetically) 
 supposed to exist between Thebes and Athens generally; a friendship so 
 firm that Theseus (sup. v. 606.) seems to have considered it as incapable, 
 of change, and which gave-(Edipus, in common with all his countrymen, 
 (κοινή) a title to Athenian hospitality and protection. ^ Passow translates 
 the word δορνξ^νος, Speerfreund, d. i. Verbundeter zii Schutz und Trutz. 
 .Esch. Choeph. 558. 911. Soph. El. 46. O. C. 632.” Cf. Peile’s Ag. 849. 
 
 637. την Tov 8 e. Cf. Bernh. p. 322. 
 
 648. Cf. Peile ad .Esch. Choeph. 956. 
 
 630. ύφ’ ορκου .. πιστώσομαι. To this expression may be referred the 
 ορκιον πιστόν, which occurs more than once in Pindar. (Ol. XI. 6. Nem. 
 IX. 39.) 
 
 667-8. Wunder arranges: 
 
 (νίππου, ^eve, τασδε χώ- 
 
 ρας ‘ίκον τα κράτιστα γας βτταυλα. 
 
 The first verse Glyconean, the second Hendecasyliable. 
 
 669. γας. This and similar pleonasms seem to be ridiculed in the short 
 sketch which Aristophanes has given us of the style and constructions of 
 the of tragic poet Agathon : 
 
 Φοίβον, ός ίδρνσατο χώρας 
 
 γναλα Σιμονντίδι yq. Thesmoph. 109· 
 
 674· Professor Scholefield understands άνόχονσα as equivalent to the 
 simple participle, έχουσα. See note to Porson’s Hec. v. ΐ2ο. 
 
 691. στ€ρνονχος. Metaphors of this nature will be more largely illus¬ 
 trated in a future play. 
 
 788. άλάστωρ. In the sense of an avenging being, this word occurs 
 also jEsch. Pers. 357 * ^ 47 ^· Suppl. 4 *^ 9 · Eur. Phoen. 157^· 
 
 1609. Or. 331. 1562. Hippol. 820. In Eumen. 169. the word μιαστωρ 
 appears as an equivalent for άλάστωρ. Other senses of the word will be 
 noticed hereafter. 
 
 790. The student will of himself understand, that the translation has 
 been given for the present infinitive, rather than the aorist. Numerous 
 instances of the prepositional power will be given in another publication. 
 
182 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 808. Cf. JEsch. Ag. 1340. and Griffiths ad iEscli. S. c. Th. i. 
 
 848. Cf. Kiihn. §. 599. 
 
 870. -γηράναι. On γηράναι and γηραναι, cf. Peile ad iEsch. Ch. 888. 
 
 898. τονσδε βωμούς. Wunder (in Prsefat. p. 23.), adverting to a passage 
 in Pausanias (I. 30, 4.) which speaks of an altar of Minerva, as well as of 
 Poseidon, at Colonos, says that no mention of such an altar is found in 
 the present play, the word βωμούς being here merely a poetical plural for 
 
 βωμόν at V. 888. 
 
 923. Cf. Kiihn. §. 479. Anm. 
 
 991. iv ydp μ αμ€ΐψαι μουνον. For double accus. cf. Pind. Pyth. IX. 65. 
 TOP de Κένταυρος ζαμ^νης μητιν iav (ύθύς άμ^ίβίτο. 
 
 looy. vnep(j)ep€iv, to excel. Cf. Pors. ad Hec. 268. 
 
 1025. Cf. Peile ad .^sch. Ag. v. 1532. 
 
 1108. ω φΐΚτατ €ρνη. Arist. Thesm. 321. Αατονς χρνσώπώος €ρνος. Eccl. 
 973 * Κύπριδο? ζρνο'ς. Pind. Nem. VI. 61. αδώι^ epveai Αατονς. Isth. IV. 75 * 
 ΜίΧίσσω, epve'i Τβλ^σίάδα. .^sch. Eum. 631—6. 
 
 1119-20. Wunder arranges : 
 
 TTov κνρζΊ €κτ 07 ηος σνθεις 
 6 πάντων 6 πάντων άκορεστατος ; 
 
 (Two dactyls and cret., then dim. dochm.) 
 
 1142. €K τούτων, propter hac. Cf. 887. and Ellendt I. 551. 
 
 1145. δείκννμι δε. Hartung (I. 470.) refers to Thucyd. I. 143. Xen. 
 Mem. I. 2, 32. Lysias bon. Arist. §. 24. Isocr. Paneg. §. 69. 
 
 1160. ποδαπον, wherefrom? On derivation of the word, see Buttmann’s 
 Lexil. p. 323. 
 
 J170. Qu. μη μοι δεηθης. Sed forsan V. seq. inteUigitur περί. Dobr. 
 
 1211—12. Aj. 473 · οίσχρον yap άνδρα του μακρού χρηζ^ιν βίου, κακοΊσιν 
 δστίς &C. 
 
 Ι2ΐ3· ζώειν. Add to Pindaric examples, Nem. X. 49. Μοίσαισί τ εδωκ 
 άρόσαι (quod ararent. Diss.) Pyth. IX. 11-15. θηκε — οίκείν {transtulit ut 
 hahitaret). 
 
 1220. When the suggestion on the formula οίσθ" t ποίησον was thrown 
 out at this page, I was not aware that Hartung, dissatisfied with the 
 usual mode of rendering this formula, had recommended a nearly similar 
 rendering. For the learned writer’s reasonings, see his ‘ Lehre v. d. P/ 
 II. 144. 
 
 1240. The further we travel eastward, the less careful does Poetry 
 appear to be in closely adapting similitudes and comparisons. The acme 
 of dissimilitude in similes is perhaps reached by that eastern people, to 
 whom too much attention cannot be called at present, for various 
 reasons. 
 
 “ The bland south-wind cherishes, by breathing on them, the woods of 
 this grove. Our mother excels in prudence and understanding, but we are 
 men of no estimation.” 
 
 “ Sweetly, tunefully, and with unbroken voice, sings the saffron-bird, 
 hoang- 7 iiao. We seven sons afford no assistance to our parent.” Mohl’s 
 Chi-king. p. 13. 
 
 1260. μαραίνων. Cf. Griffiths ad ^sch. Prom. 598. 
 
 1276. Cf. Kiihn. §. 742. Anm. i. 
 
 1303· Άπίας. See Buttmann’s Lexil. p. 154 sq. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 183 
 
 1311—I 2. ■' ξύν erTTci τάξ^σι ξνν έπτά re 
 
 λόγχαΐΫ, 
 
 Modern language uses the same sort of metonymy; 
 
 Wir hatten sechzehn Fahnlein aufgebracht, 
 
 Lotliringisch Volk. 
 
 Schiller’s Jungfrau von Orleans. 
 
 1313-14. τά πρώτα .. πρώτα. Bernhardy (p. 318.) compares Eurip. Ion. 
 1374* θεόν pep χρηστά, τον de dalpovos βαρ^α. 
 
 1322. XoxevOeh SC. ης ξλοχ^νθη. See Peile’s Choephorce p. 202. 
 
 1326. Cf. Kiihn. §. 596. 
 
 1341. πάρω. .^sch. Prom. 75. Dobr. Cf. Griffiths in loc. 
 
 1362-7. The German tragedians, deeply versed in the dramatic writings 
 of antiquity, frequently indulge in repetitions of this nature: 
 
 Er ist der Angebetete, ihm jauchzt das Volk, 
 
 Ihrn segnet es, ihm streut es diese Blumen, 
 
 Er ist &c. 
 
 Schiller’s Maid of Orleans, Act iv. s. 2. 
 
 1381. Aristoph. Av. 419. κρατξΐρ €χθρόρ. 
 
 I4TO. Further proofs of this custom, which may be derived from the 
 writings of Aristophanes, are reserved for future publications. Grillparzer, 
 familiar with this custom of antiquity, has not neglected it in the person 
 of his old warrior : 
 
 Ach ! kein Sohn folgt meiner Bahre ; 
 
 Trauernd wird der Leichenherold 
 Meines Hauses Wappenschild, 
 
 Oft gezeigt im Schlachtgefild, 
 
 Und den wohlgebrauchten Degen 
 Mir nach in die Grube legen. 
 
 Die Ahnfrau, p. 11. 
 
 1424. eKcfiepeip non raro intransitivam signiiicationem habet...Est igitur 
 idem quod βξίρχβται vel €κβαίρει. Dind. 
 
 1436. ** ovToi conjiciebam; sed verum est ov ρη.’* Dobr. 
 
 1480. For omission of verb, Bernhardy (p. 331.) compares II. XIII. 95. 
 αιδώ?, ’Apyeiot. 
 
 1490. σφίρ. Cf. Buttmann’s Lexil. p. 428. 
 
 1493. ακραρ. With a similar regard to security, the residence of the 
 Jewish monarchs was in the castle (Sion), situated on a mountain (see 
 Gesen. in voc. nso); the eastern part, by way of eminence, being called 
 ^ the hill. (Gesen. in voc. 
 
 1495· βονθντορ βστίαρ. Arist. Av. 1232. βονθντοις β’π eaxapais. .^sch. 
 Choeph. 253. βονθντοις ip ηρασιρ, &C. &C. 
 
 1506. τασδβ της όδοΟ. For this genitive of price, as Wunder considers 
 it, see the learned writer ad CEd. T. 1444. 
 
 1526. Cf. Peile ad ACsch. Ag. 622. 
 
 d In 2 Kings V. 24. (from which it should appear that the prophet Elisha had a tem¬ 
 porary abode on this hill) the word is translated tower. 
 
184 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 1534. σπαρτών αττ’ άνΒρών, circumlocution for Thebcins, as born of the 
 dragon’s teeth sown by Cadmus. The word will be more fully illustrated 
 in Antig. 1125. 
 
 1560. Αιδωι /ei). For Semitic origin of the name, see Sickler’s Cadmus,” 
 
 p. 72. 
 
 1596. Dobree suggests καυτοΧαΐνου, i. e. a natural cave, where some hero 
 was buried. 
 
 1600. ev)^ 0 ov Αημητρος. Cf. Arist. Lysist. 835* 
 
 Ib. €πόψιον, perhaps, adjoining^ within eyesight, in opposition to αποπτον. 
 Cf. Wex. ad Antig. mo. In Phil. 1040. this compound occurs in the 
 active sense of, over-looking. 
 
 1626. ποΧΧα ποΧΧακη. Pind. 01 . VIII. 30. ποΧν κα\ πολλά. 
 
 1636. οίκτον, womanish sobbing, cries of 01 01. Griffiths ad .dEsch. S. c. 
 T. 5 I. 
 
 1729. “ Wenn aber zu μών die negation ov tritt, so wird die Frage 
 bejahend (nonne).” Kiihn. §. 834, 5. 
 
 1739—40. άπίφνγ€ τα σφών, κ. τ. e. This mode of expression seems to 
 be ridiculed in the sketch given by Aristophanes of the style and con¬ 
 struction of the tragic poet, Agathon : 
 
 €υπίστως (ίνπιθώς Dind.) δε τονμον 
 δαίμονας σφίσαι. 
 
 Thesmoph. 105. 
 
 1777* πΧ(Ιω—πΧ 4 ον. So Pind. Nem. VII. 7· ισα=ισω 9 . 
 
 For “ Both,” the German scholar, read “ Bothe.” 
 
ELECTRA 
 
 OF 
 
 SOPHOCLES, 
 
 WITH 
 
 NOTES 
 
 CRITICAL AND EXPLANATORY, 
 
 ADAPTED TO THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND UNIVERSITIES, 
 
 BY 
 
 T. MITCHELL, A. M. 
 
 LATE FELLOW OF SIDNEY-SUSSEX COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 OXFORD, 
 
 JOHN HENRY PARKER, 
 
 WHITTAKER AND CO. LONDON; J. AND J. J. DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE. 
 
 M.DCCC.XLIII. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 Β 
 
ΤΑ TOT ΔΡΑΜΑΤΟΣ ΠΡΟΣΩΠΑ 
 
 ΠΑΙΔΑΓΩΓΟΣ. 
 
 ΟΡΕΣΤΗΣ. 
 
 ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 ΧΟΡΟΣ. 
 
 ΧΡΥΣΟΘΕΜΙΣ. 
 
 ΚΛΥΤΑΙΜΝΗΣΤΡΑ. 
 
 ΑΙΓΙΣΘΟΣ. 
 
 ΤΠΟΘΕΣ1Σ 
 
 ^Υπυκ€ΐται ω8€' τροφζνς deiKvvs * Ο ρέστη τά iv ^Apyct. μικρόν yap αντον οντα 
 κλέφασα η ’Ηλίκτρα, ηνίκα ό πατήρ έσφάζίτο, δβδωκβ τω τροφ€Ί, delaaaa μη κα\ 
 αντον κτ€ίνωσιν. 6 δε νπε^ε^ετο αντον eh Φωκίδα προς τον 'Στρόφιον' ννν δε ρετά 
 eiKoaiv έτη έπανιων σνν αντω προς το "'Αργος deiKvvaiv αντω τά iv "'Apyei. 
 
 'Η σκηνη τον δράματος νπόκαται iv^'Apyei. 6 δε χορος σννέστηκβν i^ ίπιχωρίων 
 παρθένων, προΧογίζ€ΐ δε ό παιδαγωγός "Ορέστον, 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 
 ΠΑΙΔΑΓΩΓΟΣ. 
 
 Ω ΤΟΥ στρατηγησαντος ev Ύροία ττοτ€ 
 Άγαμ4μνονος τταΐ, ρυν €Κ€Ϊρ βζβστί σοί 
 τταρόρτί λβύσσβίρ, ών πρόθυμοί ήσθ’ aei 
 το γαρ τταλαιορ ^Άργοί, ούπόθβΐί, τοδβ, 
 της· οΙστροπληγο 9 αΧσο^ Ίνάγρυ κόρη9' 5 
 
 αΰτη Β\ "Ορβστα, του λυκοκτόνου θβου 
 
 I. The stage is occupied by three 
 persons, Orestes, Pylades, and the 
 paedagogus or early tutor of Orestes. 
 They stand on the elevated spot in 
 Mycenae, where formerly stood the 
 palace of the ^Atridae, and which 
 commands a view of the surround¬ 
 ing country. All three wear the 
 Phocian costume; the dress of the 
 paedagogus being perhaps of a more 
 lively and fanciful character than 
 that of his two companions. (Cf. 
 infr. 43.) Time of the drama, day¬ 
 break. 
 
 3 . παρόντί, in person, or as an eye·· 
 witness. Cf. Wunder ad Trach. 418. 
 Blomf. ad Choeph. 209. 
 
 4 sq. The learned annotator in 
 the Museum Crit. (I. 62.) renders: 
 for with regard to the ancient Argos, 
 the object of your desires—this is the 
 consecrated allotment of lo—this the 
 forum {agora) of Apollo Avkclos — 
 
 this on the left the celebrated temple 
 of Juno. It is now more usual to 
 connect τόδί with ''Kpyos, and to 
 consider αλσο« as in apposition with 
 the latter word. Ellendt and Wun¬ 
 der take this view of the matter, the 
 former, who has entered largely 
 into the subject of the demonstrative 
 pronouns (Lex. Soph. II. 251-276. 
 452, sq.) translating: ilia, quam hie 
 circumspiciens intueris, Argiva terra 
 est. Cf. Phil. i. Trach. 39. 
 
 5. οίστροπΧηγος. Cf. .-Esch. Prom. 
 589. 681, and for accent of nom. 
 case, see Blomf. Gl. in Prom. 702. 
 
 Ib. αλσοζ. As implying a city, or 
 city and adjacent country, cf. Ellendt 
 in voc. Dissen ad Pind. Nem. X. 
 p. 502. Wund. ad Antig. 835. For 
 more ordinary sense, see Blomf. Gl. 
 in Pers. 1 15. 
 
 6. Χνκοκτόνον, wolf-slaying. For 
 
 this epithet and that of Ανκαος in 
 
 a On this, as well as other matters connected with the opening scene of this drama, 
 the reader will find details and observations of the deepest interest in Stephens’s ‘ Inci¬ 
 dents of Travel in Greece.’ 
 
 B 2 
 
4 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 άγορα Ανκ€ί09' ονξ apiarepas S o5e 
 
 ‘^Hpas* ό kXuvos ναός' όΐ 3’ ίκάνομ€ν, 
 
 φάσκβίν Μ,νκηνας τας ττολνχρύσονς opavy 
 
 ΤΓολνφθορόν re δώμα ΐΙβΧοττιδών τόδβ, ιο 
 
 όθβν σβ ττατρός βκ φόνων ίγώ irore 
 
 ττρος σης όμαιμου καΐ κασιγνητης Χαβών 
 
 ηνβγκα κάζβσωσα κά^ζθρβφάμην 
 
 τοσόνδ' βς ηβψ, ττατρί ημωρον φόνον. 
 
 νυν ovvy *Ορ€στα, καΐ συ 
 
 verse following, cf. Pausan. II. 19. 
 Klausen’s Aesch. Theol. p. 116. 
 Thudichum, p. 234. Blomf. Gl. ad 
 Sept. c. Th. 133. 
 
 7, 8. ουζ apLarepas — ναός, Pausan. 
 II. 17. I. Μυκηνών iv apiarepa nevre 
 ά7Γ€χ€ΐ και δέκα στάδια τό 'ΗραΓον. 
 
 9· φάσκεΐί/, inf. for imper. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 546. CEd. T. 462. Phil. 
 1411, &c. 
 
 Ib. MvKrjvas. “ The tragic poets 
 take an extraordinary liberty in con¬ 
 founding the two cities of Argos and 
 Mycenae (cf. infr. 1459.), using the 
 name of Argos indiscriminately for 
 both ; nor has any ^ satisfactory rea¬ 
 son been given for this license: 
 some eminent critics have deduced 
 it from the supposed contiguity of 
 the two capitals, and brought the 
 example of London and Westmin¬ 
 ster in support of their opinion: 
 this error they never would have 
 fallen into, had they had an oppor¬ 
 tunity of ascertaining the real dis¬ 
 tance which intervened between 
 them, and which very accurately 
 coincides with the fifty stadia of 
 Strabo, i. e. about six miles accord¬ 
 ing to our measurement.” Hughes. 
 
 Ib. ποΧνχρυσους. II. VII. l8o. 
 πόΚνχρνσοίο Μνκηνης. Horat. Ode 
 
 ** But cf. Elmsley a 
 
 φίΧτατ€ ξβνων ι$ 
 
 I. 7, 9, ditesque Mycenas. Cf. 
 Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 45. 
 
 I o. πολύφθορον, in which there have 
 been many murders and violent deaths, 
 Cf. Trach. 477. Blomf. Gl. in Sept, 
 c. Th. 920. 
 
 12 . όμαιμου και κασιγνητης, Cf. 
 Antig. I. Peile ad Ch. 321· 
 
 13. (ξίθρίφάμην. Neue (coll. 
 Matth. §.492, c.) renders: caused 
 to he bred up. Ellendt more pro¬ 
 perly considers the middle verb as 
 here equivalent to the active. (Cf. 
 349. 993. 1325, &c. &c.) The 
 preposition in the verbs ε^εσωσα and 
 €ξ€θρ€ψάμην may perhaps imply a 
 continuation by the peedagogus of 
 those duties, which in the first in¬ 
 stance had devolved upon Electra. 
 (Cf. infr. 1145 sq.) On the word 
 TjveyKa, see Matth. §. 193* Οδί. y. 
 
 14. τοσόι/δ' ε’ί ηβης, viz. about 20 
 years of age according to Scholiast 
 ad Od. III. 303. 
 
 J5. ουν. As particle, applied to 
 continuation of discourse, but in re¬ 
 ference to something previously said, 
 cf. infr. 307. Aj. 28. Tr. 1162. 
 Phil. 298, &c. Ellendt in such 
 cases renders it by ut nunc est, sic 
 igitur. See also 1339. 1343· 
 
 Eur. Heracl. 188. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 5 
 
 ΙΙνλαδη, TL χρη δραν ίν τάχρι βουλευτών' 
 ώς ημίν ηδη λαμπρόν ήλιου σελαζ 
 εωα κινεί φθεγματ ορνίθων σαφή, 
 μελαινά τ οίστρων εκλελοιπεν εύφρόνη, 
 πρ\ν ουν τιν άνδρών εζοδοιπορείν στέγης, 
 ^υνάπτετον λόγοισιν* ως καθέσταμεν, 
 ίν ουκέτ δκνειν καιρός, άλλ* έργων άκμη. 
 
 20 
 
 \η. ημίν. The second syllable in 
 ημΐν and νμίν is shortened about 
 forty-two times in the dialogue of 
 Sophocles. It is found long in seven 
 verses, which Person thinks require 
 to be corrected. When thus short¬ 
 ened, these pronouns are usually 
 written either ημιν, Ιμιν, or ημ\ν, 
 νμίν ; the latter form being preferred 
 by Brunck, and the more modern 
 «editors. Euripides never shortens 
 the last syllable of these pronouns. 
 In the present instance ημ\ν is nearly 
 redundant, or rather forms, what 
 the continental scholars now term 
 the dativus ethicus. 
 
 18. Kivii σαφή, i. e. KLVet ώστε σαφή 
 γίγρίσβαι. Cf. infr. 242. 
 
 19. άστρων €υφρόνη = αστρα €υφρό~ 
 νης SC. ίυφρόνη αστερόεσσα. SeidlER 
 ad Eur. El. 641. Bernh. p. 163. 
 Wunder, more correctly perhaps, 
 sees nothing more in the words 
 μίΚαινα άστ. εύφ. than a strong op¬ 
 position and contrast to the pre¬ 
 ceding words Χαμπρον ήλιον σίλαί. 
 I would ask, may not the word 
 άστρων here signify the sky, the 
 ^heaven, as it does in Trach. 1106, 
 and perhaps does infr. 105? 
 
 Ib. €νφρ 6 νη (ευφρωι/), euphemism 
 
 for night, or darkness. Hes. Op. 
 558. infr. 259. Fgm. Soph. 517. 
 708. 713. (Dind.) 
 
 20. ovv. As a particle of ratioci¬ 
 nation, cf. infr. 1001. Phil. 45. 
 Tr. 82. 329. 369. 550. 1174. &c. 
 
 21. ξννάπητον λόγοισι, sc. αλλτ;- 
 λοιν. The editors compare Eur. 
 Phoen. 702. els Xoyovs ξννήψα Πολν- 
 V€LK€i. Arist. Lys. 468. rt τοίσδε 
 σαντον els Xoyovs rots 6 ηpίoίs ^vvaTTreis', 
 cf. Monk in Hip. 187. Blomf. Gl. 
 in Pers. 887. With regard to the 
 use of σ and ξ, Ellendt (II. 760.) 
 thinks that two things only are 
 certain; that compound words at 
 the beginning of a senarius are to 
 be thus written (cf. infr. 264. 276. 
 611. &c.), and also the preposition 
 ξνν when similarly placed (cf. infr. 
 
 73)· 
 
 Ib. ws KaBeerrapev, Kreussler e 
 conj. Wund. ώ? evraiB' εσ -peV, and 
 evravd' epev, libri. For conjectures 
 of Pors. and G. Burges, see Do- 
 bree’s Advv. 
 
 22. εργωι/ άκμη, Aj. 811. eSpas 
 άκμη. Phil. 12. άκμη λόγων, Cf. 
 Blomf. and Griffiths ad Sept. c. 
 Th. 95. Wund. ad Tr. 711. 
 
 c Some MSS. (the Palatine more particularly) make no change in the accent on ac¬ 
 count of the metre. 
 
 ** This I since find was the opinion of Musgrave and Monk, but opposed by Herm. 
 and Ellendt. 
 
β 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΟΡΕΣΤΗΣ. 
 
 ώ φίλτατ άντρων ττροσπόλων, cos’ μοί σαφή 
 σημβΊα φαίΐ'βί^ βσθλος eh ημάς yeycos. 
 ωστΓβρ γαρ Ίττπο^ €νγ€ρη9^ καν rj γβρων, 
 ev τοίσι deiuois θυμόν ονκ άποολβσβν, 
 αλλ’ ορθον OVS ΐστησιν, ώσαντω9 Se σν 
 ημάς τ οτρύνβις καυτός ev ττροοτοίς Ιττβί. 
 τοιγαρ τα μίν δόζαντα 8ηλ(ύσω' συ Se 
 o^eiav ακοήν τοϊς €μοΐς λόγοις Βιδούς, 
 el μη τι καιρού τυγχάνω, μeθάpμoσov. 
 
 €γω γαρ ηνίχ ικόμην το ΪΙυθικον 
 μavτeΐov, ως μάθοιμ! Stco τρόττορ ττατρος 
 δικας άροίμην των φoveυσάvτωv ττάρα, 
 χρη μοι τοιαυθ* 6 Φοίβος ών 7Γeύσeι τάχα' 
 aaKeoov αυτόν ασπίδων re καΙ στρατού 
 
 30 
 
 35 
 
 24· (τημ€'ΐα φαίν^ις (ΐ. 6. δτ/λοΐί) 
 
 y€y 039 . Cf. JMatth. §. 549 » 5 · 
 
 20 . eV τόΐσι δ^ινοΊς. Cf. Ant. 2’43· 
 Phil. 504. 
 
 2’6—7. αττώλ^σει», αλλ’ Ίστησίν. Aj. 
 3 I. φράζα re κά 8 η\ωσ€ν. Cf. Pors. 
 ad Hec. 2 i. 
 
 27. ωσαύτως δε. With δε in apo- 
 dosis after similitudes and compari¬ 
 sons (cf. Trach. 112. 118. Antig. 
 423.) the reader may compare a 
 construction explained infr. 294. As 
 expounders of the above formula, El- 
 lendt (I.392.) refers to lieind. ad Plat. 
 Pheed. p. 7*3. Schsef. Mel. Cr. p. 59. 
 Jacobs Prsef. ad ^lian. H. A. p. 26. 
 Poppo Comment, ad Thucyd. I, 
 p. 122. Herm. ad Viger. p. 785. 
 Matth. §. 613, 3. Bernhardy Synt. 
 p. 487. To which add Hart. 1 . 185. 
 
 29. τα δόξαντα, the things which 
 have been-determined upon. tEscIi. 
 Sept. C. Th. 1005. δοκονντα κα\ δό- 
 ξαντα, 
 
 30. οξάαν, quick, attentive. Cf. 
 
 Ell. in voc. 
 
 31. et τvyχάvω {if I hit, touch 
 upon) TL, i. e. κατά τι (in any respect) 
 μη καιρού (a thing that is unseason¬ 
 able) : said in reference to the in¬ 
 structions subsequently given to the 
 psedagogus at 39 sq. For genitive 
 after τvyχάvω, cf. Phil. 223. For 
 μη with subst. cf. infr. 398. With 
 ri compare infr. 217. 1275. 
 
 Ib. μζβάρμοσον, correct it. Cf. 
 Blomf. Gl. ad Pr. 317. 
 
 33. οτω τρόπω. On οστις, as ap¬ 
 plied to the indirect asking of ques¬ 
 tions, cf. Tr. 321. Aj. 12. Phil. 2to. 
 &c. 
 
 34. δίκας αροιμην, poenas sumam, 
 proprie lucrer, s. comparem mihi ul- 
 tionem. Ell. For a more elaborate 
 exposition of the construction, see 
 Wund., who reads πατρί. 
 
 35 · XPii· SoHOL. : pavreverai. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 49. 
 
 36. ασκενοι» ασττίδωι». CEd. Τ. 189. 
 ηχαΧκος ασπίδων, Tr. 691. άΧαμπ^ς 
 
 d* 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 7 
 
 doXoLat κλβψαι χβφος ίν^ίκον^ σφαγάς, 
 
 οτ ουν TOLOvde χρησμόν €ΐσηκονσαμ€ν, 
 
 συ μβν μόλων, όταν σβ καφος βΙσάγη, 
 
 δόμων βσω τωνδ\ ϊσθί ττάν το δρώμ^νον, 4° 
 
 οττω? άν βίδως ημΊν άγγβίλη^ σαφή, 
 
 ου γάρ ere μη γηρσ re κα). χρόνω μακρω 
 
 γνώσ, ούδ* ύττοπτβύσουσίν ώδ* ηνθισμόνον. 
 
 ήλιου. Cf. Matth. §. 339 · Monk’s 
 Hip. 146. 
 
 Ib. avTov, by my own agency, not 
 that of others. Cf. infr. 1156. 
 
 37. δόλοισι. Cf. infr. 125. 196. 
 279. 490. 649. 1392-6. &c. ^sch. 
 Ch. 263. 542-7-8, &c. Klausen’s 
 Theol. 117. 
 
 Ib. κλίπταν σφαγας, to execute a 
 murder stealthily. Cf. Neue ad Aj. 
 189. With σφαγάί χοίρος {my hand 
 being the executor of that murder), 
 Wunder compares infr. 206. θανά~ 
 Tovs 8ώνμαίν χαροΐν. Aj. 618. epya 
 Xepotv. Tr. 603. δώρημα της ψης 
 
 Xepos. 
 
 38. or ουν, since therefore. Cf. 
 infr. 1318. CEd. T. 918. Ant. 170. 
 
 39. δταν σε καιρός (Ισάγη, when a 
 convenient opportunity shall introduce 
 you; or, when there shall be a conve¬ 
 nient opportunity for your admission. 
 
 41. δπως αν άγγ^ιΚης. Cf. Peile ad 
 
 Ag. 353·^ 
 
 42. γήρα και χρόνω μακρω, Cf. 
 Aj. 624, 5. 
 
 42-3. ου μη γνώα ούδ’ υποτττευ- 
 σονσιν. Cf. Matth. §. 517· Elms, 
 ad CEd. C. 177. Ellendt II. p. 412. 
 Annot. in Iph. T. 912. (Mus. Crit.) 
 See also infr. 1052. and (Ed. C. 
 
 450· 
 
 43. ηνθισμίνον. (άνθίζ^ιν, to COVer 
 with flowers, to adorn, to dress in a 
 party-coloured fashion : metaph. ην- 
 βισμίνος, an old man with grey hairs. 
 
 e The old English word ‘ beprankt’ would 
 
 Pass.) In the latter sense the 
 learned lexicographer himself un¬ 
 derstands the passage. The follow¬ 
 ing view of the case is submitted 
 to the reader’s consideration. It 
 must be remembered, that the tutor 
 of Orestes has to guard against the 
 suspicions as well as the knowledge 
 of Clytsemnestra and ^gisthus. The 
 latter point Orestes considers as 
 provided for by the years which 
 have elapsed, and the appearances 
 of old age (grey hairs among the 
 rest), which have taken place in the 
 person of the paedagogus. Would 
 not their suspicions be allayed on 
 the other hand by seeing him in a 
 Phocian costume—not that worn 
 where Strophius resided, who was 
 not upon friendly terms with the 
 murderers of Agamemnon, but—that 
 used where Phanoteus (cf. infr. 45.) 
 lived, and which, like that of so 
 many of the Swiss mountaineers, was 
 probably of a gay and variegated 
 character.? It is suggested then 
 that the words ωδ’ ψθισμίνον may 
 be rendered, thus ^garbed. The 
 scholia certainly are not at variance 
 with this suggestion: the Schol. 
 Rom. explaining ψθισμίνον by ησκη- 
 μόνον, while the Cod. Palat. gives as 
 glosses, π€πανουργ€νμόνον, (sic) πατο- 
 \ιωμίνον ; the first of which would 
 agree perfectly well with the sense 
 here contended for. 
 
 come much nearer to the word ^^θισμίνον. 
 
8 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Αογω θ€ γβω τοίωο , otl ξβνο^ μ€Ρ et 
 
 Φωκ€ΐ>^, Trap* avbpos Φανοτέω^ ηκων* ο γάρ 45 
 
 piyL&TOS αύτοΪ9 τνγχάΐ'βί δορνζβί/ων. 
 
 αγγ€λλ€ δ* ορκοι/ ττροστίθ^, οΘούν^κα 
 
 τβθιτηκ *Ορ€στη9 αναγκαίας τύχης, 
 
 αθλοισί ΤΙνθίκοΐσιν βκ τροχηλάτων 
 
 δίφρων κυλισθβίς* ώδ* ό μύθος ίστάτω. 
 
 ημβΐς δβ ττατρος τύμβον, ως βφίβτο, 
 
 λοίβαΐς Τ€ πρώτον κα\ καρατόμοίς χλίδαΐς 
 
 στ€ψαντ€ς, άτ άψορρον 
 
 44· λόγω χρω (Tr. 6 θ. χρησθαι 
 λόγοις) ; λόγω, here perhaps a spe¬ 
 cious, fabricated discourse. 
 
 45. παρ' ap 8 p 6 s Φανοτ€ως. Phano- 
 teus, brother of Crisus, consequently 
 uncle to Strophius and great-uncle 
 to Pylades, to whom, as well as 
 Crisus, Phanoteus was as hostile, as 
 he was friendly (δορνξ€νοε) to Cly- 
 taemnestra and ^gisthus. Matthiae 
 (§. 430,6.) considers the word avdpos 
 to be attached to the name as a 
 mark of respect. Hermann renders, 
 a viro quopiam, nomine Phanoteo. 
 On the subject of Phanoteus him¬ 
 self, see further Muller’s Eumen. 
 (German edit.) p. 132. 
 
 Ib. ό yap — ovTos yap. Matth. 
 §. 286. Bernh. p. 312. 
 
 46. αύτοΓί Tvyxavei,contingit. Monk. 
 (coll. Hec. 631. Alcest. 136.) cf. 
 infr. 313. 
 
 Ib. bopv^evos, a friend who has 
 been a foe, a brother-in-arms. Cf. 
 Blomf. Gl. in Ch. 554 * Peile ad Ch. 
 548. 656. 894. Ag. 849. Elmsley 
 (Med. 670.) considers the compound 
 as equivalent to the simple 
 With peyiaros δορνξζνων, cf. Aj. 
 133^· φίλοι/ pey ιστόν. 
 
 47· ορκον προστιΘάς, Reiske, Wund. 
 Dind. (in Annot.) Βρκω, libri. Matth. 
 
 ηζομ^ν πάλιν, - 
 
 (whom see §. 632, 6. §. 428, 2.) 
 Kiihn. §. 856, a. See also Peile ad 
 Ch. 400. Neue ad Trachin. 1217. 
 Arnold ad Thucyd. II. 38. 
 
 Ib. προσηθ^ς. Ellendt compares 
 CEnom. I. 1. (419 D.) ορκον Si 
 προστβθ^ντος. 
 
 48. avayKatas τνχης, by a violent 
 death. jEsch. Ag. 1005. cl 8 ' ovv 
 avayKq τησ 8 ' ewippenot τύχης. 
 
 50. 8 ίφρος (syncopated for διφόρον, 
 carrying two persons). The Hebrew 
 language conforms to the Greek in 
 using the seat of a chariot for the 
 chariot itself. Cf. Gesen. in na'ip. 
 
 51. c^Uto, Phoebus sc. 
 
 52. καρατόμοις χΧι 8 αΊς. The Scho¬ 
 liast explains the metonym of χλι 8 ας 
 for πλοκάμους, by observing that the 
 latter are as it were the delicacy 
 (τρυφή) of the head. On the custonT 
 of placing locks of hair on tombs, 
 see Aj. 1173 sq., and cf. Peile ad 
 Choeph. 6. λοιβαις το πρώτον, codd. 
 opt. Dind. (in Annot.) 
 
 53. ΐΐτα. ‘ Cum junctum 
 
 paene abundare videtur.’ Ell. For 
 a different opinion, see Peile ad Ag. 
 
 97 - 9 · 
 
 Ib. άψορρον (άφ, ρύω). Cf. Lo- 
 beck ad Aj. 369. Griffiths ad Aesch 
 Prom. 1021. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 9 
 
 TVTTcofioL "^αΧκοττΧβνρορ 'ρρμβνοι ^βροΐρ^ 
 
 ο κα\ σύ θάμνοις οΊσθά μοι κ€κρυμμ€νορ^ 55 
 
 όπως Χόγω κΧβπτοντβς· ηΒβΐαν φάτιρ 
 
 φβρωμβρ αυτοί?, τονμορ ω? eppei δβ/χα? 
 
 φΧογκΓΓΟΡ ηδη και κατηρθρακωμβρορ. 
 
 τί γάρ μ€ λνπβΐ rovff, οταρ Χογω θαρωρ 
 
 epyoLCTL σωθω κάζ^ρίγκωμαι kX^os ; 
 
 δοκώ μβρ ονδβρ ρημίΐ <τνρ κβρδβί kclkop. 
 
 ηδη γαρ βίδορ ΤΓοΧΧακί^ 
 
 54· τνττωμ,αχαΧκόπΧ^νρον, the brazen 
 vessel containing the (supposed) 
 ashes of Orestes, ^sch. Choeph. 
 674. Χφητος χαΚκ€ον πλευρώ/χατα 
 (where see^Blomf. and Peile). On 
 the omission of the article before 
 τύπωμα, see Ellendt II. p. 245· 
 
 Ib. ^ρμ€νοι, suhlatum gestantes. 
 Ell. For construction, see Matth. 
 §. 493. The words χειρ and πονς 
 are often nearly redundant in So¬ 
 phocles. 
 
 55, θάμνος. Phot. : avvdev 8 po 9 τό¬ 
 πος. Cf. Peile ad Ag. 1283. οΐσθά 
 μοι, La. Wund. Dind. (in Annot.) 
 οΐσθά που, libri. 
 
 56. λόγω κλεπτοι/τεί. ScHOL. : απα- 
 τωντ€ς. Eur. Phoen. 1006. κΚόψας 
 λόγοισιν. Phil. 55 * λογοίϊ «κλεπτειυ. 
 
 ^7· φύρωμξν, Br. Herm. Elms. 
 Wund. Dind. φύροιμςν, vulg. Bernh. 
 p. 408. 
 
 58. κατηνθρακωμύνον, reduced to 
 ashes. Cf. Blomf. Gl. in Prom. 380. 
 Eur. Iph. Aul. 1062, &c. Ellendt 
 doubts whether ήδη is to be referred 
 to eppei or to φλογιστόν. 
 
 59--60. λόγω — βργοισι. For this 
 opposition of terms, cf. infr. 357. 
 1360. CEd. T. 517. 864, &c. That 
 the opposition is not always ex¬ 
 pressed, cf. infr. 63. 287. 7^*· 
 
 1217. 1453. Phil. 307. On the 
 
 Kou Tovs σοφούς 
 
 difference of number, cf. Pors. ad 
 Phoen. 512. 
 
 60. €ζ€ν€γκωμαι (middle voice, pro·· 
 cure for myself) κΚύος. Trach. 497 · 
 μύγα τι σθύνος ά Κυπρίί ίκφ^ρΐται νικάς 
 act. 
 
 61. ούδευ ρήμα συν Kepdei. I un¬ 
 derstand: nothing that can he men¬ 
 tioned, provided it has some accompa¬ 
 niment of advantage. (Cf. infr. 133^· 
 Phil. 842. 1223. (Ed. T. 595.) For 
 numerous instances of ρ^μ<^ thus 
 usedinHellenisticGreek.seeSchleusn. 
 
 in voc. For λόγοί used in this 
 
 sense, cf. 13^4· 7 ^· ^ 5 ®· 4 ^ 4 * 
 
 Aj. 734. for άπος, similarly used, cf. 
 (Ed. T. 1144, for φάτις, Tr. 693. 
 Wunder, who with Herald and 
 Brunck interprets κακόν, of ill omen, 
 compares Eur. Hel. 1050. βονΧ^ι 
 Χάγ^σθαι μη θανων λόγω θανύν ; Μευ. 
 κακός μόν όρνις' ει δε κερδαυώ λεγωυ, 
 έτοιμός είμι μη θανων λογω θανειν. 
 For sentiment, cf. Phil, in, and 
 Wunder ad (Ed. T. 861. 
 
 62. τους σοφούς, the term in use, 
 before φιλοσόφοι was substituted. Cf. 
 Blomf. ad Prom. 916. The Scho¬ 
 liast understands Pythagoras as more 
 particularly meant. That the other 
 legislators and philosophers of anti¬ 
 quity indulged in the same practice, 
 viz.simulation of death by atemporary 
 
10 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Χόγω μάτην θνησκοντας^ eW\ όταν δόμους 
 βλθωσιν ανθί^, βκτβτίμηνται πλ€ον, 
 ώς καμ βπαυχω τησδβ της φήμης αττο 
 δβδορκότ βχθροΐς οίστρον ως λάμφβιν ϊτι, 
 άλλ\ ώ πατρώα γη θβοί τ Ιγγωριοι, 
 δΐ^ασθί μ βντυχονντα ταΐσδβ ταΐς οδοΐς. 
 σύ τ\ ώ πατρωον δώμα* σου γάρ βρχ^ομαί 
 δίκη καθαρτής προς θβών ώρμημβνος’ 
 καΙ μη μ* ατιμον τήσδ* άποστβίλητβ γης, 
 άλλ’ άρχβπλοντον καί καταστάτην δόμων, 
 βίρηκα μβν νυν ταυτα* σο\ δ* ηδη, γβρον, 
 το σόν μζλβσθω βάντι φρονρήσαι χρόος. 
 νώ δ" β^ιμ^ν* καιρός γαρ, οσπβρ άνδράσιν 
 
 65 
 
 70 
 
 75 
 
 retirement, in order that they might 
 gain a greater popularity on their 
 return to life, see biographies of Epi- 
 menides, Zamolxis, &c. by Brucker. 
 The dramatic anachronism will be 
 overlooked by those accustomed 
 to the Greek stage. For a long 
 list of Sophoclean adjectives and 
 participles, which with the article 
 prefixed, act as substantives, see 
 Ellendt II. 215. sq. Join 7 ^δη πολ- 
 
 \άκΐ9. 
 
 63. μάτην. ScHOL. : 'ψ'ίνθωί. infr. 
 1298. άτη τη μάτην 'Κ€Κ€γμ€νη. 
 
 65. φημηs, general talk or rumour. 
 Cf. Peile ad Ag. 610. On ως~ 
 ούτως, see Matth. §. 628, 3. On 
 κάμ£, see Ell. I. 888. 
 
 66. δ€8ορκότα=ζώντα. ScHOL. crt, 
 hereafter. For the general ima¬ 
 gery, Blomfield compares Aristsen. 
 Ep. II. 4. η 8e, νπ€ρκύφασα μόλις, ώς 
 λαμττρον aveTciXev αστρον. 
 
 67. Phil. 1040. αλλ’, ω πατρώα yrj, 
 6(01 τ επόψιοι. 
 
 68. (ύτνχονντα τα 7 ςδ( ταΙς όδοΊς : I 
 
 understand : successful as far as the 
 journey which I have made is con- 
 cerned. On the rarer use of the 
 article, when οδ^ occurs in the plural 
 number, see Ell. II. 253. 
 
 71—2. κα\ μη μ ατιμον — δόμων. In 
 the second member of the sentence 
 supply στίλλ€Τ€=ποΐ€ 7 τ€. Cf. Kuhn. 
 §. 852. k. Matth. §. 634, 3. Elms- 
 ley’s Rev. of Hermann’s Suppl. 504. 
 737 · ^ 33 · Neue cites as pa¬ 
 rallel instances, infr. 651. CEd. T. 
 241. 820. Ant. 1157. OEd. C. 405. 
 Tr.95. 
 
 72. άρχίπλοντον, master of the 
 treasures. See these treasures re¬ 
 ferred to infr. 960. 1091. 1290. 
 1393. With καταστάτην δόμων, cf. 
 Peile ad Ch. 151. 
 
 73. μόν νυν. For frequent union 
 of these particles, see Elms, ad Med. 
 1263. 
 
 74. TO σον χρ€ 0 ς, the business or 
 duty which you have most at heart. 
 Cf. Ell. in voc. For μ^λίσθω, cf. infr. 
 1436. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 11 
 
 μ€γιστός βργου παντός Ιστ ίπιστάτης, 
 
 ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 Ιώ μοί μοί. 
 
 ΠΑ. καΙ μην θνρων ίδοζα προσποΧων τίνος 
 νποστβνονσης βνδον αίσθβσθαι^ τβκνον. 
 
 ΟΡ. άρ' Ιστ\ν η δύστηνος ^Ή-Χβκτρα ; θβλβις 8ο 
 
 μ€ίνωμ€ν αυτόν κάνακούσωμεν γόων ; 
 
 ΠΑ. ήκιστα, μηδέν πρόσθεν η τα Αοζίου 
 
 πειρώμεθ' ερδειν, καπό tcovS άρχηγετεΐν 
 
 πατρος γεοντες Χοντρά' ταύτα γάρ φερει 
 
 νίκην τ εφ> ημΐν και κράτος των δρωμένων. 85 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ φάος αγνόν τυττ. 
 
 και γης Ισόμοιρ άηρ, ως μοι 
 
 76. ίτΐΐστάτη^, applied to time or 
 opportunity, as the great leader, urger, 
 persuader of men in all their under¬ 
 takings. Cf. Phil. 837. Peile ad 
 Ch. p. 277. Ag. 367. Blomf. Gl. in 
 Pers. 385. 
 
 77. A mournful lament of Electra 
 within the palace. 
 
 78—9. θνρων €v8ov. So the Scho¬ 
 liast connects. Hermann joins with 
 αίσθίσθαι, and renders a foribus. 
 
 80. On apa, as prefixed to a ques¬ 
 tion, the answer to which we are 
 doubtful of, see Ell. in voc. i. and 
 cf. infr. 790. 804. 816. 1098. 
 
 81. κάνακουσωμζν, i. e. κα\ ivaKOv- 
 σωμ€ν (ivaKoveiv, to listen^. 
 
 84. Trarpos Χοντρά (a libation to 
 my father, cf. Bemh. p. i6t. iEsch. 
 Ch. 171.) xeovres (AEsch. Ch. 129. 
 
 κάγω χίονσα rdabe χΙρνιβας βροτοΊί 
 Xe-yo), KaXovcra ττατίρα.) 
 
 84-5. eVi— φβρεί. On the tmesis, 
 see Bernh. p. 80. On the union of 
 νίκην and κράτος, cf. Tafel’s ‘ Illustra¬ 
 tions of Find.’ I. 20. 
 
 85. των δρωμένων, attempts, de~ 
 signs, undertakings. Cf. infr. 1333. 
 CEd. C. 1144. Tr. 588. (Orestes 
 and the Psedagogus retire. Electra 
 comes out of the palace : her dress 
 and general appearance such as ill 
 correspond with her high rank and 
 birth.) 
 
 86. ω φάος αγνόν. Kiihner (§. 5-10. 
 3.) observes, that when the interjec¬ 
 tion CO is united with a substantive 
 and an adjective, the substantive or 
 adjective is placed first, according 
 as the latter or former requires the 
 most emphasis. For the present in¬ 
 stance, he quotes Herm. ad Viger. 
 §. ‘ 0 lux dpura, quia lux, non quod 
 pura, sed quod lux est, invocatur. 
 Opponuntur enim statim tenebrce.’ Cf. 
 Matth. I. p. 481. (Metre; anap. 
 system.) 
 
 87. γης Ισόμοιρ' άηρ. Arnold (ad 
 Thucyd. II. 42.) translates and ex¬ 
 plains : “ earth’s equal partner, air 
 that is, ‘ they jointly divide the world 
 between them and much to the 
 
 rt Sancta, not pura. Cf. Ell. in voc. αγνόν. 
 
12 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΤΓολλάί μ^ν Θρήνων coSa^, 
 
 ΤΓολλάς δ’ άντηρ€ί 9 fjaOov 
 στέρνων ττλαγας αίμασσομβνων, 
 οττόταν Βνοφερα νν^ υπολβίφθρ* 
 τα δβ τταννυγίδων ηδη στνγβραί 
 ζυνίσαχτ βύναΐ μογερών οίκων, 
 δσα τον δύστηνον βμον θρηνώ 
 πατ€ρ, ον κατα μίν βάρβαρον αίαν 
 φοίνιθ9 ''Αρη9 ούκ i^eviaev, 
 μητηρ δ* ημη χω κοίνολβχης 
 Αϊγισθο^, οττω^ δρνν υλοτόμοι,, 
 σγίζονσι κάρα φονίω ττβλβκβί, 
 κούδβ),^ τούτων οίκτος άττ άλΑης 
 
 90 
 
 95 
 
 ΙΟΟ 
 
 same effect the Scholiast. As the 
 word άηρ does not occur a second 
 time in the writings of Sophocles, it 
 is not easy to say what philosophic 
 idea the poet attached to it. If he 
 understood by it, as Wunder sup¬ 
 poses, {ether or the heaven,, his phi¬ 
 losophy borders upon that of Hesiod, 
 Γαΐα δε τοι ττρώτον pev eyfivaro ίσον 
 eavTT} Ουρανόν άστ€ρο€νθ\ That his 
 philosophy, whatever its nature, was 
 considered as misplaced at the time, 
 is evident from the ridicule thrown 
 upon it by the comic poet Phere- 
 crates. For the genitive after ισο- 
 /ιοφοί, see Bernh. p. 172. On com¬ 
 pounds of this form, see Peile ad 
 Ch. 999. Ισόμοιρ\ Pors. Ισόμοιρος, 
 libri. 
 
 89—90. άντηρεις στέρνων ττλαγας, 
 blows against the breast. Pass. The 
 metaphor, says the Scholiast, is de¬ 
 rived from persons rowing: oXov 
 ττληγας Kara to εναντίον των στέρνων 
 ελαυνομενας. Ellendt douhts whe¬ 
 ther in an anapaestic verse, the Doric 
 form ττλαγας is correct. See Dissert. 
 
 prefixed to second volume of his 
 Lexicon, p. 14. 
 
 91. υπολειφθτ}, ceases, terminates. 
 On the omission of av, see Ell. I. 
 T 24. On Βνοφερα, dark, cf. Blomf. 
 Gl. in Ch. 797. (Peile 790.) 
 
 92. τά ττανννχίΒων =.τας παννυχίδας, 
 accus. of time. Matth. §. 425. Join 
 ηδη with subst. (Hartung, I. 243.) 
 and as to my night-vigils indeed. 
 
 93. ευνάι μογερων οϊκων. For gen. 
 see Bernh. p. 161. ξυνίσασ', are con¬ 
 scious. 
 
 94. sq. Cf. Blomf. ad Ch. 341. 
 
 96. ξενίζειν, to receive and enter-, 
 tain as a guest. The metaphor has 
 a secret allusion to the banquet, at 
 which Agamemnon was murdered. 
 
 97. κοινολεχής, ^Esch. Pr. 576. 
 κοινόλεκτρος. 
 
 98. δπως δρυν υλοτόμοι. Cf. II. 
 
 XIII. 389. XVI. 482. 
 
 ΙΟΟ. οίκτος τούτων, compassion for 
 this thing. On plurals ταύτα and τάδε, 
 used for singulars τούτο and τάδε, cf. 
 infr. 131. 1334. Phn. 1343. 1355. 
 &c. &c. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 13 
 
 η μου φ^ρβται, σου, πατβρ, όντως 
 αΙκώς οίκτρώς re Θανόντος, 
 
 άλλ’ ον μβν δη ΛντκΓυττ, 
 
 λήξω θρήνων στνγβρών re γόων, 
 
 ear αν τταμφβγγβΐς οίστρων ιο5 
 
 βίττας, λβνσσω δβ τόδ* ημα^ρ^ 
 
 μη ον, τ€κνολ€Τ€ίρ & τις αηδών, 
 
 hri κωκντω τώνδβ πατρωων 
 
 ττρο Θνρων ηχω ττασι ττροφωνβΐν. 
 
 100—1. άπ α\\ης η ^μον. infr. 885* 
 (ξ €μον Τ€ κονκ αΧΧηί. II82. αλΧην η 
 μ€* 
 
 102. αΙκώς {foully) οίκτρως re. 
 ScHOL. άίίκως μ^ν, οτι neXeKei αυτόν 
 μ(θ' ύβρεως βτίσατο' οίκτρως de, bia το 
 βία και ίΊΐΐβουΧΐνθ^ντα. αΙκως, Herm. 
 Gaisf. Wund. Dind. αδίκως, libri. 
 
 103. αλλ* ον μ€ν 8η. For position 
 of particles, cf. infr. 913, αλλ’ aide 
 pev brj. W^under (ad Aj. 858.) ex¬ 
 plains ov pev dri^profecto non, ovSepev 
 dfj, profecto ne — quidem. 
 
 105. TTap^ieyyeis. For Tvas in com¬ 
 pound adjectives, see Trach. 50. On 
 Ζστ αν with conjunctive, see Ell. I. 
 120. 
 
 103—6. άστρων ριττας. Vibrations or 
 twinklings of the stars. Cf. Griffiths 
 ad ^sch. Pr. 123. Diss. ad Pind. 
 Fragm. p. 658. Dobree proposes to 
 eject άστρων, and by παμφ. ριττας un¬ 
 derstands the rays of the sun. But 
 if this were the right sense, (and it 
 has its plausibilities,) άστρων might 
 be retained as signifying the sun, 
 which it not unfrequently does in 
 the singular number, or, according 
 to suggestion thrown out at v. 19, 
 it might imply sky or heaven. 
 
 106. λ^ύσσω Se τόδ* η pap, and live 
 
 e His words are: * non hunc diem, sed 
 est. 
 
 as I now ^do. Ell. This transla¬ 
 tion would harmonize very well with 
 Dobree’s interpretation; but both 
 versions are more plausible than 
 sound. The night vigils of Electra 
 had made her as familiar with the 
 stars as with the sun, though now 
 in all its coruscations of morning¬ 
 brightness; and night and day are 
 here opposed to each other, only with 
 a little more poetry than subsequent¬ 
 ly at V. 259. 
 
 103—7. λΐ7^ω θρήνων, μη ουκ ηχ^ω 
 ττροφωνβ'ίν, Cf. infr. Ι3^~3· M^tth. 
 
 §· 334 · ^^^· 4 · 4 · 
 
 ιο6. de. For δ€ without pev, 
 
 where terms are of the same nature, 
 or are opposed as contraries to each 
 other, cf. infr. 988. 1194· 144^· 
 
 107. TcKVoXereip' άηΒων. Erfurdt 
 refers to Horn. Od. r, 518. -iEsch. 
 Ag. 1152. Call. h. in Lavacr. Pall. 
 94. Mosch. iv. 21. Virg. Georg. IV. 
 
 5*^· 
 
 108. (7ΓΪ κωκντω’=·κωκνουσα, Cf. 
 Matth. §.586. Kuhner (§. 612.) ren¬ 
 ders : mit (eigentl. hei) Wehklagen. 
 
 109. ηχα>—ηχη^, a sound, a noise, 
 ττροφωνϋν, to utter, ττρο θνρων, cf. 
 Antig. 526. 
 
 diem cerno,* i. e. vitam habeo, qualis nunc 
 
14 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ώ δώμ * Αίδου κοα Υ\€ρσ6φ6νης, 
 
 I ώ χθόι/ί "Κρμη^ καΐ ttotvl Άρά, 
 σβμναί re θβών Trai^es* 'YipLPves, 
 
 [at Tovs αδίκως θνησκοντας 6ράτ\ 
 
 * * * * ^ * * τους βυι^ας 
 
 νποκλ€πτομ€Ρθνς,~\ ί^θβτ, άρηζατβ, 
 τίσασθβ ττατρος φόρον ημβτβρον, 
 καί μοί TOP ίμορ πβμφατ άδβλφόρ. 
 μούρη γάρ αγβίρ ούκ ert σωκώ 
 λύττης άρτίρροττορ αγθος. 
 
 I ΙΟ 
 
 ΪΙ5 
 
 1 20 
 
 111. χθόνί 'Ερμή. KlauseD (^sch. 
 Theol. ρ. ΙΟΙ.) refers the epithet to 
 the office of Hermes, as sending up 
 souls to the light from the lower 
 regions in concert with Tellus and 
 Orcus. Cf. Interpp. ad^sch. Ch. i. 
 
 Ib. πότνι Άρά. In ^schylus Άρά 
 and *Epivvs signify much the same 
 thing. Sophocles makes a difference 
 between them here, and perhaps CEd. 
 C· 1375· sq. For the short final syl¬ 
 lable in ττότνια, see Blomf. Gl. in 
 Sept. c. Th. 141. 
 
 112. σζμναί. An epithet Common¬ 
 ly given to the Erinyes at Athens. 
 Cf. Aj. 837. For θεών παίδε?, i. e. θεαι, 
 see Goettl. ad Hes. Theog. 240. 
 
 113. αδίκως θνήσκοντας, unjustly 
 slain. Cf. infr. 1420. Dindorf and 
 Wunder propose to reject this verse 
 from the text, as languid and un¬ 
 worthy of Sophocles. 
 
 ^ ^ 4“ ^ 5 · €ννας υποκΧ^πτομί^ 
 
 νους. Person ejects these words from 
 the text for a different reason : he 
 considers that the Erinyes, occupied 
 as they were in punishing murder 
 
 and incest, had not time for attend¬ 
 ing to the comparatively less offence 
 of adultery. In this opinion Dindorf 
 and Wunder coincide; the former 
 restoring the text according to the 
 old edd. eXdtr’, άρήξατβ, τίσασθζ πα- 
 τρος I φόνον ήμζτόρον, | καί μοι, &C. 
 
 119 · μοννη, by myself^ without my 
 brother. This Ionic form is found 
 also in lyric measure, infr. 153. and 
 in the dialogue, infr. 531. Kiihl- 
 stadt’s idea that the form was always 
 pronounced “ cum animi quodam 
 affectu,” is repudiated by EUendt, 
 who considers the tragedians to have 
 been influenced only by metrical 
 reasons in their use of μόνος and 
 
 μοννος. 
 
 119—20. μοννη — άχθος. I am no 
 longer able by myself to draw up the 
 weight of griefs which is in the oppo~ 
 site scale. Pors. 
 
 119. σωκώ, gl. ^δύναμαι. 
 
 120. άντίρροπον. gl. ds τα Ιναντία 
 ρίπον. jEsch. Ag. 555. νικά το κίρδος, 
 πήμα δ' ονκ άντιρρίπξΐ. Cf. Blomf. 
 Gl. in Pers. 352. 
 
 f Many of the glosses inserted in the following notes are derived from Zickendrath’s 
 Animadv. m Soph. Electr.’ in the ‘ Acta Seminarii Philol. Heidelberg.’ 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 15 
 
 ΧΟΡΟΣ. 
 
 ώ τταζ τταΐ δυσταιΌτάταί <Γτροφ. λ , 
 
 'Ιίλβκτρα ματρο^, τίν ae\ 
 τάκ€ί9 ώδ* άκόρβστον οίμωγαν 
 τον ττάλαί €Κ δολβρας^ άθβώτατα 
 
 ματρο 9 άλόντ άπάται^ *Κγαμ^μνονα, 125 
 
 κακα τ€ χ€φΙ ττρόδοτον ; ώί δ τάδβ πόρων 
 ολοίτ, €L μοί σβμι^ ταΟ ανόαν. 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ γβνβθλα γβνναίων, 
 
 ηκβτ ίμών καμάτων παραμύθων' 130 
 
 OLoa Τ€ καί ξννιημι ταο , ου tl μ€ 
 
 121.8νστανοτάτας. ScHOL.' τής €^ω- 
 
 λΐοτάτης. Cf. infr. 273-5· 439 * 
 1290. (metre: glycon. polysch.) 
 
 122-3. Wunder throws these two 
 verses into one, considering them as 
 glyconean metres, in the second of 
 which an antispast is substituted for 
 the extreme iambus. 
 
 122-5. General sense : Why thus 
 insatiably and to the pining away of 
 your flesh, do you lament for Aga¬ 
 memnon, &c. The construction in 
 its simpler form is, τί ωδ’ άκορίστως 
 οΙμώζζΐς *Αγαμβμνονα τηκόμενη ; cf. 
 
 Matth. §.421. Obs. 4. Kiihn. §.558, 
 b. Bemh. p. 112. Ell. II. 809. infr. 
 686. For άκόρ^στον^ see Blomf. Gl. 
 in Ag. 731. 
 
 124. άθΐωτατα, Erf. Wund. Dind. 
 άθ^ωτάτας, libri. Dobree observes, 
 that in comparative adverbs, the 
 Greeks use the singular neuter; in 
 superlatives, the plural neuter : thus, 
 δειι/ώ?, dcLvorepov, δεινότατα. (Metre : 
 dactyl, tetram.) 
 
 126—7. ώί (o that )— δλοιτο. Cf. 
 
 infr. 1226. Aj. 921. Matth. §. 513, 
 
 A. 
 
 126. 6 rabe πόρων. Wunder un¬ 
 derstands j^gisthus; but does not 
 the context rather imply that Cly- 
 taemnestra is meant; the masculine 
 gender, for decorum’s sake, being 
 used instead of the g feminine } Cf. 
 Bernh. p. 429. 
 
 127. Metre; antispast. and iamb, 
 penthem. 
 
 129 . yeveOXa (Gl. yeved). ScHOL. 
 ω παιδζς των €vy€va>v Μνκηναίων. yei/- 
 e 6 Xa y€vvalωv, Herm. Wund. Dind. 
 yiveOXa yζvvaίωv πατέρων, vulg. 
 
 130. παραμυθίαν, as comforters. 
 Cf. Matth. §.310. 
 
 131. alba κα\ ξννίημί. Musgrave ad 
 Eur. Or. 131. asserts that this is not 
 tautology, but a repetition indicating 
 great pathos. For the shortening 
 of the second syllable in the word, 
 see Pass, in voc. and cf. Aristoph. 
 Av. 946. For resemblance between 
 the Greek avvUvai, and the Hebrew 
 ^T, see Horsley ad Hos. IV. 6. 
 
 • 
 
 g A remarkable instance of the masculine singular used for the feminine occurs in 
 2 Cor. VII. 12, Λνΐιοΐ’ο, according to Schleusner, δ αδίκησαε signifies the contractor of the 
 incestuous mai-riage so severely censured by the great apostle, υ αδικηθίΐς the partner in 
 his guilt. 
 
16 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 φνγγάι/€ΐ' ούδ* βθβλω TTpoXiTreLV roSe, 
 μη ου τον ίμον στοναχβΐν irarep άθλων, 
 άλλ’, ώ ττ€ψτοία9 φιλότητος άμΗβόμβναι χάριν, 
 eare μ ωο aAveiv, 
 αίαΐ, Ικνονμαί, 
 
 ΧΟ^ άλλ* ovTOL τον y’ Ιζ Άΐδα 
 τταγκοίνου λίμνας ττατβρ αν¬ 
 ατάσεις οντ€ γόοίσιν οΰτ άνταις, 
 άλλ’ άτΓΟ των μέτριων επ άμηχανον 
 J άλγος άεΐ στενάχουσα δώλλυσαί. 
 εν οίς άνάλυσίς εστιν ουδεμία κακών, 
 
 135 
 
 Λντ, Λ . 
 
 140 
 
 131—2. ον τι μζ φνγγάν€ί. Cf. infr. 
 222 . 
 
 132. ουδ’ €θ(\ω, i. e. αλλ’ ονκ €θ€λω. 
 Bind. 
 
 133* H-V Cf· sup. 104. τον Ιμον 
 — Ίτατίρ. On the article thus used, 
 see Ell. II. 242. 
 
 134. άμζίβ^σθαι, midd. voice, to 
 'procure for oneself b'y exchange. He- 
 sych.: άμ^ίβου, avranobtdov. Gr.Bekk. 
 p. 185, 13. eVt του χάρίν (ibivai καϊ 
 €7Γί τον κακόν άντώώοναι. Cf. Trach. 
 
 737 · 
 
 Ib. χάριν (the gratitude due) τταν- 
 τοίας φΐΚότητος (for much or great 
 love). (Metre : antispast. and dac- 
 
 tyi·) 
 
 133 . dkveiv (^η, άΧάομαι), to be 
 afdicted even to madness. Cf. EUendt 
 in voc. and Blomf. Gl. in Sept. c. 
 Th. 387. for quantity and for accent. 
 
 136. Ικνονμαι. Gl. ίκ^τενω. 
 
 137 · Supposed by Kuhner 
 
 (§. 623, a.) to be used for iv. Neue 
 and Wunder refer to Buttm. Gr. Gr. 
 med. §. 138, I. 8. Herm. ad Viger, 
 p. 893. Matth. §. 396, a. See also 
 Bernh. p. 314. 
 
 138-9. ’Alda πάγκοινου λίμνας. Cf. 
 
 Aj. 1193. CEd. C. 1563. Antig. 810. 
 
 For grammar of the word πάγκοινου, 
 see Matth. §. 118. Obs. i. On the 
 wide separation between πατέρα and 
 its article, see Ell. II. 230. 
 
 139. avaraaeis, i, e. άναστησ€ΐξ. 
 Brunck for sentiment compares Eur. 
 Ale. 999. On the Doricism, see 
 Ellendt’s Dissert. II. p. 20. 
 
 Ib. ανταις. Hesych. αντησι’ \ιτα- 
 Vfiais. οϋτε γόοισιν οϋτ* avrais, Herm. 
 e conject. ovre yoots ουτβ λιταΐ?, vulg. 
 For sentiment, the Scholiast com¬ 
 pares .^sch. Niob. I. 4. 
 
 140-1. General meaning: but 
 proceeding from sorrows of a mode¬ 
 rate degree (άπο των μ€τρίων ά\γ€ων) 
 to a sorrow which admits neither help 
 nor cure («π’ άμηχανον άλγος), you are 
 in the way to destroy yourself (διόλ- 
 λναται) by indulging in perpetual com¬ 
 plaints (del στΐνάχονσα). With άμη¬ 
 χανον άλγος, cf. Antig. 362. νόσων 
 άμηχάνων (άκαταμάχητων, άνιάτων, me- 
 delam respuentium. Ell. I. 9.) and for 
 από (=6^ infr. 214.) cf. Matth. §. 
 573 · 
 
 142-3. WundeFs punctuation has 
 been followed in these two verses: 
 iv οίς the learned editor refers to 
 των δνσφόρων in the verse following, 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 17 
 
 TL μοί των δνσφόρων εφίει; 
 
 ΗΛ. νψηος, 0S* των οίκτρως 145 
 
 οΙχομ€νων γονέων ίπιλάθβται, 
 άλλ* €μ€ y ά στονό^σσ apapev φρβνας^ 
 a ^Ιτνν, alev 'Ίτυν ολοφύρεται 
 δρνις άτνζομβνα, Δί 09 άγγελος. 
 
 Ιω τταντλάμων 'Νωβα, σε δ’ εγωγε νέμω θεόν, ico 
 
 ατ εν τάφω ττετραίω 
 αίαΐ δακρνειί. 
 
 χο. οΰτοί σο\ μοννα, τεκνον^ 
 
 understanding by that word, grief, 
 trouble. May we not rather join Iv 
 oh κακών, and understand, in a mis¬ 
 fortune from which there is no means 
 of release or escape (ovbepia ζστΧν άνά- 
 λνσίί), why desire, &c. ? For άνάΚν- 
 σις, cf. infr. 573. Phil. 61. See also 
 Blomf, Gl. in Ag. 243. 
 
 143. τί — €φί(ΐ. Wunder adopts 
 the Scholiast’s explanation: Why 
 desire things so difficult to be borne 
 as lamentation and sorrow ? Perhaps: 
 Why desire things so difficult to be borne 
 on my part ? i. e. You ask me (v. 
 135-6) to allow of your indulging 
 in the wildest grief; but your father 
 is dead, and cannot be restored ; the 
 evil is one which admits of no re¬ 
 medy : why then a request, which 
 cannot but be painful to me, because 
 I cannot accede to it ? 
 
 147. ά. For a large collection of 
 prepositive articles in Doric forms, 
 see Ellendt II. 204. 
 
 Ib. apape. Cf. Carmich. in voc. 
 άραρίσκω : Matth. in voc. cιpω, §. 
 225. As an epic word, Dindorf 
 quotes Od. V. 95. ήραρ€ Θυμόν ebabh· 
 For άρ 4 σκζΐν Tiva, cf. Matth. §.411. 
 5. Obs. 2 ; apeaKeiv riva φρ 4 νας, ^.421. 
 Obs. (Ed. C. 113. 314. (Ed. T. 
 718. Phil. 1301. 
 
 ττροφ. 0. 
 
 148. α’^ίτνν &c. Cf. Blomf. Gl. 
 in Ag. II13. de Sinner ad Tr. J05. 
 For the hiatus, see Matth. I. p. 82. 
 and cf. infr. 157. The elongation in 
 "Ιτϋι/ is defended by the metre being 
 dactylic, and consequently enjoying 
 the license of heroic verse. 
 
 149. bpvh. For the short final 
 syllable, cf. Antig. 1021. For Ho¬ 
 meric use of the word άτυζομ4να 
 (Schol. 6 ^νρομ 4 νη} see Pass. 
 
 Ib. Atof ayyeXos, Jove’s (vernal) 
 messenger. Cf. II. 11 . 26. Od. XIX. 
 518. But why the nightingale should 
 be thus termed, is by no means clear. 
 
 150. Νιο/ 3 σ, σ€ δ’ 4 yωyξ ν€μω θζόν. 
 I consider you indeed as divine and 
 worthy of worship. For be thus put 
 after emphatic pronouns, cf. Antig. 
 1126. (Ed. T. 1097. Aj. 1409. 
 Pors. ad Eur. Orest. 614. Ellendt 
 I· 395 * With ν€μω, cf. (Ed. C. 879. 
 
 τάνδ' ap' ovKeri ν4μω πόλιν. 
 
 151 . 4 v τάφω π€τραίω. ScHOL. 
 τοντέστιν, άποΧιθωθ€Ϊσα. Cf. Antig. 
 823. sq. For are cf. Tr. 824. El¬ 
 lendt in voc. and Constantine Mat- 
 thiae ad Trach. §.21. 
 
 152. del baKpveis, Wund. 
 
 153. For sentiment, cf. Monk ad 
 Alcest. 429. Hippol. 836. (metre: 
 anap. spond.) 
 
 c 
 
18 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΗΛ. 
 
 αχοί ίφάρη βροτών^ 
 
 7τρ09 δ TL (TV TWV €vboV €L 7Γ€ρί(Τ(Τα^ 
 
 ois* ομυόθ€ν ei και γόνα ζύναιμος, 
 
 οία Xpucro^6/xty ζοοβι kou Χφιανασσα^ 
 
 κρυτΓτα τ αγίων iv ηβα 
 
 ολβίθ9, ον ά κλ€ίνα 
 
 γά ποτ€ Μυκηναίων 
 
 δίζβταί βύττατρίδαν, Aios βΰφρονι 
 
 βημχιτι μολόντα τανδβ γάν Opeorav. 
 
 ον y ίγω ακάματα ττροο'μβνονο ', ατ€κνο9^ 
 
 τάΚαιν ανύμφευτος αΙεν οίχνω, 
 
 δάκρνσί μυδαλεα, τον άνηνυτον 
 
 οίτον εγουο’α κακών* ο δε Χαθεται 
 
 ών τ eiraff^ ών τ εδαη» τί yap ουκ εμοι 
 
 *55 
 
 ι6ο 
 
 164 
 
 ΐ54· been presented, of¬ 
 
 fered. 
 
 155· ’J'poi {in respect to which) 
 cf. Matth. §. 591. y. Blomf. Gl. in 
 Pr. 1036. των evbov, {those within the 
 house, i. e. your relations) περισσά el, 
 {surpass, exceed.) 
 
 1^6—7. Homer, like Sophocles, 
 assigns three daughters to Aga¬ 
 memnon, but substitutes Laodice for 
 Electra. (II. IX. 144·) 
 
 157. οία. Erf. Gaisf. Wund. Hind. 
 Ell. oXa, vulg. La. Lb. codd. Pal. For 
 the hiatus at και Ίφιάν. cf. Bl. Pers. 
 V. 646. 
 
 159. άχίων (ScHOL. λνπονμ^νος) 
 ηβα, pining on account of his youth 
 spent in the retired abode of Stro- 
 phius. (v. 601. ό δ’ αλλοί €^ω, X^ipa 
 σην μόΚιί φυγών, τΧημων *Ορίστης δυσ¬ 
 τυχή τρίβει βίον.) On the diseresis 
 of the word άχίων, see EUendt’s Dis¬ 
 sert. T. 11 . p. 12. 
 
 160. όλβιός, and yet happy, because 
 &c. Neue compares Od. XI. 449. 
 
 ,,τταΐρ ot ην erri μαζω, νηπιος, ος που 
 
 νυν γ€ μ€Τ* άντρων ιζ€ΐ αριθμώ, όλβιος' 
 η yap τον ye πατήρ φίλος οψ€ται ελθών, 
 και κείνος πατέρα προσπτυζεται, η θεμις 
 
 εστίν. See also Hes. Theogon. 954. 
 όλβιον, Br. (metre: dact. and antisp. 
 or vers, ischior. As also the verse 
 following.) 
 
 160—3. ov — *Ορεσταν. Cf. Antig. 
 404. Phil. 1327-8. Matth. §. 474, a. 
 Monk ad Alcest. 36. 
 
 162—3. Διόί εϋφρονι βηματι (ScHOL. 
 πομπή) under the conduct of favouring 
 Zeus. 
 
 164. ακάματα, here used adverbi¬ 
 ally, without wearying, (metre : trim, 
 iamb. cat. Cf. Blomf. ad Pers. 81.) 
 
 164—3. άτεκνος, ανύμφευτος. Cf. 
 infr. 961 sq. 1183. CEd. T. 1502. 
 Ant. 876. 917. Neue. 
 
 t66. οίχνω. Suid. περιέρχομαι. For 
 other senses of the word, cf. infr. 
 313. Aj. 564.^ 
 
 167. μυ 8 αλεα. Gl. κατάβροχος. 
 i 6 g. ων T επαθεν, (i. e. the bene¬ 
 fits which he had derived from Ele¬ 
 ctra by her preservation of his life.) 
 
HAEKTPA. 
 
 19 
 
 ερχεται αγγελίας άττατώμενον ; 
 
 170 
 
 άε\ μεν γάρ ποθείς 
 
 
 ΤΓοΘων S ούκ άζιοΐ φανηναι. 
 
 
 θάρσει μοι, θάρσει^ τεκνον. 
 
 auT. 0 . 
 
 ετί μεγας ονρανω 
 
 
 Ζευς, ος όφορα ττάντα καΙ κρατύνει* 
 
 175 
 
 / ώ τον ύτΓβραλγη χόλον νβμονσα 
 μη 0 οΐί όχθαίρείί ύπεράχθεο μητ εττιλάθον. 
 χρόνος γάρ εύμαρης θεός, 
 οϋτ€ γάρ 6 τάν Κρΐσαν 
 
 ι8ο 
 
 ων τ’ €δάη, (ί. e. the knowledge which 
 he derived from the messages sent 
 by her respecting ^gisthus, &c.) 
 For €^άη, cf. Blomf. and Peile ad Ch. 
 594· 588. 
 
 169-70. τί ayyeXias. Cf. Matth. 
 §.442,3. e /ΛΟί €ρχ€ται. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 401. (Ed. T. 711. (Ed. C. 1420, 
 &c. 
 
 170. άπατώμ^νυν. I understand: 
 falsifiedy or deceptive in its results. 
 (See the verse following.) Ellendt 
 renders : quid nuntiorum mitto, quod 
 non fallatur; h. e. quos nuntios non 
 frustra mitto. 
 
 171. Electra may be supposed to 
 mimic Orestes’ expressions of a de¬ 
 sire to come to her. Cf. infr. 319. 
 φησίν ye' φάσκων δ’, ov8ev ων Xeyet 
 noiei. (metre: antispast. iamb, or, 
 bacch. and cret.) 
 
 172. Metre: antispast. penth. 
 iamb. 
 
 174-5* Zevs ονρανω. Neue 
 
 compares the Homeric Zev^ alOe'pi 
 ναίων. For dative, cf. infr. 313. 
 Matth. §. 406. ονρανω, Heath.Wund. 
 Dind. ev ονρανω, vulg. €φορα. unde 
 ίπόφιος, Phil. 1040. Spanh. ad Cal- 
 lim. in Jov. 82. Nkue. Cf. infr. 824. 
 
 176. vepovaa, g\. άνατιθ€ΐσα. With 
 
 vTTepaXyrjy cf. Antig. 630. 
 
 177. ν 7 Γ€ράχθ€θ. Cf. Antig. 128. 
 Tr. 281. (Ed. C. 1741. Monk pre¬ 
 fers vTrepaxBov, but see Lobeck ad 
 Aj. 421. and Ellendt’s Dissert. II. 
 13. The same lexicographer notices 
 the position of μηβ': ‘ semel virep^a- 
 τως positum reperio. El. 177. opor- 
 tuit dici : oXs €χθαΙρ€ΐς μη& vitep- 
 άχθβο. 
 
 179. βνμαρης (gl. ό 4 Χαφρννων) 
 ββόα. Time is a god, who brings 
 about what is desirable in an easy 
 insensible manner. Musgrave com¬ 
 pares Virg. -En. IX. 6. quod optanti 
 divum promittere nemo auderet, voU 
 venda dies en attulit ultro. In Schol. 
 Ven. II. XV. 37. €νμαρης is derived 
 from an unusual word μάρη, a hand; 
 as from €νχ€ρης. Cf. Blomf. 
 
 Gl. in Ag. 1297. Klausen’s Theol. 
 p. 14. 
 
 180-I. Κρΐσαν. Schol. Φωκικην. 
 Crisa itself derived its name from 
 Crisus its founder, father of Stro- 
 phius, (with whom Orestes was re¬ 
 siding,) and grandfather of Pylades. 
 Cf. Muller’s Eumen. p. 131. On 
 the wide separation between article 
 and substantive in 6 — πηΐς, cf. Ell. 
 II. 250. 
 
 c 2 
 
20 
 
 20Φ0ΚΛΕ0Τ:£ 
 
 βουνόμον βχωι/ άκταν 
 
 7ΓαΪ9 Άγαμβμι^ορίδα^ άττβρίτροπο^, 
 
 ονθ ο τταρα top Αχέροντα θεο9 άνάσσωρ, 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’ εμε μερ 6 πολύς άπολελοιπερ ηδη 
 βίοτος άρελπιστος^ ovS ετ αρκώ' 
 ατίς αρεν τοκεωρ κατατάκομαι, 
 ας φίλος ονης άρηρ νπερίσταται, 
 άλλ\ άπερεί τις εποίκος άραζία^ 
 οίκορομώ θαλάμους πατρος ώδε μερ 
 άείκεΐ συρ στολα, 
 κεραΐς δ* άμφίσταμαι τραπεζαις. 
 
 ΧΟ. οίκτρά μερ ρόστοις αύδά, 
 
 ‘ Ί 
 
 i 
 
 185 i 
 
 I 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 ( 
 
 190 1 
 
 ■i 
 
 ! 
 
 σ-τροφ. y. 
 
 181. βοννόμον. ScHOL. : βοών θρε¬ 
 πτικήν. Trach. l88. iv βονθερεί Χειμώ- 
 VI. (Sch. τοντεστι, βονς τρε'φοντι.) βον¬ 
 νόμον, Herm. βούνομον, vulg. 
 
 Ib. εχων, inhabiting. Cf. Phil. 154. 
 7. Aj. 135, &c. 
 
 182. άπερίτροπος, {a, περιτρεπω,) 
 not returning. The zeugma, by which 
 the epithet belongs to Pluto, as well 
 as to Orestes, is thus explained by 
 the Scholiast: TtVe? hk to ΑΠΕΡΙΤΡΟ- 
 ΠΟΣ επι μεν * Ο ρέστου ΑΝΑΠΕΛΕΥ- 
 ΣΤΟΣ, επι δε τον ΠΧοντωνος ΑΝΕΠΙ- 
 ΣΤΡΟΦΟΣ (i. e. careless, unconcerned 
 about)' τον Tovs εχθρούς μετεΧθεΊν. Re¬ 
 ferences, by which the student may 
 learn to classify and arrange varie¬ 
 ties of the zeugma, are given infr. 
 436. See also Wund. ad Trach. 
 350. On the Doric form Άγαμεμνο- 
 νίδας, see Ellendt’s Dissert. 11 . 23. 
 
 183. παρά. Cf. Matth. §.588,0. 
 For tribrach answering to iambus in 
 the strophic verse, see Wunder’s 
 Emend, in Tr. p. 77. 
 
 185—6. 0 ποΧνς βίοτος, the best 
 
 part of my life, άνεΧπιστος, devoid of 
 hope, αρκώ, Suidas : Ισχνω, νπομεΐναι 
 
 δύναμαι. Cf. Phil. T094. 
 
 187. άτις, ut quce, quippe qucE. Cf. 4 
 infr. 296. 347. 587. 613. 1314. Aj. ‘ 
 457. Phil. 1 282. Tr. 6. 323, &c. - 
 
 189. εποικος. The Scholiast ex¬ 
 plains by metic, a word familiar to - 
 the readers of comic Greek. Cf. 
 Griif. ad ^sch. Pr. 410. άναξία. 
 ScHOL. : αξίαν ονκ εχονσα, άΧΧ' άτι¬ 
 μος. Neue compares II. i. 648. ώσει 
 τιν άτίμητον μετανάστην. Cf. infr. 444 * 
 
 190. οικονομώ, have the charge of, 
 (i. e. in a servile capacity.) With 
 the form of verb, cf. infr. 280. μηΚο- 
 σφαγει εμμην ιερά. tl. IV. 3· νέκταρ 
 εωνοχόει. Arist. Plut. 821. βουθυτεϊ 
 νν και τράγον κα\ κριόν &C. ωδε, as you 
 see me, (pointing to her dress as she 
 speaks.) 
 
 192. άμφίσταμαι. Lb. Herm. ίφι- 
 σταμαι, vulg. 
 
 193-6. General meaning; there 
 were miserable lamentations, as well 
 at the time when vour father return- 
 ed from Troy, as when he was mur¬ 
 dered. 
 
 193. ανδά. Hermann understands 
 the voice of the populace generally. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 21 
 
 οίκτρά 8* ίν Kourais ιτατρώαίς 
 οτ€ οΐ τταγχάλκων άνταία 
 γεννών ώρμάθη ττλαγά, 
 δόλος· ην ό φρ^ρ-ας^ βρος 6 κτένας, 
 δείναν δείνώς ττροφντεύσαντες 
 μορφαν, εϊτ ονν θεός είτε βροτών 
 ήν 6 ταΰτα ττράσσων. 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ πασαν κείνα ττλεον άμερα 
 ελθονσ εχθίστα δη μσι' 
 ώ ννζ, ώ δείπνων άρρητων 
 εκτταγΧ άχθη* 
 τούς εμος ϊδε πατήρ 
 
 195 
 
 200 
 
 205 
 
 who, aware of the adulterous inter¬ 
 course between .^gisthus and Cly- 
 tsemnestra, had fearful anticipations 
 of what would be the results. The 
 preposition iv common to νόστοις 
 and Koirais. (Metre : spondaic ana¬ 
 paests, cat. or acat. terminated v. 
 200 by an ithyphallic.) 
 
 195. κοίτη, a convivial couch. Cf. 
 
 infr. 203. Neue compares Eur. 
 Hippol. 743 · άμβρόσιαι χ€·· 
 
 ονταί Ζηνος μΐΧάθρων τταρα κοίταις. 
 
 196. οί, him, to be elicited from 
 ττατρωαις. The hiatus is defended 
 by epic practice, and by Trach. 648. 
 a be oi φίλα bapap, &C. W. Dindorf 
 adds AEsch. Ag. 1147. τ^^ρφά\οντό 
 oi πτ€ροφόρον be μας, (to which hiatus 
 Peile decidedly objects.) ore oi, Herm. 
 ex conject. Wund. Dind. (in Annot.) 
 ore σοι, libri. Gaisf. Neue. 
 
 Ib. άνταία. Cf. Peile ad Choeph. 
 175. Blomf. Gl. in Th. 890. 
 
 197. yevvoiv, hatchet, Infr. 484. άμ~ 
 φηκης γέννς. Phil. I 204. ξίφος η yevvv. 
 
 Ib. ωρμάθη, motus est. Neue. 
 
 198. bόλoς ην 6 φράσας. ScHOL. ; 
 b 6 λoς 6 φpaσάμevoς {dictated, taught, 
 inspired the thought) την ίστίασιν, ev 
 Ώ άνηρ 4 θη. 
 
 Ib. epoy ό κτeίvaς, Haupt classes 
 €ρος among the many words and 
 forms of words (such as ξeΊvoς, alel, 
 κeίvoς, μοννος, Θρηκ€ς, μίσσος, τόσ- 
 σον, πρόσσω, ανης and avre, ζόη, ττο- 
 λιητης, &C.) which the tragedians 
 borrowed from their predecessors, 
 the epic poets. Cf. Elmsl. ad Med. 
 149. 50. ^ ^ 
 
 198—9. beivav — μορφάν. Uorri- 
 ficam horrifice procreantes sceleris 
 formam, Herm. beivav beivwj as Phil. 
 166. arvyepov στυyepως, &C. 
 
 199. eir ovv — eire. Cf. infr. ^ 60 . 
 OEd. T. 1049. βροτων (τις), see 
 Matth. §. 320, 3. 
 
 200. Neue compares Eur. Phoen. 
 1031. φόνιος, eK 6 ea>v ος τάδ’ ην 6 
 πράξας. Cf. Wunder ad Antig. 239. 
 
 201. Keiva ape pa, the day on 
 which the murder previously hinted 
 at by the chorus was committed. 
 Cf. Matth. II. p. 773. See also 
 Arist. Pac. 556, &c. 
 
 204. eWayX’ (ScHOL. : peyaXa) 
 όχθη. yp. eKnayXa πάθη. 
 
 205. * τους, i. e. a belnva. Vid. 
 Matth. §. 440.’ Wund. (metre: 
 dochmiac.) 
 
22 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 θανάτους αικύς δίδύμαίν χβφοΐν^ 
 
 ^ \ of 
 
 αι τον βμον eiAov ρων 
 ττρόδοτον, αί μ άττώλβσαν’ 
 οίς θβος 6 μάγας * Ολύμπιος 
 ποίνιμα ττάθβα τταθβΐν πόροι' 
 μηδύ ποτ αγλαΐας άποναίατο 
 ToiaS άνύσαντβς epya. 
 
 ΧΟ. φράζου μη πόρσω φωνβΐν. 
 ού γνώμαν ίσχβις, ίζ οΐων 
 τα παρόντ οίκβιας βΙς άτας 
 όμπίπτβις ούτως αΙκώς ; 
 πολύ γάρ τι κακών ύπβρεκτησω, 
 σα δυσθύμω τίκτουσ aei 
 ψνχα πολβμονς' τα δβ τοΐς δυνατοϊς 
 
 Ί 
 
 210 
 
 UVT. γ. 
 
 215 
 
 2 ο 6 . θανάτους αΙκβΐς (ρΙιΐΓ. for sin¬ 
 gular often used, when death by vio¬ 
 lence is meant. Cf. Ell. in voc. and 
 Monk’s Alcest. 907). Trach. 1256. 
 (Wund. ed.) αίνους θανάτους. For 
 the word αΙκΰς, cf. Griffiths ad 
 iEsch. Prom. 472. αΙκ€Ίς, Herm. 
 dftfcets, vulg. 
 
 Ib. bί^υμaιv χειροίν. ScHOL. : της 
 Κλυταιμνήστρας κα\ του Αίγίσθου : part 
 for the whole. 
 
 207—8. αί τον — πρόδοτον. ScHOL. : 
 ττάνυ π€ριπαθώς' αϊτιν€ς χ^Ιρ^ς, αι άν- 
 ίΚοΰσαι τον 'Ayapepvova, τον Ιμον βίον 
 avelXov, καί ττροίδωκαν τοΊς ζχθρο’ΐς. 
 EUendt renders βΓλοι/, irritum fece- 
 runt, πρόδοτον, desertum et ope desti- 
 tutum. 
 
 210. ποίνιμα. On adjectives of 
 this form, see Blomf. Gl. ad Ag. 
 395. The alliteration in this verse 
 is worthy of notice. 
 
 211. αγλαΐας. ScHOL. : ήδονης, 
 δόξης. With άποναίατο {άπονίνημι, 
 commodum creo : Med./rMciwm capio, 
 Ell.) cf. Aj. 842. ολοίατο, QEd. T. 
 
 1274. γνωσοίατο, &C. 
 
 213. φράζου, beware, be upon your 
 guard. Cf. infr. 383. 
 
 214. ου γνώμαν Χσχ^ις, do you not 
 
 perceive, understand: οΐων sc. 
 
 αγαθών. 
 
 215. οικείας, of your own creation. 
 Aj. 260. οίκεΐα πάθη, μηδενος άλλου 
 παραπράξαντος. Ib. 919· CEd. C. 765. 
 τα παρόντα, i. q. τα νυν, now. 
 
 216. αΙκώς, Herm. άεικώς, vulg. 
 
 217· πολύ. EUendt notices this 
 
 as the only instance in Sophocles of 
 πολύς used substantively in the sin¬ 
 gular number. For τι, ethicum, see j 
 the same lexicographer in voc. τις V. i 
 3, and cf. infr. 1275. Tr. 963. Aj. > 
 1266. f 
 
 218. δύσθυμος, missmuthig, de¬ 
 jected, discontented. Herm. ί 
 
 219. πολέμους, contentions, sc. with i 
 Higisthus and Clyt»emnestra. 
 
 219-20. I understand: ja δε 
 [εριστα) τοΐς δυνατοϊς, but contentions 
 with the powerful, ούκ εριστα πλάθειν, 
 are contentions not to be approached: 
 
 ••’Si*· 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 23 
 
 ούκ ipLara ττλάθ^ίν, 220 
 
 ΗΛ. δ€ίΡ0Ϊ9 ηναγκάσθην^ SeLVoh' 
 e^oiS^ ού λάθβί μ οργά. 
 άλλ’ eV γαρ δβινοΐς ού σχησω 
 ravras ατας^ 
 
 οφρα μ€ βίθ9 €χΎ). 2 25 
 
 TiVL γάρ 7 Γ 0 Τ αν^ ώ φιλία yeviOXa^ 
 πρόσφοροι/ άκούσαυμ * l^os*, 
 
 and much to the same effect, Wun- 
 der: αΰται be ai epibes τοϊς bwarois 
 oi/K epioTai elaip, ώστε π€\άζ€ΐρ αυτοίς. 
 
 Cf. Matth. §. 532, d. for infin. 
 epiara, gl. μάχιμα, likadeiv, gl. epi- 
 ζειν. 
 
 2 20. πλάθβιν. Suidas : π\ησίάζ€ΐρ, 
 προσ7Τ€\άζ€ΐν. Cf. Monk ad Alcest. 
 119. 
 
 222, opya (jjp οργίζομαι), the vehe¬ 
 ment impulse by which I am borne 
 along. 
 
 223. On αλλά γάρ, see infr. 595. 
 
 223—4. σχησω ravras άτας (gl. 
 
 κρατήσω θλίψ€ΐί), I will not restrain 
 these lamentations, which are so cala¬ 
 mitous to me. For σχησω, cf. infr. 
 242. Elmsley’s Heracl. 924. 
 
 22^. οφρα — €χτ]. On the omission 
 of the particle ά,ρ, see Hart. II. 292. 
 Ellendt I. 124. 
 
 226-8. Wunder renders: quis 
 est enim, qui quidem recte sentiat, a 
 quo opportunum verbum audiam? and 
 explains as a denial on the part of 
 Electra, that any of those, with 
 whom she is in the habit of living, 
 can console her for her misfortunes. 
 I differ at all times with sincere dis¬ 
 trust from my learned predecessor, 
 but this explanation does not appear 
 to me to harmonize altogether with 
 the context. The ‘ verbum oppor¬ 
 tunum,’ which Electra wishes to hear. 
 
 is, if I understand the passage cor¬ 
 rectly, a word which should fall in 
 with and be suited to her own des¬ 
 perate purposes of revenge and 
 grief;—and such a word she appa¬ 
 rently thinks she ought to hear from 
 a person who considers things as 
 they belong to times and circum¬ 
 stances (φρορονρτι καίρια). The lan¬ 
 guage just addressed to her by the 
 Chorus was any thing but a word 
 of that description, and accordingly, 
 whatever of affection may be implied 
 in the terms φιλία yepeOXa, the word 
 τταράγοροι at V. 229. seems one of 
 bitter irony. The resolute avowal 
 of Electra in the verses which follow 
 the use of that word, and the milder 
 reply of the Chorus, concur, I 
 think, in pointing out the above as 
 a reasonable exposition of this some¬ 
 what difficult passage. 
 
 226. τίρι yap, from whom in sooth. 
 Cf. Ell. I. 337. Other passages 
 will occur in which a similar sense 
 must be given to the particle yap. 
 
 Ib. τίρι (SoHOL. : παρά τίρος) 
 άκουσαιμ ap. For aKoveip thus con¬ 
 structed with a dative, cf. Matth. 
 §.394,3. Kiihn. §. 585, 2. Anm.4. 
 Bernh. 77. Mus. Crit. 4. p. 535. 
 
 227. πρόσφορορ, suitable, befitting. 
 Cf. Peile ad Choeph. 693. 
 
24 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 TLVL φρονονντί καίρια ; 
 
 
 avere μ!, avere, παράγοροι. 
 
 
 Tade γαρ αλυτα κ€κλησ€ται' 
 
 230 
 
 ov 8 e ποτ βκ καμάτων άποπανσομαι 
 
 
 άνάριθμος ώδβ θρήνων. 
 
 
 AU. αλλ ουν evvoia y αυοω, 
 
 επωί"*, 
 
 i 
 
 μάτηρ ώσβί τις πιστά. 
 
 
 μη TLKT61V σ άταν άταις. 
 
 235 
 
 ΗΛ. Kcu τί μβτρον κακ 6 τητο 9 βφυ ; φ€ρ€, 
 ττώί €7 γΪ τοίρ φθιμβροις' άμβλβΐρ καλόν ; 
 
 ίν TLVL TOUT ββλαστ ανθρώπων ; 
 μητ €ίην ^Τίμο 9 tovtols^ 
 
 μητ\ €Ϊ τω πρόσκβίμαί χρηστφ, 240 
 
 ζννναίοιμ! βνκηλο^, γονόων 
 
 2 28. φρονοΰντι καίρια. Cf. Dissen 
 ad Find. ΟΙ. III. 17. 
 
 230. κ(κ\ησ€ται. On κίκλημαι as a 
 graver sort of circumlocution for 
 elpl, see Ell. in voc. Monk ad Hipp. 
 2. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 247. Schleus- 
 ner in voc. 
 
 231. CK καμάτων άποπανσομαι. Cf. 
 infr. 291. 987. Kiihn. §. 513. 
 Anm. I. 
 
 232. άνάριθμος (^countless, without 
 stint or measure) θρήνων. Cf. (Ed. 
 T. 179. Tr. 247. Matth. §. 339. 
 Kiihn. §.313. Anm. 3. ωδβ, as you see. 
 
 233. evvoia, from good will. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 397 * M^ith αλλ’ ovv — ye, 
 cf. infr. 1035. Antig. 84. Phil. 
 
 1305· 
 
 235. TiKTeiv arav (eV'i) άταις. Cf. 
 Aj. 866. Eur. Phoen. 1310. Matth. 
 §. 403. Obs. 
 
 236. General meaning: And what 
 compass or measure has this mis¬ 
 fortune (κακότης, cf. (Ed. C. 525.) 
 that I should mourn over it by 
 measure ? Immeasurable misfortunes 
 
 require immeasurable griefs. Cf. 
 Peile ad Ch. 777. 
 
 237· eVlrois φθιμ€νοις άμ€\€'ίν=τών 
 φθιμάνων d/xeXeli/. Cf. Matth. §. 348. 
 Obs. 2. Ellendt in voc. ini cum 
 dat. 6. 
 
 238. €βλα<ττ€, prevailed as a cus¬ 
 tom. Cf. infr. 1095. 
 
 240. τω πρόσκ€ΐμαι χρηστω. If 
 I am in the use or enjoyment of any 
 blessing, benefit, advantage, &c. Cf. 
 infr. 1040. Wunder ad (Ed. C. 
 1493. Antig. 1230. 
 
 241. ξυνναίοιμ (gl. συν 8 ιάγω) ev- 
 κηλος, may I quietly, securely dwell 
 with, i. e. securely possess, or be par¬ 
 taker of that blessing. 
 
 241“4’ "ίαχονσα nrepvyas γόων (re¬ 
 straining the course of lamentation) yo- 
 νόων (for my deceased parent), iicri- 
 μονς (so as that those lamentations 
 should be a dishonour to him, cf. sup. 
 18). And so Ellendt: Χ(τ\ονσαητ€- 
 pvyas γόων ωστ€ μή τιμάν tovs yoveas. 
 Withπre/^^;yαf■yόωJ/,compareHorsley’s 
 version and note on Hosea iv. 19. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 25 
 
 €κτίμους ίσχονσα πτέρυγας 
 οξύτονων γόων. 
 
 el γαρ 6 μβν θανων γα re καΐ ού8^ ών 
 Keiaerai τάλας, 
 οΐ 8e μη πάλιν 
 δώσουσ άνηφόνονς Βίκας^ 
 
 V » »' » Οι ' 
 
 eppoL τ αν αώως 
 απάντων τ’ βύσβββια θνατών. 
 
 ΧΟ. έγω μ€ν, ω παΐ, καΐ το σον σπβνδονσ άμα 
 KOU τονμον αυτής ηλθον' el Be μη καλώς 
 λέγω, συ νίκα. σοΙ γάρ έψομβσθ άμα. 
 
 ΗΛ. αΙσγυνομαί μ^ν, ώ γυvaΐκeς, et Βοκώ 
 
 πολλοΐσυ θρηνοις Βυσφορβΐν ύμΐν άγαν. 
 άλλ* η βία γάρ ταυτ άvaγκάζeL μe Βράν, 
 σύγγvωτe. πώς γάρ ητίς eυγevης γυνή, 
 πατρω ορώσα πηματ, ου Βρωη ταΒ αν, 
 άγω κατ ημαρ καί κατ eύφpόvηv ae\ 
 θάλλοντα μάλλον η καταφθίνονθ* όρώ ; 
 
 244 
 
 250 
 
 255 
 
 200 
 
 244 · mere ashes. (Metre in 
 this and preceding verse : doch- 
 miac.) 
 
 248. άρτιφόνονί δίκας, punishment 
 in return for the murder which they 
 committed. Matthise compares Phil. 
 1154. άντίφονον στόρα (ίϋ mouth which 
 commits murder for previous murders). 
 metre: glycon. 
 
 249. eppoL T av αΙδωί, i. e. αΙδώς τ 
 
 αν €ppoi. Ellendt suggests, that 
 άττάντύορ ^νσίβζία are to be joined, 
 and rendered qualiscunque. 
 
 250. Metre: antispast. and penth. 
 iamb. 
 
 251. TO σον σπ€νδονσα, pursuing 
 your benefit, cf. Matth. §. 423· Eur. 
 Iph. in T. 579. (Markl. edit, with 
 Person’s note.) 
 
 252. τονμον avrrjs. Cf. Blomf. ad 
 
 Sept. cont. Theb. v. 629. Eur. Iph. 
 A. 404. (Camb. ed.) 
 
 253. σν νίκα, let your opinion have 
 the preference; and consequently de¬ 
 tail your sorrows without reserve. 
 
 Ib. croi yap ίφομ^σθ^ αμα, tibi C0~ 
 mites nos addentes sequemur. Ell. 
 for αμα ^σπ^σθαι, unaccompanied by 
 noun or pronoun, cf. (Ed. T. 471· 
 Aj. 814. For ^σιτ^σθαι, with prep, 
 cf. Tr. 563. ξνν ‘ΗρακλεΤ ίσπόμην. 
 
 255 · ηΌΧΚοΊσί θρηνοΐί, οη account 
 of my continual lamentations. By δοσ- 
 φορ€Ϊν Wunder understands afilic^ 
 tion, Brunck impotence or impatience 
 of mind. Cf. jEsch. Sept. c. Th. 
 780. επ’ oKyei δν&φορων, {impatient on 
 anguish. Griff.) 
 
 260. θαΚΚοντα. Phil. 259· V ^ 
 νόσος del τίθηΚζ κάπ\ μύζον epxerai. 
 
26 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 t 
 
 / 
 
 fj πρώτα μίν τα μητρος, η μ iyeivaTO, 
 βχθιστα συμβββηκβν' eha δώμασιι/ 
 
 €Ρ τοίς βμαυτης τοις φοι/βνσί τού πατρο^ 
 
 ^vu€LpL, κάκ τών 8 αρχομαι^ κάκ τώνδβ μοί 
 
 Χαβύν ff ομοίως koll το τητασθαι π 4 λ€ί. 265 
 
 €W€LTa ποιας ημέρας δοκβΐς μ! ayeti^^ 
 
 όταν θρόνοις Αϊγισθον Ινθακονντ ίδω 
 
 τοΐσιν πατρωοίς, ύσίδω S ίσθηματα 
 
 φορούντ βκβίνω ταύτα, καΐ παρβστίονς 
 
 σπ€νδοντα λοιβας, evff eKeivov ώλ€σ€ν, 270 
 
 ϊδω δε τούτων την τελενταίαν νβριν, 
 
 τον αντοεντην ημ\ν εν κοίτη πατρος 
 
 ζνν τη τάΚαίνη μητρί, μητερ εΐ γρεών 
 
 201 . τα μητρος = η μητηρ. Cf. 
 
 Matth. §. 285. EUendt II. 226. 
 
 Ib. η σ’ iyeivuTO. γ^ίνασθαι, said 
 of mother. Soph. Alcm. II. 2. (not in 
 Dind.) of father, Aj. 1172. (Ed. T. 
 1020, &c. 
 
 261—2. πρώτα μίν—ΐΐτα. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 603. Hart. II. 404. 
 
 262. συμβίβηκ^ν. Here and Trach. 
 1152. nearly equivalent to eVr/. 
 
 264—5. TOivbe — neXei. Gene¬ 
 ral meaning; and on them depends 
 the supply of my wants or the reverse. 
 For omission of article before λαβεΐν, 
 see Matth. §. 542. Obs. i. Ellendt 
 II. 243. For its insertion before τη- 
 τάσθαι, cf. infr. 1023. 
 
 265. τηταν (τητη = σπάρΐί), to de¬ 
 prive. Hes. Op. 406. Find. Nem. 
 X. 146. (Ed. C. 1200. 1618. 
 
 266. ημέρας ayciv. Cf. (Ed. T. 
 
 774 · 
 
 267. Cf. Od. HI. 304. Eur. El. 
 321. for fact, and observe changes 
 in the verb ϊδω. (ισίδω ad v. 268. 
 ιδω again ad v. 271. 
 
 268-9. (σθηματα φορονντ (Κ(ίνω 
 
 ταντά. Musgrave and Wunder un¬ 
 derstand of robes usually worn by 
 monarchs, by .Egisthus as well as 
 by Agamemnon : the Scholiast, of 
 .Egisthus wearing the robes previ¬ 
 ously worn by Agamemnon him¬ 
 self. Euripides in his Electra (321.) 
 is content to let .Egisthus wield the 
 same sceptre as Agamemnon, and 
 drive the same carriage as had be¬ 
 longed to him. For construction, 
 cf. MattK. §. 385. 
 
 269. παρ^στίονς, at the altar or 
 hearth. 
 
 271. τοντων, (i. e. .Egisthus and 
 Clytsemnestra. Cf. infr. 361. tovtols 
 ύπ€ΐκάθοιμι.) την TeKcvTalav, the last, 
 the greatest, the most intolerable. 
 
 272. αντοξντην, Br. and Schol. av- 
 τοφόντην, libri. the actual murderer. 
 Cf. Peile ad Ag. 1541. and see 
 Schleusn. in voc. (Ed. T. 107. τους 
 avToevTas. 
 
 273. ξυν. For different opinions 
 as to the usage of ξ and σ in this 
 preposition, see Pors. ad Med. 11. 
 Elmsley in Prsef. (Ed. R. p. 12. ad 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 27 
 
 τούτην προσαυδάν τψδε συγκοιμωμβνην' 
 
 η δ* ωδ€ τλημων, ωστβ τφ μιάστορι 275 
 
 ζύν€στ\ *^ρινύν ουτιν €Κ(Ι)οβονμ€νη’ 
 
 άλλ\ ωσπβρ βγγβλώσα τοΐς ττοιουμ^νοι^, 
 
 evpova βκβίνην η μύρον ^ βν y τοτ€ 
 
 τΓοτύρο τον ομον €Κ δολον κοτβκτονβν, 
 
 τούτη χορούς ίστηοη kcu μηλοσφογβΐ ^Sc 
 
 θβοΐσίν βμμην ίρο τοΐς σωτηρίοις, 
 
 ύγω δ’ ορώσ η δύσμορος κοτο στύγος 
 
 κλοίω, τύτηκο, κοτηκωκύω ποτρος 
 
 την δνστάΧοινον δοΐτ βΊτωνομοσμ^νην 
 
 Bacch. 52. Herm. Praef. in Aj. p. 19. 
 Ellendt in voc. Haupt. ad Trach. 
 
 5 ^ 7 · 
 
 27^. η δ’ ωδ€ τλημων, (ScHOL. τολ¬ 
 μηρά, αναιδής.') But she IS SO hold. 
 Monk (coll. Hippol. 280). See fur¬ 
 ther Ellendt II. 992. 77 δ’, Schsef. ηδ\ 
 vulg. For <B(rre, consult Ellendt in 
 voc. 2. a. 
 
 Ib. μιάστορι, ‘ One that carries a 
 curse with him, whether as the per¬ 
 petrator, or the avenger, of wicked¬ 
 ness : hence both an accursed person, 
 and the minister of a curseJ Peile 
 ad Choeph. 923. Cf.Klausen’s Theol. 
 p. 56. 
 
 278. fvpovaa, having calculated, 
 having found hy calculation. (jEschin. 
 13, 41. Xen. Mem. II. 5, 5. ττωλ^Ιν, 
 άττοδίδοσθαι του evpovTos, tO buy and 
 sell at the calculator's price, however 
 small.) Tore, in time past. Aj. 650. 
 
 κάγώ yap, bs τα deiv CKapTepovv rore. 
 Historians mention the 13th of Ga- 
 melion, as the actual day on which 
 the assassination took place. 
 
 279. ττατίρα τον αμον. Cf. infr. 
 588. 1496. Phil. 1314. Matth. §. 
 149. Obs. 2. Note. Blomf. Gl. in Th. 
 413. 
 
 280—1. μηλοσφαγ (1 ipa €μμηνα, of¬ 
 
 fers a monthly sacrifice (more parti¬ 
 cularly of sheep). Tr. 760. τανροκτο. 
 vei βους. 
 
 281. Ιίμμηνα. ScHOL. κατά μήνα. 
 Neue compares Luc. de Paras. 15. 
 ai TToXcis Tas μ^ν δι ctovs, Tas δε €μ- 
 μηνονς ίορτάς διατβλονσι. See also 
 
 Cic. de Fin. II. 31· 10^· 
 
 Ib. ipa, Θ. Wund. Dind. Upa, cod. 
 Pal. (‘ quod sine idonea causa Wun- 
 derus in ipa mutavit.’ Zick.) 
 
 282. η δύσμορος. For Elmsley s 
 opinion on metrical positions of this 
 nature, see Ed. Rev. No. XXXVII. 
 p. 73. 
 
 283. κλαίω. The opinions of va¬ 
 rious learned men on such forms as 
 κλαίω, καίω, €λαια, κλαω, καω, ελαα, 
 
 will be found in Ellendt I. 961. He 
 himself inclines to write κλαίω in the 
 dialogue, κλάω in the choruses. Haupt, 
 a recent writer, may also be consult¬ 
 ed on the subject. 
 
 284. την δνστάλαιναν δαΐτ ε’τΓωΐΌ- 
 μασμίνην, a feast bearing the name of 
 Agamemnon : the wretched Agamem- 
 nonian feast. Neue compares Eur. 
 Or. 999* T (Τΐωνυμα δίίτννα θν^στον. 
 Dindorf and Ellendt render εττωι/ο- 
 μασμίνην, famosam. On the article 
 to δνστάλαιναν, see Ellendt II. 250. 
 
ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 αυτή irpos αυτήν' ούδβ γαρ κλαΰσαι ττάρα 285 
 
 ToaovS οσον μου θυμο9 ηδονην φβρβί. 
 
 αυτή γαρ η λόγοισί γενναία γυνή 
 
 φωνοΰσα TOiaS i ^ονειδίζει κακά' 
 
 ώ δύσθεον μίσημα^ σοΙ μονρ πατήρ 
 
 τεθνηκεν, άλλθ9 δ* oyw eV πενθεί βροτών ; 290 
 
 κακώς ολοίο, μηδε σ εκ γόων ποτέ 
 
 τών νυν άπαλλά^ειαν οΐ κάτω θεοί, 
 
 τάδ* εξυβρίζει' πΧην όταν κΧύτρ τίνος 
 
 ηζοντ ^Ορεστην, τηνικαυτα ^ έμμονης 
 
 βοα παραστάσ ' ου συ μοι τώνδ' αίτια ; 295 
 
 ου σον ToS εστί τοΰργον, ητις εκ χερών 
 
 κΧεφασ ^ Ο ρέστη ν τών ερίών υπε^εθου ; 
 
 αλλ ίσοι τοι τισουσα γ αξίαν όίκην. 
 
 TOLadff ύΧακτεΐ, συν δ* εποτρυνεί πεΧας 
 
 286. ηΒονην φ€ρ€ΐ, receives for it¬ 
 self as a pleasure, {φίρα for φίρζ- 
 ται, as frequent in Sophocl.) For 
 sentiment the Scholiast compares 
 ./Eschylus : 01 re arevaypoi των ττόνων 
 epciarpara. 
 
 287. Χόγοισι yevvaia. ScHOL. €u- 
 yevrjs Xoyois και ον rrpd^eai. 
 
 288. τοιάΒ' — κακα, utters reproaches 
 to this effect. Phil. 382. κάξον€ΐδι- 
 σθ(\ί κακά. 
 
 289. Βνσθεον μίσημα, Cf. Blomf. 
 Gl. in Sept. c. Th. 170. Monk’s 
 Hippol. 408. Peile and Blomf. ad 
 Ag. 1054. (Parodied according to 
 the Scholiast in the * Garytades’ of 
 Aristophanes.) 
 
 290. ei/ TrlvOei. Inf. 847. τον iv 
 rrcvOei. 
 
 291— 2. €K yόωv άπαΧΧάττειν. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 353. Obs. i. sup. 231. 
 
 292— 3. kXvij — ηξοντ' Όρίστην. Cf. 
 Matth. §. ^48. For ηΧψ^ with a 
 verb finite, and the whole sentence 
 
 as it were suspended on it, cf. infr. 
 426. Phil. 710. QEd. C. T643. Tr. 
 41. (Enom. V. 2. (424 D.) 
 
 294. τηνικαντα δε. With δε thus 
 following what is called the protasis 
 circumstantialis, cf. CEd. T. 1267. enel 
 Be yfj €K€iTO τΧημων, Beiva δ’ ην TavOevB* 
 όράν. Cf. sup. 27. 
 
 297. νπ€ξ€θον, secretly removed. 
 
 298. %σθι — τίσουσα, know that you 
 will pay. Matth. §. 548, 2. Blomf. 
 Gl. in Ag. 1660. The particle ye, as 
 Ellendt observes, ought to have been 
 placed after αξίαν or Βίκψ. For nu¬ 
 merous other examples of this par¬ 
 ticle in hyperhatOy or out of its right 
 position, see the same lexicographer, 
 I. 349. 
 
 299. τοιανβ' vXaKTei. ScHOL. ep- 
 μανώς και άναιΒώς βοα, ώί κνων. Eur. 
 Ale. 760. άμουσ' νΧακτων. F. Jacobs 
 compares Anthol. Pal. V. 106. ypaia, 
 φίΧη OpeTTTeipa, τί μου προσιάντοί ύλα- 
 KTeis; cf. Peile ad Ag. 1602. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 29 
 
 6 κλβίροί αύτΎ} ταντα νυμ(Ι)ίθ 9 τταρωρ, 3^0 
 
 ό ττάντ avc^KL9 ovtos‘, η τταχτα βλάβη, 
 
 6 συν γυναίζί ray μάχας ττοιονμ^νος, 
 
 Ιγω S Όρ^στην τώι/δβ ττροσμένουσ aei 
 
 ττανατηρ βφη^βιν η tciXcclp (πτολλνμαί* 
 
 μβλλων γαρ aei δράν τί ray ονσας re μου 305 
 
 K0U τα^ aTTOUcray ελττίδα^ διβφθορβυ» 
 
 eV οδρ T0L0VT0L9 οντβ σωφρορβίρ^ φιλαι, 
 
 οντ eucrejSetl· ττάρβστιρ' άλλ ep tol κακοΪ 9 
 
 ΤΓολλη γ άράγκη κάτητηδβυβίΡ κακα. 
 
 299* Cf. infr. 74^· A]· 959* 
 
 1288. Bernhardy, p. Ι 97 · 
 
 • 300. ό k\€iv6s &c. On the indig¬ 
 nation and sarcasm expressed by 
 this mode of construction, see Matth. 
 §.276. TavTUj Blomf. e conject. ταϋ- 
 τα, libri. 
 
 301. ττάντ άνα\κΐ9. CEd. Τ. 1197 * 
 ττάντ ^νΒαίμων. Aj. 9^1· τται/τ αϊδρίί. 
 For numerous other examples, see 
 Lobeck ad Aj. 1415. With the word 
 ανάλκις, cf.Od.III.3 lO. {άνάλκώο: Al- 
 
 γίσθοιο^ AEsch. Prom. 868. Ag.1224· 
 Pind. 01. I. 130, &c. 
 
 Ib. η πάσα βλάβη (merum scelus, 
 WuND.) Phil. 622. Kiivos, η πάσα 
 βλάβη. 927. πάν άϋμα. Theoc. III. 
 18. πάν λίθος. Cf. Monk’s Hippol. 
 680. 
 
 302. τάς μαχας ποιουμ^νος^ SUttS 
 pugnas, quascunque facit. Ell. The 
 learned lexicographer has made an 
 elaborate attempt to establish middle 
 senses to ποίΐίσθαι, but, as Passow 
 observes, the middle senses found 
 for ποιζίσθαι are frequently very far 
 fetched, often entirely fail, and that 
 in fact there is frequently no differ¬ 
 ence between the active and middle 
 
 verb. With τάς μαχάς ποιούμενος, cf. 
 Antig. 190. τους φίλους ποιονμεθα. 
 
 303 — 4 · Όρεστην προσμενουσ' εφη~ 
 ξειν. Find. Pyth. III. 28. ούδ’ εμειν' 
 ελθείν τράπεζαν ννμφίαν. Cf. Matth. 
 
 §. 537 · 
 
 305 * μ^λων άε\ 8ράν τί. W^ith per¬ 
 petual intimations that he is about to 
 do something of importance. 
 
 205 — 6 . τάς οΰσας τε μου και τας 
 απούσας ελπί^aς, mg pvesent and past 
 hopes. Wunder compares Eur. EL 
 564. where Electra being recom¬ 
 mended to pray to the gods, replies, 
 τί των απάντων ή τί των οντων περί ; 
 
 See also ad Antig. it 09. and Peile 
 ad Ch. p. 300. On είμϊ for πάρειμι, 
 cf. infr. 1498. 
 
 306. άιεφθορεν. For the transi¬ 
 tive sense, Neue refers to Buttm. 
 §. 114. Ellendt to Lob. ad Phryn. 
 
 P· 
 
 308. εν κακοΊς, in times of calamity. 
 €v Toi, Herm. Wund. Bind, εν τοίς, 
 libri. Gaisf. Neue. 
 
 309. επιτη^ενειν κακα SC. επιτηδεύ¬ 
 ματα, to he sinful in our practices and 
 “ habits. (The figure of speech, by 
 which the word κακά expresses two 
 
 h With this sense of the Greek word {π,τπΜματα, Horsley in his Notes to Hosea 
 (V. 4.) compares the Hebrew word D’Ste· 
 
Λ 
 
 SO ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΧΟ. (f)ep €t 7 re, TTorepov ορτος ΑΙγίσθου TreXay 310 
 
 AeyeiS* ταδ* ημΐρ, η βββώτο^ €Κ Βόμων ; 
 
 ΗΛ. η κάρτα, μη 86 k€L μ αν^ eiirep ην πβλα?, 
 θνραΐορ οίγνβίν' νυν S άγροΐσι τυγγάνΗ. 
 
 ΧΟ. ή καν βγω θαρσουσα μάλλον eV λόγους 
 
 TOV9 σούς ίκοίμην, βίττβρ ώδβ ταντ βχβι. 3*5 
 
 ΗΛ. ώί νυν άττόντο^, Ιστόρβι, τί σοι φίλον, 
 
 ΧΟ. καί δη σ βρωτώ, του καχηγνητου τί φη 9 , 
 
 such different meanings in the same 
 sentence, the grammarians call πλο- 
 
 Ib. πολλή γ’ ανάγκη, pauci libri, Br. 
 Herm. Gaisf. Ell. (whom see in voc. 
 ανάγκη.) πολλή ’στ ανάγκη, La. a sec. 
 man. Wund. Dind. Neue. Ιπιτη^€υζίν 
 i. q. θ(ραπ(υ€ΐν. Ell. 
 
 310-T I. πότ€ρον — ή. For nume¬ 
 rous examples of this construction, 
 see Ell. in voc. ή. 
 
 312. η κάρτα SC. βίβώτος — λβγω. 
 On κάρτα with verb expressed, cf. 
 infr. 1278. Trach. 412. With verb 
 understood, and η or κα\ preceding or 
 omitted, cf. CEd. Col. 65. κα\ κάρτα 
 {ναίουσί), roiSe τον 6eov γ βπώννμοι. 
 301. και κάρθ’ (sc. φροντίΒ' όταν 
 
 Trep τοϋνομ' αίσθηται τό σάν. Antig. 
 659 * y^P y ^yy^vrj φυσά Άκο¬ 
 
 σμα θρέφω, κάρτα tovs εξω γενονς. 
 
 313 · θνραίον οΙχνεΊν, would have 
 quitted the house, would have been 
 at the house gate. On the gender 
 of the word θυραων, cf. Phil. 157, 
 and see Blomf. ad Ag. 1022. On av 
 οίχνεΐν, cf. Ell. I. p. 121. 
 
 Ib. τυγχάνει. Cf. Scholefield ad 
 Pors. Hec. 782. Eur. Iph. Aul. 639. 
 (Cambridge edit.) Matth. §. 533. 
 Obs. 1. Elmsl. in Mus. Crit. I, 351. 
 Wund. ad Aj. 9. 
 
 314. 7 καν. La sec. Wund. η h' av. 
 La. prim. Dind. (Monk objecting to 
 
 η καν, proposes η τ άν, e, η τοι αν : 
 but cf. infr. 1279·) 
 
 3Ι4~ί5· Xo-yovs ίκεσθαι τιν\ S. 
 Tivbs, to converse with. 
 
 316. ως vvv άπόντος, ‘ cum geni- 
 tivo absolute ως causam faciendi indi¬ 
 cat, qua quis alius moveri possit 
 Ell. Cf. Phil. 884. (Ed. T. 11. 145. 
 Tr. 394. &c. 
 
 Ib. Ti. ^ This τις appears to be 
 used for the relative οστις.’ Matth. 
 §.488. Obs. * erravit Matthiseus: 
 sensus hie est: quccre ex me, id est 
 die, quid tibi placeat ex me comperire. 
 Wund. Bernhardy (p. 443.) com¬ 
 pares Eur. Phaeth. αΐτον τί χρηζεις. 
 Menand. inc. 10. εν^αι τί βονλει. 
 Dindorf also considering τι = ο τι, 
 refers to (Ed. T. 1144. Ellendt trans¬ 
 lates ιστορεί, licet ex me comperias. 
 Cf. Schleusn. in voc. 
 
 317. και djJ. Jam, jamjam, commo- 
 dum. Wund. Jam vero, atque jam. 
 Ell. The present example seems 
 rather to come under those, which 
 Hartung ( 1 . 235.) explains by so- 
 gleich, unverzuglich, implying instan¬ 
 taneousness, absence of dilatoriness. 
 
 Ib. Tov κασιγνητον. The Scholiast 
 understands περί. Cf. Kiihn. §. 528. 
 f. Bernhardy, p. 152. Wunder ad 
 Phil. 434. Aj. 1208. Iph. Aul. 1013. 
 (Camb. edit.) ^ 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 SI 
 
 η^οντος^ η μ^λλοΐ'το^, eldevaL θ€λω. 
 
 ΗΛ. φησίρ ye' φάσκωρ δ’ ov8eu ών Xiyei TroLei. 
 
 ΧΟ. φιλ€Ϊ yap OKvelv π pay μ άνηρ πράσσων piya. 320 
 
 ΗΛ. και μην eycdy €σω(τ^ eKelvov ονκ όκνω. 
 
 ΧΟ. Θάρσβί' 7 Γ€φνκ€ν €σθλθ9) οοστ άρκβΐν φίλοις, 
 
 ΗΛ. 7 Γ 6 ποίθ\ € 7 re/ τάν ού μακραν βζων eyco. 
 
 ΧΟ. μη νυν €Τ €Ϊ7ΓΎ)9 μηΒίν' ώ? δόμων όρώ 
 
 την σην ομαιμον Ικ ττατρο^ ταύτον φνσιν 3^5 
 
 Ύ^ρυσόθεμιν βκ τβ μητρο9 βντάφία χβροΐν 
 φβρουσαν, οΙα τοΐς κάτω νομίζβται. ^ 
 
 ΧΡΥΣΟΘΕΜΙΣ. 
 
 τίν αυ συ τηνδβ προ^ θυρώνος όζοδοις 
 
 318. ηζοντος ή μ^ΧΚοντοϋ. (ScHOL. 
 βρα^νροντοί') Cf. Matth. §. 5 ^ 9 * 
 
 319* ye' φάσκωρ δ’ (but 
 
 though repeatedly declaring'). On 
 the difference between φάσκω and 
 φημί, see Blomf. Gl. ad Ch. 87, and 
 cf. Elmsl. ad Eur. Heracl. 903. 
 
 320. Ίτράσσωρ. Schol. emxeipcop 
 πράττ€ΐρ. So CEd. T. 1454. 01 μ 
 άπωΧλντηρ (purposed my destruction). 
 CEd. C. 993· KTcipoi, wished to kill. 
 Arist. Pac. 212. ποιονρτωρ, i. e. TToie'ip 
 € 7 ηθνμονρτωρ. Cf. Markl. ad Eur. 
 Suppl. 324. 
 
 320. oKj/eij/. ^21. οκρω. Cf.Matth. 
 
 §· 24» ^ 5 * 
 
 322. apKeiP^-eirapKelp. Cf. CEd. C. 
 262. 
 
 323. eVei TOP. Schol. eVei rot ap' 
 el μη eOappovp. Ell. el μη eaBXbs εφυ, 
 (whom see generally on the silence 
 of the protasis conditionalis. I. iii. 
 I. 638.) Peile ad Ag. 988. explains 
 by the more usual άποσιωπησις, άλ¬ 
 λως. On τάρ, i. e. τοι ap, cf. Trach. 
 279. Blomf. ad Sept. c. Th. 179. 
 
 lb. ίζωρ ap, viverem, non vixissem. 
 Herm. Wund. Neue. ού μακρορ ^ζωρ, 
 non 4 am diu vixissem. Dind. 
 
 324. 8όμωρ, i. e, eK 8όμωρ. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 354. C. Kuhn. §. 512. 
 Bernh. p. 137. Elms, ad Eur. Bacch. 
 636. Wund. ad Phil. 605. With μη 
 pvp, cf. infr. 616. 
 
 325. φνσιρ, origin. Cf. infr. 112^. 
 Supply ονσαρ after Ik πατρος ravrov. 
 Cf. Neue ad Aj. 760. Wunder ad 
 Aj. 1231. On the omission of ar¬ 
 ticle, see Ell. II. 244. 
 
 326. ^τάφια, sepulchral offerings. 
 At V. 405. termed epnvpa; v. 931. 
 
 KTepiapara. 
 
 Ib. eK re μητρός. With this legi¬ 
 timate place of re after a preposition, 
 cf. infr. 599. 982. Phil. 185. 4^^· 
 700. 1294. CEd. T. 20. 33. &c. &c. 
 For a single aberration, see Phil. 
 1312. 
 
 327. Tois κάτω. Aj. 863· ra δ' άλλ* 
 ep "'Albov rots κάτω μνθησομαι. Antig. 
 
 75. 
 
 Ib. poμίζeτaι. gl. κατά ρόμορ Ιστί. 
 Cf. Peile ad Ag. 1009. 
 
 328—9. tip' av συ Tr}pbe - φωpeΊς 
 
 φάτιρ ; what language is this which 
 you have but just now been uttering ? 
 For this sense of rripbe, cf. Ellendt 
 in voc. obe, 2. c. who compares Phil. 
 
32 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 έλθουσα φων€Ϊ9, ω κασίγνητη, φάτιν ; 
 
 KOvS Ιν γρόνω μακρφ δίδαχθηναί 
 θνμω ματαίω μη χαρίζβσθαι κβνά ; 
 καίτοι τοσουτόν y οιδα κάμαυτην^ οτι 
 άλγώ Vi rots* τταρουσίΐ', ώστ’ αν, el σθ4νοζ 
 λάβοίμί, δηλώσαιμ άν οΓ αύτοΐ^ φρονώ, 
 νυν δ* iv κακοΪ9 μοι ττλβΐν νφ€ίμ€νη δοκβΐ, 
 καί μη δοκβΐν μβν δραν τι, 7Γημαίν€ίν δΐ μη. 
 τοιαΰτα δ* άλλα καΐ ere βούλομαι TTOieiv. 
 καίτοι το μβν δίκαιον, ούχ^ η *γώ λύγω, 
 άλλ* Ύ) σύ κρίν€ΐ9. el δ' eXevOepav μe δeΐ 
 ζην, των κρατουντών ίστ\ ττάντ άκονστύα. 
 
 ΗΛ. δeιvov σύ y ούσαν iraTpos ον σύ τταΐί ίφυ^, 
 Keivov λeλησθaι, της δ€ τικτούσης μeλeιv. 
 
 ■J 
 
 Is 
 
 1 
 
 335 ιΐ 
 
 340 
 
 1045· ό ξ€νος φάτιρ τηνΒ' eine. 
 
 With τίρα —τ^ι/δβ, cf. infr. 388 ; and 
 with φωΡ€Ϊρ φάτιρ, cf. infr. 1213. προσ~ 
 φωρ€ΐρ φάτιρ. ίλθουσα serves merely 
 to swell the phraseology. 
 
 328. προς θυρωρός ^ξόδοις is nearly 
 equivalent to προ πνλωρ, implying 
 that part of the atrium or fore-court, 
 where the gate afforded the means 
 of going into the public street. Cf. 
 Passow in θνρώρ. 
 
 330. θ€λ€ΐς = 8νρασαι. Cf. Tr.452. 
 Schleusner in voc. δύραμαι. 
 
 331. θνμω ματαίω χαρίζ€σθαι (to in¬ 
 dulge your perverseness) κίρα (useless¬ 
 ly). For the latter word Neue com¬ 
 pares Ant. 59. 493. (Ed. C. 259. 
 Phil. 52. 
 
 333-4. On ωστ€ placed with a 
 potential optative, and accompanied 
 by ap, cf. Aj. 213. On the double 
 ap, cf. Hart. II. 325. Kiihn. §. 458, 
 
 I. 
 
 334. 01’ αυτοίς φρορω, what is my 
 disposition towards them. 
 
 335. νφ(ΐμ€Ρ]3. ScHOL. μη oKop το 
 
 ΙστΙορ άραπ(τασάση. Cf. Elm si. ad 
 Med. 273. Monk ad Alcest. 540. 
 
 336. General meaning: And not 
 to wear an appearance as if I were 
 about to inflict a hurt without actu¬ 
 ally doing it. For bpap τι, cf. sup. 
 >303. Tr. t6o. 
 
 337. δ’ αλλά. When δε and άλλα 
 are in juxtaposition, αλλά is an ad¬ 
 verb, and is to be connected with 
 the words which follow. Ell. I. 
 
 396· 
 
 338. fj. Cf. (Ed. C. 1630. Tr. 
 
 SS 3 · 679· 
 
 339. ei μ€ δει, si me vis. Neue. 
 who compares Lucian Hermot. εϊ yi 
 μ€ δεΓ Xeyeip τάΧηθ€ς. Cf. infr. 1037· 
 
 340. τωρ κρατουρτωρ. Cf. infr. 39 ^· 
 1014. Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 18. For 
 sentiment, cf. Antig. 63—4. 
 
 341. beipop σε y ονσορ. Monk. Bl. 
 deipop ye σ' οδσαί', W^und. Hind. For 
 sentiment, cf. Trach. 1064. 
 
 342. της τικτονσης, qu<B peperit. 
 
 (Ed. T. 118.437. 3 ^ 9 * Neue. 
 
 ή τικτονσα non est, qua peperit^ sed 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 33 
 
 απαντα γάρ σοί τάμα νουθβτηματα 
 
 κείνης ^ώακτά-, κούδβρ €κ σαυτη9 Aeyets*. 
 
 eireiff iXov γβ θάτ€ρ\ η φροι^βΐ^ κακώς^ 345 
 
 η των φίλων φρονούσα μη μνημην €χ€ίν' 
 
 ητι,ς Aeyets* μίν αρτίων ώ?, el λάβοι^ 
 
 σθβνοί, το τούτων μίσο9 eK heL^e ia^ άν^ 
 
 4μον Se ττατρί πάντα τιμωρούμενης 
 ούτε ζννερδεις την τε δρώσαν εκτρεπεις. 35^^ 
 
 > ου ταυτα προς κακοΐσι δειλίαν εχει ; 
 επει όιοαξον, η μασ εξ εμού, τι μοι 
 κέρδος γενοιτ αν τώνδε ληζάση γόων ; 
 ού ζώ ; κακώς μεν, oiS* επαρκονντως δε μοι' 
 
 qua parit, i. e. parens. Wuxd. Cf. 
 infr. 533. Wund. ad Antig. 239. Ell. 
 ii: 220. The word seems to be here 
 used contumeliously. Cf. infr. 366. 
 
 Ib. μβλαν (ScHOL. φρόντιζαν) , have 
 a care for. Aj. 689. peXeiv pev ημών. 
 (where see Lobeck.) ^sch. Ag. 373. 
 ovK (φα τις 6€ονς βροτών άξιοΰσβαι μί~ 
 λαν. Cf. Blomf. Gl. ad Prom. 3. 
 
 343. σοι τάμα νονθ^τηματα^ your 
 chidings of me. So GEd. C. 332. ση 
 προμηθία, from anxiety on your ac~ 
 count. Ib. 1413· η ψη υπουργία, 
 the services rendered to me, &c. Cf. 
 Matth. §.466, 2. Peile ad Ag. 218. 
 For instances of the pronoun simi¬ 
 larly used in the Greek and Hebrew 
 Scriptures, cf. Rose in Parkhurst’s 
 Greek Lexic. sub voc. καύχησις. 
 
 344. κήνης bihaKTa, are suggested 
 hy her. Cf. Matth. §. 345. Kuhn. 
 §.516. Anm. 3. 
 
 343. ew€iTa, therefore. Matth. 
 §. 603. 
 
 Ib. edrepa, Attic for θάτ^ρον. 
 
 Ib. φρονΰν κακώς, to he of unsound 
 mind. 
 
 346. η φρονούσα (i. e. eo φρονούσα, 
 •being of sound mind) τών φίλων (Aga¬ 
 
 memnon sc.) μη μνημην (χ(ΐν. Cf. 
 
 Kiihn. §. 673, 2. 
 
 Ib. μη μνημην €χ€ΐν. Ellendt ob¬ 
 serves that a far better construction 
 would have been, μνημην μη €χ€ΐν. 
 For μη in hyperhato, cf. infr. 1483, 
 and more largely, Phil. 67. 
 
 349. πατρί τιμωρούμενης. Cf. infr. 
 399. As Sophocles uses the middle 
 verb in these two instances, so he 
 uses the active verb, CEd. T. 136. 
 
 γη Trjde τιμωρουντα τω^εω θ' άμα. 
 
 350 · οϋτβ ξυνίρ^ΐΐς (not only do 
 you not cooperate with), την re δρώ- 
 σαν (hut &c.). Other instances of 
 ουτ € —re occur infr. 1078. Phil. 1321. 
 i363.CEd.T.652. CEd.C. 1397. Ant. 
 763. efcrpeTrei?. ScHOL. : άποτρίπ^ις. 
 
 351. Does not this manifest cow¬ 
 ardice as well as wickedness ? €χ€ΐ 
 perhaps for παρίχ^ι. Cf. infr. 1286. 
 &c. 
 
 352. eVet δίδαζον. Cf. (Ed. C. 
 969, and Pass, in voc. 
 
 354. έπαρκουντως. Cf. Blomf. 
 Gl. in Pers. 480. δί μοι, Gaisf. 
 Wund. Dind. δ' ψοΐ, Pors. (Advv. 
 p. 209.) 
 
 D 
 
 t 
 
34 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 λνΤΓΟύ δ€ TOVTOVij 0)(ΓΤ€ τψ τ^θρηκοτί 355 
 
 ημά^ ΤΓροσάτΓΤΗΡ^ βί tls €στ ίκά χάρις, 
 σν δ* rjplp η μκτονίτα μισύς μβρ Xoycp, 
 
 €ργω δβ τοΐς φορβΰσι του ττατρος ζυνβι, 
 
 iy^ μ€Ρ ούρ ονκ αρ ττοτ, ονδ €ΐ μοι τλ crct 
 
 pjeXXoL τις οίσπρ δωρ\ icj) οίσι νυν χΧιδας, 360 
 
 τοντοις ν7Γ€ίκαθοιμί' (τοι δβ ττΧονοΊα 
 
 τράπβζα κβίσθω και ττβριρρβίτω βίος, 
 
 βμοί yap βστω τουμβ μη Χνττβΐρ μορον 
 
 βόσκημα' της σης δ* ονκ βρω τιμής τυχβιρ, 
 
 ούδ* αρ σν^ σιοφριορ y ούσα, pvp δ* €^QP ττατρος 3^5 
 
 ττάντούΡ αρίστου τταιδα κβκΧησθαι, καΧου 
 
 355 · λυπώ τούτους. SC. -^gisth. 
 and Clytaemn. 
 
 355—6. τω τίθνηκότι τιμάς ττροσ- 
 άιττ€ΐν. Infr. 43^· τούτων—τύμβω 
 ττροσά^ς μφύν. 
 
 356. ΐκύ, there, i. e. apud inferos. 
 Instances of this euphemism abound 
 in the Greek Tragedians. Aj. 855. 
 Eur. Med. 1073, &c. &c. Cf. 
 Blomf. Gl. in Ch. 353· 
 
 357. η μισούσα. Cf. SUp. ^OO. 
 ημΊν redundant or dat. ethic. On 
 the metrical position of μισ€Ίς μίν, 
 see Ed. Rev. XXXVII. p. 81. 
 
 360. δώρα, benefits. Phil. 117. ώ? 
 τοντό y €ρζας δυο φ^ρβι Βωρηματα. 
 
 362, σοΙ τν^ριρρίίτω βιος, let the 
 
 things which life requires overfiow to 
 you. ^ 
 
 363. Tovpe μη λυπεϊυ. Of three 
 interpretations given by the scho¬ 
 liasts, Heath, Hermann, Gaisford, 
 Wunder and Dindorf adopt the se¬ 
 cond : ‘ Let this be my only food, 
 viz. that I am not obnoxious to my¬ 
 self, by being compelled to obey the 
 murderers of my father.' But 
 Electra has her father so much in 
 her thoughts throughout the speech, 
 
 that Kayser’s adoption of the third 
 scholium (του μη \ντΓ€ΐν τον πατ/ρα) 
 deserves notice. ‘ If I am not de¬ 
 ceived,’ says K., ‘ \vnfiv is to be 
 taken absolutely : “ may this be to 
 me in place of affluent food, that I 
 do not annoy (my father).”’ Brunck, 
 referring to v.’ 355, ingeniously 
 reads: τονμύ viv {them, i. e. .^gisth. 
 and Clytsem.) \νπύν. Monk favours 
 Erfurdt’s correction, λυπουι/ : a cor¬ 
 rection to which Kayser justly ob¬ 
 jects, ‘ why should Electra tell us, 
 that she is content with food not 
 unpleasant to her ?’ 
 
 365. ούδ’ av συ. On omission of 
 verb, when easily supplied from the 
 context, see Ellendt L 114. Matth. 
 §. 599. 4. 
 
 365— 6. e^ov τταιδα κ€κλησθαι. ^ 
 €στι has generally the dative of the 
 person, as Soph. Aj. 1328, but El. 
 365. acc. and inf. as Eur. Ale. 482. 
 479.’ Matth. §.537. Eor quantity in 
 κ€κ^φθαι, see Pors. Or. 64· Elms- 
 ley’s Rev. of Hermann’s Suppl. v. 
 296, and cf. infr. 1193· 
 
 366— 7. καλού της μητρός. On the 
 general tendency of the Sophoclean 
 
I 
 
 ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 35 
 
 της μητρός' οντω γάρ φανβΐ TrXelxrTOLs κακή, 
 
 Θανόντα ττατβρα /cat φίλους ττροδονσα σούς, 
 
 ΧΟ. μηδβν ττρος οργήν, προς θβών' ώς τοΐς λογοις 
 
 eveanv άμφοΐν κέρδος, εΐ συ μεν μάθοις 37° 
 
 τοΐς τησδε χρησθαί, τοΐς δε σοΐς αυτή πάλιν, 
 
 ΧΡ. εγω μεν, ώ γυναίκες, ηθάς είμί πως 
 
 των τησδε μύθων* oiS αν εμνησθην ποτέ, 
 εϊ μη κακόν μεγιστον είς αυτήν Ϊ6ν 
 ηκουσ, ο τούτην των μακρών σχησει γόων. 375 
 
 ΗΛ. φερ* είπε δη το δεινόν, εΐ γάρ τώνδε μοι 
 μεΐζόν τι λε^εις, ούκ αν άντείποιμ ετι. 
 
 ΧΡ. άλλ* εζερώ τοι παν οσον κάτοι8 εγώ. 
 
 μέλλουσι γάρ σ\ εΐ τώνδε μη λήγεις γόων, 
 ενταύθα πεμ'φειν ένθα μηπο& ήλιου 3 
 
 φέγγος προσόφει, ζώσα S εν κατηρεφεΐ 
 στέγη, χθονος τησδ* έκτος, υμνήσεις κακά, 
 προς ταυτα φράζου, κάμε μη πο& ύστερον 
 παθούσα μεμφη. νυν γάρ εν καλώ φρονεΐν. 
 
 times to undervalue the mother in 
 comparison with the father, the pre¬ 
 sent editor had occasion to enter 
 largely in his ‘ Frogs of Aristopha¬ 
 nes.’ Neue quotes Eur. El. 937. 
 κάκΐΐνονς στνγω τους παίδας, οστις τον 
 μ€ν apaevos πατρος ονκ ωνόμασται, τής 
 8 e μητρος iv πόΧξΐ. 
 
 369· ττρος οργήν, angrily. Infr. 
 464· ττρος evae^eiav, piously, Cf. 
 Matth. §. 591, €. 
 
 371. πάλιν, on her side. QEd. T. 
 619. ταχνν del κάμ€ βούλωναν πάλιν. 
 
 372. ήθάς, gl. συνήθης. 
 
 373· (μνή^τθην, mentioned the thing . 
 
 375. σχήσ€ΐ, restrain. Schol. : 
 ^φίξίΐ, κωλύσ^ι. 
 
 370. τώνδ€, these evils with which 
 1 am oppressed. Elmsl. (Ed. Rev. 
 XXXVII. p. 79.) proposes, for 
 
 metrical purposes, el Se τώνδβ 
 μοι. 
 
 380. evOa — προσόψβι, uhi nunquam 
 aspicias. Matth. §. 608, 5. See 
 also Kuhn. §. 571. Anm. 3. §. 712, 
 2. Hart. II. 114. 
 
 ^Sl. κατηρξφύ, ScHOL. : KareaKC- 
 πασμ€ντ}, σκοτ(ΐνή. Cf. Antig. 884, 
 &c. 
 
 382. υμνήσ€ΐς κακά. CEd. Τ. 1273. 
 τοιαυτ ίφυμνών (ScHOL. : άνοιμώζων). 
 
 Cf. ^sch. Sept. c. Th. 6. Eur. 
 Med. 423. Troad. 385. Ruhnk. 
 Tim. Lex. Plat. 
 
 383. προς ταυτα φράζου, be cautious 
 therefore, or consider therefore ac¬ 
 cordingly. Matth. §. 391, β. Blomf. 
 Gl. in Pr. 1063. 
 
 384. παθουσα, strongly emphatic. 
 Ib. €v καλώ = καλόν =■ ίγκαιρον. 
 
 D 2 
 
86 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΗΛ. ?! ταυτα δη μβ kou βββονλβνι^ταί ττοιβΐρ ; 3^5 
 
 ΧΡ. μάλίσθ\ όταν irep oiKaS Κίγισθο^ μολη. 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’ βξίκοιτο τονδβ γ οΰνβκ ev ταχβί, 
 
 ΧΡ. TLV, ω τάλαινα^ τόνδ' ίττηβάσω λόγον ; 
 
 ΗΛ. βλθβΐν Ικβΐνον, βί τι τώνδβ δραν voel. 
 
 ΧΡ.^ σπως ττάθη^ τί χρήμα ; ττοΟ ττοτ el φρβνών ; 39° 
 
 ΗΛ. ότΓΟύί a(f) νμών ω? 7 Γρο(Τθ)τατ βκφνγοί, 
 
 ΧΡ. βίου δβ του τταρόντος ου μν€ίαν ; 
 
 ΗΛ. καλθ9 yap ούμο9 βίοτος ωστβ θαυμάσαι. 
 
 ΧΡ. άλλ’ ην αν, el συ γ 6υ φpoveΐv ηπίστασο. 
 
 ΗΛ. μη μ eκδίδaσκe τοϊς φίλοΐ9 elvai κακήν, 395 
 
 ΧΡ. άλλ* ου διδάσκω* τοΪ 9 κρατουσί δ eiKaOelv, 
 
 ΗΛ. συ ταυτα OoiTvexj' ουκ Ιμου9 τροττου^ XeyeL9. 
 
 ΧΡ. καλόν ye μόντοί μη αβουλίαν ^τeσe'ίv, 
 
 ScHOL. Cf. Matth. §. 577 * Schleus- 
 ner in voc. ip, 29. Iph. Aul. 1002. 
 (Camb. edit.) 
 
 385. η — και, num revera? Ell. 
 who observes that the Germans use 
 their word auch in the same way. 
 Eur. Or. 1324. η τοΟδ’ ΐκατι και βοη 
 κατα ariyas ; 
 
 387· iii<oLTo, let him come, rovhi 
 y ovviKa, as far as this matter is 
 concerned. Cf. infr. 787. Phil. 774. 
 Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 343. 
 
 388. τίνα — TOpSe Xoyop. Cf. sup. 
 328. Trach. 184. With (ττηράσω, 
 cf. CEd. T. 634. ri τηρ αβονλορ στά- 
 σιρ yXaaarjs € 7 Γηρασθ’ Demosth. ^ 02 , 
 13. πολλούί και θρασύς iiraipopcpos 
 Xoyovs. 
 
 390· φρ€ρωρ ; are you 
 
 in your right mind? Cf. Matth. 
 §. 324. Ell. II. 247. Eur. Hipp. 
 
 1016. κούΒαμου pip ηρ φρ^νωρ. 
 
 391. ώ? προσωτάτω, as far distant 
 as possible. 
 
 392. μρύαρ. On the elongation 
 of the last syllable, see Mus. Crit. 
 
 VI. 312. 
 
 393. ωστβ θανμάσαι. Infin. act. 
 for pass. (Matth. §. 535. Obs.), or 
 with Neue supply τιρά. On the 
 ironical καλό?, cf. Peile ad Ch. 680. 
 
 394. ei yc, certe si. Ell. I. 497 · 
 Cf. Hart. I. 396. After αλλ’ ηρ dp, 
 supply καλός. 
 
 396. Toiy κρατονσι δ’ (6κδιδάσκω) 
 
 ύκαθίΐρ. Cf. Trach. 1177* For ac¬ 
 cent to ύκαθύρ, see Elms, ad Med. 
 
 186, and far more largely Ellendt in 
 voc. ύκαθύρ, Dind. ^Ικάθαρ, Wund. 
 
 .ταυτα —ούτως, ωδε. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 471, 13, cf. infr. 1180. On the 
 word θωπίόΐΐρ, see Griffiths ad 
 ^sch. Pr. 937. 
 
 398. μη 'ζ αβουλίας πεσεΐν (infr. 
 429· αβουλία ττεσείν). Ellendt (II. 
 93·) observes ; ‘ cave μη πεσείι/ com- 
 ponas. Hoc dicit, pulchrum esse, si 
 cui fatale sit ut cadat, certe non im- 
 prudentia cadere’ (where see other 
 examples of μη joined according to 
 the learned lexicographer with a 
 substantive). 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 ΗΛ. πβσούμβθ*, el χρη^ ττατρί τιμωρονμβνοί. 
 
 ΧΡ. πατήρ Se τούτων^ oiba^ συγγνώμην ίχρι, 
 ΗΛ. ταυτ βστί ταπη προ^ κακών ewaLveaat, 
 
 ΧΡ. συ δ* ov)(L πείσει και συναινέσεις εμοι ; 
 
 ΗΛ. ου δητα. μηπω νου τοσονδ"^ είην κενή. 
 
 ΧΡ. χωρησομαι ταρ\ οίπερ εσταλην οδού. 
 
 ΗΛ. ποΐ δ* εμπορεύει ; τω φερεις ταδ έμπυρα ; 
 ΧΡ. μήτηρ με πεμπει πατρί τυμβεΰσαι χοας. 
 ΗΛ. πώς ειπας ; ή τώ δυσμενεστατω βροτών ; 
 ΧΡ. ΟΙ' εκταν αυτή, τούτο γαρ λεζαι θελεις, 
 ΗΛ. εκ του φίλων πεισθεΐσα ; τώ τοΰτ ηρεσεν ; 
 ΧΡ. εκ δείματός του νυκτερου, δοιεεΐν εμοί. 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ θεοί πατρώοι, συγγενεσθέ γ άλλα νυν. 
 ΧΡ. €χεις τι θάρσος τουδε του ταρβους περί ; 
 ΗΛ. εϊ μοι λεγοις την οφιν, είποιμ αν τότε. 
 
 37 
 
 400 
 
 405 - 
 
 410 
 
 399 * τιμωρούμενοι. For gender, 
 cf. Matth. §. 436, 4. Kiiliner (§. 
 430, c.) compares Trach. 491. Aj. 
 266. Eur. Iph. Aul. 828. Arist. 
 Eccl. 30. See also Bernh. p. 429. 
 For sense in middle voice, cf. sup. 
 
 349 · 
 
 400. συγγνώμην εχε I , grants pardon. 
 in Trach. 328. receives pardon. Cf. 
 Monk’s Hippol. 116. On 8ε, used 
 in answers direct or indirect, cf. 
 Trach. 729. Aj. 1141. 1150. 
 
 401. ScHOL. ; κακών εστιν επαινε- 
 σαι ταντα τα επη. For preposition, 
 cf. Aj. 319. Matth. §. 316, d. Obs. 
 
 402. σνναινεσεΐί, approve, assent 
 to. Cf. Blomf. Ag. 468. 
 
 403. μηπω for μηποτε. Soph. 
 Ter. X. (520, D.) μηπω μεγ εϊπης, 
 πρ\ν τε\εντησαντ idrjs. Cf. Pors. ad 
 Hec. 1260, and cf. ονπω for ουποτε 
 ad CEd. T. 594. 
 
 404. οίπερ — όδοΰ. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 324. rap’, i. e. TOi apa. 
 
 405. έμπυρα. ScHOL. : σπονΒάς. 
 τω, i. e. rivi. 
 
 406. χοαί τυμβευειν, to pour out a 
 funeral offering to a person on his 
 grave. Pass. Antig. 901. κάπιτυμ- 
 βίονί xpas ε8ωκε. Cf. Eur. Orest. 
 115. For construction, see infr. 
 686 . 
 
 409. εκ του = νπ6 του, by whom. 
 Matth. §. 362. Cf. Iph. Aul. 635. 
 (Camb. ed.) For τούτο read τοδ’. 
 Cf. Elms, in Ed. Rev. XXXVII. 
 p. 79. 
 
 410. ^οκεΐν εμοί. Cf. Matth. §. 545 * 
 Blomf. ad Pers. V. 251. 
 
 411. συγγενεσθε, assist me, be with 
 me (cf. JEsch. Ch. 30-45), αλλά v 8 v, 
 now at least. Cf. Ant. 55 ^· 
 
 II. 41. 
 
 412. θάρσος, cause for confidence. 
 περ\ του τάρβουί, in reference to this 
 terror of which you have just spoken. 
 
 413. ειποψ’άί/. Ed. Rev. XXXVII. 
 
 p. 80. 
 
38 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΧΡ. άλλ* ου κάτοώα, ττλην Ιτη σμικρόν φράσαι, 
 ΗΛ. λβγ άλλα τούτο, πολλά τοί σμικροί λόγοι 
 ίσψηλαν η8η κα) κατώρθωσαν βροτούί» 
 ΧΡ. Aoyo? τΐ 9 αυτήν ίστιν βΙσιδεΐν ττατροί 
 του σου τ€ κάμου δβυτόραν ομιλίαν 
 όλθόντος ey φως' ^Ιτα tovS βφβστιον 
 πηζαι λαβόντα σκηπτρον, ούφόρβι ττοτβ 
 ayroy, τανυν ο Αιγισσο9 €κ τ€ τουό ανω 
 βλαστβΐν βρύοντα θαλλον, ώ κατάσκιον 
 πάσαν γβνόσθαι την Μ.υκηναίων χθόνα, 
 τοιαυτά του παρόντος, ηνί\ η^ίφ 
 δβίκνυσι τοΰναρ, βκλυον ίζηγουμάνου, 
 πλ^ίω δβ τούτων ου κάτοιδα, πλην ότι 
 πύμπβι μ €Κ€ΐνη τοΰδβ του φόβου χαριν. 
 πρ09 νυν θβων σ€ λίσσομαι των ίγγ^νών 
 €μο\ πιθύσθαι, μηδ' αβουλία πβσβΐν. 
 
 €ΐ γάρ μ άπώσβι^ συν κακω μύτ^ι πάλιν. 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’, ώ φίλη, τούτων μίν ών e^e^y χβροΐν 
 
 4*5 
 
 420 
 
 425 
 
 430 
 
 414· σμικρόν. ScHOL. : άντ\ 
 τον π\ην των ολίγων. Cf. Matth. 
 
 §. 5^6. Bernh. 252. Ell. I, 651. 
 (who observes; ^ locutio a progredi- 
 endi notione ducta’). Lob. ad Ai. 
 1268. 
 
 417. λόγοί, rumour, report. 
 
 418. devrepav ομιλίαν (coetum.^^ihl,.). 
 ScHOL.: cos avOis αντου άναζησαντος 
 και τνροσομιΚησαντος. 
 
 419* ^φ^(Ττιον (i. e. en\ τρ βστια), 
 near the heai'th or altar. CEd. T. 
 32. ΐζόμ^σθ' ΐφίστιοι. (Cf. Wun- 
 der’s Emend, in Trach. p. 130.) 
 
 419-20. Sic explica : λαβ€ΐν σκη- 
 πτρον κα\ irrl τρ ύστια πηξαι. WuND. 
 
 421. re, moreover. Ell. in voc. II. 
 793. who also admits of §e for re. 
 
 422—3. ω — yeveaOai. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 538. For βρνοντα {pullulantem, 
 Ell.), see Blomf. Glos. in Ag. 
 163. 
 
 424. ηλίω. Eiir. Iph. T. 42. a 
 καινα δ’ ηκ€ΐ ννξ φίρουσα φάσματα, 
 λίξω προς ηίθάρ', et τι δη τόδ’ eVr* 
 άκυς. See also Bergl. ad Alciphron. 
 I. 8. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 207. in Ch. 
 971. 
 
 μ2 ^ .i^pyovpevov,declarantis.Wvis!O. 
 (ad Aj. 312.) exponentis et docentis. 
 Ell. 
 
 428. θίων eyyfvcov. Cf. Antig. 199 · 
 Aisch. Sept. c. Th. 582. 
 
 430. συν κακω. ScHOL. : κακού 
 σοι Tivos yevopevov. Cf. Slip. 374 * 
 
 Ib. μίτβι, send for, πάλιν, back. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 S9 
 
 τύμβω 7 Γροσ(ίψγ )9 μηδβι/' ού γάρ σοι θέμυς 
 
 ovS όσων ίγθρας άττο γυναικος Ιστάναι 
 
 κτ€ρίσρίατ\ αύδβ λουτρά ττροσφέρ^ιν ττατρί* 
 
 άλλ’ η ττνοαΐσίν η βαθυσκαφβΐ κόνβι 435 
 
 κρυφόν VLV, evOa μηποτ els* €ύνην ττατρος 
 
 τούτων ττρόσβισί μηδέν* άλλ*, όταν θάνη^ 
 
 κειμηλί αύτη ταύτα σωζέσθω κάτω. 
 
 άρχ^ν δ’ άν, el μη τλημονεστάτη γυνή 
 
 πασών ίβλαστε, τάσδβ δυσμενείς χοάς 44° 
 
 »ν ''Λ»» / Λ 
 
 ουκ αν που , ον γ εκτεινε^ τωο επεστεφε. 
 σκέφαι γάρ, εϊ σοι προσφιλώς αύτη δοκεΐ 
 
 432. ον yap σοι Bipis. Νο viola¬ 
 tion of Porson’s canon. Cf. Elmsl. 
 ad CEd. C. 115. On the position of 
 μη 8 ^, cf. Antig. 84. (Ed. C. 1737. 
 
 433. βχθράς άττο yvvaiKos. For 
 ancient opinion on the unwilling¬ 
 ness of the Manes to receive any 
 honours offered by enemies, cf. Aj. 
 1393, sq. On the preposition, see 
 Bernh. p. 222. 
 
 Ib. ιστάναι, constituere in sepulcro, 
 {.e. funder € libationes. Ell. 
 
 434. λουτρά=σ7Γονδάί. Cf. sup. 
 84. Brunch quotes Dioscor, Ep. 36. 
 αλλά ΤΓ^ριστΐίλας μ€ δίδου χθονί’ μηδ* 
 iiri ν€κρω λουτρά xejjs. 
 
 436. κρυφόν. Of the two sub¬ 
 stantives, joined to this verb, the 
 latter is obviously the most appro¬ 
 priate. On the zeugma generally, 
 see Bernh. p. 458. Lobeck ad Aj. 
 p. 429-431. Elmsl. ad Med. 672. 
 Heracl. 312. Griffiths ad AEsch. 
 Prom. 22. Dindorf supplies δος at 
 πνοαϊσι. Cf. sup. 182. 
 
 lb. evvfjv, bed for grave. A meto¬ 
 nymy common to all languages, 
 Hebrew among the rest (Ezek. 
 XXXII. 25). Cf. (Ed. C. 1706. 
 
 Peile ad Ch. p. 173. Griffiths ad 
 Sept. c. Th. 1004. 
 
 438. σωζίσθω κάτω. On termina¬ 
 tions of similar sound, whether ca¬ 
 cophonous or otherwise, cf. Lobeck 
 ad Aj. 726. κΐίμηλια ταΰτα, these 
 precious matters. 
 
 439 · ^ΡΧΨί altogether. For the 
 double av, cf. Matth. §. 600. τλημο- 
 ν^στάτη, most audacious. 
 
 440. €βλαστ€. (Ed. T. yiy. τταιδος 
 be βλάσταζ. Dobree suggests €βλαστ€ 
 πασών : but as Porson observes 
 (Mus. Crit. I. 334.) the two pas¬ 
 sages in Soph, would lose all 
 their energy by such transposition. 
 Buttmann (Gr. Gr. VII. 10. note) 
 compares .Esch. Pr. 172. peXi- 
 γλωσσος. Arist. Eq. 767. άντιβ€βλη- 
 κως. Mosch. III. 116. €γλνκάνθην. 
 See also Elms, ad Med. 288. 
 
 441. €πιστ€φ€ΐν, to pour round 
 the grave, thereby honouring its 
 inmate, as it were with a crown. 
 Pass. Cf. infr. 458. On ov — τωδβ, 
 see Matth. §. 470, 2. Antig. 463. 
 645. Phil. 87. Tr. 23. 820. 
 
 442. avrfj. Bothe, Dindorf, and 
 Bernhardy (p. 87.) join with ίπροσ- 
 
 i And 80 Monk’s translation: for consider, whether the deceased, who is in the tomb, 
 seems to you likely to receive these honours with a disposition favourable to her, by whom 
 he fell, and was ignominiausly butchered like an enemy. 
 
40 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 yepa raS ούν τάφοισι δβζασθαι νβκυς, 
 νφ' η9 θανων, άτιμος ωστβ δνσμβι^ης, 
 
 ^μασχαλίσθη, κάτη λουτροΐσιν κάρα 445 
 
 κηλΐδας Ιζβμα^βΡ, άρα μη δοκβΐς 
 
 λντήρι αύτΎ) ταΰτα τον φόνον φόρ^ιν ; 
 
 ονκ eanv, άλλα ταντα μίν μβθβς' σν δβ 
 
 τ€μονσα κράτος βοστρύχων άκρας φόβας 
 
 κάμον ταλαίνης, σμικρά μβν τάδ\ άλΧ όμως 45^ 
 
 άχω, δός αντω, τηνδ* άλιτταρη τρίχα 
 
 φιλώς, not with δίξασθαι : Wunder 
 constructs with δίξασθαι (cf. sup. 
 226, sq. Blomf. ad Ch, 750) ; Neue 
 considers it as belonging both to 
 ττροσφιλώί and δ^ξασθαι. 
 
 443· δ€ξασθαι. Cf. Matth. §. 5 *^^· 
 Phil. 1.329. Some editors (Elms- 
 ley among them, ad Aj. 1081. in 
 Mus. Crit.) prefer the future to the 
 aorist. 
 
 444. άτιμος ωστ€ δυσμ€νης, Wund. 
 άτιμος, ώστε δνσμ€νης, vulg. 
 
 445* ^μο,σχίΐΚίσθη, gl. ηκρωτηρι~ 
 άσθη. μασχαλίζξίν [μασχάλη), to mu¬ 
 tilate a body, more particularly by 
 cutting off the hands and toes, and 
 then hanging the united parts under 
 the shoulder. Cf. Blomf. Gl. ad 
 Ch. 433. The practice, in some· 
 portion at least, seems to have been 
 of great antiquity. Cf. Judges I. 7. 
 
 Ib. ini λοντροΐσιν, gl. eV'i καβάρσ^ι, 
 for purposes of purification. By per¬ 
 forming the mutilation above men¬ 
 tioned, and then wiping the bloody 
 sword on the hair of the person 
 slain, the manes of the latter were 
 supposed to be appeased, and the 
 murderer purified. Cf. Muller’s 
 Eum. p. 145. 
 
 446. i^€pa^€v, wiped, sc. Clytsemn. 
 The change of construction has been 
 illustrated in a former play. 
 
 Ib. apa — μη, id est fere quod μων, 
 non spero fore [dock wohl nicht). Ell. 
 who compares Antig. 632. ω παΓ, 
 TfXemv ψήφον άρα μη κλνων της /ϋίλ- 
 λονυμφον πατρ'ι λνσσαίνων πάρ€ΐ. Her¬ 
 mann in the same passage, after ob¬ 
 serving that apa μη is nearly the 
 same as μη by itself, except that apa 
 μη is a little stronger, adds: ‘utrum- 
 que est suspicantis id factum esse, 
 de quo sermo est.’ Cf. Matth. §. 
 614. Griffiths ad Sept. c. Th. 208. 
 
 447. Χυτήρια τον φόνου, releasing 
 her from the guilt of murder. Cf. 
 infr. 635. 1490. Matth. §. 344. 
 Wunder comparesEur. Hippol. 1449. 
 1450. Cf. Peile ad Ch. 42. 
 
 448. συ di. Cf. Phil. 449. 
 
 449. άκρας φόβας. In griefs of 
 recent occurrence it was usual among 
 the ancients to shear the hair to the 
 skin ; in those of longer standing 
 the ceremony in the text sufficed. 
 Compare generally the proceeding 
 in the poet’s Ajax, 1 τ 70, sq. 
 
 450. κάμου τάλαίνης. On the 
 omission of article, see Matth. §. 
 
 275· 
 
 451. άλιπαρη (ScHOL. : αυχμηρόν) 
 τρίχα, hair unfitted for the rite of 
 supplication, as not sufficiently ornate 
 and bright. Wunder compares Eur. 
 El. 183. σκίψαι ph nivapav κόμαν και 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 KCU ζώ /xct τον flop ον '^Xl^CUS rjGTKYjJXEVOV. 
 
 αϊτόν δβ προσιτίτνονσα yrjOev βνμβνη 
 
 Ύ}μΐρ apcoyop αντον €L9 €^θρον9 μοΧβΐν 
 
 KOU τταϊδ* Όρβστηρ mrepTepa^ X^pos 455 
 
 Ιχθροϊαν αντον ζώντ βττβμβηνα,ί ττοδι^ 
 
 07r(J)9 το XoLTTOP aVTOV a(f)P€ 0 )T€paL^ 
 
 χβρσί στ€φωμ€Ρ, η ταννρ δωρονμβθα, 
 
 οίμαι μ^ρ ονρ, οίμαί tl κακβιρω μ€λθΡ 
 
 τΓβμψαι τάδ* αντγι δνσττρόσοτττ δνάρατα' φο 
 
 δμω9 δ\ άδ€λφη, σοί β νττονργησορ τάδβ 
 
 βμοί τ άρωγα τω Τ€ φίλτάτω βροτώρ 
 
 ττάντίϋΡ^ €Ρ Α-ίδον κ€ίμ€Ρ(ρ Kotpcp ττατρί. 
 
 ΧΟ. προς βνσφβιαρ η κόρη Xeyer σν δβ, 
 
 el σωφρορησβίς^ ώ φίλη, δρασβις ταδβ, 4^5 
 
 ΧΡ. δράσω, το γάρ δίκαιορ ονκ ίχα Χογορ 
 
 Tpv'f^rf τάδ’ epoiv ΤΓεττλωι/. αΚιτταρτ], 
 Lb. Herm. Wund. Dind. λιπαρή, Br. 
 and others. On the quantity of the 
 word άλΙπαρη, cf. Griffiths ad ^sch. 
 Pr. 520. 
 
 452. ζωμα. From an observation 
 of the Scholiast, the hair and girdle 
 thus laid on the tomb seem almost 
 equivalent to the κλάδοι Ικτηριοι of 
 (Ed. Tyr. V. 3. ζωμα de vvv την ζώνην 
 brjXoi, ον το (ν^νμα, ινα τϋντω στίφη 
 τον τάφον άντ\ μίτραν' διδωσι yap το 
 ζωμα άντί ταινίας. 
 
 Ib. χλιδαΐί ησκημίνον, elegantly 
 adorned. On άσκίιν, cf. Wund. ad CEd. 
 C. 1585. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 187. 
 
 4^3. Compare generally ^sch. 
 Ch. 444. sq. προσπίτνονσα. Lb. Elms. 
 ((Ed. Col. 1732. Eur. Heracl. v. 77.) 
 Dind. προσπίτνονσα, vulg. Wund. cf. 
 infr. 1380. W^ith γηθ^ν, cf. Aiisch. 
 Sept. c. Th. 247. Eum. 904. 
 
 455* νπ^ρτίρας x^pos, with vie· 
 torious hand. Trach. 281. νπ^ρχλίον 
 res eK yλωσσης κακής. 
 
 456. Aj. 1348. ού yap θανόντι και 
 
 προσ^μβηναί σe χρη. Cf. infr. 835. 
 4^7—8. άφν^ωτίραις χ€ρσ\ν, more 
 
 liberally. 
 
 41^8. στίφωμΐν. ‘ corollis, libatione, 
 sacris faciendis honoremus ; inest ta- 
 men, ut στίφ^ιν sua significatione 
 constet, ponendi in sepulcro vel ad 
 sepulcrum faciendcR rei sacr(E notio. 
 Ell. Cf. sup. 441. 
 
 Ib. Βωρονμ^θα. Eur. Or. 1 17* EXej/»/ 
 σ άδίλφη ταίσδβ δωρβΐται χοαΐί. 
 
 460. 8νσπρόσοπτα, of ill-omened 
 
 aspect. 
 
 464. ττρόί €νσίβ(ΐαν, piously. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 591, e. Blomf. in Ag. 373. 
 
 466—7. TO yap δίκαιοι/ — 8ράν. I 
 understand : ‘ for it is not reasonable 
 to contest a matter of right and pro- 
 
^ΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤ2 
 
 42 
 
 δνοΐι/ βρίζβίν, άλΧ eirunrevSeiv το Spap. 
 π€φωμ€ρρ δβ τώνδβ των ί'ργων βμοί 
 σιγή τταρ υμών προ9 Θβών ίστω, φίλαι' 
 ώί el τάδ’ η Τ€κοΰσα vrevaeTat, πίκραν 
 δοκώ μ€ πβΐραν τηνδβ τολμησβιν €Τί. 
 ΧΟ. €1 μη *γώ παράφρων μανής βφνν 
 καΐ γνώμας λβνπομβνα σοφάς, 
 
 S t f 
 
 eixTLV a προρυαντις 
 
 Αίκα, δίκαια φ€ρομ€να \epolv κράτη' 
 
 ^ μβτβισιν, ώ τίκνον, ού μακρου χρόνον, 
 ΰπβστι μοι θράσος, 
 
 470 .. 
 
 Λ 
 
 (Γτροφ. ^ 
 
 ί 
 
 475 I 
 
 priety with two ^ persons (as in the 
 present instance, with yourself and 
 the Chorus): but to be prompt in 
 doing what is right is reasonable.’ 
 The construction seems borrowed 
 from Homer, II. IX. 389. * Αφροδίτη 
 κάλλος €ρίζζΐν. Od. V. 212. ovbe eoi- 
 Kcv θνητας άθανάτησι δέμας καΙ είδος 
 ερίζειν. 
 
 467· επισπενδειν το δραρ. For a 
 profusion of examples of similar con¬ 
 struction in Sophocles, see Ellendt 
 II. 222. sup. 251. TO σορ σπενδονσ 
 άμα κα\ τονμοΡ αυτής. 
 
 469—7®· τΓίκραρ — ετι. ‘ Hoc dicit : 
 
 άλγειρηρ δοκώ μοι ζσεσθαι τηρ τοΚμησίρ 
 ταντης τής πείρας.* WuND.more close¬ 
 ly : δοκώ (/ feel sure. Cf. infr. ^47.) 
 τολμήσειρ πεΐραρ τήρδε {that 1 shall 
 venture upon this undertaking) πικραρ 
 (to my cost) ετι {hereafter), πείραρ. 
 ScHOL. : τήρ επιχείρησιρ. Gl. Palat. 
 πρά^ιρ. (sic.) 
 
 472. Cf. CEd. T. 1086. Phil. 910. 
 infr. 1390. (metre : base. dim. chor.) 
 
 473. Metre : mol. chor. iamb. In 
 
 his recent work ‘ Metra .^sch.’ &c. 
 
 i 
 
 Dindorf has arranged these two verses . 
 somewhat differently. 
 
 474. γρώμας λειπομερα σοφάς, aban~ ' 
 doned of wisdom. ^ 
 
 475—6. πρόμορτις Δικά. ScHOL.; ή 
 προμαρτενομερη τα μελλορτα. ..'Esch. 
 Ch. 74 ®· τοντωρ πρόμαρτις ουσα. 
 
 476. φερομε'ρα {bringing with her) 
 κράτη. Cf. sup. 84. 
 
 477. μετεισιρ, will visit. ^Esch. j 
 Ag. 1637. άλλ’ ί’γώ σ* ερ νστεραισιρ 
 ήμεραις μετειμ ετι. Eur. Androm.260. 
 σφάζ*, αίμάτου θεάς βωμορ, ή μετεισί | 
 σε. (Metre : penth. iamb, and dim. ' 
 iamb, brachyc.) 
 
 Ib. ου μακρου χρόρου. CEd. Col. 
 397. Phil. 821. Matth. §. 377, 2. b. 
 Kiihn. §. 524, 2. 
 
 479. θράσος. Cf. Phil. 104. 
 479—80.. μοι — κλύουσαρ. .Esch. 
 Ch. 410. πεπαλται δ* αυτε μοι φιλορ 
 κεαρ τόρδε κλίιουσαρ οΐκτορ. Aj. 1006. 
 ποι yap μολεΊρ μοι, δυρατορ, .... rots 
 σοίς άρή^αρτ {άρή^αρτα SC.) ερ πόροισι 
 μηδαμού; Cf. Matth. §.55^· Obs. 
 
 k And so I since find Ellendt understanding the passage: quod jusium est^ rationem 
 non habet, cur quis cum duobus contendaty i. e. non est cur Electrae et vobis cedere nolim. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 43 
 
 άδυτΓρόων κλύουσαν 4^0 
 
 άρτιων ονειρατων. 
 
 ον γάρ 7Γ0Τ άμνα(ΓΤ€Ϊ γ 6 φυσάς 
 
 Έλλαι/ωι^ αναζ, 
 
 ουδ* ά τταλαια χαλκόττλακτος 
 
 άμφηκης yeVuy, 4^5 
 
 α PLV κατίπβφνβρ αιχτχίσταις eV αΙκΙαις. 
 
 ηζ€ί KOU ΤΓοΧντΓους /cat 7 Γθλν)(βψ ^ντ. 4^9 
 
 Kiihn. §. 662. Monk ad Alcest. 34. 
 Elms, ad (Ed. Col. 1435. Eur. Heracl. 
 693. Peile ad Ch. 398. Ag. 1582. 
 Griffiths ad ^sch. Prom. 217. 
 
 480. άδυπνόων. TriCLIN : (υφραν- 
 των ημίν. Cf. Wund. ad Phil. 811. 
 (metre ; logaced.) 
 
 481. άμναστύ, IS unmindful. On 
 the Doricism, see Ellendt’s Dissert. 
 II. 20. On the yc which follows, 
 {αμναστύ ere, Wakef.) see the same 
 lexicographer, who, with his usual 
 unwearied diligence, has traced this 
 particle after every mood of the verb. 
 
 482-3. Dindorf now joins these 
 two verses, as he does also the two 
 following, and considers the metre 
 as iamb. dim. and ischiorr. 
 
 484. χάΚκόπΧακτος, formed of brass. 
 For Doricism, see Ellendt’s Dissert. 
 II. 14. άμναστ€Ϊ, common verb to 
 both sentences. 
 
 483. yivvs, hatchet. For άμφψης, 
 see Lobeck in Aj, 286. Dindorf (in 
 Annot.) prefers άμφάκης. (Metre : 
 dochmiac, as at v. 483.) 
 
 486. αίσχίσταις ev αΙκίαις, La. Lb. 
 αΙ<Γ)(ί(ττ(ΐιο'ΐν αΙκιαίί·, cod. Pal. (* recte, 
 ut infr. 5 ^ ^·dativususurpatur. Zick.) 
 For disputes on the orthography of 
 α,ΙκΙα, see Ellendt in voc. M!us. Crit. 
 VIII. 671. Blomf. Gl. in Prom. 93. 
 Porson (Advv. p. 209.) reads aiKeiais. 
 Dindorf, in his recent work on me¬ 
 tres, considers the verse as glycon., 
 
 and refers to CEd. T. 1096. 
 
 489. και πόλνπονς και πολύχαρ' 
 (ScHOL. : πολλά ^ΐ€ρχομ(νη. τνολνχαρ’ 
 πολλά ^ργαζομ^νη.) By the first epi¬ 
 thet Ellendt understands the cele¬ 
 rity, by the second the certainty, 
 with which the Erinys executes her 
 purpose. May the present Editor 
 venture a suggestion of a very dif¬ 
 ferent kind ? To him the Chorus, 
 —still speaking, as it were, under 
 prophetic impulse,—appear by these 
 words to intimate the three persons, 
 viz. Orestes, Pylades, and the Pse- 
 dagogus, by whom the purpose of 
 the Erinys is to be achieved; for to 
 them rather than to the sister-furies 
 the words may, he thinks, be applied. 
 It would lead too far to insert all the 
 passages of Sophocles bearing on 
 the words χβιρ and πονς, on which 
 this opinion is Wnded: but—cf. Phil. 
 90, where by the words (q. ουφ 
 ivos ποδό?, the single person of Phi- 
 loctetes is opposed to that of a plu¬ 
 rality ; and in the present play, cf. 
 V. 206, where by two pair of hands 
 is confessedly meant ^Egisthus and 
 Clytsemnestra. The translation from 
 this view of the subject would be: 
 the Erinys, who now shrouds her¬ 
 self in ambush, will come, and with 
 more feet and hands than her own; 
 i. e. with more ministers of ven¬ 
 geance than herself. Neue illustrates 
 
44 
 
 ^ΟΦΟΚ ΛΕΟΤ:^ 
 
 ά δ€ίΡ0Ϊ9 κρυτττομ^να λόχοί9 49° 
 
 χαλκόπουί *KpLPV9. 
 
 αλβκτρ αρνμφα γαρ βπββα μιαιφόνωι^ 
 
 γάμων άμιλλημαθ* οίσίν ου θβμι^, 
 
 ττρο τώνδβ τοί μ βχβι, 495 
 
 μητΓΟΤβ μηττοθ' ημΐρ 
 
 ax/^iyes* ireXav τέρας 
 
 τοίς δρώσί καΐ συνδρωσιν. η tol 
 
 μαντύαι βροτών 
 
 ονκ βΐσιυ eV δβίυοΐς ον€ίροις 5^^ 
 
 ovS ίν θβσφάτοις, 
 
 el μη τόδβ φάσμα νυκτος ev κατασχησβί. 
 
 the text from Herodot. VI. 86. and 
 Aristot. Polit. III. ii. 9. 
 
 491. χαλκόπους. The Scholiast 
 refers the epithet to the hard and 
 unwearied manner, in which the Eri- 
 nys pursues the murderer. Aj. 837. 
 ταννπους 'Fjpivus. CEd. T. 418. deivo- 
 τνονς *Αρά. .^sch. Sept. c. Th. 79 ^· 
 καμψίτΓονς 'Epivvs. 
 
 492—3. aXcKrp' αιηίμφα γάμων άμίλ- 
 Χηματα = άμιΧληματα ά\€κτρων άνυμφων 
 γόμων, (cf. Matth. §. 44 ^· Obs. 1. 
 Wunder ad Phil. iioi. Aj. 7. 33. 
 &c. &c.) i. e. a contention for, or de¬ 
 sire of a marriage, in which the bed 
 and the bride were not what they ought 
 to be. eVejSa SC. eKcivois, came upon 
 those, οίσιν ον θ€μις, whom it was im~ 
 pious to come upon. For dat. 'after 
 eVfiSrt, Neue compares Tr. 298. epo\ 
 ίΐσίβη. 
 
 493. Dindorf reads with the 
 books, προ Ta>vbe τοί μ' e\ei, leaving· 
 θράσος or ζλπίς to be supplied, and 
 comparing for the omission. Plat. 
 Phaedon. 58, e. ωστ€ μοι παρίστασθαι 
 {do^av SC.), (Keivov K. r. i. Wunder 
 reads προ των^ί tol θράσος, supplying 
 mentally tVrt μοι, or μ exci. (Cf. 
 
 Phil. 597.) On πρ 6 Tcovbe, see Matth. 
 
 §• 575 · 
 
 496-7. By τάρας is obviously 
 meant the portentous dream, the 
 φάσμα ννκτος of Clytsemnestra. This 
 dream the Chorus trust will in no 
 way (^μηποτβ') come (πελαΐ') without 
 reprehension (άφ·€γ€ς) to the agent 
 and accomplice in the murder of Aga· 
 memnon (toTs δρώσι καί συν^ρωσιν), 
 but on the contrary will prove a 
 source of deep reprehension and 
 execration to them, because of the 
 misery which it will entail upon 
 them. The dative τοΧς δρώσιν ap¬ 
 pears to me to be dependent on 
 πάΚάν ( = 7Γ6λάσ€ίΐ/) and ήμΐν to be a 
 dat. ethicus, on our behalf. Wunder 
 considers the latter dative to depend 
 on πάλαν, and τοΐς δρωσι to be go¬ 
 verned of άφβγίς. 
 
 497 . άφξγάς. ScHOL. : to πολνν 
 φόγον άχον. 
 
 499 . μαντάΐαι, divinations. 
 
 <^0 2. ev κατασχησα, come to a fa- 
 vourable conclusion. A bold image 
 derived from κατίχαν, implying a 
 ship, which approaches to and pos¬ 
 sesses the shore. A similar species 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 45 
 
 ω Π€λθ7Γθ9 ά πρόσθβι/ 
 ΤΓολύτΓΟΡΟ^ ΙτπΓβία, 
 ώί €μολ€9 αΙανη9 
 τα0€ γα· 
 
 €VT€ γαρ 6 ΤΓ0νΤί(τθ€19 
 
 Μυρτ/λοί βκοιμάθη, 
 τταγχρυσβωρ δίφρωρ 
 δν(ττάροί9 αΙκίαΐ9 
 ττρόρρίζοί €Κρίφθβί9, 
 ον τί ττω 
 
 ζττω^. 5^4 
 505 
 
 
 5 »ο 
 
 of metaphor occurs Trach. 827. τάδ’ 
 ορθως ίμτΐζ^α κατουρίζη. φάσμα ννκτος, 
 nocturnal vision, cf. infr. 644. 
 
 504. The Epode refers the origin 
 of the evils of the house of Atreus 
 to Pelops. Having been victorious 
 in the Olympic games, and received 
 Hippodamia as the prize of his suc¬ 
 cess, Pelops was bearing away his 
 bride on his return home, when 
 some unbecoming conduct on the 
 part of Myrtilus, his charioteer, to¬ 
 wards the lady, (v. 511.) excited the 
 anger of the former, who in conse¬ 
 quence threw his charioteer into the 
 sea. (Prevalent metre throughout 
 the Epode is an antispast, preceded 
 by a dactyl, tribrach, or spondee.) 
 
 lb. eS nAoTTos a ττρόσθΐν ίττττβια. 
 Wunder compares .^sch. Pers. 156. 
 μητ€ρ η ΖΙρξον yepaia, χαΙρ€, Aapeiov 
 yvvai. For similar but less bold il¬ 
 lustrations of this formula, see infr. 
 634. Antig. 1109. Aj. 703. Trach. 
 202, &c. 
 
 505. ποΧντΓονος. The Scholiast 
 understands cause of misery to the 
 Argives generally : Ellendt confines 
 
 it to the house of Atreus. 
 
 Ib. mneia. Schol. : Βιφρηλασία. 
 506. αίάνης, lugubrious. Schol. : 
 θρηνητικη, παρά το alai, ου yivcrai. 
 alavr]s, La. Wund. Dind. (in An- 
 not.) Blomf. (ad Pers. 935.) αίανη, 
 vulg. 
 
 308. evT€,from the time that. 
 
 309. €κοιμάθη, slept (the sleep of 
 1 death). On Myrtilus as the ττρώ- 
 ταρχο9 άτι) of the house of Atreus in 
 j^schylus, see Peile’s Agam. τΐ 59 · 
 For the Doricism, see Ell. II. 20. 
 
 310. πατ^χρνσ^ων, Herm. ^Vund. 
 Ell. (Dissert. II. 11.) πατγχρυσων €κ, 
 Dind. πayχpύσωv, libri. 
 
 3 I I. αΐκίαα, on account of the af¬ 
 front offered to Hippodamia. The 
 orthography of the word has been 
 referred to sup. 486. 
 
 312. πρόρριζοί, utterly and entirely. 
 Cf. infr. 763. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 
 817. 
 
 g Ib. (κριφθί'α (βκρίπτω), vulg. €κρι- 
 0eis, La. Ικτριφθ€ΐς, Reisk. Pors. cf. 
 
 Lobeck ad Aj. 1019. 
 
 313—13. Schol. : ου ditXinev αΙκία 
 
 τούς πολυκτημονας ο’ίκους' ο yap Έρμης, 
 
 ^ Cf I Cor. χί. 30, where the apostle, speaking of his Avealthy Corinthian converts, 
 who besides other'violations of the spirit of the Eucharist, had converted that sacied rite 
 r„«^ne oTainoTt Bacchanalia,, debanch, .,bse.-yes. ‘ for thU cause many are weak 
 
 and sickly among you, and many sleep [κοιμωνται), 
 
 1. e. 
 
 are dead. 
 
46 
 
 20Φ0ΚΛΕ0Τ2 
 
 eAtirev €Κ τονό οικου 
 ποΧύτΓονος αΙκία, 
 
 ΚΛΥΤΑΙΜΝΗΣΤΡΑ. 
 
 ^νβιμβιη] ώ? eoLKa9, αν στρ€(Ι)€ί, 
 ού γαρ ττάρβστ Αϊγίσθθ9, 09 (τ eVeF^’ aii 
 μητοί Θυραίαν γ ουσαν αίσχννβίΐ/ φίλους* 
 νυν δ\ ώί ατΓ^στ €Κ€Ϊνο9, ούδβν ίντρέττβί 
 Ιμου ye* καίτοί πολλά προ9 πολλούς /t^e δη 
 i^ehra^ ώ? θρασβΐα καΐ πέρα δίκη9 
 αρχω^ καθνβρίζονσα καΙ σβ και τά σά. 
 έγω δ* ΰβριν μβν ούκ έχω, κακώ9 δέ σβ 
 λέγω κακώζ κλύουσα προ9 σέθβν θαμά, 
 πατήρ γάρ, ουδβν άλλο σοΙ προσχημ άβι, 
 (D9 έζ έμον τέθνηκβν. βζ έμοϋ* καλώ9 
 β^οίδα* τώνδ' αρνησί 9 ούκ βνβστί μοι. 
 
 515 
 
 520 
 
 525 
 
 πατήρ Μνρτίλον, eprjviae τόΐς ΐΙίΧοπί- 
 8 ais. 
 
 514· XeiWii/, intransitively used as 
 anoXeinciu. CEd. T. 123 2. XetTTft pev 
 οϋδ’ a πρόσθ^ν rjdeipev το μη ου βαρύ- 
 στον €tvai. οίκους, La. eraso σ. οϊκον, 
 Dobr. eXinev, Herm. eXem^v, vulg. 
 
 515. αΙκία, misfortune. 
 
 516. άν€ΐμ€νη {ανίημι), at liberty, 
 under no control but your own. Cf. 
 Antig. 379. Peile ad Ag. io j 8. στρε- 
 φΐΐ, play the wanderer. (Cf. Ell. in 
 voc.) αυ, again. 
 
 Ib. ώί ζοικας. Cf. Tr. 1241. Kuhn. 
 §. 830, 6. Ellendt in voc. 
 
 5 T 7·^! 8. in€ 7 \e μη αίσχύνανζζζΐποία 
 ae μη αίσχΰναν. Matth. §.534. 
 
 518. αίσχυναν φίΧους. Schol. : 
 άντϊ του καθ' ημών Xfyetv. Wunder 
 renders oi φίΧοι, ii, quos non amare 
 impium est. Blomf. ad Ag. 1022. 
 prefers to read θυραΊον. Ellendt ob¬ 
 serves, that μητοι ought always to be 
 written separately, μη rot. See his 
 
 reasons in voc. 
 
 519. €ντρΙπ€ΐ, care for. QEd. T. 
 724. ών (ΐττρβπου συ μηδ^ν. Cf. Elms, 
 ad CEd. C. 1541. 
 
 520—1. ποΧΧά μ€ i^einas. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 416, β. προς πόΧΧους, in presence 
 of many persons. 
 
 521. πίρά δίκης, beyond what is fit 
 and right. Cf. Blomf. Gl. in Pr. 30. 
 Monk ad Hip. 1036. See also Peile’s 
 Append, ad Ag. p· 375. 
 
 522. άρχω, exercise supreme au¬ 
 thority. Monk and Herm. object to 
 the construction given by Matth. (§. 
 551, e.) «ρχω καθυβρίζουσα = καθυ¬ 
 βρίζω. 
 
 523. υβριν €χω = υβρίζω. 
 
 525. Erfurdt, Gaisf. and Neue 
 punctuate, πατήρ yap, ουδ^ν aXXo, σοι 
 πρόσχημ (^pretext) aet. 
 
 527. αρνησις. CEd. T. 57 ^· 
 σις ουκ eveariv ων άνιστορ^ις. Hisch. 
 Eum. 558. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 47 
 
 η γαρ Αίκη νιν elXei/, ονκ βγω μονή, 
 
 V apTjyeiv, €ί φρονονο" eTvyyo,v€s' 
 
 eTrel ττατηρ ουτο9 croy, ον θρην€Ϊς aei, 53° 
 
 την σην ομαιμον μουνος *ΈίΧΧηνων €τΧη 
 
 Θυσαι θβοΐσίν, ονκ ίσον καμων e/iot 
 
 Χνττη^, οτ βστΓβιρ , ωοττΓβρ η τικτονσ eyco, 
 
 elev’ διδάχον δη μ€ τον xctpiv τινων 
 
 eOvaev αντην ; ττότβρον *Apy€ίωv ipely ; 535 
 
 άλλ* ον μβτην αντοΐσί την y βμην κτανβΐν. 
 
 άΧΧ άντ άδβΧφον δητα ΜβνβΧβω κτανων 
 
 ταμ ονκ βμβΧΧβ τώνδβ μοι δίοσβίν δίκην ^ 
 
 ττότβρον βκβίνψ ττάίδβ^ ονκ ησαν δπτΧοΐ, 
 
 ονί τησδβ μάΧΧον €LK0S ην θνησκβίν, ττατροί 54° 
 
 καί μητρο9 οντα9, ή9 ο TrAoDy οδ ην j 
 
 η των βμών ^Αίδη9 Τίν ίμερον τέκνων 
 
 η των έκβίνη^ έσχβ δαίσασθαί ττΧεον ; 
 
 528, elXev ovKf vulg. Wund. Dind. 
 ίΐλί κουκ. La. sec. Lb. Gaisf. 
 
 529. ‘ The iraperf. χρην, e8ei, ττροσ·- 
 ηκ€ν are often used, not for the pre¬ 
 sents, but, like the Latin oportebat, 
 debebam, to denote that something 
 should be, or should have been, 
 which is not.’ Matth. §. 5°5· 
 
 Neue in Suppl. compares Here. f. 
 208. Thucyd. 1. 37. extr. Liv. IX. 9. 
 12 . · 
 
 53 T. ίτλη, prevailed upon himself, 
 had the courage, the heart. Aj. 1332. 
 
 Tov avhpa rovbe μη τ\ης αθαπτον ώδ’ 
 άρολγητως βα\€Ίν. 
 
 ^33· ωσττερ η τικτονσ' ty^ {ζκαμον, 
 οτ €τικτον.) For e/xoi, in preceding 
 verse, cf. Matth. §. 636. 
 
 534. eiei/. Cf. Blomf. Gl. in Ch. 
 
 645· 
 
 TOV χάριν — αντην. To whom 
 
 repaying an obligation, did he make 
 this sacrifice of his daughter ? 
 
 536. ov μ€την αντοϊσι. Antig. 1072. 
 ων οντ€ σοι pheaTL (ScHOL. (ξονσία 
 δβ’δοτίζι) οντ€ Toils αν(ύ θΐόϊσιν. "With 
 
 την Ιμην, cf. Antig. 45· 
 
 537-8. αλλ’— τάμα. But admitting 
 forsooth that he sacrificed my daugh¬ 
 ter for the sake of, or in behalf of his 
 brother Menelaus. For the particles 
 αλλά 8ητα, cf. Phil. 135^· Aj* 4^^* 
 Tr. 1245. CEd. T. 1375. Eur. Or. 
 779. For άι/τι=υ7Γ6ρ, Neue compares 
 
 Eur. Iph. Ά. 104. 
 
 538. ovK epeWf, ought he not? 
 with 8ίκην baaeiv, cf. Antig. 459* 
 
 539. TTalBes διττλοι. viz. Hermione 
 and Nicostratus. Cf. Hes. fr. 40. 
 Homer (Od. IV. 12 ) mentions only 
 the former. Cf. Heyne ad Apollod. 
 III. 2. 1. 
 
48 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 η τφ waucoXeL ττατρί των μβν €μου 
 τταίδων τΓοθοζ τταρβΐτο, Μβι/βλβω δ βνην ; 
 ον ταντ άβουλου καί κακόν γνώμην ττατρος ; 
 δοκώ /xei/, €1 καί σης δίχα γνώμης λβγω, 
 φαίη δ* αν η θανουσα γ y φωνήν Κάβοι» 
 ίγώ /Χ6Ι/ ουν ούκ βΙμΊ τοΐς ττβπραγμ^νοις 
 δύσθυμος* el δε σοι δοκώ φρονβΐν κακώς^ 
 
 I γνώμην δικαίαν σγρυσα^ τούς ττύΚας φ€γ€. 
 
 ΗΛ. €ρ€Ϊς μίν ονχι νυν γΐ μ, ως αρ^ασα τι 
 λυπηρόν elra σου τάδ’ βζηκουσ ΰπο* 
 άλ?ύ\ην ίφης μοί, του τβθνηκότος ff wrep 
 λύξαιμ αν δρθώς της κασιγνητης ff ομού. 
 
 ΚΛ. |κα1 μην €φίημ' el δύ μ ώδ* ael λόγους 
 
 545 
 
 550 
 
 555 
 
 544· For prepositions ^ 
 
 and αττό, thus used by Sophocles, cf. 
 infr. 619. Antig. 95. 193. 412. Aj. 
 138.202. Phil. 260. 940. Tr. 631. 
 &c. 
 
 545. Trapeiro. Ellendt notices this 
 as the only place in Sophocles, 
 where the passive of παρίημι is used 
 in the sense of neglecting or abandon¬ 
 ing. δε (πα'ώων πόθος SC.) €νην. 
 
 547 · ^^^*· Ell. δοκω ρει/, 
 
 my full belief and assurance is to that 
 effect. 
 
 548. ei φωνήν \άβοι. -.^sch. Ag. 
 37. oIkos δ’ avTOS, φθογγην Χάβοι, 
 σαφ€στατ άν Xe^eicv. 
 
 549· ‘ serves also to refer back 
 to something said before, as was 
 said, to return to the proper sub¬ 
 ject.’ Matth. §. 625. 
 
 551. γνώμην Βικαίαν οτχονσα. Monk, 
 connecting these words with ψ€γ€, 
 translates, when you have yourself 
 gotten sentiments of justice. Wun- 
 der, joining them with δοκώ, trans¬ 
 lates, having exercised a right judg¬ 
 ment. 
 
 Ib. τους πελα?, those nearest to 
 you (i. e. in kindred), implying Aga¬ 
 memnon. Cf. Ell. in voc. Antig. 479. 
 Aj. 115 I. Elms, ad Med. 85. Monk 
 translates generally: others. 
 
 552. ε’ρείί μΐν ονχι νυν yk μ. Eur. 
 Alcest. 674. ον μην epels γε μ'. For 
 the particle μβν, see Matth. §. 622, 
 b. On the position of ονχ\, cf. infr. 
 905. 1036. ^ . 
 
 552-3. ορζασά τι Χνττηρον, having 
 started, or begun with something of¬ 
 fensive. Cf. Peile ad Ag. p. 333. 
 
 554-5. ην ίφης μοι — λε'^αιρ αν. 
 Cf. Matth. §. 524, 4 · Ell. 1 . 1 13· 
 554 · bnep, in behalf of. In the 
 verse following, ύττερ της κασιγνητης 
 may by zeugma signify respecting. 
 Cf. Ell. in voc. 
 
 555. της κασιγνητης θ' ομον. The 
 more legitimate place of τε would 
 have been after the article. Cf. Phil. 
 
 314· 
 
 556. και μην Ιφίημι. ‘ Good: I 
 grant it: μην serving to strengthen 
 and enforce what is said.* Matth. §. 
 605. Hart. II. 378. Ellendt makes 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 49 
 
 4ζηρ)(€9, ονκ αν ήσθα λυττηρα κλυβιν, 
 
 ΗΛ. καί δη λβγω σοι. ττατψα φη9 κτβΐναι. tU αν 
 τούτον Aoyoy γβνοιτ αν aLcryicov βτι^ 
 βϊτ ούν δικαίων ^Ιτβ μη ; λβ^ω δε σοι 5^0 
 
 ώ? ού δίκη γ* εκτεινας^ άλλα σ εσττασεν 
 7Γ€ίθω κακόν ττρος^ άνδρο9, ω ταννν ζννει. 
 ipov δε την κνναγον ^Άρτεμιν^ τίνοζ 
 ποινάί τα πολλά πνενματ βσχ’ εν Αύλίδΐ' 
 η "γω φράσω' κείνην yap ον θεμις μαθεΐν. 5^5 
 
 Ίτατηρ ΤΓοθ ονμοί, εγω κλνω, θεά^ 
 τταίζων κατ άλσο^ εζεκίνησεν ττοδοΐν 
 
 use of this as well as other examples 
 to confute an opinion advanced in 
 the Classical Journal, that unless ye 
 is added, these particles always serve 
 to introduce a new person on the 
 stage. 
 
 556-7. Xoyovs,La. pr.Wund.Dind. 
 (in Annot.) the former observing 
 that "Koyovs e^apxeiv riva signifies to 
 address a person, or to begin to make 
 words to a person, and comparing 
 Eur. Troad. 149, μόλπάν — ^ξηρχον 
 θ€ούς, i. e. began to sing the gods. 
 Neue adds CEd. Col. 1006. deou? τι¬ 
 μάς σ€βίζ€ΐΡ. 1120. TeW ft φαν€Ρτ 
 aeXnra μηκύρω Χόγορ. (See his Suppl.) 
 Χόγοις, vulg. Gaisf. Ell. Matth. §. 
 423. Obs. (who explains : el ήρχον 08e 
 μe Xeyeip, and compares Eur. An dr. 
 1201 . θαρόρτα deanorap yoois ρόμω 
 τω peprepap 1 κατάρξω i. e. δεσττ. yoa- 
 σθαι αρξομαι.) 
 
 558. The Scholiast notices the 
 rhetorical arrangement of Electra’s 
 speech, which replies generally to 
 the previous reasonings of Clytsem- 
 nestra. 
 
 559. αίσχίωρ eri. With eri thus 
 joined to a comparative, cf. infr. 
 1189. 1266. CEd. T. 272. Qid. C. 
 
 5. Ant. 64. &c. 
 
 c6o. e’ir' ovp — eire. Cf. Matth. §. 
 625. 
 
 561. eanaaep, gl. ηπάτησ€. rather, 
 carried away, enticed. 
 
 562. προς άρ8ρός. For preposition, 
 cf. sup. 544· Antig. 193. Aj. 138. &c. 
 
 563. Kvpayop. Cf. Blomf. ad Sept, 
 c. Th. 42. Pors. ad Orest. 26. 
 
 563—4. ποιρας, in revenge, or 
 as a revenge for what. For the ap¬ 
 position, see Matth. §. 432, 5. Neue, 
 in Supplement, compares .^sch. 
 Prom. 563.614. ποιρας. La. Musgr. 
 Gaisf. Wund. Dind. (in Annot.) ποι- 
 ρης, libri. Monk, Ell. 
 
 564. eaxe = κατβσχβ, {restrained, 
 kept in bond, ) τα πολλά npevpara, {the 
 many or violent winds which are wont 
 to blow there.) 
 
 566. κ\νω, I have heard. kXvcip, 
 like uKoveip, is one of those verbs, 
 in which the present tense signifies 
 both present and past time. Cf. 
 Trach. 68. 72. Phil. 261. &c. 
 
 567. παίζωρ, 'hunting. Ell. But 
 were people allowed to hunt in a 
 sacred αΧσος} Wunder considers 
 the word as altogether corrupt; but 
 doubts what substitute to give. For 
 
 1 Neue objects that κατάρξω here seems to signify I will initiate, not I will begin. 
 
 E 
 
50 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 στίκτον κ€ράστΎ)ν βλαφοί'^ ον κατα σφαγα^ 
 ζκκομττάσας eiros η Tvy\avei βάΚων. 
 κάκ τυνδβ μηνίσασα Αητωα κόρη 
 κατ€Ϊχ * Αχαιούς, ώς ττατηρ άντίστ^μον 
 του θηρος €κθύσ€ί€ την αυτόν κόρην, 
 ώδ’ ην τα κείνης θύματ" ον γαρ ήν Χνσί9 
 άλλη στρατω προς οίκον ονδ" βΙς^'Ιλιον. 
 avff ων, βιασθάς πολλά κάντιβάς, μόλις 
 eOvcrev αυτήν, ούχι Νΐ€ν€λ€ω χάριν, 
 ά S ονν^ όρώ γαρ καί το σον, κβΊνον θβλων 
 όπωφβλησαι ταντ βδρα, τούτον θανβΐν 
 χρην αυτόν οΰνβκ €κ aeOev ; ποιώ νόμω ; 
 ορα τιΘάσα τόνδ^ τον νόμον βροτοΐς 
 
 570 
 
 575 
 
 58ο 
 
 other versions of the offence given 
 by Agamemnon to Diana, see Aisch. 
 Ag. 104-159. Eur. Iph. T. 15-24. 
 Callim. in Dian. 262. 
 
 568. στικτόν. Phil. 184. στικτών η 
 \ασίων μ€τα Θηρών. 
 
 Ib. ον κατα σφαγής, οη account of 
 the death of which. Cf. Bemh. p. 239. 
 Hermann reads as one word κατα- 
 σφαγάς . 
 
 569. όκκομπάσας, exultant. 
 
 Ib. eVos Ti βαλών. The impious 
 expression thrown out by Agamem¬ 
 non is supplied by the Scholiast to 
 Eur. Or. 647. viz. that Diana her¬ 
 self would not so skilfully have hit 
 the deer. 
 
 571. άντίσταθμον. ScHOL. ; Ισό- 
 σταθμον. Ell. Pari pondere, inde, 
 quod rependendo servit. Infr. 592. αν¬ 
 τίποινα. 
 
 573. ώδ’, {on this account) ην τα 
 κίίνης θύματα {was she sacrificed.) 
 
 Ib. \νσις. Wunder (Emend, in 
 Trach. p. 14.) proposes to read η\ν- 
 σις, means of going. 
 
 575. ανθ' ών, {for this reason, viz. 
 that the army might go to Ilium), 
 πολλά βιασθ^Ις {after having suffered 
 much violence, cf. Aj. 1160. Ant. 66. 
 1073.) κάντιβας {and after much strug¬ 
 gling and resistance.) , 
 
 Ib. On μόλις and μόγις see Lobeck 
 ad Aj. 306. 
 
 577. €1 δ’ ovv, sin igitur. Ell. Cf. 
 CEd. T. 851. 
 
 580. τιθΐΐσα, proposing. Cf. An- 
 
 tig· 8. 
 
 580-1. opa μη τίθης. Schaefer de¬ 
 termines-that opa μη followed by an 
 indicative, signifies vide num. Wun¬ 
 der prefers vide an non. He com¬ 
 pares Plato Each. 196,0. όρώμεν, μη 
 NtKias ouTai τι λίγβιν, κα\ ον λόγον 
 €V€Ka ταντα λίγβι, let US See whether 
 Nicias does not think that he is say¬ 
 ing something, and does not speak for 
 speaking sake. 2 Alcib. 139, d. αλλ’ 
 opa, ώ μακάριζ, μη ονχ οντω ταντ €χ€ΐ. 
 
 Cf. infr. 584. Antig. 1253· and see 
 the subj^t largely discussed by El- 
 lendt II. 104-51». 411. τίθης, Lb. 
 
 Π1 His general positions 011 the subject are, ΰρα μ)} τίθης, vide anne ponas ; 'όρα μ^ 
 θησζΐς, vide anne posiiurus sis ; Spa τιθης, vide ne forte ponas. 
 
Hy\EKTPA. 
 
 51 
 
 μη ττημα σαυτη καί μ€τάγνθίαν τίθης.^ 
 
 el γαρ κτβνονμβι' αλΧορ άντ αΧΧον, σύ τοι 
 
 πρώτη θάνοί9 αν, el δίκης ye τυγχάνοις, 
 
 άλλ* elaopa μη σκηψίν ούκ ούσαν τίθης. 
 
 el γαρ OeXeLS, δίδαζον avff δτον ταννν 5^5 
 
 αίσγιστα πάντων epya δρώσα rvyyavei?, 
 
 ητις ξvveύδeLς τω παΧαμναίω, μeθ* ον 
 
 πατάρα τον άμον πp6σθev e^πώXeσaς, 
 
 και παιδοποιεϊς' τους δί πp6σθev eύσeβeΐς 
 
 κάξ eύσeβώv βΧαστόντας ΙκβαΧουσ e^e^s*. 59^ 
 
 πώς ταντ Ιπαιν^σαίμ αν ; η καΙ τοΰτ epeΐς, 
 
 ώς της θυγατρος αντίποινα XaμβάveLς ; 
 
 αίσχρώς, iav πep και Χίγης, ού γαρ καΧον 
 
 4χθροΐς γaμeΐσθaL της θυγατρος ovveKa. 
 
 αλλ’ ού γάρ ούδ€ vovOeTeiv eζeστί ae, 595 
 
 cod. Pal. Wund. La. Gaisf. 
 
 construe τίθης^ are creating. 
 
 583· 61 ye, certe si. Ell. On the 
 double protasis with an apodosis in¬ 
 terposed, see the same lexicographer, 
 I. 493. With el δίκης τν’γχάνοις, cf. 
 Arist. Av. 1223. 
 
 584. σκηψιν, gl. ττρόφασιν, βονλην. 
 ονκ ονσαν, unreal, τίθης^ propose to 
 your selfy (where the middle voice 
 seems rather to have been required.) 
 
 585. avff oTov, wherefore. Matth. 
 §. 572. Kiihn. §. 596. Wunder pre¬ 
 fers pro qua re, i. e. quam injuriam 
 ultura ? 
 
 587 * πάλαμναίω (παλάμη). ScHOL.: 
 φον€Ϊ. παλαμναίος 6 ταϊς οΙκ€ίαις χ^ροΊ 
 φόνον €ρ'γασάμ€νος. 
 
 589· παιδοποΐ€Ϊς. Pausanias (II. 
 18, 5 ·) mentions Erigone as daugh¬ 
 ter of .iEgisthus by Clytsemnestra. 
 
 589—90. 6vae^eis κάξ Σαββών, le- 
 gitimatey and offspring of persons le¬ 
 gitimately wedded. For the sense, 
 
 see the Scholiast. With the for¬ 
 mula, cf. CEd. T. 1397. Phil. 384. 
 874. Aristoph. and Plato passim. 
 Schleusner in voc. ‘Εβραίος. 
 
 590 . όκβαλονσ €χ€ΐς = €κβ€β\ηκας. 
 Matth. §. 559, b. As referring to 
 the exiled Orestes, the present ex¬ 
 ample furnishes a proof, that in cir¬ 
 cumlocutions of this kind, έχω does 
 not alwavs lose its nature, but indi- 
 
 •f ' 
 
 cates something permanent and en¬ 
 during. 
 
 591. TovT e’pets. W^under, ad E- 
 mend. in Trach. p. 16, prefers ταντ 
 ίρ€Ϊς, and understands : rj ipehy ώί· καϊ 
 ταντα της θυγατρος αντίποινά euTiVy a 
 'Χαμβάν€ΐς ; 
 
 592. αντίποινα. Phil. 316· Blomf. 
 Gl. in Pers. 482. 
 
 Ib. \αμβάν€ΐς. “ La. erasum, sup. 
 \αμβάν€ΐ. τυγχάνει Lb.” GaiSF. 
 
 595. αλλα — γάρ. On αλλά γαρ 
 (however) in a proposition of which 
 the cause to be assigned is omitted, 
 
 E 2 
 
52 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 y ττασαν ΐη9 γλωσσαι/, ώί την μητέρα 
 κακοστομονμβν, καί σ βγωγβ δβσττοτιν 
 η μητβρ* ούκ βλασσον βΙς ημα^ νβμω, 
 
 \ η ζίύ βίον μοχθηρόν^ βκ τ€ σου κακοΪ9 
 
 7 ΓθλλοΪ 9 άβΐ ζννουσα του re σνννόμον, * 6οο 
 
 ό δ’ αλλοί βζω, χ€ίρα σην μόλι^ φνγων^ 
 
 τλημων Ό/οβσττ;? δυστυχή τριββί βίον’ 
 
 ον ΤΓολλά δη μβ σοί τρβφβιν μιάστορα 
 
 Ιττητίάσω’ καΐ τ6δ\ eiwep ίσθβνον, 
 
 ιδρών αν, βυ τουτ’ ϊσθί. τούδβ y οΰνβκα 605 
 
 κηρυσσβ μ els^ ατταντα^, etre χρη κακήν 
 
 elre στόμαργον etr άναιδβία^ irXeav,. 
 
 el yap 7Γ€φυκα τώνδβ των epyωv ϊδρί^, 
 
 see Matth^§. 615. Wund. ad Antig. 
 155. Aj. 659. Griffiths ad ^sch. 
 Prom. 941. Cf. infr. 619. For nu¬ 
 merous examples of αλλ’ ον yap, see 
 Ell. I. p. 81. 
 
 Ib. vovOeTelp. ScHOL. : iXeyxeiv. 
 ούδβ, not even. Cf. 359. 630. and see 
 Ellendt II. 421—2. 
 
 596. η — γλώσσαν. ScHOL.: τοντβστι, 
 Xeyeis πάντα λόγον, omit no declara¬ 
 tion of any kind, assert in words of 
 every description. On the phrases 
 φωνήν, €πος, γλώσσαν levai, cf. Wund. 
 ad Trach. 319. Emend, in Trach. p. 
 27. See also Pors. ad Eur. Or. 141. 
 Advv. p. 209. tees. Aid. codd. pleri- 
 que. i(U, Hr. 
 
 I 598. sq. And I consider (νίμω) you 
 rather {υίικ Ιίλασσον i. e. μάλλον) as a 
 tyrant than a mother towards us, of 
 whom I the one &c. while the other 
 &c. 
 
 599. μοχθηρόν gl. όόυνηρόν. On €K 
 T€ σον, cf. Elms, in Review of Mark·” 
 land’s Iph. in Aul. v. 508. 
 
 599—600. κακοϊς πολλοΐς ξννονσα.' 
 Cf. infr. 611. Phil. 1022. (Ed. T. 
 
 303. Eur. fr. incert. LXXV. 3. ταντ^ 
 
 τη νόσω ξννών άνηρ. 
 
 6οο. σνννόμον, consort, (applied to 
 the female sex, (Ed. C. 340.) Cf. 
 Peile ad Ch. 583. 
 
 601. ό δ’ άλλος, i e. ό δ’ πν. So 
 τοντο μόν—τοντ άλλο in CEd. 'L'. 605» 
 which is more commonly said τοντο 
 μ€ν — τοντ αν. Bind. With ό Se, fol¬ 
 lowed by 'O ρέστης, cf. Aj. 782. x^ipa 
 σην, the murder intended by your 
 hand. 
 
 603. μιάστορα, gl. φονόα. Here, 
 avenger of wickedness. Cf. sup. 275. 
 ^sch. Eum. 176. Eur. Med. 1361. 
 Blomf. Gl. in Ch. 931. 
 
 606. 619 άπαντας. Cf. infr. 642. es 
 πάσαν πόλιν. Antig. IO93. e’i πάλιν. 
 For the preposition, see Bernh. p. 
 217. See also Pors. ad Markl. Eur. 
 Suppl. 1066. For χρη, Wunder (ad 
 Emend, in Tr. p. 16.) prefers χρη^, 
 i. e. θύλας, or χρηζας. coll. Aj. 1373 * 
 Antig. 887. 
 
 607. στόμαργον = στόμαλγον, lite¬ 
 rally : a person who talks till the 
 mouth smarts. Eur. Med. 525. την 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 53 
 
 σχ€86ν TL την σην ου καταισχύνω φνσιν. 
 
 ΧΟ. ορώ pevos ττνβουσαν' el δβ συν δίκη 
 
 ζύνβστι, τονδβ φροντίδ' ούκ €Τ βΙσορώ. 
 
 ΚΛ. ΤΓοία^ δύ μοι δβΐ 7rp09 y€ τηνδβ φροντιδθ 9 , 
 ητι$ τοιαυτα την τβκονσαν νβρισεν, 
 καί ταντα τηλίκοντο9 ; άρ οϋ σοι δοκβΐ 
 
 χωρ€Ϊν αν βΙς ττάν βργον αισχύνην άτβρ ; 
 
 Η Λ. €ύ νυν βττίστω τώνδβ μ αισχύνην €χ€ΐν, 
 κβϊ μη δοκώ σοι* μανθανω δ , οθοννβκα 
 βζωρα ττράσσω κονκ ipol ττροσβικοτα. 
 άλλ’ η γαρ βκ σου δυσμύνβια καί τα σά 
 epy €^αναγκάζ€ΐ μβ ταύτα δράν βια. 
 αισχροί^ yap αίσχρα ττ pay ματ εκδιδασκβται. 
 
 ΚΛ. ω Θρβμμ άναιδβ^, ή σ eyco και ταμ €ττη 
 κοιί Tapya τάμα ττόλΑ* άγαν Xeyeiv ττοιβΐ. 
 
 ΗΛ. συ τοι \eyei 9 νιν, ούκ iyω. συ yap iroieis 
 
 ^ V 
 
 6ιο 
 
 6ι5 
 
 020 
 
 σην στόμαργον γλωσσαλγίαν. Cf.Blomf. 
 G1. in Sept. c. Th. 443. 
 
 609. την σην (i. e. την από σοΟ) φύ- 
 σιν. With σχεδόν τι, cf. Antig. 47°· 
 with καταισχύνω, Eur. Iph. A. 5°5· 
 
 61 0, pevos Ίτνέονσαν. jEsch. Ch. 
 30. KOTOV πνεων. Cf. Blomf. Gl. in 
 Ag. 1206. (The Chorus address 
 themselves to Clytsemnestra.) 
 
 6 1 o— 11. εΖ δε συν 8ικη {justly, pro¬ 
 perly) ξνν€στιν (sc. η ΉΧύκτρα τω /χε- 
 
 νει ). Cf. sup. 599· 
 
 61 1, τονδε — ίΐσορω. I see no lon¬ 
 ger any concern about this (on her 
 part.) 
 
 612. μοι δει. Matth. 39^i ^· 
 On the particle γε in this sentence, 
 consult Elms, ad Med. 1334· 
 
 614. και ταντα, and this too. Cf. 
 CEd. T. 37. Antig. 322. For gen¬ 
 der of ττ^λικουτοί, cf. Matth. §. 118. 
 Obs. I. §. 436, 2. Kiihn. §. 430, c. 
 Anm. op' ov, nonne. (cf. ad Aj. 269.) 
 
 αρά σοι, La. a pr. m. Lb. ΛVund. Dind. 
 (in Annot.) ap' ov σοι, vulg. Gaisf. 
 
 615. παν epyov. Cf. Blomf. Gl. 
 Theb. 599. ad voc. πανουργία. 
 
 6 1 6. επίστω —Cf. Matth. §. 
 549. Obs. 2. See also Elmsl. ad Med. 
 580. and Iph. Aul. 907. (Camb. ed.) 
 ευ νυν, Gaisf. Wund. ευ νυν, Dind. On 
 the quantity of the enclitic νυν, whe¬ 
 ther it is necessarily short, see Monk 
 in Mus. Crit. I. p. 73. and Griffiths 
 ad Sept. c. Th. 242. 
 
 618. ε|ωρα (ωρα), ill-timed. 
 
 619. η €Κ σου δυσρενεια. Antig. 95 · 
 την ύμον δυσ/ 3 ουλιαν. CEd.Col. 256. 
 rq εκ θβων τρεροντε^. For άλλα γάρ, 
 
 cf. sup. 59^· 
 
 621. αΙσχροΊς SC. λόγοι?. 
 
 622—3. ^7“—ποιεί. Cf. Matth. §. 
 299· ^^^· general construction, 
 and Phil. 926. for ποιεί. For θρύμμα, 
 cf. Blomf. Gl. in Sept. c. Th. 166. 
 624. vtv, them. Cf. sup. 436. For 
 
54 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Tovpyov’ τα δ epya τονζ Xoyovi βνρκτκβταί. 
 
 ΚΛ. άλλ* ον μα την 8εσττοιναν"^\ρτ€μίν θράσους 
 τον8' ονκ άλνζβίς, €ύτ άν AlyLaBo^ μολρ. 
 
 ΗΛ. ορας ; προς opyrjv βκφβρβί, μ^θβϊσα μοι 
 XiyeLv ά χρρζοιμ , ovd βπιστασαι kXv€LU. 
 
 ΚΛ. ονκουν €ασ€ίς ουΒ νπ βυφημον βοής 
 
 θυσαί μ\ βπβίδη σοί y €φηκα παν XeyeLV ; 
 ΗΛ. ίω, κβΧ^ύω, θϋβ, μηδ' ίπαίΤίώ 
 
 τουμον στόρϋ, ώς ούκ άν πβρα Χβζαιμ eri. 
 
 ΚΛ. €παίρ€ 8η συ Θύμαθ' η παρούσα μοί 
 
 πάyκapπ\ άνακτι τωδ' όπως Χυτηρίους 
 βνχάς άνάσχω δβιμάτων,, ών νυν ίχ(ο. 
 κΧυοίς άν ηδη, Φοΐββ προστατηρίβ^ 
 
 025 
 
 630 
 
 635 
 
 συ τοι 'Keyeis, cf. Blomf. ad Sept. C. 
 Th. 220. 
 
 626. deaTToivav. Cf. Aj. 38. 105. 
 Valck. ad Hipp. 88. 
 
 626-7. θράσους τοΰδ’ ουκ. άΧυζας, 
 shall not avoid the punishment of this 
 audacity. Matth. §.353, 2. §. 369, 
 370. Dissen compares Find. Pyth. 
 VIII. 16. ου μιν {βίαν SC. eventum, 
 poenam superbiee) αλυξίν, and Find. 
 Scol. (p.644.) Cf.Antig.488. Blomf. 
 Gl. ad Prom. 607. in Pers. 97. Neue 
 ad Phil. 1044. and Matth. (Const.) 
 in Qusest. Soph. 
 
 628. iK(j>ep€i, alloiv yourself to he 
 carried away. Wunder notices the 
 same force of the preposition 4κ in 
 the word cKTpeneiv, Aj. 53. For 
 όρας, cf. Pors. ad Orest. 581. 
 
 629. ά,χρηζοιμί. Cf. Matth. §.529» 
 4. Elms, ad (Ed. C. 778. 
 
 630. vtt' €νφημον βοής, in silence, 
 Cf. Trach. 178. Matth. §. 592, β. 
 Monk in Hipp. 1294. On ουδβ, El- 
 lendt ■(II· 423.) observes : dicen- 
 dum fuit ουδέ θΰσαι Ιάσας.* 
 
 631. θνσαι. dveiv, to perform sa¬ 
 
 crificial rites, whether by the slaugh¬ 
 ter of cattle, or by the offering of 
 ' incense ; here the latter. Translate 
 generally ; to make my holy offering. 
 
 634. enaipe { = aLpe, Aj. 545.) bring 
 here, advance, θύματα, i. e. θυμιάματα, 
 frankincense. (Clytsemn. speaks to her 
 attendant.) 
 
 635. πάγκαρπα {θύματα SC.), de¬ 
 rived from all kinds of seeds. Pass. 
 In Trach. 238. the Scholiast ex¬ 
 plains eyKupTTa, θυμιάματα τά από ανθών 
 ή καρπών. 
 
 Ib. ανακτι τωδβ, i. e. Apollo. 
 
 63 5 “6. Χυτηρίους (ύχάς ^eιμάτωv, 
 a prayer fitted to deliver me from these 
 terrors. For genitive, cf. infr. 1490. 
 Matth. §. 344. άνάσχω, in reference 
 to the lifting up of the hands in 
 prayer. 
 
 637. προστατήριβ. The Scholiast, 
 Hesych. and Phot., understand of 
 Apollo, as standing before the doors 
 of the palace. Herm. and Wunder 
 in the sense of defender, patron, 
 guardian. Cf. Wachsm. IV. 280. 
 Klaus. Theol. 116. Wunder ad (Ed. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 κ€κρνμμένην μου βάζιν. ον γαρ €V φίλοΐΫ 
 6 μΰθθ9, ούδβ ττάν άνατττύ^αί ττρβπβι 
 7 Γρο 9 φω^, τταρούσψ τησ8€ πλησίας Ιμο\ 
 μη συν φθάνω Τ€ καί πολυγλώσσω βοη 
 (ΤΤΓβίρϊ} ματαίαν βα^ιν €9 ττασαν ττοΧιν. 
 άλΧ ώδ’ ακον€' rySe γαρ κάγω φρασω. 
 a γαρ προσ€Ϊδον νυκτ\ τηδβ φασματα 
 8ίσ(τών ονβίρων, ταντα μοί, Ανκβί αναζ, 
 el μίν πβφηνβν άσθλα, δθ9 τβΧβσφορα, 
 el δ’ άχθρα, τοΐς άχθροΐσιν ί'μπαΧίν μeθe9' 
 καΊ μη μ€ ΊτΧούτον του 7Γαράντο9 el TLve9 
 δόΧοίσι βoυXeύoυσLv eκβaXeΐv, eφΎj9^ 
 άλλ’ §)8e μ del ζωσαν άβXaβeΐ βίω 
 δόμου9 *ATpeL8Sv σκήπτρα τ άμφeπeLV Ta8e, 
 
 55 
 
 64c 
 
 645 
 
 650 
 
 Τ. ι6. Aj. 683. Peile ad Ag. 500. 
 944. Blomf. and GriiF. ad Sept. c. 
 
 rh. 445· 449· 
 
 638. κ€κρνμμίνην βάξιν. Wunder 
 and Ellendt understand with Mus- 
 'grave as of a prayer involving much 
 ambiguity and obscurity of language, 
 not as of one uttered in a low tone 
 of voice. But with submission to 
 these eminent scholars, are there 
 much above six or eight lines in the 
 following prayer, which could well 
 be uttered in the hearing of Electra 
 (the reader’s good sense will readily 
 inform him which those verses are) ; 
 and would not the rest be uttered in 
 a dramatic aside ? to which, rather 
 than to ambiguity of language, the 
 participle κβκρνμμίνην seems to refer. 
 
 Cf. infr. 1449. 
 
 Ib. €v φίλοΐϋ, i. e. Electra and the 
 Chorus. 
 
 639—40. άναπτνξαι προς φως. Cf. 
 Wund. ad Phil. 13^5· Blomf. Gl. 
 ^ in Pers. 259. For πλησίας, see Lob. 
 
 ad Aj. 1168. 
 
 641. τΓολνγΚώσσω βοΤ). Cf. infr. 
 
 798· 
 
 642. ματαίαν βάξιν, a false report. 
 Cf. sup. 63. 
 
 644—3 · “— φάσματα δισσών ονείρων, 
 the ambiguous dream which I be¬ 
 held. SCHOL. ; δισσών. αμφιβόλων 
 και δισσοποίών. Cf. Ruhnk. ad Tim. 
 p. 86. 
 
 646. τίλζσφόρα, SC. φάσματα 6vet~ 
 ρων, grant it to have its accomplish¬ 
 ment in myself. Cf. Peile ad Ch. 
 527. Griffiths ad Sept. c. Theb. 
 
 655· . , . . ^ M 
 
 647. τοϊς (χθροΐσιν όμπαλιν /xeaes, 
 hurl back upon mine enemies. Phil. 
 1300. μη npbs θ^ων μ^θης βίλας. 
 
 648. πλούτον. Cf. Aj. 488. 
 
 649. ίφης. gl. παραχώρησης. 
 
 650. ζωσαν άβλαβά βίω. Cf. Trach. 
 168. Wund. ad CEd. T. 65. ωδε, as 
 I now live. 
 
 65 I. σκήπτρα — άμφίπαν. Pind. 
 01. 119. θίμιστύον ός άμφίπα σκαπτόν. 
 
56 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 φίλοισί T€ ζυνουσαν^ oh ζυνβιμι νυν^ 
 ^ύημ^ρονσαν και τέκνων όσων 4μο\ 
 δύσνοια μη ττρόσβστίν η λύττη ττίκρα. 
 ταντ\ ώ Ανκβι "ΆττολΧον, ΐΧβω9 κΧνων 
 δθ 9 ττασιν ημΐν, ωσττβρ βζαίτονμβθα, 
 τα δ* αΧΧα ττάντα και σιωττώση^ βμον 
 €7Γαξίω σ€ οαίμον οντ e^eioevaL, 
 
 TOV9 €Κ Alo 9 yap ύκ09 Ιση iravff οραν. 
 
 ΠΑ. ^evai γνναΐκ€^, ττως αν βίδβίην σαφώ^, 
 el τον τυράννου δώματ ΑΙγίσθου ταδβ ; 
 
 ΧΟ. τάδ’ €σην, ώ ^eV. αύτος^ ηκασας καΧω^. 
 
 ΠΑ. ^ καΙ δάμαρτα την8 €7Γβίκάζων κυρώ 
 
 κβίνον ; irpeTreL γάρ τύραννο9 βΙσοράν, 
 
 ΧΟ. μάΧίστα πάντων, ηδβ σοί κβίνη πάρα. 
 
 ΠΑ. ώ χαΐρ\ άνασσα. σοΙ φβρων ηκω Xoyovs 
 ηδ€Ϊ5’ φίΧου παρ άνδρο9 ΑΙγίσθω ff δμου. 
 
 655 
 
 66ο 
 
 665 
 
 (See numerous illustrations of the 
 word in Tafel’s Dilucidd. Find. I. 
 12.) Supply dos before the infi¬ 
 nitive. 
 
 652—3. ζννονσαν — €νημ€ρονσαν 
 (ScHOL. : ίκάστην ημέραν ev διάγον- 
 σαν). Cf. Matth. §. 557. Quart. 
 Rev. VII. 452. 
 
 653. τέκνων, said by attraction for 
 TeKvois. Cf. Matth. §. 474. Lobeck 
 ad Aj. p. 354. Dissen ad Find. 
 Nem. III. p. 389. 
 
 657. τα δ’ ^λα πάντα. ScHOL. : 
 τα nepl της reXfvrrjs ^Opearov eoucev 
 ίυχζσθαι. 
 
 659. τους €κ Aios. For con¬ 
 struction, see Kuhn. §. 516. Anm. 
 2. Ell. 11. 225. For doctrine, see 
 Klausen’s Theol. p. 117 sqq. CEd. T. 
 151, &c. 
 
 662. ηκασας, Br. eimaas, libri. 
 663—4. δάμαρτα τηνδ' €π(ίκάζων ΚίΙ- 
 
 νον (in further conjecturing this to he 
 his wife) κυρώ (do I hit the mark, or, 
 am I in the right?). Cf. Matth. 
 §. 553. Ohs. I. Note. Fhil. 223. 
 Monk’s Hippol. 828. Neue in 
 Suppl. compares ^sch. Suppl. 588. 
 τόδ’ αν yevoi \€γων €ξ ^Έπάφου κυ- 
 ρησαις. 
 
 664· π·ρ€π€ΐ, is conspicuous. (Her 
 conspicuous appearance is that of a 
 sovereign.) Cf. Monk ad Alcest. 
 528. Blomf. Gl. in Fers. 244. 
 Elms, ad Bacch. 1186. For καθοράν 
 (gl. καθοράσθαι) , see Matth. §. 535· 
 Markl. and Musgr. ad Eur. Suppl. 
 1056. 
 
 665. ηδΐ (the person whom you 
 see), κ€ίνη (the person whom you seek). 
 Antig. 384. ηδ' eVr’ ζΚΐίνη Tovpyov η 
 *ξeιpyaσμ€vη. Fhil. 261. οδ’ eip €γώ 
 
 σοί KCLVos. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 57 
 
 ΚΛ. €δ€ξάμψ το ρηθβν' eldevac de σου 
 
 •πρώτιστα χρΐΐζω^ τις σ απΙστ^ιΚ^ν βροτών. 
 
 ΠΑ. Φανοτβυς 6 Φωκβνς, πράγμα πορσύνων μβγα. 
 
 ΚΛ. το ποιον, ώ ζβν ; €ΐπ€. παρά φίλου γάρ ών 
 άνδρος, σαφ’ οίδα, προσφιλείς λεζβις λόγους. 
 
 ΠΑ. τεθνηκ Όρέστης, εν βραχεί ξυνθείς λέγω. 
 
 ΗΛ. οΐ *γώ τάλαιν\ ολωλα τηδ εν ήμερα. 
 
 ΚΛ. τί φης, τί φης, ώ ξείνε ; μη ταύτης κλυε. 
 
 ΠΑ. θανόντ *Ορεστην νυν τε και πάλαι λεγο^. 
 
 ΗΛ. άπωλόμην δύστηνος, ούδεν είμ ετι. 
 
 ΚΛ. συ μεν τα σαύτης πράσσ' εμοί δε συ, ζ^νε, 
 τάληθες είπε, τω τρόπω διόλλυται ; 
 
 ΙΙΑ^κάπεμπόμην προς τούτα και το παν φρασω. 
 κείνος γάρ ελθών εις το κλεινόν Ελλάδος* 
 πρόσχημ άγώνος /λελφικών άθλων χαριν, 
 ότ ησθετ άνδρος όρθιων κηρυγμάτων 
 δρόμον προκηρύξαντός, ου πρώτη κρισις. 
 
 670 
 
 675 
 
 68 ο 
 
 668. (cf. Matth. §. 5^6. 
 
 infr. 1322. 1479)· ρηθίν. I admit 
 the omen. Neue in Suppl. compares 
 Eur. El. 627. προσηκάμην το ρηθίν. 
 
 670. ΐΓορσυνων, pnebens per nun- 
 cium, i. e. nuncians. Ell. 
 
 673. iv βραχεί ξυνθβΙς λβγω. Cf. 
 
 Phil. 435. 
 
 675. ω This lonic form, 
 
 comparatively unknown to .^schy- 
 lus and Euripides, generally occurs, 
 as Kiihlstadt observes, where an 
 address to a person takes place. Cf. 
 infr. 1119. CEd. C. 33. 49. 1096. 
 1119. 
 
 676. θανόντα — \eya>. Cf. Matth. 
 
 §· 555· With vvv re κα\ 
 
 πάλαι, cf. infr. 907. pvv re και t 6 t€. 
 Ant. 181. (Ed. C. 1034. &c. &c. πά¬ 
 λαι Aeyw, Pors. Wund. Dind. ror’ eV- 
 νίπω, vulg. 
 
 680. και — καί. Matth. §. 620, 2. 
 
 681-2. 'Ελλάδος πρόσχημ άγωνοδ, 
 the agonistic ornament of Greece, or, 
 the ornamental game of Greece. In 
 Herodot. V. 28. Miletus is termed 
 τψ 'Ιωνίας πρόσχημα, the ornament of 
 Ionia. With double genitive after 
 
 πρόσχημα, cf. Aj. 54. 73 ^» 
 
 vbv perhaps for κλεινής here, and infr. 
 
 694· 
 
 682. άθλων χάριν, with a view to 
 gain the prize of competition. Ana¬ 
 chronisms on such matters are ea¬ 
 sily allowed to the tragedians. 
 
 683. όρθιων κηρυγμάτων. Wunder 
 compares Eur. Iph. A. 93. όρθιω κη- 
 ρΰγματι. Cf. Antig. 1206. Blomf. 
 Gl.in Pers. 395. Elmsl. Heracl. 830. 
 
 684. κρισις, gl. άγων, contest. 
 Wunder compares Tr. 266. των ων 
 τόκνων λίίποιτο προς τοζον κρισιν. So 
 κρίν€σθαι, to contend. (Cf. Pass, in 
 voc. 3. b.) 
 
58 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 elarjXee λαμπροί, πασι τοΐί €Κ€Ϊ σφαί' 685 
 
 Βρόμον δ’ ίσωσα? rfj φνσ€ΐ τα τβρματα, 
 νίκης βχων Ιζηλθ^ πάνημον γ€ρας, 
 
 ^ωττω? μ€ν iv πολΧοΐοΊ πανρα σοι Χβγο), 
 ούκ οΊδα τοίονδ' άνδρος βργα καί κράτη. 
 
 δ’ ϊσθ\ δσων yap βΙσβκηρνξαν βραβης 6 go 
 
 δρόμων διαύλων πεντάβθ^ύ ά νομίζβται, 
 
 685 . σ·(βας, an object of reverence. 
 Acts XVII. 23. σφάσματα, objects of 
 devotion. Cf. Peile ad Ag. 94^· 
 Ch. 48. 149. (Ισηλθ^, entered the 
 lists. Cf. Dissen ad Find. Pyth. VII. 
 
 50· 
 
 686. δρόμου — τέρματα. This is 
 the reading of all the MSS., and 
 may I think be retained, whether 
 we look to construction or sense. 
 With regard to the former, the 
 reader’s attention in the course of 
 this publication has been, and wiU 
 be repeatedly called to instances, 
 where the poet, instead of a cog¬ 
 nate verb to a substantive, changes 
 the former in order to give more 
 force or variety to his phrase. 
 To come to constructions most 
 nearly resembling the present. At 
 V. 406. xoas τυμβενειυ obviously 
 means χοας χείσθαι επΧ τω τνμβω. At 
 Aj. 1287. αλμα κονφίζειρ is as ob¬ 
 viously αλμα κουφον άλΧεσθαι. The 
 reader will I think anticipate me, in 
 considering in the present instance 
 Ισωσας τφματα as equivalent to τέρ¬ 
 ματα TeXeaas ίσως, i. e. τέρματα τε- 
 λέσας {Jiaving completed the course, cf. 
 II. XXIII. 309. 323. 333. 462^ 
 768.) ’ίσως {in a manner suitable) τη 
 φύσει (to what his exterior promised); 
 that exterior, which had clearly 
 been as much an object of respect 
 (σέβας) to the spectators for its indi¬ 
 cations of strength (cf. v. 697), as 
 of admiration for its beauty (λα/Λ- 
 
 πρότης). The Scholiast, andWunder 
 it may be added, render much to 
 the above effect; the former ex¬ 
 plaining ; αρμοδίως τη εαυτόν φύσει 
 δραμών ; the latter rendering : quum 
 cursus convenienter egregice statures 
 sues peragisset. Brunck, Herm. 
 Dind. and others adopt Musgrave’s 
 well-known conjecture of τάφέσει, 
 i. e. τη άφέσει for τη φύσει. 
 
 Ib. φύσει. As implying general 
 exterior of person, cf. (Ed. T. 740. 
 TOP δε Αάϊορ, φύσιρ tip' είχε, φράζε, to 
 which the reply is : μέγας, χροάζωρ, 
 άρτι ΧενκαρθεΙς κάρα. Trach. 3^^* 
 προς φύσιρ, &C., where Wunder 
 translates, dem Ausseren nach— ac¬ 
 cording to her exterior. 
 
 688. ip πόΚΚοΊσι, among the many 
 things that might be said. Find. Pyth. 
 IX. 134· βαιά δ’ ερ μακρόΙσι ποικίλΧειρ, 
 άκοα σοφοίς. 
 
 6 Sg. έργα κα'ι κράτη, puissant 
 deeds. 
 
 690. βραβεύς, properly, a steward 
 or umpire in a race or other public 
 contest. Cf. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 
 307. Peile ad Ag. 220. βραβης, Br. 
 βραβείς, vulg. 
 
 691. This is the reading of all 
 the MSS., and as no satisfactory 
 sense can be elicited from it, Wun¬ 
 der and Dind. (in Annot.) give up 
 the verse as spurious. The subject 
 has been largely handled by Con¬ 
 stantine Matthiae in his ‘ Quae- 
 stiones Sophoc.’ After combating 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 59 
 
 τούτων Ινβγκων πάντα τάπινίκια 
 
 ώλβίζβτ, Άργ€Ϊ09 μ^ν άνακαλούμβνος, 
 
 ονομα δ’ Όρύστη9, του το κλβινον Ελλαδο? 
 
 Άγαμύμνονο^ στράτ€υμ άγβίραντος ποτ€. 695 
 
 καί ταντα μίν Toiavff' όταν di tis θβων 
 
 βλάπτϊ}, ^ύναιτ αν ovS άν Ισχύων φυγβΐν. 
 
 K€LV09 yap aXXrjs^ ημβρα^, οθ ιππικών 
 ην, ηΧίου τβΧΧοντος^» ώκνπονς άγων. 
 
 the successive attempts of Brunck, 
 Person, and Herm. to correct the 
 text, the learned writer himself, im¬ 
 proving· on an emendation of Reiske, 
 proposes to read, 
 
 δρόμων, διαύλων, π€ντα€θλων, ών 
 νόμος' 
 
 observing, that όσων by a very com¬ 
 mon attraction is said for όσα (Matth. 
 §. 473—4)5 δρόμων, διαύλων, π^ντα- 
 ύθλων being in apposition with it. 
 
 692. €ν€γκών. Homer on similar 
 occasions uses the middle verb. Cf. 
 II. XXIII. 275. 413. 44 ^· 538. 
 663. 
 
 693. ώλβίζ^το. The secret refer¬ 
 ence is no doubt to the untimely 
 fate, which was soon to fall on a 
 man at present considered as so 
 wonderfully prosperous and fortu¬ 
 nate. On the word 6 λβiζeιv, see 
 Blomf. Gl. in Ag. 901. 
 
 693— 5. ’Apyeios — ’Ορύστης — Αγα- 
 μόμνονος. The three terms usually 
 proclaimed by the herald — com¬ 
 prising the victor’s own name, his 
 patronymic, and birthplace. Cf. Find. 
 Pyth. i. 60. 
 
 694— 5 .’0ρ€στ?;ί — τού 'Ayapepvovos. 
 Cf. Bernh. p. 160. 
 
 6 g6-y. όταν — βλάττττ). For ge¬ 
 neral sentiment, see Aj. 456. CEd. 
 
 C. 252. Antig. 624; for particular 
 word βλάπτΎ}, cf. II. XXIII. 774 * 
 782 ; for θζων τις in preference to 
 
 θβός τις, cf. Aj. 99 ^· 
 
 698—9. νηττικων άγώι/. To under¬ 
 stand the poet’s use of the word ιπ¬ 
 πικός in more than one passage of 
 the present narrative, we must have 
 recourse I think to the two writers, 
 whom he had so constantly before 
 his eyes, viz. Homer and Pindar. 
 In both these writers, though the 
 word Ιπποι of course more commonly 
 signifies horses, it not unfrequently 
 signifies chariot also. (In the first 
 author Passow refers to II. V. 13. 
 19. 46. III. 163, &c. : in the se¬ 
 cond see 01 . I. 65. VHI. 67. fr. 6.) 
 Hence in Sophocles, ιππικός, of or 
 belonging to a chariot. In the pre¬ 
 sent instance: ιππικών άγων, a curule 
 ocontest. Infr. 730. 1444. Ιππικών 
 ναυαγίων, wreck of chariots. Aj. 
 1030. ιππικών εξ άντύγων, from the 
 chariot wheels. See also infr. 733. 
 
 699. ηλίου τελλοντος, i. e. ανατελ- 
 λοντος. Cf. Aj. 7 ^ 4 * W^ith ωκν- 
 πονς άγων, Dissen compares Pind. 
 Pyth. V. 29. δρόμοι ποδαρκεϊς. Cf. 
 Aj. 935. άριστόχειρ άγων. Antig. 
 999. θάκον όρνιθοσκόπον , &c. 
 
 ο And so Ellendt explains: ιππικών αγών = Ιππικός αγών. Peile ad Ch. 577. under· 
 stands : a contest in horse-flesh. 
 
60 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 βΙσηλθβ πολλώνIαρματηλατών μβτα, yoo 
 
 'ετ»Λ ' 'Tiv-v' S'' 
 
 €L9 ην Αχαΐ09^ ety απο Σπάρτην, όνο 
 
 Αίβνβί ζυγωτών αρμάτων ίπιστάταί' 
 
 κάκ€Ϊνο 9 €v τούτοισι, θβσσαλά? ίχων 
 
 Imrovs^ ο π4μπτο9' ίκτος βζ ΑΙτωλία^ 
 
 ^ανθ^σί πώλοΐ9' ββδομο^ λάγνης άνηρ' yo^ 
 
 6 δ* ογδοος λ€νκίππο9, ΑΙνιάν γβνο^' 
 
 €νατο9 ^Αθηνών τών θβοδμητων απο' f 
 
 Βοίωτοί αλλθ5*5 δβκατον €κπληρών οχον, 
 
 στάντ€9 δ\ off avTOV9 οΐ τβταγμβνοι βραβης 
 
 κληροί 9 ίπηλαν καΊ κατέστησαν δίφρους, yio 
 
 700. (Ισηλθί. Cf. sup. 685. 687. 
 
 702. Αίβυες. Cf. V. y 2 y. ζνγωτών, 
 yoked. Cf. infr. 722. 
 
 703. κάκ^Ινος. Orestes, sc. 
 703—4. OeaaaXas — Ίππους. Why 
 
 mares from Thessaly are assigned to 
 Orestes, no one, who observes how 
 closely Sophocles has had his eye 
 throughout this narrative on the 
 Homeric chariot-race (II. XXIII.), 
 can for a moment doubt. The 
 fleetest coursers in that race are the 
 Thessalian steeds of Eumelus. For 
 general illustration of the speed and 
 spirit of Thessalian horses, Wunder 
 refers to Varro de R. R. II. 7. 
 Lucan VI. 396. For adjective used 
 in feminine sense, cf. infr. 705. 
 734·'737 5 masculine, 721. 722. 
 744 * ^ 
 
 706. λ^νκιππος, using white horses. 
 Cf. Diss. ad Find. Ol. VI. 95. On 
 the CEnians, a people of Thesprotia 
 or Thrace, cf. II. 11 . 749. On the 
 omission of article to yeVo?, see Ell. 
 II. 244. 
 
 707. * Αθηνών των θβο^μητων. Eur. 
 Hipp. 978. ^Αθήνας τας θΐοΒμητονς. 
 Epithet frequent in Find. 
 
 708. bcKarov (κπΧηρών οχον, com¬ 
 pleting the number of ten chariots. 
 
 Cf. Seidl. ad Eur. Iph. T. 295. 
 Ell. 
 
 709. στάντίί δ’. Cf. II. XXIII. 
 
 338 . 757 · <τταν de μβταστοίχ€ί. 
 
 Ib. o^. As 0Θ1, where y occurs 
 only in choral strains according to 
 Ellendt, the learned lexicographer 
 observes of this passage, * non 0Θ1 
 sed ore latet,’ and so he reads in 
 voc. καθίστημι, ore is found also in 
 Cod. Falat. Neue compares Eur. 
 Hec. 96. 
 
 709—10. avTovs κΧηροις ΖπηΧαν, as¬ 
 signed them their places hy lot, i. e. in 
 the order according to which the lots 
 came from the helmet. Ell. Pass. 
 (Cf. II. XXIII. 353. Antig. 396.) 
 Wunder reads κλήρους βπηλαν, sup¬ 
 poses κλήρους €πηλαν καί = κλήρους 
 πηλαντ€ς, and then considers αύτους 
 and δίφρους to be double accusatives 
 to κατέστησαν, justifying that con¬ 
 struction by Aj. 1063, where αυτόν 
 and σώμα are double accusatives to 
 τυμβ€ΰσαι. Dindorf. (in Annot.) 
 adopts Wunder’s emendation and 
 explanation. Zickendrathdenies (and 
 I think justly) that Wunder’s refer¬ 
 ence applies to the passage before 
 us, and from a gloss in his MS. 
 (Cod. Falat.) considers κληροις έπη-- 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 61 
 
 χαλκης υτται σάλτηγγος fj^av’ οΐ δ* αμα 
 
 ΐ 7 ΠΓ 0 ί 9 ομοκΧησαντ€9 ηνία^ χβροΐν 
 
 €σ€ΐσαν' eV de ττάζ ίμ^στώθη δρόμο9 
 
 κτύπον κροτητών αρμάτων' kovls δ* άνω 
 
 φορζΐθ'' ομον δβ πάντ€9 άναμβμιγμύνοί 7^5 
 
 φβίδοντο κβντρων ovBev^ ώ? νπβρβαλοί 
 
 "χνόας τις αυτών καί φρνάγμαθ' ιππικά. ^ 
 
 λαν to be equivalent to ^κλήρωσαν. 
 From a passive construction in Od. 
 IX. 331. {αντάρ Tovs aXXovs κληρω 
 π^πάΚάχβαι ανωγον), and into which 
 the present text might easily be 
 thrown, Zickendrath’s opinion seems 
 to be the more correct view of the 
 case. See further Arnold ad Thu- 
 cyd. IV. 56. 
 
 711. νπαι (infr. 1419. Antig. 
 1035.) aoKntyyos p^av. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 592. Blomf. Ag. V. 435. 
 
 Ib. oi δ’ άμα. It is inconsistent 
 with the plan of this work to enter 
 minutely into all the varieties of the 
 particle de, which occur in this nar¬ 
 rative, but the reader, who is curious 
 in such matters, will find them 
 amply discussed by Ellendt in his 
 dissertations on that particle. See 
 Bernh. p. 310. for present instance. 
 
 712. δμοκ\ησαντ(ς. Cf. II. XXIII. 
 337* 363· 4i7y 446. 
 
 712—13. ήνίας €σ€ΐσαν. Cf. Blomf. 
 Animadv. in Iph. in A. v. 152. 
 
 713. cV de, at the same time. Cf. 
 CEd. T. 182. C. 55. Tr. 206. Ant. 
 420. Aj. 675. Hermann and El¬ 
 lendt read ck, and understand e^e- 
 μίστώθη. For a refutation of this 
 reading, and a general dissertation 
 on this formula, see Const. Mat- 
 thiae’s Quaest. Soph. p. 60. 
 
 Ib. δρόμος, the hippodrome. Cf. 
 infr. 748. II. XXIII. 321. πας e/xf- 
 
 στώθη, was altogether filled. Cf. 
 infr. 729. Aj. 275. Phil. 386. 
 
 714. κροτητών αρμάτων, rattling 
 chariots. II. XV. 452. νπΐρώησαν δε 
 oi ίπποι, κεϊν' οχεα κροτεοντες. For 
 genitive after εμεστώθη, see Bernh. 
 p. 160. 
 
 715. φορειθ’. The opinions of 
 Hermann, Elmsley and others on 
 the omission of the augment are too 
 weU known to need mentioning 
 here. A recent writer (Haupt), 
 after objecting to some of these 
 opinions, more particularly those of 
 Hermann, proceeds himself to ob¬ 
 serve : ‘ the tragedians were guided 
 in the omission of the augment 
 partly by the authority of the epic 
 poets, partly by an unconscious sen¬ 
 timent (?), partly by the necessity 
 of the metre : and it would there¬ 
 fore be difficult to find out and 
 prove any fixed laws by which they 
 might be guided.’ 
 
 716. νπερβάλοι, get before or leave 
 behind, viz. the chariots and horses 
 of his opponents. 
 
 717. χνόας, the socket in which 
 the axle moves; here put for the 
 axle, or rather chariot itself. Cf. 
 infr. 743, and Pass, in voc. For 
 probable orthography, see Blomf. 
 ad Sept. c. Th. 142. 
 
 Ib. τις αυτών, aliquis eorum. Wund. 
 * αυτών τις quasi conjectantis est, et 
 
62 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ομον γαρ άμφί νώτα και τροιών βα(Χ€ί9 } 
 
 ηφρίζον, βΙσββαλλον ΙπτηκαΙ πνοαί, 
 
 K€LVOS‘ δ’ νπ αυτήν ίσχάτην στηλην €χων 7^° « 
 
 €χρί 7 ΓΤ ael σύριγγα^ Se^Lov δ avei^ 
 σβιραϊον Ιττττον eipye τον ττροσκβίμ^νον. 
 καί TTfnv μβν 6ρθο\ τταντβ? €(ττα(ταν δίφροι' 
 
 quid consentaneum sit, aperientis.’ 
 Neue. 
 
 Jb. φρνάγμαθ' ίπττικα, S7l0rting of 
 coursers, i. e. snorting coursers. Cf. 
 Blomf. Gl. in Sept. c. Th. 231. 
 
 718. τροχών βάσεις, the circumre- 
 volving wheels ; νώτα, the backs of 
 the charioteers. 
 
 719. ηφριζον, ζΙσΙβαΧΚον, were dis¬ 
 charging their foam. For the asyn¬ 
 deton, cf. Aj. 60. Ellendt I. 893. 
 With Ιππικα'ι πνοαΐ, cf. .^sch. Sept, 
 c. Th. 61, and more particularly 11 . 
 XXIIL 380, where the breath of 
 Diomed’s steeds acts like fire upon 
 the back and shoulders of Eumelus, 
 his predecessor in the course. Con¬ 
 stantine Matthise (Qusest. Soph.) 
 considers the expression as corrupt, 
 and proposes to read άφρισμον ciVe- 
 βαΧλον. 
 
 720. (σχάτην στηλην, the last pillar 
 in the hippodrome (there being 
 several on the course), round which 
 the contending horses made their 
 turn. 
 
 Ib. €χων, having in hand, holding, 
 supporting. For ^x^lv thus used, 
 with or without ίππους attached, cf. 
 infr. 734. II. XXIIl. 325. 398. 
 401. 422. 426. 
 
 721. ovpiyya, the nave or hollow 
 of the nave, into which the axle was 
 fitted; hence the axle itself. A 
 
 person was said σύριγγα χρίπτπν, 
 when on coming to the last pillar or 
 goal, he drove his chariot so close, 
 that the axle almost touched it. Cf. 
 II. XXIIL 334. 338. On the 
 transitive and intransitive forms of 
 χρίπτ€ΐν, see Griffiths ad ^Esch. 
 Prom. 713. €χριπτ€, La. Wund. 
 €χριμπτ€, vulg. (Zickendrath in¬ 
 sists that both forms were used). 
 Cf. infr. 898. 
 
 721—2. de^iov — προσκείμενον. Cf. 
 II. XXIIL 336. sq.: άνε\ς, letting 
 loose, giving the rein to. 
 
 722. σειραίον (σείρα, a rope'), dex- 
 trum jugalem. Herm. Dind. The 
 error into which these two eminent 
 scholars have fallen by this trans¬ 
 lation (making Sophocles guilty of 
 the anachronism of starting car¬ 
 riages and pairs at the Pythian 
 games, when only carriages and 
 four were used) has been pointed 
 out by Dissen. (Excurs. in Pind. 1 . 
 p. 267.) As Sophocles is describing 
 only the two side horses in rope or 
 harness (σείρα), there was no occa¬ 
 sion for his mentioning the middle 
 pair in yoke (τους μέσους ζυγίους. 
 Eur. Iph. A. 221). Hence the 
 Scholiast’s explanation : σειραίον ίπ¬ 
 πον' τον ε^(ύ του ζυγου' προσκείμενον 
 Μ, τω V καμπτηρι, αριστερόν. Cf. Αη- 
 
 tig. 140. Peile ad Ag. 8n. 
 
 p 1 . e. the goal, according to a gloss in Cod. Pal. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 63 
 
 eireura S Wvlolvo^ avbpos αστομοι i 
 
 πώλοι βία φβρονσιρ, eK δ’ υποστροφήν, 7^S 
 
 TeXovvTev €ΚΤον ββδομόν τ ηδη δρομον, 
 
 μέτωπα σνμπαίονσι ^αρκαίοιν όχοιν. 
 
 724. αστομοι, horses, which have 
 lost the sense of the mouth : there¬ 
 fore, ungovernable. 
 
 725. βία φίρουσιν = ίκφίρονσιν. 
 Hermann compares Eur. Hipp. 1224. 
 at δ’ evdaKovaai στόμια — βία φίρουσιν, 
 where Valck. supplies τον 0 χον. Cf. 
 11 . XXIII. 376, 7. φορονσιν, Pors. 
 
 Ib. eK δ’ υποστροφής. I under¬ 
 stand the text and context as fol¬ 
 lows. The ten contesting chariots 
 are in full career for the goal, 
 Orestes being last in the race, and 
 the Athenian apparently somewhat 
 in the rear of the other eight com¬ 
 petitors. Suddenly the horses of 
 the CEnian run away with him. 
 After bearing onward for a while, 
 the ungovernable animals make a 
 sudden turn, just as the other cha¬ 
 riots are at or close upon the goal. 
 In consequence of this turn (e| υπο¬ 
 στροφής, cf. infr. 728), the horses of 
 the Q^nian impinge on those of the 
 Libyan from Barce : the carriage of 
 the latter is upset, and a general 
 confusion ensues, into which it is 
 unnecessary to enter. With regard 
 to V. 726. it appears to the present 
 oditor nothing more than a paren¬ 
 thetical expression artfully thrown 
 in to give a greater air of veri¬ 
 similitude to the narrative; the 
 
 speaker aifecting a transient doubt, 
 whether it was when completing the 
 sixth or seventh course that this 
 accident took place. Little paren¬ 
 theses of this kind, thrown into 
 fictitious narratives, are familiar to 
 the great masters of composition, 
 and in a narrative, where suspicion 
 was to. be lulled, as in the case 
 before us, nothing could be more 
 appropriate than the application of 
 this little artifice. 
 
 ^ ί(). τe\oυvτeς. Dindorf and W^un- 
 der observe, that TeXoii/Tcv is here 
 used, as if Ίπποι, and not the femi-' 
 nine πώλοι, had preceded. Passow 
 assigns both genders to the latter 
 word. 
 
 Ib. eKTov €β 8 ομόν τ€. sextum sep- 
 timumi;e. Musgr. Neue compares 
 Tacit. Agr. 12. rarus duabus tribus- 
 que civitatibus conventus, and in 
 Suppl. Thucyd. I. 82. II. 49. ""Ηδ?; 
 may be joined either with the nu¬ 
 meral (cf. Phil. 312.) or with TeXow- 
 res. With reXoii/res δρόμον, cf. II. 
 XXIII. 373. aXX’ oT€ drj πύματον 
 T^eov r δρόμον, κ. τ. i. 
 
 727. Βαρκαίοις οχοις. The ana¬ 
 chronism (Barce in Lybia having 
 been founded long after this period) 
 has been noticed by Passow from 
 Herodot. IV. 160. 
 
 <1 On tuming to see what sense Wunder gave to the words υποστροφής, the present 
 writer w'as gratified to find it not much at variance with his own. The principal differ¬ 
 ence between them is this : Wunder supposes the horses of the CEnian to have occupied 
 the inner gyrus, when instead of making their turn to the left, as they ought to have done 
 round the goal, they suddenly turn to the right, and impinge upon their immediate 
 neighbour in the course, the charioteer from Barce. The principal objection to this ex¬ 
 planation seems to be, that it does not allow sufficient latitude for the word φβρουσιν. 
 
 r A further illustration might he derived from the Sacred W^ritings; but it is of so 
 solemn a nature, that I hesitate to give more than a reference, 2 Tim. IV. 7. 
 
64 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 KavrevOev αλλοί αλΧον βζ eVoy κακού 
 
 βθρανβ, κάΐ'βτΓίπτε, παν S’ ΙπίμπΧατο 
 
 ναυαγίων ¥>.pLaalov Ιτπηκών πβδον. 73^ 
 
 γνονς δ’ ονζ * Αθηνών Setvos ηνιοστρόφοί 
 
 βζω παρασπα κάνακωχβύβι, napeh 
 
 κλνδων βφιππον iv μ^σω κνκώμβνον. 
 
 ηλαννβ δ’ ίσχατος μίν^ varepas S βχων 
 
 πώλους Όρ(στη9 τφ reXei πίστιν φβρων. 735 
 
 728. €ξ ivos κακού, in consequence 
 of one mishap or misfortune. 
 
 729. Kaveninre (άλλο? αλλω SC.). 
 Cf. Ell. in €μπίπτ€ΐν. 
 
 730. ναυαγίων Ιππικών . Cf. inf. 1444. 
 Jacobs compares Dem. Or. Amat. 
 1410, g. ώί €V To2s ΙππικοΙς άγώσιν 
 η^ίστην deav παρβχζται τα ναναγονντα. 
 
 731· ^€ΐνος, cautious, provident, ^ 
 skilful. For ού| 'Αθηνών, See Matth. 
 
 §. 574» ηνιυστρόφος, consult 
 
 Blomf. Gl. in Ch. 1009. 
 
 732. €^ω παρασπα κάνακωχ€ν€ΐ. 
 
 Matthiae (Constantine) considers 
 this as a sort of hysteron proteron 
 for holds in his horses, i. e. checks 
 the rapid pace at which they were 
 previously going, and draws them 
 aside out of the course. This does 
 not seem necessary; άνακωχζύίΐν 
 (άν€χω, ανοχή) is more strictly said 
 of ships, which lie at anchor in the 
 high sea. (Cf. Herodot. VI. 116. 
 VII. 100. 168. and Pass, in voc.) 
 It would therefore I think imply, 
 that the Athenian, after drawing his 
 chariot out of the course, stayed his 
 horses, halted for a moment to con¬ 
 template the spectacle before him. 
 The approach of Orestes would 
 speedily put the Athenian and his 
 vehicle in motion again. 
 
 732—3. παρ€\ς κ\ν 8 ων έφιππον. 
 Hermann, Wunder and Ellendt adopt 
 
 the translation of Vit. Winshemius, 
 sinit prwtervehi equestrem procellam. 
 The words κΧύδων έφιππον seem to 
 admit of a more definite and appro¬ 
 priate explanation. Κλν 8 ων signifies 
 a wave, and its derivation from κλνζω 
 shews it to be that kind of wave, 
 which breaks upon a shore, making 
 as it breaks a crashing sound, and 
 then scattering to pieces. Taking 
 έφιππον in the sense ascribed to the 
 word Ιππικός at ver. 698, the two 
 words would express the crash and 
 demolition made by the chariots as 
 they fell one upon the other, thus 
 furnishing a lively equivalent for the 
 ναυάγια ιππικά of ver. 73*^· 
 
 733. κυκώμζνον, commingled (strict¬ 
 ly : kneaded) : a word better known 
 in comic than in tragic Greek. Cf. 
 Griff, ad .^sch. Prom. 994. 
 
 734-5. General meaning: Orestes 
 was last in the race: but though 
 last, still full of confidence in the 
 final result. And so Const. Mat- 
 thise : er fuhr zuletzt, dock er haute 
 als letzter auf das Ende, (whom see 
 for a more minute examination of 
 the text. In the objections made 
 to Hermann’s interpretation of the 
 word υστίρας, the present editor 
 found himself anticipated by the 
 learned writer.) 
 
 735· τω reXfi πίστιν φέρων. Cicero 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 65 
 
 ο δ' ώς ορα μόνον νιν όΧΧζΧΗμμόνον^ 
 
 οζυν δί ωτων κβΧαδον ivaeiaas θοαϊς 
 
 ττωΧοις διώκει' κά^ισώσαντε ζυγά 
 
 ηΧαυνετην, Tor’ άλλο?, αλλο^’ ατερος 
 
 κάρα ττροβάΧΧων Ιππικών οχημάτων. 74° 
 
 καΐ Tous* μεν aXXov 9 πάντα^ άσφαΧεΐί δρόμον^ 
 
 ώρθονθ* 6 τΧημων 6ρθθ9 όζ ορθών δίφρων' 
 
 επειτα Χύων ηνίαν άριστεράν 
 
 Acad. II. 29. §. 94 · ^ 9 ^ enim^ ut 
 agitator callidiis, priusquam ad finem 
 veniam, equos sustineho. 
 
 736. 0 de — viv. By 0 δε, Her¬ 
 mann and Wunder understand the 
 Athenian, by viv Orestes. Is not the 
 reverse the case ? Not to enter into 
 other arguments, are not the swift 
 coursers alluded to in the following 
 verses obviously those of Orestes, 
 not of the Athenian ? 
 
 737. cvaeiciv, schmettern, to throw 
 with a crashing sound. Pass. De 
 sono aures feriente. Ell. Said of a 
 thunderbolt. Tr. 1087. 
 
 738. dtcuKeu Cf 11 . XXIII. 344 * 
 424. 499* 547· €ξισώσαντ€, La. Lb. 
 (ζισώσαντίς, vulg. 
 
 439. ηΚαννίτην {Xttttovs SC.) Cf. II. 
 
 xxiii. 322.356-7.429.434. 
 
 739—40. TOT άλλος — οχημάτων. The 
 Scholiast, Herm. Wund. Dind. and 
 Pass, leave this difficult passage un¬ 
 touched. I understand generally: 
 sometimes the horses belonging to 
 one chariot {άλλος Ιππικών οχημάτων) 
 thrusting the head forward, or get¬ 
 ting the lead, sometimes those in the 
 other: an image familiar to those 
 conversant with racing, but the con¬ 
 struction connected with which is 
 
 less easy of explanation. 
 
 740. προβάλλων. With this nomi¬ 
 native absolute, Neue aptly compares 
 Plat. Phsedr. 248, b. at ψνχαΙ ξυμπ€.. 
 φάρονται, €Τ€ρα προ της ίτίρας ττειρω- 
 μ€νη γ^νβσθαι. 
 
 Ib. Ιππικών οχημάτων seems to me 
 equivalent to ίππων οχονμίνων, the 
 gender of άλλος being accommodated 
 to the latter sense. So sup. 717. 
 φρνάγμαθ^ ιππικά, snorting horses. 719 . 
 ιππικοί πνοα'ι, the Strongly-breath¬ 
 ing horses, infr. 754· Ιππ-ικον 8 ρόμον, 
 runaway horses. And in some such 
 manner I think Ellendt must have 
 understood the text, who at the word 
 o;(j7fia observes: ‘accommodatur Pcwr- 
 rui, quod est equi.' 
 
 742. The poet’s object appears to 
 be to represent in as vivid terms as 
 possible the erect position of Orestes 
 himself as well as his chariot. This 
 purpose would have been served by 
 writing ώρθοϋθ* — ορθών δίφρων, but 
 a reduplication of terms never came 
 amiss to Sophocles. (Cf. Aj, 267. 
 467. 620. (Ed. T. 222, Ant. 142. 
 (Ed. C. 184. Phil. 135. &c.) For the 
 preposition, cf. Matth. §. 574 · 
 
 .743. λνων, relaxing. 
 
 P This kind of accommodation occurs not unfrequently in the sacred writings. 2 Sam. 
 VIII. 4. And David lamed the whole train of chariots, i. e. the horses belonging to them. 
 X. 18. And David slew seven hundred chariots of the Syrians, i. e. the horses and meo 
 
 belonging to them. Cf. Gesen. in voc. 23 ·^. 
 
66 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 κάμτττοντο 9 ίππου XavOaveL στηλην ακραν 
 
 πάίσας, eOpavae S α^ονο^ μέσας χζ^οα?, 745 
 
 κάζ άντύγων ωλισθβ, συν S βλίσσβταί 
 
 τμητοί^ Ιμαχτι’' του δβ πίπτοντος π^δω, 
 
 πώλοι διβσπάρησαν eV μβσον δρόμον. 
 
 στρατόν δ* οπω^ όρα νιν €κπ€πτωκότα 
 
 δίφρων, άνωλόλυζβ τον veaviav, 75^ 
 
 οΓ €ργα δράσας οΙα λαγχάνβι κακα, 
 
 φορούμβνοί προί% ούδα^, αλλοτ ουρανω 
 
 σκβλη προφαίνων, Is* Τ€ νιν διφρηλάται, 
 
 μόλΐ9 κατασχ€θόντ€9 ιππικόν δρόμον, 
 
 βλυσαν αιματηρόν, ώστ€ μηδβνα 755 
 
 γνώναι φίλων ιδόντ αν άθλιον δόμας. 
 
 . 744 * κάμπτοντας Ιππον ^ the horse 
 
 by which the turn round the goal 
 was made, στηλην ακραν, the pillar s 
 edge. 
 
 746, συν be, at the same time. 
 
 747. τμητοΊ,ς ίμάσι. Comparing II. 
 XXIII. 324 and 684, I understand; 
 reins well or skilfully cut. With the 
 more obvious meaning of the word, 
 the reader may compare the ψίαί 
 άκηρατοι of Pindar_, (Diss. II. 259.) 
 ττεδω, i. e. eh πάδον. Cf. Matth. §. 
 
 401.3· 
 
 748. 8 ΐ€σπάρησαν, discurrerunt. 
 Neue. 
 
 749. στρατός, the assembly. Cf. 
 An tig. 8. Trach. 795. 
 
 750. άνωλ 6 λν^€ (άνολολνζαν). More 
 commonly used in a joyous sense, 
 (cf. Trach. 205.), and by women ra¬ 
 ther than men. 
 
 731. λαγχάν€ΐ κακά. Cf. Matth. 
 §.328. Obs. On ola — ola, cf. Aj. 557. 
 
 752. φορονμβνος (dWore) προς ov- 
 δα?. Cf. Trach. ii. Eur. Hec. 28. 
 
 753. προφαίνων, exhibiting to be 
 seen. 
 
 754. κaτaσχeθόvτeς, Wund. Dind. 
 Ell. κατασχ 4 θοντ€ς, vulg. Herm. Neue. 
 (For disputes as to whether there 
 were any such verbs as σχΙθω and 
 κατασχβθω, and consequently as to 
 the accentuation of the participle 
 above, cf. Pass, ad voc. Elms, ad 
 Med. 995. Heracl. 272. Herm. in 
 loc. Griffiths ad iEsch. Prom. 16. 
 and above all Ellendt (I. 50*—4·) 
 
 755 · FJySeVa. Ellendt notices the 
 accus. masculine and fem. of μηΒ€\ς, 
 as very rare indeed in Sophocles* 
 when compared with the instances 
 of μη^Ιν. ΜηΒάνα OCCUrS CEd. T. 
 1529. CEd. C. 1762. 
 
 7^5-6. Cf. Il.XVI. 638,sq. 
 
 756. Neue construes the av in this 
 verse with γνωναι. Ellendt doubts 
 whether it is not to be joined with 
 Ιδόντα. Instances I think often occur, 
 where av appears to have a double 
 power, referring at once to a verb 
 and participle. On the junction of 
 ωστ€ with av and an infinitive, cf. 
 infr. 1316. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 67 
 
 καί VLV ττνρα κβαντβς βνθνς ev βραχβΐ 
 
 )(αλκω μέγιστόν σώμα detXaias σττοδοΰ 
 
 φζρουσιν ανδρε^ Φωκίων τ€ταγμ€νοι, 
 
 θ 7 Γω 9 ττατρωα^ τύμβον εκλα)(Ύΐ yOovos· 7 ^® 
 
 τοιαυτά σοι ταυτ βστίν, (09 μ^ν εν λογοίξ 
 
 αΧγεινα^ rols S Ιδονσιν, οίττερ είδομεν, 
 
 μέγιστα ττάντων ών οττωττ εγ<ύ κακών, 
 
 ΧΟ. φευ φεν“ το wav δη δεσττοταισι τοΪ9 waXai 
 
 wpόpp^ζov, ώ? εοικεν, εφθαρται γενοξ. 7^S 
 
 ΚΛ. ώ Ζεν, τί ταυτα^ πότερον ευτυχή λεγω^ 
 η δείνα μ£ν^ κέρδη δε ; λυπηρών δ ^χει^ 
 εΐ TOi9 εμαυτηί τον βίον σωζω κακοΐ^,. 
 
 ΠΑ. τί δ* ώδ* άθυμεϊς^ ώ γνναι, τω νυν λογω ; 
 
 ΚΛ. δεινόν το τίκτειν εστίν" ονδε γαρ κακώξ 77 ® 
 
 wάσχovτι μ1σο9 ών τεκη wpoσγιγvετaι„ 
 
 757 · Erf. Herm. Dind. 
 
 Wund. Kzjavres, La. Lb. Gaisf. Kciav- 
 Tcff, Palat. (‘ and perhaps more pro¬ 
 perly than κηαντ€ς and Kmvres. Cf. 
 
 Buttm- Gr. Gr. II. i6i. and Triclin. 
 
 Recens.’ Zickend.) 
 
 758. μεγιστορ σώμα detXauzs <τ?Γο- 
 ioC (gl. άρτι του μ^γίστον σώματος δ^ί- 
 Χαίαν σποδόν.) σώμα σίττοδου, Ο, body 
 consisting of ashes. Cf. Matth. §. 374 » 
 b. With βραχύ χαλκώ, cf. Blomf. Gl. 
 in Ch. 674. 
 
 759. avSpes Φωκίων. Antig. 290. 
 avbpfs ίτόλβαχί. 
 
 760. ΐκΚάχυ^ Aug. b. Jen. Wund. 
 
 Dind. €κΚάχοι, La. Lb. Erf. Schsef. 
 
 Matth. Gaisf. (who refers it to κη~ 
 avT€S)^ Neue (who refers to the 
 mind of those who send, not of those 
 who bring the body). 
 
 761. TOtavra — eariv, CEd. C. 62. 
 iis μ€Ρ €P Xoyois. Cf. Matth. §. 628. 
 
 3. e. Ellendt II. 1004. Dindorf. 
 
 (in Annot.) prefers λόγω. 
 
 762. Tois δ’ idovaiPf oinep €tbop€P. 
 
 Wunder observes that the poet con¬ 
 structs as if the preceding member 
 had been τοϊς pep άκονονσιρ akyeipa. 
 
 764. beaTTorauri rois ττάλαι, those 
 who were formerly my masters. So 
 also της ίτάλαι at ver. 1143* 
 
 1420. 1490. {pi ττάλοί and τώρ araXat,) 
 the adverb is better rendered long 
 ago. This little distinction will easily 
 occur to the reader in similar cases. 
 For beaTroToia-i, cf. Matth. §. 3 ^ 9 » S’ 
 
 766. Construct : τί ταντα λίγω 
 {how shall I speak of these things), 
 TTOTcpop €ντνχη η heipa ; 
 
 Plat. Phsed. p. 123. 
 
 768. Tots e μάντης—κακοΊς. Hypo¬ 
 critically meaning the death of her 
 son. Cf. infr. 779. 
 
 770. deipop TO TLKTeiP Ιστιρ. Cf. 
 Eur. Phcen. 358. Iph. Aul. 917. 
 Arist. Lys. 884. 
 
 771. τΐάσχοντι. Masculine gender 
 used on account of the generality of 
 the declaration. Cf. sup. i 26. 399. 
 Trach. 151. 
 
68 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Π A. μάτην αρ ημβΐ^, ώ? ίοικβν, ηκομβι/. 
 
 ΚΛ. ovTOL μάτην y6. irm yap άν μάτην XeyoL9 ; 
 
 €i μοί θανόντος ττίστ ίχων τβκμηρια 
 ττροσηλθβς, όσης της ίμης ψυχής γβγως, 775 
 
 * μαστών άποστάς καί τροφής ^μης, φνγάς 
 άπβζβνοντο, καί μ\ ίττά τησΒβ χθονος» 
 βζηλθβν, ούκ €τ eJdev' Ιγκαλών de μοί 
 φόνους ττατρωους Seiv βττηττβίλη Τ€λ€Ϊν' 
 ώστ ουτ€ νυκτός ύπνον οϋτ ίζ η μόρας jSo 
 
 βμβ στ^γάζην ηδυν, άλλ* ο προστατών 
 χρόνος διηγό μ alev ώς θανουμόνην, 
 
 PVI/ δ ’—ήμερα γάρ τηδ" άπηλλάγην φόβου 
 προς τησ& εκείνου θ ' ηδε γάρ μείζων βλάβη 
 ζύνοίκος ην μοί^ τουρών εκπίνουσ άεϊ 7^5 
 
 ψνχης άκρατον άίμα—νυν δ* εκηλά που 
 τών τησδ' απειλών οΰνεχ ημερεύσομεν. 
 
 Ib. ων τίκη {τις) . On the omission 
 of αν, see Matth. §. 527. Ohs. 2. 
 Kiihn. §. 796, I. Hart. II. 297. 
 
 772. μάτην ap'. Cf. Elms, ad Eur. 
 Med. 1229. Ellendt, who has closely- 
 investigated the latter particle, ren¬ 
 ders : sic frustra venisse videmur. 
 For the sense of μάτην, cf. infr. 797 · 
 Tr. 19 i. CEd. T. 1006. 
 
 774-5* τ€κμηρια θανόντος, οστις·= 
 τΐκμηρια οτι Wavev αντος, οστις, or 
 τ€κμηρια του 6aviiv αυτόν, οστνς. W UND. 
 
 Cf. infr. 904· 
 
 775· (ί. e. €ξ €μου. 
 
 Ell.) γεγώί. Cf. Antig. 1069. Aj. 
 154· Phil. 714. QEd. C. 499. 1207. 
 
 778-9. ίγκαΧων μοι φόνους. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 370. Obs. 2. 
 
 y^g. φόνους πατρώους. Neue refers 
 to infr. 955. Tr. 1125. Horn. Od. I. 
 299. 
 
 780. ημέρας, since it becomes day. 
 Matth. §. 574. Kiihn. §. 599. 
 
 781. στ€'γάζ€ΐν=·στί"γ€ΐν, hedechen, 
 to cover. Pass. Ellendt and Neae 
 understand rather in the sense of 
 embracing. The latter compares Cic. 
 de Rep. VI. 10. arctior me somnus 
 quam solebat complexus est. 
 
 781—2. 6 προστατών χρόνος, die 
 
 bevorstehende Zeit, the time impend·^ 
 ing. Pass. For biayeiv, implying 
 prolongation of life, Ellendt refers to 
 Jacobs’s Lectt. Stob. p. 121. See 
 also Elmsley’s Herac. 788. 
 
 782. ώ? θανουμίνην. ‘ non moritu- 
 ram, sed ita, ut me morituram puta~ 
 rem* Ell. 
 
 783. άπη\Κά'γην, &c. Wund. Dind. 
 άπηΧΚαγμαι, vulg. 
 
 785—6. €κπίνουσ ακρατον αίμα. Cf. 
 Antig. 531. .dEsch. Ch. 570. 
 
 786. νυν de. On this repetition, 
 see Hart. I. 173 sq. 
 
 787. ήμ€ρεύσομ€ν, gl. ζησομ€ν. Cf. 
 Peile ad Ch. 692. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 69 
 
 ΗΛ. οίμοί τάΚαινα' νυν yap οίμώζαι ττάρα, 
 
 Όρβστα, την σην ζυμφοραν, off ώδ’ Ιχωι^ 
 7r/)os* τησ^ ύβρίζβι μητρός. άρ βχβι καλώς ; 
 ΚΛ. οΰτοι σν' κ€Ϊνοί δ’, ώ? kuXcos ίχ'^ΐ· 
 ΗΛ. ακου€, Νβ/χβσί τον θανόντος άρτίως, 
 
 ΚΛ. ηκουσ€ν ων Sel κάπβκνρωσβν καλώς. 
 
 ΗΛ. νβριζβ. νυν. γαρ €υτνχονσα τνγχάνβις. 
 
 ΚΛ. οϋκουν * Ο ρέστης καΐ σύ ττανσβτον ταδβ. 
 ΗΛ. 7 Γ€ 7 Γαύμ€θ' ημ€Ϊς^ ονχ όπως σβ πανσομβν.^ 
 ΚΛ. πολλών αν ηκοις, ώ ζέν y αζιος τυχβϊν. 
 
 Ο υ 
 
 790 
 
 795 
 
 / r/Tiu 
 
 ik U/\/\UJy ^ ^ ^ 
 
 €L TTjvS έπαυσας της πολυγλώσσου βοής. 
 
 'rr~< · '* · 
 
 
 •V^'V.·? o 
 
 ΠΑ. ούκονν άποστβίχοιμ αν, el ταδ βύ κνρβΐ. 
 ΚΛ. ηκιστ’ hrevKep οϋτ'’ βμου καταζι αν 
 
 788. οιμοι — οίμω^αι. Cf. CEd. C. 
 820. 
 
 790. «ρ* καΧως ; ηοηηβ egre- 
 gie mecum actum est, i. e. nonne mi- 
 serrima sum? Wund. Cf. infr. 816. 
 
 1340-5· ^ ^ „ 
 
 791. οϋτοι σν {καλώς €χ€ΐς) : i.e. tor 
 you are not yet dead, as Orestes is. 
 
 792. Νί/χβσί. (Cf. Pors. ad Phoen. 
 
 187.) Electra invokes the 
 
 power of the defunct Orestes, viz. to 
 compensate the contumelies which 
 he has suifered from Clytsemnestra. 
 In the following verse, Clytsemnestra 
 speaks of the avenging power gene- 
 rally. 
 
 793· ήκουσβν {^evcieBis sc.) ων Be7, 
 meaning herself^ viz. by killing Ore¬ 
 stes, who had meditated her death. 
 fniKvpovv, to ratify. Cf. infr. 9 ^ 9 · 
 
 795. τάδβ, this thing: viz. my 
 being happy, my good fortune. 
 
 796. π€πανμ€θ' ημΰς. I under¬ 
 stand ; ‘ we indeed (i. e. Orestes 
 
 and herself) have been stopped of 
 this;' viz. the being happy: then 
 sinking her voice, ‘ but—we are· not 
 now in a condition to bar or stop 
 your being q happy.’ Wunder and 
 Neue merely refer to A^iger, p. 432. 
 and Herm. ad Viger. p. 790. Har- 
 tung quotes (II. 154 ·)» without 
 giving any particular explanation. 
 
 797. τνχ€Ϊν, nearly redundant, like 
 λαβ€Ϊν and other infinitives in So¬ 
 phocles. 
 
 798. ‘ €ττανσας sic intelligendum, 
 ut sit, siquidem effecisti, ut nunc post- 
 remum locuta sit.’ Ell. For the cor¬ 
 rection, which Monk proposed to 
 make in the text, and the objections 
 made by Neue and Wunder, see 
 the two learned writers respectively. 
 For genitive βοής, cf.. Kuhn. §. 5 ^ 3 · 
 
 800. κατάξι αν, Both. Monk. Blomf. 
 (Animad. in Iph. in Aul.) W und.Dind. 
 (inAnnot.) Neue. καταξίως, Schaef. 
 Herm. Ell. and others. Cf. Matth. 
 
 q And so I since find Ellendt understands the latter part of the verse: ‘ ονχ Situs ffe 
 νανσομ^ν, hoc est, si recte introspicias, ούχ ωστ€ ^xetv, Sttus τταΰσομΐν tre. 
 
 » 
 
74 
 
 20ΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΗΛ. 
 
 
 
 • ν’ ί,·' 
 
 ττράζβία^ οντ€ τού ττορ^ύσαντο^ ξβι/ον. 
 άλλ* βϊσίθ' βϊσω, την^ε S εκτοθεν βοάρ 
 εα τά Θ' αύτηζ καί τα των φίλων κακα^ 
 άρ νρύίν ώ? aXyovcra κωδννωμεντ) 
 δεινώς δακρύσαι κάτηκωκύσαι δοκεΐ ' 'i 
 τον νϊον η δυστήνου ώδ" όλωλοτα ; 
 άλλ* εγγελωσα φρούδοι · ώ ταλαιν εγω’ 
 ρέστα φίλταθ\ ω$ ρ> αττωλεσα^ θαι^ων·*^ 
 άτΓοσττάσας γαρ της εμης θίγει φρενος 
 αί μοί μόναι τταρησαν ελτηδων ετι, 
 σε ττατρος ζωντα τιμωρον ττοτε 
 
 κάμον ταλαίνης. νυν δε ττοΐ με χρη μολειν 
 μόνη γάρ ε'ιμι^ σου τ αττεστερημ^νη 
 KCU ττατρός, ηδη δει με δουλευειν τταλιν 
 εν τοΐσιν εχθίστοισιν άνθρωττων εμοί, 
 φονεύσί πατρός, όφά μου καλώς εχει ; 
 άλλ’ οΰτι μην εγωγε του λοιπού χρονου 
 ζύνοίκος εσσομ^ άλλα τηδε προς πυλτι 
 παρεΐσ εμαυτην άφιλος οιι^α^ώ βιον. 
 
 '' <ju / 
 
 
 L‘- 
 
 8ιο 
 
 8ι5 
 
 2. ρ. 871. Peile ad Ag. ρρ. 248. 
 399 · 
 
 8ο I. TTopevaavTos, gl. άποστίίλαντος. 
 
 802. eKToBev, La. Lb. €KTocr 6 eVy 
 Tulg. Cf. -^sch. Sept. c. Th. 626. 
 Choeph. 466. 
 
 803. Toiv φίλων, Orestes sc. cf. 
 sup. 652. CEd. Col. 813. &c. &c. 
 
 804 sq. Abresch compares ^disch. 
 Ch. 726. ώί, ut comeniebat. Ell. 
 (whom see, II. p. 1002.) 
 
 807. αλλ’. On the use of αλλά, 
 when a person interrupts himself, or 
 springs suddenly to a thought, which 
 gives a different turn to the whole 
 subject, see Hart. 11 . 37· 
 
 812. Trot μ( χρη μολίΐν ; Cf. Aj. 
 1006. 
 
 814. ήδη πάλιν, again now. (On 
 the more particular sense of the word 
 ττάλιν, see Ell. IL 486.) κάι πατρόχ. 
 ή 8 η be'i μ€, Herm. Wund. και πατροχ 
 τΙ 8 η. 8 άιμ(, libri. ^ δ»?, Br. Erf. Schaef. 
 
 817· βλλ’ οντι μην. Cf. Phil. 1273· 
 
 818. ξύνοικοχ ίσσομ =ζ συνοικήσω, 
 he their fellow-habitant. ξννοικοςΖσσομ 
 
 is the general reading of the MSS. 
 but as neither the hiatus nor the 
 epic form (cf. Matth. §. 45* §· 
 seems here in place, various emenda¬ 
 tions have been offered of the pas¬ 
 sage. Ζσομαι ξΰνοικος, Dawes. Pors. 
 ξυνοικοχ αυτοΊχ, or cri ξννοικοχ, or ξυν- 
 OLKOX Λσ€ΐμ, Herm. ξννοικοχ Ζσομαί y, 
 Wund. 
 
 819. παράισ (μάντην, throwing My- 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 71 
 
 TTpos ταΰτα kollv^too tl 9 ^ €l βαρυνβται^ 
 των evdov οντων' ώί χοίρΐ9 μβν, ην κτάντ), 
 λύπη δ\ eav ζώ^ .του βίου δ’ ovdeh πόθοί. 
 
 χο. που ποτβ κ€ραυνοΙ Alo 9, η που φα€θων 
 'ΆλίΟί, ταύτ €φορώντ€9 
 κρύπτουσιν €κηλοί ; 
 
 ΗΛ. € €, aLaL. 
 
 ΧΟ. ώ τταξ τί δακρύβις ; 
 
 ΗΛ. φβυ, 
 
 ΧΟ. μηδ^ μύγ άύσης, 
 
 ΗΛ. άτΓολεΓ?. ΧΟ. πώί; 
 
 ΗΛ. €[ των φανβρώς οΐχομύνων 
 ek *Αΐδαν €λπίδ^ υποίτ 
 σ€ί?, κατ ίμού τακομύνας 
 
 820 
 
 (Γτροψ. Λ . 
 .825 
 
 830 
 
 835 
 
 self. Br. Ell. losing all care, or re¬ 
 gard for myself. Wund. 
 
 Ib. ανανώ βίον, I will allow life to 
 consume and wither away. Pbil. 954 * 
 αλλ' ανανονμαι τωδ’ iv αν\ιω. Arist. 
 Ran. 1089. ωστ ίπαφανάνθην yeX&v. 
 
 824. KepavvoX Alos. SojEsch.Prom. 
 372. but V. 667. KepavvoX €K Αιός. που 
 TTore, ubi tandem? Wund. ad Phil. 
 1071. (Metre: iamb. dip. and cho¬ 
 riamb. dim. Choriambics with or 
 without base, form the predominant 
 metre of the strophe, an ionic a 
 min ore being occasionally inter¬ 
 mixed, (as vv. 827. 831.) 
 
 825. (φορωντ€ς. As applied to the 
 sun, cf. Trach. 101. to Zeus, see 
 sup. 175. See also Klausen’s iEsch. 
 Theol. 65. 121. ταντα may be con¬ 
 sidered as equally belonging to εφο- 
 pa>vT€s and κρυτττονσιν. In his recent 
 metrical work Dindorf joins this and 
 preceding verse, as he does also vv. 
 833-4, and 835-6. 
 
 829. φβΟ. The vehemence and 
 
 spirit in which this exclamation is 
 uttered by Electra, may be collected 
 from the stage-directions given by 
 the Scholiast, who says, ‘ here the 
 actor as he speaks, must cast his 
 eyes to heaven, and stretch forth his 
 hands, the Chorus by way of pre¬ 
 ventive observing, μη^Ιν pey dv- 
 aps.’ (Gl. μη^ίν άπρεπε? ει? τούς θβονς 
 
 830. ρτ^δει; pey άύστ}ς. Aj. 386. 
 ρηΒέν pey είπ?/?. 
 
 833· «—ύποίσει?. If you suggest 
 any hope to he derived from him, who 
 is manifestly dead, (viz. Orestes.) 
 "With T(i>v ol'^opevoiv, as §^6n. after 
 ε’λπίδ’, cf. 1460. ίΚπίσιν KevaU dvdpos 
 τοΟδε, empty hopes derived from this 
 man. i486, κερδο? του χρόνου, benefit 
 conferred by time. 
 
 834—5. κατ epov — ε’περβασει. Lo- . 
 beck for construction compares Aj. 
 969. πώ? δητα τοΰΒ* eireyyeXaev αν 
 κατά; Phil. 328. Elmsley (Mus. 
 Crit. I. 473·) observes: κατ epov 
 
72 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 μάλλον €7Γ€μβάσ€ί. 
 
 ΧΟ. οΊδα γάρ ανακτ Άμφίάρβων χρυσοδβτοις Λντ, λ, 
 
 epKeaL κρνφθβντα γυναικών’ 
 και νυν ιπτο γαίας 
 
 ΗΛ. € €, Ιώ. 840 
 
 ΧΟ. ττάμψυχος άνάσσ€ΐ. 
 
 (f. κατά μου) τακομ^νας is equivalent 
 to €μον *■ κατατακομβνας. With eVe/x- 
 βάσ(ΐ (Dor. for ίττ^μβησίΐ) cf. sup. 
 
 456· 
 
 837 sq. To cheer the drooping 
 spirits of Electra, the Chorus advert 
 to the case of one of the most dis¬ 
 tinguished of Argive chiefs, (Am- 
 phiaraus sc.) who, like Agamem¬ 
 non, had come to an untimely end 
 through his wife’s means. The 
 earth, as the choral troop intimate, 
 opened her mouth and swallowed 
 him up (infr. v. 838.) ; but what 
 then ? even below the earth he still 
 retains regal power, and instead of 
 an intellect partially illuminated, he 
 has become all soul and universal 
 intelligence. The inference meant 
 to be draw'n seems this ; And may 
 not power and intellect still remain 
 with your own defunct sire ? and 
 possessed of these, will he not, not¬ 
 withstanding the death of Orestes, 
 find some means of bringing his 
 murderess to justice, as Amphiaraus 
 contrived that vengeance should be 
 dealt on the treacherous Eriphyle ? 
 
 Ib. ^Αμφιάρ^ων. Amphiaraus, son 
 of Oicleus, or, according to others, 
 of Apollo, by Hypermnestra, mar¬ 
 ried Eriphyle, the sister of Adrastus, 
 king of Argos, by whom he had two 
 • sons, Alcmseon and Amphilochus.' 
 His attempts to secrete himself, that 
 
 he might not accompany his brother- 
 in-law in an expedition, in which he 
 knew it would be his fate to perish, 
 and the bribe by which Eriphyle was 
 tempted to betray his hiding-place 
 to Polynices, are circumstances too 
 well known to need enlarging upon. 
 See Thudich. I. 316 sq. 
 
 Ib. xpvaoberoig. Antig. 945 * Χ°λκο- 
 
 deTois. 
 
 838. epKos {epyoi, (ϊργω), properly 
 a fastness, a mesh, a snare. Here 
 termed χρυσόδβΓΟϊ', {bound with gold,) 
 in allusion to the golden necklace, 
 by which Eriphyle was tempted to 
 betray her husband. Cf. Peile ad 
 Ag. 1582. for epKos: Pausan. IX. 41. 
 Creuz. II. 331. for fact. 
 
 Ib. κρνφθβντα. The allusion is to 
 the mode in which Amphiaraus pe¬ 
 rished ; viz. by the earth cleaving 
 asunder and swallowing him up. 
 Pind, Nem. IX. 56. ό δ’ ’Α/χφιάρ?/ 
 σχίσσΐν κΐραννω τταμβία Zevs rau βα· 
 βνστ€ρνον χθόνα, κρνψεν δ’ άμ ΐπτΓΟίς. 
 
 Cf. Pausan. IX. 8. 
 
 Ib.7Vi/aiic0ii/,pluralforsmg.jEn^%/e. 
 
 841· τταμψυχος, all life and intelli· 
 gence: in opposition to the other 
 dead, who with some such exception 
 as Tiresias (Od. X. 493.) possessed 
 only a half sort of existence and in¬ 
 tellectuality. Cf. Pass, in voc. Mat- 
 thise (§. 446. 8.) adopts the scho¬ 
 lium : ττάμφνχοςάνάσσξΐ, i.e. τιασων των 
 
 r Kllendt, not very courteous at times to English scholars, observes, * minime necessi- 
 rio et vix Greece, siquidem dativo opus, nisi addatur genitivo κατά.’ 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 73 
 
 ΗΛ. φβν. 
 
 ΧΟ. φβϋ δητ* όλοά γαρ 
 
 ΗΛ. ΙΒάμη. ΧΟ. ναι. 
 
 ΗΛ. old' old'' βφάνη γαρ μβλβτωρ 
 άμφί τον iv TrivOu' βμοι d 
 οϋτις er eau ‘ os γαρ er ην, 
 φpovdos avapTraorOeLS. 
 
 XO. deiXaia d€Lλaίωv KvpeLS. 
 
 ΗΛ. 4 κά)/ώ rood' ϊ(ττωρ, υττβριστωρ, 
 ΙτΓανσνρτω τταμμηνω d^LVWV 
 στνγνόύν τ' άγίοαν aLwvL. 
 
 845 
 
 ττροψ. 0· 
 850 
 
 yjiTv^oju άνά(Τ(Τ€ΐ. On which latter sub¬ 
 ject, see Klausen’s Theol. 61 sq. 
 Blomf. Gl. Pers. 697. 
 
 842. φεΟ. Adverb of indignation, 
 occasioned by the reference to Eri- 
 phyle. An equivalent must be given. 
 Shame on her—perish the wretch, or 
 the like. 
 
 843. ολοά yap. How the Chorus 
 meant to terminate their sentence 
 (for no stop ought obviously to be 
 placed at yap) is uncertain, the ve¬ 
 hemence of Electra breaking in upon 
 the sentence, before it is concluded. 
 We shall perhaps best connect it 
 with the verb εδάρτ/, by rendering— 
 for she the murderous. 
 
 844—6. ί^άμη, came to a violent 
 end, was slain. Electra speaks im¬ 
 petuously, her heated imagination 
 no doubt seeing Clytsemnestra under 
 the avenging steel, as well as Eri- 
 phyle. 
 
 846. olb' (oTi ίδάμη). 
 
 Ib. €φάνη, ohlatus est, non oculis, 
 sed ut facto se vindicem proharet. 
 Ell. 
 
 lb. μ^λίτωρ, viz. Alcmeeon, who 
 revenged his father by killing Eri- 
 phyle. With the word μίΚίτωρ, im¬ 
 
 plying a person who takes care that 
 so pious a duty to the dead shall be 
 fulfilled, compare the word άμΐλύν, 
 V. 237,'implying neglect of the of¬ 
 fice. 
 
 847. TOP iv TTeVdet, Amphiaraus : 
 the murdered dead being supposed 
 to sorrow, while they lie unrevenged. 
 For construction, cf. sup. 290. and 
 Wund. ad Trach. 718. 
 
 849. δειλαϊα beCkamv KVpeU, misera 
 miserias sustines. Johns. For kv- 
 pelv (nanscisci, potiri) with a gen. cf. 
 CEd. T. 1514. GEd. C. 247. Antig. 
 870. (Metre: cretic and iamb, or 
 cretic and troch. penth. the diphthong 
 short.) 
 
 830. General meaning: I know 
 it, too well, I know it: how could a 
 long life {τνάμμηνο^ αιών), and that 
 life crowded with misfortunes {πάν- 
 (TvpTos άχ/ύύν^, leave me ignorant that 
 I was the most wretched of women ? 
 
 lb. ύτΓβρίστωρ. So Aj. T 11 9. I'TTep- 
 δικα. Cf. Griffiths ad JE&ch. Sept. c. 
 Th. 506. 
 
 851. ττάνσνρτος (σι»ρω), heaped Up. 
 τταμμηνω. ScHOL. : πολνχρονίω, διη- 
 vckH. 
 
 852. αιωι /t, by means of, or on ac- 
 
74 
 
 20Φ0ΚΛΕ0Τ2 
 
 ΧΟ. (ίδομΐν a θρηνύζ. 
 
 ΗΛ. μη μ€ νυν μηκ€Τί 
 
 τταραγάγης, ίν ον 855 
 
 ΧΟ. τί φης ; 
 
 ΗΛ. ττάρβίσιν· βλττίδων ert κοίνοτόκων 
 βύττατριδάν τ άρωγαί, 
 
 ΧΟ. ττάσι Θνατοΐς βφν μόρος, λ]/τ. β'. 86ο 
 
 ΗΛ. η κα). χαλαργοί^ Ιν άμίλλαις 
 οντω^, ώί κβίνω δνστάνω, 
 τμητοΐ 9 δλκοίς ίγκυρσαι ; 
 
 ΧΟ. ασκσπο9 α λώβα. 
 
 ΗΛ. ττώ^ yap οΰκ ; el ^evo 9 865 
 
 count of a life, ^ανων αΙωνι, Dind. e 
 conj. Wund. πολλών deivcov στυγνών 
 τ’ αΙωνι, Herm. πολλών deivcov στυγνών 
 τ άχβων, libri. 
 
 853· Ορην€ΐ5, Erf. e conj. Wund. 
 Dind. (in ® Annot.) epoch, libri. 
 Monk. On εϊδω, in the sense of ‘ to 
 know* see Matth. §. 23 1. 2. 
 
 854 sq. Metre ; cretics, succeeded 
 by a dochmiac. After the parenthe¬ 
 tic τί φηί, follow an iambelegus, and 
 a logaoedic verse. 
 
 855—8. LV ov — άρωγαΐ. I under¬ 
 stand generally: where assistance 
 (αρωγα'ί) to be derived from him, 
 |Who was my hope and trust, (ελπί¬ 
 δων), born as he is of common pa¬ 
 rents {κοίνοτόκων), and nobly born, 
 at least on the father’s side (βυπα- 
 τρώαν), no longer presents itself {ου 
 ^napciaiv). Cf. Matth. II. p. 74 ^· 
 άρωγαι, Musgr. Wund. Dind. αρωγοί, 
 libri: 
 
 861. χα\αργο7ί iv άμΙλΧαις. ScHOL. 
 iTTTTLKah apiWais, i. e. Ιππων sive δί¬ 
 φρων apikXais. Cf. Bemh. p. ^26. 
 Kiihn. §. 473, a. *Anm. Matth. §. 
 446, 3. Obs. 
 
 Ib. χάλαργοΊς, Dor. for χηλαργοΐς 
 {χηλη, αργός), white-footed, or swift¬ 
 footed. For Doricism, see Ell. II. 
 14.; for accent, consult Lob. ad Aj. 
 890. 
 
 863. τμητούς 6 \κόΐς {ίΚκω). Sup. 
 747. τμητοΊς ίμασι. The substitution 
 seems made, in order to express the 
 dragging of the reins, which took 
 place after Orestes was thrown from 
 his car. Schol. : ολκούς αντί των ιμάν¬ 
 των, iv οΐς ίΐλκύσθτ). 
 
 864. άσκοπος (gl. απροσδόκητος) ά 
 λώβα. ϊ. e. a death so happening was 
 a misfortune which we had no right 
 to expect. 
 
 865. ξινός, in a foreign land. Cf. 
 Tr. 65. QEd. C. 562. Οηπώί γαρ ουκ, 
 cf. infr. 1307. 1448. Blomf. Gl. in 
 Ag. 264. 
 
 860. θνατοίς έ'φυ. Trach. 44 ®· 
 peiv πίφυκεν ουχϊ τοΐς αυτοΐς dei. 
 
 s In his recent work, ‘ Metra ^Eschyli Soph. &c.’ the learned writer reads adp^veis. 
 t Wunder translates briefly, but much to the same effect: ubijam non est auxilium 
 sperati fratris generosi. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 75 
 
 ατ€ρ ίμαν χβρών 
 
 ΧΟ. τταττα?. 
 
 ΗΛ. κβκβνθβν, ovre τον^άφον άντιΛσας f 
 ovT€ γόων τταρ ημών. 
 
 ΧΡ. νφ' ηδονη^ τοι^ φίΧτατη, διώκομαι 
 
 το κόσμιον μβθβΐο'α <τνν ταχβΐ μοΧβΐν. 
 φόρω γαρ ηδονα^ Τ€ καναττανΧαν ων 
 πάροιθβν €ΐχ€? καί κατέστβνες κακών. 
 
 ΗΛ. ττόθεν S αν ενροΐ9 των εμών σί) ττημάτων' 
 αρη^ιν^ oly Χααιν ονκ ενεεττ ιδεΐν ^ 
 
 ΧΡ. ττάρβστ "Ορέστης 
 
 κΧύουσ\ εναργών, ωσττερ εισορας εμε. 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’ η μεμηνας, ώ τάΧαινα, κάπί τοΪ9 
 σαυτψ κακοΐσι κάτη τοΐς εμοΐς γεΧας ; 
 
 ΧΡ. μα την ττατρωαν εστίαν, άλλ’ ούχ νβρει 
 Χεγω ταδ^, άλλ εκείνον cos* τταροντα νώ, 
 
 ΗΛ. οίμοι raXcum- και t'lvos βροτών λόγον 
 TovS (ατακονσαο’’ ώδβ Triareviis αγαν ; 
 
 ΧΡ. ίγω μίν ΐξ 4μοΰ re κοΰκ αλλψ, σαφή 
 
 870 
 
 875 
 
 88ο 
 
 885 
 
 866. arep €μαν χ^ρων, without any 
 care on my part. 
 
 869. KeKevSev. ScHOL. : avTi Tov 
 κρν7ΓΤ€ται. Cf. Elmsl. Hera.c. v. 778· 
 Ib. τάφον άντιάσαχ. For construc¬ 
 tion cf. Matth. §. 328. Peile ad Ag. 
 1527. For the word τάφον, see infr. 
 1400. 
 
 872. TO κόσριον pcBeKTa, neylectiny 
 decorum. 
 
 873. φ€ρω, I announce, bring news 
 of. Cf. Aj. 789. 799. Ant. 1172. 
 CEd. C. 420. 
 
 879. αλλ’ η. Elmsley, ad Herac. 
 426. adopts Musgrave’s interpreta¬ 
 tion, an ergo. Cf. Kiihn. §. 835» 4* 
 Peile ad Ch. 211. Blomf. ad Ch. 
 762. 
 
 882. νω, contr. for v6n, Dind. e 
 conject. Wund. v^, vulg. Dindorf 
 supports his conjecture by the Codd. 
 Harl. Monac. Flor. Γ. which read 
 i/oei, by Phil. 415. μηκΙτ οντα Κ€ΐ- 
 vov eV φάίί ν 0 €ΐ, and by a Doric crasis 
 in fr. Soph. 191. (Etym. M. p. 5 oi, 
 
 20. NeVwrat; vevorjTai, τταρα Σοφοκλβι 
 ΈλΑι/ίγαρω.) Ellendt considers λίγω 
 as used cum zeugmate, signifying dico 
 in the first instance, and nornine il- 
 Hus utor tanquam prwsentis in the 
 second. On the common reading, 
 cf. Matth. §. 568, 3. Peile ad Ch. 
 215. Elms. Heracl. 693. infr. 1341. 
 
 884. ωδ άγαν, adeo. Ell. 
 
 885. e’l epov re kovk ά\\ηί. Hart- 
 ung ( 1.102.) compares CEd. T. 1275* 
 
76 
 
 20Φ0ΚΛΕ0Τ2 
 
 σημ^ν Ιδονσα, τώδβ πιστεύω λόγω. 
 
 ΗΛ. τίρ\ ώ τάλαιν\ Ιδουσα πίστιν ; ες τί μοι ^ 
 
 βλεψασα θάλπει rcoS άνηκεστω πνρί ; 
 
 ΧΡ. πρό^ ννν θεών άκονσον, ώί μαθουσά μου 
 
 το λοιπόν η φρονούσαν η μωράν λεγρ^. 890 
 
 ΗΛ. συ S ουν λεγ\ εϊ σοι τω λόγω τις ηδονή. 
 
 ΧΡ. καΙ δή λέγω σοι παν όσον κατειδόμην. 
 επεΊ γάρ ήλθον πατρός άρχαΐον τάφον^ 
 όρώ κολώνης εζ άκρας νεορρύτους 
 
 πηγάς γάλακτος καΙ περιστεφή κύκλω ‘ 895 
 
 πάντων όσ εστ\ν άνθεων θήκην πατρός. 
 
 ιδουσα δ’ εσγον θαύμα, καί περισκοπώ, 
 
 μή πού τις ήμιν εγγύς όγχρίτττΎ) βροτών. 
 
 ως δ' εν’γαλήνη πάντ εδερκόμην τόπον, 
 
 τύμβου προσεΐρπον άσσον, εσχάτης S όρώ ^οο 
 
 πολλάκις re κουχ άπαξ. CEd. Col. 939· 
 βία Τ€ κουχ ίκων. αλλτ;?, Neue, (coll. 
 sup. ιοο. 1 1 82.) Wund. ^λου, vulg. 
 
 887. πίστιν, a thing in which con¬ 
 fidence may be placed. 
 
 887-8. is τί βλβψασα. Cf. Markl. 
 ad Eur. Suppl. 679. 
 
 888. θάλπει, heated, (.^sch. Pr. 
 904. καί (/Lie) φρξνηπληγβϊς μανίαι θάλ- 
 πονσ\ where see Blomf. Gl.) τώδ’ 
 άνηκίστω πνρ\ {this insane ardour of 
 mind). Cf. Aj. 52. άνηκ4στον χαρας. 
 
 891. συ d’ ουν. Cf. Aj. 114. 
 
 892. κατβώόμην for Karcldov, as ei- 
 ^όμην for dbop, Phil. 351. 
 
 893. άρχαΊον (ScHOL. προγονικού) 
 τάφον.^ Evidently the family-vault; 
 the tomb of Agamemnon himself, 
 so recently slain, could not well be 
 termed άρχαίον. For some observa¬ 
 tions on Agamemnon’s tomb, see 
 Hughes’s Travels, I. 235. 
 
 894. κoλώvηs i$ ακρας, running down 
 
 from the top of the tomb, pcoppvrovs, 
 recently poured. 
 
 893—6. πepισreφί) άνθβων. For con¬ 
 struction, see Matth. §. 345. Kuhn. 
 §. 525, bb. On the diaeresis in άνθίων, 
 see Ellendt’s Dissert. II. 13. As a 
 mode of appeasing the dead, cf. Bl. 
 Gl. in Pers. 616. 
 
 896. θηκην, tomb. CEd. C. 1763. 
 Cf. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 411. 
 
 897 * icrxov θαύμα — 4 Θανμαζον . ( 39 ^. 
 μνείαν €χ€ΐ 9 — μ 4 μνησαι 6 1 6 . αΙσχυνην 
 €χ€ΐν=αΙσχύν€σθαι &C. &C.) κα\ περι¬ 
 σκοπώ. On the change of tense, see 
 Kiihn. §. 441, 5. 
 
 898. εγχρίπτρ^ Aid. La. Gaisf. 
 Wund. Neue. εγχρίμπτη, vulg. Dind. 
 
 899. cos for € 7764 . infr. 902. sup. 
 519. 736. ^ 
 
 900—1. εσχάrηs πνρα^, On the top of 
 the tomb, (properly a funeral pyre.) 
 Genitive of place, cf. Matth. §.377· 
 Kiihn. 523, 2. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ, 
 
 Τ7 
 
 ττνρας ρβωρη βόστρυχον τβτ μη μόνον' 
 
 Κ€υθυ9 τάΧαιν ώ? eibov^ ^μτταίβί τί μου 
 
 “ψυχή σύνηθβ^ ομμα^ φίλτατον βροτών 
 
 πάντων Όρόστου τοΰθ* όράν τβκμηρων’ 
 
 καϊ χΕρσΙ βαστάσασα δυσφημώ μβν ου, 9^5 
 
 χσρα δβ πίμπΧημ €ύθυ9 ομμα δακρύων. 
 
 KOU νυν θ' ομοίως και τότ ίσταμαι 
 μη του τόδ* άγΧάϊσμα πΧην κβίνου μοΧβιν. 
 τώ ycip προσηκβι πΧην y όμου και σου τοδβ ; 
 
 Kayco μ€ν ούκ ί'δρασα, τοΰτ όπίσταμαι, gio 
 
 ούδ’ αυ συ. ττώ? yap ; rj ye μηδβ προί θ€ου9 
 
 βζβστ άκΧαύστω τησδ' άποστηναι στeyη 9 . 
 
 άλλ* ουδβ μβν δη μητρο9 οΰθ ο νου9 φιΧόί 
 
 τοιαυτα πράσσβιν, οΰτ€ δρώσ eXavOavev' 
 
 άλλ’ όστ ^ Ο ρόστου ταΰτα τάπιτίμια. 9^5 
 
 Qoi. Ρ€ωρη. Jacobs and W^under 
 understand, recently placed there. On 
 the custom itself, see abundant re¬ 
 ferences in Thudicbum I. p. 33 ^· 
 
 902—3. epnaiei — ομμα. * Species 
 animo obversari solita se obtulit.’ 
 Ell. who adds, that έμπαί^ι is a 
 stronger term than βίσπίπτ^ι, as ΐΐσ- 
 ηαίω than βισττίτττω. 
 
 905 . δυσφημώ μέν ον, I forbear ill- 
 omened words. (I presume, against 
 iEgisthus or her mother.) On βα- 
 στάζίίν, to carry fondly or reverently, 
 cf. Phil. 657. Peile ad Ag. 34. 
 
 905—6. δυσφημώ μ€ν οΰ, χαρα δε. 
 Infr. 1036. ατιμίας μ€ν ον, προμηθίας 
 δβ. Antig. 255· τυμβηρης pev ον — 
 λετΓΓ^ δε. Phil. 545 * ^οξάζων μ^ ον’ 
 τνχη δε. See also Elmsl. ad Med. 
 
 1053-7· ^ ^ Q . . 
 
 908. κείνου /χολεΐν. Tr, 844, αττ 
 αλλδ^ρου γνώμας μοΧόντ. On the 
 word άγΧάΐσμα, see Blomf. Gl. in 
 Ag. 1283. (Peile 1279.) Ch. 187. 
 
 911, ad, on the other hand. Cf. 
 infr. 1034. 
 
 912. άκΧαύστω, without tears, i. e. 
 with impunity. On άκΧανστος and 
 άκΧαντος, cf. Ell. in voc. and Elms- 
 ley’s CEd. C. 1360. 
 
 913—14. On άλλ* ούδε peu δη, see 
 Aj. 876. On ουδέ — ούτε — ού'τε, see 
 Ell. II. 422. 
 
 914. “ ούτε δρώσ' ε’λάν^ανεν means, 
 not ‘ she would not, or she could not 
 have done it unobserved,’ bat ‘ she 
 did not do it secretly;’ the word 
 ‘ secretly’ being emphatic.” Matth. 
 §. 508, c. Obs. 2. Wunder compares 
 infr. 1022. Ear. Troad. 397. Hec. 
 1111. (Χάνθανβν, La. lib. Gaisf.Wand. 
 Neue. ΙΧάνθαν άν, Heath. Br. Schsef. 
 Bind. Cf. Hart. II. 234. Elmsl. ad 
 Med. p. 150. ad Bacch. v. 1311. 
 
 915. τάπιτίμια. ScHOL. : τα ε’πι τη 
 τιμή yivopeva του πατρός. Dindorf, 
 observing that the word ίπιτίμια sig¬ 
 nifies punishment, not honour, (cf. 
 
78 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 άλλ*, ώ φίλη, θάρσυνβ. τοΐς αυτοίσί τοι 
 ονχ αύτο9 άβΐ δαιμόνων τταραστατβΐ. 
 νων δ’ ην τα ττρόσθβν στυγνός^ η δβ νυν ίσως 
 πολλών ύπάρζβί κύρος ημέρα καλών. 
 
 ΗΛ. 060, της άνοιας ώς σ ίποικτ^ίρω πάλαι. 9 ^o 
 
 ΧΡ. τί S έστιν ; ού προς ηδονην λέγω rade ; 
 
 ΗΛ. ούκ olaff οποί γης ovS οποί γνώμης φέρβί. 
 
 ΧΡ. πώς δ* ούκ βγω κάτοώ" ά γ elBov έμφανώς ; 
 
 ΗΛ. τέθνηκβν, ώ τάλαινα, τάκβίνου δέ σοι 
 
 σωτηρί eppeC μηδ\ν ές κβΐνον γ ορα. 9^5 
 
 infr. 1382.) ingeniously substitutes 
 τάτΓίτνμβια, in which reading he is 
 followed by Wunder. τάπιτίμια, \ihr\. 
 Gaisf. Neue. ^ Kayser. 
 
 916. βάρσνν€, be confident. So Phil. 
 650. npavveiv, 140O· βρα 8 ύν€ΐν, Tr. 
 552. οργαίνην &c. occur in an intran¬ 
 sitive or passive sense in Sophocles. 
 916-17. αυτοισι — τταραστατύ. 
 
 For sentiment, cf. Tr. 439. CEd. C. 
 1370. Herodot. I. 207. For the 
 verb παραστατών, to stand by, to as¬ 
 sist, cf. Griffiths ad .^sch. Pr. 218. 
 
 918—19. η be — καλών. Jacobs in¬ 
 terprets : Tjbe η fjpepa κύρωσα πολλά 
 αγαθά. On the word νττάρξα, cf. Peile 
 ad Ch. 10^0; on κύρος, see Peile ad 
 Ag. 847. 
 
 920. της άνοιας σ* €7Τθΐκτ€ίρω. For 
 gen. see Matth. §. 368. for acc. cf. 
 Elmsl. ad Med. 1202. 
 
 921. τί δ’ €στιν; on the admission 
 or otherwise of an hiatus after τι in 
 the tragedians, cf. Blomf. ad Sept, 
 c. Th. V. 193. Ell. I. 394. 
 
 Ib. προς η^ονην, SO as to give plea¬ 
 sure. Soph. Arcis. (60 D.) πάν προς 
 rjbovrjv Xeyec. Eur. Med. 77 ^· 
 be μη προς fjbovfjv Χόγονς. Cf. Blomf. 
 Gl. in Ag. 278. Pr. 220. 
 
 922. I read (mentally), ούκ οΐσθί 
 
 ου 
 
 οπού γης (οποί γης La.) (fi), and un¬ 
 derstand : ‘ you know not where you 
 are, if you suppose a lock of Ores¬ 
 tes’s hair is to be found here ούδ’ 
 οίσθα οποί γνώμης (fiepei, *nor do you 
 know where your thoughts are car¬ 
 rying you,, or what you are thinking 
 about.’ Supposing to belong 
 
 by a zeugma to both sentences, οποί 
 may remain in the first member, and 
 ei is of course unnecessary, the 
 sense remaining the same. Wunder, 
 comparing Phil. 805, translates: 
 nescis ubi sis, nec quid cogites. 
 
 923. Cf. Phil. 250. 
 
 924—5. T^Keivov be, libr. τάκάνου 
 re, Wund. τάκ Keivov, Canter Var. 
 Lect. 4, 29. Dind. (in Annot.) τα σω¬ 
 τήρια, the same as a substantive. 
 
 ti Kayeer observes, that this emendation would not have been made by Dindorf, had 
 he remembered the following passage in Herodotus ; (VI. 39.) Μι\τιά8ηε be απικ6μ€νοί 
 is T^v Χ€ρσόνησον, βΤχε κατ’ oinovs, τ\>ν abeXipehv ^τησαγ6ρ€α δηλαδή iniTipewv. οι δέ 
 Χ€ρσονησΐται, πυνθανόμΐνοι ταντα, σνν€λ€χθησαν — cos συ\\υτΓηθησόμ€νοι. He refers also 
 ίο Μχαρα Theocr. Epigr. 1 7, 8. 
 
 X ‘ An emendation not hastily to be rejected.’ Monk. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 79 
 
 ΧΡ. οϊμοι τάλαινα' τον ταδ’ ηκονσας βροτών ; 
 ΗΛ. του ττΧησίον τταρόντος^ ηνίκ ωλλυτο. 
 
 ΧΡ. KOLL ΤΓοΟ *στίν ovtos ; θαυμά τοί μ νττβρχβταί. 
 ΗΛ. κατ οίκον, ηδν^ ούδβ μητρΧ δνσχβρψ. 
 
 ΧΡ. οϊμοί τάλαινα' του γάρ ανθρώπων ποτ ην j 
 τα πολλά πατρο 9 προ 9 τάφον κτβρίσματα ; 1 
 ΗΛ. οϊμαι μάλιστ βγωγε του τεθνηκότος 
 
 μνημεΐ* Όρεστου ταυτα προσθεϊναι τινά. 
 
 ΧΡ. ώ δυστυχψ* €γώ δε συν χαρα λόγους 
 τοιούσδ' εχουσ εσπευδον, ούκ εΙδυΓ άρα 
 IV ημεν ατηζ* αλλα νυν^ οσ ικομην, 
 τά τ οντα προσθεν άλλα Θ' ευρίσκω κακα, 
 ΗΛ. οΰτωί εχει σοι ταυτ' εάν δε μοι πίθρ, 
 
 της νυν παρούσης πημονης λύσεις βάρος, 
 ΧΡ. η τούς θανοντας εζαναστησω ποτέ ; 
 
 ΗΛ. ουκ έσθ ο γ είπον* ου γάρ ώδ' άφρων εφυν. 
 ΧΡ. τί γάρ κελεύεις, ων εγώ φερέγγυος ; 
 
 ΗΛ. τληναί σε δρώσαν αν εγω παραινεσω. 
 
 ΧΡ. άλλ’ εϊ τις ώφέλειά γ, ούκ άπώσομαι. 
 
 ΗΛ. ορα, πόνου τοι χωρίς ούδεν ευτυχεί. 
 
 ΧΡ. όρώ, ζυνοίσω παν οσονπερ αν σθενω, 
 
 ΗΛ. ακούε δη νυν, rj βεβουλευμαι τελεΐν. 
 
 930 
 
 935 
 
 940 
 
 945 
 
 928. νπίρχζται, subit. Neue. infr. 
 11 12. ως μ* υπ€ρχεται φόβος. 
 
 929* η^νς ovbe μητρί 8νσχ€ρης^ 1. q. 
 ηΒνς μτ)τρι ovde 8νσχ€ρης. Cf. Matth. 
 §.428.4· With ηδνς, acceptable,agree¬ 
 able, cf. CEd. T. 82. 
 
 93 T. τα noWa {those many) tcre- 
 ρίσματα, i. e. the chaplets and liba¬ 
 tions which Chrysothemis had seen 
 at the tomb of her father. On πρός 
 τάφον, see Bernh. p. 264. 
 
 933· μνημεία, remembrancers, me¬ 
 morials. 
 
 936. LV ημ€ν ατης. Tr. 1 145 · Φρο*'" 
 ξνμφοράς iv ίσταμ^ν. 
 
 942. φίρβγγνος {^γγνη), in a condi¬ 
 tion to grant. Cf. Blomf. Gl. in Sept, 
 c. Th. 392. and Griffiths ad v. 396. 
 
 943. τΧηναι δρωσαν. Cf. Matth. §. 
 550, b. 
 
 943. ovbev €ύτνχ€Ϊ, there is no suc¬ 
 cess. So also used impersonally, Tr. 
 192. €t7rep (ντνχζΐ, if things are in a 
 prosperous state. 
 
 946. ξννοίσω. ScHOL.: συμπονήσω. 
 
 947. a.Kov€ dr) wv, Dind. W^und. 
 
80 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Λ 
 
 
 950 Ι 
 
 
 τταρουσίαν οίσθα και σύ ττου φιλώ!/ 
 
 0)9 OVTL9 ημΐν ίστίν^ άλΧ ^Αίδη9 λαβών 
 άπβστβρηκβ^ και μόνα λ^λΗμμ^θον. 
 
 Ιγω S' €ω9 μβν τον κασίγνητον βίω 
 Θάλλοντά τ (Ισηκουον, βΐχον όλπίδας 
 φόνου τΓοτ αυτόν ττράκτορ ίζβσΘαι ττατρός' 
 
 Λ Λ»*/» » i/ 1 3/ y 'S''/0\' 
 
 νυν ο ηνικ ουκ βτ βστιν^ €L9 ere όη βλβττω, 
 όπως τον αύτόχβφα ττατρωου φόνου ς 
 
 ζύν τρδ' άδβλφρ μη κατοκνησβις κτανβΐν ^ 
 
 Αϊγισθον, ούδβν γάρ σβ δβΐ κρύτττβίν μ! βτί. > 
 
 ΤΓοΐ γαρ μβνβΐ^ ράθυμοςλ^Ις τίν βλττίδων ο ^ 
 βΑβγασ €Τ ορυήν ; η τταρβστί μ€ν aTeveiv 
 ττλουτου ττατρωου κτησιν €στ€ρημ4νη, g6o' 
 
 TtapeaTL δ’ άλγβΐν eV τόσονδβ του χρόνου ^ ^ 
 
 
 αλβκτρα γηράσκουσαν άνυμβναιά Τ€, ^ ^ 
 
 
 a<ov€ dfj νυν, vulg. Gaisf. Neue. Lob. 
 ad Aj. 1332. (who adds, ‘ nec mihi 
 saepe sciri posse videtur utrum nunc 
 an igitur significetur.’) reXelv, to do. 
 
 948—9. τταρουσίαν — icrriv. Cf. Phil. 
 249. 
 
 948. οίσθά ττου, you surely knov), 
 I take it for granted that you know. 
 Eur. Heracl. 89. τον ^'ΆράκΚαον lare 
 ττου παραστάτην Ίόλαον. 
 
 950· XeXeippeeov. Matth. §. 203. 
 XeXeipp^ea, Monac. and Monk. 
 
 951. βίω. Dindorf and Ellendt 
 understand with Triclinius, iv βίω 
 οντα, and in the verse following read 
 θάΧΧοντά T. On βω?, dum, quamdiuj 
 cf. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 434. 
 
 952, θάΧΧοντα. Trach. 235. <0.1 
 ζωντα κα\ ΘάΧΧοντα. Critias ap. Empir. 
 p. 562. δαίμων άφθίτω θάΧΧων βίω. 
 ΘάΧΧοντά r€,libri. θάΧΧοντ Ζτ , Reiske. 
 Erf. Wund. ΘάΧΧοντά ye, Br. Schaef. 
 Gaisf. el\ov eXnlbas, had some hope, 
 was not without hope. 
 
 955. On the insertion of the ar- 
 tide before αυτόχ€ΐρα, and its omis¬ 
 sion before πατρώου φόνου, see Ell. q 
 Π. 245. 
 
 956. ^i)v Trjb* άδ€Χφη, with me, 
 your sister. Cf. Trach. 305. 1013. 
 
 958-9. Elmsl. Herm. and Dind. 
 comparing v. 995. construct, ποΊ 
 yap, €S τίν ΖΧπίδων βΧίφασα pevels 
 ράθυμος; Monk (Alcest. 214.) joins 
 ποΐ βΧίφασα. Wunder and Ellendt 
 adopt the Scholiasts’ explanation of 
 ποι, viz. €s τίνα χρόνον. For τίν' 
 ελπίδων, see Bemh. p. 444. όρθην, 
 gl. β€βαίαν. 
 
 959, sq. η πάρ€στι — Ζστερημίνΐ ] — 
 γηράσκουσαν. Cf. SUp. 480. Kiihn, 
 
 §. 648, b. Elmsl. ad Med. 1207· 
 
 prefers €στ€ρημ€νην. η πάρεστι στενειν, 
 you who have reason for groaning, 
 because, &c. 
 
 960. κτησιν. Cf. Matth. §. 4^^» ®· 
 962. aXeKTpa γηράσκουσαν. On 
 
 adjectives thus used adverbially, cf. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 81 
 
 και τώνδβ μίντοι μηκέτ iXTTiarjg^ oπωs‘ 
 
 Τ€υξ€ΐ 7Γ0Τ . ου γαρ ωο αρουλοί ear ανηρ 
 ΚίγισΘθ9, ωστ€ σόν ττοτ η κάμον yevog 
 βΧαστβιν Ιασαι^ ττημονην αύτω σαφή, .< ^ ^ 
 άλλ* ηι/ βΤΓίσπΎ] τοΐ9 ΙμοΙς βονΧβύμασιν, ^ 
 πρώτον μίν βυσβββιαν €κ πατρο 9 κάτω 
 θανόντος oiau τον κασιγνητου ff άμα^ l " 
 ίπβιτα δ *5 ώσπερ βζεφν^, εΧευθερα 
 καΧεΐ το Χοιπον, καΐ γάμων επαξίων 
 τεύ^ει, φιΧεΐ γάρ πρθ9 τα χρηστά πας οράν^ 
 Χόγων γε μην εΰκΧειαν ούχ ορας όσην ^ 
 σαντΎ) τε κάμοι προσβάλεις πεισθεΐσ εμοί ; * 
 τις γάρ ποτ αστών η ζενων ημάς Ιδών ν . 
 τοιοΐσ^ επαίνοις ούχι δεζιώσεται ; „ 
 ϊδεσθε τώδε τώ κασιγνητω, φίΧοι, 
 ώ τον πατρωον οίκον εζεσωσάττην^ 
 ώ τοΐσιν εχθροΐς ευ βεβηκόσιν ποτέ 
 φυχης άφειδησαντε προύστητην φόνου. 
 
 Φβ 
 
 Λ 
 
 970 
 
 975 
 
 980 
 
 
 
 Matth. §. 446· Kiihn. §. ^ 47 ' 
 Anm. 3. Blomf. Gl. in Ag. 86. 
 
 963. τώι/δε. ScHOL. : των Χ^κτρων 
 κα\ των υμεναίων, μέντοί, certe qui- 
 dem. Ell. 
 
 963-4. δττως (for δτι) reu^et. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 534. Ohs. 2 . §. 623, 3. 
 Elmsl. ad Heracl. 250. 
 
 968. ^νσίβζίαν, praise of piety. 
 PhU. 1443. η yap €νσ€β€ΐα {the praise 
 of piety) σννθνησκέι βροτοις {accom¬ 
 panies the dead). Antig. 924. δυσσέ- 
 β€ΐαν, charge of impiety. 
 
 969. οΧσ€ί, middle voice, you will 
 gain for yourself. Cf. infr. 1095. 
 Phil. 117. 
 
 971. KoXil, you will he termed. Cf. 
 Monk ad Hippol. 1458. Classical 
 Journal, v. XVII. p. 84. 
 
 973. λογωι/ — evKXaav. Bothe com¬ 
 
 pares Eur. Iph. Aul. 317. λόγων 
 ακοσμία. 6o8. Χόγων ευφημίαν. Cycl. 
 316. Χόγων €νμορφίαι. Χόγων, Bothe, 
 Dobr. Wund. Dind. (in Annot.) 
 λόγω, libri, Gaisf. Neue, Zick. (ser- 
 mone hominum de te.) On γβ μην, 
 see Hart. II. 384. 
 
 974. προσβαΧζϊί. Cf. Elmsl. ad 
 Heracl. 476. 
 
 975—6. 17/Aas €παίνοις δίξιώσβται^ 
 Cf. Peile ad Ag. 821. 
 
 977—80. τώδβ τώ κασιγνητω άφα- 
 δήσαντ€. Cf. Matth. §. 43 ^» 
 
 979· βίβηκόσιν, in prosperity. 
 Pass. Cf. Elmsl. ad Heracl. 487. 
 For the perfect βόβηκα = ΐΙμ\ or €χω, 
 see Wunder ad QEd. C. 52. Elmsl. 
 ad QEd, C. 1695. 
 
 980. προύστητην (προιστάναι) φόνου, 
 resolved upon murdering, undertook 
 
 G 
 
82 
 
 20Φ0ΚΛΕ0Τ2 
 
 τούτω φιλπν χρη, τώδε χρη ττάντας σ€β€ίν^ 
 τώδ* €Ρ ff iopTOLS ίρ Τ€ τταρδημω πολει 
 τίμαρ άτταρτα^ ονρβκ apSpeiai xpecop, * . 
 
 τοιαντά τοί ρω ττας tl 9 βροτώρ^ sj 
 
 ζωσαιρ θαρούσαιρ ffy ώστε μη ^κλίττβΐρ κλβος. ^ 9^5 
 
 άλλ’, ω φίλη, πβίσθητί, συμττορ^ί πατρί, 
 
 * > Λ > \ ' 
 
 σύγκαμρ άδβλφω, ττανσορ €Κ κακωρ ε/χε, 
 ττανσορ δε σαυτηρ, τούτο γιγρώσκονσ, οτι 
 ζηρ αίσχρορ αίσχρώς τοΪ9 καλώ9 ττ^φυκοσιρ, 
 
 ΧΟ. ip τοΐς TOLOVTOL9 icrnp η ττρομηθία 99° 
 
 καΙ τω XiyopTL· κοϋ kXvoptl σύμμαχο9· 
 
 ΧΡ. καΐ ττρίρ γ€ φωρβΐρ, ω γυραΐκ€9, ά φρβρώρ 
 ετνγχαρ* αντη μη κακωρ, €(τωζετ αρ 
 τηρ €νλαβ€ίαρ, ωοττ^ρ ονχι οτωί^ται, 
 
 TOLOVTOP θράσο9 995 
 
 tion. On the orthography, cf. infr. 
 1036. 
 
 991. και τώι κ\νοντι. La. deleto 
 τωι. και τώι κΧνοντι, Lb. For omis¬ 
 sion of article before κΚνοντι, see 
 Matth. §. 268. Obs, i. Neue ad 
 
 Trach. 1068. ^ ^ 
 
 992— 3. φρένων irvyxav αντη μη 
 κακων^ dachte sie nicht ganz ver- 
 kehrt, were not her thoughts wholly 
 perverse. Donn. 
 
 993 — 4 . ΐσωζ'ίτο—(τωζ€ται. Eusta¬ 
 thius (365, 37) considers these as 
 middle verbs used for active. The 
 words irpiv yc φων€ΐν oblige us to 
 give them, I think, their legitimate 
 middle sense, to keep in memory 
 (infr. 1237. Tr. 682). For the ex¬ 
 pression generally, cf. Blomf. Gl. in 
 Ag. 66 . 
 
 994. ‘ ωσττ€ρ unites not only simi¬ 
 lar but also opposite things.* Matth. 
 §. 629. την (υΚάβίΐαν, CCLUtion. 
 
 993_6. θράσος όπλί^ίΐ. ‘‘Οπλί^εσ^αι 
 
 τγοΓ yap ττοτ εμβλΕφοίτα 
 
 \ 
 
 the murdering of. Pass. Musgrave' 
 compares Eur. Androm. 221. See 
 also Epist. ad Titum, III. 8. 14. 
 and Schleusn. in voc. ττροίστημι. For 
 gen. φόνον, see Neue ad Aj. 47 ^* 
 
 981. TovTd) — τώδ€. On the oc¬ 
 currence of these two demonstrative 
 pronouns in the same sentence, see 
 Ell. II. 274. 
 
 982. τταν^ημω ττόλβι (cf. Ant. J. 
 Aj. 844). Wunder compares Lu¬ 
 cian’s Toxar. c. I. ioprals και πανη. 
 
 / ..if 
 
 ·γνρ€σιν τιμωμίν avTOVs, 
 
 984. τοιαντα νω i^epti. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 416, β. ττα? TIP, omnes ferme. Ell. 
 Cf. CEd. C. 25. Aj. 28. Elmsl. ad 
 Med. 548. 
 
 985. Cf. Blomf. ad Ch. 1029, 30. 
 987. σvyκaμve, labour with, aid. 
 
 Cf. Griffiths ad JEsch. Pr. 414. 
 
 989. For sentiment, cf. infr. 1083. 
 1320. Aj. 479. 
 
 990. ττρομηθία (answered by €v\a~ 
 β€ΐαν, V. 994), provident care, cau· 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 83 
 
 αυτή ff σττλίζβι καμ unrjpereiv καΚεΙς ; 
 ουκ europa9 ; γυνή μίν^ ovS άνηρ ίφνς* 
 σθά/βίί δ* ίλασσον των ίναντίων χβρ/. 
 δαίμων δβ τοίς μβν βύτυχη^ καθ ημέραν, 
 ημΐν δ* άπορρ€Ϊ κάττί μηδΙν ep^erac. ^ 
 
 Tis oSv τοίοντον ανδρα βουλβύων eXelv 
 
 aXxmos ατης έζατταλλαχθησβταί ; 
 
 δρα, κακω 9 ττράσσοντβ μη μβίζω κακα 
 
 κτησώμ€&, €Ϊ ny τούσδ* άκούσβται λογους* 
 
 λν€ΐ γαρ ημαζ ουδ^ν ovS έττωψβλβΐ 1005 
 
 βάξίν καλήν λαβόντ€ δυσκλβω^ θαν€Ϊν· 
 
 ου yap θανβϊν ίχθιστόν, άλλ* όταν Oaveiv 
 
 γρηζων τις ebra μηδε τοΰτ εχτ) λαββΐν, 
 
 άλλ* άντιάζω, πρ\ν πανωλέθρους το παν 
 
 is joined with an accusative by the 
 same rule of construction as eV8v- 
 (σθαι* WuND. 
 
 996. ν7Γηρ€Τ€ΐν, to be your assist¬ 
 ant. 
 
 997. ovb\ ‘ If a positive propo¬ 
 
 sition is opposed to a negative one, 
 and that which was before expressed 
 affirmatively is denied (where in 
 Latin non alone stands), not only 
 ov or μη is used in Greek, but also 
 ovBe, μηΒΐ.^ Matth. §. 6o8. e. Kiihn. 
 §. 744, a. For sentiment, ch 
 
 Antig. 61. 
 
 998. ΤΚασσον, Br. cXatror, libri. 
 
 999. ίντνχύ^ La. evTVxei, Lb. On 
 the omission of eVri in the first 
 member of a sentence, where a verb 
 opposite is found in the second, cf. 
 Ell. I. 523. and Trach. 63. 
 
 1000. ατΓορρβϊ. ScHOL.: βλαττοΰ- 
 ται, pLapaiverai. Ell. : dipluit, eva- 
 nescit. 
 
 Ib. cVrt μηΒ^ν tp^rrai. Soph. fr. 
 
 713 (D). TTokiv Siappei karri μηΒ^ν 
 epxerai (said of the evanescent moon 
 at the time of an eclipse). Phil. 259. 
 eVi μάζον ίρχζται. 
 
 1002 . aXvTTOs ατης. Cf. SUp. ^6. 
 s aXimos ΐξαιταΚΚαχβησΐταί. For the 
 
 redundancy, cf. CEd. Col. 786. Aj. 
 464, &c. &c. 
 
 1003. opa μη κτησωμ^Θ'. Cf. SUp. 
 580. Matth. §. 519, 7. Hart. 11 . 
 140. 
 
 1004. Tovabe XoyovSf the words or 
 things which you have communi¬ 
 cated to me. 
 
 1005. ημάς follows the construc¬ 
 tion belonging to «πωφβλίΐ, not that 
 belonging to λυ«. Cf. Matth. 4* 
 
 4. nos ad Antig. 537. On λύβι, see 
 Monk’s Hippol. 443. 
 
 1007, sq. General meaning; for 
 to die is not the saddest of things: 
 a far sadder thing is, when a person 
 desirous of death is unable to obtain 
 the boon which he wishes. 
 
 G 2 
 
84 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ημάς τ ολίσθαι κάζ^ρημωσαυ γίνος^ ιοιο 
 
 κατάσ'χβς ομγην. Kcu τα μ^ν Χβλ^γμ^ρα 
 
 αρρητ ίγώ σοι κάτελη φυλάγομαι* 
 
 αυτή he νουν cr^es* αλλα τφ ypovco ττοτβ, 
 
 σθίνουσα μηΒβν τοΐς κρατούσαν βικαθβΐν, 
 
 ΧΟ. ΐΓ€ίθου. Ίτρονοίας ovhev ανθροοττοίς βφυ ιοΐ5 
 
 κβρδος λαββΐν άμβίνον, ούδβ νού σοφού, 
 
 ΗΛ. άττροσδόκητον ούδ^ βϊρηκας* καλώς δ’ 
 ηδη σ άττορρίφουσαν άττηγγβλλόμην, 
 άλλ! αύτόχβφί μοί μόνη re δραστβον 
 τοϋργον τόδ** ου yap δη Kevov y αφησομβν, io2q 
 
 ΧΡ. φ€σ 
 
 eiff ωφβλβς TOiahe την yvώμηv ττατρος 
 θνησκοντος eivaC τταντα yap κaτeLpyaσω. 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’ ην φύσιν ye, τον he νουν ησσων rore. 
 
 Ι010. (ζ€ρημωσαι yevos, i. e. το 
 yevos ήμίν ίξβρημωθηναι. NeuE. 
 
 ΙΟΙ Τ. κατάσχ€5 opyrjv. Antig. 1200. 
 opyas κατασχ^θύν. 
 
 1012. φυλάξομαι^ middle voice, 
 apud me servabo. Ell. άτ(λη, without 
 any results to you. 
 
 1013—14. vovv crx^s (have the wis¬ 
 dom or prudence, cf. infr. 1464.) 
 σθ€νουσα μη 8 ^ (powerless as you 
 are') rols κρατονσιν ΐΐκαθίΐν (to give 
 way to those more powerful than 
 yourself ). 
 
 1013. αλλα τώ χρόνω, now at least, 
 if not before. Cf. Hart. II. 4^· 
 Elmsl. ad Med. 882. On the in¬ 
 sertion of the article, see Ell. II. 
 244. 
 
 1015. πΐίθον, Gaisf. Wund. Neue. 
 ηιθον, Cod. Palat. Br. Dind. (in An- 
 not.) 
 
 1016. λαβΐ'ίν nearly redundant. 
 
 1017. For the apostrophized δ’, 
 cf. Matth. §. 160. Obs. Herm. El. 
 doct. metr. p. 36. 
 
 1018. a^τηyyiK\όμηv (mid. voice), 
 which I proposed to you. Hesych. : 
 napeKoKovv, «ττβστβλλον. Cf. Peile ad 
 Ch. 204. On see Pors. in 
 Advv. p. 210. 
 
 1019. αυτόχΐΐρι (an adject.), La. 
 Pors. ad Eur. Or. 1037. Lob. ad 
 Aj. 839. αντοχξίρΧ (an adv.), vulg. 
 
 1020. Kevov, undone. With ov yap 
 δη — ye, cf. Antig. 639. OEd. C. no. 
 Phil. 246. 
 
 1021—2. πατρος θνησκοντος, when 
 our father was murdered. 
 
 1022. Ίτάντα yap κaτeιpyάσω (no¬ 
 thing had been left undone on your 
 part), Herm. Gaisf. Wund. Neue, 
 Ell. (whom see I. 125.) τταν yap av 
 κατειργάσω, Dawes, Erf. Br. SchsBf. 
 Matth. §. 508. Obs. 2. Dind. (in 
 Annot.) πάντα yap av k, eraso av La. 
 πάντα yap av k. Lb. πάντα yap, Palat. 
 cf. sup. 914. 
 
 1023. φύσιν, disposition, tempe¬ 
 rament ; vovv, understanding, purpose 
 of mind. Hermann illustrates by a 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 85 
 
 ΧΡ. αχτκΐΐ τοιαντη νονν δΐ αΙώνοί μίνίΐν. 
 
 ΗΛ. ώς ονχί σννδράσονσα ι/ονθβτβΐί τάδε. Ϊ025 
 
 ΧΡ. €ΐκο^ γαρ βγχβφουντα καΐ ττράσσβιν κακώς, 
 
 ΗΛ. ζηλ^ώ σ€ του νου, της Se Ββιλίας στυγώ, 
 
 ΧΡ. άνβζομαι κλνουσα γωταν €v λβγης, ^ 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ* οάτΓΟτ’ βζ βμοΰ γβ μη ττάθης τόδε. 
 
 ΧΡ. μάκρος το κρϊναί ταυτα χω λοιττος χρόνος. 1030 
 
 ΗΛ. ατΓβλ^β. σοΙ γαρ ώφέλησίς ουκ evi. 
 
 ΧΡ. €Ρ€στίν’ άλλα σοι μάθησις ού τταρα. 
 
 ΗΛ. ίλθουσα μητρί ταυτα ττάντ e^etire ση. 
 
 ΧΡ. ούδ’ αδ τοσουτον ^χθος βχθαίρω σ ίγώ. 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’ ουν έττίστω γ\ οΐ μ ατιμίας άγβίς. 1035 
 
 similar antithesis in Heliodorus II. 
 18. 75. Cor. On the omission of 
 the article before φνσιν, and its in¬ 
 sertion before vovv, see Ellendt II. 
 248. 
 
 1024. Study to be thus impotent 
 of purpose throughout your whole 
 life {81 al&vos). With infinitive 
 after ασκ€ΐ, cf. Schleusn. in voc. 
 
 1025. ως ούχϊ σνν8ράσουσα. Cf. 
 Matth. §. 568, I. Ellendt II. 1002. 
 Tr. 1232. 
 
 1026. et/coff yap iyxeipovvra {κακώς) 
 κα\ ττράσσαν κακώς. For sentiment, 
 cf. AEsch. Ch. 307. δράσαντι Trade tv. 
 (where see Blomf.) Find. Nem. IV. 
 32. € 7 rei ρίζοντά τι κα\ τΐαβύν eoiKcv. 
 For construction, cf. Aj. 7. Phil. 
 520. Tr. 928, &c. 
 
 1027. ζηλώ (/ at once envy and 
 admire) σβ τον νοΰ. Iph. Aul. 5 ^ 5 . 
 (Camb. ed.) ζηλώ ae μάλλον η 'μ€ τον 
 μηδέν φρονύν. Cf. Griff, ad .tEsch. 
 Pr· 330» and Schleusn. in voc. 
 
 1028. The general sense seems 
 to be ; a time will come when I 
 shall receive your eulogies, not your 
 
 reproaches on this matter; and I 
 now hear the one with as much 
 equanimity as I then shall the other. 
 On άνέξομαι κλνονσα, cf. Monk’s Hip- 
 pol. 354. Alcest. 973. 
 
 1029. That, (viz. eulogies for her 
 conduct,) you will never experience 
 (οί/'τΓοτβ μη πάθης) from me. On con¬ 
 clusions of tragic senarii by τάδε and 
 τάδε, see Ell. II. 276. For the con¬ 
 struction ov μη πάθης, see more 
 largely Phil. 103. 
 
 1030. TO Kpivai. The Cambridge 
 editor of the Iph. in Aul. v. 564. 
 notices this among other instances 
 of the article used with the infini¬ 
 tive, where it is not required by the 
 sense. Cf. infr. 1079. SoPhil.T24i. 
 δς σε κωλνσ€ΐ το δράν. Ant. I Ιθ6. τό 
 δράν άvάyκη. 
 
 1033· μητρ'ι ση, a mother worthy of 
 you. ScH^F. 
 
 1034. Cf. Matth. §.421. 0^5.3. 
 Kiihn. §. 558, a. a. Phil. 59. 
 
 1035. 01 ατιμίας, to what degree of 
 infamy. Cf. Ell. II. 247. On άλλ’ 
 ovv — ye, cf. sup. 233. 
 
86 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΧΡ. άτιμίαί μλν ου, ττρομηθίαί δΐ σου, 
 
 ΗΛ. τώ σώ δίκαίω δητ βττίσττβσθαί μβ Sel ; 
 
 ΧΡ. όταν yap ev φροντ}^, τόθ ηγησ^ί συ νων. 
 
 HA, η δβίνον €v λήγουσαν ί^αμαρτάνειν, 
 
 ΧΡ. βϊρηκα^ δρΘώς ω συ ττρόσκ^ισαι κακφ, 1040 
 
 ΗΛ. τί δ*; ου δοκώ σοι ταυτα συν δίκρ Xeyeiv ; 
 
 ΧΡ. άλλ’ βστίν βνθα χη δίκη βλάβην φ€ρ€ί, 
 
 ΗΛ. τουτοί9 €γω ζην roiy νόμοις ου βούλομχιι· 
 
 ΧΡ. άλλ’ el ΤΓονησβις ταΰτ, βπαινβσβίΫ Ιμβ, 
 
 ΗΛ. καΐ μην ποιήσω γ ούδβν €κπλαγ€Ϊσά σ€, ^ 1045 
 
 ΧΡ. καΙ τοΰτ άληθ€^, ούδβ βουλ€ύσ€ί πάλιν ; 
 
 ΗΛ. βουλής yap ούδβν βστιν βχθιον κακής, 
 
 ΧΡ. φρονβϊν βοίκας ούδβν ών eya> λβyω, 
 
 ΗΛ. πάλαι δβδοκται ταυτα κού νβωστί μχ)ΐ, 
 
 ΧΡ. άπβιμι τοίνυν, οΰτβ yap συ ταμ βπή 1050 
 
 103^· ScHOL. : ονκ ατιμάζω σ€^ 
 αλλά προνοονμαί σον. προμηθίας. La. 
 Gaisf. Wund. Dind. Neue. προμη¬ 
 θέας, vulg·. Herm. See Ellendt in 
 voc. Dissen ad Find. Ol. VIII. p. 
 95. Monk in Hippol. 1365. 
 
 IQ37. τω σω 8 ικαίω, your notions 
 of what is right. 
 
 1038. Yes: for when your own 
 opinions are correct and wise, you 
 shall not follow but take precedence 
 (ηγησα) of me. 
 
 1040. You have defined accurate¬ 
 ly your own miserable position; you 
 speak rightly, and do wrongly. 
 
 1042. Grant that you speak right¬ 
 ly {συν δίκη) : yet there are circum¬ 
 stances and occasions, when even 
 what is right {χη Βίκη) is mischiev¬ 
 ous. 
 
 1043. νόμοις, rules of conduct. 
 
 1044. I understand: if you per¬ 
 
 sist in your present line of conduct, 
 the time will come, when you will 
 have to commend me: for the mis¬ 
 fortunes, into which such conduct 
 will bring you, will evince the pro¬ 
 priety of my present advice. 
 
 1045. ovdev €κπ\αγ€ΐσά ae, undaunt¬ 
 ed by any thing, which you may or can 
 advance. With κα\ μην — ye, cf. infr. 
 1188. Phil. 660. 
 
 1046. βυν\€νσ€ΐ πάλιν, reverse your 
 determinations. Schol. : πάλιν eh 
 τoυπiσω,^eh το Εναντίον. 
 
 1048. You will not then, it seems, 
 think correctly or be wise in refer¬ 
 ence to any one of those things which 
 I recommend. Cf. infr, 1055-6. and 
 .^sch. Pr. 984. 
 
 1049. My determination on these 
 matters is of long standing, not of 
 recent adoption. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 87 
 
 τολμάς ίτταίνβϊν^ οΰτ βγω τούς σονς τροττοι^, 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’ euTLff. οΰ σοι μη μβθβψομαί ποτβ, 
 ovS ην cr(j)68p luel povcra τνγ\(ΐνη 9' βττβί 
 ' ΤΓολλης ανοίας και το θηρασθαυ κβνα, 
 
 ΧΡ. άλλ* βΐ σβαυτη τυγγάνβυς δοκονσα τι ιο55 
 
 φρονβΐν, φρόρβί TOLavff' όταν γαρ βν κακοΐς 
 ηδη βββηκης^ ταμ βτταινβσβίς βπη, 
 
 ΧΟ. τί τούς άνωθβν φρονιμωτάτους οΐω- (ττροφ. a . 
 
 1051. τολμάς enaiveip, have the cou¬ 
 rage to approve of. Cf. Markl. ad 
 Eur. Suppl. 883. Blomf. Gl. in Prom. 
 1035. 
 
 10^2. ov (Tot μτ] μίθί'^ομαί 7 Γ 0 Τ€. 
 
 You shall most assuredly never have 
 a follower in me. Perhaps in refer¬ 
 ence to V. 1037* Peile, who at 
 Choeph. 875, has entered largely 
 into the difference between ov μη 
 with a conjunctive, and ov μη with 
 a future indie., translates ; You need 
 not fear that I shall ever come to seek 
 for you. Kiihner (§. 779, 2.) ex¬ 
 plains : There is no need for me to 
 consider, whether I will follow, i. e. 
 I will never follow you. Ellendt, who 
 has also entered largely into this 
 construction, (II.409—13.) explains; 
 ov ^ίος τον μζθίτΓΐΟ'θαι <τοι e/ie : cave 
 credasy me secuturam, nam non se- 
 guar profecto. See further Matth. 
 §.517. Obs. 2. Hart. II. i 37 · Quart. 
 Rev. Numb. XIV. 
 
 1053. ηολλης άνοΐας SC. ecrri. Matth. 
 §.316. Kiihn. §. 517,2. OxiKa\,even, 
 see Phil. 234. 
 
 Ib. TO θηρασθαι Keva, perhaps a pro- 
 verbialism for hunting empty places, 
 sporting on ground, where no game 
 is to be had: in the present instance. 
 
 endeavouring to work upon a mind, 
 incapable of answering the lofty pur¬ 
 poses required of it. The Athenians, 
 as I have elsewhere endeavoured to 
 shew (Frogs of Aristoph. see also 
 Soph. Phil. 1007.), were passionately 
 fond of metaphors derived from field- 
 sports, and Sophocles was not a 
 man to despise a phrase for , its 
 homeliness. That there is little or 
 no difference between the active and 
 middle voices of the verb θηράω in 
 Sophocles, cf. Phil. 1007. 
 
 1055— 6. τιφρονΐίν {aligutd sapere. 
 Ell.) Phil. 192. e’inep κάγώ τι φρονώ. 
 
 1056— 7. δταν — β€βηκης, cf. infr, 
 
 1094· 
 
 1058. The Chorus, drawing an 
 illustration from the v stork and 
 other birds devoted to their parents, 
 assert that filial ingratitude will not 
 long go unpunished. They assure the 
 manes of Agamemnon, that whatever 
 differences may exist between Chry- 
 sothemis and Electra, the affection 
 of the latter for him remains un¬ 
 shaken. A personal address to the 
 heroine of the drama concludes this 
 beautiful ode. The metrical arrange¬ 
 ment of Wunder, though subjecting 
 us to many divisions of words, has 
 
 y The annotators refer to Arist. Soph. Av. 1553· Arist. Hist. An. IX. 13. 
 
 Hist. An. III. 23. X. 16. For references to the swan and other birds, see Lurip. Bacch. 
 1364. El. 151. Cicero de Fin. II. 33. Symmach. Epist. V, 67. 
 
88 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 pov 9 βσορωμβροί τροφά^ 
 
 κηδομ€νου9 άφ* ών re βΧά-^ ιο6ο 
 
 στωσιν άφ' ών τ ονασιν eu- 
 ρωσί, τάδ' ούκ iir ϊσας^ τβλονμβν ; 
 άλλ* ού τάν Alos άστ^αττάν 
 
 καΐ τάν ουρανίαν Οβμίν, 
 ον ούκ άπονητοί, 
 ώ γθονία βροτοΐσι φά·' 
 
 been preferred as more simple than 
 that of Dindorf, and bringing out 
 the choriambic form more clearly 
 than the Ionic in the arrangement 
 of the latter. 
 
 Ib. Tovs ανωθΐν. ScHOL. : τους iv 
 τω dept. Eur. El. 897. οΙωνοισιν, al~ 
 θβρος TCKvois. The epithet φρονιμω- 
 τάτονς restricts the practice to cer¬ 
 tain birds, and does not allow it to 
 all indiscriminately. 
 
 1058- 9. οιωνούς. Neue observes 
 that the first syllable in οιωνούς is 
 short, as in Τροία (z Soph. Aj. 424.) 
 Βοιωτών (Eur. Iph. A. 245.), a doc¬ 
 trine which Hermann (Elem. d. m. 
 p. 494.) does not admit. 
 
 1059. ζσορώμζνοι, middle for ac¬ 
 tive voice. Cf. sup. 13. and to nu¬ 
 merous examples given in Antig. 
 594. of similar usage in Sophocles, 
 add CEd. T. 287. ^πραξάμην for e- 
 πραξα. Phil. I Ol 7. προύβάΧου for ττρού- 
 βαλλες. TraiCh. κρύψομαι. 681. 
 
 7 Γρού 8 ι 8 άξατο. 12^^. aXpsaOc. Aj. 1406, 
 θίσθΐ. The middle sense which Con¬ 
 stantine Matthise gives to some of 
 these verbs in his ‘ Qusest. Sophocl.’ 
 will be noticed ^ hereafter. 
 
 1059— 60. τροφάς κη^ομύνονς (eicei- 
 νων sc.) For gen. aiter κηδομύνονς, cf. 
 
 Ϊ065 
 
 * .· 
 
 , A 
 
 ·< 
 
 Kuhn. §. 533. Bernh. p. 176. For 
 omission of pronoun, cf. Phil. 137* 
 Aj. 1050. &c. 
 
 1060— 1. άφ' ων τ€ βΧάστωσι. For 
 conjunctive, see Matth. §. 5 ^ 7 * ^^ 1 · I· 
 1 24. With the short vowel before βλ, 
 cf. sup. 238. 440. infr. 1081. 1095. 
 βλάστωσι, Schsef. βΧαστωσι, libri. 
 
 1061— 2. €vpωσlf obtain (for them¬ 
 selves). Cf. infr. 1305. Phil. 1100. 
 In these instances, as well as Tr. 25. 
 284. Phil. 288. 394. Aj. 1016. &c, 
 the doctrines of Ammonius would 
 have led us to expect the middle 
 voice. On the double re, cf. Phil. 
 1012. 
 
 1062. cV Χσας, equally. Bemh. 
 (p. i86.) reads eVl Ισης sc. μοίρας. 
 (metre: logaoed.) 
 
 1063. ταν Αιος άστραττάν. On the 
 omission of ρά, cf. CEd. T. 660. 
 Antig. 758. &c. (metre of this and 
 foUowing verse, glycon.) 
 
 1064. θ6ριι/. Cf. Klausen’s Theol. 
 
 Ρ· 34 · 
 
 1065. άπόνητοι, exempt from trou^ 
 hie. sc. ol Tab' ovK Ιπ Χσας τίΧονντίς. 
 Chrysothemis being meant, bapov y 
 OVK, Dobr. άποίνητοι, Br. 
 
 1066-7. I understand: O thou 
 voice of mortal man, which can find 
 
 z In Wander’s edition corrected Τρωία. 
 
 a The learned writer refers to a disputation of Mehlhorn in the Neue Jahrbucher fur 
 Phil, und Pad. xstes Heft §. 29 if. as displaying great acumen and sagacity on the 
 subject of the middle verb. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 89 
 
 μα^ κατά μοι βόασον οΙ~ 
 κτράν οττα roty evepO ’Arpet- 
 daL 9 , άχόρβυτα φάρονσ ονβ'ώη' 
 
 OTL (τφΊρ ηδη τά μ€ν €Κ δομοαν ροίΤβΐ , ccvt, ct . 1070 
 δη, τά δβ 7Γρο9 τέκνων δνττΧη 
 φύλσπίζ ονκ er έ^ισου^ 
 ται φιλοτασίω δίαι¬ 
 τα. ττρόδοτο^ δβ μονά σαΧ^νει 
 
 ^ΥΙλέκτρα, τον ael ττατρο^ 1^75 
 
 its way below the earth even to 
 Hades. 
 
 1066. χθονία. * xBouia omnia di- 
 cuntur, quee ad inferos pertinent. Sic 
 χθονία φάμα El. io66. est eo per· 
 means' Ell. 
 
 1066— 7. βροτόΐσι φάμα, fama mor- 
 talium. Ell. For datives of this kind, 
 see Bemh. p. 88. Wund. ad Antig. 
 
 847· , , X V . 
 
 1067— 8. καταβόασον οίκτράν οττα, de¬ 
 liver a mournful message. For Dori- 
 cism, see Ell. Dissert. II. 20. For 
 tmesis, cf. Matth. §, 594 » 
 sentiment, see Find. Ol. XIV. 29. 
 where Echo is required to go ‘ to 
 the black-walled house of Perse¬ 
 phone, and deliver an illustrious 
 message (κλντάν φ^ροισ ayyeXiav) to 
 the father of Cleodamus,’ viz. that 
 his son has been victorious in the 
 Olympic games. 
 
 Ib. To\<itvip& ’Arpeidais. Agamem¬ 
 non more particularly meant. 
 
 1069. άχόρεντα 6 ν€ΐδη, deeds of dis¬ 
 grace, deeds ill calculated to excite 
 dancing or joy. φορούσα, announcing. 
 (logaced. succeeding three chor.) 
 
 1070. σφ'ιν Schsef. e conject. 
 Herm. Gaisf. Wund. Dind. σφίσ ήδη, 
 Br. σφίσ IV ήδη, libri. 
 
 Ib. τά eK δόμων —τά των δόμων — 
 
 b In his Emendd. in Trach. p. 17 * 
 
 oi δόμοι or 6 δόμος. WuND. 
 
 Ib. νοσ^ί, is in a state of afiic- 
 tion, viz. on account of the death of 
 Orestes. Wunder compares Eur. 
 Andr. 549. νοσύ δόμος. Iph. T. 860. 
 
 eTTt νοσονσι δώμασιν. 93®· νοσονντας 
 δόμους, ι/οσεΐ δη, Tricl. Herm. νοσοΰ- 
 σιν. Erf. Matth. νοσάται, Wund. 
 Neue. νοσζί, libri. (Dindorf ob¬ 
 serves, that νοσξνβι would be an easy 
 correction, ‘ si de usu hujus formse 
 satis constaret.’) 
 
 1071— 2. τά προς τέκνων, (as to 
 what concerns the children, viz. E- 
 lectra and Chrysoth.) διπ\η φύλο- 
 πις, {the joint quarrel or controversy, 
 the dispute between the two.) 
 
 1072— 3. ovK €T ί^ισονται {is not 
 yet equalised, made up), φιλοτασίω 
 δίαιτα {by friendly intercourse). 
 
 1074. craXeuet, is tossed about. 
 ScHOL. : Kivbvvevei’ eK μεταφοράς των 
 νηων' μόνη δβ, αντη βφ’ ίαντης χωρίς 
 άyκυpaς. 
 
 1075 · τον aei. Kiihner (§. 852, i.) 
 supplies στόνον. Bernh. (§. 19®*) 
 γόον. Sch8ef. Herm. Ell. and h Wun- 
 der, χρόνον. Dind. (coll. CEd. C. 
 1584.) rejects πατρός, and reads τον 
 άά πότμον {sortem suam semper de- 
 plorans). For πατρός as gen. after 
 στίνάχονσα, cf. Matth. §. 3^8. 
 
 he considers the reading as corrupt. 
 
90 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤ3 
 
 « / 
 
 ιο8ο 
 
 στ^οφ, / 3 ^ 
 
 1084 
 
 δβίλαΐα στ€νάχονσ\ οττωί 
 ά πάνδνρτο9 αηδών, 
 οΰτ€ TL του Θανβΐν ττρομη- 
 Θη9 τό Τ€ μη βΧ<ίπ€ΐν Ιτοί- 
 pjo, δίδύμαν βλοΟσ’ ipi- 
 νυν. τις αν βυττατρις ώδβ βλαστοί ; 
 ούδβΙς των αγαθών 
 ζών κακώς (ΰκλβίαν οΙσγυναι OeXei 
 νώνυμος, ώ τταί τταΐ, ' 
 
 ώς Kou συ πάγκΧαυτον αΙώνα Kotvov βίΧου, 
 το μη καΧον καΘοττΧίσασα δύο φβρβίν ev ev\ Χόγω, 
 σοφά τ άριστα τ€ τταΐς κ€κΧησθοα. 
 
 ιο 77 · ττάρ^νρτος. Erf. Pors. (in condition). Metre of v. 1083, two 
 Adw.), ττανόδνρτος, libri. epitrites and cretic. 
 
 1078. ScHOL. : ηρόνοιαρ ovK €χου- 1084. ρώρυμος, SO that his name 
 
 σα τον μη άποθαρίΐν. should be extinguished. W^und. : who 
 
 1079. TO μη βΚέττ€ΐρ ίτοίμα. Antig. observes that at the end of the verse 
 78. TO βία πόλιτωρ hpap άμηχαρος. is to be supplied (mentally), 
 
 Cf. Matth. §. 543. Obs. 2. For βλ/- fers death to a life of that kind. Cf. 
 π«ι/, in the sense of living, cf. Aj. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 999. 
 
 962 ; for position of μη, see Ell. II. 1085. πάγιά^αντορ αΙωρα κοιρορ. 
 93. and with oi;re—re, cf. sup. 350. Wunder, Erfurdt, and Herm. un- 
 
 1080. 8 ί 8 νμαρ iptpvp, SC. jEgisthus derstand death by this phrase. Cf. 
 and Clgtcemnestra. Cf. ^sch. Ag. Pind. Isthm. VI. 41. cxaXoy ίττίίμι 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 726. Eur. Or. 1390. Wund. Emend, 
 in Trach. p. 11 o. 
 
 Ib. ^οΟσα, after that she shall 
 have killed. 
 
 1081. ξϋπατρις, generous. Ell. 
 well-intentioned towards her father^· 
 land. Pass. 
 
 1082. Metre: penth. dact. To 
 equalise the strophic and antistro- 
 phic verses, Hermann adds yap : but 
 
 yrjpas es T€ top μόρσιμορ αιώρα. Eur. t 
 Phoen. 1492. κοιρω θαράτω σκοτίαν j 
 αΙώρα Χαχόρτωρ. πάγκΧαντορ, La. ηάγ- 1 
 κλανστορ, vulg. (metre : anac. 2 cret. ' 
 ithyph. Cf. infr. 1408.) 
 
 1087. TO μη κάΧορ καΘοττΧίσασα. 
 ScHOL. : καταττοΧΐμησασα το αίσχρορ^ 
 και ρικησασα' οϊορ tovs Ιχθρούχ κατα~ 
 ■γωρισαμίρη. 
 
 Ib. δνο φ€ρ€ΐν, to gain (for your- 
 
 as Wunder observes, the error may self) a double meed, ip ipi λόγφ, by 
 be in καθνττ^ρθΐρ in the antistrophic means of one thing or purpose, iv 
 verse. ip\, Br. Herm. Wund. cvl, libri. 
 
 ' 1082—3. ovSets τώρ αγαθών (gl. eu- (metre : tetram. iamb.) 
 
 γΐρώρ, no one belonging to the higher 1089. σοφά τ’ άριστα τ’, wise, be- 
 ranks of life), ζώρ κακώς (by leading cause unwilling to lead a life so un- 
 a miserable life and unworthy of his worthy of her birth; most excellent 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 91 
 
 μοί καθύπ^ρθ^ν άντ. β, 1090 
 
 χβφί KCU ττΧούτω τβώρ β^ζθρών, οσον 
 νυν vTr6)(eLp vaieLS* 
 
 iirei σ βφβνρηκα μοίρα μίν ονκ ev βσθλα 
 βφώσαν, a δβ μίγιστ ββλαστβ νόμιμα, τώνδβ φβρο- 
 μέναν ^°95 
 
 άριστά τα Ζηνο9 βνσβββία. ι°97 
 
 ΟΡ. άρ , ώ γυναΐκ€9, ορθά τ βισηκουσαμβν, 
 
 6ρθω9 δ' οδοιΤΓοροΰμβν βνθα χρχιζομ€ν ; 
 
 ΧΟ. τί δ* i^epevva^, και τί βουληθβΐ^ irapei ; ιιοο 
 
 ΟΡ. Κίγισθον, €vff ψκηκβν, ιστορώ πάλαι. 
 
 towards her parents, as having caused 
 (by supposition) the deaths of ^gis- 
 thus and Clytaemnestra. Cf. Phil. 
 
 119. where the double praise of 
 wisdom and bravery is promised to 
 Neoptolemus. (metre: two penth. 
 iamb.) 
 
 1091. —remvy Herm. e con- 
 ject. x<Ep \— των, libri. For τεων, cf. 
 Antig. 604. QLd. C. 534. 
 
 1092. ύττόχβίρ, Musgr.Dind.W^und. 
 νττό x^pO; Herm. Bernh. (p. 267·) viro 
 χ€Ϊρα, libri. 
 
 1093—4. μοίρα ovK iv €σβλα βφω~ 
 σαν, being, it is true, in a state of 
 wretchedness, Cf. sup. 1056. όταν ev 
 KoKois ήΒη β€βηκτ]ί. Eur. Heracl. 610. 
 
 βίβάναι τντνχία, 
 
 1095· ® piyicTT €β\αστ€ νόμιμα, 
 but as to those laws, which in their 
 nature are of the highest import. 
 
 (β\αστ(, cf. sup. 44®· 
 
 1095—6. (f)epop€vav (ScHOL. : απο- 
 φ^ρομΐναν') άριστά ^ apicrrela, Neub. 
 
 On the position of τωνΒε, see Bemh. 
 p. 297. r&vbe, Wund. Dind. των be, 
 Herm. Ell. (whom see, II. 263.) 
 
 1096. τα Ζηνος (υσ(β€ΐα., from your 
 reverence for Jupiter. jEsch. Pr. 123. 
 φιΧότητα βροτών, friendship for mor¬ 
 
 tals. Cf. Matth. §.367. 
 
 1097. Orestes and Pylades come 
 upon the stage, their attendants (cf. 
 infr. 1123.) bearing the urn, which 
 is supposed to contain the ashes of 
 the former. The Scholiast notices 
 with great commendation the art of 
 the poet in not allowing these sup¬ 
 posed remains to be brought for¬ 
 ward, when the intelligence of Ores¬ 
 tes’s death is first communicated, in 
 order that a valid excuse may be 
 given for the appearance of the lat¬ 
 ter, and the pathos of the recogni¬ 
 tion between him and his sister be 
 increased. 
 
 1098-9. re (as well)—be (as more¬ 
 over). Cf. Aj. 835-6. Tr. 285—6. 
 333-4. Ant. 1096. Phil. 1312. CEd. 
 T. 695. Xen. Cyr. VI. 24. 6 be Kvpos 
 
 τά Te αλλα els τον noXepov irapeoKeva- 
 ζeτo peya\onpeTra>s—inepeXelTO be &C. 
 See on this collocation Ellendt in 
 voc. be, I. 39 ^· 79 ^· Elms- 
 
 ley ad Mus. Crit. I. p. 474 * Hind, 
 ad (Ed. T. 347. Wund. ad Trach. 
 140. ορθως θ’. La. Gaisf. Wund. 
 Neue. 6 pes>s ff , Lb. Lc. Br. Erf. 
 Schsef. Dind. Elms. 
 
 1101. Ιστορώ, γρ. μαστ€νω. On 
 
92 
 
 50Φ0ΚΛΕ0Τ2 
 
 ΧΟ. άλλ (δ ff iKaveis χώ ψράσα! άζημιοΐ. 
 
 ΟΡ. r/s* ονν αν υμών τοί^ ίσω (ppaaecev αν 
 ημών ΤΓοθβινην κοινόπονν παρουσίαν ; 
 
 ΧΟ. €1 τον αγγυστόν γ€ κηρύσσβίν γρ^ών, 
 
 ΟΡ. ίΘ\ ώ γύναί, δήλωσον βίσβλθοΰσ, δτι 
 
 Φωκης ματβύουσ ανδρβ^ Αίγισθόν tlv€9. 
 
 ΗΛ. οϊμοι, τάΧαιν ^ ου δη ποθ* η9 ηκούσαμεν 
 φημη9 (j)€povT€9 €μφανη τεκμήρια ; 
 
 ΟΡ. ουκ οίδα την σην κληδόν* άλλα μοί γέρων 
 εφεΐτ Όρέστου 'Στρόφων άγγεΐλαι περί, 
 
 ΗΛ. τί S εστιν, ώ ^eV; ώί μ* ύπερχεται φόβθ9. 
 
 ΟΡ. φεροντες^ αύτοΰ σμικρά λείφαν εν βραχεί 
 τεύχει θανόντος^ ώ? δρα^^ κομίζομεν, 
 
 TJA .V»' V?, ι\ 
 
 γΙΛ. OL γω ταλαινα^ τουτ εκειν ηοη σαφε^ 
 πρόχειρον άχθθ 9 , ώ? εοικε, δερκομαι. 
 
 1105 
 
 1 I I ο 
 
 
 ^νθα, cf. Elmsl. ad Med. 1087. with 
 ωκηκ€ν, cf. (Ed. C. 1259. 
 
 1102. 6 φράσας, {the person who 
 indicated that JEgisthus dwells here,) 
 άζημιος, (is without blame.) 
 
 1103. Tciis €(τω for Tols evbov. Cf. 
 Wund. ad Antig. 489. With φρά- 
 σ6ΐ6ΐ/, cf. infr. 1265. and see Wund. 
 ad Emend, in Trach. p. 48. 
 
 1104. κοινόπονν παρουσίαν 
 ημάς κοινώς παρόντας. Ell. Cf. Aj. 
 872. ημών ye ναός κοινόπΧονν ομιλίαν. 
 See also sup. 488. 
 
 Ib. ποθανην. ScHOL.; την Επιθυ¬ 
 μητήν. 
 
 1105. κηρύσσ€ΐν = κηρυκα eivai. Cf. 
 Peile ad Choeph. 116. 
 
 1107. Φωκης, cf. Lob. ad Aj. 188. 
 ΦωκβΊς, vulg. 
 
 T108. ου St) Trod’. Matth. §. 610, 
 6. infr. 1180. 1202. Monk joins 
 8 ηποθ\ and translates : surely you are 
 not bringing clear evidence of the re¬ 
 
 port which we heard ? 
 
 I 110 . την σην κλη8όνα, the φημη, 
 or report to which you allude. Aj. 
 792. ουκ oi8a την σην πραξιν. Cf. 
 Antig. 573. Matth. §. 466, 2. 
 
 1111. Εφ€ΐτο. Matth. §.214. Blomf. 
 Gloss, in Prom. V. 4. 'Στρόφιος, cf. 
 sup. 54. 
 
 Ill 3— 14. φζροντ€ς — κομίζομ€ν. The 
 participle apparently pleonastic, but 
 not absolutely so. 
 
 1115. τουτ iKe'iv\ This formula, 
 well known to the readers of Ari¬ 
 stophanes and Euripides, and which 
 has been adopted, but not without 
 distrust, from Neue’s punctuation, 
 does not, I believe, occur again in the 
 writings of Sophocles. Turnebe, Br. 
 Gaisf. and Dind. (in Annot.) punc¬ 
 tuate at σαφβς ; Hermann and Wun- 
 der only before and after ώς eoiKc. 
 For Matthise’s sense of the passage, 
 see Gr. Gr. II. 1130. EUendt, join- 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 93 
 
 OP. eh-ep tl κλαίεις των Όρβστείων κακών, 
 τοδ’ αγγος ίσθι σώμα τον κείνου στεγον, 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ ζεϊνε, δός νυν ττρος θεών, ευττερ τοδε 
 
 κεκευθεν αντον τεύχος, είς χεΐρας λαβεΐν, 112ο 
 
 οττως εμάντην και γένος το τταν ομου 
 ξνν τηδε κλαύσω κάττοδνρωμαί σττοδώ. 
 
 ΟΡ. δ 6 θ% ητις εστί, ττροσφεροντες. ον γαρ ώς 
 εν δυσμενεία γ ονσ ετταιτεΊταί τοδε, 
 
 ‘ άλλ’ η φίλων τις, η ττρος αίματος φύσιν. 1125 
 
 ΗΛ. ω φίλτάτου μνημεΐον ανθρώπων εμο\ 
 
 \Ι/νχης * Ο ρέστου λουπον, ως σ απ ελπίδων, 
 
 ονχ ώνπερ εζεπεμπον, είσεδεξάμην. 
 
 νυν μεν γαρ ονδεν οντα βαστάζω χεροΐν, 
 
 δόμων δε σ, ώ παΐ, λαμπρόν εζεπεμψ* εγώ, 1130 
 
 ing TOUT* €Κ€7ρ* ήδη ττρόχΐΐρον, renders 
 * quod pr<Bsens adest, quasi in manus 
 sumendum.’ 
 
 1116. πρόχζίρορ. ScHOL. : άρτί τον 
 eVi χειρωρ. Cf. Matth. §.575, extr. 
 
 1117. kKoUis κακωρ. Eur. Here. f. 
 52^. δακρν€ΐρ συμφοράς. Matt.§.368,a. 
 
 1120. KUevdep. Here used tran¬ 
 sitively ; elsewhere (as sup. 868. 
 Antig. 911. O. C. 1523.), intransi¬ 
 tively. 
 
 11 21—2. οττως κΚαυσω (cf. Matth. 
 II. 885.) κάποδνρωμαι. ^sch. Prom. 
 657 . τάτΓοκΚαΰσαί κάττοδνρασθαι. 
 
 1123 · boff (avrrj SC.), ήης (ScHOL.: 
 ήτισουρ) iari. On δστις for όστισονρ, 
 see Ellendt II. 384, who gives as 
 instances CEd. T. 237. 1349 · CEd.C. 
 935. Neue compares Plat. Protag. 
 327, b. Hipp. Maj. 282, d. 
 
 1124. ip δνσμ€Ρ€ία γ' ονσα = δνσ- 
 μ€Ρ·ης y ονσα, Cf. infr. 1329. CEd. T. 
 562. 1286. Aj. 271. 
 
 Ib. robe, La. rabe, vulg. It is im¬ 
 material, which is used. Cf. Trach. 
 600. 
 
 1125. ‘ ττρος αίματος φυσιρ — σνναι- 
 μος τω yipeiJ LobecK (ad Aj. 760). 
 The acc. φνσιρ is nearly redundant. 
 Cf. sup. 325. and Aj. 1305. τούς ττρος 
 αίματος. 
 
 1120. For the affecting story of 
 the actor Polus, who during the re¬ 
 citation of the following exquisite 
 monologue, bore in his hands an 
 urn containing the ashes of his own 
 son, see Aul. Cell. Noct. Att. VII. 5· 
 
 1127· Όρίστου, circumlo¬ 
 
 cution for Orestes himself. Phil. 55* 
 τηρ Φίλοκτητον φνχηρ, i.e. Philoctetes. 
 
 Ib. ατΓ ίΚττίδωρ = ούκ ως ήΧττιζορ. 
 Cf. Matth. §.572. Neue ad Trach. 
 389. Griff, ad Sept. c. Th. 273. σ’ 
 άττ' βΧττίδωρ, Br. αττ’ (Χττιδωρ, La. Lb. 
 
 1128. cBi/7rep said for αΓσπ^ρ. For 
 similar instances of attraction, see 
 Bernh. p. 299. opirep, Harl. Dobr. 
 Kidd. 
 
 11 29—30. ovbep ορτα, dead, Χαμττρορ, 
 blooming in health and vigour. Wund. 
 Ellendt renders λαμπρορ, an object of 
 bright hope. 
 
94 
 
 20Φ0ΚΛΕ0ΤΣ 
 
 \ 
 
 ’"i 
 
 \ 
 
 ώζ ωφβλορ ττάροίθβν ίκλιττ^ίν βίοι/, 
 
 TTfHV is ζ^νην σβ γαΐαι/ ίβοτίμψαι χβροΐι/ 
 κλβψασα raivSe κανασώσουσθαι φόι/ον, 
 οπω9 θανων βκβισο rrj τ6θ* rjpiepa, 
 τύμβου πατρώου kolvov εΙΧηγω9 μ€ρο9. 
 νυν S ίκτος οίκων κάπΙ γη9 αλλη9 φιτγας 
 κακώς άπωλου, σης καχτιγνητης δ/χα* 
 κοΰτ iv φίλαισι χ^ρσίν η ταλοαν βγω 
 λουτροΐς σ βκόσμησ, οΰτβ παμφλβκτου ττυρος ^ 
 άνβίΧόμην, ως βίκος, αθΧιον βάρος, 
 άλλ* βν ζβναισι χ€ρσί κη8βυθβ\ς τάΧας 
 σμικρός προσηκβις ογκος βν σμικρω κυτβι. 
 οίμοι τάΧαινα της βμης πάΧαι τροφής 
 άνωφβΧητου, την βγω θάμ άμφί σο\ 
 πονώ γΧυκβΐ παρβσχον. οΰτβ γάρ ποτβ 
 
 ”35 
 
 1140 
 
 ”45 
 
 1132. πριν ίκπψψαι. Cf. Elmsl. ad 
 Med. 633. 
 
 1133. φόνου. Cf. Bernh. p. 180. 
 
 1134. όπως — €Κ€ΐσο. Cf. Matth. §. 
 519, 6. Monk’s Hippol. 643. 
 
 11^6. €κτ6ς οικων. On the more 
 general absence of the article in 
 forms of this sort, see Ell. II. 247. 
 
 1136-42. Monk illustrates by re¬ 
 ferences to II. XL 432. Virg. iEn. 
 
 X. 557 · TibuU. I. El. 3.5* Pope’s 
 
 El. i^at can atone &c. 
 
 1138. €v χερσίν. Cf. infr. 1141· 
 Trach. 241. 6ρας iv όμμασιν. GEd. T. 
 6^2. iv δρκω piyav. On ή τάλαινα, see 
 Ell. II. 213. 
 
 1139. Xovrpoiff σ’ εκόσμησ. Lb. 
 Palat. Wund. Dind. (in Annot.) Χον¬ 
 τροί? iκόσμησ, vulg. 
 
 Ib. παμφΧεκτου πυρός. Antig. IOo6. 
 βωμοισι παμφΧεκτοισιν. Cf. Neue ad 
 Aj. 712. 
 
 1140. άνεΐΧόμην. {αναιρεισθαι, secum 
 auferre, nanscisci. Ell.) Neue cites 
 
 Eur. Suppl.471. 1173· 
 
 1141. ^ivaiai, Aug. b. Lips. a. b. 
 Mosq. I. 2 &c. Herm. Wund. Dind. 
 ξ€ντ]σι, vulg. See dissertation on the 
 subject, prefixed to second volume 
 of Ellendt’s Lexicon. 
 
 1142. προσηκεις, ades. Ell. per^ 
 tines. Monk. For the apposition, 
 cf. Matth. §. 310. 
 
 Ib. κύτος (κνω), a vessel of greater 
 or less capacity: here, the urn, sup¬ 
 posed to contain the ashes of Orestes, 
 Cf. Griffiths ad Sept. c. Th. 495. 
 
 1143. iμης πάΧαι τροφής^ my 
 former care, or superintendance. With 
 the word τροφής, as thus used, cf. 
 (Ed. C. 1614; as genitive after τά- 
 Xaiva, cf. infr. 1209. τάλαινα σεθεν. 
 
 1144-5. — παρεσχον. For an 
 
 elaborate view of the article used in¬ 
 stead of the relative pronoun, see 
 Ell. II. 202. άμφι σοί. gl. σου χάριν. 
 Compare generally .Esch. Ch. 730 
 sq. (Peile’s edit.) 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 μητρο^ (TV γ η(τθ(ΐ μαΧΚον rj καμοΰ φίλο?, 
 ovff οΐ κατ οίκον ήσαν, άλλ* e.y(o τροφθ9' 
 ίγίύ δ’ άδβλψ^ σοί ττροσηυδώμην aeL 
 νυν S ίκΐΚέλονπβ ταυτ ev ημ^ρ^ μ(^ 
 θανόντα συν σοί, ττάντα yap συναρττασα^^ 
 θύζλλ* οττωί, β0ηκα9, οϊχΕταί πατήρ' 
 τ€θντ]κ iyco' (τυ (Ι)ρουδθ9 αυτο9 (ΐ θανοον' 4- 
 y€λώσL ^ €χθροί' μαίνβται S vij) ηδονη^ 
 μητηρ άμητωρ^ η9 (μοί συ ποΧλακίς 
 (Ι)ημα9 λάθ^ρα προΰπ€μπ€9, (09 (Ι)ανουμ€νθ9 
 τιμχύρδε avTos· αλλα ταυθ ο δυστυ^τι^ 
 δαίμοον δ croy τε καμο9 ε^αφείλετο, 
 oy (Τ ώδε μοι προυπ^μ^^ν αντί (^ίΚταττίζ 
 μορ(^η9 (τποδόν τε /cat σκιάν αϊ/ωφελ^. 
 όΐμοί μοί, 
 
 ώ δβμαζ οίκτρόν· 0εΟ φεδ. 
 
 95 
 
 1150 
 
 IIS5 
 
 1 ι6ο 
 
 114^. μαΚΚον η καΐ. Ellendt (I. 
 890.) includes this among the ex¬ 
 amples of Koi, signifying vel, jam. 
 Hartung (I. 126.) compares Plat. 
 Phaed. 75, c. ov yap nepX τον ίσον νυν 
 6 "koyos μαΐΚλορ η και ττΐρΧ του καΚον. 
 
 Cf. Matth. §. 620, 2. 
 
 1147 * Trach. 934· 
 
 €κ8ώαχθ(Χς των κατ οΊκον. 
 
 1148. ά 8 €\φη, i. e. in preference 
 to his other sisters, άδίλφη σοι, Neue, 
 Wund. αδβλφή σοι, vulg. 
 
 1150. θανόντα συν σοί. Brunck 
 compares Eur. Here. f. 69· 
 eK^wa μ€ν θανόντ άνβτττατο. fr. Temen. 
 κακοϊσι di απαντα φρου8α συνθανόνθ 
 νττό χθονόί. θανόντα. Par. D. a pr. m. 
 libr. Triclin. Br. Gaisf. Wund. Neue. 
 θανόντι. La. Lb. Palat. Hind, (in 
 Annot.) 
 
 Ib. σνναρττάσας. Neue compares 
 σνΧΚαβων in CEd. T. 97 ^· 
 
 1151, βφηκας. gl. άΐΓηΚθ€5. 
 
 11^2. Τίθνηκ^ 6γώ· συ &C. Erf. β 
 conject. Herm. Wund. τ^θνηκ €γώ 
 σοι, libri. Gaisf. Dind. Neue. (Phil. 
 1030. τ^θνηκ νμΧν ττάλαι.) 
 
 Ib. φροΰ8ος θανών. Cf. Wund. ad 
 (Ed. T. 930. 
 
 1154. μητηρ άμητωρ. Aj. 665. άδω¬ 
 ρα δώρα. CEd. Τ. 1214. ayapov γάρου. 
 Phil. 534. 848. On the word άμητωρ, 
 see Blom. Gl. in Prom. 9®· and 
 Schleusn. in voc. rjs depends on τι- 
 
 μωρος, V. 115 ^. 
 
 TrpovTTepTres. Cf. infr. 1158. 
 Ant. 1287. (Ed. C. 665. 1667. Phil. 
 105. 1205. Neue. 
 
 11^8—9. auri μορφής σττοδου. Cf. 
 
 Blomf. Gl. in Ag. 429. 
 
 1160. For anapaests similarly in¬ 
 terspersed between iambic trimeters, 
 cf. Trach. 1085. 
 
96 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ώ ^Ηνοτάτας, οϊμοι μοί, 
 
 ΤΓβμφθβΙς κβλβνθου^, φί\ταΘ\ ως μ άττωλβσας* 
 άπώλβσας 8 ητ\ ώ κασίγνητον κάρα, 
 τοιγάρ συ be^ai pi βς το σου τοδβ στεγος^ 1165 
 
 τηυ μηδβυ βΙς το μηδίν^ ώς συν σο\ κάτω 
 ναίω το λοιπόν. καΙ γάρ ηνίκ ήσθ* ανω, 
 ζύν σο), μ€Τ€ίχον των 'ίσων' καΙ νυν ποθώ 
 του σου θανουσα μη 'ποΧείπβσθαι τάφου, 
 τους γάρ θανόντας ούγ ορώ λυπουμόνους. 1170 
 
 Χθ. θνητού πόφυκας πατρός, 'Υίλόκτρα^ φρόνβι' 
 θνητός S Όρβστης' ωστ€ μη λίαν στόνβ.- 
 πάσιν γάρ ημΐν τουτ όφ^ίλ^ται παθβΐν. 
 
 ΟΡ. φβυ φβΰ. τί λόζω ; ποΐ λόγων αμήχανων 
 
 €λθω ; κρατβιν γάρ ουκ ίτι γλώσσης σθόνω. 1175 
 
 ΗΛ. τί S ^σχ€ς άλγος ; προς τί τουτ €ΐπά)ν κυρβΐς ; 
 
 ΟΡ. ή σον το κλβινον βΊδος 'Ιτίλβκτρας τόδβ ; 
 
 ΗΛ. τόδ' ίστ €Κ€Ϊνο, και μάΧ άθλίως ^χον. 
 
 1162—3. ^etwrtiraff ττίμφθί'ις KeXev- 
 θονς. For sentiment, cf. Antig. 807. 
 1213. Tr. 875. Eur. Med. 1067. 
 Ale. 273. Ion. 1226 &c. &c. For 
 grammar, see Matth. §. 409, 4. 
 
 1165. στ^γος sc. the urn with the 
 supposed ashes of Orestes. 
 
 1166. την μηδίν SC. ονσαν, her that 
 is no more : eU to μηδ^ν, to that which 
 is but ashes. For some differences 
 between the expressions μηδ^ν ων, and 
 ονδεν ων, cf. Aj. T231. Phil. 409. 
 
 1169. μη 'πόλείπεσθαι, not to be 
 deprived of, i. e. to share. Cf. Elms, 
 ad Med. 35. 
 
 1170. Trach. 1173. τοίί yap βα- 
 νονσι μόχθος ον ^τpoσyίyvετaι. 
 
 1172. ώστε, therefore. Cf. Ell. II. 
 1013. Kiihn. §. 828. On μη Χίαν, see 
 Elms, ad Med. 1^6. 
 
 1173. τοϋτ\ See Bernh. p. 282. 
 
 Wunder omits this verse, as belong¬ 
 ing not to Sophocles, but Euripides. 
 
 11 74—5 . TTot Xόyωv εΧθω, i. e. ποΓ 
 Xόyωv εΧθω αμήχανων Xόyωv, nesciens 
 quid sit dicendum. Ell. CEd. C. 167. 
 ποΐ Tis φροντίδας εΧθη ; 
 
 1175. κρατεϊν yXώσσης. Eur. Hel. 
 1388. κρατούντα στόματος. Cf. Blomf. 
 Gloss, in Prom. V, 909. yXώσσης 
 
 άκρατης. 
 
 1176. Hermann and Dind. re¬ 
 move the note of interrogation at 
 dXyoς, and consider προς τί as said 
 for προς o Ti. On εσχες aXyoς, see 
 sup. 897. On the formula προς τί 
 (Aj. 40. Phil. 836.) see Matth. §. 
 591. On είπων κνρεϊς, cf. infr. 
 
 ΐ33ί· 
 
 1178. τόδ* εστ εκεΊνο, this which 
 you behold is that person, respecting 
 which you make inquiry. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 97 
 
 y 
 
 OP. οιμοι ταΧαίνης άρα rrjcrSf συμφοραί. 
 
 ΗΛ. ού 8η ΤΓΟΤ, ώ ζίν, άμφ’ e/xoi στίνΐίς τάδβ; 
 ΟΡ. ώ σωμ aTipuos κάθίωί ΐφθαρμίνον. 
 
 ΗΛ. οϋτοί ΤΓΟΤ άλλην η ’/Χ€ δνσφημβΐς, ζ^νβ. 
 
 ΟΡ. φβν της άνύμφου δυσμόρου Τ€ σης τροφής. 
 ΗΛ. τί δη ΤΓΟΤ, ώ ζόν\ ώδ’ ότησκοπων στ€ν€ίς ; 
 
 . ως ουκ αρ ηοη των €μων ουοβν κακών. 
 
 ΗΛ. iv τω δίβγνως τούτο των βίρημβνων ; 
 
 ΟΡ. ορών σ€ πολλοΐς όμπρέττουσαν άλγ€σίν. 
 ΗΛ. καΐ μην όρας γβ τταυρα των βμών κακών. 
 ΟΡ. KOLL ττώς yevoLT αν τώνδ' €τ’ όχθίω βλόπβιν ; 
 ΗΛ. οθοννβκ βΙμΙ τοΐς φον^νσι σύντφοφος 
 
 I ι8ο 
 
 1185 
 
 1190 
 
 ιΐ 79 · On αρα for αρα, οη account 
 of the metre, cf. Ell. I. 217. 
 
 1180. ov δη ποτ. Wund. (ex La. 
 Ti)· Ti TTor, vulg. Cf. infr. 1202. 
 On ά/χφ’ e/xoi, see Kiihn. §. 609, 2. 
 
 1181. άθβως, without help on the 
 part of heaven. Cf. Pass, in voc. 
 OEd. T. 254. 661. 
 
 1182. ‘ These ill-omened words 
 are appropriate to me and no one 
 else.’ With άλλην ή 'pe, cf. Phil. 347 ' 
 
 1183. άνυρφου. I understand : un¬ 
 suited to the virgin state. Orestes 
 still appears to speak in reference 
 to the mean attire of Electra. That 
 the Greek maidens were usually at¬ 
 tired richly, see Arist. Acharn. 258. 
 
 Ib. τροφής, mode of life. Cf. (Ed. 
 0.338. Aj.499. 
 
 1184. Ιπισκοπών, observing atten¬ 
 tively. Cf. Schleusn. in voc. For 
 δη Dindorf (in Annot.) proposes to 
 
 read μοι from La. (μοι, eraso μοι), 
 Monac. and Suidas. 
 
 1185. a>s apa. (Cf. Aj. 367. Tr. 
 871. Ant. 1178. (Ed. T. 1395. 
 Fgm. (apud Dind.) 508. Wund. 
 
 Emend, in Tr. p. 143.) Ellendt brings 
 this apa under the rule of examples, 
 where the particle contains a tacit 
 considering in the mind, ‘ adsigni- 
 ficata re insperata, gravi, vel opi~ 
 nione frustra suscepta.' He trans¬ 
 lates : quam nihil igitur meorum ma- 
 lorum scivi. The mala mea of Orestes 
 refer to the miserable condition in 
 which he finds Electra. 
 
 1086. iv τω των ΐίρημίνων. iv re¬ 
 dundant as at V. 1141. 
 
 1187. €μπρΙπονσαν. I understand 
 generally; ‘ my opinion is formed 
 (δ^γνων) not from what I hear, but 
 from what I see: for in that wasted 
 form and mean attire do I not be¬ 
 hold a person conspicuous for more 
 than one cause of sorrow ?’ With 
 iμπρiπoυσav, cf. sup. 664. and Blomf. 
 Gl. in Ch. 350. F. Jacobs renders : 
 non virginali, ut par erat, ornatu, sed 
 plurimis malis cinctam et instructam. 
 
 1188. και μην, and yet. Matth. §. 
 621. 
 
 1189. βλβπαν, as far as sight is 
 concerned. 
 
 1190. ftpi σύντροφος, am compelled 
 
 H 
 
98 
 
 20Φ0ΚΛΕ0Τ2 
 
 OP. roiy rov ; ττόθίν tout ίζ^σημηνας κακόν ; 
 
 ΗΛ. rot? ττατρό^· €ΐτα τοΐσδβ SouAevco βκχ. r 
 OP. TtV yip cr άνάγκρ TySe TTpoTpeTreL βροτων ; 
 
 ΗΛ. ρ^ητηρ καλβΐται, μητρί δ’ ovSeu e^iaol. 
 
 OP. τί δρωσα ; Trorepa χ€ρσ\ν, η λι^ρ βίου ; 1 195 
 
 ΗΛ. καί χ€ρσί καΐ λύμαισί καί ττασίν κακοΪ 9 , 
 
 ΟΡ. ούδ' ούτταρηζωρ ούδ* ο κωΧυσων τταρα ; 
 
 ΗΛ. ού δη&' 0? ην γάρ μοί, συ προνθηκας σττοδόν. 
 
 ΟΡ. ω δνστΓΟτμ!, ws* οροου σ βττοίκτβίρίο τταΧαι. 
 
 ΗΛ. μόνος βροτων νυν Ισθ* εττοίκτβφας ττοτβ, ΐ2οο 
 
 ΟΡ. μόνος yip ^κω τοΐσι σοΐς aXya>v κακοΐς. 
 
 ΗΛ. ού δη ΤΓοθ' ημΐν ^oyyev^ ηκβυς ττοθβν ; 
 
 ΟΡ. iyi> φράσαιμ! αν, el το τώνδ εϋνουν τταρα. 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’ ίστ\ν βΰνουν, ωστβ ττρος τηστας βρβΐς, 
 
 ΟΡ. μόθβς τόδ' ayyoς νυν, όπως το παν μαθης. 1205 
 
 ΗΛ. μη δητα προς θβών τούτο μ epyaay, ^eve. 
 
 OP. πβίθου XeyovTL, κούχ άμαρτησβί ποτβ. 
 
 to live with, rots φον^νσι. .^gisthus 
 more particularly meant. 
 
 1192. eira, what is more, βία, em¬ 
 phatic. 
 
 1193. ris — βροτων. Who brings 
 you into this want of freedom ? Pass. 
 avdyKT] nporpenet — άvayκάζ€L. Herm. 
 Ell. rrjbe. (Is rovro. Schol. For 
 the elongation of the first syllable 
 in Trporpenei, see sup. 366. For dat. 
 dvdyKT), Neue refers to v. ^ 47 · 
 Matth. §. 401. 
 
 1194. ρητρ\ δ’ ovdev (ξισοΊ, she does 
 nothing like a mother. Pass. 
 
 119^. λυ /Li^ βίου. Cf. sup. 190 sq. 
 
 1197. ονπαρηξων {enaprjyeiv, to as¬ 
 sist). On the article, see Bernh. p. 
 318. Matth. 268. On ουδ6 placed 
 twice or three times, where ovre 
 seemed to be required, see Ellendt 
 
 II. 422. 
 
 1200. eTTOLKTelpas. Cf. Monk’s 
 Hippol. 304. 
 
 1202. ‘In direct questions ού 
 often occurs with other particles, 
 e. g. Soph. El. 1202. ‘ Thou dost 
 not come .. . ? indicating that what 
 is asked is conjectured to be true. 
 Comp. ib. 1138. Tr. 876.’ Matth. 
 
 610, 6. ποθβν, aliunde. Ell. Coll. 
 Phil. 156. CEd. C. 1595. 737 · 
 
 1203. TO rS)v8€=atd€. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 285. sup. 261. 
 
 1204. ττρος ττιστάς. For prep, see 
 numerous examples in El. II. 651. 
 
 1207. κούχ apaprrjaet, and you shall 
 not fail of what you wish. Cf. infr. 
 1320. Phil. 231. (Ed. T. 621. ποτέ, 
 non sane, puto {wohl nicht). Ell. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 99 
 
 ΗΛ. μη^ ΤΓρο9 yevelov^ μη *ζ€λη τα φίλτατα. 
 
 ΟΡ. ον φημ Ιάσπν. ΗΛ. oS τάλαιν Ιγω aeOev^ 
 
 Όρβστα, της σης el στβρησομαι ταφής. ΐ2ΐο 
 
 ΟΡ. ίΰφημα φωνΐΐ. προί δίκηί γαρ ον στίν€Κ. 
 
 ΗΛ. ττώ? τον θανόντ αδελφόν ου δίκρ στενω ; 
 
 ΟΡ. ον σοι ττροσηκει τηνδε ττροατφωνεΐν φάτιν. 
 
 ΗΛ. οΰτωί ατιμόί είμι του τεθνηκοτοί ; 
 
 ΟΡ. άτιμος ονδβνος σύ’ τοντο δ* ού)μ σόν. 1215 
 
 ΗΛ. eiirep γ Όρβστου σώμα βαστάζω τόδβ. 
 
 ΟΡ. άλλ’ ούκ ^Ορβστον, ττΧην λόγω γ ησκημόνον. 
 
 ΗΛ. ΤΓοΰ S εστ εκείνου του ταλαιττώρου ταφοί ; 
 
 ΟΡ. ούκ εστι. του γαρ ζώντοί ούκ εστιν ταφοί. 
 
 ΗΛ. ττως βίττας, ώ τταΐ ; ΟΡ. ψευδός ονδεν ών λέγω. 1220 
 ΗΛ. ^ ^ γαρ άνηρ ; ΟΡ. είττερ έμψυχός γ εγώ. 
 
 ΗΛ. η γαρ συ κεΐνος ; ΟΡ. τηνδε ττροσβλεψασά μου 
 
 Ι2ο8. μη τά φίλτατα, vulg*. 
 
 Wund. Dind. μ Elms, ad CEd. 
 
 T. 1522. Eur. Heracl. 977. np6s ye- 
 veiov. On the insertion or omission 
 of article in formulae of intreaty, see 
 Ellendt II. 245. 
 
 1209. ov φημ iaaeiv. The same 
 words occur Phil. 817· On ov φημι 
 {I deny), see Blomf. Gl. in Ag. 361. 
 On cl στίρησομαι, cf. Peile ad Ch. 
 
 173· 
 
 1210. TTjs (της ταφής. I under¬ 
 stand : of the receptacle in which your 
 ashes are cofitained. 
 
 1211 . ττρος δίκης, gl. δικαίως. Wun- 
 der renders προς δίκης, von Rechts- 
 wegen, and δίκη in verse following, 
 mit Recht. On (ϋφημα φώνα, see 
 Monk’s Hippol. 721. 
 
 1213. τηνδζ προσφωνίίν φάτιν \ viz. 
 
 that Orestes is dead. Cf. sup. 329. 
 Aj. 500. πρόσφθ€γμα ipci. 
 
 1214· άτιμος του Τζθνηκότος. Cf. 
 Matth. §.338. 
 
 Ib. TovTo δ’ ονχι σόν. This which 
 you have in your hand does not be¬ 
 long to you : you have no concern 
 in it. 
 
 1217* ησκημίνον. ScHOL. : KOTC- 
 σΚ€νασμ€νον. 
 
 1221-1. Elmsley ad Med. 678. 
 translates : What ? is the man alive ? 
 what P are you he? On γάρ thus 
 used, see Ellendt in voc. Blomf. ad 
 Ag. 613. 
 
 1223. σφραγίδα. The Scholiast 
 supposes a ring or seal to be meant. 
 (Cf. Tr. 615.) Others suppose some 
 mark common to the whole of the 
 cPelopidae, as an ivory shoulder, or 
 
 c How the family of the Red Gauntlets were known to each other, the readers of Sir 
 "W^alter Scott need not be told. 
 
 H 2 
 
100 
 
 :£ΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤ2 
 
 σφραγίδα ττατρο^, €κμαθ\ el σαφή λβγω, 
 
 ΗΛ. ω φίλτατον φώ^. ΟΡ. φίλτατοι^, συμμαρτυρω. 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ φθβγμ\ άφίκον ; ΟΡ. μηκβτ αλλοθβι^ πυθρ. 1225 
 ΗΛ. βχω σ€ χβρσίν ; ΟΡ. ώς τα λοίπ ίχοί 9 aei, 
 
 ΗΛ. ω φίλταται γυναίκας, ώ ττολίτιδβΫ, 
 
 ορατ Όρβστην τόνδβ, μηχαναΐσί μ€ΐ/ 
 θανόντα^ ννν δβ μρχαναί^ σ^σοασμ^νον. 
 
 ΧΟ. ορώμβΡ, ώ τταΓ, κάπΐ συμφοραΐσι μοί 1230 
 
 yeypOos epirei δακρνον ομματίύν ατνο. 
 
 ΗΛ. ίώ yovoLL, 
 
 yovai σωμάτων βμοί φιλτατων 
 βμόλβτ αρτίων, 
 
 €φ€νρ€τ\ ηλθβτ 5 βϊδβθ ovs" ^XPpC^T^· '^35 
 
 OP. ττάρβσμβν' άλλα σΐγ' άχουσα ττροσμξνβ. 
 
 the mark of an olive-branch on the 
 shoulder, σαφή, things to be depend¬ 
 ed on. 
 
 1224. φως. Wunder, Neue and 
 Ellendt render by dies (coll. Phil. 
 530.) Schsefer understands in the 
 Homeric sense, ηΚθ^ς, ΎηΧίμαχ^, yKv- 
 Kcpou φάος. Comparing infr. V. 1286 . 
 1354,1 should be tempted to render 
 ω φίλτατον φως, Ο dearest to be seen, 
 as ώ φθβγμα [φίΧτατον SC.) Ο deui'est 
 to be heard. The answer of Orestes 
 will easily correspond with either of 
 these interpretations. 
 
 1225. ω φθ€Ύμ, (gl. φίλτατον.) 
 άφίκον ; QEd. C. 863. ω φθβγμ αναι¬ 
 δές, η σν yap φαίισεις ipov; Phil. 1445 * 
 ω φθeyμa ποθίΐνον έμοί πέμφας. The 
 verb άφίκον obviously alludes to Ore¬ 
 stes having at last come in person, 
 ■not sending messages and messen¬ 
 gers, as previously. 
 
 Ib. μηκίτ αλλοθίν πνθτ], "make the 
 inquiry of none else, but take the as¬ 
 surance from me in person. CEd. C. 
 
 1266. τάμα μη άλλων ττνθη. 
 
 1220 . ώί τα λοίπ €χοις. Cf. Peile 
 ad Ag. 308. On ^x^tv, to hold, or to 
 embrace, cf. Elms, ad CEd. C. 143^· 
 1228. 6ράτ€ TovSe, see here. 
 
 1230. σνμφοραίσι. It is hardly 
 necessary to observe, that in the 
 Greek language σνμφοραΧ implies 
 events of either kind, joyous or 
 mournful. 
 
 1233. yovcu— σωμάτων (plur. for 
 sing.) φίλτάτων. 0 offspring of the 
 person most dear to me, sc. Aga¬ 
 memnon. For yovr), implying son, 
 cf. Antig. 641. CEd. C. 1192. for 
 σωμάτων, person, ci. mix. 1333. CEd. 
 C. 335. CEd. T. 643. Ant. 676. 
 Virg. ^n. V. 318. longeque ante 
 omnia corpora Nisus emicat. (metre: 
 dochmiac.) 
 
 T235. elbeB' ονς έχρηζ€Τ€. ScHOL.: 
 
 aVTL TOV €jU.€· 
 
 1236. σΐγ €χονσα. Phil. 238. 
 y€λώσι σίy* €χοντ€ς. lb. 201, βνστομ* 
 
 J/ 
 
 exe. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 101 
 
 ΗΛ. τί 8 ' ^στιν ; 
 
 ΟΡ. σιγάν αμβινον, μη τις βνδοθβν κλύη, 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ* ού τάν ^Άρτβμιν τάν αάν άδμηταν, 
 
 τόδβ μβν ονποτ αξιώσω τρβσαι 1240 
 
 ΤΓβρισσον άχθος βνδον γυναικών δν ae'i. 
 
 ΟΡ. ορα ye μ^ντοι καν γυναιζιν ώ? "Άρης 
 eveariv’ ev S β^οισθα ττβιραθβΐσα ττον. 
 
 ΗΛ. οτοτοτοτοΐ τοτοΐ, 1245 
 
 άνβφβλον Ιπββαλβς ονττοτβ κατ αλνσιμ ον^ 
 ούδβτΓοτβ λη σόμβ νον άμβτβρον 
 
 οΐον βφυ κακόν, 1250 
 
 ΟΡ. €^oi 8 a, να\ ταυτ' άλλ’ όταν παρουσία 
 
 φράζη, τότ βργων τώνδβ μβμνησθαι χρεών. 
 
 1237· Metre: bacchiac. 
 
 1239· There appears to be some 
 corruption in this and the antistro- 
 phic verse, but of what nature, is 
 ^uncertain. Ov μά τάν, plerique Codd. 
 With regard to the goddess herself, 
 and the theology, cf. Thud. I. 234. 
 Klausen’s Theol. .^sch. p. 99. 
 (metre: uncertain.) 
 
 1240. rpe'aai. A Doric term, 
 seldom used by the tragedians ex¬ 
 cept in the aorist. Cf. CEd. C. 
 1419. Ant. 1042. Blomf. Gl. in 
 Sept. c. Th. 790. 
 
 1241. άχθοί γυναικών = γνναίκας αίς 
 αχθομαι, quas (Egre tolero. Ell. ττβ- 
 ρισσον, useless, Br. intolerable,W ui^jo. 
 Ιβγ γυναικών, the Scholiast and^Vun- 
 der understand Clytaemnestra. (me¬ 
 tre : dim. iamb. cat. and two bac- 
 chiacs, or dim. iamb. cret. and two 
 trochaics.) 
 
 I 243. opa ye pevToi, Herm. Blomf. 
 Wund. Ell. ( 1 . 346, where see ex¬ 
 amples). pev drj, libri, Neue. Elms. 
 
 1243—4. γύναιξίν "'Αρης eveari. 
 (The allusion, as the Scholiast ob¬ 
 serves, is to Clytaemnestra, who had 
 murdered! her husband). Ailsch. 
 Suppl. 749. γυνή μονωθύσ' oihiv' ουκ 
 €νίστ' ’'Αρης (^martial vigour. Cf. 
 Blomf. Gl. in Ag. 77). 
 
 1246. άνίφίΚον, over which no 
 cloud can he thrown. Schol. : υπό 
 μη^^μιάς ν€φ€λης κρυβηναι dvvdpevov. 
 lb. eVe/3aXey. Metaph. mentioned. 
 Ib. οϋποτ€ καταΧυσιμον, incapable 
 of dissolution or termination. 
 
 I 249. λησόμ€νον for βπιλησθησόμζ- 
 vov, to be forgotten, buried in oblivion. 
 Cf. Triclin. Matth. §. 494, 495 > d. 
 
 1231—2. δτανπαρουσίαφράζτ] (Schol. 
 KoiKfj), cum res prwsens admonebit. 
 Herm. Comparing Electra’s an¬ 
 swer, the scholium, and vv. 1259. 
 1292, παρουσία seems equivalent to 
 καιρός, a fitting opportunity, ’e^oiba, 
 va\, ταυτ, Herm. Wund. Dind. (in 
 Annot.) Ell. (ξοιδα και ταυτ, libri. 
 
 Neue. δργων τώνδβ, these things. 
 
 ad (Ed. C. 587. Hart. II. 402. 
 
 Dobree reads : άλλ’ οΰ μά τάν άΖμητον cukv ’'Αρτ^μιν, and adduces Kidd as authority 
 for Άδμητον. On the equally Attic foims, άδμης and άδμητος, see Pors. ad Med. J363. 
 
102 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 /I 
 
 ΗΛ. ό Tray €μοί 
 
 6 TTOLs αν TTpenoL τταρων ivveweiv 
 
 τάδβ δίκα χρόνος. 1255 
 
 μόλις γαρ ίσχον νυν eXevOepov στόμα, 
 
 ΟΡ. ζνμφημι κάγώ. τοιγαρουν σώζου τόδβ. 
 
 ΗΛ. τί δρώσα ; 
 
 ΟΡ. ου μη 'στι καιρός^ μη μακραν βονλον λβγβιν. 
 
 ΗΛ. τις ούν αν άζίαν γβ σου ττβφηνοτος 1260 
 
 μβταβάλοίτ αν ώδβ σιγάν λόγων ; 
 
 €7Γ€ί σβ νυν άφράστως αβλτττως τ ^σβΐδον. 
 
 ΟΡ. τότ βΊδβς, 0 τ€ θεοί μ επώτρυναν μολειν. 
 
 ΗΛ. εφρασας υττερτεραν 1265 
 
 1256. μοΚίς — στόμα. I understand 
 Electra to mean: for scarcely now 
 do I restrain my tongue from 
 giving itself full vent and liberty. 
 Cf. Aj. 1258. θαρσων υβρίζεις κά- 
 ξξ\€νθ€ροστομ€Ϊ5. Propert. I. 9· 
 Dicebam tibi ventures, irrisor, amo- 
 res, nec tibi perpetuo libera verba 
 fore. 
 
 1257. Todf. By rode I under¬ 
 stand the whole of the preceding 
 sentence ; a little pleasantry being to 
 be understood on the part of Orestes, 
 who is contrasting in his own mind 
 the pretended forbearance of Electra 
 with the real outbreak in vv. 1245— 
 50. Wunder and the Scholiast re¬ 
 fer rode to iX^vOepoaTopelvt the for¬ 
 mer rendering, noli igitur committere, 
 ut libertatem vix concessam amittas, 
 Ellendt, adverting to the middle 
 form of the verb, translates: cave 
 obliviscaris, sed facta potius observa. 
 On ξίιμφημι, see Lob. ad Aj. 278. 
 
 1259. καιρός, expedient. Qid. T. 
 1512 . vvv de Tovr (νχ€σ6€ μοι, ον και¬ 
 ρός del ζην. 
 
 Ib. μακραν Xeyeiv. Aj. IO40. μη 
 
 τ€ΐι/€ μακράν. 
 
 1200 - 1 . SCHOL. : τις αν, φησ'ι, 
 σου φαν€ντος, δικαίως eXoiro άντί Χόγων 
 σιωπήν ; 
 
 1200. αν άζίαν. The αν is omitted 
 La. pr. Γ. Palat., but whether 
 omitted or retained, the integrity of 
 the verse seems doubtful. Perhaps 
 we might read άναζίαν aiyav, an un¬ 
 becoming silence. Otherwise άζίαν 
 must be construed adverbially,yM5i/y, 
 worthily. 
 
 1261. μ€ταβάΧοιτ' av aiyav Xόyωv 
 {take silence in exchange for words, 
 prefer silence to speech'), ώδβ {as you 
 recommend). So I think the adverb 
 must be understood. 
 
 1262. άφράστως. Cf. Peile ad 
 Ch. 177. 
 
 1263. ξπώτρυναν, Br. ωτρυναν, libri. 
 The opinion of Brunck and Hermann 
 that one or two verses have here 
 been ^lost, has been refuted by Wun¬ 
 der and Neue, who shew that tri¬ 
 meters are exempt from antistrophic 
 responsion. 
 
 1263. vnepTepav, better. Cf. Peile 
 ad Ch. 96. 
 
 e Dijidorf, in conformity with their opinion, puts the marks of a lacuna after 1263. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 103 
 
 ray Tripos ^tl γάριτος, et ae Oeos iiropLaev 
 άμβτβρα irpos μβλαθρα’ δαιμόνων 
 αυτό τίθημ ίγώ, 
 
 ΟΡ. τα μβΐ' σ οκνω 'χαίρονσ’αρ βΙργαθβΐρ, τα de 
 δβδοίκα λίαρ ηδονρ ρίκωμβρηρ. 
 
 ΗΛ. ίώ χρορω μακρω φιλτάταρ ίττω^ . 
 
 οδορ €παξίώσα9 ωδβ μοί φαρψαι, 
 
 μη τί μ€, τΓολνπορορ ώδ’ Ιδωρ, ^^75 
 
 ΟΡ. τί μη ποιήσω ; ΗΛ. μη μ άποστβρησψ 
 τωρ σώρ προσώπωρ ηδοραρ μ€θ€σΘαί, 
 
 ΟΡ. ή κάρτα κάρ άΧΧοισι Θυμοιμηρ ιδωρ. 
 
 ΗΛ. ^vpaipeis ; 
 
 ΟΡ. τί μηρ ου ; ^ 
 
 I 206 . τα? ττάροί χάριτος. ScHOL. : 
 της σης παρουσίας. 
 
 Ib. Ιπόρισ^ν, has brought, made to 
 come. Dindorf compares (Ed. Col. 
 1458. πως αν, ei rt? Ζντοπος, τον πάντ 
 αριστον devpo Θτ^σεα πόροι ; βπωρσ^ν, 
 libri. (πορσβν. La. pr. επόρισβν, Dind. 
 e conject. Wund. 
 
 1270. τίθημ, I consider: where 
 the middle voice might have been 
 expected, αυτό, SC^ ro πορίσαι σε προς 
 ημίτ€ρα μίλαθρα. Compare gene¬ 
 rally, Ant. 462. κίρ 8 ος αϋτ εγώ 
 λέγω. 
 
 127^· clpyaBciv, Elmsl. ad Med. 
 186. elpyadeiv, Wund. 
 
 1273. χρόνω μακρω, after a long 
 time. Cf. Peile ad Ag. 301. 
 
 1273—4. φιί^τάταν ό 86 ν — φανηναι. 
 Aj. 877. την ίίφ’ η\ίου βοΧων ΚίΧ^υθον 
 — φανπς. Join ωδε (here) with φα- 
 νηναι. Cf. Ell. in voc. 3· 
 
 1274. ζπα^ιώσας. Cf. Phil. 803. 
 
 T 275. ποΧυπονον, Jen. Herm. Dind. 
 Wund. ποΧύστονον, vulg. For the 
 Ti ethicum, as Ellendt terms it, cf. 
 sup. 217. (metre : dim. iamb.) 
 
 1276. τί μη ποιήσω ; quidprohibes, 
 quinfaciam ? Ell. Aj. 77. τί /at) yi- 
 νηται ; Cf. Matth. §. 488, 12. Peile 
 in Choeph. p. 120. Lobeck ad Aj. 
 
 77 · , , „ . 
 
 1277-8. μη μ' αποστίρησης των σων 
 προσώπων η8οναν μ^Θ^σθαι {αποστ€ρ('ΐν 
 τινά τι and μβθβσθαι τινός). Kiihn. 
 §. 856. β. ηΒονάν, Herm. Gaisf. 
 Wund. Dind. Neue. ahovav. Person 
 ad Med. 734. Erf. Scha3f. Elms. 
 
 1277. μζθίσθαι. Cf. Matth. §· 
 d. 
 
 1278. κάρτα θυμουσθαι, to be verg 
 angry. For other instances of κάρτα 
 with a verb, see Trach. ^.12. For 
 instances with verb understood, cf. 
 sup. 312. ι8ών, i. e. if I saw that they 
 wished to deprive me of your pre¬ 
 sence. Instead of καν. Monk (Mus. 
 Crit.) proposes to read τάν, but un¬ 
 necessarily ; see Ellendt in η και, I. 
 747 . 
 
 1279. ^υναιν^ίς, du gonnst mir s: 
 do you then allow it me ? Donn. 
 
 1280. τί μην ου, Seidl. e conj. Ti 
 μη ου, libri. Seidler compares Rhes. 
 
104 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ φίλαι, βκλνορ αν 
 
 €γω ονό αν ηΑτΓίσ ανόαν, 
 
 βσχον οργαν άνανδον, 
 
 ούδβ συν βοα κλύουσα τάλαινα. 
 
 νυν δ’ €χω σ€' ττρούφάνη^ δβ 
 
 φίλτάταν βχων ττρόσοψίν, 
 
 as* €γω ονδ^ αν (V κακοΐς λαθοίμαν. 
 
 ΟΡ. τα μίν Trepiaaevovra των Χόγων αφβ^^ 
 καί μητ€ μητηρ ώs' κακή δίδασκε με 
 μη& ώ$* ττατρωαν κτησιν Κίγισθο^ δόμων 
 αντλεί, τα S όκχει, τα δε διασπείρευ μάτην, 
 γρό^ΡΛ) γαρ αν σοι καιρόν ε^είργοι Aoyos*. 
 α δ' αρμόσει μοι τω τταρόντι νυν χρόνω 
 σημαιν\ οττον φανεντε^ η κεκρυμμενοι 
 γελώντας εχθρούς ττανσομεν τρ νυν όδω. 
 οντω9 όπω9 βητηρ σε μη ^ττιγνώσεται 
 
 1285 
 
 1290 
 
 ί295 
 
 706. δοκ€Ϊί yap; — τί μήνου; (metre 
 in this and preceding verse : bac- 
 chiac.) 
 
 1281, sqq. ω φιλαι — τάλαινα. The 
 exact sense and metre of these 
 verses as they stand in the old edi¬ 
 tions, and as they are here printed 
 in conformity with Wunder, seem 
 irreclaimably lost. Their general 
 meaning as explained by the Scho¬ 
 liast is, that Electra, on hearing the 
 unexpected report respecting her 
 brother’s return, was neither able to 
 keep silence, nor to burst into such 
 loud declarations of joy as the occa¬ 
 sion demanded: her sensations of 
 delight prevented the former, her 
 fears that she might be overheard 
 by iEgisthus and Clytsemnestra put 
 a bar on the latter. Hermann pro¬ 
 poses a lacuna before ^σχον opyav. 
 
 1282. av — ai) 8 av, reversi prater 
 spent fratris vocem. Dind. 
 
 1286. βχων^.τταρ^χων, Cf. SUp. 
 935· infr. 1360. 
 
 1291. άντ\ύ, ‘is running through,* 
 Peile (ad Ch. 730.): rather, is drains 
 ing to the bottom, is exhausting. The 
 remainder of the sentence would 
 have been more explicable in con¬ 
 struction, as τα €γχ€ων (by a la¬ 
 vish profusion of one part), and τα be 
 biaaneipcdv μάτην (a useless squander¬ 
 ing of another). 
 
 1292. χρόνον καιρόν = T 6 . καίριον τον 
 χρόνον. Herm. λόγος, loquacity, e^- 
 eipyoi, exclude, chase away. (Cf. Pass, 
 in voc.) 
 
 1295. τη vvv όδω. Cf. infr. 13 · 4 · 
 1318. In all these passages οδός, 
 like the Hebrew derek, seems to 
 imply mode of proceeding, manner. 
 
 1296. όντως be, gl. σκόπβι, noiei. 
 
 Cf. Matth. §. 623, 2. 
 
 I 296—7. δττως — προσώπω, that 
 your mother may not from the hila- 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 105 
 
 φαίδρώ προσώττω, νων iTreXOovTOLV δομον^' 
 άλλ’ ώί €7Γ ατΎ) ΤΎ) μάτην λβλβγμΕΡΎ) 
 στίναζ' όταν γαρ €ντν)(Τ]σωμ€ν, τοτ€ 
 χαίρβιν τταρίσται καί yeXav eXevOepcos. 130® 
 
 ΗΛ. άλλ’, ω κασίγνηθ\ ωδ* όπως καΙ σο\ φίΧον, 
 καΊ τονμόν βσται τγιδ^' όπεί τας ηδονάς 
 προς σου Χαβουσα κούκ όμας ίκτησάμην. 
 
 KOvS αν σ€ Χυπησασα βουΧοίμην / 3 ραχυ 
 
 αντη μόγ evpeiv κόρδος. ον γαρ αν καΧώς 1305 
 
 νπΎ]ρ 6 Τθίμην τω παρονη δαίμονι, 
 
 άΧΚ οίσθα μ^ τάνθβνδβ, πώς γαρ ον ; κΧνων 
 
 οθοννβκ Κίγισθος^ μίν ον κατα στβγας, 
 
 μητηρ S iv οίκοις' ην σν μη δβίσης ποθ\ ώς 
 
 γ€^Χωτί φαιδρόν τονμόν όψβται καρα. > 3 i° 
 
 μισός τβ γαρ παΧαιον €ντ€τηκ€ μοί, 
 
 κάπβί σ βσβΐδον^ ον ποτ βκΧη^ω χ<^ρώ 
 
 rity of your countenance understand 
 what is passing in your mind. 
 
 1297. νων ζττίΚθόντοιν δόμους, when 
 we two (i. e. in conjunction with Py- 
 lades, cf. infr. 1372. 1398.) have 
 entered the house. 
 
 13OT . όπως και σοί. Cf. Aj. 525. 
 Heind. ad Plat. Phsedon. 23. Matth. 
 §. 620, 2. 
 
 1301— 2. (u5e—Wunder il¬ 
 lustrates the redundancy from his 
 vernacular tongue : so wie du willst, 
 aanz so will auch ich. 
 
 1302- 3. Construction ; eVet τας 
 η 8 ονας, ας €κτησάμην, προς σου ϊΧαβον, 
 &C. WUND. 
 
 1304—3· Order: KOvb’ αν βονΧοίμην 
 €vpelv μ€·γα κέρδος Χνπηαασα σε βραχύ, 
 βουΧοίμην, Wund. Neue. δεξαίμην, 
 Palat. Dind. (in Annot.) Χεξαίμην (γρ. 
 βουΧοίμην), La. 
 
 1306. υπηρετοίμην (ScHOL. : υπουρ- 
 
 'γοίην. υπηρετώ κα\ υπηρετούμαι επ\ τοΰ 
 αίιτοΰ' ών τδ μεν Χεγεται κοινώς, το δε 
 υπηρετούμαι παρα τοΐς Άττικοΐς), Gaisf. 
 Wund. Neue. υπηρετοίην. Elms, (ad 
 Eur. Heracl. 1017.^ CEd. Col. 491.) 
 Herm. Dind. 
 
 1307. οίσθα ydp. ScHOL. ; είκος 
 yap καί εξωθεν ταΰτα πεπυσθαι τον 
 'Ορεστην. 
 
 Ib. τάνθενδε. Cf. infr. 1339· 
 
 Τ. 1267. CEd. C. 47^· 
 
 1 3 *^ 9 · δείσης, ώς. Cf. Matth. 
 
 §. 5 20. Ohs. 1. 
 
 1310. κάρα, countenance. 
 
 131 ϊ· μ"ΐ-(^ος εντετηκε μοι. Trach. 
 462. εΐ κάρτ εντακείη τω φιΧεϊν. Plat. 
 Menex. 245? ^· καθαρόν το μίσος 
 εντετηκε τη πόΧει της αΧΧοτριας φυσεως. 
 Fred. Jacobs compares Aijlian Η. A. 
 I. 32. Julian 130, c. Cf. Griffiths 
 
 ad ^sch. Pr. 535* 
 
 1312. χορά, Schsef. W^und. Dind. 
 
 f Where the learned writer observes, ‘ quanqnam υπηρετοίμην fortasse Gritcum est 
 
 / 
 
106 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 δακρνρροονσα. ττώ? γαρ αν ληζαιμ βγω, 
 ητί 9 μια σβ ΤΎΐδ" οδω θανόντα τβ 
 
 καΐ ζώντ βσβΐδον ; βϊργασαι δέ μ! ασκοπα' 1315 
 
 ωστ, βΐ ττατηρ μοί ζών ΐκοιτο, μηκβτ αν 
 
 τβρας νομίζβίν αύτδ, ττιστβνβιν S οραν. 
 
 οτ ουν τοίαύτην ήραν βζηκβΐ9 οδον, 
 
 αρχ αυτός ως σοί θυμός, ως βγω μόνη 
 
 ούκ αν δυοΐν ημαρτον' η γαρ αν καλώς 1320 
 
 βσωσ βμαυτην, η καλώς άττωλομην, 
 
 ΧΟ. σιγάν βττηνβσ* ως βττ όζόδω κλυω 
 
 τών βνδοθβν χωρουντος. Η Λ. βϊσιτ, ώ ζβνοι, 
 
 άλλως τβ και φβροντβς οΐ αν οΰτβ τις 
 
 δόμων άπώσαιτ οΰτ αν ησθβίη λαβών. 1325 
 
 (in Annot.) χαρας, libri. ον ποτ\ 
 Wund. Dind. Ellendt (II. 415·) 
 prefers ονποτ€, where vehement feel¬ 
 ing is expressed. 
 
 13 I ζ , ασκοπα. Cf. sup. 865. 
 
 1 3 16— I 7.ωστ’. . av, . i/o/xt^fii/.When 
 ώστε is thus followed by an infinitive 
 with av, the same sense according 
 to Ellendt is to be attached as to 
 the optative potential. (I. 10F4.) 
 He instances (Ed. T. 374. ώστε μητ 
 €μ€ μ^τ aWov —/3λαλ^αι ττοτ’ αν (ut 
 posthac nocere non posse videaris). 
 
 1317. T€pas. Antig. 376. δαιμό¬ 
 νων Tepas, an incredible prodigy. 
 
 1319. μόνη. Supply Ύ€νομ€νη. 
 
 1320. δνοϊν, one of two things. 
 Hermann compares Thucyd. I. 33. 
 
 μη δυοΙν φθάσαι άμάρτωσιν, η κακωσαι 
 ημαί, η σφάς αντονς βίβαιώσασθαι. 
 Andoc. de Mvst. 20. iv ω δνοϊν τοϊν 
 μίγιστοιν κακοιν ονκ ην αντω αμαρτ€ΐν 
 ή yap, K.T.e. Wunder adds Trach. 
 100. δισσαϊσιν άττβίροις {one of two 
 continents) κΚιθ^Ις. 
 
 1321-2. Eur. Or. 1149. cVos yap 
 ov σφα\€ντ €5 e^opev kXcos, καλώς βα- 
 vovTcs, η καλώς σ^σωσμίνοι. 
 
 1322. €7Γην€σα, I recommend. (Ed. 
 C. 665. On aorist for present, cf. 
 Monk’s Hippol. 1403. 
 
 1323. των €νδοθ€ν χωρονντος for 
 Τίνος r. €νδ. Matth. §. 323· Obs. i. 
 Bernh. p. 144. Peile ad Ch. 712. 
 
 1323-5. Electra, not knowing 
 who is coming out of the house, ad¬ 
 dresses Pylades and Orestes as two 
 strangers. The ambiguity of her 
 language is calculated to make the 
 person out-coming believe, that she 
 is speaking of the ashes of the de¬ 
 funct Orestes, which the strangers 
 are bringing to the house, and to 
 which it would be indecorous to 
 refuse admission; she herself un¬ 
 derstanding of the living Orestes, 
 who will be admitted by the inmates 
 of the house to their infinite mis¬ 
 chief. 
 
 1325. ovT — λαβών. Electra may 
 be supposed to drop her voice when 
 uttering these words. 
 
 Ib. άπώσαιτ . Ellendt observes, 
 that the active and middle voices of 
 άπωθόω express the same sense. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 107 
 
 ΠΑ. ω ττλβΐστα μωροί καί φρ^ρώι^ τητώμβροι, 
 πότβρα παρ ονδβρ του βίου κηδβσθ* ert, 
 η povs" epeaTLP ovtls vpup βγγβρη^, 
 or ού Trap αντοΪ9^ άλλ’ ip αύτοΐσιρ κακοΪ9 
 τοΐσίΡ μ€γίστοις opt€ 9 ού γιγρώσκβτβ ; 
 άλλ* el σταθμοΐσί τοΐσδβ μη ’κνρονρ ύγω 
 ττάλαι φνλάσσωρ, ήρ αρ νμ\ρ ip δόμοίί 
 τα δρώμ€Ρ νμωρ ττρόσθβρ η τα σώματα' 
 PVP δ' βνλάββίαρ τώρδβ ττρούθβμηρ iγώ. 
 κα\ PVP άπαλλαχθβρτβ τώρ μακρώρ λόγωρ 
 καί της άττΧηστου τησδβ σνρ χ^ί,ρα βοής 
 βΐσω ΤΓαρβλθβθ", ώς το μ€Ρ μ€λλ€ΐρ κακορ 
 ip τοΐς τοωντοις βστ, άττηλλαχθαί δ ακμή, 
 ΟΡ. ττώς OVP βχβί τάρτβνθβρ elacopn μοι ; 
 
 ΠΑ. καλώς, νττάρχβί γάρ σβ μη γρώραί τιρα. 
 
 1330 
 
 1335 
 
 1340 
 
 1326. πλβΐστα μωροί. CEd. C. JIO. 
 ω πΚίΊστ inatvois evXoyovpevov rreSov. 
 
 1327* Trap’ ovbev κη8€σθ€, do you 
 utterly disregard ? Cf. Matth. §.588, 
 c. Blomf. Gl. in Ag. 221. CEd. T. 
 983. Ant. 35.^ 
 
 1328. eyyevrjs. ScHOL. : eyyeye- 
 νημίνος, innate. 
 
 1329. Trap’ avTois αλλ’ ev αυτόΙσιν 
 κακοΊς. ScHOL. : ore ού πΧησίον αυ¬ 
 τών, dKk' ivros αυτών των κινδύνων των 
 μeyίστωv ovtcs. Cf. CEd. Τ. I 169. 
 
 133 I— 2 .e#c 0 poo!/ — φυΧάσσων. With 
 KvpeTv thus joined with a participle, 
 to which κυρα,ν gives the meaning of 
 ‘ quali forte conditione res est’ (Ell. 
 II. 1003), cf. Phil. 30. καταυλισθβ'ις 
 κυρΐ). 1 279. Xeyωv κυρώ. CEd. Τ. 259. 
 €χων. 9 ^ 5 · CEd. C. 1 19· o·^- 
 
 θβΐί, &C. &C. 
 
 1331. σταθμοΐσι, gate-posts, i. e. 
 gates themselves. 
 
 1333. τα δρώμενα, desig 7 is, pur¬ 
 
 poses, attempts. For υμών, cf. Matth. 
 §. 375. Obs. I. τα σώματα, your per¬ 
 sons. 
 
 1334. €υλάβ(ΐαν τώνδ€ ττρουθίμην — 
 ηυλαβηθην τάδβ, taken previous cau¬ 
 tion. On προύθίμην, cf. Elms, ad 
 Med. 884. 
 
 1337. €Ϊσω παρύΧθ^θ' . Cf. CEd. 
 T. 1241. τταρηΧθ' €σω. 
 
 1338. άττηΧΧάχθαι δ' άκμη. I un¬ 
 derstand: hut to get them dispatched, 
 to be rid of them, is the essential 
 point. 
 
 1339. τάντ€ύθ€ν, things yonder, i. e. 
 in the interior of the house : how 
 am I situated with regard to them ? 
 Of the ουν in this and verse 1343. 
 Ellendt observes : ‘ hsec non sunt 
 argumentantium, sed plura deinceps 
 rogando audire cupientium.’· 
 
 1340. ύπάρχβι — Tiva, for it so hap¬ 
 pens that no one has recognised you. 
 With infinitive after ύττάρχ^ι, Wun- 
 
108 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 OP. ηγγβίλας, ώ? ίοίκβρ, ώς τ^θνηκότα. 
 
 ΠΑ. βίς των iv Άίδου μάνθαν ίνθά& ων άνήρ. 
 
 ΟΡ. χαίρουσιν ούν τούτοίσιν ; η rive^ λόγοι ; 
 
 ΠΑ. Τ€λουμ4νων^ €Χποιμ αν' ως de νυν €χ€ΐ, 
 
 καλώς τα κείνων ττάντα, και τα μη καλώς. 1345 
 
 ΗΛ. τις οΰτός εστ\ άδβλφβ ; προς θεών φράσον. 
 
 ΟΡ, ού)μ ζννίης ; ΗΑ. ουδέ γ ες θυμόν φέρω. 
 
 ΟΡ. ούκ οίσ& ΟΓψ μ (δωκαί els χίρα -S wore ; 
 
 ΗΛ. ποιώ ; τι φωνεΐς ; ΟΡ. ού το Φωκεων πεδον 
 
 ύπεζεπεμφθην ση προμηθία χεροΐν. * 1350 
 
 ΗΑ. ή κείνος ούτος, ον ποτ εκ πολλών εγώ 
 
 μόνον προσευρον πιστόν εν πατρός φόνίο ; 
 
 ΟΡ. οδ’ earL μη μ' eXey^e nXeioaw Xoyots. 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ φίλτατον φώς, ώ μόνος σωτηρ δόμων 
 
 * Αγαμε μνονος^ πώς ήλθες ; ή συ κείνος ε\ 1355 
 
 ός τόνδε καμ εσωσας εκ πολλών πόνων ; 
 
 der compares infin. after yei/eV^at in 
 Xen. Cyr. V. 2. 12. εύχονται ττάσι 
 Beois 'γζνίσθαι τνοτε imbel^aL, ως κ. τ. i. 
 134^· — ώί τΐβνηκότα. Cf. 
 
 Matth. §. 355 ί 2 . ^6g, 5· Ell. 
 
 II. 1003. iEsch. Ag. 655. Xeyovatv 
 ημάς ώί ολωλότα?. 
 
 1342. eV^cxS’, hie, i. e. apud eos, 
 qui intus sunt. Ell. I understand 
 by iv6ab' ων, a living person, as op¬ 
 posed to the των €V ''Αώου. Cf. Ai. 
 
 1372. 
 
 1343. rives Xoyot, what is their 
 language, what do they say ? With 
 rj, cf. Trach. 390. Aj. 332. and 
 Ellendt in voc. 
 
 1344. τ€Χονμ^ων, when matters 
 have been completed. Cf. Matth. 
 
 §· 563· 
 
 1345· (e'xec) τά Κ€ίνων πάντα 
 
 {every thing on their part is well or 
 favourable for us) κα\ τά μη καΧώς 
 
 (e'xovra) (even the things which are 
 unwell or unseemly on their part), 
 viz. the unseemly joy of Clytaem- 
 nestra on the supposed death of 
 Orestes, and her consequent se¬ 
 curity. 
 
 1347. ovhe ye — φβρω, I have not 
 even a suspicion. GEd. T. 975. μη 
 νυν er αυτών μηδέν es θυμόν βάΧης. 
 
 ΐ 34 δ. οτω, i. e. εκείνον, οτω. 
 
 ι 349 “ 50 · — xepoiv. By whose 
 
 hands I was secretly sent away 
 (υπεξεπεμφθην) to Phocis through 
 your providential care.. On πεδον 
 υπεξεπεμφθην, cf. Matth. §. 409, a. 
 
 1353. μη — Xoyois, put no further 
 questions to me. 
 
 1354. ω μόνος σωτηρ, i. e. ω συ os 
 εί μόνος σωτηρ. Cf. Neue ad Aj. 861 
 for construction, and Phil. 530 for 
 general sense. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 109 
 
 ώ φίλταταί μίν χβΓρβ?, ηδιστορ δ’ βχωρ 
 ττοδωρ υττηρ^τημα, ττώ? οΰτω ττάλαι 
 ζυνών μ €ληθ€9 ονδ' βφαινβς ; άλλα μ€ 
 λόγοις άττώλλν^, epy βχωΐ' ηδιστ ίμοί. 
 χαΐρ\ ώ πάτβρ* ττατβρα γαρ elaopav δοκώ' 
 χοίίρ' ϊσθί δ’ ώζ μάλιστα σ ανθρώπων €γώ 
 ηχθηρα κάφΙλησ ev ημ^ρα μια, 
 
 ΠΑ. άρκώίν δοκ€Ϊ μοι, τούζ γαρ eV μ^ίτω λόγους 
 πολλαΐ κνκλονσι νύκτ€9 ημάραι τ ϊσαι, 
 αι ταυτά σοι δβίξονσιν, Ίίλβκτρα, σαφή, 
 σφων δ* βννβπω γώ τοΐν παρβστωτοιν οτι 
 νυν καιρός βρδβιν' νυν Κλυταιμνήστρα μόνη 
 νυν οϋτις άνδρών άνδον' €ΐ δ βφβ^βτον^ 
 φροντίζβΘ" ώς τούτοις τ€ καί σοφωτβροις 
 αλλοισι τούτων πλβιοσιν μαχουμ^νοι. 
 
 ΟΡ. ούκ αν μακρών iO ημιν ουδβν αν λόγων, 
 
 Πυλάδη, τόδ’ βίη τοΰργον, άλλ’ όσον τάχος 
 χωρώιν €σω, πατρώα προσκυσανθ βδη 
 
 1360 
 
 1365 
 
 1370 
 
 1357 “^· ^διστοι/— ν7Γηρ€τημα, and 
 having feet, which did me the most 
 agreeable of services, viz. by carrying 
 away Orestes in safety. With νπη- 
 
 ρίτημα πο8ων = υπηρ(τοΰντα9 nodaSj cf. 
 
 Aj. 159. 381. Phil. 868. 
 
 1359. ov8'e(f)aiv€S. ScHOL. : ούδ’ 
 ebeiKVVS, σβαυτόι/ ^η\ovότt. Ell. ovb 
 ^(f)aiv€s ere τον ξυνόντα, oaris 
 
 1360. \6yois — epya. Cf. Sup. 60. 
 CEd. C. 782. On the rarity of such 
 an imperfect as αττώλλυί, see Blomf. 
 ad Pers. v. 658. €χων = 7Γαρ€χων. 
 
 1364. Tovs ev μίσω Xoyovs, the' 
 things to be talked of, the occurrences, 
 which took place between my de¬ 
 parture from Argos and my return to 
 it. For rouy λόγου? followed by se¬ 
 cond accus. ταντα, see Matth. §. 47 ^» 
 
 I. a. Heindorf ad Plat. Phsedr. p. 
 221. Scheef. ad Theocr. p. 219. 
 
 1365. KVKXeiv, intrans. turn in a 
 circle. Pass. Ellendt observes that 
 the pronoun reflexive is to be used. 
 Cf. Tr. 130. 
 
 1367. Ιννίττω ’γώ, Herm. e con- 
 ject. Wund. evve^τω ye, libri, Neue. 
 Dind. Ell. (who considers the ye as 
 in hyperbato, and belonging pro¬ 
 perly to Tolv.) 
 
 1369. e(f)e^eTov (eπeχeιv, tO delay). 
 CEd. C. 856. eTTiaxe^ avrov, ^eive. 
 Phil. 539. eniaxerov, μάθωμev. 
 
 12^2—3. For epyov (ScHOL. ad 
 Aj. Ti. avayKoiov eariv) with gcn. 
 cf. Phil. I 2 : as subsequently followed 
 by infinitive x^peiv, cf. Aj. 11. 
 
 1374. edr;, statues, images. He- 
 
110 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Θ^ών^ οσοιπβρ πρόπυλα ναίουσιν τάδβ. ΐ375 
 
 ΗΛ. αραζ ^Άπολλορ^ ΐλ€ω 9 αυτοίρ κΧν€, 
 
 ίμου τ€ προ 9 τούτοίσιρ^ η σβ πολλά δη 
 άφ’ ώρ €χοίμί λιπαρβΐ προϋστηρ χ^ρί· 
 
 PVP δ\ ώ Avk€l ^Άπολλορ, βζ οΙωρ €χω 
 
 αΙτώ, προπίτρω, λίσσομαι, yepov πρόφρωρ 1380 
 
 ημΊρ αρωγόν τώρδβ τώρ βονλβνμάτωρ, 
 
 καΐ δβΐζορ άρθρωποίσί, τάπιτίμια 
 
 της δνσσβββίας οΙα δωρουρταί θβοί, 
 
 ΧΟ. ϊδ€θ\ όπη προρβμβταί (ττροφ. 
 
 το δυσβριστορ αίμα φνσώρ ^Άρης. 1385 
 
 sych. : edos, αγαλ/χα. Cf. CEd. Τ. 
 886. ..ΈβοΙι. Pers. 4 *^ 4 * τ^ροσκυσανθ\ 
 having paid your reverence to. Stricter 
 views of the primary and secondary 
 meanings of this verb will be sub¬ 
 mitted to the reader at Phil. 533. 
 657. 776. 1408. 
 
 1375. πρόπυΧον, i. q. προπνλαιον, 
 a fore-court, most commonly used in 
 plural number. Herodot. II. 91. 
 
 1376. While Electra puts up au¬ 
 dible prayer, Pylades and Orestes 
 are to be supposed praying tacitly. 
 
 1377—8. η σβ προνστην. {προιστά- 
 ναι, assistere precans et donans. Ell. 
 vor einen od. zu ihm hinan treten. 
 Pass.) The accusative, says Mat- 
 thise (§. 409, 5. Ohs. 2), seems to 
 be used more, because in προνστην 
 λιτΓ. χ€ρ. the idea of ίκίτενσά σε θυ- 
 ονσα, αφ’ ων €χοίμι, is contained, than 
 that προστήναι (κατά) τινα was put for 
 προστηναί twos. Cf. Wunder ad 
 CEd. C. 1166. πολλά, frequently. 
 
 1378. αφ’ ών βχοιμι, from the things 
 which I possessed. CEd. T. 314. αφ’ 
 ων €χοι re καΐ δύναιτο. 
 
 Ib. λιπαρβϊ χ^ρ'ί, with bountiful 
 hand. 
 
 *379· ^*2:. her mere 
 
 words. 
 
 1380. προπιτι/ω, Elms, (ad Heracl. 
 V. 618.) Dind. Ell. (whom see), προ- 
 πιτνώ, Wund. 
 
 1382. τάπιτίμια οϊα, what are the 
 rewards which, &c. For the word 
 επιτίμια, cf. Eur. Hec. 1069. Herod. 
 IV. 80. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 828. 
 Sept. c. Th. 1023. 
 
 1383. Pylades, Orestes, and Elec¬ 
 tra enter the palace. 
 
 1384. ιδε^’. For similar instances 
 of the chorus addressing each other, 
 see Trach. 210. 821, &c. 
 
 Ib. προνεμίται, advances, goes for^ 
 ward; the image derived from cattle, 
 which advance while feeding. F. Ja- 
 coBS. (metre : dim. cret.) 
 
 1385. αίμα φνσών, breathing slaugh¬ 
 ter, i. e. intent on murder. For Ares 
 as the author of any species of 
 violent death, cf. Neue ad Aj. 706. 
 For (άμα, slaughter or murder, cf. 
 CEd. T. ΐοι. 996. CEd. C. 408. 
 1672, and see Schleusn. in voc. 
 
 Ib. ΒυσΙριστον. ScHOL. : to Si 
 epw 'γίγνόμ€νον κακόν. WuND. most 
 hostile, or not to he avoided. Doed. 
 and Pass, not to be envied. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 Ill 
 
 βφάσιν apTL δωμάτων νπ 6 στ€γοι 
 μβτάδρομοί κακών ττανουργημάτων 
 αφυκτοί Kvv€ 9 , 
 ωστ ού μακραν er’ άμμβνβΐ 
 
 τουμον φρβνών oveipov αΙωρούμβνον. 139® 
 
 τταράγβταί γαρ ίν^ρων άντ. 
 
 ^οΧιότΓους αρωγοί €Ϊσω στβγα^, 
 άρχραόπλοντα ττατρο^ eh βδώλια, 
 νβακόνητορ αίμα χρφοΐν βχων' 
 
 6 Μα/α? de τταΓ? 
 
 13Β6. Βωμάτων vnoareyoi. Cf. 
 
 Matth. §. 339 · 
 
 1387. μ^τάΒρομοι - πανονργημάτων. 
 
 For construct, cf. Matth. §. 344. 
 Bernh. p. 173· τΐο,νονρ-γημάτων, per¬ 
 haps abstract for concrete, i. e. JEi- 
 gisth. and Clytsemn. (metre in this 
 and following verse, dochrniac.) 
 
 1388. αφυκτοι κύν € ς . The Scho¬ 
 liast leaves it open, whether the 
 Furies, or Pylades and Orestes are 
 meant. Brunck, Wund., Dind., Ell. 
 adopt the first opinion (cf. Eur. 
 Electr. 1349. Blomf. Gl. Ch. 91 1. 
 1041. Muller’s Eumen. p. 186) ; 
 Hermann prefers the latter. 
 
 1390. τονμον φρξρωρ opeipop (my 
 mind's dream). Cf. sup. 472-303. 
 Matth. §. 466. I. αΙωρονμ€Ρθρ, sus¬ 
 pended, in suspense, appepei, Wund. 
 e conject. appepei, libri. 
 
 1391—2. TTapdyerai (Χσω. Herod. 
 V. 20. naprjye εσω. On the omission 
 of article in such forms as εί'σω στί- 
 yης, see Ell. II. 246. 
 
 Ib. €Ρ€ρωρ aponyos. Orestes, as 
 the avenger of the defunct Aga¬ 
 memnon, is meant, δολωπου?, entering 
 stealthily. 
 
 1393. Ιδώλια, seat, abode (cf. Aj. 
 1277. Soph. Fr. 152 (D). Blomf. 
 
 1395 
 
 Gl. in Sept. c. Th. 431)· άρχαιό- 
 ττλουτα, aboriginally wealthy (cf. Peile 
 ad Ag. 1005). 
 
 1394. Ρ€ακόρητορ αίμα. ScHOL. : 
 TO ξίφος TO ηκορημίρορ els αίμα και 
 φορορ. And in this sense of a sword, 
 the word alpa is understood by 
 Wunder and Passow. Ellendt and 
 Dindorf adopt Hermann’s interpre¬ 
 tation, ‘ having his hands sprinkled 
 with blood recently shed.’ But how 
 could that be said of Orestes, who 
 so far from having yet perpetrated 
 his mother’s assassination, has only 
 just entered the palace for the pur¬ 
 pose of shedding her blood ? 
 
 Ib. ρ^ακορητορ (^άκορη), newly 
 sharpened. Pass. Hermann and 
 Dind. read ρίοκόρητορ, and consider 
 as equivalent to ρζόφορορ (newly 
 shed); coll. Eur. El. 1172. αλλ’ olbe 
 
 μητρος Ρ€θφόροις ep αίμασιρ | πβφνρμί- 
 poi βαίροναπρ €ξ ο’ίκωρ ττοδα. ρ^ακορητορ, 
 
 libri, Wund. Neue, (who collects 
 from Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 701, that 
 the second syllable is doubtful). 
 
 1393—7. ° Mata?— reppa. ScHOL. : 
 6 ^Έρμης αύτορ ciyei προς αυτό το Teppa, 
 κατακρνφ·ας σκότω top νπ* αυτόν yepo- 
 pepop doXop. On the word boXop, as 
 applied to Hermes, cf. Phil. 133. 
 
112 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 Έρμψ σφ' αγβί, δόλον σκότω . 
 
 κρνφας, ττρος· αυτό τβρμα, κονκ er άμμβνβί. 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ φίλταταί γυναΐκβ^^ avbpes ανήκα (ττροψ, 
 
 reXovcri rovpyov' άλλα οΊγα ττροσμβνβ, 
 
 ΧΟ. 7 rm δη ; τΐ νυν πράσσουσιν ; ΗΛ. η μβν eV τάφον 1400 
 λόβητα κοσμεΐ, τω δ’ ΙφΙστατον ττε'λα?. 
 
 ΧΟ. συ S €κτ 09 ηξα 9 ττρό^ τί; ΗΛ. φρουρησουσ, οττω? 
 
 Αϊγισθος^ ημάς μη λάθη μόλων βσω. 
 
 ΚΛ. αίαϊ. Ιω στάγαι 
 
 φίλων βρημοί, των δ’ άπολλύντων ττλβάί, H^S 
 
 ΗΛ. βοα τις βνδον. ούκ άκούβτ, ώ φίλαι ; 
 
 ΧΟ. ηκουσ' άνηκουστα δύστανος, ωστβ φρΐζαί. 
 
 ΚΛ. οϊμοί τάλαιν' Α^Ιγίσθβ^ ττου ττοτ ων κνρβΐς ; 
 
 ΗΛ. Ιδου μάΧ αυ θρο€Ϊ τις, ΚΛ. ω τβκνον τβκνον, 1410 
 οϊκτ€ΐρ€ την τβκουσαν. Η Λ. αλλ ουκ εκ σεθεν 
 ωκτείρεθ’’ ουτος οϋθ' ό γεννήσας πατήρ. 
 
 Eur. Med. 754 · 
 
 708. Klausen’s Theol. ρ.104· 
 
 139 ^· 'Ep/i^s σφ’ ayei, Junt. 1 . 
 libr. Tricl. Herra. Br. Wund. Bind. 
 enayei, Aid. La. sec. i^ayei vel εισ¬ 
 άγει, La. pr. ετΓΐ σφ’ άγει, Neue e 
 conj. 
 
 1398. Electra returns to the 
 stage. 
 
 1400. τάφον. The Scholiast un¬ 
 derstands the funeral-feast for O- 
 restes supposed to be dead. Ellendt 
 interprets sepulture. 
 
 1401. ΧΙβητα. The sense of this 
 word must be determined by that 
 which is assigned to the word τάφον. 
 The commentators generally refer it 
 to the urn, supposed to contain the 
 ashes of Orestes. Cf. Blomf. Gl. in 
 Ch. 674. (Peile 668.) κοσρεΐ, is pre¬ 
 paring. 
 
 1405. TrXeai, libri, Bind. Neue, 
 
 Ell. (whom see), πλεα. Elms, (ad 
 Med. 259). Herm. Wun^. On the 
 omission of των μίν in the verse, see 
 Hart. 1 . 203. 
 
 1407. ανήκουστα. Triclin. : ήτοι 
 a ού bvvuTai tis ακόυαν, πάσι yap ai 
 των φονβυομίνων βοα\, καν Εχθροί ωσι, 
 deos και ϋποστυΧήν άκουόμΐναι φίρουσιν. 
 ScHOL. : οΙκ€Ϊον το 8ιανόημα yvvaiKOiV. 
 το δε άνηκουστα ουχ ως καταγιι/ώσκουσαι 
 τοίι 'θρ€στου φασ'ιν, άΧλά παν το πpάyμa 
 eKTpenopevai. (Metre : dip. iamb, 
 cret. troch.) 
 
 1409. που ποτ ων Kvpels : SO also 
 Phil. 805. 
 
 1410. ιδού μάΧ αν. Cf. infr. I416. 
 (Ed. Col. 1478. Phil. 793. 
 
 1411—12. ουκ — ούτε. Cf. Ell. IL 
 444. ού^’, libri. ούδ’. Bind. Cf. Aj. 
 428. With 0 yevvrjaas πατήρ, cf. 
 V. 261. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 113 
 
 ΧΟ. ώ πόλις, ώ yevea τάλαινα, νυν σβ 
 μοίρα καθαμβρία φθίι^Εΐ φθίνει. 
 
 ΚΑ. ωμοί πεπληγμαι. HA. παΐσον, εΐ σθενεις, διπλήν. 1415 
 ΚΛ. ωμοί μαΚ ανθις. ΗΛ. εΐ γαρ ΑΙγίσθω γ ομοΰ. 
 
 ΧΟ. τελονσ apal· ζώσιν οι γας υπαι κείμενοι. 
 
 παλίρρυτον γαρ αίμ! υπεζαιρουσι των κτανόντων 1420 
 οι πάλαι θανόντες, 
 
 και μην πάρεισιν οϊδε' φοινία δε χεφ άντ. 
 
 1413· ® γ^νεά τάΚαινα. Cf. Matth. 
 §. 277. b* (Metre in this and follow¬ 
 ing verse, logaoedic.) 
 
 1413—14. vvv — φθίν€ΐ. ScHOL. : 
 Kara ταντην σε την ημέραν ή μοίρα els 
 φθοράν κα\ ελάττωσιν ayei τον yevovs. 
 καθαμερία, Erf. e Triclin. καθημερία, 
 libri. 
 
 1414* φβ^νει, gl. φθείρει. Her¬ 
 mann, doubting the transitive power 
 of this word, (is Sophocles so nice 
 about giving transitive to intransi¬ 
 tive forms ?) reads φθίνειν, and is 
 followed by Wunder. 
 
 1415. ωμοί. Elmsley (in Mus. 
 Crit. I. 471.) thinks that the Ho¬ 
 meric ωμοί ought always in the tra¬ 
 gedians to be changed to the Attic 
 
 οιμοι. 
 
 Ib. τταΐσον dinXrjv SC. 7 Γληyηv. An- 
 tig. 1309· ri μ ούκ άνταίαν επαισεν 
 ns άμφιθηκτω ζίφει ; cf. Griffiths ad 
 Sept. c. Th. 894. Blomf. ad Ag. 
 
 1314· 
 
 1416. εΐ yap, 0 that, (without γάρ, 
 CEd. C. 644. 61 μοι θεμιs y ην.) 
 
 Ib. λ.lyίσθω yε, Herm. Wund. Ell. 
 (who cites CEd. T. 80. εΐ yap εν τνχη 
 ye τω σωτηρι βαίη.) Klyίσθω θ\ libri, 
 Gaisf. Dind. Neue, Matth. (§. 626.) 
 Hart. (I. 112.) Peile. (Append, ad 
 
 Ag. p. e 379. Ch. p. 82.) 
 
 1417. τελονσ’. intrans. Schneider 
 and Neue compare Trach. 82 5.AEsch. 
 ’Sept. C. Th. 659. τοντω τάχ εΐσόμε- 
 σθα τάπίσημ οττη τεΚεΙ. Ch. 1021 ,τουτ 
 αρ olb' οπη τελεί. For the sentiment, 
 see ΚΙ. Theol. p. 62. (Metre: dip. 
 iamb, cret.) 
 
 Ib. ima\ κείμενοι, Br. υποκείμενοι, 
 libri. For the sentiment, cf. ^sch. 
 Eum. 97. Schiller, in his ‘Maria 
 Steuart,’ speaks the language of an¬ 
 tiquity : ‘ Blut kann versohnen, was 
 das Blut verbrach.’ 
 
 1419. παΧίρρντον {sic ut vicissim 
 flmt. Wund.), Bothe e conject. 
 Wund. Dind. (in Annot.) Bothe il¬ 
 lustrates by Eur. Here. f. 739. El. 
 
 ^^ 55 · 
 
 Ib. νπεξαιρονσι (ea? improviso exi- 
 munt. Neue.) των κτανόντων. For 
 the fact Neue compares AEsch. Ch. 
 886. τον ζωντα καίνειν tovs τεθvηκότas 
 Xεyω. 
 
 1420. Metre: tetram. iamb. cat. 
 1422. και μην. For examples of 
 
 these particles in introducing a new 
 person or persons on the stage, cf. 
 CEd. C. 549.1249. Antig. 526.1180. 
 1257. &C. with πάρεισιν οιδε, cf. Aj. 
 1168. οιδε πΧησιοι πάρεισιν. 
 
 e Where the learned editor translates : would that it were to JEgisihus concurrently 
 with you ! or, would it were “ (you) and iFgisthus” together. ^ And^much to the same 
 effect Hartung: ‘ εΐ yhp ΑΪγίσθψ θ' 0μου, i. e. σοί τ' Aιylσθφ θ υμοΰ. 
 
114 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 στάζβί θνηλψ ''Αρ€ος, ον^ €χω λβγβίί/, 
 
 ΗΛ. Όρβστα, ττώί κνρβΐ ^ ; ΟΡ. rau δομοισι μεν 
 
 καλώς, 'Απόλλων el καλώς βθόσπισβν. 1425 
 
 ΗΛ. τβθνηκβν η τάλαινα ; ΟΡ. μηκότ βκφοβον, 
 μητρώον ώς σβ λημ άτιμασβι ποτβ. 
 
 ΧΟ. παύσασθβ, λβύσσω γαρ Αϊγισθον €κ προδήλου. 
 
 ΗΛ. ώ παΐδβς, ονκ αψορρον ; ΟΡ. elaopdre που 143° 
 τον ανδρ\ ΗΛ. ίφ> ημΐν οντος βκ προαστίου 
 χωρβΐ γβγηθώς * * * * 
 
 ΧΟ. βάτ€ κατ άντίθύρων όσον τάχιστα. 
 
 1425· θνή\ηί"*Αρ€ 09 , with the blood 
 of him that has been offered to Ares, 
 i. e. the murdered man. Pass. Cf. 
 Dissen ad Find. Pyth. XI. 35. 
 
 Ib. ούδ’ \eyeiv. Speech fails 
 me : I have not what to say on such 
 a business. 
 
 1424. πως Kvpet, libri. To com¬ 
 plete the metre various emendations 
 have been offered, πώς Kvpelre, Elms. 
 Reis. (coll. Phil. 440. αναξίου pev φω¬ 
 τός ίξίρησομαι . . . τί νυν Kvpcl.) πώς 
 
 Kvpci di, Herm. Matth. Ell. (whom 
 see, I. 397·) τά y 8όμοισι, Br. 
 Schaef. Compare generally .^sch. 
 Ch. 871. πώς eX6t; πώς κ^κρανται δό- 
 μοις ; 
 
 1427· ωί. Matth. §. 520. Obs. 
 
 sup. 1309. μητρώον Χημα. Cf. Wund. 
 ad Aj. 49. Erfurdt here supposes 
 a lacuna of three verses. It has 
 already been observed that no metri¬ 
 cal necessity exists for such a sup¬ 
 position. Cf. sup. 1263. 
 
 1428. €Κ προδήλου=προδηΧώς. Ell. 
 Cf. Peile ad Ag. p. 230. Seidler de 
 vers, dochm. p. 248. supposes a verse 
 to be here wanting. 
 
 1430. ουκ αφορρον; Aj. 369. ου< 
 αψορρον iKvepct πόδα ; 
 
 1431-2. ουτος χωρεΐ, is coming 
 here. Cf. sup. 6 . infr. 1474· 
 
 1431. προάστιον — προάσταον, (cf. 
 Monk ad Alcest. 852.) place or coun¬ 
 try before a town, Herodot. I. 78. 
 III. 142. VIII. 129. Pass, suburbs. 
 Ell. 
 
 1433. βατ€ κατ άντιθυρων. By the 
 word άντιθυρων is I think to be un¬ 
 derstood the court or street -άοοτ, at 
 which the parties are conversing; so 
 called because opposite to the Θυρα, 
 or AoMse-door. Through this door 
 (Arist. Av. 1208. κατά ποιας πύλας 
 (ΙσηΧθ€ς €ς το τείχος ;) Orestes and 
 Pylades are requested by the Chorus 
 to go, first, that they may not be 
 seen in converse with Electra, and 
 secondly, that they may take a posi¬ 
 tion suitable to their future purposes; 
 viz. by the side of the corpse, which, 
 according to Grecian custom, would 
 be laid out at the θύρα or house- 
 door. If the subsequent intercourse 
 between ji^gisthus and Orestes takes 
 place within the house, (v. 1451.) by 
 means of the encyclema, which, how¬ 
 ever, the context does not seem to 
 imply, (cf. infr. 1465.) then by the 
 word άντιθυρων might be understood 
 both the court-door and house-door, 
 through both which the two com¬ 
 panions would have to pass to gain 
 the interior. But it is time to refe^ 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 115 
 
 OR 
 
 OR 
 
 XO. 
 
 τα Trp\v βδ θ€μ€νοί, rad" ώ? ττάλιν, 
 
 OapaeC τ€λονμ€ν^ y voeh. ΗΛ. ίππγβ νυν. 
 και δη βββηκα, Η Λ. τάνθάδ* αν μβλοίτ €μοί 
 
 δί ώτο? αν ττανρά y ηττίως ivveiruv 
 ττρος ανδρα τόνδβ συμφβροι, λαθραΐον ώs‘ ορονση 
 ττροΫ δίκας αγώνα. 
 
 ΑΙΓΙΣΘΟΣ. 
 
 TL 9 οίδβν νμών^ ττοΰ ττο& οΐ Φωκη9 ζ^νοι^ 
 ovs" φασ *Ορ€στην ημίν άγγβΐλαί βίον 
 XeXonroff ΙττΊΓίκοίσιν βν ναναγίοις ; 
 σ€ TOty σβ κρίνω, ναΐ σ€, την iv τω πάρο9 
 
 *435 
 
 1440 
 
 1445 
 
 to more learned authorities on the 
 subject. By άνηθνρων Hermann un¬ 
 derstands the inner part of the house 
 opposite the gate. The prep, κατα 
 EUendt renders versus, coll. Trach. 
 678; and after quoting the Scho¬ 
 lium (πορ€ύθηΤ€ κατα των οπισθΐν της 
 θυρας μ€ρων) he adds ; * quod si quis 
 consistite e regione januee interpreta- 
 bitur, non intercedam, sed motus 
 illuc facti procul dubio inest adsigni- 
 ficatio.’ 
 
 1434. vvv (/ 3 are) τα πρ\ν ev Bepevoi, 
 τάδ’ ως πάΧιν (βυ θησθ(). Kuhn. §. 
 8^2, g. Bernh. p. 4^6. Others, as 
 Brunck and Porson, place the mark 
 of an interrupted speech after πάλιν. 
 
 t ib. τά nfHv (i. e. in regard to Cly- 
 semnestra) ev dipevoi. With ev θε- 
 μevoι cf. CEd. T. 633. Thucyd. I. 25. 
 Bl. ad Pers. v. 234. gl. in Ag. 31. 
 Ell. II. 813. On πάλιν as marking 
 transition from one to the other, see 
 Ell. 11 . 48. 
 
 * 435 · V voeU. Erf. Herm. Dind. * 
 Ell. and others assign these words 
 
 to Electra. As brevity of speech 
 best befits the latter, they seem bet¬ 
 ter given to Orestes, as Wunder 
 gives them. 
 
 1436. κα\ drj βεβηκα, I am gone 
 without the least delay. 
 
 Ib. TavOabe, matters here, the things 
 to he done here. Cf. Tavrev^ev, Phil. 
 834. On μελοιτο, see sup. 74. 
 
 1439. ως ηπίως. gl. λίαν S πράως. 
 Cf. Elmsl. in (Ed. Col. 14. The cau¬ 
 tion is given to Electra, whose usual 
 mode of addressing her parents was 
 haughty and vehement. With ώ? 
 ηπίως cf. ως ^τητνμως 145 2. and Pass, 
 in voc. ως. II. 3. a. 
 
 [440-1. λαθραΐον ως — αγώνα. 
 SCHOL.: όπως αν άπaτηθe\ς c/xTreV?; eh 
 τον αγώνα της Βίκης τον λάθρα κατ' αν- 
 τον γevόμevov. 
 
 144*· αγώνα, infr. 149 *~2. 
 
 λόγων άγων. Aj. II63. €ριΒος αγών. 
 1239· 'Aχιλλeίωv οπλών αγώνας. 
 
 1444* f*' ναναγ. cf. sup. 73°· 
 
 1445· κρίνω, ναι σβ, την 
 
 &C. Compare generally Antig. 44 *· 
 
 f He observes: ^ non dicit confice rem, ut optas, quae Erfurdtii ratio est, neque illuc, 
 quo cogitae, propera, ut Hermannus interpretatur, sed ilia via progredere, i. e. confice 
 illam, quam instituisti, viam.’ , 
 
 e Ellendt (II. 999) : ‘ male Schol. : λίαν πράωε: est autem, οϋτως ware ηπίως eφη- 
 pevov SoKeTv, sic, ut lent animo loquenti convenire videatur.' 
 
116 
 
 ^ΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤ2 
 
 Xpovcp 6pa(THCLV' coy β(ΐ\ΐ(ττ(ΐ (tol μβΧβίρ 
 
 οΊμαί, μάλιστα S άν κατειδυΐαν φρασαι. 
 
 Η Λ. βζοίδα. Tvm γάρ ονχί; συμφοράς γάρ άν 
 ίζωθβν eiy]V των εμών της φίλτατης. 
 
 ΑΙ. ΤΓον δητ άν eiev οΐ ^evoL ; διδασκβ μ€. 145° 
 
 ΗΛ. βνδον. φίλης γάρ irpo^evov κατηννσαν, 
 
 ΑΙ. η καί θανόντ ήγγειλαν ως ετητνμως ; 
 
 Aj. 1228. For roi, see Matth. §.627. 
 for κρίνω, I ask, cf. Aj. 5^6. for con¬ 
 tempt expressed in the article την, 
 cf. Monk’s Alcest. 714. vaWe.Reiske 
 e conject. κα\ σβ, libri. 
 
 1447. Repeat οίμαι at the end of 
 the sentence. For άν φράσαι, cf. Ell. 
 I. 121, καηώνΐαν, slightly emphatic. 
 
 1448—9. συμφοράς — της φΐΚτάτης. 
 I understand as follows: συμφορά 
 in Greek signifies an occurrence, an 
 event, good or bad; but more com¬ 
 monly taken in the latter sense, and 
 hence translated calamity. Electra 
 takes advantage of this double sense 
 to express herself ambiguously—‘ for 
 did I not know what you mention— 
 1 should be a stranger to a calamity 
 —of all my b calamities—(here she 
 drops her voice, so as not to be heard 
 by ^ ^gisthus) the most agreeable to 
 me. 
 
 1449. ζξωθζν €ΐναι = €ξω elvai. Cf. 
 Pass, in vocc. €ξω 6 €ν and e|w. 
 
 14^1. κατηνυσαν. This word seems 
 
 to have been chosen, as capable of 
 a double meaning; have made their 
 way to, and, Aave made away with; 
 have dispatched them to, and, have 
 dispatched; (cf. Pass, in voc.) AEgis- 
 thas of course understanding in the 
 former, Electra in the latter sense. 
 And so Hermann more learnedly 
 explains the text; the ambiguity 
 according to him lying in the pre¬ 
 position, which may signify to or 
 against: * iEgisthum enim haec ita 
 intelligere vult: confecerunt (iter) ad 
 amicam hospitam; ipsa hoc dicit: 
 confecerunt (rem) contra amicam ho¬ 
 spitam.' For other expositions of 
 the sense or construction, see Dind. 
 (who illustrates the genitive from 
 CEd. C.^1755. (Ed.T. 1435. 1487·) 
 Butler (Peile’s Ag. p. 226.) Wund. 
 ad CEd. C. 1546. Neue ad Aj. 607. 
 
 1432. θανόντ' ήγγειλαν. Matth. §. 
 555· ^· €τητύμως, i. e. ούτως, 
 
 ωστ€ ίτητυμως άγγβΧθ^ντα boKeiv. Ell. 
 
 h The very eminent scholar Avho has cleared up so many difficulties in Soph^les, 
 explains the present as follows: ‘ Ambiguitas, quam in Electrse dicto inesse non dubiura 
 est, duplex est, una in nomine συμφορά, altera in eo, quod quum dicere deberet rwi' έμων 
 rov φιλτάτου, adjectivum illud. ad. συμφοράν retulit, ut si Latine dicas: qnidni. sorits^ 
 enim expers essem meorum conjunctissimce. Id igitur dum iEgistho de morte carissimi 
 fratris dictum videri vult, ipsa sortem in mente habet sibi cupide expetitam hatns et 
 vivi et reducis et vindicis scelerum.’ Herm. For the exposition of Wunder and EUendt 
 (I. 584.), see the learned writers respectively. ^ i · · 
 
 i Mr. Peile somewhere denies that speaking aside was used by the ancients; but it is 
 only necessary to advert to the address made by Clytsemnestra to Apollo (sup. 637 sq.) 
 to feel assured that a dramatic ai*tifice known to all other theatres, was not unknown to 
 the Greek theatre. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 117 
 
 ΗΛ . ονκ' άλλα Kanedei^ap, ον λόγω μόνον, 
 
 ΑΙ. ττάρ^στ άρ ημΐν ωστ€ κάμφανη μαθβϊν. 
 
 ΗΛ. TvapeaTL δητα, και μάΚ άζηλο^ θέα, ΐ455 
 
 ΑΙ. η ΤΓολλά χαίρβίν μ ehra^^ ούκ βίωθότω^. 
 
 ΗχΑ. χαίροί9 άν^ βί σοί γαρτά τυγγαν^ι ταδβ. 
 
 ΑΙ. σιγάν άνωγα, κάναδβικννναι ττνλα^ 
 
 ττάσιν Μ.νκηναίοισίν Άργβίοιί θ’ οράν, 
 ώ?, et TL 9 αυτών βλττίσιν Κ€ναι^ τταρο^ 
 έζίιρβτ άν8ρο9 τουδβ, νυν ορών νβκρον^ 
 στόμια δέχηται τάμά^ μηδβ ττροί βίαν, 
 έμοϋ κολαστου προστυχών, φύσρ φρένας, 
 
 ΗΛ. και δη τβλέίται τάπ βμοΰ, τώ γάρ χρόνω 
 
 νουν έσχον, ώστε συμφβρβιν tois κρβισσοσιν, ^4^5 
 ΑΙ. ώ Ζεΰ, δέδορκα φάσμ, άνβυ φθόνον μεν, -eu ου 
 
 1453 * (ή'γγαΧαν). eVeSet^av 
 
 (βργω), ον \όγω μόνον. Cf. Slip. 59 ~ 
 
 6θ. 
 
 1454 · ώστε. For examples of ωστ€ 
 actually or apparently redundant, cf. 
 Ell. in voc. Elms. CEd. C. 135°· 
 Matth. §.531. Obs. 2. 
 
 1455. αζηλος. Cf. Blomf. Gl. in 
 Prom. 146. 
 
 1456. xalpeLV dnelv. Matth. §.416. 
 β. Obs. 2. χαίρ€ΐν μ etnas, Aid. Wund. 
 Dind. (in Annot.) xaipetv elnas, 
 Herm. 
 
 1457. χαρτά. Tr. 228. iEsch. Pr. 
 164. €πιχάρτον. On rabe, where ToSe 
 might have been used, see Ell. II.- 
 276. τνγχάνοι, Dind. (in Annot.) 
 
 1458 . avabeiKvvvai, to thvow open. 
 Arist. Nub. 304. tva μνστοΒόκος bopos 
 ev reXerals ayiais avabeUvvTai. 
 
 1460-1 . eXntaiv avbpos rovbe, hopes 
 derived from this man. Cf. sup. 
 
 834· 
 
 1462. πρόί/ 3 /αι/. ScHOL.: βιαίως κα\ 
 pera ανάγκης. On στόμια, bit, cf. Blomf. 
 
 Gl. in Ag. 130. Griff, ad^sch. Prom. 
 287. 
 
 1463. φνση φρενας. ScHOL. : τοντ- 
 εστι σωφροσύνην. And SO Wunder 
 understands, coll. CEd. C. 804. El- 
 lendt considers the two passages, 
 though alike in words, as widely dif¬ 
 ferent in sense, and renders in the 
 present instance, ne superbum pariat 
 animum. For κο\αστου προστυχών, 
 
 see Bernh. p. 95. 
 
 1464. τατΓ* ipov, what I have to do. 
 Matth. §. 572. CEd. C. 1628. τώχρο- 
 νω, cf. sup. 1013. Lob. ad Aj. 306. 
 
 1465. vox)v — κρείσσοσιν. Wunder, 
 comparing sup. 1013. {αντη be νοΰν 
 σχες αλλά τω χρονω ποτέ tois κρα- 
 τοΰσιν είκαθεΐν,') says, in reference to 
 the addition of ώστε, that the former 
 phrase signifies, disce obedire poten· 
 tioribus, the present, iawiwm didici, 
 ut me applicem potentioribus. With 
 rots κρείσσοσιν, cf. Antig. 63. 
 
 Ib. σνμφερειν, i.e. ομοφρονειν. DiND. 
 Elms, ad Med. 13· who understands 
 
118 
 
 ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 πβπτωκό^' el δ’ eweari ον λέγω. 
 
 γαΧατβ παν κάλνμμ άπ οφθαλμών, οπω^ 
 το συγγβνε^ tol κάπ' βμοϋ θρήνων τυχτ). 
 
 ΟΡ. avTos συ βάσταζ*' ούκ βμον τόδ\ άλλα σον, 1470 
 το τανθ οράν τ€ και προσηγορβΐν φίλω 9 . 
 
 ΑΙ. άλλ’ ed παραινβΐ^, κάπίπβίσομαί' σύ Se, 
 
 eX που κατ οίκον μοί Ι^λνταιμνηστρα, κάλβι. 
 
 ΟΡ. αντη πβλας σου. μηκβτ αλλοσβ σκόπα. 
 
 ΑΙ. οΧμοί, τί λβνσσω ; ΟΡ. τίνα φοββΐ; τίν άγνο€Ϊ9 ; 1475 
 . ΑΙ. τίνων ποτ άντρων iv peaoLS άρκυστάτοις 
 
 ΤΓβπτωχ ο τλημων ; ΟΡ. ού γάρ αίσθάνβί πάλαι, 
 ζώντας θανουσιν οννβκ’ άνταυ^ας ίσα ; 
 
 ΑΙ. οΧμοι, ζυνηκα Toihros. ού γάρ βσθ* οπω 9 
 
 οδ’ ούκ ^Ορ 4 στης eaff 6 προσφωνών βμ€, 1480 
 
 συμφέρον for σνμφερεσθαι. (The 
 gates of the fore-court are here 
 thrown open, and the supposed body 
 of Orestes is seen, covered with a 
 pall.) 
 
 1466. ap€v φθόνον, apart from 
 odium. (Cf. Antig. 4. ατης arep.) 
 JEgisthus speaks in reference to the 
 ancient belief, that any piece of ex¬ 
 traordinary good fortune was sure 
 to be followed by a reverse, in 
 consequence of the odium, or invi¬ 
 dious view which the divine powers 
 took of human happiness. This φθό¬ 
 νος (cf. Phil. 776. -^sch. Ag. 913. 
 Eur. El. 906. Blomf. Gl. in Pers. 
 368. Herodot. saepissime) is not to 
 be confounded with νίμεσις, the ven¬ 
 geance which the gods conceive and 
 execute for misdeeds. 
 
 1466-7. ενπετΓτωκός. Met. derived 
 from dice. Cf. Tr. 62. cv, Tyrwh. e 
 conj. Br. Musg. Wund. ού, libri, 
 Herm. Dind. (who understand: vi¬ 
 deo corpus non sine deorum invidia 
 prostratum.) 
 
 1467. et δ’ εττεστι νεμεσις, {but if 
 there is cause for divine vengeance, in 
 what I say), ov λβγω, {it is unsaid,! 
 wish it unsaid.) Cf. CEd. C. 1753. 
 Peile ad Ag. 839. Griffiths ad ^sch. 
 Prom. 936. 
 
 1468. οφθαλμών. Here: the face. 
 1468—9. όπως — τύχη. For gen. 
 
 after τύχη, cf. Matth. §. 328. With 
 όπως τοι, cf. Trach. 190. 
 
 1470. βάσταζε. ScHOL. : aipe {re¬ 
 move, take away) to κάλυμμα. Cf. 
 Wund. ad Aj. 808. On ούκ εμον τόδ’, 
 see Elms, ad (Ed. C. 197. 
 
 1475. ^gisthus speaks, after hav¬ 
 ing taken off the covering. 
 
 1476. TO άρκύστατον = άρκνστάσιον, 
 
 place for hanging nets: hence, nets 
 themselves. Cf. Pass, in voc. Blomf. 
 Gl. in Pers. 102. Peile ad Ag. 1342. 
 
 1478. θανουσιν ϊσα, just as if they 
 were dead. Cf. Stanley ad Ch. 866. 
 ζώντας θανουσιν, Tyrwh. e conject. 
 Br. Gaisf. Wund. Dind. ζών τοΐς θα- 
 νούσιν, libri, Neue. 
 
 1479. sup. 668. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 119 
 
 OP. και μάντις ων αριστο 9 βσφάλλου πάλαι. 
 
 ΑΙ. ολωλα δη δβίλαιο^. αλλά μοι Trapes* 
 
 καν σμικρόν ehreiv. ΗΛ. μη πβρα λβγβιν ea 
 προ9 θ€ών^ άδβλφ^^ μηδβ μηκννβιν λόγους, 
 τί γάρ βροτών αν συν κακοις μβμιγμβνων 1485 
 
 θνησκβιν 6 μβλλων τον χρόνου κόρδο^ φόροι ; 
 άλλ* ώς τάχιστα κτβΐνβ και κτανων πρόθβί 
 ταφζΰσιν, ών τόνδ* βΐκό^ ίστι τυγχάνβιν^ 
 αποπτον ημών, όμο\ τό 8 αν κακών 
 μόνον γόνοιτο των πάλαι λντηριον. 1490 
 
 ΟΡ. χωροϊί αν €Ϊσω συν τάχβι. λόγων γάρ ου 
 νυν όστιν αγών, άλλα σης ψυχη 9 πόρι. 
 
 ΑΙ. τί S €9 δόμους άγ€ΐ9 μ€ ; Troys', τόδ' el καλόν 
 τοΰργον, σκότου δβΐ, κού πρόχ€ΐρο 9 κτανβΐν ; 
 
 1481. κα\ μάντις — ττάλαι. I under¬ 
 stand generally : ‘ excellent inter¬ 
 preter ! but why so many false steps, 
 before you came to such result ?’ By 
 €σφάλλου ττάλαι Ellendt understands ; 
 diu est, quod errasti, i. e. errastiplane. , 
 Neue observes, that και with an in- 
 terrog. (and with an interrog. Wun- 
 der and himself punctuate,) ‘ objur- 
 gantis est.’ 
 
 1483. μή TTcpa Xeyeiv ea, i. e. μη ea 
 πepα Xeyeiv. For further examples of 
 μή in hyperbato, cf, Phil. 67. 
 
 1485. βροτών σνν κακοΊ,ς μ^μνγμίνων 
 =: βροτών κακοΊς συμμεμιγμίνων, when 
 men are mixed up with, or are in 
 affliction. Antig. 1311. σνγκζκραμαι 
 dvq. Aj. 895. ο’ίκτω r^Se σνγκ€κρα- 
 μίνην. Arist. Plut. 853. πολυφόρω 
 σνγκ€κραμαι ^αίμονι. 
 
 1486. κ€ρδος του χρόνον, the be¬ 
 nefit which time confers: in the 
 present instance, by delaying the 
 hour of death. For construction, 
 cf. sup. 834.1461. By θνήσκαν δ μίλ- 
 
 λων Ellendt understands : cui mors 
 certa proponitur, φίροι for φόροιτο. 
 
 1488. ταφ^νσιν, ων — τυ'γχάνίΐν, SC. 
 
 wild beasts and birds. So in the 
 kindred play of Euripides, Orestes 
 bringing the dead body of AEgisthus 
 to Electra, says: ov, eire xprjCeis, 
 θηρσίν αρπαγήν προθίς, ή σκΰλον οΙω~ 
 νοΊσιν (ν. 894)· Cf. Antig. ιο8ι. 
 AEsch. Sept. c. Th. 1022. Horn. 
 Od. III. 258, sq. 
 
 1489. αποπτον ημών, unseen by us, 
 without exposing him to our eyes. 
 
 1489—90. κακών τών πάλαι, the 
 misfortunes with which I have been 
 long time afflicted. 
 
 1491—2. \όγων αγών. Eur. An- 
 drom. 234. (Is αγών i'pxei λόγων. 
 With ψυχής πόρι. Monk compares 
 the Homeric άλλα πβρι ψυχής θίον '’^Εκ- 
 τορος ίπποδάμοιο. 
 
 1493· why? i. q. πώς άν γΐ- 
 
 νοιτο ώ<ττ€ σκότου deiv, Ell. 
 
 1494· 'Π'ρόχίΐρος, prepared. The 
 reader’s thoughts may perhaps recur 
 
ΣΟΦΟΚΛΕΟΤΣ 
 
 120 
 
 OP. μη τασσβ* χω/)€ί S βρθαττβρ κατ4κτανβ9 ΐ495 
 
 ττατβρα τον άμον, ώί αν iv ταυτω Θανη9· 
 
 ΑΙ. η ττασ ανάγκη τηνδβ την στίγην Ιδβΐν 
 
 τά τ οντα και μβλλοντα ΠβλοτΓίδώι^ κακα ; 
 
 ΟΡ. τά γουν cr’ ίγά) (τοί μαντι^ €ΐμϊ τώνδ ακρο9· 
 
 ΑΙ. άλλ’ ού ττατρωαν την τέχνην ίκόμπασας. 
 
 ΟΡ. πόλλ’ άντίφων€Ϊ 9 ^ η δ’ οδοί βραδννβται, 
 
 άλλ’ €ρφ\ ΑΙ. υφηγον, ΟΡ. σο\ βαδιχττέον πάροί, . 
 ΑΙ. η μη φύγω σε ; ΟΡ. μη μεν ουν καθ' ηδονην 
 Θάνηί' φυλάξαί δει με τοντό σοι πικρόν, 
 χρην δ’ εύθνί είναι τηνδε τοΐί πάσιν δίκην, 1505 
 
 όστις πέρα πράσσειν τι των νόμων θέλει, 
 
 to the homely Anglicism ; Why not 
 kill me out of hand ? 
 
 1496. av iv ταντω θάντ]ς, Br. 
 Gaisf. Dind. cos iv τω y αντώ θάντις, 
 Wund. <us ap* or ώ? νυν, Herm. Ell. 
 cos ip ταντω, libri. On άμον, see 
 Matth. §. 149, Ohs. 2. note, 
 
 1497. η ττασ ανάγκη, is it altoge¬ 
 ther necessary ? 
 
 Ib. Trjvbe την στέγην (pointing as 
 he speaks). 
 
 1498. οντα — τταρόντα. (Ed. T. 
 781. την ουσαν ημέραν. Tr. 330. 
 προς κακοΐσι τοΐς ονσι. 
 
 Ib. μέλλοντα, ^gisthus endea¬ 
 vours to frighten Orestes from his 
 purpose by menacing him with fu¬ 
 ture retribution. (The pause and 
 look which would accompany the 
 word will readily occur to the 
 reader.) 
 
 1499. τά γουν σά (κακά), SC. πάσα 
 
 ανάγκη Ti'jvbc την στέγην Ibe'iv. On τά 
 σ’ for τά σά, cf. Phil. 339 · ^^· 
 
 272. Griffiths ad ^Esch. Prom. 340. 
 
 Ib. μάντις άκρος, a consummate 
 foreseer, a foreseer that may be de¬ 
 pended on (iEsch. Ag. 61 1 . τοξό¬ 
 της άκρος. Demosth. 1414, 20. άκρος 
 
 αγωνιστής. 2 JO, II. τριταγωνιστής ά¬ 
 κρος,) τώνδ’, emphatic : in answer to 
 the μέλλοντα, or future retributions, 
 which ^Egisthus affects to predict. 
 
 1^00. i. e. η τέχνη ην έκόμπασας, οίικ 
 έστι πατρώα. General meaning ; the 
 consummate foresight which you 
 boast was not derived to you from 
 your father; for had he possessed it, 
 he would not have allowed himself 
 to fall into my hands and those of 
 his wife. 
 
 1501. βραδυν€ται, is made tedious, 
 is delayed. (Ed. C. 1628. τάπο σου 
 βραδυνίται. For transitive and in¬ 
 transitive Hellenistic forms of this 
 verb, cf. Schleusn. in voc. 
 
 1^03. μέν ουν, nay rather. Matth. 
 §. 623. καθ* ηδονην. Cf. (Ed. C. 89O· 
 
 1^05. τηνδί δίκην, this rule, law, 
 mode of justice; or, this punishment. 
 On the reference of τηνδε to κτείνειν 
 (v. 1507), see Ellendt 11 . 384. 
 
 I 6. Tots πάσιν, όστις. Cf. 
 
 Matth. §. 481. Ohs. i. Ell. II. 384. 
 
 1506. πράσσειν τι, Wund. e con- 
 ject. Dind. (in Annot.) πράσσειν ye, 
 libri. 
 
 Ib. θέλει, vulg. Dind. θέλοι, Lb. Γ. 
 
ΗΛΕΚΤΡΑ. 
 
 121 
 
 KT€LV€Li/. TO γαρ ττανουργον ούκ αν ην ττολύ, 
 ΧΟ. ώ στΓβρμ! Άτρ€ω9, ώ? ττολλά τταθον 
 Sl βλβνθβρίας μόλί^ 
 
 Trj νυν ορμγ) τβλβωθβν. 
 
 Palat. Wund. (See Hermann’s note 
 on the subject.) 
 
 1507. KTfiveiv (gl. λβγω to Kreiveiv). 
 Infin. in apposition with 8ίκην, and 
 which in free translation may be 
 rendered death. 
 
 Ib. TO πανονργον — πολύ, craft and 
 wickedness would have been more 
 rare. Cf. Phil. 448. CEd. T. 786. 
 (Ed. C. 305. 517. 
 
 1508. ω σπ^ρμ *Κτρίως. Phil. 
 
 582. ω σπ^ρμ’ ΆχιΚλ^ως. 
 
 1308—9· ώί πολλά — (ζη\θί 5 . 
 
 15 ‘Ο 
 
 ScHOL. : άντ\ του μ€τα ττόλλων καμά¬ 
 των μόΧις ηΧίνθερώθηζ. 
 
 1310. General meaning : the 
 present attempt and attack (on ΛΕ- 
 gisthus) being the finishing part by 
 which that liberty has been achieved. 
 Ib. τίΧζωθίν. Herodot. III. 86. 
 
 (πιγίϊ'όμζνα de ταντα τω Aapcico, ireXe- 
 ωσ·€ {ad finem consiliorum perduxe- 
 runt) μιν. Cf. Wund. ad Emend, 
 in Trach. p. 160. ορμή, commine et 
 consiUo. Ell. 
 
Η 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Γ 
 
 ■i - 
 
 
 
 . 4 ^ 
 
 -A WA-'VMI 
 
 S iJ i A. ^ _ J 
 
 
 .4j' U\Aywji^ h\jji. (Avvt^viAC(iu><» 
 
 
 ' f 
 
 - .*rv 
 
 23. With the full and beautiful Sophoclean picture of deep affection , 
 subsisting between pupil and early tutor (a relationship hardly less sacred 
 or engaging than that between parent and child), compare the brief but 
 not less affecting scriptural account of that between the female nursling 
 
 and her Τροφό?, Genes. XXIV. 59· ^XXXV. 8 . 
 
 yy. Ιω μοί μοι δύστηνος, vulg. The latter word is omitted by W^under 
 as having crept into the text from v. 80; and Dindorf in his Annotations 
 approves of the omission. 
 
 129. Metre: chor. and moloss. See Dind. in ‘ Metra iEschyl.’ &c. 
 
 160—I. Versus ischiorrogici, sec. Dind. in * Metra .<®schyl. &c. 
 
 164. βγω ακάματα. With this hiatus and shortening of long vowel in 
 iambic metre, cf. CEd. T. i6y. ω πόποι, άνάριΘμα yap φ€ρω. (Where see 
 
 Dind.) 
 
 iy5. Cf. Arist. Ach. 435. ’Ω ZtC δίότττα και κατόπτα πανταχη. 
 
 2oy-8. Cf. Dind. ad CEd. T. 190. (Metra ^schyl. &c.) 
 
 215. olKctas. Antiph. 122,2. eis eavTov άμαρτων, olKeiais σνμφοραΐς Κ€- 
 
 ΧΡΨ^·- . . 
 
 232. άνάριθμος. Ellendt cautions against considering this as a Done 
 
 form for άνηριθμος. It belongs, as he observes, only to lyric measure, and 
 
 constantly shortens the second syllable. " De utraque forma άνάριθμος et 
 
 άνηριθμος observavit vir summus (i. e. Lobeck) parerg. ad Phryn. p. yii. 
 
 280. μηλοσφαγ€ 7 . Av. I 232. μηλοσφαγβΐρ βονθύτοΐ 5 iir (σχάραιχ. 
 
 362. βιος. Cf. Schleusn. in voc. βιωτικός. 
 
 410. Cf. Peile ad Ch. 510. 
 
 436. eivrjv, 2 Sam. III. 31. ‘ And king David himself followed the 
 bier.* (Heb. bed.) 
 
 440. άρτιβφληκως^ now read άρτιβφηκώς. 
 
 445. φασχαλίσθη. Cf. 2 Sam. IV. 12. Dem. y38,14. Lysias, 105, 29. 
 ^52. The eye of Electra glances at the splendid zone of Chrysothemis, 
 
 as she speaks. 
 
 486=502. Cf. Dind. ad CEd. T. 1092. (Metra iEschyl. &c.) 
 
 509. Many eminent commentators understand the offences here alluded 
 
 a ‘ But Deborah Rebekah’s nurse died, and she was buried beneath Beth^el, under an 
 oak: and the name of it was called Allon-bachuth’ (i. e. the oak of weeping). 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 -123 
 
 to as having taken place, not at the actual celebration of the Eucharist, 
 but at the Agape or love-feast which preceded it. The apostle’s train of 
 argument seems to me almost entirely at variance with this opinion; but 
 in a matter of great doubt and difficulty, let us hope that the more cha¬ 
 ritable interpretation is also the more correct one. 
 
 551. τους πίλας. Cf. 2 Sam. XII. n. and Gesen. in voc. 
 
 648. irXovTos, prosperity in the fullest sense of the word. Cf. Arist. Av. 
 731-6. 
 
 664. eiaropav, 2 Sam. XIV. 25. ‘ But in all Israel there was none to be 
 so much praised as Absalom for his beauty.* (Heb. And as Absalom there 
 was not a beautiful man in all Israel to praise greatly.) 
 
 696-7. orau βλάπτρ —dvvair av. EUendt observes, that when the pro¬ 
 tasis is in the conjunctive, that conjunctive being suspended on the particles 
 όταν or iav, the potential optative is very like a future, ‘ modo quod sen- 
 tentiam minus graviter profert.’ Cf. CEd. T. 77, 
 
 763. Mr. (now sir E. L.) Bulwer, after an able version of much of the 
 above narrative, (‘ Athens,’ II. 560.) proceeds to observe ‘ that it has no 
 interest as connected with the play, because the audience know that Orestes 
 is not dead, and therefore though the description of the race retains its ani¬ 
 mation, the report of the catastrophe loses the terror of reality, and appears 
 but a highly coloured and elaborate falsehood.’ These remarks indicate, 
 I think, an imperfect conception of one essential characteristic of this 
 drama. It must be remembered that when the time arrives for Orestes 
 to regain possession of his father’s house and throne, he is expressly for¬ 
 bidden by the Delphic shrine to make use of any force for that purpose, 
 (v. 36-7.) All is to be achieved by trickery and deception. This com¬ 
 mand of Apollo is carefully kept in view throughout the whole drama. False" 
 hood therefore was to be as it were the very religion of the piece, and con¬ 
 sequently the more highly coloured and elaborate, the greater its dramatic 
 interest. And with this view of things the narrative in the text admirably 
 harmonises. It is a splendid piece of mendacity throughout, from which 
 if the auditor critically recovered, it would be not to ask himself whether 
 Orestes was ahve or dead, but whether it would have the effect of imposing 
 on Clyteemnestra, and thus furthering the orders of Apollo, of which his 
 feelings would tell him there could be no doubt 
 
 922. Cf. Arist. Av. 9. αλλ* οΰδ’ οπού γης eapiv old' Ζγωγ ϊτι. 
 
 b Some apology may perhaps be due to professional Scholars for references to writings 
 of a merely popular character; but sir E. Bulwer, with whatever deductions, is a man 
 of genius; and his more learned labours, it must be remembered, have, by acknow¬ 
 ledgment, received the close supervision and sanction of Mr. Fynes Clinton, one of those 
 names of which English scholarship is scarcely less proud, than she is of her Blointields 
 and Gaisfords, and many others whom it is unnecessary to mention. 
 
124 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 950. λΑίΙμμ^θον. Cf. Elms, ad Arist. Ach. 733. 
 
 1034. Compare Hebrew idiom, 2 Sam. XIII. 15. ‘ Then Ammon hated 
 her with great hatred greatly.’ 
 
 1035. ot αΥιμίας, See Editor’s Acharnenses of Arist. p. 177. 
 
 1070-1, ι/οσβί brj. It appears from Neue, that Erfurdt in deference to 
 Person (Add. ad Hec. 1x41.) afterwards read νοσώδη. The reading in the 
 present text, questionable perhaps from the position of δη, was adopted in 
 deference to the name of Hermann, an authority which, however great, is 
 rarely to be put in competition with that of our own pre-eminent scholar 
 and metrician. 
 
 1087. Cf. Dind. ad (Ed. T. 193. (Metra iEschyl. &c.) 
 
 1207. κουχ άμαρτησ(ΐ nore. Neque non consequere quod volueris. Wund. 
 
 r -- ' " 
 
 ERRATA (in Text). 
 
 Ver. 101. For μου read *μον. 
 
 195. Insert accent in κοίταις, also in e|ear* v. 912. and άμμίνΐΐ v. 1397. 
 690. Punctuate L· δ’ ‘ίσθ'" not kv δ’ ισ&. 
 
 ERRATA (in Notes). 
 
 86. At Vig. §. supply 260. 
 
 126. (Foot-note.) Read 6 άδικησας, not 6 αδίκησαν. 
 
 365. For Pors. Or. read Pors. ad Eur. Or. 
 
 549. Read : ‘ as was said, &c. 
 
 567. For ‘ see &c.’ read ‘ Wunder compares’ &c. 
 
 740. For ξνμπξφξρονται read ξνμττεριφ^ρονται. 
 
 10^8. (Foot-note.) For Arist. Soph, read Aristoph. 
 
 1301. For Phaedon. 23. read Phsedon. §.23. 
 
 1394. For ‘ is doubtful’ read ‘ is of doubtful^quantity,’ i. e. maybe long 
 
 or short. 
 
 1407. For ντΓοστνλην read υποστολήν. 
 
 
Whittaker & Co., London. 
 
 Latin Works, 
 
 With English Translations, &c. 
 
 Bede. 
 
 Venerable Bede’s Works. A New and complete 
 
 Edition. Latin Text, with a New English Translation, &c. By 
 the Rev. J. A. Giles, LL.D. 12 vols'. demy 8vo. 
 
 The Life and Miscellaneous Works, 6 vols. 8vo, cloth 
 The Biblical Commentaries, 6 vols. (Vols. 7 to 12,) 
 
 completing the Entire Works. {In the Press.) 
 
 Caesar. 
 
 Commentaries, Fragments, and Hirtius’ Continuation. 
 
 Delphin. Latin Text. With Latin Notes, Index, and Maps. 
 8 vo, bound ........... 
 
 Commentaries. Duncan. Latin Text. With Index 
 
 of Persons and Places, Latin and English, by Christison. 12 mo, 
 bound ........... 
 
 Commentaries, Fragments, and Hirtius’ Continuation. 
 
 Maittaire. Latin Text. With Latin Index. 12 ino, bound. 
 
 Commentaries and Fragments. Dymock. Latin 
 
 Text. With English Notes, and a copious Geographical and 
 Historical Index. 12 mo, bound. 
 
 First Four Books of Commentaries. Mair. Latin 
 
 Text. With a literal English Translation, and Notes. l 2 mo, 
 bound . 
 
 Commentaries, with Hirtius’ Continuation. Latin 
 
 Text. Pegent Edition. 18 mo, bds. 
 
 Cicero. 
 
 Selectae Orationes, De Senectute, De x\micitia, Som- 
 
 nium Scipionis, et Vita Ciceronis, with Latin Notes, and Index. 
 Delphin. Latin Text. Edit. Carey. 8vo, bound, 
 
 Orationes Seleetae Duodecim. Latin Text. For the 
 
 use of Rugby School. 12ino, cloth ...... 
 
 Orations on the Impeachment of Verres, with Com¬ 
 mentary of Ascanius Pedianus. Zumpt. Latin Text. For the 
 use of Rugby School. 8vo, bds. . . 
 
 De Oratore, from Ernesti. Greenwood. Latin Text, 
 
 and Latin Notes, and Index. 8vo, bds. ..... 
 
 De Oratore. English Translation, by Guthrie; with 
 
 Notes Historical and Explanatory, and Introductory Preface. 
 12 mo, bds. 
 
 Tusculan Disputations. English Translation. 8vo. 
 
 bds. . . 
 
 £ s. d. 
 
 3 3 0 
 
 0 12 0 
 
 0 3 6 
 
 0 ’ 5 G 
 
 6 4 0 
 
 0 3 0 
 
 0 7 6 
 
 0 10 6 
 0 4 6 
 
 0 10 6 
 0 12 0 
 
 0 6 0 
 
 0 8 0 
 
 9 
 
 c 
 
Latin Whittaker & Co., London. Litemtnre. 
 
 Cicero* [Continued.) 
 
 De Officiis, Cato Major, Laelius, Paradoxa, De Re¬ 
 pub lica, et Somnium Scipionis. Latin Text. With explanatory 
 Notes in English. 12mo, bound ...... 
 
 De Officiis, De Senectute, De Amicitia, cum Somnio 
 
 Scipionis. Latin Text. Olivet and Ernesti. Edited by Carey. 
 {Regent Edition.) 18ino, bds. . .. 
 
 Life, by Conyers Middleton. One vol. 8vo. bds. 
 
 ^ s. d. 
 
 0 4 6 
 
 0 3 6 
 0 14 0 
 
 Catullus, Tibullus, et Propertius. 
 
 Doering, Heyne, Kuinoel. Latin Text. Edited by 
 
 Carey. {Regent Edition.) 18mo, bds. . . . . .050 
 
 Claudianus. 
 
 Burmann. Latin Text. Edited by Carey. [Regent 
 
 Edition.) 18mo, bds. . . . . . . . .056 
 
 Cornelius Nepos. 
 
 Delphin. Latin Text, Latin Notes and Index, by 
 
 Carey. 8vo, bound . . . . . . . . ,066 
 
 Valpy. Latin Text. With English Notes, and Chro¬ 
 nological Index. 12mo, bound .. .036 
 
 Latin Text only. 12mo, bound . . . .026 
 
 Clarke. With Latin Text, and literal English Trans¬ 
 lation, English Notes, and Latin Index. 12mo, bound . .040 
 
 Maittaire. Latin Text and Index. 18mo, bound .016 
 
 Ritchie. Latin Text. With Latin Notes, and Voca¬ 
 bulary, Latin and English. 18mo, bound, . . . . .030 
 
 Grotius. 
 
 De Veritate Religionis Christianas. Valpy. Latin 
 
 Text, with English Notes from Le Clerc, Clarke, &c. 12mo, 
 
 bound.060 
 
 Horace. 
 
 Doering. Latin Text, and Latin Notes, Indexes of 
 
 Names and Words. 8vo, bds.0 18 0 
 
 Anthon. Doering’s Latin Text, with explanatory 
 
 English Notes by Chas. Anthon. Eighth Edition. Adapted to 
 
 the English Student. 12mo, cloth,.0 7 6 
 
 Delphin. Latin Text, Ordo in the margin. Index, 
 
 with Annotations translated into English by Pemble from Doering 
 
 and others. 8vo, bds. .. 0110 
 
 Baxter, Gesner, and Zeunius. Latin Text, and Latin 
 
 Notes, and Index. 8vo, bound.0 12 0 
 
 Pyper. Latin Text, with accentuation marked. 18mo. 
 
 cloth.026 
 
 10 
 
Latin _ Whittaker & Co., London. Literature, 
 
 Ιΐ0Γ3,0Θ. {^Continued.) 
 
 £ s. d. 
 
 Kidd. Latin Text, with Bentley^s Latin Notes, &c., 
 
 and Versification indicated. . Royal 12mo, bds.0 15 0 
 
 Smart. Latin Text from Gesner, with literal trans¬ 
 
 lation into English Prose, and English Notes from Francis, Hurd, 
 
 Dacier, &c. 12mo, bds.. .066 
 
 Smart. Literal translation into English Prose, with 
 
 Notes. 18mo, bds.030 
 
 Zeunius. Latin Text. Edited by Carey. {Regent 
 
 Edition.) l8mo, bds.. . . .046 
 
 Juvenal and Persius. 
 
 Stocker. From the Latin Texts of Ruperti and 
 
 Orellius, with English Notes, partly compiled and partly original, 
 
 and Latin Index. 8vo, bds. . . 0140 
 
 Gifford. Translation into English Verse, with Notes 
 
 and Illustrations. 2 vols. 8vo, bds. . . . . . .110 
 
 Juvenal. . - . 
 
 Ruperti. Latin Text. Royal 32 mo, bds. . . .026 
 
 Livy. 
 
 Latin Text. Drakenborch. Crevier’s Latin Notes, 
 
 the various Readings of Gronovius, Crevier, Kreyssig, and Bekker, 
 
 and Index of Matters. 3 vols. 8vo, bds. 1116 
 
 Third Decade. Stocker. Principally from the Latin 
 
 Text of Bekker, with English Notes, Marginal References, and 
 various Readings. Vol. II. in two Parts. 8vo. bds. . . .14 0 
 
 Excerpta ex Livio. Crevier’s Latin Notes. For 
 
 the use of Schools. 12 mo, boimd. 0 6 0 
 
 Ovid. 
 
 Metamorphoses. Davidson. English .Prose Trans¬ 
 lation, with Latin Text, and Order of Construction in the same 
 page ; and Critical, Historical, Geographical, and Classical Notes 
 in English. 8vo. bds. . . ‘ . . · · · . 0 12 0 
 
 Fasti. Keightley. Latin Text, with English Notes, 
 
 and Introduction. 8vo, bds, . . . . . . .076 
 
 De Tristibus Libri V. Latin Text. 12 mo, bound .026 
 Metamorphoses. English Translation in Verse, by 
 
 various Authors. Edited by Garth. ( Walker’s Edition.) 24 mo, 
 
 bds. . . . . . . · · · · · .040 
 
 Phsedrus, etc. 
 
 Select Fables. Whittaker. Latin Text and Notes. 
 
 12 mo, bound . . . · .020 
 
 Fables of Pheedrus, Avianus, P. Syrus, Cato’s 
 
 Distichs, &c. Latin Text. Edited by Carey. {Regent Edition.) 
 
 18 mo, bds. . . ..* »026 
 
 11 
 
Latin Whittaker & Co., London. Literature. 
 
 Plautus. 
 
 £ s. d. 
 
 Latin Text. Edited by Carey. {Regent Edition,) 
 
 3 vols. 18mo, bds.. 0166 
 
 Quintus Curtius. 
 
 Latin Text, Edited by Carey. [Regent Edition,) 
 
 18mo, bds..070 
 
 Quintilian. 
 
 Latin Text. Gesner. Edited by Carey. [Regent 
 
 Edition.) 2 vols. 18mo, bds.0 12 0 
 
 Seneca. 
 
 Latin Text. Tragedies. Edited by Carey. [Regent 
 
 Edition.) 18mo, bds. ' .060 
 
 Silius Italicus. 
 
 Latin Text. Edited by Carey, [Regent Edition,) 
 
 18mo, bds. OHO 
 
 Statius. 
 
 Latin Text. Edited by Carey. [Regent^ Edition,) 
 
 18mo, bds. .,0 7 0 
 
 Suetonius. 
 
 Latin Text. Edited by Carey. [Reaent Edition,) 
 
 18mo, bds. . . . \ . . .'.060 
 
 Sallust. 
 
 Delphin. Latin Text, Notes, and Index. 8vo, bound o a o 
 
 Valpy. Latin Text. 12mo, bound, . . . .026 
 
 Ditto. Latin Text, with English Notes by Hickie. 
 
 12mo, bound, . . 7 . . “. . .046 
 
 Maittaire. Latin Text, Index, and Various Readings. 
 
 12mo, bound,.026 
 
 English Translation of the Catiline and Jugurthine 
 
 Wars, with Four Orations of Cicero against Catiline. 8vo, bds. .080 
 
 Tacitus. 
 
 Opera. Carson. Latin Text and Index. 8vo, bds. o 9 o 
 Historiae. . Relhan. Latin Text of Brotier, with 
 
 Latin Notes and Emendations. 8vo, bds.0 12 0 
 
 Germania et Agricola. Relhan. Latin Text of Bro- 
 
 with Maps, Latin Notes, and Commentaries of Ernesti, 
 
 Oberlin, &c. 12mo, bds.0 5 6 
 
 The Germany and Life of Agricola. Translated into 
 
 English by Dr, Aikin, with Notes, and Map of Ancient Germany. 
 
 12mo,bds..046 
 
 12 
 
Latin Whittaker .& Co., London. Literature. 
 
 Terence. 
 
 £ s. d. 
 
 Delphin. Latin Text, Latin Notes, Interpretation, 
 
 and Index. 8vo, bound, . . . , . . . . 0 10 0 
 
 Zeunius. Latin Text. (Harding’s Edition.) 12mo, 
 
 bds.080 
 
 Patrick. Latin and English. Edited by Prendeville. 
 
 8 VO, bds. 0150 
 
 Virgil. 
 
 Delphin. Latin Text, Latin Notes, Interpretation, 
 
 and Index. 8vo, bound,. 0110 
 
 Heyne. Latin Text, Latin Notes, and Index. 
 
 {Londoji.) 8vo, bds. 
 
 Heyne. Latin Text. I8mo,^bpund, . . , , 
 
 Heyne. Latin Text, with English Notes. 18mo, 
 
 bound,.. 
 
 Latin Text. Miniature Edition. (Cambridge.) 32mo, 
 
 cloth. 
 
 Heyne. Latin Text. Edited by Carey. (Regent 
 
 Edition.) 18mo, bds. . 
 
 Dymock. Latin Text, with Life, Clavis Metrica, 
 
 Historical and Geographical Index, Latin and English. 18mo, 
 bound ........... 
 
 Translated into English Prose, with Explanatory 
 Notes, and Latin Text. Davidson. 2 vols. 18mo, bds. 
 
 Translated into English Verse. Dryden. 24mo, bds. 
 
 0 14 0 
 0 3 G 
 
 0 7 6 
 
 0 4 0 
 
 0 6 0 
 
 0 3 6 
 
 0 9 0 
 0 4 0 
 
 Valerius Maximus. 
 
 Kappius. Latin Text. Edited by Carey. (Regent 
 
 Edition.) 18mo, bds..070 
 
 Dictionaries, &c. 
 
 Ainsworth’s Latin Dictionary, abridged for the Use 
 of Schools by Morell. New Edition, improved by Carey. 8vo, 
 bound . . . · · · · · · · .0120 
 
 Bossut’s Latin Word-Book; or. First Step to the 
 
 Latin Language. 18mo, sewed, . . . . . . .010 
 
 Bossut’s Latin Phrase-Book. 18mo, sewed, . . .010 
 
 Entick’s English-Latin, and Latin-English Dic¬ 
 tionary. New Edition, with improvements by Carey, sq. 12mo, 
 bound. ,090 
 
 Entick’s Tyronis Thesaurus; or, Latin-English Dic¬ 
 tionary. New Edition, by Carey, sq. 12mo, bound, . . . 0 o 6 
 
 Greenwood’s Latin Vocabulary, English and Latin. 
 
 New Edition, by Howard. 18mo, bound . . · · .016 
 
 13 
 
Latin Whittaker & Co., London. Literature. 
 
 DlCtlOn^l 10 Sj Sec* (Continued.) 
 
 £ s. d. 
 
 Irving’s Latin and English Vocabulary. ISmo, sewed 0 0 6 
 
 Moore’s Dictionary of Quotations from Various Au¬ 
 thors, in Ancient and Modern Languages, with English Transla¬ 
 tions, and illustrated by Remarks and .Explanations. 6 VO, cloth . 0 12 0 
 
 Niblock’s New and Improved Latin and English, and 
 
 English and Latin Dictionary, in Two Parts, for the Use of 
 Schools, Colleges, and Private Tuition. By the Rev. J. W. 
 
 Niblock, D.D., F.R.S.L., F.S.A., Head Master of the London High 
 School. Second Edition, considerably improved, sq. 12 mo, bound. 0 9 0 
 Part T. containing the Latin and English Dictionary. Sold 
 
 separately; bound, . . . . . . . .056 
 
 Palairet’s Dictionary of Latin Ellipses. Latin and 
 
 English. With additions, and emendations, by E. H. Barker. 
 
 8vo, bds. . ·. . . ·. . . . . . .086 
 
 Pinnock’s New Analytical Latin Vocabulary, showing 
 
 the English Derivations. 18 mo, cloth, . . . . .016 
 
 Pyper’s Gradus ad Parnassum. With the Synonymes, 
 
 Epithets, Verses, and Phrases. In Latin. 12 mo, cloth . .070 
 
 Whittaker’s Improved Edition of Valpy’s Gradus ad 
 
 Parnassum. Latin and English. Sixth Edition, greatly amended 
 
 and enlarged with many thousand new articles, royal 12mo, bound 0 7 6 
 
 Grammars, and Exercises, 
 
 First Latin Grammar and Exercises on Ollendorff’s 
 
 Method. By William Henry Pinnock, Esq., of Corpus Christi 
 College, Cambridge. 12 mo, cloth . . . . . .030 
 
 Beatson’s Exercises for Latin Prose Composition, 
 
 with Examples and Hints for Themes. 12 mo, cloth, . . .046 
 
 Carson’s Grammatical Exercises on the Moods,Tenses, 
 
 and Syntax of the Latin Language, adapted to the Method of 
 Ruddiman’s Rudiments, with Latin and English Vocabulary. 
 
 18 mo, bound, . . . . .020 
 
 Clarke’s Introduction to the Making of Latin, with 
 
 Appendix containing a succinct Account of Greece and Rome, 
 
 Latin and English, &c. 12 mo, bound, . . . . .036 
 
 Grant’s Institutes of the Latin Grammar. 8vo, bds. 0 12 o 
 Gretton’s Introduction to the Translation of English 
 
 Poetry into Latin Elegiacs and Hexameters. English Version. 
 
 12mo, cloth, . . . . . . . . . .030 
 
 Ellis’s Exercises. Collection of English Exercises 
 
 translated from Cicero for Schoolboys to Retranslate into Latin. 
 
 New Edition, revised and improved by the Rev. T. Kerchever 
 Arnold. 12mo, bound,.0 3 6 
 
 Key to the Second, and Third.Parts of Ellis’s Col¬ 
 lection of Exercises from Cicero, with References to the Passages 
 in the Original. 12mo, bound, . . . . . . .030 
 
 Mavor’s Eton Latin Grammar, with Explanatory 
 
 Notes. The Accents and Quantity marked by Dr. Carey. 12mo, 
 
 bound, . . . . . . . . . . .026 
 
 14 
 
Lntin Whittaker & Co., London. Literature. 
 
 Grammars, and Exercises, [continued.) 
 
 £ s. d. 
 
 Pinnock^S Elements of Latin Familiarized with Nu¬ 
 
 merous Exercises and Questions for Examination. 18mo, bound .016 
 
 Port Royal Latin Grammar^ by Nugent. 2vols. Svo, 
 
 bds. 110 
 
 Reid^s Rudiments of the Latin Language, with an 
 
 Outline of English Grammar. 12mo, bound . . . .030 
 
 Steps to Sense Verses; or, a Set of Exercises to be 
 
 Rendered into Latin Hexameters and Pentameters. 18mo, bound 0 16 
 
 *** Key to Ditto. 18mo, bound,.0 16 
 
 Whittaker’s Latin Exercises, or Exempla Propria; 
 
 being English Sentences translated from the best Roman Writer's, 
 and adapted to the Rules of Syntax, to be again translated into 
 the Latin Language. Twelfth Edition, Enlarged and Amended. 
 
 12mo, bound, . . . . . . . . · .030 
 
 Whittaker’s Improved Edition of Pinnock’s Cate¬ 
 
 chism of Latin Grammar. 18mo, sewed, . . . . .009 
 
 Lesson and Reading Books. 
 
 Adams’s Lectiones Selectae; or. Select Latin Lessons 
 
 in Morality, History, and Biography. 18mo, bound 
 
 Adams’s Literal English Translation of Lectiones 
 
 Selectae. 18mo, bound ........ 
 
 Allen’s Collectanea Latina; or. Easy Construing 
 
 Lessons from the best Latin Authors, with Index Verborum, Latin 
 and English. 12mo, bound, ....... 
 
 Ballantyne’s Introduction to Latin Reading, arranged 
 
 in Progressive Lessons, according to the Eton Latin Grammar, 
 Whittaker’s Latin Exercises, and Ruddiman’s Rudiments. 12mo, 
 bound,. 
 
 Bedingfield’s Practical Latin Delectus; being an 
 
 easy and progressive Introduction to Latin Construing. 12mo,bound 
 
 Beza’s Latin Testament. 12mo, bound. 
 
 Book of Common Prayer, Psalms of David, and Thirty- 
 
 nine Articles. Translated into Latin by Harwood, roy. 32mo, bound 
 
 Corderiiis’ Colloquies, with Literal English Trans¬ 
 lation; an Analysis, or Grammatical Resolution of the Latin 
 Words in the Colloquies, by Loggan. 12mo, bound. 
 
 Ditto, with a Literal English Translation by Clarke. 
 
 18mo, bound, .....····· 
 
 CoUoquia Quotidiana; or, an Introduction to Fami¬ 
 
 liar Latin Conversation. 12mo, bound, . . . . · 
 
 Irving’s Epitome of Sacred History in Latin, for the 
 
 Use of Schools. 18mo, sewed, .....·· 
 
 Irving’s Collects and Church Catechism in Latin. 
 
 18mo, sewed, .......♦·· 
 
 Lusus Westmonasterienses. A Selection of Latin 
 
 Poems from various Authors. 8vo, bound, . . . . 
 
 Robinson Crusoe, translated into Latin. I2mo, bds. 
 
 0 1 0 
 0 1 6 
 
 0 3 0 
 
 0 3 6 
 
 0 2 6 
 0 3 6 
 
 0 4 0 
 
 0 2 0 
 
 0 1 6 
 
 0 2 0 
 
 0 0 9 
 
 0 0 6 
 
 0 4 6 
 
 0 5 0 
 
 15 
 
Latin Whittaker Λ: Co., London. Literature. 
 
 Lesson and Reading Books. (Cmtimed) 
 
 £ s, d. 
 
 Sampson’s (Rev. S.) Lusus Seniles. 12mo, cloth .030 
 Selectae e Profanis Scriptoribus Historiae. 12mo,bound 0 3 6 
 Selectae e Veteri Testamento Historiae. 12mo, bound 020 
 Spyer’s Praxis on the Eton Latin Syntax, being a 
 
 Collection of the Sentences of Cicero illustrating each Rule. 12mo, 
 
 hound.020 
 
 Whittaker’s Florilegium Poeticum; a Selection of 
 
 Elegiac Extracts from the Works of Ovid, Tibullus, Propertius, 
 
 Martial, and Ausonius. 18mo, bound,.0 3 0 
 
 Works Illustrative of Roman Literature. 
 
 £ s. d. 
 
 Adam’s Roman Antiquities. New Edition, Cor¬ 
 rected, Improved, and Enlarged, by Dr. Major. 8vo, bds. . 0 10 6 
 
 Adam’s Questions on Dicto. 8vo, bds. . . .060 
 
 Barker and Anthon’s Lempriere’s Classical Dic¬ 
 tionary. Re-edited from the last American Edition of Charles 
 Anthon ; with Appendix and numerous Additions, by Dr. Giles. 
 
 8vo, bound, . 0166 
 
 Brown’s Classical Dictionary. 12mo, bound, . .080 
 
 Carr’s Manual of Roman Antiquities. 12mo, bds. .066 
 Gibbon’s History of the Decline and Fall of the 
 
 Roman Empire ; with Life, by Chalmers. 8 vols. 8vo. bds. .300 
 
 Ditto. Complete in One Volume. 8vo, bds. . . o 18 o 
 
 Hooke’s Roman History, from the Building of Rome 
 
 to the Time of the Commonwealth. Illustrated with Maps. 6 vols. 
 
 8vo, bds.330 
 
 Kennett’s Antiquities of Rome. With Numerous 
 
 Plates. 8 VO, bds., . .0106 
 
 Moore’s Dictionary of Quotations from various Au¬ 
 thors in Ancient and Modern Languages ; with English Trans¬ 
 lations, and illusti'ated by Remarks and Explanations. 8vo, cloth, 0 12 0 
 
 Taylor’s (Dr. W. C.) History of the Overthrow of 
 
 the Roman Empire, and the Foundation of the Principal Eu¬ 
 ropean States. 12mo, bound, 7s. cloth,.0 6 6 
 
 Whittaker’s Improved Edition of Pinnock’s Gold¬ 
 smith’s History of Rome ; Λvith large Additions by Dr. W. C. 
 
 Taylor, and Illustrations. 12mo, bound.0 5 6 
 
 Whittaker’s Improved Edition of.Pinnock’s Cate¬ 
 chism of the History of Rome. 18mo, sewed, . . . . 0 0 0 
 
 Whittaker’s Improved Edition bf Pinnock’s Cate¬ 
 chism of Ancient Geography. 18mo, sewed, . . . .009 
 
 16 
 

' Λ . * / · ■ 
 
 ^4 wL 
 
 tJ..* '", 'ιτΦ- 
 
 S'if ' 
 
 ', .ν' 
 
 * ί'» λ ,■ * 
 
 .•α,.ι' · j, 
 
 ' .»' 'ΐ '■ 
 
 j)v’A · 
 
 
 i- . ' . ’ v'V'L' ■'■ -‘ν.'.^. 
 
 V Λ' ΐ ■ 
 
 ,’ ■ . ■'·. ■’ ■ . ’ ·?!·, ^'νΓΪί'ί|Λ'ν);' ''.' 
 
 :ν'··, . ■'^ν,■.**.';» 5 Λ'· 
 
 .· ' ' ■;’ t■''H'Vi''i ' ’ ''ΐ ' 
 
 ;''·ι·'· -‘''VV-AJ ' .'•j-A'V· ·; ■ '' 
 
 'V :'·:■. '■' . : 
 
 ■A: 
 
 . V .' n ■ . 
 
 
 r 
 
 ■‘-λ 
 
 > ■.-■ 
 
 » ■' ,.■/ · /,;·. 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 
 \ 
 
 > '· : 
 
 ’ll 
 
 \ 
 
 ( 
 
 ■χ 
 
 1 
 
 k> 
 
 A · 
 
 '\ 
 
 f 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 ♦, 
 
 >» 
 
 t 
 
 ; ' , 
 
 i 
 
 
 ) 
 

 mm 
 
 ΐ|Μ)ί'픣·. 
 
 ^'iV 
 
 fl -V '■. 
 
 ϊ· . ·{ .\ _ ,, 
 
 V( 
 
 ■» ·.' 
 
 ^ \ V 
 
 
 H 
 
 ‘.'a., 
 
 :■- l· ' Sk' -,■- ‘ ν;ώ-Γ a. 4 'i::i 
 
 DATE DUE 
 
 
 
 
 
 JUN 1 1 
 
 rZDDT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 nor 
 
 mm 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 UNIVERSITY PRODUCTS, INC. #859-5503 
 
 ■ '· ■ , 
 
 yf^ '. ' ^ 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 >93 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 201-5503 
 
 
 
 PRINTED IN U.S.A. 
 
 
 ''13951 
 
 Sophocles 
 
 AUTHOR 
 
 7/f j A3^.^/^ct : 
 
 TITLE 
 
 
 The Tragedies of Soohocles 
 
 Edit: T 
 
 .Mitchell 
 
 Yol.l 
 
 John H.Parker Oxford 1844 
 
 DATE DUE 
 
 BORROWER’S NAME 
 
 8/7/36 
 
 New card 
 
 
 t \ 
 
 J. j·' k7 ''=A ^ - 
 
 \^*->p-Wd 
 
 4v 
 
 hATL· 
 
 
 
 
LKAW 
 
 DATE DUE 
 
 BORROWER’S NAME 
 
 i 
 
 >> 
 
 ! 
 
 • 
 
 !_ 
 
 
 * ‘ ‘ ··· 
 
 Λ -j 
 
 .’1 i‘. ^ o aO 'ih L, 
 
 D'^f-’LIN -Wr 
 
 HI 
 
 X\ '' ,-' 
 
 4 ^ Λ 
 
 * 1 ♦ i > H », . · / 
 
 Γ. 4c 
 
 
 / 
 
 GUL 
 
 aVAN c/iARLCS V ’ 
 
 . «/ ^ m i rrf f' a rv 
 
 b i\ 
 
 ΖΏ \ 
 
 /rZl^L'l/dl HASS 
 
 LU V' ' ^ 
 cgp i- -■.. 
 
 V f ■ii'A 164 3Ub 
 
 ^ i 
 
 ! ^ 
 to 
 
 .\ -Λ ■.. -.-/L)*.■·.* 0 
 
 i -■.- 
 
 % Di· ■ 
 
 • y y ^ ' k A fcj i 
 
 ■·- '’i VA'-v*·*--· r ·.♦ v-c;v!^ 
 
 ϊ^CrV..>Λ . ί· .. .. . 
 
 » 'Λ, 
 
 CD - 
 
 fn Vi 
 
 i f '■ ' a . *» ^ V* ^ 6 ^ 
 
 ■ \ 
 
 c 3 J 
 
 tWiL :p/e 
 
 ^aoxBi) 
 
 
 
 ι.εο6 ε 
 
 • nj-- r. - I < f ^ 
 
 L εΐ-οβεί-ΐ-ο 
 
 393nOD NOiSOa 
 
r 
 
 BOSTON COLLEGE 
 
 3 903 ^ 
 
 0113901 
 
 i 
 
 BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY 
 
 UNIVERSITY HEIGHTS 
 CHESTNUT HILL. MASS. 
 
 Books may be kept for two weeks and may 
 be renewed for the same period, unless re¬ 
 served. 
 
 Two cents a day is charged for each book 
 kept overtime. 
 
 If you cannot find what you want, ask the 
 Librarian who will be glad to help you. 
 
 The borrower is responsible for books drawn 
 on his card and for all fines accruing on the 
 
 same.